This is spec.info, produced by makeinfo version 7.2 from spec.texinfo.

START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Specification of the Exim Mail Transfer Agent: (the_exim_mta).
                                                  [MISSING TEXT]
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY


File: spec.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Up: (dir)

Specification of the Exim Mail Transfer Agent
*********************************************

* Menu:

* Introduction::
* Incorporated code::
* How Exim receives and delivers mail: Receiving and delivering mail.
* Building and installing Exim::
* The Exim command line::
* The Exim runtime configuration file: The runtime configuration file.
* The default configuration file::
* Regular expressions::
* File and database lookups::
* Domain, host, address, and local part lists: Domain; host; and address lists.
* String expansions::
* Embedded Perl::
* Starting the daemon and the use of network interfaces: Starting the daemon.
* Main configuration::
* Generic options for routers::
* The accept router::
* The dnslookup router::
* The ipliteral router::
* The iplookup router::
* The manualroute router::
* The queryprogram router::
* The redirect router::
* Environment for running local transports: Environment for local transports.
* Generic options for transports::
* Address batching in local transports: Address batching.
* The appendfile transport::
* The autoreply transport::
* The lmtp transport::
* The pipe transport::
* The smtp transport::
* Address rewriting::
* Retry configuration::
* SMTP authentication::
* The plaintext authenticator::
* The cram_md5 authenticator::
* The cyrus_sasl authenticator::
* The dovecot authenticator::
* The gsasl authenticator::
* The heimdal_gssapi authenticator::
* The spa authenticator::
* The external authenticator::
* The tls authenticator::
* Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.
* Access control lists::
* Content scanning at ACL time::
* Adding a local scan function to Exim: Local scan function.
* System-wide message filtering::
* Message processing::
* SMTP processing::
* Customizing bounce and warning messages: Customizing messages.
* Some common configuration settings::
* Using Exim as a non-queueing client: Exim as a non-queueing client.
* Log files::
* Exim utilities::
* The Exim monitor::
* Security considerations::
* Format of spool files::
* DKIM, SPF, SRS and DMARC: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support.
* Proxies: Proxy support.
* Internationalisation: Internationalisation".
* Events::
* Adding new drivers or lookup types: Adding drivers or lookups.
* Concept Index::

— The Detailed Node Listing —

Introduction

* Exim documentation::
* FTP site and websites::
* Mailing lists::
* Bug reports::
* Where to find the Exim distribution::
* Limitations::
* Runtime configuration::
* Calling interface::
* Terminology::

How Exim receives and delivers mail

* Overall philosophy::
* Policy control::
* User filters::
* Message identification::
* Receiving mail::
* Handling an incoming message::
* Life of a message::
* Processing an address for delivery::
* Processing an address for verification::
* Running an individual router::
* Duplicate addresses::
* Router preconditions::
* Delivery in detail::
* Retry mechanism::

Building and installing Exim

* Unpacking::
* Multiple machine architectures and operating systems::
* PCRE2 library::
* DBM libraries::
* Pre-building configuration::
* Support for iconv(): Support for iconv[].
* Including TLS/SSL encryption support::
* Including support for IPv6::
* Dynamically loaded module support::
* The building process::
* Output from "make"::
* Overriding build-time options for Exim::
* OS-specific header files::
* Overriding build-time options for the monitor::
* Installing Exim binaries and scripts::
* Installing info documentation::
* Setting up the spool directory::
* Testing::
* Replacing another MTA with Exim::
* Running the daemon::
* Upgrading Exim::
* Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris::

The Exim command line

* Setting options by program name::
* Trusted and admin users::
* Command line options::

The Exim runtime configuration file

* Using a different configuration file::
* Configuration file format::
* File inclusions in the configuration file::
* Macros in the configuration file::
* Macro substitution::
* Redefining macros::
* Overriding macro values::
* Example of macro usage::
* Builtin macros::
* Conditional skips in the configuration file::
* Common option syntax::
* Boolean options::
* Integer values::
* Octal integer values::
* Fixed point numbers::
* Time intervals::
* String values::
* Expanded strings::
* User and group names::
* List construction::
* Format of driver configurations::

The default configuration file

* Macros::
* Main configuration settings::
* ACL configuration::
* Router configuration::
* Transport configuration::
* Default retry rule::
* Rewriting configuration::
* Authenticators configuration::

File and database lookups

* Examples of different lookup syntax::
* Lookup types::
* Single-key lookup types::
* Query-style lookup types::
* Temporary errors in lookups::
* Default values in single-key lookups::
* Partial matching in single-key lookups::
* Lookup caching::
* Quoting lookup data::
* More about dnsdb::
* More about LDAP::
* More about NIS+::
* SQL lookups::

Domain, host, address, and local part lists

* Results of list checking::
* Expansion of lists::
* Domain lists::
* Host lists::
* Address lists::
* Local part lists::

String expansions

* Literal text in expanded strings::
* Character escape sequences in expanded strings::
* Testing string expansions::
* Forced expansion failure::
* Expansion items::
* Expansion operators::
* Expansion conditions::
* Combining expansion conditions::
* Expansion variables::

Embedded Perl

* Setting up so Perl can be used::
* Calling Perl subroutines::
* Calling Exim functions from Perl::
* Use of standard output and error by Perl::

Starting the daemon and the use of network interfaces

* Starting a listening daemon::
* Special IP listening addresses::
* Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports::
* Support for the submissions (aka SSMTP or SMTPS) protocol: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
* IPv6 address scopes::
* Disabling IPv6::
* Examples of starting a listening daemon::
* Recognizing the local host::
* Delivering to a remote host::

Main configuration

* Miscellaneous::
* Exim parameters::
* Privilege controls::
* Logging::
* Frozen messages::
* Data lookups::
* Message ids::
* Embedded Perl Startup::
* Daemon::
* Resource control::
* Policy controls::
* Callout cache::
* TLS::
* Local user handling::
* All incoming messages (SMTP and non-SMTP): All incoming messages [SMTP and non-SMTP].
* Non-SMTP incoming messages::
* Incoming SMTP messages::
* SMTP extensions::
* Processing messages::
* System filter::
* Routing and delivery::
* Bounce and warning messages::
* Alphabetical list of main options::

The dnslookup router

* Problems with DNS lookups::
* Declining addresses by dnslookup::
* Private options for dnslookup::
* Effect of qualify_single and search_parents::

The manualroute router

* Private options for manualroute::
* Routing rules in route_list::
* Routing rules in route_data::
* Format of the list of hosts::
* Format of one host item::
* How the list of hosts is used::
* How the options are used::
* Manualroute examples::

The redirect router

* Redirection data::
* Forward files and address verification::
* Interpreting redirection data::
* Items in a non-filter redirection list::
* Redirecting to a local mailbox::
* Special items in redirection lists::
* Duplicate addresses: Duplicate addresses <1>.
* Repeated redirection expansion::
* Errors in redirection lists::
* Private options for the redirect router::

Environment for running local transports

* Concurrent deliveries::
* Uids and gids::
* Current and home directories::
* Expansion variables derived from the address::

The appendfile transport

* The file and directory options::
* Private options for appendfile::
* Operational details for appending::
* Operational details for delivery to a new file::
* Maildir delivery::
* Using tags to record message sizes::
* Using a maildirsize file::
* Mailstore delivery::
* Non-special new file delivery::

The autoreply transport

* Private options for autoreply::

The pipe transport

* Concurrent delivery::
* Returned status and data::
* How the command is run::
* Environment variables::
* Private options for pipe::
* Using an external local delivery agent::

The smtp transport

* Multiple messages on a single connection::
* Use of the $host and $host_address variables::
* Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn::
* Private options for smtp::
* How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used::

Address rewriting

* Explicitly configured address rewriting::
* When does rewriting happen?::
* Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input::
* Rewriting rules::
* Rewriting patterns::
* Rewriting replacements::
* Rewriting examples::

Retry configuration

* Changing retry rules::
* Format of retry rules::
* Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors::
* Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors::
* Retry rules for specific errors::
* Retry rules for specified senders::
* Retry parameters::
* Retry rule examples::
* Timeout of retry data::
* Long-term failures::
* Deliveries that work intermittently::

SMTP authentication

* Generic options for authenticators::
* The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands::
* Authentication on an Exim server::
* Authentication by an Exim client::

The plaintext authenticator

* Avoiding cleartext use::
* Plaintext server options::
* Using plaintext in a server::
* Using plaintext in a client::

The cram_md5 authenticator

* Using cram_md5 as a server::
* Using cram_md5 as a client::

The cyrus_sasl authenticator

* Using cyrus_sasl as a server::

The gsasl authenticator

* gsasl auth variables::

The heimdal_gssapi authenticator

* heimdal_gssapi auth variables::

The spa authenticator

* Using spa as a server::
* Using spa as a client::

The external authenticator

* External options::
* Using external in a server::
* Using external in a client::

Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL

* Support for the "submissions" (aka "ssmtp" and "smtps") protocol: Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
* OpenSSL vs GnuTLS::
* GnuTLS parameter computation::
* Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL::
* Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS::
* Configuring an Exim server to use TLS::
* Configuring an Exim client to use TLS::
* Use of TLS Server Name Indication::
* Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection::
* Certificates and all that::
* TLS Resumption::
* DANE::

Access control lists

* Testing ACLs::
* Specifying when ACLs are used::
* Finding an ACL to use::
* ACL return codes::
* Unset ACL options::
* Data for message ACLs::
* Data for non-message ACLs::
* Format of an ACL::
* ACL verbs::
* ACL variables::
* Condition and modifier processing::
* ACL modifiers::
* Use of the control modifier::
* Summary of message fixup control::
* Adding header lines in ACLs::
* Removing header lines in ACLs::
* ACL conditions::
* Using DNS lists::
* Previously seen user and hosts::
* Rate limiting incoming messages::
* Address verification::
* Callout verification::
* Quota caching::
* Sender address verification reporting::
* Redirection while verifying::
* Client SMTP authorization (CSA): Client SMTP authorization [CSA].
* Bounce address tag validation::
* Using an ACL to control relaying::
* Checking a relay configuration::

Content scanning at ACL time

* Scanning for viruses::
* Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd::
* Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL::
* Scanning MIME parts::
* Scanning with regular expressions::

Adding a local scan function to Exim

* Building Exim to use a local scan function::
* API for local_scan(): API for local_scan[].
* Configuration options for local_scan(): Configuration options for local_scan[].
* Available Exim variables::
* Structure of header lines::
* Structure of recipient items::
* Available Exim functions::
* More about Exim's memory handling::

System-wide message filtering

* Specifying a system filter::
* Testing a system filter::
* Contents of a system filter::
* Additional variable for system filters::
* Defer, freeze, and fail commands for system filters: Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
* Adding and removing headers in a system filter::
* Setting an errors address in a system filter::
* Per-address filtering::

Message processing

* Submission mode for non-local messages::
* Line endings::
* Unqualified addresses::
* The UUCP From line::
* Header lines::
* Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports::
* Constructed addresses::
* Case of local parts::
* Dots in local parts::
* Rewriting addresses::

SMTP processing

* Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP::
* Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP::
* Incoming local SMTP::
* Batched SMTP::

Customizing bounce and warning messages

* Customizing bounce messages::
* Customizing warning messages::

Some common configuration settings

* Sending mail to a smart host::
* Using Exim to handle mailing lists::
* Syntax errors in mailing lists::
* Re-expansion of mailing lists::
* Closed mailing lists::
* Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP): Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].
* Virtual domains::
* Multiple user mailboxes::
* Simplified vacation processing::
* Taking copies of mail::
* Intermittently connected hosts::
* Exim on the upstream server host::
* Exim on the intermittently connected client host::

Log files

* Where the logs are written::
* Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled"::
* Datestamped log files::
* Logging to syslog::
* Log line flags::
* Logging message reception::
* Logging deliveries::
* Discarded deliveries::
* Deferred deliveries::
* Delivery failures::
* Fake deliveries::
* Completion::
* Summary of Fields in Log Lines::
* Other log entries::
* Reducing or increasing what is logged::
* Message log::

Exim utilities

* Finding out what Exim processes are doing (exiwhat): Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat].
* Selective queue listing (exiqgrep): Selective queue listing [exiqgrep].
* Summarizing the queue (exiqsumm): Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm].
* Extracting specific information from the log (exigrep): Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep].
* Selecting messages by various criteria (exipick): Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick].
* Cycling log files (exicyclog): Cycling log files [exicyclog].
* Mail statistics (eximstats): Mail statistics [eximstats].
* Checking access policy (exim_checkaccess): Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess].
* Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild): Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
* Finding individual retry times (exinext): Finding individual retry times [exinext].
* Hints database maintenance::
* Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock): Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock].
* Message Ids for humans (exim_msgdate): Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate].

The Exim monitor

* Running the monitor::
* The stripcharts::
* Main action buttons::
* The log display::
* The queue display::
* The queue menu::

Security considerations

* Building a more "hardened" Exim::
* Root privilege::
* Running Exim without privilege::
* Delivering to local files::
* Running local commands::
* Trust in configuration data::
* IPv4 source routing::
* The VRFY, EXPN, and ETRN commands in SMTP: The VRFY; EXPN; and ETRN commands in SMTP.
* Privileged users::
* Spool files::
* Use of argv[0]::
* Use of %f formatting::
* Embedded Exim path::
* Dynamic module directory::
* Use of sprintf(): Use of sprintf[].
* Use of debug_printf() and log_write(): Use of debug_printf[] and log_write[].
* Use of strcat() and strcpy(): Use of strcat[] and strcpy[].

Format of spool files

* Format of the -H file::
* Format of the -D file::

DKIM, SPF, SRS and DMARC

* DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail): DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail].
* SPF (Sender Policy Framework): SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
* DMARC::

Proxies

* Inbound proxies::
* Outbound proxies::
* Logging: Logging <2>.

Internationalisation

* MTA operations::
* MDA operations::


File: spec.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Incorporated code,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top

1 Introduction
**************

Exim is a mail transfer agent (MTA) for hosts that are running Unix or
Unix-like operating systems.  It was designed on the assumption that it
would be run on hosts that are permanently connected to the Internet.
However, it can be used on intermittently connected hosts with suitable
configuration adjustments.

   Configuration files currently exist for the following operating
systems: AIX, BSD/OS (aka BSDI), Darwin (Mac OS X), DGUX, Dragonfly,
FreeBSD, GNU/Hurd, GNU/Linux, HI-OSF (Hitachi), HI-UX, HP-UX, IRIX, MIPS
RISCOS, NetBSD, OpenBSD, OpenUNIX, QNX, SCO, SCO SVR4.2 (aka UNIX-SV),
Solaris (aka SunOS5), SunOS4, Tru64-Unix (formerly Digital UNIX,
formerly DEC-OSF1), Ultrix, and UnixWare.  Some of these operating
systems are no longer current and cannot easily be tested, so the
configuration files may no longer work in practice.

   There are also configuration files for compiling Exim in the Cygwin
environment that can be installed on systems running Windows.  However,
this document does not contain any information about running Exim in the
Cygwin environment.

   The terms and conditions for the use and distribution of Exim are
contained in the file ‘NOTICE’.  Exim is distributed under the terms of
the GNU General Public Licence, a copy of which may be found in the file
‘LICENCE’.

   The use, supply, or promotion of Exim for the purpose of sending
bulk, unsolicited electronic mail is incompatible with the basic aims of
Exim, which revolve around the free provision of a service that enhances
the quality of personal communications.  The author of Exim regards
indiscriminate mass-mailing as an antisocial, irresponsible abuse of the
Internet.

   Exim owes a great deal to Smail 3 and its author, Ron Karr.  Without
the experience of running and working on the Smail 3 code, I could never
have contemplated starting to write a new MTA. Many of the ideas and
user interfaces were originally taken from Smail 3, though the actual
code of Exim is entirely new, and has developed far beyond the initial
concept.

   Many people, both in Cambridge and around the world, have contributed
to the development and the testing of Exim, and to porting it to various
operating systems.  I am grateful to them all.  The distribution now
contains a file called ‘ACKNOWLEDGMENTS’, in which I have started
recording the names of contributors.

* Menu:

* Exim documentation::
* FTP site and websites::
* Mailing lists::
* Bug reports::
* Where to find the Exim distribution::
* Limitations::
* Runtime configuration::
* Calling interface::
* Terminology::


File: spec.info,  Node: Exim documentation,  Next: FTP site and websites,  Up: Introduction

1.1 Exim documentation
======================

This edition of the Exim specification applies to version 4.100-RC3 of
Exim.  Substantive changes from the 4.99 edition are marked in some
renditions of this document; this paragraph is so marked if the
rendition is capable of showing a change indicator.

   This document is very much a reference manual; it is not a tutorial.
The reader is expected to have some familiarity with the SMTP mail
transfer protocol and with general Unix system administration.  Although
there are some discussions and examples in places, the information is
mostly organized in a way that makes it easy to look up, rather than in
a natural order for sequential reading.  Furthermore, this manual aims
to cover every aspect of Exim in detail, including a number of
rarely-used, special-purpose features that are unlikely to be of very
wide interest.

   An "easier" discussion of Exim which provides more in-depth
explanatory, introductory, and tutorial material can be found in a book
entitled _The Exim SMTP Mail Server_ (second edition, 2007), published
by UIT Cambridge (*https://www.uit.co.uk/exim-book/
(https://www.uit.co.uk/exim-book/)*).

   The book also contains a chapter that gives a general introduction to
SMTP and Internet mail.  Inevitably, however, the book is unlikely to be
fully up-to-date with the latest release of Exim.  (Note that the
earlier book about Exim, published by O'Reilly, covers Exim 3, and many
things have changed in Exim 4.)

   If you are using a Debian distribution of Exim, you will find
information about Debian-specific features in the file
‘/usr/share/doc/exim4-base/README.Debian’.  The command ‘man
update-exim.conf’ is another source of Debian-specific information.

   As Exim develops, there may be features in newer versions that have
not yet made it into this document, which is updated only when the most
significant digit of the fractional part of the version number changes.
Specifications of new features that are not yet in this manual are
placed in the file ‘doc/NewStuff’ in the Exim distribution.

   Some features may be classified as "experimental".  These may change
incompatibly while they are developing, or even be withdrawn.  For this
reason, they are not documented in this manual.  Information about
experimental features can be found in the file ‘doc/experimental.txt’.

   All changes to Exim (whether new features, bug fixes, or other kinds
of change) are noted briefly in the file called ‘doc/ChangeLog’.

   This specification itself is available as an ASCII file in
‘doc/spec.txt’ so that it can easily be searched with a text editor.
Other files in the ‘doc’ directory are:

‘OptionLists.txt’                    list of all options in
                                     alphabetical order
‘dbm.discuss.txt’                    discussion about DBM libraries
‘exim.8’                             a man page of Exim's command line
                                     options
‘experimental.txt’                   documentation of experimental
                                     features
‘filter.txt’                         specification of the filter
                                     language
‘Exim3.upgrade’                      upgrade notes from release 2 to
                                     release 3
‘Exim4.upgrade’                      upgrade notes from release 3 to
                                     release 4
‘openssl.txt’                        installing a current OpenSSL
                                     release

   The main specification and the specification of the filtering
language are also available in other formats (HTML, PostScript, PDF, and
Texinfo).  Section *note Where to find the Exim distribution:: below
tells you how to get hold of these.


File: spec.info,  Node: FTP site and websites,  Next: Mailing lists,  Prev: Exim documentation,  Up: Introduction

1.2 FTP site and websites
=========================

The primary site for Exim source distributions is the ‘exim.org’ FTP
site, available over HTTPS, HTTP and FTP.

   As well as Exim distribution tar files, the Exim website contains a
number of differently formatted versions of the documentation.  A recent
addition to the online information is *the Exim wiki
(https://wiki.exim.org)*, which contains what used to be a separate FAQ,
as well as various other examples, tips, and know-how that have been
contributed by Exim users.  The wiki site should always redirect to the
correct place, which is currently provided by GitHub, and is open to
editing by anyone with a GitHub account.

   An issues tracking system exists at
*https://code.exim.org/exim/exim/issues/
(https://code.exim.org/exim/exim/issues/)* You can use this to report
bugs, and also to add items to the wish list.  Please search first to
check that you are not duplicating a previous entry.  Please do not ask
for configuration help in this system.


File: spec.info,  Node: Mailing lists,  Next: Bug reports,  Prev: FTP site and websites,  Up: Introduction

1.3 Mailing lists
=================

The following Exim mailing lists exist:

_exim-announce@lists.exim.org_       Moderated, low volume
                                     announcements list
_exim-users@lists.exim.org_          General discussion list
_exim-users-de@lists.exim.org_       General discussion list in German
                                     language
_exim-dev@lists.exim.org_            Discussion of bugs, enhancements,
                                     etc.
_exim-cvs@lists.exim.org_            Automated commit messages from the
                                     VCS

   You can subscribe to these lists, change your existing subscriptions,
and view or search the archives via the mailing lists link on the Exim
home page.  If you are using a Debian distribution of Exim, you may wish
to subscribe to the Debian-specific mailing list
_pkg-exim4-users@lists.alioth.debian.org_ via this web page:

     https://alioth-lists.debian.net/cgi-bin/mailman/listinfo/pkg-exim4-users

   Please ask Debian-specific questions on that list and not on the
general Exim lists.


File: spec.info,  Node: Bug reports,  Next: Where to find the Exim distribution,  Prev: Mailing lists,  Up: Introduction

1.4 Bug reports
===============

Reports of obvious bugs can be filed via
*https://code.exim.org/exim/exim/issues
(https://code.exim.org/exim/exim/issues)*.  However, if you are unsure
whether some behaviour is a bug or not, the best thing to do is to post
a message to the _exim-dev_ mailing list and have it discussed.


File: spec.info,  Node: Where to find the Exim distribution,  Next: Limitations,  Prev: Bug reports,  Up: Introduction

1.5 Where to find the Exim distribution
=======================================

The master distribution site for the Exim distribution is

     https://downloads.exim.org/

   The service is available over HTTPS, HTTP and FTP. We encourage
people to migrate to HTTPS.

   The content served at *https://downloads.exim.org/
(https://downloads.exim.org/)* is identical to the content served at
*https://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim (https://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim)* and
*ftp://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim (ftp://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim)*.

   If accessing via a hostname containing _ftp_, then the file
references that follow are relative to the ‘exim’ directories at these
sites.  If accessing via the hostname _downloads_ then the
subdirectories described here are top-level directories.

   There are now quite a number of independent mirror sites around the
world.  Those that I know about are listed in the file called ‘Mirrors’.

   Within the top exim directory there are subdirectories called ‘exim3’
(for previous Exim 3 distributions), ‘exim4’ (for the latest Exim 4
distributions), and ‘Testing’ for testing versions.  In the ‘exim4’
subdirectory, the current release can always be found in files called

     exim-n.nn.tar.xz
     exim-n.nn.tar.gz
     exim-n.nn.tar.bz2

   where _n.nn_ is the highest such version number in the directory.
The three files contain identical data; the only difference is the type
of compression.  The ‘.xz’ file is usually the smallest, while the ‘.gz’
file is the most portable to old systems.

   The distributions will be PGP signed by an individual key of the
Release Coordinator.  This key will have a uid containing an email
address in the _exim.org_ domain and will have signatures from other
people, including other Exim maintainers.  We expect that the key will
be in the "strong set" of PGP keys.  There should be a trust path to
that key from the Exim Maintainer's PGP keys, a version of which can be
found in the release directory in the file
‘Exim-Maintainers-Keyring.asc’.  All keys used will be available in
public keyserver pools, such as _pool.sks-keyservers.net_.

   At the time of the last update, releases were being made by Jeremy
Harris and signed with key _0xBCE58C8CE41F32DF_. Other recent keys used
for signing are those of Heiko Schlittermann, _0x26101B62F69376CE_, and
of Phil Pennock, _0x4D1E900E14C1CC04_.

   The signatures for the tar bundles are in:

     exim-n.nn.tar.xz.asc
     exim-n.nn.tar.gz.asc
     exim-n.nn.tar.bz2.asc

   For each released version, the log of changes is made available in a
separate file in the directory ‘ChangeLogs’ so that it is possible to
find out what has changed without having to download the entire
distribution.

   The main distribution contains ASCII versions of this specification
and other documentation; other formats of the documents are available in
separate files inside the ‘exim4’ directory of the FTP site:

     exim-html-n.nn.tar.gz
     exim-pdf-n.nn.tar.gz
     exim-postscript-n.nn.tar.gz
     exim-info-n.nn.tar.gz
     exim-texinfo-n.nn.tar.gz

   These tar files contain only the ‘doc’ directory, not the complete
distribution, and are also available in ‘.bz2’ and ‘.xz’ forms.


File: spec.info,  Node: Limitations,  Next: Runtime configuration,  Prev: Where to find the Exim distribution,  Up: Introduction

1.6 Limitations
===============

   • Exim is designed for use as an Internet MTA, and therefore handles
     addresses in *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* domain format
     only.  It cannot handle UUCP "bang paths", though simple
     two-component bang paths can be converted by a straightforward
     rewriting configuration.  This restriction does not prevent Exim
     from being interfaced to UUCP as a transport mechanism, provided
     that domain addresses are used.

   • Exim insists that every address it handles has a domain attached.
     For incoming local messages, domainless addresses are automatically
     qualified with a configured domain value.  Configuration options
     specify from which remote systems unqualified addresses are
     acceptable.  These are then qualified on arrival.

   • The only external transport mechanisms that are currently
     implemented are SMTP and LMTP over a TCP/IP network (including
     support for IPv6).  However, a pipe transport is available, and
     there are facilities for writing messages to files and pipes,
     optionally in _batched SMTP_ format; these facilities can be used
     to send messages to other transport mechanisms such as UUCP,
     provided they can handle domain-style addresses.  Batched SMTP
     input is also catered for.

   • Exim is not designed for storing mail for dial-in hosts.  When the
     volumes of such mail are large, it is better to get the messages
     "delivered" into files (that is, off Exim's queue) and subsequently
     passed on to the dial-in hosts by other means.

   • Although Exim does have basic facilities for scanning incoming
     messages, these are not comprehensive enough to do full virus or
     spam scanning.  Such operations are best carried out using
     additional specialized software packages.  If you compile Exim with
     the content-scanning extension, straightforward interfaces to a
     number of common scanners are provided.


File: spec.info,  Node: Runtime configuration,  Next: Calling interface,  Prev: Limitations,  Up: Introduction

1.7 Runtime configuration
=========================

Exim's runtime configuration is held in a single text file that is
divided into a number of sections.  The entries in this file consist of
keywords and values, in the style of Smail 3 configuration files.  A
default configuration file which is suitable for simple online
installations is provided in the distribution, and is described in
chapter *note The default configuration file:: below.


File: spec.info,  Node: Calling interface,  Next: Terminology,  Prev: Runtime configuration,  Up: Introduction

1.8 Calling interface
=====================

Like many MTAs, Exim has adopted the Sendmail command line interface so
that it can be a straight replacement for ‘/usr/lib/sendmail’ or
‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’ when sending mail, but you do not need to know
anything about Sendmail in order to run Exim.  For actions other than
sending messages, Sendmail-compatible options also exist, but those that
produce output (for example, ‘-bp’, which lists the messages in the
queue) do so in Exim's own format.  There are also some additional
options that are compatible with Smail 3, and some further options that
are new to Exim.  Chapter *note The Exim command line:: documents all
Exim's command line options.  This information is automatically made
into the man page that forms part of the Exim distribution.

   Control of messages in the queue can be done via certain privileged
command line options.  There is also an optional monitor program called
_eximon_, which displays current information in an X window, and which
contains a menu interface to Exim's command line administration options.


File: spec.info,  Node: Terminology,  Prev: Calling interface,  Up: Introduction

1.9 Terminology
===============

The _body_ of a message is the actual data that the sender wants to
transmit.  It is the last part of a message and is separated from the
_header_ (see below) by a blank line.

   When a message cannot be delivered, it is normally returned to the
sender in a delivery failure message or a "non-delivery report" (NDR).
The term _bounce_ is commonly used for this action, and the error
reports are often called _bounce messages_.  This is a convenient
shorthand for "delivery failure error report".  Such messages have an
empty sender address in the message's _envelope_ (see below) to ensure
that they cannot themselves give rise to further bounce messages.

   The term _default_ appears frequently in this manual.  It is used to
qualify a value which is used in the absence of any setting in the
configuration.  It may also qualify an action which is taken unless a
configuration setting specifies otherwise.

   The term _defer_ is used when the delivery of a message to a specific
destination cannot immediately take place for some reason (a remote host
may be down, or a user's local mailbox may be full).  Such deliveries
are _deferred_ until a later time.

   The word _domain_ is sometimes used to mean all but the first
component of a host's name.  It is _not_ used in that sense here, where
it normally refers to the part of an email address following the @ sign.

   A message in transit has an associated _envelope_, as well as a
header and a body.  The envelope contains a sender address (to which
bounce messages should be delivered), and any number of recipient
addresses.  References to the sender or the recipients of a message
usually mean the addresses in the envelope.  An MTA uses these addresses
for delivery, and for returning bounce messages, not the addresses that
appear in the header lines.

   The _header_ of a message is the first part of a message's text,
consisting of a number of lines, each of which has a name such as
_From:_, _To:_, _Subject:_, etc.  Long header lines can be split over
several text lines by indenting the continuations.  The header is
separated from the body by a blank line.

   The term _local part_, which is taken from *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.4.1)*, is used
to refer to the part of an email address that precedes the @ sign.  The
part that follows the @ sign is called the _domain_ or _mail domain_.

   The terms _local delivery_ and _remote delivery_ are used to
distinguish delivery to a file or a pipe on the local host from delivery
by SMTP over TCP/IP to another host.  As far as Exim is concerned, all
hosts other than the host it is running on are _remote_.

   _Return path_ is another name that is used for the sender address in
a message's envelope.

   The term _queue_ is used to refer to the set of messages awaiting
delivery because this term is in widespread use in the context of MTAs.
However, in Exim's case, the reality is more like a pool than a queue,
because there is normally no ordering of waiting messages.

   The term _queue runner_ is used to describe a process that scans the
queue and attempts to deliver those messages whose retry times have
come.  This term is used by other MTAs and also relates to the command
‘runq’, but in Exim the waiting messages are normally processed in an
unpredictable order.

   The term _spool directory_ is used for a directory in which Exim
keeps the messages in its queue - that is, those that it is in the
process of delivering.  This should not be confused with the directory
in which local mailboxes are stored, which is called a "spool directory"
by some people.  In the Exim documentation, "spool" is always used in
the first sense.


File: spec.info,  Node: Incorporated code,  Next: Receiving and delivering mail,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top

2 Incorporated code
*******************

A number of pieces of external code are included in the Exim
distribution.

   • Regular expressions are supported in the main Exim program and in
     the Exim monitor using the freely-distributable PCRE2 library,
     copyright (c) University of Cambridge.  The source to PCRE2 is not
     shipped with Exim, so you will need to use the version of PCRE2
     shipped with your system, or obtain and install the full version of
     the library from *https://github.com/PCRE2Project/pcre2/releases
     (https://github.com/PCRE2Project/pcre2/releases)*.

   • Support for the cdb (Constant DataBase) lookup method is provided
     by code contributed by Nigel Metheringham of (at the time he
     contributed it) Planet Online Ltd.  The implementation is
     completely contained within the code of Exim.  It does not link
     against an external cdb library.  The code contains the following
     statements:

          Copyright (c) 1998 Nigel Metheringham, Planet Online Ltd

          This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
          modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
          published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
          the License, or (at your option) any later version.  This code
          implements Dan Bernstein's Constant DataBase (cdb) spec.
          Information, the spec and sample code for cdb can be obtained
          from *https://cr.yp.to/cdb.html (https://cr.yp.to/cdb.html)*.
          This implementation borrows some code from Dan Bernstein's
          implementation (which has no license restrictions applied to
          it).

   • Client support for Microsoft's _Secure Password Authentication_ is
     provided by code contributed by Marc Prud'hommeaux.  Server support
     was contributed by Tom Kistner.  This includes code taken from the
     Samba project, which is released under the Gnu GPL.

   • Support for calling the Cyrus _saslauthd_ daemon is provided by
     code taken from the Cyrus-SASL library and adapted by Alexander S.
     Sabourenkov.  The permission notice appears below, in accordance
     with the conditions expressed therein.

          Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University.  All rights
          reserved.

          Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
          without modification, are permitted provided that the
          following conditions are met:

            1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
               copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
               following disclaimer.

            2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
               copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
               following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
               materials provided with the distribution.

            3. The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to
               endorse or promote products derived from this software
               without prior written permission.  For permission or any
               other legal details, please contact

                                  Office of Technology Transfer
                                  Carnegie Mellon University
                                  5000 Forbes Avenue
                                  Pittsburgh, PA  15213-3890
                                  (412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
                                  tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu

            4. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the
               following acknowledgment:

               "This product includes software developed by Computing
               Services at Carnegie Mellon University
               (*https://www.cmu.edu/computing/
               (https://www.cmu.edu/computing/)*)."

               CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
               REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
               OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
               CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
               INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
               WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
               WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
               TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
               USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

   • The Exim Monitor program, which is an X-Window application,
     includes modified versions of the Athena StripChart and TextPop
     widgets.  This code is copyright by DEC and MIT, and their
     permission notice appears below, in accordance with the conditions
     expressed therein.

          Copyright 1987, 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation,
          Maynard, Massachusetts, and the Massachusetts Institute of
          Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts.

          All Rights Reserved

          Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
          and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is
          hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
          appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and
          this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and
          that the names of Digital or MIT not be used in advertising or
          publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
          specific, written prior permission.

          DIGITAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
          INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
          FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
          INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
          RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
          ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
          ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
          THIS SOFTWARE.

   • The library DMARC implementation option uses the OpenDMARC library
     which is Copyrighted by The Trusted Domain Project.  Portions of
     Exim source which use OpenDMARC derived code are indicated in the
     respective source files.  The full OpenDMARC license is provided in
     the LICENSE.opendmarc file contained in the distributed source
     code.

   • Many people have contributed code fragments, some large, some
     small, that were not covered by any specific license requirements.
     It is assumed that the contributors are happy to see their code
     incorporated into Exim under the GPL.


File: spec.info,  Node: Receiving and delivering mail,  Next: Building and installing Exim,  Prev: Incorporated code,  Up: Top

3 How Exim receives and delivers mail
*************************************

* Menu:

* Overall philosophy::
* Policy control::
* User filters::
* Message identification::
* Receiving mail::
* Handling an incoming message::
* Life of a message::
* Processing an address for delivery::
* Processing an address for verification::
* Running an individual router::
* Duplicate addresses::
* Router preconditions::
* Delivery in detail::
* Retry mechanism::


File: spec.info,  Node: Overall philosophy,  Next: Policy control,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.1 Overall philosophy
======================

Exim is designed to work efficiently on systems that are permanently
connected to the Internet and are handling a general mix of mail.  In
such circumstances, most messages can be delivered immediately.
Consequently, Exim does not maintain independent queues of messages for
specific domains or hosts, though it does try to send several messages
in a single SMTP connection after a host has been down, and it also
maintains per-host retry information.


File: spec.info,  Node: Policy control,  Next: User filters,  Prev: Overall philosophy,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.2 Policy control
==================

Policy controls are now an important feature of MTAs that are connected
to the Internet.  Perhaps their most important job is to stop MTAs from
being abused as "open relays" by misguided individuals who send out vast
amounts of unsolicited junk and want to disguise its source.  Exim
provides flexible facilities for specifying policy controls on incoming
mail:

   • Exim 4 (unlike previous versions of Exim) implements policy
     controls on incoming mail by means of _Access Control Lists_
     (ACLs).  Each list is a series of statements that may either grant
     or deny access.  ACLs can be used at several places in the SMTP
     dialogue while receiving a message from a remote host.  However,
     the most common places are after each RCPT command, and at the very
     end of the message.  The sysadmin can specify conditions for
     accepting or rejecting individual recipients or the entire message,
     respectively, at these two points (see chapter *note Access control
     lists::).  Denial of access results in an SMTP error code.

   • An ACL is also available for locally generated, non-SMTP messages.
     In this case, the only available actions are to accept or deny the
     entire message.

   • When Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension,
     facilities are provided in the ACL mechanism for passing the
     message to external virus and/or spam scanning software.  The
     result of such a scan is passed back to the ACL, which can then use
     it to decide what to do with the message.

   • When a message has been received, either from a remote host or from
     the local host, but before the final acknowledgment has been sent,
     a locally supplied C function called ‘local_scan()’ can be run to
     inspect the message and decide whether to accept it or not (see
     chapter *note Adding a local scan function to Exim: Local scan
     function.).  If the message is accepted, the list of recipients can
     be modified by the function.

   • Using the ‘local_scan()’ mechanism is another way of calling
     external scanner software.  The ‘SA-Exim’ add-on package works this
     way.  It does not require Exim to be compiled with the
     content-scanning extension.

   • After a message has been accepted, a further checking mechanism is
     available in the form of the _system filter_ (see chapter *note
     System-wide message filtering::).  This runs at the start of every
     delivery process.


File: spec.info,  Node: User filters,  Next: Message identification,  Prev: Policy control,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.3 User filters
================

In a conventional Exim configuration, users are able to run private
filters by setting up appropriate ‘.forward’ files in their home
directories.  See chapter *note The redirect router:: (about the
‘redirect’ router) for the configuration needed to support this, and the
separate document entitled _Exim's interfaces to mail filtering_ for
user details.  Two different kinds of filtering are available:

   • Sieve filters are written in the standard filtering language that
     is defined by *RFC 3028
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3028)*.

   • Exim filters are written in a syntax that is unique to Exim, but
     which is more powerful than Sieve, which it pre-dates.

   User filters are run as part of the routing process, described below.


File: spec.info,  Node: Message identification,  Next: Receiving mail,  Prev: User filters,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.4 Message identification
==========================

Every message handled by Exim is given a _message id_ which is 23
characters long.  It is divided into three parts, separated by hyphens,
for example ‘16VDhn-000000001bo-D342’.  Each part is a sequence of
letters and digits, normally encoding numbers in base 62.  However, in
the Darwin operating system (Mac OS X) and when Exim is compiled to run
under Cygwin, base 36 (avoiding the use of lower case letters) is used
instead, because the message id is used to construct filenames, and the
names of files in those systems are not always case-sensitive.

   The detail of the contents of the message id have changed as Exim has
evolved.  Earlier versions relied on the operating system not re-using a
process id (pid) within one second.  On modern operating systems, this
assumption can no longer be made, so the algorithm had to be changed.
To retain backward compatibility, the format of the message id was
retained, which is why the following rules are somewhat eccentric:

   • The first six characters of the message id are the time at which
     the message started to be received, to a granularity of one second.
     That is, this field contains the number of seconds since the start
     of the epoch (the normal Unix way of representing the date and time
     of day).

   • After the first hyphen, the next eleven characters are the id of
     the process that received the message.

   • There are two different possibilities for the final four
     characters:

       1. If ‘localhost_number’ is not set, this value is the fractional
          part of the time of reception, normally in units of
          microseconds.  but for systems that must use base 36 instead
          of base 62 (because of case-insensitive file systems), the
          units are 2 us.

       2. If ‘localhost_number’ is set, it is multiplied by 500000
          (250000) and added to the fractional part of the time, which
          in this case is in units of 2 us (4 us).

   After a message has been received, Exim waits for the clock to tick
at the appropriate resolution before proceeding, so that if another
message is received by the same process, or by another process with the
same (re-used) pid, it is guaranteed that the time will be different.
In most cases, the clock will already have ticked while the message was
being received.

   The exim_msgdate utility (see section *note Message Ids for humans
(exim_msgdate): Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate].) can be used to
display the date, and optionally the process id, of an Exim Message ID.


File: spec.info,  Node: Receiving mail,  Next: Handling an incoming message,  Prev: Message identification,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.5 Receiving mail
==================

The only way Exim can receive mail from another host is using SMTP over
TCP/IP, in which case the sender and recipient addresses are transferred
using SMTP commands.  However, from a locally running process (such as a
user's MUA), there are several possibilities:

   • If the process runs Exim with the ‘-bm’ option, the message is read
     non-interactively (usually via a pipe), with the recipients taken
     from the command line, or from the body of the message if ‘-t’ is
     also used.

   • If the process runs Exim with the ‘-bS’ option, the message is also
     read non-interactively, but in this case the recipients are listed
     at the start of the message in a series of SMTP RCPT commands,
     terminated by a DATA command.  This is called "batch SMTP" format,
     but it isn't really SMTP. The SMTP commands are just another way of
     passing envelope addresses in a non-interactive submission.

   • If the process runs Exim with the ‘-bs’ option, the message is read
     interactively, using the SMTP protocol.  A two-way pipe is normally
     used for passing data between the local process and the Exim
     process.  This is "real" SMTP and is handled in the same way as
     SMTP over TCP/IP. For example, the ACLs for SMTP commands are used
     for this form of submission.

   • A local process may also make a TCP/IP call to the host's loopback
     address (127.0.0.1) or any other of its IP addresses.  When
     receiving messages, Exim does not treat the loopback address
     specially.  It treats all such connections in the same way as
     connections from other hosts.

   In the three cases that do not involve TCP/IP, the sender address is
constructed from the login name of the user that called Exim and a
default qualification domain (which can be set by the ‘qualify_domain’
configuration option).  For local or batch SMTP, a sender address that
is passed using the SMTP MAIL command is ignored.  However, the system
administrator may allow certain users ("trusted users") to specify a
different sender addresses unconditionally, or all users to specify
certain forms of different sender address.  The ‘-f’ option or the SMTP
MAIL command is used to specify these different addresses.  See section
*note Trusted and admin users:: for details of trusted users, and the
‘untrusted_set_sender’ option for a way of allowing untrusted users to
change sender addresses.

   Messages received by either of the non-interactive mechanisms are
subject to checking by the non-SMTP ACL if one is defined.  Messages
received using SMTP (either over TCP/IP or interacting with a local
process) can be checked by a number of ACLs that operate at different
times during the SMTP session.  Either individual recipients or the
entire message can be rejected if local policy requirements are not met.
The ‘local_scan()’ function (see chapter *note Adding a local scan
function to Exim: Local scan function.) is run for all incoming
messages.

   Exim can be configured not to start a delivery process when a message
is received; this can be unconditional, or depend on the number of
incoming SMTP connections or the system load.  In these situations, new
messages wait on the queue until a queue runner process picks them up.
However, in standard configurations under normal conditions, delivery is
started as soon as a message is received.


File: spec.info,  Node: Handling an incoming message,  Next: Life of a message,  Prev: Receiving mail,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.6 Handling an incoming message
================================

When Exim accepts a message, it writes two files in its spool directory.
The first contains the envelope information, the current status of the
message, and the header lines, and the second contains the body of the
message.  The names of the two spool files consist of the message id,
followed by ‘-H’ for the file containing the envelope and header, and
‘-D’ for the data file.

   By default, all these message files are held in a single directory
called ‘input’ inside the general Exim spool directory.  Some operating
systems do not perform very well if the number of files in a directory
gets large; to improve performance in such cases, the
‘split_spool_directory’ option can be used.  This causes Exim to split
up the input files into 62 sub-directories whose names are single
letters or digits.  When this is done, the queue is processed one
sub-directory at a time instead of all at once, which can improve
overall performance even when there are not enough files in each
directory to affect file system performance.

   The envelope information consists of the address of the message's
sender and the addresses of the recipients.  This information is
entirely separate from any addresses contained in the header lines.  The
status of the message includes a list of recipients who have already
received the message.  The format of the first spool file is described
in chapter *note Format of spool files::.

   Address rewriting that is specified in the rewrite section of the
configuration (see chapter *note Address rewriting::) is done once and
for all on incoming addresses, both in the header lines and the
envelope, at the time the message is accepted.  If during the course of
delivery additional addresses are generated (for example, via aliasing),
these new addresses are rewritten as soon as they are generated.  At the
time a message is actually delivered (transported) further rewriting can
take place; because this is a transport option, it can be different for
different forms of delivery.  It is also possible to specify the
addition or removal of certain header lines at the time the message is
delivered (see chapters *note Generic options for routers:: and *note
Generic options for transports::).


File: spec.info,  Node: Life of a message,  Next: Processing an address for delivery,  Prev: Handling an incoming message,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.7 Life of a message
=====================

A message remains in the spool directory until it is completely
delivered to its recipients or to an error address, or until it is
deleted by an administrator or by the user who originally created it.
In cases when delivery cannot proceed - for example when a message can
neither be delivered to its recipients nor returned to its sender, the
message is marked "frozen" on the spool, and no more deliveries are
attempted.

   An administrator can "thaw" such messages when the problem has been
corrected, and can also freeze individual messages by hand if necessary.
In addition, an administrator can force a delivery error, causing a
bounce message to be sent.

   There are options called ‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’ and
‘timeout_frozen_after’, which discard frozen messages after a certain
time.  The first applies only to frozen bounces, the second to all
frozen messages.

   While Exim is working on a message, it writes information about each
delivery attempt to its main log file.  This includes successful,
unsuccessful, and delayed deliveries for each recipient (see chapter
*note Log files::).  The log lines are also written to a separate
_message log_ file for each message.  These logs are solely for the
benefit of the administrator and are normally deleted along with the
spool files when processing of a message is complete.  The use of
individual message logs can be disabled by setting ‘no_message_logs’;
this might give an improvement in performance on very busy systems.

   All the information Exim itself needs to set up a delivery is kept in
the first spool file, along with the header lines.  When a successful
delivery occurs, the address is immediately written at the end of a
journal file, whose name is the message id followed by ‘-J’.  At the end
of a delivery run, if there are some addresses left to be tried again
later, the first spool file (the ‘-H’ file) is updated to indicate which
these are, and the journal file is then deleted.  Updating the spool
file is done by writing a new file and renaming it, to minimize the
possibility of data loss.

   Should the system or Exim crash after a successful delivery but
before the spool file has been updated, the journal is left lying
around.  The next time Exim attempts to deliver the message, it reads
the journal file and updates the spool file before proceeding.  This
minimizes the chances of double deliveries caused by crashes.


File: spec.info,  Node: Processing an address for delivery,  Next: Processing an address for verification,  Prev: Life of a message,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.8 Processing an address for delivery
======================================

The main delivery processing elements of Exim are called _routers_ and
_transports_, and collectively these are known as _drivers_.  Code for a
number of them is provided in the source distribution, and compile-time
options specify which ones are included in the binary.  Runtime options
specify which ones are actually used for delivering messages.

   Each driver that is specified in the runtime configuration is an
_instance_ of that particular driver type.  Multiple instances are
allowed; for example, you can set up several different ‘smtp’
transports, each with different option values that might specify
different ports or different timeouts.  Each instance has its own
identifying name.  In what follows we will normally use the instance
name when discussing one particular instance (that is, one specific
configuration of the driver), and the generic driver name when
discussing the driver's features in general.

   A _router_ is a driver that operates on an address, either
determining how its delivery should happen, by assigning it to a
specific transport, or converting the address into one or more new
addresses (for example, via an alias file).  A router may also
explicitly choose to fail an address, causing it to be bounced.

   A _transport_ is a driver that transmits a copy of the message from
Exim's spool to some destination.  There are two kinds of transport: for
a _local_ transport, the destination is a file or a pipe on the local
host, whereas for a _remote_ transport the destination is some other
host.  A message is passed to a specific transport as a result of
successful routing.  If a message has several recipients, it may be
passed to a number of different transports.

   An address is processed by passing it to each configured router
instance in turn, subject to certain preconditions, until a router
accepts the address or specifies that it should be bounced.  We will
describe this process in more detail shortly.  First, as a simple
example, we consider how each recipient address in a message is
processed in a small configuration of three routers.

   To make this a more concrete example, it is described in terms of
some actual routers, but remember, this is only an example.  You can
configure Exim's routers in many different ways, and there may be any
number of routers in a configuration.

   The first router that is specified in a configuration is often one
that handles addresses in domains that are not recognized specifically
by the local host.  Typically these are addresses for arbitrary domains
on the Internet.  A precondition is set up which looks for the special
domains known to the host (for example, its own domain name), and the
router is run for addresses that do _not_ match.  Typically, this is a
router that looks up domains in the DNS in order to find the hosts to
which this address routes.  If it succeeds, the address is assigned to a
suitable SMTP transport; if it does not succeed, the router is
configured to fail the address.

   The second router is reached only when the domain is recognized as
one that "belongs" to the local host.  This router does redirection -
also known as aliasing and forwarding.  When it generates one or more
new addresses from the original, each of them is routed independently
from the start.  Otherwise, the router may cause an address to fail, or
it may simply decline to handle the address, in which case the address
is passed to the next router.

   The final router in many configurations is one that checks to see if
the address belongs to a local mailbox.  The precondition may involve a
check to see if the local part is the name of a login account, or it may
look up the local part in a file or a database.  If its preconditions
are not met, or if the router declines, we have reached the end of the
routers.  When this happens, the address is bounced.


File: spec.info,  Node: Processing an address for verification,  Next: Running an individual router,  Prev: Processing an address for delivery,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.9 Processing an address for verification
==========================================

As well as being used to decide how to deliver to an address, Exim's
routers are also used for _address verification_.  Verification can be
requested as one of the checks to be performed in an ACL for incoming
messages, on both sender and recipient addresses, and it can be tested
using the ‘-bv’ and ‘-bvs’ command line options.

   When an address is being verified, the routers are run in "verify
mode".  This does not affect the way the routers work, but it is a state
that can be detected.  By this means, a router can be skipped or made to
behave differently when verifying.  A common example is a configuration
in which the first router sends all messages to a message-scanning
program unless they have been previously scanned.  Thus, the first
router accepts all addresses without any checking, making it useless for
verifying.  Normally, the ‘no_verify’ option would be set for such a
router, causing it to be skipped in verify mode.


File: spec.info,  Node: Running an individual router,  Next: Duplicate addresses,  Prev: Processing an address for verification,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.10 Running an individual router
=================================

As explained in the example above, a number of preconditions are checked
before running a router.  If any are not met, the router is skipped, and
the address is passed to the next router.  When all the preconditions on
a router _are_ met, the router is run.  What happens next depends on the
outcome, which is one of the following:

   • _accept_: The router accepts the address, and either assigns it to
     a transport or generates one or more "child" addresses.  Processing
     the original address ceases unless the ‘unseen’ option is set on
     the router.  This option can be used to set up multiple deliveries
     with different routing (for example, for keeping archive copies of
     messages).  When ‘unseen’ is set, the address is passed to the next
     router.  Normally, however, an _accept_ return marks the end of
     routing.

     Any child addresses generated by the router are processed
     independently, starting with the first router by default.  It is
     possible to change this by setting the ‘redirect_router’ option to
     specify which router to start at for child addresses.  Unlike
     ‘pass_router’ (see below) the router specified by ‘redirect_router’
     may be anywhere in the router configuration.

   • _pass_: The router recognizes the address, but cannot handle it
     itself.  It requests that the address be passed to another router.
     By default, the address is passed to the next router, but this can
     be changed by setting the ‘pass_router’ option.  However, (unlike
     ‘redirect_router’) the named router must be below the current
     router (to avoid loops).

   • _decline_: The router declines to accept the address because it
     does not recognize it at all.  By default, the address is passed to
     the next router, but this can be prevented by setting the ‘no_more’
     option.  When ‘no_more’ is set, all the remaining routers are
     skipped.  In effect, ‘no_more’ converts _decline_ into _fail_.

   • _fail_: The router determines that the address should fail, and
     queues it for the generation of a bounce message.  There is no
     further processing of the original address unless ‘unseen’ is set
     on the router.

   • _defer_: The router cannot handle the address at the present time.
     (A database may be offline, or a DNS lookup may have timed out.)
     No further processing of the address happens in this delivery
     attempt.  It is tried again next time the message is considered for
     delivery.

   • _error_: There is some error in the router (for example, a syntax
     error in its configuration).  The action is as for defer.

   If an address reaches the end of the routers without having been
accepted by any of them, it is bounced as unrouteable.  The default
error message in this situation is "unrouteable address", but you can
set your own message by making use of the ‘cannot_route_message’ option.
This can be set for any router; the value from the last router that
"saw" the address is used.

   Sometimes while routing you want to fail a delivery when some
conditions are met but others are not, instead of passing the address on
for further routing.  You can do this by having a second router that
explicitly fails the delivery when the relevant conditions are met.  The
‘redirect’ router has a "fail" facility for this purpose.


File: spec.info,  Node: Duplicate addresses,  Next: Router preconditions,  Prev: Running an individual router,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.11 Duplicate addresses
========================

Once routing is complete, Exim scans the addresses that are assigned to
local and remote transports and discards any duplicates that it finds.
During this check, local parts are treated case-sensitively.  This
happens only when actually delivering a message; when testing routers
with ‘-bt’, all the routed addresses are shown.


File: spec.info,  Node: Router preconditions,  Next: Delivery in detail,  Prev: Duplicate addresses,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.12 Router preconditions
=========================

The preconditions that are tested for each router are listed below, in
the order in which they are tested.  The individual configuration
options are described in more detail in chapter *note Generic options
for routers::.

  1. The ‘local_part_prefix’ and ‘local_part_suffix’ options can specify
     that the local parts handled by the router may or must have certain
     prefixes and/or suffixes.  If a mandatory affix (prefix or suffix)
     is not present, the router is skipped.  These conditions are tested
     first.  When an affix is present, it is removed from the local part
     before further processing, including the evaluation of any other
     conditions.

  2. Routers can be designated for use only when not verifying an
     address, that is, only when routing it for delivery (or testing its
     delivery routing).  If the ‘verify’ option is set false, the router
     is skipped when Exim is verifying an address.  Setting the ‘verify’
     option actually sets two options, ‘verify_sender’ and
     ‘verify_recipient’, which independently control the use of the
     router for sender and recipient verification.  You can set these
     options directly if you want a router to be used for only one type
     of verification.  Note that cutthrough delivery is classed as a
     recipient verification for this purpose.

  3. If the ‘address_test’ option is set false, the router is skipped
     when Exim is run with the ‘-bt’ option to test an address routing.
     This can be helpful when the first router sends all new messages to
     a scanner of some sort; it makes it possible to use ‘-bt’ to test
     subsequent delivery routing without having to simulate the effect
     of the scanner.

  4. Routers can be designated for use only when verifying an address,
     as opposed to routing it for delivery.  The ‘verify_only’ option
     controls this.  Again, cutthrough delivery counts as a
     verification.

  5. Individual routers can be explicitly skipped when running the
     routers to check an address given in the SMTP EXPN command (see the
     ‘expn’ option).

  6. If the ‘domains’ option is set, the domain of the address must be
     in the set of domains that it defines.  A match verifies the
     variable ‘$domain’ (which carries tainted data) and assigns an
     untainted value to the ‘$domain_data’ variable.  Such an untainted
     value is often needed in the transport.  For specifics of the
     matching operation and the resulting untainted value, refer to
     section *note Domain lists::.

     When an untainted value is wanted, use this option rather than the
     generic ‘condition’ option.

  7. If the ‘local_parts’ option is set, the local part of the address
     must be in the set of local parts that it defines.  A match
     verifies the variable ‘$local_part’ (which carries tainted data)
     and assigns an untainted value to the ‘$local_part_data’ variable.
     Such an untainted value is often needed in the transport.  For
     specifics of the matching operation and the resulting untainted
     value, refer to section *note Local part lists::.

     When an untainted value is wanted, use this option rather than the
     generic ‘condition’ option.

     If ‘local_part_prefix’ or ‘local_part_suffix’ is in use, the prefix
     or suffix is removed from the local part before this check.  If you
     want to do precondition tests on local parts that include affixes,
     you can do so by using a ‘condition’ option (see below) that uses
     the variables ‘$local_part’, ‘$local_part_prefix’,
     ‘$local_part_prefix_v’, ‘$local_part_suffix’ and
     ‘$local_part_suffix_v’ as necessary.

  8. If the ‘check_local_user’ option is set, the local part must be the
     name of an account on the local host.  If this check succeeds, the
     uid and gid of the local user are placed in ‘$local_user_uid’ and
     ‘$local_user_gid’ and the user's home directory is placed in
     ‘$home’; these values can be used in the remaining preconditions.

  9. If the ‘router_home_directory’ option is set, it is expanded at
     this point, because it overrides the value of ‘$home’.  If this
     expansion were left till later, the value of ‘$home’ as set by
     ‘check_local_user’ would be used in subsequent tests.  Having two
     different values of ‘$home’ in the same router could lead to
     confusion.

  10. If the ‘senders’ option is set, the envelope sender address must
     be in the set of addresses that it defines.

  11. If the ‘require_files’ option is set, the existence or
     non-existence of specified files is tested.

  12. If the ‘condition’ option is set, it is evaluated and tested.
     This option uses an expanded string to allow you to set up your own
     custom preconditions.  Expanded strings are described in chapter
     *note String expansions::.

     Note that while using this option for address matching technically
     works, it does not set any de-tainted values.  Such values are
     often needed, either for router-specific options or for transport
     options.  Using the ‘domains’ and ‘local_parts’ options is usually
     the most convenient way to obtain them.

   Note that ‘require_files’ comes near the end of the list, so you
cannot use it to check for the existence of a file in which to lookup up
a domain, local part, or sender.  However, as these options are all
expanded, you can use the ‘exists’ expansion condition to make such
tests within each condition.  The ‘require_files’ option is intended for
checking files that the router may be going to use internally, or which
are needed by a specific transport (for example, ‘.procmailrc’).


File: spec.info,  Node: Delivery in detail,  Next: Retry mechanism,  Prev: Router preconditions,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.13 Delivery in detail
=======================

When a message is to be delivered, the sequence of events is as follows:

  1. If a system-wide filter file is specified, the message is passed to
     it.  The filter may add recipients to the message, replace the
     recipients, discard the message, cause a new message to be
     generated, or cause the message delivery to fail.  The format of
     the system filter file is the same as for Exim user filter files,
     described in the separate document entitled _Exim's interfaces to
     mail filtering_.  (*Note*: Sieve cannot be used for system filter
     files.)

     Some additional features are available in system filters - see
     chapter *note System-wide message filtering:: for details.  Note
     that a message is passed to the system filter only once per
     delivery attempt, however many recipients it has.  However, if
     there are several delivery attempts because one or more addresses
     could not be immediately delivered, the system filter is run each
     time.  The filter condition ‘first_delivery’ can be used to detect
     the first run of the system filter.

  2. Each recipient address is offered to each configured router, in
     turn, subject to its preconditions, until one is able to handle it.
     If no router can handle the address, that is, if they all decline,
     the address is failed.  Because routers can be targeted at
     particular domains, several locally handled domains can be
     processed entirely independently of each other.

  3. A router that accepts an address may assign it to a local or a
     remote transport.  However, the transport is not run at this time.
     Instead, the address is placed on a list for the particular
     transport, which will be run later.  Alternatively, the router may
     generate one or more new addresses (typically from alias, forward,
     or filter files).  New addresses are fed back into this process
     from the top, but in order to avoid loops, a router ignores any
     address which has an identically-named ancestor that was processed
     by itself.

  4. When all the routing has been done, addresses that have been
     successfully handled are passed to their assigned transports.  When
     local transports are doing real local deliveries, they handle only
     one address at a time, but if a local transport is being used as a
     pseudo-remote transport (for example, to collect batched SMTP
     messages for transmission by some other means) multiple addresses
     can be handled.  Remote transports can always handle more than one
     address at a time, but can be configured not to do so, or to
     restrict multiple addresses to the same domain.

  5. Each local delivery to a file or a pipe runs in a separate process
     under a non-privileged uid, and these deliveries are run one at a
     time.  Remote deliveries also run in separate processes, normally
     under a uid that is private to Exim ("the Exim user"), but in this
     case, several remote deliveries can be run in parallel.  The
     maximum number of simultaneous remote deliveries for any one
     message is set by the ‘remote_max_parallel’ option.  The order in
     which deliveries are done is not defined, except that all local
     deliveries happen before any remote deliveries.

  6. When it encounters a local delivery during a queue run, Exim checks
     its retry database to see if there has been a previous temporary
     delivery failure for the address before running the local
     transport.  If there was a previous failure, Exim does not attempt
     a new delivery until the retry time for the address is reached.
     However, this happens only for delivery attempts that are part of a
     queue run.  Local deliveries are always attempted when delivery
     immediately follows message reception, even if retry times are set
     for them.  This makes for better behaviour if one particular
     message is causing problems (for example, causing quota overflow,
     or provoking an error in a filter file).

  7. Remote transports do their own retry handling, since an address may
     be deliverable to one of a number of hosts, each of which may have
     a different retry time.  If there have been previous temporary
     failures and no host has reached its retry time, no delivery is
     attempted, whether in a queue run or not.  See chapter *note Retry
     configuration:: for details of retry strategies.

  8. If there were any permanent errors, a bounce message is returned to
     an appropriate address (the sender in the common case), with
     details of the error for each failing address.  Exim can be
     configured to send copies of bounce messages to other addresses.

  9. If one or more addresses suffered a temporary failure, the message
     is left on the queue, to be tried again later.  Delivery of these
     addresses is said to be _deferred_.

  10. When all the recipient addresses have either been delivered or
     bounced, handling of the message is complete.  The spool files and
     message log are deleted, though the message log can optionally be
     preserved if required.


File: spec.info,  Node: Retry mechanism,  Prev: Delivery in detail,  Up: Receiving and delivering mail

3.14 Retry mechanism
====================

Exim's mechanism for retrying messages that fail to get delivered at the
first attempt is the queue runner process.  You must either run an Exim
daemon that uses the ‘-q’ option with a time interval to start queue
runners at regular intervals or use some other means (such as _cron_) to
start them.  If you do not arrange for queue runners to be run, messages
that fail temporarily at the first attempt will remain in your queue
forever.  A queue runner process works its way through the queue, one
message at a time, trying each delivery that has passed its retry time.
You can run several queue runners at once.

   Exim uses a set of configured rules to determine when next to retry
the failing address (see chapter *note Retry configuration::).  These
rules also specify when Exim should give up trying to deliver to the
address, at which point it generates a bounce message.  If no retry
rules are set for a particular host, address, and error combination, no
retries are attempted, and temporary errors are treated as permanent.

* Menu:

* Temporary delivery failure::
* Permanent delivery failure::
* Failures to deliver bounce messages::


File: spec.info,  Node: Temporary delivery failure,  Next: Permanent delivery failure,  Up: Retry mechanism

3.14.1 Temporary delivery failure
---------------------------------

There are many reasons why a message may not be immediately deliverable
to a particular address.  Failure to connect to a remote machine
(because it, or the connection to it, is down) is one of the most
common.  Temporary failures may be detected during routing as well as
during the transport stage of delivery.  Local deliveries may be delayed
if NFS files are unavailable, or if a mailbox is on a file system where
the user is over quota.  Exim can be configured to impose its own quotas
on local mailboxes; where system quotas are set they will also apply.

   If a host is unreachable for a period of time, a number of messages
may be waiting for it by the time it recovers, and sending them in a
single SMTP connection is clearly beneficial.  Whenever a delivery to a
remote host is deferred, Exim makes a note in its hints database, and
whenever a successful SMTP delivery has happened, it looks to see if any
other messages are waiting for the same host.  If any are found, they
are sent over the same SMTP connection, subject to a configuration limit
as to the maximum number in any one connection.


File: spec.info,  Node: Permanent delivery failure,  Next: Failures to deliver bounce messages,  Prev: Temporary delivery failure,  Up: Retry mechanism

3.14.2 Permanent delivery failure
---------------------------------

When a message cannot be delivered to some or all of its intended
recipients, a bounce message is generated.  Temporary delivery failures
turn into permanent errors when their timeout expires.  All the
addresses that fail in a given delivery attempt are listed in a single
message.  If the original message has many recipients, it is possible
for some addresses to fail in one delivery attempt and others to fail
subsequently, giving rise to more than one bounce message.  The wording
of bounce messages can be customized by the administrator.  See chapter
*note Customizing bounce and warning messages: Customizing messages. for
details.

   Bounce messages contain an _X-Failed-Recipients:_ header line that
lists the failed addresses, for the benefit of programs that try to
analyse such messages automatically.

   A bounce message is normally sent to the sender of the original
message, as obtained from the message's envelope.  For incoming SMTP
messages, this is the address given in the MAIL command.  However, when
an address is expanded via a forward or alias file, an alternative
address can be specified for delivery failures of the generated
addresses.  For a mailing list expansion (see section *note Using Exim
to handle mailing lists::) it is common to direct bounce messages to the
manager of the list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Failures to deliver bounce messages,  Prev: Permanent delivery failure,  Up: Retry mechanism

3.14.3 Failures to deliver bounce messages
------------------------------------------

If a bounce message (either locally generated or received from a remote
host) itself suffers a permanent delivery failure, the message is left
in the queue, but it is frozen, awaiting the attention of an
administrator.  There are options that can be used to make Exim discard
such failed messages, or to keep them for only a short time (see
‘timeout_frozen_after’ and ‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’).


File: spec.info,  Node: Building and installing Exim,  Next: The Exim command line,  Prev: Receiving and delivering mail,  Up: Top

4 Building and installing Exim
******************************

* Menu:

* Unpacking::
* Multiple machine architectures and operating systems::
* PCRE2 library::
* DBM libraries::
* Pre-building configuration::
* Support for iconv(): Support for iconv[].
* Including TLS/SSL encryption support::
* Including support for IPv6::
* Dynamically loaded module support::
* The building process::
* Output from "make"::
* Overriding build-time options for Exim::
* OS-specific header files::
* Overriding build-time options for the monitor::
* Installing Exim binaries and scripts::
* Installing info documentation::
* Setting up the spool directory::
* Testing::
* Replacing another MTA with Exim::
* Running the daemon::
* Upgrading Exim::
* Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris::


File: spec.info,  Node: Unpacking,  Next: Multiple machine architectures and operating systems,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.1 Unpacking
=============

Exim is distributed as a gzipped or bzipped tar file which, when
unpacked, creates a directory with the name of the current release (for
example, ‘exim-4.100-RC3’) into which the following files are placed:

    ‘ACKNOWLEDGMENTS’                contains some acknowledgments
    ‘CHANGES’                        contains a reference to where
                                     changes are documented
    ‘LICENCE’                        the GNU General Public Licence
    ‘Makefile’                       top-level make file
    ‘NOTICE’                         conditions for the use of Exim
    ‘README’                         list of files, directories and
                                     simple build instructions

   Other files whose names begin with ‘README’ may also be present.  The
following subdirectories are created:

    ‘Local’                          an empty directory for local
                                     configuration files
    ‘OS’                             OS-specific files
    ‘doc’                            documentation files
    ‘exim_monitor’                   source files for the Exim monitor
    ‘scripts’                        scripts used in the build process
    ‘src’                            remaining source files
    ‘util’                           independent utilities

   The main utility programs are contained in the ‘src’ directory and
are built with the Exim binary.  The ‘util’ directory contains a few
optional scripts that may be useful to some sites.


File: spec.info,  Node: Multiple machine architectures and operating systems,  Next: PCRE2 library,  Prev: Unpacking,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.2 Multiple machine architectures and operating systems
========================================================

The building process for Exim is arranged to make it easy to build
binaries for a number of different architectures and operating systems
from the same set of source files.  Compilation does not take place in
the ‘src’ directory.  Instead, a _build directory_ is created for each
architecture and operating system.  Symbolic links to the sources are
installed in this directory, which is where the actual building takes
place.  In most cases, Exim can discover the machine architecture and
operating system for itself, but the defaults can be overridden if
necessary.  A C11-capable compiler will be required for the build.


File: spec.info,  Node: PCRE2 library,  Next: DBM libraries,  Prev: Multiple machine architectures and operating systems,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.3 PCRE2 library
=================

Exim no longer has an embedded regular-expression library as the vast
majority of modern systems include PCRE2 as a system library, although
you may need to install the PCRE2 package or the PCRE2 development
package for your operating system.  If your system has a normal PCRE2
installation the Exim build process will need no further configuration.
If the library or the headers are in an unusual location you will need
to either set the PCRE2_LIBS and INCLUDE directives appropriately, or
set PCRE2_CONFIG=yes to use the installed ‘pcre-config’ command.  If
your operating system has no PCRE2 support then you will need to obtain
and build the current PCRE2 from
*https://github.com/PCRE2Project/pcre2/releases
(https://github.com/PCRE2Project/pcre2/releases)*.  More information on
PCRE2 is available at *https://pcre2project.github.io/pcre2/
(https://pcre2project.github.io/pcre2/)*.


File: spec.info,  Node: DBM libraries,  Next: Pre-building configuration,  Prev: PCRE2 library,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.4 DBM libraries
=================

Even if you do not use any DBM files in your configuration, Exim still
needs a DBM library in order to operate, because it uses indexed files
for its hints databases.  Unfortunately, there are a number of DBM
libraries in existence, and different operating systems often have
different ones installed.

   If you are using Solaris, IRIX, one of the modern BSD systems, or a
modern Linux distribution, the DBM configuration should happen
automatically, and you may be able to ignore this section.  Otherwise,
you may have to learn more than you would like about DBM libraries from
what follows.

   Licensed versions of Unix normally contain a library of DBM functions
operating via the _ndbm_ interface, and this is what Exim expects by
default.  Free versions of Unix seem to vary in what they contain as
standard.  In particular, some early versions of Linux have no default
DBM library, and different distributors have chosen to bundle different
libraries with their packaged versions.  However, the more recent
releases seem to have standardized on the Berkeley DB library.

   Ownership of the Berkeley DB library has moved to a major
corporation; development seems to have stalled and documentation is not
freely available.  This is probably not tenable for the long term use by
Exim.

   Different DBM libraries have different conventions for naming the
files they use.  When a program opens a file called ‘dbmfile’, there are
several possibilities:

  1. A traditional _ndbm_ implementation, such as that supplied as part
     of Solaris, operates on two files called ‘dbmfile.dir’ and
     ‘dbmfile.pag’.

  2. The GNU library, _gdbm_, operates on a single file.  If used via
     its _ndbm_ compatibility interface it makes two different hard
     links to it with names ‘dbmfile.dir’ and ‘dbmfile.pag’, but if used
     via its native interface, the filename is used unmodified.

  3. The Berkeley DB package, if called via its _ndbm_ compatibility
     interface, operates on a single file called ‘dbmfile.db’, but
     otherwise looks to the programmer exactly the same as the
     traditional _ndbm_ implementation.

  4. If the Berkeley package is used in its native mode, it operates on
     a single file called ‘dbmfile’; the programmer's interface is
     somewhat different to the traditional _ndbm_ interface.

  5. To complicate things further, there are several very different
     versions of the Berkeley DB package.  Version 1.85 was stable for a
     very long time, releases 2._x_ and 3._x_ were current for a while,
     but the latest versions when Exim last revamped support were
     numbered 5._x_.  Maintenance of some of the earlier releases has
     ceased, and Exim no longer supports versions before 3._x_.  All
     versions of Berkeley DB could be obtained from
     *http://www.sleepycat.com/ (http://www.sleepycat.com/)*, which is
     now a redirect to their new owner's page with far newer versions
     listed.  It is probably wise to plan to move your storage
     configurations away from Berkeley DB format, as today there are
     smaller and simpler alternatives more suited to Exim's usage model.

  6. Yet another DBM library, called _tdb_, is available from
     *https://sourceforge.net/projects/tdb/files/
     (https://sourceforge.net/projects/tdb/files/)*.  It has its own
     interface, and also operates on a single file.

  7. It is possible to use *sqlite3 (https://www.sqlite.org/index.html)*
     for the DBM library.

   Exim and its utilities can be compiled to use any of these
interfaces.  In order to use any version of the Berkeley DB package in
native mode, you must set USE_DB in an appropriate configuration file
(typically ‘Local/Makefile’).  For example:

     USE_DB=yes

   Similarly, for gdbm you set USE_GDBM, for tdb you set USE_TDB, and
for sqlite3 you set USE_SQLITE. An error is diagnosed if you set more
than one of these.  You can set USE_NDBM if needed to override an
operating system default.

   At the lowest level, the build-time configuration sets none of these
options, thereby assuming an interface of type (1).  However, some
operating system configuration files (for example, those for the BSD
operating systems and Linux) assume type (4) by setting USE_DB as their
default, and the configuration files for Cygwin set USE_GDBM. Anything
you set in ‘Local/Makefile’, however, overrides these system defaults.

   As well as setting USE_DB, USE_GDBM, or USE_TDB, it may also be
necessary to set DBMLIB, to cause inclusion of the appropriate library,
as in one of these lines:

     DBMLIB = -ldb
     DBMLIB = -ltdb
     DBMLIB = -lsqlite3
     DBMLIB = -lgdbm -lgdbm_compat

   The last of those was for a Linux having GDBM provide emulated NDBM
facilities.  Settings like that will work if the DBM library is
installed in the standard place.  Sometimes it is not, and the library's
header file may also not be in the default path.  You may need to set
INCLUDE to specify where the header file is, and to specify the path to
the library more fully in DBMLIB, as in this example:

     INCLUDE=-I/usr/local/include/db-4.1
     DBMLIB=/usr/local/lib/db-4.1/libdb.a

   There is further detailed discussion about the various DBM libraries
in the file ‘doc/dbm.discuss.txt’ in the Exim distribution.

   When moving from one DBM library to another, for the hints databases
it suffices to just remove all the files in the directory named "db/"
under the spool directory.  This is because hints are only for
optimisation and will be rebuilt during normal operations.  Non-hints
DBM databases (used by "dbm" lookups in the configuration) will need
individual rebuilds for the new DBM library.  This is not done
automatically


File: spec.info,  Node: Pre-building configuration,  Next: Support for iconv[],  Prev: DBM libraries,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.5 Pre-building configuration
==============================

Before building Exim, a local configuration file that specifies options
independent of any operating system has to be created with the name
‘Local/Makefile’.  A template for this file is supplied as the file
‘src/EDITME’, and it contains full descriptions of all the option
settings therein.  These descriptions are therefore not repeated here.
If you are building Exim for the first time, the simplest thing to do is
to copy ‘src/EDITME’ to ‘Local/Makefile’, then read it and edit it
appropriately.

   There are three settings that you must supply, because Exim will not
build without them.  They are the location of the runtime configuration
file (CONFIGURE_FILE), the directory in which Exim binaries will be
installed (BIN_DIRECTORY), and the identity of the Exim user (EXIM_USER
and maybe EXIM_GROUP as well).  The value of CONFIGURE_FILE can in fact
be a colon-separated list of filenames; Exim uses the first of them that
exists.

   There are a few other parameters that can be specified either at
build time or at runtime, to enable the same binary to be used on a
number of different machines.  However, if the locations of Exim's spool
directory and log file directory (if not within the spool directory) are
fixed, it is recommended that you specify them in ‘Local/Makefile’
instead of at runtime, so that errors detected early in Exim's execution
(such as a malformed configuration file) can be logged.

   Exim's interfaces for calling virus and spam scanning software
directly from access control lists are not compiled by default.  If you
want to include these facilities, you need to set

     WITH_CONTENT_SCAN=yes

   in your ‘Local/Makefile’.  For details of the facilities themselves,
see chapter *note Content scanning at ACL time::.

   If you are going to build the Exim monitor, a similar configuration
process is required.  The file ‘exim_monitor/EDITME’ must be edited
appropriately for your installation and saved under the name
‘Local/eximon.conf’.  If you are happy with the default settings
described in ‘exim_monitor/EDITME’, ‘Local/eximon.conf’ can be empty,
but it must exist.

   This is all the configuration that is needed in straightforward cases
for known operating systems.  However, the building process is set up so
that it is easy to override options that are set by default or by
operating-system-specific configuration files, for example, to change
the C compiler, which defaults to ‘gcc’.  See section *note Overriding
build-time options for Exim:: below for details of how to do this.


File: spec.info,  Node: Support for iconv[],  Next: Including TLS/SSL encryption support,  Prev: Pre-building configuration,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.6 Support for iconv()
=======================

The contents of header lines in messages may be encoded according to the
rules described in *RFC 2047
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)*.  This makes it
possible to transmit characters that are not in the ASCII character set,
and to label them as being in a particular character set.  When Exim is
inspecting header lines by means of the ‘$h_’ mechanism, it decodes
them, and translates them into a specified character set (default is set
at build time).  The translation is possible only if the operating
system supports the ‘iconv()’ function.

   However, some of the operating systems that supply ‘iconv()’ do not
support very many conversions.  The GNU ‘libiconv’ library (available
from *https://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/
(https://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/)*) can be installed on such
systems to remedy this deficiency, as well as on systems that do not
supply ‘iconv()’ at all.  After installing ‘libiconv’, you should add

     HAVE_ICONV=yes

   to your ‘Local/Makefile’ and rebuild Exim.


File: spec.info,  Node: Including TLS/SSL encryption support,  Next: Including support for IPv6,  Prev: Support for iconv[],  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.7 Including TLS/SSL encryption support
========================================

Exim is usually built to support encrypted SMTP connections, using the
STARTTLS command as per *RFC 2487
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2487)*.  It can also support
clients that expect to start a TLS session immediately on connection to
a non-standard port (see the ‘tls_on_connect_ports’ runtime option and
the ‘-tls-on-connect’ command line option).

   If you want to build Exim with TLS support, you must first install
either the OpenSSL or GnuTLS library.  There is no cryptographic code in
Exim itself for implementing SSL.

   If you do not want TLS support you should set

     DISABLE_TLS=yes

   in ‘Local/Makefile’.

   If OpenSSL is installed, you should set

     USE_OPENSL=yes
     TLS_LIBS=-lssl -lcrypto

   in ‘Local/Makefile’.  You may also need to specify the locations of
the OpenSSL library and include files.  For example:

     USE_OPENSSL=yes
     TLS_LIBS=-L/usr/local/openssl/lib -lssl -lcrypto
     TLS_INCLUDE=-I/usr/local/openssl/include/

   If you have _pkg-config_ available, then instead you can just use:

     USE_OPENSSL=yes
     USE_OPENSSL_PC=openssl

   If GnuTLS is installed, you should set

     USE_GNUTLS=yes
     TLS_LIBS=-lgnutls -ltasn1 -lgcrypt

   in ‘Local/Makefile’, and again you may need to specify the locations
of the library and include files.  For example:

     USE_GNUTLS=yes
     TLS_LIBS=-L/usr/gnu/lib -lgnutls -ltasn1 -lgcrypt
     TLS_INCLUDE=-I/usr/gnu/include

   If you have _pkg-config_ available, then instead you can just use:

     USE_GNUTLS=yes
     USE_GNUTLS_PC=gnutls

   You do not need to set TLS_INCLUDE if the relevant directory is
already specified in INCLUDE. Details of how to configure Exim to make
use of TLS are given in chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using
TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.


File: spec.info,  Node: Including support for IPv6,  Next: Dynamically loaded module support,  Prev: Including TLS/SSL encryption support,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.8 Including support for IPv6
==============================

Exim contains code for use on systems that have IPv6 support.  Setting
‘HAVE_IPV6=YES’ in ‘Local/Makefile’ causes the IPv6 code to be included;
it may also be necessary to set IPV6_INCLUDE and IPV6_LIBS on systems
where the IPv6 support is not fully integrated into the normal include
and library files.

   Two different types of DNS record for handling IPv6 addresses have
been defined.  AAAA records (analogous to A records for IPv4) are in
use, and are currently seen as the mainstream.  Another record type
called A6 was proposed as better than AAAA because it had more
flexibility.  However, it was felt to be over-complex, and its status
was reduced to "experimental".  Exim used to have a compile option for
including A6 record support but this has now been withdrawn.


File: spec.info,  Node: Dynamically loaded module support,  Next: The building process,  Prev: Including support for IPv6,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.9 Dynamically loaded module support
=====================================

On some platforms, Exim supports not compiling all feature support
directly into the main binary, instead putting some into external
modules which can be loaded on demand.  This permits packagers to build
Exim with support for features with extensive library dependencies
without requiring all systems to install all of those dependencies.  Any
combination of lookup types can be built this way.  Lookup types that
provide several variants will be loaded as Exim starts.  Types that
provide only one method are not loaded until used by the runtime
configuration.

   Other features that can be built this way include all the router and
authentication drivers, all the transport drivers except smtp, both
filter types (exim and sieve), SPF, DKIM, DMARC, ARC, perl,

   DSCP, socks, xclient and proxy-protocol.

   For building set ‘LOOKUP_MODULE_DIR’ to the directory into which the
modules will be installed; Exim will only load modules from that
directory, as a security measure.  You will need to set ‘CFLAGS_DYNAMIC’
if not already defined for your OS; see ‘OS/Makefile-Linux’ for an
example.  Some other requirements for adjusting ‘EXTRALIBS’ may also be
necessary, see ‘src/EDITME’ for details.

   Then, for each lookup module to be loaded dynamically, define the
relevant ‘LOOKUP_’<_lookup_type_> flags to have the value "2" instead of
"yes".  For example, this will build in lsearch but load sqlite and
mysql support only if each is installed:

     LOOKUP_LSEARCH=yes
     LOOKUP_SQLITE=2
     LOOKUP_MYSQL=2

   Set also ‘LOOKUP_’<_lookup_type_>‘ INCLUDE’ and
‘LOOKUP_’<_lookup_type_>‘_LIBS if needed for each lookup type, ensuring
that duplicates are not present in more global values.

   Similarly, authenticator, router and transport drivers can be built
as external modules.  Modules will be searched for as demanded by the
runtime configuration, permitting a smaller Exim binary.

   For building, as above but using ‘AUTH_*’, ‘ROUTER_*’ and
‘TRANSPORT_*’ instead of ‘LOOKUP_*’,

   Detail for each module type is given in the EDITME file.

   The ‘-bI:modules’ command line option to exim will list the modules
that are installed on a system.


File: spec.info,  Node: The building process,  Next: Output from "make",  Prev: Dynamically loaded module support,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.10 The building process
=========================

Once ‘Local/Makefile’ (and ‘Local/eximon.conf’, if required) have been
created, run _make_ at the top level.  It determines the architecture
and operating system types, and creates a build directory if one does
not exist.  For example, on a Sun system running Solaris 8, the
directory ‘build-SunOS5-5.8-sparc’ is created.  Symbolic links to
relevant source files are installed in the build directory.

   If this is the first time _make_ has been run, it calls a script that
builds a make file inside the build directory, using the configuration
files from the ‘Local’ directory.  The new make file is then passed to
another instance of _make_.  This does the real work, building a number
of utility scripts, and then compiling and linking the binaries for the
Exim monitor (if configured), a number of utility programs, and finally
Exim itself.  The command ‘make makefile’ can be used to force a rebuild
of the make file in the build directory, should this ever be necessary.

   If you have problems building Exim, check for any comments there may
be in the ‘README’ file concerning your operating system, and also take
a look at the FAQ, where some common problems are covered.


File: spec.info,  Node: Output from "make",  Next: Overriding build-time options for Exim,  Prev: The building process,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.11 Output from "make"
=======================

The output produced by the _make_ process for compile lines is often
very unreadable, because these lines can be very long.  For this reason,
the normal output is suppressed by default, and instead output similar
to that which appears when compiling the 2.6 Linux kernel is generated:
just a short line for each module that is being compiled or linked.
However, it is still possible to get the full output, by calling _make_
like this:

     FULLECHO='' make -e

   The value of FULLECHO defaults to "@", the flag character that
suppresses command reflection in _make_.  When you ask for the full
output, it is given in addition to the short output.


File: spec.info,  Node: Overriding build-time options for Exim,  Next: OS-specific header files,  Prev: Output from "make",  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.12 Overriding build-time options for Exim
===========================================

The main make file that is created at the beginning of the building
process consists of the concatenation of a number of files which set
configuration values, followed by a fixed set of _make_ instructions.
If a value is set more than once, the last setting overrides any
previous ones.  This provides a convenient way of overriding defaults.
The files that are concatenated are, in order:

     OS/Makefile-Default
     OS/Makefile-<ostype>
     Local/Makefile
     Local/Makefile-<ostype>
     Local/Makefile-<archtype>
     Local/Makefile-<ostype>-<archtype>
     OS/Makefile-Base

   where <_ostype_> is the operating system type and <_archtype_> is the
architecture type.  ‘Local/Makefile’ is required to exist, and the
building process fails if it is absent.  The other three ‘Local’ files
are optional, and are often not needed.

   The values used for <_ostype_> and <_archtype_> are obtained from
scripts called ‘scripts/os-type’ and ‘scripts/arch-type’ respectively.
If either of the environment variables EXIM_OSTYPE or EXIM_ARCHTYPE is
set, their values are used, thereby providing a means of forcing
particular settings.  Otherwise, the scripts try to get values from the
‘uname’ command.  If this fails, the shell variables OSTYPE and ARCHTYPE
are inspected.  A number of _ad hoc_ transformations are then applied,
to produce the standard names that Exim expects.  You can run these
scripts directly from the shell in order to find out what values are
being used on your system.

   ‘OS/Makefile-Default’ contains comments about the variables that are
set therein.  Some (but not all) are mentioned below.  If there is
something that needs changing, review the contents of this file and the
contents of the make file for your operating system
(‘OS/Makefile-<ostype>’) to see what the default values are.

   If you need to change any of the values that are set in
‘OS/Makefile-Default’ or in ‘OS/Makefile-<ostype>’, or to add any new
definitions, you do not need to change the original files.  Instead, you
should make the changes by putting the new values in an appropriate
‘Local’ file.  For example, when building Exim in many releases of the
Tru64-Unix (formerly Digital UNIX, formerly DEC-OSF1) operating system,
it is necessary to specify that the C compiler is called _cc_ rather
than _gcc_.  Also, the compiler must be called with the option ‘-std1’,
to make it recognize some of the features of Standard C that Exim uses.
(Most other compilers recognize Standard C by default.)  To do this, you
should create a file called ‘Local/Makefile-OSF1’ containing the lines

     CC=cc
     CFLAGS=-std1

   If you are compiling for just one operating system, it may be easier
to put these lines directly into ‘Local/Makefile’.

   Keeping all your local configuration settings separate from the
distributed files makes it easy to transfer them to new versions of Exim
simply by copying the contents of the ‘Local’ directory.

   Exim contains support for doing LDAP, NIS, NIS+, and other kinds of
file lookup, but not all systems have these components installed, so the
default is not to include the relevant code in the binary.  All the
different kinds of file and database lookup that Exim supports are
implemented as separate code modules which are included only if the
relevant compile-time options are set.  In the case of LDAP, NIS, and
NIS+, the settings for ‘Local/Makefile’ are:

     LOOKUP_LDAP=yes
     LOOKUP_NIS=yes
     LOOKUP_NISPLUS=yes

   and similar settings apply to the other lookup types.  They are all
listed in ‘src/EDITME’.  In many cases the relevant include files and
interface libraries need to be installed before compiling Exim.
However, there are some optional lookup types (such as cdb) for which
the code is entirely contained within Exim, and no external include
files or libraries are required.  When a lookup type is not included in
the binary, attempts to configure Exim to use it cause runtime
configuration errors.

   Many systems now use a tool called _pkg-config_ to encapsulate
information about how to compile against a library; Exim has some
initial support for being able to use pkg-config for lookups and
authenticators.  For any given makefile variable which starts ‘LOOKUP_’
or ‘AUTH_’, you can add a new variable with the ‘_PC’ suffix in the name
and assign as the value the name of the package to be queried.  The
results of querying via the _pkg-config_ command will be added to the
appropriate Makefile variables with ‘+=’ directives, so your version of
_make_ will need to support that syntax.  For instance:

     LOOKUP_SQLITE=yes
     LOOKUP_SQLITE_PC=sqlite3
     AUTH_GSASL=yes
     AUTH_GSASL_PC=libgsasl
     AUTH_HEIMDAL_GSSAPI=yes
     AUTH_HEIMDAL_GSSAPI_PC=heimdal-gssapi

   Exim can be linked with an embedded Perl interpreter, allowing Perl
subroutines to be called during string expansion.  To enable this
facility,

     EXIM_PERL=perl.o

   must be defined in ‘Local/Makefile’.  Details of this facility are
given in chapter *note Embedded Perl::.

   The location of the X11 libraries is something that varies a lot
between operating systems, and there may be different versions of X11 to
cope with.  Exim itself makes no use of X11, but if you are compiling
the Exim monitor, the X11 libraries must be available.  The following
three variables are set in ‘OS/Makefile-Default’:

     X11=/usr/X11R6
     XINCLUDE=-I$(X11)/include
     XLFLAGS=-L$(X11)/lib

   These are overridden in some of the operating-system configuration
files.  For example, in ‘OS/Makefile-SunOS5’ there is

     X11=/usr/openwin
     XINCLUDE=-I$(X11)/include
     XLFLAGS=-L$(X11)/lib -R$(X11)/lib

   If you need to override the default setting for your operating
system, place a definition of all three of these variables into your
‘Local/Makefile-<ostype>’ file.

   If you need to add any extra libraries to the link steps, these can
be put in a variable called EXTRALIBS, which appears in all the link
commands, but by default is not defined.  In contrast, EXTRALIBS_EXIM is
used only on the command for linking the main Exim binary, and not for
any associated utilities.

   There is also DBMLIB, which appears in the link commands for binaries
that use DBM functions (see also section *note DBM libraries::).
Finally, there is EXTRALIBS_EXIMON, which appears only in the link step
for the Exim monitor binary, and which can be used, for example, to
include additional X11 libraries.

   The make file copes with rebuilding Exim correctly if any of the
configuration files are edited.  However, if an optional configuration
file is deleted, it is necessary to touch the associated non-optional
file (that is, ‘Local/Makefile’ or ‘Local/eximon.conf’) before
rebuilding.


File: spec.info,  Node: OS-specific header files,  Next: Overriding build-time options for the monitor,  Prev: Overriding build-time options for Exim,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.13 OS-specific header files
=============================

The ‘OS’ directory contains a number of files with names of the form
‘os.h-<ostype>’.  These are system-specific C header files that should
not normally need to be changed.  There is a list of macro settings that
are recognized in the file ‘OS/os.configuring’, which should be
consulted if you are porting Exim to a new operating system.


File: spec.info,  Node: Overriding build-time options for the monitor,  Next: Installing Exim binaries and scripts,  Prev: OS-specific header files,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.14 Overriding build-time options for the monitor
==================================================

A similar process is used for overriding things when building the Exim
monitor, where the files that are involved are

     OS/eximon.conf-Default
     OS/eximon.conf-<ostype>
     Local/eximon.conf
     Local/eximon.conf-<ostype>
     Local/eximon.conf-<archtype>
     Local/eximon.conf-<ostype>-<archtype>

   As with Exim itself, the final three files need not exist, and in
this case the ‘OS/eximon.conf-<ostype>’ file is also optional.  The
default values in ‘OS/eximon.conf-Default’ can be overridden dynamically
by setting environment variables of the same name, preceded by EXIMON_.
For example, setting EXIMON_LOG_DEPTH in the environment overrides the
value of LOG_DEPTH at runtime.


File: spec.info,  Node: Installing Exim binaries and scripts,  Next: Installing info documentation,  Prev: Overriding build-time options for the monitor,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.15 Installing Exim binaries and scripts
=========================================

The command ‘make install’ runs the ‘exim_install’ script with no
arguments.  The script copies binaries and utility scripts into the
directory whose name is specified by the BIN_DIRECTORY setting in
‘Local/Makefile’.  The install script copies files only if they are
newer than the files they are going to replace.  The Exim binary is
required to be owned by root and have the _setuid_ bit set, for normal
configurations.  Therefore, you must run ‘make install’ as root so that
it can set up the Exim binary in this way.  However, in some special
situations (for example, if a host is doing no local deliveries) it may
be possible to run Exim without making the binary setuid root (see
chapter *note Security considerations:: for details).

   Exim's runtime configuration file is named by the CONFIGURE_FILE
setting in ‘Local/Makefile’.  If this names a single file, and the file
does not exist, the default configuration file ‘src/configure.default’
is copied there by the installation script.  If a runtime configuration
file already exists, it is left alone.  If CONFIGURE_FILE is a
colon-separated list, naming several alternative files, no default is
installed.

   One change is made to the default configuration file when it is
installed: the default configuration contains a router that references a
system aliases file.  The path to this file is set to the value
specified by SYSTEM_ALIASES_FILE in ‘Local/Makefile’ (‘/etc/aliases’ by
default).  If the system aliases file does not exist, the installation
script creates it, and outputs a comment to the user.

   The created file contains no aliases, but it does contain comments
about the aliases a site should normally have.  Mail aliases have
traditionally been kept in ‘/etc/aliases’.  However, some operating
systems are now using ‘/etc/mail/aliases’.  You should check if yours is
one of these, and change Exim's configuration if necessary.

   The default configuration uses the local host's name as the only
local domain, and is set up to do local deliveries into the shared
directory ‘/var/mail’, running as the local user.  System aliases and
‘.forward’ files in users' home directories are supported, but no NIS or
NIS+ support is configured.  Domains other than the name of the local
host are routed using the DNS, with delivery over SMTP.

   It is possible to install Exim for special purposes (such as building
a binary distribution) in a private part of the file system.  You can do
this by a command such as

     make DESTDIR=/some/directory/ install

   This has the effect of pre-pending the specified directory to all the
file paths, except the name of the system aliases file that appears in
the default configuration.  (If a default alias file is created, its
name _is_ modified.)  For backwards compatibility, ROOT is used if
DESTDIR is not set, but this usage is deprecated.

   Running _make install_ does not copy the Exim 4 conversion script
_convert4r4_.  You will probably run this only once if you are upgrading
from Exim 3.  None of the documentation files in the ‘doc’ directory are
copied, except for the info files when you have set INFO_DIRECTORY, as
described in section *note Installing info documentation:: below.

   For the utility programs, old versions are renamed by adding the
suffix ‘.O’ to their names.  The Exim binary itself, however, is handled
differently.  It is installed under a name that includes the version
number and the compile number, for example, ‘exim-4.100-RC3-1’.  The
script then arranges for a symbolic link called ‘exim’ to point to the
binary.  If you are updating a previous version of Exim, the script
takes care to ensure that the name ‘exim’ is never absent from the
directory (as seen by other processes).

   If you want to see what the _make install_ will do before running it
for real, you can pass the ‘-n’ option to the installation script by
this command:

     make INSTALL_ARG=-n install

   The contents of the variable INSTALL_ARG are passed to the
installation script.  You do not need to be root to run this test.
Alternatively, you can run the installation script directly, but this
must be from within the build directory.  For example, from the
top-level Exim directory you could use this command:

     (cd build-SunOS5-5.5.1-sparc; ../scripts/exim_install -n)

   There are two other options that can be supplied to the installation
script.

   • ‘-no_chown’ bypasses the call to change the owner of the installed
     binary to root, and the call to make it a setuid binary.

   • ‘-no_symlink’ bypasses the setting up of the symbolic link ‘exim’
     to the installed binary.

   INSTALL_ARG can be used to pass these options to the script.  For
example:

     make INSTALL_ARG=-no_symlink install

   The installation script can also be given arguments specifying which
files are to be copied.  For example, to install just the Exim binary,
and nothing else, without creating the symbolic link, you could use:

     make INSTALL_ARG='-no_symlink exim' install


File: spec.info,  Node: Installing info documentation,  Next: Setting up the spool directory,  Prev: Installing Exim binaries and scripts,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.16 Installing info documentation
==================================

The GNU _info_ system for documentation has fallen out of support from
the Exim maintainers.  There are traces of the build still present in
the documentation source directory for interested parties.


File: spec.info,  Node: Setting up the spool directory,  Next: Testing,  Prev: Installing info documentation,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.17 Setting up the spool directory
===================================

When it starts up, Exim tries to create its spool directory if it does
not exist.  The Exim uid and gid are used for the owner and group of the
spool directory.  Sub-directories are automatically created in the spool
directory as necessary.


File: spec.info,  Node: Testing,  Next: Replacing another MTA with Exim,  Prev: Setting up the spool directory,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.18 Testing
============

Having installed Exim, you can check that the runtime configuration file
is syntactically valid by running the following command, which assumes
that the Exim binary directory is within your PATH environment variable:

     exim -bV

   If there are any errors in the configuration file, Exim outputs error
messages.  Otherwise it outputs the version number and build date, the
DBM library that is being used, and information about which drivers and
other optional code modules are included in the binary.  Some simple
routing tests can be done by using the address testing option.  For
example,

     exim -bt <local username>

   should verify that it recognizes a local mailbox, and

     exim -bt <remote address>

   a remote one.  Then try getting it to deliver mail, both locally and
remotely.  This can be done by passing messages directly to Exim,
without going through a user agent.  For example:

     exim -v postmaster@your.domain.example
     From: user@your.domain.example
     To: postmaster@your.domain.example
     Subject: Testing Exim

     This is a test message.
     ^D

   The ‘-v’ option causes Exim to output some verification of what it is
doing.  In this case you should see copies of three log lines, one for
the message's arrival, one for its delivery, and one containing
"Completed".

   If you encounter problems, look at Exim's log files (_mainlog_ and
_paniclog_) to see if there is any relevant information there.  Another
source of information is running Exim with debugging turned on, by
specifying the ‘-d’ option.  If a message is stuck on Exim's spool, you
can force a delivery with debugging turned on by a command of the form

     exim -d -M <exim-message-id>

   You must be root or an "admin user" in order to do this.  The ‘-d’
option produces rather a lot of output, but you can cut this down to
specific areas.  For example, if you use ‘-d-all+route’ only the
debugging information relevant to routing is included.  (See the ‘-d’
option in chapter *note The Exim command line:: for more details.)

   One specific problem that has shown up on some sites is the inability
to do local deliveries into a shared mailbox directory, because it does
not have the "sticky bit" set on it.  By default, Exim tries to create a
lock file before writing to a mailbox file, and if it cannot create the
lock file, the delivery is deferred.  You can get round this either by
setting the "sticky bit" on the directory, or by setting a specific
group for local deliveries and allowing that group to create files in
the directory (see the comments above the ‘local_delivery’ transport in
the default configuration file).  Another approach is to configure Exim
not to use lock files, but just to rely on ‘fcntl()’ locking instead.
However, you should do this only if all user agents also use ‘fcntl()’
locking.  For further discussion of locking issues, see chapter *note
The appendfile transport::.

   One thing that cannot be tested on a system that is already running
an MTA is the receipt of incoming SMTP mail on the standard SMTP port.
However, the ‘-oX’ option can be used to run an Exim daemon that listens
on some other port, or _inetd_ can be used to do this.  The ‘-bh’ option
and the _exim_checkaccess_ utility can be used to check out policy
controls on incoming SMTP mail.

   Testing a new version on a system that is already running Exim can
most easily be done by building a binary with a different CONFIGURE_FILE
setting.  From within the runtime configuration, all other file and
directory names that Exim uses can be altered, in order to keep it
entirely clear of the production version.


File: spec.info,  Node: Replacing another MTA with Exim,  Next: Running the daemon,  Prev: Testing,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.19 Replacing another MTA with Exim
====================================

Building and installing Exim for the first time does not of itself put
it in general use.  The name by which the system's MTA is called by mail
user agents is either ‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’, or ‘/usr/lib/sendmail’
(depending on the operating system), and it is necessary to make this
name point to the _exim_ binary in order to get the user agents to pass
messages to Exim.  This is normally done by renaming any existing file
and making ‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’ or ‘/usr/lib/sendmail’ a symbolic link
to the _exim_ binary.  It is a good idea to remove any setuid privilege
and executable status from the old MTA. It is then necessary to stop and
restart the mailer daemon, if one is running.

   Some operating systems have introduced alternative ways of switching
MTAs.  For example, if you are running FreeBSD, you need to edit the
file ‘/etc/mail/mailer.conf’ instead of setting up a symbolic link as
just described.  A typical example of the contents of this file for
running Exim is as follows:

     sendmail            /usr/exim/bin/exim
     send-mail           /usr/exim/bin/exim
     mailq               /usr/exim/bin/exim -bp
     newaliases          /usr/bin/true

   Once you have set up the symbolic link, or edited
‘/etc/mail/mailer.conf’, your Exim installation is "live".  Check it by
sending a message from your favourite user agent.

   You should consider what to tell your users about the change of MTA.
Exim may have different capabilities to what was previously running, and
there are various operational differences such as the text of messages
produced by command line options and in bounce messages.  If you allow
your users to make use of Exim's filtering capabilities, you should make
the document entitled _Exim's interface to mail filtering_ available to
them.


File: spec.info,  Node: Running the daemon,  Next: Upgrading Exim,  Prev: Replacing another MTA with Exim,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.20 Running the daemon
=======================

The most common command line for launching the Exim daemon looks like

     exim -bd -q5m

   This starts a daemon which

   • listens for incoming smtp connections, launching handler processes
     for each new one

   • starts a queue-runner process every five minutes, to inspect queued
     messages and run delivery attempts on any that have arrived at
     their retry time

   Should a queue run take longer than the time between queue-runner
starts, they will run in parallel.  Numbers of jobs of the various types
are subject to policy controls defined in the configuration.


File: spec.info,  Node: Upgrading Exim,  Next: Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris,  Prev: Running the daemon,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.21 Upgrading Exim
===================

If you are already running Exim on your host, building and installing a
new version automatically makes it available to MUAs, or any other
programs that call the MTA directly.  However, if you are running an
Exim daemon, you do need to send it a HUP signal, to make it re-execute
itself, and thereby pick up the new binary.  You do not need to stop
processing mail in order to install a new version of Exim.  The install
script does not modify an existing runtime configuration file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris,  Prev: Upgrading Exim,  Up: Building and installing Exim

4.22 Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris
========================================

The standard command for stopping the mailer daemon on Solaris is

     /etc/init.d/sendmail stop

   If ‘/usr/lib/sendmail’ has been turned into a symbolic link, this
script fails to stop Exim because it uses the command _ps -e_ and greps
the output for the text "sendmail"; this is not present because the
actual program name (that is, "exim") is given by the _ps_ command with
these options.  A solution is to replace the line that finds the process
id with something like

     pid=`cat /var/spool/exim/exim-daemon.pid`

   to obtain the daemon's pid directly from the file that Exim saves it
in.

   Note, however, that stopping the daemon does not "stop Exim".
Messages can still be received from local processes, and if automatic
delivery is configured (the normal case), deliveries will still occur.


File: spec.info,  Node: The Exim command line,  Next: The runtime configuration file,  Prev: Building and installing Exim,  Up: Top

5 The Exim command line
***********************

Exim's command line takes the standard Unix form of a sequence of
options, each starting with a hyphen character, followed by a number of
arguments.  The options are compatible with the main options of
Sendmail, and there are also some additional options, some of which are
compatible with Smail 3.  Certain combinations of options do not make
sense, and provoke an error if used.  The form of the arguments depends
on which options are set.

* Menu:

* Setting options by program name::
* Trusted and admin users::
* Command line options::


File: spec.info,  Node: Setting options by program name,  Next: Trusted and admin users,  Up: The Exim command line

5.1 Setting options by program name
===================================

If Exim is called under the name _mailq_, it behaves as if the option
‘-bp’ were present before any other options.  The ‘-bp’ option requests
a listing of the contents of the mail queue on the standard output.
This feature is for compatibility with some systems that contain a
command of that name in one of the standard libraries, symbolically
linked to ‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’ or ‘/usr/lib/sendmail’.

   If Exim is called under the name _rsmtp_ it behaves as if the option
‘-bS’ were present before any other options, for compatibility with
Smail.  The ‘-bS’ option is used for reading in a number of messages in
batched SMTP format.

   If Exim is called under the name _rmail_ it behaves as if the ‘-i’
and ‘-oee’ options were present before any other options, for
compatibility with Smail.  The name _rmail_ is used as an interface by
some UUCP systems.

   If Exim is called under the name _runq_ it behaves as if the option
‘-q’ were present before any other options, for compatibility with
Smail.  The ‘-q’ option causes a single queue runner process to be
started.

   If Exim is called under the name _newaliases_ it behaves as if the
option ‘-bi’ were present before any other options, for compatibility
with Sendmail.  This option is used for rebuilding Sendmail's alias
file.  Exim does not have the concept of a single alias file, but can be
configured to run a given command if called with the ‘-bi’ option.


File: spec.info,  Node: Trusted and admin users,  Next: Command line options,  Prev: Setting options by program name,  Up: The Exim command line

5.2 Trusted and admin users
===========================

Some Exim options are available only to _trusted users_ and others are
available only to _admin users_.  In the description below, the phrases
"Exim user" and "Exim group" mean the user and group defined by
EXIM_USER and EXIM_GROUP in ‘Local/Makefile’ or set by the ‘exim_user’
and ‘exim_group’ options.  These do not necessarily have to use the name
"exim".

   • The trusted users are root, the Exim user, any user listed in the
     ‘trusted_users’ configuration option, and any user whose current
     group or any supplementary group is one of those listed in the
     ‘trusted_groups’ configuration option.  Note that the Exim group is
     not automatically trusted.

     Trusted users are always permitted to use the ‘-f’ option or a
     leading "From " line to specify the envelope sender of a message
     that is passed to Exim through the local interface (see the ‘-bm’
     and ‘-f’ options below).  See the ‘untrusted_set_sender’ option for
     a way of permitting non-trusted users to set envelope senders.

     For a trusted user, there is never any check on the contents of the
     _From:_ header line, and a _Sender:_ line is never added.
     Furthermore, any existing _Sender:_ line in incoming local
     (non-TCP/IP) messages is not removed.

     Trusted users may also specify a host name, host address, interface
     address, protocol name, ident value, and authentication data when
     submitting a message locally.  Thus, they are able to insert
     messages into Exim's queue locally that have the characteristics of
     messages received from a remote host.  Untrusted users may in some
     circumstances use ‘-f’, but can never set the other values that are
     available to trusted users.

   • The admin users are root, the Exim user, and any user that is a
     member of the Exim group or of any group listed in the
     ‘admin_groups’ configuration option.  The current group does not
     have to be one of these groups.

     Admin users are permitted to list the queue, and to carry out
     certain operations on messages, for example, to force delivery
     failures.  It is also necessary to be an admin user in order to see
     the full information provided by the Exim monitor, and full
     debugging output.

     By default, the use of the ‘-M’, ‘-q’, ‘-R’, and ‘-S’ options to
     cause Exim to attempt delivery of messages on its queue is
     restricted to admin users.  However, this restriction can be
     relaxed by setting the ‘prod_requires_admin’ option false (that is,
     specifying ‘no_prod_requires_admin’).

     Similarly, the use of the ‘-bp’ option to list all the messages in
     the queue is restricted to admin users unless
     ‘queue_list_requires_admin’ is set false.

   *Warning*: If you configure your system so that admin users are able
to edit Exim's configuration file, you are giving those users an easy
way of getting root.  There is further discussion of this issue at the
start of chapter *note The Exim runtime configuration file: The runtime
configuration file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Command line options,  Prev: Trusted and admin users,  Up: The Exim command line

5.3 Command line options
========================

Exim's command line options are described in alphabetical order below.
If none of the options that specifies a specific action (such as
starting the daemon or a queue runner, or testing an address, or
receiving a message in a specific format, or listing the queue) are
present, and there is at least one argument on the command line, ‘-bm’
(accept a local message on the standard input, with the arguments
specifying the recipients) is assumed.  Otherwise, Exim outputs a brief
message about itself and exits.

‘--’ -
     This is a pseudo-option whose only purpose is to terminate the
     options and therefore to cause subsequent command line items to be
     treated as arguments rather than options, even if they begin with
     hyphens.

‘--help’
     This option causes Exim to output a few sentences stating what it
     is.  The same output is generated if the Exim binary is called with
     no options and no arguments.

‘--version’
     This option is an alias for ‘-bV’ and causes version information to
     be displayed.

‘-Ac’
‘-Am’
     These options are used by Sendmail for selecting configuration
     files and are ignored by Exim.

‘-atrn’ <_host_>
     This option requests an ODMR customer connection.  See *note ODMR
     customer connection:: for details.

‘-B’ <_type_>
     This is a Sendmail option for selecting 7 or 8 bit processing.
     Exim is 8-bit clean; it ignores this option.

‘-bd’
     This option runs Exim as a daemon, awaiting incoming SMTP
     connections.  Usually the ‘-bd’ option is combined with the
     ‘-q’<_time_> option, to specify that the daemon should also
     initiate periodic queue runs.

     The ‘-bd’ option can be used only by an admin user.  If either of
     the ‘-d’ (debugging) or ‘-v’ (verifying) options are set, the
     daemon does not disconnect from the controlling terminal.  When
     running this way, it can be stopped by pressing ctrl-C.

     By default, Exim listens for incoming connections to the standard
     SMTP port on all the host's running interfaces.  However, it is
     possible to listen on other ports, on multiple ports, and only on
     specific interfaces.  Chapter *note Starting the daemon and the use
     of network interfaces: Starting the daemon. contains a description
     of the options that control this.

     When a listening daemon is started without the use of ‘-oX’ (that
     is, without overriding the normal configuration), it writes its
     process id to a file called ‘exim-daemon.pid’ in Exim's spool
     directory.  This location can be overridden by setting
     PID_FILE_PATH in ‘Local/Makefile’.  The file is written while Exim
     is still running as root.

     When ‘-oX’ is used on the command line to start a listening daemon,
     the process id is not written to the normal pid file path.
     However, ‘-oP’ can be used to specify a path on the command line if
     a pid file is required.

     The SIGHUP signal can be used to cause the daemon to re-execute
     itself.  This should be done whenever Exim's configuration file, or
     any file that is incorporated into it by means of the ‘.include’
     facility, is changed, and also whenever a new version of Exim is
     installed.  It is not necessary to do this when other files that
     are referenced from the configuration (for example, alias files)
     are changed, because these are reread each time they are used.

     Either a SIGTERM or a SIGINT signal should be used to cause the
     daemon to cleanly shut down.  Subprocesses handling recceiving or
     delivering messages, or for scanning the queue, will not be
     affected by the termination of the daemon process.

‘-bdf’
     This option has the same effect as ‘-bd’ except that it never
     disconnects from the controlling terminal, even when no debugging
     is specified.

‘-be’
     Run Exim in expansion testing mode.  Exim discards its root
     privilege, to prevent ordinary users from using this mode to read
     otherwise inaccessible files.  If no arguments are given, Exim runs
     interactively, prompting for lines of data.  Otherwise, it
     processes each argument in turn.

     If Exim was built with USE_READLINE=yes in ‘Local/Makefile’, it
     tries to load the ‘libreadline’ library dynamically whenever the
     ‘-be’ option is used without command line arguments.  If
     successful, it uses the ‘readline()’ function, which provides
     extensive line-editing facilities, for reading the test data.  A
     line history is supported.

     Long expansion expressions can be split over several lines by using
     backslash continuations.  As in Exim's runtime configuration, white
     space at the start of continuation lines is ignored.  Each argument
     or data line is passed through the string expansion mechanism, and
     the result is output.  Variable values from the configuration file
     (for example, ‘$qualify_domain’) are available, but no
     message-specific values (such as ‘$message_exim_id’) are set,
     because no message is being processed (but see ‘-bem’ and ‘-Mset’).

     *Note*: If you use this mechanism to test lookups, and you change
     the data files or databases you are using, you must exit and
     restart Exim before trying the same lookup again.  Otherwise,
     because each Exim process caches the results of lookups, you will
     just get the same result as before.

     Macro processing is done on lines before string-expansion: new
     macros can be defined and macros will be expanded.  Because macros
     in the config file are often used for secrets, those are only
     available to admin users.

     The word "set" at the start of a line, followed by a single space,
     is recognised specially as defining a value for a variable.  If the
     sequence ",t" is inserted before the space, the value is marked as
     tainted.  The syntax is otherwise the same as the ACL modifier "set
     =".

‘-bem’ <_filename_>
     This option operates like ‘-be’ except that it must be followed by
     the name of a file.  For example:

          exim -bem /tmp/testmessage

     The file is read as a message (as if receiving a locally-submitted
     non-SMTP message) before any of the test expansions are done.
     Thus, message-specific variables such as ‘$message_size’ and
     ‘$header_from:’ are available.  However, no _Received:_ header is
     added to the message.  If the ‘-t’ option is set, recipients are
     read from the headers in the normal way, and are shown in the
     ‘$recipients’ variable.  Note that recipients cannot be given on
     the command line, because further arguments are taken as strings to
     expand (just like ‘-be’).

‘-bF’ <_filename_>
     This option is the same as ‘-bf’ except that it assumes that the
     filter being tested is a system filter.  The additional commands
     that are available only in system filters are recognized.

‘-bf’ <_filename_>
     This option runs Exim in user filter testing mode; the file is the
     filter file to be tested, and a test message must be supplied on
     the standard input.  If there are no message-dependent tests in the
     filter, an empty file can be supplied.

     If you want to test a system filter file, use ‘-bF’ instead of
     ‘-bf’.  You can use both ‘-bF’ and ‘-bf’ on the same command, in
     order to test a system filter and a user filter in the same run.
     For example:

          exim -bF /system/filter -bf /user/filter </test/message

     This is helpful when the system filter adds header lines or sets
     filter variables that are used by the user filter.

     If the test filter file does not begin with one of the special
     lines

          # Exim filter
          # Sieve filter

     it is taken to be a normal ‘.forward’ file, and is tested for
     validity under that interpretation.  See sections *note Items in a
     non-filter redirection list:: to *note Special items in redirection
     lists:: for a description of the possible contents of non-filter
     redirection lists.

     The result of an Exim command that uses ‘-bf’, provided no errors
     are detected, is a list of the actions that Exim would try to take
     if presented with the message for real.  More details of filter
     testing are given in the separate document entitled _Exim's
     interfaces to mail filtering_.

     When testing a filter file, the envelope sender can be set by the
     ‘-f’ option, or by a "From " line at the start of the test message.
     Various parameters that would normally be taken from the envelope
     recipient address of the message can be set by means of additional
     command line options (see the next four options).

‘-bfd’ <_domain_>
     This sets the domain of the recipient address when a filter file is
     being tested by means of the ‘-bf’ option.  The default is the
     value of ‘$qualify_domain’.

‘-bfl’ <_local part_>
     This sets the local part of the recipient address when a filter
     file is being tested by means of the ‘-bf’ option.  The default is
     the username of the process that calls Exim.  A local part should
     be specified with any prefix or suffix stripped, because that is
     how it appears to the filter when a message is actually being
     delivered.

‘-bfp’ <_prefix_>
     This sets the prefix of the local part of the recipient address
     when a filter file is being tested by means of the ‘-bf’ option.
     The default is an empty prefix.

‘-bfs’ <_suffix_>
     This sets the suffix of the local part of the recipient address
     when a filter file is being tested by means of the ‘-bf’ option.
     The default is an empty suffix.

‘-bh’ <_IP address_>
     This option runs a fake SMTP session as if from the given IP
     address, using the standard input and output.  The IP address may
     include a port number at the end, after a full stop.  For example:

          exim -bh 10.9.8.7.1234
          exim -bh fe80::a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678

     When an IPv6 address is given, it is converted into canonical form.
     In the case of the second example above, the value of
     ‘$sender_host_address’ after conversion to the canonical form is
     ‘fe80:0000:0000:0a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678’.

     Comments as to what is going on are written to the standard error
     file.  These include lines beginning with "LOG" for anything that
     would have been logged.  This facility is provided for testing
     configuration options for incoming messages, to make sure they
     implement the required policy.  For example, you can test your
     relay controls using ‘-bh’.

     *Warning 1*: You can test features of the configuration that rely
     on ident (*RFC 1413
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1413)*) information by
     using the ‘-oMt’ option.  However, Exim cannot actually perform an
     ident callout when testing using ‘-bh’ because there is no incoming
     SMTP connection.

     *Warning 2*: Address verification callouts (see section *note
     Callout verification::) are also skipped when testing using ‘-bh’.
     If you want these callouts to occur, use ‘-bhc’ instead.

     Messages supplied during the testing session are discarded, and
     nothing is written to any of the real log files.  There may be
     pauses when DNS (and other) lookups are taking place, and of course
     these may time out.  The ‘-oMi’ option can be used to specify a
     specific IP interface and port if this is important, and ‘-oMaa’
     and ‘-oMai’ can be used to set parameters as if the SMTP session
     were authenticated.

     The _exim_checkaccess_ utility is a "packaged" version of ‘-bh’
     whose output just states whether a given recipient address from a
     given host is acceptable or not.  See section *note Checking access
     policy (exim_checkaccess): Checking access policy
     [exim_checkaccess].

     Features such as authentication and encryption, where the client
     input is not plain text, cannot easily be tested with ‘-bh’.
     Instead, you should use a specialized SMTP test program such as
     *swaks (https://www.jetmore.org/john/code/swaks/)*.

‘-bhc’ <_IP address_>
     This option operates in the same way as ‘-bh’, except that address
     verification callouts are performed if required.  This includes
     consulting and updating the callout cache database.

‘-bi’
     Sendmail interprets the ‘-bi’ option as a request to rebuild its
     alias file.  Exim does not have the concept of a single alias file,
     and so it cannot mimic this behaviour.  However, calls to
     ‘/usr/lib/sendmail’ with the ‘-bi’ option tend to appear in various
     scripts such as NIS make files, so the option must be recognized.

     If ‘-bi’ is encountered, the command specified by the ‘bi_command’
     configuration option is run, under the uid and gid of the caller of
     Exim.  If the ‘-oA’ option is used, its value is passed to the
     command as an argument.  The command set by ‘bi_command’ may not
     contain arguments.  The command can use the _exim_dbmbuild_
     utility, or some other means, to rebuild alias files if this is
     required.  If the ‘bi_command’ option is not set, calling Exim with
     ‘-bi’ is a no-op.

‘-bI:help’
     We shall provide various options starting ‘-bI:’ for querying Exim
     for information.  The output of many of these will be intended for
     machine consumption.  This one is not.  The ‘-bI:help’ option asks
     Exim for a synopsis of supported options beginning ‘-bI:’.  Use of
     any of these options shall cause Exim to exit after producing the
     requested output.

‘-bI:dscp’
     If Exim was built with DSCP support this option causes Exim to emit
     an alphabetically sorted list of all recognised DSCP names.

‘-bI:modules’
     This option causes Exim to emit a list of dynamic-load modules that
     are installed on the system.

‘-bI:sieve’
     If Exim was built with Sieve support this option causes Exim to
     emit an alphabetically sorted list of all supported Sieve protocol
     extensions on stdout, one per line.  This is anticipated to be
     useful for ManageSieve (*RFC 5804
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc5804)*) implementations,
     in providing that protocol's ‘SIEVE’ capability response line.  As
     the precise list may depend upon compile-time build options, which
     this option will adapt to, this is the only way to guarantee a
     correct response.

‘-bm’
     This option runs an Exim receiving process that accepts an
     incoming, locally-generated message on the standard input.  The
     recipients are given as the command arguments (except when ‘-t’ is
     also present - see below).  Each argument can be a comma-separated
     list of *RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)*
     addresses.  This is the default option for selecting the overall
     action of an Exim call; it is assumed if no other conflicting
     option is present.

     If any addresses in the message are unqualified (have no domain),
     they are qualified by the values of the ‘qualify_domain’ or
     ‘qualify_recipient’ options, as appropriate.  The ‘-bnq’ option
     (see below) provides a way of suppressing this for special cases.

     Policy checks on the contents of local messages can be enforced by
     means of the non-SMTP ACL. See section *note The non-SMTP ACLs::
     for details.

     The return code is zero if the message is successfully accepted.
     Otherwise, the action is controlled by the ‘-oe’_x_ option setting
     - see below.

     The format of the message must be as defined in *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)*, except that, for
     compatibility with Sendmail and Smail, a line in one of the forms

          From sender Fri Jan  5 12:55 GMT 1997
          From sender Fri, 5 Jan 97 12:55:01

     (with the weekday optional, and possibly with additional text after
     the date) is permitted to appear at the start of the message.
     There appears to be no authoritative specification of the format of
     this line.  Exim recognizes it by matching against the regular
     expression defined by the ‘uucp_from_pattern’ option, which can be
     changed if necessary.

     The specified sender is treated as if it were given as the argument
     to the ‘-f’ option, but if a ‘-f’ option is also present, its
     argument is used in preference to the address taken from the
     message.  The caller of Exim must be a trusted user for the sender
     of a message to be set in this way.

‘-bmalware’ <_filename_>
     This debugging option causes Exim to scan the given file or
     directory (depending on the used scanner interface), using the
     malware scanning framework.  The option of ‘av_scanner’ influences
     this option, so if ‘av_scanner’'s value is dependent upon an
     expansion then the expansion should have defaults which apply to
     this invocation.  ACLs are not invoked, so if ‘av_scanner’
     references an ACL variable then that variable will never be
     populated and ‘-bmalware’ will fail.

     Exim will have changed working directory before resolving the
     filename, so using fully qualified pathnames is advisable.  Exim
     will be running as the Exim user when it tries to open the file,
     rather than as the invoking user.  This option requires admin
     privileges.

     The ‘-bmalware’ option will not be extended to be more generally
     useful, there are better tools for file-scanning.  This option
     exists to help administrators verify their Exim and AV scanner
     configuration.

‘-bnq’
     By default, Exim automatically qualifies unqualified addresses
     (those without domains) that appear in messages that are submitted
     locally (that is, not over TCP/IP). This qualification applies both
     to addresses in envelopes, and addresses in header lines.  Sender
     addresses are qualified using ‘qualify_domain’, and recipient
     addresses using ‘qualify_recipient’ (which defaults to the value of
     ‘qualify_domain’).

     Sometimes, qualification is not wanted.  For example, if ‘-bS’
     (batch SMTP) is being used to re-submit messages that originally
     came from remote hosts after content scanning, you probably do not
     want to qualify unqualified addresses in header lines.  (Such lines
     will be present only if you have not enabled a header syntax check
     in the appropriate ACL.)

     The ‘-bnq’ option suppresses all qualification of unqualified
     addresses in messages that originate on the local host.  When this
     is used, unqualified addresses in the envelope provoke errors
     (causing message rejection) and unqualified addresses in header
     lines are left alone.

‘-bP’
     If this option is given with no arguments, it causes the values of
     all Exim's main configuration options to be written to the standard
     output.  The values of one or more specific options can be
     requested by giving their names as arguments, for example:

          exim -bP qualify_domain hold_domains

     However, any option setting that is preceded by the word "hide" in
     the configuration file is not shown in full, except to an admin
     user.  For other users, the output is as in this example:

          mysql_servers = <value not displayable>

     If ‘config’ is given as an argument, the config is output, as it
     was parsed, any include file resolved, any comment removed.

     If ‘config_file’ is given as an argument, the name of the runtime
     configuration file is output.  (‘configure_file’ works too, for
     backward compatibility.)  If a list of configuration files was
     supplied, the value that is output here is the name of the file
     that was actually used.

     If the ‘-n’ flag is given, then for most modes of ‘-bP’ operation
     the name will not be output.

     If ‘log_file_path’ or ‘pid_file_path’ are given, the names of the
     directories where log files and daemon pid files are written are
     output, respectively.  If these values are unset, log files are
     written in a sub-directory of the spool directory called ‘log’, and
     the pid file is written directly into the spool directory.

     If ‘-bP’ is followed by a name preceded by ‘+’, for example,

          exim -bP +local_domains

     it searches for a matching named list of any type (domain, host,
     address, or local part) and outputs what it finds.

     If one of the words ‘router’, ‘transport’, or ‘authenticator’ is
     given, followed by the name of an appropriate driver instance, the
     option settings for that driver are output.  For example:

          exim -bP transport local_delivery

     The generic driver options are output first, followed by the
     driver's private options.  A list of the names of drivers of a
     particular type can be obtained by using one of the words
     ‘router_list’, ‘transport_list’, or ‘authenticator_list’, and a
     complete list of all drivers with their option settings can be
     obtained by using ‘routers’, ‘transports’, or ‘authenticators’.

     If ‘environment’ is given as an argument, the set of environment
     variables is output, line by line.  Using the ‘-n’ flag suppresses
     the value of the variables.

     If invoked by an admin user, then ‘macro’, ‘macro_list’ and
     ‘macros’ are available, similarly to the drivers.  Because macros
     are sometimes used for storing passwords, this option is
     restricted.  The output format is one item per line.  For the "-bP
     macro <name>" form, if no such macro is found the exit status will
     be nonzero.

‘-bp’
     This option requests a listing of the contents of the mail queue on
     the standard output.  If the ‘-bp’ option is followed by a list of
     message ids, just those messages are listed.  By default, this
     option can be used only by an admin user.  However, the
     ‘queue_list_requires_admin’ option can be set false to allow any
     user to see the queue.

     Each message in the queue is displayed as in the following example:

          25m  2.9K 0t5C6f-0000c8-00 <alice@wonderland.fict.example>
                    red.king@looking-glass.fict.example
                    <other addresses>

     The first line contains the length of time the message has been in
     the queue (in this case 25 minutes), the size of the message
     (2.9K), the unique local identifier for the message, and the
     message sender, as contained in the envelope.  For bounce messages,
     the sender address is empty, and appears as "<>".  If the message
     was submitted locally by an untrusted user who overrode the default
     sender address, the user's login name is shown in parentheses
     before the sender address.

     If the message is frozen (attempts to deliver it are suspended)
     then the text "*** frozen ***" is displayed at the end of this
     line.

     The recipients of the message (taken from the envelope, not the
     headers) are displayed on subsequent lines.  Those addresses to
     which the message has already been delivered are marked with the
     letter D. If an original address gets expanded into several
     addresses via an alias or forward file, the original is displayed
     with a D only when deliveries for all of its child addresses are
     complete.

‘-bpa’
     This option operates like ‘-bp’, but in addition it shows delivered
     addresses that were generated from the original top level
     address(es) in each message by alias or forwarding operations.
     These addresses are flagged with "+D" instead of just "D".

‘-bpc’
     This option counts the number of messages in the queue, and writes
     the total to the standard output.  It is restricted to admin users,
     unless ‘queue_list_requires_admin’ is set false.

‘-bpi’
     This option operates like ‘-bp’, but only outputs message ids (one
     per line).

‘-bpr’
     This option operates like ‘-bp’, but the output is not sorted into
     chronological order of message arrival.  This can speed it up when
     there are lots of messages in the queue, and is particularly useful
     if the output is going to be post-processed in a way that doesn't
     need the sorting.

‘-bpra’
     This option is a combination of ‘-bpr’ and ‘-bpa’.

‘-bpri’
     This option is a combination of ‘-bpr’ and ‘-bpi’.

‘-bpru’
     This option is a combination of ‘-bpr’ and ‘-bpu’.

‘-bpu’
     This option operates like ‘-bp’ but shows only undelivered
     top-level addresses for each message displayed.  Addresses
     generated by aliasing or forwarding are not shown, unless the
     message was deferred after processing by a router with the
     ‘one_time’ option set.

‘-brt’
     This option is for testing retry rules, and it must be followed by
     up to three arguments.  It causes Exim to look for a retry rule
     that matches the values and to write it to the standard output.
     For example:

          exim -brt bach.comp.mus.example
          Retry rule: *.comp.mus.example  F,2h,15m; F,4d,30m;

     See chapter *note Retry configuration:: for a description of Exim's
     retry rules.  The first argument, which is required, can be a
     complete address in the form _local_part@domain_, or it can be just
     a domain name.  If the second argument contains a dot, it is
     interpreted as an optional second domain name; if no retry rule is
     found for the first argument, the second is tried.  This ties in
     with Exim's behaviour when looking for retry rules for remote hosts
     - if no rule is found that matches the host, one that matches the
     mail domain is sought.  Finally, an argument that is the name of a
     specific delivery error, as used in setting up retry rules, can be
     given.  For example:

          exim -brt haydn.comp.mus.example quota_3d
          Retry rule: *@haydn.comp.mus.example quota_3d  F,1h,15m

‘-brw’
     This option is for testing address rewriting rules, and it must be
     followed by a single argument, consisting of either a local part
     without a domain, or a complete address with a fully qualified
     domain.  Exim outputs how this address would be rewritten for each
     possible place it might appear.  See chapter *note Address
     rewriting:: for further details.

‘-bS’
     This option is used for batched SMTP input, which is an alternative
     interface for non-interactive local message submission.  A number
     of messages can be submitted in a single run.  However, despite its
     name, this is not really SMTP input.  Exim reads each message's
     envelope from SMTP commands on the standard input, but generates no
     responses.  If the caller is trusted, or ‘untrusted_set_sender’ is
     set, the senders in the SMTP MAIL commands are believed; otherwise
     the sender is always the caller of Exim.

     The message itself is read from the standard input, in SMTP format
     (leading dots doubled), terminated by a line containing just a
     single dot.  An error is provoked if the terminating dot is
     missing.  A further message may then follow.

     As for other local message submissions, the contents of incoming
     batch SMTP messages can be checked using the non-SMTP ACL (see
     section *note The non-SMTP ACLs::).  Unqualified addresses are
     automatically qualified using ‘qualify_domain’ and
     ‘qualify_recipient’, as appropriate, unless the ‘-bnq’ option is
     used.

     Some other SMTP commands are recognized in the input.  HELO and
     EHLO act as RSET; VRFY, EXPN, ETRN, ATRN, and HELP act as NOOP;
     QUIT quits, ignoring the rest of the standard input.

     If any error is encountered, reports are written to the standard
     output and error streams, and Exim gives up immediately.  The
     return code is 0 if no error was detected; it is 1 if one or more
     messages were accepted before the error was detected; otherwise it
     is 2.

     More details of input using batched SMTP are given in section *note
     Incoming batched SMTP::.

‘-bs’
     This option causes Exim to accept one or more messages by reading
     SMTP commands on the standard input, and producing SMTP replies on
     the standard output.  SMTP policy controls, as defined in ACLs (see
     chapter *note Access control lists::) are applied.  Some user
     agents use this interface as a way of passing locally-generated
     messages to the MTA.

     In this usage, if the caller of Exim is trusted, or
     ‘untrusted_set_sender’ is set, the senders of messages are taken
     from the SMTP MAIL commands.  Otherwise the content of these
     commands is ignored and the sender is set up as the calling user.
     Unqualified addresses are automatically qualified using
     ‘qualify_domain’ and ‘qualify_recipient’, as appropriate, unless
     the ‘-bnq’ option is used.

     The ‘-bs’ option is also used to run Exim from _inetd_, as an
     alternative to using a listening daemon.  Exim can distinguish the
     two cases by checking whether the standard input is a TCP/IP
     socket.  When Exim is called from _inetd_, the source of the mail
     is assumed to be remote, and the comments above concerning senders
     and qualification do not apply.  In this situation, Exim behaves in
     exactly the same way as it does when receiving a message via the
     listening daemon.

‘-bt’
     This option runs Exim in address testing mode, in which each
     argument is taken as a recipient address to be tested for
     deliverability.  The results are written to the standard output.
     If a test fails, and the caller is not an admin user, no details of
     the failure are output, because these might contain sensitive
     information such as usernames and passwords for database lookups.

     If no arguments are given, Exim runs in an interactive manner,
     prompting with a right angle bracket for addresses to be tested.

     Unlike the ‘-be’ test option, you cannot arrange for Exim to use
     the ‘readline()’ function, because it is running as _root_ and
     there are security issues.

     Each address is handled as if it were the recipient address of a
     message (compare the ‘-bv’ option).  It is passed to the routers
     and the result is written to the standard output.  However, any
     router that has ‘no_address_test’ set is bypassed.  This can make
     ‘-bt’ easier to use for genuine routing tests if your first router
     passes everything to a scanner program.

     The return code is 2 if any address failed outright; it is 1 if no
     address failed outright but at least one could not be resolved for
     some reason.  Return code 0 is given only when all addresses
     succeed.

     *Note*: When actually delivering a message, Exim removes duplicate
     recipient addresses after routing is complete, so that only one
     delivery takes place.  This does not happen when testing with
     ‘-bt’; the full results of routing are always shown.

     *Warning*: ‘-bt’ can only do relatively simple testing.  If any of
     the routers in the configuration makes any tests on the sender
     address of a message, you can use the ‘-f’ option to set an
     appropriate sender when running ‘-bt’ tests.  Without it, the
     sender is assumed to be the calling user at the default qualifying
     domain.  However, if you have set up (for example) routers whose
     behaviour depends on the contents of an incoming message, you
     cannot test those conditions using ‘-bt’.  The ‘-N’ option provides
     a possible way of doing such tests.

‘-bV’
     This option causes Exim to write the current version number,
     compilation number, and compilation date of the _exim_ binary to
     the standard output.  It also lists the DBM library that is being
     used, the optional modules (such as specific lookup types), the
     drivers that are included in the binary, and the name of the
     runtime configuration file that is in use.

     As part of its operation, ‘-bV’ causes Exim to read and syntax
     check its configuration file.  However, this is a static check
     only.  It cannot check values that are to be expanded.  For
     example, although a misspelt ACL verb is detected, an error in the
     verb's arguments is not.  You cannot rely on ‘-bV’ alone to
     discover (for example) all the typos in the configuration; some
     realistic testing is needed.  The ‘-bh’ and ‘-N’ options provide
     more dynamic testing facilities.

‘-bv’
     This option runs Exim in address verification mode, in which each
     argument is taken as a recipient address to be verified by the
     routers.  (This does not involve any verification callouts).
     During normal operation, verification happens mostly as a
     consequence processing a ‘verify’ condition in an ACL (see chapter
     *note Access control lists::).  If you want to test an entire ACL,
     possibly including callouts, see the ‘-bh’ and ‘-bhc’ options.

     If verification fails, and the caller is not an admin user, no
     details of the failure are output, because these might contain
     sensitive information such as usernames and passwords for database
     lookups.

     If no arguments are given, Exim runs in an interactive manner,
     prompting with a right angle bracket for addresses to be verified.

     Unlike the ‘-be’ test option, you cannot arrange for Exim to use
     the ‘readline()’ function, because it is running as _exim_ and
     there are security issues.

     Verification differs from address testing (the ‘-bt’ option) in
     that routers that have ‘no_verify’ set are skipped, and if the
     address is accepted by a router that has ‘fail_verify’ set,
     verification fails.  The address is verified as a recipient if
     ‘-bv’ is used; to test verification for a sender address, ‘-bvs’
     should be used.

     If the ‘-v’ option is not set, the output consists of a single line
     for each address, stating whether it was verified or not, and
     giving a reason in the latter case.  Without ‘-v’, generating more
     than one address by redirection causes verification to end
     successfully, without considering the generated addresses.
     However, if just one address is generated, processing continues,
     and the generated address must verify successfully for the overall
     verification to succeed.

     When ‘-v’ is set, more details are given of how the address has
     been handled, and in the case of address redirection, all the
     generated addresses are also considered.  Verification may succeed
     for some and fail for others.

     The return code is 2 if any address failed outright; it is 1 if no
     address failed outright but at least one could not be resolved for
     some reason.  Return code 0 is given only when all addresses
     succeed.

     If any of the routers in the configuration makes any tests on the
     sender address of a message, you should use the ‘-f’ option to set
     an appropriate sender when running ‘-bv’ tests.  Without it, the
     sender is assumed to be the calling user at the default qualifying
     domain.

‘-bvs’
     This option acts like ‘-bv’, but verifies the address as a sender
     rather than a recipient address.  This affects any rewriting and
     qualification that might happen.

‘-bw’
     This option runs Exim as a daemon, awaiting incoming SMTP
     connections, similarly to the ‘-bd’ option.  All port
     specifications on the command-line and in the configuration file
     are ignored.  Queue-running may not be specified.

     In this mode, Exim expects to be passed a socket as fd 0 (stdin)
     which is listening for connections.  This permits the system to
     start up and have inetd (or equivalent) listen on the SMTP ports,
     starting an Exim daemon for each port only when the first
     connection is received.

     If the option is given as ‘-bw’<_time_> then the time is a timeout,
     after which the daemon will exit, which should cause inetd to
     listen once more.

‘-C’ <_filelist_>
     This option causes Exim to find the runtime configuration file from
     the given list instead of from the list specified by the
     CONFIGURE_FILE compile-time setting.  Usually, the list will
     consist of just a single filename, but it can be a colon-separated
     list of names.  In this case, the first file that exists is used.
     Failure to open an existing file stops Exim from proceeding any
     further along the list, and an error is generated.

     When this option is used by a caller other than root, and the list
     is different from the compiled-in list, Exim gives up its root
     privilege immediately, and runs with the real and effective uid and
     gid set to those of the caller.  However, if a TRUSTED_CONFIG_LIST
     file is defined in ‘Local/Makefile’, that file contains a list of
     full pathnames, one per line, for configuration files which are
     trusted.  Root privilege is retained for any configuration file so
     listed, as long as the caller is the Exim user (or the user
     specified in the CONFIGURE_OWNER option, if any), and as long as
     the configuration file is not writeable by inappropriate users or
     groups.

     Leaving TRUSTED_CONFIG_LIST unset precludes the possibility of
     testing a configuration using ‘-C’ right through message reception
     and delivery, even if the caller is root.  The reception works, but
     by that time, Exim is running as the Exim user, so when it
     re-executes to regain privilege for the delivery, the use of ‘-C’
     causes privilege to be lost.  However, root can test reception and
     delivery using two separate commands (one to put a message in the
     queue, using ‘-odq’, and another to do the delivery, using ‘-M’).

     If ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX is defined ‘in Local/Makefile’, it specifies a
     prefix string with which any file named in a ‘-C’ command line
     option must start.  In addition, the filename must not contain the
     sequence ‘/../’.  However, if the value of the ‘-C’ option is
     identical to the value of CONFIGURE_FILE in ‘Local/Makefile’, Exim
     ignores ‘-C’ and proceeds as usual.  There is no default setting
     for ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX; when it is unset, any filename can be used
     with ‘-C’.

     ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX can be used to confine alternative configuration
     files to a directory to which only root has access.  This prevents
     someone who has broken into the Exim account from running a
     privileged Exim with an arbitrary configuration file.

     The ‘-C’ facility is useful for ensuring that configuration files
     are syntactically correct, but cannot be used for test deliveries,
     unless the caller is privileged, or unless it is an exotic
     configuration that does not require privilege.  No check is made on
     the owner or group of the files specified by this option.

‘-D’<_macro_>=<_value_>
     This option can be used to override macro definitions in the
     configuration file (see section *note Macros in the configuration
     file::).  However, like ‘-C’, if it is used by an unprivileged
     caller, it causes Exim to give up its root privilege.  If
     DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in ‘Local/Makefile’, the use of ‘-D’ is
     completely disabled, and its use causes an immediate error exit.

     If WHITELIST_D_MACROS is defined in ‘Local/Makefile’ then it should
     be a colon-separated list of macros which are considered safe and,
     if ‘-D’ only supplies macros from this list, and the values are
     acceptable, then Exim will not give up root privilege if the caller
     is root, the Exim run-time user, or the CONFIGURE_OWNER, if set.
     This is a transition mechanism and is expected to be removed in the
     future.  Acceptable values for the macros satisfy the regexp:
     ‘^[A-Za-z0-9_/.-]*$’

     The entire option (including equals sign if present) must all be
     within one command line item.  ‘-D’ can be used to set the value of
     a macro to the empty string, in which case the equals sign is
     optional.  These two commands are synonymous:

          exim -DABC  ...
          exim -DABC= ...

     To include spaces in a macro definition item, quotes must be used.
     If you use quotes, spaces are permitted around the macro name and
     the equals sign.  For example:

          exim '-D ABC = something' ...

     ‘-D’ may be repeated up to 10 times on a command line.  Only macro
     names up to 22 letters long can be set.

‘-d’<_debug options_>
     This option causes debugging information to be written to the
     standard error stream.  It is restricted to admin users because
     debugging output may show database queries that contain password
     information.  Also, the details of users' filter files should be
     protected.  If a non-admin user uses ‘-d’, Exim writes an error
     message to the standard error stream and exits with a non-zero
     return code.

     When ‘-d’ is used, ‘-v’ is assumed.  If ‘-d’ is given on its own, a
     lot of standard debugging data is output.  This can be reduced, or
     increased to include some more rarely needed information, by
     directly following ‘-d’ with a string made up of names preceded by
     plus or minus characters.  These add or remove sets of debugging
     data, respectively.  For example, ‘-d+filter’ adds filter
     debugging, whereas ‘-d-all+filter’ selects only filter debugging.
     Note that no spaces are allowed in the debug setting.  The
     available debugging categories are:

         acl        ACL interpretation
         auth       authenticators
         deliver    general delivery logic
         dns        DNS lookups (see also resolver)
         dnsbl      DNS black list (aka RBL) code
         exec       arguments for ‘execv()’ calls
         expand     detailed debugging for string expansions
         filter     filter handling
         hints_lookuphints data lookups
         host_lookupall types of name-to-IP address handling
         ident      ident lookup
         interface  lists of local interfaces
         lists      matching things in lists
         load       system load checks
         local_scan can be used by ‘local_scan()’ (see chapter
                    *note Adding a local scan function to Exim: Local scan function.)
         lookup     general lookup code and all lookups
         macro      macro definition and expansion
         memory     memory handling
         noutf8     modifier: avoid UTF-8 line-drawing
         pid        modifier: add pid to debug output lines
         process_infosetting info for the process log
         queue_run  queue runs
         receive    general message reception logic
         regex      regular expressions
         resolver   turn on the DNS resolver's debugging output
         retry      retry handling
         rewrite    address rewriting
         route      address routing
         start      on startup, information about the build
         timestamp  modifier: add timestamp to debug output lines
         tls        TLS logic
         transport  transports
         uid        changes of uid/gid and looking up uid/gid
         verify     address verification logic
         all        almost all of the above (see below), and also ‘-v’

     The ‘all’ option excludes ‘memory’,

     ‘macro’ and ‘regex’

     when used as ‘+all’, but includes them for ‘-all’.  The reason for
     this is that ‘+all’ is something that people tend to use when
     generating debug output for Exim maintainers.  If ‘+memory’ is
     included, an awful lot of output that is very rarely of interest is
     generated, so it now has to be explicitly requested.  However,
     ‘-all’ does turn everything off.

     The ‘resolver’ option produces output only if the DNS resolver was
     compiled with DEBUG enabled.  This is not the case in some
     operating systems.  Also, unfortunately, debugging output from the
     DNS resolver is written to stdout rather than stderr.

     The default (‘-d’ with no argument) omits ‘expand’, ‘filter’,
     ‘interface’, ‘load’, ‘memory’, ‘pid’, ‘resolver’, and ‘timestamp’.
     However, the ‘pid’ selector is forced when debugging is turned on
     for a daemon, which then passes it on to any re-executed Exims.
     Exim also automatically adds the pid to debug lines when several
     remote deliveries are run in parallel.

     The ‘timestamp’ selector causes the current time to be inserted at
     the start of all debug output lines.  This can be useful when
     trying to track down delays in processing.

     The ‘noutf8’ selector disables the use of UTF-8 line-drawing
     characters to group related information.  When disabled.  ascii-art
     is used instead.  Using the ‘+all’ option does not set this
     modifier.

     If the ‘debug_print’ option is set in any driver, it produces
     output whenever any debugging is selected, or if ‘-v’ is used.

‘-dd’<_debug options_>
     This option behaves exactly like ‘-d’ except when used on a command
     that starts a daemon process.  In that case, debugging is turned
     off for the subprocesses that the daemon creates.  Thus, it is
     useful for monitoring the behaviour of the daemon without creating
     as much output as full debugging does.

‘-dp’<_size_>
     This option sets up a debug pretrigger buffer with given size (in
     bytes).  The default is 16kB.

‘-dt’=<_value_>
     This option sets additional reasons for debug to trigger, over
     ACL-initiated triggers.  A value with bit 0 set will trigger on a
     write to the panic log.  If a pretrigger buffer had been set up
     (cf.  the ‘-dp’ option above) the debug trail leading up to this
     write will be available.

‘-dS’
     This option enables debug during the startup of Exim, before the
     completion of processing the configuration file(s).

‘-E’
     This option specifies that an incoming message is a
     locally-generated delivery failure report.  It is used internally
     by Exim when handling delivery failures and is not intended for
     external use.  Its only effect is to stop Exim generating certain
     messages to the postmaster, as otherwise message cascades could
     occur in some situations.  As part of the same option, a message id
     may follow the characters ‘-E’.  If it does, the log entry for the
     receipt of the new message contains the id, following "R=", as a
     cross-reference.

‘-e’_x_
     There are a number of Sendmail options starting with ‘-oe’ which
     seem to be called by various programs without the leading ‘o’ in
     the option.  For example, the ‘vacation’ program uses ‘-eq’.  Exim
     treats all options of the form ‘-e’_x_ as synonymous with the
     corresponding ‘-oe’_x_ options.

‘-F’ <_string_>
     This option sets the sender's full name for use when a
     locally-generated message is being accepted.  In the absence of
     this option, the user's _gecos_ entry from the password data is
     used.  As users are generally permitted to alter their _gecos_
     entries, no security considerations are involved.  White space
     between ‘-F’ and the <_string_> is optional.

‘-f’ <_address_>
     This option sets the address of the envelope sender of a
     locally-generated message (also known as the return path).  The
     option can normally be used only by a trusted user, but
     ‘untrusted_set_sender’ can be set to allow untrusted users to use
     it.

     Processes running as root or the Exim user are always trusted.
     Other trusted users are defined by the ‘trusted_users’ or
     ‘trusted_groups’ options.  In the absence of ‘-f’, or if the caller
     is not trusted, the sender of a local message is set to the
     caller's login name at the default qualify domain.

     There is one exception to the restriction on the use of ‘-f’: an
     empty sender can be specified by any user, trusted or not, to
     create a message that can never provoke a bounce.  An empty sender
     can be specified either as an empty string, or as a pair of angle
     brackets with nothing between them, as in these examples of shell
     commands:

          exim -f '<>' user@domain
          exim -f "" user@domain

     In addition, the use of ‘-f’ is not restricted when testing a
     filter file with ‘-bf’ or when testing or verifying addresses using
     the ‘-bt’ or ‘-bv’ options.

     Allowing untrusted users to change the sender address does not of
     itself make it possible to send anonymous mail.  Exim still checks
     that the _From:_ header refers to the local user, and if it does
     not, it adds a _Sender:_ header, though this can be overridden by
     setting ‘no_local_from_check’.

     White space between ‘-f’ and the <_address_> is optional (that is,
     they can be given as two arguments or one combined argument).  The
     sender of a locally-generated message can also be set (when
     permitted) by an initial "From " line in the message - see the
     description of ‘-bm’ above - but if ‘-f’ is also present, it
     overrides "From ".

‘-G’
     This option is equivalent to an ACL applying:

          control = suppress_local_fixups

     for every message received.  Note that Sendmail will complain about
     such bad formatting, where Exim silently just does not fix it up.
     This may change in future.

     As this affects audit information, the caller must be a trusted
     user to use this option.

‘-h’ <_number_>
     This option is accepted for compatibility with Sendmail, but has no
     effect.  (In Sendmail it overrides the "hop count" obtained by
     counting _Received:_ headers.)

‘-i’
     This option, which has the same effect as ‘-oi’, specifies that a
     dot on a line by itself should not terminate an incoming, non-SMTP
     message.  Solaris 2.4 (SunOS 5.4) Sendmail has a similar ‘-i’
     processing option
     (*https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19457-01/801-6680-1M/801-6680-1M.pdf
     (https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19457-01/801-6680-1M/801-6680-1M.pdf)*,
     p.  1M-529), and therefore a ‘-oi’ command line option, which both
     are used by its _mailx_ command.

‘-L’ <_tag_>
     This option is equivalent to setting ‘syslog_processname’ in the
     config file and setting ‘log_file_path’ to ‘syslog’.  Its use is
     restricted to administrators.  The configuration file has to be
     read and parsed, to determine access rights, before this is set and
     takes effect, so early configuration file errors will not honour
     this flag.

     The tag should not be longer than 32 characters.

‘-M’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to run a delivery attempt on each message
     in turn.  If any of the messages are frozen, they are automatically
     thawed before the delivery attempt.  The settings of
     ‘queue_domains’, ‘queue_smtp_domains’, and ‘hold_domains’ are
     ignored.

     Retry hints for any of the addresses are overridden - Exim tries to
     deliver even if the normal retry time has not yet been reached.
     This option requires the caller to be an admin user.  However,
     there is an option called ‘prod_requires_admin’ which can be set
     false to relax this restriction (and also the same requirement for
     the ‘-q’, ‘-R’, and ‘-S’ options).

     The deliveries happen synchronously, that is, the original Exim
     process does not terminate until all the delivery attempts have
     finished.  No output is produced unless there is a serious error.
     If you want to see what is happening, use the ‘-v’ option as well,
     or inspect Exim's main log.

‘-Mar’ <_message id_> <_address_> <_address_> ...
     This option requests Exim to add the addresses to the list of
     recipients of the message ("ar" for "add recipients").  The first
     argument must be a message id, and the remaining ones must be email
     addresses.  However, if the message is active (in the middle of a
     delivery attempt), it is not altered.  This option can be used only
     by an admin user.

‘-MC’ <_transport_> <_hostname_> <_host IP_> <_host port_> <_sequence number_> <_message id_>
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim to invoke another instance of itself to
     deliver a waiting message using an existing SMTP connection, which
     is passed as the standard input.  Details are given in chapter
     *note SMTP processing::.  This must be the final option, and the
     caller must be root or the Exim user in order to use it.

‘-MCA’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that the connection to the remote host has been
     authenticated.

‘-MCD’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that the remote host supports the ESMTP ‘DSN’ extension.

‘-MCd’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-d’ option to pass
     on an information string on the purpose of the process.

‘-MCG’ <_queue name_>
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that an alternate queue is used, named by the following
     argument.

‘-MCK’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that a remote host supports the ESMTP ‘CHUNKING’
     extension.

‘-MCL’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that the server to which Exim is connected advertised
     limits on numbers of mails, recipients or recipient domains.  The
     limits are given by the following three arguments.

‘-MCP’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that the server to which Exim is connected supports
     pipelining.

‘-MCp’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option.  It
     signifies that the connection t a remote server is via a SOCKS
     proxy, using addresses and ports given by the following four
     arguments.

‘-MCQ’ <_process id_> <_pipe fd_>
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option when
     the original delivery was started by a queue runner.  It passes on
     the process id of the queue runner, together with the file
     descriptor number of an open pipe.  Closure of the pipe signals the
     final completion of the sequence of processes that are passing
     messages through the same SMTP connection.

‘-MCq’ <_recipient address_> <_size_>
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim to implement quota checking for local
     users.

‘-MCS’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option, and
     passes on the fact that the ESMTP SIZE option should be used on
     messages delivered down the existing connection.

‘-MCT’
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option, and
     passes on the fact that the host to which Exim is connected
     supports TLS encryption.

‘-MCr’ <_SNI_>
‘-MCs’ <_SNI_>
     These options are not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MCt’ option, and
     passes on the fact that a TLS Server Name Indication was sent as
     part of the channel establishment.  The argument gives the SNI
     string.  The "r" variant indicates a DANE-verified connection.

‘-MCt’ <_IP address_> <_port_> <_cipher_>
     This option is not intended for use by external callers.  It is
     used internally by Exim in conjunction with the ‘-MC’ option, and
     passes on the fact that the connection is being proxied by a parent
     process for handling TLS encryption.  The arguments give the local
     address and port being proxied, and the TLS cipher.

‘-Mc’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to run a delivery attempt on each
     message, in turn, but unlike the ‘-M’ option, it does check for
     retry hints, and respects any that are found.  This option is not
     very useful to external callers.  It is provided mainly for
     internal use by Exim when it needs to re-invoke itself in order to
     regain root privilege for a delivery (see chapter *note Security
     considerations::).  However, ‘-Mc’ can be useful when testing, in
     order to run a delivery that respects retry times and other options
     such as ‘hold_domains’ that are overridden when ‘-M’ is used.  Such
     a delivery does not count as a queue run.  If you want to run a
     specific delivery as if in a queue run, you should use ‘-q’ with a
     message id argument.  A distinction between queue run deliveries
     and other deliveries is made in one or two places.

‘-Mes’ <_message id_> <_address_>
     This option requests Exim to change the sender address in the
     message to the given address, which must be a fully qualified
     address or "<>" ("es" for "edit sender").  There must be exactly
     two arguments.  The first argument must be a message id, and the
     second one an email address.  However, if the message is active (in
     the middle of a delivery attempt), its status is not altered.  This
     option can be used only by an admin user.

‘-Mf’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to mark each listed message as "frozen".
     This prevents any delivery attempts taking place until the message
     is "thawed", either manually or as a result of the ‘auto_thaw’
     configuration option.  However, if any of the messages are active
     (in the middle of a delivery attempt), their status is not altered.
     This option can be used only by an admin user.

‘-Mg’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to give up trying to deliver the listed
     messages, including any that are frozen.  However, if any of the
     messages are active, their status is not altered.  For non-bounce
     messages, a delivery error message is sent to the sender.  Bounce
     messages are just discarded.  This option can be used only by an
     admin user.

‘-MG’ <_queue name_> <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests that each listed message be moved from its
     current queue to the given named queue.  The destination queue name
     argument is required, but can be an empty string to define the
     default queue.  If the messages are not currently located in the
     default queue, a ‘-qG<name>’ option will be required to define the
     source queue.

‘-Mmad’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to mark all the recipient addresses in
     the messages as already delivered ("mad" for "mark all delivered").
     However, if any message is active (in the middle of a delivery
     attempt), its status is not altered.  This option can be used only
     by an admin user.

‘-Mmd’ <_message id_> <_address_> <_address_> ...
     This option requests Exim to mark the given addresses as already
     delivered ("md" for "mark delivered").  The first argument must be
     a message id, and the remaining ones must be email addresses.
     These are matched to recipient addresses in the message in a
     case-sensitive manner.  If the message is active (in the middle of
     a delivery attempt), its status is not altered.  This option can be
     used only by an admin user.

‘-Mrm’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to remove the given messages from the
     queue.  No bounce messages are sent; each message is simply
     forgotten.  However, if any of the messages are active, their
     status is not altered.  This option can be used only by an admin
     user or by the user who originally caused the message to be placed
     in the queue.

‘-Mset’ <_message id_>
     This option is useful only in conjunction with ‘-be’ (that is, when
     testing string expansions).  Exim loads the given message from its
     spool before doing the test expansions, thus setting
     message-specific variables such as ‘$message_size’ and the header
     variables.  The ‘$recipients’ variable is made available.  This
     feature is provided to make it easier to test expansions that make
     use of these variables.  However, this option can be used only by
     an admin user.  See also ‘-bem’.

‘-Mt’ <_message id_> <_message id_> ...
     This option requests Exim to "thaw" any of the listed messages that
     are "frozen", so that delivery attempts can resume.  However, if
     any of the messages are active, their status is not altered.  This
     option can be used only by an admin user.

‘-Mvb’ <_message id_>
     This option causes the contents of the message body (-D) spool file
     to be written to the standard output.  This option can be used only
     by an admin user.

‘-Mvc’ <_message id_>
     This option causes a copy of the complete message (header lines
     plus body) to be written to the standard output in *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* format.  This
     option can be used only by an admin user.

‘-Mvh’ <_message id_>
     This option causes the contents of the message headers (-H) spool
     file to be written to the standard output.  This option can be used
     only by an admin user.

‘-Mvl’ <_message id_>
     This option causes the contents of the message log spool file to be
     written to the standard output.  This option can be used only by an
     admin user.

‘-m’
     This is a synonym for ‘-om’ that is accepted by Sendmail
     (*https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19457-01/801-6680-1M/801-6680-1M.pdf
     (https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E19457-01/801-6680-1M/801-6680-1M.pdf)*
     p.  1M-258), so Exim treats it that way too.

‘-N’
     This is a debugging option that inhibits delivery of a message at
     the transport level.  It implies ‘-v’.  Exim goes through many of
     the motions of delivery - it just doesn't actually transport the
     message, but instead behaves as if it had successfully done so.
     However, it does not make any updates to the retry database, and
     the log entries for deliveries are flagged with "*>" rather than
     "=>".

     Because ‘-N’ discards any message to which it applies, only root or
     the Exim user are allowed to use it with ‘-bd’, ‘-q’, ‘-R’ or ‘-M’.
     In other words, an ordinary user can use it only when supplying an
     incoming message to which it will apply.  Although transportation
     never fails when ‘-N’ is set, an address may be deferred because of
     a configuration problem on a transport, or a routing problem.  Once
     ‘-N’ has been used for a delivery attempt, it sticks to the
     message, and applies to any subsequent delivery attempts that may
     happen for that message.

‘-n’
     This option is interpreted by Sendmail to mean "no aliasing".  For
     normal modes of operation, it is ignored by Exim.  When combined
     with ‘-bP’ it makes the output more terse (suppresses option names,
     environment values and config pretty printing).

‘-O’ <_data_>
     This option is interpreted by Sendmail to mean ‘set option’.  It is
     ignored by Exim.

‘-oA’ <_file name_>
     This option is used by Sendmail in conjunction with ‘-bi’ to
     specify an alternative alias filename.  Exim handles ‘-bi’
     differently; see the description above.

‘-oB’ <_n_>
     This is a debugging option which limits the maximum number of
     messages that can be delivered down one SMTP connection, overriding
     the value set in any ‘smtp’ transport.  If <_n_> is omitted, the
     limit is set to 1.

‘-oDSN’ <_option_>
     DSN extensions (*RFC 3461
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3461)*) will be used, if
     possible, on commandline-sourced messages sent when one or more of
     these options are used.

     The option value must start with a code letter and an equals sign.

     Code letter N requests a NOTIFY parameter on SMTP RCPT commands;
     the equals may be followed by either "never", or a comma-separated
     list with any combination of "success", "failure" and "delay".  The
     NOTIFY is applied to all recipients of the message.

     Code letter R requests a RET parameter on the SMTP MAIL command;
     the equals must be followed by either "full" or "hdrs".

     Code letter V requests an ENVID parameter on the SMTP MAIL command;
     the equals should be followed by an "envelope identifier" value for
     the message.

‘-odb’
     This option applies to all modes in which Exim accepts incoming
     messages, including the listening daemon.  It requests "background"
     delivery of such messages, which means that the accepting process
     automatically starts a delivery process for each message received,
     but does not wait for the delivery processes to finish.

     When all the messages have been received, the reception process
     exits, leaving the delivery processes to finish in their own time.
     The standard output and error streams are closed at the start of
     each delivery process.  This is the default action if none of the
     ‘-od’ options are present.

     If one of the queueing options in the configuration file
     (‘queue_only’ or ‘queue_only_file’, for example) is in effect,
     ‘-odb’ overrides it if ‘queue_only_override’ is set true, which is
     the default setting.  If ‘queue_only_override’ is set false, ‘-odb’
     has no effect.

‘-odf’
     This option requests "foreground" (synchronous) delivery when Exim
     has accepted a locally-generated message.  (For the daemon it is
     exactly the same as ‘-odb’.)  A delivery process is automatically
     started to deliver the message, and Exim waits for it to complete
     before proceeding.

     The original Exim reception process does not finish until the
     delivery process for the final message has ended.  The standard
     error stream is left open during deliveries.

     However, like ‘-odb’, this option has no effect if
     ‘queue_only_override’ is false and one of the queueing options in
     the configuration file is in effect.

     If there is a temporary delivery error during foreground delivery,
     the message is left in the queue for later delivery, and the
     original reception process exits.  See chapter *note Using Exim as
     a non-queueing client: Exim as a non-queueing client. for a way of
     setting up a restricted configuration that never queues messages.

‘-odi’
     This option is synonymous with ‘-odf’.  It is provided for
     compatibility with Sendmail.

‘-odq’
     This option applies to all modes in which Exim accepts incoming
     messages, including the listening daemon.  It specifies that the
     accepting process should not automatically start a delivery process
     for each message received.  Messages are placed in the queue, and
     remain there until a subsequent queue runner process encounters
     them.  There are several configuration options (such as
     ‘queue_only’) that can be used to queue incoming messages under
     certain conditions.  This option overrides all of them and also
     ‘-odqs’.  It always forces queueing.

‘-odqs’
     This option is a hybrid between ‘-odb’/‘-odi’ and ‘-odq’.  However,
     like ‘-odb’ and ‘-odi’, this option has no effect if
     ‘queue_only_override’ is false and one of the queueing options in
     the configuration file is in effect.

     When ‘-odqs’ does operate, a delivery process is started for each
     incoming message, in the background by default, but in the
     foreground if ‘-odi’ is also present.  The recipient addresses are
     routed, and local deliveries are done in the normal way.  However,
     if any SMTP deliveries are required, they are not done at this
     time, so the message remains in the queue until a subsequent queue
     runner process encounters it.  Because routing was done, Exim knows
     which messages are waiting for which hosts, and so a number of
     messages for the same host can be sent in a single SMTP connection.
     The ‘queue_smtp_domains’ configuration option has the same effect
     for specific domains.  See also the ‘-qq’ option.

‘-oee’
     If an error is detected while a non-SMTP message is being received
     (for example, a malformed address), the error is reported to the
     sender in a mail message.

     Provided this error message is successfully sent, the Exim
     receiving process exits with a return code of zero.  If not, the
     return code is 2 if the problem is that the original message has no
     recipients, or 1 for any other error.  This is the default ‘-oe’_x_
     option if Exim is called as _rmail_.

‘-oem’
     This is the same as ‘-oee’, except that Exim always exits with a
     non-zero return code, whether or not the error message was
     successfully sent.  This is the default ‘-oe’_x_ option, unless
     Exim is called as _rmail_.

‘-oep’
     If an error is detected while a non-SMTP message is being received,
     the error is reported by writing a message to the standard error
     file (stderr).  The return code is 1 for all errors.

‘-oeq’
     This option is supported for compatibility with Sendmail, but has
     the same effect as ‘-oep’.

‘-oew’
     This option is supported for compatibility with Sendmail, but has
     the same effect as ‘-oem’.

‘-oi’
     This option, which has the same effect as ‘-i’, specifies that a
     dot on a line by itself should not terminate an incoming, non-SMTP
     message.  Otherwise, a single dot does terminate, though Exim does
     no special processing for other lines that start with a dot.  This
     option is set by default if Exim is called as _rmail_.  See also
     ‘-ti’.

‘-oitrue’
     This option is treated as synonymous with ‘-oi’.

‘-oMa’ <_host address_>
     A number of options starting with ‘-oM’ can be used to set values
     associated with remote hosts on locally-submitted messages (that
     is, messages not received over TCP/IP). These options can be used
     by any caller in conjunction with the ‘-bh’, ‘-be’, ‘-bf’, ‘-bF’,
     ‘-bt’, or ‘-bv’ testing options.  In other circumstances, they are
     ignored unless the caller is trusted.

     The ‘-oMa’ option sets the sender host address.  This may include a
     port number at the end, after a full stop (period).  For example:

          exim -bs -oMa 10.9.8.7.1234

     An alternative syntax is to enclose the IP address in square
     brackets, followed by a colon and the port number:

          exim -bs -oMa [10.9.8.7]:1234

     The IP address is placed in the ‘$sender_host_address’ variable,
     and the port, if present, in ‘$sender_host_port’.  If both ‘-oMa’
     and ‘-bh’ are present on the command line, the sender host IP
     address is taken from whichever one is last.

‘-oMaa’ <_name_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMaa’ option sets the value of ‘$sender_host_authenticated’ (the
     authenticator name).  See chapter *note SMTP authentication:: for a
     discussion of SMTP authentication.  This option can be used with
     ‘-bh’ and ‘-bs’ to set up an authenticated SMTP session without
     actually using the SMTP AUTH command.

‘-oMai’ <_string_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMai’ option sets the value of ‘$authenticated_id’ (the id that
     was authenticated).  This overrides the default value (the caller's
     login id, except with ‘-bh’, where there is no default) for
     messages from local sources.  See chapter *note SMTP
     authentication:: for a discussion of authenticated ids.

‘-oMas’ <_address_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMas’ option sets the authenticated sender value in
     ‘$authenticated_sender’.  It overrides the sender address that is
     created from the caller's login id for messages from local sources,
     except when ‘-bh’ is used, when there is no default.  For both
     ‘-bh’ and ‘-bs’, an authenticated sender that is specified on a
     MAIL command overrides this value.  See chapter *note SMTP
     authentication:: for a discussion of authenticated senders.

‘-oMi’ <_interface address_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMi’ option sets the IP interface address value.  A port number
     may be included, using the same syntax as for ‘-oMa’.  The
     interface address is placed in ‘$received_ip_address’ and the port
     number, if present, in ‘$received_port’.

‘-oMm’ <_message reference_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMm’ option sets the message reference, e.g.  message-id, and is
     logged during delivery.  This is useful when some kind of audit
     trail is required to tie messages together.  The format of the
     message reference is checked and will abort if the format is
     invalid.  The option will only be accepted if exim is running in
     trusted mode, not as any regular user.

     The best example of a message reference is when Exim sends a bounce
     message.  The message reference is the message-id of the original
     message for which Exim is sending the bounce.

‘-oMr’ <_protocol name_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMr’ option sets the received protocol value that is stored in
     ‘$received_protocol’.  However, it does not apply (and is ignored)
     when ‘-bh’ or ‘-bs’ is used.  For ‘-bh’, the protocol is forced to
     one of the standard SMTP protocol names (see the description of
     ‘$received_protocol’ in section *note Expansion variables::).  For
     ‘-bs’, the protocol is always "local-" followed by one of those
     same names.  For ‘-bS’ (batched SMTP) however, the protocol can be
     set by ‘-oMr’.  Repeated use of this option is not supported.

‘-oMs’ <_host name_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMs’ option sets the sender host name in ‘$sender_host_name’.
     When this option is present, Exim does not attempt to look up a
     host name from an IP address; it uses the name it is given.

‘-oMt’ <_ident string_>
     See ‘-oMa’ above for general remarks about the ‘-oM’ options.  The
     ‘-oMt’ option sets the sender ident value in ‘$sender_ident’.  The
     default setting for local callers is the login id of the calling
     process, except when ‘-bh’ is used, when there is no default.

‘-om’
     In Sendmail, this option means "me too", indicating that the sender
     of a message should receive a copy of the message if the sender
     appears in an alias expansion.  Exim always does this, so the
     option does nothing.

‘-oo’
     This option is ignored.  In Sendmail it specifies "old style
     headers", whatever that means.

‘-oP’ <_path_>
     This option is useful only in conjunction with ‘-bd’ or ‘-q’ with a
     time value.  The option specifies the file to which the process id
     of the daemon is written.  When ‘-oX’ is used with ‘-bd’, or when
     ‘-q’ with a time is used without ‘-bd’, this is the only way of
     causing Exim to write a pid file, because in those cases, the
     normal pid file is not used.

‘-oPX’
     This option is not intended for general use.  The daemon uses it
     when terminating due to a SIGTEM, possibly in combination with
     ‘-oP’ <_path_>.  It causes the pid file to be removed.

‘-or’ <_time_>
     This option sets a timeout value for incoming non-SMTP messages.
     If it is not set, Exim will wait forever for the standard input.
     The value can also be set by the ‘receive_timeout’ option.  The
     format used for specifying times is described in section *note Time
     intervals::.

‘-os’ <_time_>
     This option sets a timeout value for incoming SMTP messages.  The
     timeout applies to each SMTP command and block of data.  The value
     can also be set by the ‘smtp_receive_timeout’ option; it defaults
     to 5 minutes.  The format used for specifying times is described in
     section *note Time intervals::.

‘-ov’
     This option has exactly the same effect as ‘-v’.

‘-oX’ <_number or string_>
     This option is relevant only when the ‘-bd’ (start listening
     daemon) option is also given.  It controls which ports and
     interfaces the daemon uses.  Details of the syntax, and how it
     interacts with configuration file options, are given in chapter
     *note Starting the daemon and the use of network interfaces:
     Starting the daemon.  When ‘-oX’ is used to start a daemon, no pid
     file is written unless ‘-oP’ is also present to specify a pid
     filename.

‘-oY’
     This option controls the creation of an inter-process
     communications endpoint by the Exim daemon.  It is only relevant
     when the ‘-bd’ (start listening daemon) option is also given.
     Normally the daemon creates this socket, unless a ‘-oX’ and *no*
     ‘-oP’ option is also present.  If this option is given then the
     socket will not be created.  This is required if the system is
     running multiple daemons, in which case it should be used on all.
     The features supported by the socket will not be available in such
     cases.

     The socket is currently used for

        • fast ramp-up of queue runner processes

        • caching compiled regexes

        • obtaining a current queue size

‘-pd’
     This option applies when an embedded Perl interpreter is linked
     with Exim (see chapter *note Embedded Perl::).  It overrides the
     setting of the ‘perl_at_start’ option, forcing the starting of the
     interpreter to be delayed until it is needed.

‘-ps’
     This option applies when an embedded Perl interpreter is linked
     with Exim (see chapter *note Embedded Perl::).  It overrides the
     setting of the ‘perl_at_start’ option, forcing the starting of the
     interpreter to occur as soon as Exim is started.

‘-p’<_rval_>:<_sval_>
     For compatibility with Sendmail, this option is equivalent to

          -oMr <rval> -oMs <sval>

     It sets the incoming protocol and host name (for trusted callers).
     The host name and its colon can be omitted when only the protocol
     is to be set.  Note the Exim already has two private options, ‘-pd’
     and ‘-ps’, that refer to embedded Perl.  It is therefore impossible
     to set a protocol value of ‘d’ or ‘s’ using this option (but that
     does not seem a real limitation).  Repeated use of this option is
     not supported.

‘-q’
     This option is normally restricted to admin users.  However, there
     is a configuration option called ‘prod_requires_admin’ which can be
     set false to relax this restriction (and also the same requirement
     for the ‘-M’, ‘-R’, and ‘-S’ options).

     If other commandline options do not specify an action, the ‘-q’
     option starts one queue runner process.  This scans the queue of
     waiting messages, and runs a delivery process for each one in turn.
     It waits for each delivery process to finish before starting the
     next one.  A delivery process may not actually do any deliveries if
     the retry times for the addresses have not been reached.  Use ‘-qf’
     (see below) if you want to override this.

     If the delivery process spawns other processes to deliver other
     messages down passed SMTP connections, the queue runner waits for
     these to finish before proceeding.

     When all the queued messages have been considered, the original
     queue runner process terminates.  In other words, a single pass is
     made over the waiting mail, one message at a time.  Use ‘-q’ with a
     time (see below) if you want this to be repeated periodically.

     Exim processes the waiting messages in an unpredictable order.  It
     isn't very random, but it is likely to be different each time,
     which is all that matters.  If one particular message screws up a
     remote MTA, other messages to the same MTA have a chance of getting
     through if they get tried first.

     It is possible to cause the messages to be processed in lexical
     message id order, which is essentially the order in which they
     arrived, by setting the ‘queue_run_order’ option, but this is not
     recommended for normal use.

‘-q’<_qflags_>
     Perform a queue run.  The ‘-q’ option may be followed by one or
     more flag letters that change its behaviour.  They are all
     optional, but if more than one is present, they must appear in the
     correct order.  Each flag is described in a separate item below.

‘-qq...’
     An option starting with ‘-qq’ requests a two-stage queue run.  In
     the first stage, the queue is scanned as if the
     ‘queue_smtp_domains’ option matched every domain.  Addresses are
     routed, local deliveries happen, but no remote transports are run.

     Performance will be best if the ‘queue_run_order’ option is unset
     or "random").  If that is so and the ‘queue_fast_ramp’ option is
     true and a daemon-notifier socket is available then in the first
     phase of the run, once a threshold number of messages are routed
     for a given host, a delivery process is forked in parallel with the
     rest of the scan.

     The hints database that remembers which messages are waiting for
     specific hosts is updated, as if delivery to those hosts had been
     deferred.

     After the first queue scan complete, a second, normal queue scan is
     done, with routing and delivery taking place as normal.  Messages
     that are routed to the same host should mostly be delivered down a
     single SMTP connection because of the hints that were set up during
     the first queue scan.

     Two-phase queue runs should be used on systems which, even
     intermittently, have a large queue (such as mailing-list
     operators).  They may also be useful for hosts that are connected
     to the Internet intermittently.

‘-q[q]i...’
     If the _i_ flag is present, the queue runner runs delivery
     processes only for those messages that haven't previously been
     tried.  (_i_ stands for "initial delivery".)  This can be helpful
     if you are putting messages in the queue using ‘-odq’ and want a
     queue runner just to process the new messages.

‘-q[q][i]f...’
     If one _f_ flag is present, a delivery attempt is forced for each
     non-frozen message, whereas without _f_ only those non-frozen
     addresses that have passed their retry times are tried.

‘-q[q][i]ff...’
     If _ff_ is present, a delivery attempt is forced for every message,
     whether frozen or not.

‘-q[q][i][f[f]]l’
     The _l_ (the letter "ell") flag specifies that only local
     deliveries are to be done.  If a message requires any remote
     deliveries, it remains in the queue for later delivery.

‘-q[q][i][f[f]][l][G<name>[/<time>]]]’
     If the _G_ flag and a name is present, the queue runner operates on
     the queue with the given name rather than the default queue.  The
     name should not contain a _/_ character.  For a periodic queue run
     (see below) append to the name a slash and a time value.

     If other commandline options specify an action, a _-qG<name>_
     option will specify a queue to operate on.  For example:

          exim -bp -qGquarantine
          mailq -qGquarantine
          exim -qGoffpeak -Rf @special.domain.example

‘-q’<_qflags_> <_start id_> <_end id_>
     When scanning the queue, Exim can be made to skip over messages
     whose ids are lexically less than a given value by following the
     ‘-q’ option with a starting message id.  For example:

          exim -q 0t5C6f-0000c8-00

     Messages that arrived earlier than ‘0t5C6f-0000c8-00’ are not
     inspected.  If a second message id is given, messages whose ids are
     lexically greater than it are also skipped.  If the same id is
     given twice, for example,

          exim -q 0t5C6f-0000c8-00 0t5C6f-0000c8-00

     just one delivery process is started, for that message.  This
     differs from ‘-M’ in that retry data is respected, and it also
     differs from ‘-Mc’ in that it counts as a delivery from a queue
     run.  Note that the selection mechanism does not affect the order
     in which the messages are scanned.  There are also other ways of
     selecting specific sets of messages for delivery in a queue run -
     see ‘-R’ and ‘-S’.

‘-q’<_qflags_><_time_>
     When a time value is present, the ‘-q’ option causes Exim to run as
     a daemon, starting a queue runner process at intervals specified by
     the given time value (whose format is described in section *note
     Time intervals::).  This form of the ‘-q’ option is commonly
     combined with the ‘-bd’ option, in which case a single daemon
     process handles both functions.  A common way of starting up a
     combined daemon at system boot time is to use a command such as

          /usr/exim/bin/exim -bd -q30m

     Such a daemon listens for incoming SMTP calls, and also starts a
     queue runner process every 30 minutes.

     It is possible to set up runners for multiple named queues within
     one daemon, For example:

          exim -qGhipri/2m -q10m -qqGmailinglist/1h

     When a daemon is started by ‘-q’ with a time value, but without
     ‘-bd’, no pid file is written unless one is explicitly requested by
     the ‘-oP’ option.

‘-qR’<_rsflags_> <_string_>
     This option is synonymous with ‘-R’.  It is provided for Sendmail
     compatibility.

‘-qS’<_rsflags_> <_string_>
     This option is synonymous with ‘-S’.

‘-R’<_rsflags_> <_string_>
     The <_rsflags_> may be empty, in which case the white space before
     the string is optional, unless the string is _f_, _ff_, _r_, _rf_,
     or _rff_, which are the possible values for <_rsflags_>.  White
     space is required if <_rsflags_> is not empty.

     This option is similar to ‘-q’ with no time value, that is, it
     causes Exim to perform a single queue run, except that, when
     scanning the messages on the queue, Exim processes only those that
     have at least one undelivered recipient address containing the
     given string, which is checked in a case-independent way.  If the
     <_rsflags_> start with _r_, <_string_> is interpreted as a regular
     expression; otherwise it is a literal string.

     If you want to do periodic queue runs for messages with specific
     recipients, you can combine ‘-R’ with ‘-q’ and a time value.  For
     example:

          exim -q25m -R @special.domain.example

     This example does a queue run for messages with recipients in the
     given domain every 25 minutes.  Any additional flags that are
     specified with ‘-q’ are applied to each queue run.

     Once a message is selected for delivery by this mechanism, all its
     addresses are processed.  For the first selected message, Exim
     overrides any retry information and forces a delivery attempt for
     each undelivered address.  This means that if delivery of any
     address in the first message is successful, any existing retry
     information is deleted, and so delivery attempts for that address
     in subsequently selected messages (which are processed without
     forcing) will run.  However, if delivery of any address does not
     succeed, the retry information is updated, and in subsequently
     selected messages, the failing address will be skipped.

     If the <_rsflags_> contain _f_ or _ff_, the delivery forcing
     applies to all selected messages, not just the first; frozen
     messages are included when _ff_ is present.

     The ‘-R’ option makes it straightforward to initiate delivery of
     all messages to a given domain after a host has been down for some
     time.  When the SMTP command ETRN is accepted by its ACL (see
     section *note The ETRN command::), its default effect is to run
     Exim with the ‘-R’ option, but it can be configured to run an
     arbitrary command instead.

‘-r’
     This is a documented (for Sendmail) obsolete alternative name for
     ‘-f’.

‘-S’<_rsflags_> <_string_>
     This option acts like ‘-R’ except that it checks the string against
     each message's sender instead of against the recipients.  If ‘-R’
     is also set, both conditions must be met for a message to be
     selected.  If either of the options has _f_ or _ff_ in its flags,
     the associated action is taken.

‘-Tqt’ <_times_>
     This is an option that is exclusively for use by the Exim testing
     suite.  It is not recognized when Exim is run normally.  It allows
     for the setting up of explicit "queue times" so that various
     warning/retry features can be tested.

‘-t’
     When Exim is receiving a locally-generated, non-SMTP message on its
     standard input, the ‘-t’ option causes the recipients of the
     message to be obtained from the _To:_, _Cc:_, and _Bcc:_ header
     lines in the message instead of from the command arguments.  The
     addresses are extracted before any rewriting takes place and the
     _Bcc:_ header line, if present, is then removed.

     If the command has any arguments, they specify addresses to which
     the message is _not_ to be delivered.  That is, the argument
     addresses are removed from the recipients list obtained from the
     headers.  This is compatible with Smail 3 and in accordance with
     the documented behaviour of several versions of Sendmail, as
     described in man pages on a number of operating systems (e.g.
     Solaris 8, IRIX 6.5, HP-UX 11).  However, some versions of Sendmail
     _add_ argument addresses to those obtained from the headers, and
     the O'Reilly Sendmail book documents it that way.  Exim can be made
     to add argument addresses instead of subtracting them by setting
     the option ‘extract_addresses_remove_arguments’ false.

     If there are any ‘Resent-’ header lines in the message, Exim
     extracts recipients from all _Resent-To:_, _Resent-Cc:_, and
     _Resent-Bcc:_ header lines instead of from _To:_, _Cc:_, and
     _Bcc:_.  This is for compatibility with Sendmail and other MTAs.
     (Prior to release 4.20, Exim gave an error if ‘-t’ was used in
     conjunction with ‘Resent-’ header lines.)

     *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.6.6)*
     talks about different sets of ‘Resent-’ header lines (for when a
     message is resent several times).  The RFC also specifies that they
     should be added at the front of the message, and separated by
     _Received:_ lines.  It is not at all clear how ‘-t’ should operate
     in the present of multiple sets, nor indeed exactly what
     constitutes a "set".  In practice, it seems that MUAs do not follow
     the RFC. The ‘Resent-’ lines are often added at the end of the
     header, and if a message is resent more than once, it is common for
     the original set of ‘Resent-’ headers to be renamed as ‘X-Resent-’
     when a new set is added.  This removes any possible ambiguity.

‘-ti’
     This option is exactly equivalent to ‘-t’ ‘-i’.  It is provided for
     compatibility with Sendmail.

‘-tls-on-connect’
     This option is available when Exim is compiled with TLS support.
     It forces all incoming SMTP connections to behave as if the
     incoming port is listed in the ‘tls_on_connect_ports’ option.  See
     section *note Support for the submissions (aka SSMTP or SMTPS)
     protocol: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS]
     protocol. and chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using
     TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections. for further details.

‘-U’
     Sendmail uses this option for "initial message submission", and its
     documentation states that in future releases, it may complain about
     syntactically invalid messages rather than fixing them when this
     flag is not set.  Exim ignores this option.

‘-v’
     This option causes Exim to write information to the standard error
     stream, describing what it is doing.  In particular, it shows the
     log lines for receiving and delivering a message, and if an SMTP
     connection is made, the SMTP dialogue is shown.  Some of the log
     lines shown may not actually be written to the log if the setting
     of ‘log_selector’ discards them.  Any relevant selectors are shown
     with each log line.  If none are shown, the logging is
     unconditional.

‘-x’
     AIX uses ‘-x’ for a private purpose ("mail from a local mail
     program has National Language Support extended characters in the
     body of the mail item").  It sets ‘-x’ when calling the MTA from
     its ‘mail’ command.  Exim ignores this option.

‘-X’ <_logfile_>
     This option is interpreted by Sendmail to cause debug information
     to be sent to the named file.  It is ignored by Exim.

‘-z’ <_log-line_>
     This option writes its argument to Exim's logfile.  Use is
     restricted to administrators; the intent is for operational notes.
     Quotes should be used to maintain a multi-word item as a single
     argument, under most shells.


File: spec.info,  Node: The runtime configuration file,  Next: The default configuration file,  Prev: The Exim command line,  Up: Top

6 The Exim runtime configuration file
*************************************

Exim uses a single runtime configuration file that is read whenever an
Exim binary is executed.  Note that in normal operation, this happens
frequently, because Exim is designed to operate in a distributed manner,
without central control.

   If a syntax error is detected while reading the configuration file,
Exim writes a message on the standard error, and exits with a non-zero
return code.  The message is also written to the panic log.  *Note*:
Only simple syntax errors can be detected at this time.  The values of
any expanded options are not checked until the expansion happens, even
when the expansion does not actually alter the string.

   The name of the configuration file is compiled into the binary for
security reasons, and is specified by the CONFIGURE_FILE compilation
option.  In most configurations, this specifies a single file.  However,
it is permitted to give a colon-separated list of filenames, in which
case Exim uses the first existing file in the list.

   The runtime configuration file must be owned by root or by the user
that is specified at compile time by the CONFIGURE_OWNER option (if
set).  The configuration file must not be world-writeable, or
group-writeable unless its group is the root group or the one specified
at compile time by the CONFIGURE_GROUP option.

   *Warning*: In a conventional configuration, where the Exim binary is
setuid to root, anybody who is able to edit the runtime configuration
file has an easy way to run commands as root.  If you specify a user or
group in the CONFIGURE_OWNER or CONFIGURE_GROUP options, then that user
and/or any users who are members of that group will trivially be able to
obtain root privileges.

   Up to Exim version 4.72, the runtime configuration file was also
permitted to be writeable by the Exim user and/or group.  That has been
changed in Exim 4.73 since it offered a simple privilege escalation for
any attacker who managed to compromise the Exim user account.

   A default configuration file, which will work correctly in simple
situations, is provided in the file ‘src/configure.default’.  If
CONFIGURE_FILE defines just one filename, the installation process
copies the default configuration to a new file of that name if it did
not previously exist.  If CONFIGURE_FILE is a list, no default is
automatically installed.  Chapter *note The default configuration file::
is a "walk-through" discussion of the default configuration.

* Menu:

* Using a different configuration file::
* Configuration file format::
* File inclusions in the configuration file::
* Macros in the configuration file::
* Macro substitution::
* Redefining macros::
* Overriding macro values::
* Example of macro usage::
* Builtin macros::
* Conditional skips in the configuration file::
* Common option syntax::
* Boolean options::
* Integer values::
* Octal integer values::
* Fixed point numbers::
* Time intervals::
* String values::
* Expanded strings::
* User and group names::
* List construction::
* Format of driver configurations::


File: spec.info,  Node: Using a different configuration file,  Next: Configuration file format,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.1 Using a different configuration file
========================================

A one-off alternate configuration can be specified by the ‘-C’ command
line option, which may specify a single file or a list of files.
However, when ‘-C’ is used, Exim gives up its root privilege, unless
called by root (or unless the argument for ‘-C’ is identical to the
built-in value from CONFIGURE_FILE), or is listed in the
TRUSTED_CONFIG_LIST file and the caller is the Exim user or the user
specified in the CONFIGURE_OWNER setting.  ‘-C’ is useful mainly for
checking the syntax of configuration files before installing them.  No
owner or group checks are done on a configuration file specified by
‘-C’, if root privilege has been dropped.

   Even the Exim user is not trusted to specify an arbitrary
configuration file with the ‘-C’ option to be used with root privileges,
unless that file is listed in the TRUSTED_CONFIG_LIST file.  This locks
out the possibility of testing a configuration using ‘-C’ right through
message reception and delivery, even if the caller is root.  The
reception works, but by that time, Exim is running as the Exim user, so
when it re-execs to regain privilege for the delivery, the use of ‘-C’
causes privilege to be lost.  However, root can test reception and
delivery using two separate commands (one to put a message in the queue,
using ‘-odq’, and another to do the delivery, using ‘-M’).

   If ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX is defined ‘in Local/Makefile’, it specifies a
prefix string with which any file named in a ‘-C’ command line option
must start.  In addition, the filename must not contain the sequence
"‘/../’".  There is no default setting for ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX; when it is
unset, any filename can be used with ‘-C’.

   One-off changes to a configuration can be specified by the ‘-D’
command line option, which defines and overrides values for macros used
inside the configuration file.  However, like ‘-C’, the use of this
option by a non-privileged user causes Exim to discard its root
privilege.  If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in ‘Local/Makefile’, the use
of ‘-D’ is completely disabled, and its use causes an immediate error
exit.

   The WHITELIST_D_MACROS option in ‘Local/Makefile’ permits the binary
builder to declare certain macro names trusted, such that root privilege
will not necessarily be discarded.  WHITELIST_D_MACROS defines a
colon-separated list of macros which are considered safe and, if ‘-D’
only supplies macros from this list, and the values are acceptable, then
Exim will not give up root privilege if the caller is root, the Exim
run-time user, or the CONFIGURE_OWNER, if set.  This is a transition
mechanism and is expected to be removed in the future.  Acceptable
values for the macros satisfy the regexp: ‘^[A-Za-z0-9_/.-]*$’

   Some sites may wish to use the same Exim binary on different machines
that share a file system, but to use different configuration files on
each machine.  If CONFIGURE_FILE_USE_NODE is defined in
‘Local/Makefile’, Exim first looks for a file whose name is the
configuration filename followed by a dot and the machine's node name, as
obtained from the ‘uname()’ function.  If this file does not exist, the
standard name is tried.  This processing occurs for each filename in the
list given by CONFIGURE_FILE or ‘-C’.

   In some esoteric situations different versions of Exim may be run
under different effective uids and the CONFIGURE_FILE_USE_EUID is
defined to help with this.  See the comments in ‘src/EDITME’ for
details.


File: spec.info,  Node: Configuration file format,  Next: File inclusions in the configuration file,  Prev: Using a different configuration file,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.2 Configuration file format
=============================

Exim's configuration file is divided into a number of different parts.
General option settings must always appear at the start of the file.
The other parts are all optional, and may appear in any order.  Each
part other than the first is introduced by the word "begin" followed by
at least one literal space, and the name of the part.  The optional
parts are:

   • _ACL_: Access control lists for controlling incoming SMTP mail (see
     chapter *note Access control lists::).

   • _authenticators_: Configuration settings for the authenticator
     drivers.  These are concerned with the SMTP AUTH command (see
     chapter *note SMTP authentication::).

   • _routers_: Configuration settings for the router drivers.  Routers
     process addresses and determine how the message is to be delivered
     (see chapters *note Generic options for routers::-*note The
     redirect router::).

   • _transports_: Configuration settings for the transport drivers.
     Transports define mechanisms for copying messages to destinations
     (see chapters *note Generic options for transports::-*note The smtp
     transport::).

   • _retry_: Retry rules, for use when a message cannot be delivered
     immediately.  If there is no retry section, or if it is empty (that
     is, no retry rules are defined), Exim will not retry deliveries.
     In this situation, temporary errors are treated the same as
     permanent errors.  Retry rules are discussed in chapter *note Retry
     configuration::.

   • _rewrite_: Global address rewriting rules, for use when a message
     arrives and when new addresses are generated during delivery.
     Rewriting is discussed in chapter *note Address rewriting::.

   • _local_scan_: Private options for the ‘local_scan()’ function.  If
     you want to use this feature, you must set

          LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes

     in ‘Local/Makefile’ before building Exim.  Details of the
     ‘local_scan()’ facility are given in chapter *note Adding a local
     scan function to Exim: Local scan function.

   Leading and trailing white space in configuration lines is always
ignored.

   Blank lines in the file, and lines starting with a # character
(ignoring leading white space) are treated as comments and are ignored.
*Note*: A # character other than at the beginning of a line is not
treated specially, and does not introduce a comment.

   Any non-comment line can be continued by ending it with a backslash.
Note that the general rule for white space means that trailing white
space after the backslash and leading white space at the start of
continuation lines is ignored.  Comment lines beginning with # (but not
empty lines) may appear in the middle of a sequence of continuation
lines.

   A convenient way to create a configuration file is to start from the
default, which is supplied in ‘src/configure.default’, and add, delete,
or change settings as required.

   The ACLs, retry rules, and rewriting rules have their own syntax
which is described in chapters *note Access control lists::, *note Retry
configuration::, and *note Address rewriting::, respectively.  The other
parts of the configuration file have some syntactic items in common, and
these are described below, from section *note Common option syntax::
onwards.  Before that, the inclusion, macro, and conditional facilities
are described.


File: spec.info,  Node: File inclusions in the configuration file,  Next: Macros in the configuration file,  Prev: Configuration file format,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.3 File inclusions in the configuration file
=============================================

You can include other files inside Exim's runtime configuration file by
using this syntax:

     .include <filename>
     .include_if_exists <filename>

   on a line by itself.  Double quotes round the filename are optional.
If you use the first form, a configuration error occurs if the file does
not exist; the second form does nothing for non-existent files.  The
first form allows a relative name.  It is resolved relative to the
directory of the including file.  For the second form an absolute
filename is required.

   Includes may be nested to any depth, but remember that Exim reads its
configuration file often, so it is a good idea to keep them to a
minimum.  If you change the contents of an included file, you must HUP
the daemon, because an included file is read only when the configuration
itself is read.

   The processing of inclusions happens early, at a physical line level,
so, like comment lines, an inclusion can be used in the middle of an
option setting, for example:

     hosts_lookup = a.b.c \
                    .include /some/file

   Include processing happens after macro processing (see below).  Its
effect is to process the lines of the included file as if they occurred
inline where the inclusion appears.


File: spec.info,  Node: Macros in the configuration file,  Next: Macro substitution,  Prev: File inclusions in the configuration file,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.4 Macros in the configuration file
====================================

If a line in the main part of the configuration (that is, before the
first "begin" line) begins with an upper case letter, it is taken as a
macro definition, and must be of the form

     <name> = <rest of line>

   The name must consist of letters, digits, and underscores, and need
not all be in upper case, though that is recommended.  The rest of the
line, including any continuations, is the replacement text, and has
leading and trailing white space removed.  Quotes are not removed.  The
replacement text can never end with a backslash character, but this
doesn't seem to be a serious limitation.

   Macros may also be defined between router, transport, authenticator,
or ACL definitions.  They may not, however, be defined within an
individual driver or ACL, or in the ‘local_scan’, retry, or rewrite
sections of the configuration.


File: spec.info,  Node: Macro substitution,  Next: Redefining macros,  Prev: Macros in the configuration file,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.5 Macro substitution
======================

Once a macro is defined, all subsequent lines in the file (and any
included files) are scanned for the macro name; if there are several
macros, the line is scanned for each, in turn, in the order in which the
macros are defined.  The replacement text is not re-scanned for the
current macro, though it is scanned for subsequently defined macros.
For this reason, a macro name may not contain the name of a previously
defined macro as a substring.  You could, for example, define

     ABCD_XYZ = <something>
     ABCD = <something else>

   but putting the definitions in the opposite order would provoke a
configuration error.  Macro expansion is applied to individual physical
lines from the file, before checking for line continuation or file
inclusion (see above).  If a line consists solely of a macro name, and
the expansion of the macro is empty, the line is ignored.  A macro at
the start of a line may turn the line into a comment line or a
‘.include’ line.


File: spec.info,  Node: Redefining macros,  Next: Overriding macro values,  Prev: Macro substitution,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.6 Redefining macros
=====================

Once defined, the value of a macro can be redefined later in the
configuration (or in an included file).  Redefinition is specified by
using _==_ instead of _=_.  For example:

     MAC =  initial value
     ...
     MAC == updated value

   Redefinition does not alter the order in which the macros are applied
to the subsequent lines of the configuration file.  It is still the same
order in which the macros were originally defined.  All that changes is
the macro's value.  Redefinition makes it possible to accumulate values.
For example:

     MAC =  initial value
     ...
     MAC == MAC and something added

   This can be helpful in situations where the configuration file is
built from a number of other files.


File: spec.info,  Node: Overriding macro values,  Next: Example of macro usage,  Prev: Redefining macros,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.7 Overriding macro values
===========================

The values set for macros in the configuration file can be overridden by
the ‘-D’ command line option, but Exim gives up its root privilege when
‘-D’ is used, unless called by root or the Exim user.  A definition on
the command line using the ‘-D’ option causes all definitions and
redefinitions within the file to be ignored.


File: spec.info,  Node: Example of macro usage,  Next: Builtin macros,  Prev: Overriding macro values,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.8 Example of macro usage
==========================

As an example of macro usage, consider a configuration where aliases are
looked up in a MySQL database.  It helps to keep the file less cluttered
if long strings such as SQL statements are defined separately as macros,
for example:

     ALIAS_QUERY = select mailbox from user where \
                   login='${quote_mysql:$local_part}';

   This can then be used in a ‘redirect’ router setting like this:

     data = ${lookup mysql{ALIAS_QUERY}}

   In earlier versions of Exim macros were sometimes used for domain,
host, or address lists.  In Exim version 4 these are handled better by
named lists - see section *note Named lists::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Builtin macros,  Next: Conditional skips in the configuration file,  Prev: Example of macro usage,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.9 Builtin macros
==================

Exim defines some macros depending on facilities available, which may
differ due to build-time definitions and from one release to another.
All of these macros start with an underscore.  They can be used to
conditionally include parts of a configuration (see below).

   The following classes of macros are defined:

      _HAVE_*                      build-time defines
      _DRIVER_ROUTER_*             router drivers
      _DRIVER_TRANSPORT_*          transport drivers
      _DRIVER_AUTHENTICATOR_*      authenticator drivers
      _EXP_COND_*                  expansion conditions
      _EXP_ITEM_*                  expansion items
      _EXP_OP_*                    expansion operators
      _EXP_VAR_*                   expansion variables
      _LOG_*                       log_selector values
      _OPT_MAIN_*                  main config options
      _OPT_ROUTERS_*               generic router options
      _OPT_TRANSPORTS_*            generic transport options
      _OPT_AUTHENTICATORS_*        generic authenticator options
      _OPT_ROUTER_*_*              private router options
      _OPT_TRANSPORT_*_*           private transport options
      _OPT_AUTHENTICATOR_*_*       private authenticator options

   Use an "exim -bP macros" command to get the list of macros.


File: spec.info,  Node: Conditional skips in the configuration file,  Next: Common option syntax,  Prev: Builtin macros,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.10 Conditional skips in the configuration file
================================================

You can use the directives ‘.ifdef’, ‘.ifndef’, ‘.elifdef’, ‘.elifndef’,
‘.else’, and ‘.endif’ to dynamically include or exclude portions of the
configuration file.  The processing happens whenever the file is read
(that is, when an Exim binary starts to run).

   The implementation is very simple.  Instances of the first four
directives must be followed by text that includes the names of one or
macros.  The condition that is tested is whether or not any macro
substitution has taken place in the line.  Thus:

     .ifdef AAA
     message_size_limit = 50M
     .else
     message_size_limit = 100M
     .endif

   sets a message size limit of 50M if the macro ‘AAA’ is defined (or
‘A’ or ‘AA’), and 100M otherwise.  If there is more than one macro named
on the line, the condition is true if any of them are defined.  That is,
it is an "or" condition.  To obtain an "and" condition, you need to use
nested ‘.ifdef’s.

   Although you can use a macro expansion to generate one of these
directives, it is not very useful, because the condition "there was a
macro substitution in this line" will always be true.

   Text following ‘.else’ and ‘.endif’ is ignored, and can be used as
comment to clarify complicated nestings.


File: spec.info,  Node: Common option syntax,  Next: Boolean options,  Prev: Conditional skips in the configuration file,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.11 Common option syntax
=========================

For the main set of options, driver options, and ‘local_scan()’ options,
each setting is on a line by itself, and starts with a name consisting
of lower-case letters and underscores.  Many options require a data
value, and in these cases the name must be followed by an equals sign
(with optional white space) and then the value.  For example:

     qualify_domain = mydomain.example.com

   Some option settings may contain sensitive data, for example,
passwords for accessing databases.  To stop non-admin users from using
the ‘-bP’ command line option to read these values, you can precede the
option settings with the word "hide".  For example:

     hide mysql_servers = localhost/users/admin/secret-password

   For non-admin users, such options are displayed like this:

     mysql_servers = <value not displayable>

   If "hide" is used on a driver option, it hides the value of that
option on all instances of the same driver.

   The following sections describe the syntax used for the different
data types that are found in option settings.


File: spec.info,  Node: Boolean options,  Next: Integer values,  Prev: Common option syntax,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.12 Boolean options
====================

Options whose type is given as boolean are on/off switches.  There are
two different ways of specifying such options: with and without a data
value.  If the option name is specified on its own without data, the
switch is turned on; if it is preceded by "no_" or "not_" the switch is
turned off.  However, boolean options may be followed by an equals sign
and one of the words "true", "false", "yes", or "no", as an alternative
syntax.  For example, the following two settings have exactly the same
effect:

     queue_only
     queue_only = true

   The following two lines also have the same (opposite) effect:

     no_queue_only
     queue_only = false

   You can use whichever syntax you prefer.


File: spec.info,  Node: Integer values,  Next: Octal integer values,  Prev: Boolean options,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.13 Integer values
===================

If an option's type is given as "integer", the value can be given in
decimal, hexadecimal, or octal.  If it starts with a digit greater than
zero, a decimal number is assumed.  Otherwise, it is treated as an octal
number unless it starts with the characters "0x", in which case the
remainder is interpreted as a hexadecimal number.

   If an integer value is followed by the letter K, it is multiplied by
1024; if it is followed by the letter M, it is multiplied by 1024x1024;
if by the letter G, 1024x1024x1024.  When the values of integer option
settings are output, values which are an exact multiple of 1024 or
1024x1024 are sometimes, but not always, printed using the letters K and
M. The printing style is independent of the actual input format that was
used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Octal integer values,  Next: Fixed point numbers,  Prev: Integer values,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.14 Octal integer values
=========================

If an option's type is given as "octal integer", its value is always
interpreted as an octal number, whether or not it starts with the digit
zero.  Such options are always output in octal.


File: spec.info,  Node: Fixed point numbers,  Next: Time intervals,  Prev: Octal integer values,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.15 Fixed point numbers
========================

If an option's type is given as "fixed-point", its value must be a
decimal integer, optionally followed by a decimal point and up to three
further digits.


File: spec.info,  Node: Time intervals,  Next: String values,  Prev: Fixed point numbers,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.16 Time intervals
===================

A time interval is specified as a sequence of numbers, each followed by
one of the following letters, with no intervening white space:

    ‘s’                              seconds
    ‘m’                              minutes
    ‘h’                              hours
    ‘d’                              days
    ‘w’                              weeks

   For example, "3h50m" specifies 3 hours and 50 minutes.  The values of
time intervals are output in the same format.  Exim does not restrict
the values; it is perfectly acceptable, for example, to specify "90m"
instead of "1h30m".


File: spec.info,  Node: String values,  Next: Expanded strings,  Prev: Time intervals,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.17 String values
==================

If an option's type is specified as "string", the value can be specified
with or without double-quotes.  If it does not start with a
double-quote, the value consists of the remainder of the line plus any
continuation lines, starting at the first character after any leading
white space, with trailing white space removed, and with no
interpretation of the characters in the string.  Because Exim removes
comment lines (those beginning with #) at an early stage, they can
appear in the middle of a multi-line string.  The following two settings
are therefore equivalent:

     trusted_users = uucp:mail
     trusted_users = uucp:\
                     # This comment line is ignored
                     mail

   If a string does start with a double-quote, it must end with a
closing double-quote, and any backslash characters other than those used
for line continuation are interpreted as escape characters, as follows:

    ‘\\’                             single backslash
    ‘\n’                             newline
    ‘\r’                             carriage return
    ‘\t’                             tab
    ‘\’<_octal digits_>              up to 3 octal digits specify one
                                     character
    ‘\x’<_hex digits_>               up to 2 hexadecimal digits specify
                                     one character

   If a backslash is followed by some other character, including a
double-quote character, that character replaces the pair.

   Quoting is necessary only if you want to make use of the backslash
escapes to insert special characters, or if you need to specify a value
with leading or trailing spaces.  These cases are rare, so quoting is
almost never needed in current versions of Exim.  In versions of Exim
before 3.14, quoting was required in order to continue lines, so you may
come across older configuration files and examples that apparently quote
unnecessarily.


File: spec.info,  Node: Expanded strings,  Next: User and group names,  Prev: String values,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.18 Expanded strings
=====================

Some strings in the configuration file are subjected to _string
expansion_, by which means various parts of the string may be changed
according to the circumstances (see chapter *note String expansions::).
The input syntax for such strings is as just described; in particular,
the handling of backslashes in quoted strings is done as part of the
input process, before expansion takes place.  However, backslash is also
an escape character for the expander, so any backslashes that are
required for that reason must be doubled if they are within a quoted
configuration string.


File: spec.info,  Node: User and group names,  Next: List construction,  Prev: Expanded strings,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.19 User and group names
=========================

User and group names are specified as strings, using the syntax
described above, but the strings are interpreted specially.  A user or
group name must either consist entirely of digits, or be a name that can
be looked up using the ‘getpwnam()’ or ‘getgrnam()’ function, as
appropriate.


File: spec.info,  Node: List construction,  Next: Format of driver configurations,  Prev: User and group names,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.20 List construction
======================

The data for some configuration options is a list of items, with colon
as the default separator.  Many of these options are shown with type
"string list" in the descriptions later in this document.  Others are
listed as "domain list", "host list", "address list", or "local part
list".  Syntactically, they are all the same; however, those other than
"string list" are subject to particular kinds of interpretation, as
described in chapter *note Domain, host, address, and local part lists:
Domain; host; and address lists.

   In all these cases, the entire list is treated as a single string as
far as the input syntax is concerned.  The ‘trusted_users’ setting in
section *note String values:: above is an example.  If a colon is
actually needed in an item in a list, it must be entered as two colons.
Leading and trailing white space on each item in a list is ignored.
This makes it possible to include items that start with a colon, and in
particular, certain forms of IPv6 address.  For example, the list

     local_interfaces = 127.0.0.1 : ::::1

   contains two IP addresses, the IPv4 address 127.0.0.1 and the IPv6
address ::1.

   *Note*: Although leading and trailing white space is ignored in
individual list items, it is not ignored when parsing the list.  The
spaces around the first colon in the example above are necessary.  If
they were not there, the list would be interpreted as the two items
127.0.0.1:: and 1.

* Menu:

* Changing list separators::
* Empty items in lists::


File: spec.info,  Node: Changing list separators,  Next: Empty items in lists,  Up: List construction

6.20.1 Changing list separators
-------------------------------

Doubling colons in IPv6 addresses is an unwelcome chore, so a mechanism
was introduced to allow the separator character to be changed.  If a
list begins with a left angle bracket, followed by any punctuation
character, that character is used instead of colon as the list
separator.  For example, the list above can be rewritten to use a
semicolon separator like this:

     local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1

   This facility applies to all lists, with the exception of the list in
‘log_file_path’.  It is recommended that the use of non-colon separators
be confined to circumstances where they really are needed.

   It is also possible to use newline and other control characters
(those with code values less than 32, plus DEL) as separators in lists.
Such separators must be provided literally at the time the list is
processed.  For options that are string-expanded, you can write the
separator using a normal escape sequence.  This will be processed by the
expander before the string is interpreted as a list.  For example, if a
newline-separated list of domains is generated by a lookup, you can
process it directly by a line such as this:

     domains = <\n ${lookup mysql{.....}}

   This avoids having to change the list separator in such data.  You
are unlikely to want to use a control character as a separator in an
option that is not expanded, because the value is literal text.
However, it can be done by giving the value in quotes.  For example:

     local_interfaces = "<\n 127.0.0.1 \n ::1"

   Unlike printing character separators, which can be included in list
items by doubling, it is not possible to include a control character as
data when it is set as the separator.  Two such characters in succession
are interpreted as enclosing an empty list item.


File: spec.info,  Node: Empty items in lists,  Prev: Changing list separators,  Up: List construction

6.20.2 Empty items in lists
---------------------------

An empty item at the end of a list is always ignored.  In other words,
trailing separator characters are ignored.  Thus, the list in

     senders = user@domain :

   contains only a single item.  If you want to include an empty string
as one item in a list, it must not be the last item.  For example, this
list contains three items, the second of which is empty:

     senders = user1@domain : : user2@domain

   *Note*: There must be white space between the two colons, as
otherwise they are interpreted as representing a single colon data
character (and the list would then contain just one item).  If you want
to specify a list that contains just one, empty item, you can do it as
in this example:

     senders = :

   In this case, the first item is empty, and the second is discarded
because it is at the end of the list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of driver configurations,  Prev: List construction,  Up: The runtime configuration file

6.21 Format of driver configurations
====================================

There are separate parts in the configuration for defining routers,
transports, and authenticators.  In each part, you are defining a number
of driver instances, each with its own set of options.  Each driver
instance is defined by a sequence of lines like this:

     <instance name>:
       <option>
       ...
       <option>

   In the following example, the instance name is ‘localuser’, and it is
followed by three options settings:

     localuser:
       driver = accept
       check_local_user
       transport = local_delivery

   For each driver instance, you specify which Exim code module it uses
- by the setting of the ‘driver’ option - and (optionally) some
configuration settings.  For example, in the case of transports, if you
want a transport to deliver with SMTP you would use the ‘smtp’ driver;
if you want to deliver to a local file you would use the ‘appendfile’
driver.  Each of the drivers is described in detail in its own separate
chapter later in this manual.

   You can have several routers, transports, or authenticators that are
based on the same underlying driver (each must have a different instance
name).

   The order in which routers are defined is important, because
addresses are passed to individual routers one by one, in order.  The
order in which transports are defined does not matter at all.  The order
in which authenticators are defined is used only when Exim, as a client,
is searching them to find one that matches an authentication mechanism
offered by the server.

   Within a driver instance definition, there are two kinds of option:
_generic_ and _private_.  The generic options are those that apply to
all drivers of the same type (that is, all routers, all transports or
all authenticators).  The ‘driver’ option is a generic option that must
appear in every definition.  The private options are special for each
driver, and none need appear, because they all have default values.

   The options may appear in any order, except that the ‘driver’ option
must precede any private options, since these depend on the particular
driver.  For this reason, it is recommended that ‘driver’ always be the
first option.

   Driver instance names, which are used for reference in log entries
and elsewhere, can be any sequence of letters, digits, and underscores
(starting with a letter) and must be unique among drivers of the same
type.  A router and a transport (for example) can each have the same
name, but no two router instances can have the same name.  The name of a
driver instance should not be confused with the name of the underlying
driver module.  For example, the configuration lines:

     remote_smtp:
       driver = smtp

   create an instance of the ‘smtp’ transport driver whose name is
‘remote_smtp’.  The same driver code can be used more than once, with
different instance names and different option settings each time.  A
second instance of the ‘smtp’ transport, with different options, might
be defined thus:

     special_smtp:
       driver = smtp
       port = 1234
       command_timeout = 10s

   The names ‘remote_smtp’ and ‘special_smtp’ would be used to reference
these transport instances from routers, and these names would appear in
log lines.

   Comment lines may be present in the middle of driver specifications.
The full list of option settings for any particular driver instance,
including all the defaulted values, can be extracted by making use of
the ‘-bP’ command line option.


File: spec.info,  Node: The default configuration file,  Next: Regular expressions,  Prev: The runtime configuration file,  Up: Top

7 The default configuration file
********************************

The default configuration file supplied with Exim as
‘src/configure.default’ is sufficient for a host with simple mail
requirements.  As an introduction to the way Exim is configured, this
chapter "walks through" the default configuration, giving brief
explanations of the settings.  Detailed descriptions of the options are
given in subsequent chapters.  The default configuration file itself
contains extensive comments about ways you might want to modify the
initial settings.  However, note that there are many options that are
not mentioned at all in the default configuration.

* Menu:

* Macros::
* Main configuration settings::
* ACL configuration::
* Router configuration::
* Transport configuration::
* Default retry rule::
* Rewriting configuration::
* Authenticators configuration::


File: spec.info,  Node: Macros,  Next: Main configuration settings,  Up: The default configuration file

7.1 Macros
==========

All macros should be defined before any options.

   One macro is specified, but commented out, in the default
configuration:

     # ROUTER_SMARTHOST=MAIL.HOSTNAME.FOR.CENTRAL.SERVER.EXAMPLE

   If all off-site mail is expected to be delivered to a "smarthost",
then set the hostname here and uncomment the macro.  This will affect
which router is used later on.  If this is left commented out, then Exim
will perform direct-to-MX deliveries using a ‘dnslookup’ router.

   In addition to macros defined here, Exim includes a number of
built-in macros to enable configuration to be guarded by a binary built
with support for a given feature.  See section *note Builtin macros::
for more details.


File: spec.info,  Node: Main configuration settings,  Next: ACL configuration,  Prev: Macros,  Up: The default configuration file

7.2 Main configuration settings
===============================

The main (global) configuration option settings section must always come
first in the file, after the macros.  The first thing you'll see in the
file, after some initial comments, is the line

     # primary_hostname =

   This is a commented-out setting of the ‘primary_hostname’ option.
Exim needs to know the official, fully qualified name of your host, and
this is where you can specify it.  However, in most cases you do not
need to set this option.  When it is unset, Exim uses the ‘uname()’
system function to obtain the host name.

   The first three non-comment configuration lines are as follows:

     domainlist local_domains    = @
     domainlist relay_to_domains =
     hostlist   relay_from_hosts = 127.0.0.1

   These are not, in fact, option settings.  They are definitions of two
named domain lists and one named host list.  Exim allows you to give
names to lists of domains, hosts, and email addresses, in order to make
it easier to manage the configuration file (see section *note Named
lists::).

   The first line defines a domain list called _local_domains_; this is
used later in the configuration to identify domains that are to be
delivered on the local host.

   There is just one item in this list, the string "@".  This is a
special form of entry which means "the name of the local host".  Thus,
if the local host is called _a.host.example_, mail to
_any.user@a.host.example_ is expected to be delivered locally.  Because
the local host's name is referenced indirectly, the same configuration
file can be used on different hosts.

   The second line defines a domain list called _relay_to_domains_, but
the list itself is empty.  Later in the configuration we will come to
the part that controls mail relaying through the local host; it allows
relaying to any domains in this list.  By default, therefore, no
relaying on the basis of a mail domain is permitted.

   The third line defines a host list called _relay_from_hosts_.  This
list is used later in the configuration to permit relaying from any host
or IP address that matches the list.  The default contains just the IP
address of the IPv4 loopback interface, which means that processes on
the local host are able to submit mail for relaying by sending it over
TCP/IP to that interface.  No other hosts are permitted to submit
messages for relaying.

   Just to be sure there's no misunderstanding: at this point in the
configuration we aren't actually setting up any controls.  We are just
defining some domains and hosts that will be used in the controls that
are specified later.

   The next two configuration lines are genuine option settings:

     acl_smtp_rcpt = acl_check_rcpt
     acl_smtp_data = acl_check_data

   These options specify _Access Control Lists_ (ACLs) that are to be
used during an incoming SMTP session for every recipient of a message
(every RCPT command), and after the contents of the message have been
received, respectively.  The names of the lists are _acl_check_rcpt_ and
_acl_check_data_, and we will come to their definitions below, in the
ACL section of the configuration.  The RCPT ACL controls which
recipients are accepted for an incoming message - if a configuration
does not provide an ACL to check recipients, no SMTP mail can be
accepted.  The DATA ACL allows the contents of a message to be checked.

   Two commented-out option settings are next:

     # av_scanner = clamd:/tmp/clamd
     # spamd_address = 127.0.0.1 783

   These are example settings that can be used when Exim is compiled
with the content-scanning extension.  The first specifies the interface
to the virus scanner, and the second specifies the interface to
SpamAssassin.  Further details are given in chapter *note Content
scanning at ACL time::.

   Three more commented-out option settings follow:

     # tls_advertise_hosts = *
     # tls_certificate = /etc/ssl/exim.crt
     # tls_privatekey = /etc/ssl/exim.pem

   These are example settings that can be used when Exim is compiled
with support for TLS (aka SSL) as described in section *note Including
TLS/SSL encryption support::.  The first one specifies the list of
clients that are allowed to use TLS when connecting to this server; in
this case, the wildcard means all clients.  The other options specify
where Exim should find its TLS certificate and private key, which
together prove the server's identity to any clients that connect.  More
details are given in chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using
TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.

   Another two commented-out option settings follow:

     # daemon_smtp_ports = 25 : 465 : 587
     # tls_on_connect_ports = 465

   These options provide better support for roaming users who wish to
use this server for message submission.  They are not much use unless
you have turned on TLS (as described in the previous paragraph) and
authentication (about which more in section *note Authenticators
configuration::).  Mail submission from mail clients (MUAs) should be
separate from inbound mail to your domain (MX delivery) for various good
reasons (eg, ability to impose much saner TLS protocol and ciphersuite
requirements without unintended consequences).  *RFC 6409
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6409)* (previously 4409)
specifies use of port 587 for SMTP Submission, which uses STARTTLS, so
this is the "submission" port.  *RFC 8314
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8314#section-3.3)* specifies
use of port 465 as the "submissions" protocol, which should be used in
preference to 587.  You should also consider deploying SRV records to
help clients find these ports.  Older names for "submissions" are
"smtps" and "ssmtp".

   Two more commented-out options settings follow:

     # qualify_domain =
     # qualify_recipient =

   The first of these specifies a domain that Exim uses when it
constructs a complete email address from a local login name.  This is
often needed when Exim receives a message from a local process.  If you
do not set ‘qualify_domain’, the value of ‘primary_hostname’ is used.
If you set both of these options, you can have different qualification
domains for sender and recipient addresses.  If you set only the first
one, its value is used in both cases.

   The following line must be uncommented if you want Exim to recognize
addresses of the form _user@[10.11.12.13]_ that is, with a "domain
literal" (an IP address within square brackets) instead of a named
domain.

     # allow_domain_literals

   The RFCs still require this form, but many people think that in the
modern Internet it makes little sense to permit mail to be sent to
specific hosts by quoting their IP addresses.  This ancient format has
been used by people who try to abuse hosts by using them for unwanted
relaying.  However, some people believe there are circumstances (for
example, messages addressed to _postmaster_) where domain literals are
still useful.

   The next configuration line is a kind of trigger guard:

     never_users = root

   It specifies that no delivery must ever be run as the root user.  The
normal convention is to set up _root_ as an alias for the system
administrator.  This setting is a guard against slips in the
configuration.  The list of users specified by ‘never_users’ is not,
however, the complete list; the build-time configuration in
‘Local/Makefile’ has an option called FIXED_NEVER_USERS specifying a
list that cannot be overridden.  The contents of ‘never_users’ are added
to this list.  By default FIXED_NEVER_USERS also specifies root.

   When a remote host connects to Exim in order to send mail, the only
information Exim has about the host's identity is its IP address.  The
next configuration line,

     host_lookup = *

   specifies that Exim should do a reverse DNS lookup on all incoming
connections, in order to get a host name.  This improves the quality of
the logging information, but if you feel it is too expensive, you can
remove it entirely, or restrict the lookup to hosts on "nearby"
networks.  Note that it is not always possible to find a host name from
an IP address, because not all DNS reverse zones are maintained, and
sometimes DNS servers are unreachable.

   The next two lines are concerned with _ident_ callbacks, as defined
by *RFC 1413 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1413)* (hence
their names):

     rfc1413_hosts = *
     rfc1413_query_timeout = 0s

   These settings cause Exim to avoid ident callbacks for all incoming
SMTP calls.  Few hosts offer RFC1413 service these days; calls have to
be terminated by a timeout and this needlessly delays the startup of an
incoming SMTP connection.  If you have hosts for which you trust RFC1413
and need this information, you can change this.

   This line enables an efficiency SMTP option.  It is negotiated by
clients and not expected to cause problems but can be disabled if
needed.

     prdr_enable = true

   When Exim receives messages over SMTP connections, it expects all
addresses to be fully qualified with a domain, as required by the SMTP
definition.  However, if you are running a server to which simple
clients submit messages, you may find that they send unqualified
addresses.  The two commented-out options:

     # sender_unqualified_hosts =
     # recipient_unqualified_hosts =

   show how you can specify hosts that are permitted to send unqualified
sender and recipient addresses, respectively.

   The ‘log_selector’ option is used to increase the detail of logging
over the default:

     log_selector = +smtp_protocol_error +smtp_syntax_error \
                    +tls_certificate_verified

   The ‘percent_hack_domains’ option is also commented out:

     # percent_hack_domains =

   It provides a list of domains for which the "percent hack" is to
operate.  This is an almost obsolete form of explicit email routing.  If
you do not know anything about it, you can safely ignore this topic.

   The next two settings in the main part of the default configuration
are concerned with messages that have been "frozen" on Exim's queue.
When a message is frozen, Exim no longer continues to try to deliver it.
Freezing occurs when a bounce message encounters a permanent failure
because the sender address of the original message that caused the
bounce is invalid, so the bounce cannot be delivered.  This is probably
the most common case, but there are also other conditions that cause
freezing, and frozen messages are not always bounce messages.

     ignore_bounce_errors_after = 2d
     timeout_frozen_after = 7d

   The first of these options specifies that failing bounce messages are
to be discarded after 2 days in the queue.  The second specifies that
any frozen message (whether a bounce message or not) is to be timed out
(and discarded) after a week.  In this configuration, the first setting
ensures that no failing bounce message ever lasts a week.

   Exim queues it's messages in a spool directory.  If you expect to
have large queues, you may consider using this option.  It splits the
spool directory into subdirectories to avoid file system degradation
from many files in a single directory, resulting in better performance.
Manual manipulation of queued messages becomes more complex (though
fortunately not often needed).

     # split_spool_directory = true

   In an ideal world everybody follows the standards.  For non-ASCII
messages *RFC 2047 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)* is a
standard, allowing a maximum line length of 76 characters.  Exim adheres
that standard and won't process messages which violate this standard.
(Even ${rfc2047:...} expansions will fail.)  In particular, the Exim
maintainers have had multiple reports of problems from Russian
administrators of issues until they disable this check, because of some
popular, yet buggy, mail composition software.

     # check_rfc2047_length = false

   If you need to be strictly RFC compliant you may wish to disable the
8BITMIME advertisement.  Use this, if you exchange mails with systems
that are not 8-bit clean.

     # accept_8bitmime = false

   Libraries you use may depend on specific environment settings.  This
imposes a security risk (e.g.  PATH). There are two lists:
‘keep_environment’ for the variables to import as they are, and
‘add_environment’ for variables we want to set to a fixed value.  Note
that TZ is handled separately, by the ‘timezone’ runtime option and by
the TIMEZONE_DEFAULT buildtime option.

     # keep_environment = ^LDAP
     # add_environment = PATH=/usr/bin::/bin


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL configuration,  Next: Router configuration,  Prev: Main configuration settings,  Up: The default configuration file

7.3 ACL configuration
=====================

In the default configuration, the ACL section follows the main
configuration.  It starts with the line

     begin acl

   and it contains the definitions of two ACLs, called _acl_check_rcpt_
and _acl_check_data_, that were referenced in the settings of
‘acl_smtp_rcpt’ and ‘acl_smtp_data’ above.

   The first ACL is used for every RCPT command in an incoming SMTP
message.  Each RCPT command specifies one of the message's recipients.
The ACL statements are considered in order, until the recipient address
is either accepted or rejected.  The RCPT command is then accepted or
rejected, according to the result of the ACL processing.

     acl_check_rcpt:

   This line, consisting of a name terminated by a colon, marks the
start of the ACL, and names it.

     accept  hosts = :

   This ACL statement accepts the recipient if the sending host matches
the list.  But what does that strange list mean?  It doesn't actually
contain any host names or IP addresses.  The presence of the colon puts
an empty item in the list; Exim matches this only if the incoming
message did not come from a remote host, because in that case, the
remote hostname is empty.  The colon is important.  Without it, the list
itself is empty, and can never match anything.

   What this statement is doing is to accept unconditionally all
recipients in messages that are submitted by SMTP from local processes
using the standard input and output (that is, not using TCP/IP). A
number of MUAs operate in this manner.

     deny    domains       = +local_domains
             local_parts   = ^[.] : ^.*[@%!/|]
             message       = Restricted characters in address

     deny    domains       = !+local_domains
             local_parts   = ^[./|] : ^.*[@%!] : ^.*/\\.\\./
             message       = Restricted characters in address

   These statements are concerned with local parts that contain any of
the characters "@", "%", "!", "/", "|", or dots in unusual places.
Although these characters are entirely legal in local parts (in the case
of "@" and leading dots, only if correctly quoted), they do not commonly
occur in Internet mail addresses.

   The first three have in the past been associated with explicitly
routed addresses (percent is still sometimes used - see the
‘percent_hack_domains’ option).  Addresses containing these characters
are regularly tried by spammers in an attempt to bypass relaying
restrictions, and also by open relay testing programs.  Unless you
really need them it is safest to reject these characters at this early
stage.  This configuration is heavy-handed in rejecting these characters
for all messages it accepts from remote hosts.  This is a deliberate
policy of being as safe as possible.

   The first rule above is stricter, and is applied to messages that are
addressed to one of the local domains handled by this host.  This is
implemented by the first condition, which restricts it to domains that
are listed in the _local_domains_ domain list.  The "+" character is
used to indicate a reference to a named list.  In this configuration,
there is just one domain in _local_domains_, but in general there may be
many.

   The second condition on the first statement uses two regular
expressions to block local parts that begin with a dot or contain "@",
"%", "!", "/", or "|".  If you have local accounts that include these
characters, you will have to modify this rule.

   Empty components (two dots in a row) are not valid in *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)*, but Exim allows them
because they have been encountered in practice.  (Consider the common
convention of local parts constructed as
"_first-initial.second-initial.family-name_" when applied to someone
like the author of Exim, who has no second initial.)  However, a local
part starting with a dot or containing "/../" can cause trouble if it is
used as part of a filename (for example, for a mailing list).  This is
also true for local parts that contain slashes.  A pipe symbol can also
be troublesome if the local part is incorporated unthinkingly into a
shell command line.

   The second rule above applies to all other domains, and is less
strict.  This allows your own users to send outgoing messages to sites
that use slashes and vertical bars in their local parts.  It blocks
local parts that begin with a dot, slash, or vertical bar, but allows
these characters within the local part.  However, the sequence "/../" is
barred.  The use of "@", "%", and "!"  is blocked, as before.  The
motivation here is to prevent your users (or your users' viruses) from
mounting certain kinds of attack on remote sites.

     accept  local_parts   = postmaster
             domains       = +local_domains

   This statement, which has two conditions, accepts an incoming address
if the local part is _postmaster_ and the domain is one of those listed
in the _local_domains_ domain list.  The "+" character is used to
indicate a reference to a named list.  In this configuration, there is
just one domain in _local_domains_, but in general there may be many.

   The presence of this statement means that mail to postmaster is never
blocked by any of the subsequent tests.  This can be helpful while
sorting out problems in cases where the subsequent tests are incorrectly
denying access.

     require verify        = sender

   This statement requires the sender address to be verified before any
subsequent ACL statement can be used.  If verification fails, the
incoming recipient address is refused.  Verification consists of trying
to route the address, to see if a bounce message could be delivered to
it.  In the case of remote addresses, basic verification checks only the
domain, but _callouts_ can be used for more verification if required.
Section *note Address verification:: discusses the details of address
verification.

     accept  hosts         = +relay_from_hosts
             control       = submission

   This statement accepts the address if the message is coming from one
of the hosts that are defined as being allowed to relay through this
host.  Recipient verification is omitted here, because in many cases the
clients are dumb MUAs that do not cope well with SMTP error responses.
For the same reason, the second line specifies "submission mode" for
messages that are accepted.  This is described in detail in section
*note Submission mode for non-local messages::; it causes Exim to fix
messages that are deficient in some way, for example, because they lack
a _Date:_ header line.  If you are actually relaying out from MTAs, you
should probably add recipient verification here, and disable submission
mode.

     accept  authenticated = *
             control       = submission

   This statement accepts the address if the client host has
authenticated itself.  Submission mode is again specified, on the
grounds that such messages are most likely to come from MUAs.  The
default configuration does not define any authenticators, though it does
include some nearly complete commented-out examples described in *note
Authenticators configuration::.  This means that no client can in fact
authenticate until you complete the authenticator definitions.

     require message = relay not permitted
             domains = +local_domains : +relay_to_domains

   This statement rejects the address if its domain is neither a local
domain nor one of the domains for which this host is a relay.

     require verify = recipient

   This statement requires the recipient address to be verified; if
verification fails, the address is rejected.

     # deny    dnslists    = black.list.example
     #         message     = rejected because $sender_host_address \
     #                       is in a black list at $dnslist_domain\n\
     #                       $dnslist_text
     #
     # warn    dnslists    = black.list.example
     #         add_header  = X-Warning: $sender_host_address is in \
     #                       a black list at $dnslist_domain
     #         log_message = found in $dnslist_domain

   These commented-out lines are examples of how you could configure
Exim to check sending hosts against a DNS black list.  The first
statement rejects messages from blacklisted hosts, whereas the second
just inserts a warning header line.

     # require verify = csa

   This commented-out line is an example of how you could turn on client
SMTP authorization (CSA) checking.  Such checks do DNS lookups for
special SRV records.

     accept

   The final statement in the first ACL unconditionally accepts any
recipient address that has successfully passed all the previous tests.

     acl_check_data:

   This line marks the start of the second ACL, and names it.  Most of
the contents of this ACL are commented out:

     # deny    malware   = *
     #         message   = This message contains a virus \
     #                     ($malware_name).

   These lines are examples of how to arrange for messages to be scanned
for viruses when Exim has been compiled with the content-scanning
extension, and a suitable virus scanner is installed.  If the message is
found to contain a virus, it is rejected with the given custom error
message.

     # warn    spam      = nobody
     #         message   = X-Spam_score: $spam_score\n\
     #                     X-Spam_score_int: $spam_score_int\n\
     #                     X-Spam_bar: $spam_bar\n\
     #                     X-Spam_report: $spam_report

   These lines are an example of how to arrange for messages to be
scanned by SpamAssassin when Exim has been compiled with the
content-scanning extension, and SpamAssassin has been installed.  The
SpamAssassin check is run with ‘nobody’ as its user parameter, and the
results are added to the message as a series of extra header line.  In
this case, the message is not rejected, whatever the spam score.

     accept

   This final line in the DATA ACL accepts the message unconditionally.


File: spec.info,  Node: Router configuration,  Next: Transport configuration,  Prev: ACL configuration,  Up: The default configuration file

7.4 Router configuration
========================

The router configuration comes next in the default configuration,
introduced by the line

     begin routers

   Routers are the modules in Exim that make decisions about where to
send messages.  An address is passed to each router, in turn, until it
is either accepted, or failed.  This means that the order in which you
define the routers matters.  Each router is fully described in its own
chapter later in this manual.  Here we give only brief overviews.

     # domain_literal:
     #   driver = ipliteral
     #   domains = !+local_domains
     #   transport = remote_smtp

   This router is commented out because the majority of sites do not
want to support domain literal addresses (those of the form
_user@[10.9.8.7]_).  If you uncomment this router, you also need to
uncomment the setting of ‘allow_domain_literals’ in the main part of the
configuration.

   Which router is used next depends upon whether or not the
ROUTER_SMARTHOST macro has been defined, per

     .ifdef ROUTER_SMARTHOST
     smarthost:
     #...
     .else
     dnslookup:
     #...
     .endif

   If ROUTER_SMARTHOST has been defined, either at the top of the file
or on the command-line, then we route all non-local mail to that
smarthost; otherwise, we'll perform DNS lookups for direct-to-MX lookup.
Any mail which is to a local domain will skip these routers because of
the ‘domains’ option.

     smarthost:
       driver = manualroute
       domains = ! +local_domains
       transport = smarthost_smtp
       route_data = ROUTER_SMARTHOST
       ignore_target_hosts = <; 0.0.0.0 ; 127.0.0.0/8 ; ::1
       no_more

   This router only handles mail which is not to any local domains; this
is specified by the line

     domains = ! +local_domains

   The ‘domains’ option lists the domains to which this router applies,
but the exclamation mark is a negation sign, so the router is used only
for domains that are not in the domain list called _local_domains_
(which was defined at the start of the configuration).  The plus sign
before _local_domains_ indicates that it is referring to a named list.
Addresses in other domains are passed on to the following routers.

   The name of the router driver is ‘manualroute’ because we are
manually specifying how mail should be routed onwards, instead of using
DNS MX. While the name of this router instance is arbitrary, the
‘driver’ option must be one of the driver modules that is in the Exim
binary.

   With no pre-conditions other than ‘domains’, all mail for non-local
domains will be handled by this router, and the ‘no_more’ setting will
ensure that no other routers will be used for messages matching the
pre-conditions.  See *note Router preconditions:: for more on how the
pre-conditions apply.  For messages which are handled by this router, we
provide a hostname to deliver to in ‘route_data’ and the macro supplies
the value; the address is then queued for the ‘smarthost_smtp’
transport.

     dnslookup:
       driver = dnslookup
       domains = ! +local_domains
       transport = remote_smtp
       ignore_target_hosts = 0.0.0.0 : 127.0.0.0/8
       no_more

   The ‘domains’ option behaves as per smarthost, above.

   The name of the router driver is ‘dnslookup’, and is specified by the
‘driver’ option.  Do not be confused by the fact that the name of this
router instance is the same as the name of the driver.  The instance
name is arbitrary, but the name set in the ‘driver’ option must be one
of the driver modules that is in the Exim binary.

   The ‘dnslookup’ router routes addresses by looking up their domains
in the DNS in order to obtain a list of hosts to which the address is
routed.  If the router succeeds, the address is queued for the
‘remote_smtp’ transport, as specified by the ‘transport’ option.  If the
router does not find the domain in the DNS, no further routers are tried
because of the ‘no_more’ setting, so the address fails and is bounced.

   The ‘ignore_target_hosts’ option specifies a list of IP addresses
that are to be entirely ignored.  This option is present because a
number of cases have been encountered where MX records in the DNS point
to host names whose IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 or are in the 127 subnet
(typically 127.0.0.1).  Completely ignoring these IP addresses causes
Exim to fail to route the email address, so it bounces.  Otherwise, Exim
would log a routing problem, and continue to try to deliver the message
periodically until the address timed out.

     system_aliases:
       driver = redirect
       allow_fail
       allow_defer
       data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/aliases}}
     # user = exim
       file_transport = address_file
       pipe_transport = address_pipe

   Control reaches this and subsequent routers only for addresses in the
local domains.  This router checks to see whether the local part is
defined as an alias in the ‘/etc/aliases’ file, and if so, redirects it
according to the data that it looks up from that file.  If no data is
found for the local part, the value of the ‘data’ option is empty,
causing the address to be passed to the next router.

   ‘/etc/aliases’ is a conventional name for the system aliases file
that is often used.  That is why it is referenced by from the default
configuration file.  However, you can change this by setting
SYSTEM_ALIASES_FILE in ‘Local/Makefile’ before building Exim.

     userforward:
       driver = redirect
       check_local_user
     # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
     # local_part_suffix_optional
       file = $home/.forward
     # allow_filter
       no_verify
       no_expn
       check_ancestor
       file_transport = address_file
       pipe_transport = address_pipe
       reply_transport = address_reply

   This is the most complicated router in the default configuration.  It
is another redirection router, but this time it is looking for
forwarding data set up by individual users.  The ‘check_local_user’
setting specifies a check that the local part of the address is the
login name of a local user.  If it is not, the router is skipped.  The
two commented options that follow ‘check_local_user’, namely:

     # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
     # local_part_suffix_optional

   show how you can specify the recognition of local part suffixes.  If
the first is uncommented, a suffix beginning with either a plus or a
minus sign, followed by any sequence of characters, is removed from the
local part and placed in the variable ‘$local_part_suffix’.  The second
suffix option specifies that the presence of a suffix in the local part
is optional.  When a suffix is present, the check for a local login uses
the local part with the suffix removed.

   When a local user account is found, the file called ‘.forward’ in the
user's home directory is consulted.  If it does not exist, or is empty,
the router declines.  Otherwise, the contents of ‘.forward’ are
interpreted as redirection data (see chapter *note The redirect router::
for more details).

   Traditional ‘.forward’ files contain just a list of addresses, pipes,
or files.  Exim supports this by default.  However, if ‘allow_filter’ is
set (it is commented out by default), the contents of the file are
interpreted as a set of Exim or Sieve filtering instructions, provided
the file begins with "#Exim filter" or "#Sieve filter", respectively.
User filtering is discussed in the separate document entitled _Exim's
interfaces to mail filtering_.

   The ‘no_verify’ and ‘no_expn’ options mean that this router is
skipped when verifying addresses, or when running as a consequence of an
SMTP EXPN command.  There are two reasons for doing this:

  1. Whether or not a local user has a ‘.forward’ file is not really
     relevant when checking an address for validity; it makes sense not
     to waste resources doing unnecessary work.

  2. More importantly, when Exim is verifying addresses or handling an
     EXPN command during an SMTP session, it is running as the Exim
     user, not as root.  The group is the Exim group, and no additional
     groups are set up.  It may therefore not be possible for Exim to
     read users' ‘.forward’ files at this time.

   The setting of ‘check_ancestor’ prevents the router from generating a
new address that is the same as any previous address that was
redirected.  (This works round a problem concerning a bad interaction
between aliasing and forwarding - see section *note Redirecting to a
local mailbox::).

   The final three option settings specify the transports that are to be
used when forwarding generates a direct delivery to a file, or to a
pipe, or sets up an auto-reply, respectively.  For example, if a
‘.forward’ file contains

     a.nother@elsewhere.example, /home/spqr/archive

   the delivery to ‘/home/spqr/archive’ is done by running the
‘address_file’ transport.

     localuser:
       driver = accept
       check_local_user
     # local_part_suffix = +* : -*
     # local_part_suffix_optional
       transport = local_delivery

   The final router sets up delivery into local mailboxes, provided that
the local part is the name of a local login, by accepting the address
and assigning it to the ‘local_delivery’ transport.  Otherwise, we have
reached the end of the routers, so the address is bounced.  The
commented suffix settings fulfil the same purpose as they do for the
‘userforward’ router.


File: spec.info,  Node: Transport configuration,  Next: Default retry rule,  Prev: Router configuration,  Up: The default configuration file

7.5 Transport configuration
===========================

Transports define mechanisms for actually delivering messages.  They
operate only when referenced from routers, so the order in which they
are defined does not matter.  The transports section of the
configuration starts with

     begin transports

   Two remote transports and four local transports are defined.

     remote_smtp:
       driver = smtp
       message_size_limit = ${if > {$max_received_linelength}{998} {1}{0}}
     .ifdef _HAVE_PRDR
       hosts_try_prdr = *
     .endif

   This transport is used for delivering messages over SMTP connections.
The list of remote hosts comes from the router.  The
‘message_size_limit’ usage is a hack to avoid sending on messages with
over-long lines.

   The ‘hosts_try_prdr’ option enables an efficiency SMTP option.  It is
negotiated between client and server and not expected to cause problems
but can be disabled if needed.  The built-in macro _HAVE_PRDR guards the
use of the ‘hosts_try_prdr’ configuration option.

   The other remote transport is used when delivering to a specific
smarthost with whom there must be some kind of existing relationship,
instead of the usual federated system.

     smarthost_smtp:
       driver = smtp
       message_size_limit = ${if > {$max_received_linelength}{998} {1}{0}}
       multi_domain
       #
     .ifdef _HAVE_TLS
       # Comment out any of these which you have to, then file a Support
       # request with your smarthost provider to get things fixed:
       hosts_require_tls = *
       tls_verify_hosts = *
       # As long as tls_verify_hosts is enabled, this this will have no effect,
       # but if you have to comment it out then this will at least log whether
       # you succeed or not:
       tls_try_verify_hosts = *
       #
       # The SNI name should match the name which we'll expect to verify;
       # many mail systems don't use SNI and this doesn't matter, but if it does,
       # we need to send a name which the remote site will recognize.
       # This _should_ be the name which the smarthost operators specified as
       # the hostname for sending your mail to.
       tls_sni = ROUTER_SMARTHOST
       #
     .ifdef _HAVE_OPENSSL
       tls_require_ciphers = HIGH:!aNULL:@STRENGTH
     .endif
     .ifdef _HAVE_GNUTLS
       tls_require_ciphers = SECURE192:-VERS-SSL3.0:-VERS-TLS1.0:-VERS-TLS1.1
     .endif
     .endif
     .ifdef _HAVE_PRDR
       hosts_try_prdr = *
     .endif

   After the same ‘message_size_limit’ hack, we then specify that this
Transport can handle messages to multiple domains in one run.  The
assumption here is that you're routing all non-local mail to the same
place and that place is happy to take all messages from you as quickly
as possible.  All other options depend upon built-in macros; if Exim was
built without TLS support then no other options are defined.  If TLS is
available, then we configure "stronger than default" TLS ciphersuites
and versions using the ‘tls_require_ciphers’ option, where the value to
be used depends upon the library providing TLS. Beyond that, the options
adopt the stance that you should have TLS support available from your
smarthost on today's Internet, so we turn on requiring TLS for the mail
to be delivered, and requiring that the certificate be valid, and match
the expected hostname.  The ‘tls_sni’ option can be used by service
providers to select an appropriate certificate to present to you and
here we re-use the ROUTER_SMARTHOST macro, because that is unaffected by
CNAMEs present in DNS. You want to specify the hostname which you'll
expect to validate for, and that should not be subject to insecure
tampering via DNS results.

   For the ‘hosts_try_prdr’ option see the previous transport.

   All other options are defaulted.

     local_delivery:
       driver = appendfile
       file = /var/mail/$local_part_data
       delivery_date_add
       envelope_to_add
       return_path_add
     # group = mail
     # mode = 0660

   This ‘appendfile’ transport is used for local delivery to user
mailboxes in traditional BSD mailbox format.

   We prefer to avoid using ‘$local_part’ directly to define the mailbox
filename, as it is provided by a potential bad actor.  Instead we use
‘$local_part_data’, the result of looking up ‘$local_part’ in the user
database (done by using ‘check_local_user’ in the the router).

   By default ‘appendfile’ runs under the uid and gid of the local user,
which requires the sticky bit to be set on the ‘/var/mail’ directory.
Some systems use the alternative approach of running mail deliveries
under a particular group instead of using the sticky bit.  The commented
options show how this can be done.

   Exim adds three headers to the message as it delivers it:
_Delivery-date:_, _Envelope-to:_ and _Return-path:_.  This action is
requested by the three similarly-named options above.

     address_pipe:
       driver = pipe
       return_output

   This transport is used for handling deliveries to pipes that are
generated by redirection (aliasing or users' ‘.forward’ files).  The
‘return_output’ option specifies that any output on stdout or stderr
generated by the pipe is to be returned to the sender.

     address_file:
       driver = appendfile
       delivery_date_add
       envelope_to_add
       return_path_add

   This transport is used for handling deliveries to files that are
generated by redirection.  The name of the file is not specified in this
instance of ‘appendfile’, because it comes from the ‘redirect’ router.

     address_reply:
       driver = autoreply

   This transport is used for handling automatic replies generated by
users' filter files.


File: spec.info,  Node: Default retry rule,  Next: Rewriting configuration,  Prev: Transport configuration,  Up: The default configuration file

7.6 Default retry rule
======================

The retry section of the configuration file contains rules which affect
the way Exim retries deliveries that cannot be completed at the first
attempt.  It is introduced by the line

     begin retry

   In the default configuration, there is just one rule, which applies
to all errors:

     *   *   F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,4d,6h

   This causes any temporarily failing address to be retried every 15
minutes for 2 hours, then at intervals starting at one hour and
increasing by a factor of 1.5 until 16 hours have passed, then every 6
hours up to 4 days.  If an address is not delivered after 4 days of
temporary failure, it is bounced.  The time is measured from first
failure, not from the time the message was received.

   If the retry section is removed from the configuration, or is empty
(that is, if no retry rules are defined), Exim will not retry
deliveries.  This turns temporary errors into permanent errors.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting configuration,  Next: Authenticators configuration,  Prev: Default retry rule,  Up: The default configuration file

7.7 Rewriting configuration
===========================

The rewriting section of the configuration, introduced by

     begin rewrite

   contains rules for rewriting addresses in messages as they arrive.
There are no rewriting rules in the default configuration file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Authenticators configuration,  Prev: Rewriting configuration,  Up: The default configuration file

7.8 Authenticators configuration
================================

The authenticators section of the configuration, introduced by

     begin authenticators

   defines mechanisms for the use of the SMTP AUTH command.  The default
configuration file contains two commented-out example authenticators
which support plaintext username/password authentication using the
standard PLAIN mechanism and the traditional but non-standard LOGIN
mechanism, with Exim acting as the server.  PLAIN and LOGIN are enough
to support most MUA software.

   The example PLAIN authenticator looks like this:

     #PLAIN:
     #  driver                  = plaintext
     #  server_set_id           = $auth2
     #  server_prompts          = :
     #  server_condition        = Authentication is not yet configured
     #  server_advertise_condition = ${if def:tls_in_cipher }

   And the example LOGIN authenticator looks like this:

     #LOGIN:
     #  driver                  = plaintext
     #  server_set_id           = $auth1
     #  server_prompts          = <| Username: | Password:
     #  server_condition        = Authentication is not yet configured
     #  server_advertise_condition = ${if def:tls_in_cipher }

   The ‘server_set_id’ option makes Exim remember the authenticated
username in ‘$authenticated_id’, which can be used later in ACLs or
routers.  The ‘server_prompts’ option configures the ‘plaintext’
authenticator so that it implements the details of the specific
authentication mechanism, i.e.  PLAIN or LOGIN. The
‘server_advertise_condition’ setting controls when Exim offers
authentication to clients; in the examples, this is only when TLS or SSL
has been started, so to enable the authenticators you also need to add
support for TLS as described in section *note Main configuration
settings::.

   The ‘server_condition’ setting defines how to verify that the
username and password are correct.  In the examples it just produces an
error message.  To make the authenticators work, you can use a string
expansion expression like one of the examples in chapter *note The
plaintext authenticator::.

   Beware that the sequence of the parameters to PLAIN and LOGIN differ;
the usercode and password are in different positions.  Chapter *note The
plaintext authenticator:: covers both.


File: spec.info,  Node: Regular expressions,  Next: File and database lookups,  Prev: The default configuration file,  Up: Top

8 Regular expressions
*********************

Exim supports the use of regular expressions in many of its options.  It
uses the PCRE2 regular expression library; this provides regular
expression matching that is compatible with Perl 5.  The syntax and
semantics of regular expressions is discussed in online Perl manpages,
in many Perl reference books, and also in Jeffrey Friedl's _Mastering
Regular Expressions_, which is also available for free (see, for
example, *https://archive.org/search?query=friedl+regular+expressions
(https://archive.org/search?query=friedl+regular+expressions)*).

   The documentation for the syntax and semantics of the regular
expressions that are supported by PCRE2 is included in the PCRE2
distribution, and no further description is included here.  The PCRE2
functions are called from Exim using the default option settings (that
is, with no PCRE2 options set), except that the PCRE2_CASELESS option is
set when the matching is required to be case-insensitive.

   In most cases, when a regular expression is required in an Exim
configuration, it has to start with a circumflex, in order to
distinguish it from plain text or an "ends with" wildcard.  In this
example of a configuration setting, the second item in the
colon-separated list is a regular expression.

     domains = a.b.c : ^\\d{3} : *.y.z : ...

   The doubling of the backslash is required because of string expansion
that precedes interpretation - see section *note Literal text in
expanded strings:: for more discussion of this issue, and a way of
avoiding the need for doubling backslashes.  The regular expression that
is eventually used in this example contains just one backslash.  The
circumflex is included in the regular expression, and has the normal
effect of "anchoring" it to the start of the string that is being
matched.

   There are, however, two cases where a circumflex is not required for
the recognition of a regular expression: these are the ‘match’ condition
in a string expansion, and the ‘matches’ condition in an Exim filter
file.  In these cases, the relevant string is always treated as a
regular expression; if it does not start with a circumflex, the
expression is not anchored, and can match anywhere in the subject
string.

   In all cases, if you want a regular expression to match at the end of
a string, you must code the $ metacharacter to indicate this.  For
example:

     domains = ^\\d{3}\\.example

   matches the domain _123.example_, but it also matches
_123.example.com_.  You need to use:

     domains = ^\\d{3}\\.example\$

   if you want _example_ to be the top-level domain.  The backslash
before the $ is needed because string expansion also interprets dollar
characters.


File: spec.info,  Node: File and database lookups,  Next: Domain; host; and address lists,  Prev: Regular expressions,  Up: Top

9 File and database lookups
***************************

Exim can be configured to look up data in files or databases as it
processes messages.  Two different kinds of syntax are used:

  1. A string that is to be expanded may contain explicit lookup
     requests.  These cause parts of the string to be replaced by data
     that is obtained from the lookup.  Lookups of this type are
     conditional expansion items.  Different results can be defined for
     the cases of lookup success and failure.  See chapter *note String
     expansions::, where string expansions are described in detail.  The
     key for the lookup is *specified* as part of the string to be
     expanded.

  2. Lists of domains, hosts, and email addresses can contain lookup
     requests as a way of avoiding excessively long linear lists.  In
     this case, the data that is returned by the lookup is often (but
     not always) discarded; whether the lookup succeeds or fails is what
     really counts.  These kinds of list are described in chapter *note
     Domain, host, address, and local part lists: Domain; host; and
     address lists.  Depending on the lookup type (see below) the key
     for the lookup may need to be *specified* as above or may be
     *implicit*, given by the context in which the list is being
     checked.

   String expansions, lists, and lookups interact with each other in
such a way that there is no order in which to describe any one of them
that does not involve references to the others.  Each of these three
chapters makes more sense if you have read the other two first.  If you
are reading this for the first time, be aware that some of it will make
a lot more sense after you have read chapters *note Domain, host,
address, and local part lists: Domain; host; and address lists. and
*note String expansions::.

* Menu:

* Examples of different lookup syntax::
* Lookup types::
* Single-key lookup types::
* Query-style lookup types::
* Temporary errors in lookups::
* Default values in single-key lookups::
* Partial matching in single-key lookups::
* Lookup caching::
* Quoting lookup data::
* More about dnsdb::
* More about LDAP::
* More about NIS+::
* SQL lookups::


File: spec.info,  Node: Examples of different lookup syntax,  Next: Lookup types,  Up: File and database lookups

9.1 Examples of different lookup syntax
=======================================

It is easy to confuse the two different kinds of lookup, especially as
lists (which may contain elements that are the second kind of lookup)
are always expanded before being processed as lists.  Therefore, they
may also contain lookups of the first kind.  Be careful to distinguish
between the following two examples:

     domains = ${lookup{$sender_host_address}lsearch{/some/file}}
     domains = lsearch;/some/file

   • The first uses a string expansion, the result of which must be a
     domain list.  The key for an expansion-style lookup must be given
     explicitly.  No strings have been specified for a successful or a
     failing lookup; the defaults in this case are the looked-up data
     and an empty string, respectively.  The expansion takes place
     before the string is processed as a list, and the file that is
     searched could contain lines like this:

          192.168.3.4: domain1:domain2:...
          192.168.1.9: domain3:domain4:...

     When the lookup succeeds, the result of the expansion is a list of
     domains (and possibly other types of item that are allowed in
     domain lists).  The result of the expansion is not tainted.

   • In the second example, the lookup is a single item in a domain
     list.  It causes Exim to use a lookup to see if the domain that is
     being processed can be found in the file.  The file could contains
     lines like this:

          domain1:
          domain2:

     Any data that follows the keys is not relevant when checking that
     the domain matches the list item.

     The key for a list-style lookup is implicit, from the lookup
     context, if the lookup is a single-key type (see below).  For
     query-style lookup types the query must be given explicitly.

   It is possible, though no doubt confusing, to use both kinds of
lookup at once.  Consider a file containing lines like this:

     192.168.5.6: lsearch;/another/file

   If the value of ‘$sender_host_address’ is 192.168.5.6, expansion of
the first ‘domains’ setting above generates the second setting, which
therefore causes a second lookup to occur.

   The lookup type may optionally be followed by a comma and a
comma-separated list of options.  Each option is a "name=value" pair.
Whether an option is meaningful depends on the lookup type.

   All lookups support the option "cache=", with values "no_rd", "no_wr"
or "no".  If this is given with "no" or "no_rd" then the cache that Exim
manages for lookup results is not checked before doing the lookup.  If
this is given with "no" or "no_wr" then the result of the lookup is not
written to the cache.

   The rest of this chapter describes the different lookup types that
are available.  Any of them can be used in any part of the configuration
where a lookup is permitted.


File: spec.info,  Node: Lookup types,  Next: Single-key lookup types,  Prev: Examples of different lookup syntax,  Up: File and database lookups

9.2 Lookup types
================

Two different types of data lookup are implemented:

   • The _single-key_ type requires the specification of a file in which
     to look, and a single key to search for.  The key must be a
     non-empty string for the lookup to succeed.  The lookup type
     determines how the file is searched.  The file string may not be
     tainted.

     All single-key lookups support the option "ret=key".  If this is
     given and the lookup (either underlying implementation or cached
     value) returns data, the result is replaced with a non-tainted
     version of the lookup key.

   • The _query-style_ type accepts a generalized database query.  No
     particular key value is assumed by Exim for query-style lookups.
     You can use whichever Exim variables you need to construct the
     database query.

     For the string-expansion kind of lookups, the query is given in the
     first bracketed argument of the ‘${lookup ...}’ expansion.  For the
     list-argument kind of lookup the query is given by the remainder of
     the list item after the first semicolon.

     If tainted data is used in the query then it should be quoted by
     using the *${quote_*<_lookup-type_>*:*<_string_>*}* expansion
     operator appropriate for the lookup.

   The code for each lookup type is in a separate source file that is
included in the binary of Exim only if the corresponding compile-time
option is set.  The default settings in ‘src/EDITME’ are:

     LOOKUP_DBM=yes
     LOOKUP_LSEARCH=yes

   which means that only linear searching and DBM lookups are included
by default.  For some types of lookup (e.g.  SQL databases), you need to
install appropriate libraries and header files before building Exim.


File: spec.info,  Node: Single-key lookup types,  Next: Query-style lookup types,  Prev: Lookup types,  Up: File and database lookups

9.3 Single-key lookup types
===========================

The following single-key lookup types are implemented:

* Menu:

* cdb::
* dbm::
* dbmjz::
* dbmnz::
* dsearch::
* iplsearch::
* json::
* lmdb::
* lsearch::
* nis::
* (n)wildlsearch: [n]wildlsearch.
* Public Suffix List::
* spf::


File: spec.info,  Node: cdb,  Next: dbm,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.1 cdb
---------

The given file is searched as a Constant DataBase file, using the key
string without a terminating binary zero.  The cdb format is designed
for indexed files that are read frequently and never updated, except by
total re-creation.  As such, it is particularly suitable for large files
containing aliases or other indexed data referenced by an MTA.
Information about cdb and tools for building the files can be found in
several places:

     https://cr.yp.to/cdb.html
     https://www.corpit.ru/mjt/tinycdb.html
     https://packages.debian.org/stable/utils/freecdb
     https://github.com/philpennock/cdbtools (in Go)

   A cdb distribution is not needed in order to build Exim with cdb
support, because the code for reading cdb files is included directly in
Exim itself.  However, no means of building or testing cdb files is
provided with Exim, so you need to obtain a cdb distribution in order to
do this.


File: spec.info,  Node: dbm,  Next: dbmjz,  Prev: cdb,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.2 dbm
---------

Calls to DBM library functions are used to extract data from the given
DBM file by looking up the record with the given key.

   DBM files can be generated using the ‘exim_dbmbuild’ utility.  Each
entry in the database consists (only) of a key and some data.  The
underlying support for these lookups is that used for Exim's hints
databases, so whichever DB mechanism chosen at build time for those is
also used here.

   A terminating binary zero is included in the key that is passed to
the DBM library.  See section *note DBM libraries:: for a discussion of
DBM libraries.

   For all versions of Berkeley DB, Exim uses the DB_HASH style of
database when building DBM files using the ‘exim_dbmbuild’ utility.
However, when using Berkeley DB versions 3 or 4, it opens existing
databases for reading with the DB_UNKNOWN option.  This enables it to
handle any of the types of database that the library supports, and can
be useful for accessing DBM files created by other applications.  (For
earlier DB versions, DB_HASH is always used.)


File: spec.info,  Node: dbmjz,  Next: dbmnz,  Prev: dbm,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.3 dbmjz
-----------

This is the same as ‘dbm’, except that the lookup key is interpreted as
an Exim list; the elements of the list are joined together with ASCII
NUL characters to form the lookup key.  An example usage would be to
authenticate incoming SMTP calls using the passwords from Cyrus SASL's
‘/etc/sasldb2’ file with the ‘gsasl’ authenticator or Exim's own
‘cram_md5’ authenticator.


File: spec.info,  Node: dbmnz,  Next: dsearch,  Prev: dbmjz,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.4 dbmnz
-----------

This is the same as ‘dbm’, except that a terminating binary zero is not
included in the key that is passed to the DBM library.  You may need
this if you want to look up data in files that are created by or shared
with some other application that does not use terminating zeros.  For
example, you need to use ‘dbmnz’ rather than ‘dbm’ if you want to
authenticate incoming SMTP calls using the passwords from Courier's
‘/etc/userdbshadow.dat’ file.  Exim's utility program for creating DBM
files (_exim_dbmbuild_) includes the zeros by default, but has an option
to omit them (see section *note Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild): Making
DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].).


File: spec.info,  Node: dsearch,  Next: iplsearch,  Prev: dbmnz,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.5 dsearch
-------------

The given file must be an absolute directory path; this is searched for
an entry whose name is the key by calling the ‘lstat()’ function.
Unless the options (below) permit a path, the key may not contain any
forward slash characters.  If ‘lstat()’ succeeds then so does the
lookup.  The result is regarded as untainted.

   Options for the lookup can be given by appending them after the word
"dsearch", separated by a comma.  Options, if present, are a
comma-separated list having each element starting with a tag name and an
equals.

   Three options are supported, for the return value and for filtering
match candidates.  The "ret" option requests an alternate result value
of the entire path for the entry.  Example:

     ${lookup {passwd} dsearch,ret=full {/etc}}

   The default result is just the requested entry.

   The "filter" option requests that only directory entries of a given
type are matched.  The match value is one of "file", "dir" or "subdir"
(the latter not matching "."  or "..").  Example:

     ${lookup {passwd} dsearch,filter=file {/etc}}

   The default matching is for any entry type, including directories and
symlinks.

   The "key" option relaxes the restriction that only a simple path
component can be searched for, to permit a sequence of path components.
Example:

     ${lookup {foo/bar} dsearch,key=path {/etc}}

   If this option is used, a ".."  component in the key is specifically
disallowed.  The default operation is that the key may only be a single
path component.

   Lookups violating restrictions will behave as for no match.

   An example of how this lookup can be used to support virtual domains
is given in section *note Virtual domains::.


File: spec.info,  Node: iplsearch,  Next: json,  Prev: dsearch,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.6 iplsearch
---------------

The given file is a text file containing keys and data.  A key is
terminated by a colon or white space or the end of the line.  The keys
in the file must be IP addresses, or IP addresses with CIDR masks.  Keys
that involve IPv6 addresses must be enclosed in quotes to prevent the
first internal colon being interpreted as a key terminator.  For
example:

     1.2.3.4:           data for 1.2.3.4
     192.168.0.0/16:    data for 192.168.0.0/16
     "abcd::cdab":      data for abcd::cdab
     "abcd:abcd::/32"   data for abcd:abcd::/32

   The key for an ‘iplsearch’ lookup must be an IP address (without a
mask).  The file is searched linearly, using the CIDR masks where
present, until a matching key is found.  The first key that matches is
used; there is no attempt to find a "best" match.  Apart from the way
the keys are matched, the processing for ‘iplsearch’ is the same as for
‘lsearch’.

   *Warning 1*: Unlike most other single-key lookup types, a file of
data for ‘iplsearch’ can _not_ be turned into a DBM or cdb file, because
those lookup types support only literal keys.

   *Warning 2*: In a host list, you must always use ‘net-iplsearch’ so
that the implicit key is the host's IP address rather than its name (see
section *note Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host
address::).

   *Warning 3*: Do not use an IPv4-mapped IPv6 address for a key; use
the IPv4, in dotted-quad form.  (Exim converts IPv4-mapped IPv6
addresses to this notation before executing the lookup.)

   One option is supported, "ret=full", to request the return of the
entire line rather than omitting the key portion.  Note however that the
key portion will have been de-quoted.


File: spec.info,  Node: json,  Next: lmdb,  Prev: iplsearch,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.7 json
----------

The given file is a text file with a JSON structure.  An element of the
structure is extracted, defined by the search key.  The key is a list of
subelement selectors (colon-separated by default but changeable in the
usual way) which are applied in turn to select smaller and smaller
portions of the JSON structure.  If a selector is numeric, it must apply
to a JSON array; the (zero-based) numbered array element is selected.
Otherwise it must apply to a JSON object; the named element is selected.
The final resulting element can be a simple JSON type or a JSON object
or array; for the latter two a string-representation of the JSON is
returned.  For elements of type string, the returned value is de-quoted.


File: spec.info,  Node: lmdb,  Next: lsearch,  Prev: json,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.8 lmdb
----------

The given file is an LMDB database.  LMDB is a memory-mapped key-value
store, with API modeled loosely on that of BerkeleyDB. See *LMDB
(https://symas.com/products/lightning-memory-mapped-database/)* for the
feature set and operation modes.

   Exim provides read-only access via the LMDB C library.  The library
can be obtained from *https://github.com/LMDB/lmdb
(https://github.com/LMDB/lmdb)* or your operating system package
repository.  To enable LMDB support in Exim set LOOKUP_LMDB=yes in
‘Local/Makefile’.

   You will need to separately create the LMDB database file, possibly
using the "mdb_load" utility.


File: spec.info,  Node: lsearch,  Next: nis,  Prev: lmdb,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.9 lsearch
-------------

The given file is a text file that is searched linearly for a line
beginning with the search key, terminated by a colon or white space or
the end of the line.  The search is case-insensitive; that is, upper and
lower case letters are treated as the same.  The first occurrence of the
key that is found in the file is used.

   White space between the key and the colon is permitted.  The
remainder of the line, with leading and trailing white space removed, is
the data.  This can be continued onto subsequent lines by starting them
with any amount of white space, but only a single space character is
included in the data at such a junction.  If the data begins with a
colon, the key must be terminated by a colon, for example:

     baduser:  :fail:

   Empty lines and lines beginning with # are ignored, even if they
occur in the middle of an item.  This is the traditional textual format
of alias files.  Note that the keys in an ‘lsearch’ file are literal
strings.  There is no wildcarding of any kind.

   In most ‘lsearch’ files, keys are not required to contain colons or #
characters, or white space.  However, if you need this feature, it is
available.  If a key begins with a doublequote character, it is
terminated only by a matching quote (or end of line), and the normal
escaping rules apply to its contents (see section *note String
values::).  An optional colon is permitted after quoted keys (exactly as
for unquoted keys).  There is no special handling of quotes for the data
part of an ‘lsearch’ line.


File: spec.info,  Node: nis,  Next: [n]wildlsearch,  Prev: lsearch,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.10 nis
----------

The given file is the name of a NIS map, and a NIS lookup is done with
the given key, without a terminating binary zero.  There is a variant
called ‘nis0’ which does include the terminating binary zero in the key.
This is reportedly needed for Sun-style alias files.  Exim does not
recognize NIS aliases; the full map names must be used.


File: spec.info,  Node: [n]wildlsearch,  Next: Public Suffix List,  Prev: nis,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.11 (n)wildlsearch
---------------------

‘wildlsearch’ or ‘nwildlsearch’: These search a file linearly, like
‘lsearch’, but instead of being interpreted as a literal string, each
key in the file may be wildcarded.  The difference between these two
lookup types is that for ‘wildlsearch’, each key in the file is
string-expanded before being used, whereas for ‘nwildlsearch’, no
expansion takes place.

   Like ‘lsearch’, the testing is done case-insensitively.  However,
keys in the file that are regular expressions can be made case-sensitive
by the use of ‘(-i)’ within the pattern.  The following forms of
wildcard are recognized:

  1. The string may begin with an asterisk to mean "ends with".  For
     example:

          *.a.b.c       data for anything.a.b.c
          *fish         data for anythingfish

  2. The string may begin with a circumflex to indicate a regular
     expression.  For example, for ‘wildlsearch’:

          ^\N\d+\.a\.b\N    data for <digits>.a.b

     Note the use of ‘\N’ to disable expansion of the contents of the
     regular expression.  If you are using ‘nwildlsearch’, where the
     keys are not string-expanded, the equivalent entry is:

          ^\d+\.a\.b        data for <digits>.a.b

     The case-insensitive flag is set at the start of compiling the
     regular expression, but it can be turned off by using ‘(-i)’ at an
     appropriate point.  For example, to make the entire pattern
     case-sensitive:

          ^(?-i)\d+\.a\.b        data for <digits>.a.b

     The circumflex remains part of the regular expression and has the
     usual anchor effect.

     If the regular expression contains white space or colon characters,
     you must either quote it (see ‘lsearch’ above), or represent these
     characters in other ways.  For example, ‘\s’ can be used for white
     space and ‘\x3A’ for a colon.  This may be easier than quoting,
     because if you quote, you have to escape all the backslashes inside
     the quotes.

     *Note*: It is not possible to capture substrings in a regular
     expression match for later use, because the results of all lookups
     are cached.  If a lookup is repeated, the result is taken from the
     cache, and no actual pattern matching takes place.  The values of
     all the numeric variables are unset after a ‘(n)wildlsearch’ match.

  3. Although I cannot see it being of much use, the general matching
     function that is used to implement ‘(n)wildlsearch’ means that the
     string may begin with a lookup name terminated by a semicolon, and
     followed by lookup data.  For example:

          cdb;/some/file  data for keys that match the file

     The data that is obtained from the nested lookup is discarded.

   Keys that do not match any of these patterns are interpreted
literally.  The continuation rules for the data are the same as for
‘lsearch’, and keys may be followed by optional colons.

   *Warning*: Unlike most other single-key lookup types, a file of data
for ‘(n)wildlsearch’ can _not_ be turned into a DBM or cdb file, because
those lookup types support only literal keys.


File: spec.info,  Node: Public Suffix List,  Next: spf,  Prev: [n]wildlsearch,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.12 Public Suffix List
-------------------------

‘psl’ or ‘regdom’: These search a Public Suffix List file.  For both,
the key is a candidate domain.  The ‘psl’ lookup returns the public
suffix for the domain; the ‘regdom’ lookup returns the registered
domain.

   It is the operator's responsibility to provide an up-to-date PSL
file.  Many OS distributions provide one (Eg.  package
"publicsuffix-list" from Fedora; "publicsuffix" from Debian), or one
could be regularly fetched from *publicsuffix.org
(https://publicsuffix.org/)*.

   The result will have the same A-label/U-label state as the key, and
will be untainted.


File: spec.info,  Node: spf,  Prev: Public Suffix List,  Up: Single-key lookup types

9.3.13 spf
----------

If Exim is built with SPF support, manual lookups can be done (as
opposed to the standard ACL condition method).  For details see section
*note SPF (Sender Policy Framework): SPF [Sender Policy Framework].


File: spec.info,  Node: Query-style lookup types,  Next: Temporary errors in lookups,  Prev: Single-key lookup types,  Up: File and database lookups

9.4 Query-style lookup types
============================

The supported query-style lookup types are listed below.  Further
details about many of them are given in later sections.

* Menu:

* dnsdb::
* ldap::
* mysql::
* nisplus::
* oracle::
* passwd::
* pgsql::
* redis::
* sqlite::
* testdb::
* whoson::


File: spec.info,  Node: dnsdb,  Next: ldap,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.1 dnsdb
-----------

This does a DNS search for one or more records whose domain names are
given in the supplied query.  The resulting data is the contents of the
records.  See section *note More about dnsdb::.


File: spec.info,  Node: ldap,  Next: mysql,  Prev: dnsdb,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.2 ldap
----------

This does an LDAP lookup using a query in the form of a URL, and returns
attributes from a single entry.  There is a variant called ‘ldapm’ that
permits values from multiple entries to be returned.  A third variant
called ‘ldapdn’ returns the Distinguished Name of a single entry instead
of any attribute values.  See section *note More about LDAP::.


File: spec.info,  Node: mysql,  Next: nisplus,  Prev: ldap,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.3 mysql
-----------

The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to a MySQL
(MariaDB) database.  See section *note SQL lookups::.


File: spec.info,  Node: nisplus,  Next: oracle,  Prev: mysql,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.4 nisplus
-------------

This does a NIS+ lookup using a query that can specify the name of the
field to be returned.  See section *note More about NIS+::.


File: spec.info,  Node: oracle,  Next: passwd,  Prev: nisplus,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.5 oracle
------------

The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to an Oracle
database.  See section *note SQL lookups::.


File: spec.info,  Node: passwd,  Next: pgsql,  Prev: oracle,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.6 passwd
------------

This is a query-style lookup with queries that are just user names.  The
lookup calls ‘getpwnam()’ to interrogate the system password data, and
on success, the result string is the same as you would get from an
‘lsearch’ lookup on a traditional ‘/etc/passwd file’, though with ‘*’
for the password value.  For example:

     *:42:42:King Rat:/home/kr:/bin/bash


File: spec.info,  Node: pgsql,  Next: redis,  Prev: passwd,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.7 pgsql
-----------

The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to a
PostgreSQL database.  See section *note SQL lookups::.


File: spec.info,  Node: redis,  Next: sqlite,  Prev: pgsql,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.8 redis
-----------

The format of the query is either a simple get or simple set, passed to
a Redis database.  See section *note SQL lookups::.


File: spec.info,  Node: sqlite,  Next: testdb,  Prev: redis,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.9 sqlite
------------

The format of the query is an SQL statement that is passed to an SQLite
database.  See section *note More about SQLite::.


File: spec.info,  Node: testdb,  Next: whoson,  Prev: sqlite,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.10 testdb
-------------

This is a lookup type that is used for testing Exim.  It is not likely
to be useful in normal operation.


File: spec.info,  Node: whoson,  Prev: testdb,  Up: Query-style lookup types

9.4.11 whoson
-------------

_Whoson_ (*http://whoson.sourceforge.net
(http://whoson.sourceforge.net)*) is a protocol that allows a server to
check whether a particular (dynamically allocated) IP address is
currently allocated to a known (trusted) user and, optionally, to obtain
the identity of the said user.  For SMTP servers, _Whoson_ was popular
at one time for "POP before SMTP" authentication, but that approach has
been superseded by SMTP authentication.  In Exim, _Whoson_ can be used
to implement "POP before SMTP" checking using ACL statements such as

     require condition = \
       ${lookup whoson {$sender_host_address}{yes}{no}}

   The query consists of a single IP address.  The value returned is the
name of the authenticated user, which is stored in the variable
‘$value’.  However, in this example, the data in ‘$value’ is not used;
the result of the lookup is one of the fixed strings "yes" or "no".


File: spec.info,  Node: Temporary errors in lookups,  Next: Default values in single-key lookups,  Prev: Query-style lookup types,  Up: File and database lookups

9.5 Temporary errors in lookups
===============================

Lookup functions can return temporary error codes if the lookup cannot
be completed.  For example, an SQL or LDAP database might be
unavailable.  For this reason, it is not advisable to use a lookup that
might do this for critical options such as a list of local domains.

   When a lookup cannot be completed in a router or transport, delivery
of the message (to the relevant address) is deferred, as for any other
temporary error.  In other circumstances Exim may assume the lookup has
failed, or may give up altogether.


File: spec.info,  Node: Default values in single-key lookups,  Next: Partial matching in single-key lookups,  Prev: Temporary errors in lookups,  Up: File and database lookups

9.6 Default values in single-key lookups
========================================

In this context, a "default value" is a value specified by the
administrator that is to be used if a lookup fails.

   *Note:* This section applies only to single-key lookups.  For
query-style lookups, the facilities of the query language must be used.
An attempt to specify a default for a query-style lookup provokes an
error.

   If "*" is added to a single-key lookup type (for example, ‘lsearch*’)
and the initial lookup fails, the key "*" is looked up in the file to
provide a default value.  See also the section on partial matching
below.

   Alternatively, if "*@" is added to a single-key lookup type (for
example ‘dbm*@’) then, if the initial lookup fails and the key contains
an @ character, a second lookup is done with everything before the last
@ replaced by *.  This makes it possible to provide per-domain defaults
in alias files that include the domains in the keys.  If the second
lookup fails (or doesn't take place because there is no @ in the key),
"*" is looked up.  For example, a ‘redirect’ router might contain:

     data = ${lookup{$local_part@$domain}lsearch*@{/etc/mix-aliases}}

   Suppose the address that is being processed is _jane@eyre.example_.
Exim looks up these keys, in this order:

     jane@eyre.example
     *@eyre.example
     *

   The data is taken from whichever key it finds first.  *Note*: In an
‘lsearch’ file, this does not mean the first of these keys in the file.
A complete scan is done for each key, and only if it is not found at all
does Exim move on to try the next key.


File: spec.info,  Node: Partial matching in single-key lookups,  Next: Lookup caching,  Prev: Default values in single-key lookups,  Up: File and database lookups

9.7 Partial matching in single-key lookups
==========================================

The normal operation of a single-key lookup is to search the file for an
exact match with the given key.  However, in a number of situations
where domains are being looked up, it is useful to be able to do partial
matching.  In this case, information in the file that has a key starting
with "*."  is matched by any domain that ends with the components that
follow the full stop.  For example, if a key in a DBM file is

     *.dates.fict.example

   then when partial matching is enabled this is matched by (amongst
others) _2001.dates.fict.example_ and _1984.dates.fict.example_.  It is
also matched by _dates.fict.example_, if that does not appear as a
separate key in the file.

   *Note*: Partial matching is not available for query-style lookups.
It is also not available for any lookup items in address lists (see
section *note Address lists::).

   Partial matching is implemented by doing a series of separate lookups
using keys constructed by modifying the original subject key.  This
means that it can be used with any of the single-key lookup types,
provided that partial matching keys beginning with a special prefix
(default "*.")  are included in the data file.  Keys in the file that do
not begin with the prefix are matched only by unmodified subject keys
when partial matching is in use.

   Partial matching is requested by adding the string "partial-" to the
front of the name of a single-key lookup type, for example,
‘partial-dbm’.  When this is done, the subject key is first looked up
unmodified; if that fails, "*."  is added at the start of the subject
key, and it is looked up again.  If that fails, further lookups are
tried with dot-separated components removed from the start of the
subject key, one-by-one, and "*."  added on the front of what remains.

   A minimum number of two non-* components are required.  This can be
adjusted by including a number before the hyphen in the search type.
For example, ‘partial3-lsearch’ specifies a minimum of three non-*
components in the modified keys.  Omitting the number is equivalent to
"partial2-".  If the subject key is _2250.dates.fict.example_ then the
following keys are looked up when the minimum number of non-* components
is two:

     2250.dates.fict.example
     *.2250.dates.fict.example
     *.dates.fict.example
     *.fict.example

   As soon as one key in the sequence is successfully looked up, the
lookup finishes.

   The use of "*."  as the partial matching prefix is a default that can
be changed.  The motivation for this feature is to allow Exim to operate
with file formats that are used by other MTAs.  A different prefix can
be supplied in parentheses instead of the hyphen after "partial".  For
example:

     domains = partial(.)lsearch;/some/file

   In this example, if the domain is _a.b.c_, the sequence of lookups is
‘a.b.c’, ‘.a.b.c’, and ‘.b.c’ (the default minimum of 2 non-wild
components is unchanged).  The prefix may consist of any punctuation
characters other than a closing parenthesis.  It may be empty, for
example:

     domains = partial1()cdb;/some/file

   For this example, if the domain is _a.b.c_, the sequence of lookups
is ‘a.b.c’, ‘b.c’, and ‘c’.

   If "partial0" is specified, what happens at the end (when the lookup
with just one non-wild component has failed, and the original key is
shortened right down to the null string) depends on the prefix:

   • If the prefix has zero length, the whole lookup fails.

   • If the prefix has length 1, a lookup for just the prefix is done.
     For example, the final lookup for "partial0(.)"  is for ‘.’ alone.

   • Otherwise, if the prefix ends in a dot, the dot is removed, and the
     remainder is looked up.  With the default prefix, therefore, the
     final lookup is for "*" on its own.

   • Otherwise, the whole prefix is looked up.

   If the search type ends in "*" or "*@" (see section *note Default
values in single-key lookups:: above), the search for an ultimate
default that this implies happens after all partial lookups have failed.
If "partial0" is specified, adding "*" to the search type has no effect
with the default prefix, because the "*" key is already included in the
sequence of partial lookups.  However, there might be a use for lookup
types such as "partial0(.)lsearch*".

   The use of "*" in lookup partial matching differs from its use as a
wildcard in domain lists and the like.  Partial matching works only in
terms of dot-separated components; a key such as ‘*fict.example’ in a
database file is useless, because the asterisk in a partial matching
subject key is always followed by a dot.

   When the lookup is done from a string-expansion, the variables ‘$1’
and ‘$2’ contain the wild and non-wild parts of the key during the
expansion of the replacement text.  They return to their previous values
at the end of the lookup item.


File: spec.info,  Node: Lookup caching,  Next: Quoting lookup data,  Prev: Partial matching in single-key lookups,  Up: File and database lookups

9.8 Lookup caching
==================

Exim caches all lookup results in order to avoid needless repetition of
lookups.  However, because (apart from the daemon) Exim operates as a
collection of independent, short-lived processes, this caching applies
only within a single Exim process.  There is no inter-process lookup
caching facility.

   If an option "cache=no_rd" is used on the lookup then the cache is
only written to, cached data is not used for the operation and a real
lookup is done.

   For single-key lookups, Exim keeps the relevant files open in case
there is another lookup that needs them.  In some types of configuration
this can lead to many files being kept open for messages with many
recipients.  To avoid hitting the operating system limit on the number
of simultaneously open files, Exim closes the least recently used file
when it needs to open more files than its own internal limit, which can
be changed via the ‘lookup_open_max’ option.

   The single-key lookup files are closed and the lookup caches are
flushed at strategic points during delivery - for example, after all
routing is complete.


File: spec.info,  Node: Quoting lookup data,  Next: More about dnsdb,  Prev: Lookup caching,  Up: File and database lookups

9.9 Quoting lookup data
=======================

When data from an incoming message is included in a query-style lookup,
there is the possibility of special characters in the data messing up
the syntax of the query.  For example, a NIS+ query that contains

     [name=$local_part]

   will be broken if the local part happens to contain a closing square
bracket.  For NIS+, data can be enclosed in double quotes like this:

     [name="$local_part"]

   but this still leaves the problem of a double quote in the data.  The
rule for NIS+ is that double quotes must be doubled.  Other lookup types
have different rules, and to cope with the differing requirements, an
expansion operator of the following form is provided:

     ${quote_<lookup-type>:<string>}

   For example, the way to write the NIS+ query is

     [name="${quote_nisplus:$local_part}"]

   *All* tainted data used in a query-style lookup must be quoted using
a mechanism appropriate for the lookup type.  See chapter *note String
expansions:: for full coverage of string expansions.  The quote operator
can be used for all lookup types, but has no effect for single-key
lookups, since no quoting is ever needed in their key strings.


File: spec.info,  Node: More about dnsdb,  Next: More about LDAP,  Prev: Quoting lookup data,  Up: File and database lookups

9.10 More about dnsdb
=====================

The ‘dnsdb’ lookup type uses the DNS as its database.  A simple query
consists of a record type and a domain name, separated by an equals
sign.  For example, an expansion string could contain:

     ${lookup dnsdb{mx=a.b.example}{$value}fail}

   If the lookup succeeds, the result is placed in ‘$value’, which in
this case is used on its own as the result.  If the lookup does not
succeed, the ‘fail’ keyword causes a _forced expansion failure_ - see
section *note Forced expansion failure:: for an explanation of what this
means.

   The supported DNS record types are A, CNAME, MX, NS, PTR, SOA, SPF,
SRV, TLSA and TXT, and, when Exim is compiled with IPv6 support, AAAA.
If no type is given, TXT is assumed.

   For any record type, if multiple records are found, the data is
returned as a concatenation, with newline as the default separator.  The
order, of course, depends on the DNS resolver.  You can specify a
different separator character between multiple records by putting a
right angle-bracket followed immediately by the new separator at the
start of the query.  For example:

     ${lookup dnsdb{>: a=host1.example}}

   It is permitted to specify a space as the separator character.
Further white space is ignored.  For lookup types that return multiple
fields per record, an alternate field separator can be specified using a
comma after the main separator character, followed immediately by the
field separator.

   When the type is PTR, the data can be an IP address, written as
normal; inversion and the addition of ‘in-addr.arpa’ or ‘ip6.arpa’
happens automatically.  For example:

     ${lookup dnsdb{ptr=192.168.4.5}{$value}fail}

   If the data for a PTR record is not a syntactically valid IP address,
it is not altered and nothing is added.

   For an MX lookup, both the preference value and the host name are
returned for each record, separated by a space.  For an SRV lookup, the
priority, weight, port, and host name are returned for each record,
separated by spaces.  The field separator can be modified as above.

   For TXT records with multiple items of data, only the first item is
returned, unless a field separator is specified.  To concatenate items
without a separator, use a semicolon instead.  For SPF records the
default behaviour is to concatenate multiple items without using a
separator.

     ${lookup dnsdb{>\n,: txt=a.b.example}}
     ${lookup dnsdb{>\n; txt=a.b.example}}
     ${lookup dnsdb{spf=example.org}}

   It is permitted to specify a space as the separator character.
Further white space is ignored.

   For an SOA lookup, while no result is obtained the lookup is redone
with successively more leading components dropped from the given domain.
Only the primary-nameserver field is returned unless a field separator
is specified.

     ${lookup dnsdb{>:,; soa=a.b.example.com}}

* Menu:

* Multiple dnsdb lookups::
* Dnsdb lookup modifiers::
* Pseudo dnsdb record types::


File: spec.info,  Node: Multiple dnsdb lookups,  Next: Dnsdb lookup modifiers,  Up: More about dnsdb

9.10.1 Multiple dnsdb lookups
-----------------------------

In the previous sections, ‘dnsdb’ lookups for a single domain are
described.  However, you can specify a list of domains or IP addresses
in a single ‘dnsdb’ lookup.  The list is specified in the normal Exim
way, with colon as the default separator, but with the ability to change
this.  For example:

     ${lookup dnsdb{one.domain.com:two.domain.com}}
     ${lookup dnsdb{a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
     ${lookup dnsdb{ptr = <; 1.2.3.4 ; 4.5.6.8}}

   In order to retain backwards compatibility, there is one special
case: if the lookup type is PTR and no change of separator is specified,
Exim looks to see if the rest of the string is precisely one IPv6
address.  In this case, it does not treat it as a list.

   The data from each lookup is concatenated, with newline separators by
default, in the same way that multiple DNS records for a single item are
handled.  A different separator can be specified, as described above.


File: spec.info,  Node: Dnsdb lookup modifiers,  Next: Pseudo dnsdb record types,  Prev: Multiple dnsdb lookups,  Up: More about dnsdb

9.10.2 Dnsdb lookup modifiers
-----------------------------

Modifiers for ‘dnsdb’ lookups are given by optional keywords, each
followed by a comma, that may appear before the record type.

   The ‘dnsdb’ lookup fails only if all the DNS lookups fail.  If there
is a temporary DNS error for any of them, the behaviour is controlled by
a defer-option modifier.  The possible keywords are "defer_strict",
"defer_never", and "defer_lax".  With "strict" behaviour, any temporary
DNS error causes the whole lookup to defer.  With "never" behaviour, a
temporary DNS error is ignored, and the behaviour is as if the DNS
lookup failed to find anything.  With "lax" behaviour, all the queries
are attempted, but a temporary DNS error causes the whole lookup to
defer only if none of the other lookups succeed.  The default is "lax",
so the following lookups are equivalent:

     ${lookup dnsdb{defer_lax,a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}
     ${lookup dnsdb{a=one.host.com:two.host.com}}

   Thus, in the default case, as long as at least one of the DNS lookups
yields some data, the lookup succeeds.

   Use of ‘DNSSEC’ is controlled by a dnssec modifier.  The possible
keywords are "dnssec_strict", "dnssec_lax", and "dnssec_never".  With
"strict" or "lax" DNSSEC information is requested with the lookup.  With
"strict" a response from the DNS resolver that is not labelled as
authenticated data is treated as equivalent to a temporary DNS error.
The default is "lax".

   See also the ‘$lookup_dnssec_authenticated’ variable.

   Timeout for the dnsdb lookup can be controlled by a retrans modifier.
The form is "retrans_VAL" where VAL is an Exim time specification (e.g.
"5s").  The default value is set by the main configuration option
‘dns_retrans’.

   Retries for the dnsdb lookup can be controlled by a retry modifier.
The form if "retry_VAL" where VAL is an integer.  The default count is
set by the main configuration option ‘dns_retry’.

   Dnsdb lookup results are cached within a single process (and its
children).  The cache entry lifetime is limited to the smallest
time-to-live (TTL) value of the set of returned DNS records.


File: spec.info,  Node: Pseudo dnsdb record types,  Prev: Dnsdb lookup modifiers,  Up: More about dnsdb

9.10.3 Pseudo dnsdb record types
--------------------------------

By default, both the preference value and the host name are returned for
each MX record, separated by a space.  If you want only host names, you
can use the pseudo-type MXH:

     ${lookup dnsdb{mxh=a.b.example}}

   In this case, the preference values are omitted, and just the host
names are returned.

   Another pseudo-type is ZNS (for "zone NS"). It performs a lookup for
NS records on the given domain, but if none are found, it removes the
first component of the domain name, and tries again.  This process
continues until NS records are found or there are no more components
left (or there is a DNS error).  In other words, it may return the name
servers for a top-level domain, but it never returns the root name
servers.  If there are no NS records for the top-level domain, the
lookup fails.  Consider these examples:

     ${lookup dnsdb{zns=xxx.quercite.com}}
     ${lookup dnsdb{zns=xxx.edu}}

   Assuming that in each case there are no NS records for the full
domain name, the first returns the name servers for ‘quercite.com’, and
the second returns the name servers for ‘edu’.

   You should be careful about how you use this lookup because, unless
the top-level domain does not exist, the lookup always returns some host
names.  The sort of use to which this might be put is for seeing if the
name servers for a given domain are on a blacklist.  You can probably
assume that the name servers for the high-level domains such as ‘com’ or
‘co.uk’ are not going to be on such a list.

   A third pseudo-type is CSA (Client SMTP Authorization).  This looks
up SRV records according to the CSA rules, which are described in
section *note Client SMTP authorization (CSA): Client SMTP authorization
[CSA]. Although ‘dnsdb’ supports SRV lookups directly, this is not
sufficient because of the extra parent domain search behaviour of CSA.
The result of a successful lookup such as:

     ${lookup dnsdb {csa=$sender_helo_name}}

   has two space-separated fields: an authorization code and a target
host name.  The authorization code can be "Y" for yes, "N" for no, "X"
for explicit authorization required but absent, or "?"  for unknown.

   The pseudo-type A+ performs an AAAA and then an A lookup.  All
results are returned; defer processing (see below) is handled separately
for each lookup.  Example:

     ${lookup dnsdb {>; a+=$sender_helo_name}}


File: spec.info,  Node: More about LDAP,  Next: More about NIS+,  Prev: More about dnsdb,  Up: File and database lookups

9.11 More about LDAP
====================

The original LDAP implementation came from the University of Michigan;
this has become "Open LDAP", and there are now two different releases.
Another implementation comes from Netscape, and Solaris 7 and subsequent
releases contain inbuilt LDAP support.  Unfortunately, though these are
all compatible at the lookup function level, their error handling is
different.  For this reason it is necessary to set a compile-time
variable when building Exim with LDAP, to indicate which LDAP library is
in use.  One of the following should appear in your ‘Local/Makefile’:

     LDAP_LIB_TYPE=UMICHIGAN
     LDAP_LIB_TYPE=OPENLDAP1
     LDAP_LIB_TYPE=OPENLDAP2
     LDAP_LIB_TYPE=NETSCAPE
     LDAP_LIB_TYPE=SOLARIS

   If LDAP_LIB_TYPE is not set, Exim assumes ‘OPENLDAP1’, which has the
same interface as the University of Michigan version.

   There are three LDAP lookup types in Exim.  These behave slightly
differently in the way they handle the results of a query:

   • ‘ldap’ requires the result to contain just one entry; if there are
     more, it gives an error.

   • ‘ldapdn’ also requires the result to contain just one entry, but it
     is the Distinguished Name that is returned rather than any
     attribute values.

   • ‘ldapm’ permits the result to contain more than one entry; the
     attributes from all of them are returned.

   For ‘ldap’ and ‘ldapm’, if a query finds only entries with no
attributes, Exim behaves as if the entry did not exist, and the lookup
fails.  The format of the data returned by a successful lookup is
described in the next section.  First we explain how LDAP queries are
coded.

* Menu:

* Format of LDAP queries::
* LDAP quoting::
* LDAP connections::
* LDAP authentication and control information::
* Format of data returned by LDAP::


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of LDAP queries,  Next: LDAP quoting,  Up: More about LDAP

9.11.1 Format of LDAP queries
-----------------------------

An LDAP query takes the form of a URL as defined in *RFC 2255
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2255)*.  For example, in the
configuration of a ‘redirect’ router one might have this setting:

     data = ${lookup ldap \
       {ldap:///cn=$local_part,o=University%20of%20Cambridge,\
       c=UK?mailbox?base?}}

   The URL may begin with ‘ldap’ or ‘ldaps’ if your LDAP library
supports secure (encrypted) LDAP connections.  The second of these
ensures that an encrypted TLS connection is used.

   With sufficiently modern LDAP libraries, Exim supports forcing TLS
over regular LDAP connections, rather than the SSL-on-connect ‘ldaps’.
See the ‘ldap_start_tls’ option.

   Starting with Exim 4.83, the initialization of LDAP with TLS is more
tightly controlled.  Every part of the TLS configuration can be
configured by settings in ‘exim.conf’.  Depending on the version of the
client libraries installed on your system, some of the initialization
may have required setting options in ‘/etc/ldap.conf’ or ‘~/.ldaprc’ to
get TLS working with self-signed certificates.  This revealed a nuance
where the current UID that exim was running as could affect which config
files it read.  With Exim 4.83, these methods become optional, only
taking effect if not specifically set in ‘exim.conf’.


File: spec.info,  Node: LDAP quoting,  Next: LDAP connections,  Prev: Format of LDAP queries,  Up: More about LDAP

9.11.2 LDAP quoting
-------------------

Two levels of quoting are required in LDAP queries, the first for LDAP
itself and the second because the LDAP query is represented as a URL.
Furthermore, within an LDAP query, two different kinds of quoting are
required.  For this reason, there are two different LDAP-specific
quoting operators.

   The ‘quote_ldap’ operator is designed for use on strings that are
part of filter specifications.  Conceptually, it first does the
following conversions on the string:

     *   =>   \2A
     (   =>   \28
     )   =>   \29
     \   =>   \5C

   in accordance with *RFC 2254
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2254)*.  The resulting string
is then quoted according to the rules for URLs, that is, all
non-alphanumeric characters except

     ! $ ' - . _ ( ) * +

   are converted to their hex values, preceded by a percent sign.  For
example:

     ${quote_ldap: a(bc)*, a<yz>; }

   yields

     %20a%5C28bc%5C29%5C2A%2C%20a%3Cyz%3E%3B%20

   Removing the URL quoting, this is (with a leading and a trailing
space):

     a\28bc\29\2A, a<yz>;

   The ‘quote_ldap_dn’ operator is designed for use on strings that are
part of base DN specifications in queries.  Conceptually, it first
converts the string by inserting a backslash in front of any of the
following characters:

     , + " \ < > ;

   It also inserts a backslash before any leading spaces or #
characters, and before any trailing spaces.  (These rules are in *RFC
2253 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2253#section-2.4)*.)  The
resulting string is then quoted according to the rules for URLs.  For
example:

     ${quote_ldap_dn: a(bc)*, a<yz>; }

   yields

     %5C%20a(bc)*%5C%2C%20a%5C%3Cyz%5C%3E%5C%3B%5C%20

   Removing the URL quoting, this is (with a trailing space):

     \ a(bc)*\, a\<yz\>\;\

   There are some further comments about quoting in the section on LDAP
authentication below.


File: spec.info,  Node: LDAP connections,  Next: LDAP authentication and control information,  Prev: LDAP quoting,  Up: More about LDAP

9.11.3 LDAP connections
-----------------------

The connection to an LDAP server may either be over TCP/IP, or, when
OpenLDAP is in use, via a Unix domain socket.  The example given above
does not specify an LDAP server.  A server that is reached by TCP/IP can
be specified in a query by starting it with

     ldap://<hostname>:<port>/...

   If the port (and preceding colon) are omitted, the standard LDAP port
(389) is used.  When no server is specified in a query, a list of
default servers is taken from the ‘ldap_default_servers’ configuration
option.  This supplies a colon-separated list of servers which are tried
in turn until one successfully handles a query, or there is a serious
error.  Successful handling either returns the requested data, or
indicates that it does not exist.  Serious errors are syntactical, or
multiple values when only a single value is expected.  Errors which
cause the next server to be tried are connection failures, bind
failures, and timeouts.

   For each server name in the list, a port number can be given.  The
standard way of specifying a host and port is to use a colon separator
(*RFC 1738
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1738#section-3.1)*).  Because
‘ldap_default_servers’ is a colon-separated list, such colons have to be
doubled.  For example

     ldap_default_servers = ldap1.example.com::145:ldap2.example.com

   If ‘ldap_default_servers’ is unset, a URL with no server name is
passed to the LDAP library with no server name, and the library's
default (normally the local host) is used.

   If you are using the OpenLDAP library, you can connect to an LDAP
server using a Unix domain socket instead of a TCP/IP connection.  This
is specified by using ‘ldapi’ instead of ‘ldap’ in LDAP queries.  What
follows here applies only to OpenLDAP. If Exim is compiled with a
different LDAP library, this feature is not available.

   For this type of connection, instead of a host name for the server, a
pathname for the socket is required, and the port number is not
relevant.  The pathname can be specified either as an item in
‘ldap_default_servers’, or inline in the query.  In the former case, you
can have settings such as

     ldap_default_servers = /tmp/ldap.sock : backup.ldap.your.domain

   When the pathname is given in the query, you have to escape the
slashes as ‘%2F’ to fit in with the LDAP URL syntax.  For example:

     ${lookup ldap {ldapi://%2Ftmp%2Fldap.sock/o=...

   When Exim processes an LDAP lookup and finds that the "hostname" is
really a pathname, it uses the Unix domain socket code, even if the
query actually specifies ‘ldap’ or ‘ldaps’.  In particular, no
encryption is used for a socket connection.  This behaviour means that
you can use a setting of ‘ldap_default_servers’ such as in the example
above with traditional ‘ldap’ or ‘ldaps’ queries, and it will work.
First, Exim tries a connection via the Unix domain socket; if that
fails, it tries a TCP/IP connection to the backup host.

   If an explicit ‘ldapi’ type is given in a query when a host name is
specified, an error is diagnosed.  However, if there are more items in
‘ldap_default_servers’, they are tried.  In other words:

   • Using a pathname with ‘ldap’ or ‘ldaps’ forces the use of the Unix
     domain interface.

   • Using ‘ldapi’ with a host name causes an error.

   Using ‘ldapi’ with no host or path in the query, and no setting of
‘ldap_default_servers’, does whatever the library does by default.


File: spec.info,  Node: LDAP authentication and control information,  Next: Format of data returned by LDAP,  Prev: LDAP connections,  Up: More about LDAP

9.11.4 LDAP authentication and control information
--------------------------------------------------

The LDAP URL syntax provides no way of passing authentication and other
control information to the server.  To make this possible, the URL in an
LDAP query may be preceded by any number of <_name_>=<_value_> settings,
separated by spaces.  If a value contains spaces it must be enclosed in
double quotes, and when double quotes are used, backslash is interpreted
in the usual way inside them.  The following names are recognized:

    DEREFERENCEset the dereferencing parameter
    NETTIME    set a timeout for a network operation
    USER       set the DN, for authenticating the LDAP bind
    PASS       set the password, likewise
    REFERRALS  set the referrals parameter
    SERVERS    set alternate server list for this query only
    SIZE       set the limit for the number of entries returned
    TIME       set the maximum waiting time for a query

   The value of the DEREFERENCE parameter must be one of the words
"never", "searching", "finding", or "always".  The value of the
REFERRALS parameter must be "follow" (the default) or "nofollow".  The
latter stops the LDAP library from trying to follow referrals issued by
the LDAP server.

   The name CONNECT is an obsolete name for NETTIME, retained for
backwards compatibility.  This timeout (specified as a number of
seconds) is enforced from the client end for operations that can be
carried out over a network.  Specifically, it applies to network
connections and calls to the _ldap_result()_ function.  If the value is
greater than zero, it is used if LDAP_OPT_NETWORK_TIMEOUT is defined in
the LDAP headers (OpenLDAP), or if LDAP_X_OPT_CONNECT_TIMEOUT is defined
in the LDAP headers (Netscape SDK 4.1).  A value of zero forces an
explicit setting of "no timeout" for Netscape SDK; for OpenLDAP no
action is taken.

   The TIME parameter (also a number of seconds) is passed to the server
to set a server-side limit on the time taken to complete a search.

   The SERVERS parameter allows you to specify an alternate list of ldap
servers to use for an individual lookup.  The global
‘ldap_default_servers’ option provides a default list of ldap servers,
and a single lookup can specify a single ldap server to use.  But when
you need to do a lookup with a list of servers that is different than
the default list (maybe different order, maybe a completely different
set of servers), the SERVERS parameter allows you to specify this
alternate list (colon-separated).

   Here is an example of an LDAP query in an Exim lookup that uses some
of these values.  This is a single line, folded to fit on the page:

     ${lookup ldap
       {user="cn=manager,o=University of Cambridge,c=UK" pass=secret
       ldap:///o=University%20of%20Cambridge,c=UK?sn?sub?(cn=foo)}
       {$value}fail}

   The encoding of spaces as ‘%20’ is a URL thing which should not be
done for any of the auxiliary data.  Exim configuration settings that
include lookups which contain password information should be preceded by
"hide" to prevent non-admin users from using the ‘-bP’ option to see
their values.

   The auxiliary data items may be given in any order.  The default is
no connection timeout (the system timeout is used), no user or password,
no limit on the number of entries returned, and no time limit on
queries.

   When a DN is quoted in the USER= setting for LDAP authentication,
Exim removes any URL quoting that it may contain before passing it to
the LDAP library.  Apparently some libraries do this for themselves, but
some do not.  Removing the URL quoting has two advantages:

   • It makes it possible to use the same ‘quote_ldap_dn’ expansion for
     USER= DNs as with DNs inside actual queries.

   • It permits spaces inside USER= DNs.

   For example, a setting such as

     USER=cn=${quote_ldap_dn:$1}

   should work even if ‘$1’ contains spaces.

   Expanded data for the PASS= value should be quoted using the ‘quote’
expansion operator, rather than the LDAP quote operators.  The only
reason this field needs quoting is to ensure that it conforms to the
Exim syntax, which does not allow unquoted spaces.  For example:

     PASS=${quote:$3}

   The LDAP authentication mechanism can be used to check passwords as
part of SMTP authentication.  See the ‘ldapauth’ expansion string
condition in chapter *note String expansions::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of data returned by LDAP,  Prev: LDAP authentication and control information,  Up: More about LDAP

9.11.5 Format of data returned by LDAP
--------------------------------------

The ‘ldapdn’ lookup type returns the Distinguished Name from a single
entry as a sequence of values, for example

     cn=manager,o=University of Cambridge,c=UK

   The ‘ldap’ lookup type generates an error if more than one entry
matches the search filter, whereas ‘ldapm’ permits this case, and
inserts a newline in the result between the data from different entries.
It is possible for multiple values to be returned for both ‘ldap’ and
‘ldapm’, but in the former case you know that whatever values are
returned all came from a single entry in the directory.

   In the common case where you specify a single attribute in your LDAP
query, the result is not quoted, and does not contain the attribute
name.  If the attribute has multiple values, they are separated by
commas.  Any comma that is part of an attribute's value is doubled.

   If you specify multiple attributes, the result contains
space-separated, quoted strings, each preceded by the attribute name and
an equals sign.  Within the quotes, the quote character, backslash, and
newline are escaped with backslashes, and commas are used to separate
multiple values for the attribute.  Any commas in attribute values are
doubled (permitting treatment of the values as a comma-separated list).
Apart from the escaping, the string within quotes takes the same form as
the output when a single attribute is requested.  Specifying no
attributes is the same as specifying all of an entry's attributes.

   Here are some examples of the output format.  The first line of each
pair is an LDAP query, and the second is the data that is returned.  The
attribute called ‘attr1’ has two values, one of them with an embedded
comma, whereas ‘attr2’ has only one value.  Both attributes are derived
from ‘attr’ (they have SUP ‘attr’ in their schema definitions).

     ldap:///o=base?attr1?sub?(uid=fred)
     value1.1,value1,,2

     ldap:///o=base?attr2?sub?(uid=fred)
     value two

     ldap:///o=base?attr?sub?(uid=fred)
     value1.1,value1,,2,value two

     ldap:///o=base?attr1,attr2?sub?(uid=fred)
     attr1="value1.1,value1,,2" attr2="value two"

     ldap:///o=base??sub?(uid=fred)
     objectClass="top" attr1="value1.1,value1,,2" attr2="value two"

   You can make use of Exim's ‘-be’ option to run expansion tests and
thereby check the results of LDAP lookups.  The ‘extract’ operator in
string expansions can be used to pick out individual fields from data
that consists of _key_=_value_ pairs.  The ‘listextract’ operator should
be used to pick out individual values of attributes, even when only a
single value is expected.  The doubling of embedded commas allows you to
use the returned data as a comma separated list (using the "<," syntax
for changing the input list separator).


File: spec.info,  Node: More about NIS+,  Next: SQL lookups,  Prev: More about LDAP,  Up: File and database lookups

9.12 More about NIS+
====================

NIS+ queries consist of a NIS+ _indexed name_ followed by an optional
colon and field name.  If this is given, the result of a successful
query is the contents of the named field; otherwise the result consists
of a concatenation of _field-name=field-value_ pairs, separated by
spaces.  Empty values and values containing spaces are quoted.  For
example, the query

     [name=mg1456],passwd.org_dir

   might return the string

     name=mg1456 passwd="" uid=999 gid=999 gcos="Martin Guerre"
     home=/home/mg1456 shell=/bin/bash shadow=""

   (split over two lines here to fit on the page), whereas

     [name=mg1456],passwd.org_dir:gcos

   would just return

     Martin Guerre

   with no quotes.  A NIS+ lookup fails if NIS+ returns more than one
table entry for the given indexed key.  The effect of the
‘quote_nisplus’ expansion operator is to double any quote characters
within the text.


File: spec.info,  Node: SQL lookups,  Prev: More about NIS+,  Up: File and database lookups

9.13 SQL lookups
================

Exim can support lookups in MySQL (MariaDB), Oracle, PostgreSQL, Redis,
and SQLite databases.  Queries for these databases contain SQL
statements, so an example might be

     ${lookup mysql{select mailbox from users where id='userx'}\
       {$value}fail}

   If the result of the query contains more than one field, the data for
each field in the row is returned, preceded by its name, so the result
of

     ${lookup pgsql{select home,name from users where id='userx'}\
       {$value}}

   might be

     home=/home/userx name="Mister X"

   Empty values and values containing spaces are double quoted, with
embedded quotes escaped by a backslash.  If the result of the query
contains just one field, the value is passed back verbatim, without a
field name, for example:

     Mister X

   If the result of the query yields more than one row, it is all
concatenated, with a newline between the data for each row.

* Menu:

* More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Redis: More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
* Specifying the server in the query::
* Special MySQL features::
* Special PostgreSQL features::
* More about SQLite::
* More about Redis::


File: spec.info,  Node: More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis,  Next: Specifying the server in the query,  Up: SQL lookups

9.13.1 More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Redis
------------------------------------------------------

If any MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, or Redis lookups are used, the
‘mysql_servers’, ‘pgsql_servers’, ‘oracle_servers’, or ‘redis_servers’
option (as appropriate) must be set to a colon-separated list of server
information.  (For MySQL and PostgreSQL, the global option need not be
set if all queries contain their own server information - see section
*note Specifying the server in the query::.)  For all but Redis each
item in the list is a slash-separated list of four items: host name,
database name, user name, and password.  In the case of Oracle, the host
name field is used for the "service name", and the database name field
is not used and should be empty.  For example:

     hide oracle_servers = oracle.plc.example//userx/abcdwxyz

   Because password data is sensitive, you should always precede the
setting with "hide", to prevent non-admin users from obtaining the
setting via the ‘-bP’ option.  Here is an example where two MySQL
servers are listed:

     hide mysql_servers = localhost/users/root/secret:\
                          otherhost/users/root/othersecret

   For MySQL and PostgreSQL, a host may be specified as
<_name_>:<_port_> but because this is a colon-separated list, the colon
has to be doubled.  For each query, these parameter groups are tried in
order until a connection is made and a query is successfully processed.
The result of a query may be that no data is found, but that is still a
successful query.  In other words, the list of servers provides a backup
facility, not a list of different places to look.

   For Redis the global option need not be specified if all queries
contain their own server information - see section *note Specifying the
server in the query::.  If specified, the option must be set to a
colon-separated list of server information.  Each item in the list is a
slash-separated list of three items: host, database number, and
password.

  1. The host is required and may be either an IPv4 address and optional
     port number (separated by a colon, which needs doubling due to the
     higher-level list), or a Unix socket pathname enclosed in
     parentheses

  2. The database number is optional; if present that number is selected
     in the backend

  3. The password is optional; if present it is used to authenticate to
     the backend

   The ‘quote_mysql’, ‘quote_pgsql’, and ‘quote_oracle’ expansion
operators convert newline, tab, carriage return, and backspace to \n,
\t, \r, and \b respectively, and the characters single-quote,
double-quote, and backslash itself are escaped with backslashes.

   The ‘quote_redis’ expansion operator escapes whitespace and backslash
characters with a backslash.


File: spec.info,  Node: Specifying the server in the query,  Next: Special MySQL features,  Prev: More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis,  Up: SQL lookups

9.13.2 Specifying the server in the query
-----------------------------------------

For MySQL, PostgreSQL and Redis lookups (but not currently for Oracle),
it is possible to specify a list of servers with an individual query.
This is done by appending a comma-separated option to the query type:

     ,servers=server1:server2:server3:...

   Each item in the list may take one of two forms:

  1. If it contains no slashes it is assumed to be just a host name.
     The appropriate global option (‘mysql_servers’ or ‘pgsql_servers’)
     is searched for a host of the same name, and the remaining
     parameters (database, user, password) are taken from there.

  2. If it contains any slashes, it is taken as a complete parameter
     set.

   The list of servers is used in exactly the same way as the global
list.  Once a connection to a server has happened and a query has been
successfully executed, processing of the lookup ceases.

   This feature is intended for use in master/slave situations where
updates are occurring and you want to update the master rather than a
slave.  If the master is in the list as a backup for reading, you might
have a global setting like this:

     mysql_servers = slave1/db/name/pw:\
                     slave2/db/name/pw:\
                     master/db/name/pw

   In an updating lookup, you could then write:

     ${lookup mysql,servers=master {UPDATE ...} }

   That query would then be sent only to the master server.  If, on the
other hand, the master is not to be used for reading, and so is not
present in the global option, you can still update it by a query of this
form:

     ${lookup pgsql,servers=master/db/name/pw {UPDATE ...} }

   A now-deprecated syntax places the servers specification before the
query, semicolon separated:

     ${lookup mysql{servers=master; UPDATE ...} }

   The new version avoids issues with tainted arguments explicitly
expanded as part of the query.  The entire string within the braces
becomes tainted, including the server specification - which is not
permissible.  If the older sytax is used, a warning message will be
logged.  This syntax will be removed in a future release.

   *Note*: server specifications in list-style lookups are still
problematic.


File: spec.info,  Node: Special MySQL features,  Next: Special PostgreSQL features,  Prev: Specifying the server in the query,  Up: SQL lookups

9.13.3 Special MySQL features
-----------------------------

For MySQL (MariaDB), an empty host name or the use of "localhost" in
‘mysql_servers’ causes a connection to the server on the local host by
means of a Unix domain socket.  An alternate socket can be specified in
parentheses.  An option group name for MySQL option files can be
specified in square brackets; the default value is "exim".  The full
syntax of each item in ‘mysql_servers’ is:

     <hostspec><portspec>(<socket name>)[<option group>]/<database>/<user>/<password>

   Any of the four sub-parts of the first field can be omitted.  For
normal use on the local host it can be left blank or set to just
"localhost".

   A _hostspec_ can be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address.
For the latter, a _portspec_ is a dot followed by a port number; for the
other two a _portspec_ is a colon followed by a port number.

   Note that the default list-separator for the list of servers is a
colon so (unless that is changed) all colons in list items must be
doubled.

   No database need be supplied - but if it is absent here, it must be
given in the queries.

   If a MySQL query is issued that does not request any data (an insert,
update, or delete command), the result of the lookup is the number of
rows affected.

   *Warning*: This can be misleading.  If an update does not actually
change anything (for example, setting a field to the value it already
has), the result is zero because no rows are affected.

   To get an encryted connection, use a Mysql option file with the
required parameters for the connection.


File: spec.info,  Node: Special PostgreSQL features,  Next: More about SQLite,  Prev: Special MySQL features,  Up: SQL lookups

9.13.4 Special PostgreSQL features
----------------------------------

The _hostspec_ for PostgreSQL follows the same rules as for MySQL above.

   PostgreSQL lookups can also use Unix domain socket connections to the
database.  This is usually faster and costs less CPU time than a TCP/IP
connection.  However it can be used only if the mail server runs on the
same machine as the database server.  A configuration line for
PostgreSQL via Unix domain sockets looks like this:

     hide pgsql_servers = (/tmp/.s.PGSQL.5432)/db/user/password : ...

   In other words, instead of supplying a host name, a path to the
socket is given.  The path name is enclosed in parentheses so that its
slashes aren't visually confused with the delimiters for the other
server parameters.

   If a PostgreSQL query is issued that does not request any data (an
insert, update, or delete command), the result of the lookup is the
number of rows affected.


File: spec.info,  Node: More about SQLite,  Next: More about Redis,  Prev: Special PostgreSQL features,  Up: SQL lookups

9.13.5 More about SQLite
------------------------

SQLite is different to the other SQL lookups because a filename is
required in addition to the SQL query.  An SQLite database is a single
file, and there is no daemon as in the other SQL databases.

   There are two ways of specifying the file.  The first is by using the
‘sqlite_dbfile’ main option.  The second, which allows separate files
for each query, is to use an option appended, comma-separated, to the
"sqlite" lookup type word.  The option is the word "file", then an
equals, then the filename.  The filename in this case cannot contain
whitespace or open-brace characters.

   A deprecated method is available, prefixing the query with the
filename separated by white space.  This means that the query cannot use
any tainted values, as that taints the entire query including the
filename - resulting in a refusal to open the file.

   In all the above cases the filename must be an absolute path.

   Here is a lookup expansion example:

     sqlite_dbfile = /some/thing/sqlitedb
     ...
     ${lookup sqlite {select name from aliases where id='userx';}}

   In a list, the syntax is similar.  For example:

     domainlist relay_to_domains = sqlite;\
        select * from relays where ip='$sender_host_address';

   The only character affected by the ‘quote_sqlite’ operator is a
single quote, which it doubles.

   The SQLite library handles multiple simultaneous accesses to the
database internally.  Multiple readers are permitted, but only one
process can update at once.  Attempts to access the database while it is
being updated are rejected after a timeout period, during which the
SQLite library waits for the lock to be released.  In Exim, the default
timeout is set to 5 seconds, but it can be changed by means of the
‘sqlite_lock_timeout’ option.


File: spec.info,  Node: More about Redis,  Prev: More about SQLite,  Up: SQL lookups

9.13.6 More about Redis
-----------------------

Redis is a non-SQL database.  Commands are simple get and set.
Examples:

     ${lookup redis{set keyname ${quote_redis:objvalue plus}}}
     ${lookup redis{get keyname}}

   As of release 4.91, "lightweight" support for Redis Cluster is
available.  Requires ‘redis_servers’ list to contain all the servers in
the cluster, all of which must be reachable from the running exim
instance.  If the cluster has master/slave replication, the list must
contain all the master and slave servers.

   When the Redis Cluster returns a "MOVED" response to a query, Exim
does not immediately follow the redirection but treats the response as a
DEFER, moving on to the next server in the ‘redis_servers’ list until
the correct server is reached.


File: spec.info,  Node: Domain; host; and address lists,  Next: String expansions,  Prev: File and database lookups,  Up: Top

10 Domain, host, address, and local part lists
**********************************************

A number of Exim configuration options contain lists of domains, hosts,
email addresses, or local parts.  For example, the ‘hold_domains’ option
contains a list of domains whose delivery is currently suspended.  These
lists are also used as data in ACL statements (see chapter *note Access
control lists::), and as arguments to expansion conditions such as
‘match_domain’.

   Each item in one of these lists is a pattern to be matched against a
domain, host, email address, or local part, respectively.  In the
sections below, the different types of pattern for each case are
described, but first we cover some general facilities that apply to all
four kinds of list.

   Note that other parts of Exim use a _string list_ which does not
support all the complexity available in domain, host, address and local
part lists.

* Menu:

* Results of list checking::
* Expansion of lists::
* Domain lists::
* Host lists::
* Address lists::
* Local part lists::


File: spec.info,  Node: Results of list checking,  Next: Expansion of lists,  Up: Domain; host; and address lists

10.1 Results of list checking
=============================

The primary result of doing a list check is a truth value.  In some
contexts additional information is stored about the list element that
matched:

hosts
     A ‘hosts’ ACL condition will store a result in the ‘$host_data’
     variable.

local_parts
     A ‘local_parts’ router option or ‘local_parts’ ACL condition will
     store a result in the ‘$local_part_data’ variable.

domains
     A ‘domains’ router option or ‘domains’ ACL condition will store a
     result in the ‘$domain_data’ variable.

senders
     A ‘senders’ router option or ‘senders’ ACL condition will store a
     result in the ‘$sender_data’ variable.

recipients
     A ‘recipients’ ACL condition will store a result in the
     ‘$recipient_data’ variable.

   The detail of the additional information depends on the type of match
and is given below as the *value* information.


File: spec.info,  Node: Expansion of lists,  Next: Domain lists,  Prev: Results of list checking,  Up: Domain; host; and address lists

10.2 Expansion of lists
=======================

Each list, after any leading change-of-separator specification (see
*note Changing list separators::) is expanded as a single string, See
*note String expansions:: for details of string expansion.  *Note*: As a
result, if any component was tainted then the entire expansion result
string becomes tainted.

   Splitting out a leading explicit change-of-separator permits one
being safely used on a list that has tainted components while still
detecting the use of a tainted setting.  The latter is not permitted.

   _Exception: the router headers_remove option, where list-item
splitting is done before string-expansion._

   The result of expansion must be a list, possibly containing empty
items, which is split up into separate items for matching.  By default,
colon is the separator character, but this can be varied if necessary.
See sections *note List construction:: and *note Empty items in lists::
for details of the list syntax; the second of these discusses the way to
specify empty list items.

   If the string expansion is forced to fail, Exim behaves as if the
item it is testing (domain, host, address, or local part) is not in the
list.  Other expansion failures cause temporary errors.

   If an item in a list is a regular expression, backslashes, dollars
and possibly other special characters in the expression must be
protected against misinterpretation by the string expander.  The easiest
way to do this is to use the ‘\N’ expansion feature to indicate that the
contents of the regular expression should not be expanded.  For example,
in an ACL you might have:

     deny senders = \N^\d{8}\w@.*\.baddomain\.example$\N : \
                    ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/badsenders/bydomain}}

   The first item is a regular expression that is protected from
expansion by ‘\N’, whereas the second uses the expansion to obtain a
list of unwanted senders based on the receiving domain.

* Menu:

* Negated items in lists::
* File names in lists::
* An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list::
* Named lists::
* Named lists compared with macros::
* Named list caching::


File: spec.info,  Node: Negated items in lists,  Next: File names in lists,  Up: Expansion of lists

10.2.1 Negated items in lists
-----------------------------

Items in a list may be positive or negative.  Negative items are
indicated by a leading exclamation mark, which may be followed by
optional white space.  A list defines a set of items (domains, etc).
When Exim processes one of these lists, it is trying to find out whether
a domain, host, address, or local part (respectively) is in the set that
is defined by the list.  It works like this:

   The list is scanned from left to right.  If a positive item is
matched, the subject that is being checked is in the set; if a negative
item is matched, the subject is not in the set.  If the end of the list
is reached without the subject having matched any of the patterns, it is
in the set if the last item was a negative one, but not if it was a
positive one.  For example, the list in

     domainlist relay_to_domains = !a.b.c : *.b.c

   matches any domain ending in _.b.c_ except for _a.b.c_.  Domains that
match neither _a.b.c_ nor _*.b.c_ do not match, because the last item in
the list is positive.  However, if the setting were

     domainlist relay_to_domains = !a.b.c

   then all domains other than _a.b.c_ would match because the last item
in the list is negative.  In other words, a list that ends with a
negative item behaves as if it had an extra item ‘:*’ on the end.

   Another way of thinking about positive and negative items in lists is
to read the connector as "or" after a positive item and as "and" after a
negative item.


File: spec.info,  Node: File names in lists,  Next: An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list,  Prev: Negated items in lists,  Up: Expansion of lists

10.2.2 File names in lists
--------------------------

If an item in a domain, host, address, or local part list is an absolute
filename (beginning with a slash character), each line of the file is
read and processed as if it were an independent item in the list, except
that further filenames are not allowed, and no expansion of the data
from the file takes place.  Empty lines in the file are ignored, and the
file may also contain comment lines:

   • For domain and host lists, if a # character appears anywhere in a
     line of the file, it and all following characters are ignored.

   • Because local parts may legitimately contain # characters, a
     comment in an address list or local part list file is recognized
     only if # is preceded by white space or the start of the line.  For
     example:

          not#comment@x.y.z   # but this is a comment

   Putting a filename in a list has the same effect as inserting each
line of the file as an item in the list (blank lines and comments
excepted).  However, there is one important difference: the file is read
each time the list is processed, so if its contents vary over time,
Exim's behaviour changes.

   If a filename is preceded by an exclamation mark, the sense of any
match within the file is inverted.  For example, if

     hold_domains = !/etc/nohold-domains

   and the file contains the lines

     !a.b.c
     *.b.c

   then _a.b.c_ is in the set of domains defined by ‘hold_domains’,
whereas any domain matching ‘*.b.c’ is not.


File: spec.info,  Node: An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list,  Next: Named lists,  Prev: File names in lists,  Up: Expansion of lists

10.2.3 An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list
-------------------------------------------------

As will be described in the sections that follow, lookups can be used in
lists to provide indexed methods of checking list membership.  There has
been some confusion about the way ‘lsearch’ lookups work in lists.
Because an ‘lsearch’ file contains plain text and is scanned
sequentially, it is sometimes thought that it is allowed to contain wild
cards and other kinds of non-constant pattern.  This is not the case.
The keys in an ‘lsearch’ file are always fixed strings, just as for any
other single-key lookup type.

   If you want to use a file to contain wild-card patterns that form
part of a list, just give the filename on its own, without a search
type, as described in the previous section.  You could also use the
‘wildlsearch’ or ‘nwildlsearch’, but there is no advantage in doing
this.


File: spec.info,  Node: Named lists,  Next: Named lists compared with macros,  Prev: An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list,  Up: Expansion of lists

10.2.4 Named lists
------------------

A list of domains, hosts, email addresses, or local parts can be given a
name which is then used to refer to the list elsewhere in the
configuration.  This is particularly convenient if the same list is
required in several different places.  It also allows lists to be given
meaningful names, which can improve the readability of the
configuration.  For example, it is conventional to define a domain list
called _local_domains_ for all the domains that are handled locally on a
host, using a configuration line such as

     domainlist local_domains = localhost:my.dom.example

   Named lists are referenced by giving their name preceded by a plus
sign, so, for example, a router that is intended to handle local domains
would be configured with the line

     domains = +local_domains

   The first router in a configuration is often one that handles all
domains except the local ones, using a configuration with a negated item
like this:

     dnslookup:
       driver = dnslookup
       domains = ! +local_domains
       transport = remote_smtp
       no_more

   The four kinds of named list are created by configuration lines
starting with the words ‘domainlist’, ‘hostlist’, ‘addresslist’, or
‘localpartlist’, respectively.  Then there follows the name that you are
defining, followed by an equals sign and the list itself.  For example:

     hostlist    relay_from_hosts = 192.168.23.0/24 : my.friend.example
     addresslist bad_senders = cdb;/etc/badsenders

   A named list may refer to other named lists:

     domainlist  dom1 = first.example : second.example
     domainlist  dom2 = +dom1 : third.example
     domainlist  dom3 = fourth.example : +dom2 : fifth.example

   *Warning*: If the last item in a referenced list is a negative one,
the effect may not be what you intended, because the negation does not
propagate out to the higher level.  For example, consider:

     domainlist  dom1 = !a.b
     domainlist  dom2 = +dom1 : *.b

   The second list specifies "either in the ‘dom1’ list or _*.b_".  The
first list specifies just "not _a.b_", so the domain _x.y_ matches it.
That means it matches the second list as well.  The effect is not the
same as

     domainlist  dom2 = !a.b : *.b

   where _x.y_ does not match.  It's best to avoid negation altogether
in referenced lists if you can.

   The list item which references a named list ("+<listname>") may not
be tainted.

   Some named list definitions may contain sensitive data, for example,
passwords for accessing databases.  To stop non-admin users from using
the ‘-bP’ command line option to read these values, you can precede the
definition with the word "hide".  For example:

     hide domainlist filter_for_domains = ldap;PASS=secret ldap::/// ...

   Named lists may have a performance advantage.  When Exim is routing
an address or checking an incoming message, it caches the result of
tests on named lists.  So, if you have a setting such as

     domains = +local_domains

   on several of your routers or in several ACL statements, the actual
test is done only for the first one.  However, the caching works only if
there are no expansions within the list itself or any sublists that it
references.  In other words, caching happens only for lists that are
known to be the same each time they are referenced.

   By default, there may be up to 16 named lists of each type.  This
limit can be extended by changing a compile-time variable.  The use of
domain and host lists is recommended for concepts such as local domains,
relay domains, and relay hosts.  The default configuration is set up
like this.


File: spec.info,  Node: Named lists compared with macros,  Next: Named list caching,  Prev: Named lists,  Up: Expansion of lists

10.2.5 Named lists compared with macros
---------------------------------------

At first sight, named lists might seem to be no different from macros in
the configuration file.  However, macros are just textual substitutions.
If you write

     ALIST = host1 : host2
     auth_advertise_hosts = !ALIST

   it probably won't do what you want, because that is exactly the same
as

     auth_advertise_hosts = !host1 : host2

   Notice that the second host name is not negated.  However, if you use
a host list, and write

     hostlist alist = host1 : host2
     auth_advertise_hosts = ! +alist

   the negation applies to the whole list, and so that is equivalent to

     auth_advertise_hosts = !host1 : !host2


File: spec.info,  Node: Named list caching,  Prev: Named lists compared with macros,  Up: Expansion of lists

10.2.6 Named list caching
-------------------------

While processing a message, Exim caches the result of checking a named
list if it is sure that the list is the same each time.  In practice,
this means that the cache operates only if the list contains no $
characters, which guarantees that it will not change when it is
expanded.  Sometimes, however, you may have an expanded list that you
know will be the same each time within a given message.  For example:

     domainlist special_domains = \
                ${lookup{$sender_host_address}cdb{/some/file}}

   This provides a list of domains that depends only on the sending
host's IP address.  If this domain list is referenced a number of times
(for example, in several ACL lines, or in several routers) the result of
the check is not cached by default, because Exim does not know that it
is going to be the same list each time.

   By appending ‘_cache’ to ‘domainlist’ you can tell Exim to go ahead
and cache the result anyway.  For example:

     domainlist_cache special_domains = ${lookup{...

   If you do this, you should be absolutely sure that caching is going
to do the right thing in all cases.  When in doubt, leave it out.


File: spec.info,  Node: Domain lists,  Next: Host lists,  Prev: Expansion of lists,  Up: Domain; host; and address lists

10.3 Domain lists
=================

Domain lists contain patterns that are to be matched against a mail
domain.  The following types of item may appear in domain lists:

   • If a pattern consists of a single @ character, it matches the local
     host name, as set by the ‘primary_hostname’ option (or defaulted).
     This makes it possible to use the same configuration file on
     several different hosts that differ only in their names.

     The value for a match will be the primary host name.  The pattern
     may not be tainted.

   • If a pattern consists of the string ‘@[]’ it matches an IP address
     enclosed in square brackets (as in an email address that contains a
     domain literal), but only if that IP address is recognized as local
     for email routing purposes.  The ‘local_interfaces’ and
     ‘extra_local_interfaces’ options can be used to control which of a
     host's several IP addresses are treated as local.  In today's
     Internet, the use of domain literals is controversial; see the
     ‘allow_domain_literals’ main option.

     The value for a match will be the string ‘@[]’.  The pattern may
     not be tainted.

   • If a pattern consists of the string ‘@mx_any’ it matches any domain
     that has an MX record pointing to the local host or to any host
     that is listed in ‘hosts_treat_as_local’.  The items ‘@mx_primary’
     and ‘@mx_secondary’ are similar, except that the first matches only
     when a primary MX target is the local host, and the second only
     when no primary MX target is the local host, but a secondary MX
     target is.  "Primary" means an MX record with the lowest preference
     value - there may of course be more than one of them.

     The pattern may not be tainted.

     The MX lookup that takes place when matching a pattern of this type
     is performed with the resolver options for widening names turned
     off.  Thus, for example, a single-component domain will _not_ be
     expanded by adding the resolver's default domain.  See the
     ‘qualify_single’ and ‘search_parents’ options of the ‘dnslookup’
     router for a discussion of domain widening.

     Sometimes you may want to ignore certain IP addresses when using
     one of these patterns.  You can specify this by following the
     pattern with ‘/ignore=’<_ip list_>, where <_ip list_> is a list of
     IP addresses.  These addresses are ignored when processing the
     pattern (compare the ‘ignore_target_hosts’ option on a router).
     For example:

          domains = @mx_any/ignore=127.0.0.1

     This example matches any domain that has an MX record pointing to
     one of the local host's IP addresses other than 127.0.0.1.

     The list of IP addresses is in fact processed by the same code that
     processes host lists, so it may contain CIDR-coded network
     specifications and it may also contain negative items.

     Because the list of IP addresses is a sublist within a domain list,
     you have to be careful about delimiters if there is more than one
     address.  Like any other list, the default delimiter can be
     changed.  Thus, you might have:

          domains = @mx_any/ignore=<;127.0.0.1;0.0.0.0 : \
                    an.other.domain : ...

     so that the sublist uses semicolons for delimiters.  When IPv6
     addresses are involved, it is easiest to change the delimiter for
     the main list as well:

          domains = <? @mx_any/ignore=<;127.0.0.1;::1 ? \
                    an.other.domain ? ...

     The value for a match will be the list element string (starting
     ‘@mx_’).

   • If a pattern starts with an asterisk, the remaining characters of
     the pattern are compared with the terminating characters of the
     domain.  The use of "*" in domain lists differs from its use in
     partial matching lookups.  In a domain list, the character
     following the asterisk need not be a dot, whereas partial matching
     works only in terms of dot-separated components.  For example, a
     domain list item such as ‘*key.ex’ matches _donkey.ex_ as well as
     _cipher.key.ex_.

     The value for a match will be the list element string (starting
     with the asterisk).  Additionally, ‘$0’ will be set to the matched
     string and ‘$1’ to the variable portion which the asterisk matched.

   • If a pattern starts with a circumflex character, it is treated as a
     regular expression, and matched against the domain using a regular
     expression matching function.  The circumflex is treated as part of
     the regular expression.  Email domains are case-independent, so
     this regular expression match is by default case-independent, but
     you can make it case-dependent by starting it with ‘(?-i)’.
     References to descriptions of the syntax of regular expressions are
     given in chapter *note Regular expressions::.

     *Warning*: Because domain lists are expanded before being
     processed, you must escape any backslash and dollar characters in
     the regular expression, or use the special ‘\N’ sequence (see
     chapter *note String expansions::) to specify that it is not to be
     expanded (unless you really do want to build a regular expression
     by expansion, of course).

     The value for a match will be the list element string (starting
     with the circumflex).  Additionally, ‘$0’ will be set to the string
     matching the regular expression, and ‘$1’ (onwards) to any
     submatches identified by parentheses.

   • If a pattern starts with the name of a single-key lookup type
     followed by a semicolon (for example, "dbm;" or "lsearch;"), the
     remainder of the pattern must be a filename in a suitable format
     for the lookup type.  For example, for "cdb;" it must be an
     absolute path:

          domains = cdb;/etc/mail/local_domains.cdb

     The appropriate type of lookup is done on the file using the domain
     name as the key.  In most cases, the value resulting from the
     lookup is not used; Exim is interested only in whether or not the
     key is present in the file.  However, when a lookup is used for the
     ‘domains’ option on a router or a ‘domains’ condition in an ACL
     statement, the value is preserved in the ‘$domain_data’ variable
     and can be referred to in other router options or other statements
     in the same ACL. The value will be untainted.

     *Note*: If the data result of the lookup (as opposed to the key) is
     empty, then this empty value is stored in ‘$domain_data’.  The
     option to return the key for the lookup, as the value, may be what
     is wanted.

   • Any of the single-key lookup type names may be preceded by
     ‘partial’<_n_>‘-’, where the <_n_> is optional, for example,

          domains = partial-dbm;/partial/domains

     This causes partial matching logic to be invoked; a description of
     how this works is given in section *note Partial matching in
     single-key lookups::.

   • Any of the single-key lookup types may be followed by an asterisk.
     This causes a default lookup for a key consisting of a single
     asterisk to be done if the original lookup fails.  This is not a
     useful feature when using a domain list to select particular
     domains (because any domain would match), but it might have value
     if the result of the lookup is being used via the ‘$domain_data’
     expansion variable.

   • If the pattern starts with the name of a query-style lookup type
     followed by a semicolon (for example, "nisplus;" or "ldap;"), the
     remainder of the pattern must be an appropriate query for the
     lookup type, as described in chapter *note File and database
     lookups::.  For example:

          hold_domains = mysql;select domain from holdlist \
            where domain = '${quote_mysql:$domain}';

     In most cases, the value resulting from the lookup is not used (so
     for an SQL query, for example, it doesn't matter what field you
     select).  Exim is interested only in whether or not the query
     succeeds.  However, when a lookup is used for the ‘domains’ option
     on a router, the value is preserved in the ‘$domain_data’ variable
     and can be referred to in other options.  The value will be
     untainted.

   • If the pattern starts with the name of a lookup type of either kind
     (single-key or query-style) it may be followed by a comma and
     options, The options are lookup-type specific and consist of a
     comma-separated list.  Each item starts with a tag and and equals
     "=" sign.

   • If none of the above cases apply, a caseless textual comparison is
     made between the pattern and the domain.

     The value for a match will be the list element string.  Note that
     this is commonly untainted (depending on the way the list was
     created).  Specifically, explicit text in the configuration file in
     not tainted.  This is a useful way of obtaining an untainted
     equivalent to the domain, for later operations.

     However if the list (including one-element lists) is created by
     expanding a variable containing tainted data, it is tainted and so
     will the match value be.

   Here is an example that uses several different kinds of pattern:

     domainlist funny_domains = \
       @ : \
       lib.unseen.edu : \
       *.foundation.fict.example : \
       \N^[1-2]\d{3}\.fict\.example$\N : \
       partial-dbm;/opt/data/penguin/book : \
       nis;domains.byname : \
       nisplus;[name=$domain,status=local],domains.org_dir

   There are obvious processing trade-offs among the various matching
modes.  Using an asterisk is faster than a regular expression, and
listing a few names explicitly probably is too.  The use of a file or
database lookup is expensive, but may be the only option if hundreds of
names are required.  Because the patterns are tested in order, it makes
sense to put the most commonly matched patterns earlier.


File: spec.info,  Node: Host lists,  Next: Address lists,  Prev: Domain lists,  Up: Domain; host; and address lists

10.4 Host lists
===============

Host lists are used to control what remote hosts are allowed to do.  For
example, some hosts may be allowed to use the local host as a relay, and
some may be permitted to use the SMTP ETRN command.  Hosts can be
identified in two different ways, by name or by IP address.  In a host
list, some types of pattern are matched to a host name, and some are
matched to an IP address.  You need to be particularly careful with this
when single-key lookups are involved, to ensure that the right value is
being used as the key.

* Menu:

* Special host list patterns::
* Host list patterns that match by IP address::
* Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address::
* Host list patterns that match by host name::
* Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found::
* Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists::
* Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information::
* Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name::
* Host list patterns for query-style lookups::


File: spec.info,  Node: Special host list patterns,  Next: Host list patterns that match by IP address,  Up: Host lists

10.4.1 Special host list patterns
---------------------------------

If a host list item is the empty string, it matches only when no remote
host is involved.  This is the case when a message is being received
from a local process using SMTP on the standard input, that is, when a
TCP/IP connection is not used.

   The special pattern "*" in a host list matches any host or no host.
Neither the IP address nor the name is actually inspected.


File: spec.info,  Node: Host list patterns that match by IP address,  Next: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address,  Prev: Special host list patterns,  Up: Host lists

10.4.2 Host list patterns that match by IP address
--------------------------------------------------

If an IPv4 host calls an IPv6 host and the call is accepted on an IPv6
socket, the incoming address actually appears in the IPv6 host as
‘::ffff:’<_v4address_>.  When such an address is tested against a host
list, it is converted into a traditional IPv4 address first.  (Not all
operating systems accept IPv4 calls on IPv6 sockets, as there have been
some security concerns.)

   The following types of pattern in a host list check the remote host
by inspecting its IP address:

   • If the pattern is a plain domain name (not a regular expression,
     not starting with *, not a lookup of any kind), Exim calls the
     operating system function to find the associated IP address(es).
     Exim uses the newer ‘getipnodebyname()’ function when available,
     otherwise ‘gethostbyname()’.  This typically causes a forward DNS
     lookup of the name.  The result is compared with the IP address of
     the subject host.

     If there is a temporary problem (such as a DNS timeout) with the
     host name lookup, a temporary error occurs.  For example, if the
     list is being used in an ACL condition, the ACL gives a "defer"
     response, usually leading to a temporary SMTP error code.  If no IP
     address can be found for the host name, what happens is described
     in section *note Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be
     found:: below.

   • If the pattern is "@", the primary host name is substituted and
     used as a domain name, as just described.

   • If the pattern is an IP address, it is matched against the IP
     address of the subject host.  IPv4 addresses are given in the
     normal "dotted-quad" notation.  IPv6 addresses can be given in
     colon-separated format, but the colons have to be doubled so as not
     to be taken as item separators when the default list separator is
     used.  IPv6 addresses are recognized even when Exim is compiled
     without IPv6 support.  This means that if they appear in a host
     list on an IPv4-only host, Exim will not treat them as host names.
     They are just addresses that can never match a client host.

   • If the pattern is "@[]", it matches the IP address of any IP
     interface on the local host.  For example, if the local host is an
     IPv4 host with one interface address 10.45.23.56, these two ACL
     statements have the same effect:

          accept hosts = 127.0.0.1 : 10.45.23.56
          accept hosts = @[]

   • If the pattern is an IP address followed by a slash and a mask
     length, for example

          10.11.42.0/24

     , it is matched against the IP address of the subject host under
     the given mask.  This allows an entire network of hosts to be
     included (or excluded) by a single item.  The mask uses CIDR
     notation; it specifies the number of address bits that must match,
     starting from the most significant end of the address.

     *Note*: The mask is _not_ a count of addresses, nor is it the high
     number of a range of addresses.  It is the number of bits in the
     network portion of the address.  The above example specifies a
     24-bit netmask, so it matches all 256 addresses in the 10.11.42.0
     network.  An item such as

          192.168.23.236/31

     matches just two addresses, 192.168.23.236 and 192.168.23.237.  A
     mask value of 32 for an IPv4 address is the same as no mask at all;
     just a single address matches.

     Here is another example which shows an IPv4 and an IPv6 network:

          recipient_unqualified_hosts = 192.168.0.0/16: \
                                        3ffe::ffff::836f::::/48

     The doubling of list separator characters applies only when these
     items appear inline in a host list.  It is not required when
     indirecting via a file.  For example:

          recipient_unqualified_hosts = /opt/exim/unqualnets

     could make use of a file containing

          172.16.0.0/12
          3ffe:ffff:836f::/48

     to have exactly the same effect as the previous example.  When
     listing IPv6 addresses inline, it is usually more convenient to use
     the facility for changing separator characters.  This list contains
     the same two networks:

          recipient_unqualified_hosts = <; 172.16.0.0/12; \
                                           3ffe:ffff:836f::/48

     The separator is changed to semicolon by the leading "<;" at the
     start of the list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address,  Next: Host list patterns that match by host name,  Prev: Host list patterns that match by IP address,  Up: Host lists

10.4.3 Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address
----------------------------------------------------------------

When a host is to be identified by a single-key lookup of its complete
IP address, the pattern takes this form:

     net-<single-key-search-type>;<search-data>

   For example:

     hosts_lookup = net-cdb;/hosts-by-ip.db

   The text form of the IP address of the subject host is used as the
lookup key.  IPv6 addresses are converted to an unabbreviated form,
using lower case letters, with dots as separators because colon is the
key terminator in ‘lsearch’ files.  [Colons can in fact be used in keys
in ‘lsearch’ files by quoting the keys, but this is a facility that was
added later.]  The data returned by the lookup is not used.

   Single-key lookups can also be performed using masked IP addresses,
using patterns of this form:

     net<number>-<single-key-search-type>;<search-data>

   For example:

     net24-dbm;/networks.db

   The IP address of the subject host is masked using <_number_> as the
mask length.  A textual string is constructed from the masked value,
followed by the mask, and this is used as the lookup key.  For example,
if the host's IP address is 192.168.34.6, the key that is looked up for
the above example is "192.168.34.0/24".

   When an IPv6 address is converted to a string, dots are normally used
instead of colons, so that keys in ‘lsearch’ files need not contain
colons (which terminate ‘lsearch’ keys).  This was implemented some time
before the ability to quote keys was made available in ‘lsearch’ files.
However, the more recently implemented ‘iplsearch’ files do require
colons in IPv6 keys (notated using the quoting facility) so as to
distinguish them from IPv4 keys.  For this reason, when the lookup type
is ‘iplsearch’, IPv6 addresses are converted using colons and not dots.
In all cases except IPv4-mapped IPv6, full, unabbreviated IPv6 addresses
are always used.  The latter are converted to IPv4 addresses, in
dotted-quad form.

   Ideally, it would be nice to tidy up this anomalous situation by
changing to colons in all cases, given that quoting is now available for
‘lsearch’.  However, this would be an incompatible change that might
break some existing configurations.

   *Warning*: Specifying ‘net32-’ (for an IPv4 address) or ‘net128-’
(for an IPv6 address) is not the same as specifying just ‘net-’ without
a number.  In the former case the key strings include the mask value,
whereas in the latter case the IP address is used on its own.


File: spec.info,  Node: Host list patterns that match by host name,  Next: Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found,  Prev: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address,  Up: Host lists

10.4.4 Host list patterns that match by host name
-------------------------------------------------

There are several types of pattern that require Exim to know the name of
the remote host.  These are either wildcard patterns or lookups by name.
(If a complete hostname is given without any wildcarding, it is used to
find an IP address to match against, as described in section *note Host
list patterns that match by IP address:: above.)

   If the remote host name is not already known when Exim encounters one
of these patterns, it has to be found from the IP address.  Although
many sites on the Internet are conscientious about maintaining reverse
DNS data for their hosts, there are also many that do not do this.
Consequently, a name cannot always be found, and this may lead to
unwanted effects.  Take care when configuring host lists with wildcarded
name patterns.  Consider what will happen if a name cannot be found.

   Because of the problems of determining host names from IP addresses,
matching against host names is not as common as matching against IP
addresses.

   By default, in order to find a host name, Exim first does a reverse
DNS lookup; if no name is found in the DNS, the system function
(‘gethostbyaddr()’ or ‘getipnodebyaddr()’ if available) is tried.  The
order in which these lookups are done can be changed by setting the
‘host_lookup_order’ option.  For security, once Exim has found one or
more names, it looks up the IP addresses for these names and compares
them with the IP address that it started with.  Only those names whose
IP addresses match are accepted.  Any other names are discarded.  If no
names are left, Exim behaves as if the host name cannot be found.  In
the most common case there is only one name and one IP address.

   There are some options that control what happens if a host name
cannot be found.  These are described in section *note Behaviour when an
IP address or name cannot be found:: below.

   As a result of aliasing, hosts may have more than one name.  When
processing any of the following types of pattern, all the host's names
are checked:

   • If a pattern starts with "*" the remainder of the item must match
     the end of the host name.  For example, ‘*.b.c’ matches all hosts
     whose names end in _.b.c_.  This special simple form is provided
     because this is a very common requirement.  Other kinds of
     wildcarding require the use of a regular expression.

   • If the item starts with "^" it is taken to be a regular expression
     which is matched against the host name.  Host names are
     case-independent, so this regular expression match is by default
     case-independent, but you can make it case-dependent by starting it
     with ‘(?-i)’.  References to descriptions of the syntax of regular
     expressions are given in chapter *note Regular expressions::.  For
     example,

          ^(a|b)\.c\.d$

     is a regular expression that matches either of the two hosts
     _a.c.d_ or _b.c.d_.  When a regular expression is used in a host
     list, you must take care that backslash and dollar characters are
     not misinterpreted as part of the string expansion.  The simplest
     way to do this is to use ‘\N’ to mark that part of the string as
     non-expandable.  For example:

          sender_unqualified_hosts = \N^(a|b)\.c\.d$\N : ....

     *Warning*: If you want to match a complete host name, you must
     include the ‘$’ terminating metacharacter in the regular
     expression, as in the above example.  Without it, a match at the
     start of the host name is all that is required.


File: spec.info,  Node: Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found,  Next: Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists,  Prev: Host list patterns that match by host name,  Up: Host lists

10.4.5 Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found
-----------------------------------------------------------

While processing a host list, Exim may need to look up an IP address
from a name (see section *note Host list patterns that match by IP
address::), or it may need to look up a host name from an IP address
(see section *note Host list patterns that match by host name::).  In
either case, the behaviour when it fails to find the information it is
seeking is the same.

   *Note*: This section applies to permanent lookup failures.  It does
_not_ apply to temporary DNS errors, whose handling is described in the
next section.

   Exim parses a host list from left to right.  If it encounters a
permanent lookup failure in any item in the host list before it has
found a match, Exim treats it as a failure and the default behavior is
as if the host does not match the list.  This may not always be what you
want to happen.  To change Exim's behaviour, the special items
‘+include_unknown’ or ‘+ignore_unknown’ may appear in the list (at top
level - they are not recognized in an indirected file).  The effects of
these special items do not propagate into referenced named lists.

   • If any item that follows ‘+include_unknown’ requires information
     that cannot found, Exim behaves as if the host does match the list.
     For example,

          host_reject_connection = +include_unknown:*.enemy.ex

     rejects connections from any host whose name matches ‘*.enemy.ex’,
     and also any hosts whose name it cannot find.

   • If any item that follows ‘+ignore_unknown’ requires information
     that cannot be found, Exim ignores that item and proceeds to the
     rest of the list.  For example:

          accept hosts = +ignore_unknown : friend.example : \
                         192.168.4.5

     accepts from any host whose name is _friend.example_ and from
     192.168.4.5, whether or not its host name can be found.  Without
     ‘+ignore_unknown’, if no name can be found for 192.168.4.5, it is
     rejected.

   Both ‘+include_unknown’ and ‘+ignore_unknown’ may appear in the same
list.  The effect of each one lasts until the next, or until the end of
the list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists,  Next: Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information,  Prev: Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found,  Up: Host lists

10.4.6 Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists
---------------------------------------------------------------

This section explains the host/ip processing logic with the same
concepts as the previous section, but specifically addresses what
happens when a wildcarded hostname is one of the items in the hostlist.

   • If you have name lookups or wildcarded host names and IP addresses
     in the same host list, you should normally put the IP addresses
     first.  For example, in an ACL you could have:

          accept hosts = 10.9.8.7 : *.friend.example

     The reason you normally would order it this way lies in the
     left-to-right way that Exim processes lists.  It can test IP
     addresses without doing any DNS lookups, but when it reaches an
     item that requires a host name, it fails if it cannot find a host
     name to compare with the pattern.  If the above list is given in
     the opposite order, the ‘accept’ statement fails for a host whose
     name cannot be found, even if its IP address is 10.9.8.7.

   • If you really do want to do the name check first, and still
     recognize the IP address, you can rewrite the ACL like this:

          accept hosts = *.friend.example
          accept hosts = 10.9.8.7

     If the first ‘accept’ fails, Exim goes on to try the second one.
     See chapter *note Access control lists:: for details of ACLs.
     Alternatively, you can use ‘+ignore_unknown’, which was discussed
     in depth in *note Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be
     found::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information,  Next: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name,  Prev: Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists,  Up: Host lists

10.4.7 Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information
------------------------------------------------------------

A temporary DNS lookup failure normally causes a defer action (except
when ‘dns_again_means_nonexist’ converts it into a permanent error).
However, host lists can include ‘+ignore_defer’ and ‘+include_defer’,
analogous to ‘+ignore_unknown’ and ‘+include_unknown’, as described in
*note Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found::.  These
options should be used with care, probably only in non-critical host
lists such as whitelists.


File: spec.info,  Node: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name,  Next: Host list patterns for query-style lookups,  Prev: Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information,  Up: Host lists

10.4.8 Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name
-------------------------------------------------------------

If a pattern is of the form

     <single-key-search-type>;<search-data>

   for example

     dbm;/host/accept/list

   a single-key lookup is performed, using the host name as its key.  If
the lookup succeeds, the host matches the item.  The actual data that is
looked up is not used.

   *Reminder*: With this kind of pattern, you must have host _names_ as
keys in the file, not IP addresses.  If you want to do lookups based on
IP addresses, you must precede the search type with "net-" (see section
*note Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address::).
There is, however, no reason why you could not use two items in the same
list, one doing an address lookup and one doing a name lookup, both
using the same file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Host list patterns for query-style lookups,  Prev: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name,  Up: Host lists

10.4.9 Host list patterns for query-style lookups
-------------------------------------------------

If a pattern is of the form

     <query-style-search-type>;<query>

   the query is obeyed, and if it succeeds, the host matches the item.
The actual data that is looked up is not used.  The variables
‘$sender_host_address’ and ‘$sender_host_name’ can be used in the query.
For example:

     hosts_lookup = pgsql;\
       select ip from hostlist where ip='$sender_host_address'

   The value of ‘$sender_host_address’ for an IPv6 address contains
colons.  You can use the ‘sg’ expansion item to change this if you need
to.  If you want to use masked IP addresses in database queries, you can
use the ‘mask’ expansion operator.

   If the query contains a reference to ‘$sender_host_name’, Exim
automatically looks up the host name if it has not already done so.
(See section *note Host list patterns that match by host name:: for
comments on finding host names.)

   Historical note: prior to release 4.30, Exim would always attempt to
find a host name before running the query, unless the search type was
preceded by ‘net-’.  This is no longer the case.  For backwards
compatibility, ‘net-’ is still recognized for query-style lookups, but
its presence or absence has no effect.  (Of course, for single-key
lookups, ‘net-’ _is_ important.  See section *note Host list patterns
for single-key lookups by host address::.)


File: spec.info,  Node: Address lists,  Next: Local part lists,  Prev: Host lists,  Up: Domain; host; and address lists

10.5 Address lists
==================

Address lists contain patterns that are matched against mail addresses.
There is one special case to be considered: the sender address of a
bounce message is always empty.  You can test for this by providing an
empty item in an address list.  For example, you can set up a router to
process bounce messages by using this option setting:

     senders = :

   The presence of the colon creates an empty item.  If you do not
provide any data, the list is empty and matches nothing.  The empty
sender can also be detected by a regular expression that matches an
empty string, and by a query-style lookup that succeeds when
‘$sender_address’ is empty.

   Non-empty items in an address list can be straightforward email
addresses.  For example:

     senders = jbc@askone.example : hs@anacreon.example

   A certain amount of wildcarding is permitted.  If a pattern contains
an @ character, but is not a regular expression and does not begin with
a semicolon-terminated lookup type (described below), the local part of
the subject address is compared with the local part of the pattern,
which may start with an asterisk.  If the local parts match, the domain
is checked in exactly the same way as for a pattern in a domain list.
For example, the domain can be wildcarded, refer to a named list, or be
a lookup:

     deny senders = *@*.spamming.site:\
                    *@+hostile_domains:\
                    bozo@partial-lsearch;/list/of/dodgy/sites:\
                    *@dbm;/bad/domains.db

   If a local part that begins with an exclamation mark is required, it
has to be specified using a regular expression, because otherwise the
exclamation mark is treated as a sign of negation, as is standard in
lists.

   If a non-empty pattern that is not a regular expression or a lookup
does not contain an @ character, it is matched against the domain part
of the subject address.  The only two formats that are recognized this
way are a literal domain, or a domain pattern that starts with *.  In
both these cases, the effect is the same as if ‘*@’ preceded the
pattern.  For example:

     deny senders = enemy.domain : *.enemy.domain

   The following kinds of more complicated address list pattern can
match any address, including the empty address that is characteristic of
bounce message senders:

   • If (after expansion) a pattern starts with "^", a regular
     expression match is done against the complete address, with the
     pattern as the regular expression.  You must take care that
     backslash and dollar characters are not misinterpreted as part of
     the string expansion.  The simplest way to do this is to use ‘\N’
     to mark that part of the string as non-expandable.  For example:

          deny senders = \N^.*this.*@example\.com$\N : \
                         \N^\d{8}.+@spamhaus.example$\N : ...

     The ‘\N’ sequences are removed by the expansion, so these items do
     indeed start with "^" by the time they are being interpreted as
     address patterns.

   • Complete addresses can be looked up by using a pattern that starts
     with a lookup type terminated by a semicolon, followed by the data
     for the lookup.  For example:

          deny senders = cdb;/etc/blocked.senders : \
            mysql;select address from blocked where \
            address='${quote_mysql:$sender_address}'

     Both query-style and single-key lookup types can be used.  For a
     single-key lookup type, Exim uses the complete address as the key.
     However, empty keys are not supported for single-key lookups, so a
     match against the empty address always fails.  This restriction
     does not apply to query-style lookups.

     Partial matching for single-key lookups (section *note Partial
     matching in single-key lookups::) cannot be used, and is ignored if
     specified, with an entry being written to the panic log.  However,
     you can configure lookup defaults, as described in section *note
     Default values in single-key lookups::, but this is useful only for
     the "*@" type of default.  For example, with this lookup:

          accept senders = lsearch*@;/some/file

     the file could contains lines like this:

          user1@domain1.example
          *@domain2.example

     and for the sender address _nimrod@jaeger.example_, the sequence of
     keys that are tried is:

          nimrod@jaeger.example
          *@jaeger.example
          *

     *Warning 1*: Do not include a line keyed by "*" in the file,
     because that would mean that every address matches, thus rendering
     the test useless.

     *Warning 2*: Do not confuse these two kinds of item:

          deny recipients = dbm*@;/some/file
          deny recipients = *@dbm;/some/file

     The first does a whole address lookup, with defaulting, as just
     described, because it starts with a lookup type.  The second
     matches the local part and domain independently, as described in a
     bullet point below.

   The following kinds of address list pattern can match only non-empty
addresses.  If the subject address is empty, a match against any of
these pattern types always fails.

   • If a pattern starts with "@@" followed by a single-key lookup item
     (for example, ‘@@lsearch;/some/file’), the address that is being
     checked is split into a local part and a domain.  The domain is
     looked up in the file.  If it is not found, there is no match.  If
     it is found, the data that is looked up from the file is treated as
     a colon-separated list of local part patterns, each of which is
     matched against the subject local part in turn.

     The lookup may be a partial one, and/or one involving a search for
     a default keyed by "*" (see section *note Default values in
     single-key lookups::).  The local part patterns that are looked up
     can be regular expressions or begin with "*", or even be further
     lookups.  They may also be independently negated.  For example,
     with

          deny senders = @@dbm;/etc/reject-by-domain

     the data from which the DBM file is built could contain lines like

          baddomain.com:  !postmaster : *

     to reject all senders except ‘postmaster’ from that domain.

     If a local part that actually begins with an exclamation mark is
     required, it has to be specified using a regular expression.  In
     ‘lsearch’ files, an entry may be split over several lines by
     indenting the second and subsequent lines, but the separating colon
     must still be included at line breaks.  White space surrounding the
     colons is ignored.  For example:

          aol.com:  spammer1 : spammer2 : ^[0-9]+$ :
            spammer3 : spammer4

     As in all colon-separated lists in Exim, a colon can be included in
     an item by doubling.

     If the last item in the list starts with a right angle-bracket, the
     remainder of the item is taken as a new key to look up in order to
     obtain a continuation list of local parts.  The new key can be any
     sequence of characters.  Thus one might have entries like

          aol.com: spammer1 : spammer 2 : >*
          xyz.com: spammer3 : >*
          *:       ^\d{8}$

     in a file that was searched with ‘@@dbm*’, to specify a match for
     8-digit local parts for all domains, in addition to the specific
     local parts listed for each domain.  Of course, using this feature
     costs another lookup each time a chain is followed, but the effort
     needed to maintain the data is reduced.

     It is possible to construct loops using this facility, and in order
     to catch them, the chains may be no more than fifty items long.

   • The @@<_lookup_> style of item can also be used with a query-style
     lookup, but in this case, the chaining facility is not available.
     The lookup can only return a single list of local parts.

   *Warning*: There is an important difference between the address list
items in these two examples:

     senders = +my_list
     senders = *@+my_list

   In the first one, ‘my_list’ is a named address list, whereas in the
second example it is a named domain list.

* Menu:

* Case of letters in address lists::


File: spec.info,  Node: Case of letters in address lists,  Up: Address lists

10.5.1 Case of letters in address lists
---------------------------------------

Domains in email addresses are always handled caselessly, but for local
parts case may be significant on some systems (see ‘caseful_local_part’
for how Exim deals with this when routing addresses).  However, *RFC
2505 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2505#section-2)*
(_Anti-Spam Recommendations for SMTP MTAs_) suggests that matching of
addresses to blocking lists should be done in a case-independent manner.
Since most address lists in Exim are used for this kind of control, Exim
attempts to do this by default.

   The domain portion of an address is always lowercased before matching
it to an address list.  The local part is lowercased by default, and any
string comparisons that take place are done caselessly.  This means that
the data in the address list itself, in files included as plain
filenames, and in any file that is looked up using the "@@" mechanism,
can be in any case.  However, the keys in files that are looked up by a
search type other than ‘lsearch’ (which works caselessly) must be in
lower case, because these lookups are not case-independent.

   To allow for the possibility of caseful address list matching, if an
item in an address list is the string "+caseful", the original case of
the local part is restored for any comparisons that follow, and string
comparisons are no longer case-independent.  This does not affect the
domain, which remains in lower case.  However, although independent
matches on the domain alone are still performed caselessly, regular
expressions that match against an entire address become case-sensitive
after "+caseful" has been seen.  The effects of "+caseful" propagate
into any referenced named lists.

   This string may not be tainted.  To do caseful matching on list
elements whic are tainted, place them in a named list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Local part lists,  Prev: Address lists,  Up: Domain; host; and address lists

10.6 Local part lists
=====================

These behave in the same way as domain and host lists, with the
following changes:

   Case-sensitivity in local part lists is handled in the same way as
for address lists, as just described.  The "+caseful" item can be used
if required.  In a setting of the ‘local_parts’ option in a router with
‘caseful_local_part’ set false, the subject is lowercased and the
matching is initially case-insensitive.  In this case, "+caseful" will
restore case-sensitive matching in the local part list, but not
elsewhere in the router.  If ‘caseful_local_part’ is set true in a
router, matching in the ‘local_parts’ option is case-sensitive from the
start.

   This string may not be tainted.  To do caseful matching on list
elements whic are tainted, place them in a named list.

   If a local part list is indirected to a file (see section *note File
names in lists::), comments are handled in the same way as address lists
- they are recognized only if the # is preceded by white space or the
start of the line.  Otherwise, local part lists are matched in the same
way as domain lists, except that the special items that refer to the
local host (‘@’, ‘@[]’, ‘@mx_any’, ‘@mx_primary’, and ‘@mx_secondary’)
are not recognized.  Refer to section *note Domain lists:: for details
of the other available item types.


File: spec.info,  Node: String expansions,  Next: Embedded Perl,  Prev: Domain; host; and address lists,  Up: Top

11 String expansions
********************

Many strings in Exim's runtime configuration are expanded before use.
Some of them are expanded every time they are used; others are expanded
only once.

   When a string is being expanded it is copied verbatim from left to
right except when a dollar or backslash character is encountered.  A
dollar specifies the start of a portion of the string that is
interpreted and replaced as described below in section *note Expansion
items:: onwards.  Backslash is used as an escape character, as described
in the following section.

   If any porttion of the result string is tainted, the entire result
is.

   Whether a string is expanded depends upon the context.  Usually this
is solely dependent upon the option for which a value is sought; in this
documentation, options for which string expansion is performed are
marked with * after the data type.  ACL rules always expand strings.  A
couple of expansion conditions do not expand some of the brace-delimited
branches, for security reasons, and expansion of data deriving from the
sender ("tainted data") is not permitted (including acessing a file
using a tainted name).

   Common ways of obtaining untainted equivalents of variables with
tainted values come down to using the tainted value as a lookup key in a
trusted database.  This database could be the filesystem structure, or
the password file, or accessed via a DBMS. Specific methods are indexed
under "de-tainting".

* Menu:

* Literal text in expanded strings::
* Character escape sequences in expanded strings::
* Testing string expansions::
* Forced expansion failure::
* Expansion items::
* Expansion operators::
* Expansion conditions::
* Combining expansion conditions::
* Expansion variables::


File: spec.info,  Node: Literal text in expanded strings,  Next: Character escape sequences in expanded strings,  Up: String expansions

11.1 Literal text in expanded strings
=====================================

An uninterpreted dollar can be included in an expanded string by putting
a backslash in front of it.  A backslash can be used to prevent any
special character being treated specially in an expansion, including
backslash itself.  If the string appears in quotes in the configuration
file, two backslashes are required because the quotes themselves cause
interpretation of backslashes when the string is read in (see section
*note String values::).

   A portion of the string can specified as non-expandable by placing it
between two occurrences of ‘\N’.  This is particularly useful for
protecting regular expressions, which often contain backslashes and
dollar signs.  For example:

     deny senders = \N^\d{8}[a-z]@some\.site\.example$\N

   On encountering the first ‘\N’, the expander copies subsequent
characters without interpretation until it reaches the next ‘\N’ or the
end of the string.


File: spec.info,  Node: Character escape sequences in expanded strings,  Next: Testing string expansions,  Prev: Literal text in expanded strings,  Up: String expansions

11.2 Character escape sequences in expanded strings
===================================================

A backslash followed by one of the letters "n", "r", or "t" in an
expanded string is recognized as an escape sequence for the character
newline, carriage return, or tab, respectively.  A backslash followed by
up to three octal digits is recognized as an octal encoding for a single
character, and a backslash followed by "x" and up to two hexadecimal
digits is a hexadecimal encoding.

   These escape sequences are also recognized in quoted strings when
they are read in.  Their interpretation in expansions as well is useful
for unquoted strings, and for other cases such as looked-up strings that
are then expanded.


File: spec.info,  Node: Testing string expansions,  Next: Forced expansion failure,  Prev: Character escape sequences in expanded strings,  Up: String expansions

11.3 Testing string expansions
==============================

Many expansions can be tested by calling Exim with the ‘-be’ option.
This takes the command arguments, or lines from the standard input if
there are no arguments, runs them through the string expansion code, and
writes the results to the standard output.  Variables based on
configuration values are set up, but since no message is being
processed, variables such as ‘$local_part’ have no value.  Nevertheless
the ‘-be’ option can be useful for checking out file and database
lookups, and the use of expansion operators such as ‘sg’, ‘substr’ and
‘nhash’.

   When reading lines from the standard input, macros can be defined and
ACL variables can be set.  For example:

     MY_MACRO = foo
     set acl_m_myvar = bar

   Such macros and variables can then be used in later input lines.

   Exim gives up its root privilege when it is called with the ‘-be’
option, and instead runs under the uid and gid it was called with, to
prevent users from using ‘-be’ for reading files to which they do not
have access.

   If you want to test expansions that include variables whose values
are taken from a message, there are two other options that can be used.
The ‘-bem’ option is like ‘-be’ except that it is followed by a
filename.  The file is read as a message before doing the test
expansions.  For example:

     exim -bem /tmp/test.message '$h_subject:'

   The ‘-Mset’ option is used in conjunction with ‘-be’ and is followed
by an Exim message identifier.  For example:

     exim -be -Mset 1GrA8W-0004WS-LQ '$recipients'

   This loads the message from Exim's spool before doing the test
expansions, and is therefore restricted to admin users.


File: spec.info,  Node: Forced expansion failure,  Next: Expansion items,  Prev: Testing string expansions,  Up: String expansions

11.4 Forced expansion failure
=============================

A number of expansions that are described in the following section have
alternative "true" and "false" substrings, enclosed in brace characters
(which are sometimes called "curly brackets").  Which of the two strings
is used depends on some condition that is evaluated as part of the
expansion.  If, instead of a "false" substring, the word "fail" is used
(not in braces), the entire string expansion fails in a way that can be
detected by the code that requested the expansion.  This is called
"forced expansion failure", and its consequences depend on the
circumstances.  In some cases it is no different from any other
expansion failure, but in others a different action may be taken.  Such
variations are mentioned in the documentation of the option that is
being expanded.


File: spec.info,  Node: Expansion items,  Next: Expansion operators,  Prev: Forced expansion failure,  Up: String expansions

11.5 Expansion items
====================

The following items are recognized in expanded strings.  White space may
be used between sub-items that are keywords or substrings enclosed in
braces inside an outer set of braces, to improve readability.
*Warning*: Within braces, white space is significant.

*$*<_variable name_> or *${*<_variable name_>*}*
     Substitute the contents of the named variable, for example:

          $local_part
          ${domain}

     The second form can be used to separate the name from subsequent
     alphanumeric characters.  This form (using braces) is available
     only for variables; it does _not_ apply to message headers.  The
     names of the variables are given in section *note Expansion
     variables:: below.  If the name of a non-existent variable is
     given, the expansion fails.

*${*<_op_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     The string is first itself expanded, and then the operation
     specified by <_op_> is applied to it.  For example:

          ${lc:$local_part}

     The string starts with the first character after the colon, which
     may be leading white space.  A list of operators is given in
     section *note Expansion operators:: below.  The operator notation
     is used for simple expansion items that have just one argument,
     because it reduces the number of braces and therefore makes the
     string easier to understand.

*$bheader_*<_header name_>*:* or *$bh_*<_header name_>*:*
     This item inserts "basic" header lines.  It is described with the
     ‘header’ expansion item below.

*${acl{*<_name_>*}{*<_arg_>*}...}*
     The name and zero to nine argument strings are first expanded
     separately.  The expanded arguments are assigned to the variables
     ‘$acl_arg1’ to ‘$acl_arg9’ in order.  Any unused are made empty.
     The variable ‘$acl_narg’ is set to the number of arguments.  The
     named ACL (see chapter *note Access control lists::) is called and
     may use the variables; if another acl expansion is used the values
     are restored after it returns.  If the ACL sets a value using a
     "message =" modifier and returns accept or deny, the value becomes
     the result of the expansion.  If no message is set and the ACL
     returns accept or deny the expansion result is an empty string.  If
     the ACL returns defer the result is a forced-fail.  Otherwise the
     expansion fails.

*${authresults{*<_authserv-id_>*}}*
     This item returns a string suitable for insertion as an
     _Authentication-Results:_ header line.  The given <_authserv-id_>
     is included in the result; typically this will be a domain name
     identifying the system performing the authentications.  Methods
     that might be present in the result include:

          none
          iprev
          auth
          spf
          dkim

     Example use (as an ACL modifier):

                add_header = :at_start:${authresults {$primary_hostname}}

     This is safe even if no authentication results are available and
     would generally be placed in the DATA ACL.

*${certextract{*<_field_>*}{*<_certificate_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The <_certificate_> must be a variable of type certificate.  The
     field name is expanded and used to retrieve the relevant field from
     the certificate.  Supported fields are:

          version
          serial_number
          subject         RFC4514 DN
          issuer          RFC4514 DN
          notbefore       time
          notafter        time
          sig_algorithm
          signature
          subj_altname    tagged list
          ocsp_uri        list
          crl_uri         list

     If the field is found, <_string2_> is expanded, and replaces the
     whole item; otherwise <_string3_> is used.  During the expansion of
     <_string2_> the variable ‘$value’ contains the value that has been
     extracted.  Afterwards, it is restored to any previous value it
     might have had.

     If {<_string3_>} is omitted, the item is replaced by an empty
     string if the key is not found.  If {<_string2_>} is also omitted,
     the value that was extracted is used.

     Some field names take optional modifiers, appended and separated by
     commas.

     The field selectors marked as "RFC4514" above output a
     Distinguished Name string which is not quite parseable by Exim as a
     comma-separated tagged list (the exceptions being elements
     containing commas).  RDN elements of a single type may be selected
     by a modifier of the type label; if so the expansion result is a
     list (newline-separated by default).  The separator may be changed
     by another modifier of a right angle-bracket followed immediately
     by the new separator.  Recognised RDN type labels include "CN",
     "O", "OU" and "DC".

     The field selectors marked as "time" above take an optional
     modifier of "int" for which the result is the number of seconds
     since epoch.  Otherwise the result is a human-readable string in
     the timezone selected by the main "timezone" option.

     The field selectors marked as "list" above return a list,
     newline-separated by default, (embedded separator characters in
     elements are doubled).  The separator may be changed by a modifier
     of a right angle-bracket followed immediately by the new separator.

     The field selectors marked as "tagged" above prefix each list
     element with a type string and an equals sign.  Elements of only
     one type may be selected by a modifier which is one of "dns", "uri"
     or "mail"; if so the element tags are omitted.

     If not otherwise noted field values are presented in human-readable
     form.

*${dlfunc{*<_file_>*}{*<_function_>*}{*<_arg_>*}{*<_arg_>*}...}*
     This expansion dynamically loads and then calls a locally-written C
     function.  This functionality is available only if Exim is compiled
     with

          EXPAND_DLFUNC=yes

     set in ‘Local/Makefile’.  Once loaded, Exim remembers the
     dynamically loaded object so that it doesn't reload the same object
     file in the same Exim process (but of course Exim does start new
     processes frequently).

     There may be from zero to eight arguments to the function.

     When compiling a local function that is to be called in this way,
     first ‘DLFUNC_IMPL’ should be defined, and second ‘local_scan.h’
     should be included.  The Exim variables and functions that are
     defined by that API are also available for dynamically loaded
     functions.  The function itself must have the following type:

          int dlfunction(uschar **yield, int argc, uschar *argv[])

     Where ‘uschar’ is a typedef for ‘unsigned char’ in ‘local_scan.h’.
     The function should return one of the following values:

     ‘OK’: Success.  The string that is placed in the variable _yield_
     is put into the expanded string that is being built.

     ‘FAIL’: A non-forced expansion failure occurs, with the error
     message taken from _yield_, if it is set.

     ‘FAIL_FORCED’: A forced expansion failure occurs, with the error
     message taken from _yield_ if it is set.

     ‘ERROR’: Same as ‘FAIL’, except that a panic log entry is written.

     When compiling a function that is to be used in this way with gcc,
     you need to add ‘-shared’ to the gcc command.  Also, in the Exim
     build-time configuration, you must add ‘-export-dynamic’ to
     EXTRALIBS.

*${env{*<_key_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}}*
     The key is first expanded separately, and leading and trailing
     white space removed.  This is then searched for as a name in the
     environment.  If a variable is found then its value is placed in
     ‘$value’ and <_string1_> is expanded, otherwise <_string2_> is
     expanded.

     Instead of {<_string2_>} the word "fail" (not in curly brackets)
     can appear, for example:

          ${env{USER}{$value} fail }

     This forces an expansion failure (see section *note Forced
     expansion failure::); {<_string1_>} must be present for "fail" to
     be recognized.

     If {<_string2_>} is omitted an empty string is substituted on
     search failure.  If {<_string1_>} is omitted the search result is
     substituted on search success.

     The environment is adjusted by the ‘keep_environment’ and
     ‘add_environment’ main section options.

*${extract{*<_key_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The key and <_string1_> are first expanded separately.  Leading and
     trailing white space is removed from the key (but not from any of
     the strings).  The key must not be empty and must not consist
     entirely of digits.  The expanded <_string1_> must be of the form:

          <key1> = <value1>  <key2> = <value2> ...

     where the equals signs and spaces (but not both) are optional.  If
     any of the values contain white space, they must be enclosed in
     double quotes, and any values that are enclosed in double quotes
     are subject to escape processing as described in section *note
     String values::.  The expanded <_string1_> is searched for the
     value that corresponds to the key.  The search is case-insensitive.
     If the key is found, <_string2_> is expanded, and replaces the
     whole item; otherwise <_string3_> is used.  During the expansion of
     <_string2_> the variable ‘$value’ contains the value that has been
     extracted.  Afterwards, it is restored to any previous value it
     might have had.

     If {<_string3_>} is omitted, the item is replaced by an empty
     string if the key is not found.  If {<_string2_>} is also omitted,
     the value that was extracted is used.  Thus, for example, these two
     expansions are identical, and yield "2001":

          ${extract{gid}{uid=1984 gid=2001}}
          ${extract{gid}{uid=1984 gid=2001}{$value}}

     Instead of {<_string3_>} the word "fail" (not in curly brackets)
     can appear, for example:

          ${extract{Z}{A=... B=...}{$value} fail }

     This forces an expansion failure (see section *note Forced
     expansion failure::); {<_string2_>} must be present for "fail" to
     be recognized.

*${extract json{*<_key_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
*${extract jsons{*<_key_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The key and <_string1_> are first expanded separately.  Leading and
     trailing white space is removed from the key (but not from any of
     the strings).  The key must not be empty and must not consist
     entirely of digits.  The expanded <_string1_> must be of the form:

          { <"key1"> : <value1> ,  <"key2"> , <value2> ... }

     The braces, commas and colons, and the quoting of the member name
     are required; the spaces are optional.  Matching of the key against
     the member names is done case-sensitively.  For the "json" variant,
     if a returned value is a JSON string, it retains its leading and
     trailing quotes.  For the "jsons" variant, which is intended for
     use with JSON strings, the leading and trailing quotes are removed
     from the returned value.

     The results of matching are handled as above.

*${extract{*<_number_>*}{*<_separators_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The <_number_> argument must consist entirely of decimal digits,
     apart from leading and trailing white space, which is ignored.
     This is what distinguishes this form of ‘extract’ from the previous
     kind.  It behaves in the same way, except that, instead of
     extracting a named field, it extracts from <_string1_> the field
     whose number is given as the first argument.  You can use ‘$value’
     in <_string2_> or ‘fail’ instead of <_string3_> as before.

     The fields in the string are separated by any one of the characters
     in the separator string.  These may include space or tab
     characters.  The first field is numbered one.  If the number is
     negative, the fields are counted from the end of the string, with
     the rightmost one numbered -1.  If the number given is zero, the
     entire string is returned.  If the modulus of the number is greater
     than the number of fields in the string, the result is the
     expansion of <_string3_>, or the empty string if <_string3_> is not
     provided.  For example:

          ${extract{2}{:}{x:42:99:& Mailer::/bin/bash}}

     yields "42", and

          ${extract{-4}{:}{x:42:99:& Mailer::/bin/bash}}

     yields "99".  Two successive separators mean that the field between
     them is empty (for example, the fifth field above).

*${extract json {*<_number_>*}}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
*${extract jsons{*<_number_>*}}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The <_number_> argument must consist entirely of decimal digits,
     apart from leading and trailing white space, which is ignored.

     Field selection and result handling is as above; there is no choice
     of field separator.  For the "json" variant, if a returned value is
     a JSON string, it retains its leading and trailing quotes.  For the
     "jsons" variant, which is intended for use with JSON strings, the
     leading and trailing quotes are removed from the returned value.

*${filter{*<_list_>*}{*<_condition_>*}}*
     The first argument has the part after any change-of-list-separator
     (see *note Changing list separators::) expanded, then the whole is
     taken as a list.  The default separator for the list is a colon.

     For each item in this list, its value is placed in ‘$item’, and
     then the second argument is evaluated as a condition.  Any
     modification of ‘$value’ by this evaluation is discarded.  If the
     condition is true, ‘$item’ is added to the output as an item in a
     new list; if the condition is false, the item is discarded.  The
     separator used for the output list is the same as the one used for
     the input, but a separator setting is not included in the output.
     For example:

          ${filter{a:b:c}{!eq{$item}{b}}}

     yields ‘a:c’.  At the end of the overall expansion, the value of
     ‘$item’ is restored to what it was before.  See also the ‘map’ and
     ‘reduce’ expansion items.

*${hash{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     This is a textual hashing function, and was the first to be
     implemented in early versions of Exim.  In current releases, there
     are other hashing functions (numeric, MD5, and SHA-1), which are
     described below.

     The first two strings, after expansion, must be numbers.  Call them
     <_m_> and <_n_>.  If you are using fixed values for these numbers,
     that is, if <_string1_> and <_string2_> do not change when they are
     expanded, you can use the simpler operator notation that avoids
     some of the braces:

          ${hash_<n>_<m>:<string>}

     The second number is optional (in both notations).  If <_n_> is
     greater than or equal to the length of the string, the expansion
     item returns the string.  Otherwise it computes a new string of
     length <_n_> by applying a hashing function to the string.  The new
     string consists of characters taken from the first <_m_> characters
     of the string

          abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQWRSTUVWXYZ0123456789

     If <_m_> is not present the value 26 is used, so that only lower
     case letters appear.  For example:

          $hash{3}{monty}}              yields  jmg
          $hash{5}{monty}}              yields  monty
          $hash{4}{62}{monty python}}   yields  fbWx

*$header_*<_header name_>*:* or *$h_*<_header name_>*:*
*$bheader_*<_header name_>*:* or *$bh_*<_header name_>*:*
*$lheader_*<_header name_>*:* or *$lh_*<_header name_>*:*
*$rheader_*<_header name_>*:* or *$rh_*<_header name_>*:*
     Substitute the contents of the named message header line, for
     example

          $header_reply-to:

     The newline that terminates a header line is not included in the
     expansion, but internal newlines (caused by splitting the header
     line over several physical lines) may be present.

     The difference between the four pairs of expansions is in the way
     the data in the header line is interpreted.

        • ‘rheader’ gives the original "raw" content of the header line,
          with no processing at all, and without the removal of leading
          and trailing white space.

        • ‘lheader’ gives a colon-separated list, one element per header
          when there are multiple headers with a given name.  Any
          embedded colon characters within an element are doubled, so
          normal Exim list-processing facilities can be used.  The
          terminating newline of each element is removed; in other
          respects the content is "raw".

        • ‘bheader’ removes leading and trailing white space, and then
          decodes base64 or quoted-printable MIME "words" within the
          header text, but does no character set translation.  If
          decoding of what looks superficially like a MIME "word" fails,
          the raw string is returned.  If decoding produces a binary
          zero character, it is replaced by a question mark - this is
          what Exim does for binary zeros that are actually received in
          header lines.

        • ‘header’ tries to translate the string as decoded by ‘bheader’
          to a standard character set.  This is an attempt to produce
          the same string as would be displayed on a user's MUA. If
          translation fails, the ‘rheader’ string is returned.
          Translation is attempted only on operating systems that
          support the ‘iconv()’ function.  This is indicated by the
          compile-time macro HAVE_ICONV in a system Makefile or in
          ‘Local/Makefile’.

     In a filter file, the target character set for ‘header’ can be
     specified by a command of the following form:

          headers charset "UTF-8"

     This command affects all references to ‘$h_’ (or ‘$header_’)
     expansions in subsequently obeyed filter commands.  In the absence
     of this command, the target character set in a filter is taken from
     the setting of the ‘headers_charset’ option in the runtime
     configuration.  The value of this option defaults to the value of
     HEADERS_CHARSET in ‘Local/Makefile’.  The ultimate default is
     ISO-8859-1.

     Header names follow the syntax of *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.6)*, which
     states that they may contain any printing characters except space
     and colon.  Consequently, curly brackets _do not_ terminate header
     names, and should not be used to enclose them as if they were
     variables.  Attempting to do so causes a syntax error.

     Only header lines that are common to all copies of a message are
     visible to this mechanism.  These are the original header lines
     that are received with the message, and any that are added by an
     ACL statement or by a system filter.  Header lines that are added
     to a particular copy of a message by a router or transport are not
     accessible.

     For incoming SMTP messages, no header lines are visible in ACLs
     that are obeyed before the data phase completes, because the header
     structure is not set up until the message is received.  They are
     visible in DKIM, PRDR and DATA ACLs.  Header lines that are added
     in a RCPT ACL (for example) are saved until the message's incoming
     header lines are available, at which point they are added.  When
     any of the above ACLs are running, however, header lines added by
     earlier ACLs are visible.

     Upper case and lower case letters are synonymous in header names.
     If the following character is white space, the terminating colon
     may be omitted, but this is not recommended, because you may then
     forget it when it is needed.  When white space terminates the
     header name, this white space is included in the expanded string.
     If the message does not contain the given header, the expansion
     item is replaced by an empty string.  (See the ‘def’ condition in
     section *note Expansion conditions:: for a means of testing for the
     existence of a header.)

     If there is more than one header with the same name, they are all
     concatenated to form the substitution string, up to a maximum
     length of 64K. Unless ‘rheader’ is being used, leading and trailing
     white space is removed from each header before concatenation, and a
     completely empty header is ignored.  A newline character is then
     inserted between non-empty headers, but there is no newline at the
     very end.  For the ‘header’ and ‘bheader’ expansion, for those
     headers that contain lists of addresses, a comma is also inserted
     at the junctions between headers.  This does not happen for the
     ‘rheader’ expansion.

     When the headers are from an incoming message, the result of
     expanding any of these variables is tainted.

*${hmac{*<_hashname_>*}{*<_secret_>*}{*<_string_>*}}*
     This function uses cryptographic hashing (either MD5 or SHA-1) to
     convert a shared secret and some text into a message authentication
     code, as specified in *RFC 2104
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2104)*.  This differs
     from ‘${md5:secret_text...}’ or ‘${sha1:secret_text...}’ in that
     the hmac step adds a signature to the cryptographic hash, allowing
     for authentication that is not possible with MD5 or SHA-1 alone.
     The hash name must expand to either ‘md5’ or ‘sha1’ at present.
     For example:

          ${hmac{md5}{somesecret}{$primary_hostname $tod_log}}

     For the hostname _mail.example.com_ and time 2002-10-17 11:30:59,
     this produces:

          dd97e3ba5d1a61b5006108f8c8252953

     As an example of how this might be used, you might put in the main
     part of an Exim configuration:

          SPAMSCAN_SECRET=cohgheeLei2thahw

     In a router or a transport you could then have:

          headers_add = \
            X-Spam-Scanned: ${primary_hostname} ${message_exim_id} \
            ${hmac{md5}{SPAMSCAN_SECRET}\
            {${primary_hostname},${message_exim_id},$h_message-id:}}

     Then given a message, you can check where it was scanned by looking
     at the _X-Spam-Scanned:_ header line.  If you know the secret, you
     can check that this header line is authentic by recomputing the
     authentication code from the host name, message ID and the
     _Message-id:_ header line.  This can be done using Exim's ‘-be’
     option, or by other means, for example, by using the
     _hmac_md5_hex()_ function in Perl.

*${if *<_condition_>* {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}}*
     If <_condition_> is true, <_string1_> is expanded and replaces the
     whole item; otherwise <_string2_> is used.  The available
     conditions are described in section *note Expansion conditions::
     below.  For example:

          ${if eq {$local_part}{postmaster} {yes}{no} }

     The second string need not be present; if it is not and the
     condition is not true, the item is replaced with nothing.
     Alternatively, the word "fail" may be present instead of the second
     string (without any curly brackets).  In this case, the expansion
     is forced to fail if the condition is not true (see section *note
     Forced expansion failure::).

     If both strings are omitted, the result is the string ‘true’ if the
     condition is true, and the empty string if the condition is false.
     This makes it less cumbersome to write custom ACL and router
     conditions.  For example, instead of

          condition = ${if >{$acl_m4}{3}{true}{false}}

     you can use

          condition = ${if >{$acl_m4}{3}}

*${imapfolder{*<_foldername_>*}}*
     This item converts a (possibly multilevel, or with non-ASCII
     characters) folder specification to a Maildir name for filesystem
     use.  For information on internationalisation support see *note MDA
     operations::.

*${length{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}}*
     The ‘length’ item is used to extract the initial portion of a
     string.  Both strings are expanded, and the first one must yield a
     number, <_n_>, say.  If you are using a fixed value for the number,
     that is, if <_string1_> does not change when expanded, you can use
     the simpler operator notation that avoids some of the braces:

          ${length_<n>:<string>}

     The result of this item is either the first <_n_> bytes or the
     whole of <_string2_>, whichever is the shorter.  Do not confuse
     ‘length’ with ‘strlen’, which gives the length of a string.  All
     measurement is done in bytes and is not UTF-8 aware.

*${listextract{*<_number_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The <_number_> argument must consist entirely of decimal digits,
     apart from an optional leading minus, and leading and trailing
     white space (which is ignored).

     The <_string1_> argument, after any leading change-of-separator
     (see *note Changing list separators::), is expanded and the whole
     forms the list.  By default, the list separator is a colon.

     The first field of the list is numbered one.  If the number is
     negative, the fields are counted from the end of the list, with the
     rightmost one numbered -1.  The numbered element of the list is
     extracted and placed in ‘$value’, then <_string2_> is expanded as
     the result.

     If the modulus of the number is zero or greater than the number of
     fields in the string, the result is the expansion of <_string3_>.

     For example:

          ${listextract{2}{x:42:99}}

     yields "42", and

          ${listextract{-3}{<, x,42,99,& Mailer,,/bin/bash}{result: $value}}

     yields "result: 42".

     If {<_string3_>} is omitted, an empty string is used for string3.
     If {<_string2_>} is also omitted, the value that was extracted is
     used.  You can use ‘fail’ instead of {<_string3_>} as in a string
     extract.

*${listquote{*<_separator_>*}{*<_string_>*}}*
     This item doubles any occurrence of the separator character in the
     given string.  An empty string is replaced with a single space.
     This converts the string into a safe form for use as a list
     element, in a list using the given separator.

*${lookup {*<_key_>*} *<_search type_>* {*<_file_>*} {*<_string1_>*} {*<_string2_>*}}*
*${lookup *<_search type_>* {*<_query_>*} {*<_string1_>*} {*<_string2_>*}}*
     The two forms of lookup item specify data lookups in files and
     databases, as discussed in chapter *note File and database
     lookups::.  The first form is used for single-key lookups, and the
     second is used for query-style lookups.  The <_key_>, <_file_>, and
     <_query_> strings are expanded before use.

     If there is any white space in a lookup item which is part of a
     filter command, a retry or rewrite rule, a routing rule for the
     ‘manualroute’ router, or any other place where white space is
     significant, the lookup item must be enclosed in double quotes.
     The use of data lookups in users' filter files may be locked out by
     the system administrator.

     If the lookup succeeds, <_string1_> is expanded and replaces the
     entire item.  During its expansion, the variable ‘$value’ contains
     the data returned by the lookup.  Afterwards it reverts to the
     value it had previously (at the outer level it is empty).  If the
     lookup fails, <_string2_> is expanded and replaces the entire item.
     If {<_string2_>} is omitted, the replacement is the empty string on
     failure.  If <_string2_> is provided, it can itself be a nested
     lookup, thus providing a mechanism for looking up a default value
     when the original lookup fails.

     If a nested lookup is used as part of <_string1_>, ‘$value’
     contains the data for the outer lookup while the parameters of the
     second lookup are expanded, and also while <_string2_> of the
     second lookup is expanded, should the second lookup fail.  Instead
     of {<_string2_>} the word "fail" can appear, and in this case, if
     the lookup fails, the entire expansion is forced to fail (see
     section *note Forced expansion failure::).  If both {<_string1_>}
     and {<_string2_>} are omitted, the result is the looked up value in
     the case of a successful lookup, and nothing in the case of
     failure.

     For single-key lookups, the string "partial" is permitted to
     precede the search type in order to do partial matching, and * or
     *@ may follow a search type to request default lookups if the key
     does not match (see sections *note Default values in single-key
     lookups:: and *note Partial matching in single-key lookups:: for
     details).

     If a partial search is used, the variables ‘$1’ and ‘$2’ contain
     the wild and non-wild parts of the key during the expansion of the
     replacement text.  They return to their previous values at the end
     of the lookup item.

     This example looks up the postmaster alias in the conventional
     alias file:

          ${lookup {postmaster} lsearch {/etc/aliases} {$value}}

     This example uses NIS+ to look up the full name of the user
     corresponding to the local part of an address, forcing the
     expansion to fail if it is not found:

          ${lookup nisplus {[name=$local_part],passwd.org_dir:gcos} \
            {$value}fail}

*${map{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}}*
     <_string1_> first has the part after any change-of-list-separator
     (see *note Changing list separators::) expanded, then the whole is
     taken as a list.  The default separator for the list is a colon.

     For each item in this list, its value is place in ‘$item’, and then
     <_string2_> is expanded and added to the output as an item in a new
     list.  The separator used for the output list is the same as the
     one used for the input, but a separator setting is not included in
     the output.  For example:

          ${map{a:b:c}{[$item]}} ${map{<- x-y-z}{($item)}}

     expands to ‘[a]:[b]:[c] (x)-(y)-(z)’.  At the end of the expansion,
     the value of ‘$item’ is restored to what it was before.  See also
     the ‘filter’ and ‘reduce’ expansion items.

*${nhash{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     The three strings are expanded; the first two must yield numbers.
     Call them <_n_> and <_m_>.  If you are using fixed values for these
     numbers, that is, if <_string1_> and <_string2_> do not change when
     they are expanded, you can use the simpler operator notation that
     avoids some of the braces:

          ${nhash_<n>_<m>:<string>}

     The second number is optional (in both notations).  If there is
     only one number, the result is a number in the range 0-<_n_>-1.
     Otherwise, the string is processed by a div/mod hash function that
     returns two numbers, separated by a slash, in the ranges 0 to
     <_n_>-1 and 0 to <_m_>-1, respectively.  For example,

          ${nhash{8}{64}{supercalifragilisticexpialidocious}}

     returns the string "6/33".

*${perl{*<_subroutine_>*}{*<_arg_>*}{*<_arg_>*}...}*
     This item is available only if Exim has been built to include an
     embedded Perl interpreter.  The subroutine name and the arguments
     are first separately expanded, and then the Perl subroutine is
     called with those arguments.  No additional arguments need be
     given; the maximum number permitted, including the name of the
     subroutine, is nine.

     The return value of the subroutine is inserted into the expanded
     string, unless the return value is ‘undef’.  In that case, the
     entire expansion is forced to fail, in the same way as an explicit
     "fail" on a lookup item does (see section *note Forced expansion
     failure::).  Whatever you return is evaluated in a scalar context,
     thus the return value is a scalar.  For example, if you return a
     Perl vector, the return value is the size of the vector, not its
     contents.

     If the subroutine exits by calling Perl's ‘die’ function, the
     expansion fails with the error message that was passed to ‘die’.
     More details of the embedded Perl facility are given in chapter
     *note Embedded Perl::.

     The ‘redirect’ router has an option called ‘forbid_filter_perl’
     which locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.

*${prvs{*<_address_>*}{*<_secret_>*}{*<_keynumber_>*}}*
     The first argument is a complete email address and the second is
     secret keystring.  The third argument, specifying a key number, is
     optional.  If absent, it defaults to 0.  The result of the
     expansion is a prvs-signed email address, to be typically used with
     the ‘return_path’ option on an ‘smtp’ transport as part of a bounce
     address tag validation (BATV) scheme.  For more discussion and an
     example, see section *note Bounce address tag validation::.

*${prvscheck{*<_address_>*}{*<_secret_>*}{*<_string_>*}}*
     This expansion item is the complement of the ‘prvs’ item.  It is
     used for checking prvs-signed addresses.  If the expansion of the
     first argument does not yield a syntactically valid prvs-signed
     address, the whole item expands to the empty string.  When the
     first argument does expand to a syntactically valid prvs-signed
     address, the second argument is expanded, with the prvs-decoded
     version of the address and the key number extracted from the
     address in the variables ‘$prvscheck_address’ and
     ‘$prvscheck_keynum’, respectively.

     These two variables can be used in the expansion of the second
     argument to retrieve the secret.  The validity of the prvs-signed
     address is then checked against the secret.  The result is stored
     in the variable ‘$prvscheck_result’, which is empty for failure or
     "1" for success.

     The third argument is optional; if it is missing, it defaults to an
     empty string.  This argument is now expanded.  If the result is an
     empty string, the result of the expansion is the decoded version of
     the address.  This is the case whether or not the signature was
     valid.  Otherwise, the result of the expansion is the expansion of
     the third argument.

     All three variables can be used in the expansion of the third
     argument.  However, once the expansion is complete, only
     ‘$prvscheck_result’ remains set.  For more discussion and an
     example, see section *note Bounce address tag validation::.

*${readfile{*<_file name_>*}{*<_eol string_>*}}*
     The filename and end-of-line (eol) string are first expanded
     separately.  The file is then read, and its contents replace the
     entire item.  All newline characters in the file are replaced by
     the end-of-line string if it is present.  Otherwise, newlines are
     left in the string.  String expansion is not applied to the
     contents of the file.  If you want this, you must wrap the item in
     an ‘expand’ operator.  If the file cannot be read, the string
     expansion fails.

     The ‘redirect’ router has an option called ‘forbid_filter_readfile’
     which locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.

*${readsocket{*<_name_>*}{*<_request_>*}{*<_options_>*}{*<_eol string_>*}{*<_fail string_>*}}*
     This item inserts data from a Unix domain or TCP socket into the
     expanded string.  The minimal way of using it uses just two
     arguments, as in these examples:

          ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request string}}
          ${readsocket{inet:some.host:1234}{request string}}

     For a Unix domain socket, the first substring must be the path to
     the socket.  For an Internet socket, the first substring must
     contain ‘inet:’ followed by a host name or IP address, followed by
     a colon and a port, which can be a number or the name of a TCP port
     in ‘/etc/services’.  An IP address may optionally be enclosed in
     square brackets.  This is best for IPv6 addresses.  For example:

          ${readsocket{inet:[::1]:1234}{request string}}

     Only a single host name may be given, but if looking it up yields
     more than one IP address, they are each tried in turn until a
     connection is made.  For both kinds of socket, Exim makes a
     connection, writes the request string (unless it is an empty
     string; no terminating NUL is ever sent) and reads from the socket
     until an end-of-file is read.  A timeout of 5 seconds is applied.
     Additional, optional arguments extend what can be done.  Firstly,
     you can vary the timeout.  For example:

          ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request string}{3s}}

     The third argument is a list of options, of which the first element
     is the timeout and must be present if any options are given.
     Further elements are options of form _name=value_.  Example:

          ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request string}{3s:shutdown=no}}

     The following option names are recognised:

        • *cache* Defines if the result data can be cached for use by a
          later identical request in the same process.  Values are "yes"
          or "no" (the default).  If not, all cached results for this
          connection specification will be invalidated.

        • *shutdown* Defines whether or not a write-shutdown is done on
          the connection after sending the request.  Values are "yes"
          (the default) or "no" (preferred, eg.  by some webservers).

        • *sni* Controls the use of Server Name Identification on the
          connection.  Any nonempty value will be the SNI sent; TLS will
          be forced.

        • *tls* Controls the use of TLS on the connection.  Values are
          "yes" or "no" (the default).  If it is enabled, a shutdown as
          described above is never done.

     A fourth argument allows you to change any newlines that are in the
     data that is read, in the same way as for ‘readfile’ (see above).
     This example turns them into spaces:

          ${readsocket{inet:127.0.0.1:3294}{request string}{3s}{ }}

     As with all expansions, the substrings are expanded before the
     processing happens.  Errors in these sub-expansions cause the
     expansion to fail.  In addition, the following errors can occur:

        • Failure to create a socket file descriptor;

        • Failure to connect the socket;

        • Failure to write the request string;

        • Timeout on reading from the socket.

     By default, any of these errors causes the expansion to fail.
     However, if you supply a fifth substring, it is expanded and used
     when any of the above errors occurs.  For example:

          ${readsocket{/socket/name}{request string}{3s}{\n}\
            {socket failure}}

     You can test for the existence of a Unix domain socket by wrapping
     this expansion in ‘${if exists’, but there is a race condition
     between that test and the actual opening of the socket, so it is
     safer to use the fifth argument if you want to be absolutely sure
     of avoiding an expansion error for a non-existent Unix domain
     socket, or a failure to connect to an Internet socket.

     The ‘redirect’ router has an option called
     ‘forbid_filter_readsocket’ which locks out the use of this
     expansion item in filter files.

*${reduce{*<_string1_>}{<_string2_>*}{*<_string3_>*}}*
     This operation reduces a list to a single, scalar string.

     <_string1_> first has the part after any change-of-list-separator
     (see *note Changing list separators::) expanded, then the whole is
     taken as a list.  The default separator for the list is a colon.

     Then <_string2_> is expanded and assigned to the ‘$value’ variable.
     After this, each item in the <_string1_> list is assigned to
     ‘$item’, in turn, and <_string3_> is expanded for each of them.
     The result of that expansion is assigned to ‘$value’ before the
     next iteration.  When the end of the list is reached, the final
     value of ‘$value’ is added to the expansion output.  The ‘reduce’
     expansion item can be used in a number of ways.  For example, to
     add up a list of numbers:

          ${reduce {<, 1,2,3}{0}{${eval:$value+$item}}}

     The result of that expansion would be ‘6’.  The maximum of a list
     of numbers can be found:

          ${reduce {3:0:9:4:6}{0}{${if >{$item}{$value}{$item}{$value}}}}

     At the end of a *reduce* expansion, the values of ‘$item’ and
     ‘$value’ are restored to what they were before.  See also the
     ‘filter’ and ‘map’ expansion items.

*$rheader_*<_header name_>*:* or *$rh_*<_header name_>*:*
     This item inserts "raw" header lines.  It is described with the
     ‘header’ expansion item in section *note Expansion items:: above.

*${run<*options*> {*<_command string_>*}{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}}*
     This item runs an external command, as a subprocess.  One option is
     supported after the word _run_, comma-separated and without
     whitespace.

     If the option _preexpand_ is not used, the command string before
     expansion is split into individual arguments by spaces and then
     each argument is separately expanded.  Then the command is run in a
     separate process, but under the same uid and gid.  As in other
     command executions from Exim, a shell is not used by default.  If
     the command requires a shell, you must explicitly code it.  The
     command name may not be tainted, but the remaining arguments can
     be.

     *Note*: if tainted arguments are used, they are supplied by a
     potential attacker; a careful assessment for security
     vulnerabilities should be done.

     If the option _preexpand_ is used, the command string is first
     expanded as a whole.  The expansion result is split apart into
     individual arguments by spaces, and then the command is run as
     above.  Since the arguments are split by spaces, when there is a
     variable expansion which has an empty result, it will cause the
     situation that the argument will simply be omitted when the program
     is actually executed by Exim.  If the script/program requires a
     specific number of arguments and the expanded variable could
     possibly result in this empty expansion, the variable must be
     quoted.  This is more difficult if the expanded variable itself
     could result in a string containing quotes, because it would
     interfere with the quotes around the command arguments.  A possible
     guard against this is to wrap the variable in the ‘sg’ operator to
     change any quote marks to some other character.  Neither the
     command nor any argument may be tainted.

     The standard input for the command exists, but is empty.  The
     standard output and standard error are set to the same file
     descriptor.  If the command succeeds (gives a zero return code)
     <_string1_> is expanded and replaces the entire item; during this
     expansion, the standard output/error from the command is in the
     variable ‘$value’.  If the command fails, <_string2_>, if present,
     is expanded and used.  Once again, during the expansion, the
     standard output/error from the command is in the variable ‘$value’.

     If <_string2_> is absent, the result is empty.  Alternatively,
     <_string2_> can be the word "fail" (not in braces) to force
     expansion failure if the command does not succeed.  If both strings
     are omitted, the result is contents of the standard output/error on
     success, and nothing on failure.

     The standard output/error of the command is put in the variable
     ‘$value’.  In this ACL example, the output of a command is logged
     for the admin to troubleshoot:

          warn  condition    = ${run{/usr/bin/id}{yes}{no}}
                log_message  = Output of id: $value

     If the command requires shell idioms, such as the > redirect
     operator, the shell must be invoked directly, such as with:

          ${run{/bin/bash -c "/usr/bin/id >/tmp/id"}{yes}{yes}}

     Note that ‘$value’ will not persist beyond the reception of a
     single message.

     The return code from the command is put in the variable ‘$runrc’,
     and this remains set afterwards, so in a filter file you can do
     things like this:

          if "${run{x y z}{}}$runrc" is 1 then ...
            elif $runrc is 2 then ...
            ...
          endif

     If execution of the command fails (for example, the command does
     not exist), the return code is 127 - the same code that shells use
     for non-existent commands.

     *Warning*: In a router or transport, you cannot assume the order in
     which option values are expanded, except for those preconditions
     whose order of testing is documented.  Therefore, you cannot
     reliably expect to set ‘$runrc’ by the expansion of one option, and
     use it in another.

     The ‘redirect’ router has an option called ‘forbid_filter_run’
     which locks out the use of this expansion item in filter files.

*${sg{*<_subject_>*}{*<_regex_>*}{*<_replacement_>*}}*
     This item works like Perl's substitution operator (s) with the
     global (/g) option; hence its name.  However, unlike the Perl
     equivalent, Exim does not modify the subject string; instead it
     returns the modified string for insertion into the overall
     expansion.  The item takes three arguments: the subject string, a
     regular expression, and a substitution string.  For example:

          ${sg{abcdefabcdef}{abc}{xyz}}

     yields "xyzdefxyzdef".  Because all three arguments are expanded
     before use, if any $, } or \ characters are required in the regular
     expression or in the substitution string, they have to be escaped.
     For example:

          ${sg{abcdef}{^(...)(...)\$}{\$2\$1}}

     yields "defabc", and

          ${sg{1=A 4=D 3=C}{\N(\d+)=\N}{K\$1=}}

     yields "K1=A K4=D K3=C". Note the use of ‘\N’ to protect the
     contents of the regular expression from string expansion.

     The regular expression is compiled in 8-bit mode, working against
     bytes rather than any Unicode-aware character handling.

*${sort{*<_string_>*}{*<_comparator_>*}{*<_extractor_>*}}*
     <_string_> first has the part after any change-of-list-separator
     (see *note Changing list separators::) expanded, then the whole is
     taken as a list.  The default separator for the list is a colon.

     The <_comparator_> argument is interpreted as the operator of a
     two-argument expansion condition.  The numeric operators plus ge,
     gt, le, lt (and ~i variants) are supported.  The comparison should
     return true when applied to two values if the first value should
     sort before the second value.  The <_extractor_> expansion is
     applied repeatedly to elements of the list, the element being
     placed in ‘$item’, to give values for comparison.

     The item result is a sorted list, with the original list separator,
     of the list elements (in full) of the original.

     Examples:

          ${sort{3:2:1:4}{<}{$item}}

     sorts a list of numbers, and

          ${sort {${lookup dnsdb{>:,,mx=example.com}}} {<} {${listextract{1}{<,$item}}}}

     will sort an MX lookup into priority order.

*${srs_encode {*<_secret_>*}{*<_return path_>*}{*<_original domain_>*}}*
     SRS encoding.  See section *note SRS (Sender Rewriting Scheme): SRS
     [Sender Rewriting Scheme]. for details.

*${substr{*<_start_>*}{*<_len_>*}{*<_subject_>*}}*
     The three strings are expanded; the first two must yield numbers.
     Call them <_n_> and <_m_>.  If you are using fixed values for these
     numbers, that is, if <_start_> and <_len_> do not change when they
     are expanded, you can use the simpler operator notation that avoids
     some of the braces:

          ${substr_<n>_<m>:<subject>}

     The second number is optional (in both notations).  If it is absent
     in the simpler format, the preceding underscore must also be
     omitted.

     The ‘substr’ item can be used to extract more general substrings
     than ‘length’.  The first number, <_n_>, is a starting offset, and
     <_m_> is the length required.  For example

          ${substr{3}{2}{$local_part}}

     If the starting offset is greater than the string length the result
     is the null string; if the length plus starting offset is greater
     than the string length, the result is the right-hand part of the
     string, starting from the given offset.  The first byte (character)
     in the string has offset zero.

     The ‘substr’ expansion item can take negative offset values to
     count from the right-hand end of its operand.  The last byte
     (character) is offset -1, the second-last is offset -2, and so on.
     Thus, for example,

          ${substr{-5}{2}{1234567}}

     yields "34".  If the absolute value of a negative offset is greater
     than the length of the string, the substring starts at the
     beginning of the string, and the length is reduced by the amount of
     overshoot.  Thus, for example,

          ${substr{-5}{2}{12}}

     yields an empty string, but

          ${substr{-3}{2}{12}}

     yields "1".

     When the second number is omitted from ‘substr’, the remainder of
     the string is taken if the offset is positive.  If it is negative,
     all bytes (characters) in the string preceding the offset point are
     taken.  For example, an offset of -1 and no length, as in these
     semantically identical examples:

          ${substr_-1:abcde}
          ${substr{-1}{abcde}}

     yields all but the last character of the string, that is, "abcd".

     All measurement is done in bytes and is not UTF-8 aware.

*${tr{*<_subject_>*}{*<_characters_>*}{*<_replacements_>*}}*
     This item does single-character (in bytes) translation on its
     subject string.  The second argument is a list of characters to be
     translated in the subject string.  Each matching character is
     replaced by the corresponding character from the replacement list.
     For example

          ${tr{abcdea}{ac}{13}}

     yields ‘1b3de1’.  If there are duplicates in the second character
     string, the last occurrence is used.  If the third string is
     shorter than the second, its last character is replicated.
     However, if it is empty, no translation takes place.

     All character handling is done in bytes and is not UTF-8 aware.


File: spec.info,  Node: Expansion operators,  Next: Expansion conditions,  Prev: Expansion items,  Up: String expansions

11.6 Expansion operators
========================

For expansion items that perform transformations on a single argument
string, the "operator" notation is used because it is simpler and uses
fewer braces.  The substring is first expanded before the operation is
applied to it.  The following operations can be performed:

*${address:*<_string_>*}*
     The string is interpreted as an *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address, as it
     might appear in a header line, and the effective address is
     extracted from it.  If the string does not parse successfully, the
     result is empty.

     The parsing correctly handles SMTPUTF8 Unicode in the string.

*${addresses:*<_string_>*}*
     The string (after expansion) is interpreted as a list of addresses
     in *RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)*
     format, such as can be found in a _To:_ or _Cc:_ header line.  The
     operative address (_local-part@domain_) is extracted from each
     item, and the result of the expansion is a colon-separated list,
     with appropriate doubling of colons should any happen to be present
     in the email addresses.  Syntactically invalid RFC2822 address
     items are omitted from the output.

     It is possible to specify a character other than colon for the
     output separator by starting the string with > followed by the new
     separator character.  For example:

          ${addresses:>& Chief <ceo@up.stairs>, sec@base.ment (dogsbody)}

     expands to ‘ceo@up.stairs&sec@base.ment’.  The string is expanded
     first, so if the expanded string starts with >, it may change the
     output separator unintentionally.  This can be avoided by setting
     the output separator explicitly:

          ${addresses:>:$h_from:}

     Compare the ‘address’ (singular) expansion item, which extracts the
     working address from a single RFC2822 address.  See the ‘filter’,
     ‘map’, and ‘reduce’ items for ways of processing lists.

     To clarify "list of addresses in RFC 2822 format" mentioned above,
     Exim follows a strict interpretation of header line formatting.
     Exim parses the bare, unquoted portion of an email address and if
     it finds a comma, treats it as an email address separator.  For the
     example header line:

          From: =?iso-8859-2?Q?Last=2C_First?= <user@example.com>

     The first example below demonstrates that Q-encoded email addresses
     are parsed properly if it is given the raw header (in this example,
     ‘$rheader_from:’).  It does not see the comma because it's still
     encoded as "=2C". The second example below is passed the contents
     of ‘$header_from:’, meaning it gets de-mimed.  Exim sees the
     decoded "," so it treats it as *two* email addresses.  The third
     example shows that the presence of a comma is skipped when it is
     quoted.  The fourth example shows SMTPUTF8 handling.

          # exim -be '${addresses:From: \
          =?iso-8859-2?Q?Last=2C_First?= <user@example.com>}'
          user@example.com
          # exim -be '${addresses:From: Last, First <user@example.com>}'
          Last:user@example.com
          # exim -be '${addresses:From: "Last, First" <user@example.com>}'
          user@example.com
          # exim -be '${addresses:フィル <フィリップ@example.jp>}'
          フィリップ@example.jp

*${base32:*<_digits_>*}*
     The string must consist entirely of decimal digits.  The number is
     converted to base 32 and output as a (empty, for zero) string of
     characters.  Only lowercase letters are used.

*${base32d:*<_base-32 digits_>*}*
     The string must consist entirely of base-32 digits.  The number is
     converted to decimal and output as a string.

*${base62:*<_digits_>*}*
     The string must consist entirely of decimal digits.  The number is
     converted to base 62 and output as a string of six characters,
     including leading zeros.  In the few operating environments where
     Exim uses base 36 instead of base 62 for its message identifiers
     (because those systems do not have case-sensitive filenames), base
     36 is used by this operator, despite its name.  *Note*: Just to be
     absolutely clear: this is _not_ base64 encoding.

*${base62d:*<_base-62 digits_>*}*
     The string must consist entirely of base-62 digits, or, in
     operating environments where Exim uses base 36 instead of base 62
     for its message identifiers, base-36 digits.  The number is
     converted to decimal and output as a string.

*${base64:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator converts a string into one that is base64 encoded.

     If the string is a single variable of type certificate, returns the
     base64 encoding of the DER form of the certificate.

*${base64d:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator converts a base64-encoded string into the un-coded
     form.

*${domain:*<_string_>*}*
     The string is interpreted as an *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address and the
     domain is extracted from it.  If the string does not parse
     successfully, the result is empty.

*${escape:*<_string_>*}*
     If the string contains any non-printing characters, they are
     converted to escape sequences starting with a backslash.  Whether
     characters with the most significant bit set (so-called "8-bit
     characters") count as printing or not is controlled by the
     ‘print_topbitchars’ option.

*${escape8bit:*<_string_>*}*
     If the string contains any characters with the most significant bit
     set, they are converted to escape sequences starting with a
     backslash.  Backslashes and DEL characters are also converted.

*${eval:*<_string_>*}* and *${eval10:*<_string_>*}*
     These items supports simple arithmetic and bitwise logical
     operations in expansion strings.  The string (after expansion) must
     be a conventional arithmetic expression, but it is limited to basic
     arithmetic operators, bitwise logical operators, and parentheses.

     It may not be tainted.

     All operations are carried out using integer arithmetic.  The
     operator priorities are as follows (the same as in the C
     programming language):

         _highest:_                       not (~), negate (-)
                                          multiply (*), divide (/),
                                          remainder (%)
                                          plus (+), minus (-)
                                          shift-left (<<), shift-right (>>)
                                          and (&)
                                          xor (^)
         _lowest:_                        or (|)

     Binary operators with the same priority are evaluated from left to
     right.  White space is permitted before or after operators.

     For ‘eval’, numbers may be decimal, octal (starting with "0") or
     hexadecimal (starting with "0x").  For ‘eval10’, all numbers are
     taken as decimal, even if they start with a leading zero;
     hexadecimal numbers are not permitted.  This can be useful when
     processing numbers extracted from dates or times, which often do
     have leading zeros.

     A number may be followed by "K", "M" or "G" to multiply it by 1024,
     1024*1024 or 1024*1024*1024, respectively.  Negative numbers are
     supported.  The result of the computation is a decimal
     representation of the answer (without "K", "M" or "G"). For
     example:

          ${eval:1+1}              yields 2
          ${eval:1+2*3}            yields 7
          ${eval:(1+2)*3}          yields 9
          ${eval:2+42%5}           yields 4
          ${eval:0xc&5}            yields 4
          ${eval:0xc|5}            yields 13
          ${eval:0xc^5}            yields 9
          ${eval:0xc>>1}           yields 6
          ${eval:0xc<<1}           yields 24
          ${eval:~255&0x1234}      yields 4608
          ${eval:-(~255&0x1234)}   yields -4608

     As a more realistic example, in an ACL you might have

          deny   condition =                    \
                   ${if and {                   \
                     {>{$rcpt_count}{10}}       \
                     {                          \
                     <                          \
                       {$recipients_count}      \
                       {${eval:$rcpt_count/2}}  \
                     }                          \
                   }{yes}{no}}
                 message = Too many bad recipients

     The condition is true if there have been more than 10 RCPT commands
     and fewer than half of them have resulted in a valid recipient.

*${expand:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘expand’ operator causes a string to be expanded for a second
     time.  For example,

          ${expand:${lookup{$domain}dbm{/some/file}{$value}}}

     first looks up a string in a file while expanding the operand for
     ‘expand’, and then re-expands what it has found.

*${from_utf8:*<_string_>*}*
     The world is slowly moving towards Unicode, although there are no
     standards for email yet.  However, other applications (including
     some databases) are starting to store data in Unicode, using UTF-8
     encoding.  This operator converts from a UTF-8 string to an
     ISO-8859-1 string.  UTF-8 code values greater than 255 are
     converted to underscores.  The input must be a valid UTF-8 string.
     If it is not, the result is an undefined sequence of bytes.

     Unicode code points with values less than 256 are compatible with
     ASCII and ISO-8859-1 (also known as Latin-1).  For example,
     character 169 is the copyright symbol in both cases, though the way
     it is encoded is different.  In UTF-8, more than one byte is needed
     for characters with code values greater than 127, whereas
     ISO-8859-1 is a single-byte encoding (but thereby limited to 256
     characters).  This makes translation from UTF-8 to ISO-8859-1
     straightforward.

*${hash_*<_n_>*_*<_m_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘hash’ operator is a simpler interface to the hashing function
     that can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers (as
     opposed to strings that change when expanded).  The effect is the
     same as

          ${hash{<n>}{<m>}{<string>}}

     See the description of the general ‘hash’ item above for details.
     The abbreviation ‘h’ can be used when ‘hash’ is used as an
     operator.

*${headerwrap_*<_cols_>*_*<_limit_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator line-wraps its argument in a way useful for headers.
     The _cols_ value gives the column number to wrap after, the _limit_
     gives a limit number of result characters to truncate at.  Either
     just the _limit_ and the preceding underbar, or both, can be
     omitted; the defaults are 80 and 998.  Wrapping will be inserted at
     a space if possible before the column number is reached.
     Whitespace at a chosen wrap point is removed.  A line-wrap consists
     of a newline followed by a tab, and the tab is counted as 8
     columns.

     *Note*: The defaults correspond to values defined in standards.
     Using larger values may result in problems in message delivery.

*${hex2b64:*<_hexstring_>*}*
     This operator converts a hex string into one that is base64
     encoded.  This can be useful for processing the output of the
     various hashing functions.

*${hexquote:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator converts non-printable characters in a string into a
     hex escape form.  Byte values between 33 (!)  and 126 (~) inclusive
     are left as is, and other byte values are converted to ‘\xNN’, for
     example, a byte value 127 is converted to ‘\x7f’.

*${ipv6denorm:*<_string_>*}*
     This expands an IPv6 address to a full eight-element
     colon-separated set of hex digits including leading zeroes.  A
     trailing ipv4-style dotted-decimal set is converted to hex.  Pure
     IPv4 addresses are converted to IPv4-mapped IPv6.

*${ipv6norm:*<_string_>*}*
     This converts an IPv6 address to canonical form.  Leading zeroes of
     groups are omitted, and the longest set of zero-valued groups is
     replaced with a double colon.  A trailing ipv4-style dotted-decimal
     set is converted to hex.  Pure IPv4 addresses are converted to
     IPv4-mapped IPv6.

*${lc:*<_string_>*}*
     This forces the letters in the string into lower-case, for example:

          ${lc:$local_part}

     Case is defined per the system C locale.

*${length_*<_number_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘length’ operator is a simpler interface to the ‘length’
     function that can be used when the parameter is a fixed number (as
     opposed to a string that changes when expanded).  The effect is the
     same as

          ${length{<number>}{<string>}}

     See the description of the general ‘length’ item above for details.
     Note that ‘length’ is not the same as ‘strlen’.  The abbreviation
     ‘l’ can be used when ‘length’ is used as an operator.  All
     measurement is done in bytes and is not UTF-8 aware.

*${listcount:*<_string_>*}*
     The part of the string after any leading change-of-separator is
     expanded, then the whole is interpreted as a list and the number of
     items is returned.

*${listnamed:*<_name_>*}* and *${listnamed_*<_type_>*:*<_name_>*}*
     The name is interpreted as a named list and the content of the list
     is returned, expanding any referenced lists, re-quoting as needed
     for colon-separation.  If the optional type is given it must be one
     of "a", "d", "h" or "l" and selects address-, domain-, host- or
     localpart- lists to search among respectively.  Otherwise all types
     are searched in an undefined order and the first matching list is
     returned.  *Note*: Neither string-expansion of lists referenced by
     named-list syntax elements, nor expansion of lookup elements, is
     done by the ‘listnamed’ operator.

*${local_part:*<_string_>*}*
     The string is interpreted as an *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address and the
     local part is extracted from it.  If the string does not parse
     successfully, the result is empty.  The parsing correctly handles
     SMTPUTF8 Unicode in the string.

*${mask:*<_IP address_>*/*<_bit count_>*}*
*${mask_n:*<_IP address_>*/*<_bit count_>*}*
     If the form of the string to be operated on is not an IP address
     followed by a slash and an integer (that is, a network address in
     CIDR notation), the expansion fails.  Otherwise, this operator
     converts the IP address to binary, masks off the least significant
     bits according to the bit count, and converts the result back to
     text, with mask appended.  For example,

          ${mask:10.111.131.206/28}

     returns the string "10.111.131.192/28".

     Since this operation is expected to be mostly used for looking up
     masked addresses in files, the normal result for an IPv6 address
     uses dots to separate components instead of colons, because colon
     terminates a key string in lsearch files.  So, for example,

          ${mask:3ffe:ffff:836f:0a00:000a:0800:200a:c031/99}

     returns the string

          3ffe.ffff.836f.0a00.000a.0800.2000.0000/99

     If the optional form *mask_n* is used, IPv6 address result are
     instead returned in normailsed form, using colons and with
     zero-compression.  Letters in IPv6 addresses are always output in
     lower case.

*${md5:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘md5’ operator computes the MD5 hash value of the string, and
     returns it as a 32-digit hexadecimal number, in which any letters
     are in lower case.

     If the string is a single variable of type certificate, returns the
     MD5 hash fingerprint of the certificate.

*${nhash_*<_n_>*_*<_m_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘nhash’ operator is a simpler interface to the numeric hashing
     function that can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers
     (as opposed to strings that change when expanded).  The effect is
     the same as

          ${nhash{<n>}{<m>}{<string>}}

     See the description of the general ‘nhash’ item above for details.

*${quote:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘quote’ operator puts its argument into double quotes if it is
     an empty string or contains anything other than letters, digits,
     underscores, dots, and hyphens.  Any occurrences of double quotes
     and backslashes are escaped with a backslash.  Newlines and
     carriage returns are converted to ‘\n’ and ‘\r’, respectively For
     example,

          ${quote:ab"*"cd}

     becomes

          "ab\"*\"cd"

     The place where this is useful is when the argument is a
     substitution from a variable or a message header.

*${quote_local_part:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator is like ‘quote’, except that it quotes the string
     only if required to do so by the rules of *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* for quoting local
     parts.  For example, a plus sign would not cause quoting (but it
     would for ‘quote’).  If you are creating a new email address from
     the contents of ‘$local_part’ (or any other unknown data), you
     should always use this operator.

     This quoting determination is not SMTPUTF8-aware, thus quoting
     non-ASCII data will likely use the quoting form.  Thus
     _${quote_local_part:フィル}_ will always become _"フィル"_.

*${quote_*<_lookup-type_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator applies lookup-specific quoting rules to the string.
     Each query-style lookup type has its own quoting rules which are
     described with the lookups in chapter *note File and database
     lookups::.  For example,

          ${quote_ldap:two * two}

     returns

          two%20%5C2A%20two

     For single-key lookup types, no quoting is ever necessary and this
     operator yields an unchanged string.

*${randint:*<_n_>*}*
     This operator returns a somewhat random number which is less than
     the supplied number and is at least 0.  The quality of this
     randomness depends on how Exim was built; the values are not
     suitable for keying material.  If Exim is linked against OpenSSL
     then RAND_pseudo_bytes() is used.  If Exim is linked against GnuTLS
     then gnutls_rnd(GNUTLS_RND_NONCE) is used, for versions of GnuTLS
     with that function.  Otherwise, the implementation may be
     arc4random(), random() seeded by srandomdev() or srandom(), or a
     custom implementation even weaker than random().

*${reverse_ip:*<_ipaddr_>*}*
     This operator reverses an IP address; for IPv4 addresses, the
     result is in dotted-quad decimal form, while for IPv6 addresses the
     result is in dotted-nibble hexadecimal form.  In both cases, this
     is the "natural" form for DNS. For example,

          ${reverse_ip:192.0.2.4}
          ${reverse_ip:2001:0db8:c42:9:1:abcd:192.0.2.127}

     returns

          4.2.0.192
          f.7.2.0.0.0.0.c.d.c.b.a.1.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.2.4.c.0.8.b.d.0.1.0.0.2

*${rfc2047:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator encodes text according to the rules of *RFC 2047
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)*.  This is an
     encoding that is used in header lines to encode non-ASCII
     characters.  It is assumed that the input string is in the encoding
     specified by the ‘headers_charset’ option, which gets its default
     at build time.  If the string contains only characters in the range
     33-126, and no instances of the characters

          ? = ( ) < > @ , ; : \ " . [ ] _

     it is not modified.  Otherwise, the result is the RFC 2047 encoding
     of the string, using as many "encoded words" as necessary to encode
     all the characters.

*${rfc2047d:*<_string_>*}*
     This operator decodes strings that are encoded as per *RFC 2047
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)*.  Binary zero
     bytes are replaced by question marks.  Characters are converted
     into the character set defined by ‘headers_charset’.  Overlong RFC
     2047 "words" are not recognized unless ‘check_rfc2047_length’ is
     set false.

     *Note*: If you use ‘$header’__xxx_*:* (or ‘$h’__xxx_*:*) to access
     a header line, RFC 2047 decoding is done automatically.  You do not
     need to use this operator as well.

*${rxquote:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘rxquote’ operator inserts a backslash before any
     non-alphanumeric characters in its argument.  This is useful when
     substituting the values of variables or headers inside regular
     expressions.

*${sha1:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘sha1’ operator computes the SHA-1 hash value of the string,
     and returns it as a 40-digit hexadecimal number, in which any
     letters are in upper case.

     If the string is a single variable of type certificate, returns the
     SHA-1 hash fingerprint of the certificate.

*${sha256:*<_string_>*}*
*${sha2:*<_string_>*}*
*${sha2_<n>:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘sha256’ operator computes the SHA-256 hash value of the string
     and returns it as a 64-digit hexadecimal number, in which any
     letters are in upper case.

     If the string is a single variable of type certificate, returns the
     SHA-256 hash fingerprint of the certificate.

     The operator can also be spelled ‘sha2’ and does the same as
     ‘sha256’ (except for certificates, which are not supported).
     Finally, if an underbar and a number is appended it specifies the
     output length, selecting a member of the SHA-2 family of hash
     functions.  Values of 256, 384 and 512 are accepted, with 256 being
     the default.

*${sha3:*<_string_>*}*
*${sha3_<n>:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘sha3’ operator computes the SHA3-256 hash value of the string
     and returns it as a 64-digit hexadecimal number, in which any
     letters are in upper case.

     If a number is appended, separated by an underbar, it specifies the
     output length.  Values of 224, 256, 384 and 512 are accepted; with
     256 being the default.

     The ‘sha3’ expansion item is only supported if Exim has been
     compiled with GnuTLS 3.5.0 or later, or OpenSSL 1.1.1 or later.
     The macro "_CRYPTO_HASH_SHA3" will be defined if it is supported.

*${stat:*<_string_>*}*
     The string, after expansion, must be a file path.  A call to the
     ‘stat()’ function is made for this path.  If ‘stat()’ fails, an
     error occurs and the expansion fails.  If it succeeds, the data
     from the stat replaces the item, as a series of <_name_>=<_value_>
     pairs, where the values are all numerical, except for the value of
     "smode".  The names are: "mode" (giving the mode as a 4-digit octal
     number), "smode" (giving the mode in symbolic format as a
     10-character string, as for the _ls_ command), "inode", "device",
     "links", "uid", "gid", "size", "atime", "mtime", and "ctime".  You
     can extract individual fields using the ‘extract’ expansion item.

     The use of the ‘stat’ expansion in users' filter files can be
     locked out by the system administrator.  *Warning*: The file size
     may be incorrect on 32-bit systems for files larger than 2GB.

*${str2b64:*<_string_>*}*
     Now deprecated, a synonym for the ‘base64’ expansion operator.

*${strlen:*<_string_>*}*
     The item is replaced by the length of the expanded string,
     expressed as a decimal number.  *Note*: Do not confuse ‘strlen’
     with ‘length’.  All measurement is done in bytes and is not UTF-8
     aware.

*${substr_*<_start_>*_*<_length_>*:*<_string_>*}*
     The ‘substr’ operator is a simpler interface to the ‘substr’
     function that can be used when the two parameters are fixed numbers
     (as opposed to strings that change when expanded).  The effect is
     the same as

          ${substr{<start>}{<length>}{<string>}}

     See the description of the general ‘substr’ item above for details.
     The abbreviation ‘s’ can be used when ‘substr’ is used as an
     operator.  All measurement is done in bytes and is not UTF-8 aware.

*${time_eval:*<_string_>*}*
     This item converts an Exim time interval such as ‘2d4h5m’ into a
     number of seconds.

*${time_interval:*<_string_>*}*
     The argument (after sub-expansion) must be a sequence of decimal
     digits that represents an interval of time as a number of seconds.
     It is converted into a number of larger units and output in Exim's
     normal time format, for example, ‘1w3d4h2m6s’.

*${uc:*<_string_>*}*
     This forces the letters in the string into upper-case.  Case is
     defined per the system C locale.

*${utf8clean:*<_string_>*}*
     This replaces any invalid utf-8 sequence in the string by the
     character ‘?’.  In versions of Exim before 4.92, this did not
     correctly do so for a truncated final codepoint's encoding, and the
     character would be silently dropped.  If you must handle detection
     of this scenario across both sets of Exim behavior, the complexity
     will depend upon the task.  For instance, to detect if the first
     character is multibyte and a 1-byte extraction can be successfully
     used as a path component (as is common for dividing up delivery
     folders), you might use:

          condition = ${if inlist{${utf8clean:${length_1:$local_part}}}{:?}{yes}{no}}

     (which will false-positive if the first character of the local part
     is a literal question mark).

*${utf8_domain_to_alabel:*<_string_>*}*
*${utf8_domain_from_alabel:*<_string_>*}*
*${utf8_localpart_to_alabel:*<_string_>*}*
*${utf8_localpart_from_alabel:*<_string_>*}*
     These convert EAI mail name components between UTF-8 and a-label
     forms.  For information on internationalisation support see *note
     MTA operations::.

*${xtextd:*<_string_>*}*
     This performs xtext decoding of the string (per *RFC 3461
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3461#section-4)*).


File: spec.info,  Node: Expansion conditions,  Next: Combining expansion conditions,  Prev: Expansion operators,  Up: String expansions

11.7 Expansion conditions
=========================

The following conditions are available for testing by the ‘${if’
construct while expanding strings:

*!*<_condition_>
     Preceding any condition with an exclamation mark negates the result
     of the condition.

<_symbolic operator_> *{*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     There are a number of symbolic operators for doing numeric
     comparisons.  They are:

         =   equal
         ==  equal
         >   greater
         >=  greater or equal
         <   less
         <=  less or equal

     For example:

          ${if >{$message_size}{10M} ...

     Note that the general negation operator provides for inequality
     testing.  The two strings must take the form of optionally signed
     decimal integers, optionally followed by one of the letters "K",
     "M" or "G" (in either upper or lower case), signifying
     multiplication by 1024, 1024*1024 or 1024*1024*1024, respectively.
     As a special case, the numerical value of an empty string is taken
     as zero.

     In all cases, a relative comparator OP is testing if <_string1_> OP
     <_string2_>; the above example is checking if ‘$message_size’ is
     larger than 10M, not if 10M is larger than ‘$message_size’.

*acl {{*<_name_>*}{*<_arg1_>*}{*<_arg2_>*}...}*
     The name and zero to nine argument strings are first expanded
     separately.  The expanded arguments are assigned to the variables
     ‘$acl_arg1’ to ‘$acl_arg9’ in order.  Any unused are made empty.
     The variable ‘$acl_narg’ is set to the number of arguments.  The
     named ACL (see chapter *note Access control lists::) is called and
     may use the variables; if another acl expansion is used the values
     are restored after it returns.  If the ACL sets a value using a
     "message =" modifier the variable $value becomes the result of the
     expansion, otherwise it is empty.  If the ACL returns accept the
     condition is true; if deny, false.  If the ACL returns defer the
     result is a forced-fail.

*bool {*<_string_>*}*
     This condition turns a string holding a true or false
     representation into a boolean state.  It parses "true", "false",
     "yes" and "no" (case-insensitively); also integer numbers map to
     true if non-zero, false if zero.  An empty string is treated as
     false.  Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored; thus a string
     consisting only of whitespace is false.  All other string values
     will result in expansion failure.

     When combined with ACL variables, this expansion condition will let
     you make decisions in one place and act on those decisions in
     another place.  For example:

          ${if bool{$acl_m_privileged_sender} ...

*bool_lax {*<_string_>*}*
     Like ‘bool’, this condition turns a string into a boolean state.
     But where ‘bool’ accepts a strict set of strings, ‘bool_lax’ uses
     the same loose definition that the Router ‘condition’ option uses.
     The empty string and the values "false", "no" and "0" map to false,
     all others map to true.  Leading and trailing whitespace is
     ignored.

     Note that where "bool{00}" is false, "bool_lax{00}" is true.

*crypteq {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     This condition is included in the Exim binary if it is built to
     support any authentication mechanisms (see chapter *note SMTP
     authentication::).  Otherwise, it is necessary to define
     SUPPORT_CRYPTEQ in ‘Local/Makefile’ to get ‘crypteq’ included in
     the binary.

     The ‘crypteq’ condition has two arguments.  The first is encrypted
     and compared against the second, which is already encrypted.  The
     second string may be in the LDAP form for storing encrypted
     strings, which starts with the encryption type in curly brackets,
     followed by the data.  If the second string does not begin with "{"
     it is assumed to be encrypted with ‘crypt()’ or ‘crypt16()’ (see
     below), since such strings cannot begin with "{".  Typically this
     will be a field from a password file.  An example of an encrypted
     string in LDAP form is:

          {md5}CY9rzUYh03PK3k6DJie09g==

     If such a string appears directly in an expansion, the curly
     brackets have to be quoted, because they are part of the expansion
     syntax.  For example:

          ${if crypteq {test}{\{md5\}CY9rzUYh03PK3k6DJie09g==}{yes}{no}}

     The following encryption types (whose names are matched
     case-independently) are supported:

        • ‘{md5}’ computes the MD5 digest of the first string, and
          expresses this as printable characters to compare with the
          remainder of the second string.  If the length of the
          comparison string is 24, Exim assumes that it is base64
          encoded (as in the above example).  If the length is 32, Exim
          assumes that it is a hexadecimal encoding of the MD5 digest.
          If the length not 24 or 32, the comparison fails.

        • ‘{sha1}’ computes the SHA-1 digest of the first string, and
          expresses this as printable characters to compare with the
          remainder of the second string.  If the length of the
          comparison string is 28, Exim assumes that it is base64
          encoded.  If the length is 40, Exim assumes that it is a
          hexadecimal encoding of the SHA-1 digest.  If the length is
          not 28 or 40, the comparison fails.

        • ‘{crypt}’ calls the ‘crypt()’ function, which traditionally
          used to use only the first eight characters of the password.
          However, in modern operating systems this is no longer true,
          and in many cases the entire password is used, whatever its
          length.

        • ‘{crypt16}’ calls the ‘crypt16()’ function, which was
          originally created to use up to 16 characters of the password
          in some operating systems.  Again, in modern operating
          systems, more characters may be used.

     Exim has its own version of ‘crypt16()’, which is just a double
     call to ‘crypt()’.  For operating systems that have their own
     version, setting HAVE_CRYPT16 in ‘Local/Makefile’ when building
     Exim causes it to use the operating system version instead of its
     own.  This option is set by default in the OS-dependent ‘Makefile’
     for those operating systems that are known to support ‘crypt16()’.

     Some years after Exim's ‘crypt16()’ was implemented, a user
     discovered that it was not using the same algorithm as some
     operating systems' versions.  It turns out that as well as
     ‘crypt16()’ there is a function called ‘bigcrypt()’ in some
     operating systems.  This may or may not use the same algorithm, and
     both of them may be different to Exim's built-in ‘crypt16()’.

     However, since there is now a move away from the traditional
     ‘crypt()’ functions towards using SHA1 and other algorithms,
     tidying up this area of Exim is seen as very low priority.

     If you do not put a encryption type (in curly brackets) in a
     ‘crypteq’ comparison, the default is usually either ‘{crypt}’ or
     ‘{crypt16}’, as determined by the setting of DEFAULT_CRYPT in
     ‘Local/Makefile’.  The default default is ‘{crypt}’.  Whatever the
     default, you can always use either function by specifying it
     explicitly in curly brackets.

*def:*<_variable name_>
     The ‘def’ condition must be followed by the name of one of the
     expansion variables defined in section *note Expansion variables::.
     The condition is true if the variable contains a non-empty string.
     For example:

          ${if def:sender_ident {from $sender_ident}}

     Note that the variable name is given without a leading ‘$’
     character.  If the variable does not exist, the expansion fails.

*def:header_*<_header name_>*:*  or  *def:h_*<_header name_>*:*
     This condition is true if a message is being processed and the
     named header exists in the message.  For example,

          ${if def:header_reply-to:{$h_reply-to:}{$h_from:}}

     *Note*: No ‘$’ appears before ‘header_’ or ‘h_’ in the condition,
     and the header name must be terminated by a colon if white space
     does not follow.

*eq {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
*eqi {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     The two substrings are first expanded.  The condition is true if
     the two resulting strings are identical.  For ‘eq’ the comparison
     includes the case of letters, whereas for ‘eqi’ the comparison is
     case-independent, where case is defined per the system C locale.

*exists {*<_file name_>*}*
     The substring is first expanded and then interpreted as an absolute
     path.  The condition is true if the named file (or directory)
     exists.  The existence test is done by calling the ‘stat()’
     function.  The use of the ‘exists’ test in users' filter files may
     be locked out by the system administrator.

     *Note:* Testing a path using this condition is not a sufficient way
     of de-tainting it.  Consider using a dsearch lookup.

*first_delivery*
     This condition, which has no data, is true during a message's first
     delivery attempt.  It is false during any subsequent delivery
     attempts.

*forall{*<_a list_>*}{*<_a condition_>*}*
*forany{*<_a list_>*}{*<_a condition_>*}*
     These conditions iterate over a list.  The first argument, after
     any leading change-of-separator (see *note Changing list
     separators::), is expanded and the whole forms the list.  By
     default, the list separator is a colon.

     The second argument is interpreted as a condition that is to be
     applied to each item in the list in turn.  During the
     interpretation of the condition, the current list item is placed in
     a variable called ‘$item’.

        • For *forany*, interpretation stops if the condition is true
          for any item, and the result of the whole condition is true.
          If the condition is false for all items in the list, the
          overall condition is false.

        • For *forall*, interpretation stops if the condition is false
          for any item, and the result of the whole condition is false.
          If the condition is true for all items in the list, the
          overall condition is true.

     Note that negation of *forany* means that the condition must be
     false for all items for the overall condition to succeed, and
     negation of *forall* means that the condition must be false for at
     least one item.

     Example:

          ${if forany{$recipients_list}{match{$item}{^user3@}}{yes}{no}}

     The value of ‘$item’ is saved and restored while ‘forany’ or
     ‘forall’ is being processed, to enable these expansion items to be
     nested.

     To scan a named list, expand it with the *listnamed* operator.

*forall_json{*<_a JSON array_>*}{*<_a condition_>*}*
*forany_json{*<_a JSON array_>*}{*<_a condition_>*}*
*forall_jsons{*<_a JSON array_>*}{*<_a condition_>*}*
*forany_jsons{*<_a JSON array_>*}{*<_a condition_>*}*
     As for the above, except that the first argument must, after
     expansion, be a JSON array.  The array separator is not changeable.
     For the "jsons" variants the elements are expected to be JSON
     strings and have their quotes removed before the evaluation of the
     condition.

*ge {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
*gei {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     The two substrings are first expanded.  The condition is true if
     the first string is lexically greater than or equal to the second
     string.  For ‘ge’ the comparison includes the case of letters,
     whereas for ‘gei’ the comparison is case-independent.  Case and
     collation order are defined per the system C locale.

*gt {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
*gti {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     The two substrings are first expanded.  The condition is true if
     the first string is lexically greater than the second string.  For
     ‘gt’ the comparison includes the case of letters, whereas for ‘gti’
     the comparison is case-independent.  Case and collation order are
     defined per the system C locale.

*inbound_srs {*<_local part_>*}{*<_secret_>*}*
     SRS decode.  See SECT *note SRS (Sender Rewriting Scheme): SRS
     [Sender Rewriting Scheme]. for details.

*inlist {*<_subject_>*}{*<_list_>*}*
*inlisti {*<_subject_>*}{*<_list_>*}*
     The <_subject_> string is expanded.  The <_list_> first has any
     change-of-list-separator (see *note Changing list separators::)
     retained verbatim, then the remainder is expanded.  The whole is
     treated as a list of simple strings; if the subject string is a
     member of that list, then the condition is true.  For the
     case-independent ‘inlisti’ condition, case is defined per the
     system C locale.

     These are simpler to use versions of the more powerful *forany*
     condition.  Examples, and the *forany* equivalents:

          ${if inlist{needle}{foo:needle:bar}}
            ${if forany{foo:needle:bar}{eq{$item}{needle}}}
          ${if inlisti{Needle}{fOo:NeeDLE:bAr}}
            ${if forany{fOo:NeeDLE:bAr}{eqi{$item}{Needle}}}

     The variable ‘$value’ will be set for a successful match and can be
     used in the success clause of an ‘if’ expansion item using the
     condition.  It will have the same taint status as the list;
     expansions such as

          ${if inlist {$h_mycode:} {0 : 1 : 42} {$value}}

     can be used for de-tainting.  Any previous ‘$value’ is restored
     after the if.

*isip {*<_string_>*}*
*isip4 {*<_string_>*}*
*isip6 {*<_string_>*}*
     The substring is first expanded, and then tested to see if it has
     the form of an IP address.  Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are valid
     for ‘isip’, whereas ‘isip4’ and ‘isip6’ test specifically for IPv4
     or IPv6 addresses.

     For an IPv4 address, the test is for four dot-separated components,
     each of which consists of from one to three digits.  For an IPv6
     address, up to eight colon-separated components are permitted, each
     containing from one to four hexadecimal digits.  There may be fewer
     than eight components if an empty component (adjacent colons) is
     present.  Only one empty component is permitted.

     *Note*: The checks used to be just on the form of the address;
     actual numerical values were not considered.  Thus, for example,
     999.999.999.999 passed the IPv4 check.  This is no longer the case.

     The main use of these tests is to distinguish between IP addresses
     and host names, or between IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.  For example,
     you could use

          ${if isip4{$sender_host_address}...

     to test which IP version an incoming SMTP connection is using.

*ldapauth {*<_ldap query_>*}*
     This condition supports user authentication using LDAP. See section
     *note More about LDAP:: for details of how to use LDAP in lookups
     and the syntax of queries.  For this use, the query must contain a
     user name and password.  The query itself is not used, and can be
     empty.  The condition is true if the password is not empty, and the
     user name and password are accepted by the LDAP server.  An empty
     password is rejected without calling LDAP because LDAP binds with
     an empty password are considered anonymous regardless of the
     username, and will succeed in most configurations.  See chapter
     *note SMTP authentication:: for details of SMTP authentication, and
     chapter *note The plaintext authenticator:: for an example of how
     this can be used.

*le {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
*lei {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     The two substrings are first expanded.  The condition is true if
     the first string is lexically less than or equal to the second
     string.  For ‘le’ the comparison includes the case of letters,
     whereas for ‘lei’ the comparison is case-independent.  Case and
     collation order are defined per the system C locale.

*lt {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
*lti {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     The two substrings are first expanded.  The condition is true if
     the first string is lexically less than the second string.  For
     ‘lt’ the comparison includes the case of letters, whereas for ‘lti’
     the comparison is case-independent.  Case and collation order are
     defined per the system C locale.

*match {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     The two substrings are first expanded.  The second is then treated
     as a regular expression and applied to the first.  Because of the
     pre-expansion, if the regular expression contains dollar, or
     backslash characters, they must be escaped.  Care must also be
     taken if the regular expression contains braces (curly brackets).
     A closing brace must be escaped so that it is not taken as a
     premature termination of <_string2_>.  The easiest approach is to
     use the ‘\N’ feature to disable expansion of the regular
     expression.  For example,

          ${if match {$local_part}{\N^\d{3}\N} ...

     If the whole expansion string is in double quotes, further escaping
     of backslashes is also required.

     The condition is true if the regular expression match succeeds.
     The regular expression is not required to begin with a circumflex
     metacharacter, but if there is no circumflex, the expression is not
     anchored, and it may match anywhere in the subject, not just at the
     start.  If you want the pattern to match at the end of the subject,
     you must include the ‘$’ metacharacter at an appropriate point.
     All character handling is done in bytes and is not UTF-8 aware, but
     we might change this in a future Exim release.

     At the start of an ‘if’ expansion the values of the numeric
     variable substitutions ‘$1’ etc.  are remembered.  Obeying a
     ‘match’ condition that succeeds causes them to be reset to the
     substrings of that condition and they will have these values during
     the expansion of the success string.  At the end of the ‘if’
     expansion, the previous values are restored.  After testing a
     combination of conditions using ‘or’, the subsequent values of the
     numeric variables are those of the condition that succeeded.

*match_address {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     See *match_local_part*.

*match_domain {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     See *match_local_part*.

*match_ip {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     This condition matches an IP address to a list of IP address
     patterns.  It must be followed by two argument strings.  The first
     (after expansion) must be an IP address or an empty string.  The
     second (not expanded) is a restricted host list that can match only
     an IP address, not a host name.  For example:

          ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{1.2.3.4:5.6.7.8}{...}{...}}

     The specific types of host list item that are permitted in the list
     are:

        • An IP address, optionally with a CIDR mask.

        • A single asterisk, which matches any IP address.

        • An empty item, which matches only if the IP address is empty.
          This could be useful for testing for a locally submitted
          message or one from specific hosts in a single test such as

                 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{:4.3.2.1:...}{...}{...}}

          where the first item in the list is the empty string.

        • The item @[] matches any of the local host's interface
          addresses.

        • Single-key lookups are assumed to be like "net-" style lookups
          in host lists (see section *note Host list patterns for
          single-key lookups by host address::), even if ‘net-’ is not
          specified.  There is never any attempt to turn the IP address
          into a host name.  The most common type of linear search for
          *match_ip* is likely to be *iplsearch*, in which the file can
          contain CIDR masks.  For example:

                 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{iplsearch;/some/file}...

          It is of course possible to use other kinds of lookup, and in
          such a case, you do need to specify the ‘net-’ prefix if you
          want to specify a specific address mask, for example:

                 ${if match_ip{$sender_host_address}{net24-dbm;/some/file}...

          However, unless you are combining a ‘match_ip’ condition with
          others, it is just as easy to use the fact that a lookup is
          itself a condition, and write:

                 ${lookup{${mask:$sender_host_address/24}}dbm{/a/file}...

     Note that <_string2_> is not itself subject to string expansion,
     unless Exim was built with the EXPAND_LISTMATCH_RHS option.  For
     the latter case, only the part after any leading
     change-of-separator specification is expanded.

     Consult section *note Host list patterns that match by IP address::
     for further details of these patterns.

     The variable ‘$value’ will be set for a successful match and can be
     used in the success clause of an ‘if’ expansion item using the
     condition.  Any previous ‘$value’ is restored after the if.

*match_local_part {*<_string1_>*}{*<_string2_>*}*
     This condition, together with ‘match_address’ and ‘match_domain’,
     make it possible to test domain, address, and local part lists
     within expansions.  Each condition requires two arguments: an item
     and a list to match.  A trivial example is:

          ${if match_domain{a.b.c}{x.y.z:a.b.c:p.q.r}{yes}{no}}

     In each case, the second argument may contain any of the allowable
     items for a list of the appropriate type.  Also, because the second
     argument is a standard form of list, it is possible to refer to a
     named list.  Thus, you can use conditions like this:

          ${if match_domain{$domain}{+local_domains}{...

     For address lists, the matching starts off caselessly, but the
     ‘+caseful’ item can be used, as in all address lists, to cause
     subsequent items (including those of referenced named lists) to
     have their local parts matched casefully.  Domains are always
     matched caselessly.

     The variable ‘$value’ will be set for a successful match and can be
     used in the success clause of an ‘if’ expansion item using the
     condition.  It will have the same taint status as the list;
     expansions such as

          ${if match_local_part {$local_part} {alice : bill : charlotte : dave} {$value}}

     can be used for de-tainting.  Any previous ‘$value’ is restored
     after the if.

     Note that <_string2_> is not itself subject to string expansion,
     unless Exim was built with the EXPAND_LISTMATCH_RHS option.  For
     the latter case, only the part after any leading
     change-of-separator specification is expanded.

     *Note*: Host lists are _not_ supported in this way.  This is
     because hosts have two identities: a name and an IP address, and it
     is not clear how to specify cleanly how such a test would work.
     However, IP addresses can be matched using ‘match_ip’.

*pam {*<_string1_>*:*<_string2_>*:...}*
     _Pluggable Authentication Modules_
     (*https://mirrors.edge.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/
     (https://mirrors.edge.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam/)*) are a
     facility that is available in Solaris and in some GNU/Linux
     distributions.  The Exim support, which is intended for use in
     conjunction with the SMTP AUTH command, is available only if Exim
     is compiled with

          SUPPORT_PAM=yes

     in ‘Local/Makefile’.  You probably need to add ‘-lpam’ to
     EXTRALIBS, and in some releases of GNU/Linux ‘-ldl’ is also needed.

     The argument string is first expanded, and the result must be a
     colon-separated list of strings.  The separator is not changeable.
     Leading and trailing white space is ignored.  The PAM module is
     initialized with the service name "exim" and the user name taken
     from the first item in the colon-separated data string
     (<_string1_>).  The remaining items in the data string are passed
     over in response to requests from the authentication function.  In
     the simple case there will only be one request, for a password, so
     the data consists of just two strings.

     There can be problems if any of the strings are permitted to
     contain colon characters.  In the usual way, these have to be
     doubled to avoid being taken as separators.  The ‘listquote’
     expansion item can be used for this.  For example, the
     configuration of a LOGIN authenticator might contain this setting:

          server_condition = ${if pam{$auth1 : ${listquote{:}{$auth2}}}}

     *Note*: To manage the case of a leading colon in the second list
     element, whitespace after the list separator is required.  This
     whitespace is removed before the value is handed to the
     authentication function.  *Note 2*: Neither element may start or
     end with embedded whitespace.

     In some operating systems, PAM authentication can be done only from
     a process running as root.  Since Exim is running as the Exim user
     when receiving messages, this means that PAM cannot be used
     directly in those systems.

*queue_running*
     This condition, which has no data, is true during delivery attempts
     that are initiated by queue runner processes, and false otherwise.

*radius {*<_authentication string_>*}*
     Radius authentication (*RFC 2865
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2865)*) is supported in a
     similar way to PAM. You must set RADIUS_CONFIG_FILE in
     ‘Local/Makefile’ to specify the location of the Radius client
     configuration file in order to build Exim with Radius support.

     With just that one setting, Exim expects to be linked with the
     ‘radiusclient’ library, using the original API. If you are using
     release 0.4.0 or later of this library, you need to set

          RADIUS_LIB_TYPE=RADIUSCLIENTNEW

     in ‘Local/Makefile’ when building Exim.  You can also link Exim
     with the ‘libradius’ library that comes with FreeBSD. To do this,
     set

          RADIUS_LIB_TYPE=RADLIB

     in ‘Local/Makefile’, in addition to setting RADIUS_CONFIGURE_FILE.
     You may also have to supply a suitable setting in EXTRALIBS so that
     the Radius library can be found when Exim is linked.

     The string specified by RADIUS_CONFIG_FILE is expanded and passed
     to the Radius client library, which calls the Radius server.  The
     condition is true if the authentication is successful.  For
     example:

          server_condition = ${if radius{<arguments>}}

     The same caveats for the arguments apply as for PAM.

*saslauthd {{*<_user_>*}{*<_password_>*}{*<_service_>*}{*<_realm_>*}}*
     This condition supports user authentication using the Cyrus
     _saslauthd_ daemon.

     This replaces the older _pwcheck_ daemon, which is no longer
     supported.

     Using this daemon is one way of making it possible for passwords to
     be checked by a process that is not running as root.

     The saslauthd support is not included in Exim by default.  You need
     to specify the location of the saslauthd daemon's socket in
     ‘Local/Makefile’ before building Exim.  For example:

          CYRUS_SASLAUTHD_SOCKET=/var/state/saslauthd/mux

     You do not need to install the full Cyrus software suite in order
     to use the saslauthd daemon.  You can compile and install just the
     daemon alone from the Cyrus SASL library.

     Up to four arguments can be supplied to the ‘saslauthd’ condition,
     but only two are mandatory.  For example:

          server_condition = ${if saslauthd{{$auth1}{$auth2}}}

     The service and the realm are optional (which is why the arguments
     are enclosed in their own set of braces).  For details of the
     meaning of the service and realm, and how to run the daemon,
     consult the Cyrus documentation.


File: spec.info,  Node: Combining expansion conditions,  Next: Expansion variables,  Prev: Expansion conditions,  Up: String expansions

11.8 Combining expansion conditions
===================================

Several conditions can be tested at once by combining them using the
‘and’ and ‘or’ combination conditions.  Note that ‘and’ and ‘or’ are
complete conditions on their own, and precede their lists of
sub-conditions.  Each sub-condition must be enclosed in braces within
the overall braces that contain the list.  No repetition of ‘if’ is
used.

*or {{*<_cond1_>*}{*<_cond2_>*}...}*
     The sub-conditions are evaluated from left to right.  The condition
     is true if any one of the sub-conditions is true.  For example,

          ${if or {{eq{$local_part}{spqr}}{eq{$domain}{testing.com}}}...

     When a true sub-condition is found, the following ones are parsed
     but not evaluated.  If there are several "match" sub-conditions the
     values of the numeric variables afterwards are taken from the first
     one that succeeds.

*and {{*<_cond1_>*}{*<_cond2_>*}...}*
     The sub-conditions are evaluated from left to right.  The condition
     is true if all of the sub-conditions are true.  If there are
     several "match" sub-conditions, the values of the numeric variables
     afterwards are taken from the last one.  When a false sub-condition
     is found, the following ones are parsed but not evaluated.


File: spec.info,  Node: Expansion variables,  Prev: Combining expansion conditions,  Up: String expansions

11.9 Expansion variables
========================

This section contains an alphabetical list of all the expansion
variables.  Some of them are available only when Exim is compiled with
specific options such as support for TLS or the content scanning
extension.  Variables marked as _tainted_ are likely to carry data
supplied by a potential attacker.  Variables without such marking may
also, depending on how their values are created.  Such variables should
not be further expanded, used as filenames or used as command-line
arguments for external commands.

‘$0’, ‘$1’, etc
     When a ‘match’ expansion condition succeeds, these variables
     contain the captured substrings identified by the regular
     expression during subsequent processing of the success string of
     the containing ‘if’ expansion item.  In the expansion condition
     case they do not retain their values afterwards; in fact, their
     previous values are restored at the end of processing an ‘if’ item.
     The numerical variables may also be set externally by some other
     matching process which precedes the expansion of the string.  For
     example, the commands available in Exim filter files include an
     ‘if’ command with its own regular expression matching condition.
     If the subject string was tainted then any captured substring will
     also be.

‘$acl_arg1’, ‘$acl_arg2’, etc
     Within an acl condition, expansion condition or expansion item any
     arguments are copied to these variables, any unused variables being
     made empty.

‘$acl_c...’
     Values can be placed in these variables by the ‘set’ modifier in an
     ACL. They can be given any name that starts with ‘$acl_c’ and is at
     least six characters long, but the sixth character must be either a
     digit or an underscore.  For example: ‘$acl_c5’, ‘$acl_c_mycount’.
     The values of the ‘$acl_c...’ variables persist throughout the
     lifetime of an SMTP connection.  They can be used to pass
     information between ACLs and between different invocations of the
     same ACL. When a message is received, the values of these variables
     are saved with the message, and can be accessed by filters,
     routers, and transports during subsequent delivery.

‘$acl_m...’
     These variables are like the ‘$acl_c...’ variables, except that
     their values are reset after a message has been received.  Thus, if
     several messages are received in one SMTP connection, ‘$acl_m...’
     values are not passed on from one message to the next, as
     ‘$acl_c...’ values are.  The ‘$acl_m...’ variables are also reset
     by MAIL, RSET, EHLO, HELO, and after starting a TLS session.  When
     a message is received, the values of these variables are saved with
     the message, and can be accessed by filters, routers, and
     transports during subsequent delivery.

‘$acl_narg’
     Within an acl condition, expansion condition or expansion item this
     variable has the number of arguments.

‘$acl_verify_message’
     After an address verification has failed, this variable contains
     the failure message.  It retains its value for use in subsequent
     modifiers of the verb.  The message can be preserved by coding like
     this:

          warn !verify = sender
               set acl_m0 = $acl_verify_message

     You can use ‘$acl_verify_message’ during the expansion of the
     ‘message’ or ‘log_message’ modifiers, to include information about
     the verification failure.  *Note*: The variable is cleared at the
     end of processing the ACL verb.

‘$address_data’
     This variable is set by means of the ‘address_data’ option in
     routers.  The value then remains with the address while it is
     processed by subsequent routers and eventually a transport.  If the
     transport is handling multiple addresses, the value from the first
     address is used.  See chapter *note Generic options for routers::
     for more details.  *Note*: The contents of ‘$address_data’ are
     visible in user filter files.

     If ‘$address_data’ is set when the routers are called from an ACL
     to verify a recipient address, the final value is still in the
     variable for subsequent conditions and modifiers of the ACL
     statement.  If routing the address caused it to be redirected to
     just one address, the child address is also routed as part of the
     verification, and in this case the final value of ‘$address_data’
     is from the child's routing.

     If ‘$address_data’ is set when the routers are called from an ACL
     to verify a sender address, the final value is also preserved, but
     this time in ‘$sender_address_data’, to distinguish it from data
     from a recipient address.

     In both cases (recipient and sender verification), the value does
     not persist after the end of the current ACL statement.  If you
     want to preserve these values for longer, you can save them in ACL
     variables.

‘$address_file’
     When, as a result of aliasing, forwarding, or filtering, a message
     is directed to a specific file, this variable holds the name of the
     file when the transport is running.  At other times, the variable
     is empty.  For example, using the default configuration, if user
     ‘r2d2’ has a ‘.forward’ file containing

          /home/r2d2/savemail

     then when the ‘address_file’ transport is running, ‘$address_file’
     contains the text string ‘/home/r2d2/savemail’.  For Sieve filters,
     the value may be "inbox" or a relative folder name.  It is then up
     to the transport configuration to generate an appropriate absolute
     path to the relevant file.

‘$address_pipe’
     When, as a result of aliasing or forwarding, a message is directed
     to a pipe, this variable holds the pipe command when the transport
     is running.

‘$atrn_host’
     When an ATRN command is accepted, this variable is filled in with
     the client IP and port, for use in a manualroute router.

‘$atrn_mode’
     When in provider mode this variable will contain "P". When in
     customer mode it will contain "C". Otherwise, it will be empty.

‘$auth1’ - ‘$auth4’
     These variables are used in SMTP authenticators (see chapters *note
     The plaintext authenticator::-*note The tls authenticator::).
     Elsewhere, they are empty.

‘$authenticated_id’
     When a server successfully authenticates a client it may be
     configured to preserve some of the authentication information in
     the variable ‘$authenticated_id’ (see chapter *note SMTP
     authentication::).  For example, a user/password authenticator
     configuration might preserve the user name for use in the routers.
     Note that this is not the same information that is saved in
     ‘$sender_host_authenticated’.

     When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP
     connection) the value of ‘$authenticated_id’ is normally the login
     name of the calling process.  However, a trusted user can override
     this by means of the ‘-oMai’ command line option.  This second case
     also sets up information used by the ‘$authresults’ expansion item.

‘$authenticated_fail_id’
     When an authentication attempt fails, the variable
     ‘$authenticated_fail_id’ will contain the failed authentication id.
     If more than one authentication id is attempted, it will contain
     only the last one.  The variable is available for processing in the
     ACL's, generally the quit or notquit ACL. A message to a local
     recipient could still be accepted without requiring authentication,
     which means this variable could also be visible in all of the ACL's
     as well.

‘$authenticated_sender’

     _Tainted_

     When acting as a server, Exim takes note of the AUTH= parameter on
     an incoming SMTP MAIL command if it believes the sender is
     sufficiently trusted, as described in section *note The AUTH
     parameter on MAIL commands::.  Unless the data is the string "<>",
     it is set as the authenticated sender of the message, and the value
     is available during delivery in the ‘$authenticated_sender’
     variable.  If the sender is not trusted, Exim accepts the syntax of
     AUTH=, but ignores the data.

     When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP
     connection), the value of ‘$authenticated_sender’ is an address
     constructed from the login name of the calling process and
     ‘$qualify_domain’, except that a trusted user can override this by
     means of the ‘-oMas’ command line option.

‘$authentication_failed’
     This variable is set to "1" in an Exim server if a client issues an
     AUTH command that does not succeed.  Otherwise it is set to "0".
     This makes it possible to distinguish between "did not try to
     authenticate" (‘$sender_host_authenticated’ is empty and
     ‘$authentication_failed’ is set to "0") and "tried to authenticate
     but failed" (‘$sender_host_authenticated’ is empty and
     ‘$authentication_failed’ is set to "1").  Failure includes
     cancellation of a authentication attempt, and any negative response
     to an AUTH command, (including, for example, an attempt to use an
     undefined mechanism).

‘$av_failed’
     This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension.  It is set to "0" by default, but will
     be set to "1" if any problem occurs with the virus scanner
     (specified by ‘av_scanner’) during the ACL malware condition.

‘$body_linecount’
     When a message is being received or delivered, this variable
     contains the number of lines in the message's body.  See also
     ‘$message_linecount’.

‘$body_zerocount’
     When a message is being received or delivered, this variable
     contains the number of binary zero bytes (ASCII NULs) in the
     message's body.

‘$bounce_recipient’
     This is set to the recipient address of a bounce message while Exim
     is creating it.  It is useful if a customized bounce message text
     file is in use (see chapter *note Customizing bounce and warning
     messages: Customizing messages.).

‘$bounce_return_size_limit’
     This contains the value set in the ‘bounce_return_size_limit’
     option, rounded up to a multiple of 1000.  It is useful when a
     customized error message text file is in use (see chapter *note
     Customizing bounce and warning messages: Customizing messages.).

‘$caller_gid’
     The real group id under which the process that called Exim was
     running.  This is not the same as the group id of the originator of
     a message (see ‘$originator_gid’).  If Exim re-execs itself, this
     variable in the new incarnation normally contains the Exim gid.

‘$caller_uid’
     The real user id under which the process that called Exim was
     running.  This is not the same as the user id of the originator of
     a message (see ‘$originator_uid’).  If Exim re-execs itself, this
     variable in the new incarnation normally contains the Exim uid.

‘$callout_address’
     After a callout for verification, spamd or malware daemon service,
     the address that was connected to.

‘$compile_number’
     The building process for Exim keeps a count of the number of times
     it has been compiled.  This serves to distinguish different
     compilations of the same version of Exim.

‘$config_dir’
     The directory name of the main configuration file.  That is, the
     content of ‘$config_file’ with the last component stripped.  The
     value does not contain the trailing slash.  If ‘$config_file’ does
     not contain a slash, ‘$config_dir’ is ".".

‘$config_file’
     The name of the main configuration file Exim is using.

‘$connection_id’
     An identifier for the accepted connection, for use in custom
     logging.

‘$dkim_verify_status’
     Results of DKIM verification.  For details see section *note
     Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail::.

‘$dkim_cur_signer’
‘$dkim_verify_reason’
‘$dkim_domain’
‘$dkim_identity’
‘$dkim_selector’
‘$dkim_algo’
‘$dkim_canon_body’
‘$dkim_canon_headers’
‘$dkim_copiedheaders’
‘$dkim_bodylength’
‘$dkim_created’
‘$dkim_expires’
‘$dkim_headernames’
‘$dkim_key_testing’
‘$dkim_key_nosubdomains’
‘$dkim_key_srvtype’
‘$dkim_key_granularity’
‘$dkim_key_notes’
‘$dkim_key_length’
     These variables are only available within the DKIM ACL. For details
     see section *note Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail::.

‘$dkim_signers’
     When a message has been received this variable contains a
     colon-separated list of signer domains and identities for the
     message.  For details see section *note Verifying DKIM signatures
     in incoming mail::.

‘$dmarc_alignment_spf’
‘$dmarc_alignment_dkim’
‘$dmarc_domain_policy’
‘$dmarc_status’
‘$dmarc_status_text’
‘$dmarc_used_domains’
     Results of DMARC verification.  For details see section *note
     DMARC::.

‘$dnslist_domain’
‘$dnslist_matched’
‘$dnslist_text’
‘$dnslist_value’
     When a DNS (black) list lookup succeeds, these variables are set to
     contain the following data from the lookup: the list's domain name,
     the key that was looked up, the contents of any associated TXT
     record, and the value from the main A record.  See section *note
     Variables set from DNS lists:: for more details.

‘$domain’

     _Tainted_

     When an address is being routed, or delivered on its own, this
     variable contains the domain.  Uppercase letters in the domain are
     converted into lower case for ‘$domain’.

     Global address rewriting happens when a message is received, so the
     value of ‘$domain’ during routing and delivery is the value after
     rewriting.  ‘$domain’ is set during user filtering, but not during
     system filtering, because a message may have many recipients and
     the system filter is called just once.

     When more than one address is being delivered at once (for example,
     several RCPT commands in one SMTP delivery), ‘$domain’ is set only
     if they all have the same domain.  Transports can be restricted to
     handling only one domain at a time if the value of ‘$domain’ is
     required at transport time - this is the default for local
     transports.  For further details of the environment in which local
     transports are run, see chapter *note Environment for running local
     transports: Environment for local transports.

     At the end of a delivery, if all deferred addresses have the same
     domain, it is set in ‘$domain’ during the expansion of
     ‘delay_warning_condition’.

     The ‘$domain’ variable is also used in some other circumstances:

        • When an ACL is running for a RCPT command, ‘$domain’ contains
          the domain of the recipient address.  The domain of the
          _sender_ address is in ‘$sender_address_domain’ at both MAIL
          time and at RCPT time.  ‘$domain’ is not normally set during
          the running of the MAIL ACL. However, if the sender address is
          verified with a callout during the MAIL ACL, the sender domain
          is placed in ‘$domain’ during the expansions of ‘hosts’,
          ‘interface’, and ‘port’ in the ‘smtp’ transport.

        • When a rewrite item is being processed (see chapter *note
          Address rewriting::), ‘$domain’ contains the domain portion of
          the address that is being rewritten; it can be used in the
          expansion of the replacement address, for example, to rewrite
          domains by file lookup.

        • With one important exception, whenever a domain list is being
          scanned, ‘$domain’ contains the subject domain.  *Exception*:
          When a domain list in a ‘sender_domains’ condition in an ACL
          is being processed, the subject domain is in
          ‘$sender_address_domain’ and not in ‘$domain’.  It works this
          way so that, in a RCPT ACL, the sender domain list can be
          dependent on the recipient domain (which is what is in
          ‘$domain’ at this time).

        • When the ‘smtp_etrn_command’ option is being expanded,
          ‘$domain’ contains the complete argument of the ETRN command
          (see section *note The ETRN command::).

     If the origin of the data is an incoming message, the result of
     expanding this variable is tainted and may not be further expanded
     or used as a filename.  When an untainted version is needed, one
     should be obtained from looking up the value in a local (therefore
     trusted) database.  Often ‘$domain_data’ is usable in this role.

‘$domain_data’
     When the ‘domains’ condition on a router or an ACL matches a domain
     against a list, the match value is copied to ‘$domain_data’.  This
     is an enhancement over previous versions of Exim, when it only
     applied to the data read by a lookup.  For details on match values
     see section *note Results of list checking:: et.  al.

     If the router routes the address to a transport, the value is
     available in that transport.  If the transport is handling multiple
     addresses, the value from the first address is used.

     ‘$domain_data’ set in an ACL is available during the rest of the
     ACL statement.

‘$exim_gid’
     This variable contains the numerical value of the Exim group id.

‘$exim_path’
     This variable contains the path to the Exim binary.

‘$exim_uid’
     This variable contains the numerical value of the Exim user id.

‘$exim_version’
     This variable contains the version string of the Exim build.  The
     first character is a major version number, currently 4.  Then after
     a dot, the next group of digits is a minor version number.  There
     may be other characters following the minor version.  This value
     may be overridden by the ‘exim_version’ main config option.

‘$header_’<_name_>
     _Tainted_

     This is not strictly an expansion variable.  It is expansion syntax
     for inserting the message header line with the given name.  Note
     that the name must be terminated by colon or white space, because
     it may contain a wide variety of characters.  Note also that braces
     must _not_ be used.  See the full description in section *note
     Expansion items:: above.

‘$headers_added’
     Within an ACL this variable contains the headers added so far by
     the ACL modifier add_header (section *note Adding header lines in
     ACLs::).  The headers are a newline-separated list.

‘$home’
     When the ‘check_local_user’ option is set for a router, the user's
     home directory is placed in ‘$home’ when the check succeeds.  In
     particular, this means it is set during the running of users'
     filter files.  A router may also explicitly set a home directory
     for use by a transport; this can be overridden by a setting on the
     transport itself.

     When running a filter test via the ‘-bf’ option, ‘$home’ is set to
     the value of the environment variable HOME, which is subject to the
     ‘keep_environment’ and ‘add_environment’ main config options.

‘$host’
     If a router assigns an address to a transport (any transport), and
     passes a list of hosts with the address, the value of ‘$host’ when
     the transport starts to run is the name of the first host on the
     list.  Note that this applies both to local and remote transports.

     For the ‘smtp’ transport, if there is more than one host, the value
     of ‘$host’ changes as the transport works its way through the list.
     In particular, when the ‘smtp’ transport is expanding its options
     for encryption using TLS, or for specifying a transport filter (see
     chapter *note Generic options for transports::), ‘$host’ contains
     the name of the host to which it is connected.

     When used in the client part of an authenticator configuration (see
     chapter *note SMTP authentication::), ‘$host’ contains the name of
     the server to which the client is connected.

‘$host_address’
     This variable is set to the remote host's IP address whenever
     ‘$host’ is set for a remote connection.  It is also set to the IP
     address that is being checked when the ‘ignore_target_hosts’ option
     is being processed.

‘$host_data’
     If a ‘hosts’ condition in an ACL is satisfied by means of a lookup,
     the result of the lookup is made available in the ‘$host_data’
     variable.  This allows you, for example, to do things like this:

          deny  hosts = net-lsearch;/some/file
                message = $host_data

‘$host_lookup_deferred’
     This variable normally contains "0", as does ‘$host_lookup_failed’.
     When a message comes from a remote host and there is an attempt to
     look up the host's name from its IP address, and the attempt is not
     successful, one of these variables is set to "1".

        • If the lookup receives a definite negative response (for
          example, a DNS lookup succeeded, but no records were found),
          ‘$host_lookup_failed’ is set to "1".

        • If there is any kind of problem during the lookup, such that
          Exim cannot tell whether or not the host name is defined (for
          example, a timeout for a DNS lookup), ‘$host_lookup_deferred’
          is set to "1".

     Looking up a host's name from its IP address consists of more than
     just a single reverse lookup.  Exim checks that a forward lookup of
     at least one of the names it receives from a reverse lookup yields
     the original IP address.  If this is not the case, Exim does not
     accept the looked up name(s), and ‘$host_lookup_failed’ is set to
     "1".  Thus, being able to find a name from an IP address (for
     example, the existence of a PTR record in the DNS) is not
     sufficient on its own for the success of a host name lookup.  If
     the reverse lookup succeeds, but there is a lookup problem such as
     a timeout when checking the result, the name is not accepted, and
     ‘$host_lookup_deferred’ is set to "1".  See also
     ‘$sender_host_name’.

     Performing these checks sets up information used by the
     ‘authresults’ expansion item.

‘$host_lookup_failed’
     See ‘$host_lookup_deferred’.

‘$host_port’
     This variable is set to the remote host's TCP port whenever ‘$host’
     is set for an outbound connection.

‘$initial_cwd’
     This variable contains the full path name of the initial working
     directory of the current Exim process.  This may differ from the
     current working directory, as Exim changes this to "/" during early
     startup, and to ‘$spool_directory’ later.

‘$inode’
     The only time this variable is set is while expanding the
     ‘directory_file’ option in the ‘appendfile’ transport.  The
     variable contains the inode number of the temporary file which is
     about to be renamed.  It can be used to construct a unique name for
     the file.

‘$interface_address’
‘$interface_port’
     These are obsolete names for ‘$received_ip_address’ and
     ‘$received_port’.

‘$item’
     This variable is used during the expansion of *forall* and *forany*
     conditions (see section *note Expansion conditions::), and
     *filter*, *map*, and *reduce* items (see section *note Expansion
     conditions::).  In other circumstances, it is empty.

‘$ldap_dn’
     This variable, which is available only when Exim is compiled with
     LDAP support, contains the DN from the last entry in the most
     recently successful LDAP lookup.

‘$load_average’
     This variable contains the system load average, multiplied by 1000
     so that it is an integer.  For example, if the load average is
     0.21, the value of the variable is 210.  The value is recomputed
     every time the variable is referenced.

‘$local_part’

     _Tainted_

     When an address is being routed, or delivered on its own, this
     variable contains the local part.  When a number of addresses are
     being delivered together (for example, multiple RCPT commands in an
     SMTP session), ‘$local_part’ is not set.

     Global address rewriting happens when a message is received, so the
     value of ‘$local_part’ during routing and delivery is the value
     after rewriting.  ‘$local_part’ is set during user filtering, but
     not during system filtering, because a message may have many
     recipients and the system filter is called just once.

     If the origin of the data is an incoming message, the result of
     expanding this variable is tainted and may not be further expanded
     or used as a filename.

     *Warning*: the content of this variable is usually provided by a
     potential attacker.  Consider carefully the implications of using
     it unvalidated as a name for file access.  This presents issues for
     users' ‘.forward’ and filter files.  For traditional full user
     accounts, use ‘check_local_users’ and the ‘$local_part_data’
     variable rather than this one.  For virtual users, store a suitable
     pathname component in the database which is used for account name
     validation, and use that retrieved value rather than this variable.
     Often ‘$local_part_data’ is usable in this role.  If needed, use a
     router ‘address_data’ or ‘set’ option for the retrieved data.

     When a message is being delivered to a file, pipe, or autoreply
     transport as a result of aliasing or forwarding, ‘$local_part’ is
     set to the local part of the parent address, not to the filename or
     command (see ‘$address_file’ and ‘$address_pipe’).

     When an ACL is running for a RCPT command, ‘$local_part’ contains
     the local part of the recipient address.

     When a rewrite item is being processed (see chapter *note Address
     rewriting::), ‘$local_part’ contains the local part of the address
     that is being rewritten; it can be used in the expansion of the
     replacement address, for example.

     In all cases, all quoting is removed from the local part.  For
     example, for both the addresses

          "abc:xyz"@test.example
          abc\:xyz@test.example

     the value of ‘$local_part’ is

          abc:xyz

     If you use ‘$local_part’ to create another address, you should
     always wrap it inside a quoting operator.  For example, in a
     ‘redirect’ router you could have:

          data = ${quote_local_part:$local_part}@new.domain.example

     *Note*: The value of ‘$local_part’ is normally lower cased.  If you
     want to process local parts in a case-dependent manner in a router,
     you can set the ‘caseful_local_part’ option (see chapter *note
     Generic options for routers::).

‘$local_part_data’
     When the ‘local_parts’ condition on a router or ACL matches a local
     part list the match value is copied to ‘$local_part_data’.  This is
     an enhancement over previous versions of Exim, when it only applied
     to the data read by a lookup.  For details on match values see
     section *note Results of list checking:: et.  al.

     The ‘check_local_user’ router option also sets this variable.

     If a local part prefix or suffix has been recognized, it is not
     included in the value of ‘$local_part’ during routing and
     subsequent delivery.  The values of any prefix or suffix are in
     ‘$local_part_prefix’ and ‘$local_part_suffix’, respectively.  If
     the specification did not include a wildcard then the affix
     variable value is not tainted.

     If the affix specification included a wildcard then the portion of
     the affix matched by the wildcard is in ‘$local_part_prefix_v’ or
     ‘$local_part_suffix_v’ as appropriate, and both the whole and
     varying values are tainted.

‘$local_scan_data’
     This variable contains the text returned by the ‘local_scan()’
     function when a message is received.  See chapter *note Adding a
     local scan function to Exim: Local scan function. for more details.

‘$local_user_gid’
     See ‘$local_user_uid’.

‘$local_user_uid’
     This variable and ‘$local_user_gid’ are set to the uid and gid
     after the ‘check_local_user’ router precondition succeeds.  This
     means that their values are available for the remaining
     preconditions (‘senders’, ‘require_files’, and ‘condition’), for
     the ‘address_data’ expansion, and for any router-specific
     expansions.  At all other times, the values in these variables are
     ‘(uid_t)(-1)’ and ‘(gid_t)(-1)’, respectively.

‘$localhost_number’
     This contains the expanded value of the ‘localhost_number’ option.
     The expansion happens after the main options have been read.

‘$log_inodes’
     The number of free inodes in the disk partition where Exim's log
     files are being written.  The value is recalculated whenever the
     variable is referenced.  If the relevant file system does not have
     the concept of inodes, the value of is -1.  See also the
     ‘check_log_inodes’ option.

‘$log_space’
     The amount of free space (as a number of kilobytes) in the disk
     partition where Exim's log files are being written.  The value is
     recalculated whenever the variable is referenced.  If the operating
     system does not have the ability to find the amount of free space
     (only true for experimental systems), the space value is -1.  See
     also the ‘check_log_space’ option.

‘$lookup_dnssec_authenticated’
     This variable is set after a DNS lookup done by a dnsdb lookup
     expansion, dnslookup router or smtp transport.  It will be empty if
     ‘DNSSEC’ was not requested, "no" if the result was not labelled as
     authenticated data and "yes" if it was.  Results that are labelled
     as authoritative answer that match the ‘dns_trust_aa’ configuration
     variable count also as authenticated data.

‘$mailstore_basename’
     This variable is set only when doing deliveries in "mailstore"
     format in the ‘appendfile’ transport.  During the expansion of the
     ‘mailstore_prefix’, ‘mailstore_suffix’, ‘message_prefix’, and
     ‘message_suffix’ options, it contains the basename of the files
     that are being written, that is, the name without the ".tmp",
     ".env", or ".msg" suffix.  At all other times, this variable is
     empty.

‘$malware_name’
     This variable is available when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension.  It is set to the name of the virus
     that was found when the ACL ‘malware’ condition is true (see
     section *note Scanning for viruses::).

‘$max_received_linelength’
     This variable contains the number of bytes in the longest line that
     was received as part of the message, not counting the line
     termination character(s).  It is not valid if the
     ‘spool_wireformat’ option is used.

‘$message_age’
     This variable is set at the start of a delivery attempt to contain
     the number of seconds since the message was received.  It does not
     change during a single delivery attempt.

‘$message_body’

     _Tainted_

     This variable contains the initial portion of a message's body
     while it is being delivered, and is intended mainly for use in
     filter files.  The maximum number of characters of the body that
     are put into the variable is set by the ‘message_body_visible’
     configuration option; the default is 500.

     By default, newlines are converted into spaces in ‘$message_body’,
     to make it easier to search for phrases that might be split over a
     line break.  However, this can be disabled by setting
     ‘message_body_newlines’ to be true.  Binary zeros are always
     converted into spaces.

‘$message_body_end’

     _Tainted_

     This variable contains the final portion of a message's body while
     it is being delivered.  The format and maximum size are as for
     ‘$message_body’.

‘$message_body_size’
     When a message is being delivered, this variable contains the size
     of the body in bytes.  The count starts from the character after
     the blank line that separates the body from the header.  Newlines
     are included in the count.  See also ‘$message_size’,
     ‘$body_linecount’, and ‘$body_zerocount’.

     If the spool file is wireformat (see the ‘spool_wireformat’ main
     option) the CRLF line-terminators are included in the count.

‘$message_exim_id’
     When a message is being received or delivered, this variable
     contains the unique message id that is generated and used by Exim
     to identify the message.  An id is not created for a message until
     after its header has been successfully received.  *Note*: This is
     _not_ the contents of the _Message-ID:_ header line; it is the
     local id that Exim assigns to the message, for example:
     ‘1BXTIK-0001yO-VA’.

‘$message_headers’

     _Tainted_

     This variable contains a concatenation of all the header lines when
     a message is being processed, except for lines added by routers or
     transports.  The header lines are separated by newline characters.
     Their contents are decoded in the same way as a header line that is
     inserted by ‘bheader’.

‘$message_headers_raw’

     _Tainted_

     This variable is like ‘$message_headers’ except that no processing
     of the contents of header lines is done.

‘$message_id’
     This is an old name for ‘$message_exim_id’.  It is now deprecated.

‘$message_linecount’
     This variable contains the total number of lines in the header and
     body of the message.  Compare ‘$body_linecount’, which is the count
     for the body only.  During the DATA and content-scanning ACLs,
     ‘$message_linecount’ contains the number of lines received.  Before
     delivery happens (that is, before filters, routers, and transports
     run) the count is increased to include the _Received:_ header line
     that Exim standardly adds, and also any other header lines that are
     added by ACLs.  The blank line that separates the message header
     from the body is not counted.

     As with the special case of ‘$message_size’, during the expansion
     of the appendfile transport's maildir_tag option in maildir format,
     the value of ‘$message_linecount’ is the precise size of the number
     of newlines in the file that has been written (minus one for the
     blank line between the header and the body).

     Here is an example of the use of this variable in a DATA ACL:

          deny condition = \
                ${if <{250}{${eval:$message_linecount - $body_linecount}}}
               message   = Too many lines in message header

     In the MAIL and RCPT ACLs, the value is zero because at that stage
     the message has not yet been received.

     This variable is not valid if the ‘spool_wireformat’ option is
     used.

‘$message_size’
     When a message is being processed, this variable contains its size
     in bytes.  In most cases, the size includes those headers that were
     received with the message, but not those (such as _Envelope-to:_)
     that are added to individual deliveries as they are written.
     However, there is one special case: during the expansion of the
     ‘maildir_tag’ option in the ‘appendfile’ transport while doing a
     delivery in maildir format, the value of ‘$message_size’ is the
     precise size of the file that has been written.  See also
     ‘$message_body_size’, ‘$body_linecount’, and ‘$body_zerocount’.

     While running a per message ACL (mail/rcpt/predata),
     ‘$message_size’ contains the size supplied on the MAIL command, or
     -1 if no size was given.  The value may not, of course, be
     truthful.

‘$mime_anomaly_level’
‘$mime_anomaly_text’
‘$mime_boundary’
‘$mime_charset’
‘$mime_content_description’
‘$mime_content_disposition’
‘$mime_content_id’
‘$mime_content_size’
‘$mime_content_transfer_encoding’
‘$mime_content_type’
‘$mime_decoded_filename’
‘$mime_filename’
‘$mime_is_coverletter’
‘$mime_is_multipart’
‘$mime_is_rfc822’
‘$mime_part_count’
     A number of variables whose names start with ‘$mime’ are available
     when Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension.  For
     details, see section *note Scanning MIME parts::.

‘$n0’ - ‘$n9’
     These variables are counters that can be incremented by means of
     the ‘add’ command in filter files.

‘$original_domain’

     _Tainted_

     When a top-level address is being processed for delivery, this
     contains the same value as ‘$domain’.  However, if a "child"
     address (for example, generated by an alias, forward, or filter
     file) is being processed, this variable contains the domain of the
     original address (lower cased).  This differs from ‘$parent_domain’
     only when there is more than one level of aliasing or forwarding.
     When more than one address is being delivered in a single transport
     run, ‘$original_domain’ is not set.

     If a new address is created by means of a ‘deliver’ command in a
     system filter, it is set up with an artificial "parent" address.
     This has the local part _system-filter_ and the default qualify
     domain.

‘$original_local_part’

     _Tainted_

     When a top-level address is being processed for delivery, this
     contains the same value as ‘$local_part’, unless a prefix or suffix
     was removed from the local part, because ‘$original_local_part’
     always contains the full local part.  When a "child" address (for
     example, generated by an alias, forward, or filter file) is being
     processed, this variable contains the full local part of the
     original address.

     If the router that did the redirection processed the local part
     case-insensitively, the value in ‘$original_local_part’ is in lower
     case.  This variable differs from ‘$parent_local_part’ only when
     there is more than one level of aliasing or forwarding.  When more
     than one address is being delivered in a single transport run,
     ‘$original_local_part’ is not set.

     If a new address is created by means of a ‘deliver’ command in a
     system filter, it is set up with an artificial "parent" address.
     This has the local part _system-filter_ and the default qualify
     domain.

‘$originator_gid’
     This variable contains the value of ‘$caller_gid’ that was set when
     the message was received.  For messages received via the command
     line, this is the gid of the sending user.  For messages received
     by SMTP over TCP/IP, this is normally the gid of the Exim user.

‘$originator_uid’
     The value of ‘$caller_uid’ that was set when the message was
     received.  For messages received via the command line, this is the
     uid of the sending user.  For messages received by SMTP over
     TCP/IP, this is normally the uid of the Exim user.

‘$parent_domain’

     _Tainted_

     This variable is similar to ‘$original_domain’ (see above), except
     that it refers to the immediately preceding parent address.

‘$parent_local_part’

     _Tainted_

     This variable is similar to ‘$original_local_part’ (see above),
     except that it refers to the immediately preceding parent address.

‘$pid’
     This variable contains the current process id.

‘$pipe_addresses’
     This is not an expansion variable, but is mentioned here because
     the string ‘$pipe_addresses’ is handled specially in the command
     specification for the ‘pipe’ transport (chapter *note The pipe
     transport::) and in transport filters (described under
     ‘transport_filter’ in chapter *note Generic options for
     transports::).  It cannot be used in general expansion strings, and
     provokes an "unknown variable" error if encountered.  *Note*: This
     value permits data supplied by a potential attacker to be used in
     the command for a ‘pipe’ transport.  Such configurations should be
     carefully assessed for security vulnerbilities.

‘$primary_hostname’
     This variable contains the value set by ‘primary_hostname’ in the
     configuration file, or read by the ‘uname()’ function.  If
     ‘uname()’ returns a single-component name, Exim calls
     ‘gethostbyname()’ (or ‘getipnodebyname()’ where available) in an
     attempt to acquire a fully qualified host name.  See also
     ‘$smtp_active_hostname’.

‘$proxy_external_address’
‘$proxy_external_port’
‘$proxy_local_address’
‘$proxy_local_port’
‘$proxy_session’
     These variables are only available when built with Proxy Protocol
     or SOCKS5 support.  For details see chapter *note Inbound
     proxies::.

‘$prdr_requested’
     This variable is set to "yes" if PRDR was requested by the client
     for the current message, otherwise "no".

‘$prvscheck_address’
‘$prvscheck_keynum’
‘$prvscheck_result’
     These variables are used in conjunction with the ‘prvscheck’
     expansion item, which is described in sections *note Expansion
     items:: and *note Bounce address tag validation::.

‘$qualify_domain’
     The value set for the ‘qualify_domain’ option in the configuration
     file.

‘$qualify_recipient’
     The value set for the ‘qualify_recipient’ option in the
     configuration file, or if not set, the value of ‘$qualify_domain’.

‘$queue_name’
     The name of the spool queue in use; empty for the default queue.

‘$queue_size’
     This variable contains the number of messages queued.  It is
     evaluated on demand, but no more often than once every minute.  If
     there is no daemon notifier socket open, the value will be an empty
     string.

‘$r_...’
     Values can be placed in these variables by the ‘set’ option of a
     router.  They can be given any name that starts with ‘$r_’.  The
     values persist for the address being handled through subsequent
     routers and the eventual transport.

‘$rcpt_count’
     When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains
     the number of RCPT commands received for the current message.  If
     this variable is used in a RCPT ACL, its value includes the current
     command.

‘$rcpt_defer_count’
     When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains
     the number of RCPT commands in the current message that have
     previously been rejected with a temporary (4_xx_) response.

‘$rcpt_fail_count’
     When a message is being received by SMTP, this variable contains
     the number of RCPT commands in the current message that have
     previously been rejected with a permanent (5_xx_) response.

‘$received_count’
     This variable contains the number of _Received:_ header lines in
     the message, including the one added by Exim (so its value is
     always greater than zero).  It is available in the DATA ACL, the
     non-SMTP ACL, and while routing and delivering.

‘$received_for’

     _Tainted_

     If there is only a single recipient address in an incoming message,
     this variable contains that address when the _Received:_ header
     line is being built.  The value is copied after recipient rewriting
     has happened, but before the ‘local_scan()’ function is run.

‘$received_ip_address’
‘$received_port’
     As soon as an Exim server starts processing an incoming TCP/IP
     connection, these variables are set to the address and port on the
     local IP interface.  (The remote IP address and port are in
     ‘$sender_host_address’ and ‘$sender_host_port’.)  When testing with
     ‘-bh’, the port value is -1 unless it has been set using the ‘-oMi’
     command line option.

     As well as being useful in ACLs (including the "connect" ACL),
     these variable could be used, for example, to make the filename for
     a TLS certificate depend on which interface and/or port is being
     used for the incoming connection.  The values of
     ‘$received_ip_address’ and ‘$received_port’ are saved with any
     messages that are received, thus making these variables available
     at delivery time.  For outbound connections see
     ‘$sending_ip_address’.

‘$received_protocol’
     When a message is being processed, this variable contains the name
     of the protocol by which it was received.  Most of the names used
     by Exim are defined by RFCs 821, 2821, and 3848.  They start with
     "smtp" (the client used HELO) or "esmtp" (the client used EHLO).
     This can be followed by "s" for secure (encrypted) and/or "a" for
     authenticated.  Thus, for example, if the protocol is set to
     "esmtpsa", the message was received over an encrypted SMTP
     connection and the client was successfully authenticated.

     Exim uses the protocol name "smtps" for the unusual case when the
     client initially uses EHLO, sets up an encrypted connection using
     STARTTLS, and then uses HELO afterwards.

     If the log selector "tls_on_connect" is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
     used (the default), "smtps" is also used for the case when
     encryption is automatically set up on connection without the use of
     STARTTLS (see ‘tls_on_connect_ports’), and the client uses HELO to
     initiate the encrypted SMTP session, and "esmtps" is also used for
     the equivalent using EHLO.

     If the log selector "tls_on_connect" is used then the possible
     values for tls-on-connect sessions are "ssmtp", "essmtp" and
     "essmtpa" for (respectively) HELO, EHLO and EHLO with
     authentication.

     The ‘-oMr’ option provides a way of specifying a custom protocol
     name for messages that are injected locally by trusted callers.
     This is commonly used to identify messages that are being
     re-injected after some kind of scanning.

‘$received_time’
     This variable contains the date and time when the current message
     was received, as a number of seconds since the start of the Unix
     epoch.

‘$recipient_data’
     This variable is set after an indexing lookup success in an ACL
     ‘recipients’ condition.  It contains the data from the lookup, and
     the value remains set until the next ‘recipients’ test.  Thus, you
     can do things like this:

          require recipients  = cdb*@;/some/file
          deny    some further test involving $recipient_data

     *Warning*: This variable is set only when a lookup is used as an
     indexing method in the address list, using the semicolon syntax as
     in the example above.  The variable is not set for a lookup that is
     used as part of the string expansion that all such lists undergo
     before being interpreted.

‘$recipient_verify_failure’
     In an ACL, when a recipient verification fails, this variable
     contains information about the failure.  It is set to one of the
     following words:

        • "qualify": The address was unqualified (no domain), and the
          message was neither local nor came from an exempted host.

        • "route": Routing failed.

        • "mail": Routing succeeded, and a callout was attempted;
          rejection occurred at or before the MAIL command (that is, on
          initial connection, HELO, or MAIL).

        • "recipient": The RCPT command in a callout was rejected.

        • "postmaster": The postmaster check in a callout was rejected.

     The main use of this variable is expected to be to distinguish
     between rejections of MAIL and rejections of RCPT.

‘$recipients’

     _Tainted_

‘$recipients_list’

     _Tainted_

     These variables both contain the envelope recipients for a message.

     The first uses a comma and a space separate the addresses in the
     replacement text.  *Note*: an address can legitimately contain a
     comma; this variable is not intended for further processing.

     The second is a proper Exim list; colon-separated.

     However, the variables are not generally available, to prevent
     exposure of Bcc recipients in unprivileged users' filter files.
     You can use either of them only in these cases:

       1. In a system filter file.

       2. In the ACLs associated with the DATA command and with non-SMTP
          messages, that is, the ACLs defined by ‘acl_smtp_predata’,
          ‘acl_smtp_data’, ‘acl_smtp_mime’, ‘acl_not_smtp_start’,
          ‘acl_not_smtp’, and ‘acl_not_smtp_mime’.

       3. From within a ‘local_scan()’ function.

‘$recipients_count’
     When a message is being processed, this variable contains the
     number of envelope recipients that came with the message.
     Duplicates are not excluded from the count.  While a message is
     being received over SMTP, the number increases for each accepted
     recipient.  It can be referenced in an ACL.

‘$regex_match_string’
     This variable is set to contain the matching regular expression
     after a ‘regex’ ACL condition has matched (see section *note
     Scanning with regular expressions::).

‘$regex1’, ‘$regex2’, etc
     When a ‘regex’ or ‘mime_regex’ ACL condition succeeds, these
     variables contain the captured substrings identified by the regular
     expression.  If the subject string was tainted then so will any
     captured substring.

‘$reply_address’

     _Tainted_

     When a message is being processed, this variable contains the
     contents of the _Reply-To:_ header line if one exists and it is not
     empty, or otherwise the contents of the _From:_ header line.  Apart
     from the removal of leading white space, the value is not processed
     in any way.  In particular, no RFC 2047 decoding or character code
     translation takes place.

‘$return_path’
     When a message is being delivered, this variable contains the
     return path - the sender field that will be sent as part of the
     envelope.  It is not enclosed in <> characters.  At the start of
     routing an address, ‘$return_path’ has the same value as
     ‘$sender_address’, but if, for example, an incoming message to a
     mailing list has been expanded by a router which specifies a
     different address for bounce messages, ‘$return_path’ subsequently
     contains the new bounce address, whereas ‘$sender_address’ always
     contains the original sender address that was received with the
     message.  In other words, ‘$sender_address’ contains the incoming
     envelope sender, and ‘$return_path’ contains the outgoing envelope
     sender.

‘$return_size_limit’
     This is an obsolete name for ‘$bounce_return_size_limit’.

‘$router_name’
     During the running of a router, or a transport called, this
     variable contains the router name.

‘$runrc’
     This variable contains the return code from a command that is run
     by the ‘${run...}’ expansion item.  *Warning*: In a router or
     transport, you cannot assume the order in which option values are
     expanded, except for those preconditions whose order of testing is
     documented.  Therefore, you cannot reliably expect to set ‘$runrc’
     by the expansion of one option, and use it in another.

‘$self_hostname’
     When an address is routed to a supposedly remote host that turns
     out to be the local host, what happens is controlled by the ‘self’
     generic router option.  One of its values causes the address to be
     passed to another router.  When this happens, ‘$self_hostname’ is
     set to the name of the local host that the original router
     encountered.  In other circumstances its contents are null.

‘$sender_address’

     _Tainted_

     When a message is being processed, this variable contains the
     sender's address that was received in the message's envelope.  The
     case of letters in the address is retained, in both the local part
     and the domain.  For bounce messages, the value of this variable is
     the empty string.  See also ‘$return_path’.

‘$sender_address_data’
     If ‘$address_data’ is set when the routers are called from an ACL
     to verify a sender address, the final value is preserved in
     ‘$sender_address_data’, to distinguish it from data from a
     recipient address.  The value does not persist after the end of the
     current ACL statement.  If you want to preserve it for longer, you
     can save it in an ACL variable.

‘$sender_address_domain’

     _Tainted_

     The domain portion of ‘$sender_address’.

‘$sender_address_local_part’

     _Tainted_

     The local part portion of ‘$sender_address’.

‘$sender_data’
     This variable is set after a lookup success in an ACL ‘senders’
     condition or in a router ‘senders’ option.  It contains the data
     from the lookup, and the value remains set until the next ‘senders’
     test.  Thus, you can do things like this:

          require senders      = cdb*@;/some/file
          deny    some further test involving $sender_data

     *Warning*: This variable is set only when a lookup is used as an
     indexing method in the address list, using the semicolon syntax as
     in the example above.  The variable is not set for a lookup that is
     used as part of the string expansion that all such lists undergo
     before being interpreted.

‘$sender_fullhost’
     When a message is received from a remote host, this variable
     contains the host name and IP address in a single string.  It ends
     with the IP address in square brackets, followed by a colon and a
     port number if the logging of ports is enabled.  The format of the
     rest of the string depends on whether the host issued a HELO or
     EHLO SMTP command, and whether the host name was verified by
     looking up its IP address.  (Looking up the IP address can be
     forced by the ‘host_lookup’ option, independent of verification.)
     A plain host name at the start of the string is a verified host
     name; if this is not present, verification either failed or was not
     requested.  A host name in parentheses is the argument of a HELO or
     EHLO command.  This is omitted if it is identical to the verified
     host name or to the host's IP address in square brackets.

‘$sender_helo_dnssec’
     This boolean variable is true if a successful HELO verification was
     done using DNS information the resolver library stated was
     authenticated data.

‘$sender_helo_name’

     _Tainted_

     When a message is received from a remote host that has issued a
     HELO or EHLO command, the argument of that command is placed in
     this variable.  It is also set if HELO or EHLO is used when a
     message is received using SMTP locally via the ‘-bs’ or ‘-bS’
     options.

‘$sender_host_address’
     When a message is received from a remote host using SMTP, this
     variable contains that host's IP address.  For locally non-SMTP
     submitted messages, it is empty.

‘$sender_host_authenticated’
     This variable contains the name (not the public name) of the
     authenticator driver that successfully authenticated the client
     from which the message was received.  It is empty if there was no
     successful authentication.  See also ‘$authenticated_id’.

‘$sender_host_dnssec’
     If an attempt to populate ‘$sender_host_name’ has been made (by
     reference, ‘hosts_lookup’ or otherwise) then this boolean will have
     been set true if, and only if, the resolver library states that
     both the reverse and forward DNS were authenticated data.  At all
     other times, this variable is false.

     It is likely that you will need to coerce DNSSEC support on in the
     resolver library, by setting:

          dns_dnssec_ok = 1

     In addition, on Linux with glibc 2.31 or newer the resolver library
     will default to stripping out a successful validation status.  This
     will break a previously working Exim installation.  Provided that
     you do trust the resolver (ie, is on localhost) you can tell glibc
     to pass through any successful validation with a new option in
     ‘/etc/resolv.conf’:

          options trust-ad

     Exim does not perform DNSSEC validation itself, instead leaving
     that to a validating resolver (e.g.  unbound, or bind with suitable
     configuration).

     If you have changed ‘host_lookup_order’ so that ‘bydns’ is not the
     first mechanism in the list, then this variable will be false.

     This requires that your system resolver library support EDNS0 (and
     that DNSSEC flags exist in the system headers).  If the resolver
     silently drops all EDNS0 options, then this will have no effect.
     OpenBSD's asr resolver is known to currently ignore EDNS0,
     documented in CAVEATS of asr_run(3).

‘$sender_host_name’

     _Tainted_

     When a message is received from a remote host, this variable
     contains the host's name as obtained by looking up its IP address.
     For messages received by other means, this variable is empty.

     If the host name has not previously been looked up, a reference to
     ‘$sender_host_name’ triggers a lookup (for messages from remote
     hosts).  A looked up name is accepted only if it leads back to the
     original IP address via a forward lookup.  If either the reverse or
     the forward lookup fails to find any data, or if the forward lookup
     does not yield the original IP address, ‘$sender_host_name’ remains
     empty, and ‘$host_lookup_failed’ is set to "1".

     However, if either of the lookups cannot be completed (for example,
     there is a DNS timeout), ‘$host_lookup_deferred’ is set to "1", and
     ‘$host_lookup_failed’ remains set to "0".

     Once ‘$host_lookup_failed’ is set to "1", Exim does not try to look
     up the host name again if there is a subsequent reference to
     ‘$sender_host_name’ in the same Exim process, but it does try again
     if ‘$host_lookup_deferred’ is set to "1".

     Exim does not automatically look up every calling host's name.  If
     you want maximum efficiency, you should arrange your configuration
     so that it avoids these lookups altogether.  The lookup happens
     only if one or more of the following are true:

        • A string containing ‘$sender_host_name’ is expanded.

        • The calling host matches the list in ‘host_lookup’.  In the
          default configuration, this option is set to *, so it must be
          changed if lookups are to be avoided.  (In the code, the
          default for ‘host_lookup’ is unset.)

        • Exim needs the host name in order to test an item in a host
          list.  The items that require this are described in sections
          *note Host list patterns that match by host name:: and *note
          Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name::.

        • The calling host matches ‘helo_try_verify_hosts’ or
          ‘helo_verify_hosts’.  In this case, the host name is required
          to compare with the name quoted in any EHLO or HELO commands
          that the client issues.

        • The remote host issues a EHLO or HELO command that quotes one
          of the domains in ‘helo_lookup_domains’.  The default value of
          this option is

                 helo_lookup_domains = @ : @[]

          which causes a lookup if a remote host (incorrectly) gives the
          server's name or IP address in an EHLO or HELO command.

‘$sender_host_port’
     When a message is received from a remote host, this variable
     contains the port number that was used on the remote host.

‘$sender_ident’
     When a message is received from a remote host, this variable
     contains the identification received in response to an RFC 1413
     request.  When a message has been received locally, this variable
     contains the login name of the user that called Exim.

‘$sender_rate_’_xxx_
     A number of variables whose names begin ‘$sender_rate_’ are set as
     part of the ‘ratelimit’ ACL condition.  Details are given in
     section *note Rate limiting incoming messages::.

‘$sender_rcvhost’
     This is provided specifically for use in _Received:_ headers.  It
     starts with either the verified host name (as obtained from a
     reverse DNS lookup) or, if there is no verified host name, the IP
     address in square brackets.  After that there may be text in
     parentheses.  When the first item is a verified host name, the
     first thing in the parentheses is the IP address in square
     brackets, followed by a colon and a port number if port logging is
     enabled.  When the first item is an IP address, the port is
     recorded as "port=_xxxx_" inside the parentheses.

     There may also be items of the form "helo=_xxxx_" if HELO or EHLO
     was used and its argument was not identical to the real host name
     or IP address, and "ident=_xxxx_" if an RFC 1413 ident string is
     available.  If all three items are present in the parentheses, a
     newline and tab are inserted into the string, to improve the
     formatting of the _Received:_ header.

‘$sender_verify_failure’
     In an ACL, when a sender verification fails, this variable contains
     information about the failure.  The details are the same as for
     ‘$recipient_verify_failure’.

‘$sending_ip_address’
     This variable is set whenever an outgoing SMTP connection to
     another host has been set up.  It contains the IP address of the
     local interface that is being used.  This is useful if a host that
     has more than one IP address wants to take on different
     personalities depending on which one is being used.  For incoming
     connections, see ‘$received_ip_address’.

‘$sending_port’
     This variable is set whenever an outgoing SMTP connection to
     another host has been set up.  It contains the local port that is
     being used.  For incoming connections, see ‘$received_port’.

‘$smtp_active_hostname’
     During an incoming SMTP session, this variable contains the value
     of the active host name, as specified by the ‘smtp_active_hostname’
     option.  The value of ‘$smtp_active_hostname’ is saved with any
     message that is received, so its value can be consulted during
     routing and delivery.

‘$smtp_command’

     _Tainted_

     During the processing of an incoming SMTP command, this variable
     contains the entire command.  This makes it possible to distinguish
     between HELO and EHLO in the HELO ACL, and also to distinguish
     between commands such as these:

          MAIL FROM:<>
          MAIL FROM: <>

     For a MAIL command, extra parameters such as SIZE can be inspected.
     For a RCPT command, the address in ‘$smtp_command’ is the original
     address before any rewriting, whereas the values in ‘$local_part’
     and ‘$domain’ are taken from the address after SMTP-time rewriting.

‘$smtp_command_argument’

     _Tainted_

     While an ACL is running to check an SMTP command, this variable
     contains the argument, that is, the text that follows the command
     name, with leading white space removed.  Following the introduction
     of ‘$smtp_command’, this variable is somewhat redundant, but is
     retained for backwards compatibility.

‘$smtp_command_history’
     A comma-separated list (with no whitespace) of the most-recent SMTP
     commands received, in time-order left to right.  Only a limited
     number of commands are remembered.

‘$smtp_count_at_connection_start’
     This variable is set greater than zero only in processes spawned by
     the Exim daemon for handling incoming SMTP connections.  The name
     is deliberately long, in order to emphasize what the contents are.
     When the daemon accepts a new connection, it increments this
     variable.  A copy of the variable is passed to the child process
     that handles the connection, but its value is fixed, and never
     changes.  It is only an approximation of how many incoming
     connections there actually are, because many other connections may
     come and go while a single connection is being processed.  When a
     child process terminates, the daemon decrements its copy of the
     variable.

‘$smtp_notquit_reason’
     When the not-QUIT ACL is running, this variable is set to a string
     that indicates the reason for the termination of the SMTP
     connection.

‘$sn0’ - ‘$sn9’
     These variables are copies of the values of the ‘$n0’ - ‘$n9’
     accumulators that were current at the end of the system filter
     file.  This allows a system filter file to set values that can be
     tested in users' filter files.  For example, a system filter could
     set a value indicating how likely it is that a message is junk
     mail.

‘$spam_score’
‘$spam_score_int’
‘$spam_bar’
‘$spam_report’
‘$spam_action’
     A number of variables whose names start with ‘$spam’ are available
     when Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension.  For
     details, see section *note Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd::.

‘$spf_header_comment’
‘$spf_received’
‘$spf_result’
‘$spf_result_guessed’
‘$spf_smtp_comment’
     These variables are only available if Exim is built with SPF
     support.  For details see section *note SPF (Sender Policy
     Framework): SPF [Sender Policy Framework].

‘$spool_directory’
     The name of Exim's spool directory.

‘$spool_inodes’
     The number of free inodes in the disk partition where Exim's spool
     files are being written.  The value is recalculated whenever the
     variable is referenced.  If the relevant file system does not have
     the concept of inodes, the value of is -1.  See also the
     ‘check_spool_inodes’ option.

‘$spool_space’
     The amount of free space (as a number of kilobytes) in the disk
     partition where Exim's spool files are being written.  The value is
     recalculated whenever the variable is referenced.  If the operating
     system does not have the ability to find the amount of free space
     (only true for experimental systems), the space value is -1.  For
     example, to check in an ACL that there is at least 50 megabytes
     free on the spool, you could write:

          condition = ${if > {$spool_space}{50000}}

     See also the ‘check_spool_space’ option.

‘$srs_recipient’

     _Tainted_

     If an *inbound_srs{}* expansion condition succeeds this variable is
     set to the decoded (original) recipient.  See section *note SRS
     (Sender Rewriting Scheme): SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme]. for more
     information on SRS.

‘$thisaddress’
     This variable is set only during the processing of the
     ‘foranyaddress’ command in a filter file.  Its use is explained in
     the description of that command, which can be found in the separate
     document entitled _Exim's interfaces to mail filtering_.

‘$tls_in_bits’
     Contains an approximation of the TLS cipher's bit-strength on the
     inbound connection; the meaning of this depends upon the TLS
     implementation used.  If TLS has not been negotiated, the value
     will be 0.  The value of this is automatically fed into the Cyrus
     SASL authenticator when acting as a server, to specify the
     "external SSF" (a SASL term).

     The deprecated ‘$tls_bits’ variable refers to the inbound side
     except when used in the context of an outbound SMTP delivery, when
     it refers to the outbound.

‘$tls_out_bits’
     Contains an approximation of the TLS cipher's bit-strength on an
     outbound SMTP connection; the meaning of this depends upon the TLS
     implementation used.  If TLS has not been negotiated, the value
     will be 0.

‘$tls_in_ourcert’

     _Tainted_

     This variable refers to the certificate presented to the peer of an
     inbound connection when the message was received.  It is only
     useful as the argument of a ‘certextract’ expansion item, ‘md5’,
     ‘sha1’ or ‘sha256’ operator, or a ‘def’ condition.

     *Note*: Under versions of OpenSSL preceding 1.1.1, when a list of
     more than one file is used for ‘tls_certificate’, this variable is
     not reliable.  The macro "_TLS_BAD_MULTICERT_IN_OURCERT" will be
     defined for those versions.

‘$tls_in_peercert’

     _Tainted_

     This variable refers to the certificate presented by the peer of an
     inbound connection when the message was received.  It is only
     useful as the argument of a ‘certextract’ expansion item, ‘md5’,
     ‘sha1’ or ‘sha256’ operator, or a ‘def’ condition.  If certificate
     verification fails it may refer to a failing chain element which is
     not the leaf.

‘$tls_out_ourcert’

     _Tainted_

     This variable refers to the certificate presented to the peer of an
     outbound connection.  It is only useful as the argument of a
     ‘certextract’ expansion item, ‘md5’, ‘sha1’ or ‘sha256’ operator,
     or a ‘def’ condition.

‘$tls_out_peercert’

     _Tainted_

     This variable refers to the certificate presented by the peer of an
     outbound connection.  It is only useful as the argument of a
     ‘certextract’ expansion item, ‘md5’, ‘sha1’ or ‘sha256’ operator,
     or a ‘def’ condition.  If certificate verification fails it may
     refer to a failing chain element which is not the leaf.

‘$tls_in_certificate_verified’
     This variable is set to "1" if a TLS certificate was verified when
     the message was received, and "0" otherwise.

     The deprecated ‘$tls_certificate_verified’ variable refers to the
     inbound side except when used in the context of an outbound SMTP
     delivery, when it refers to the outbound.

‘$tls_out_certificate_verified’
     This variable is set to "1" if a TLS certificate was verified when
     an outbound SMTP connection was made, and "0" otherwise.

‘$tls_in_cipher’
     When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted
     SMTP connection, this variable is set to the cipher suite that was
     negotiated, for example DES-CBC3-SHA. In other circumstances, in
     particular, for message received over unencrypted connections, the
     variable is empty.  Testing ‘$tls_in_cipher’ for emptiness is one
     way of distinguishing between encrypted and non-encrypted
     connections during ACL processing.

     The deprecated ‘$tls_cipher’ variable is the same as
     ‘$tls_in_cipher’ during message reception, but in the context of an
     outward SMTP delivery taking place via the ‘smtp’ transport becomes
     the same as ‘$tls_out_cipher’.

‘$tls_in_cipher_std’
     As above, but returning the RFC standard name for the cipher suite.

‘$tls_out_cipher’
     This variable is cleared before any outgoing SMTP connection is
     made, and then set to the outgoing cipher suite if one is
     negotiated.  See chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using
     TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections. for details of TLS support and
     chapter *note The smtp transport:: for details of the ‘smtp’
     transport.

‘$tls_out_cipher_std’
     As above, but returning the RFC standard name for the cipher suite.

‘$tls_out_dane’
     DANE active status.  See section *note DANE::.

‘$tls_in_ocsp’
     When a message is received from a remote client connection the
     result of any OCSP request from the client is encoded in this
     variable:

          0 OCSP proof was not requested (default value)
          1 No response to request
          2 Response not verified
          3 Verification failed
          4 Verification succeeded

‘$tls_out_ocsp’
     When a message is sent to a remote host connection the result of
     any OCSP request made is encoded in this variable.  See
     ‘$tls_in_ocsp’ for values.

‘$tls_in_peerdn’
     When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted
     SMTP connection, and Exim is configured to request a certificate
     from the client, the value of the Distinguished Name of the
     certificate is made available in the ‘$tls_in_peerdn’ during
     subsequent processing.  If certificate verification fails it may
     refer to a failing chain element which is not the leaf.

     The deprecated ‘$tls_peerdn’ variable refers to the inbound side
     except when used in the context of an outbound SMTP delivery, when
     it refers to the outbound.

‘$tls_out_peerdn’
     When a message is being delivered to a remote host over an
     encrypted SMTP connection, and Exim is configured to request a
     certificate from the server, the value of the Distinguished Name of
     the certificate is made available in the ‘$tls_out_peerdn’ during
     subsequent processing.  If certificate verification fails it may
     refer to a failing chain element which is not the leaf.

‘$tls_in_resumption’
‘$tls_out_resumption’
     Observability for TLS session resumption.  See *note TLS
     Resumption:: for details.

‘$tls_in_sni’

     _Tainted_

     When a TLS session is being established, if the client sends the
     Server Name Indication extension, the value will be placed in this
     variable.  If the variable appears in ‘tls_certificate’ then this
     option and some others, described in *note Use of TLS Server Name
     Indication::, will be re-expanded early in the TLS session, to
     permit a different certificate to be presented (and optionally a
     different key to be used) to the client, based upon the value of
     the SNI extension.

     The deprecated ‘$tls_sni’ variable refers to the inbound side
     except when used in the context of an outbound SMTP delivery, when
     it refers to the outbound.

‘$tls_out_sni’
     During outbound SMTP deliveries, this variable reflects the value
     of the ‘tls_sni’ option on the transport.

‘$tls_out_tlsa_usage’
     Bitfield of TLSA record types found.  See section *note DANE::.

‘$tls_in_ver’
     When a message is received from a remote host over an encrypted
     SMTP connection this variable is set to the protocol version, eg
     _TLS1.2_.

‘$tls_out_ver’
     When a message is being delivered to a remote host over an
     encrypted SMTP connection this variable is set to the protocol
     version.

‘$tod_bsdinbox’
     The time of day and the date, in the format required for BSD-style
     mailbox files, for example: Thu Oct 17 17:14:09 1995.

‘$tod_epoch’
     The time and date as a number of seconds since the start of the
     Unix epoch.

‘$tod_epoch_l’
     The time and date as a number of microseconds since the start of
     the Unix epoch.

‘$tod_full’
     A full version of the time and date, for example: Wed, 16 Oct 1995
     09:51:40 +0100.  The timezone is always given as a numerical offset
     from UTC, with positive values used for timezones that are ahead
     (east) of UTC, and negative values for those that are behind
     (west).

‘$tod_log’
     The time and date in the format used for writing Exim's log files,
     for example: 1995-10-12 15:32:29, but without a timezone.

‘$tod_logfile’
     This variable contains the date in the format yyyymmdd.  This is
     the format that is used for datestamping log files when
     ‘log_file_path’ contains the ‘%D’ flag.

‘$tod_zone’
     This variable contains the numerical value of the local timezone,
     for example: -0500.

‘$tod_zulu’
     This variable contains the UTC date and time in "Zulu" format, as
     specified by ISO 8601, for example: 20030221154023Z.

‘$transport_name’
     During the running of a transport, this variable contains its name.

‘$value’
     This variable contains the result of an expansion lookup,
     extraction operation, or external command, as described above.  It
     is also used during a *reduce* expansion.

‘$verify_mode’
     While a router or transport is being run in verify mode or for
     cutthrough delivery, contains "S" for sender-verification or "R"
     for recipient-verification.  Otherwise, empty.

‘$version_number’
     The version number of Exim.  Same as ‘$exim_version’, may be
     overridden by the ‘exim_version’ main config option.

‘$warn_message_delay’
     This variable is set only during the creation of a message warning
     about a delivery delay.  Details of its use are explained in
     section *note Customizing warning messages::.

‘$warn_message_recipients’
     This variable is set only during the creation of a message warning
     about a delivery delay.  Details of its use are explained in
     section *note Customizing warning messages::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Embedded Perl,  Next: Starting the daemon,  Prev: String expansions,  Up: Top

12 Embedded Perl
****************

Exim can be built to include an embedded Perl interpreter.  When this is
done, Perl subroutines can be called as part of the string expansion
process.  To make use of the Perl support, you need version 5.004 or
later of Perl installed on your system.  To include the embedded
interpreter in the Exim binary, include the line

     EXIM_PERL = perl.o

   in your ‘Local/Makefile’ and then build Exim in the normal way.

* Menu:

* Setting up so Perl can be used::
* Calling Perl subroutines::
* Calling Exim functions from Perl::
* Use of standard output and error by Perl::


File: spec.info,  Node: Setting up so Perl can be used,  Next: Calling Perl subroutines,  Up: Embedded Perl

12.1 Setting up so Perl can be used
===================================

Access to Perl subroutines is via a global configuration option called
‘perl_startup’ and an expansion string operator ‘${perl ...}’.  If there
is no ‘perl_startup’ option in the Exim configuration file then no Perl
interpreter is started and there is almost no overhead for Exim (since
none of the Perl library will be paged in unless used).  If there is a
‘perl_startup’ option then the associated value is taken to be Perl code
which is executed in a newly created Perl interpreter.

   The value of ‘perl_startup’ is not expanded in the Exim sense, so you
do not need backslashes before any characters to escape special
meanings.  The option should usually be something like

     perl_startup = do '/etc/exim.pl'

   where ‘/etc/exim.pl’ is Perl code which defines any subroutines you
want to use from Exim.  Exim can be configured either to start up a Perl
interpreter as soon as it is entered, or to wait until the first time it
is needed.  Starting the interpreter at the beginning ensures that it is
done while Exim still has its setuid privilege, but can impose an
unnecessary overhead if Perl is not in fact used in a particular run.
Also, note that this does not mean that Exim is necessarily running as
root when Perl is called at a later time.  By default, the interpreter
is started only when it is needed, but this can be changed in two ways:

   • Setting ‘perl_at_start’ (a boolean option) in the configuration
     requests a startup when Exim is entered.

   • The command line option ‘-ps’ also requests a startup when Exim is
     entered, overriding the setting of ‘perl_at_start’.

   There is also a command line option ‘-pd’ (for delay) which
suppresses the initial startup, even if ‘perl_at_start’ is set.

   • To provide more security executing Perl code via the embedded Perl
     interpreter, the ‘perl_taintmode’ option can be set.  This enables
     the taint mode of the Perl interpreter.  You are encouraged to set
     this option to a true value.  To avoid breaking existing
     installations, it defaults to false.

     *Note*: This is entirely separate from Exim's tainted-data
     tracking.


File: spec.info,  Node: Calling Perl subroutines,  Next: Calling Exim functions from Perl,  Prev: Setting up so Perl can be used,  Up: Embedded Perl

12.2 Calling Perl subroutines
=============================

When the configuration file includes a ‘perl_startup’ option you can
make use of the string expansion item to call the Perl subroutines that
are defined by the ‘perl_startup’ code.  The operator is used in any of
the following forms:

     ${perl{foo}}
     ${perl{foo}{argument}}
     ${perl{foo}{argument1}{argument2} ... }

   which calls the subroutine ‘foo’ with the given arguments.  A maximum
of eight arguments may be passed.  Passing more than this results in an
expansion failure with an error message of the form

     Too many arguments passed to Perl subroutine "foo" (max is 8)

   The return value of the Perl subroutine is evaluated in a scalar
context before it is passed back to Exim to be inserted into the
expanded string.  If the return value is _undef_, the expansion is
forced to fail in the same way as an explicit "fail" on an ‘if’ or
‘lookup’ item.  If the subroutine aborts by obeying Perl's ‘die’
function, the expansion fails with the error message that was passed to
‘die’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Calling Exim functions from Perl,  Next: Use of standard output and error by Perl,  Prev: Calling Perl subroutines,  Up: Embedded Perl

12.3 Calling Exim functions from Perl
=====================================

Within any Perl code called from Exim, the function
_Exim::expand_string()_ is available to call back into Exim's string
expansion function.  For example, the Perl code

     my $lp = Exim::expand_string('$local_part');

   makes the current Exim ‘$local_part’ available in the Perl variable
‘$lp’.  Note those are single quotes and not double quotes to protect
against ‘$local_part’ being interpolated as a Perl variable.

   If the string expansion is forced to fail by a "fail" item, the
result of _Exim::expand_string()_ is ‘undef’.  If there is a syntax
error in the expansion string, the Perl call from the original expansion
string fails with an appropriate error message, in the same way as if
‘die’ were used.

   Two other Exim functions are available for use from within Perl code.
_Exim::debug_write()_ writes a string to the standard error stream if
Exim's debugging is enabled.  If you want a newline at the end, you must
supply it.  _Exim::log_write()_ writes a string to Exim's main log,
adding a leading timestamp.  In this case, you should not supply a
terminating newline.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of standard output and error by Perl,  Prev: Calling Exim functions from Perl,  Up: Embedded Perl

12.4 Use of standard output and error by Perl
=============================================

You should not write to the standard error or output streams from within
your Perl code, as it is not defined how these are set up.  In versions
of Exim before 4.50, it is possible for the standard output or error to
refer to the SMTP connection during message reception via the daemon.
Writing to this stream is certain to cause chaos.  From Exim 4.50
onwards, the standard output and error streams are connected to
‘/dev/null’ in the daemon.  The chaos is avoided, but the output is
lost.

   The Perl ‘warn’ statement writes to the standard error stream by
default.  Calls to ‘warn’ may be embedded in Perl modules that you use,
but over which you have no control.  When Exim starts up the Perl
interpreter, it arranges for output from the ‘warn’ statement to be
written to the Exim main log.  You can change this by including
appropriate Perl magic somewhere in your Perl code.  For example, to
discard ‘warn’ output completely, you need this:

     $SIG{__WARN__} = sub { };

   Whenever a ‘warn’ is obeyed, the anonymous subroutine is called.  In
this example, the code for the subroutine is empty, so it does nothing,
but you can include any Perl code that you like.  The text of the ‘warn’
message is passed as the first subroutine argument.


File: spec.info,  Node: Starting the daemon,  Next: Main configuration,  Prev: Embedded Perl,  Up: Top

13 Starting the daemon and the use of network interfaces
********************************************************

A host that is connected to a TCP/IP network may have one or more
physical hardware network interfaces.  Each of these interfaces may be
configured as one or more "logical" interfaces, which are the entities
that a program actually works with.  Each of these logical interfaces is
associated with an IP address.  In addition, TCP/IP software supports
"loopback" interfaces (127.0.0.1 in IPv4 and ::1 in IPv6), which do not
use any physical hardware.  Exim requires knowledge about the host's
interfaces for use in three different circumstances:

  1. When a listening daemon is started, Exim needs to know which
     interfaces and ports to listen on.

  2. When Exim is routing an address, it needs to know which IP
     addresses are associated with local interfaces.  This is required
     for the correct processing of MX lists by removing the local host
     and others with the same or higher priority values.  Also, Exim
     needs to detect cases when an address is routed to an IP address
     that in fact belongs to the local host.  Unless the ‘self’ router
     option or the ‘allow_localhost’ option of the smtp transport is set
     (as appropriate), this is treated as an error situation.

  3. When Exim connects to a remote host, it may need to know which
     interface to use for the outgoing connection.

   Exim's default behaviour is likely to be appropriate in the vast
majority of cases.  If your host has only one interface, and you want
all its IP addresses to be treated in the same way, and you are using
only the standard SMTP port, you should not need to take any special
action.  The rest of this chapter does not apply to you.

   In a more complicated situation you may want to listen only on
certain interfaces, or on different ports, and for this reason there are
a number of options that can be used to influence Exim's behaviour.  The
rest of this chapter describes how they operate.

   When a message is received over TCP/IP, the interface and port that
were actually used are set in ‘$received_ip_address’ and
‘$received_port’.

* Menu:

* Starting a listening daemon::
* Special IP listening addresses::
* Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports::
* Support for the submissions (aka SSMTP or SMTPS) protocol: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
* IPv6 address scopes::
* Disabling IPv6::
* Examples of starting a listening daemon::
* Recognizing the local host::
* Delivering to a remote host::


File: spec.info,  Node: Starting a listening daemon,  Next: Special IP listening addresses,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.1 Starting a listening daemon
================================

When a listening daemon is started (by means of the ‘-bd’ command line
option), the interfaces and ports on which it listens are controlled by
the following options:

   • ‘daemon_smtp_ports’ contains a list of default ports or service
     names.  (For backward compatibility, this option can also be
     specified in the singular.)

   • ‘local_interfaces’ contains list of interface IP addresses on which
     to listen.  Each item may optionally also specify a port.

   The default list separator in both cases is a colon, but this can be
changed as described in section *note Changing list separators::.  When
IPv6 addresses are involved, it is usually best to change the separator
to avoid having to double all the colons.  For example:

     local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; \
                           192.168.23.65 ; \
                           ::1 ; \
                           3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061

   There are two different formats for specifying a port along with an
IP address in ‘local_interfaces’:

  1. The port is added onto the address with a dot separator.  For
     example, to listen on port 1234 on two different IP addresses:

          local_interfaces = <; 192.168.23.65.1234 ; \
                                3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061.1234

  2. The IP address is enclosed in square brackets, and the port is
     added with a colon separator, for example:

          local_interfaces = <; [192.168.23.65]:1234 ; \
                                [3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061]:1234

   When a port is not specified, the value of ‘daemon_smtp_ports’ is
used.  The default setting contains just one port:

     daemon_smtp_ports = smtp

   If more than one port is listed, each interface that does not have
its own port specified listens on all of them.  Ports that are listed in
‘daemon_smtp_ports’ can be identified either by name (defined in
‘/etc/services’) or by number.  However, when ports are given with
individual IP addresses in ‘local_interfaces’, only numbers (not names)
can be used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Special IP listening addresses,  Next: Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports,  Prev: Starting a listening daemon,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.2 Special IP listening addresses
===================================

The addresses 0.0.0.0 and ::0 are treated specially.  They are
interpreted as "all IPv4 interfaces" and "all IPv6 interfaces",
respectively.  In each case, Exim tells the TCP/IP stack to "listen on
all IPv_x_ interfaces" instead of setting up separate listening sockets
for each interface.  The default value of ‘local_interfaces’ is

     local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0

   when Exim is built without IPv6 support; otherwise it is:

     local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0

   Thus, by default, Exim listens on all available interfaces, on the
SMTP port.


File: spec.info,  Node: Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports,  Next: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol,  Prev: Special IP listening addresses,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.3 Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports
======================================================

The ‘-oX’ command line option can be used to override the values of
‘daemon_smtp_ports’ and/or ‘local_interfaces’ for a particular daemon
instance.  Another way of doing this would be to use macros and the ‘-D’
option.  However, ‘-oX’ can be used by any admin user, whereas
modification of the runtime configuration by ‘-D’ is allowed only when
the caller is root or exim.

   The value of ‘-oX’ is a list of items.  The default colon separator
can be changed in the usual way (*note Changing list separators::) if
required.  If there are any items that do not contain dots or colons
(that is, are not IP addresses), the value of ‘daemon_smtp_ports’ is
replaced by the list of those items.  If there are any items that do
contain dots or colons, the value of ‘local_interfaces’ is replaced by
those items.  Thus, for example,

     -oX 1225

   overrides ‘daemon_smtp_ports’, but leaves ‘local_interfaces’
unchanged, whereas

     -oX 192.168.34.5.1125

   overrides ‘local_interfaces’, leaving ‘daemon_smtp_ports’ unchanged.
(However, since ‘local_interfaces’ now contains no items without ports,
the value of ‘daemon_smtp_ports’ is no longer relevant in this example.)


File: spec.info,  Node: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol,  Next: IPv6 address scopes,  Prev: Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.4 Support for the submissions (aka SSMTP or SMTPS) protocol
==============================================================

Exim supports the use of TLS-on-connect, used by mail clients in the
"submissions" protocol, historically also known as SMTPS or SSMTP. For
some years, IETF Standards Track documents only blessed the
STARTTLS-based Submission service (port 587) while common practice was
to support the same feature set on port 465, but using TLS-on-connect.
If your installation needs to provide service to mail clients (Mail User
Agents, MUAs) then you should provide service on both the 587 and the
465 TCP ports.

   If the ‘tls_on_connect_ports’ option is set to a list of port numbers
or service names, connections to those ports must first establish TLS,
before proceeding to the application layer use of the SMTP protocol.

   The common use of this option is expected to be

     tls_on_connect_ports = 465

   per *RFC 8314
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8314#section-3.3)*.  There is
also a command line option ‘-tls-on-connect’, which forces all ports to
behave in this way when a daemon is started.

   *Warning*: Setting ‘tls_on_connect_ports’ does not of itself cause
the daemon to listen on those ports.  You must still specify them in
‘daemon_smtp_ports’, ‘local_interfaces’, or the ‘-oX’ option.  (This is
because ‘tls_on_connect_ports’ applies to ‘inetd’ connections as well as
to connections via the daemon.)


File: spec.info,  Node: IPv6 address scopes,  Next: Disabling IPv6,  Prev: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.5 IPv6 address scopes
========================

IPv6 addresses have "scopes", and a host with multiple hardware
interfaces can, in principle, have the same link-local IPv6 address on
different interfaces.  Thus, additional information is needed, over and
above the IP address, to distinguish individual interfaces.  A
convention of using a percent sign followed by something (often the
interface name) has been adopted in some cases, leading to addresses
like this:

     fe80::202:b3ff:fe03:45c1%eth0

   To accommodate this usage, a percent sign followed by an arbitrary
string is allowed at the end of an IPv6 address.  By default, Exim calls
‘getaddrinfo()’ to convert a textual IPv6 address for actual use.  This
function recognizes the percent convention in operating systems that
support it, and it processes the address appropriately.  Unfortunately,
some older libraries have problems with ‘getaddrinfo()’.  If

     IPV6_USE_INET_PTON=yes

   is set in ‘Local/Makefile’ (or an OS-dependent Makefile) when Exim is
built, Exim uses _inet_pton()_ to convert a textual IPv6 address for
actual use, instead of ‘getaddrinfo()’.  (Before version 4.14, it always
used this function.)  Of course, this means that the additional
functionality of ‘getaddrinfo()’ - recognizing scoped addresses - is
lost.


File: spec.info,  Node: Disabling IPv6,  Next: Examples of starting a listening daemon,  Prev: IPv6 address scopes,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.6 Disabling IPv6
===================

Sometimes it happens that an Exim binary that was compiled with IPv6
support is run on a host whose kernel does not support IPv6.  The binary
will fall back to using IPv4, but it may waste resources looking up AAAA
records, and trying to connect to IPv6 addresses, causing delays to mail
delivery.  If you set the ‘disable_ipv6’ option true, even if the Exim
binary has IPv6 support, no IPv6 activities take place.  AAAA records
are never looked up, and any IPv6 addresses that are listed in
‘local_interfaces’, data for the ‘manualroute’ router, etc.  are
ignored.  If IP literals are enabled, the ‘ipliteral’ router declines to
handle IPv6 literal addresses.

   On the other hand, when IPv6 is in use, there may be times when you
want to disable it for certain hosts or domains.  You can use the
‘dns_ipv4_lookup’ option to globally suppress the lookup of AAAA records
for specified domains, and you can use the ‘ignore_target_hosts’ generic
router option to ignore IPv6 addresses in an individual router.


File: spec.info,  Node: Examples of starting a listening daemon,  Next: Recognizing the local host,  Prev: Disabling IPv6,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.7 Examples of starting a listening daemon
============================================

The default case in an IPv6 environment is

     daemon_smtp_ports = smtp
     local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0

   This specifies listening on the smtp port on all IPv6 and IPv4
interfaces.  Either one or two sockets may be used, depending on the
characteristics of the TCP/IP stack.  (This is complicated and messy;
for more information, read the comments in the ‘daemon.c’ source file.)

   To specify listening on ports 25 and 26 on all interfaces:

     daemon_smtp_ports = 25 : 26

   (leaving ‘local_interfaces’ at the default setting) or, more
explicitly:

     local_interfaces = <; ::0.25     ; ::0.26 \
                           0.0.0.0.25 ; 0.0.0.0.26

   To listen on the default port on all IPv4 interfaces, and on port 26
on the IPv4 loopback address only:

     local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0 : 127.0.0.1.26

   To specify listening on the default port on specific interfaces only:

     local_interfaces = 10.0.0.67 : 192.168.34.67

   *Warning*: Such a setting excludes listening on the loopback
interfaces.


File: spec.info,  Node: Recognizing the local host,  Next: Delivering to a remote host,  Prev: Examples of starting a listening daemon,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.8 Recognizing the local host
===============================

The ‘local_interfaces’ option is also used when Exim needs to determine
whether or not an IP address refers to the local host.  That is, the IP
addresses of all the interfaces on which a daemon is listening are
always treated as local.

   For this usage, port numbers in ‘local_interfaces’ are ignored.  If
either of the items 0.0.0.0 or ::0 are encountered, Exim gets a complete
list of available interfaces from the operating system, and extracts the
relevant (that is, IPv4 or IPv6) addresses to use for checking.

   Some systems set up large numbers of virtual interfaces in order to
provide many virtual web servers.  In this situation, you may want to
listen for email on only a few of the available interfaces, but
nevertheless treat all interfaces as local when routing.  You can do
this by setting ‘extra_local_interfaces’ to a list of IP addresses,
possibly including the "all" wildcard values.  These addresses are
recognized as local, but are not used for listening.  Consider this
example:

     local_interfaces = <; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1 ; \
                           192.168.53.235 ; \
                           3ffe:2101:12:1:a00:20ff:fe86:a061

     extra_local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0

   The daemon listens on the loopback interfaces and just one IPv4 and
one IPv6 address, but all available interface addresses are treated as
local when Exim is routing.

   In some environments the local host name may be in an MX list, but
with an IP address that is not assigned to any local interface.  In
other cases it may be desirable to treat other host names as if they
referred to the local host.  Both these cases can be handled by setting
the ‘hosts_treat_as_local’ option.  This contains host names rather than
IP addresses.  When a host is referenced during routing, either via an
MX record or directly, it is treated as the local host if its name
matches ‘hosts_treat_as_local’, or if any of its IP addresses match
‘local_interfaces’ or ‘extra_local_interfaces’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Delivering to a remote host,  Prev: Recognizing the local host,  Up: Starting the daemon

13.9 Delivering to a remote host
================================

Delivery to a remote host is handled by the smtp transport.  By default,
it allows the system's TCP/IP functions to choose which interface to use
(if there is more than one) when connecting to a remote host.  However,
the ‘interface’ option can be set to specify which interface is used.
See the description of the smtp transport in chapter *note The smtp
transport:: for more details.


File: spec.info,  Node: Main configuration,  Next: Generic options for routers,  Prev: Starting the daemon,  Up: Top

14 Main configuration
*********************

The first part of the runtime configuration file contains three types of
item:

   • Macro definitions: These lines start with an upper case letter.
     See section *note Macros in the configuration file:: for details of
     macro processing.

   • Named list definitions: These lines start with one of the words
     "domainlist", "hostlist", "addresslist", or "localpartlist".  Their
     use is described in section *note Named lists::.

   • Main configuration settings: Each setting occupies one line of the
     file (with possible continuations).  If any setting is preceded by
     the word "hide", the ‘-bP’ command line option displays its value
     to admin users only.  See section *note Common option syntax:: for
     a description of the syntax of these option settings.

   This chapter specifies all the main configuration options, along with
their types and default values.  For ease of finding a particular
option, they appear in alphabetical order in section *note Alphabetical
list of main options:: below.  However, because there are now so many
options, they are first listed briefly in functional groups, as an aid
to finding the name of the option you are looking for.  Some options are
listed in more than one group.

* Menu:

* Miscellaneous::
* Exim parameters::
* Privilege controls::
* Logging::
* Frozen messages::
* Data lookups::
* Message ids::
* Embedded Perl Startup::
* Daemon::
* Resource control::
* Policy controls::
* Callout cache::
* TLS::
* Local user handling::
* All incoming messages (SMTP and non-SMTP): All incoming messages [SMTP and non-SMTP].
* Non-SMTP incoming messages::
* Incoming SMTP messages::
* SMTP extensions::
* Processing messages::
* System filter::
* Routing and delivery::
* Bounce and warning messages::
* Alphabetical list of main options::


File: spec.info,  Node: Miscellaneous,  Next: Exim parameters,  Up: Main configuration

14.1 Miscellaneous
==================

‘add_environment’                    environment variables
‘bi_command’                         to run for ‘-bi’ command line
                                     option
‘debug_store’                        do extra internal checks
‘disable_ipv6’                       do no IPv6 processing
‘keep_environment’                   environment variables
‘keep_malformed’                     for broken files - should not
                                     happen
‘localhost_number’                   for unique message ids in clusters
‘message_body_newlines’              retain newlines in ‘$message_body’
‘message_body_visible’               how much to show in
                                     ‘$message_body’
‘mua_wrapper’                        run in "MUA wrapper" mode
‘print_topbitchars’                  top-bit characters are printing
‘spool_wireformat’                   use wire-format spool data files
                                     when possible
‘timezone’                           force time zone


File: spec.info,  Node: Exim parameters,  Next: Privilege controls,  Prev: Miscellaneous,  Up: Main configuration

14.2 Exim parameters
====================

‘exim_group’                         override compiled-in value
‘exim_path’                          override compiled-in value
‘exim_user’                          override compiled-in value
‘primary_hostname’                   default from ‘uname()’
‘split_spool_directory’              use multiple directories
‘spool_directory’                    override compiled-in value


File: spec.info,  Node: Privilege controls,  Next: Logging,  Prev: Exim parameters,  Up: Main configuration

14.3 Privilege controls
=======================

‘admin_groups’                       groups that are Exim admin users
‘commandline_checks_require_admin’   require admin for various checks
‘deliver_drop_privilege’             drop root for delivery processes
‘local_from_check’                   insert _Sender:_ if necessary
‘local_from_prefix’                  for testing _From:_ for local
                                     sender
‘local_from_suffix’                  for testing _From:_ for local
                                     sender
‘local_sender_retain’                keep _Sender:_ from untrusted user
‘never_users’                        do not run deliveries as these
‘prod_requires_admin’                forced delivery requires admin
                                     user
‘queue_list_requires_admin’          queue listing requires admin user
‘trusted_groups’                     groups that are trusted
‘trusted_users’                      users that are trusted


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging,  Next: Frozen messages,  Prev: Privilege controls,  Up: Main configuration

14.4 Logging
============

‘event_action’                       custom logging
‘hosts_connection_nolog’             exemption from connect logging
‘log_file_path’                      override compiled-in value
‘log_ports’                          filter logging of port numbers
‘log_selector’                       set/unset optional logging
‘log_timezone’                       add timezone to log lines
‘message_logs’                       create per-message logs
‘preserve_message_logs’              after message completion
‘panic_coredump’                     request coredump on fatal errors
‘process_log_path’                   for SIGUSR1 and _exiwhat_
‘slow_lookup_log’                    control logging of slow DNS
                                     lookups
‘syslog_duplication’                 controls duplicate log lines on
                                     syslog
‘syslog_facility’                    set syslog "facility" field
‘syslog_pid’                         pid in syslog lines
‘syslog_processname’                 set syslog "ident" field
‘syslog_timestamp’                   timestamp syslog lines
‘write_rejectlog’                    control use of message log


File: spec.info,  Node: Frozen messages,  Next: Data lookups,  Prev: Logging,  Up: Main configuration

14.5 Frozen messages
====================

‘auto_thaw’                          sets time for retrying frozen
                                     messages
‘freeze_tell’                        send message when freezing
‘move_frozen_messages’               to another directory
‘timeout_frozen_after’               keep frozen messages only so long


File: spec.info,  Node: Data lookups,  Next: Message ids,  Prev: Frozen messages,  Up: Main configuration

14.6 Data lookups
=================

‘ldap_ca_cert_dir’                   dir of CA certs to verify LDAP
                                     server's
‘ldap_ca_cert_file’                  file of CA certs to verify LDAP
                                     server's
‘ldap_cert_file’                     client cert file for LDAP
‘ldap_cert_key’                      client key file for LDAP
‘ldap_cipher_suite’                  TLS negotiation preference control
‘ldap_default_servers’               used if no server in query
‘ldap_require_cert’                  action to take without LDAP server
                                     cert
‘ldap_start_tls’                     require TLS within LDAP
‘ldap_version’                       set protocol version
‘lookup_open_max’                    lookup files held open
‘mysql_servers’                      default MySQL servers
‘oracle_servers’                     Oracle servers
‘pgsql_servers’                      default PostgreSQL servers
‘sqlite_lock_timeout’                as it says


File: spec.info,  Node: Message ids,  Next: Embedded Perl Startup,  Prev: Data lookups,  Up: Main configuration

14.7 Message ids
================

‘message_id_header_domain’           used to build _Message-ID:_ header
‘message_id_header_text’             ditto


File: spec.info,  Node: Embedded Perl Startup,  Next: Daemon,  Prev: Message ids,  Up: Main configuration

14.8 Embedded Perl Startup
==========================

‘perl_at_start’                      always start the interpreter
‘perl_startup’                       code to obey when starting Perl
‘perl_taintmode’                     enable taint mode in Perl


File: spec.info,  Node: Daemon,  Next: Resource control,  Prev: Embedded Perl Startup,  Up: Main configuration

14.9 Daemon
===========

‘daemon_modules_load’                dynamic-module load control
‘daemon_smtp_ports’                  default ports
‘daemon_startup_retries’             number of times to retry
‘daemon_startup_sleep’               time to sleep between tries
‘extra_local_interfaces’             not necessarily listened on
‘local_interfaces’                   on which to listen, with optional
                                     ports
‘notifier_socket’                    override compiled-in value
‘pid_file_path’                      override compiled-in value
‘queue_run_max’                      maximum simultaneous queue runners
‘smtp_backlog_monitor’               level to log listen backlog


File: spec.info,  Node: Resource control,  Next: Policy controls,  Prev: Daemon,  Up: Main configuration

14.10 Resource control
======================

‘check_log_inodes’                   before accepting a message
‘check_log_space’                    before accepting a message
‘check_spool_inodes’                 before accepting a message
‘check_spool_space’                  before accepting a message
‘deliver_queue_load_max’             no queue deliveries if load high
‘queue_only_load’                    queue incoming if load high
‘queue_only_load_latch’              don't re-evaluate load for each
                                     message
‘queue_run_max’                      maximum simultaneous queue runners
‘remote_max_parallel’                parallel SMTP delivery per message
‘smtp_accept_max’                    simultaneous incoming connections
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’            non-mail commands
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts’      hosts to which the limit applies
‘smtp_accept_max_per_connection’     messages per connection
‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’           connections from one host
‘smtp_accept_queue’                  queue mail if more connections
‘smtp_accept_queue_per_connection’   queue if more messages per
                                     connection
‘smtp_accept_reserve’                only reserve hosts if more
                                     connections
‘smtp_check_spool_space’             from SIZE on MAIL command
‘smtp_connect_backlog’               passed to TCP/IP stack
‘smtp_load_reserve’                  SMTP from reserved hosts if load
                                     high
‘smtp_reserve_hosts’                 these are the reserve hosts


File: spec.info,  Node: Policy controls,  Next: Callout cache,  Prev: Resource control,  Up: Main configuration

14.11 Policy controls
=====================

‘acl_not_smtp’                       ACL for non-SMTP messages
‘acl_not_smtp_mime’                  ACL for non-SMTP MIME parts
‘acl_not_smtp_start’                 ACL for start of non-SMTP message
‘acl_smtp_atrn’                      ACL for ATRN
‘acl_smtp_auth’                      ACL for AUTH
‘acl_smtp_connect’                   ACL for connection
‘acl_smtp_data’                      ACL for DATA
‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’                 ACL for DATA, per-recipient
‘acl_smtp_dkim’                      ACL for DKIM verification
‘acl_smtp_etrn’                      ACL for ETRN
‘acl_smtp_expn’                      ACL for EXPN
‘acl_smtp_helo’                      ACL for EHLO or HELO
‘acl_smtp_mail’                      ACL for MAIL
‘acl_smtp_mailauth’                  ACL for AUTH on MAIL command
‘acl_smtp_mime’                      ACL for MIME parts
‘acl_smtp_notquit’                   ACL for non-QUIT terminations
‘acl_smtp_predata’                   ACL for start of data
‘acl_smtp_quit’                      ACL for QUIT
‘acl_smtp_rcpt’                      ACL for RCPT
‘acl_smtp_starttls’                  ACL for STARTTLS
‘acl_smtp_vrfy’                      ACL for VRFY
‘acl_smtp_wellknown’                 ACL for WELLKNOWN
‘av_scanner’                         specify virus scanner
‘check_rfc2047_length’               check length of RFC 2047 "encoded
                                     words"
‘dns_cname_loops’                    follow CNAMEs returned by resolver
‘dns_csa_search_limit’               control CSA parent search depth
‘dns_csa_use_reverse’                en/disable CSA IP reverse search
‘header_maxsize’                     total size of message header
‘header_line_maxsize’                individual header line limit
‘helo_accept_junk_hosts’             allow syntactic junk from these
                                     hosts
‘helo_allow_chars’                   allow illegal chars in HELO names
‘helo_lookup_domains’                lookup hostname for these HELO
                                     names
‘helo_try_verify_hosts’              HELO soft-checked for these hosts
‘helo_verify_hosts’                  HELO hard-checked for these hosts
‘host_lookup’                        host name looked up for these
                                     hosts
‘host_lookup_order’                  order of DNS and local name
                                     lookups
‘hosts_proxy’                        use proxy protocol for these hosts
‘host_reject_connection’             reject connection from these hosts
‘hosts_treat_as_local’               useful in some cluster
                                     configurations
‘local_scan_timeout’                 timeout for ‘local_scan()’
‘message_size_limit’                 for all messages
‘percent_hack_domains’               recognize %-hack for these domains
‘proxy_protocol_timeout’             timeout for proxy protocol
                                     negotiation
‘spamd_address’                      set interface to SpamAssassin
‘strict_acl_vars’                    object to unset ACL variables
‘spf_smtp_comment_template’          template for ‘$spf_smtp_comment’


File: spec.info,  Node: Callout cache,  Next: TLS,  Prev: Policy controls,  Up: Main configuration

14.12 Callout cache
===================

‘callout_domain_negative_expire’     timeout for negative domain cache
                                     item
‘callout_domain_positive_expire’     timeout for positive domain cache
                                     item
‘callout_negative_expire’            timeout for negative address cache
                                     item
‘callout_positive_expire’            timeout for positive address cache
                                     item
‘callout_random_local_part’          string to use for "random" testing


File: spec.info,  Node: TLS,  Next: Local user handling,  Prev: Callout cache,  Up: Main configuration

14.13 TLS
=========

‘gnutls_compat_mode’                 use GnuTLS compatibility mode
‘gnutls_allow_auto_pkcs11’           allow GnuTLS to autoload PKCS11
                                     modules
‘hosts_require_alpn’                 mandatory ALPN
‘hosts_require_helo’                 mandatory HELO/EHLO
‘openssl_options’                    adjust OpenSSL compatibility
                                     options
‘tls_advertise_hosts’                advertise TLS to these hosts
‘tls_alpn’                           acceptable protocol names
‘tls_certificate’                    location of server certificate
‘tls_crl’                            certificate revocation list
‘tls_dh_max_bits’                    clamp D-H bit count suggestion
‘tls_dhparam’                        DH parameters for server
‘tls_early_banner_hosts’             banner as early as possible
‘tls_eccurve’                        EC curve selection for server
‘tls_ocsp_file’                      location of server certificate
                                     status proof
‘tls_on_connect_ports’               specify SSMTP (SMTPS) ports
‘tls_privatekey’                     location of server private key
‘tls_remember_esmtp’                 don't reset after starting TLS
‘tls_require_ciphers’                specify acceptable ciphers
‘tls_try_verify_hosts’               try to verify client certificate
‘tls_verify_certificates’            expected client certificates
‘tls_verify_hosts’                   insist on client certificate
                                     verify


File: spec.info,  Node: Local user handling,  Next: All incoming messages [SMTP and non-SMTP],  Prev: TLS,  Up: Main configuration

14.14 Local user handling
=========================

‘finduser_retries’                   useful in NIS environments
‘gecos_name’                         used when creating _Sender:_
‘gecos_pattern’                      ditto
‘max_username_length’                for systems that truncate
‘unknown_login’                      used when no login name found
‘unknown_username’                   ditto
‘uucp_from_pattern’                  for recognizing "From " lines
‘uucp_from_sender’                   ditto


File: spec.info,  Node: All incoming messages [SMTP and non-SMTP],  Next: Non-SMTP incoming messages,  Prev: Local user handling,  Up: Main configuration

14.15 All incoming messages (SMTP and non-SMTP)
===============================================

‘header_maxsize’                     total size of message header
‘header_line_maxsize’                individual header line limit
‘message_size_limit’                 applies to all messages
‘percent_hack_domains’               recognize %-hack for these domains
‘received_header_text’               expanded to make _Received:_
‘received_headers_max’               for mail loop detection
‘recipients_max’                     limit per message
‘recipients_max_reject’              permanently reject excess
                                     recipients


File: spec.info,  Node: Non-SMTP incoming messages,  Next: Incoming SMTP messages,  Prev: All incoming messages [SMTP and non-SMTP],  Up: Main configuration

14.16 Non-SMTP incoming messages
================================

‘receive_timeout’                    for non-SMTP messages


File: spec.info,  Node: Incoming SMTP messages,  Next: SMTP extensions,  Prev: Non-SMTP incoming messages,  Up: Main configuration

14.17 Incoming SMTP messages
============================

See also the _Policy controls_ section above.

‘dkim_verify_hashes’                 DKIM hash methods accepted for
                                     signatures
‘dkim_verify_keytypes’               DKIM key types accepted for
                                     signatures
‘dkim_verify_min_keysizes’           DKIM key sizes accepted for
                                     signatures
‘dkim_verify_signers’                DKIM domains for which DKIM ACL is
                                     run
‘dmarc_forensic_sender’              DMARC sender for report messages
‘dmarc_history_file’                 DMARC results log
‘dmarc_tld_file’                     DMARC toplevel domains file
‘host_lookup’                        host name looked up for these
                                     hosts
‘host_lookup_order’                  order of DNS and local name
                                     lookups
‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’        may send unqualified recipients
‘rfc1413_hosts’                      make ident calls to these hosts
‘rfc1413_query_timeout’              zero disables ident calls
‘sender_unqualified_hosts’           may send unqualified senders
‘smtp_accept_keepalive’              some TCP/IP magic
‘smtp_accept_max’                    simultaneous incoming connections
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’            non-mail commands
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts’      hosts to which the limit applies
‘smtp_accept_max_per_connection’     messages per connection
‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’           connections from one host
‘smtp_accept_queue’                  queue mail if more connections
‘smtp_accept_queue_per_connection’   queue if more messages per
                                     connection
‘smtp_accept_reserve’                only reserve hosts if more
                                     connections
‘smtp_active_hostname’               host name to use in messages
‘smtp_banner’                        text for welcome banner
‘smtp_check_spool_space’             from SIZE on MAIL command
‘smtp_connect_backlog’               passed to TCP/IP stack
‘smtp_enforce_sync’                  of SMTP command/responses
‘smtp_etrn_command’                  what to run for ETRN
‘smtp_etrn_serialize’                only one at once
‘smtp_load_reserve’                  only reserve hosts if this load
‘smtp_max_synprot_errors’            before dropping connection
‘smtp_max_unknown_commands’          before dropping connection
‘smtp_ratelimit_hosts’               apply ratelimiting to these hosts
‘smtp_ratelimit_mail’                ratelimit for MAIL commands
‘smtp_ratelimit_rcpt’                ratelimit for RCPT commands
‘smtp_receive_timeout’               per command or data line
‘smtp_reserve_hosts’                 these are the reserve hosts
‘smtp_return_error_details’          give detail on rejections


File: spec.info,  Node: SMTP extensions,  Next: Processing messages,  Prev: Incoming SMTP messages,  Up: Main configuration

14.18 SMTP extensions
=====================

‘accept_8bitmime’                    advertise 8BITMIME
‘auth_advertise_hosts’               advertise AUTH to these hosts
‘chunking_advertise_hosts’           advertise CHUNKING to these hosts
‘dsn_advertise_hosts’                advertise DSN extensions to these
                                     hosts
‘ignore_fromline_hosts’              allow "From " from these hosts
‘ignore_fromline_local’              allow "From " from local SMTP
‘limits_advertise_hosts’             advertise LIMITS to these hosts
‘pipelining_advertise_hosts’         advertise pipelining to these
                                     hosts
‘pipelining_connect_advertise_hosts’ advertise pipelining to these
                                     hosts
‘prdr_enable’                        advertise PRDR to all hosts
‘smtputf8_advertise_hosts’           advertise SMTPUTF8 to these hosts
‘tls_advertise_hosts’                advertise TLS to these hosts
‘wellknown_advertise_hosts’          advertise WELLKNOWN to these hosts


File: spec.info,  Node: Processing messages,  Next: System filter,  Prev: SMTP extensions,  Up: Main configuration

14.19 Processing messages
=========================

‘allow_domain_literals’              recognize domain literal syntax
‘allow_mx_to_ip’                     allow MX to point to IP address
‘allow_utf8_domains’                 in addresses
‘check_rfc2047_length’               check length of RFC 2047 "encoded
                                     words"
‘delivery_date_remove’               from incoming messages
‘envelope_to_remove’                 from incoming messages
‘extract_addresses_remove_arguments’ affects ‘-t’ processing
‘headers_charset’                    default for translations
‘qualify_domain’                     default for senders
‘qualify_recipient’                  default for recipients
‘return_path_remove’                 from incoming messages
‘strip_excess_angle_brackets’        in addresses
‘strip_trailing_dot’                 at end of addresses
‘untrusted_set_sender’               untrusted can set envelope sender


File: spec.info,  Node: System filter,  Next: Routing and delivery,  Prev: Processing messages,  Up: Main configuration

14.20 System filter
===================

‘system_filter’                      locate system filter
‘system_filter_directory_transport’  transport for delivery to a
                                     directory
‘system_filter_file_transport’       transport for delivery to a file
‘system_filter_group’                group for filter running
‘system_filter_pipe_transport’       transport for delivery to a pipe
‘system_filter_reply_transport’      transport for autoreply delivery
‘system_filter_user’                 user for filter running


File: spec.info,  Node: Routing and delivery,  Next: Bounce and warning messages,  Prev: System filter,  Up: Main configuration

14.21 Routing and delivery
==========================

‘disable_ipv6’                       do no IPv6 processing
‘dns_again_means_nonexist’           for broken domains
‘dns_check_names_pattern’            pre-DNS syntax check
‘dns_dnssec_ok’                      parameter for resolver
‘dns_ipv4_lookup’                    only v4 lookup for these domains
‘dns_retrans’                        parameter for resolver
‘dns_retry’                          parameter for resolver
‘dns_trust_aa’                       DNS zones trusted as authentic
‘dns_use_edns0’                      parameter for resolver
‘hold_domains’                       hold delivery for these domains
‘local_interfaces’                   for routing checks
‘queue_domains’                      no immediate delivery for these
‘queue_fast_ramp’                    parallel delivery with 2-phase
                                     queue run
‘queue_only’                         no immediate delivery at all
‘queue_only_file’                    no immediate delivery if file
                                     exists
‘queue_only_load’                    no immediate delivery if load is
                                     high
‘queue_only_load_latch’              don't re-evaluate load for each
                                     message
‘queue_only_override’                allow command line to override
‘queue_run_in_order’                 order of arrival
‘queue_run_max’                      of simultaneous queue runners
‘queue_run_order’                    time, reverse-time, or random
‘queue_smtp_domains’                 no immediate SMTP delivery for
                                     these
‘remote_max_parallel’                parallel SMTP delivery per message
‘remote_sort_domains’                order of remote deliveries
‘retry_data_expire’                  timeout for retry data
‘retry_interval_max’                 safety net for retry rules


File: spec.info,  Node: Bounce and warning messages,  Next: Alphabetical list of main options,  Prev: Routing and delivery,  Up: Main configuration

14.22 Bounce and warning messages
=================================

‘bounce_charset’                     Content-type: headers
‘bounce_message_file’                content of bounce
‘bounce_message_text’                content of bounce
‘bounce_return_body’                 include body if returning message
‘bounce_return_linesize_limit’       limit on returned message line
                                     length
‘bounce_return_message’              include original message in bounce
‘bounce_return_size_limit’           limit on returned message
‘bounce_sender_authentication’       send authenticated sender with
                                     bounce
‘dsn_from’                           set _From:_ contents in bounces
‘errors_copy’                        copy bounce messages
‘errors_reply_to’                    _Reply-to:_ in bounces
‘delay_warning’                      time schedule
‘delay_warning_condition’            condition for warning messages
‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’         discard undeliverable bounces
‘smtp_return_error_details’          give detail on rejections
‘warn_message_file’                  content of warning message


File: spec.info,  Node: Alphabetical list of main options,  Prev: Bounce and warning messages,  Up: Main configuration

14.23 Alphabetical list of main options
=======================================

Those options that undergo string expansion before use are marked with
*.

‘accept_8bitmime’      Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   This option causes Exim to send 8BITMIME in its response to an SMTP
EHLO command, and to accept the BODY= parameter on MAIL commands.
However, though Exim is 8-bit clean, it is not a protocol converter, and
it takes no steps to do anything special with messages received by this
route.

   Historically Exim kept this option off by default, but the
maintainers feel that in today's Internet, this causes more problems
than it solves.  It now defaults to true.  A more detailed analysis of
the issues is provided by Dan Bernstein:

     https://cr.yp.to/smtp/8bitmime.html

   To log received 8BITMIME status use

     log_selector = +8bitmime

‘acl_not_smtp’         Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when a non-SMTP message has
been read and is on the point of being accepted.  See section *note The
non-SMTP ACLs:: for further details.

‘acl_not_smtp_mime’    Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run for individual MIME parts of
non-SMTP messages.  It operates in exactly the same way as
‘acl_smtp_mime’ operates for SMTP messages.

‘acl_not_smtp_start’   Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run before Exim starts reading a
non-SMTP message.  See section *note The non-SMTP ACLs:: for further
details.

‘acl_smtp_atrn’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP ATRN command is
received.  If no value is set, or the result after expansion is an empty
string, then the ATRN facility is not advertised.  See chapter *note
Access control lists:: for general information on ACLs, and section
*note ODMR provider connection:: for description of ATRN.

‘acl_smtp_auth’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP AUTH command is
received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for general
information on ACLs, and chapter *note SMTP authentication:: for details
of authentication.

‘acl_smtp_connect’     Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP connection is
received.  See section *note The SMTP connect ACL:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_data’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run after an SMTP DATA command
has been processed and the message itself has been received, but before
the final acknowledgment is sent.  See section *note The DATA ACLs:: for
further details.

‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’   Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _accept_

   This option defines the ACL that, if the PRDR feature has been
negotiated, is run for each recipient after an SMTP DATA command has
been processed and the message itself has been received, but before the
acknowledgment is sent.  See section *note The SMTP PRDR ACL:: for
further details.

‘acl_smtp_dkim’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run for each DKIM signature (by
default, or as specified in the dkim_verify_signers option) of a
received message.  See section *note Verifying DKIM signatures in
incoming mail:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_etrn’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP ETRN command is
received.  If no value is set then the ETRN facility is not advertised.
See chapter *note Access control lists:: for general information on
ACLs, and section *note The ETRN command:: for description of ETRN.

‘acl_smtp_expn’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP EXPN command is
received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_helo’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP EHLO or HELO
command is received.  See section *note The EHLO/HELO ACL:: for further
details.

‘acl_smtp_mail’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP MAIL command is
received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_mailauth’    Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when there is an AUTH
parameter on a MAIL command.  See chapter *note Access control lists::
for general information on ACLs, and chapter *note SMTP authentication::
for details of authentication.

‘acl_smtp_mime’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is available when Exim is built with the content-scanning
extension.  It defines the ACL that is run for each MIME part in a
message.  See section *note Scanning MIME parts:: for details.

‘acl_smtp_notquit’     Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP session ends
without a QUIT command being received.  See section *note The not-QUIT
ACL:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_predata’     Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP DATA command is
received, before the message itself is received.  See chapter *note
Access control lists:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_quit’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP QUIT command is
received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_rcpt’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP RCPT command is
received.  See section *note The QUIT ACL:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_starttls’    Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP STARTTLS command
is received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for further
details.

‘acl_smtp_vrfy’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP VRFY command is
received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for further details.

‘acl_smtp_wellknown’   Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the ACL that is run when an SMTP WELLKNOWN
command is received.  See section *note The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL:: for
further details.

‘add_environment’      Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _empty_

   This option adds individual environment variables that the currently
linked libraries and programs in child processes may use.  Each list
element should be of the form "name=value".

   See *note Environment variables:: for the environment of ‘pipe’
transports.

‘admin_groups’         Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing.
If the current group or any of the supplementary groups of an Exim
caller is in this colon-separated list, the caller has admin privileges.
If all your system programmers are in a specific group, for example, you
can give them all Exim admin privileges by putting that group in
‘admin_groups’.  However, this does not permit them to read Exim's spool
files (whose group owner is the Exim gid).  To permit this, you have to
add individuals to the Exim group.

‘allow_domain_literals’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, the *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.4.1)* domain
literal format is permitted in email addresses.  The option is not set
by default, because the domain literal format is not normally required
these days, and few people know about it.  It has, however, been
exploited by mail abusers.

   Unfortunately, it seems that some DNS black list maintainers are
using this format to report black listing to postmasters.  If you want
to accept messages addressed to your hosts by IP address, you need to
set ‘allow_domain_literals’ true, and also to add ‘@[]’ to the list of
local domains (defined in the named domain list ‘local_domains’ in the
default configuration).  This "magic string" matches the domain literal
form of all the local host's IP addresses.

‘allow_mx_to_ip’       Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   It appears that more and more DNS zone administrators are breaking
the rules and putting domain names that look like IP addresses on the
right hand side of MX records.  Exim follows the rules and rejects this,
giving an error message that explains the misconfiguration.  However,
some other MTAs support this practice, so to avoid "Why can't Exim do
this?"  complaints, ‘allow_mx_to_ip’ exists, in order to enable this
heinous activity.  It is not recommended, except when you have no other
choice.

‘allow_utf8_domains’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Lots of discussion is going on about internationalized domain names.
One camp is strongly in favour of just using UTF-8 characters, and it
seems that at least two other MTAs permit this.  This option allows Exim
users to experiment if they wish.

   If it is set true, Exim's domain parsing function allows valid UTF-8
multicharacters to appear in domain name components, in addition to
letters, digits, and hyphens.

   If Exim is built with internationalization support and the SMTPUTF8
ESMTP option is in use (see chapter *note Internationalisation:
Internationalisation".) this option can be left as default.  Without
that, if you want to look up such domain names in the DNS, you must also
adjust the value of ‘dns_check_names_pattern’ to match the extended
form.  A suitable setting is:

     dns_check_names_pattern = (?i)^(?>(?(1)\.|())[a-z0-9\xc0-\xff]\
       (?>[-a-z0-9\x80-\xff]*[a-z0-9\x80-\xbf])?)+$

   Alternatively, you can just disable this feature by setting

     dns_check_names_pattern =

   That is, set the option to an empty string so that no check is done.

‘auth_advertise_hosts’ Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   If any server authentication mechanisms are configured, Exim
advertises them in response to an EHLO command only if the calling host
matches this list.  Otherwise, Exim does not advertise AUTH. Exim does
not accept AUTH commands from clients to which it has not advertised the
availability of AUTH. The advertising of individual authentication
mechanisms can be controlled by the use of the
‘server_advertise_condition’ generic authenticator option on the
individual authenticators.  See chapter *note SMTP authentication:: for
further details.

   Certain mail clients (for example, Netscape) require the user to
provide a name and password for authentication if AUTH is advertised,
even though it may not be needed (the host may accept messages from
hosts on its local LAN without authentication, for example).  The
‘auth_advertise_hosts’ option can be used to make these clients more
friendly by excluding them from the set of hosts to which Exim
advertises AUTH.

   If you want to advertise the availability of AUTH only when the
connection is encrypted using TLS, you can make use of the fact that the
value of this option is expanded, with a setting like this:

     auth_advertise_hosts = ${if eq{$tls_in_cipher}{}{}{*}}

   If ‘$tls_in_cipher’ is empty, the session is not encrypted, and the
result of the expansion is empty, thus matching no hosts.  Otherwise,
the result of the expansion is *, which matches all hosts.

‘auto_thaw’            Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _0s_

   If this option is set to a time greater than zero, a queue runner
will try a new delivery attempt on any frozen message, other than a
bounce message, if this much time has passed since it was frozen.  This
may result in the message being re-frozen if nothing has changed since
the last attempt.  It is a way of saying "keep on trying, even though
there are big problems".

   *Note*: This is an old option, which predates ‘timeout_frozen_after’
and ‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’.  It is retained for compatibility, but
it is not thought to be very useful any more, and its use should
probably be avoided.

‘av_scanner’           Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option is available if Exim is built with the content-scanning
extension.  It specifies which anti-virus scanner to use.  The default
value is:

     sophie:/var/run/sophie

   If the value of ‘av_scanner’ starts with a dollar character, it is
expanded before use.  See section *note Scanning for viruses:: for
further details.

‘bi_command’           Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option supplies the name of a command that is run when Exim is
called with the ‘-bi’ option (see chapter *note The Exim command
line::).  The string value is just the command name, it is not a
complete command line.  If an argument is required, it must come from
the ‘-oA’ command line option.

‘bounce_charset’       Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _us-ascii_

   This aoption is expanded and used for the "charset=" item in
"Content-type:" headers in bounce and warning messages.

   The only permitted values after expansion are "us-ascii" or "UTF-8".

   *Note*: No validation of the message content is done, however this
option is set.

‘bounce_message_file’  Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines a template file containing paragraphs of text to
be used for constructing bounce messages.  Details of the file's
contents are given in chapter *note Customizing bounce and warning
messages: Customizing messages.  The option is expanded to give the file
path, which must be absolute and untainted.  See also
‘warn_message_file’.

‘bounce_message_text’  Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   When this option is set, its contents are included in the default
bounce message immediately after "This message was created automatically
by mail delivery software."  It is not used if ‘bounce_message_file’ is
set.

‘bounce_return_body’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   This option controls whether the body of an incoming message is
included in a bounce message when ‘bounce_return_message’ is true.  The
default setting causes the entire message, both header and body, to be
returned (subject to the value of ‘bounce_return_size_limit’).  If this
option is false, only the message header is included.  In the case of a
non-SMTP message containing an error that is detected during reception,
only those header lines preceding the point at which the error was
detected are returned.

‘bounce_return_linesize_limit’Use: _main_Type: _integer_   Default: _998_

   This option sets a limit in bytes on the line length of messages that
are returned to senders due to delivery problems, when
‘bounce_return_message’ is true.  The default value corresponds to RFC
limits.  If the message being returned has lines longer than this value
it is treated as if the ‘bounce_return_size_limit’ (below) restriction
was exceeded.

   The option also applies to bounces returned when an error is detected
during reception of a message.  In this case lines from the original are
truncated.

   The option does not apply to messages generated by an ‘autoreply’
transport.

‘bounce_return_message’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If this option is set false, none of the original message is included
in bounce messages generated by Exim.  See also
‘bounce_return_size_limit’ and ‘bounce_return_body’.

‘bounce_return_size_limit’Use: _main_    Type: _integer_   Default: _100K_

   This option sets a limit in bytes on the size of messages that are
returned to senders as part of bounce messages when
‘bounce_return_message’ is true.  The limit should be less than the
value of the global ‘message_size_limit’ and of any ‘message_size_limit’
settings on transports, to allow for the bounce text that Exim
generates.  If this option is set to zero there is no limit.

   When the body of any message that is to be included in a bounce
message is greater than the limit, it is truncated, and a comment
pointing this out is added at the top.  The actual cutoff may be greater
than the value given, owing to the use of buffering for transferring the
message in chunks (typically 8K in size).  The idea is to save bandwidth
on those undeliverable 15-megabyte messages.

‘bounce_sender_authentication’Use: _main_Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option provides an authenticated sender address that is sent
with any bounce messages generated by Exim that are sent over an
authenticated SMTP connection.  A typical setting might be:

     bounce_sender_authentication = mailer-daemon@my.domain.example

   which would cause bounce messages to be sent using the SMTP command:

     MAIL FROM:<> AUTH=mailer-daemon@my.domain.example

   The value of ‘bounce_sender_authentication’ must always be a complete
email address.

‘callout_domain_negative_expire’Use: _main_Type: _time_    Default: _3h_

   This option specifies the expiry time for negative callout cache data
for a domain.  See section *note Callout verification:: for details of
callout verification, and section *note Callout caching:: for details of
the caching.

‘callout_domain_positive_expire’Use: _main_Type: _time_    Default: _7d_

   This option specifies the expiry time for positive callout cache data
for a domain.  See section *note Callout verification:: for details of
callout verification, and section *note Callout caching:: for details of
the caching.

‘callout_negative_expire’Use: _main_     Type: _time_      Default: _2h_

   This option specifies the expiry time for negative callout cache data
for an address.  See section *note Callout verification:: for details of
callout verification, and section *note Callout caching:: for details of
the caching.

‘callout_positive_expire’Use: _main_     Type: _time_      Default: _24h_

   This option specifies the expiry time for positive callout cache data
for an address.  See section *note Callout verification:: for details of
callout verification, and section *note Callout caching:: for details of
the caching.

‘callout_random_local_part’Use: _main_   Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This option defines the "random" local part that can be used as part
of callout verification.  The default value is

     $primary_hostname-$tod_epoch-testing

   See section *note Additional parameters for callouts:: for details of
how this value is used.

‘check_log_inodes’     Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _100_
‘check_log_space’      Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _10M_

   See ‘check_spool_space’ below.

‘check_rfc2047_length’ Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   *RFC 2047 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)* defines a
way of encoding non-ASCII characters in headers using a system of
"encoded words".  The RFC specifies a maximum length for an encoded
word; strings to be encoded that exceed this length are supposed to use
multiple encoded words.  By default, Exim does not recognize encoded
words that exceed the maximum length.  However, it seems that some
software, in violation of the RFC, generates overlong encoded words.  If
‘check_rfc2047_length’ is set false, Exim recognizes encoded words of
any length.

‘check_spool_inodes’   Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _100_
‘check_spool_space’    Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _10M_

   The four ‘check_...’ options allow for checking of disk resources
before a message is accepted.

   When any of these options are nonzero, they apply to all incoming
messages.  If you want to apply different checks to different kinds of
message, you can do so by testing the variables ‘$log_inodes’,
‘$log_space’, ‘$spool_inodes’, and ‘$spool_space’ in an ACL with
appropriate additional conditions.

   ‘check_spool_space’ and ‘check_spool_inodes’ check the spool
partition if either value is greater than zero, for example:

     check_spool_space = 100M
     check_spool_inodes = 100

   The spool partition is the one that contains the directory defined by
SPOOL_DIRECTORY in ‘Local/Makefile’.  It is used for holding messages in
transit.

   ‘check_log_space’ and ‘check_log_inodes’ check the partition in which
log files are written if either is greater than zero.  These should be
set only if ‘log_file_path’ and ‘spool_directory’ refer to different
partitions.

   If there is less space or fewer inodes than requested, Exim refuses
to accept incoming mail.  In the case of SMTP input this is done by
giving a 452 temporary error response to the MAIL command.  If ESMTP is
in use and there was a SIZE parameter on the MAIL command, its value is
added to the ‘check_spool_space’ value, and the check is performed even
if ‘check_spool_space’ is zero, unless ‘no_smtp_check_spool_space’ is
set.

   The values for ‘check_spool_space’ and ‘check_log_space’ are held as
a number of kilobytes (though specified in bytes).  If a non-multiple of
1024 is specified, it is rounded up.

   For non-SMTP input and for batched SMTP input, the test is done at
start-up; on failure a message is written to stderr and Exim exits with
a non-zero code, as it obviously cannot send an error message of any
kind.

   There is a slight performance penalty for these checks.  Versions of
Exim preceding 4.88 had these disabled by default; high-rate
installations confident they will never run out of resources may wish to
deliberately disable them.

‘chunking_advertise_hosts’Use: _main_    Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   The CHUNKING extension (*RFC 3030
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3030)*) will be advertised in
the EHLO message to these hosts.  Hosts may use the BDAT command as an
alternate to DATA.

‘commandline_checks_require_admin’Use: _main_Type: _boolean_Default:
                                                           _‘false’_

   This option restricts various basic checking features to require an
administrative user.  This affects most of the ‘-b*’ options, such as
‘-be’.

‘debug_store’          Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _‘false’_

   This option, when true, enables extra checking in Exim's internal
memory management.  For use when a memory corruption issue is being
investigated, it should normally be left as default.

‘daemon_modules_load’  Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option may be used to give a list of dynamic-load modules which
should be loaded at daemon startup.

   This should give better performance on any module used in the daemon
process or any directly forked process, by amortizing the
symbol-resolution cost of the module load over all the child processes.
It will have no effect for those where the initial parsing of the
configuration can simply detect the need for a module (eg.  auths,
routers, transports, certain DB lookups, SPF, DKIM, DMARC) because those
are always loaded.

‘daemon_smtp_ports’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _‘smtp’_

   This option specifies one or more default SMTP ports on which the
Exim daemon listens.  See chapter *note Starting the daemon and the use
of network interfaces: Starting the daemon. for details of how it is
used.  For backward compatibility, ‘daemon_smtp_port’ (singular) is a
synonym.

‘daemon_startup_retries’Use: _main_      Type: _integer_   Default: _9_
‘daemon_startup_sleep’ Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _30s_

   These options control the retrying done by the daemon at startup when
it cannot immediately bind a listening socket (typically because the
socket is already in use): ‘daemon_startup_retries’ defines the number
of retries after the first failure, and ‘daemon_startup_sleep’ defines
the length of time to wait between retries.

‘delay_warning’        Use: _main_       Type: _time       Default: _24h_
                                         list_

   When a message is delayed, Exim sends a warning message to the sender
at intervals specified by this option.  The data is a colon-separated
list of times after which to send warning messages.  If the value of the
option is an empty string or a zero time, no warnings are sent.  Up to
10 times may be given.  If a message has been in the queue for longer
than the last time, the last interval between the times is used to
compute subsequent warning times.  For example, with

     delay_warning = 4h:8h:24h

   the first message is sent after 4 hours, the second after 8 hours,
and the third one after 24 hours.  After that, messages are sent every
16 hours, because that is the interval between the last two times on the
list.  If you set just one time, it specifies the repeat interval.  For
example, with:

     delay_warning = 6h

   messages are repeated every six hours.  To stop warnings after a
given time, set a very large time at the end of the list.  For example:

     delay_warning = 2h:12h:99d

   Note that the option is only evaluated at the time a delivery attempt
fails, which depends on retry and queue-runner configuration.  Typically
retries will be configured more frequently than warning messages.

‘delay_warning_condition’Use: _main_     Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   The string is expanded at the time a warning message might be sent.
If all the deferred addresses have the same domain, it is set in
‘$domain’ during the expansion.  Otherwise ‘$domain’ is empty.  If the
result of the expansion is a forced failure, an empty string, or a
string matching any of "0", "no" or "false" (the comparison being done
caselessly) then the warning message is not sent.  The default is:

     delay_warning_condition = ${if or {\
       { !eq{$h_list-id:$h_list-post:$h_list-subscribe:}{} }\
       { match{$h_precedence:}{(?i)bulk|list|junk} }\
       { match{$h_auto-submitted:}{(?i)auto-generated|auto-replied} }\
       } {no}{yes}}

   This suppresses the sending of warnings for messages that contain
_List-ID:_, _List-Post:_, or _List-Subscribe:_ headers, or have "bulk",
"list" or "junk" in a _Precedence:_ header, or have "auto-generated" or
"auto-replied" in an _Auto-Submitted:_ header.

‘deliver_drop_privilege’Use: _main_      Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, Exim drops its root privilege at the
start of a delivery process, and runs as the Exim user throughout.  This
severely restricts the kinds of local delivery that are possible, but is
viable in certain types of configuration.  There is a discussion about
the use of root privilege in chapter *note Security considerations::.

‘deliver_queue_load_max’Use: _main_      Type:             Default:
                                         _fixed-point_     _unset_

   When this option is set, a queue run is abandoned if the system load
average becomes greater than the value of the option.  The option has no
effect on ancient operating systems on which Exim cannot determine the
load average.  See also ‘queue_only_load’ and ‘smtp_load_reserve’.

‘delivery_date_remove’ Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   Exim's transports have an option for adding a _Delivery-date:_ header
to a message when it is delivered, in exactly the same way as
_Return-path:_ is handled.  _Delivery-date:_ records the actual time of
delivery.  Such headers should not be present in incoming messages, and
this option causes them to be removed at the time the message is
received, to avoid any problems that might occur when a delivered
message is subsequently sent on to some other recipient.

‘disable_fsync’        Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option is available only if Exim was built with the compile-time
option ENABLE_DISABLE_FSYNC. When this is not set, a reference to
‘disable_fsync’ in a runtime configuration generates an "unknown option"
error.  You should not build Exim with ENABLE_DISABLE_FSYNC or set
‘disable_fsync’ unless you really, really, really understand what you
are doing.  _No pre-compiled distributions of Exim should ever make this
option available._

   When ‘disable_fsync’ is set true, Exim no longer calls ‘fsync()’ to
force updated files' data to be written to disc before continuing.
Unexpected events such as crashes and power outages may cause data to be
lost or scrambled.  Here be Dragons.  *Beware.*

‘disable_ipv6’         Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, even if the Exim binary has IPv6 support,
no IPv6 activities take place.  AAAA records are never looked up, and
any IPv6 addresses that are listed in ‘local_interfaces’, data for the
‘manualroute’ router, etc.  are ignored.  If IP literals are enabled,
the ‘ipliteral’ router declines to handle IPv6 literal addresses.

‘dkim_verify_hashes’   Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _sha256 :
                                                           sha512_

   This option gives a list of hash types which are acceptable in
signatures, and an order of processing.  Signatures with algorithms not
in the list will be ignored.

   Acceptable values include:

     sha1
     sha256
     sha512

   Note that the acceptance of sha1 violates *RFC 8301
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)*.

‘dkim_verify_keytypes’ Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _ed25519 : rsa_

   This option gives a list of key types which are acceptable in
signatures, and an order of processing.  Signatures with algorithms not
in the list will be ignored.

‘dkim_verify_min_keysizes’Use: _main_    Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _rsa=1024
                                                           ed25519=250_

   This option gives a list of key sizes which are acceptable in
signatures.  The list is keyed by the algorithm type for the key; the
values are in bits.  Signatures with keys smaller than given by this
option will fail verification.

   The default enforces the *RFC 8301
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)* minimum key size for
RSA signatures.

‘dkim_verify_minimal’  Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If set to true, verification of signatures will terminate after the
first success.

‘dkim_verify_signers’  Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _$dkim_signers_

   This option gives a list of DKIM domains for which the DKIM ACL is
run.  It is expanded after the message is received; by default it runs
the ACL once for each signature in the message.  See section *note
Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail::.

‘dmarc_forensic_sender’Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_
‘dmarc_history_file’   Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_
‘dmarc_tld_file’       Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   These options control DMARC processing.  See section *note DMARC::
for details.

‘dns_again_means_nonexist’Use: _main_    Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   DNS lookups give a "try again" response for the DNS errors
"non-authoritative host not found" and "SERVERFAIL". This can cause Exim
to keep trying to deliver a message, or to give repeated temporary
errors to incoming mail.  Sometimes the effect is caused by a badly set
up name server and may persist for a long time.  If a domain which
exhibits this problem matches anything in ‘dns_again_means_nonexist’, it
is treated as if it did not exist.  This option should be used with
care.  You can make it apply to reverse lookups by a setting such as
this:

     dns_again_means_nonexist = *.in-addr.arpa

   This option applies to all DNS lookups that Exim does, except for
TLSA lookups (where knowing about such failures is security-relevant).
It also applies when the ‘gethostbyname()’ or ‘getipnodebyname()’
functions give temporary errors, since these are most likely to be
caused by DNS lookup problems.  The ‘dnslookup’ router has some options
of its own for controlling what happens when lookups for MX or SRV
records give temporary errors.  These more specific options are applied
after this global option.

‘dns_check_names_pattern’Use: _main_     Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   When this option is set to a non-empty string, it causes Exim to
check domain names for characters that are not allowed in host names
before handing them to the DNS resolver, because some resolvers give
temporary errors for names that contain unusual characters.  If a domain
name contains any unwanted characters, a "not found" result is forced,
and the resolver is not called.  The check is done by matching the
domain name against a regular expression, which is the value of this
option.  The default pattern is

     dns_check_names_pattern = \
       (?i)^(?>(?(1)\.|())[^\W_](?>[a-z0-9/-]*[^\W_])?)+$

   which permits only letters, digits, slashes, and hyphens in
components, but they must start and end with a letter or digit.  Slashes
are not, in fact, permitted in host names, but they are found in certain
NS records (which can be accessed in Exim by using a ‘dnsdb’ lookup).
If you set ‘allow_utf8_domains’, you must modify this pattern, or set
the option to an empty string.

‘dns_csa_search_limit’ Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _5_

   This option controls the depth of parental searching for CSA SRV
records in the DNS, as described in more detail in section *note Client
SMTP authorization (CSA): Client SMTP authorization [CSA].

‘dns_csa_use_reverse’  Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   This option controls whether or not an IP address, given as a CSA
domain, is reversed and looked up in the reverse DNS, as described in
more detail in section *note Client SMTP authorization (CSA): Client
SMTP authorization [CSA].

‘dns_cname_loops’      Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _1_

   This option controls the following of CNAME chains, needed if the
resolver does not do it internally.  As of 2018 most should, and the
default can be left.  If you have an ancient one, a value of 10 is
likely needed.

   The default value of one CNAME-follow is needed thanks to the
observed return for an MX request, given no MX presence but a CNAME to
an A, of the CNAME.

‘dns_dnssec_ok’        Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _-1_

   If this option is set to a non-negative number then Exim will
initialise the DNS resolver library to either use or not use DNSSEC,
overriding the system default.  A value of 0 coerces DNSSEC off, a value
of 1 coerces DNSSEC on.

   If the resolver library does not support DNSSEC then this option has
no effect.

   On Linux with glibc 2.31 or newer this is insufficient, the resolver
library will default to stripping out a successful validation status.
This will break a previously working Exim installation.  Provided that
you do trust the resolver (ie, is on localhost) you can tell glibc to
pass through any successful validation with a new option in
‘/etc/resolv.conf’:

     options trust-ad

‘dns_ipv4_lookup’      Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   When Exim is compiled with IPv6 support and ‘disable_ipv6’ is not
set, it looks for IPv6 address records (AAAA records) as well as IPv4
address records (A records) when trying to find IP addresses for hosts,
unless the host's domain matches this list.

   This is a fudge to help with name servers that give big delays or
otherwise do not work for the AAAA record type.  In due course, when the
world's name servers have all been upgraded, there should be no need for
this option.  Note that all lookups, including those done for
verification, are affected; this will result in verify failure for IPv6
connections or ones using names only valid for IPv6 addresses.

‘dns_retrans’          Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _0s_
‘dns_retry’            Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   The options ‘dns_retrans’ and ‘dns_retry’ can be used to set the
retransmission and retry parameters for DNS lookups.  Values of zero
(the defaults) leave the system default settings unchanged.  The first
value is the time between retries, and the second is the number of
retries.  It isn't totally clear exactly how these settings affect the
total time a DNS lookup may take.  I haven't found any documentation
about timeouts on DNS lookups; these parameter values are available in
the external resolver interface structure, but nowhere does it seem to
describe how they are used or what you might want to set in them.  See
also the ‘slow_lookup_log’ option.

‘dns_trust_aa’         Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If this option is set then lookup results marked with the AA bit
(Authoritative Answer) are trusted the same way as if they were
DNSSEC-verified.  The authority section's name of the answer must match
with this expanded domain list.

   Use this option only if you talk directly to a resolver that is
authoritative for some zones and does not set the AD (Authentic Data)
bit in the answer.  Some DNS servers may have an configuration option to
mark the answers from their own zones as verified (they set the AD bit).
Others do not have this option.  It is considered as poor practice using
a resolver that is an authoritative server for some zones.

   Use this option only if you really have to (e.g.  if you want to use
DANE for remote delivery to a server that is listed in the DNS zones
that your resolver is authoritative for).

   If the DNS answer packet has the AA bit set and contains resource
record in the answer section, the name of the first NS record appearing
in the authority section is compared against the list.  If the answer
packet is authoritative but the answer section is empty, the name of the
first SOA record in the authoritative section is used instead.

‘dns_use_edns0’        Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _-1_

   If this option is set to a non-negative number then Exim will
initialise the DNS resolver library to either use or not use EDNS0
extensions, overriding the system default.  A value of 0 coerces EDNS0
off, a value of 1 coerces EDNS0 on.

   If the resolver library does not support EDNS0 then this option has
no effect.

   OpenBSD's asr resolver routines are known to ignore the EDNS0 option;
this means that DNSSEC will not work with Exim on that platform either,
unless Exim is linked against an alternative DNS client library.

‘dsn_advertise_hosts’  Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   DSN extensions (*RFC 3461
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3461)*) will be advertised in
the EHLO message to, and accepted from, these hosts.  Hosts may use the
NOTIFY and ORCPT options on RCPT TO commands, and RET and ENVID options
on MAIL FROM commands.  A NOTIFY=SUCCESS option requests success-DSN
messages.  A NOTIFY= option with no argument requests that no delay or
failure DSNs are sent.  *Note*: Supplying success-DSN messages has been
criticised on privacy grounds; it can leak details of internal
forwarding.

‘dsn_from’             Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This option can be used to vary the contents of _From:_ header lines
in bounces and other automatically generated messages ("Delivery Status
Notifications" - hence the name of the option).  The default setting is:

     dsn_from = Mail Delivery System <Mailer-Daemon@$qualify_domain>

   The value is expanded every time it is needed.  If the expansion
fails, a panic is logged, and the default value is used.

‘envelope_to_remove’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   Exim's transports have an option for adding an _Envelope-to:_ header
to a message when it is delivered, in exactly the same way as
_Return-path:_ is handled.  _Envelope-to:_ records the original
recipient address from the message's envelope that caused the delivery
to happen.  Such headers should not be present in incoming messages, and
this option causes them to be removed at the time the message is
received, to avoid any problems that might occur when a delivered
message is subsequently sent on to some other recipient.

‘errors_copy’          Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Setting this option causes Exim to send bcc copies of bounce messages
that it generates to other addresses.  *Note*: This does not apply to
bounce messages coming from elsewhere.  The value of the option is a
colon-separated list of items.  Each item consists of a pattern,
terminated by white space, followed by a comma-separated list of email
addresses.  If a pattern contains spaces, it must be enclosed in double
quotes.

   Each pattern is processed in the same way as a single item in an
address list (see section *note Address lists::).  When a pattern
matches the recipient of the bounce message, the message is copied to
the addresses on the list.  The items are scanned in order, and once a
matching one is found, no further items are examined.  For example:

     errors_copy = spqr@mydomain   postmaster@mydomain.example :\
                   rqps@mydomain   hostmaster@mydomain.example,\
                                   postmaster@mydomain.example

   The address list is expanded before use.  The expansion variables
‘$local_part’ and ‘$domain’ are set from the original recipient of the
error message, and if there was any wildcard matching in the pattern,
the expansion variables ‘$0’, ‘$1’, etc.  are set in the normal way.

‘errors_reply_to’      Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   By default, Exim's bounce and delivery warning messages contain the
header line

     From: Mail Delivery System <Mailer-Daemon@qualify-domain>

   where _qualify-domain_ is the value of the ‘qualify_domain’ option.
A warning message that is generated by the ‘quota_warn_message’ option
in an ‘appendfile’ transport may contain its own _From:_ header line
that overrides the default.

   Experience shows that people reply to bounce messages.  If the
‘errors_reply_to’ option is set, a _Reply-To:_ header is added to bounce
and warning messages.  For example:

     errors_reply_to = postmaster@my.domain.example

   The value of the option is not expanded.  It must specify a valid
*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address.
However, if a warning message that is generated by the
‘quota_warn_message’ option in an ‘appendfile’ transport contain its own
_Reply-To:_ header line, the value of the ‘errors_reply_to’ option is
not used.

‘event_action’         Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option declares a string to be expanded for Exim's events
mechanism.  For details see chapter *note Events::.

‘exim_group’           Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _compile-time
                                                           configured_

   This option changes the gid under which Exim runs when it gives up
root privilege.  The default value is compiled into the binary.  The
value of this option is used only when ‘exim_user’ is also set.  Unless
it consists entirely of digits, the string is looked up using
‘getgrnam()’, and failure causes a configuration error.  See chapter
*note Security considerations:: for a discussion of security issues.

‘exim_path’            Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option specifies the path name of the Exim binary, which is used
when Exim needs to re-exec itself.  The default is set up to point to
the file _exim_ in the directory configured at compile time by the
BIN_DIRECTORY setting.  It is necessary to change ‘exim_path’ if,
exceptionally, Exim is run from some other place.  *Warning*: Do not use
a macro to define the value of this option, because you will break those
Exim utilities that scan the configuration file to find where the binary
is.  (They then use the ‘-bP’ option to extract option settings such as
the value of ‘spool_directory’.)

‘exim_user’            Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _compile-time
                                                           configured_

   This option changes the uid under which Exim runs when it gives up
root privilege.  The default value is compiled into the binary.
Ownership of the run time configuration file and the use of the ‘-C’ and
‘-D’ command line options is checked against the values in the binary,
not what is set here.

   Unless it consists entirely of digits, the string is looked up using
‘getpwnam()’, and failure causes a configuration error.  If ‘exim_group’
is not also supplied, the gid is taken from the result of ‘getpwnam()’
if it is used.  See chapter *note Security considerations:: for a
discussion of security issues.

‘exim_version’         Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _current
                                                           version_

   This option overrides the ‘$version_number’/‘$exim_version’ that Exim
reports in various places.  Use with care; this may fool stupid security
scanners.

‘extra_local_interfaces’Use: _main_      Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option defines network interfaces that are to be considered
local when routing, but which are not used for listening by the daemon.
See section *note Recognizing the local host:: for details.

‘extract_addresses_remove_arguments’Use: _main_Type: _boolean_Default: _true_

   According to some Sendmail documentation (Sun, IRIX, HP-UX), if any
addresses are present on the command line when the ‘-t’ option is used
to build an envelope from a message's _To:_, _Cc:_ and _Bcc:_ headers,
the command line addresses are removed from the recipients list.  This
is also how Smail behaves.  However, other Sendmail documentation (the
O'Reilly book) states that command line addresses are added to those
obtained from the header lines.  When
‘extract_addresses_remove_arguments’ is true (the default), Exim
subtracts argument headers.  If it is set false, Exim adds rather than
removes argument addresses.

‘finduser_retries’     Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   On systems running NIS or other schemes in which user and group
information is distributed from a remote system, there can be times when
‘getpwnam()’ and related functions fail, even when given valid data,
because things time out.  Unfortunately these failures cannot be
distinguished from genuine "not found" errors.  If ‘finduser_retries’ is
set greater than zero, Exim will try that many extra times to find a
user or a group, waiting for one second between retries.

   You should not set this option greater than zero if your user
information is in a traditional ‘/etc/passwd’ file, because it will
cause Exim needlessly to search the file multiple times for non-existent
users, and also cause delay.

‘freeze_tell’          Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list, comma       _unset_
                                         separated_

   On encountering certain errors, or when configured to do so in a
system filter, ACL, or special router, Exim freezes a message.  This
means that no further delivery attempts take place until an
administrator thaws the message, or the ‘auto_thaw’,
‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’, or ‘timeout_frozen_after’ feature cause it
to be processed.  If ‘freeze_tell’ is set, Exim generates a warning
message whenever it freezes something, unless the message it is freezing
is a locally-generated bounce message.  (Without this exception there is
the possibility of looping.)  The warning message is sent to the
addresses supplied as the comma-separated value of this option.  If
several of the message's addresses cause freezing, only a single message
is sent.  If the freezing was automatic, the reason(s) for freezing can
be found in the message log.  If you configure freezing in a filter or
ACL, you must arrange for any logging that you require.

‘gecos_name’           Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_
‘gecos_pattern’        Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   Some operating systems, notably HP-UX, use the "gecos" field in the
system password file to hold other information in addition to users'
real names.  Exim looks up this field for use when it is creating
_Sender:_ or _From:_ headers.  If either ‘gecos_pattern’ or ‘gecos_name’
are unset, the contents of the field are used unchanged, except that, if
an ampersand is encountered, it is replaced by the user's login name
with the first character forced to upper case, since this is a
convention that is observed on many systems.

   When these options are set, ‘gecos_pattern’ is treated as a regular
expression that is to be applied to the field (again with & replaced by
the login name), and if it matches, ‘gecos_name’ is expanded and used as
the user's name.

   Numeric variables such as ‘$1’, ‘$2’, etc.  can be used in the
expansion to pick up sub-fields that were matched by the pattern.  In
HP-UX, where the user's name terminates at the first comma, the
following can be used:

     gecos_pattern = ([^,]*)
     gecos_name = $1

‘gnutls_compat_mode’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option controls whether GnuTLS is used in compatibility mode in
an Exim server.  This reduces security slightly, but improves
interworking with older implementations of TLS.

‘gnutls_allow_auto_pkcs11’Use: _main_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option will let GnuTLS (2.12.0 or later) autoload PKCS11 modules
with the p11-kit configuration files in ‘/etc/pkcs11/modules/’.

   See *https://www.gnutls.org/manual/gnutls.html#Smart-cards-and-HSMs
(https://www.gnutls.org/manual/gnutls.html#Smart-cards-and-HSMs)* for
documentation.

‘headers_charset’      Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option sets a default character set for translating from encoded
MIME "words" in header lines, when referenced by an ‘$h_xxx’ expansion
item.  The default is the value of HEADERS_CHARSET in ‘Local/Makefile’.
The ultimate default is ISO-8859-1.  For more details see the
description of header insertions in section *note Expansion items::.

‘header_maxsize’       Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option controls the overall maximum size of a message's header
section.  The default is the value of HEADER_MAXSIZE in
‘Local/Makefile’; the default for that is 1M. Messages with larger
header sections are rejected.

‘header_line_maxsize’  Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   This option limits the length of any individual header line in a
message, after all the continuations have been joined together.
Messages with individual header lines that are longer than the limit are
rejected.  The default value of zero means "no limit".

   *Note*: The SMTP standards have a 998 character limit.  See also the
‘messsage_linelength_limit’ smtp transport option.

‘helo_accept_junk_hosts’Use: _main_      Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim checks the syntax of HELO and EHLO commands for incoming SMTP
mail, and gives an error response for invalid data.  Unfortunately,
there are some SMTP clients that send syntactic junk.  They can be
accommodated by setting this option.  Note that this is a syntax check
only.  See ‘helo_verify_hosts’ if you want to do semantic checking.  See
also ‘helo_allow_chars’ for a way of extending the permitted character
set.

‘helo_allow_chars’     Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option can be set to a string of rogue characters that are
permitted in non-ip-literal EHLO and HELO names in addition to the
standard letters, digits, hyphens, and dots.  For example if you really
must allow underscores, you can set

     helo_allow_chars = _

   This option does not apply to names that look like ip-literals.  Note
that the value is one string, not a list.

‘helo_lookup_domains’  Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _‘@:@[]’_

   If the domain given by a client in a HELO or EHLO command matches
this list, a reverse lookup is done in order to establish the host's
true name.  The default forces a lookup if the client host gives the
server's name or any of its IP addresses (in brackets), something that
broken clients have been seen to do.

‘helo_try_verify_hosts’Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   By default, Exim just checks the syntax of HELO and EHLO commands
(see ‘helo_accept_junk_hosts’ and ‘helo_allow_chars’).  However, some
sites like to do more extensive checking of the data supplied by these
commands.  The ACL condition ‘verify = helo’ is provided to make this
possible.  Formerly, it was necessary also to set this option
(‘helo_try_verify_hosts’) to force the check to occur.  From release
4.53 onwards, this is no longer necessary.  If the check has not been
done before ‘verify = helo’ is encountered, it is done at that time.
Consequently, this option is obsolete.  Its specification is retained
here for backwards compatibility.

   When an EHLO or HELO command is received, if the calling host matches
‘helo_try_verify_hosts’, Exim checks that the host name given in the
HELO or EHLO command either:

   • is an IP literal matching the calling address of the host, or

   • matches the host name that Exim obtains by doing a reverse lookup
     of the calling host address, or

   • when looked up in DNS yields the calling host address.

   However, the EHLO or HELO command is not rejected if any of the
checks fail.  Processing continues, but the result of the check is
remembered, and can be detected later in an ACL by the ‘verify = helo’
condition.

   If DNS was used for successful verification, the variable
‘$helo_verify_dnssec’ records the DNSSEC status of the lookups.

‘helo_verify_hosts’    Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Like ‘helo_try_verify_hosts’, this option is obsolete, and retained
only for backwards compatibility.  For hosts that match this option,
Exim checks the host name given in the HELO or EHLO in the same way as
for ‘helo_try_verify_hosts’.  If the check fails, the HELO or EHLO
command is rejected with a 550 error, and entries are written to the
main and reject logs.  If a MAIL command is received before EHLO or
HELO, it is rejected with a 503 error.

‘hold_domains’         Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option allows mail for particular domains to be held in the
queue manually.  The option is overridden if a message delivery is
forced with the ‘-M’, ‘-qf’, ‘-Rf’ or ‘-Sf’ options, and also while
testing or verifying addresses using ‘-bt’ or ‘-bv’.  Otherwise, if a
domain matches an item in ‘hold_domains’, no routing or delivery for
that address is done, and it is deferred every time the message is
looked at.

   This option is intended as a temporary operational measure for
delaying the delivery of mail while some problem is being sorted out, or
some new configuration tested.  If you just want to delay the processing
of some domains until a queue run occurs, you should use ‘queue_domains’
or ‘queue_smtp_domains’, not ‘hold_domains’.

   A setting of ‘hold_domains’ does not override Exim's code for
removing messages from the queue if they have been there longer than the
longest retry time in any retry rule.  If you want to hold messages for
longer than the normal retry times, insert a dummy retry rule with a
long retry time.

‘host_lookup’          Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim does not look up the name of a calling host from its IP address
unless it is required to compare against some host list, or the host
matches ‘helo_try_verify_hosts’ or ‘helo_verify_hosts’, or the host
matches this option (which normally contains IP addresses rather than
host names).  The default configuration file contains

     host_lookup = *

   which causes a lookup to happen for all hosts.  If the expense of
these lookups is felt to be too great, the setting can be changed or
removed.

   After a successful reverse lookup, Exim does a forward lookup on the
name it has obtained, to verify that it yields the IP address that it
started with.  If this check fails, Exim behaves as if the name lookup
failed.

   After any kind of failure, the host name (in ‘$sender_host_name’)
remains unset, and ‘$host_lookup_failed’ is set to the string "1".  See
also ‘dns_again_means_nonexist’, ‘helo_lookup_domains’, and ‘verify =
reverse_host_lookup’ in ACLs.

‘host_lookup_order’    Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _‘bydns:byaddr’_

   This option specifies the order of different lookup methods when Exim
is trying to find a host name from an IP address.  The default is to do
a DNS lookup first, and then to try a local lookup (using
‘gethostbyaddr()’ or equivalent) if that fails.  You can change the
order of these lookups, or omit one entirely, if you want.

   *Warning*: The "byaddr" method does not always yield aliases when
there are multiple PTR records in the DNS and the IP address is not
listed in ‘/etc/hosts’.  Different operating systems give different
results in this case.  That is why the default tries a DNS lookup first.

‘host_reject_connection’Use: _main_      Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If this option is set, incoming SMTP calls from the hosts listed are
rejected as soon as the connection is made.  This option is obsolete,
and retained only for backward compatibility, because nowadays the ACL
specified by ‘acl_smtp_connect’ can also reject incoming connections
immediately.

   If the connection is on a TLS-on-connect port then the TCP connection
is just dropped.  Otherwise, an SMTP error is sent first.

   The ability to give an immediate rejection (either by this option or
using an ACL) is provided for use in unusual cases.  Many hosts will
just try again, sometimes without much delay.  Normally, it is better to
use an ACL to reject incoming messages at a later stage, such as after
RCPT commands.  See chapter *note Access control lists::.

‘hosts_connection_nolog’Use: _main_      Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option defines a list of hosts for which connection logging does
not happen, even though the ‘smtp_connection’ log selector is set.  For
example, you might want not to log SMTP connections from local
processes, or from 127.0.0.1, or from your local LAN. This option is
consulted in the main loop of the daemon; you should therefore strive to
restrict its value to a short inline list of IP addresses and networks.
To disable logging SMTP connections from local processes, you must
create a host list with an empty item.  For example:

     hosts_connection_nolog = :

   The hosts affected by this option also do not log "no MAIL in SMTP
connection" lines, as may commonly be produced by a monitoring system.

‘hosts_require_alpn’   Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If the TLS library supports ALPN then a successful negotiation of
ALPN will be required for any client matching the list, for TLS to be
used.  See also the ‘tls_alpn’ option.

   *Note*: prevention of fallback to in-clear connection is not managed
by this option, and should be done separately.

‘hosts_require_helo’   Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   Exim will require an accepted HELO or EHLO command from a host
matching this list, before accepting a MAIL command.

‘hosts_proxy’          Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option enables use of Proxy Protocol proxies for incoming
connections.  For details see section *note Inbound proxies::.

‘hosts_treat_as_local’ Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If this option is set, any host names that match the domain list are
treated as if they were the local host when Exim is scanning host lists
obtained from MX records or other sources.  Note that the value of this
option is a domain list, not a host list, because it is always used to
check host names, not IP addresses.

   This option also applies when Exim is matching the special items
‘@mx_any’, ‘@mx_primary’, and ‘@mx_secondary’ in a domain list (see
section *note Domain lists::), and when checking the ‘hosts’ option in
the ‘smtp’ transport for the local host (see the ‘allow_localhost’
option in that transport).  See also ‘local_interfaces’,
‘extra_local_interfaces’, and chapter *note Starting the daemon and the
use of network interfaces: Starting the daemon, which contains a
discussion about local network interfaces and recognizing the local
host.

‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’Use: _main_  Type: _time_      Default: _10w_

   This option affects the processing of bounce messages that cannot be
delivered, that is, those that suffer a permanent delivery failure.
(Bounce messages that suffer temporary delivery failures are of course
retried in the usual way.)

   After a permanent delivery failure, bounce messages are frozen,
because there is no sender to whom they can be returned.  When a frozen
bounce message has been in the queue for more than the given time, it is
unfrozen at the next queue run, and a further delivery is attempted.  If
delivery fails again, the bounce message is discarded.  This makes it
possible to keep failed bounce messages around for a shorter time than
the normal maximum retry time for frozen messages.  For example,

     ignore_bounce_errors_after = 12h

   retries failed bounce message deliveries after 12 hours, discarding
any further failures.  If the value of this option is set to a zero time
period, bounce failures are discarded immediately.  Setting a very long
time (as in the default value) has the effect of disabling this option.
For ways of automatically dealing with other kinds of frozen message,
see ‘auto_thaw’ and ‘timeout_frozen_after’.

‘ignore_fromline_hosts’Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_
‘ignore_fromline_local’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Some broken SMTP clients insist on sending a UUCP-like "From " line
before the headers of a message.  By default this is treated as the
start of the message's body, which means that any following headers are
not recognized as such.  Exim can be made to ignore it by setting
‘ignore_fromline_hosts’ to match those hosts that insist on sending it.
If the sender is actually a local process rather than a remote host, and
is using ‘-bs’ to inject the messages, ‘ignore_fromline_local’ must be
set to achieve this effect.

‘keep_environment’     Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option contains a string list of environment variables to keep.
You have to trust these variables or you have to be sure that these
variables do not impose any security risk.  Keep in mind that during the
startup phase Exim is running with an effective UID 0 in most
installations.  As the default value is an empty list, the default
environment for using libraries, running embedded Perl code, or running
external binaries is empty, and does not not even contain PATH or HOME.

   Actually the list is interpreted as a list of patterns (*note
Expansion of lists::), except that it is not expanded first.

   WARNING: Macro substitution is still done first, so having a macro
FOO and having FOO_HOME in your ‘keep_environment’ option may have
unexpected results.  You may work around this using a regular expression
that does not match the macro name: ^[F]OO_HOME$.

   Current versions of Exim issue a warning during startup if you do not
mention ‘keep_environment’ in your runtime configuration file and if
your current environment is not empty.  Future versions may not issue
that warning anymore.

   See the ‘add_environment’ main config option for a way to set
environment variables to a fixed value.  The environment for ‘pipe’
transports is handled separately, see section *note Environment
variables:: for details.

‘keep_malformed’       Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _4d_

   This option specifies the length of time to keep messages whose spool
files have been corrupted in some way.  This should, of course, never
happen.  At the next attempt to deliver such a message, it gets removed.
The incident is logged.

‘ldap_ca_cert_dir’     Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option indicates which directory contains CA certificates for
verifying a TLS certificate presented by an LDAP server.  While Exim
does not provide a default value, your SSL library may.  Analogous to
‘tls_verify_certificates’ but as a client-side option for LDAP and
constrained to be a directory.

‘ldap_ca_cert_file’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option indicates which file contains CA certificates for
verifying a TLS certificate presented by an LDAP server.  While Exim
does not provide a default value, your SSL library may.  Analogous to
‘tls_verify_certificates’ but as a client-side option for LDAP and
constrained to be a file.

‘ldap_cert_file’       Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option indicates which file contains an TLS client certificate
which Exim should present to the LDAP server during TLS negotiation.
Should be used together with ‘ldap_cert_key’.

‘ldap_cert_key’        Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option indicates which file contains the secret/private key to
use to prove identity to the LDAP server during TLS negotiation.  Should
be used together with ‘ldap_cert_file’, which contains the identity to
be proven.

‘ldap_cipher_suite’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This controls the TLS cipher-suite negotiation during TLS negotiation
with the LDAP server.  See *note Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL::
for more details of the format of cipher-suite options with OpenSSL (as
used by LDAP client libraries).

‘ldap_default_servers’ Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option provides a list of LDAP servers which are tried in turn
when an LDAP query does not contain a server.  See section *note Format
of LDAP queries:: for details of LDAP queries.  This option is available
only when Exim has been built with LDAP support.

‘ldap_require_cert’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset._

   This should be one of the values "hard", "demand", "allow", "try" or
"never".  A value other than one of these is interpreted as "never".
See the entry "TLS_REQCERT" in your system man page for ldap.conf(5).
Although Exim does not set a default, the LDAP library probably defaults
to hard/demand.

‘ldap_start_tls’       Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If set, Exim will attempt to negotiate TLS with the LDAP server when
connecting on a regular LDAP port.  This is the LDAP equivalent of
SMTP's "STARTTLS". This is distinct from using "ldaps", which is the
LDAP form of SSL-on-connect.  In the event of failure to negotiate TLS,
the action taken is controlled by ‘ldap_require_cert’.  This option is
ignored for ‘ldapi’ connections.

‘ldap_version’         Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option can be used to force Exim to set a specific protocol
version for LDAP. If it option is unset, it is shown by the ‘-bP’
command line option as -1.  When this is the case, the default is 3 if
LDAP_VERSION3 is defined in the LDAP headers; otherwise it is 2.  This
option is available only when Exim has been built with LDAP support.

‘limits_advertise_hosts’Use: _main_      Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option can be used to suppress the advertisement of the SMTP
LIMITS extension (*RFC 9422
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc9422)*) to specific hosts.  If
permitted, Exim as a server will advertise in the EHLO response the
limit for RCPT commands set by the ‘recipients_max’ option (if it is
set) and the limit for MAIL commands set by the
‘smtp_accept_max_per_connection’ option.

‘local_from_check’     Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   Normally Exim processes _From:_ and _Sender:_ headers in messages
considered "local".  The ‘local_from_check’ option can be set to false
to disable this processing.

   For these purposes, "local" means either the message was submitted
locally (that is, not over a TCP/IP connection) by an untrusted user, or
an ACL has specified "submission mode" for the message.  See section
*note Sender:: Sender;, which has more details about _Sender:_
processing.

   Exim removes any existing _Sender:_ header line, and checks that the
_From:_ header line matches the login of the calling user and the domain
specified by ‘qualify_domain’.  You can use ‘local_from_prefix’ and
‘local_from_suffix’ to permit affixes on the local part.

   *Note*: An unqualified address (no domain) in the _From:_ header in a
locally submitted message is automatically qualified by Exim, unless the
‘-bnq’ command line option is used.

   If the _From:_ header line does not match, Exim adds a _Sender:_
header with an address constructed from the calling user's login and the
default qualify domain.

   *Note*: Even with ‘local_from_check’ set false if, in addition, you
want to retain _Sender:_ header lines supplied by untrusted users, you
must also set ‘local_sender_retain’ to be true.

   These options affect only the header lines in the message.  The
envelope sender is still forced to be the login id at the qualify domain
unless ‘untrusted_set_sender’ permits the user to supply an envelope
sender.

‘local_from_prefix’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_
‘local_from_suffix’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   When Exim checks the _From:_ header line of locally submitted
messages for matching the login id (see ‘local_from_check’ above), it
can be configured to ignore certain prefixes and suffixes in the local
part of the address.  This is done by setting ‘local_from_prefix’ and/or
‘local_from_suffix’ to appropriate lists, in the same form as the
‘local_part_prefix’ and ‘local_part_suffix’ router options (see chapter
*note Generic options for routers::).  For example, if

     local_from_prefix = *-

   is set, a _From:_ line containing

     From: anything-user@your.domain.example

   will not cause a _Sender:_ header to be added if
_user@your.domain.example_ matches the actual sender address that is
constructed from the login name and qualify domain.

‘local_interfaces’     Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default: _see
                                         list_             below_

   This option controls which network interfaces are used by the daemon
for listening; they are also used to identify the local host when
routing.  Chapter *note Starting the daemon and the use of network
interfaces: Starting the daemon. contains a full description of this
option and the related options ‘daemon_smtp_ports’,
‘extra_local_interfaces’, ‘hosts_treat_as_local’, and
‘tls_on_connect_ports’.  The default value for ‘local_interfaces’ is

     local_interfaces = 0.0.0.0

   when Exim is built without IPv6 support; otherwise it is

     local_interfaces = <; ::0 ; 0.0.0.0

‘local_scan_timeout’   Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _5m_

   This timeout applies to the ‘local_scan()’ function (see chapter
*note Adding a local scan function to Exim: Local scan function.).  Zero
means "no timeout".  If the timeout is exceeded, the incoming message is
rejected with a temporary error if it is an SMTP message.  For a
non-SMTP message, the message is dropped and Exim ends with a non-zero
code.  The incident is logged on the main and reject logs.

‘local_sender_retain’  Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   When a message is submitted locally (that is, not over a TCP/IP
connection) by an untrusted user, Exim removes any existing _Sender:_
header line.  If you do not want this to happen, you must set
‘local_sender_retain’, and you must also set ‘local_from_check’ to be
false (Exim will complain if you do not).  See also the ACL modifier
‘control = suppress_local_fixups’.  Section *note Sender:: Sender;. has
more details about _Sender:_ processing.

‘localhost_number’     Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   Exim's message ids are normally unique only within the local host.
If uniqueness among a set of hosts is required (eg.  because they share
a spool directory), each host must set a different value for the
‘localhost_number’ option.  The string is expanded immediately after
reading the configuration file (so that a number can be computed from
the host name, for example) and the result of the expansion must be a
number in the range 0-16 (or 0-10 on operating systems with
case-insensitive file systems).  This is available in subsequent string
expansions via the variable ‘$localhost_number’.  When
‘localhost_number’ is set, the final four characters of the message id,
instead of just being a fractional part of the time, are computed from
the time and the local host number as described in section *note Message
identification::.

‘log_file_path’        Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default: _set
                                         list_*__          at compile
                                                           time_

   This option sets the path which is used to determine the names of
Exim's log files, or indicates that logging is to be to syslog, or both.
It is expanded when Exim is entered, so it can, for example, contain a
reference to the host name.  If no specific path is set for the log
files at compile or runtime, or if the option is unset at runtime (i.e.
‘log_file_path = ’) they are written in a sub-directory called ‘log’ in
Exim's spool directory.  A path must start with a slash.  To send to
syslog, use the word "syslog".  Chapter *note Log files:: contains
further details about Exim's logging, and section *note Where the logs
are written:: describes how the contents of ‘log_file_path’ are used.
If this string is fixed at your installation (contains no expansion
variables) it is recommended that you do not set this option in the
configuration file, but instead supply the path using LOG_FILE_PATH in
‘Local/Makefile’ so that it is available to Exim for logging errors
detected early on - in particular, failure to read the configuration
file.

‘log_ports’            Use: _main_       Type: _integer    Default: _*_
                                         list_

   If set, this option must be a list of integers.  When enabled by
logging selectors ‘outgoing_port’ or ‘incoming_interface’, receiving
port numbers are only logged if they match the list.  For example:

     log_ports = !25 : !587

‘log_selector’         Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option can be used to reduce or increase the number of things
that Exim writes to its log files.  Its argument is made up of names
preceded by plus or minus characters.  For example:

     log_selector = +arguments -retry_defer

   A list of possible names and what they control is given in the
chapter on logging, in section *note Reducing or increasing what is
logged::.

‘log_timezone’         Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   By default, the timestamps on log lines are in local time without the
timezone.  This means that if your timezone changes twice a year, the
timestamps in log lines are ambiguous for an hour when the clocks go
back.  One way of avoiding this problem is to set the timezone to UTC.
An alternative is to set ‘log_timezone’ true.  This turns on the
addition of the timezone offset to timestamps in log lines.  Turning on
this option can add quite a lot to the size of log files because each
line is extended by 6 characters.  Note that the ‘$tod_log’ variable
contains the log timestamp without the zone, but there is another
variable called ‘$tod_zone’ that contains just the timezone offset.

‘lookup_open_max’      Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _25_

   This option limits the number of simultaneously open files for
single-key lookups that use regular files (that is, ‘lsearch’, ‘dbm’,
and ‘cdb’).  Exim normally keeps these files open during routing,
because often the same file is required several times.  If the limit is
reached, Exim closes the least recently used file.  Note that if you are
using the _ndbm_ library, it actually opens two files for each logical
DBM database, though it still counts as one for the purposes of
‘lookup_open_max’.  If you are getting "too many open files" errors with
NDBM, you need to reduce the value of ‘lookup_open_max’.

‘max_username_length’  Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   Some operating systems are broken in that they truncate long
arguments to ‘getpwnam()’ to eight characters, instead of returning "no
such user".  If this option is set greater than zero, any attempt to
call ‘getpwnam()’ with an argument that is longer behaves as if
‘getpwnam()’ failed.

‘message_body_newlines’Use: _main_       Type: _bool_      Default:
                                                           _false_

   By default, newlines in the message body are replaced by spaces when
setting the ‘$message_body’ and ‘$message_body_end’ expansion variables.
If this option is set true, this no longer happens.

‘message_body_visible’ Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _500_

   This option specifies how much of a message's body is to be included
in the ‘$message_body’ and ‘$message_body_end’ expansion variables.

‘message_id_header_domain’Use: _main_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, the string is expanded and used as the right
hand side (domain) of the _Message-ID:_ header that Exim creates if a
locally-originated incoming message does not have one.
"Locally-originated" means "not received over TCP/IP." Otherwise, the
primary host name is used.  Only letters, digits, dot and hyphen are
accepted; any other characters are replaced by hyphens.  If the
expansion is forced to fail, or if the result is an empty string, the
option is ignored.

‘message_id_header_text’Use: _main_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this variable is set, the string is expanded and used to augment
the text of the _Message-id:_ header that Exim creates if a
locally-originated incoming message does not have one.  The text of this
header is required by *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* to take the form of an
address.  By default, Exim uses its internal message id as the local
part, and the primary host name as the domain.  If this option is set,
it is expanded, and provided the expansion is not forced to fail, and
does not yield an empty string, the result is inserted into the header
immediately before the @, separated from the internal message id by a
dot.  Any characters that are illegal in an address are automatically
converted into hyphens.  This means that variables such as ‘$tod_log’
can be used, because the spaces and colons will become hyphens.

‘message_logs’         Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If this option is turned off, per-message log files are not created
in the ‘msglog’ spool sub-directory.  This reduces the amount of disk
I/O required by Exim, by reducing the number of files involved in
handling a message from a minimum of four (header spool file, body spool
file, delivery journal, and per-message log) to three.  The other major
I/O activity is Exim's main log, which is not affected by this option.

‘message_size_limit’   Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _50M_
                                         _string_*__

   This option limits the maximum size of message that Exim will
process.  The value is expanded for each incoming connection so, for
example, it can be made to depend on the IP address of the remote host
for messages arriving via TCP/IP. After expansion, the value must be a
sequence of decimal digits, optionally followed by K or M.

   If nonzero the value will be advertised as a parameter to the ESMTP
SIZE service extension keyword.

   *Note*: This limit cannot be made to depend on a message's sender or
any other properties of an individual message, because it has to be
advertised in the server's response to EHLO. String expansion failure
causes a temporary error.  A value of zero means no limit, but its use
is not recommended.  See also ‘bounce_return_size_limit’.

   Incoming SMTP messages are failed with a 552 error if the limit is
exceeded; locally-generated messages either get a stderr message or a
delivery failure message to the sender, depending on the ‘-oe’ setting.
Rejection of an oversized message is logged in both the main and the
reject logs.  See also the generic transport option
‘message_size_limit’, which limits the size of message that an
individual transport can process.

   If you use a virus-scanner and set this option to to a value larger
than the maximum size that your virus-scanner is configured to support,
you may get failures triggered by large mails.  The right size to
configure for the virus-scanner depends upon what data is passed and the
options in use but it's probably safest to just set it to a little
larger than this value.  E.g., with a default Exim message size of 50M
and a default ClamAV StreamMaxLength of 10M, some problems may result.

   A value of 0 will disable size limit checking; Exim will still
advertise the SIZE extension in an EHLO response, but without a limit,
so as to permit SMTP clients to still indicate the message size along
with the MAIL verb.

‘move_frozen_messages’ Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option, which is available only if Exim has been built with the
setting

     SUPPORT_MOVE_FROZEN_MESSAGES=yes

   in ‘Local/Makefile’, causes frozen messages and their message logs to
be moved from the ‘input’ and ‘msglog’ directories on the spool to
‘Finput’ and ‘Fmsglog’, respectively.  There is currently no support in
Exim or the standard utilities for handling such moved messages, and
they do not show up in lists generated by ‘-bp’ or by the Exim monitor.

‘mua_wrapper’          Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Setting this option true causes Exim to run in a very restrictive
mode in which it passes messages synchronously to a smart host.  Chapter
*note Using Exim as a non-queueing client: Exim as a non-queueing
client. contains a full description of this facility.

‘mysql_servers’        Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option provides a list of MySQL servers and associated
connection data, to be used in conjunction with ‘mysql’ lookups (see
section *note More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Redis: More
about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.).  The option is available
only if Exim has been built with MySQL support.

‘never_users’          Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing.
Local message deliveries are normally run in processes that are setuid
to the recipient, and remote deliveries are normally run under Exim's
own uid and gid.  It is usually desirable to prevent any deliveries from
running as root, as a safety precaution.

   When Exim is built, an option called FIXED_NEVER_USERS can be set to
a list of users that must not be used for local deliveries.  This list
is fixed in the binary and cannot be overridden by the configuration
file.  By default, it contains just the single user name "root".  The
‘never_users’ runtime option can be used to add more users to the fixed
list.

   If a message is to be delivered as one of the users on the fixed list
or the ‘never_users’ list, an error occurs, and delivery is deferred.  A
common example is

     never_users = root:daemon:bin

   Including root is redundant if it is also on the fixed list, but it
does no harm.  This option overrides the ‘pipe_as_creator’ option of the
‘pipe’ transport driver.

‘notifier_socket’      Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _$spool_directory/exim_daemon_notify_

   This option gives the name for a unix-domain socket on which the
daemon listens for work and information-requests.  Only installations
running multiple daemons sharing a spool directory should need to modify
the default.

   The option is expanded before use.  If the platform supports
Linux-style abstract socket names, the result is used with a nul byte
prefixed.  Otherwise, it should be a full path name and use a directory
accessible to Exim.

   If this option is set as empty, or the command line ‘-oY’ option is
used, or the command line uses a ‘-oX’ option and does not use ‘-oP’,
then a notifier socket is not created.

‘openssl_options’      Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _+no_sslv2
                                                           +no_sslv3
                                                           +single_dh_use
                                                           +no_ticket
                                                           +no_renegotiation_

   This option allows an administrator to adjust the SSL options applied
by OpenSSL to connections.  It is given as a space-separated list of
items, each one to be +added or -subtracted from the current value.

   This option is only available if Exim is built against OpenSSL. The
values available for this option vary according to the age of your
OpenSSL install.  The "all" value controls a subset of flags which are
available, typically the bug workaround options.  The
_SSL_CTX_set_options_ man page will list the values known on your system
and Exim should support all the "bug workaround" options and many of the
"modifying" options.  The Exim names lose the leading "SSL_OP_" and are
lower-cased.

   Note that adjusting the options can have severe impact upon the
security of SSL as used by Exim.  It is possible to disable safety
checks and shoot yourself in the foot in various unpleasant ways.  This
option should not be adjusted lightly.  An unrecognised item will be
detected at startup, by invoking Exim with the ‘-bV’ flag.

   The option affects Exim operating both as a server and as a client.

   Historical note: prior to release 4.80, Exim defaulted this value to
"+dont_insert_empty_fragments", which may still be needed for
compatibility with some clients, but which lowers security by increasing
exposure to some now infamous attacks.

   Examples:

     # Make both old MS and old Eudora happy:
     openssl_options = -all +microsoft_big_sslv3_buffer \
                            +dont_insert_empty_fragments

     # Disable older protocol versions:
     openssl_options = +no_sslv2 +no_sslv3

   Possible options may include:

   • ‘all’

   • ‘allow_unsafe_legacy_renegotiation’

   • ‘cipher_server_preference’

   • ‘dont_insert_empty_fragments’

   • ‘ephemeral_rsa’

   • ‘legacy_server_connect’

   • ‘microsoft_big_sslv3_buffer’

   • ‘microsoft_sess_id_bug’

   • ‘msie_sslv2_rsa_padding’

   • ‘netscape_challenge_bug’

   • ‘netscape_reuse_cipher_change_bug’

   • ‘no_compression’

   • ‘no_session_resumption_on_renegotiation’

   • ‘no_sslv2’

   • ‘no_sslv3’

   • ‘no_ticket’

   • ‘no_tlsv1’

   • ‘no_tlsv1_1’

   • ‘no_tlsv1_2’

   • ‘safari_ecdhe_ecdsa_bug’

   • ‘single_dh_use’

   • ‘single_ecdh_use’

   • ‘ssleay_080_client_dh_bug’

   • ‘sslref2_reuse_cert_type_bug’

   • ‘tls_block_padding_bug’

   • ‘tls_d5_bug’

   • ‘tls_rollback_bug’

   As an aside, the ‘safari_ecdhe_ecdsa_bug’ item is a misnomer and
affects all clients connecting using the MacOS SecureTransport TLS
facility prior to MacOS 10.8.4, including email clients.  If you see old
MacOS clients failing to negotiate TLS then this option value might
help, provided that your OpenSSL release is new enough to contain this
work-around.  This may be a situation where you have to upgrade OpenSSL
to get buggy clients working.

‘oracle_servers’       Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option provides a list of Oracle servers and associated
connection data, to be used in conjunction with ‘oracle’ lookups (see
section *note More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Redis: More
about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.).  The option is available
only if Exim has been built with Oracle support.

‘panic_coredump’       Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option is rarely needed but can help for some debugging
investigations.  If set, when an internal error is detected by Exim
which is sufficient to terminate the process (all such are logged in the
paniclog) then a coredump is requested.

   Note that most systems require additional administrative
configuration to permit write a core file for a setuid program, which is
Exim's common installed configuration.

‘percent_hack_domains’ Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The "percent hack" is the convention whereby a local part containing
a percent sign is re-interpreted as a new email address, with the
percent replaced by @.  This is sometimes called "source routing",
though that term is also applied to *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* addresses that begin
with an @ character.  If this option is set, Exim implements the percent
facility for those domains listed, but no others.  This happens before
an incoming SMTP address is tested against an ACL.

   *Warning*: The "percent hack" has often been abused by people who are
trying to get round relaying restrictions.  For this reason, it is best
avoided if at all possible.  Unfortunately, a number of less
security-conscious MTAs implement it unconditionally.  If you are
running Exim on a gateway host, and routing mail through to internal
MTAs without processing the local parts, it is a good idea to reject
recipient addresses with percent characters in their local parts.
Exim's default configuration does this.

‘perl_at_start’        Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_
‘perl_startup’         Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_
‘perl_taintmode’       Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   These options are available only when Exim is built with an embedded
Perl interpreter.  See chapter *note Embedded Perl:: for details of
their use.

‘pgsql_servers’        Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option provides a list of PostgreSQL servers and associated
connection data, to be used in conjunction with ‘pgsql’ lookups (see
section *note More about MySQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle, and Redis: More
about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.).  The option is available
only if Exim has been built with PostgreSQL support.

‘pid_file_path’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _set
                                         _string_*__       at compile
                                                           time_

   This option sets the name of the file to which the Exim daemon writes
its process id.  The string is expanded, so it can contain, for example,
references to the host name:

     pid_file_path = /var/log/$primary_hostname/exim.pid

   If no path is set, the pid is written to the file ‘exim-daemon.pid’
in Exim's spool directory.  The value set by the option can be
overridden by the ‘-oP’ command line option.  A pid file is not written
if a "non-standard" daemon is run by means of the ‘-oX’ option, unless a
path is explicitly supplied by ‘-oP’.

‘pipelining_advertise_hosts’Use: _main_  Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option can be used to suppress the advertisement of the SMTP
PIPELINING extension to specific hosts.  See also the *no_pipelining*
control in section *note Use of the control modifier::.  When PIPELINING
is not advertised and ‘smtp_enforce_sync’ is true, an Exim server
enforces strict synchronization for each SMTP command and response.
When PIPELINING is advertised, Exim assumes that clients will use it;
"out of order" commands that are "expected" do not count as protocol
errors (see ‘smtp_max_synprot_errors’).

‘pipelining_connect_advertise_hosts’Use: _main_Type: _host Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   If Exim is built without the DISABLE_PIPE_CONNECT build option this
option controls which hosts the facility is advertised to and from which
pipelined early-connection (before MAIL) SMTP commands are acceptable.
When used, the pipelining saves on roundtrip times.

   See also the ‘hosts_pipe_connect’ smtp transport option.

   The SMTP service extension keyword advertised is "PIPECONNECT"; it
permits the client to pipeline TCP connection and hello command
(cleartext phase), or TLS-establishment and hello command (encrypted
phase), on later connections to the same host.

   This saves a roundtrip time for the initial banner, and (if STARTTLS
is being used) one each for the STARTTLS and the subsequent banner.  If
AUTH is used, another roundtrip is saved for that.

‘prdr_enable’          Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option can be used to enable the Per-Recipient Data Response
extension to SMTP, defined by Eric Hall.  If the option is set, PRDR is
advertised by Exim when operating as a server.  If the client requests
PRDR, and more than one recipient, for a message an additional ACL is
called for each recipient after the message content is received.  See
section *note The SMTP PRDR ACL::.

‘preserve_message_logs’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, message log files are not deleted when
messages are completed.  Instead, they are moved to a sub-directory of
the spool directory called ‘msglog.OLD’, where they remain available for
statistical or debugging purposes.  This is a dangerous option to set on
systems with any appreciable volume of mail.  Use with care!

‘primary_hostname’     Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This specifies the name of the current host.  It is used:

   • in the default EHLO or HELO command for outgoing SMTP messages
     (changeable via the ‘helo_data’ option in the ‘smtp’ transport)

   • as the default for ‘qualify_domain’

   • by default, in some SMTP response messages from an Exim server.
     This can be changed dynamically by setting ‘smtp_active_hostname’.

   • as the value represented by a single _@_ character in a domain list

   If ‘primary_hostname’ is not set, Exim calls ‘uname()’ to find the
host name.  If this fails, Exim panics and dies.  If the name returned
by ‘uname()’ contains only one component, Exim passes it to
‘gethostbyname()’ (or ‘getipnodebyname()’ when available) in order to
obtain the fully qualified version.  The variable ‘$primary_hostname’
contains the host name, whether set explicitly by this option, or
defaulted.

‘print_topbitchars’    Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   By default, Exim considers only those characters whose codes lie in
the range 32-126 to be printing characters.  In a number of
circumstances (for example, when writing log entries) non-printing
characters are converted into escape sequences, primarily to avoid
messing up the layout.  If ‘print_topbitchars’ is set, code values of
128 and above are also considered to be printing characters.

   This option also affects the header syntax checks performed by the
‘autoreply’ transport, and whether Exim uses *RFC 2047
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)* encoding of the user's
full name when constructing From: and Sender: addresses (as described in
section *note Constructed addresses::).  Setting this option can cause
Exim to generate eight bit message headers that do not conform to the
standards.

‘process_log_path’     Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option sets the name of the file to which an Exim process writes
its "process log" when sent a USR1 signal.  This is used by the
_exiwhat_ utility script.  If this option is unset, the file called
‘exim-process.info’ in Exim's spool directory is used.  The ability to
specify the name explicitly can be useful in environments where two
different Exims are running, using different spool directories.

‘prod_requires_admin’  Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   The ‘-M’, ‘-R’, and ‘-q’ command-line options require the caller to
be an admin user unless ‘prod_requires_admin’ is set false.  See also
‘queue_list_requires_admin’ and ‘commandline_checks_require_admin’.

‘proxy_protocol_timeout’Use: _main_      Type: _time_      Default: _3s_

   This option sets the timeout for proxy protocol negotiation.  For
details see section *note Inbound proxies::.

‘qualify_domain’       Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option specifies the domain name that is added to any envelope
sender addresses that do not have a domain qualification.  It also
applies to recipient addresses if ‘qualify_recipient’ is not set.
Unqualified addresses are accepted by default only for locally-generated
messages.  Qualification is also applied to addresses in header lines
such as _From:_ and _To:_ for locally-generated messages, unless the
‘-bnq’ command line option is used.

   Messages from external sources must always contain fully qualified
addresses, unless the sending host matches ‘sender_unqualified_hosts’ or
‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’ (as appropriate), in which case incoming
addresses are qualified with ‘qualify_domain’ or ‘qualify_recipient’ as
necessary.  Internally, Exim always works with fully qualified envelope
addresses.  If ‘qualify_domain’ is not set, it defaults to the
‘primary_hostname’ value.

‘qualify_recipient’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option allows you to specify a different domain for qualifying
recipient addresses to the one that is used for senders.  See
‘qualify_domain’ above.

‘queue_domains’        Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option lists domains for which immediate delivery is not
required.  A delivery process is started whenever a message is received,
but only those domains that do not match are processed.  All other
deliveries wait until the next queue run.  See also ‘hold_domains’ and
‘queue_smtp_domains’.

‘queue_fast_ramp’      Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If set to true, two-phase queue runs, initiated using ‘-qq’ on the
command line, may start parallel delivery processes during their first
phase.  This will be done when a threshold number of messages have been
routed for a single host.

‘queue_list_requires_admin’Use: _main_   Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   The ‘-bp’ command-line option, which lists the messages that are on
the queue, requires the caller to be an admin user unless
‘queue_list_requires_admin’ is set false.  See also
‘prod_requires_admin’ and ‘commandline_checks_require_admin’.

‘queue_only’           Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If ‘queue_only’ is set, a delivery process is not automatically
started whenever a message is received.  Instead, the message waits in
the queue for the next queue run.  Even if ‘queue_only’ is false,
incoming messages may not get delivered immediately when certain
conditions (such as heavy load) occur.

   The ‘-odq’ command line has the same effect as ‘queue_only’.  The
‘-odb’ and ‘-odi’ command line options override ‘queue_only’ unless
‘queue_only_override’ is set false.  See also ‘queue_only_file’,
‘queue_only_load’, and ‘smtp_accept_queue’.

‘queue_only_file’      Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option can be set to a colon-separated list of absolute path
names, each one optionally preceded by "smtp".  When Exim is receiving a
message, it tests for the existence of each listed path using a call to
‘stat()’.  For each path that exists, the corresponding queueing option
is set.  For paths with no prefix, ‘queue_only’ is set; for paths
prefixed by "smtp", ‘queue_smtp_domains’ is set to match all domains.
So, for example,

     queue_only_file = smtp/some/file

   causes Exim to behave as if ‘queue_smtp_domains’ were set to "*"
whenever ‘/some/file’ exists.

‘queue_only_load’      Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _fixed-point_     _unset_

   If the system load average is higher than this value, incoming
messages from all sources are queued, and no automatic deliveries are
started.  If this happens during local or remote SMTP input, all
subsequent messages received on the same SMTP connection are queued by
default, whatever happens to the load in the meantime, but this can be
changed by setting ‘queue_only_load_latch’ false.

   Deliveries will subsequently be performed by queue runner processes.
This option has no effect on ancient operating systems on which Exim
cannot determine the load average.  See also ‘deliver_queue_load_max’
and ‘smtp_load_reserve’.

‘queue_only_load_latch’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When this option is true (the default), once one message has been
queued because the load average is higher than the value set by
‘queue_only_load’, all subsequent messages received on the same SMTP
connection are also queued.  This is a deliberate choice; even though
the load average may fall below the threshold, it doesn't seem right to
deliver later messages on the same connection when not delivering
earlier ones.  However, there are special circumstances such as very
long-lived connections from scanning appliances where this is not the
best strategy.  In such cases, ‘queue_only_load_latch’ should be set
false.  This causes the value of the load average to be re-evaluated for
each message.

‘queue_only_override’  Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When this option is true, the ‘-od’_x_ command line options override
the setting of ‘queue_only’ or ‘queue_only_file’ in the configuration
file.  If ‘queue_only_override’ is set false, the ‘-od’_x_ options
cannot be used to override; they are accepted, but ignored.

‘queue_run_order’      Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _random_

‘queue_run_in_order’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Permissible values for the string option are

   • random

   • oldest

   • newest

   The boolean option is obsolete, replaced by the string option.  For
now it is still supported but it will be removed in a future release.
If set true, it corresponds to "oldest".

   If this option indicates a time-order, queue runs happen either
oldest or newest first instead of in an arbitrary order.  For this to
happen, a complete list of the entire queue must be set up before the
deliveries start.  When the queue is all held in a single directory (the
default), a single list is created for both the ordered and the
non-ordered cases.  However, if ‘split_spool_directory’ is set, a single
list is not created when time-ordering is not required.  In this case,
the sub-directories are processed one at a time (in a random order), and
this avoids setting up one huge list for the whole queue.  Thus, setting
a value other than "random" with ‘split_spool_directory’ may degrade
performance when the queue is large, because of the extra work in
setting up the single, large list.  In most situations,
‘queue_run_order’ should not be set.

‘queue_run_max’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _5_
                                         _integer_*__

   This controls the maximum number of queue runner processes that an
Exim daemon can run simultaneously.  This does not mean that it starts
them all at once, but rather that if the maximum number are still
running when the time comes to start another one, it refrains from
starting another one.  This can happen with very large queues and/or
very sluggish deliveries.  This option does not, however, interlock with
other processes, so additional queue runners can be started by other
means, or by killing and restarting the daemon.

   Setting this option to zero does not suppress queue runs; rather, it
disables the limit, allowing any number of simultaneous queue runner
processes to be run.  If you do not want queue runs to occur, omit the
‘-q’_xx_ setting on the daemon's command line.

   To set limits for different named queues use an expansion depending
on the ‘$queue_name’ variable.

‘queue_smtp_domains’   Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   When this option is set, a delivery process is started whenever a
message is received, routing is performed, and local deliveries take
place.  However, if any SMTP deliveries are required for domains that
match ‘queue_smtp_domains’, they are not immediately delivered, but
instead the message waits in the queue for the next queue run.  Since
routing of the message has taken place, Exim knows to which remote hosts
it must be delivered, and so when the queue run happens, multiple
messages for the same host are delivered over a single SMTP connection.
The ‘-odqs’ command line option causes all SMTP deliveries to be queued
in this way, and is equivalent to setting ‘queue_smtp_domains’ to "*".
See also ‘hold_domains’ and ‘queue_domains’.

‘receive_timeout’      Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _0s_

   This option sets the timeout for accepting a non-SMTP message, that
is, the maximum time that Exim waits when reading a message on the
standard input.  If the value is zero, it will wait forever.  This
setting is overridden by the ‘-or’ command line option.  The timeout for
incoming SMTP messages is controlled by ‘smtp_receive_timeout’.

‘received_header_text’ Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This string defines the contents of the _Received:_ message header
that is added to each message, except for the timestamp, which is
automatically added on at the end (preceded by a semicolon).  The string
is expanded each time it is used.  If the expansion yields an empty
string, no _Received:_ header line is added to the message.  Otherwise,
the string should start with the text "Received:" and conform to the
*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* specification
for _Received:_ header lines.  The default setting is:

     received_header_text = Received: \
       ${if def:sender_rcvhost {from $sender_rcvhost\n\t}\
         {${if def:sender_ident \
           {from ${quote_local_part:$sender_ident} }}\
             ${if def:sender_helo_name {(helo=$sender_helo_name)\n\t}}}}\
       by $primary_hostname \
       ${if def:received_protocol {with $received_protocol }}\
       ${if def:tls_in_ver        { ($tls_in_ver)}}\
       ${if def:tls_in_cipher_std { tls $tls_in_cipher_std\n\t}}\
       (Exim $version_number)\n\t\
       ${if def:sender_address \
       {(envelope-from <$sender_address>)\n\t}}\
       id $message_exim_id\
       ${if def:received_for {\n\tfor $received_for}}

   The references to the TLS version and cipher are omitted when Exim is
built without TLS support.  The use of conditional expansions ensures
that this works for both locally generated messages and messages
received from remote hosts, giving header lines such as the following:

     Received: from scrooge.carol.example ([192.168.12.25] ident=root)
     by marley.carol.example with esmtp (Exim 4.00)
     (envelope-from <bob@carol.example>)
     id 16IOWa-00019l-00
     for chas@dickens.example; Tue, 25 Dec 2001 14:43:44 +0000
     Received: by scrooge.carol.example with local (Exim 4.00)
     id 16IOWW-000083-00; Tue, 25 Dec 2001 14:43:41 +0000

   Until the body of the message has been received, the timestamp is the
time when the message started to be received.  Once the body has
arrived, and all policy checks have taken place, the timestamp is
updated to the time at which the message was accepted.

‘received_headers_max’ Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _30_

   When a message is to be delivered, the number of _Received:_ headers
is counted, and if it is greater than this parameter, a mail loop is
assumed to have occurred, the delivery is abandoned, and an error
message is generated.  This applies to both local and remote deliveries.

‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’Use: _main_ Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option lists those hosts from which Exim is prepared to accept
unqualified recipient addresses in message envelopes.  The addresses are
made fully qualified by the addition of the ‘qualify_recipient’ value.
This option also affects message header lines.  Exim does not reject
unqualified recipient addresses in headers, but it qualifies them only
if the message came from a host that matches
‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’, or if the message was submitted locally
(not using TCP/IP), and the ‘-bnq’ option was not set.

‘recipients_max’       Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _integer_*__      _50000_

   If the value resulting from expanding this option is set greater than
zero, it specifies the maximum number of original recipients for any
message being received.  Additional recipients that are generated by
aliasing or forwarding do not count.  SMTP messages get a 452 response
for all recipients over the limit; earlier recipients are delivered as
normal.  Non-SMTP messages with too many recipients are failed, and no
deliveries are done.

   For SMTP messages the expansion is done after the connection is
accepted (but before any SMTP conversation) and may depend on the IP
addresses and port numbers of the connection.  *Note*: If an expansion
is used for the option, care should be taken that a resonable value
results for non-SMTP messages.

   *Note*: The RFCs specify that an SMTP server should accept at least
100 RCPT commands in a single message.

‘recipients_max_reject’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, Exim rejects SMTP messages containing too
many recipients by giving 552 errors to the surplus RCPT commands, and a
554 error to the eventual DATA command.  Otherwise (the default) it
gives a 452 error to the surplus RCPT commands and accepts the message
on behalf of the initial set of recipients.  The remote server should
then re-send the message for the remaining recipients at a later time.

‘remote_max_parallel’  Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _6_

   This option controls parallel delivery of one message to a number of
remote hosts.  If the value is less than 2, parallel delivery is
disabled, and Exim does all the remote deliveries for a message one by
one.  Otherwise, if a single message has to be delivered to more than
one remote host, or if several copies have to be sent to the same remote
host, up to ‘remote_max_parallel’ deliveries are done simultaneously.
If more than ‘remote_max_parallel’ deliveries are required, the maximum
number of processes are started, and as each one finishes, another is
begun.  The order of starting processes is the same as if sequential
delivery were being done, and can be controlled by the
‘remote_sort_domains’ option.  If parallel delivery takes place while
running with debugging turned on, the debugging output from each
delivery process is tagged with its process id.

   This option controls only the maximum number of parallel deliveries
for one message in one Exim delivery process.  Because Exim has no
central queue manager, there is no way of controlling the total number
of simultaneous deliveries if the configuration allows a delivery
attempt as soon as a message is received.

   See also the ‘max_parallel’ generic transport option, and the
‘serialize_hosts’ smtp transport option.

   If you want to control the total number of deliveries on the system,
you need to set the ‘queue_only’ option.  This ensures that all incoming
messages are added to the queue without starting a delivery process.
Then set up an Exim daemon to start queue runner processes at
appropriate intervals (probably fairly often, for example, every
minute), and limit the total number of queue runners by setting the
‘queue_run_max’ parameter.  Because each queue runner delivers only one
message at a time, the maximum number of deliveries that can then take
place at once is ‘queue_run_max’ multiplied by ‘remote_max_parallel’.

   If it is purely remote deliveries you want to control, use
‘queue_smtp_domains’ instead of ‘queue_only’.  This has the added
benefit of doing the SMTP routing before queueing, so that several
messages for the same host will eventually get delivered down the same
connection.

‘remote_sort_domains’  Use: _main_       Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   When there are a number of remote deliveries for a message, they are
sorted by domain into the order given by this list.  For example,

     remote_sort_domains = *.cam.ac.uk:*.uk

   would attempt to deliver to all addresses in the _cam.ac.uk_ domain
first, then to those in the ‘uk’ domain, then to any others.

‘retry_data_expire’    Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _7d_

   This option sets a "use before" time on retry information in Exim's
hints database.  Any older retry data is ignored.  This means that, for
example, once a host has not been tried for 7 days, Exim behaves as if
it has no knowledge of past failures.

‘retry_interval_max’   Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _24h_

   Chapter *note Retry configuration:: describes Exim's mechanisms for
controlling the intervals between delivery attempts for messages that
cannot be delivered straight away.  This option sets an overall limit to
the length of time between retries.  It cannot be set greater than 24
hours; any attempt to do so forces the default value.

‘return_path_remove’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   *RFC 2821
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2821#section-4.4)*, states
that an SMTP server must insert a _Return-path:_ header line into a
message when it makes a "final delivery".  The _Return-path:_ header
preserves the sender address as received in the MAIL command.  This
description implies that this header should not be present in an
incoming message.  If ‘return_path_remove’ is true, any existing
_Return-path:_ headers are removed from messages at the time they are
received.  Exim's transports have options for adding _Return-path:_
headers at the time of delivery.  They are normally used only for final
local deliveries.

‘return_size_limit’    Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _100K_

   This option is an obsolete synonym for ‘bounce_return_size_limit’.

‘rfc1413_hosts’        Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default: _@[]_
                                         list_*__

   *RFC 1413 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1413)*
identification calls are made to any client host which matches an item
in the list.  The default value specifies just this host, being any
local interface for the system.

‘rfc1413_query_timeout’Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _0s_

   This sets the timeout on *RFC 1413
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1413)* identification calls.
If it is set to zero, no RFC 1413 calls are ever made.

‘sender_unqualified_hosts’Use: _main_    Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option lists those hosts from which Exim is prepared to accept
unqualified sender addresses.  The addresses are made fully qualified by
the addition of ‘qualify_domain’.  This option also affects message
header lines.  Exim does not reject unqualified addresses in headers
that contain sender addresses, but it qualifies them only if the message
came from a host that matches ‘sender_unqualified_hosts’, or if the
message was submitted locally (not using TCP/IP), and the ‘-bnq’ option
was not set.

‘slow_lookup_log’      Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   This option controls logging of slow lookups.  If the value is
nonzero it is taken as a number of milliseconds and lookups taking
longer than this are logged.  Currently this applies only to DNS
lookups.

‘smtp_accept_keepalive’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   This option controls the setting of the SO_KEEPALIVE option on
incoming TCP/IP socket connections.  When set, it causes the kernel to
probe idle connections periodically, by sending packets with "old"
sequence numbers.  The other end of the connection should send an
acknowledgment if the connection is still okay or a reset if the
connection has been aborted.  The reason for doing this is that it has
the beneficial effect of freeing up certain types of connection that can
get stuck when the remote host is disconnected without tidying up the
TCP/IP call properly.  The keepalive mechanism takes several hours to
detect unreachable hosts.

‘smtp_accept_max’      Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _20_

   This option specifies the maximum number of simultaneous incoming
SMTP calls that Exim will accept.  It applies only to the listening
daemon; there is no control (in Exim) when incoming SMTP is being
handled by _inetd_.  If the value is set to zero, no limit is applied.
However, it is required to be non-zero if either
‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’ or ‘smtp_accept_queue’ is set.  See also
‘smtp_accept_reserve’ and ‘smtp_load_reserve’.

   A new SMTP connection is immediately rejected if the
‘smtp_accept_max’ limit has been reached.  If not, Exim first checks
‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’.  If that limit has not been reached for the
client host, ‘smtp_accept_reserve’ and ‘smtp_load_reserve’ are then
checked before accepting the connection.

‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’Use: _main_     Type: _integer_   Default: _10_

   Exim counts the number of "non-mail" commands in an SMTP session, and
drops the connection if there are too many.  This option defines "too
many".  The check catches some denial-of-service attacks, repeated
failing AUTHs, or a mad client looping sending EHLO, for example.  The
check is applied only if the client host matches
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts’.

   When a new message is expected, one occurrence of RSET is not
counted.  This allows a client to send one RSET between messages (this
is not necessary, but some clients do it).  Exim also allows one
uncounted occurrence of HELO or EHLO, and one occurrence of STARTTLS
between messages.  After starting up a TLS session, another EHLO is
expected, and so it too is not counted.  The first occurrence of AUTH in
a connection, or immediately following STARTTLS is not counted.
Otherwise, all commands other than MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and QUIT are
counted.

‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts’Use: _main_Type: _host      Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   You can control which hosts are subject to the
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’ check by setting this option.  The default
value makes it apply to all hosts.  By changing the value, you can
exclude any badly-behaved hosts that you have to live with.

‘smtp_accept_max_per_connection’Use: _main_Type:           Default: _1000_
                                         _integer_*__

   The value of this option limits the number of MAIL commands that Exim
is prepared to accept over a single SMTP connection, whether or not each
command results in the transfer of a message.  After the limit is
reached, a 421 response is given to subsequent MAIL commands.  This
limit is a safety precaution against a client that goes mad (incidents
of this type have been seen).  The option is expanded after the HELO or
EHLO is received and may depend on values available at that time.  An
empty or zero value after expansion removes the limit.

‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’Use: _main_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option restricts the number of simultaneous IP connections from
a single host (strictly, from a single IP address) to the Exim daemon.
The option is expanded, to enable different limits to be applied to
different hosts by reference to ‘$sender_host_address’.  Once the limit
is reached, additional connection attempts from the same host are
rejected with error code 421.  This is entirely independent of
‘smtp_accept_reserve’.  The option's default value of zero imposes no
limit.  If this option is set greater than zero, it is required that
‘smtp_accept_max’ be non-zero.

   *Warning*: When setting this option you should not use any expansion
constructions that take an appreciable amount of time.  The expansion
and test happen in the main daemon loop, in order to reject additional
connections without forking additional processes (otherwise a
denial-of-service attack could cause a vast number or processes to be
created).  While the daemon is doing this processing, it cannot accept
any other incoming connections.

‘smtp_accept_queue’    Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   If the number of simultaneous incoming SMTP connections being handled
via the listening daemon exceeds this value, messages received by SMTP
are just placed in the queue; no delivery processes are started
automatically.  The count is fixed at the start of an SMTP connection.
It cannot be updated in the subprocess that receives messages, and so
the queueing or not queueing applies to all messages received in the
same connection.

   A value of zero implies no limit, and clearly any non-zero value is
useful only if it is less than the ‘smtp_accept_max’ value (unless that
is zero).  See also ‘queue_only’, ‘queue_only_load’,
‘queue_smtp_domains’, and the various ‘-od’_x_ command line options.

‘smtp_accept_queue_per_connection’Use: _main_Type: _integer_Default: _10_

   This option limits the number of delivery processes that Exim starts
automatically when receiving messages via SMTP, whether via the daemon
or by the use of ‘-bs’ or ‘-bS’.  If the value of the option is greater
than zero, and the number of messages received in a single SMTP session
exceeds this number, subsequent messages are placed in the queue, but no
delivery processes are started.  This helps to limit the number of Exim
processes when a server restarts after downtime and there is a lot of
mail waiting for it on other systems.  On large systems, the default
should probably be increased, and on dial-in client systems it should
probably be set to zero (that is, disabled).

‘smtp_accept_reserve’  Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   When ‘smtp_accept_max’ is set greater than zero, this option
specifies a number of SMTP connections that are reserved for connections
from the hosts that are specified in ‘smtp_reserve_hosts’.  The value
set in ‘smtp_accept_max’ includes this reserve pool.  The specified
hosts are not restricted to this number of connections; the option
specifies a minimum number of connection slots for them, not a maximum.
It is a guarantee that this group of hosts can always get at least
‘smtp_accept_reserve’ connections.  However, the limit specified by
‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’ is still applied to each individual host.

   For example, if ‘smtp_accept_max’ is set to 50 and
‘smtp_accept_reserve’ is set to 5, once there are 45 active connections
(from any hosts), new connections are accepted only from hosts listed in
‘smtp_reserve_hosts’, provided the other criteria for acceptance are
met.

‘smtp_active_hostname’ Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is provided for multi-homed servers that want to
masquerade as several different hosts.  At the start of an incoming SMTP
connection, its value is expanded and used instead of the value of
‘$primary_hostname’ in SMTP responses.  For example, it is used as
domain name in the response to an incoming HELO or EHLO command.

   The active hostname is placed in the ‘$smtp_active_hostname’
variable, which is saved with any messages that are received.  It is
therefore available for use in routers and transports when the message
is later delivered.

   If this option is unset, or if its expansion is forced to fail, or if
the expansion results in an empty string, the value of
‘$primary_hostname’ is used.  Other expansion failures cause a message
to be written to the main and panic logs, and the SMTP command receives
a temporary error.  Typically, the value of ‘smtp_active_hostname’
depends on the incoming interface address.  For example:

     smtp_active_hostname = ${if eq{$received_ip_address}{10.0.0.1}\
       {cox.mydomain}{box.mydomain}}

   Although ‘$smtp_active_hostname’ is primarily concerned with incoming
messages, it is also used as the default for HELO commands in callout
verification if there is no remote transport from which to obtain a
‘helo_data’ value.

‘smtp_backlog_monitor’ Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   If this option is set to greater than zero, and the backlog of
available TCP connections on a socket listening for SMTP is larger than
it, a line is logged giving the value and the socket address and port.
The value is retrieved just before an accept call.  This facility is
only available on Linux.

‘smtp_banner’          Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   If a connect ACL does not supply a message, this string (which is
expanded every time it is used) is output as the initial positive
response to an SMTP connection.  The default setting is:

     smtp_banner = $smtp_active_hostname ESMTP Exim \
       $version_number $tod_full

   Failure to expand the string causes a panic error; a forced fail just
closes the connection.  If you want to create a multiline response to
the initial SMTP connection, use "\n" in the string at appropriate
points, but not at the end.  Note that the 220 code is not included in
this string.  Exim adds it automatically (several times in the case of a
multiline response).

‘smtp_check_spool_space’Use: _main_      Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When this option is set, if an incoming SMTP session encounters the
SIZE option on a MAIL command, it checks that there is enough space in
the spool directory's partition to accept a message of that size, while
still leaving free the amount specified by ‘check_spool_space’ (even if
that value is zero).  If there isn't enough space, a temporary error
code is returned.

‘smtp_connect_backlog’ Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _20_

   This option specifies a maximum number of waiting SMTP connections.
Exim passes this value to the TCP/IP system when it sets up its
listener.  Once this number of connections are waiting for the daemon's
attention, subsequent connection attempts are refused at the TCP/IP
level.  At least, that is what the manuals say; in some circumstances
such connection attempts have been observed to time out instead.  For
large systems it is probably a good idea to increase the value (to 50,
say).  It also gives some protection against denial-of-service attacks
by SYN flooding.

‘smtp_enforce_sync’    Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   The SMTP protocol specification requires the client to wait for a
response from the server at certain points in the dialogue.  Without
PIPELINING these synchronization points are after every command; with
PIPELINING they are fewer, but they still exist.

   Some spamming sites send out a complete set of SMTP commands without
waiting for any response.  Exim protects against this by rejecting a
message if the client has sent further input when it should not have.
The error response "554 SMTP synchronization error" is sent, and the
connection is dropped.  Testing for this error cannot be perfect because
of transmission delays (unexpected input may be on its way but not yet
received when Exim checks).  However, it does detect many instances.

   The check can be globally disabled by setting ‘smtp_enforce_sync’
false.  If you want to disable the check selectively (for example, only
for certain hosts), you can do so by an appropriate use of a ‘control’
modifier in an ACL (see section *note Use of the control modifier::).
See also ‘pipelining_advertise_hosts’.

‘smtp_etrn_command’    Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, the given command is run whenever an SMTP ETRN
command is received from a host that is permitted to issue such commands
(see chapter *note Access control lists::).  The string is split up into
separate arguments which are independently expanded.  The expansion
variable ‘$domain’ is set to the argument of the ETRN command, and no
syntax checking is done on it.  For example:

     smtp_etrn_command = /etc/etrn_command $domain \
                         $sender_host_address

   If the option is not set, the argument for the ETRN command must be a
_#_ followed by an address string.  In this case an _exim -R <string>_
command is used; if the ETRN ACL has set up a named-queue then _-MCG
<queue>_ is appended.

   A new process is created to run the command, but Exim does not wait
for it to complete.  Consequently, its status cannot be checked.  If the
command cannot be run, a line is written to the panic log, but the ETRN
caller still receives a 250 success response.  Exim is normally running
under its own uid when receiving SMTP, so it is not possible for it to
change the uid before running the command.

   Serialization of ETRN commands is based on the MD5 hash of the
command's argument.  No more than one ETRN command with the same hash of
its arguments can run at a given time.  Other ETRN commands get a 458
SMTP rejection.

   To protect against attacks flooding the ETRN serialization table, you
should consider rate limiting the ETRN command.

     deny
       ratelimit = 3 / 1m / per_cmd / $sender_host_address
       message = rate for ETRN is over the limit ($sender_rate > $sender_rate_limit)

     accept

‘smtp_etrn_serialize’  Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When this option is set, it prevents the simultaneous execution of
more than one identical command as a result of ETRN in an SMTP
connection.  See section *note The ETRN command:: for details.

‘smtp_load_reserve’    Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _fixed-point_     _unset_

   If the system load average ever gets higher than this, incoming SMTP
calls are accepted only from those hosts that match an entry in
‘smtp_reserve_hosts’.  If ‘smtp_reserve_hosts’ is not set, no incoming
SMTP calls are accepted when the load is over the limit.  The option has
no effect on ancient operating systems on which Exim cannot determine
the load average.  See also ‘deliver_queue_load_max’ and
‘queue_only_load’.

‘smtp_max_synprot_errors’Use: _main_     Type: _integer_   Default: _3_

   Exim rejects SMTP commands that contain syntax or protocol errors.
In particular, a syntactically invalid email address, as in this
command:

     RCPT TO:<abc xyz@a.b.c>

   causes immediate rejection of the command, before any other tests are
done.  (The ACL cannot be run if there is no valid address to set up for
it.)  An example of a protocol error is receiving RCPT before MAIL. If
there are too many syntax or protocol errors in one SMTP session, the
connection is dropped.  The limit is set by this option.  A value of
zero will result in a drop on the first error.

   When the PIPELINING extension to SMTP is in use, some protocol errors
are "expected", for instance, a RCPT command after a rejected MAIL
command.  Exim assumes that PIPELINING will be used if it advertises it
(see ‘pipelining_advertise_hosts’), and in this situation, "expected"
errors do not count towards the limit.

‘smtp_max_unknown_commands’Use: _main_   Type: _integer_   Default: _3_

   If there are too many unrecognized commands in an incoming SMTP
session, an Exim server drops the connection.  This is a defence against
some kinds of abuse that subvert web clients into making connections to
SMTP ports; in these circumstances, a number of non-SMTP command lines
are sent first.

‘smtp_ratelimit_hosts’ Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_
‘smtp_ratelimit_mail’  Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_
‘smtp_ratelimit_rcpt’  Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   Some sites find it helpful to be able to limit the rate at which
certain hosts can send them messages, and the rate at which an
individual message can specify recipients.

   Exim has two rate-limiting facilities.  This section describes the
older facility, which can limit rates within a single connection.  The
newer ‘ratelimit’ ACL condition can limit rates across all connections.
See section *note Rate limiting incoming messages:: for details of the
newer facility.

   When a host matches ‘smtp_ratelimit_hosts’, the values of
‘smtp_ratelimit_mail’ and ‘smtp_ratelimit_rcpt’ are used to control the
rate of acceptance of MAIL and RCPT commands in a single SMTP session,
respectively.  Each option, if set, must contain a set of four
comma-separated values:

   • A threshold, before which there is no rate limiting.

   • An initial time delay.  Unlike other times in Exim, numbers with
     decimal fractional parts are allowed here.

   • A factor by which to increase the delay each time.

   • A maximum value for the delay.  This should normally be less than 5
     minutes, because after that time, the client is liable to timeout
     the SMTP command.

   For example, these settings have been used successfully at the site
which first suggested this feature, for controlling mail from their
customers:

     smtp_ratelimit_mail = 2,0.5s,1.05,4m
     smtp_ratelimit_rcpt = 4,0.25s,1.015,4m

   The first setting specifies delays that are applied to MAIL commands
after two have been received over a single connection.  The initial
delay is 0.5 seconds, increasing by a factor of 1.05 each time.  The
second setting applies delays to RCPT commands when more than four occur
in a single message.

‘smtp_receive_timeout’ Use: _main_       Type: _time_*__   Default: _5m_

   This sets a timeout value for SMTP reception.  It applies to all
forms of SMTP input, including batch SMTP. If a line of input (either an
SMTP command or a data line) is not received within this time, the SMTP
connection is dropped and the message is abandoned.  A line is written
to the log containing one of the following messages:

     SMTP command timeout on connection from...
     SMTP data timeout on connection from...

   The former means that Exim was expecting to read an SMTP command; the
latter means that it was in the DATA phase, reading the contents of a
message.

   If the first character of the option is a "$" the option is expanded
before use and may depend on ‘$sender_host_name’, ‘$sender_host_address’
and ‘$sender_host_port’.

   The value set by this option can be overridden by the ‘-os’
command-line option.  A setting of zero time disables the timeout, but
this should never be used for SMTP over TCP/IP. (It can be useful in
some cases of local input using ‘-bs’ or ‘-bS’.)  For non-SMTP input,
the reception timeout is controlled by ‘receive_timeout’ and ‘-or’.

‘smtp_reserve_hosts’   Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option defines hosts for which SMTP connections are reserved;
see ‘smtp_accept_reserve’ and ‘smtp_load_reserve’ above.

‘smtp_return_error_details’Use: _main_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   In the default state, Exim uses bland messages such as
"Administrative prohibition" when it rejects SMTP commands for policy
reasons.  Many sysadmins like this because it gives away little
information to spammers.  However, some other sysadmins who are applying
strict checking policies want to give out much fuller information about
failures.  Setting ‘smtp_return_error_details’ true causes Exim to be
more forthcoming.  For example, instead of "Administrative prohibition",
it might give:

     550-Rejected after DATA: '>' missing at end of address:
     550 failing address in "From" header is: <user@dom.ain

‘smtputf8_advertise_hosts’Use: _main_    Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   When Exim is built with support for internationalised mail names, the
availability thereof is advertised in response to EHLO only to those
client hosts that match this option.  See chapter *note
Internationalisation: Internationalisation". for details of Exim's
support for internationalisation.

‘spamd_address’        Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _127.0.0.1 783_

   This option is available when Exim is compiled with the
content-scanning extension.  It specifies how Exim connects to
SpamAssassin's ‘spamd’ daemon.  See section *note Scanning with
SpamAssassin and Rspamd:: for more details.

‘spf_guess’            Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _v=spf1 a/24
                                                           mx/24 ptr ?all_

   This option is available when Exim is compiled with SPF support.  See
section *note SPF (Sender Policy Framework): SPF [Sender Policy
Framework]. for more details.

‘spf_smtp_comment_template’Use: _main_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _Please%_see%_http://www.open-spf.org/Why_

   This option is available when Exim is compiled with SPF support.  It
allows the customisation of the SMTP comment that the SPF library
generates.  You are strongly encouraged to link to your own explanative
site.  The template must not contain spaces.  If you need spaces in the
output, use the proper placeholder.  If libspf2 can not parse the
template, it uses a built-in default broken link.  The following
placeholders (along with Exim variables (but see below)) are allowed in
the template:

   • *%_*: A space.

   • *%{L}*: Envelope sender's local part.

   • *%{S}*: Envelope sender.

   • *%{O}*: Envelope sender's domain.

   • *%{D}*: Current(?)  domain.

   • *%{I}*: SMTP client Ip.

   • *%{C}*: SMTP client pretty IP.

   • *%{T}*: Epoch time (UTC).

   • *%{P}*: SMTP client domain name.

   • *%{V}*: IP version.

   • *%{H}*: EHLO/HELO domain.

   • *%{R}*: Receiving domain.

   The capitalized placeholders do proper URL encoding, if you use them
lowercased, no encoding takes place.  This list was compiled from the
libspf2 sources.

   A note on using Exim variables: As currently the SPF library is
initialized before the SMTP EHLO phase, the variables useful for
expansion are quite limited.

‘split_spool_directory’Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, it causes Exim to split its input directory
into 62 subdirectories, each with a single alphanumeric character as its
name.  The sixth character of the message id is used to allocate
messages to subdirectories; this is the least significant base-62 digit
of the time of arrival of the message.

   Splitting up the spool in this way may provide better performance on
systems where there are long mail queues, by reducing the number of
files in any one directory.  The msglog directory is also split up in a
similar way to the input directory; however, if ‘preserve_message_logs’
is set, all old msglog files are still placed in the single directory
‘msglog.OLD’.

   It is not necessary to take any special action for existing messages
when changing ‘split_spool_directory’.  Exim notices messages that are
in the "wrong" place, and continues to process them.  If the option is
turned off after a period of being on, the subdirectories will
eventually empty and be automatically deleted.

   When ‘split_spool_directory’ is set, the behaviour of queue runner
processes changes.  Instead of creating a list of all messages in the
queue, and then trying to deliver each one, in turn, it constructs a
list of those in one sub-directory and tries to deliver them, before
moving on to the next sub-directory.  The sub-directories are processed
in a random order.  This spreads out the scanning of the input
directories, and uses less memory.  It is particularly beneficial when
there are lots of messages in the queue.  However, if ‘queue_run_order’
requires a time order, none of this new processing happens.  The entire
queue has to be scanned and sorted before any deliveries can start.

‘spool_directory’      Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _set
                                         _string_*__       at compile
                                                           time_

   This defines the directory in which Exim keeps its spool, that is,
the messages it is waiting to deliver.  The default value is taken from
the compile-time configuration setting, if there is one.  If not, this
option must be set.  The string is expanded, so it can contain, for
example, a reference to ‘$primary_hostname’.

   If the spool directory name is fixed on your installation, it is
recommended that you set it at build time rather than from this option,
particularly if the log files are being written to the spool directory
(see ‘log_file_path’).  Otherwise log files cannot be used for errors
that are detected early on, such as failures in the configuration file.

   By using this option to override the compiled-in path, it is possible
to run tests of Exim without using the standard spool.

‘spool_wireformat’     Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, Exim may for some messages use an alternative
format for data-files in the spool which matches the wire format.  Doing
this permits more efficient message reception and transmission.
Currently it is only done for messages received using the ESMTP CHUNKING
option.

   The following variables will not have useful values:

     $max_received_linelength
     $body_linecount
     $body_zerocount

   Users of the local_scan() API (see *note Adding a local scan function
to Exim: Local scan function.), and any external programs which are
passed a reference to a message data file (except via the "regex",
"malware" or "spam") ACL conditions) will need to be aware of the
different formats potentially available.

   Using any of the ACL conditions noted will negate the reception
benefit (as a Unix-mbox-format file is constructed for them).  The
transmission benefit is maintained.

‘sqlite_lock_timeout’  Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _5s_

   This option controls the timeout that the ‘sqlite’ lookup uses when
trying to access an SQLite database.  See section *note More about
SQLite:: for more details.

‘strict_acl_vars’      Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option controls what happens if a syntactically valid but
undefined ACL variable is referenced.  If it is false (the default), an
empty string is substituted; if it is true, an error is generated.  See
section *note ACL variables:: for details of ACL variables.

‘strip_excess_angle_brackets’Use: _main_ Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, redundant pairs of angle brackets round
"route-addr" items in addresses are stripped.  For example,
_<<xxx@a.b.c.d>>_ is treated as _<xxx@a.b.c.d>_.  If this is in the
envelope and the message is passed on to another MTA, the excess angle
brackets are not passed on.  If this option is not set, multiple pairs
of angle brackets cause a syntax error.

‘strip_trailing_dot’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, a trailing dot at the end of a domain in an
address is ignored.  If this is in the envelope and the message is
passed on to another MTA, the dot is not passed on.  If this option is
not set, a dot at the end of a domain causes a syntax error.  However,
addresses in header lines are checked only when an ACL requests header
syntax checking.

‘syslog_duplication’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When Exim is logging to syslog, it writes the log lines for its three
separate logs at different syslog priorities so that they can in
principle be separated on the logging hosts.  Some installations do not
require this separation, and in those cases, the duplication of certain
log lines is a nuisance.  If ‘syslog_duplication’ is set false, only one
copy of any particular log line is written to syslog.  For lines that
normally go to both the main log and the reject log, the reject log
version (possibly containing message header lines) is written, at
LOG_NOTICE priority.  Lines that normally go to both the main and the
panic log are written at the LOG_ALERT priority.

‘syslog_facility’      Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option sets the syslog "facility" name, used when Exim is
logging to syslog.  The value must be one of the strings "mail", "user",
"news", "uucp", "daemon", or "local_x_" where _x_ is a digit between 0
and 7.  If this option is unset, "mail" is used.  See chapter *note Log
files:: for details of Exim's logging.

‘syslog_pid’           Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If ‘syslog_pid’ is set false, the PID on Exim's log lines are omitted
when these lines are sent to syslog.  (Syslog normally prefixes the log
lines with the PID of the logging process automatically.)  You need to
enable the ‘+pid’ log selector item, if you want Exim to write it's PID
into the logs.)  See chapter *note Log files:: for details of Exim's
logging.

‘syslog_processname’   Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _‘exim’_

   This option sets the syslog "ident" name, used when Exim is logging
to syslog.  The value must be no longer than 32 characters.  See chapter
*note Log files:: for details of Exim's logging.

‘syslog_timestamp’     Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If ‘syslog_timestamp’ is set false, the timestamps on Exim's log
lines are omitted when these lines are sent to syslog.  See chapter
*note Log files:: for details of Exim's logging.

‘system_filter’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies an Exim filter file that is applied to all
messages at the start of each delivery attempt, before any routing is
done.  System filters must be Exim filters; they cannot be Sieve
filters.  If the system filter generates any deliveries to files or
pipes, or any new mail messages, the appropriate
‘system_filter_..._transport’ option(s) must be set, to define which
transports are to be used.  Details of this facility are given in
chapter *note System-wide message filtering::.  A forced expansion
failure results in no filter operation.

‘system_filter_directory_transport’Use: _main_Type:        Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This sets the name of the transport driver that is to be used when
the ‘save’ command in a system message filter specifies a path ending in
"/", implying delivery of each message into a separate file in some
directory.  During the delivery, the variable ‘$address_file’ contains
the path name.

‘system_filter_file_transport’Use: _main_Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This sets the name of the transport driver that is to be used when
the ‘save’ command in a system message filter specifies a path not
ending in "/".  During the delivery, the variable ‘$address_file’
contains the path name.

‘system_filter_group’  Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option is used only when ‘system_filter_user’ is also set.  It
sets the gid under which the system filter is run, overriding any gid
that is associated with the user.  The value may be numerical or
symbolic.

‘system_filter_pipe_transport’Use: _main_Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the transport driver that is to be used when a ‘pipe’
command is used in a system filter.  During the delivery, the variable
‘$address_pipe’ contains the pipe command.

‘system_filter_reply_transport’Use: _main_Type:            Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the transport driver that is to be used when a ‘mail’
command is used in a system filter.

‘system_filter_user’   Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   If this option is set to root, the system filter is run in the main
Exim delivery process, as root.  Otherwise, the system filter runs in a
separate process, as the given user, defaulting to the Exim run-time
user.  Unless the string consists entirely of digits, it is looked up in
the password data.  Failure to find the named user causes a
configuration error.  The gid is either taken from the password data, or
specified by ‘system_filter_group’.  When the uid is specified
numerically, ‘system_filter_group’ is required to be set.

   If the system filter generates any pipe, file, or reply deliveries,
the uid under which the filter is run is used when transporting them,
unless a transport option overrides.

‘tcp_nodelay’          Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If this option is set false, it stops the Exim daemon setting the
TCP_NODELAY option on its listening sockets.  Setting TCP_NODELAY turns
off the "Nagle algorithm", which is a way of improving network
performance in interactive (character-by-character) situations.  Turning
it off should improve Exim's performance a bit, so that is what happens
by default.  However, it appears that some broken clients cannot cope,
and time out.  Hence this option.  It affects only those sockets that
are set up for listening by the daemon.  Sockets created by the smtp
transport for delivering mail always set TCP_NODELAY.

‘timeout_frozen_after’ Use: _main_       Type: _time_      Default: _0s_

   If ‘timeout_frozen_after’ is set to a time greater than zero, a
frozen message of any kind that has been in the queue for longer than
the given time is automatically cancelled at the next queue run.  If the
frozen message is a bounce message, it is just discarded; otherwise, a
bounce is sent to the sender, in a similar manner to cancellation by the
‘-Mg’ command line option.  If you want to timeout frozen bounce
messages earlier than other kinds of frozen message, see
‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’.

   *Note:* the default value of zero means no timeouts; with this
setting, frozen messages remain in the queue forever (except for any
frozen bounce messages that are released by
‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’).

‘timezone’             Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   The value of ‘timezone’ is used to set the environment variable TZ
while running Exim (if it is different on entry).  This ensures that all
timestamps created by Exim are in the required timezone.  If you want
all your timestamps to be in UTC (aka GMT) you should set

     timezone = UTC

   The default value is taken from TIMEZONE_DEFAULT in ‘Local/Makefile’,
or, if that is not set, from the value of the TZ environment variable
when Exim is built.  If ‘timezone’ is set to the empty string, either at
build or run time, any existing TZ variable is removed from the
environment when Exim runs.  This is appropriate behaviour for obtaining
wall-clock time on some, but unfortunately not all, operating systems.

‘tls_advertise_hosts’  Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   When Exim is built with support for TLS encrypted connections, the
availability of the STARTTLS command to set up an encrypted session is
advertised in response to EHLO only to those client hosts that match
this option.  See chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using
TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections. for details of Exim's support for
TLS. Note that the default value requires that a certificate be supplied
using the ‘tls_certificate’ option.  If TLS support for incoming
connections is not required the ‘tls_advertise_hosts’ option should be
set empty.

‘tls_alpn’             Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default: _smtp
                                         list_*__          : esmtp_

   If this option is set, the TLS library supports ALPN, and the client
offers either more than one ALPN name or a name which does not match the
list, the TLS connection is declined.

‘tls_certificate’      Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The value of this option is expanded, and must then be a list of
absolute paths to files which contain the server's certificates (in PEM
format).  Commonly only one file is needed.  The server's private key is
also assumed to be in this file if ‘tls_privatekey’ is unset.  See
chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP
connections. for further details.

   *Note*: The certificates defined by this option are used only when
Exim is receiving incoming messages as a server.  If you want to supply
certificates for use when sending messages as a client, you must set the
‘tls_certificate’ option in the relevant ‘smtp’ transport.

   *Note*: If you use filenames based on IP addresses, change the list
separator in the usual way (*note Changing list separators::) to avoid
confusion under IPv6.

   *Note*: Under versions of OpenSSL preceding 1.1.1, when a list of
more than one file is used, the ‘$tls_in_ourcert’ variable is
unreliable.  The macro "_TLS_BAD_MULTICERT_IN_OURCERT" will be defined
for those versions.

   If the option contains ‘$tls_out_sni’ and Exim is built against
OpenSSL, then if the OpenSSL build supports TLS extensions and the TLS
client sends the Server Name Indication extension, then this option and
others documented in *note Use of TLS Server Name Indication:: will be
re-expanded.

   If this option is unset or empty a self-signed certificate will be
used.  Under Linux this is generated at daemon startup; on other
platforms it will be generated fresh for every connection.

‘tls_crl’              Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies a certificate revocation list.  The expanded
value must be the name of a file that contains CRLs in PEM format.

   Under OpenSSL the option can specify a directory with CRL files.

   *Note:* Under OpenSSL the option must, if given, supply a CRL for
each signing element of the certificate chain (i.e.  all but the leaf).
For the file variant this can be multiple PEM blocks in the one file.

   See *note Use of TLS Server Name Indication:: for discussion of when
this option might be re-expanded.

‘tls_dh_max_bits’      Use: _main_       Type: _integer_   Default: _2236_

   The number of bits used for Diffie-Hellman key-exchange may be
suggested by the chosen TLS library.  That value might prove to be too
high for interoperability.  This option provides a maximum clamp on the
value suggested, trading off security for interoperability.

   The value must be at least 1024.

   The value 2236 was chosen because, at time of adding the option, it
was the hard-coded maximum value supported by the NSS cryptographic
library, as used by Thunderbird, while GnuTLS was suggesting 2432 bits
as normal.

   If you prefer more security and are willing to break some clients,
raise this number.

   Note that the value passed to GnuTLS for *generating* a new prime may
be a little less than this figure, because GnuTLS is inexact and may
produce a larger prime than requested.

‘tls_dhparam’          Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The value of this option is expanded and indicates the source of DH
parameters to be used by Exim.

   *Note: The Exim Maintainers strongly recommend using a filename with
site-generated local DH parameters*, which has been supported across all
versions of Exim.  The other specific constants available are a fallback
so that even when "unconfigured", Exim can offer Perfect Forward Secrecy
in older ciphersuites in TLS.

   If ‘tls_dhparam’ is a filename starting with a ‘/’, then it names a
file from which DH parameters should be loaded.  If the file exists, it
should hold a PEM-encoded PKCS#3 representation of the DH prime.  If the
file does not exist, for OpenSSL it is an error.  For GnuTLS, Exim will
attempt to create the file and fill it with a generated DH prime.  For
OpenSSL, if the DH bit-count from loading the file is greater than
‘tls_dh_max_bits’ then it will be ignored, and treated as though the
‘tls_dhparam’ were set to "none".

   If this option expands to the string "none", then no DH parameters
will be loaded by Exim.

   If this option expands to the string "historic" and Exim is using
GnuTLS, then Exim will attempt to load a file from inside the spool
directory.  If the file does not exist, Exim will attempt to create it.
See section *note GnuTLS parameter computation:: for further details.

   If Exim is using OpenSSL and this option is empty or unset, then Exim
will load a default DH prime; the default is Exim-specific but lacks
verifiable provenance.

   In older versions of Exim the default was the 2048 bit prime
described in *RFC 5114
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc5114#section-2.2)*, "2048-bit
MODP Group with 224-bit Prime Order Subgroup", which in IKE is assigned
number 23.

   Otherwise, the option must expand to the name used by Exim for any of
a number of DH primes specified in *RFC 2409
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2409)*, *RFC 3526
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3526)*, *RFC 5114
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc5114)*, *RFC 7919
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc7919)*, or from other sources.
As names, Exim uses a standard specified name, else "ike" followed by
the number used by IKE, or "default" which corresponds to
‘exim.dev.20160529.3’.

   The available standard primes are: ‘ffdhe2048’, ‘ffdhe3072’,
‘ffdhe4096’, ‘ffdhe6144’, ‘ffdhe8192’, ‘ike1’, ‘ike2’, ‘ike5’, ‘ike14’,
‘ike15’, ‘ike16’, ‘ike17’, ‘ike18’, ‘ike22’, ‘ike23’ and ‘ike24’.

   The available additional primes are: ‘exim.dev.20160529.1’,
‘exim.dev.20160529.2’ and ‘exim.dev.20160529.3’.

   Some of these will be too small to be accepted by clients.  Some may
be too large to be accepted by clients.  The open cryptographic
community has suspicions about the integrity of some of the later IKE
values, which led into *RFC 7919
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc7919)* providing new fixed
constants (the "ffdhe" identifiers).

   At this point, all of the "ike" values should be considered obsolete;
they are still in Exim to avoid breaking unusual configurations, but are
candidates for removal the next time we have backwards-incompatible
changes.  Two of them in particular (‘ike1’ and ‘ike22’) are called out
by *RFC 8247 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8247)* as MUST
NOT use for IPSEC, and two more (‘ike23’ and ‘ike24’) as SHOULD NOT.
Because of this, Exim regards them as deprecated; if either of the first
pair are used, warnings will be logged in the paniclog, and if any are
used then warnings will be logged in the mainlog.  All four will be
removed in a future Exim release.

   The TLS protocol does not negotiate an acceptable size for this;
clients tend to hard-drop connections if what is offered by the server
is unacceptable, whether too large or too small, and there's no
provision for the client to tell the server what these constraints are.
Thus, as a server operator, you need to make an educated guess as to
what is most likely to work for your userbase.

   Some known size constraints suggest that a bit-size in the range 2048
to 2236 is most likely to maximise interoperability.  The upper bound
comes from applications using the Mozilla Network Security Services
(NSS) library, which used to set its ‘DH_MAX_P_BITS’ upper-bound to
2236.  This affects many mail user agents (MUAs).  The lower bound comes
from Debian installs of Exim4 prior to the 4.80 release, as Debian used
to patch Exim to raise the minimum acceptable bound from 1024 to 2048.

‘tls_early_banner_hosts’Use: _main_      Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option, after expansion, lists hosts for which the SMTP banner
may be sent without waiting for the client Certificate and Finished TLS
records.  This will only be done on a TLS-on-connect port, when the
connection uses TLSv1.3, and when verification of the client certificate
is not needed.

   When it is possible it saves one whole roundtrip time.  The feature
may usefully be combined with TCP Fast Open.

‘tls_eccurve’          Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _‘auto’_

   This option selects EC curves for use by Exim when used with OpenSSL.
It has no effect when Exim is used with GnuTLS (the equivalent can be
done using a priority string for the ‘tls_require_ciphers’ option).

   After expansion it must contain one or (only for OpenSSL versions
1.1.1 onwards) more EC curve names, such as ‘prime256v1’, ‘secp384r1’,
or ‘P-521’.  Consult your OpenSSL manual for valid curve names.

   For OpenSSL versions before (and not including) 1.0.2, the string
‘auto’ selects ‘prime256v1’.  For more recent OpenSSL versions ‘auto’
tells the library to choose.

   For OpenSSL versions 3.5 onwards the string may be a full group tuple
list as described in the *documentation for SSL_CTX_set1_groups_list()
(https://docs.openssl.org/master/man3/SSL_CTX_set1_curves/#name)*.

   If the option expands to an empty string, the effect is undefined.

‘tls_ocsp_file’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option must if set expand to the absolute path to a file which
contains a current status proof for the server's certificate, as
obtained from the Certificate Authority.

   Usable for GnuTLS 3.4.4 or 3.3.17 or OpenSSL 1.1.0 (or later).  The
macro "_HAVE_TLS_OCSP" will be defined for those versions.

   For OpenSSL 1.1.0 or later, and for GnuTLS 3.5.6 or later the
expanded value of this option can be a list of files, to match a list
given for the ‘tls_certificate’ option.  The ordering of the two lists
must match.  The macro "_HAVE_TLS_OCSP_LIST" will be defined for those
versions.

   The file(s) should be in DER format, except for GnuTLS 3.6.3 or later
or for OpenSSL, when an optional filetype prefix can be used.  The
prefix must be one of "DER" or "PEM", followed by a single space.  If
one is used it sets the format for subsequent files in the list; the
initial format is DER. If multiple proofs are wanted, for multiple chain
elements (this only works under TLS1.3) they must be coded as a combined
OCSP response.

   Although GnuTLS will accept PEM files with multiple separate PEM
blobs (ie.  separate OCSP responses), it sends them in the TLS
Certificate record interleaved with the certificates of the chain;
although a GnuTLS client is happy with that, an OpenSSL client is not.

‘tls_on_connect_ports’ Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option specifies a list of incoming SSMTP (aka SMTPS) ports that
should operate the SSMTP (SMTPS) protocol, where a TLS session is
immediately set up without waiting for the client to issue a STARTTLS
command.  For further details, see section *note Support for the
submissions (aka SSMTP or SMTPS) protocol: Support for the submissions
[aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.

‘tls_privatekey’       Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The value of this option is expanded, and must then be a list of
absolute paths to files which contains the server's private keys.  If
this option is unset, or if the expansion is forced to fail, or the
result is an empty string, the private key is assumed to be in the same
file as the server's certificates.  See chapter *note Encrypted SMTP
connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections. for further
details.

   See *note Use of TLS Server Name Indication:: for discussion of when
this option might be re-expanded.

‘tls_remember_esmtp’   Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, Exim violates the RFCs by remembering
that it is in "esmtp" state after successfully negotiating a TLS
session.  This provides support for broken clients that fail to send a
new EHLO after starting a TLS session.

‘tls_require_ciphers’  Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option controls which ciphers can be used for incoming TLS
connections.  The ‘smtp’ transport has an option of the same name for
controlling outgoing connections.  This option is expanded for each
connection, so can be varied for different clients if required.  The
value of this option must be a list of permitted cipher suites.  The
OpenSSL and GnuTLS libraries handle cipher control in somewhat different
ways.  If GnuTLS is being used, the client controls the preference order
of the available ciphers.  Details are given in sections *note Requiring
specific ciphers in OpenSSL:: and *note Requiring specific ciphers or
other parameters in GnuTLS::.

‘tls_resumption_hosts’ Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option controls which connections to offer the TLS resumption
feature.  See *note TLS Resumption:: for details.

‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   See ‘tls_verify_hosts’ below.

‘tls_verify_certificates’Use: _main_     Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _system_

   The value of this option is expanded, and must then be either the
word "system" or the absolute path to a file or directory containing
permitted certificates for clients that match ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or
‘tls_try_verify_hosts’.

   The "system" value for the option will use a system default location
compiled into the SSL library.  This is not available for GnuTLS
versions preceding 3.0.20, and will be taken as empty; an explicit
location must be specified.

   The use of a directory for the option value is not available for
GnuTLS versions preceding 3.3.6 and a single file must be used.

   With OpenSSL the certificates specified explicitly either by file or
directory are added to those given by the system default location.

   These certificates should be for the certificate authorities trusted,
rather than the public cert of individual clients.  With both OpenSSL
and GnuTLS, if the value is a file then the certificates are sent by
Exim as a server to connecting clients, defining the list of accepted
certificate authorities.  Thus the values defined should be considered
public data.  To avoid this, use the explicit directory version.  (If
your peer is Exim up to 4.85, using GnuTLS, you may need to send the CAs
(thus using the file variant).  Otherwise the peer doesn't send its
certificate.)

   See *note Use of TLS Server Name Indication:: for discussion of when
this option might be re-expanded.

   A forced expansion failure or setting to an empty string is
equivalent to being unset.

   *Note*: For the server to verify the client certificate, the server's
TLS library might require that the certificate includes a Client
Authentication extension.  It is up to the Certificate Authority that
constructs and signs the certificate whether that is included.

‘tls_verify_hosts’     Use: _main_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option, along with ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’, controls the checking
of certificates from clients.  The expected certificates are defined by
‘tls_verify_certificates’, which must be set.  A configuration error
occurs if either ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ is set and
‘tls_verify_certificates’ is not set.

   Any client that matches ‘tls_verify_hosts’ is constrained by
‘tls_verify_certificates’.  When the client initiates a TLS session, it
must present one of the listed certificates.  If it does not, the
connection is aborted.  *Warning*: Including a host in
‘tls_verify_hosts’ does not require the host to use TLS. It can still
send SMTP commands through unencrypted connections.  Forcing a client to
use TLS has to be done separately using an ACL to reject inappropriate
commands when the connection is not encrypted.

   A weaker form of checking is provided by ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’.  If
a client matches this option (but not ‘tls_verify_hosts’), Exim requests
a certificate and checks it against ‘tls_verify_certificates’, but does
not abort the connection if there is no certificate or if it does not
match.  This state can be detected in an ACL, which makes it possible to
implement policies such as "accept for relay only if a verified
certificate has been received, but accept for local delivery if
encrypted, even without a verified certificate".

   Client hosts that match neither of these lists are not asked to
present certificates.

‘trusted_groups’       Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing.
If this option is set, any process that is running in one of the listed
groups, or which has one of them as a supplementary group, is trusted.
The groups can be specified numerically or by name.  See section *note
Trusted and admin users:: for details of what trusted callers are
permitted to do.  If neither ‘trusted_groups’ nor ‘trusted_users’ is
set, only root and the Exim user are trusted.

‘trusted_users’        Use: _main_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option is expanded just once, at the start of Exim's processing.
If this option is set, any process that is running as one of the listed
users is trusted.  The users can be specified numerically or by name.
See section *note Trusted and admin users:: for details of what trusted
callers are permitted to do.  If neither ‘trusted_groups’ nor
‘trusted_users’ is set, only root and the Exim user are trusted.

‘unknown_login’        Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_
‘unknown_username’     Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This is a specialized feature for use in unusual configurations.  By
default, if the uid of the caller of Exim cannot be looked up using
‘getpwuid()’, Exim gives up.  The ‘unknown_login’ option can be used to
set a login name to be used in this circumstance.  It is expanded, so
values like ‘user$caller_uid’ can be set.  When ‘unknown_login’ is used,
the value of ‘unknown_username’ is used for the user's real name (gecos
field), unless this has been set by the ‘-F’ option.

‘untrusted_set_sender’ Use: _main_       Type: _address    Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   When an untrusted user submits a message to Exim using the standard
input, Exim normally creates an envelope sender address from the user's
login and the default qualification domain.  Data from the ‘-f’ option
(for setting envelope senders on non-SMTP messages) or the SMTP MAIL
command (if ‘-bs’ or ‘-bS’ is used) is ignored.

   However, untrusted users are permitted to set an empty envelope
sender address, to declare that a message should never generate any
bounces.  For example:

     exim -f '<>' user@domain.example

   The ‘untrusted_set_sender’ option allows you to permit untrusted
users to set other envelope sender addresses in a controlled way.  When
it is set, untrusted users are allowed to set envelope sender addresses
that match any of the patterns in the list.  Like all address lists, the
string is expanded.  The identity of the user is in ‘$sender_ident’, so
you can, for example, restrict users to setting senders that start with
their login ids followed by a hyphen by a setting like this:

     untrusted_set_sender = ^$sender_ident-

   If you want to allow untrusted users to set envelope sender addresses
without restriction, you can use

     untrusted_set_sender = *

   The ‘untrusted_set_sender’ option applies to all forms of local
input, but only to the setting of the envelope sender.  It does not
permit untrusted users to use the other options which trusted user can
use to override message parameters.  Furthermore, it does not stop Exim
from removing an existing _Sender:_ header in the message, or from
adding a _Sender:_ header if necessary.  See ‘local_sender_retain’ and
‘local_from_check’ for ways of overriding these actions.  The handling
of the _Sender:_ header is also described in section *note Sender::
Sender;.

   The log line for a message's arrival shows the envelope sender
following "<=".  For local messages, the user's login always follows,
after "U=".  In ‘-bp’ displays, and in the Exim monitor, if an untrusted
user sets an envelope sender address, the user's login is shown in
parentheses after the sender address.

‘uucp_from_pattern’    Use: _main_       Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_
‘uucp_from_sender’     Use: _main_       Type:             Default: _‘$1’_
                                         _string_*__

   Some applications that pass messages to an MTA via a command line
interface use an initial line starting with "From " to pass the envelope
sender.  In particular, this is used by UUCP software.  Exim recognizes
such a line by means of a regular expression that is set in
‘uucp_from_pattern’.  When the pattern matches, the sender address is
constructed by expanding the contents of ‘uucp_from_sender’, provided
that the caller of Exim is a trusted user.  The default pattern
recognizes lines in the following two forms:

     From ph10 Fri Jan  5 12:35 GMT 1996
     From ph10 Fri, 7 Jan 97 14:00:00 GMT

   The pattern can be seen by running

     exim -bP uucp_from_pattern

   It checks only up to the hours and minutes, and allows for a 2-digit
or 4-digit year in the second case.  The first word after "From " is
matched in the regular expression by a parenthesized subpattern.  The
default value for ‘uucp_from_sender’ is "$1", which therefore just uses
this first word ("ph10" in the example above) as the message's sender.
See also ‘ignore_fromline_hosts’.

‘warn_message_file’    Use: _main_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines a template file containing paragraphs of text to
be used for constructing the warning message which is sent by Exim when
a message has been in the queue for a specified amount of time, as
specified by ‘delay_warning’.  Details of the file's contents are given
in chapter *note Customizing bounce and warning messages: Customizing
messages.  The option is expanded to give the file path, which must be
absolute and untainted.  See also ‘bounce_message_file’.

‘wellknown_advertise_hosts’Use: _main_   Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option enables the advertising of the SMTP WELLKNOWN extension.
See also the ‘acl_smtp_wellknown’ ACL (*note The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL::).

‘write_rejectlog’      Use: _main_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If this option is set false, Exim no longer writes anything to the
reject log.  See chapter *note Log files:: for details of what Exim
writes to its logs.


File: spec.info,  Node: Generic options for routers,  Next: The accept router,  Prev: Main configuration,  Up: Top

15 Generic options for routers
******************************

This chapter describes the generic options that apply to all routers.
Those that are preconditions are marked with ** in the "use" field.

   For a general description of how a router operates, see sections
*note Running an individual router:: and *note Router preconditions::.
The latter specifies the order in which the preconditions are tested.
The order of expansion of the options that provide data for a transport
is: ‘errors_to’, ‘headers_add’, ‘headers_remove’, ‘transport’.

   The name of a router is limited to be 64 ASCII characters long; prior
to Exim 4.95 names would be silently truncated at this length, but now
it is enforced.

‘address_data’         Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The string is expanded just before the router is run, that is, after
all the precondition tests have succeeded.  If the expansion is forced
to fail, the router declines, the value of ‘address_data’ remains
unchanged, and the ‘more’ option controls what happens next.  Other
expansion failures cause delivery of the address to be deferred.

   When the expansion succeeds, the value is retained with the address,
and can be accessed using the variable ‘$address_data’ in the current
router, subsequent routers, and the eventual transport.

   *Warning*: If the current or any subsequent router is a ‘redirect’
router that runs a user's filter file, the contents of ‘$address_data’
are accessible in the filter.  This is not normally a problem, because
such data is usually either not confidential or it "belongs" to the
current user, but if you do put confidential data into ‘$address_data’
you need to remember this point.

   Even if the router declines or passes, the value of ‘$address_data’
remains with the address, though it can be changed by another
‘address_data’ setting on a subsequent router.  If a router generates
child addresses, the value of ‘$address_data’ propagates to them.  This
also applies to the special kind of "child" that is generated by a
router with the ‘unseen’ option.

   The idea of ‘address_data’ is that you can use it to look up a lot of
data for the address once, and then pick out parts of the data later.
For example, you could use a single LDAP lookup to return a string of
the form

     uid=1234 gid=5678 mailbox=/mail/xyz forward=/home/xyz/.forward

   In the transport you could pick out the mailbox by a setting such as

     file = ${extract{mailbox}{$address_data}}

   This makes the configuration file less messy, and also reduces the
number of lookups (though Exim does cache lookups).

   See also the ‘set’ option below.

   The ‘address_data’ facility is also useful as a means of passing
information from one router to another, and from a router to a
transport.  In addition, if ‘$address_data’ is set by a router when
verifying a recipient address from an ACL, it remains available for use
in the rest of the ACL statement.  After verifying a sender, the value
is transferred to ‘$sender_address_data’.

‘address_test’         Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _routers_**__

   If this option is set false, the router is skipped when routing is
being tested by means of the ‘-bt’ command line option.  This can be a
convenience when your first router sends messages to an external
scanner, because it saves you having to set the "already scanned"
indicator when testing real address routing.

‘cannot_route_message’ Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies a text message that is used when an address
cannot be routed because Exim has run out of routers.  The default
message is "Unrouteable address".  This option is useful only on routers
that have ‘more’ set false, or on the very last router in a
configuration, because the value that is used is taken from the last
router that is considered.  This includes a router that is skipped
because its preconditions are not met, as well as a router that
declines.  For example, using the default configuration, you could put:

     cannot_route_message = Remote domain not found in DNS

   on the first router, which is a ‘dnslookup’ router with ‘more’ set
false, and

     cannot_route_message = Unknown local user

   on the final router that checks for local users.  If string expansion
fails for this option, the default message is used.  Unless the
expansion failure was explicitly forced, a message about the failure is
written to the main and panic logs, in addition to the normal message
about the routing failure.

‘caseful_local_part’   Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   By default, routers handle the local parts of addresses in a
case-insensitive manner, though the actual case is preserved for
transmission with the message.  If you want the case of letters to be
significant in a router, you must set this option true.  For individual
router options that contain address or local part lists (for example,
‘local_parts’), case-sensitive matching can be turned on by "+caseful"
as a list item.  See section *note Case of letters in address lists::
for more details.

   The value of the ‘$local_part’ variable is forced to lower case while
a router is running unless ‘caseful_local_part’ is set.  When a router
assigns an address to a transport, the value of ‘$local_part’ when the
transport runs is the same as it was in the router.  Similarly, when a
router generates child addresses by aliasing or forwarding, the values
of ‘$original_local_part’ and ‘$parent_local_part’ are those that were
used by the redirecting router.

   This option applies to the processing of an address by a router.
When a recipient address is being processed in an ACL, there is a
separate ‘control’ modifier that can be used to specify case-sensitive
processing within the ACL (see section *note Use of the control
modifier::).

‘check_local_user’     Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _routers_**__                       _false_

   When this option is true, Exim checks that the local part of the
recipient address (with affixes removed if relevant) is the name of an
account on the local system.  The check is done by calling the
‘getpwnam()’ function rather than trying to read ‘/etc/passwd’ directly.
This means that other methods of holding password data (such as NIS) are
supported.  If the local part is a local user, ‘$local_part_data’ is set
to an untainted version of the local part and ‘$home’ is set from the
password data.  The latter can be tested in other preconditions that are
evaluated after this one (the order of evaluation is given in section
*note Router preconditions::).  However, the value of ‘$home’ can be
overridden by ‘router_home_directory’.  If the local part is not a local
user, the router is skipped.

   If you want to check that the local part is either the name of a
local user or matches something else, you cannot combine
‘check_local_user’ with a setting of ‘local_parts’, because that
specifies the logical _and_ of the two conditions.  However, you can use
a ‘passwd’ lookup in a ‘local_parts’ setting to achieve this.  For
example:

     local_parts = passwd;$local_part : lsearch;/etc/other/users

   Note, however, that the side effects of ‘check_local_user’ (such as
setting up a home directory) do not occur when a ‘passwd’ lookup is used
in a ‘local_parts’ (or any other) precondition.

‘condition’            Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _routers_**__     _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies a general precondition test that has to succeed
for the router to be called.  The ‘condition’ option is the last
precondition to be evaluated (see section *note Router preconditions::).
The string is expanded, and if the result is a forced failure, or an
empty string, or one of the strings "0" or "no" or "false" (checked
without regard to the case of the letters), the router is skipped, and
the address is offered to the next one.

   If the result is any other value, the router is run (as this is the
last precondition to be evaluated, all the other preconditions must be
true).

   This option is unusual in that multiple ‘condition’ options may be
present.  All ‘condition’ options must succeed.

   The ‘condition’ option provides a means of applying custom conditions
to the running of routers.  Note that in the case of a simple
conditional expansion, the default expansion values are exactly what is
wanted.  For example:

     condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}}

   Because of the default behaviour of the string expansion, this is
equivalent to

     condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}{true}{}}

   A multiple condition example, which succeeds:

     condition = ${if >{$message_age}{600}}
     condition = ${if !eq{${lc:$local_part}}{postmaster}}
     condition = foobar

   If the expansion fails (other than forced failure) delivery is
deferred.  Some of the other precondition options are common special
cases that could in fact be specified using ‘condition’.

   Historical note: We have ‘condition’ on ACLs and on Routers.  Routers
are far older, and use one set of semantics.  ACLs are newer and when
they were created, the ACL ‘condition’ process was given far stricter
parse semantics.  The ‘bool{}’ expansion condition uses the same rules
as ACLs.  The ‘bool_lax{}’ expansion condition uses the same rules as
Routers.  More pointedly, the ‘bool_lax{}’ was written to match the
existing Router rules processing behavior.

   This is best illustrated in an example:

     # If used in an ACL condition will fail with a syntax error, but
     # in a router condition any extra characters are treated as a string

     $ exim -be '${if eq {${lc:GOOGLE.com}} {google.com}} {yes} {no}}'
     true {yes} {no}}

     $ exim -be '${if eq {${lc:WHOIS.com}} {google.com}} {yes} {no}}'
      {yes} {no}}

   In each example above, the ‘if’ statement actually ends after
"{google.com}}".  Since no true or false braces were defined, the
default ‘if’ behavior is to return a boolean true or a null answer
(which evaluates to false).  The rest of the line is then treated as a
string.  So the first example resulted in the boolean answer "true" with
the string " {yes} {no}}" appended to it.  The second example resulted
in the null output (indicating false) with the string " {yes} {no}}"
appended to it.

   In fact you can put excess forward braces in too.  In the router
‘condition’, Exim's parser only looks for "{" symbols when they mean
something, like after a "$" or when required as part of a conditional.
But otherwise "{" and "}" are treated as ordinary string characters.

   Thus, in a Router, the above expansion strings will both always
evaluate true, as the result of expansion is a non-empty string which
doesn't match an explicit false value.  This can be tricky to debug.  By
contrast, in an ACL either of those strings will always result in an
expansion error because the result doesn't look sufficiently boolean.

‘debug_print’          Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set and debugging is enabled (see the ‘-d’ command
line option) or in address-testing mode (see the ‘-bt’ command line
option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging output.
If expansion of the string fails, the error message is written to the
debugging output, and Exim carries on processing.  This option is
provided to help with checking out the values of variables and so on
when debugging router configurations.  For example, if a ‘condition’
option appears not to be working, ‘debug_print’ can be used to output
the variables it references.  The output happens after checks for
‘domains’, ‘local_parts’, and ‘check_local_user’ but before any other
preconditions are tested.  A newline is added to the text if it does not
end with one.  The variable ‘$router_name’ contains the name of the
router.

‘disable_logging’      Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, nothing is logged for any routing errors
or for any deliveries caused by this router.  You should not set this
option unless you really, really know what you are doing.  See also the
generic transport option of the same name.

‘dnssec_request_domains’Use: _routers_   Type: _domain     Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   DNS lookups for domains matching ‘dnssec_request_domains’ will be
done with the DNSSEC request bit set.  This applies to all of the SRV,
MX, AAAA, A lookup sequence.

‘dnssec_require_domains’Use: _routers_   Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   DNS lookups for domains matching ‘dnssec_require_domains’ will be
done with the DNSSEC request bit set.  Any returns not having the
Authenticated Data bit (AD bit) set will be ignored and logged as a
host-lookup failure.  This applies to all of the SRV, MX, AAAA, A lookup
sequence.

‘domains’              Use:              Type: _domain     Default:
                       _routers_**__     list_*__          _unset_

   If this option is set, the argument is first expanded to give a list.
The router is skipped unless the current domain matches the list.  The
data returned by the list check is placed in ‘$domain_data’ for use in
string expansions of the driver's private options and in the transport.
If the result of expansion is empty or a forced-fail, the router is
skipped.

   See section *note Router preconditions:: for a list of the order in
which preconditions are evaluated.

   A complex example, using a file like:

     alice@dom1
     bill@dom1
     maggie@dom1

   and checking both domain and local_part

     domains =         ${domain:${lookup {$local_part@$domain} lseach,ret=key {/path/to/accountsfile}}}
     local_parts = ${local_part:${lookup {$local_part@$domain} lseach,ret=key {/path/to/accountsfile}}}

‘driver’               Use: _routers_    Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option must always be set.  It specifies which of the available
routers is to be used.

‘dsn_lasthop’          Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, and extended DSN (*RFC 3461
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3461)*) processing is in
effect, Exim will not pass on DSN requests to downstream DSN-aware hosts
but will instead send a success DSN as if the next hop does not support
DSN. Not effective on redirect routers.

‘errors_to’            Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If a router successfully handles an address, it may assign the
address to a transport for delivery or it may generate child addresses.
In both cases, if there is a delivery problem during later processing,
the resulting bounce message is sent to the address that results from
expanding this string, provided that the address verifies successfully.
The ‘errors_to’ option is expanded before ‘headers_add’,
‘headers_remove’, and ‘transport’.

   The ‘errors_to’ setting associated with an address can be overridden
if it subsequently passes through other routers that have their own
‘errors_to’ settings, or if the message is delivered by a transport with
a ‘return_path’ setting.

   If ‘errors_to’ is unset, or the expansion is forced to fail, or the
result of the expansion fails to verify, the errors address associated
with the incoming address is used.  At top level, this is the envelope
sender.  A non-forced expansion failure causes delivery to be deferred.

   If an address for which ‘errors_to’ has been set ends up being
delivered over SMTP, the envelope sender for that delivery is the
‘errors_to’ value, so that any bounces that are generated by other MTAs
on the delivery route are also sent there.  You can set ‘errors_to’ to
the empty string by either of these settings:

     errors_to =
     errors_to = ""

   An expansion item that yields an empty string has the same effect.
If you do this, a locally detected delivery error for addresses
processed by this router no longer gives rise to a bounce message; the
error is discarded.  If the address is delivered to a remote host, the
return path is set to ‘<>’, unless overridden by the ‘return_path’
option on the transport.

   If for some reason you want to discard local errors, but use a
non-empty MAIL command for remote delivery, you can preserve the
original return path in ‘$address_data’ in the router, and reinstate it
in the transport by setting ‘return_path’.

   The most common use of ‘errors_to’ is to direct mailing list bounces
to the manager of the list, as described in section *note Using Exim to
handle mailing lists::, or to implement VERP (Variable Envelope Return
Paths) (see section *note Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP):
Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].).

‘expn’                 Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _routers_**__

   If this option is turned off, the router is skipped when testing an
address as a result of processing an SMTP EXPN command.  You might, for
example, want to turn it off on a router for users' ‘.forward’ files,
while leaving it on for the system alias file.  See section *note Router
preconditions:: for a list of the order in which preconditions are
evaluated.

   The use of the SMTP EXPN command is controlled by an ACL (see chapter
*note Access control lists::).  When Exim is running an EXPN command, it
is similar to testing an address with ‘-bt’.  Compare VRFY, whose
counterpart is ‘-bv’.

‘fail_verify’          Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Setting this option has the effect of setting both
‘fail_verify_sender’ and ‘fail_verify_recipient’ to the same value.

‘fail_verify_recipient’Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true and an address is accepted by this router when
verifying a recipient, verification fails.

‘fail_verify_sender’   Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true and an address is accepted by this router when
verifying a sender, verification fails.

‘fallback_hosts’       Use: _routers_    Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The argument must, after expansion, be a colon-separated list of host
names or IP addresses.  The list separator can be changed (see section
*note Changing list separators::), and a port can be specified with each
name or address.  In fact, the format of each item is exactly the same
as defined for the list of hosts in a ‘manualroute’ router (see section
*note Format of one host item::).

   If a router queues an address for a remote transport, this host list
is associated with the address, and used instead of the transport's
fallback host list.  If ‘hosts_randomize’ is set on the transport, the
order of the list is randomized for each use.  See the ‘fallback_hosts’
option of the ‘smtp’ transport for further details.

‘group’                Use: _routers_    Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   When a router queues an address for a transport, and the transport
does not specify a group, the group given here is used when running the
delivery process.  The group may be specified numerically or by name.
If expansion fails, the error is logged and delivery is deferred.  The
default is unset, unless ‘check_local_user’ is set, when the default is
taken from the password information.  See also ‘initgroups’ and ‘user’
and the discussion in chapter *note Environment for running local
transports: Environment for local transports.

‘headers_add’          Use: _routers_    Type: _list_*__   Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option specifies a list of text headers, newline-separated (by
default, changeable in the usual way *note Changing list separators::),
that is associated with any addresses that are accepted by the router.
Each item is separately expanded, at routing time.  However, this option
has no effect when an address is just being verified.  The way in which
the text is used to add header lines at transport time is described in
section *note Adding and removing header lines in routers and
transports::.  New header lines are not actually added until the message
is in the process of being transported.  This means that references to
header lines in string expansions in the transport's configuration do
not "see" the added header lines.

   The ‘headers_add’ option is expanded after ‘errors_to’, but before
‘headers_remove’ and ‘transport’.  If an item is empty, or if an item
expansion is forced to fail, the item has no effect.  Other expansion
failures are treated as configuration errors.

   Unlike most options, ‘headers_add’ can be specified multiple times
for a router; all listed headers are added.

   *Warning 1*: The ‘headers_add’ option cannot be used for a ‘redirect’
router that has the ‘one_time’ option set.

   *Warning 2*: If the ‘unseen’ option is set on the router, all header
additions are deleted when the address is passed on to subsequent
routers.  For a ‘redirect’ router, if a generated address is the same as
the incoming address, this can lead to duplicate addresses with
different header modifications.  Exim does not do duplicate deliveries
(except, in certain circumstances, to pipes - see section *note
Duplicate addresses: Duplicate addresses <1>.), but it is undefined
which of the duplicates is discarded, so this ambiguous situation should
be avoided.  The ‘repeat_use’ option of the ‘redirect’ router may be of
help.

‘headers_remove’       Use: _routers_    Type: _list_*__   Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option specifies a list of text headers, colon-separated (by
default, changeable in the usual way *note Changing list separators::),
that is associated with any addresses that are accepted by the router.
However, the option has no effect when an address is just being
verified.  Each list item is separately expanded, at transport time.  If
an item ends in *, it will match any header with the given prefix.  The
way in which the text is used to remove header lines at transport time
is described in section *note Adding and removing header lines in
routers and transports::.  Header lines are not actually removed until
the message is in the process of being transported.  This means that
references to header lines in string expansions in the transport's
configuration still "see" the original header lines.

   The ‘headers_remove’ option is handled after ‘errors_to’ and
‘headers_add’, but before ‘transport’.  If an item expansion is forced
to fail, the item has no effect.  Other expansion failures are treated
as configuration errors.

   Unlike most options, ‘headers_remove’ can be specified multiple times
for a router; all listed headers are removed.

   *Warning 1*: The ‘headers_remove’ option cannot be used for a
‘redirect’ router that has the ‘one_time’ option set.

   *Warning 2*: If the ‘unseen’ option is set on the router, all header
removal requests are deleted when the address is passed on to subsequent
routers, and this can lead to problems with duplicates - see the similar
warning for ‘headers_add’ above.

   *Warning 3*: Because of the separate expansion of the list items,
items that contain a list separator must have it doubled.  To avoid
this, change the list separator (*note Changing list separators::).

‘ignore_target_hosts’  Use: _routers_    Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Although this option is a host list, it should normally contain IP
address entries rather than names.  If any host that is looked up by the
router has an IP address that matches an item in this list, Exim behaves
as if that IP address did not exist.  This option allows you to cope
with rogue DNS entries like

     remote.domain.example.  A  127.0.0.1

   by setting

     ignore_target_hosts = 127.0.0.1

   on the relevant router.  If all the hosts found by a ‘dnslookup’
router are discarded in this way, the router declines.  In a
conventional configuration, an attempt to mail to such a domain would
normally provoke the "unrouteable domain" error, and an attempt to
verify an address in the domain would fail.  Similarly, if
‘ignore_target_hosts’ is set on an ‘ipliteral’ router, the router
declines if presented with one of the listed addresses.

   You can use this option to disable the use of IPv4 or IPv6 for mail
delivery by means of the first or the second of the following settings,
respectively:

     ignore_target_hosts = 0.0.0.0/0
     ignore_target_hosts = <; 0::0/0

   The pattern in the first line matches all IPv4 addresses, whereas the
pattern in the second line matches all IPv6 addresses.

   This option may also be useful for ignoring link-local and site-local
IPv6 addresses.  Because, like all host lists, the value of
‘ignore_target_hosts’ is expanded before use as a list, it is possible
to make it dependent on the domain that is being routed.

   During its expansion, ‘$host_address’ is set to the IP address that
is being checked.

‘initgroups’           Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If the router queues an address for a transport, and this option is
true, and the uid supplied by the router is not overridden by the
transport, the ‘initgroups()’ function is called when running the
transport to ensure that any additional groups associated with the uid
are set up.  See also ‘group’ and ‘user’ and the discussion in chapter
*note Environment for running local transports: Environment for local
transports.

‘local_part_prefix’    Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _routers_**__     list_             _unset_

   If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the local part
starts with one of the given strings, or ‘local_part_prefix_optional’ is
true.  See section *note Router preconditions:: for a list of the order
in which preconditions are evaluated.

   The list is scanned from left to right, and the first prefix that
matches is used.  Limited forms of wildcard are available; if the prefix
begins with an asterisk, it matches the longest possible sequence of
arbitrary characters at the start of the local part.

   If is begins with a tilde, it matches the shortest possible sequence.
An asterisk or tilde

   should therefore always be followed by some character that does not
occur in normal local parts.  Wildcarding can be used to set up multiple
user mailboxes, as described in section *note Multiple user mailboxes::.

   During the testing of the ‘local_parts’ option, and while the router
is running, the prefix is removed from the local part, and is available
in the expansion variable ‘$local_part_prefix’.  When a message is being
delivered, if the router accepts the address, this remains true during
subsequent delivery by a transport.  In particular, the local part that
is transmitted in the RCPT command for LMTP, SMTP, and BSMTP deliveries
has the prefix removed by default.  This behaviour can be overridden by
setting ‘rcpt_include_affixes’ true on the relevant transport.

   If wildcarding (above) was used then the part of the prefix matching
the wildcard is available in ‘$local_part_prefix_v’.

   When an address is being verified, ‘local_part_prefix’ affects only
the behaviour of the router.  If the callout feature of verification is
in use, this means that the full address, including the prefix, will be
used during the callout.

   The prefix facility is commonly used to handle local parts of the
form ‘owner-something’.  Another common use is to support local parts of
the form ‘real-username’ to bypass a user's ‘.forward’ file - helpful
when trying to tell a user their forwarding is broken - by placing a
router like this one immediately before the router that handles
‘.forward’ files:

     real_localuser:
       driver = accept
       local_part_prefix = real-
       check_local_user
       transport = local_delivery

   For security, it would probably be a good idea to restrict the use of
this router to locally-generated messages, using a condition such as
this:

       condition = ${if match_ip {$sender_host_address} \
     			{<; ; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1}}

   If both ‘local_part_prefix’ and ‘local_part_suffix’ are set for a
router, both conditions must be met if not optional.  Care must be taken
if wildcards are used in both a prefix and a suffix on the same router.
Different separator characters must be used to avoid ambiguity.

‘local_part_prefix_optional’Use: _routers_Type: _boolean_  Default:
                                                           _false_

   See ‘local_part_prefix’ above.

‘local_part_suffix’    Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _routers_**__     list_             _unset_

   This option operates in the same way as ‘local_part_prefix’, except
that the local part must end (rather than start) with the given string,
the ‘local_part_suffix_optional’ option determines whether the suffix is
mandatory, and the wildcard *

   or ~

   character, if present, must be the last character of the suffix.
This option facility is commonly used to handle local parts of the form
‘something-request’ and multiple user mailboxes of the form
‘username-foo’.

‘local_part_suffix_optional’Use: _routers_Type: _boolean_  Default:
                                                           _false_

   See ‘local_part_suffix’ above.

‘local_parts’          Use:              Type: _local      Default:
                       _routers_**__     part list_*__     _unset_

   If this option is set, the argument is first expanded to give a list.
The router is run only if the local part of the address matches the
list.  If the result of expansion is empty or a forced-fail, the router
is skipped.

   See section *note Router preconditions:: for a list of the order in
which preconditions are evaluated, and section *note Local part lists::
for a discussion of local part lists.  Because the string is expanded,
it is possible to make it depend on the domain, for example:

     local_parts = dbm;/usr/local/specials/$domain_data

   The data returned by the list check for the local part is placed in
the variable ‘$local_part_data’ for use in expansions of the router's
private options or in the transport.  You might use this option, for
example, if you have a large number of local virtual domains, and you
want to send all postmaster mail to the same place without having to set
up an alias in each virtual domain:

     postmaster:
       driver = redirect
       local_parts = postmaster
       data = postmaster@real.domain.example

‘log_as_local’         Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                                                           below_

   Exim has two logging styles for delivery, the idea being to make
local deliveries stand out more visibly from remote ones.  In the
"local" style, the recipient address is given just as the local part,
without a domain.  The use of this style is controlled by this option.
It defaults to true for the ‘accept’ router, and false for all the
others.  This option applies only when a router assigns an address to a
transport.  It has no effect on routers that redirect addresses.

‘more’                 Use: _routers_    Type:             Default: _true_
                                         _boolean_*__

   The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid
boolean value, that is, one of the strings "yes", "no", "true", or
"false".  Any other result causes an error, and delivery is deferred.
If the expansion is forced to fail, the default value for the option
(true) is used.  Other failures cause delivery to be deferred.

   If this option is set false, and the router declines to handle the
address, no further routers are tried, routing fails, and the address is
bounced.  However, if the router explicitly passes an address to the
following router by means of the setting

     self = pass

   or otherwise, the setting of ‘more’ is ignored.  Also, the setting of
‘more’ does not affect the behaviour if one of the precondition tests
fails.  In that case, the address is always passed to the next router.

   Note that ‘address_data’ is not considered to be a precondition.  If
its expansion is forced to fail, the router declines, and the value of
‘more’ controls what happens next.

‘pass_on_timeout’      Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If a router times out during a host lookup, it normally causes
deferral of the address.  If ‘pass_on_timeout’ is set, the address is
passed on to the next router, overriding ‘no_more’.  This may be helpful
for systems that are intermittently connected to the Internet, or those
that want to pass to a smart host any messages that cannot immediately
be delivered.

   There are occasional other temporary errors that can occur while
doing DNS lookups.  They are treated in the same way as a timeout, and
this option applies to all of them.

‘pass_router’          Use: _routers_    Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   Routers that recognize the generic ‘self’ option (‘dnslookup’,
‘ipliteral’, and ‘manualroute’) are able to return "pass", forcing
routing to continue, and overriding a false setting of ‘more’.  When one
of these routers returns "pass", the address is normally handed on to
the next router in sequence.  This can be changed by setting
‘pass_router’ to the name of another router.  However (unlike
‘redirect_router’) the named router must be below the current router, to
avoid loops.  Note that this option applies only to the special case of
"pass".  It does not apply when a router returns "decline" because it
cannot handle an address.

‘redirect_router’      Use: _routers_    Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   Sometimes an administrator knows that it is pointless to reprocess
addresses generated from alias or forward files with the same router
again.  For example, if an alias file translates real names into login
ids there is no point searching the alias file a second time, especially
if it is a large file.

   The ‘redirect_router’ option can be set to the name of any router
instance.  It causes the routing of any generated addresses to start at
the named router instead of at the first router.  This option has no
effect if the router in which it is set does not generate new addresses.

‘require_files’        Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _routers_**__     list_*__          _unset_

   This option provides a general mechanism for predicating the running
of a router on the existence or non-existence of certain files or
directories.  Before running a router, as one of its precondition tests,
Exim works its way through the ‘require_files’ list, expanding each item
separately.

   Because the list is split before expansion, any colons in expansion
items must be doubled, or the facility for using a different list
separator must be used (*note Changing list separators::).  If any
expansion is forced to fail, the item is ignored.  Other expansion
failures cause routing of the address to be deferred.

   If any expanded string is empty, it is ignored.  Otherwise, except as
described below, each string must be a fully qualified file path,
optionally preceded by "!".  The paths are passed to the ‘stat()’
function to test for the existence of the files or directories.  The
router is skipped if any paths not preceded by "!"  do not exist, or if
any paths preceded by "!"  do exist.

   If ‘stat()’ cannot determine whether a file exists or not, delivery
of the message is deferred.  This can happen when NFS-mounted
filesystems are unavailable.

   This option is checked after the ‘domains’, ‘local_parts’, and
‘senders’ options, so you cannot use it to check for the existence of a
file in which to look up a domain, local part, or sender.  (See section
*note Router preconditions:: for a full list of the order in which
preconditions are evaluated.)  However, as these options are all
expanded, you can use the ‘exists’ expansion condition to make such
tests.  The ‘require_files’ option is intended for checking files that
the router may be going to use internally, or which are needed by a
transport (e.g., ‘.procmailrc’).

   During delivery, the ‘stat()’ function is run as root, but there is a
facility for some checking of the accessibility of a file by another
user.  This is not a proper permissions check, but just a "rough" check
that operates as follows:

   If an item in a ‘require_files’ list does not contain any forward
slash characters, it is taken to be the user (and optional group,
separated by a comma) to be checked for subsequent files in the list.
If no group is specified but the user is specified symbolically, the gid
associated with the uid is used.  For example:

     require_files = mail:/some/file
     require_files = $local_part_data:$home/.procmailrc

   If a user or group name in a ‘require_files’ list does not exist, the
‘require_files’ condition fails.

   Exim performs the check by scanning along the components of the file
path, and checking the access for the given uid and gid.  It checks for
"x" access on directories, and "r" access on the final file.  Note that
this means that file access control lists, if the operating system has
them, are ignored.

   *Warning 1*: When the router is being run to verify addresses for an
incoming SMTP message, Exim is not running as root, but under its own
uid.  This may affect the result of a ‘require_files’ check.  In
particular, ‘stat()’ may yield the error EACCES ("Permission denied").
This means that the Exim user is not permitted to read one of the
directories on the file's path.

   *Warning 2*: Even when Exim is running as root while delivering a
message, ‘stat()’ can yield EACCES for a file in an NFS directory that
is mounted without root access.  In this case, if a check for access by
a particular user is requested, Exim creates a subprocess that runs as
that user, and tries the check again in that process.

   The default action for handling an unresolved EACCES is to consider
it to be caused by a configuration error, and routing is deferred
because the existence or non-existence of the file cannot be determined.
However, in some circumstances it may be desirable to treat this
condition as if the file did not exist.  If the filename (or the
exclamation mark that precedes the filename for non-existence) is
preceded by a plus sign, the EACCES error is treated as if the file did
not exist.  For example:

     require_files = +/some/file

   If the router is not an essential part of verification (for example,
it handles users' ‘.forward’ files), another solution is to set the
‘verify’ option false so that the router is skipped when verifying.

‘retry_use_local_part’ Use: _routers_    Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                                                           below_

   When a delivery suffers a temporary routing failure, a retry record
is created in Exim's hints database.  For addresses whose routing
depends only on the domain, the key for the retry record should not
involve the local part, but for other addresses, both the domain and the
local part should be included.  Usually, remote routing is of the former
kind, and local routing is of the latter kind.

   This option controls whether the local part is used to form the key
for retry hints for addresses that suffer temporary errors while being
handled by this router.  The default value is true for any router that
has any of ‘check_local_user’, ‘local_parts’, ‘condition’,
‘local_part_prefix’, ‘local_part_suffix’, ‘senders’ or ‘require_files’
set, and false otherwise.  Note that this option does not apply to hints
keys for transport delays; they are controlled by a generic transport
option of the same name.

   Failing to set this option when it is needed (because a remote router
handles only some of the local-parts for a domain) can result in
incorrect error messages being generated.

   The setting of ‘retry_use_local_part’ applies only to the router on
which it appears.  If the router generates child addresses, they are
routed independently; this setting does not become attached to them.

‘router_home_directory’Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option sets a home directory for use while the router is
running.  (Compare ‘transport_home_directory’, which sets a home
directory for later transporting.)  In particular, if used on a
‘redirect’ router, this option sets a value for ‘$home’ while a filter
is running.  The value is expanded; forced expansion failure causes the
option to be ignored - other failures cause the router to defer.

   Expansion of ‘router_home_directory’ happens immediately after the
‘check_local_user’ test (if configured), before any further expansions
take place.  (See section *note Router preconditions:: for a list of the
order in which preconditions are evaluated.)  While the router is
running, ‘router_home_directory’ overrides the value of ‘$home’ that
came from ‘check_local_user’.

   When a router accepts an address and assigns it to a local transport
(including the cases when a ‘redirect’ router generates a pipe, file, or
autoreply delivery), the home directory setting for the transport is
taken from the first of these values that is set:

   • The ‘home_directory’ option on the transport;

   • The ‘transport_home_directory’ option on the router;

   • The password data if ‘check_local_user’ is set on the router;

   • The ‘router_home_directory’ option on the router.

   In other words, ‘router_home_directory’ overrides the password data
for the router, but not for the transport.

‘self’                 Use: _routers_    Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _freeze_

   This option applies to those routers that use a recipient address to
find a list of remote hosts.  Currently, these are the ‘dnslookup’,
‘ipliteral’, and ‘manualroute’ routers.  Certain configurations of the
‘queryprogram’ router can also specify a list of remote hosts.  Usually
such routers are configured to send the message to a remote host via an
‘smtp’ transport.  The ‘self’ option specifies what happens when the
first host on the list turns out to be the local host.  The way in which
Exim checks for the local host is described in section *note Recognizing
the local host::.

   Normally this situation indicates either an error in Exim's
configuration (for example, the router should be configured not to
process this domain), or an error in the DNS (for example, the MX should
not point to this host).  For this reason, the default action is to log
the incident, defer the address, and freeze the message.  The following
alternatives are provided for use in special cases:

‘defer’
     Delivery of the message is tried again later, but the message is
     not frozen.

‘reroute’: <_domain_>
     The domain is changed to the given domain, and the address is
     passed back to be reprocessed by the routers.  No rewriting of
     headers takes place.  This behaviour is essentially a redirection.

‘reroute: rewrite:’ <_domain_>
     The domain is changed to the given domain, and the address is
     passed back to be reprocessed by the routers.  Any headers that
     contain the original domain are rewritten.

‘pass’
     The router passes the address to the next router, or to the router
     named in the ‘pass_router’ option if it is set.  This overrides
     ‘no_more’.  During subsequent routing and delivery, the variable
     ‘$self_hostname’ contains the name of the local host that the
     router encountered.  This can be used to distinguish between
     different cases for hosts with multiple names.  The combination

          self = pass
          no_more

     ensures that only those addresses that routed to the local host are
     passed on.  Without ‘no_more’, addresses that were declined for
     other reasons would also be passed to the next router.

‘fail’
     Delivery fails and an error report is generated.

‘send’
     The anomaly is ignored and the address is queued for the transport.
     This setting should be used with extreme caution.  For an ‘smtp’
     transport, it makes sense only in cases where the program that is
     listening on the SMTP port is not this version of Exim.  That is,
     it must be some other MTA, or Exim with a different configuration
     file that handles the domain in another way.

‘senders’              Use:              Type: _address    Default:
                       _routers_**__     list_*__          _unset_

   If this option is set, the router is skipped unless the message's
sender address matches something on the list.  See section *note Router
preconditions:: for a list of the order in which preconditions are
evaluated.

   There are issues concerning verification when the running of routers
is dependent on the sender.  When Exim is verifying the address in an
‘errors_to’ setting, it sets the sender to the null string.  When using
the ‘-bt’ option to check a configuration file, it is necessary also to
use the ‘-f’ option to set an appropriate sender.  For incoming mail,
the sender is unset when verifying the sender, but is available when
verifying any recipients.  If the SMTP VRFY command is enabled, it must
be used after MAIL if the sender address matters.

‘set’                  Use: _routers_    Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This option may be used multiple times on a router; because of this
the list aspect is mostly irrelevant.  The list separator is a semicolon
but can be changed in the usual way.

   Each list-element given must be of the form "name = value" and the
names used must start with the string "r_".  Values containing a
list-separator should have them doubled.  When a router runs, the
strings are evaluated in order, to create variables which are added to
the set associated with the address.  This is done immediately after all
the preconditions, before the evaluation of the ‘address_data’ option.
The variable is set with the expansion of the value.  The variables can
be used by the router options (not including any preconditions) and by
the transport.  Later definitions of a given named variable will
override former ones.  Variable use is via the usual ‘$r_...’ syntax.

   This is similar to the ‘address_data’ option, except that many
independent variables can be used, with choice of naming.

‘translate_ip_address’ Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   There exist some rare networking situations (for example, packet
radio) where it is helpful to be able to translate IP addresses
generated by normal routing mechanisms into other IP addresses, thus
performing a kind of manual IP routing.  This should be done only if the
normal IP routing of the TCP/IP stack is inadequate or broken.  Because
this is an extremely uncommon requirement, the code to support this
option is not included in the Exim binary unless
SUPPORT_TRANSLATE_IP_ADDRESS=yes is set in ‘Local/Makefile’.

   The ‘translate_ip_address’ string is expanded for every IP address
generated by the router, with the generated address set in
‘$host_address’.  If the expansion is forced to fail, no action is
taken.  For any other expansion error, delivery of the message is
deferred.  If the result of the expansion is an IP address, that
replaces the original address; otherwise the result is assumed to be a
host name - this is looked up using ‘gethostbyname()’ (or
‘getipnodebyname()’ when available) to produce one or more replacement
IP addresses.  For example, to subvert all IP addresses in some specific
networks, this could be added to a router:

     translate_ip_address = \
       ${lookup{${mask:$host_address/26}}lsearch{/some/file}\
         {$value}fail}}

   The file would contain lines like

     10.2.3.128/26    some.host
     10.8.4.34/26     10.44.8.15

   You should not make use of this facility unless you really understand
what you are doing.

‘transport’            Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies the transport to be used when a router accepts
an address and sets it up for delivery.  A transport is never needed if
a router is used only for verification.  The value of the option is
expanded at routing time, after the expansion of ‘errors_to’,
‘headers_add’, and ‘headers_remove’, and result must be the name of one
of the configured transports.  If it is not, delivery is deferred.

   The ‘transport’ option is not used by the ‘redirect’ router, but it
does have some private options that set up transports for pipe and file
deliveries (see chapter *note The redirect router::).

‘transport_current_directory’Use: _routers_Type:           Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option associates a current directory with any address that is
routed to a local transport.  This can happen either because a transport
is explicitly configured for the router, or because it generates a
delivery to a file or a pipe.  During the delivery process (that is, at
transport time), this option string is expanded and is set as the
current directory, unless overridden by a setting on the transport.  If
the expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error
is logged, and delivery is deferred.  See chapter *note Environment for
running local transports: Environment for local transports. for details
of the local delivery environment.

‘transport_home_directory’Use: _routers_ Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This option associates a home directory with any address that is
routed to a local transport.  This can happen either because a transport
is explicitly configured for the router, or because it generates a
delivery to a file or a pipe.  During the delivery process (that is, at
transport time), the option string is expanded and is set as the home
directory, unless overridden by a setting of ‘home_directory’ on the
transport.  If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced
failure, an error is logged, and delivery is deferred.

   If the transport does not specify a home directory, and
‘transport_home_directory’ is not set for the router, the home directory
for the transport is taken from the password data if ‘check_local_user’
is set for the router.  Otherwise it is taken from
‘router_home_directory’ if that option is set; if not, no home directory
is set for the transport.

   See chapter *note Environment for running local transports:
Environment for local transports. for further details of the local
delivery environment.

‘unseen’               Use: _routers_    Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid
boolean value, that is, one of the strings "yes", "no", "true", or
"false".  Any other result causes an error, and delivery is deferred.
If the expansion is forced to fail, the default value for the option
(false) is used.  Other failures cause delivery to be deferred.

   When this option is set true, routing does not cease if the router
accepts the address.  Instead, a copy of the incoming address is passed
to the next router, overriding a false setting of ‘more’.  There is
little point in setting ‘more’ false if ‘unseen’ is always true, but it
may be useful in cases when the value of ‘unseen’ contains expansion
items (and therefore, presumably, is sometimes true and sometimes
false).

   Setting the ‘unseen’ option has a similar effect to the ‘unseen’
command qualifier in filter files.  It can be used to cause copies of
messages to be delivered to some other destination, while also carrying
out a normal delivery.  In effect, the current address is made into a
"parent" that has two children - one that is delivered as specified by
this router, and a clone that goes on to be routed further.  For this
reason, ‘unseen’ may not be combined with the ‘one_time’ option in a
‘redirect’ router.

   *Warning*: Header lines added to the address (or specified for
removal) by this router or by previous routers affect the "unseen" copy
of the message only.  The clone that continues to be processed by
further routers starts with no added headers and none specified for
removal.  For a ‘redirect’ router, if a generated address is the same as
the incoming address, this can lead to duplicate addresses with
different header modifications.  Exim does not do duplicate deliveries
(except, in certain circumstances, to pipes - see section *note
Duplicate addresses: Duplicate addresses <1>.), but it is undefined
which of the duplicates is discarded, so this ambiguous situation should
be avoided.  The ‘repeat_use’ option of the ‘redirect’ router may be of
help.

   Unlike the handling of header modifications, any data that was set by
the ‘address_data’ option in the current or previous routers _is_ passed
on to subsequent routers.

‘user’                 Use: _routers_    Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   When a router queues an address for a transport, and the transport
does not specify a user, the user given here is used when running the
delivery process.  The user may be specified numerically or by name.  If
expansion fails, the error is logged and delivery is deferred.  This
user is also used by the ‘redirect’ router when running a filter file.
The default is unset, except when ‘check_local_user’ is set.  In this
case, the default is taken from the password information.  If the user
is specified as a name, and ‘group’ is not set, the group associated
with the user is used.  See also ‘initgroups’ and ‘group’ and the
discussion in chapter *note Environment for running local transports:
Environment for local transports.

‘verify’               Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _routers_**__

   Setting this option has the effect of setting ‘verify_sender’ and
‘verify_recipient’ to the same value.

‘verify_only’          Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _routers_**__                       _false_

   If this option is set, the router is used only when verifying an
address, delivering in cutthrough mode or testing with the ‘-bv’ option,
not when actually doing a delivery, testing with the ‘-bt’ option, or
running the SMTP EXPN command.  It can be further restricted to
verifying only senders or recipients by means of ‘verify_sender’ and
‘verify_recipient’.

   *Warning*: When the router is being run to verify addresses for an
incoming SMTP message, Exim is not running as root, but under its own
uid.  If the router accesses any files, you need to make sure that they
are accessible to the Exim user or group.

‘verify_recipient’     Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _routers_**__

   If this option is false, the router is skipped when verifying
recipient addresses, delivering in cutthrough mode or testing recipient
verification using ‘-bv’.  See section *note Router preconditions:: for
a list of the order in which preconditions are evaluated.  See also the
‘$verify_mode’ variable.

‘verify_sender’        Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _routers_**__

   If this option is false, the router is skipped when verifying sender
addresses or testing sender verification using ‘-bvs’.  See section
*note Router preconditions:: for a list of the order in which
preconditions are evaluated.  See also the ‘$verify_mode’ variable.


File: spec.info,  Node: The accept router,  Next: The dnslookup router,  Prev: Generic options for routers,  Up: Top

16 The accept router
********************

The ‘accept’ router has no private options of its own.  Unless it is
being used purely for verification (see ‘verify_only’) a transport is
required to be defined by the generic ‘transport’ option.  If the
preconditions that are specified by generic options are met, the router
accepts the address and queues it for the given transport.  The most
common use of this router is for setting up deliveries to local
mailboxes.  For example:

     localusers:
       driver = accept
       domains = mydomain.example
       check_local_user
       transport = local_delivery

   The ‘domains’ condition in this example checks the domain of the
address, and ‘check_local_user’ checks that the local part is the login
of a local user.  When both preconditions are met, the ‘accept’ router
runs, and queues the address for the ‘local_delivery’ transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: The dnslookup router,  Next: The ipliteral router,  Prev: The accept router,  Up: Top

17 The dnslookup router
***********************

The ‘dnslookup’ router looks up the hosts that handle mail for the
recipient's domain in the DNS. A transport must always be set for this
router, unless ‘verify_only’ is set.

   If SRV support is configured (see ‘check_srv’ below), Exim first
searches for SRV records.  If none are found, or if SRV support is not
configured, MX records are looked up.  If no MX records exist, address
records are sought.  However, ‘mx_domains’ can be set to disable the
direct use of address records.

   MX records of equal priority are sorted by Exim into a random order.
Exim then looks for address records for the host names obtained from MX
or SRV records.  When a host has more than one IP address, they are
sorted into a random order, except that IPv6 addresses are sorted before
IPv4 addresses.  If all the IP addresses found are discarded by a
setting of the ‘ignore_target_hosts’ generic option, the router
declines.

   Unless they have the highest priority (lowest MX value), MX records
that point to the local host, or to any host name that matches
‘hosts_treat_as_local’, are discarded, together with any other MX
records of equal or lower priority.

   If the host pointed to by the highest priority MX record, or looked
up as an address record, is the local host, or matches
‘hosts_treat_as_local’, what happens is controlled by the generic ‘self’
option.

* Menu:

* Problems with DNS lookups::
* Declining addresses by dnslookup::
* Private options for dnslookup::
* Effect of qualify_single and search_parents::


File: spec.info,  Node: Problems with DNS lookups,  Next: Declining addresses by dnslookup,  Up: The dnslookup router

17.1 Problems with DNS lookups
==============================

There have been problems with DNS servers when SRV records are looked
up.  Some misbehaving servers return a DNS error or timeout when a
non-existent SRV record is sought.  Similar problems have in the past
been reported for MX records.  The global ‘dns_again_means_nonexist’
option can help with this problem, but it is heavy-handed because it is
a global option.

   For this reason, there are two options, ‘srv_fail_domains’ and
‘mx_fail_domains’, that control what happens when a DNS lookup in a
‘dnslookup’ router results in a DNS failure or a "try again" response.
If an attempt to look up an SRV or MX record causes one of these
results, and the domain matches the relevant list, Exim behaves as if
the DNS had responded "no such record".  In the case of an SRV lookup,
this means that the router proceeds to look for MX records; in the case
of an MX lookup, it proceeds to look for A or AAAA records, unless the
domain matches ‘mx_domains’, in which case routing fails.


File: spec.info,  Node: Declining addresses by dnslookup,  Next: Private options for dnslookup,  Prev: Problems with DNS lookups,  Up: The dnslookup router

17.2 Declining addresses by dnslookup
=====================================

There are a few cases where a ‘dnslookup’ router will decline to accept
an address; if such a router is expected to handle "all remaining
non-local domains", then it is important to set ‘no_more’.

   The router will defer rather than decline if the domain is found in
the ‘fail_defer_domains’ router option.

   Reasons for a ‘dnslookup’ router to decline currently include:

   • The domain does not exist in DNS

   • The domain exists but the MX record's host part is just "."; this
     is a common convention (borrowed from SRV) used to indicate that
     there is no such service for this domain and to not fall back to
     trying A/AAAA records.

   • Ditto, but for SRV records, when ‘check_srv’ is set on this router.

   • MX record points to a non-existent host.

   • MX record points to an IP address and the main section option
     ‘allow_mx_to_ip’ is not set.

   • MX records exist and point to valid hosts, but all hosts resolve
     only to addresses blocked by the ‘ignore_target_hosts’ generic
     option on this router.

   • The domain is not syntactically valid (see also
     ‘allow_utf8_domains’ and ‘dns_check_names_pattern’ for handling one
     variant of this)

   • ‘check_secondary_mx’ is set on this router but the local host can
     not be found in the MX records (see below)


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for dnslookup,  Next: Effect of qualify_single and search_parents,  Prev: Declining addresses by dnslookup,  Up: The dnslookup router

17.3 Private options for dnslookup
==================================

The private options for the ‘dnslookup’ router are as follows:

‘check_secondary_mx’   Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _dnslookup_                         _false_

   If this option is set, the router declines unless the local host is
found in (and removed from) the list of hosts obtained by MX lookup.
This can be used to process domains for which the local host is a
secondary mail exchanger differently to other domains.  The way in which
Exim decides whether a host is the local host is described in section
*note Recognizing the local host::.

‘check_srv’            Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _dnslookup_       list_*__          _unset_

   The ‘dnslookup’ router supports the use of SRV records (see *RFC 2782
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2782)*) in addition to MX and
address records.  The support is disabled by default.  To enable SRV
support, set the ‘check_srv’ option to the name of the service required.
For example,

     check_srv = smtp

   looks for SRV records that refer to the normal smtp service.  The
option is expanded, so the service name can vary from message to message
or address to address.  This might be helpful if SRV records are being
used for a submission service.  If the expansion is forced to fail, the
‘check_srv’ option is ignored, and the router proceeds to look for MX
records in the normal way.

   When the expansion succeeds, the router searches first for SRV
records for the given service (it assumes TCP protocol).  If the list
contains more than one service name, searches are made in the given
order until one succeeds.  A single SRV record with a host name that
consists of just a single dot indicates "no such service for this
domain"; if this is encountered, the router declines.  If other kinds of
SRV record are found, they are used to construct a host list for
delivery according to the rules of RFC 2782.  MX records are not sought
in this case.

   When no SRV records are found, MX records (and address records) are
sought in the traditional way.  In other words, SRV records take
precedence over MX records, just as MX records take precedence over
address records.  Note that this behaviour is not sanctioned by RFC
2782, though a previous draft RFC defined it.  It is apparently believed
that MX records are sufficient for email and that SRV records should not
be used for this purpose.  However, SRV records have an additional
"weight" feature which some people might find useful when trying to
split an SMTP load between hosts of different power.

   See section *note Problems with DNS lookups:: above for a discussion
of Exim's behaviour when there is a DNS lookup error.

‘fail_defer_domains’   Use:              Type: _domain     Default:
                       _dnslookup_       list_*__          _unset_

   DNS lookups for domains matching ‘fail_defer_domains’ which find no
matching record will cause the router to defer rather than the default
behaviour of decline.  This maybe be useful for queueing messages for a
newly created domain while the DNS configuration is not ready.  However,
it will result in any message with mistyped domains also being queued.

‘ipv4_only’            Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _dnslookup_       _string_*__       _unset_

   The string is expanded, and if the result is anything but a forced
failure, or an empty string, or one of the strings “0” or “no” or
“false” (checked without regard to the case of the letters), only A
records are used.

‘ipv4_prefer’          Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _dnslookup_       _string_*__       _unset_

   The string is expanded, and if the result is anything but a forced
failure, or an empty string, or one of the strings “0” or “no” or
“false” (checked without regard to the case of the letters), A records
are sorted before AAAA records (inverting the default).

‘mx_domains’           Use:              Type: _domain     Default:
                       _dnslookup_       list_*__          _unset_

   A domain that matches ‘mx_domains’ is required to have either an MX
or an SRV record in order to be recognized.  (The name of this option
could be improved.)  For example, if all the mail hosts in
_fict.example_ are known to have MX records, except for those in
_discworld.fict.example_, you could use this setting:

     mx_domains = ! *.discworld.fict.example : *.fict.example

   This specifies that messages addressed to a domain that matches the
list but has no MX record should be bounced immediately instead of being
routed using the address record.

‘mx_fail_domains’      Use:              Type: _domain     Default:
                       _dnslookup_       list_*__          _unset_

   If the DNS lookup for MX records for one of the domains in this list
causes a DNS lookup error, Exim behaves as if no MX records were found.
See section *note Problems with DNS lookups:: for more discussion.

‘qualify_single’       Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _dnslookup_

   When this option is true, the resolver option RES_DEFNAMES is set for
DNS lookups.  Typically, but not standardly, this causes the resolver to
qualify single-component names with the default domain.  For example, on
a machine called _dictionary.ref.example_, the domain _thesaurus_ would
be changed to _thesaurus.ref.example_ inside the resolver.  For details
of what your resolver actually does, consult your man pages for
_resolver_ and _resolv.conf_.

‘rewrite_headers’      Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _dnslookup_

   If the domain name in the address that is being processed is not
fully qualified, it may be expanded to its full form by a DNS lookup.
For example, if an address is specified as _dormouse@teaparty_, the
domain might be expanded to _teaparty.wonderland.fict.example_.  Domain
expansion can also occur as a result of setting the ‘widen_domains’
option.  If ‘rewrite_headers’ is true, all occurrences of the
abbreviated domain name in any _Bcc:_, _Cc:_, _From:_, _Reply-to:_,
_Sender:_, and _To:_ header lines of the message are rewritten with the
full domain name.

   This option should be turned off only when it is known that no
message is ever going to be sent outside an environment where the
abbreviation makes sense.

   When an MX record is looked up in the DNS and matches a wildcard
record, name servers normally return a record containing the name that
has been looked up, making it impossible to detect whether a wildcard
was present or not.  However, some name servers have recently been seen
to return the wildcard entry.  If the name returned by a DNS lookup
begins with an asterisk, it is not used for header rewriting.

‘same_domain_copy_routing’Use:           Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _dnslookup_                         _false_

   Addresses with the same domain are normally routed by the ‘dnslookup’
router to the same list of hosts.  However, this cannot be presumed,
because the router options and preconditions may refer to the local part
of the address.  By default, therefore, Exim routes each address in a
message independently.  DNS servers run caches, so repeated DNS lookups
are not normally expensive, and in any case, personal messages rarely
have more than a few recipients.

   If you are running mailing lists with large numbers of subscribers at
the same domain, and you are using a ‘dnslookup’ router which is
independent of the local part, you can set ‘same_domain_copy_routing’ to
bypass repeated DNS lookups for identical domains in one message.  In
this case, when ‘dnslookup’ routes an address to a remote transport, any
other unrouted addresses in the message that have the same domain are
automatically given the same routing without processing them
independently, provided the following conditions are met:

   • No router that processed the address specified ‘headers_add’ or
     ‘headers_remove’.

   • The router did not change the address in any way, for example, by
     "widening" the domain.

‘search_parents’       Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _dnslookup_                         _false_

   When this option is true, the resolver option RES_DNSRCH is set for
DNS lookups.  This is different from the ‘qualify_single’ option in that
it applies to domains containing dots.  Typically, but not standardly,
it causes the resolver to search for the name in the current domain and
in parent domains.  For example, on a machine in the _fict.example_
domain, if looking up _teaparty.wonderland_ failed, the resolver would
try _teaparty.wonderland.fict.example_.  For details of what your
resolver actually does, consult your man pages for _resolver_ and
_resolv.conf_.

   Setting this option true can cause problems in domains that have a
wildcard MX record, because any domain that does not have its own MX
record matches the local wildcard.

‘srv_fail_domains’     Use:              Type: _domain     Default:
                       _dnslookup_       list_*__          _unset_

   If the DNS lookup for SRV records for one of the domains in this list
causes a DNS lookup error, Exim behaves as if no SRV records were found.
See section *note Problems with DNS lookups:: for more discussion.

‘widen_domains’        Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _dnslookup_       list_             _unset_

   If a DNS lookup fails and this option is set, each of its strings in
turn is added onto the end of the domain, and the lookup is tried again.
For example, if

     widen_domains = fict.example:ref.example

   is set and a lookup of _klingon.dictionary_ fails,
_klingon.dictionary.fict.example_ is looked up, and if this fails,
_klingon.dictionary.ref.example_ is tried.  Note that the
‘qualify_single’ and ‘search_parents’ options can cause some widening to
be undertaken inside the DNS resolver.  ‘widen_domains’ is not applied
to sender addresses when verifying, unless ‘rewrite_headers’ is false
(not the default).


File: spec.info,  Node: Effect of qualify_single and search_parents,  Prev: Private options for dnslookup,  Up: The dnslookup router

17.4 Effect of qualify_single and search_parents
================================================

When a domain from an envelope recipient is changed by the resolver as a
result of the ‘qualify_single’ or ‘search_parents’ options, Exim
rewrites the corresponding address in the message's header lines unless
‘rewrite_headers’ is set false.  Exim then re-routes the address, using
the full domain.

   These two options affect only the DNS lookup that takes place inside
the router for the domain of the address that is being routed.  They do
not affect lookups such as that implied by

     domains = @mx_any

   that may happen while processing a router precondition before the
router is entered.  No widening ever takes place for these lookups.


File: spec.info,  Node: The ipliteral router,  Next: The iplookup router,  Prev: The dnslookup router,  Up: Top

18 The ipliteral router
***********************

This router has no private options.  Unless it is being used purely for
verification (see ‘verify_only’) a transport is required to be defined
by the generic ‘transport’ option.  The router accepts the address if
its domain part takes the form of an *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* domain literal.  For
example, the ‘ipliteral’ router handles the address

     root@[192.168.1.1]

   by setting up delivery to the host with that IP address.  IPv4 domain
literals consist of an IPv4 address enclosed in square brackets.  IPv6
domain literals are similar, but the address is preceded by ‘ipv6:’.
For example:

     postmaster@[ipv6:fe80::a00:20ff:fe86:a061.5678]

   Exim allows ‘ipv4:’ before IPv4 addresses, for consistency, and on
the grounds that sooner or later somebody will try it.

   If the IP address matches something in ‘ignore_target_hosts’, the
router declines.  If an IP literal turns out to refer to the local host,
the generic ‘self’ option determines what happens.

   The RFCs require support for domain literals; however, their use is
controversial in today's Internet.  If you want to use this router, you
must also set the main configuration option ‘allow_domain_literals’.
Otherwise, Exim will not recognize the domain literal syntax in
addresses.


File: spec.info,  Node: The iplookup router,  Next: The manualroute router,  Prev: The ipliteral router,  Up: Top

19 The iplookup router
**********************

The ‘iplookup’ router was written to fulfil a specific requirement in
Cambridge University (which in fact no longer exists).  For this reason,
it is not included in the binary of Exim by default.  If you want to
include it, you must set

     ROUTER_IPLOOKUP=yes

   in your ‘Local/Makefile’ configuration file.

   The ‘iplookup’ router routes an address by sending it over a TCP or
UDP connection to one or more specific hosts.  The host can then return
the same or a different address - in effect rewriting the recipient
address in the message's envelope.  The new address is then passed on to
subsequent routers.  If this process fails, the address can be passed on
to other routers, or delivery can be deferred.  Since ‘iplookup’ is just
a rewriting router, a transport must not be specified for it.

‘hosts’                Use: _iplookup_   Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option must be supplied.  Its value is a colon-separated list of
host names.  The hosts are looked up using ‘gethostbyname()’ (or
‘getipnodebyname()’ when available) and are tried in order until one
responds to the query.  If none respond, what happens is controlled by
‘optional’.

‘optional’             Use: _iplookup_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If ‘optional’ is true, if no response is obtained from any host, the
address is passed to the next router, overriding ‘no_more’.  If
‘optional’ is false, delivery to the address is deferred.

‘port’                 Use: _iplookup_   Type: _integer_   Default: _0_

   This option must be supplied.  It specifies the port number for the
TCP or UDP call.

‘protocol’             Use: _iplookup_   Type: _string_    Default: _udp_

   This option can be set to "udp" or "tcp" to specify which of the two
protocols is to be used.

‘query’                Use: _iplookup_   Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This defines the content of the query that is sent to the remote
hosts.  The default value is:

     $local_part@$domain $local_part@$domain

   The repetition serves as a way of checking that a response is to the
correct query in the default case (see ‘response_pattern’ below).

‘reroute’              Use: _iplookup_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is not set, the rerouted address is precisely the byte
string returned by the remote host, up to the first white space, if any.
If set, the string is expanded to form the rerouted address.  It can
include parts matched in the response by ‘response_pattern’ by means of
numeric variables such as ‘$1’, ‘$2’, etc.  The variable ‘$0’ refers to
the entire input string, whether or not a pattern is in use.  In all
cases, the rerouted address must end up in the form _local_part@domain_.

‘response_pattern’     Use: _iplookup_   Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option can be set to a regular expression that is applied to the
string returned from the remote host.  If the pattern does not match the
response, the router declines.  If ‘response_pattern’ is not set, no
checking of the response is done, unless the query was defaulted, in
which case there is a check that the text returned after the first white
space is the original address.  This checks that the answer that has
been received is in response to the correct question.  For example, if
the response is just a new domain, the following could be used:

     response_pattern = ^([^@]+)$
     reroute = $local_part@$1

‘timeout’              Use: _iplookup_   Type: _time_      Default: _5s_

   This specifies the amount of time to wait for a response from the
remote machine.  The same timeout is used for the ‘connect()’ function
for a TCP call.  It does not apply to UDP.


File: spec.info,  Node: The manualroute router,  Next: The queryprogram router,  Prev: The iplookup router,  Up: Top

20 The manualroute router
*************************

The ‘manualroute’ router is so-called because it provides a way of
manually routing an address according to its domain.  It is mainly used
when you want to route addresses to remote hosts according to your own
rules, bypassing the normal DNS routing that looks up MX records.
However, ‘manualroute’ can also route to local transports, a facility
that may be useful if you want to save messages for dial-in hosts in
local files.

   The ‘manualroute’ router compares a list of domain patterns with the
domain it is trying to route.  If there is no match, the router
declines.  Each pattern has associated with it a list of hosts and some
other optional data, which may include a transport.  The combination of
a pattern and its data is called a "routing rule".  For patterns that do
not have an associated transport, the generic ‘transport’ option must
specify a transport, unless the router is being used purely for
verification (see ‘verify_only’).

   In the case of verification, matching the domain pattern is
sufficient for the router to accept the address.  When actually routing
an address for delivery, an address that matches a domain pattern is
queued for the associated transport.  If the transport is not a local
one, a host list must be associated with the pattern; IP addresses are
looked up for the hosts, and these are passed to the transport along
with the mail address.  For local transports, a host list is optional.
If it is present, it is passed in ‘$host’ as a single text string.

   The list of routing rules can be provided as an inline string in
‘route_list’, or the data can be obtained by looking up the domain in a
file or database by setting ‘route_data’.  Only one of these settings
may appear in any one instance of ‘manualroute’.  The format of routing
rules is described below, following the list of private options.

* Menu:

* Private options for manualroute::
* Routing rules in route_list::
* Routing rules in route_data::
* Format of the list of hosts::
* Format of one host item::
* How the list of hosts is used::
* How the options are used::
* Manualroute examples::


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for manualroute,  Next: Routing rules in route_list,  Up: The manualroute router

20.1 Private options for manualroute
====================================

The private options for the ‘manualroute’ router are as follows:

‘host_all_ignored’     Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _manualroute_                       _defer_

   See ‘host_find_failed’.

‘host_find_failed’     Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _manualroute_                       _freeze_

   This option controls what happens when ‘manualroute’ tries to find an
IP address for a host, and the host does not exist.  The option can be
set to one of the following values:

     decline
     defer
     fail
     freeze
     ignore
     pass

   The default ("freeze") assumes that this state is a serious
configuration error.  The difference between "pass" and "decline" is
that the former forces the address to be passed to the next router (or
the router defined by ‘pass_router’), overriding ‘no_more’, whereas the
latter passes the address to the next router only if ‘more’ is true.

   The value "ignore" causes Exim to completely ignore a host whose IP
address cannot be found.  If all the hosts in the list are ignored, the
behaviour is controlled by the ‘host_all_ignored’ option.  This takes
the same values as ‘host_find_failed’, except that it cannot be set to
"ignore".

   The ‘host_find_failed’ option applies only to a definite "does not
exist" state; if a host lookup gets a temporary error, delivery is
deferred unless the generic ‘pass_on_timeout’ option is set.

‘hosts_randomize’      Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _manualroute_     _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is set, the order of the items in a host list in a
routing rule is randomized each time the list is used, unless an option
in the routing rule overrides (see below).  Randomizing the order of a
host list can be used to do crude load sharing.  However, if more than
one mail address is routed by the same router to the same host list, the
host lists are considered to be the same (even though they may be
randomized into different orders) for the purpose of deciding whether to
batch the deliveries into a single SMTP transaction.

   When ‘hosts_randomize’ is true, a host list may be split into groups
whose order is separately randomized.  This makes it possible to set up
MX-like behaviour.  The boundaries between groups are indicated by an
item that is just ‘+’ in the host list.  For example:

     route_list = * host1:host2:host3:+:host4:host5

   The order of the first three hosts and the order of the last two
hosts is randomized for each use, but the first three always end up
before the last two.  If ‘hosts_randomize’ is not set, a ‘+’ item in the
list is ignored.  If a randomized host list is passed to an ‘smtp’
transport that also has ‘hosts_randomize set’, the list is not
re-randomized.

‘route_data’           Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _manualroute_     _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, it must expand to yield the data part of a
routing rule.  Typically, the expansion string includes a lookup based
on the domain.  For example:

     route_data = ${lookup{$domain}dbm{/etc/routes}}

   If the expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string,
the router declines.  Other kinds of expansion failure cause delivery to
be deferred.

‘route_list’           Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _manualroute_     list_             _unset_

   This string is a list of routing rules, in the form defined below.
Note that, unlike most string lists, the items are separated by
semicolons.  This is so that they may contain colon-separated host
lists.

‘same_domain_copy_routing’Use:           Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _manualroute_                       _false_

   Addresses with the same domain are normally routed by the
‘manualroute’ router to the same list of hosts.  However, this cannot be
presumed, because the router options and preconditions may refer to the
local part of the address.  By default, therefore, Exim routes each
address in a message independently.  DNS servers run caches, so repeated
DNS lookups are not normally expensive, and in any case, personal
messages rarely have more than a few recipients.

   If you are running mailing lists with large numbers of subscribers at
the same domain, and you are using a ‘manualroute’ router which is
independent of the local part, you can set ‘same_domain_copy_routing’ to
bypass repeated DNS lookups for identical domains in one message.  In
this case, when ‘manualroute’ routes an address to a remote transport,
any other unrouted addresses in the message that have the same domain
are automatically given the same routing without processing them
independently.  However, this is only done if ‘headers_add’ and
‘headers_remove’ are unset.


File: spec.info,  Node: Routing rules in route_list,  Next: Routing rules in route_data,  Prev: Private options for manualroute,  Up: The manualroute router

20.2 Routing rules in route_list
================================

The value of ‘route_list’ is a string consisting of a sequence of
routing rules, separated by semicolons.  If a semicolon is needed in a
rule, it can be entered as two semicolons.  Alternatively, the list
separator can be changed as described (for colon-separated lists) in
section *note List construction::.  Empty rules are ignored.  The format
of each rule is

     <domain pattern>  <list of hosts>  <options>

   The following example contains two rules, each with a simple domain
pattern and no options:

     route_list = \
       dict.ref.example  mail-1.ref.example:mail-2.ref.example ; \
       thes.ref.example  mail-3.ref.example:mail-4.ref.example

   The three parts of a rule are separated by white space.  The pattern
and the list of hosts can be enclosed in quotes if necessary, and if
they are, the usual quoting rules apply.  Each rule in a ‘route_list’
must start with a single domain pattern, which is the only mandatory
item in the rule.  The pattern is in the same format as one item in a
domain list (see section *note Domain lists::), except that it may not
be the name of an interpolated file.  That is, it may be wildcarded, or
a regular expression, or a file or database lookup (with semicolons
doubled, because of the use of semicolon as a separator in a
‘route_list’).

   The rules in ‘route_list’ are searched in order until one of the
patterns matches the domain that is being routed.  The list of hosts and
then options are then used as described below.  If there is no match,
the router declines.  When ‘route_list’ is set, ‘route_data’ must not be
set.


File: spec.info,  Node: Routing rules in route_data,  Next: Format of the list of hosts,  Prev: Routing rules in route_list,  Up: The manualroute router

20.3 Routing rules in route_data
================================

The use of ‘route_list’ is convenient when there are only a small number
of routing rules.  For larger numbers, it is easier to use a file or
database to hold the routing information, and use the ‘route_data’
option instead.  The value of ‘route_data’ is a list of hosts, followed
by (optional) options.  Most commonly, ‘route_data’ is set as a string
that contains an expansion lookup.  For example, suppose we place two
routing rules in a file like this:

     dict.ref.example:  mail-1.ref.example:mail-2.ref.example
     thes.ref.example:  mail-3.ref.example:mail-4.ref.example

   This data can be accessed by setting

     route_data = ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/the/file/name}}

   Failure of the lookup results in an empty string, causing the router
to decline.  However, you do not have to use a lookup in ‘route_data’.
The only requirement is that the result of expanding the string is a
list of hosts, possibly followed by options, separated by white space.
The list of hosts must be enclosed in quotes if it contains white space.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of the list of hosts,  Next: Format of one host item,  Prev: Routing rules in route_data,  Up: The manualroute router

20.4 Format of the list of hosts
================================

A list of hosts, whether obtained via ‘route_data’ or ‘route_list’, is
always separately expanded before use.  If the expansion fails, the
router declines.  The result of the expansion must be a colon-separated
list of names and/or IP addresses, optionally also including ports.  If
the list is written with spaces, it must be protected with quotes.  The
format of each item in the list is described in the next section.  The
list separator can be changed as described in section *note Changing
list separators::.

   If the list of hosts was obtained from a ‘route_list’ item, the
following variables are set during its expansion:

   • If the domain was matched against a regular expression, the numeric
     variables ‘$1’, ‘$2’, etc.  may be set.  For example:

          route_list = ^domain(\d+)   host-$1.text.example

   • ‘$0’ is always set to the entire domain.

   • ‘$1’ is also set when partial matching is done in a file lookup.

   • If the pattern that matched the domain was a lookup item, the data
     that was looked up is available in the expansion variable ‘$value’.
     For example:

          route_list = lsearch;;/some/file.routes  $value

   Note the doubling of the semicolon in the pattern that is necessary
because semicolon is the default route list separator.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of one host item,  Next: How the list of hosts is used,  Prev: Format of the list of hosts,  Up: The manualroute router

20.5 Format of one host item
============================

Each item in the list of hosts can be either a host name or an IP
address, optionally with an attached port number, or it can be a single
"+" (see ‘hosts_randomize’).  When no port is given, an IP address is
not enclosed in brackets.  When a port is specified, it overrides the
port specification on the transport.  The port is separated from the
name or address by a colon.  This leads to some complications:

   • Because colon is the default separator for the list of hosts,
     either the colon that specifies a port must be doubled, or the list
     separator must be changed.  The following two examples have the
     same effect:

          route_list = * "host1.tld::1225 : host2.tld::1226"
          route_list = * "<+ host1.tld:1225 + host2.tld:1226"

   • When IPv6 addresses are involved, it gets worse, because they
     contain colons of their own.  To make this case easier, it is
     permitted to enclose an IP address (either v4 or v6) in square
     brackets if a port number follows.  For example:

          route_list = * "</ [10.1.1.1]:1225 / [::1]:1226"


File: spec.info,  Node: How the list of hosts is used,  Next: How the options are used,  Prev: Format of one host item,  Up: The manualroute router

20.6 How the list of hosts is used
==================================

When an address is routed to an ‘smtp’ transport by ‘manualroute’, each
of the hosts is tried, in the order specified, when carrying out the
SMTP delivery.  However, the order can be changed by setting the
‘hosts_randomize’ option, either on the router (see section *note
Private options for manualroute:: above), or on the transport.

   Hosts may be listed by name or by IP address.  An unadorned name in
the list of hosts is interpreted as a host name.  A name that is
followed by ‘/MX’ is interpreted as an indirection to a sublist of hosts
obtained by looking up MX records in the DNS. For example:

     route_list = *  x.y.z:p.q.r/MX:e.f.g

   If this feature is used with a port specifier, the port must come
last.  For example:

     route_list = *  dom1.tld/mx::1225

   If the ‘hosts_randomize’ option is set, the order of the items in the
list is randomized before any lookups are done.  Exim then scans the
list; for any name that is not followed by ‘/MX’ it looks up an IP
address.  If this turns out to be an interface on the local host and the
item is not the first in the list, Exim discards it and any subsequent
items.  If it is the first item, what happens is controlled by the
‘self’ option of the router.

   A name on the list that is followed by ‘/MX’ is replaced with the
list of hosts obtained by looking up MX records for the name.  This is
always a DNS lookup; the ‘bydns’ and ‘byname’ options (see section *note
How the options are used:: below) are not relevant here.  The order of
these hosts is determined by the preference values in the MX records,
according to the usual rules.  Because randomizing happens before the MX
lookup, it does not affect the order that is defined by MX preferences.

   If the local host is present in the sublist obtained from MX records,
but is not the most preferred host in that list, it and any equally or
less preferred hosts are removed before the sublist is inserted into the
main list.

   If the local host is the most preferred host in the MX list, what
happens depends on where in the original list of hosts the ‘/MX’ item
appears.  If it is not the first item (that is, there are previous hosts
in the main list), Exim discards this name and any subsequent items in
the main list.

   If the MX item is first in the list of hosts, and the local host is
the most preferred host, what happens is controlled by the ‘self’ option
of the router.

   DNS failures when lookup up the MX records are treated in the same
way as DNS failures when looking up IP addresses: ‘pass_on_timeout’ and
‘host_find_failed’ are used when relevant.

   The generic ‘ignore_target_hosts’ option applies to all hosts in the
list, whether obtained from an MX lookup or not.


File: spec.info,  Node: How the options are used,  Next: Manualroute examples,  Prev: How the list of hosts is used,  Up: The manualroute router

20.7 How the options are used
=============================

The options are a sequence of words, space-separated.  One of the words
can be the name of a transport; this overrides the ‘transport’ option on
the router for this particular routing rule only.  The other words (if
present) control randomization of the list of hosts on a per-rule basis,
and how the IP addresses of the hosts are to be found when routing to a
remote transport.  These options are as follows:

   • ‘randomize’: randomize the order of the hosts in this list,
     overriding the setting of ‘hosts_randomize’ for this routing rule
     only.

   • ‘no_randomize’: do not randomize the order of the hosts in this
     list, overriding the setting of ‘hosts_randomize’ for this routing
     rule only.

   • ‘byname’: use ‘getipnodebyname()’ (‘gethostbyname()’ on older
     systems) to find IP addresses.  This function may ultimately cause
     a DNS lookup, but it may also look in ‘/etc/hosts’ or other sources
     of information.

   • ‘bydns’: look up address records for the hosts directly in the DNS;
     fail if no address records are found.  If there is a temporary DNS
     error (such as a timeout), delivery is deferred.

   • ‘ipv4_only’: in direct DNS lookups, look up only A records.

   • ‘ipv4_prefer’: in direct DNS lookups, sort A records before AAAA
     records.

   For example:

     route_list = domain1  host1:host2:host3  randomize bydns;\
                  domain2  host4:host5

   If neither ‘byname’ nor ‘bydns’ is given, Exim behaves as follows:
First, a DNS lookup is done.  If this yields anything other than
HOST_NOT_FOUND, that result is used.  Otherwise, Exim goes on to try a
call to ‘getipnodebyname()’ or ‘gethostbyname()’, and the result of the
lookup is the result of that call.

   *Warning*: It has been discovered that on some systems, if a DNS
lookup called via ‘getipnodebyname()’ times out, HOST_NOT_FOUND is
returned instead of TRY_AGAIN. That is why the default action is to try
a DNS lookup first.  Only if that gives a definite "no such host" is the
local function called.

   *Compatibility*: From Exim 4.85 until fixed for 4.90, there was an
inadvertent constraint that a transport name as an option had to be the
last option specified.

   If no IP address for a host can be found, what happens is controlled
by the ‘host_find_failed’ option.

   When an address is routed to a local transport, IP addresses are not
looked up.  The host list is passed to the transport in the ‘$host’
variable.


File: spec.info,  Node: Manualroute examples,  Prev: How the options are used,  Up: The manualroute router

20.8 Manualroute examples
=========================

In some of the examples that follow, the presence of the ‘remote_smtp’
transport, as defined in the default configuration file, is assumed:

   • The ‘manualroute’ router can be used to forward all external mail
     to a _smart host_.  If you have set up, in the main part of the
     configuration, a named domain list that contains your local
     domains, for example:

          domainlist local_domains = my.domain.example

     You can arrange for all other domains to be routed to a smart host
     by making your first router something like this:

          smart_route:
            driver = manualroute
            domains = !+local_domains
            transport = remote_smtp
            route_list = * smarthost.ref.example

     This causes all non-local addresses to be sent to the single host
     _smarthost.ref.example_.  If a colon-separated list of smart hosts
     is given, they are tried in order (but you can use
     ‘hosts_randomize’ to vary the order each time).  Another way of
     configuring the same thing is this:

          smart_route:
            driver = manualroute
            transport = remote_smtp
            route_list = !+local_domains  smarthost.ref.example

     There is no difference in behaviour between these two routers as
     they stand.  However, they behave differently if ‘no_more’ is added
     to them.  In the first example, the router is skipped if the domain
     does not match the ‘domains’ precondition; the following router is
     always tried.  If the router runs, it always matches the domain and
     so can never decline.  Therefore, ‘no_more’ would have no effect.
     In the second case, the router is never skipped; it always runs.
     However, if it doesn't match the domain, it declines.  In this case
     ‘no_more’ would prevent subsequent routers from running.

   • A _mail hub_ is a host which receives mail for a number of domains
     via MX records in the DNS and delivers it via its own private
     routing mechanism.  Often the final destinations are behind a
     firewall, with the mail hub being the one machine that can connect
     to machines both inside and outside the firewall.  The
     ‘manualroute’ router is usually used on a mail hub to route
     incoming messages to the correct hosts.  For a small number of
     domains, the routing can be inline, using the ‘route_list’ option,
     but for a larger number a file or database lookup is easier to
     manage.

     If the domain names are in fact the names of the machines to which
     the mail is to be sent by the mail hub, the configuration can be
     quite simple.  For example:

          hub_route:
            driver = manualroute
            transport = remote_smtp
            route_list = *.rhodes.tvs.example  $domain

     This configuration routes domains that match ‘*.rhodes.tvs.example’
     to hosts whose names are the same as the mail domains.  A similar
     approach can be taken if the host name can be obtained from the
     domain name by a string manipulation that the expansion facilities
     can handle.  Otherwise, a lookup based on the domain can be used to
     find the host:

          through_firewall:
            driver = manualroute
            transport = remote_smtp
            route_data = ${lookup {$domain} cdb {/internal/host/routes}}

     The result of the lookup must be the name or IP address of the host
     (or hosts) to which the address is to be routed.  If the lookup
     fails, the route data is empty, causing the router to decline.  The
     address then passes to the next router.

   • You can use ‘manualroute’ to deliver messages to pipes or files in
     batched SMTP format for onward transportation by some other means.
     This is one way of storing mail for a dial-up host when it is not
     connected.  The route list entry can be as simple as a single
     domain name in a configuration like this:

          save_in_file:
            driver = manualroute
            transport = batchsmtp_appendfile
            route_list = saved.domain.example

     though often a pattern is used to pick up more than one domain.  If
     there are several domains or groups of domains with different
     transport requirements, different transports can be listed in the
     routing information:

          save_in_file:
            driver = manualroute
            route_list = \
              *.saved.domain1.example  $domain  batch_appendfile; \
              *.saved.domain2.example  \
                ${lookup{$domain}dbm{/domain2/hosts}{$value}fail} \
                batch_pipe

     The first of these just passes the domain in the ‘$host’ variable,
     which doesn't achieve much (since it is also in ‘$domain’), but the
     second does a file lookup to find a value to pass, causing the
     router to decline to handle the address if the lookup fails.

   • Routing mail directly to UUCP software is a specific case of the
     use of ‘manualroute’ in a gateway to another mail environment.
     This is an example of one way it can be done:

          # Transport
          uucp:
            driver = pipe
            user = nobody
            command = /usr/local/bin/uux -r - \
              ${substr_-5:$host}!rmail ${local_part}
            return_fail_output = true

          # Router
          uucphost:
            transport = uucp
            driver = manualroute
            route_data = \
              ${lookup{$domain}lsearch{/usr/local/exim/uucphosts}}

     The file ‘/usr/local/exim/uucphosts’ contains entries like

          darksite.ethereal.example:           darksite.UUCP

     It can be set up more simply without adding and removing ".UUCP"
     but this way makes clear the distinction between the domain name
     _darksite.ethereal.example_ and the UUCP host name _darksite_.


File: spec.info,  Node: The queryprogram router,  Next: The redirect router,  Prev: The manualroute router,  Up: Top

21 The queryprogram router
**************************

The ‘queryprogram’ router routes an address by running an external
command and acting on its output.  This is an expensive way to route,
and is intended mainly for use in lightly-loaded systems, or for
performing experiments.  However, if it is possible to use the
precondition options (‘domains’, ‘local_parts’, etc) to skip this router
for most addresses, it could sensibly be used in special cases, even on
a busy host.  There are the following private options:

‘command’              Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _queryprogram_    _string_*__       _unset_

   This option must be set.  It specifies the command that is to be run.
The command is split up into a command name and arguments, and then each
is expanded separately (exactly as for a ‘pipe’ transport, described in
chapter *note The pipe transport::).

‘command_group’        Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _queryprogram_                      _unset_

   This option specifies a gid to be set when running the command while
routing an address for deliver.  It must be set if ‘command_user’
specifies a numerical uid.  If it begins with a digit, it is interpreted
as the numerical value of the gid.  Otherwise it is looked up using
‘getgrnam()’.

‘command_user’         Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _queryprogram_                      _unset_

   This option must be set.  It specifies the uid which is set when
running the command while routing an address for delivery.  If the value
begins with a digit, it is interpreted as the numerical value of the
uid.  Otherwise, it is looked up using ‘getpwnam()’ to obtain a value
for the uid and, if ‘command_group’ is not set, a value for the gid
also.

   *Warning:* Changing uid and gid is possible only when Exim is running
as root, which it does during a normal delivery in a conventional
configuration.  However, when an address is being verified during
message reception, Exim is usually running as the Exim user, not as
root.  If the ‘queryprogram’ router is called from a non-root process,
Exim cannot change uid or gid before running the command.  In this
circumstance the command runs under the current uid and gid.

‘current_directory’    Use:              Type: _string_    Default: _/_
                       _queryprogram_

   This option specifies an absolute path which is made the current
directory before running the command.

‘timeout’              Use:              Type: _time_      Default: _1h_
                       _queryprogram_

   If the command does not complete within the timeout period, its
process group is killed and the message is frozen.  A value of zero time
specifies no timeout.

   The standard output of the command is connected to a pipe, which is
read when the command terminates.  It should consist of a single line of
output, containing up to five fields, separated by white space.  The
maximum length of the line is 1023 characters.  Longer lines are
silently truncated.  The first field is one of the following words
(case-insensitive):

   • _Accept_: routing succeeded; the remaining fields specify what to
     do (see below).

   • _Decline_: the router declines; pass the address to the next
     router, unless ‘no_more’ is set.

   • _Fail_: routing failed; do not pass the address to any more
     routers.  Any subsequent text on the line is an error message.  If
     the router is run as part of address verification during an
     incoming SMTP message, the message is included in the SMTP
     response.

   • _Defer_: routing could not be completed at this time; try again
     later.  Any subsequent text on the line is an error message which
     is logged.  It is not included in any SMTP response.

   • _Freeze_: the same as _defer_, except that the message is frozen.

   • _Pass_: pass the address to the next router (or the router
     specified by ‘pass_router’), overriding ‘no_more’.

   • _Redirect_: the message is redirected.  The remainder of the line
     is a list of new addresses, which are routed independently,
     starting with the first router, or the router specified by
     ‘redirect_router’, if set.

   When the first word is _accept_, the remainder of the line consists
of a number of keyed data values, as follows (split into two lines here,
to fit on the page):

     ACCEPT TRANSPORT=<transport> HOSTS=<list of hosts>
     LOOKUP=byname|bydns DATA=<text>

   The data items can be given in any order, and all are optional.  If
no transport is included, the transport specified by the generic
‘transport’ option is used.  The list of hosts and the lookup type are
needed only if the transport is an ‘smtp’ transport that does not itself
supply a list of hosts.

   The format of the list of hosts is the same as for the ‘manualroute’
router.  As well as host names and IP addresses with optional port
numbers, as described in section *note Format of one host item::, it may
contain names followed by ‘/MX’ to specify sublists of hosts that are
obtained by looking up MX records (see section *note How the list of
hosts is used::).

   If the lookup type is not specified, Exim behaves as follows when
trying to find an IP address for each host: First, a DNS lookup is done.
If this yields anything other than HOST_NOT_FOUND, that result is used.
Otherwise, Exim goes on to try a call to ‘getipnodebyname()’ or
‘gethostbyname()’, and the result of the lookup is the result of that
call.

   If the DATA field is set, its value is placed in the ‘$address_data’
variable.  For example, this return line

     accept hosts=x1.y.example:x2.y.example data="rule1"

   routes the address to the default transport, passing a list of two
hosts.  When the transport runs, the string "rule1" is in
‘$address_data’.


File: spec.info,  Node: The redirect router,  Next: Environment for local transports,  Prev: The queryprogram router,  Up: Top

22 The redirect router
**********************

The ‘redirect’ router handles several kinds of address redirection.  Its
most common uses are for resolving local part aliases from a central
alias file (usually called ‘/etc/aliases’) and for handling users'
personal ‘.forward’ files, but it has many other potential uses.  The
incoming address can be redirected in several different ways:

   • It can be replaced by one or more new addresses which are
     themselves routed independently.

   • It can be routed to be delivered to a given file or directory.

   • It can be routed to be delivered to a specified pipe command.

   • It can cause an automatic reply to be generated.

   • It can be forced to fail, optionally with a custom error message.

   • It can be temporarily deferred, optionally with a custom message.

   • It can be discarded.

   The generic ‘transport’ option must not be set for ‘redirect’
routers.  However, there are some private options which define
transports for delivery to files and pipes, and for generating
autoreplies.  See the ‘file_transport’, ‘pipe_transport’ and
‘reply_transport’ descriptions below.

   If success DSNs have been requested redirection triggers one and the
DSN options are not passed any further.

* Menu:

* Redirection data::
* Forward files and address verification::
* Interpreting redirection data::
* Items in a non-filter redirection list::
* Redirecting to a local mailbox::
* Special items in redirection lists::
* Duplicate addresses: Duplicate addresses <1>.
* Repeated redirection expansion::
* Errors in redirection lists::
* Private options for the redirect router::


File: spec.info,  Node: Redirection data,  Next: Forward files and address verification,  Up: The redirect router

22.1 Redirection data
=====================

The router operates by interpreting a text string which it obtains
either by expanding the contents of the ‘data’ option, or by reading the
entire contents of a file whose name is given in the ‘file’ option.
These two options are mutually exclusive.  The first is commonly used
for handling system aliases, in a configuration like this:

     system_aliases:
       driver = redirect
       data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/aliases}}

   If the lookup fails, the expanded string in this example is empty.
When the expansion of ‘data’ results in an empty string, the router
declines.  A forced expansion failure also causes the router to decline;
other expansion failures cause delivery to be deferred.

   A configuration using ‘file’ is commonly used for handling users'
‘.forward’ files, like this:

     userforward:
       driver = redirect
       check_local_user
       file = $home/.forward
       no_verify

   If the file does not exist, or causes no action to be taken (for
example, it is empty or consists only of comments), the router declines.
*Warning*: This is not the case when the file contains syntactically
valid items that happen to yield empty addresses, for example, items
containing only *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address comments.

   Tainted data may not be used for a filename.

   *Warning*: It is unwise to use ‘$local_part’ or ‘$domain’ directly
for redirection, as they are provided by a potential attacker.  In the
examples above, ‘$local_part’ is used for looking up data held locally
on the system, and not used directly (the second example derives ‘$home’
via the passsword file or database, using ‘$local_part’).


File: spec.info,  Node: Forward files and address verification,  Next: Interpreting redirection data,  Prev: Redirection data,  Up: The redirect router

22.2 Forward files and address verification
===========================================

It is usual to set ‘no_verify’ on ‘redirect’ routers which handle users'
‘.forward’ files, as in the example above.  There are two reasons for
this:

   • When Exim is receiving an incoming SMTP message from a remote host,
     it is running under the Exim uid, not as root.  Exim is unable to
     change uid to read the file as the user, and it may not be able to
     read it as the Exim user.  So in practice the router may not be
     able to operate.

   • However, even when the router can operate, the existence of a
     ‘.forward’ file is unimportant when verifying an address.  What
     should be checked is whether the local part is a valid user name or
     not.  Cutting out the redirection processing saves some resources.


File: spec.info,  Node: Interpreting redirection data,  Next: Items in a non-filter redirection list,  Prev: Forward files and address verification,  Up: The redirect router

22.3 Interpreting redirection data
==================================

The contents of the data string, whether obtained from ‘data’ or ‘file’,
can be interpreted in two different ways:

   • If the ‘allow_filter’ option is set true, and the data begins with
     the text "#Exim filter" or "#Sieve filter", it is interpreted as a
     list of _filtering_ instructions in the form of an Exim or Sieve
     filter file, respectively.  Details of the syntax and semantics of
     filter files are described in a separate document entitled _Exim's
     interfaces to mail filtering_; this document is intended for use by
     end users.

   • Otherwise, the data must be a comma-separated list of redirection
     items, as described in the next section.

   When a message is redirected to a file (a "mail folder"), the
filename given in a non-filter redirection list must always be an
absolute path.  A filter may generate a relative path - how this is
handled depends on the transport's configuration.  See section *note The
file and directory options:: for a discussion of this issue for the
‘appendfile’ transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: Items in a non-filter redirection list,  Next: Redirecting to a local mailbox,  Prev: Interpreting redirection data,  Up: The redirect router

22.4 Items in a non-filter redirection list
===========================================

When the redirection data is not an Exim or Sieve filter, for example,
if it comes from a conventional alias or forward file, it consists of a
list of addresses, filenames, pipe commands, or certain special items
(see section *note Special items in redirection lists:: below).  The
special items can be individually enabled or disabled by means of
options whose names begin with ‘allow_’ or ‘forbid_’, depending on their
default values.  The items in the list are separated by commas or
newlines.  If a comma is required in an item, the entire item must be
enclosed in double quotes.

   Lines starting with a # character are comments, and are ignored, and
# may also appear following a comma, in which case everything between
the # and the next newline character is ignored.

   If an item is entirely enclosed in double quotes, these are removed.
Otherwise double quotes are retained because some forms of mail address
require their use (but never to enclose the entire address).  In the
following description, "item" refers to what remains after any
surrounding double quotes have been removed.

   *Warning*: If you use an Exim expansion to construct a redirection
address, and the expansion contains a reference to ‘$local_part’, you
should make use of the ‘quote_local_part’ expansion operator, in case
the local part contains special characters.  For example, to redirect
all mail for the domain _obsolete.example_, retaining the existing local
part, you could use this setting:

     data = ${quote_local_part:$local_part}@newdomain.example


File: spec.info,  Node: Redirecting to a local mailbox,  Next: Special items in redirection lists,  Prev: Items in a non-filter redirection list,  Up: The redirect router

22.5 Redirecting to a local mailbox
===================================

A redirection item may safely be the same as the address currently under
consideration.  This does not cause a routing loop, because a router is
automatically skipped if any ancestor of the address that is being
processed is the same as the current address and was processed by the
current router.  Such an address is therefore passed to the following
routers, so it is handled as if there were no redirection.  When making
this loop-avoidance test, the complete local part, including any prefix
or suffix, is used.

   Specifying the same local part without a domain is a common usage in
personal filter files when the user wants to have messages delivered to
the local mailbox and also forwarded elsewhere.  For example, the user
whose login is _cleo_ might have a ‘.forward’ file containing this:

     cleo, cleopatra@egypt.example

   For compatibility with other MTAs, such unqualified local parts may
be preceded by "\", but this is not a requirement for loop prevention.
However, it does make a difference if more than one domain is being
handled synonymously.

   If an item begins with "\" and the rest of the item parses as a valid
*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address that
does not include a domain, the item is qualified using the domain of the
incoming address.  In the absence of a leading "\", unqualified
addresses are qualified using the value in ‘qualify_recipient’, but you
can force the incoming domain to be used by setting
‘qualify_preserve_domain’.

   Care must be taken if there are alias names for local users.
Consider an MTA handling a single local domain where the system alias
file contains:

     Sam.Reman: spqr

   Now suppose that Sam (whose login id is _spqr_) wants to save copies
of messages in the local mailbox, and also forward copies elsewhere.  He
creates this forward file:

     Sam.Reman, spqr@reme.elsewhere.example

   With these settings, an incoming message addressed to _Sam.Reman_
fails.  The ‘redirect’ router for system aliases does not process
_Sam.Reman_ the second time round, because it has previously routed it,
and the following routers presumably cannot handle the alias.  The
forward file should really contain

     spqr, spqr@reme.elsewhere.example

   but because this is such a common error, the ‘check_ancestor’ option
(see below) exists to provide a way to get round it.  This is normally
set on a ‘redirect’ router that is handling users' ‘.forward’ files.


File: spec.info,  Node: Special items in redirection lists,  Next: Duplicate addresses <1>,  Prev: Redirecting to a local mailbox,  Up: The redirect router

22.6 Special items in redirection lists
=======================================

In addition to addresses, the following types of item may appear in
redirection lists (that is, in non-filter redirection data):

   • An item is treated as a pipe command if it begins with "|" and does
     not parse as a valid *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address that
     includes a domain.  A transport for running the command must be
     specified by the ‘pipe_transport’ option.  Normally, either the
     router or the transport specifies a user and a group under which to
     run the delivery.  The default is to use the Exim user and group.

     Single or double quotes can be used for enclosing the individual
     arguments of the pipe command; no interpretation of escapes is done
     for single quotes.  If the command contains a comma character, it
     is necessary to put the whole item in double quotes, for example:

          "|/some/command ready,steady,go"

     since items in redirection lists are terminated by commas.  Do not,
     however, quote just the command.  An item such as

          |"/some/command ready,steady,go"

     is interpreted as a pipe with a rather strange command name, and no
     arguments.

     Note that the above example assumes that the text comes from a
     lookup source of some sort, so that the quotes are part of the
     data.  If composing a redirect router with a ‘data’ option directly
     specifying this command, the quotes will be used by the
     configuration parser to define the extent of one string, but will
     not be passed down into the redirect router itself.  There are two
     main approaches to get around this: escape quotes to be part of the
     data itself, or avoid using this mechanism and instead create a
     custom transport with the ‘command’ option set and reference that
     transport from an ‘accept’ router.

   • An item is interpreted as a path name if it begins with "/" and
     does not parse as a valid *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address that
     includes a domain.  For example,

          /home/world/minbari

     is treated as a filename, but

          /s=molari/o=babylon/@x400gate.way

     is treated as an address.  For a filename, a transport must be
     specified using the ‘file_transport’ option.  However, if the
     generated path name ends with a forward slash character, it is
     interpreted as a directory name rather than a filename, and
     ‘directory_transport’ is used instead.

     Normally, either the router or the transport specifies a user and a
     group under which to run the delivery.  The default is to use the
     Exim user and group.

     However, if a redirection item is the path ‘/dev/null’, delivery to
     it is bypassed at a high level, and the log entry shows
     "**bypassed**" instead of a transport name.  In this case the user
     and group are not used.

   • If an item is of the form

          :include:<path name>

     a list of further items is taken from the given file and included
     at that point.  *Note*: Such a file can not be a filter file; it is
     just an out-of-line addition to the list.  The items in the
     included list are separated by commas or newlines and are not
     subject to expansion.  If this is the first item in an alias list
     in an ‘lsearch’ file, a colon must be used to terminate the alias
     name.  This example is incorrect:

          list1    :include:/opt/lists/list1

     It must be given as

          list1:   :include:/opt/lists/list1

     Tainted data may not be used for a filename.

   • Sometimes you want to throw away mail to a particular local part.
     Making the ‘data’ option expand to an empty string does not work,
     because that causes the router to decline.  Instead, the alias item

          :blackhole:

     can be used.  It does what its name implies.  No delivery is done,
     and no error message is generated.  This has the same effect as
     specifying ‘/dev/null’ as a destination, but it can be
     independently disabled.

     *Warning*: If _:blackhole:_ appears anywhere in a redirection list,
     no delivery is done for the original local part, even if other
     redirection items are present.  If you are generating a multi-item
     list (for example, by reading a database) and need the ability to
     provide a no-op item, you must use ‘/dev/null’.

   • An attempt to deliver a particular address can be deferred or
     forced to fail by redirection items of the form

          :defer:
          :fail:

     respectively.  When a redirection list contains such an item, it
     applies to the entire redirection; any other items in the list are
     ignored.  Any text following _:fail:_ or _:defer:_ is placed in the
     error text associated with the failure.  For example, an alias file
     might contain:

          X.Employee:  :fail: Gone away, no forwarding address

     In the case of an address that is being verified from an ACL or as
     the subject of a VRFY command, the text is included in the SMTP
     error response by default.  The text is not included in the
     response to an EXPN command.  In non-SMTP cases the text is
     included in the error message that Exim generates.

     By default for verify, Exim sends a 451 SMTP code for a _:defer:_,
     and 550 for _:fail:_.  However, if the message starts with three
     digits followed by a space, optionally followed by an extended code
     of the form _n.n.n_, also followed by a space, and the very first
     digit is the same as the default error code, the code from the
     message is used instead.  If the very first digit is incorrect, a
     panic error is logged, and the default code is used.  You can
     suppress the use of the supplied code in a redirect router by
     setting the ‘forbid_smtp_code’ option true.  In this case, any SMTP
     code is quietly ignored.

     In an ACL, an explicitly provided message overrides the default,
     but the default message is available in the variable
     ‘$acl_verify_message’ and can therefore be included in a custom
     message if this is desired.

     Normally the error text is the rest of the redirection list - a
     comma does not terminate it - but a newline does act as a
     terminator.  Newlines are not normally present in alias expansions.
     In ‘lsearch’ lookups they are removed as part of the continuation
     process, but they may exist in other kinds of lookup and in
     _:include:_ files.

     During routing for message delivery (as opposed to verification), a
     redirection containing _:fail:_ causes an immediate failure of the
     incoming address, whereas _:defer:_ causes the message to remain in
     the queue so that a subsequent delivery attempt can happen at a
     later time.  If an address is deferred for too long, it will
     ultimately fail, because the normal retry rules still apply.

   • Sometimes it is useful to use a single-key search type with a
     default (see chapter *note File and database lookups::) to look up
     aliases.  However, there may be a need for exceptions to the
     default.  These can be handled by aliasing them to _:unknown:_.
     This differs from _:fail:_ in that it causes the ‘redirect’ router
     to decline, whereas _:fail:_ forces routing to fail.  A lookup
     which results in an empty redirection list has the same effect.


File: spec.info,  Node: Duplicate addresses <1>,  Next: Repeated redirection expansion,  Prev: Special items in redirection lists,  Up: The redirect router

22.7 Duplicate addresses
========================

Exim removes duplicate addresses from the list to which it is
delivering, so as to deliver just one copy to each address.  This does
not apply to deliveries routed to pipes by different immediate parent
addresses, but an indirect aliasing scheme of the type

     pipe:       |/some/command $local_part
     localpart1: pipe
     localpart2: pipe

   does not work with a message that is addressed to both local parts,
because when the second is aliased to the intermediate local part "pipe"
it gets discarded as being the same as a previously handled address.
However, a scheme such as

     localpart1: |/some/command $local_part
     localpart2: |/some/command $local_part

   does result in two different pipe deliveries, because the immediate
parents of the pipes are distinct.


File: spec.info,  Node: Repeated redirection expansion,  Next: Errors in redirection lists,  Prev: Duplicate addresses <1>,  Up: The redirect router

22.8 Repeated redirection expansion
===================================

When a message cannot be delivered to all of its recipients immediately,
leading to two or more delivery attempts, redirection expansion is
carried out afresh each time for those addresses whose children were not
all previously delivered.  If redirection is being used as a mailing
list, this can lead to new members of the list receiving copies of old
messages.  The ‘one_time’ option can be used to avoid this.


File: spec.info,  Node: Errors in redirection lists,  Next: Private options for the redirect router,  Prev: Repeated redirection expansion,  Up: The redirect router

22.9 Errors in redirection lists
================================

If ‘skip_syntax_errors’ is set, a malformed address that causes a
parsing error is skipped, and an entry is written to the main log.  This
may be useful for mailing lists that are automatically managed.
Otherwise, if an error is detected while generating the list of new
addresses, the original address is deferred.  See also
‘syntax_errors_to’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for the redirect router,  Prev: Errors in redirection lists,  Up: The redirect router

22.10 Private options for the redirect router
=============================================

The private options for the ‘redirect’ router are as follows:

‘allow_defer’          Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Setting this option allows the use of _:defer:_ in non-filter
redirection data, or the ‘defer’ command in an Exim filter file.

‘allow_fail’           Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true, the _:fail:_ item can be used in a
redirection list, and the ‘fail’ command may be used in an Exim filter
file.

‘allow_filter’         Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   A "true" value for this option allows Exim to interpret redirection
data that starts with "#Exim filter" or "#Sieve filter" as a set of
filtering instructions.  There are some features of Exim filter files
that some administrators may wish to lock out; see the
‘forbid_filter_’_xxx_ options below

   and note also that the option is expanded before use.

   It is also possible to lock out Exim filters or Sieve filters while
allowing the other type; see ‘forbid_exim_filter’ and
‘forbid_sieve_filter’.

   The filter is run using the uid and gid set by the generic ‘user’ and
‘group’ options.  These take their defaults from the password data if
‘check_local_user’ is set, so in the normal case of users' personal
filter files, the filter is run as the relevant user.  When
‘allow_filter’ is set true, Exim insists that either ‘check_local_user’
or ‘user’ is set.

‘allow_freeze’         Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Setting this option allows the use of the ‘freeze’ command in an Exim
filter.  This command is more normally encountered in system filters,
and is disabled by default for redirection filters because it isn't
something you usually want to let ordinary users do.

‘check_ancestor’       Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option is concerned with handling generated addresses that are
the same as some address in the list of redirection ancestors of the
current address.  Although it is turned off by default in the code, it
is set in the default configuration file for handling users' ‘.forward’
files.  It is recommended for this use of the ‘redirect’ router.

   When ‘check_ancestor’ is set, if a generated address (including the
domain) is the same as any ancestor of the current address, it is
replaced by a copy of the current address.  This helps in the case where
local part A is aliased to B, and B has a ‘.forward’ file pointing back
to A. For example, within a single domain, the local part "Joe.Bloggs"
is aliased to "jb" and ‘ jb/.forward’ contains:

     \Joe.Bloggs, <other item(s)>

   Without the ‘check_ancestor’ setting, either local part ("jb" or
"joe.bloggs") gets processed once by each router and so ends up as it
was originally.  If "jb" is the real mailbox name, mail to "jb" gets
delivered (having been turned into "joe.bloggs" by the ‘.forward’ file
and back to "jb" by the alias), but mail to "joe.bloggs" fails.  Setting
‘check_ancestor’ on the ‘redirect’ router that handles the ‘.forward’
file prevents it from turning "jb" back into "joe.bloggs" when that was
the original address.  See also the ‘repeat_use’ option below.

‘check_group’          Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                                                           below_

   When the ‘file’ option is used, the group owner of the file is
checked only when this option is set.  The permitted groups are those
listed in the ‘owngroups’ option, together with the user's default group
if ‘check_local_user’ is set.  If the file has the wrong group, routing
is deferred.  The default setting for this option is true if
‘check_local_user’ is set and the ‘modemask’ option permits the group
write bit, or if the ‘owngroups’ option is set.  Otherwise it is false,
and no group check occurs.

‘check_owner’          Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                                                           below_

   When the ‘file’ option is used, the owner of the file is checked only
when this option is set.  If ‘check_local_user’ is set, the local user
is permitted; otherwise the owner must be one of those listed in the
‘owners’ option.  The default value for this option is true if
‘check_local_user’ or ‘owners’ is set.  Otherwise the default is false,
and no owner check occurs.

‘data’                 Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is mutually exclusive with ‘file’.  One or other of them
must be set, but not both.  The contents of ‘data’ are expanded, and
then used as the list of forwarding items, or as a set of filtering
instructions.  If the expansion is forced to fail, or the result is an
empty string or a string that has no effect (consists entirely of
comments), the router declines.

   When filtering instructions are used, the string must begin with
"#Exim filter", and all comments in the string, including this initial
one, must be terminated with newline characters.  For example:

     data = #Exim filter\n\
            if $h_to: contains Exim then save $home/mail/exim endif

   If you are reading the data from a database where newlines cannot be
included, you can use the ‘${sg}’ expansion item to turn the escape
string of your choice into a newline.

‘directory_transport’  Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   A ‘redirect’ router sets up a direct delivery to a directory when a
path name ending with a slash is specified as a new "address".  The
transport used is specified by this option, which, after expansion, must
be the name of a configured transport.  This should normally be an
‘appendfile’ transport.

‘file’                 Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies the name of a file that contains the
redirection data.  It is mutually exclusive with the ‘data’ option.  The
string is expanded before use; if the expansion is forced to fail, the
router declines.  Other expansion failures cause delivery to be
deferred.  The result of a successful expansion must be an absolute
path.  The entire file is read and used as the redirection data.  If the
data is an empty string or a string that has no effect (consists
entirely of comments), the router declines.

   The file operations will be done using the user and group as
specified by the corresponding router options, or as discovered by the
‘check_local_user’ option.

   If the attempt to open the file fails with a "does not exist" error,
Exim runs a check on the containing directory, unless ‘ignore_enotdir’
is true (see below).  If the directory does not appear to exist,
delivery is deferred.  This can happen when users' ‘.forward’ files are
in NFS-mounted directories, and there is a mount problem.  If the
containing directory does exist, but the file does not, the router
declines.

‘file_transport’       Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   A ‘redirect’ router sets up a direct delivery to a file when a path
name not ending in a slash is specified as a new "address".  The
transport used is specified by this option, which, after expansion, must
be the name of a configured transport.  This should normally be an
‘appendfile’ transport.  When it is running, the filename is in
‘$address_file’.

‘filter_prepend_home’  Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When this option is true, if a ‘save’ command in an Exim filter
specifies a relative path, and ‘$home’ is defined, it is automatically
prepended to the relative path.  If this option is set false, this
action does not happen.  The relative path is then passed to the
transport unmodified.

‘forbid_blackhole’     Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, the _:blackhole:_ item may not appear in a
redirection list.

‘forbid_exim_filter’   Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is set true, only Sieve filters are permitted when
‘allow_filter’ is true.

‘forbid_file’          Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, this router may not generate a new address
that specifies delivery to a local file or directory, either from a
filter or from a conventional forward file.  This option is forced to be
true if ‘one_time’ is set.  It applies to Sieve filters as well as to
Exim filters, but if true, it locks out the Sieve's "keep" facility.

‘forbid_filter_dlfunc’ Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filters are not
allowed to make use of the ‘dlfunc’ expansion facility to run
dynamically loaded functions.

‘forbid_filter_existstest’Use: _redirect_Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filters are not
allowed to make use of the ‘exists’ condition or the ‘stat’ expansion
item.

‘forbid_filter_logwrite’Use: _redirect_  Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, use of the logging facility in Exim filters
is not permitted.  Logging is in any case available only if the filter
is being run under some unprivileged uid (which is normally the case for
ordinary users' ‘.forward’ files).

‘forbid_filter_lookup’ Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are
not allowed to make use of ‘lookup’ items.

‘forbid_filter_perl’   Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   This option has an effect only if Exim is built with embedded Perl
support.  If it is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are not
allowed to make use of the embedded Perl support.

‘forbid_filter_readfile’Use: _redirect_  Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are
not allowed to make use of ‘readfile’ items.

‘forbid_filter_readsocket’Use: _redirect_Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are
not allowed to make use of ‘readsocket’ items.

‘forbid_filter_reply’  Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, this router may not generate an automatic
reply message.  Automatic replies can be generated only from Exim or
Sieve filter files, not from traditional forward files.  This option is
forced to be true if ‘one_time’ is set.

‘forbid_filter_run’    Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, string expansions in Exim filter files are
not allowed to make use of ‘run’ items.

‘forbid_include’       Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, items of the form

     :include:<path name>

   are not permitted in non-filter redirection lists.

‘forbid_pipe’          Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is true, this router may not generate a new address
which specifies delivery to a pipe, either from an Exim filter or from a
conventional forward file.  This option is forced to be true if
‘one_time’ is set.

‘forbid_sieve_filter’  Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is set true, only Exim filters are permitted when
‘allow_filter’ is true.

‘forbid_smtp_code’     Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is set true, any SMTP error codes that are present at
the start of messages specified for ‘:defer:’ or ‘:fail:’ are quietly
ignored, and the default codes (451 and 550, respectively) are always
used.

‘hide_child_in_errmsg’ Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true, it prevents Exim from quoting a child address
if it generates a bounce or delay message for it.  Instead it says "an
address generated from <_the top level address_>".  Of course, this
applies only to bounces generated locally.  If a message is forwarded to
another host, _its_ bounce may well quote the generated address.

‘ignore_eacces’        Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set and an attempt to open a redirection file
yields the EACCES error (permission denied), the ‘redirect’ router
behaves as if the file did not exist.

‘ignore_enotdir’       Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set and an attempt to open a redirection file
yields the ENOTDIR error (something on the path is not a directory), the
‘redirect’ router behaves as if the file did not exist.

   Setting ‘ignore_enotdir’ has another effect as well: When a
‘redirect’ router that has the ‘file’ option set discovers that the file
does not exist (the ENOENT error), it tries to ‘stat()’ the parent
directory, as a check against unmounted NFS directories.  If the parent
can not be statted, delivery is deferred.  However, it seems wrong to do
this check when ‘ignore_enotdir’ is set, because that option tells Exim
to ignore "something on the path is not a directory" (the ENOTDIR
error).  This is a confusing area, because it seems that some operating
systems give ENOENT where others give ENOTDIR.

‘include_directory’    Use: _redirect_   Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   If this option is set, the path names of any _:include:_ items in a
redirection list must start with this directory.

‘modemask’             Use: _redirect_   Type: _octal      Default: _022_
                                         integer_

   This specifies mode bits which must not be set for a file specified
by the ‘file’ option.  If any of the forbidden bits are set, delivery is
deferred.

‘one_time’             Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Sometimes the fact that Exim re-evaluates aliases and reprocesses
redirection files each time it tries to deliver a message causes a
problem when one or more of the generated addresses fails be delivered
at the first attempt.  The problem is not one of duplicate delivery -
Exim is clever enough to handle that - but of what happens when the
redirection list changes during the time that the message is on Exim's
queue.  This is particularly true in the case of mailing lists, where
new subscribers might receive copies of messages that were posted before
they subscribed.

   If ‘one_time’ is set and any addresses generated by the router fail
to deliver at the first attempt, the failing addresses are added to the
message as "top level" addresses, and the parent address that generated
them is marked "delivered".  Thus, redirection does not happen again at
the next delivery attempt.

   *Warning 1*: Any header line addition or removal that is specified by
this router would be lost if delivery did not succeed at the first
attempt.  For this reason, the ‘headers_add’ and ‘headers_remove’
generic options are not permitted when ‘one_time’ is set.

   *Warning 2*: To ensure that the router generates only addresses (as
opposed to pipe or file deliveries or auto-replies) ‘forbid_file’,
‘forbid_pipe’, and ‘forbid_filter_reply’ are forced to be true when
‘one_time’ is set.

   *Warning 3*: The ‘unseen’ generic router option may not be set with
‘one_time’.

   The original top-level address is remembered with each of the
generated addresses, and is output in any log messages.  However, any
intermediate parent addresses are not recorded.  This makes a difference
to the log only if ‘all_parents’ log selector is set.  It is expected
that ‘one_time’ will typically be used for mailing lists, where there is
normally just one level of expansion.

‘owners’               Use: _redirect_   Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This specifies a list of permitted owners for the file specified by
‘file’.  This list is in addition to the local user when
‘check_local_user’ is set.  See ‘check_owner’ above.

‘owngroups’            Use: _redirect_   Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_             _unset_

   This specifies a list of permitted groups for the file specified by
‘file’.  The list is in addition to the local user's primary group when
‘check_local_user’ is set.  See ‘check_group’ above.

‘pipe_transport’       Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   A ‘redirect’ router sets up a direct delivery to a pipe when a string
starting with a vertical bar character is specified as a new "address".
The transport used is specified by this option, which, after expansion,
must be the name of a configured transport.  This should normally be a
‘pipe’ transport.  When the transport is run, the pipe command is in
‘$address_pipe’.

‘qualify_domain’       Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, and an unqualified address (one without a
domain) is generated, and that address would normally be qualified by
the global setting in ‘qualify_recipient’, it is instead qualified with
the domain specified by expanding this string.  If the expansion fails,
the router declines.  If you want to revert to the default, you can have
the expansion generate ‘$qualify_recipient’.

   This option applies to all unqualified addresses generated by Exim
filters, but for traditional ‘.forward’ files, it applies only to
addresses that are not preceded by a backslash.  Sieve filters cannot
generate unqualified addresses.

‘qualify_preserve_domain’Use: _redirect_ Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, the router's local ‘qualify_domain’ option
must not be set (a configuration error occurs if it is).  If an
unqualified address (one without a domain) is generated, it is qualified
with the domain of the parent address (the immediately preceding
ancestor) instead of the global ‘qualify_recipient’ value.  In the case
of a traditional ‘.forward’ file, this applies whether or not the
address is preceded by a backslash.

‘repeat_use’           Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If this option is set false, the router is skipped for a child
address that has any ancestor that was routed by this router.  This test
happens before any of the other preconditions are tested.  Exim's
default anti-looping rules skip only when the ancestor is the same as
the current address.  See also ‘check_ancestor’ above and the generic
‘redirect_router’ option.

‘reply_transport’      Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   A ‘redirect’ router sets up an automatic reply when a ‘mail’ or
‘vacation’ command is used in a filter file.  The transport used is
specified by this option, which, after expansion, must be the name of a
configured transport.  This should normally be an ‘autoreply’ transport.
Other transports are unlikely to do anything sensible or useful.

‘rewrite’              Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If this option is set false, addresses generated by the router are
not subject to address rewriting.  Otherwise, they are treated like new
addresses and are rewritten according to the global rewriting rules.

‘sieve_inbox’          Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _inbox_

   The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the
name of the mailbox used for "keep" operations (explicit or implicit).

‘sieve_subaddress’     Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the
:subaddress part of an address.

‘sieve_useraddress’    Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The value of this option is passed to a Sieve filter to specify the
:user part of an address.  However, if it is unset, the entire original
local part (including any prefix or suffix) is used for :user.

‘sieve_vacation_directory’Use: _redirect_Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   To enable the "vacation" extension for Sieve filters, you must set
‘sieve_vacation_directory’ to the directory where vacation databases are
held (do not put anything else in that directory), and ensure that the
‘reply_transport’ option refers to an ‘autoreply’ transport.  Each user
needs their own directory; Exim will create it if necessary.

‘skip_syntax_errors’   Use: _redirect_   Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If ‘skip_syntax_errors’ is set, syntactically malformed addresses in
non-filter redirection data are skipped, and each failing address is
logged.  If ‘syntax_errors_to’ is set, a message is sent to the address
it defines, giving details of the failures.  If ‘syntax_errors_text’ is
set, its contents are expanded and placed at the head of the error
message generated by ‘syntax_errors_to’.  Usually it is appropriate to
set ‘syntax_errors_to’ to be the same address as the generic ‘errors_to’
option.  The ‘skip_syntax_errors’ option is often used when handling
mailing lists.

   If all the addresses in a redirection list are skipped because of
syntax errors, the router declines to handle the original address, and
it is passed to the following routers.

   If ‘skip_syntax_errors’ is set when an Exim filter is interpreted,
any syntax error in the filter causes filtering to be abandoned without
any action being taken.  The incident is logged, and the router declines
to handle the address, so it is passed to the following routers.

   Syntax errors in a Sieve filter file cause the "keep" action to
occur.  This action is specified by *RFC 3028
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3028#section-2.10.6)*.  The
values of ‘skip_syntax_errors’, ‘syntax_errors_to’, and
‘syntax_errors_text’ are not used.

   ‘skip_syntax_errors’ can be used to specify that errors in users'
forward lists or filter files should not prevent delivery.  The
‘syntax_errors_to’ option, used with an address that does not get
redirected, can be used to notify users of these errors, by means of a
router like this:

     userforward:
       driver = redirect
       allow_filter
       check_local_user
       file = $home/.forward
       file_transport = address_file
       pipe_transport = address_pipe
       reply_transport = address_reply
       no_verify
       skip_syntax_errors
       syntax_errors_to = real-$local_part@$domain
       syntax_errors_text = \
        This is an automatically generated message. An error has\n\
        been found in your .forward file. Details of the error are\n\
        reported below. While this error persists, you will receive\n\
        a copy of this message for every message that is addressed\n\
        to you. If your .forward file is a filter file, or if it is\n\
        a non-filter file containing no valid forwarding addresses,\n\
        a copy of each incoming message will be put in your normal\n\
        mailbox. If a non-filter file contains at least one valid\n\
        forwarding address, forwarding to the valid addresses will\n\
        happen, and those will be the only deliveries that occur.

   You also need a router to ensure that local addresses that are
prefixed by ‘real-’ are recognized, but not forwarded or filtered.  For
example, you could put this immediately before the ‘userforward’ router:

     real_localuser:
       driver = accept
       check_local_user
       local_part_prefix = real-
       transport = local_delivery

   For security, it would probably be a good idea to restrict the use of
this router to locally-generated messages, using a condition such as
this:

       condition = ${if match_ip {$sender_host_address} \
     			{<; ; 127.0.0.1 ; ::1}}

‘syntax_errors_text’   Use: _redirect_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   See ‘skip_syntax_errors’ above.

‘syntax_errors_to’     Use: _redirect_   Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   See ‘skip_syntax_errors’ above.


File: spec.info,  Node: Environment for local transports,  Next: Generic options for transports,  Prev: The redirect router,  Up: Top

23 Environment for running local transports
*******************************************

Local transports handle deliveries to files and pipes.  (The ‘autoreply’
transport can be thought of as similar to a pipe.)  Exim always runs
transports in subprocesses, under specified uids and gids.  Typical
deliveries to local mailboxes run under the uid and gid of the local
user.

   Exim also sets a specific current directory while running the
transport; for some transports a home directory setting is also
relevant.  The ‘pipe’ transport is the only one that sets up environment
variables; see section *note Environment variables:: for details.

   The values used for the uid, gid, and the directories may come from
several different places.  In many cases, the router that handles the
address associates settings with that address as a result of its
‘check_local_user’, ‘group’, or ‘user’ options.  However, values may
also be given in the transport's own configuration, and these override
anything that comes from the router.

* Menu:

* Concurrent deliveries::
* Uids and gids::
* Current and home directories::
* Expansion variables derived from the address::


File: spec.info,  Node: Concurrent deliveries,  Next: Uids and gids,  Up: Environment for local transports

23.1 Concurrent deliveries
==========================

If two different messages for the same local recipient arrive more or
less simultaneously, the two delivery processes are likely to run
concurrently.  When the ‘appendfile’ transport is used to write to a
file, Exim applies locking rules to stop concurrent processes from
writing to the same file at the same time.

   However, when you use a ‘pipe’ transport, it is up to you to arrange
any locking that is needed.  Here is a silly example:

     my_transport:
       driver = pipe
       command = /bin/sh -c 'cat >>/some/file'

   This is supposed to write the message at the end of the file.
However, if two messages arrive at the same time, the file will be
scrambled.  You can use the ‘exim_lock’ utility program (see section
*note Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock): Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock].)
to lock a file using the same algorithm that Exim itself uses.


File: spec.info,  Node: Uids and gids,  Next: Current and home directories,  Prev: Concurrent deliveries,  Up: Environment for local transports

23.2 Uids and gids
==================

All transports have the options ‘group’ and ‘user’.  If ‘group’ is set,
it overrides any group that the router set in the address, even if
‘user’ is not set for the transport.  This makes it possible, for
example, to run local mail delivery under the uid of the recipient (set
by the router), but in a special group (set by the transport).  For
example:

     # Routers ...
     # User/group are set by check_local_user in this router
     local_users:
       driver = accept
       check_local_user
       transport = group_delivery

     # Transports ...
     # This transport overrides the group
     group_delivery:
       driver = appendfile
       file = /var/spool/mail/$local_part_data
       group = mail

   If ‘user’ is set for a transport, its value overrides what is set in
the address by the router.  If ‘user’ is non-numeric and ‘group’ is not
set, the gid associated with the user is used.  If ‘user’ is numeric,
‘group’ must be set.

   When the uid is taken from the transport's configuration, (including
the default use of the "exim" uid) the ‘initgroups()’ function is called
for the groups associated with that uid if the ‘initgroups’ option is
set for the transport.  When the uid is not specified by the transport,
but is associated with the address by a router, the option for calling
‘initgroups()’ is taken from the router configuration.

   This matters if the transport depends on any membership of
supplemental groups.

   The ‘pipe’ transport contains the special option ‘pipe_as_creator’.
If this is set and ‘user’ is not set, the uid of the process that called
Exim to receive the message is used, and if ‘group’ is not set, the
corresponding original gid is also used.

   This is the detailed preference order for obtaining a gid; the first
of the following that is set is used:

   • A ‘group’ setting of the transport;

   • A ‘group’ setting of the router;

   • A gid associated with a user setting of the router, either as a
     result of ‘check_local_user’ or an explicit non-numeric ‘user’
     setting;

   • The group associated with a non-numeric ‘user’ setting of the
     transport;

   • In a ‘pipe’ transport, the creator's gid if ‘deliver_as_creator’ is
     set and the uid is the creator's uid;

   • The Exim gid if the Exim uid is being used as a default.

   If, for example, the user is specified numerically on the router and
there are no group settings, no gid is available.  In this situation, an
error occurs.  This is different for the uid, for which there always is
an ultimate default.  The first of the following that is set is used:

   • A ‘user’ setting of the transport;

   • In a ‘pipe’ transport, the creator's uid if ‘deliver_as_creator’ is
     set;

   • A ‘user’ setting of the router;

   • A ‘check_local_user’ setting of the router;

   • The Exim uid.

   Of course, an error will still occur if the uid that is chosen is on
the ‘never_users’ list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Current and home directories,  Next: Expansion variables derived from the address,  Prev: Uids and gids,  Up: Environment for local transports

23.3 Current and home directories
=================================

Routers may set current and home directories for local transports by
means of the ‘transport_current_directory’ and
‘transport_home_directory’ options.  However, if the transport's
‘current_directory’ or ‘home_directory’ options are set, they override
the router's values.  In detail, the home directory for a local
transport is taken from the first of these values that is set:

   • The ‘home_directory’ option on the transport;

   • The ‘transport_home_directory’ option on the router;

   • The password data if ‘check_local_user’ is set on the router;

   • The ‘router_home_directory’ option on the router.

   The current directory is taken from the first of these values that is
set:

   • The ‘current_directory’ option on the transport;

   • The ‘transport_current_directory’ option on the router.

   If neither the router nor the transport sets a current directory,
Exim uses the value of the home directory, if it is set.  Otherwise it
sets the current directory to ‘/’ before running a local transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: Expansion variables derived from the address,  Prev: Current and home directories,  Up: Environment for local transports

23.4 Expansion variables derived from the address
=================================================

Normally a local delivery is handling a single address, and in that case
the variables such as ‘$domain’ and ‘$local_part’ are set during local
deliveries.  However, in some circumstances more than one address may be
handled at once (for example, while writing batch SMTP for onward
transmission by some other means).  In this case, the variables
associated with the local part are never set, ‘$domain’ is set only if
all the addresses have the same domain, and ‘$original_domain’ is never
set.


File: spec.info,  Node: Generic options for transports,  Next: Address batching,  Prev: Environment for local transports,  Up: Top

24 Generic options for transports
*********************************

The name of a transport is limited to be 64 ASCII characters long; prior
to Exim 4.95 names would be silently truncated at this length, but now
it is enforced.

   The following generic options apply to all transports:

‘body_only’            Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is set, the message's headers are not transported.  It
is mutually exclusive with ‘headers_only’.  If it is used with the
‘appendfile’ or ‘pipe’ transports, the settings of ‘message_prefix’ and
‘message_suffix’ should be checked, because this option does not
automatically suppress them.

‘current_directory’    Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the current directory that is to be set while running
the transport, overriding any value that may have been set by the
router.  If the expansion fails for any reason, including forced
failure, an error is logged, and delivery is deferred.

‘disable_logging’      Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is set true, nothing is logged for any deliveries by
the transport or for any transport errors.  You should not set this
option unless you really, really know what you are doing.

‘debug_print’          Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set and debugging is enabled (see the ‘-d’ command
line option), the string is expanded and included in the debugging
output when the transport is run.  If expansion of the string fails, the
error message is written to the debugging output, and Exim carries on
processing.  This facility is provided to help with checking out the
values of variables and so on when debugging driver configurations.  For
example, if a ‘headers_add’ option is not working properly,
‘debug_print’ could be used to output the variables it references.  A
newline is added to the text if it does not end with one.  The variables
‘$transport_name’ and ‘$router_name’ contain the name of the transport
and the router that called it.

‘delivery_date_add’    Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is true, a _Delivery-date:_ header is added to the
message.  This gives the actual time the delivery was made.  As this is
not a standard header, Exim has a configuration option
(‘delivery_date_remove’) which requests its removal from incoming
messages, so that delivered messages can safely be resent to other
recipients.

‘driver’               Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _transports_                        _unset_

   This specifies which of the available transport drivers is to be
used.  There is no default, and this option must be set for every
transport.

‘envelope_to_add’      Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is true, an _Envelope-to:_ header is added to the
message.  This gives the original address(es) in the incoming envelope
that caused this delivery to happen.  More than one address may be
present if the transport is configured to handle several addresses at
once, or if more than one original address was redirected to the same
final address.  As this is not a standard header, Exim has a
configuration option (‘envelope_to_remove’) which requests its removal
from incoming messages, so that delivered messages can safely be resent
to other recipients.

   *Note:* If used on a transport handling multiple recipients (the smtp
transport unless ‘max_rcpt’ is 1, the appendfile, pipe or lmtp transport
if ‘batch_max’ is greater than 1) then information about Bcc recipients
will be leaked.  Doing so is generally not advised.

‘event_action’         Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option declares a string to be expanded for Exim's events
mechanism.  For details see chapter *note Events::.

‘group’                Use:              Type:             Default: _Exim
                       _transports_      _string_*__       group_

   This option specifies a gid for running the transport process,
overriding any value that the router supplies, and also overriding any
value associated with ‘user’ (see below).

‘headers_add’          Use:              Type: _list_*__   Default:
                       _transports_                        _unset_

   This option specifies a list of text headers, newline-separated (by
default, changeable in the usual way *note Changing list separators::),
which are (separately) expanded and added to the header portion of a
message as it is transported, as described in section *note Adding and
removing header lines in routers and transports::.  Additional header
lines can also be specified by routers.  If the result of the expansion
is an empty string, or if the expansion is forced to fail, no action is
taken.  Other expansion failures are treated as errors and cause the
delivery to be deferred.

   Unlike most options, ‘headers_add’ can be specified multiple times
for a transport; all listed headers are added.

‘headers_only’         Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is set, the message's body is not transported.  It is
mutually exclusive with ‘body_only’.  If it is used with the
‘appendfile’ or ‘pipe’ transports, the settings of ‘message_prefix’ and
‘message_suffix’ should be checked, since this option does not
automatically suppress them.

‘headers_remove’       Use:              Type: _list_*__   Default:
                       _transports_                        _unset_

   This option specifies a list of text headers, colon-separated (by
default, changeable in the usual way *note Changing list separators::),
to be removed from the message.  However, the option has no effect when
an address is just being verified.  Each list item is separately
expanded.  If the result of the expansion is an empty string, or if the
expansion is forced to fail, no action is taken.  Other expansion
failures are treated as errors and cause the delivery to be deferred.
If an item ends in *, it will match any header with the given prefix.

   Matching headers are omitted from the message as it is transported,
as described in section *note Adding and removing header lines in
routers and transports::.  Header removal can also be specified by
routers.

   Unlike most options, ‘headers_remove’ can be specified multiple times
for a transport; all listed headers are removed.

   *Warning*: Because of the separate expansion of the list items, items
that contain a list separator must have it doubled.  To avoid this,
change the list separator (*note Changing list separators::).

‘headers_rewrite’      Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _transports_                        _unset_

   This option allows addresses in header lines to be rewritten at
transport time, that is, as the message is being copied to its
destination.  The contents of the option are a colon-separated list of
rewriting rules.  Each rule is in exactly the same form as one of the
general rewriting rules that are applied when a message is received.
These are described in chapter *note Address rewriting::.  For example,

     headers_rewrite = a@b c@d f : \
                       x@y w@z

   changes _a@b_ into _c@d_ in _From:_ header lines, and _x@y_ into
_w@z_ in all address-bearing header lines.  The rules are applied to the
header lines just before they are written out at transport time, so they
affect only those copies of the message that pass through the transport.
However, only the message's original header lines, and any that were
added by a system filter, are rewritten.  If a router or transport adds
header lines, they are not affected by this option.  These rewriting
rules are _not_ applied to the envelope.  You can change the return path
using ‘return_path’, but you cannot change envelope recipients at this
time.

‘home_directory’       Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies a home directory setting for a local transport,
overriding any value that may be set by the router.  The home directory
is placed in ‘$home’ while expanding the transport's private options.
It is also used as the current directory if no current directory is set
by the ‘current_directory’ option on the transport or the
‘transport_current_directory’ option on the router.  If the expansion
fails for any reason, including forced failure, an error is logged, and
delivery is deferred.

‘initgroups’           Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is true and the uid for the delivery process is
provided by the transport, the ‘initgroups()’ function is called when
running the transport to ensure that any additional groups associated
with the uid are set up.

‘max_parallel’         Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _integer_*__      _unset_

   If this option is set and expands to an integer greater than zero it
limits the number of concurrent runs of the transport.  The control does
not apply to shadow transports.

   Exim implements this control by means of a hints database in which a
record is incremented whenever a transport process is being created.
The record is decremented and possibly removed when the process
terminates.  Obviously there is scope for records to get left lying
around if there is a system or program crash.  To guard against this,
Exim ignores any records that are more than six hours old.

   If you use this option, you should also arrange to delete the
relevant hints database whenever your system reboots.  The names of the
files start with ‘misc’ and they are kept in the ‘spool/db’ directory.
There may be one or two files, depending on the type of DBM in use.  The
same files are used for ETRN and smtp transport serialization.

‘message_size_limit’   Use:              Type:             Default: _0_
                       _transports_      _string_*__

   This option controls the size of messages passed through the
transport.  It is expanded before use; the result of the expansion must
be a sequence of decimal digits, optionally followed by K or M. If the
expansion fails for any reason, including forced failure, or if the
result is not of the required form, delivery is deferred.  If the value
is greater than zero and the size of a message exceeds this limit, the
address is failed.  If there is any chance that the resulting bounce
message could be routed to the same transport, you should ensure that
‘return_size_limit’ is less than the transport's ‘message_size_limit’,
as otherwise the bounce message will fail to get delivered.

‘rcpt_include_affixes’ Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   When this option is false (the default), and an address that has had
any affixes (prefixes or suffixes) removed from the local part is
delivered by any form of SMTP or LMTP, the affixes are not included.
For example, if a router that contains

     local_part_prefix = *-

   routes the address _abc-xyz@some.domain_ to an SMTP transport, the
envelope is delivered with

     RCPT TO:<xyz@some.domain>

   This is also the case when an ACL-time callout is being used to
verify a recipient address.  However, if ‘rcpt_include_affixes’ is set
true, the whole local part is included in the RCPT command.  This option
applies to BSMTP deliveries by the ‘appendfile’ and ‘pipe’ transports as
well as to the ‘lmtp’ and ‘smtp’ transports.

‘retry_use_local_part’ Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                       _transports_                        below_

   When a delivery suffers a temporary failure, a retry record is
created in Exim's hints database.  For remote deliveries, the key for
the retry record is based on the name and/or IP address of the failing
remote host.  For local deliveries, the key is normally the entire
address, including both the local part and the domain.  This is suitable
for most common cases of local delivery temporary failure - for example,
exceeding a mailbox quota should delay only deliveries to that mailbox,
not to the whole domain.

   However, in some special cases you may want to treat a temporary
local delivery as a failure associated with the domain, and not with a
particular local part.  (For example, if you are storing all mail for
some domain in files.)  You can do this by setting
‘retry_use_local_part’ false.

   For all the local transports, its default value is true.  For remote
transports, the default value is false for tidiness, but changing the
value has no effect on a remote transport in the current implementation.

‘return_path’          Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, the string is expanded at transport time and
replaces the existing return path (envelope sender) value in the copy of
the message that is being delivered.  An empty return path is permitted.
This feature is designed for remote deliveries, where the value of this
option is used in the SMTP MAIL command.  If you set ‘return_path’ for a
local transport, the only effect is to change the address that is placed
in the _Return-path:_ header line, if one is added to the message (see
the next option).

   *Note:* A changed return path is not logged unless you add
‘return_path_on_delivery’ to the log selector.

   The expansion can refer to the existing value via ‘$return_path’.
This is either the message's envelope sender, or an address set by the
‘errors_to’ option on a router.  If the expansion is forced to fail, no
replacement occurs; if it fails for another reason, delivery is
deferred.  This option can be used to support VERP (Variable Envelope
Return Paths) - see section *note Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP):
Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].

   *Note*: If a delivery error is detected locally, including the case
when a remote server rejects a message at SMTP time, the bounce message
is not sent to the value of this option.  It is sent to the previously
set errors address.  This defaults to the incoming sender address, but
can be changed by setting ‘errors_to’ in a router.

‘return_path_add’      Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _transports_                        _false_

   If this option is true, a _Return-path:_ header is added to the
message.  Although the return path is normally available in the prefix
line of BSD mailboxes, this is commonly not displayed by MUAs, and so
the user does not have easy access to it.

   *RFC 2821
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2821#section-4.1)* states that
the _Return-path:_ header is added to a message "when the delivery SMTP
server makes the final delivery".  This implies that this header should
not be present in incoming messages.  Exim has a configuration option,
‘return_path_remove’, which requests removal of this header from
incoming messages, so that delivered messages can safely be resent to
other recipients.

‘shadow_condition’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   See ‘shadow_transport’ below.

‘shadow_transport’     Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _transports_                        _unset_

   A local transport may set the ‘shadow_transport’ option to the name
of another local transport.  Shadow remote transports are not supported.

   Whenever a delivery to the main transport succeeds, and either
‘shadow_condition’ is unset, or its expansion does not result in the
empty string or one of the strings "0" or "no" or "false", the message
is also passed to the shadow transport, with the same delivery address
or addresses.  If expansion fails, no action is taken except that
non-forced expansion failures cause a log line to be written.

   The result of the shadow transport is discarded and does not affect
the subsequent processing of the message.  Only a single level of
shadowing is provided; the ‘shadow_transport’ option is ignored on any
transport when it is running as a shadow.  Options concerned with output
from pipes are also ignored.  The log line for the successful delivery
has an item added on the end, of the form

     ST=<shadow transport name>

   If the shadow transport did not succeed, the error message is put in
parentheses afterwards.  Shadow transports can be used for a number of
different purposes, including keeping more detailed log information than
Exim normally provides, and implementing automatic acknowledgment
policies based on message headers that some sites insist on.

‘transport_filter’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _transports_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option sets up a filtering (in the Unix shell sense) process for
messages at transport time.  It should not be confused with mail
filtering as set up by individual users or via a system filter.  If
unset, or expanding to an empty string, no filtering is done.

   When the message is about to be written out, the command specified by
‘transport_filter’ is started up in a separate, parallel process, and
the entire message, including the header lines, is passed to it on its
standard input (this in fact is done from a third process, to avoid
deadlock).  The command must be specified as an absolute path.

   The process run by the command must use its standard input as the
message data to be transformed, and write the results on its standard
output.

   The lines of the message that are written to the transport filter are
terminated by newline ("\n").  The message is passed to the filter
before any SMTP-specific processing, such as turning "\n" into "\r\n"
and escaping lines beginning with a dot, and also before any processing
implied by the settings of ‘check_string’ and ‘escape_string’ in the
‘appendfile’ or ‘pipe’ transports.

   The standard error for the filter process is set to the same
destination as its standard output; this is read and written to the
message's ultimate destination.  The process that writes the message to
the filter, the filter itself, and the original process that reads the
result and delivers it are all run in parallel, like a shell pipeline.

   The filter can perform any transformations it likes, but of course
should take care not to break *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* syntax.  Exim does not
check the result, except to test for a final newline when SMTP is in
use.  All messages transmitted over SMTP must end with a newline, so
Exim supplies one if it is missing.

   A transport filter can be used to provide content-scanning on a
per-user basis at delivery time if the only required effect of the scan
is to modify the message.  For example, a content scan could insert a
new header line containing a spam score.  This could be interpreted by a
filter in the user's MUA. It is not possible to discard a message at
this stage.

   A problem might arise if the filter increases the size of a message
that is being sent down an SMTP connection.  If the receiving SMTP
server has indicated support for the SIZE parameter, Exim will have sent
the size of the message at the start of the SMTP session.  If what is
actually sent is substantially more, the server might reject the
message.  This can be worked round by setting the ‘size_addition’ option
on the ‘smtp’ transport, either to allow for additions to the message,
or to disable the use of SIZE altogether.

   The value of the ‘transport_filter’ option is the command string for
starting the filter, which is run directly from Exim, not under a shell.
The string is parsed by Exim in the same way as a command string for the
‘pipe’ transport: Exim breaks it up into arguments and then expands each
argument separately (see section *note How the command is run::).  Any
kind of expansion failure causes delivery to be deferred.  The special
argument ‘$pipe_addresses’ is replaced by a number of arguments, one for
each address that applies to this delivery.  (This isn't an ideal name
for this feature here, but as it was already implemented for the ‘pipe’
transport, it seemed sensible not to change it.)

   The expansion variables ‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are available
when the transport is a remote one.  They contain the name and IP
address of the host to which the message is being sent.  For example:

     transport_filter = /some/directory/transport-filter.pl \
       $host $host_address $pipe_addresses

   Two problems arise if you want to use more complicated expansion
items to generate transport filter commands, both of which due to the
fact that the command is split up _before_ expansion.

   • If an expansion item contains white space, you must quote it, so
     that it is all part of the same command item.  If the entire option
     setting is one such expansion item, you have to take care what kind
     of quoting you use.  For example:

          transport_filter = '/bin/cmd${if eq{$host}{a.b.c}{1}{2}}'

     This runs the command ‘/bin/cmd1’ if the host name is _a.b.c_, and
     ‘/bin/cmd2’ otherwise.

     Option strings in general have any fully-surrounding double quote
     wrapping removed early in parsing (see *note String values::).
     Then, for this option, quotes protect against whitespace being
     regarded as a separator while splitting into the command argument
     vector.  Either double or single quotes can be used here; the
     former interprets backlash-quoted characters and the latter does
     not.

     If double quotes had been used in this example, they would have
     been stripped by Exim when it read the option's value.  When the
     value is used, if the single quotes were missing, the line would be
     split into two items, ‘/bin/cmd${if’ and ‘eq{$host}{a.b.c}{1}{2}’,
     and an error would occur when Exim tried to expand the first one.

   • Except for the special case of ‘$pipe_addresses’ that is mentioned
     above, an expansion cannot generate multiple arguments, or a
     command name followed by arguments.  Consider this example:

          transport_filter = ${lookup{$host}lsearch{/a/file}\
                              {$value}{/bin/cat}}

     The result of the lookup is interpreted as the name of the command,
     even if it contains white space.  The simplest way round this is to
     use a shell:

          transport_filter = /bin/sh -c ${lookup{$host}lsearch{/a/file}\
                                         {$value}{/bin/cat}}

   The filter process is run under the same uid and gid as the normal
delivery.  For remote deliveries this is the Exim uid/gid by default.
The command should normally yield a zero return code.  Transport filters
are not supposed to fail.  A non-zero code is taken to mean that the
transport filter encountered some serious problem.  Delivery of the
message is deferred; the message remains on the queue and is tried again
later.  It is not possible to cause a message to be bounced from a
transport filter.

   If a transport filter is set on an autoreply transport, the original
message is passed through the filter as it is being copied into the
newly generated message, which happens if the ‘return_message’ option is
set.

‘transport_filter_timeout’Use:           Type: _time_      Default: _5m_
                       _transports_

   When Exim is reading the output of a transport filter, it applies a
timeout that can be set by this option.  Exceeding the timeout is
normally treated as a temporary delivery failure.  However, if a
transport filter is used with a ‘pipe’ transport, a timeout in the
transport filter is treated in the same way as a timeout in the pipe
command itself.  By default, a timeout is a hard error, but if the
‘pipe’ transport's ‘timeout_defer’ option is set true, it becomes a
temporary error.

‘user’                 Use:              Type:             Default: _Exim
                       _transports_      _string_*__       user_

   This option specifies the user under whose uid the delivery process
is to be run, overriding any uid that may have been set by the router.
If the user is given as a name, the uid is looked up from the password
data, and the associated group is taken as the value of the gid to be
used if the ‘group’ option is not set.

   For deliveries that use local transports, a user and group are
normally specified explicitly or implicitly (for example, as a result of
‘check_local_user’) by the router or transport.

   For remote transports, you should leave this option unset unless you
really are sure you know what you are doing.  When a remote transport is
running, it needs to be able to access Exim's hints databases, because
each host may have its own retry data.


File: spec.info,  Node: Address batching,  Next: The appendfile transport,  Prev: Generic options for transports,  Up: Top

25 Address batching in local transports
***************************************

The only remote transport (‘smtp’) is normally configured to handle more
than one address at a time, so that when several addresses are routed to
the same remote host, just one copy of the message is sent.  Local
transports, however, normally handle one address at a time.  That is, a
separate instance of the transport is run for each address that is
routed to the transport.  A separate copy of the message is delivered
each time.

   In special cases, it may be desirable to handle several addresses at
once in a local transport, for example:

   • In an ‘appendfile’ transport, when storing messages in files for
     later delivery by some other means, a single copy of the message
     with multiple recipients saves space.

   • In an ‘lmtp’ transport, when delivering over "local SMTP" to some
     process, a single copy saves time, and is the normal way LMTP is
     expected to work.

   • In a ‘pipe’ transport, when passing the message to a scanner
     program or to some other delivery mechanism such as UUCP, multiple
     recipients may be acceptable.

   These three local transports all have the same options for
controlling multiple ("batched") deliveries, namely ‘batch_max’ and
‘batch_id’.  To save repeating the information for each transport, these
options are described here.

   The ‘batch_max’ option specifies the maximum number of addresses that
can be delivered together in a single run of the transport.  Its default
value is one (no batching).  When more than one address is routed to a
transport that has a ‘batch_max’ value greater than one, the addresses
are delivered in a batch (that is, in a single run of the transport with
multiple recipients), subject to certain conditions:

   • If any of the transport's options contain a reference to
     ‘$local_part’, no batching is possible.

   • If any of the transport's options contain a reference to ‘$domain’,
     only addresses with the same domain are batched.

   • If ‘batch_id’ is set, it is expanded for each address, and only
     those addresses with the same expanded value are batched.  This
     allows you to specify customized batching conditions.  Failure of
     the expansion for any reason, including forced failure, disables
     batching, but it does not stop the delivery from taking place.

   • Batched addresses must also have the same errors address (where to
     send delivery errors), the same header additions and removals, the
     same user and group for the transport, and if a host list is
     present, the first host must be the same.

   In the case of the ‘appendfile’ and ‘pipe’ transports, batching
applies both when the file or pipe command is specified in the
transport, and when it is specified by a ‘redirect’ router, but all the
batched addresses must of course be routed to the same file or pipe
command.  These two transports have an option called ‘use_bsmtp’, which
causes them to deliver the message in "batched SMTP" format, with the
envelope represented as SMTP commands.  The ‘check_string’ and
‘escape_string’ options are forced to the values

     check_string = "."
     escape_string = ".."

   when batched SMTP is in use.  A full description of the batch SMTP
mechanism is given in section *note Outgoing batched SMTP::.  The ‘lmtp’
transport does not have a ‘use_bsmtp’ option, because it always delivers
using the SMTP protocol.

   If the generic ‘envelope_to_add’ option is set for a batching
transport, the _Envelope-to:_ header that is added to the message
contains all the addresses that are being processed together.  If you
are using a batching ‘appendfile’ transport without ‘use_bsmtp’, the
only way to preserve the recipient addresses is to set the
‘envelope_to_add’ option.

   If you are using a ‘pipe’ transport without BSMTP, and setting the
transport's ‘command’ option, you can include ‘$pipe_addresses’ as part
of the command.  This is not a true variable; it is a bit of magic that
causes each of the recipient addresses to be inserted into the command
as a separate argument.  This provides a way of accessing all the
addresses that are being delivered in the batch.  *Note:* This is not
possible for pipe commands that are specified by a ‘redirect’ router.


File: spec.info,  Node: The appendfile transport,  Next: The autoreply transport,  Prev: Address batching,  Up: Top

26 The appendfile transport
***************************

The ‘appendfile’ transport delivers a message by appending it to an
existing file, or by creating an entirely new file in a specified
directory.  Single files to which messages are appended can be in the
traditional Unix mailbox format, or optionally in the MBX format
supported by the Pine MUA and University of Washington IMAP daemon,
_inter alia_.  When each message is being delivered as a separate file,
"maildir" format can optionally be used to give added protection against
failures that happen part-way through the delivery.  A third form of
separate-file delivery known as "mailstore" is also supported.  For all
file formats, Exim attempts to create as many levels of directory as
necessary, provided that ‘create_directory’ is set.

   The code for the optional formats is not included in the Exim binary
by default.  It is necessary to set SUPPORT_MBX, SUPPORT_MAILDIR and/or
SUPPORT_MAILSTORE in ‘Local/Makefile’ to have the appropriate code
included.

   Exim recognizes system quota errors, and generates an appropriate
message.  Exim also supports its own quota control within the transport,
for use when the system facility is unavailable or cannot be used for
some reason.

   If there is an error while appending to a file (for example, quota
exceeded or partition filled), Exim attempts to reset the file's length
and last modification time back to what they were before.  If there is
an error while creating an entirely new file, the new file is removed.

   Before appending to a file, a number of security checks are made, and
the file is locked.  A detailed description is given below, after the
list of private options.

   The ‘appendfile’ transport is most commonly used for local deliveries
to users' mailboxes.  However, it can also be used as a pseudo-remote
transport for putting messages into files for remote delivery by some
means other than Exim.  "Batch SMTP" format is often used in this case
(see the ‘use_bsmtp’ option).

* Menu:

* The file and directory options::
* Private options for appendfile::
* Operational details for appending::
* Operational details for delivery to a new file::
* Maildir delivery::
* Using tags to record message sizes::
* Using a maildirsize file::
* Mailstore delivery::
* Non-special new file delivery::


File: spec.info,  Node: The file and directory options,  Next: Private options for appendfile,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.1 The file and directory options
===================================

The ‘file’ option specifies a single file, to which the message is
appended; the ‘directory’ option specifies a directory, in which a new
file containing the message is created.  Only one of these two options
can be set, and for normal deliveries to mailboxes, one of them _must_
be set.

   However, ‘appendfile’ is also used for delivering messages to files
or directories whose names (or parts of names) are obtained from alias,
forwarding, or filtering operations (for example, a ‘save’ command in a
user's Exim filter).  When such a transport is running, ‘$local_part’
contains the local part that was aliased or forwarded, and
‘$address_file’ contains the name (or partial name) of the file or
directory generated by the redirection operation.  There are two cases:

   • If neither ‘file’ nor ‘directory’ is set, the redirection operation
     must specify an absolute path (one that begins with ‘/’).  This is
     the most common case when users with local accounts use filtering
     to sort mail into different folders.  See for example, the
     ‘address_file’ transport in the default configuration.  If the path
     ends with a slash, it is assumed to be the name of a directory.  A
     delivery to a directory can also be forced by setting
     ‘maildir_format’ or ‘mailstore_format’.

   • If ‘file’ or ‘directory’ is set for a delivery from a redirection,
     it is used to determine the file or directory name for the
     delivery.  Normally, the contents of ‘$address_file’ are used in
     some way in the string expansion.

   If the ‘create_file’ option is set to a path which matches (see the
option definition below for details) a file or directory name for the
delivery, that name becomes de-tainted.

   Tainted data may not be used for a file or directory name.  This
means that, for instance, ‘$local_part’ cannot be used directly as a
component of a path.  It can however be used as the key for a lookup
which returns a path (or component).

   As an example of the second case, consider an environment where users
do not have home directories.  They may be permitted to use Exim filter
commands of the form:

     save folder23

   or Sieve filter commands of the form:

     require "fileinto";
     fileinto "folder23";

   In this situation, the expansion of ‘file’ or ‘directory’ in the
transport must transform the relative path into an appropriate absolute
filename.  In the case of Sieve filters, the name _inbox_ must be
handled.  It is the default name that is used as a result of a "keep"
action in the filter.  This example shows one way of handling this
requirement:

     file = ${if eq{$address_file}{inbox} \
                 {/var/mail/$local_part_data} \
                 {${if eq{${substr_0_1:$address_file}}{/} \
                       {$address_file} \
                       {$home/mail/$address_file} \
                 }} \
            }

   With this setting of ‘file’, _inbox_ refers to the standard mailbox
location, absolute paths are used without change, and other folders are
in the ‘mail’ directory within the home directory.

   An alternative for the "keep" aspect is to use the ‘sieve_inbox’
option on the redirect router that calls the Sieve filter, to explicitly
set the filename used.

   *Note 1*: While processing an Exim filter, a relative path such as
‘folder23’ is turned into an absolute path if a home directory is known
to the router.  In particular, this is the case if ‘check_local_user’ is
set.  If you want to prevent this happening at routing time, you can set
‘router_home_directory’ empty.  This forces the router to pass the
relative path to the transport.

   *Note 2*: An absolute path in ‘$address_file’ is not treated
specially; the ‘file’ or ‘directory’ option is still used if it is set.

   *Note 3*: Permitting a user to enable writes to an absolute path may
be a security issue.


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for appendfile,  Next: Operational details for appending,  Prev: The file and directory options,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.2 Private options for appendfile
===================================

‘allow_fifo’           Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   Setting this option permits delivery to named pipes (FIFOs) as well
as to regular files.  If no process is reading the named pipe at
delivery time, the delivery is deferred.

‘allow_symlink’        Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   By default, ‘appendfile’ will not deliver if the path name for the
file is that of a symbolic link.  Setting this option relaxes that
constraint, but there are security issues involved in the use of
symbolic links.  Be sure you know what you are doing if you set this.
Details of exactly what this option affects are included in the
discussion which follows this list of options.

‘batch_id’             Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   See the description of local delivery batching in chapter *note
Address batching in local transports: Address batching.  However,
batching is automatically disabled for ‘appendfile’ deliveries that
happen as a result of forwarding or aliasing or other redirection
directly to a file.

‘batch_max’            Use:              Type: _integer_   Default: _1_
                       _appendfile_

   See the description of local delivery batching in chapter *note
Address batching in local transports: Address batching.

‘check_group’          Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   When this option is set, the group owner of the file defined by the
‘file’ option is checked to see that it is the same as the group under
which the delivery process is running.  The default setting is false
because the default file mode is 0600, which means that the group is
irrelevant.

‘check_owner’          Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _appendfile_

   When this option is set, the owner of the file defined by the ‘file’
option is checked to ensure that it is the same as the user under which
the delivery process is running.

‘check_string’         Use:              Type: _string_    Default: _see
                       _appendfile_                        below_

   As ‘appendfile’ writes the message, the start of each line is tested
for matching ‘check_string’, and if it does, the initial matching
characters are replaced by the contents of ‘escape_string’.  The value
of ‘check_string’ is a literal string, not a regular expression, and the
case of any letters it contains is significant.

   If ‘use_bsmtp’ is set the values of ‘check_string’ and
‘escape_string’ are forced to "."  and ".."  respectively, and any
settings in the configuration are ignored.  Otherwise, they default to
"From " and ">From " when the ‘file’ option is set, and unset when any
of the ‘directory’, ‘maildir’, or ‘mailstore’ options are set.

   The default settings, along with ‘message_prefix’ and
‘message_suffix’, are suitable for traditional "BSD" mailboxes, where a
line beginning with "From " indicates the start of a new message.  All
four options need changing if another format is used.  For example, to
deliver to mailboxes in MMDF format:

     check_string = "\1\1\1\1\n"
     escape_string = "\1\1\1\1 \n"
     message_prefix = "\1\1\1\1\n"
     message_suffix = "\1\1\1\1\n"

‘create_directory’     Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _appendfile_

   When this option is true, Exim attempts to create any missing
superior directories for the file that it is about to write.  A created
directory's mode is given by the ‘directory_mode’ option.

   The group ownership of a newly created directory is highly dependent
on the operating system (and possibly the file system) that is being
used.  For example, in Solaris, if the parent directory has the setgid
bit set, its group is propagated to the child; if not, the currently set
group is used.  However, in FreeBSD, the parent's group is always used.

‘create_file’          Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _anywhere_

   This option constrains the location of files and directories that are
created by this transport.  It applies to files defined by the ‘file’
option and directories defined by the ‘directory’ option.  In the case
of maildir delivery, it applies to the top level directory, not the
maildir directories beneath.

   The option must be set to one of the words "anywhere", "inhome", or
"belowhome", or to an absolute path.

   In the second and third cases, a home directory must have been set
for the transport, and the file or directory being created must reside
within it.  The "belowhome" checking additionally checks for attempts to
use "../" to evade the testing.  This option is not useful when an
explicit filename is given for normal mailbox deliveries.  It is
intended for the case when filenames are generated from users'
‘.forward’ files.  These are usually handled by an ‘appendfile’
transport called ‘address_file’.  See also ‘file_must_exist’.

   In the fourth case, the value given for this option must be an
absolute path for an existing directory.  The value is used for checking
instead of a home directory; checking is done in "belowhome" mode.

   If "belowhome" checking is used, the file or directory path becomes
de-tainted.

‘directory’            Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is mutually exclusive with the ‘file’ option, but one of
‘file’ or ‘directory’ must be set, unless the delivery is the direct
result of a redirection (see section *note The file and directory
options::).

   When ‘directory’ is set, the string is expanded, and the message is
delivered into a new file or files in or below the given directory,
instead of being appended to a single mailbox file.  A number of
different formats are provided (see ‘maildir_format’ and
‘mailstore_format’), and see section *note Operational details for
delivery to a new file:: for further details of this form of delivery.

   The result of expansion must not be tainted, unless the ‘create_file’
option specifies a path.

‘directory_file’       Use:              Type:             Default: _see
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       below_

   When ‘directory’ is set, but neither ‘maildir_format’ nor
‘mailstore_format’ is set, ‘appendfile’ delivers each message into a
file whose name is obtained by expanding this string.  The default value
is:

     q${base62:$tod_epoch}-$inode

   This generates a unique name from the current time, in base 62 form,
and the inode of the file.  The variable ‘$inode’ is available only when
expanding this option.

‘directory_mode’       Use:              Type: _octal      Default: _0700_
                       _appendfile_      integer_

   If ‘appendfile’ creates any directories as a result of the
‘create_directory’ option, their mode is specified by this option.

‘escape_string’        Use:              Type: _string_    Default: _see
                       _appendfile_                        description_

   See ‘check_string’ above.

‘file’                 Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is mutually exclusive with the ‘directory’ option, but
one of ‘file’ or ‘directory’ must be set, unless the delivery is the
direct result of a redirection (see section *note The file and directory
options::).  The ‘file’ option specifies a single file, to which the
message is appended.  One or more of ‘use_fcntl_lock’, ‘use_flock_lock’,
or ‘use_lockfile’ must be set with ‘file’.

   The result of expansion must not be tainted, unless the ‘create_file’
option specifies a path.

   If you are using more than one host to deliver over NFS into the same
mailboxes, every program that opens the mailbox must use compatible
locking.  Lock files are the safest choice when you cannot guarantee
that all such programs (including MUAs) use ‘fcntl()’ locking.

   The string value is expanded for each delivery, and must yield an
absolute path.  The most common settings of this option are variations
on one of these examples:

     file = /var/spool/mail/$local_part_data
     file = /home/$local_part_data/inbox
     file = $home/inbox

   In the first example, all deliveries are done into the same
directory.  If Exim is configured to use lock files (see ‘use_lockfile’
below) it must be able to create a file in the directory, so the
"sticky" bit must be turned on for deliveries to be possible, or
alternatively the ‘group’ option can be used to run the delivery under a
group id which has write access to the directory.

‘file_format’          Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _unset_

   This option requests the transport to check the format of an existing
file before adding to it.  The check consists of matching a specific
string at the start of the file.  The value of the option consists of an
even number of colon-separated strings.  The first of each pair is the
test string, and the second is the name of a transport.  If the
transport associated with a matched string is not the current transport,
control is passed over to the other transport.  For example, suppose the
standard ‘local_delivery’ transport has this added to it:

     file_format = "From       : local_delivery :\
                    \1\1\1\1\n : local_mmdf_delivery"

   Mailboxes that begin with "From" are still handled by this transport,
but if a mailbox begins with four binary ones followed by a newline,
control is passed to a transport called ‘local_mmdf_delivery’, which
presumably is configured to do the delivery in MMDF format.  If a
mailbox does not exist or is empty, it is assumed to match the current
transport.  If the start of a mailbox doesn't match any string, or if
the transport named for a given string is not defined, delivery is
deferred.

‘file_must_exist’      Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   If this option is true, the file specified by the ‘file’ option must
exist.  A temporary error occurs if it does not, causing delivery to be
deferred.  If this option is false, the file is created if it does not
exist.

‘lock_fcntl_timeout’   Use:              Type: _time_      Default: _0s_
                       _appendfile_

   By default, the ‘appendfile’ transport uses non-blocking calls to
‘fcntl()’ when locking an open mailbox file.  If the call fails, the
delivery process sleeps for ‘lock_interval’ and tries again, up to
‘lock_retries’ times.  Non-blocking calls are used so that the file is
not kept open during the wait for the lock; the reason for this is to
make it as safe as possible for deliveries over NFS in the case when
processes might be accessing an NFS mailbox without using a lock file.
This should not be done, but misunderstandings and hence
misconfigurations are not unknown.

   On a busy system, however, the performance of a non-blocking lock
approach is not as good as using a blocking lock with a timeout.  In
this case, the waiting is done inside the system call, and Exim's
delivery process acquires the lock and can proceed as soon as the
previous lock holder releases it.

   If ‘lock_fcntl_timeout’ is set to a non-zero time, blocking locks,
with that timeout, are used.  There may still be some retrying: the
maximum number of retries is

     (lock_retries * lock_interval) / lock_fcntl_timeout

   rounded up to the next whole number.  In other words, the total time
during which ‘appendfile’ is trying to get a lock is roughly the same,
unless ‘lock_fcntl_timeout’ is set very large.

   You should consider setting this option if you are getting a lot of
delayed local deliveries because of errors of the form

     failed to lock mailbox /some/file (fcntl)

‘lock_flock_timeout’   Use:              Type: _time_      Default: _0s_
                       _appendfile_

   This timeout applies to file locking when using ‘flock()’ (see
‘use_flock’); the timeout operates in a similar manner to
‘lock_fcntl_timeout’.

‘lock_interval’        Use:              Type: _time_      Default: _3s_
                       _appendfile_

   This specifies the time to wait between attempts to lock the file.
See below for details of locking.

‘lock_retries’         Use:              Type: _integer_   Default: _10_
                       _appendfile_

   This specifies the maximum number of attempts to lock the file.  A
value of zero is treated as 1.  See below for details of locking.

‘lockfile_mode’        Use:              Type: _octal      Default: _0600_
                       _appendfile_      integer_

   This specifies the mode of the created lock file, when a lock file is
being used (see ‘use_lockfile’ and ‘use_mbx_lock’).

‘lockfile_timeout’     Use:              Type: _time_      Default: _30m_
                       _appendfile_

   When a lock file is being used (see ‘use_lockfile’), if a lock file
already exists and is older than this value, it is assumed to have been
left behind by accident, and Exim attempts to remove it.

‘mailbox_filecount’    Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, it is expanded, and the result is taken as the
current number of files in the mailbox.  It must be a decimal number,
optionally followed by K or M. This provides a way of obtaining this
information from an external source that maintains the data.

‘mailbox_size’         Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set, it is expanded, and the result is taken as the
current size the mailbox.  It must be a decimal number, optionally
followed by K or M. This provides a way of obtaining this information
from an external source that maintains the data.  This is likely to be
helpful for maildir deliveries where it is computationally expensive to
compute the size of a mailbox.

‘maildir_format’       Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   If this option is set with the ‘directory’ option, the delivery is
into a new file, in the "maildir" format that is used by other mail
software.  When the transport is activated directly from a ‘redirect’
router (for example, the ‘address_file’ transport in the default
configuration), setting ‘maildir_format’ causes the path received from
the router to be treated as a directory, whether or not it ends with
‘/’.  This option is available only if SUPPORT_MAILDIR is present in
‘Local/Makefile’.  See section *note Maildir delivery:: below for
further details.

‘maildir_quota_directory_regex’Use:      Type: _string_    Default: _See
                       _appendfile_                        below_

   This option is relevant only when ‘maildir_use_size_file’ is set.  It
defines a regular expression for specifying directories, relative to the
quota directory (see ‘quota_directory’), that should be included in the
quota calculation.  The default value is:

     maildir_quota_directory_regex = ^(?:cur|new|\..*)$

   This includes the ‘cur’ and ‘new’ directories, and any maildir++
folders (directories whose names begin with a dot).  If you want to
exclude the ‘Trash’ folder from the count (as some sites do), you need
to change this setting to

     maildir_quota_directory_regex = ^(?:cur|new|\.(?!Trash).*)$

   This uses a negative lookahead in the regular expression to exclude
the directory whose name is ‘.Trash’.  When a directory is excluded from
quota calculations, quota processing is bypassed for any messages that
are delivered directly into that directory.

‘maildir_retries’      Use:              Type: _integer_   Default: _10_
                       _appendfile_

   This option specifies the number of times to retry when writing a
file in "maildir" format.  See section *note Maildir delivery:: below.

‘maildir_tag’          Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option applies only to deliveries in maildir format, and is
described in section *note Maildir delivery:: below.

‘maildir_use_size_file’Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_*__                     _false_

   The result of string expansion for this option must be a valid
boolean value.  If it is true, it enables support for ‘maildirsize’
files.  Exim creates a ‘maildirsize’ file in a maildir if one does not
exist, taking the quota from the ‘quota’ option of the transport.  If
‘quota’ is unset, the value is zero.  See
‘maildir_quota_directory_regex’ above and section *note Maildir
delivery:: below for further details.

‘maildirfolder_create_regex’Use:         Type: _string_    Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _unset_

   The value of this option is a regular expression.  If it is unset, it
has no effect.  Otherwise, before a maildir delivery takes place, the
pattern is matched against the name of the maildir directory, that is,
the directory containing the ‘new’ and ‘tmp’ subdirectories that will be
used for the delivery.  If there is a match, Exim checks for the
existence of a file called ‘maildirfolder’ in the directory, and creates
it if it does not exist.  See section *note Maildir delivery:: for more
details.

‘mailstore_format’     Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   If this option is set with the ‘directory’ option, the delivery is
into two new files in "mailstore" format.  The option is available only
if SUPPORT_MAILSTORE is present in ‘Local/Makefile’.  See section *note
Operational details for delivery to a new file:: below for further
details.

‘mailstore_prefix’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option applies only to deliveries in mailstore format, and is
described in section *note Operational details for delivery to a new
file:: below.

‘mailstore_suffix’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option applies only to deliveries in mailstore format, and is
described in section *note Operational details for delivery to a new
file:: below.

‘mbx_format’           Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   This option is available only if Exim has been compiled with
SUPPORT_MBX set in ‘Local/Makefile’.  If ‘mbx_format’ is set with the
‘file’ option, the message is appended to the mailbox file in MBX format
instead of traditional Unix format.  This format is supported by Pine4
and its associated IMAP and POP daemons, by means of the _c-client_
library that they all use.

   *Note*: The ‘message_prefix’ and ‘message_suffix’ options are not
automatically changed by the use of ‘mbx_format’.  They should normally
be set empty when using MBX format, so this option almost always appears
in this combination:

     mbx_format = true
     message_prefix =
     message_suffix =

   If none of the locking options are mentioned in the configuration,
‘use_mbx_lock’ is assumed and the other locking options default to
false.  It is possible to specify the other kinds of locking with
‘mbx_format’, but ‘use_fcntl_lock’ and ‘use_mbx_lock’ are mutually
exclusive.  MBX locking interworks with _c-client_, providing for shared
access to the mailbox.  It should not be used if any program that does
not use this form of locking is going to access the mailbox, nor should
it be used if the mailbox file is NFS mounted, because it works only
when the mailbox is accessed from a single host.

   If you set ‘use_fcntl_lock’ with an MBX-format mailbox, you cannot
use the standard version of _c-client_, because as long as it has a
mailbox open (this means for the whole of a Pine or IMAP session), Exim
will not be able to append messages to it.

‘message_prefix’       Use:              Type:             Default: _see
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       below_

   The string specified here is expanded and output at the start of
every message.  The default is unset unless ‘file’ is specified and
‘use_bsmtp’ is not set, in which case it is:

     message_prefix = "From ${if def:return_path{$return_path}\
       {MAILER-DAEMON}} $tod_bsdinbox\n"

   *Note:* If you set ‘use_crlf’ true, you must change any occurrences
of ‘\n’ to ‘\r\n’ in ‘message_prefix’.

‘message_suffix’       Use:              Type:             Default: _see
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       below_

   The string specified here is expanded and output at the end of every
message.  The default is unset unless ‘file’ is specified and
‘use_bsmtp’ is not set, in which case it is a single newline character.
The suffix can be suppressed by setting

     message_suffix =

   *Note:* If you set ‘use_crlf’ true, you must change any occurrences
of ‘\n’ to ‘\r\n’ in ‘message_suffix’.

‘mode’                 Use:              Type: _octal      Default: _0600_
                       _appendfile_      integer_

   If the output file is created, it is given this mode.  If it already
exists and has wider permissions, they are reduced to this mode.  If it
has narrower permissions, an error occurs unless ‘mode_fail_narrower’ is
false.  However, if the delivery is the result of a ‘save’ command in a
filter file specifying a particular mode, the mode of the output file is
always forced to take that value, and this option is ignored.

‘mode_fail_narrower’   Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _appendfile_

   This option applies in the case when an existing mailbox file has a
narrower mode than that specified by the ‘mode’ option.  If
‘mode_fail_narrower’ is true, the delivery is deferred ("mailbox has the
wrong mode"); otherwise Exim continues with the delivery attempt, using
the existing mode of the file.

‘notify_comsat’        Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   If this option is true, the _comsat_ daemon is notified after every
successful delivery to a user mailbox.  This is the daemon that notifies
logged on users about incoming mail.

‘quota’                Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option imposes a limit on the size of the file to which Exim is
appending, or to the total space used in the directory tree when the
‘directory’ option is set.  In the latter case, computation of the space
used is expensive, because all the files in the directory (and any
sub-directories) have to be individually inspected and their sizes
summed.  (See ‘quota_size_regex’ and ‘maildir_use_size_file’ for ways to
avoid this in environments where users have no shell access to their
mailboxes).

   As there is no interlock against two simultaneous deliveries into a
multi-file mailbox, it is possible for the quota to be overrun in this
case.  For single-file mailboxes, of course, an interlock is a
necessity.

   A file's size is taken as its _used_ value.  Because of blocking
effects, this may be a lot less than the actual amount of disk space
allocated to the file.  If the sizes of a number of files are being
added up, the rounding effect can become quite noticeable, especially on
systems that have large block sizes.  Nevertheless, it seems best to
stick to the _used_ figure, because this is the obvious value which
users understand most easily.

   The value of the option is expanded, and must then be a numerical
value (decimal point allowed), optionally followed by one of the letters
K, M, or G, for kilobytes, megabytes, or gigabytes, optionally followed
by a slash and further option modifiers.  If Exim is running on a system
with large file support (Linux and FreeBSD have this), mailboxes larger
than 2G can be handled.

   The option modifier ‘no_check’ can be used to force delivery even if
the over quota condition is met.  The quota gets updated as usual.

   *Note*: A value of zero is interpreted as "no quota".

   The expansion happens while Exim is running as root, before it
changes uid for the delivery.  This means that files that are
inaccessible to the end user can be used to hold quota values that are
looked up in the expansion.  When delivery fails because this quota is
exceeded, the handling of the error is as for system quota failures.

   By default, Exim's quota checking mimics system quotas, and restricts
the mailbox to the specified maximum size, though the value is not
accurate to the last byte, owing to separator lines and additional
headers that may get added during message delivery.  When a mailbox is
nearly full, large messages may get refused even though small ones are
accepted, because the size of the current message is added to the quota
when the check is made.  This behaviour can be changed by setting
‘quota_is_inclusive’ false.  When this is done, the check for exceeding
the quota does not include the current message.  Thus, deliveries
continue until the quota has been exceeded; thereafter, no further
messages are delivered.  See also ‘quota_warn_threshold’.

‘quota_directory’      Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines the directory to check for quota purposes when
delivering into individual files.  The default is the delivery
directory, or, if a file called ‘maildirfolder’ exists in a maildir
directory, the parent of the delivery directory.

‘quota_filecount’      Use:              Type:             Default: _0_
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__

   This option applies when the ‘directory’ option is set.  It limits
the total number of files in the directory (compare the inode limit in
system quotas).  It can only be used if ‘quota’ is also set.  The value
is expanded; an expansion failure causes delivery to be deferred.  A
value of zero is interpreted as "no quota".

   The option modifier ‘no_check’ can be used to force delivery even if
the over quota condition is met.  The quota gets updated as usual.

‘quota_is_inclusive’   Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_
                       _appendfile_

   See ‘quota’ above.

‘quota_size_regex’     Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _unset_

   This option applies when one of the delivery modes that writes a
separate file for each message is being used.  When Exim wants to find
the size of one of these files in order to test the quota, it first
checks ‘quota_size_regex’.  If this is set to a regular expression that
matches the filename, and it captures one string, that string is
interpreted as a representation of the file's size.  The value of
‘quota_size_regex’ is not expanded.

   This feature is useful only when users have no shell access to their
mailboxes - otherwise they could defeat the quota simply by renaming the
files.  This facility can be used with maildir deliveries, by setting
‘maildir_tag’ to add the file length to the filename.  For example:

     maildir_tag = ,S=$message_size
     quota_size_regex = ,S=(\d+)

   An alternative to ‘$message_size’ is ‘$message_linecount’, which
contains the number of lines in the message.

   The regular expression should not assume that the length is at the
end of the filename (even though ‘maildir_tag’ puts it there) because
maildir MUAs sometimes add other information onto the ends of message
filenames.

   Section *note Using a maildirsize file:: contains further
information.

   This option should not be used when other message-handling software
may duplicate messages by making hardlinks to the files.  When that is
done Exim will count the message size once for each filename, in
contrast with the actual disk usage.  When the option is not set,
calculating total usage requires a system-call per file to get the size;
the number of links is then available also as is used to adjust the
effective size.

‘quota_warn_message’   Use:              Type:             Default: _see
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__       below_

   See below for the use of this option.  If it is not set when
‘quota_warn_threshold’ is set, it defaults to

     quota_warn_message = "\
       To: $local_part@$domain\n\
       Subject: Your mailbox\n\n\
       This message is automatically created \
       by mail delivery software.\n\n\
       The size of your mailbox has exceeded \
       a warning threshold that is\n\
       set by the system administrator.\n"

‘quota_warn_threshold’ Use:              Type:             Default: _0_
                       _appendfile_      _string_*__

   This option is expanded in the same way as ‘quota’ (see above).  If
the resulting value is greater than zero, and delivery of the message
causes the size of the file or total space in the directory tree to
cross the given threshold, a warning message is sent.  If ‘quota’ is
also set, the threshold may be specified as a percentage of it by
following the value with a percent sign.  For example:

     quota = 10M
     quota_warn_threshold = 75%

   If ‘quota’ is not set, a setting of ‘quota_warn_threshold’ that ends
with a percent sign is ignored.

   The warning message itself is specified by the ‘quota_warn_message’
option, and it must start with a _To:_ header line containing the
recipient(s) of the warning message.  These do not necessarily have to
include the recipient(s) of the original message.  A _Subject:_ line
should also normally be supplied.  You can include any other header
lines that you want.  If you do not include a _From:_ line, the default
is:

     From: Mail Delivery System <mailer-daemon@$qualify_domain_sender>

   If you supply a _Reply-To:_ line, it overrides the global
‘errors_reply_to’ option.

   The ‘quota’ option does not have to be set in order to use this
option; they are independent of one another except when the threshold is
specified as a percentage.

‘use_bsmtp’            Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   If this option is set true, ‘appendfile’ writes messages in "batch
SMTP" format, with the envelope sender and recipient(s) included as SMTP
commands.  If you want to include a leading HELO command with such
messages, you can do so by setting the ‘message_prefix’ option.  See
section *note Outgoing batched SMTP:: for details of batch SMTP.

‘use_crlf’             Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   This option causes lines to be terminated with the two-character CRLF
sequence (carriage return, linefeed) instead of just a linefeed
character.  In the case of batched SMTP, the byte sequence written to
the file is then an exact image of what would be sent down a real SMTP
connection.

   *Note:* The contents of the ‘message_prefix’ and ‘message_suffix’
options (which are used to supply the traditional "From " and blank line
separators in Berkeley-style mailboxes) are written verbatim, so must
contain their own carriage return characters if these are needed.  In
cases where these options have non-empty defaults, the values end with a
single linefeed, so they must be changed to end with ‘\r\n’ if
‘use_crlf’ is set.

‘use_fcntl_lock’       Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                       _appendfile_                        below_

   This option controls the use of the ‘fcntl()’ function to lock a file
for exclusive use when a message is being appended.  It is set by
default unless ‘use_flock_lock’ is set.  Otherwise, it should be turned
off only if you know that all your MUAs use lock file locking.  When
both ‘use_fcntl_lock’ and ‘use_flock_lock’ are unset, ‘use_lockfile’
must be set.

‘use_flock_lock’       Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _appendfile_                        _false_

   This option is provided to support the use of ‘flock()’ for file
locking, for the few situations where it is needed.  Most modern
operating systems support ‘fcntl()’ and ‘lockf()’ locking, and these two
functions interwork with each other.  Exim uses ‘fcntl()’ locking by
default.

   This option is required only if you are using an operating system
where ‘flock()’ is used by programs that access mailboxes (typically
MUAs), and where ‘flock()’ does not correctly interwork with ‘fcntl()’.
You can use both ‘fcntl()’ and ‘flock()’ locking simultaneously if you
want.

   Not all operating systems provide ‘flock()’.  Some versions of
Solaris do not have it (and some, I think, provide a not quite right
version built on top of ‘lockf()’).  If the OS does not have ‘flock()’,
Exim will be built without the ability to use it, and any attempt to do
so will cause a configuration error.

   *Warning*: ‘flock()’ locks do not work on NFS files (unless ‘flock()’
is just being mapped onto ‘fcntl()’ by the OS).

‘use_lockfile’         Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                       _appendfile_                        below_

   If this option is turned off, Exim does not attempt to create a lock
file when appending to a mailbox file.  In this situation, the only
locking is by ‘fcntl()’.  You should only turn ‘use_lockfile’ off if you
are absolutely sure that every MUA that is ever going to look at your
users' mailboxes uses ‘fcntl()’ rather than a lock file, and even then
only when you are not delivering over NFS from more than one host.

   Historically, lock files were recommended for mailboxes appended to
from more than one host over NFS, because some MUAs do not use ‘fcntl()’
locking, and because ‘fcntl()’ locking was unreliable on older NFS
implementations.  On modern NFS (NFSv3 with NLM, NFSv4) ‘fcntl()’
locking is reliable provided every program that touches the mailbox uses
it.  A lock file is still required when interoperating with user agents
that use dot-locking, or in environments where ‘fcntl()’ over NFS cannot
be trusted.

   The ‘use_lockfile’ option is set by default unless ‘use_mbx_lock’ is
set.  It is not possible to turn both ‘use_lockfile’ and
‘use_fcntl_lock’ off, except when ‘mbx_format’ is set.

‘use_mbx_lock’         Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default: _see
                       _appendfile_                        below_

   This option is available only if Exim has been compiled with
SUPPORT_MBX set in ‘Local/Makefile’.  Setting the option specifies that
special MBX locking rules be used.  It is set by default if ‘mbx_format’
is set and none of the locking options are mentioned in the
configuration.  The locking rules are the same as are used by the
_c-client_ library that underlies Pine and the IMAP4 and POP daemons
that come with it (see the discussion below).  The rules allow for
shared access to the mailbox.  However, this kind of locking does not
work when the mailbox is NFS mounted.

   You can set ‘use_mbx_lock’ with either (or both) of ‘use_fcntl_lock’
and ‘use_flock_lock’ to control what kind of locking is used in
implementing the MBX locking rules.  The default is to use ‘fcntl()’ if
‘use_mbx_lock’ is set without ‘use_fcntl_lock’ or ‘use_flock_lock’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Operational details for appending,  Next: Operational details for delivery to a new file,  Prev: Private options for appendfile,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.3 Operational details for appending
======================================

Before appending to a file, the following preparations are made:

   • If the name of the file is ‘/dev/null’, no action is taken, and a
     success return is given.

   • If any directories on the file's path are missing, Exim creates
     them if the ‘create_directory’ option is set.  A created
     directory's mode is given by the ‘directory_mode’ option.

   • If ‘file_format’ is set, the format of an existing file is checked.
     If this indicates that a different transport should be used,
     control is passed to that transport.

   • If ‘use_lockfile’ is set, a lock file is built in a way that will
     work reliably over NFS, as follows:

       1. Create a "hitching post" file whose name is that of the lock
          file with the current time, primary host name, and process id
          added, by opening for writing as a new file.  If this fails
          with an access error, delivery is deferred.

       2. Close the hitching post file, and hard link it to the lock
          filename.

       3. If the call to ‘link()’ succeeds, creation of the lock file
          has succeeded.  Unlink the hitching post name.

       4. Otherwise, use ‘stat()’ to get information about the hitching
          post file, and then unlink hitching post name.  If the number
          of links is exactly two, creation of the lock file succeeded
          but something (for example, an NFS server crash and restart)
          caused this fact not to be communicated to the ‘link()’ call.

       5. If creation of the lock file failed, wait for ‘lock_interval’
          and try again, up to ‘lock_retries’ times.  However, since any
          program that writes to a mailbox should complete its task very
          quickly, it is reasonable to time out old lock files that are
          normally the result of user agent and system crashes.  If an
          existing lock file is older than ‘lockfile_timeout’ Exim
          attempts to unlink it before trying again.

   • A call is made to ‘lstat()’ to discover whether the main file
     exists, and if so, what its characteristics are.  If ‘lstat()’
     fails for any reason other than non-existence, delivery is
     deferred.

   • If the file does exist and is a symbolic link, delivery is
     deferred, unless the ‘allow_symlink’ option is set, in which case
     the ownership of the link is checked, and then ‘stat()’ is called
     to find out about the real file, which is then subjected to the
     checks below.  The check on the top-level link ownership prevents
     one user creating a link for another's mailbox in a sticky
     directory, though allowing symbolic links in this case is
     definitely not a good idea.  If there is a chain of symbolic links,
     the intermediate ones are not checked.

   • If the file already exists but is not a regular file, or if the
     file's owner and group (if the group is being checked - see
     ‘check_group’ above) are different from the user and group under
     which the delivery is running, delivery is deferred.

   • If the file's permissions are more generous than specified, they
     are reduced.  If they are insufficient, delivery is deferred,
     unless ‘mode_fail_narrower’ is set false, in which case the
     delivery is tried using the existing permissions.

   • The file's inode number is saved, and the file is then opened for
     appending.  If this fails because the file has vanished,
     ‘appendfile’ behaves as if it hadn't existed (see below).  For any
     other failures, delivery is deferred.

   • If the file is opened successfully, check that the inode number
     hasn't changed, that it is still a regular file, and that the owner
     and permissions have not changed.  If anything is wrong, defer
     delivery and freeze the message.

   • If the file did not exist originally, defer delivery if the
     ‘file_must_exist’ option is set.  Otherwise, check that the file is
     being created in a permitted directory if the ‘create_file’ option
     is set (deferring on failure), and then open for writing as a new
     file, with the O_EXCL and O_CREAT options, except when dealing with
     a symbolic link (the ‘allow_symlink’ option must be set).  In this
     case, which can happen if the link points to a non-existent file,
     the file is opened for writing using O_CREAT but not O_EXCL,
     because that prevents link following.

   • If opening fails because the file exists, obey the tests given
     above for existing files.  However, to avoid looping in a situation
     where the file is being continuously created and destroyed, the
     exists/not-exists loop is broken after 10 repetitions, and the
     message is then frozen.

   • If opening fails with any other error, defer delivery.

   • Once the file is open, unless both ‘use_fcntl_lock’ and
     ‘use_flock_lock’ are false, it is locked using ‘fcntl()’ or
     ‘flock()’ or both.  If ‘use_mbx_lock’ is false, an exclusive lock
     is requested in each case.  However, if ‘use_mbx_lock’ is true,
     Exim takes out a shared lock on the open file, and an exclusive
     lock on the file whose name is

          /tmp/.<device-number>.<inode-number>

     using the device and inode numbers of the open mailbox file, in
     accordance with the MBX locking rules.  This file is created with a
     mode that is specified by the ‘lockfile_mode’ option.

     If Exim fails to lock the file, there are two possible courses of
     action, depending on the value of the locking timeout.  This is
     obtained from ‘lock_fcntl_timeout’ or ‘lock_flock_timeout’, as
     appropriate.

     If the timeout value is zero, the file is closed, Exim waits for
     ‘lock_interval’, and then goes back and re-opens the file as above
     and tries to lock it again.  This happens up to ‘lock_retries’
     times, after which the delivery is deferred.

     If the timeout has a value greater than zero, blocking calls to
     ‘fcntl()’ or ‘flock()’ are used (with the given timeout), so there
     has already been some waiting involved by the time locking fails.
     Nevertheless, Exim does not give up immediately.  It retries up to

          (lock_retries * lock_interval) / <timeout>

     times (rounded up).

   At the end of delivery, Exim closes the file (which releases the
‘fcntl()’ and/or ‘flock()’ locks) and then deletes the lock file if one
was created.


File: spec.info,  Node: Operational details for delivery to a new file,  Next: Maildir delivery,  Prev: Operational details for appending,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.4 Operational details for delivery to a new file
===================================================

When the ‘directory’ option is set instead of ‘file’, each message is
delivered into a newly-created file or set of files.  When ‘appendfile’
is activated directly from a ‘redirect’ router, neither ‘file’ nor
‘directory’ is normally set, because the path for delivery is supplied
by the router.  (See for example, the ‘address_file’ transport in the
default configuration.)  In this case, delivery is to a new file if
either the path name ends in ‘/’, or the ‘maildir_format’ or
‘mailstore_format’ option is set.

   No locking is required while writing the message to a new file, so
the various locking options of the transport are ignored.  The "From"
line that by default separates messages in a single file is not normally
needed, nor is the escaping of message lines that start with "From", and
there is no need to ensure a newline at the end of each message.
Consequently, the default values for ‘check_string’, ‘message_prefix’,
and ‘message_suffix’ are all unset when any of ‘directory’,
‘maildir_format’, or ‘mailstore_format’ is set.

   If Exim is required to check a ‘quota’ setting, it adds up the sizes
of all the files in the delivery directory by default.  However, you can
specify a different directory by setting ‘quota_directory’.  Also, for
maildir deliveries (see below) the ‘maildirfolder’ convention is
honoured.

   There are three different ways in which delivery to individual files
can be done, controlled by the settings of the ‘maildir_format’ and
‘mailstore_format’ options.  Note that code to support maildir or
mailstore formats is not included in the binary unless SUPPORT_MAILDIR
or SUPPORT_MAILSTORE, respectively, is set in ‘Local/Makefile’.

   In all three cases an attempt is made to create the directory and any
necessary sub-directories if they do not exist, provided that the
‘create_directory’ option is set (the default).  The location of a
created directory can be constrained by setting ‘create_file’.  A
created directory's mode is given by the ‘directory_mode’ option.  If
creation fails, or if the ‘create_directory’ option is not set when
creation is required, delivery is deferred.


File: spec.info,  Node: Maildir delivery,  Next: Using tags to record message sizes,  Prev: Operational details for delivery to a new file,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.5 Maildir delivery
=====================

If the ‘maildir_format’ option is true, Exim delivers each message by
writing it to a file whose name is ‘tmp/<stime>.H<mtime>P<pid>.<host>’
in the directory that is defined by the ‘directory’ option (the
"delivery directory").  If the delivery is successful, the file is
renamed into the ‘new’ subdirectory.

   In the filename, <_stime_> is the current time of day in seconds, and
<_mtime_> is the microsecond fraction of the time.  After a maildir
delivery, Exim checks that the time-of-day clock has moved on by at
least one microsecond before terminating the delivery process.  This
guarantees uniqueness for the filename.  However, as a precaution, Exim
calls ‘stat()’ for the file before opening it.  If any response other
than ENOENT (does not exist) is given, Exim waits 2 seconds and tries
again, up to ‘maildir_retries’ times.

   Before Exim carries out a maildir delivery, it ensures that
subdirectories called ‘new’, ‘cur’, and ‘tmp’ exist in the delivery
directory.  If they do not exist, Exim tries to create them and any
superior directories in their path, subject to the ‘create_directory’
and ‘create_file’ options.  If the ‘maildirfolder_create_regex’ option
is set, and the regular expression it contains matches the delivery
directory, Exim also ensures that a file called ‘maildirfolder’ exists
in the delivery directory.  If a missing directory or ‘maildirfolder’
file cannot be created, delivery is deferred.

   These features make it possible to use Exim to create all the
necessary files and directories in a maildir mailbox, including
subdirectories for maildir++ folders.  Consider this example:

     maildir_format = true
     directory = /var/mail/$local_part_data\
                ${if eq{$local_part_suffix}{}{}\
                {/.${substr_1:$local_part_suffix}}}
     maildirfolder_create_regex = /\.[^/]+$

   If ‘$local_part_suffix’ is empty (there was no suffix for the local
part), delivery is into a toplevel maildir with a name like
‘/var/mail/pimbo’ (for the user called _pimbo_).  The pattern in
‘maildirfolder_create_regex’ does not match this name, so Exim will not
look for or create the file ‘/var/mail/pimbo/maildirfolder’, though it
will create ‘/var/mail/pimbo/{cur,new,tmp}’ if necessary.

   However, if ‘$local_part_suffix’ contains ‘-eximusers’ (for example),
delivery is into the maildir++ folder ‘/var/mail/pimbo/.eximusers’,
which does match ‘maildirfolder_create_regex’.  In this case, Exim will
create ‘/var/mail/pimbo/.eximusers/maildirfolder’ as well as the three
maildir directories ‘/var/mail/pimbo/.eximusers/{cur,new,tmp}’.

   *Warning:* Take care when setting ‘maildirfolder_create_regex’ that
it does not inadvertently match the toplevel maildir directory, because
a ‘maildirfolder’ file at top level would completely break quota
calculations.

   If Exim is required to check a ‘quota’ setting before a maildir
delivery, and ‘quota_directory’ is not set, it looks for a file called
‘maildirfolder’ in the maildir directory (alongside ‘new’, ‘cur’,
‘tmp’).  If this exists, Exim assumes the directory is a maildir++
folder directory, which is one level down from the user's top level
mailbox directory.  This causes it to start at the parent directory
instead of the current directory when calculating the amount of space
used.

   One problem with delivering into a multi-file mailbox is that it is
computationally expensive to compute the size of the mailbox for quota
checking.  Various approaches have been taken to reduce the amount of
work needed.  The next two sections describe two of them.  A third
alternative is to use some external process for maintaining the size
data, and use the expansion of the ‘mailbox_size’ option as a way of
importing it into Exim.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using tags to record message sizes,  Next: Using a maildirsize file,  Prev: Maildir delivery,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.6 Using tags to record message sizes
=======================================

If ‘maildir_tag’ is set, the string is expanded for each delivery.  When
the maildir file is renamed into the ‘new’ sub-directory, the tag is
added to its name.  However, if adding the tag takes the length of the
name to the point where the test ‘stat()’ call fails with ENAMETOOLONG,
the tag is dropped and the maildir file is created with no tag.

   Tags can be used to encode the size of files in their names; see
‘quota_size_regex’ above for an example.  The expansion of ‘maildir_tag’
happens after the message has been written.  The value of the
‘$message_size’ variable is set to the number of bytes actually written.
If the expansion is forced to fail, the tag is ignored, but a non-forced
failure causes delivery to be deferred.  The expanded tag may contain
any printing characters except "/".  Non-printing characters in the
string are ignored; if the resulting string is empty, it is ignored.  If
it starts with an alphanumeric character, a leading colon is inserted;
this default has not proven to be the path that popular maildir
implementations have chosen (but changing it in Exim would break
backwards compatibility).

   For one common implementation, you might set:

     maildir_tag = ,S=${message_size}

   but you should check the documentation of the other software to be
sure.

   It is advisable to also set ‘quota_size_regex’ when setting
‘maildir_tag’ as this allows Exim to extract the size from your tag,
instead of having to ‘stat()’ each message file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using a maildirsize file,  Next: Mailstore delivery,  Prev: Using tags to record message sizes,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.7 Using a maildirsize file
=============================

If ‘maildir_use_size_file’ is true, Exim implements the maildir++ rules
for storing quota and message size information in a file called
‘maildirsize’ within the toplevel maildir directory.  If this file does
not exist, Exim creates it, setting the quota from the ‘quota’ option of
the transport.  If the maildir directory itself does not exist, it is
created before any attempt to write a ‘maildirsize’ file.

   The ‘maildirsize’ file is used to hold information about the sizes of
messages in the maildir, thus speeding up quota calculations.  The quota
value in the file is just a cache; if the quota is changed in the
transport, the new value overrides the cached value when the next
message is delivered.  The cache is maintained for the benefit of other
programs that access the maildir and need to know the quota.

   If the ‘quota’ option in the transport is unset or zero, the
‘maildirsize’ file is maintained (with a zero quota setting), but no
quota is imposed.

   A regular expression is available for controlling which directories
in the maildir participate in quota calculations when a
‘maildirsizefile’ is in use.  See the description of the
‘maildir_quota_directory_regex’ option above for details.


File: spec.info,  Node: Mailstore delivery,  Next: Non-special new file delivery,  Prev: Using a maildirsize file,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.8 Mailstore delivery
=======================

If the ‘mailstore_format’ option is true, each message is written as two
files in the given directory.  A unique base name is constructed from
the message id and the current delivery process, and the files that are
written use this base name plus the suffixes ‘.env’ and ‘.msg’.  The
‘.env’ file contains the message's envelope, and the ‘.msg’ file
contains the message itself.  The base name is placed in the variable
‘$mailstore_basename’.

   During delivery, the envelope is first written to a file with the
suffix ‘.tmp’.  The ‘.msg’ file is then written, and when it is
complete, the ‘.tmp’ file is renamed as the ‘.env’ file.  Programs that
access messages in mailstore format should wait for the presence of both
a ‘.msg’ and a ‘.env’ file before accessing either of them.  An
alternative approach is to wait for the absence of a ‘.tmp’ file.

   The envelope file starts with any text defined by the
‘mailstore_prefix’ option, expanded and terminated by a newline if there
isn't one.  Then follows the sender address on one line, then all the
recipient addresses, one per line.  There can be more than one recipient
only if the ‘batch_max’ option is set greater than one.  Finally,
‘mailstore_suffix’ is expanded and the result appended to the file,
followed by a newline if it does not end with one.

   If expansion of ‘mailstore_prefix’ or ‘mailstore_suffix’ ends with a
forced failure, it is ignored.  Other expansion errors are treated as
serious configuration errors, and delivery is deferred.  The variable
‘$mailstore_basename’ is available for use during these expansions.


File: spec.info,  Node: Non-special new file delivery,  Prev: Mailstore delivery,  Up: The appendfile transport

26.9 Non-special new file delivery
==================================

If neither ‘maildir_format’ nor ‘mailstore_format’ is set, a single new
file is created directly in the named directory.  For example, when
delivering messages into files in batched SMTP format for later delivery
to some host (see section *note Outgoing batched SMTP::), a setting such
as

     directory = /var/bsmtp/$host

   might be used.  A message is written to a file with a temporary name,
which is then renamed when the delivery is complete.  The final name is
obtained by expanding the contents of the ‘directory_file’ option.


File: spec.info,  Node: The autoreply transport,  Next: The lmtp transport,  Prev: The appendfile transport,  Up: Top

27 The autoreply transport
**************************

The ‘autoreply’ transport is not a true transport in that it does not
cause the message to be transmitted.  Instead, it generates a new mail
message as an automatic reply to the incoming message.  _References:_
and _Auto-Submitted:_ header lines are included.  These are constructed
according to the rules in RFCs *2822
(https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2822)* and *3834
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3834)*, respectively.

   If the router that passes the message to this transport does not have
the ‘unseen’ option set, the original message (for the current
recipient) is not delivered anywhere.  However, when the ‘unseen’ option
is set on the router that passes the message to this transport, routing
of the address continues, so another router can set up a normal message
delivery.

   The ‘autoreply’ transport is usually run as the result of mail
filtering, a "vacation" message being the standard example.  However, it
can also be run directly from a router like any other transport.  To
reduce the possibility of message cascades, messages created by the
‘autoreply’ transport always have empty envelope sender addresses, like
bounce messages.

   The parameters of the message to be sent can be specified in the
configuration by options described below.  However, these are used only
when the address passed to the transport does not contain its own reply
information.  When the transport is run as a consequence of a ‘mail’ or
‘vacation’ command in a filter file, the parameters of the message are
supplied by the filter, and passed with the address.  The transport's
options that define the message are then ignored (so they are not
usually set in this case).  The message is specified entirely by the
filter or by the transport; it is never built from a mixture of options.
However, the ‘file_optional’, ‘mode’, and ‘return_message’ options apply
in all cases.

   ‘Autoreply’ is implemented as a local transport.  When used as a
result of a command in a user's filter file, ‘autoreply’ normally runs
under the uid and gid of the user, and with appropriate current and home
directories (see chapter *note Environment for running local transports:
Environment for local transports.).

   There is a subtle difference between routing a message to a ‘pipe’
transport that generates some text to be returned to the sender, and
routing it to an ‘autoreply’ transport.  This difference is noticeable
only if more than one address from the same message is so handled.  In
the case of a pipe, the separate outputs from the different addresses
are gathered up and returned to the sender in a single message, whereas
if ‘autoreply’ is used, a separate message is generated for each address
that is passed to it.

   Non-printing characters are not permitted in the header lines
generated for the message that ‘autoreply’ creates, with the exception
of newlines that are immediately followed by white space.  If any
non-printing characters are found, the transport defers.  Whether
characters with the top bit set count as printing characters or not is
controlled by the ‘print_topbitchars’ global option.

   If any of the generic options for manipulating headers (for example,
‘headers_add’) are set on an ‘autoreply’ transport, they apply to the
copy of the original message that is included in the generated message
when ‘return_message’ is set.  They do not apply to the generated
message itself.

   If the ‘autoreply’ transport receives return code 2 from Exim when it
submits the message, indicating that there were no recipients, it does
not treat this as an error.  This means that autoreplies sent to
‘$sender_address’ when this is empty (because the incoming message is a
bounce message) do not cause problems.  They are just discarded.

* Menu:

* Private options for autoreply::


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for autoreply,  Up: The autoreply transport

27.1 Private options for autoreply
==================================

‘bcc’                  Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the addresses that are to receive "blind carbon
copies" of the message when the message is specified by the transport.

‘cc’                   Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies recipients of the message and the contents of the
_Cc:_ header when the message is specified by the transport.

‘file’                 Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   The contents of the file are sent as the body of the message when the
message is specified by the transport.  If both ‘file’ and ‘text’ are
set, the text string comes first.

‘file_expand’          Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _autoreply_                         _false_

   If this is set, the contents of the file named by the ‘file’ option
are subjected to string expansion as they are added to the message.

‘file_optional’        Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _autoreply_                         _false_

   If this option is true, no error is generated if the file named by
the ‘file’ option or passed with the address does not exist or cannot be
read.

‘from’                 Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the contents of the _From:_ header when the message is
specified by the transport.

‘headers’              Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies additional *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* headers that are to be
added to the message when the message is specified by the transport.
Several can be given by using "\n" to separate them.  There is no check
on the format.

‘log’                  Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This option names a file in which a record of every message sent is
logged when the message is specified by the transport.

‘mode’                 Use:              Type: _octal      Default: _0600_
                       _autoreply_       integer_

   If either the log file or the "once" file has to be created, this
mode is used.

‘never_mail’           Use:              Type: _address    Default:
                       _autoreply_       list_*__          _unset_

   If any run of the transport creates a message with a recipient that
matches any item in the list, that recipient is quietly discarded.  If
all recipients are discarded, no message is created.  This applies both
when the recipients are generated by a filter and when they are
specified in the transport.

‘once’                 Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This option names a file or DBM database in which a record of each
_To:_ recipient is kept when the message is specified by the transport.
*Note*: This does not apply to _Cc:_ or _Bcc:_ recipients.

   If ‘once’ is unset, or is set to an empty string, the message is
always sent.  By default, if ‘once’ is set to a non-empty filename, the
message is not sent if a potential recipient is already listed in the
database.  However, if the ‘once_repeat’ option specifies a time greater
than zero, the message is sent if that much time has elapsed since a
message was last sent to this recipient.  A setting of zero time for
‘once_repeat’ (the default) prevents a message from being sent a second
time - in this case, zero means infinity.

   If ‘once_file_size’ is zero, a DBM database is used to remember
recipients, and it is allowed to grow as large as necessary.  If
‘once_file_size’ is set greater than zero, it changes the way Exim
implements the ‘once’ option.  Instead of using a DBM file to record
every recipient it sends to, it uses a regular file, whose size will
never get larger than the given value.

   In the file, Exim keeps a linear list of recipient addresses and the
times at which they were sent messages.  If the file is full when a new
address needs to be added, the oldest address is dropped.  If
‘once_repeat’ is not set, this means that a given recipient may receive
multiple messages, but at unpredictable intervals that depend on the
rate of turnover of addresses in the file.  If ‘once_repeat’ is set, it
specifies a maximum time between repeats.

‘once_file_size’       Use:              Type: _integer_   Default: _0_
                       _autoreply_

   See ‘once’ above.

‘once_repeat’          Use:              Type: _time_*__   Default: _0s_
                       _autoreply_

   See ‘once’ above.  After expansion, the value of this option must be
a valid time value.

‘reply_to’             Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the contents of the _Reply-To:_ header when the
message is specified by the transport.

‘return_message’       Use:              Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _autoreply_                         _false_

   If this is set, a copy of the original message is returned with the
new message, subject to the maximum size set in the ‘return_size_limit’
global configuration option.

‘subject’              Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the contents of the _Subject:_ header when the message
is specified by the transport.  It is tempting to quote the original
subject in automatic responses.  For example:

     subject = Re: $h_subject:

   There is a danger in doing this, however.  It may allow a third party
to subscribe your users to an opt-in mailing list, provided that the
list accepts bounce messages as subscription confirmations.
Well-managed lists require a non-bounce message to confirm a
subscription, so the danger is relatively small.

‘text’                 Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies a single string to be used as the body of the message
when the message is specified by the transport.  If both ‘text’ and
‘file’ are set, the text comes first.

‘to’                   Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _autoreply_       _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies recipients of the message and the contents of the
_To:_ header when the message is specified by the transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: The lmtp transport,  Next: The pipe transport,  Prev: The autoreply transport,  Up: Top

28 The lmtp transport
*********************

The ‘lmtp’ transport runs the LMTP protocol (*RFC 2033
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2033)*) over a pipe to a
specified command or by interacting with a Unix domain socket.  This
transport is something of a cross between the ‘pipe’ and ‘smtp’
transports.  Exim also has support for using LMTP over TCP/IP; this is
implemented as an option for the ‘smtp’ transport.  Because LMTP is
expected to be of minority interest, the default build-time configure in
‘src/EDITME’ has it commented out.  You need to ensure that

     TRANSPORT_LMTP=yes

   is present in your ‘Local/Makefile’ in order to have the ‘lmtp’
transport included in the Exim binary.  The private options of the
‘lmtp’ transport are as follows:

‘batch_id’             Use: _lmtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   See the description of local delivery batching in chapter *note
Address batching in local transports: Address batching.

‘batch_max’            Use: _lmtp_       Type: _integer_   Default: _1_

   This limits the number of addresses that can be handled in a single
delivery.  Most LMTP servers can handle several addresses at once, so it
is normally a good idea to increase this value.  See the description of
local delivery batching in chapter *note Address batching in local
transports: Address batching.

‘command’              Use: _lmtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option must be set if ‘socket’ is not set.  The string is a
command which is run in a separate process.  It is split up into a
command name and list of arguments, each of which is separately expanded
(so expansion cannot change the number of arguments).  The command is
run directly, not via a shell.  The message is passed to the new process
using the standard input and output to operate the LMTP protocol.

‘ignore_quota’         Use: _lmtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, the string ‘IGNOREQUOTA’ is added to RCPT
commands, provided that the LMTP server has advertised support for
IGNOREQUOTA in its response to the LHLO command.

‘socket’               Use: _lmtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option must be set if ‘command’ is not set.  The result of
expansion must be the name of a Unix domain socket.  The transport
connects to the socket and delivers the message to it using the LMTP
protocol.

‘timeout’              Use: _lmtp_       Type: _time_      Default: _5m_

   The transport is aborted if the created process or Unix domain socket
does not respond to LMTP commands or message input within this timeout.
Delivery is deferred, and will be tried again later.  Here is an example
of a typical LMTP transport:

     lmtp:
       driver = lmtp
       command = /some/local/lmtp/delivery/program
       batch_max = 20
       user = exim

   This delivers up to 20 addresses at a time, in a mixture of domains
if necessary, running as the user _exim_.


File: spec.info,  Node: The pipe transport,  Next: The smtp transport,  Prev: The lmtp transport,  Up: Top

29 The pipe transport
*********************

The ‘pipe’ transport is used to deliver messages via a pipe to a command
running in another process.  One example is the use of ‘pipe’ as a
pseudo-remote transport for passing messages to some other delivery
mechanism (such as UUCP). Another is the use by individual users to
automatically process their incoming messages.  The ‘pipe’ transport can
be used in one of the following ways:

   • A router routes one address to a transport in the normal way, and
     the transport is configured as a ‘pipe’ transport.  In this case,
     ‘$local_part’ contains the local part of the address (as usual),
     and the command that is run is specified by the ‘command’ option on
     the transport.

   • If the ‘batch_max’ option is set greater than 1 (the default is 1),
     the transport can handle more than one address in a single run.  In
     this case, when more than one address is routed to the transport,
     ‘$local_part’ is not set (because it is not unique).  However, the
     pseudo-variable ‘$pipe_addresses’ (described in section *note How
     the command is run:: below) contains all the addresses that are
     routed to the transport.

   • A router redirects an address directly to a pipe command (for
     example, from an alias or forward file).  In this case,
     ‘$address_pipe’ contains the text of the pipe command, and the
     ‘command’ option on the transport is ignored unless ‘force_command’
     is set.  If only one address is being transported (‘batch_max’ is
     not greater than one, or only one address was redirected to this
     pipe command), ‘$local_part’ contains the local part that was
     redirected.

   The ‘pipe’ transport is a non-interactive delivery method.  Exim can
also deliver messages over pipes using the LMTP interactive protocol.
This is implemented by the ‘lmtp’ transport.

   In the case when ‘pipe’ is run as a consequence of an entry in a
local user's ‘.forward’ file, the command runs under the uid and gid of
that user.  In other cases, the uid and gid have to be specified
explicitly, either on the transport or on the router that handles the
address.  Current and "home" directories are also controllable.  See
chapter *note Environment for running local transports: Environment for
local transports. for details of the local delivery environment and
chapter *note Address batching in local transports: Address batching.
for a discussion of local delivery batching.

   Tainted data may not be used for the command name.

* Menu:

* Concurrent delivery::
* Returned status and data::
* How the command is run::
* Environment variables::
* Private options for pipe::
* Using an external local delivery agent::


File: spec.info,  Node: Concurrent delivery,  Next: Returned status and data,  Up: The pipe transport

29.1 Concurrent delivery
========================

If two messages arrive at almost the same time, and both are routed to a
pipe delivery, the two pipe transports may be run concurrently.  You
must ensure that any pipe commands you set up are robust against this
happening.  If the commands write to a file, the ‘exim_lock’ utility
might be of use.  Alternatively the ‘max_parallel’ option could be used
with a value of "1" to enforce serialization.


File: spec.info,  Node: Returned status and data,  Next: How the command is run,  Prev: Concurrent delivery,  Up: The pipe transport

29.2 Returned status and data
=============================

If the command exits with a non-zero return code, the delivery is deemed
to have failed, unless either the ‘ignore_status’ option is set (in
which case the return code is treated as zero), or the return code is
one of those listed in the ‘temp_errors’ option, which are interpreted
as meaning "try again later".  In this case, delivery is deferred.
Details of a permanent failure are logged, but are not included in the
bounce message, which merely contains "local delivery failed".

   If the command exits on a signal and the ‘freeze_signal’ option is
set then the message will be frozen in the queue.  If that option is not
set, a bounce will be sent as normal.

   If the return code is greater than 128 and the command being run is a
shell script, it normally means that the script was terminated by a
signal whose value is the return code minus 128.  The ‘freeze_signal’
option does not apply in this case.

   If Exim is unable to run the command (that is, if ‘execve()’ fails),
the return code is set to 127.  This is the value that a shell returns
if it is asked to run a non-existent command.  The wording for the log
line suggests that a non-existent command may be the problem.

   The ‘return_output’ option can affect the result of a pipe delivery.
If it is set and the command produces any output on its standard output
or standard error streams, the command is considered to have failed,
even if it gave a zero return code or if ‘ignore_status’ is set.  The
output from the command is included as part of the bounce message.  The
‘return_fail_output’ option is similar, except that output is returned
only when the command exits with a failure return code, that is, a value
other than zero or a code that matches ‘temp_errors’.


File: spec.info,  Node: How the command is run,  Next: Environment variables,  Prev: Returned status and data,  Up: The pipe transport

29.3 How the command is run
===========================

The command line is (by default) broken down into a command name and
arguments by the ‘pipe’ transport itself.  The ‘allow_commands’ and
‘restrict_to_path’ options can be used to restrict the commands that may
be run.

   Unquoted arguments are delimited by white space.  If an argument
appears in double quotes, backslash is interpreted as an escape
character in the usual way.  If an argument appears in single quotes, no
escaping is done.

   String expansion is applied to the command line except when it comes
from a traditional ‘.forward’ file (commands from a filter file are
expanded).  The expansion is applied to each argument in turn rather
than to the whole line.  For this reason, any string expansion item that
contains white space must be quoted so as to be contained within a
single argument.  A setting such as

     command = /some/path ${if eq{$local_part}{postmaster}{xx}{yy}}

   will not work, because the expansion item gets split between several
arguments.  You have to write

     command = /some/path "${if eq{$local_part}{postmaster}{xx}{yy}}"

   to ensure that it is all in one argument.  The expansion is done in
this way, argument by argument, so that the number of arguments cannot
be changed as a result of expansion, and quotes or backslashes in
inserted variables do not interact with external quoting.  However, this
leads to problems if you want to generate multiple arguments (or the
command name plus arguments) from a single expansion.  In this
situation, the simplest solution is to use a shell.  For example:

     command = /bin/sh -c ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/some/file}}

   Special handling takes place when an argument consists of precisely
the text ‘$pipe_addresses’ (no quotes).  This is not a general expansion
variable; the only place this string is recognized is when it appears as
an argument for a pipe or transport filter command.  It causes each
address that is being handled to be inserted in the argument list at
that point _as a separate argument_.  This avoids any problems with
spaces or shell metacharacters, and is of use when a ‘pipe’ transport is
handling groups of addresses in a batch.

   If ‘force_command’ is enabled on the transport, special handling
takes place for an argument that consists of precisely the text
‘$address_pipe’.  It is handled similarly to ‘$pipe_addresses’ above.
It is expanded and each argument is inserted in the argument list at
that point _as a separate argument_.  The ‘$address_pipe’ item does not
need to be the only item in the argument; in fact, if it were then
‘force_command’ should behave as a no-op.  Rather, it should be used to
adjust the command run while preserving the argument vector separation.

   After splitting up into arguments and expansion, the resulting
command is run in a subprocess directly from the transport, _not_ under
a shell.  The message that is being delivered is supplied on the
standard input, and the standard output and standard error are both
connected to a single pipe that is read by Exim.  The ‘max_output’
option controls how much output the command may produce, and the
‘return_output’ and ‘return_fail_output’ options control what is done
with it.

   Not running the command under a shell (by default) lessens the
security risks in cases when a command from a user's filter file is
built out of data that was taken from an incoming message.  If a shell
is required, it can of course be explicitly specified as the command to
be run.  However, there are circumstances where existing commands (for
example, in ‘.forward’ files) expect to be run under a shell and cannot
easily be modified.  To allow for these cases, there is an option called
‘use_shell’, which changes the way the ‘pipe’ transport works.  Instead
of breaking up the command line as just described, it expands it as a
single string and passes the result to ‘/bin/sh’.  The
‘restrict_to_path’ option and the ‘$pipe_addresses’ facility cannot be
used with ‘use_shell’, and the whole mechanism is inherently less
secure.


File: spec.info,  Node: Environment variables,  Next: Private options for pipe,  Prev: How the command is run,  Up: The pipe transport

29.4 Environment variables
==========================

The environment variables listed below are set up when the command is
invoked.  This list is a compromise for maximum compatibility with other
MTAs.  Note that the ‘environment’ option can be used to add additional
variables to this environment.  The environment for the ‘pipe’ transport
is not subject to the ‘add_environment’ and ‘keep_environment’ main
config options.  *Note*: Using enviroment variables loses track of
tainted data.  Writers of ‘pipe’ transport commands should be wary of
data supplied by potential attackers.

     DOMAIN               the domain of the address
     HOME                 the home directory, if set
     HOST                 the host name when called from a router (see below)
     LOCAL_PART           see below
     LOCAL_PART_PREFIX    see below
     LOCAL_PART_SUFFIX    see below
     LOGNAME              see below
     MESSAGE_ID           Exim's local ID for the message
     PATH                 as specified by the path option below
     QUALIFY_DOMAIN       the sender qualification domain
     RECIPIENT            the complete recipient address
     SENDER               the sender of the message (empty if a bounce)
     SHELL                /bin/sh
     TZ                   the value of the timezone option, if set
     USER                 see below

   When a ‘pipe’ transport is called directly from (for example) an
‘accept’ router, LOCAL_PART is set to the local part of the address.
When it is called as a result of a forward or alias expansion,
LOCAL_PART is set to the local part of the address that was expanded.
In both cases, any affixes are removed from the local part, and made
available in LOCAL_PART_PREFIX and LOCAL_PART_SUFFIX, respectively.
LOGNAME and USER are set to the same value as LOCAL_PART for
compatibility with other MTAs.

   HOST is set only when a ‘pipe’ transport is called from a router that
associates hosts with an address, typically when using ‘pipe’ as a
pseudo-remote transport.  HOST is set to the first host name specified
by the router.

   If the transport's generic ‘home_directory’ option is set, its value
is used for the HOME environment variable.  Otherwise, a home directory
may be set by the router's ‘transport_home_directory’ option, which
defaults to the user's home directory if ‘check_local_user’ is set.


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for pipe,  Next: Using an external local delivery agent,  Prev: Environment variables,  Up: The pipe transport

29.5 Private options for pipe
=============================

‘allow_commands’       Use: _pipe_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The string is expanded, and is then interpreted as a colon-separated
list of permitted commands.  If ‘restrict_to_path’ is not set, the only
commands permitted are those in the ‘allow_commands’ list.  They need
not be absolute paths; the ‘path’ option is still used for relative
paths.  If ‘restrict_to_path’ is set with ‘allow_commands’, the command
must either be in the ‘allow_commands’ list, or a name without any
slashes that is found on the path.  In other words, if neither
‘allow_commands’ nor ‘restrict_to_path’ is set, there is no restriction
on the command, but otherwise only commands that are permitted by one or
the other are allowed.  For example, if

     allow_commands = /usr/bin/vacation

   and ‘restrict_to_path’ is not set, the only permitted command is
‘/usr/bin/vacation’.  The ‘allow_commands’ option may not be set if
‘use_shell’ is set.

‘batch_id’             Use: _pipe_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   See the description of local delivery batching in chapter *note
Address batching in local transports: Address batching.

‘batch_max’            Use: _pipe_       Type: _integer_   Default: _1_

   This limits the number of addresses that can be handled in a single
delivery.  See the description of local delivery batching in chapter
*note Address batching in local transports: Address batching.

‘check_string’         Use: _pipe_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   As ‘pipe’ writes the message, the start of each line is tested for
matching ‘check_string’, and if it does, the initial matching characters
are replaced by the contents of ‘escape_string’, provided both are set.
The value of ‘check_string’ is a literal string, not a regular
expression, and the case of any letters it contains is significant.
When ‘use_bsmtp’ is set, the contents of ‘check_string’ and
‘escape_string’ are forced to values that implement the SMTP escaping
protocol.  Any settings made in the configuration file are ignored.

‘command’              Use: _pipe_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option need not be set when ‘pipe’ is being used to deliver to
pipes obtained directly from address redirections.  In other cases, the
option must be set, to provide a command to be run.  It need not yield
an absolute path (see the ‘path’ option below).  The command is split up
into separate arguments by Exim, and each argument is separately
expanded, as described in section *note How the command is run:: above.

   No part of the resulting command may be tainted.

‘environment’          Use: _pipe_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option is used to add additional variables to the environment in
which the command runs (see section *note Environment variables:: for
the default list).  Its value is a string which is expanded, and then
interpreted as a colon-separated list of environment settings of the
form <_name_>=<_value_>.

‘escape_string’        Use: _pipe_       Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   See ‘check_string’ above.

‘freeze_exec_fail’     Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Failure to exec the command in a pipe transport is by default treated
like any other failure while running the command.  However, if
‘freeze_exec_fail’ is set, failure to exec is treated specially, and
causes the message to be frozen, whatever the setting of
‘ignore_status’.

‘freeze_signal’        Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Normally if the process run by a command in a pipe transport exits on
a signal, a bounce message is sent.  If ‘freeze_signal’ is set, the
message will be frozen in Exim's queue instead.

‘force_command’        Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Normally when a router redirects an address directly to a pipe
command the ‘command’ option on the transport is ignored.  If
‘force_command’ is set, the ‘command’ option will used.  This is
especially useful for forcing a wrapper or additional argument to be
added to the command.  For example:

     command = /usr/bin/remote_exec myhost -- $address_pipe
     force_command

   Note that ‘$address_pipe’ is handled specially in ‘command’ when
‘force_command’ is set, expanding out to the original argument vector as
separate items, similarly to a Unix shell ‘"$@"’ construct.

‘ignore_status’        Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true, the status returned by the subprocess that is
set up to run the command is ignored, and Exim behaves as if zero had
been returned.  Otherwise, a non-zero status or termination by signal
causes an error return from the transport unless the status value is one
of those listed in ‘temp_errors’; these cause the delivery to be
deferred and tried again later.

   *Note*: This option does not apply to timeouts, which do not return a
status.  See the ‘timeout_defer’ option for how timeouts are handled.

‘log_defer_output’     Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, and the status returned by the command is one
of the codes listed in ‘temp_errors’ (that is, delivery was deferred),
and any output was produced on stdout or stderr, the first line of it is
written to the main log.

‘log_fail_output’      Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, and the command returns any output on stdout
or stderr, and also ends with a return code that is neither zero nor one
of the return codes listed in ‘temp_errors’ (that is, the delivery
failed), the first line of output is written to the main log.  This
option and ‘log_output’ are mutually exclusive.  Only one of them may be
set.

‘log_output’           Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set and the command returns any output on stdout or
stderr, the first line of output is written to the main log, whatever
the return code.  This option and ‘log_fail_output’ are mutually
exclusive.  Only one of them may be set.

‘max_output’           Use: _pipe_       Type: _integer_   Default: _20K_

   This specifies the maximum amount of output that the command may
produce on its standard output and standard error file combined.  If the
limit is exceeded, the process running the command is killed.  This is
intended as a safety measure to catch runaway processes.  The limit is
applied independently of the settings of the options that control what
is done with such output (for example, ‘return_output’).  Because of
buffering effects, the amount of output may exceed the limit by a small
amount before Exim notices.

‘message_prefix’       Use: _pipe_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   The string specified here is expanded and output at the start of
every message.  The default is unset if ‘use_bsmtp’ is set.  Otherwise
it is

     message_prefix = \
       From ${if def:return_path{$return_path}{MAILER-DAEMON}}\
       ${tod_bsdinbox}\n

   This is required by the commonly used ‘/usr/bin/vacation’ program.
However, it must _not_ be present if delivery is to the Cyrus IMAP
server, or to the ‘tmail’ local delivery agent.  The prefix can be
suppressed by setting

     message_prefix =

   *Note:* If you set ‘use_crlf’ true, you must change any occurrences
of ‘\n’ to ‘\r\n’ in ‘message_prefix’.

‘message_suffix’       Use: _pipe_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   The string specified here is expanded and output at the end of every
message.  The default is unset if ‘use_bsmtp’ is set.  Otherwise it is a
single newline.  The suffix can be suppressed by setting

     message_suffix =

   *Note:* If you set ‘use_crlf’ true, you must change any occurrences
of ‘\n’ to ‘\r\n’ in ‘message_suffix’.

‘path’                 Use: _pipe_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _/bin:/usr/bin_

   This option is expanded and specifies the string that is set up in
the PATH environment variable of the subprocess.  If the ‘command’
option does not yield an absolute path name, the command is sought in
the PATH directories, in the usual way.  *Warning*: This does not apply
to a command specified as a transport filter.

‘permit_coredump’      Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Normally Exim inhibits core-dumps during delivery.  If you have a
need to get a core-dump of a pipe command, enable this command.  This
enables core-dumps during delivery and affects both the Exim binary and
the pipe command run.  It is recommended that this option remain off
unless and until you have a need for it and that this only be enabled
when needed, as the risk of excessive resource consumption can be quite
high.  Note also that Exim is typically installed as a setuid binary and
most operating systems will inhibit coredumps of these by default, so
further OS-specific action may be required.

‘pipe_as_creator’      Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If the generic ‘user’ option is not set and this option is true, the
delivery process is run under the uid that was in force when Exim was
originally called to accept the message.  If the group id is not
otherwise set (via the generic ‘group’ option), the gid that was in
force when Exim was originally called to accept the message is used.

‘restrict_to_path’     Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   When this option is set, any command name not listed in
‘allow_commands’ must contain no slashes.  The command is searched for
only in the directories listed in the ‘path’ option.  This option is
intended for use in the case when a pipe command has been generated from
a user's ‘.forward’ file.  This is usually handled by a ‘pipe’ transport
called ‘address_pipe’.

‘return_fail_output’   Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true, and the command produced any output and ended
with a return code other than zero or one of the codes listed in
‘temp_errors’ (that is, the delivery failed), the output is returned in
the bounce message.  However, if the message has a null sender (that is,
it is itself a bounce message), output from the command is discarded.
This option and ‘return_output’ are mutually exclusive.  Only one of
them may be set.

‘return_output’        Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true, and the command produced any output, the
delivery is deemed to have failed whatever the return code from the
command, and the output is returned in the bounce message.  Otherwise,
the output is just discarded.  However, if the message has a null sender
(that is, it is a bounce message), output from the command is always
discarded, whatever the setting of this option.  This option and
‘return_fail_output’ are mutually exclusive.  Only one of them may be
set.

‘temp_errors’          Use: _pipe_       Type: _string     Default: _see
                                         list_             below_

   This option contains either a colon-separated list of numbers, or a
single asterisk.  If ‘ignore_status’ is false and ‘return_output’ is not
set, and the command exits with a non-zero return code, the failure is
treated as temporary and the delivery is deferred if the return code
matches one of the numbers, or if the setting is a single asterisk.
Otherwise, non-zero return codes are treated as permanent errors.  The
default setting contains the codes defined by EX_TEMPFAIL and
EX_CANTCREAT in ‘sysexits.h’.  If Exim is compiled on a system that does
not define these macros, it assumes values of 75 and 73, respectively.

‘timeout’              Use: _pipe_       Type: _time_      Default: _1h_

   If the command fails to complete within this time, it is killed.
This normally causes the delivery to fail (but see ‘timeout_defer’).  A
zero time interval specifies no timeout.  In order to ensure that any
subprocesses created by the command are also killed, Exim makes the
initial process a process group leader, and kills the whole process
group on a timeout.  However, this can be defeated if one of the
processes starts a new process group.

‘timeout_defer’        Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   A timeout in a ‘pipe’ transport, either in the command that the
transport runs, or in a transport filter that is associated with it, is
by default treated as a hard error, and the delivery fails.  However, if
‘timeout_defer’ is set true, both kinds of timeout become temporary
errors, causing the delivery to be deferred.

‘umask’                Use: _pipe_       Type: _octal      Default: _022_
                                         integer_

   This specifies the umask setting for the subprocess that runs the
command.

‘use_bsmtp’            Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, the ‘pipe’ transport writes messages in
"batch SMTP" format, with the envelope sender and recipient(s) included
as SMTP commands.  If you want to include a leading HELO command with
such messages, you can do so by setting the ‘message_prefix’ option.
See section *note Outgoing batched SMTP:: for details of batch SMTP.

‘use_classresources’   Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option is available only when Exim is running on FreeBSD,
NetBSD, or BSD/OS. If it is set true, the ‘setclassresources()’ function
is used to set resource limits when a ‘pipe’ transport is run to perform
a delivery.  The limits for the uid under which the pipe is to run are
obtained from the login class database.

‘use_crlf’             Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   This option causes lines to be terminated with the two-character CRLF
sequence (carriage return, linefeed) instead of just a linefeed
character.  In the case of batched SMTP, the byte sequence written to
the pipe is then an exact image of what would be sent down a real SMTP
connection.

   The contents of the ‘message_prefix’ and ‘message_suffix’ options are
written verbatim, so must contain their own carriage return characters
if these are needed.  When ‘use_bsmtp’ is not set, the default values
for both ‘message_prefix’ and ‘message_suffix’ end with a single
linefeed, so their values must be changed to end with ‘\r\n’ if
‘use_crlf’ is set.

‘use_shell’            Use: _pipe_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set, it causes the command to be passed to
‘/bin/sh’ instead of being run directly from the transport, as described
in section *note How the command is run::.  This is less secure, but is
needed in some situations where the command is expected to be run under
a shell and cannot easily be modified.  The ‘allow_commands’ and
‘restrict_to_path’ options, and the ‘$pipe_addresses’ facility are
incompatible with ‘use_shell’.  The command is expanded as a single
string, and handed to ‘/bin/sh’ as data for its ‘-c’ option.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using an external local delivery agent,  Prev: Private options for pipe,  Up: The pipe transport

29.6 Using an external local delivery agent
===========================================

The ‘pipe’ transport can be used to pass all messages that require local
delivery to a separate local delivery agent such as ‘procmail’.  When
doing this, care must be taken to ensure that the pipe is run under an
appropriate uid and gid.  In some configurations one wants this to be a
uid that is trusted by the delivery agent to supply the correct sender
of the message.  It may be necessary to recompile or reconfigure the
delivery agent so that it trusts an appropriate user.  The following is
an example transport and router configuration for ‘procmail’:

     # transport
     procmail_pipe:
       driver = pipe
       command = /usr/local/bin/procmail -d $local_part_data
       return_path_add
       delivery_date_add
       envelope_to_add
       check_string = "From "
       escape_string = ">From "
       umask = 077
       user = $local_part_data
       group = mail

     # router
     procmail:
       driver = accept
       check_local_user
       transport = procmail_pipe

   In this example, the pipe is run as the local user, but with the
group set to _mail_.  An alternative is to run the pipe as a specific
user such as _mail_ or _exim_, but in this case you must arrange for
‘procmail’ to trust that user to supply a correct sender address.  If
you do not specify either a ‘group’ or a ‘user’ option, the pipe command
is run as the local user.  The home directory is the user's home
directory by default.

   *Note*: The command that the pipe transport runs does _not_ begin
with

     IFS=" "

   as shown in some ‘procmail’ documentation, because Exim does not by
default use a shell to run pipe commands.

   The next example shows a transport and a router for a system where
local deliveries are handled by the Cyrus IMAP server.

     # transport
     local_delivery_cyrus:
       driver = pipe
       command = /usr/cyrus/bin/deliver \
                 -- $local_part_data
       user = cyrus
       group = mail
       return_output
       log_output
       message_prefix =
       message_suffix =

     # router
     local_user_cyrus:
       driver = accept
       check_local_user
       transport = local_delivery_cyrus

   Note the unsetting of ‘message_prefix’ and ‘message_suffix’, and the
use of ‘return_output’ to cause any text written by Cyrus to be returned
to the sender.


File: spec.info,  Node: The smtp transport,  Next: Address rewriting,  Prev: The pipe transport,  Up: Top

30 The smtp transport
*********************

The ‘smtp’ transport delivers messages over TCP/IP connections using the
SMTP or LMTP protocol.  The list of hosts to try can either be taken
from the address that is being processed (having been set up by the
router), or specified explicitly for the transport.  Timeout and retry
processing (see chapter *note Retry configuration::) is applied to each
IP address independently.

* Menu:

* Multiple messages on a single connection::
* Use of the $host and $host_address variables::
* Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn::
* Private options for smtp::
* How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used::


File: spec.info,  Node: Multiple messages on a single connection,  Next: Use of the $host and $host_address variables,  Up: The smtp transport

30.1 Multiple messages on a single connection
=============================================

The sending of multiple messages over a single TCP/IP connection can
arise in two ways:

   • If a message contains more than ‘max_rcpt’ (see below) addresses
     that are routed to the same host, more than one copy of the message
     has to be sent to that host.  In this situation, multiple copies
     may be sent in a single run of the ‘smtp’ transport over a single
     TCP/IP connection.  (What Exim actually does when it has too many
     addresses to send in one message also depends on the value of the
     global ‘remote_max_parallel’ option.  Details are given in section
     *note Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP::.)

   • When a message has been successfully delivered over a TCP/IP
     connection, Exim looks in its hints database to see if there are
     any other messages awaiting a connection to the same host.  If
     there are, a new delivery process is started for one of them, and
     the current TCP/IP connection is passed on to it.  The new process
     may in turn send multiple copies and possibly create yet another
     process.

   For each copy sent over the same TCP/IP connection, a sequence
counter is incremented, and if it ever gets to the value of
‘connection_max_messages’, no further messages are sent over that
connection.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of the $host and $host_address variables,  Next: Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn,  Prev: Multiple messages on a single connection,  Up: The smtp transport

30.2 Use of the $host and $host_address variables
=================================================

At the start of a run of the ‘smtp’ transport, the values of ‘$host’ and
‘$host_address’ are the name and IP address of the first host on the
host list passed by the router.  However, when the transport is about to
connect to a specific host, and while it is connected to that host,
‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are set to the values for that host.  These
are the values that are in force when the ‘helo_data’, ‘hosts_try_auth’,
‘interface’, ‘serialize_hosts’, and the various TLS options are
expanded.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn,  Next: Private options for smtp,  Prev: Use of the $host and $host_address variables,  Up: The smtp transport

30.3 Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn
=======================================

At the start of a run of the ‘smtp’ transport, the values of
‘$tls_bits’, ‘$tls_cipher’, ‘$tls_peerdn’ and ‘$tls_sni’ are the values
that were set when the message was received.  These are the values that
are used for options that are expanded before any SMTP connections are
made.  Just before each connection is made, these four variables are
emptied.  If TLS is subsequently started, they are set to the
appropriate values for the outgoing connection, and these are the values
that are in force when any authenticators are run and when the
‘authenticated_sender’ option is expanded.

   These variables are deprecated in favour of ‘$tls_in_cipher’ et.  al.
and will be removed in a future release.


File: spec.info,  Node: Private options for smtp,  Next: How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used,  Prev: Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn,  Up: The smtp transport

30.4 Private options for smtp
=============================

The private options of the ‘smtp’ transport are as follows:

‘address_retry_include_sender’Use: _smtp_Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When an address is delayed because of a 4_xx_ response to a RCPT
command, it is the combination of sender and recipient that is delayed
in subsequent queue runs until the retry time is reached.  You can delay
the recipient without reference to the sender (which is what earlier
versions of Exim did), by setting ‘address_retry_include_sender’ false.
However, this can lead to problems with servers that regularly issue
4_xx_ responses to RCPT commands.

‘allow_localhost’      Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   When a host specified in ‘hosts’ or ‘fallback_hosts’ (see below)
turns out to be the local host, or is listed in ‘hosts_treat_as_local’,
delivery is deferred by default.  However, if ‘allow_localhost’ is set,
Exim goes on to do the delivery anyway.  This should be used only in
special cases when the configuration ensures that no looping will result
(for example, a differently configured Exim is listening on the port to
which the message is sent).

‘authenticated_sender’ Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   When Exim has authenticated as a client, or if
‘authenticated_sender_force’ is true, this option sets a value for the
AUTH= item on outgoing MAIL commands, overriding any existing
authenticated sender value.  If the string expansion is forced to fail,
the option is ignored.  Other expansion failures cause delivery to be
deferred.  If the result of expansion is an empty string, that is also
ignored.

   The expansion happens after the outgoing connection has been made and
TLS started, if required.  This means that the ‘$host’, ‘$host_address’,
‘$tls_out_cipher’, and ‘$tls_out_peerdn’ variables are set according to
the particular connection.

   If the SMTP session is not authenticated, the expansion of
‘authenticated_sender’ still happens (and can cause the delivery to be
deferred if it fails), but no AUTH= item is added to MAIL commands
unless ‘authenticated_sender_force’ is true.

   This option allows you to use the ‘smtp’ transport in LMTP mode to
deliver mail to Cyrus IMAP and provide the proper local part as the
"authenticated sender", via a setting such as:

     authenticated_sender = $local_part

   This removes the need for IMAP subfolders to be assigned special ACLs
to allow direct delivery to those subfolders.

   Because of expected uses such as that just described for Cyrus (when
no domain is involved), there is no checking on the syntax of the
provided value.

‘authenticated_sender_force’Use: _smtp_  Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true, the ‘authenticated_sender’ option's value
is used for the AUTH= item on outgoing MAIL commands, even if Exim has
not authenticated as a client.

‘command_timeout’      Use: _smtp_       Type: _time_      Default: _5m_

   This sets a timeout for receiving a response to an SMTP command that
has been sent out.  It is also used when waiting for the initial banner
line from the remote host.  Its value must not be zero.

‘connect_timeout’      Use: _smtp_       Type: _time_      Default: _5m_

   This sets a timeout for the ‘connect()’ function, which sets up a
TCP/IP call to a remote host.  A setting of zero allows the system
timeout (typically several minutes) to act.  To have any effect, the
value of this option must be less than the system timeout.  However, it
has been observed that on some systems there is no system timeout, which
is why the default value for this option is 5 minutes, a value
recommended by *RFC 1123
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1123#section-5)*.

‘connection_max_messages’Use: _smtp_     Type: _integer_   Default: _500_

   This controls the maximum number of separate message deliveries that
are sent over a single TCP/IP connection.  If the value is zero, there
is no limit.  For testing purposes, this value can be overridden by the
‘-oB’ command line option.

   If the peer advertises a LIMITS extension with a MAILMAX value, and
either TLS is in use or was not advertised, that value also constrains
the result of this option.

‘dane_require_tls_ciphers’Use: _smtp_    Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option may be used to override ‘tls_require_ciphers’ for
connections where DANE has been determined to be in effect.  If not set,
then ‘tls_require_ciphers’ will be used.  Normal SMTP delivery is not
able to make strong demands of TLS cipher configuration, because
delivery will fall back to plaintext.  Once DANE has been determined to
be in effect, there is no plaintext fallback and making the TLS
cipherlist configuration stronger will increase security, rather than
counter-intuitively decreasing it.  If the option expands to be empty or
is forced to fail, then it will be treated as unset and
‘tls_require_ciphers’ will be used instead.

‘data_timeout’         Use: _smtp_       Type: _time_      Default: _5m_

   This sets a timeout for the transmission of each block in the data
portion of the message.  As a result, the overall timeout for a message
depends on the size of the message.  Its value must not be zero.  See
also ‘final_timeout’.

‘dkim_canon’           Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_domain’          Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_hash’            Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _sha256_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_identity’        Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_private_key’     Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_selector’        Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_strict’          Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_sign_headers’    Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _per
                                         _string_*__       RFC_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘dkim_timestamps’      Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   DKIM signing option.  For details see section *note Signing outgoing
messages::.

‘delay_after_cutoff’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   This option controls what happens when all remote IP addresses for a
given domain have been inaccessible for so long that they have passed
their retry cutoff times.

   In the default state, if the next retry time has not been reached for
any of them, the address is bounced without trying any deliveries.  In
other words, Exim delays retrying an IP address after the final cutoff
time until a new retry time is reached, and can therefore bounce an
address without ever trying a delivery, when machines have been down for
a long time.  Some people are unhappy at this prospect, so...

   If ‘delay_after_cutoff’ is set false, Exim behaves differently.  If
all IP addresses are past their final cutoff time, Exim tries to deliver
to those IP addresses that have not been tried since the message
arrived.  If there are none, of if they all fail, the address is
bounced.  In other words, it does not delay when a new message arrives,
but immediately tries those expired IP addresses that haven't been tried
since the message arrived.  If there is a continuous stream of messages
for the dead hosts, unsetting ‘delay_after_cutoff’ means that there will
be many more attempts to deliver to them.

‘dns_qualify_single’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   If the ‘hosts’ or ‘fallback_hosts’ option is being used, and the
‘gethostbyname’ option is false, the RES_DEFNAMES resolver option is
set.  See the ‘qualify_single’ option in chapter *note The dnslookup
router:: for more details.

‘dns_search_parents’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If the ‘hosts’ or ‘fallback_hosts’ option is being used, and the
‘gethostbyname’ option is false, the RES_DNSRCH resolver option is set.
See the ‘search_parents’ option in chapter *note The dnslookup router::
for more details.

‘dnssec_request_domains’Use: _smtp_      Type: _domain     Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   DNS lookups for domains matching ‘dnssec_request_domains’ will be
done with the DNSSEC request bit set.  Setting this transport option is
only useful if the transport overrides or sets the host names.  See the
‘dnssec_request_domains’ router option.

‘dnssec_require_domains’Use: _smtp_      Type: _domain     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   DNS lookups for domains matching ‘dnssec_require_domains’ will be
done with the DNSSEC request bit set.  Setting this transport option is
only useful if the transport overrides or sets the host names.  See the
‘dnssec_require_domains’ router option.

‘dscp’                 Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If Exim is built with DSCP support,

   this option causes the DSCP value associated with a socket to be set
corresponsing to one of a number of fixed strings, or to a numeric
value.  The ‘-bI:dscp’ option may be used to ask Exim which names it
knows of.  Common values include ‘throughput’, ‘mincost’, and on newer
systems ‘ef’, ‘af41’, etc.  Numeric values may be in the range 0 to
0x3F.

   The outbound packets from Exim will be marked with this value in the
header (for IPv4, the TOS field; for IPv6, the TCLASS field); there is
no guarantee that these values will have any effect, not be stripped by
networking equipment, or do much of anything without cooperation with
your Network Engineer and those of all network operators between the
source and destination.

‘fallback_hosts’       Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The argument must, after expansion, be a colon-separated list of host
names or IP addresses, optionally also including port numbers, though
the separator can be changed, as described in section *note List
construction::.  Each individual item in the list is the same as an item
in a ‘route_list’ setting for the ‘manualroute’ router, as described in
section *note Format of one host item::.

   Fallback hosts can also be specified on routers, which associate them
with the addresses they process.  As for the ‘hosts’ option without
‘hosts_override’, ‘fallback_hosts’ specified on the transport is used
only if the address does not have its own associated fallback host list.
Unlike ‘hosts’, a setting of ‘fallback_hosts’ on an address is not
overridden by ‘hosts_override’.  However, ‘hosts_randomize’ does apply
to fallback host lists.

   If Exim is unable to deliver to any of the hosts for a particular
address, and the errors are not permanent rejections, the address is put
on a separate transport queue with its host list replaced by the
fallback hosts, unless the address was routed via MX records and the
current host was in the original MX list.  In that situation, the
fallback host list is not used.

   Once normal deliveries are complete, the fallback queue is delivered
by re-running the same transports with the new host lists.  If several
failing addresses have the same fallback hosts (and ‘max_rcpt’ permits
it), a single copy of the message is sent.

   The resolution of the host names on the fallback list is controlled
by the ‘gethostbyname’ option, as for the ‘hosts’ option.  Fallback
hosts apply both to cases when the host list comes with the address and
when it is taken from ‘hosts’.  This option provides a "use a smart host
only if delivery fails" facility.

‘final_timeout’        Use: _smtp_       Type: _time_      Default: _10m_

   This is the timeout that applies while waiting for the response to
the final line containing just "."  that terminates a message.  Its
value must not be zero.

‘gethostbyname’        Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is true when the ‘hosts’ and/or ‘fallback_hosts’
options are being used, names are looked up using ‘gethostbyname()’ (or
‘getipnodebyname()’ when available) instead of using the DNS. Of course,
that function may in fact use the DNS, but it may also consult other
sources of information such as ‘/etc/hosts’.

‘gnutls_compat_mode’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option controls whether GnuTLS is used in compatibility mode in
an Exim server.  This reduces security slightly, but improves
interworking with older implementations of TLS.

‘helo_data’            Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   The value of this option is expanded after a connection to a another
host has been set up.  The result is used as the argument for the EHLO,
HELO, or LHLO command that starts the outgoing SMTP or LMTP session.
The default value of the option is:

     $primary_hostname

   During the expansion, the variables ‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are
set to the identity of the remote host, and the variables
‘$sending_ip_address’ and ‘$sending_port’ are set to the local IP
address and port number that are being used.  These variables can be
used to generate different values for different servers or different
local IP addresses.  For example, if you want the string that is used
for ‘helo_data’ to be obtained by a DNS lookup of the outgoing interface
address, you could use this:

     helo_data = ${lookup dnsdb{ptr=$sending_ip_address} \
       {${listextract{1}{<\n $value}}} \
       {$primary_hostname}}

   The use of ‘helo_data’ applies both to sending messages and when
doing callouts.

‘host_name_extract’    Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default: _see
                                         list_*__          below_

   Some mail-accepting sites (notably Microsoft) operate many servers
behind a network load-balancer.  When this is done, with separated TLS
session caches, TLS session resuption becomes problematic.  It will only
succeed when the same server happens to be selected by the
load-balancer, matching the session stored in the client's cache.

   Exim can pull out a server name, if there is one, from the response
to the client's SMTP EHLO command.  For normal STARTTLS use, the default
value of this option:

         ${if and { {match {$host} {.outlook.com\$}} \
                    {match {$item} {\N^250-([\w.]+)\s\N}} \
     	     } {$1}}

   suffices for one known case.

   During the expansion of this option the ‘$item’ variable will have
the server's EHLO response.

   For TLS-on-connect connections we do not have an EHLO response to
use.  Because of this the default value of this option is set to a
static string for those cases, meaning that resumption will always be
attempted if permitted by the ‘tls_resumption_hosts’ option.

   The result of the option expansion is included in the key used to
store and retrieve the TLS session, for session resumption.

   Operators of high-load sites may wish to evaluate their logs for
indications of other destination sites operating load-balancers, and
develop a suitable expression for this option.  The smtp:ehlo event and
the ‘$tls_out_resumption’ variable will be useful for such work.

‘hosts’                Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Hosts are associated with an address by a router such as ‘dnslookup’,
which finds the hosts by looking up the address domain in the DNS, or by
‘manualroute’, which has lists of hosts in its configuration.  However,
email addresses can be passed to the ‘smtp’ transport by any router, and
not all of them can provide an associated list of hosts.

   The ‘hosts’ option specifies a list of hosts to be used if the
address being processed does not have any hosts associated with it.  The
hosts specified by ‘hosts’ are also used, whether or not the address has
its own hosts, if ‘hosts_override’ is set.

   The string is first expanded, before being interpreted as a
colon-separated list of host names or IP addresses, possibly including
port numbers.  The separator may be changed to something other than
colon, as described in section *note List construction::.  Each
individual item in the list is the same as an item in a ‘route_list’
setting for the ‘manualroute’ router, as described in section *note
Format of one host item::.  However, note that the ‘/MX’ facility of the
‘manualroute’ router is not available here.

   If the expansion fails, delivery is deferred.  Unless the failure was
caused by the inability to complete a lookup, the error is logged to the
panic log as well as the main log.  Host names are looked up either by
searching directly for address records in the DNS or by calling
‘gethostbyname()’ (or ‘getipnodebyname()’ when available), depending on
the setting of the ‘gethostbyname’ option.  When Exim is compiled with
IPv6 support, if a host that is looked up in the DNS has both IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses, both types of address are used.

   During delivery, the hosts are tried in order, subject to their retry
status, unless ‘hosts_randomize’ is set.

‘hosts_avoid_esmtp’    Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option is for use with broken hosts that announce ESMTP
facilities (for example, PIPELINING) and then fail to implement them
properly.  When a host matches ‘hosts_avoid_esmtp’, Exim sends HELO
rather than EHLO at the start of the SMTP session.  This means that it
cannot use any of the ESMTP facilities such as AUTH, PIPELINING, SIZE,
and STARTTLS.

‘hosts_avoid_pipelining’Use: _smtp_      Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim will not use the ESMTP PIPELINING extension when delivering to
any host that matches this list, even if the server host advertises
PIPELINING support.

‘hosts_pipe_connect’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If Exim is built with the SUPPORT_PIPE_CONNECT build option this
option controls which to hosts the facility watched for and recorded,
and used for subsequent connections.

   The retry hints database is used for the record, and records are
subject to the ‘retry_data_expire’ option.  When used, the pipelining
saves on roundtrip times.  It also turns SMTP into a client-first
protocol so combines well with TCP Fast Open.

   See also the ‘pipelining_connect_advertise_hosts’ main option.

   Note: When the facility is used, if the transport ‘interface’ option
is unset the ‘helo_data’ option will be expanded before the
‘$sending_ip_address’ variable is filled in.  A check is made for the
use of that variable, without the presence of a "def:" test on it, but
suitably complex coding can avoid the check and produce unexpected
results.  You have been warned.

‘hosts_avoid_tls’      Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim will not try to start a TLS session using STARTTLS when
delivering to any host that matches this list.  See chapter *note
Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.
for details of TLS.

‘hosts_verify_avoid_tls’Use: _smtp_      Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim will not try to start a TLS session using STARTTLS for a verify
callout, or when delivering in cutthrough mode, to any host that matches
this list.

‘hosts_max_try’        Use: _smtp_       Type: _integer_   Default: _5_

   This option limits the number of IP addresses that are tried for any
one delivery in cases where there are temporary delivery errors.
Section *note How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used::
describes in detail how the value of this option is used.

‘hosts_max_try_hardlimit’Use: _smtp_     Type: _integer_   Default: _50_

   This is an additional check on the maximum number of IP addresses
that Exim tries for any one delivery.  Section *note How the limits for
the number of hosts to try are used:: describes its use and why it
exists.

‘hosts_nopass_tls’     Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   For any host that matches this list, a connection on which a TLS
session has been started will not be passed to a new delivery process
for sending another message on the same connection.  See section *note
Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection:: for an
explanation of when this might be needed.

‘hosts_noproxy_tls’    Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   For any host that matches this list, a TLS session which has been
started will not be passed to a new delivery process for sending another
message on the same session.

   The traditional implementation closes down TLS and re-starts it in
the new process, on the same open TCP connection, for each successive
message sent.  If permitted by this option a pipe to to the new process
is set up instead, and the original process maintains the TLS connection
and proxies the SMTP connection from and to the new process and any
subsequents.  The new process has no access to TLS information, so
cannot include it in logging.

‘hosts_override’       Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set and the ‘hosts’ option is also set, any hosts
that are attached to the address are ignored, and instead the hosts
specified by the ‘hosts’ option are always used.  This option does not
apply to ‘fallback_hosts’.

‘hosts_randomize’      Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _boolean_*__      _false_

   If this option is set, and either the list of hosts is taken from the
‘hosts’ or the ‘fallback_hosts’ option, or the hosts supplied by the
router were not obtained from MX records (this includes fallback hosts
from the router), and were not randomized by the router, the order of
trying the hosts is randomized each time the transport runs.
Randomizing the order of a host list can be used to do crude load
sharing.

   When ‘hosts_randomize’ is true, a host list may be split into groups
whose order is separately randomized.  This makes it possible to set up
MX-like behaviour.  The boundaries between groups are indicated by an
item that is just ‘+’ in the host list.  For example:

     hosts = host1:host2:host3:+:host4:host5

   The order of the first three hosts and the order of the last two
hosts is randomized for each use, but the first three always end up
before the last two.  If ‘hosts_randomize’ is not set, a ‘+’ item in the
list is ignored.

‘hosts_require_auth’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option provides a list of servers for which authentication must
succeed before Exim will try to transfer a message.  If authentication
fails for servers which are not in this list, Exim tries to send
unauthenticated.  If authentication fails for one of these servers,
delivery is deferred.  This temporary error is detectable in the retry
rules, so it can be turned into a hard failure if required.  See also
‘hosts_try_auth’, and chapter *note SMTP authentication:: for details of
authentication.

‘hosts_request_ocsp’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default: _see
                                         list_*__          below_

   Exim will request a Certificate Status on a TLS session for any host
that matches this list.  ‘tls_verify_certificates’ should also be set
for the transport.

   The default is "**" if DANE is not in use for the connection, or if
DANE-TA us used.  It is empty if DANE-EE is used.

‘hosts_require_alpn’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If the TLS library supports ALPN then a successful negotiation of
ALPN will be required for any host matching the list, for TLS to be
used.  See also the ‘tls_alpn’ option.

   *Note*: prevention of fallback to in-clear connection is not managed
by this option; see ‘hosts_require_tls’.

‘hosts_require_dane’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   If built with DANE support, Exim will require that a DNSSEC-validated
TLSA record is present for any host matching the list, and that a
DANE-verified TLS connection is made.  There will be no fallback to
in-clear communication.  See the ‘dnssec_request_domains’ router and
transport options.  See section *note DANE::.

‘hosts_require_ocsp’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim will request, and check for a valid Certificate Status being
given, on a TLS session for any host that matches this list.
‘tls_verify_certificates’ should also be set for the transport.

‘hosts_require_tls’    Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Exim will insist on using a TLS session when delivering to any host
that matches this list.  See chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections
using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections. for details of TLS. *Note*:
This option affects outgoing mail only.  To insist on TLS for incoming
messages, use an appropriate ACL.

‘hosts_try_auth’       Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option provides a list of servers to which, provided they
announce authentication support, Exim will attempt to authenticate as a
client when it connects.  If authentication fails and
‘hosts_require_auth’ permits, Exim will try to transfer the message
unauthenticated.  See also chapter *note SMTP authentication:: for
details of authentication.

‘hosts_try_chunking’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option provides a list of servers to which, provided they
announce CHUNKING support, Exim will attempt to use BDAT commands rather
than DATA. Unless DKIM signing is being done, BDAT will not be used in
conjunction with a transport filter.

‘hosts_try_dane’       Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   If built with DANE support, Exim will look up a TLSA record for any
host matching the list, If one is found and that lookup was
DNSSEC-validated, then Exim requires that a DANE-verified TLS connection
is made for that host; there will be no fallback to in-clear
communication.  See the ‘dnssec_request_domains’ router and transport
options.  See section *note DANE::.

‘hosts_try_fastopen’   Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option provides a list of servers to which, provided the
facility is supported by this system, Exim will attempt to perform a TCP
Fast Open (*RFC 7413 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc7413)*.
No data is sent on the SYN segment (except for TLS-on-connect
connections) but, if the remote server also supports the facility, it
can send its SMTP banner immediately after the SYN,ACK segment.  This
can save up to one round-trip time.

   For TLS-on-connect, if supported by the remote server the TLS Client
Hello is sent on the TCP SYN segment and the entire server-provided TLS
startup can be sent immediately after the SYN,ACK.

   The facility is only active for previously-contacted servers, as the
initiator must present a cookie in the SYN segment.

   On (at least some) current Linux distributions the facility must be
enabled in the kernel by the sysadmin before the support is usable.
There is no option for control of the server side; if the system
supports it it is always enabled.  Note that lengthy operations in the
connect ACL, such as DNSBL lookups, will still delay the emission of the
SMTP banner.

‘hosts_try_prdr’       Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option provides a list of servers to which, provided they
announce PRDR support, Exim will attempt to negotiate PRDR for
multi-recipient messages.  The option can usually be left as default.

‘interface’            Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option specifies which interface to bind to when making an
outgoing SMTP call.  The value is an IP address, not an interface name
such as ‘eth0’.  Do not confuse this with the interface address that was
used when a message was received, which is in ‘$received_ip_address’,
formerly known as ‘$interface_address’.  The name was changed to
minimize confusion with the outgoing interface address.  There is no
variable that contains an outgoing interface address because, unless it
is set by this option, its value is unknown.

   During the expansion of the ‘interface’ option the variables ‘$host’
and ‘$host_address’ refer to the host to which a connection is about to
be made during the expansion of the string.  Forced expansion failure,
or an empty string result causes the option to be ignored.  Otherwise,
after expansion, the string must be a list of IP addresses,
colon-separated by default, but the separator can be changed in the
usual way (*note Changing list separators::).  For example:

     interface = <; 192.168.123.123 ; 3ffe:ffff:836f::fe86:a061

   The first interface of the correct type (IPv4 or IPv6) is used for
the outgoing connection.  If none of them are the correct type, the
option is ignored.  If ‘interface’ is not set, or is ignored, the
system's IP functions choose which interface to use if the host has more
than one.

‘keepalive’            Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   This option controls the setting of SO_KEEPALIVE on outgoing TCP/IP
socket connections.  When set, it causes the kernel to probe idle
connections periodically, by sending packets with "old" sequence
numbers.  The other end of the connection should send a acknowledgment
if the connection is still okay or a reset if the connection has been
aborted.  The reason for doing this is that it has the beneficial effect
of freeing up certain types of connection that can get stuck when the
remote host is disconnected without tidying up the TCP/IP call properly.
The keepalive mechanism takes several hours to detect unreachable hosts.

‘lmtp_ignore_quota’    Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   If this option is set true when the ‘protocol’ option is set to
"lmtp", the string ‘IGNOREQUOTA’ is added to RCPT commands, provided
that the LMTP server has advertised support for IGNOREQUOTA in its
response to the LHLO command.

‘max_rcpt’             Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _100_
                                         _integer_*__

   This option, after expansion, limits the number of RCPT commands that
are sent in a single SMTP message transaction.  A value setting of zero
disables the limit.

   If a constant is given, each set of addresses is treated
independently, and so can cause parallel connections to the same host if
‘remote_max_parallel’ permits this.

   If the peer advertises a LIMITS extension with a RCPTMAX value, and
either TLS is in use or was not advertised, that value also constrains
the result of this option and no parallel connections will be caused on
meeting the RCPTMAX limit.

‘message_linelength_limit’Use: _smtp_    Type: _integer_   Default: _998_

   This option sets the maximum line length, in bytes, that the
transport will send.  Any messages with lines exceeding the given value
(before a transport filter, if any) will fail and a failure-DSN
("bounce") message will if possible be returned to the sender.  The
default value is that defined by the SMTP standards.

   It is generally wise to also check in the data ACL so that messages
received via SMTP can be refused without producing a bounce.

‘multi_domain’         Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _true_
                                         _boolean_*__

   When this option is set, the ‘smtp’ transport can handle a number of
addresses containing a mixture of different domains provided they all
resolve to the same list of hosts.  Turning the option off restricts the
transport to handling only one domain at a time.  This is useful if you
want to use ‘$domain’ in an expansion for the transport, because it is
set only when there is a single domain involved in a remote delivery.

   It is expanded per-address and can depend on any of ‘$address_data’,
‘$domain_data’, ‘$local_part_data’, ‘$host’, ‘$host_address’ and
‘$host_port’.

   If the connection is DANE-enabled then this option is ignored; only
messages having the domain used for the DANE TLSA lookup are sent on the
connection.

   If the peer advertises a LIMITS extension with a RCPTDOMAINMAX value,
and either TLS is in use or was not advertised, this option is regarded
as being false.

‘port’                 Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This option specifies a TCP/IP port on the server to which Exim
connects.  *Note:* Do not confuse this with the port that was used when
a message was received, which is in ‘$received_port’, formerly known as
‘$interface_port’.  That variable name was changed to minimize confusion
with the outgoing port.

   The value given by this option can be overidden by one associated
with the host being connected to.  This could be as specified by a
‘hosts’ option, a ‘manualroute’ router or a SRV lookup done by a
‘dnslookup’ router.

   During delivery the ‘$host_port’ veriable will be set to the
destination port number used.

   If the value of this option begins with a digit it is taken as a port
number; otherwise it is looked up using ‘getservbyname()’.  The default
value is normally "25", but if ‘protocol’ is set to one of "lmtp",
"smtp", "smtps" or "submissions" then the default becomes that value.
If the expansion fails, or if a port number cannot be found, delivery is
deferred.

   *Note:* some Linux distributions have been seen failing to put
(variously) "smtps" or "submissions" in their "/etc/services" file,
resulting is such deferrals.

‘protocol’             Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If the option is not set (the default), or is set to "smtp", then the
transport operates using the SMTP protocol and the default for the
‘port’ option becomes "25".

   If this option is set to "lmtp", the default value for the ‘port’
option changes to "lmtp", and the transport operates the LMTP protocol
(*RFC 2033 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2033)*) instead of
SMTP. This protocol is sometimes used for local deliveries into closed
message stores.  Exim also has support for running LMTP over a pipe to a
local process - see chapter *note The lmtp transport::.

   *Note*: When using LMTP it should be considered whether the default
values for some other features, such as DANE, are appropriate.

   If this option is set to either "smtps" or "submissions", the default
value for the ‘port’ option changes to the same value, and the transport
initiates TLS immediately after connecting, as an outbound
SSL-on-connect, instead of using STARTTLS to upgrade.  The Internet
standards bodies used to strongly discourage use of this mode, but as of
*RFC 8314 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8314)* it is
preferred over STARTTLS for message submission (as distinct from MTA-MTA
communication).

   The option is expanded before use.  It is permissible for it to
depend on ‘$host_port’ or ‘$host’.  However, the defaults mentioned
above for the ‘port’ option will not depend on the value after expansion
(as that would be circular).  Only the values mentioned above are valid.

‘retry_include_ip_address’Use: _smtp_    Type:             Default: _true_
                                         _boolean_*__

   Exim normally includes both the host name and the IP address in the
key it constructs for indexing retry data after a temporary delivery
failure.  This means that when one of several IP addresses for a host is
failing, it gets tried periodically (controlled by the retry rules), but
use of the other IP addresses is not affected.

   However, in some dialup environments hosts are assigned a different
IP address each time they connect.  In this situation the use of the IP
address as part of the retry key leads to undesirable behaviour.
Setting this option false causes Exim to use only the host name.  Since
it is expanded it can be made to depend on the host or domain.

‘serialize_hosts’      Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   Because Exim operates in a distributed manner, if several messages
for the same host arrive at around the same time, more than one
simultaneous connection to the remote host can occur.  This is not
usually a problem except when there is a slow link between the hosts.
In that situation it may be helpful to restrict Exim to one connection
at a time.  This can be done by setting ‘serialize_hosts’ to match the
relevant hosts.

   Exim implements serialization by means of a hints database in which a
record is written whenever a process connects to one of the restricted
hosts.  The record is deleted when the connection is completed.
Obviously there is scope for records to get left lying around if there
is a system or program crash.  To guard against this, Exim ignores any
records that are more than six hours old.

   If you set up this kind of serialization, you should also arrange to
delete the relevant hints database whenever your system reboots.  The
names of the files start with ‘misc’ and they are kept in the ‘spool/db’
directory.  There may be one or two files, depending on the type of DBM
in use.  The same files are used for ETRN serialization.

   See also the ‘max_parallel’ generic transport option.

‘size_addition’        Use: _smtp_       Type: _integer_   Default: _1024_

   If a remote SMTP server indicates that it supports the SIZE option of
the MAIL command, Exim uses this to pass over the message size at the
start of an SMTP transaction.  It adds the value of ‘size_addition’ to
the value it sends, to allow for headers and other text that may be
added during delivery by configuration options or in a transport filter.
It may be necessary to increase this if a lot of text is added to
messages.

   Alternatively, if the value of ‘size_addition’ is set negative, it
disables the use of the SIZE option altogether.

‘socks_proxy’          Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option enables use of SOCKS proxies for connections made by the
transport.  For details see section *note Outbound proxies::.

‘tls_alpn’             Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set and the TLS library supports ALPN, the value
given is used.

   As of writing no value has been standardised for email use.  The
authors suggest using "smtp".

‘tls_certificate’      Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file which
contains the client's certificate, for possible use when sending a
message over an encrypted connection.  The values of ‘$host’ and
‘$host_address’ are set to the name and address of the server during the
expansion.  See chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL:
Encrypted SMTP connections. for details of TLS.

   *Note*: This option must be set if you want Exim to be able to use a
TLS certificate when sending messages as a client.  The global option of
the same name specifies the certificate for Exim as a server; it is not
automatically assumed that the same certificate should be used when Exim
is operating as a client.

   *Note*: For the peer to verify the certificate, the peer's TLS
library might require that the certificate includes a Client
Authentication extension.  It is up to the Certificate Authority that
constructs and signs the certificate whether that is included.

‘tls_crl’              Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies a certificate revocation list.  The expanded
value must be the name of a file that contains a CRL in PEM format.

‘tls_dh_min_bits’      Use: _smtp_       Type: _integer_   Default: _1024_

   When establishing a TLS session, if a ciphersuite which uses
Diffie-Hellman key agreement is negotiated, the server will provide a
large prime number for use.  This option establishes the minimum
acceptable size of that number.  If the parameter offered by the server
is too small, then the TLS handshake will fail.

   Only supported when using GnuTLS.

‘tls_eccurve’          Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   For OpenSSL versions 3.3 and later this option may be used to control
the encryption groups negotiated with the server.  If unset, or empty
after expansion, the library defaults are used.

   The string may be a full group tuple list as described in the
*documentation for SSL_CTX_set1_groups_list()
(https://docs.openssl.org/master/man3/SSL_CTX_set1_curves/#name)*.

   This option is ignored when using GnuTLS.

‘tls_privatekey’       Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The value of this option must be the absolute path to a file which
contains the client's private key.  This is used when sending a message
over an encrypted connection using a client certificate.  The values of
‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are set to the name and address of the
server during the expansion.  If this option is unset, or the expansion
is forced to fail, or the result is an empty string, the private key is
assumed to be in the same file as the certificate.  See chapter *note
Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.
for details of TLS.

‘tls_require_ciphers’  Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   The value of this option must be a list of permitted cipher suites,
for use when setting up an outgoing encrypted connection.  (There is a
global option of the same name for controlling incoming connections.)
The values of ‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are set to the name and
address of the server during the expansion.  See chapter *note Encrypted
SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections. for details
of TLS; note that this option is used in different ways by OpenSSL and
GnuTLS (see sections *note Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL:: and
*note Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS::).  For
GnuTLS, the order of the ciphers is a preference order.

‘tls_resumption_hosts’ Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option controls which connections to use the TLS resumption
feature.  See *note TLS Resumption:: for details.

‘tls_sni’              Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set and the connection is not DANE-validated then
it sets the $tls_out_sni variable and causes any TLS session to pass
this value as the Server Name Indication extension to the remote side,
which can be used by the remote side to select an appropriate
certificate and private key for the session.

   See *note Use of TLS Server Name Indication:: for more information.

   Note that for OpenSSL, this feature requires a build of OpenSSL that
supports TLS extensions.

‘tls_tempfail_tryclear’Use: _smtp_       Type: _boolean_   Default: _true_

   When the server host is not in ‘hosts_require_tls’, and there is a
problem in setting up a TLS session, this option determines whether or
not Exim should try to deliver the message unencrypted.  If it is set
false, delivery to the current host is deferred; if there are other
hosts, they are tried.  If this option is set true, Exim attempts to
deliver unencrypted after a 4_xx_ response to STARTTLS. Also, if
STARTTLS is accepted, but the subsequent TLS negotiation fails, Exim
closes the current connection (because it is in an unknown state), opens
a new one to the same host, and then tries the delivery in clear.

‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option gives a list of hosts for which, on encrypted
connections, certificate verification will be tried but need not
succeed.  The ‘tls_verify_certificates’ option must also be set.  Note
that unless the host is in this list TLS connections will be denied to
hosts using self-signed certificates when ‘tls_verify_certificates’ is
matched.  The ‘$tls_out_certificate_verified’ variable is set when
certificate verification succeeds.

‘tls_verify_cert_hostnames’Use: _smtp_   Type: _host       Default: _*_
                                         list_*__

   This option give a list of hosts for which, while verifying the
server certificate, checks will be included on the host name (note that
this will generally be the result of a DNS MX lookup) versus the
Subject-Alternate-Name (or, if none, Subject-Name) fields.  Wildcard
names are permitted, limited to being the initial component of a
3-or-more component FQDN.

   There is no equivalent checking on client certificates.

‘tls_verify_certificates’Use: _smtp_     Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _system_

   The value of this option must be either the word "system" or the
absolute path to a file or directory containing permitted certificates
for servers, for use when setting up an encrypted connection.

   The "system" value for the option will use a location compiled into
the SSL library.  This is not available for GnuTLS versions preceding
3.0.20; a value of "system" is taken as empty and an explicit location
must be specified.

   The use of a directory for the option value is not available for
GnuTLS versions preceding 3.3.6 and a single file must be used.

   With OpenSSL the certificates specified explicitly either by file or
directory are added to those given by the system default location.

   The values of ‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are set to the name and
address of the server during the expansion of this option.  See chapter
*note Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP
connections. for details of TLS.

   For back-compatibility, if neither tls_verify_hosts nor
tls_try_verify_hosts are set (a single-colon empty list counts as being
set) and certificate verification fails the TLS connection is closed.

‘tls_verify_hosts’     Use: _smtp_       Type: _host       Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This option gives a list of hosts for which, on encrypted
connections, certificate verification must succeed.  The
‘tls_verify_certificates’ option must also be set.  If both this option
and ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ are unset operation is as if this option
selected all hosts.  *Warning*: Including a host in ‘tls_verify_hosts’
does not require that connections use TLS. Fallback to in-clear
communication will be done unless restricted by the ‘hosts_require_tls’
option.

‘utf8_downconvert’     Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _-1_
                                         _integer_*__

   If built with internationalization support, this option controls
conversion of UTF-8 in message envelope addresses to a-label form.  If,
after expansion, the value is 1, 0, or -1 then this value overrides any
value previously set for the message.  Otherwise, any previously set
value is used.  To permit use of a previous value, set this option to an
empty string.  For details on the values see section *note MTA
operations::.


File: spec.info,  Node: How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used,  Prev: Private options for smtp,  Up: The smtp transport

30.5 How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used
===========================================================

There are two options that are concerned with the number of hosts that
are tried when an SMTP delivery takes place.  They are ‘hosts_max_try’
and ‘hosts_max_try_hardlimit’.

   The ‘hosts_max_try’ option limits the number of hosts that are tried
for a single delivery.  However, despite the term "host" in its name,
the option actually applies to each IP address independently.  In other
words, a multihomed host is treated as several independent hosts, just
as it is for retrying.

   Many of the larger ISPs have multiple MX records which often point to
multihomed hosts.  As a result, a list of a dozen or more IP addresses
may be created as a result of routing one of these domains.

   Trying every single IP address on such a long list does not seem
sensible; if several at the top of the list fail, it is reasonable to
assume there is some problem that is likely to affect all of them.
Roughly speaking, the value of ‘hosts_max_try’ is the maximum number
that are tried before deferring the delivery.  However, the logic cannot
be quite that simple.

   Firstly, IP addresses that are skipped because their retry times have
not arrived do not count, and in addition, addresses that are past their
retry limits are also not counted, even when they are tried.  This means
that when some IP addresses are past their retry limits, more than the
value of ‘hosts_max_retry’ may be tried.  The reason for this behaviour
is to ensure that all IP addresses are considered before timing out an
email address (but see below for an exception).

   Secondly, when the ‘hosts_max_try’ limit is reached, Exim looks down
the host list to see if there is a subsequent host with a different
(higher valued) MX. If there is, that host is considered next, and the
current IP address is used but not counted.  This behaviour helps in the
case of a domain with a retry rule that hardly ever delays any hosts, as
is now explained:

   Consider the case of a long list of hosts with one MX value, and a
few with a higher MX value.  If ‘hosts_max_try’ is small (the default is
5) only a few hosts at the top of the list are tried at first.  With the
default retry rule, which specifies increasing retry times, the higher
MX hosts are eventually tried when those at the top of the list are
skipped because they have not reached their retry times.

   However, it is common practice to put a fixed short retry time on
domains for large ISPs, on the grounds that their servers are rarely
down for very long.  Unfortunately, these are exactly the domains that
tend to resolve to long lists of hosts.  The short retry time means that
the lowest MX hosts are tried every time.  The attempts may be in a
different order because of random sorting, but without the special MX
check, the higher MX hosts would never be tried until all the lower MX
hosts had timed out (which might be several days), because there are
always some lower MX hosts that have reached their retry times.  With
the special check, Exim considers at least one IP address from each MX
value at every delivery attempt, even if the ‘hosts_max_try’ limit has
already been reached.

   The above logic means that ‘hosts_max_try’ is not a hard limit, and
in particular, Exim normally eventually tries all the IP addresses
before timing out an email address.  When ‘hosts_max_try’ was
implemented, this seemed a reasonable thing to do.  Recently, however,
some lunatic DNS configurations have been set up with hundreds of IP
addresses for some domains.  It can take a very long time indeed for an
address to time out in these cases.

   The ‘hosts_max_try_hardlimit’ option was added to help with this
problem.  Exim never tries more than this number of IP addresses; if it
hits this limit and they are all timed out, the email address is
bounced, even though not all possible IP addresses have been tried.


File: spec.info,  Node: Address rewriting,  Next: Retry configuration,  Prev: The smtp transport,  Up: Top

31 Address rewriting
********************

There are some circumstances in which Exim automatically rewrites
domains in addresses.  The two most common are when an address is given
without a domain (referred to as an "unqualified address") or when an
address contains an abbreviated domain that is expanded by DNS lookup.

   Unqualified envelope addresses are accepted only for locally
submitted messages, or for messages that are received from hosts
matching ‘sender_unqualified_hosts’ or ‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’, as
appropriate.  Unqualified addresses in header lines are qualified if
they are in locally submitted messages, or messages from hosts that are
permitted to send unqualified envelope addresses.  Otherwise,
unqualified addresses in header lines are neither qualified nor
rewritten.

   One situation in which Exim does _not_ automatically rewrite a domain
is when it is the name of a CNAME record in the DNS. The older RFCs
suggest that such a domain should be rewritten using the "canonical"
name, and some MTAs do this.  The new RFCs do not contain this
suggestion.

* Menu:

* Explicitly configured address rewriting::
* When does rewriting happen?::
* Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input::
* Rewriting rules::
* Rewriting patterns::
* Rewriting replacements::
* Rewriting examples::


File: spec.info,  Node: Explicitly configured address rewriting,  Next: When does rewriting happen?,  Up: Address rewriting

31.1 Explicitly configured address rewriting
============================================

This chapter describes the rewriting rules that can be used in the main
rewrite section of the configuration file, and also in the generic
‘headers_rewrite’ option that can be set on any transport.

   Some people believe that configured address rewriting is a Mortal
Sin.  Others believe that life is not possible without it.  Exim
provides the facility; you do not have to use it.

   The main rewriting rules that appear in the "rewrite" section of the
configuration file are applied to addresses in incoming messages, both
envelope addresses and addresses in header lines.  Each rule specifies
the types of address to which it applies.

   Whether or not addresses in header lines are rewritten depends on the
origin of the headers and the type of rewriting.  Global rewriting, that
is, rewriting rules from the rewrite section of the configuration file,
is applied only to those headers that were received with the message.
Header lines that are added by ACLs or by a system filter or by
individual routers or transports (which are specific to individual
recipient addresses) are not rewritten by the global rules.

   Rewriting at transport time, by means of the ‘headers_rewrite’
option, applies all headers except those added by routers and
transports.  That is, as well as the headers that were received with the
message, it also applies to headers that were added by an ACL or a
system filter.

   In general, rewriting addresses from your own system or domain has
some legitimacy.  Rewriting other addresses should be done only with
great care and in special circumstances.  The author of Exim believes
that rewriting should be used sparingly, and mainly for "regularizing"
addresses in your own domains.  Although it can sometimes be used as a
routing tool, this is very strongly discouraged.

   There are two commonly encountered circumstances where rewriting is
used, as illustrated by these examples:

   • The company whose domain is _hitch.fict.example_ has a number of
     hosts that exchange mail with each other behind a firewall, but
     there is only a single gateway to the outer world.  The gateway
     rewrites _*.hitch.fict.example_ as _hitch.fict.example_ when
     sending mail off-site.

   • A host rewrites the local parts of its own users so that, for
     example, _fp42@hitch.fict.example_ becomes
     _Ford.Prefect@hitch.fict.example_.


File: spec.info,  Node: When does rewriting happen?,  Next: Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input,  Prev: Explicitly configured address rewriting,  Up: Address rewriting

31.2 When does rewriting happen?
================================

Configured address rewriting can take place at several different stages
of a message's processing.

   At the start of an ACL for MAIL, the sender address may have been
rewritten by a special SMTP-time rewrite rule (see section *note The
SMTP-time rewriting flag::), but no ordinary rewrite rules have yet been
applied.  If, however, the sender address is verified in the ACL, it is
rewritten before verification, and remains rewritten thereafter.  The
subsequent value of ‘$sender_address’ is the rewritten address.  This
also applies if sender verification happens in a RCPT ACL. Otherwise,
when the sender address is not verified, it is rewritten as soon as a
message's header lines have been received.

   Similarly, at the start of an ACL for RCPT, the current recipient's
address may have been rewritten by a special SMTP-time rewrite rule, but
no ordinary rewrite rules have yet been applied to it.  However, the
behaviour is different from the sender address when a recipient is
verified.  The address is rewritten for the verification, but the
rewriting is not remembered at this stage.  The value of ‘$local_part’
and ‘$domain’ after verification are always the same as they were before
(that is, they contain the unrewritten - except for SMTP-time rewriting
- address).

   As soon as a message's header lines have been received, all the
envelope recipient addresses are permanently rewritten, and rewriting is
also applied to the addresses in the header lines (if configured).  This
happens before adding any header lines that were specified in MAIL or
RCPT ACLs, and before the DATA ACL and ‘local_scan()’ functions are run.

   When an address is being routed, either for delivery or for
verification, rewriting is applied immediately to child addresses that
are generated by redirection, unless ‘no_rewrite’ is set on the router.

   At transport time, additional rewriting of addresses in header lines
can be specified by setting the generic ‘headers_rewrite’ option on a
transport.  This option contains rules that are identical in form to
those in the rewrite section of the configuration file.  They are
applied to the original message header lines and any that were added by
ACLs or a system filter.  They are not applied to header lines that are
added by routers or the transport.

   The outgoing envelope sender can be rewritten by means of the
‘return_path’ transport option.  However, it is not possible to rewrite
envelope recipients at transport time.


File: spec.info,  Node: Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input,  Next: Rewriting rules,  Prev: When does rewriting happen?,  Up: Address rewriting

31.3 Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input
====================================================

Exim's input rewriting configuration appears in a part of the runtime
configuration file headed by "begin rewrite".  It can be tested by the
‘-brw’ command line option.  This takes an address (which can be a full
*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address) as
its argument.  The output is a list of how the address would be
transformed by the rewriting rules for each of the different places it
might appear in an incoming message, that is, for each different header
and for the envelope sender and recipient fields.  For example,

     exim -brw ph10@exim.workshop.example

   might produce the output

     sender: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
     from: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
     to: ph10@exim.workshop.example
     cc: ph10@exim.workshop.example
     bcc: ph10@exim.workshop.example
     reply-to: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
     env-from: Philip.Hazel@exim.workshop.example
     env-to: ph10@exim.workshop.example

   which shows that rewriting has been set up for that address when used
in any of the source fields, but not when it appears as a recipient
address.  At the present time, there is no equivalent way of testing
rewriting rules that are set for a particular transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting rules,  Next: Rewriting patterns,  Prev: Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input,  Up: Address rewriting

31.4 Rewriting rules
====================

The rewrite section of the configuration file consists of lines of
rewriting rules in the form

     <source pattern>  <replacement>  <flags>

   Rewriting rules that are specified for the ‘headers_rewrite’ generic
transport option are given as a colon-separated list.  Each item in the
list takes the same form as a line in the main rewriting configuration
(except that any colons must be doubled, of course).

   The formats of source patterns and replacement strings are described
below.  Each is terminated by white space, unless enclosed in double
quotes, in which case normal quoting conventions apply inside the
quotes.  The flags are single characters which may appear in any order.
Spaces and tabs between them are ignored.

   For each address that could potentially be rewritten, the rules are
scanned in order, and replacements for the address from earlier rules
can themselves be replaced by later rules (but see the "q" and "R"
flags).

   The order in which addresses are rewritten is undefined, may change
between releases, and must not be relied on, with one exception: when a
message is received, the envelope sender is always rewritten first,
before any header lines are rewritten.  For example, the replacement
string for a rewrite of an address in _To:_ must not assume that the
message's address in _From:_ has (or has not) already been rewritten.
However, a rewrite of _From:_ may assume that the envelope sender has
already been rewritten.

   The variables ‘$local_part’ and ‘$domain’ can be used in the
replacement string to refer to the address that is being rewritten.
Note that lookup-driven rewriting can be done by a rule of the form

     *@*   ${lookup ...

   where the lookup key uses ‘$1’ and ‘$2’ or ‘$local_part’ and
‘$domain’ to refer to the address that is being rewritten.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting patterns,  Next: Rewriting replacements,  Prev: Rewriting rules,  Up: Address rewriting

31.5 Rewriting patterns
=======================

The source pattern in a rewriting rule is any item which may appear in
an address list (see section *note Address lists::).  It is in fact
processed as a single-item address list, which means that it is expanded
before being tested against the address.  As always, if you use a
regular expression as a pattern, you must take care to escape dollar and
backslash characters, or use the ‘\N’ facility to suppress string
expansion within the regular expression.

   Domains in patterns should be given in lower case.  Local parts in
patterns are case-sensitive.  If you want to do case-insensitive
matching of local parts, you can use a regular expression that starts
with ‘^(?i)’.

   After matching, the numerical variables ‘$1’, ‘$2’, etc.  may be set,
depending on the type of match which occurred.  These can be used in the
replacement string to insert portions of the incoming address.  ‘$0’
always refers to the complete incoming address.  When a regular
expression is used, the numerical variables are set from its capturing
subexpressions.  For other types of pattern they are set as follows:

   • If a local part or domain starts with an asterisk, the numerical
     variables refer to the character strings matched by asterisks, with
     ‘$1’ associated with the first asterisk, and ‘$2’ with the second,
     if present.  For example, if the pattern

          *queen@*.fict.example

     is matched against the address
     _hearts-queen@wonderland.fict.example_ then

          $0 = hearts-queen@wonderland.fict.example
          $1 = hearts-
          $2 = wonderland

     Note that if the local part does not start with an asterisk, but
     the domain does, it is ‘$1’ that contains the wild part of the
     domain.

   • If the domain part of the pattern is a partial lookup, the wild and
     fixed parts of the domain are placed in the next available
     numerical variables.  Suppose, for example, that the address
     _foo@bar.baz.example_ is processed by a rewriting rule of the form

          *@partial-dbm;/some/dbm/file    <replacement string>

     and the key in the file that matches the domain is ‘*.baz.example’.
     Then

          $1 = foo
          $2 = bar
          $3 = baz.example

     If the address _foo@baz.example_ is looked up, this matches the
     same wildcard file entry, and in this case ‘$2’ is set to the empty
     string, but ‘$3’ is still set to _baz.example_.  If a non-wild key
     is matched in a partial lookup, ‘$2’ is again set to the empty
     string and ‘$3’ is set to the whole domain.  For non-partial domain
     lookups, no numerical variables are set.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting replacements,  Next: Rewriting examples,  Prev: Rewriting patterns,  Up: Address rewriting

31.6 Rewriting replacements
===========================

If the replacement string for a rule is a single asterisk, addresses
that match the pattern and the flags are _not_ rewritten, and no
subsequent rewriting rules are scanned.  For example,

     hatta@lookingglass.fict.example  *  f

   specifies that _hatta@lookingglass.fict.example_ is never to be
rewritten in _From:_ headers.

   If the replacement string is not a single asterisk, it is expanded,
and must yield a fully qualified address.  Within the expansion, the
variables ‘$local_part’ and ‘$domain’ refer to the address that is being
rewritten.  Any letters they contain retain their original case - they
are not lower cased.  The numerical variables are set up according to
the type of pattern that matched the address, as described above.  If
the expansion is forced to fail by the presence of "fail" in a
conditional or lookup item, rewriting by the current rule is abandoned,
but subsequent rules may take effect.  Any other expansion failure
causes the entire rewriting operation to be abandoned, and an entry
written to the panic log.

* Menu:

* Rewriting flags::
* Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite::
* The SMTP-time rewriting flag::
* Flags controlling the rewriting process::


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting flags,  Next: Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite,  Up: Rewriting replacements

31.6.1 Rewriting flags
----------------------

There are three different kinds of flag that may appear on rewriting
rules:

   • Flags that specify which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite:
     E, F, T, b, c, f, h, r, s, t.

   • A flag that specifies rewriting at SMTP time: S.

   • Flags that control the rewriting process: Q, q, R, w.

   For rules that are part of the ‘headers_rewrite’ generic transport
option, E, F, T, and S are not permitted.


File: spec.info,  Node: Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite,  Next: The SMTP-time rewriting flag,  Prev: Rewriting flags,  Up: Rewriting replacements

31.6.2 Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

If none of the following flag letters, nor the "S" flag (see section
*note The SMTP-time rewriting flag::) are present, a main rewriting rule
applies to all headers and to both the sender and recipient fields of
the envelope, whereas a transport-time rewriting rule just applies to
all headers.  Otherwise, the rewriting rule is skipped unless the
relevant addresses are being processed.

     E       rewrite all envelope fields
     F       rewrite the envelope From field
     T       rewrite the envelope To field
     b       rewrite the Bcc: header
     c       rewrite the Cc: header
     f       rewrite the From: header
     h       rewrite all headers
     r       rewrite the Reply-To: header
     s       rewrite the Sender: header
     t       rewrite the To: header

   "All headers" means all of the headers listed above that can be
selected individually, plus their _Resent-_ versions.  It does not
include other headers such as _Subject:_ etc.

   You should be particularly careful about rewriting _Sender:_ headers,
and restrict this to special known cases in your own domains.


File: spec.info,  Node: The SMTP-time rewriting flag,  Next: Flags controlling the rewriting process,  Prev: Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite,  Up: Rewriting replacements

31.6.3 The SMTP-time rewriting flag
-----------------------------------

The rewrite flag "S" specifies a rewrite of incoming envelope addresses
at SMTP time, as soon as an address is received in a MAIL or RCPT
command, and before any other processing; even before syntax checking.
The pattern is required to be a regular expression, and it is matched
against the whole of the data for the command, including any surrounding
angle brackets.

   This form of rewrite rule allows for the handling of addresses that
are not compliant with RFCs *2821
(https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2821)* and *2822
(https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2822)* (for example, "bang paths" in
batched SMTP input).  Because the input is not required to be a
syntactically valid address, the variables ‘$local_part’ and ‘$domain’
are not available during the expansion of the replacement string.  The
result of rewriting replaces the original address in the MAIL or RCPT
command.


File: spec.info,  Node: Flags controlling the rewriting process,  Prev: The SMTP-time rewriting flag,  Up: Rewriting replacements

31.6.4 Flags controlling the rewriting process
----------------------------------------------

There are four flags which control the way the rewriting process works.
These take effect only when a rule is invoked, that is, when the address
is of the correct type (matches the flags) and matches the pattern:

   • If the "Q" flag is set on a rule, the rewritten address is
     permitted to be an unqualified local part.  It is qualified with
     ‘qualify_recipient’.  In the absence of "Q" the rewritten address
     must always include a domain.

   • If the "q" flag is set on a rule, no further rewriting rules are
     considered, even if no rewriting actually takes place because of a
     "fail" in the expansion.  The "q" flag is not effective if the
     address is of the wrong type (does not match the flags) or does not
     match the pattern.

   • The "R" flag causes a successful rewriting rule to be re-applied to
     the new address, up to ten times.  It can be combined with the "q"
     flag, to stop rewriting once it fails to match (after at least one
     successful rewrite).

   • When an address in a header is rewritten, the rewriting normally
     applies only to the working part of the address, with any comments
     and *RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)*
     "phrase" left unchanged.  For example, rewriting might change

          From: Ford Prefect <fp42@restaurant.hitch.fict.example>

     into

          From: Ford Prefect <prefectf@hitch.fict.example>

     Sometimes there is a need to replace the whole address item, and
     this can be done by adding the flag letter "w" to a rule.  If this
     is set on a rule that causes an address in a header line to be
     rewritten, the entire address is replaced, not just the working
     part.  The replacement must be a complete *RFC 2822
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address, including
     the angle brackets if necessary.  If text outside angle brackets
     contains a character whose value is greater than 126 or less than
     32 (except for tab), the text is encoded according to *RFC 2047
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)*.  The character
     set is taken from ‘headers_charset’, which gets its default at
     build time.

     When the "w" flag is set on a rule that causes an envelope address
     to be rewritten, all but the working part of the replacement
     address is discarded.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting examples,  Prev: Rewriting replacements,  Up: Address rewriting

31.7 Rewriting examples
=======================

Here is an example of the two common rewriting paradigms:

     *@*.hitch.fict.example  $1@hitch.fict.example
     *@hitch.fict.example    ${lookup{$1}dbm{/etc/realnames}\
                          {$value}fail}@hitch.fict.example bctfrF

   Note the use of "fail" in the lookup expansion in the second rule,
forcing the string expansion to fail if the lookup does not succeed.  In
this context it has the effect of leaving the original address
unchanged, but Exim goes on to consider subsequent rewriting rules, if
any, because the "q" flag is not present in that rule.  An alternative
to "fail" would be to supply ‘$1’ explicitly, which would cause the
rewritten address to be the same as before, at the cost of a small bit
of processing.  Not supplying either of these is an error, since the
rewritten address would then contain no local part.

   The first example above replaces the domain with a superior, more
general domain.  This may not be desirable for certain local parts.  If
the rule

     root@*.hitch.fict.example  *

   were inserted before the first rule, rewriting would be suppressed
for the local part _root_ at any domain ending in _hitch.fict.example_.

   Rewriting can be made conditional on a number of tests, by making use
of ‘${if’ in the expansion item.  For example, to apply a rewriting rule
only to messages that originate outside the local host:

     *@*.hitch.fict.example  "${if !eq {$sender_host_address}{}\
                              {$1@hitch.fict.example}fail}"

   The replacement string is quoted in this example because it contains
white space.

   Exim does not handle addresses in the form of "bang paths".  If it
sees such an address it treats it as an unqualified local part which it
qualifies with the local qualification domain (if the source of the
message is local or if the remote host is permitted to send unqualified
addresses).  Rewriting can sometimes be used to handle simple bang paths
with a fixed number of components.  For example, the rule

     \N^([^!]+)!(.*)@your.domain.example$\N   $2@$1

   rewrites a two-component bang path _host.name!user_ as the domain
address _user@host.name_.  However, there is a security implication in
using this as a global rewriting rule for envelope addresses.  It can
provide a backdoor method for using your system as a relay, because the
incoming addresses appear to be local.  If the bang path addresses are
received via SMTP, it is safer to use the "S" flag to rewrite them as
they are received, so that relay checking can be done on the rewritten
addresses.


File: spec.info,  Node: Retry configuration,  Next: SMTP authentication,  Prev: Address rewriting,  Up: Top

32 Retry configuration
**********************

The "retry" section of the runtime configuration file contains a list of
retry rules that control how often Exim tries to deliver messages that
cannot be delivered at the first attempt.  If there are no retry rules
(the section is empty or not present), there are no retries.  In this
situation, temporary errors are treated as permanent.  The default
configuration contains a single, general-purpose retry rule (see section
*note Default retry rule::).  The ‘-brt’ command line option can be used
to test which retry rule will be used for a given address, domain and
error.

   The most common cause of retries is temporary failure to deliver to a
remote host because the host is down, or inaccessible because of a
network problem.  Exim's retry processing in this case is applied on a
per-host (strictly, per IP address) basis, not on a per-message basis.
Thus, if one message has recently been delayed, delivery of a new
message to the same host is not immediately tried, but waits for the
host's retry time to arrive.  If the ‘retry_defer’ log selector is set,
the message "retry time not reached" is written to the main log whenever
a delivery is skipped for this reason.  Section *note Errors in outgoing
SMTP:: contains more details of the handling of errors during remote
deliveries.

   Retry processing applies to routing as well as to delivering, except
as covered in the next paragraph.  The retry rules do not distinguish
between these actions.  It is not possible, for example, to specify
different behaviour for failures to route the domain
_snark.fict.example_ and failures to deliver to the host
_snark.fict.example_.  I didn't think anyone would ever need this added
complication, so did not implement it.  However, although they share the
same retry rule, the actual retry times for routing and transporting a
given domain are maintained independently.

   When a delivery is not part of a queue run (typically an immediate
delivery on receipt of a message), the routers are always run, and local
deliveries are always attempted, even if retry times are set for them.
This makes for better behaviour if one particular message is causing
problems (for example, causing quota overflow, or provoking an error in
a filter file).  If such a delivery suffers a temporary failure, the
retry data is updated as normal, and subsequent delivery attempts from
queue runs occur only when the retry time for the local address is
reached.

* Menu:

* Changing retry rules::
* Format of retry rules::
* Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors::
* Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors::
* Retry rules for specific errors::
* Retry rules for specified senders::
* Retry parameters::
* Retry rule examples::
* Timeout of retry data::
* Long-term failures::
* Deliveries that work intermittently::


File: spec.info,  Node: Changing retry rules,  Next: Format of retry rules,  Up: Retry configuration

32.1 Changing retry rules
=========================

If you change the retry rules in your configuration, you should consider
whether or not to delete the retry data that is stored in Exim's spool
area in files with names like ‘db/retry’.  Deleting any of Exim's hints
files is always safe; that is why they are called "hints".

   The hints retry data contains suggested retry times based on the
previous rules.  In the case of a long-running problem with a remote
host, it might record the fact that the host has timed out.  If your new
rules increase the timeout time for such a host, you should definitely
remove the old retry data and let Exim recreate it, based on the new
rules.  Otherwise Exim might bounce messages that it should now be
retaining.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of retry rules,  Next: Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors,  Prev: Changing retry rules,  Up: Retry configuration

32.2 Format of retry rules
==========================

Each retry rule occupies one line and consists of three or four parts,
separated by white space: a pattern, an error name, an optional list of
sender addresses, and a list of retry parameters.  The pattern and
sender lists must be enclosed in double quotes if they contain white
space.  The rules are searched in order until one is found where the
pattern, error name, and sender list (if present) match the failing host
or address, the error that occurred, and the message's sender,
respectively.

   The pattern is any single item that may appear in an address list
(see section *note Address lists::).  It is in fact processed as a
one-item address list, which means that it is expanded before being
tested against the address that has been delayed.  A negated address
list item is permitted.  Address list processing treats a plain domain
name as if it were preceded by "*@", which makes it possible for many
retry rules to start with just a domain.  For example,

     lookingglass.fict.example        *  F,24h,30m;

   provides a rule for any address in the _lookingglass.fict.example_
domain, whereas

     alice@lookingglass.fict.example  *  F,24h,30m;

   applies only to temporary failures involving the local part ‘alice’.
In practice, almost all rules start with a domain name pattern without a
local part.

   *Warning*: If you use a regular expression in a retry rule pattern,
it must match a complete address, not just a domain, because that is how
regular expressions work in address lists.

     ^\Nxyz\d+\.abc\.example$\N        *  G,1h,10m,2     Wrong
     ^\N[^@]+@xyz\d+\.abc\.example$\N  *  G,1h,10m,2     Right


File: spec.info,  Node: Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors,  Next: Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors,  Prev: Format of retry rules,  Up: Retry configuration

32.3 Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors
========================================================

When Exim is looking for a retry rule after a routing attempt has failed
(for example, after a DNS timeout), each line in the retry configuration
is tested against the complete address only if ‘retry_use_local_part’ is
set for the router.  Otherwise, only the domain is used, except when
matching against a regular expression, when the local part of the
address is replaced with "*".  A domain on its own can match a domain
pattern, or a pattern that starts with "*@".  By default,
‘retry_use_local_part’ is true for routers where ‘check_local_user’ is
true, and false for other routers.

   Similarly, when Exim is looking for a retry rule after a local
delivery has failed (for example, after a mailbox full error), each line
in the retry configuration is tested against the complete address only
if ‘retry_use_local_part’ is set for the transport (it defaults true for
all local transports).

   However, when Exim is looking for a retry rule after a remote
delivery attempt suffers an address error (a 4_xx_ SMTP response for a
recipient address), the whole address is always used as the key when
searching the retry rules.  The rule that is found is used to create a
retry time for the combination of the failing address and the message's
sender.  It is the combination of sender and recipient that is delayed
in subsequent queue runs until its retry time is reached.  You can delay
the recipient without regard to the sender by setting
‘address_retry_include_sender’ false in the ‘smtp’ transport but this
can lead to problems with servers that regularly issue 4_xx_ responses
to RCPT commands.


File: spec.info,  Node: Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors,  Next: Retry rules for specific errors,  Prev: Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors,  Up: Retry configuration

32.4 Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors
=================================================================

For a temporary error that is not related to an individual address (for
example, a connection timeout), each line in the retry configuration is
checked twice.  First, the name of the remote host is used as a domain
name (preceded by "*@" when matching a regular expression).  If this
does not match the line, the domain from the email address is tried in a
similar fashion.  For example, suppose the MX records for
_a.b.c.example_ are

     a.b.c.example  MX  5  x.y.z.example
                    MX  6  p.q.r.example
                    MX  7  m.n.o.example

   and the retry rules are

     p.q.r.example    *      F,24h,30m;
     a.b.c.example    *      F,4d,45m;

   and a delivery to the host _x.y.z.example_ suffers a connection
failure.  The first rule matches neither the host nor the domain, so
Exim looks at the second rule.  This does not match the host, but it
does match the domain, so it is used to calculate the retry time for the
host _x.y.z.example_.  Meanwhile, Exim tries to deliver to
_p.q.r.example_.  If this also suffers a host error, the first retry
rule is used, because it matches the host.

   In other words, temporary failures to deliver to host _p.q.r.example_
use the first rule to determine retry times, but for all the other hosts
for the domain _a.b.c.example_, the second rule is used.  The second
rule is also used if routing to _a.b.c.example_ suffers a temporary
failure.

   *Note*: The host name is used when matching the patterns, not its IP
address.  However, if a message is routed directly to an IP address
without the use of a host name, for example, if a ‘manualroute’ router
contains a setting such as:

     route_list = *.a.example  192.168.34.23

   then the "host name" that is used when searching for a retry rule is
the textual form of the IP address.


File: spec.info,  Node: Retry rules for specific errors,  Next: Retry rules for specified senders,  Prev: Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors,  Up: Retry configuration

32.5 Retry rules for specific errors
====================================

The second field in a retry rule is the name of a particular error, or
an asterisk, which matches any error.  The errors that can be tested for
are:

‘auth_failed’
     Authentication failed when trying to send to a host in the
     ‘hosts_require_auth’ list in an ‘smtp’ transport.

‘data_4xx’
     A 4_xx_ error was received for an outgoing DATA command, either
     immediately after the command, or after sending the message's data.

‘mail_4xx’
     A 4_xx_ error was received for an outgoing MAIL command.

‘rcpt_4xx’
     A 4_xx_ error was received for an outgoing RCPT command.

   For the three 4_xx_ errors, either the first or both of the x's can
be given as specific digits, for example: ‘mail_45x’ or ‘rcpt_436’.  For
example, to recognize 452 errors given to RCPT commands for addresses in
a certain domain, and have retries every ten minutes with a one-hour
timeout, you could set up a retry rule of this form:

     the.domain.name  rcpt_452   F,1h,10m

   These errors apply to both outgoing SMTP (the ‘smtp’ transport) and
outgoing LMTP (either the ‘lmtp’ transport, or the ‘smtp’ transport in
LMTP mode).

‘lost_connection’
     A server unexpectedly closed the SMTP connection.  There may, of
     course, legitimate reasons for this (host died, network died), but
     if it repeats a lot for the same host, it indicates something odd.

‘lookup’
     A DNS lookup for a host failed.  Note that a ‘dnslookup’ router
     will need to have matched its ‘fail_defer_domains’ option for this
     retry type to be usable.  Also note that a ‘manualroute’ router
     will probably need its ‘host_find_failed’ option set to ‘defer’.

‘refused_MX’
     A connection to a host obtained from an MX record was refused.

‘refused_A’
     A connection to a host not obtained from an MX record was refused.

‘refused’
     A connection was refused.

‘timeout_connect_MX’
     A connection attempt to a host obtained from an MX record timed
     out.

‘timeout_connect_A’
     A connection attempt to a host not obtained from an MX record timed
     out.

‘timeout_connect’
     A connection attempt timed out.

‘timeout_MX’
     There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session with
     a host obtained from an MX record.

‘timeout_A’
     There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session with
     a host not obtained from an MX record.

‘timeout’
     There was a timeout while connecting or during an SMTP session.

‘tls_required’
     The server was required to use TLS (it matched ‘hosts_require_tls’
     in the ‘smtp’ transport), but either did not offer TLS, or it
     responded with 4_xx_ to STARTTLS, or there was a problem setting up
     the TLS connection.

‘quota’
     A mailbox quota was exceeded in a local delivery by the
     ‘appendfile’ transport.

‘quota_’<_time_>
     A mailbox quota was exceeded in a local delivery by the
     ‘appendfile’ transport, and the mailbox has not been accessed for
     <_time_>.  For example, _quota_4d_ applies to a quota error when
     the mailbox has not been accessed for four days.

   The idea of ‘quota_’<_time_> is to make it possible to have shorter
timeouts when the mailbox is full and is not being read by its owner.
Ideally, it should be based on the last time that the user accessed the
mailbox.  However, it is not always possible to determine this.  Exim
uses the following heuristic rules:

   • If the mailbox is a single file, the time of last access (the
     "atime") is used.  As no new messages are being delivered (because
     the mailbox is over quota), Exim does not access the file, so this
     is the time of last user access.

   • For a maildir delivery, the time of last modification of the ‘new’
     subdirectory is used.  As the mailbox is over quota, no new files
     are created in the ‘new’ subdirectory, because no new messages are
     being delivered.  Any change to the ‘new’ subdirectory is therefore
     assumed to be the result of an MUA moving a new message to the
     ‘cur’ directory when it is first read.  The time that is used is
     therefore the last time that the user read a new message.

   • For other kinds of multi-file mailbox, the time of last access
     cannot be obtained, so a retry rule that uses this type of error
     field is never matched.

   The quota errors apply both to system-enforced quotas and to Exim's
own quota mechanism in the ‘appendfile’ transport.  The _quota_ error
also applies when a local delivery is deferred because a partition is
full (the ENOSPC error).


File: spec.info,  Node: Retry rules for specified senders,  Next: Retry parameters,  Prev: Retry rules for specific errors,  Up: Retry configuration

32.6 Retry rules for specified senders
======================================

You can specify retry rules that apply only when the failing message has
a specific sender.  In particular, this can be used to define retry
rules that apply only to bounce messages.  The third item in a retry
rule can be of this form:

     senders=<address list>

   The retry timings themselves are then the fourth item.  For example:

     *   rcpt_4xx   senders=:   F,1h,30m

   matches recipient 4_xx_ errors for bounce messages sent to any
address at any host.  If the address list contains white space, it must
be enclosed in quotes.  For example:

     a.domain  rcpt_452  senders="xb.dom : yc.dom"  G,8h,10m,1.5

   *Warning*: This facility can be unhelpful if it is used for host
errors (which do not depend on the recipient).  The reason is that the
sender is used only to match the retry rule.  Once the rule has been
found for a host error, its contents are used to set a retry time for
the host, and this will apply to all messages, not just those with
specific senders.

   When testing retry rules using ‘-brt’, you can supply a sender using
the ‘-f’ command line option, like this:

     exim -f "" -brt user@dom.ain

   If you do not set ‘-f’ with ‘-brt’, a retry rule that contains a
senders list is never matched.


File: spec.info,  Node: Retry parameters,  Next: Retry rule examples,  Prev: Retry rules for specified senders,  Up: Retry configuration

32.7 Retry parameters
=====================

The third (or fourth, if a senders list is present) field in a retry
rule is a sequence of retry parameter sets, separated by semicolons.
Each set consists of

     <letter>,<cutoff time>,<arguments>

   The letter identifies the algorithm for computing a new retry time;
the cutoff time is the time beyond which this algorithm no longer
applies, and the arguments vary the algorithm's action.  The cutoff time
is measured from the time that the first failure for the domain
(combined with the local part if relevant) was detected, not from the
time the message was received.

   The available algorithms are:

   • _F_: retry at fixed intervals.  There is a single time parameter
     specifying the interval.

   • _G_: retry at geometrically increasing intervals.  The first
     argument specifies a starting value for the interval, and the
     second a multiplier, which is used to increase the size of the
     interval at each retry.

   • _H_: retry at randomized intervals.  The arguments are as for _G_.
     For each retry, the previous interval is multiplied by the factor
     in order to get a maximum for the next interval.  The minimum
     interval is the first argument of the parameter, and an actual
     interval is chosen randomly between them.  Such a rule has been
     found to be helpful in cluster configurations when all the members
     of the cluster restart at once, and may therefore synchronize their
     queue processing times.

   When computing the next retry time, the algorithm definitions are
scanned in order until one whose cutoff time has not yet passed is
reached.  This is then used to compute a new retry time that is later
than the current time.  In the case of fixed interval retries, this
simply means adding the interval to the current time.  For geometrically
increasing intervals, retry intervals are computed from the rule's
parameters until one that is greater than the previous interval is
found.  The main configuration variable ‘retry_interval_max’ limits the
maximum interval between retries.  It cannot be set greater than ‘24h’,
which is its default value.

   A single remote domain may have a number of hosts associated with it,
and each host may have more than one IP address.  Retry algorithms are
selected on the basis of the domain name, but are applied to each IP
address independently.  If, for example, a host has two IP addresses and
one is unusable, Exim will generate retry times for it and will not try
to use it until its next retry time comes.  Thus the good IP address is
likely to be tried first most of the time.

   Retry times are hints rather than promises.  Exim does not make any
attempt to run deliveries exactly at the computed times.  Instead, a
queue runner process starts delivery processes for delayed messages
periodically, and these attempt new deliveries only for those addresses
that have passed their next retry time.  If a new message arrives for a
deferred address, an immediate delivery attempt occurs only if the
address has passed its retry time.  In the absence of new messages, the
minimum time between retries is the interval between queue runner
processes.  There is not much point in setting retry times of five
minutes if your queue runners happen only once an hour, unless there are
a significant number of incoming messages (which might be the case on a
system that is sending everything to a smart host, for example).

   The data in the retry hints database can be inspected by using the
_exim_dumpdb_ or _exim_fixdb_ utility programs (see chapter *note Exim
utilities::).  The latter utility can also be used to change the data.
The _exinext_ utility script can be used to find out what the next retry
times are for the hosts associated with a particular mail domain, and
also for local deliveries that have been deferred.


File: spec.info,  Node: Retry rule examples,  Next: Timeout of retry data,  Prev: Retry parameters,  Up: Retry configuration

32.8 Retry rule examples
========================

Here are some example retry rules:

     alice@wonderland.fict.example quota_5d  F,7d,3h
     wonderland.fict.example       quota_5d
     wonderland.fict.example       *         F,1h,15m; G,2d,1h,2;
     lookingglass.fict.example     *         F,24h,30m;
     *                 refused_A   F,2h,20m;
     *                 *           F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,5d,8h

   The first rule sets up special handling for mail to
_alice@wonderland.fict.example_ when there is an over-quota error and
the mailbox has not been read for at least 5 days.  Retries continue
every three hours for 7 days.  The second rule handles over-quota errors
for all other local parts at _wonderland.fict.example_; the absence of a
local part has the same effect as supplying "*@".  As no retry
algorithms are supplied, messages that fail are bounced immediately if
the mailbox has not been read for at least 5 days.

   The third rule handles all other errors at _wonderland.fict.example_;
retries happen every 15 minutes for an hour, then with geometrically
increasing intervals until two days have passed since a delivery first
failed.  After the first hour there is a delay of one hour, then two
hours, then four hours, and so on (this is a rather extreme example).

   The fourth rule controls retries for the domain
_lookingglass.fict.example_.  They happen every 30 minutes for 24 hours
only.  The remaining two rules handle all other domains, with special
action for connection refusal from hosts that were not obtained from an
MX record.

   The final rule in a retry configuration should always have asterisks
in the first two fields so as to provide a general catch-all for any
addresses that do not have their own special handling.  This example
tries every 15 minutes for 2 hours, then with intervals starting at one
hour and increasing by a factor of 1.5 up to 16 hours, then every 8
hours up to 5 days.


File: spec.info,  Node: Timeout of retry data,  Next: Long-term failures,  Prev: Retry rule examples,  Up: Retry configuration

32.9 Timeout of retry data
==========================

Exim timestamps the data that it writes to its retry hints database.
When it consults the data during a delivery it ignores any that is older
than the value set in ‘retry_data_expire’ (default 7 days).  If, for
example, a host hasn't been tried for 7 days, Exim will try to deliver
to it immediately a message arrives, and if that fails, it will
calculate a retry time as if it were failing for the first time.

   This improves the behaviour for messages routed to rarely-used hosts
such as MX backups.  If such a host was down at one time, and happens to
be down again when Exim tries a month later, using the old retry data
would imply that it had been down all the time, which is not a justified
assumption.

   If a host really is permanently dead, this behaviour causes a burst
of retries every now and again, but only if messages routed to it are
rare.  If there is a message at least once every 7 days the retry data
never expires.


File: spec.info,  Node: Long-term failures,  Next: Deliveries that work intermittently,  Prev: Timeout of retry data,  Up: Retry configuration

32.10 Long-term failures
========================

Special processing happens when an email address has been failing for so
long that the cutoff time for the last algorithm is reached.  For
example, using the default retry rule:

     * * F,2h,15m; G,16h,1h,1.5; F,4d,6h

   the cutoff time is four days.  Reaching the retry cutoff is
independent of how long any specific message has been failing; it is the
length of continuous failure for the recipient address that counts.

   When the cutoff time is reached for a local delivery, or for all the
IP addresses associated with a remote delivery, a subsequent delivery
failure causes Exim to give up on the address, and a bounce message is
generated.  In order to cater for new messages that use the failing
address, a next retry time is still computed from the final algorithm,
and is used as follows:

   For local deliveries, one delivery attempt is always made for any
subsequent messages.  If this delivery fails, the address fails
immediately.  The post-cutoff retry time is not used.

   If the delivery is remote, there are two possibilities, controlled by
the ‘delay_after_cutoff’ option of the ‘smtp’ transport.  The option is
true by default.  Until the post-cutoff retry time for one of the IP
addresses, as set by the ‘retry_data_expire’ option, is reached, the
failing email address is bounced immediately, without a delivery attempt
taking place.  After that time, one new delivery attempt is made to
those IP addresses that are past their retry times, and if that still
fails, the address is bounced and new retry times are computed.

   In other words, when all the hosts for a given email address have
been failing for a long time, Exim bounces rather then defers until one
of the hosts' retry times is reached.  Then it tries once, and bounces
if that attempt fails.  This behaviour ensures that few resources are
wasted in repeatedly trying to deliver to a broken destination, but if
the host does recover, Exim will eventually notice.

   If ‘delay_after_cutoff’ is set false, Exim behaves differently.  If
all IP addresses are past their final cutoff time, Exim tries to deliver
to those IP addresses that have not been tried since the message
arrived.  If there are no suitable IP addresses, or if they all fail,
the address is bounced.  In other words, it does not delay when a new
message arrives, but tries the expired addresses immediately, unless
they have been tried since the message arrived.  If there is a
continuous stream of messages for the failing domains, setting
‘delay_after_cutoff’ false means that there will be many more attempts
to deliver to permanently failing IP addresses than when
‘delay_after_cutoff’ is true.


File: spec.info,  Node: Deliveries that work intermittently,  Prev: Long-term failures,  Up: Retry configuration

32.11 Deliveries that work intermittently
=========================================

Some additional logic is needed to cope with cases where a host is
intermittently available, or when a message has some attribute that
prevents its delivery when others to the same address get through.  In
this situation, because some messages are successfully delivered, the
"retry clock" for the host or address keeps getting reset by the
successful deliveries, and so failing messages remain in the queue for
ever because the cutoff time is never reached.

   Two exceptional actions are applied to prevent this happening.  The
first applies to errors that are related to a message rather than a
remote host.  Section *note Errors in outgoing SMTP:: has a discussion
of the different kinds of error; examples of message-related errors are
4_xx_ responses to MAIL or DATA commands, and quota failures.  For this
type of error, if a message's arrival time is earlier than the "first
failed" time for the error, the earlier time is used when scanning the
retry rules to decide when to try next and when to time out the address.

   The exceptional second action applies in all cases.  If a message has
been on the queue for longer than the cutoff time of any applicable
retry rule for a given address, a delivery is attempted for that
address, even if it is not yet time, and if this delivery fails, the
address is timed out.  A new retry time is not computed in this case, so
that other messages for the same address are considered immediately.


File: spec.info,  Node: SMTP authentication,  Next: The plaintext authenticator,  Prev: Retry configuration,  Up: Top

33 SMTP authentication
**********************

The "authenticators" section of Exim's runtime configuration is
concerned with SMTP authentication.  This facility is an extension to
the SMTP protocol, described in *RFC 2554
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2554)*, which allows a client
SMTP host to authenticate itself to a server.  This is a common way for
a server to recognize clients that are permitted to use it as a relay.
SMTP authentication is not of relevance to the transfer of mail between
servers that have no managerial connection with each other.

   The name of an authenticator is limited to be 64 ASCII characters
long; prior to Exim 4.95 names would be silently truncated at this
length, but now it is enforced.

   Very briefly, the way SMTP authentication works is as follows:

  1. The server advertises a number of authentication _mechanisms_ in
     response to the client's EHLO command.

  2. The client issues an AUTH command, naming a specific mechanism.
     The command may, optionally, contain some authentication data.

  3. The server may issue one or more _challenges_, to which the client
     must send appropriate responses.  In simple authentication
     mechanisms, the challenges are just prompts for user names and
     passwords.  The server does not have to issue any challenges - in
     some mechanisms the relevant data may all be transmitted with the
     AUTH command.

  4. The server either accepts or denies authentication.

  5. If authentication succeeds, the client may optionally make use of
     the AUTH option on the MAIL command to pass an authenticated sender
     in subsequent mail transactions.  Authentication lasts for the
     remainder of the SMTP connection.

  6. If authentication fails, the client may give up, or it may try a
     different authentication mechanism, or it may try transferring mail
     over the unauthenticated connection.

   If you are setting up a client, and want to know which authentication
mechanisms the server supports, you can use Telnet to connect to port 25
(the SMTP port) on the server, and issue an EHLO command.  The response
to this includes the list of supported mechanisms.  For example:

     $ telnet server.example 25
     Trying 192.168.34.25...
     Connected to server.example.
     Escape character is '^]'.
     220 server.example ESMTP Exim 4.20 ...
     ehlo client.example
     250-server.example Hello client.example [10.8.4.5]
     250-SIZE 52428800
     250-PIPELINING
     250-AUTH PLAIN
     250 HELP

   The second-last line of this example output shows that the server
supports authentication using the PLAIN mechanism.  In Exim, the
different authentication mechanisms are configured by specifying
_authenticator_ drivers.  Like the routers and transports, which
authenticators are included in the binary is controlled by build-time
definitions.  The following are currently available, included by setting

     AUTH_CRAM_MD5=yes
     AUTH_CYRUS_SASL=yes
     AUTH_DOVECOT=yes
     AUTH_EXTERNAL=yes
     AUTH_GSASL=yes
     AUTH_HEIMDAL_GSSAPI=yes
     AUTH_PLAINTEXT=yes
     AUTH_SPA=yes
     AUTH_TLS=yes

   in ‘Local/Makefile’, respectively.  The first of these supports the
CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism (*RFC 2195
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2195)*), and the second
provides an interface to the Cyrus SASL authentication library.  The
third is an interface to Dovecot's authentication system, delegating the
work via a socket interface.  The fourth provides for negotiation of
authentication done via non-SMTP means, as defined by *RFC 4422
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4422#appendix-A)*.  The fifth
provides an interface to the GNU SASL authentication library, which
provides mechanisms but typically not data sources.  The sixth provides
direct access to Heimdal GSSAPI, geared for Kerberos, but supporting
setting a server keytab.  The seventh can be configured to support the
PLAIN authentication mechanism (*RFC 2595
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2595#section-6)*) or the LOGIN
mechanism, which is not formally documented, but used by several MUAs.
The eighth authenticator supports Microsoft's _Secure Password
Authentication_ mechanism.  The last is an Exim authenticator but not an
SMTP one; instead it can use information from a TLS negotiation.

   The authenticators are configured using the same syntax as other
drivers (see section *note Format of driver configurations::).  If no
authenticators are required, no authentication section need be present
in the configuration file.  Each authenticator can in principle have
both server and client functions.  When Exim is receiving SMTP mail, it
is acting as a server; when it is sending out messages over SMTP, it is
acting as a client.  Authenticator configuration options are provided
for use in both these circumstances.

   As a client, authenticators configured earlier will be preferred over
later ones.

   To make it clear which options apply to which situation, the prefixes
‘server_’ and ‘client_’ are used on option names that are specific to
either the server or the client function, respectively.  Server and
client functions are disabled if none of their options are set.  If an
authenticator is to be used for both server and client functions, a
single definition, using both sets of options, is required.  For
example:

     cram:
       driver = cram_md5
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       server_secret = ${if eq{$auth1}{ph10}{secret1}fail}
       client_name = ph10
       client_secret = secret2

   The ‘server_’ option is used when Exim is acting as a server, and the
‘client_’ options when it is acting as a client.

   Descriptions of the individual authenticators are given in subsequent
chapters.  The remainder of this chapter covers the generic options for
the authenticators, followed by general discussion of the way
authentication works in Exim.

   *Beware:* the meaning of ‘$auth1’, ‘$auth2’, ...  varies on a
per-driver and per-mechanism basis.  Please read carefully to determine
which variables hold account labels such as usercodes and which hold
passwords or other authenticating data.

   Note that some mechanisms support two different identifiers for
accounts: the _authentication id_ and the _authorization id_.  The
contractions _authn_ and _authz_ are commonly encountered.  The American
spelling is standard here.  Conceptually, authentication data such as
passwords are tied to the identifier used to authenticate; servers may
have rules to permit one user to act as a second user, so that after
login the session is treated as though that second user had logged in.
That second user is the _authorization id_.  A robust configuration
might confirm that the _authz_ field is empty or matches the _authn_
field.  Often this is just ignored.  The _authn_ can be considered as
verified data, the _authz_ as an unverified request which the server
might choose to honour.

   A _realm_ is a text string, typically a domain name, presented by a
server to a client to help it select an account and credentials to use.
In some mechanisms, the client and server provably agree on the realm,
but clients typically can not treat the realm as secure data to be
blindly trusted.

* Menu:

* Generic options for authenticators::
* The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands::
* Authentication on an Exim server::
* Authentication by an Exim client::


File: spec.info,  Node: Generic options for authenticators,  Next: The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands,  Up: SMTP authentication

33.1 Generic options for authenticators
=======================================

‘client_condition’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   When Exim is authenticating as a client, it skips any authenticator
whose ‘client_condition’ expansion yields "0", "no", or "false".  This
can be used, for example, to skip plain text authenticators when the
connection is not encrypted by a setting such as:

     client_condition = ${if !eq{$tls_out_cipher}{}}

‘client_set_id’        Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   When client authentication succeeds, this condition is expanded; the
result is used in the log lines for outbound messages.  Typically it
will be the user name used for authentication.

‘driver’               Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _authenticators_                    _unset_

   This option must always be set.  It specifies which of the available
authenticators is to be used.

‘public_name’          Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _authenticators_                    _unset_

   This option specifies the name of the authentication mechanism that
the driver implements, and by which it is known to the outside world.
These names should contain only upper case letters, digits, underscores,
and hyphens (*RFC 2222
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2222#section-3)*), but Exim in
fact matches them caselessly.  If ‘public_name’ is not set, it defaults
to the driver's instance name.

‘server_advertise_condition’Use:         Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   When a server is about to advertise an authentication mechanism, the
condition is expanded.  If it yields the empty string, "0", "no", or
"false", the mechanism is not advertised.  If the expansion fails, the
mechanism is not advertised.  If the failure was not forced, and was not
caused by a lookup defer, the incident is logged.  See section *note
Authentication on an Exim server:: below for further discussion.

‘server_condition’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   This option must be set for a ‘plaintext’ server authenticator, where
it is used directly to control authentication.  See section *note Using
plaintext in a server:: for details.

   For the ‘gsasl’ authenticator, this option is required for various
mechanisms; see chapter *note The gsasl authenticator:: for details.

   For the other authenticators, ‘server_condition’ can be used as an
additional authentication or authorization mechanism that is applied
after the other authenticator conditions succeed.  If it is set, it is
expanded when the authenticator would otherwise return a success code.
If the expansion is forced to fail, authentication fails.  Any other
expansion failure causes a temporary error code to be returned.  If the
result of a successful expansion is an empty string, "0", "no", or
"false", authentication fails.  If the result of the expansion is "1",
"yes", or "true", authentication succeeds.  For any other result, a
temporary error code is returned, with the expanded string as the error
text.

‘server_debug_print’   Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   If this option is set and authentication debugging is enabled (see
the ‘-d’ command line option), the string is expanded and included in
the debugging output when the authenticator is run as a server.  This
can help with checking out the values of variables.  If expansion of the
string fails, the error message is written to the debugging output, and
Exim carries on processing.

‘server_set_id’        Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   When an Exim server successfully authenticates a client, this string
is expanded using data from the authentication, and preserved for any
incoming messages in the variable ‘$authenticated_id’.  It is also
included in the log lines for incoming messages.  For example, a
user/password authenticator configuration might preserve the user name
that was used to authenticate, and refer to it subsequently during
delivery of the message.  On a failing authentication the expansion
result is instead saved in the ‘$authenticated_fail_id’ variable.  If
expansion fails, the option is ignored.

‘server_mail_auth_condition’Use:         Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   This option allows a server to discard authenticated sender addresses
supplied as part of MAIL commands in SMTP connections that are
authenticated by the driver on which ‘server_mail_auth_condition’ is
set.  The option is not used as part of the authentication process;
instead its (unexpanded) value is remembered for later use.  How it is
used is described in the following section.


File: spec.info,  Node: The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands,  Next: Authentication on an Exim server,  Prev: Generic options for authenticators,  Up: SMTP authentication

33.2 The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands
========================================

When a client supplied an AUTH= item on a MAIL command, Exim applies the
following checks before accepting it as the authenticated sender of the
message:

   • If the connection is not using extended SMTP (that is, HELO was
     used rather than EHLO), the use of AUTH= is a syntax error.

   • If the value of the AUTH= parameter is "<>", it is ignored.

   • If ‘acl_smtp_mailauth’ is defined, the ACL it specifies is run.
     While it is running, the value of ‘$authenticated_sender’ is set to
     the value obtained from the AUTH= parameter.  If the ACL does not
     yield "accept", the value of ‘$authenticated_sender’ is deleted.
     The ‘acl_smtp_mailauth’ ACL may not return "drop" or "discard".  If
     it defers, a temporary error code (451) is given for the MAIL
     command.

   • If ‘acl_smtp_mailauth’ is not defined, the value of the AUTH=
     parameter is accepted and placed in ‘$authenticated_sender’ only if
     the client has authenticated.

   • If the AUTH= value was accepted by either of the two previous
     rules, and the client has authenticated, and the authenticator has
     a setting for the ‘server_mail_auth_condition’, the condition is
     checked at this point.  The valued that was saved from the
     authenticator is expanded.  If the expansion fails, or yields an
     empty string, "0", "no", or "false", the value of
     ‘$authenticated_sender’ is deleted.  If the expansion yields any
     other value, the value of ‘$authenticated_sender’ is retained and
     passed on with the message.

   When ‘$authenticated_sender’ is set for a message, it is passed on to
other hosts to which Exim authenticates as a client.  Do not confuse
this value with ‘$authenticated_id’, which is a string obtained from the
authentication process, and which is not usually a complete email
address.

   Whenever an AUTH= value is ignored, the incident is logged.  The ACL
for MAIL, if defined, is run after AUTH= is accepted or ignored.  It can
therefore make use of ‘$authenticated_sender’.  The converse is not
true: the value of ‘$sender_address’ is not yet set up when the
‘acl_smtp_mailauth’ ACL is run.


File: spec.info,  Node: Authentication on an Exim server,  Next: Authentication by an Exim client,  Prev: The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands,  Up: SMTP authentication

33.3 Authentication on an Exim server
=====================================

When Exim receives an EHLO command, it advertises the public names of
those authenticators that are configured as servers, subject to the
following conditions:

   • The client host must match ‘auth_advertise_hosts’ (default *).

   • If the ‘server_advertise_condition’ option is set, its expansion
     must not yield the empty string, "0", "no", or "false".

   The order in which the authenticators are defined controls the order
in which the mechanisms are advertised.

   Some mail clients (for example, some versions of Netscape) require
the user to provide a name and password for authentication whenever AUTH
is advertised, even though authentication may not in fact be needed (for
example, Exim may be set up to allow unconditional relaying from the
client by an IP address check).  You can make such clients more friendly
by not advertising AUTH to them.  For example, if clients on the
10.9.8.0/24 network are permitted (by the ACL that runs for RCPT) to
relay without authentication, you should set

     auth_advertise_hosts = ! 10.9.8.0/24

   so that no authentication mechanisms are advertised to them.

   The ‘server_advertise_condition’ controls the advertisement of
individual authentication mechanisms.  For example, it can be used to
restrict the advertisement of a particular mechanism to encrypted
connections, by a setting such as:

     server_advertise_condition = ${if eq{$tls_in_cipher}{}{no}{yes}}

   If the session is encrypted, ‘$tls_in_cipher’ is not empty, and so
the expansion yields "yes", which allows the advertisement to happen.

   When an Exim server receives an AUTH command from a client, it
rejects it immediately if AUTH was not advertised in response to an
earlier EHLO command.  This is the case if

   • The client host does not match ‘auth_advertise_hosts’; or

   • No authenticators are configured with server options; or

   • Expansion of ‘server_advertise_condition’ blocked the advertising
     of all the server authenticators.

   Otherwise, Exim runs the ACL specified by ‘acl_smtp_auth’ in order to
decide whether to accept the command.  If ‘acl_smtp_auth’ is not set,
AUTH is accepted from any client host.

   If AUTH is not rejected by the ACL, Exim searches its configuration
for a server authentication mechanism that was advertised in response to
EHLO and that matches the one named in the AUTH command.  If it finds
one, it runs the appropriate authentication protocol, and authentication
either succeeds or fails.  If there is no matching advertised mechanism,
the AUTH command is rejected with a 504 error.

   When a message is received from an authenticated host, the value of
‘$received_protocol’ is set to "esmtpa" or "esmtpsa" instead of "esmtp"
or "esmtps", and ‘$sender_host_authenticated’ contains the name (not the
public name) of the authenticator driver that successfully authenticated
the client from which the message was received.  This variable is empty
if there was no successful authentication.

   Successful authentication sets up information used by the
‘authresults’ expansion item.

   If an authenticator is run and does not succeed, an event of type
"auth:fail" is raised.  While the event is being processed the variables
‘$sender_host_authenticated’ (with the authenticator name) and
‘$authenticated_fail_id’ (as set by the authenticator ‘server_set_id’
option) will be valid.  If the event is serviced and a string is
returned then the string will be logged instead of the default log line.
See *note Events:: for details on events.

* Menu:

* Testing server authentication::


File: spec.info,  Node: Testing server authentication,  Up: Authentication on an Exim server

33.3.1 Testing server authentication
------------------------------------

Exim's ‘-bh’ option can be useful for testing server authentication
configurations.  The data for the AUTH command has to be sent using
base64 encoding.  A quick way to produce such data for testing is the
following Perl script:

     use MIME::Base64;
     printf ("%s", encode_base64(eval "\"$ARGV[0]\""));

   This interprets its argument as a Perl string, and then encodes it.
The interpretation as a Perl string allows binary zeros, which are
required for some kinds of authentication, to be included in the data.
For example, a command line to run this script on such data might be

     encode '\0user\0password'

   Note the use of single quotes to prevent the shell interpreting the
backslashes, so that they can be interpreted by Perl to specify
characters whose code value is zero.

   *Warning 1*: If either of the user or password strings starts with an
octal digit, you must use three zeros instead of one after the leading
backslash.  If you do not, the octal digit that starts your string will
be incorrectly interpreted as part of the code for the first character.

   *Warning 2*: If there are characters in the strings that Perl
interprets specially, you must use a Perl escape to prevent them being
misinterpreted.  For example, a command such as

     encode '\0user@domain.com\0pas$$word'

   gives an incorrect answer because of the unescaped "@" and "$"
characters.

   If you have the ‘mimencode’ command installed, another way to produce
base64-encoded strings is to run the command

     echo -e -n `\0user\0password' | mimencode

   The ‘-e’ option of ‘echo’ enables the interpretation of backslash
escapes in the argument, and the ‘-n’ option specifies no newline at the
end of its output.  However, not all versions of ‘echo’ recognize these
options, so you should check your version before relying on this
suggestion.


File: spec.info,  Node: Authentication by an Exim client,  Prev: Authentication on an Exim server,  Up: SMTP authentication

33.4 Authentication by an Exim client
=====================================

The ‘smtp’ transport has two options called ‘hosts_require_auth’ and
‘hosts_try_auth’.  When the ‘smtp’ transport connects to a server that
announces support for authentication, and the host matches an entry in
either of these options, Exim (as a client) tries to authenticate as
follows:

   • For each authenticator that is configured as a client, in the order
     in which they are defined in the configuration, it searches the
     authentication mechanisms announced by the server for one whose
     name matches the public name of the authenticator.

   • When it finds one that matches, it runs the authenticator's client
     code.  The variables ‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ are available for
     any string expansions that the client might do.  They are set to
     the server's name and IP address.  If any expansion is forced to
     fail, the authentication attempt is abandoned, and Exim moves on to
     the next authenticator.  Otherwise an expansion failure causes
     delivery to be deferred.

   • If the result of the authentication attempt is a temporary error or
     a timeout, Exim abandons trying to send the message to the host for
     the moment.  It will try again later.  If there are any backup
     hosts available, they are tried in the usual way.

   • If the response to authentication is a permanent error (5_xx_
     code), an event of type "auth:fail" is raised.  While the event is
     being processed the variable ‘$sender_host_authenticated’ (with the
     authenticator name) will be valid.  If the event is serviced and a
     string is returned then the string will be logged.  See *note
     Events:: for details on events.

   • If the response to authentication is a permanent error (5_xx_
     code), Exim carries on searching the list of authenticators and
     tries another one if possible.  If all authentication attempts give
     permanent errors, or if there are no attempts because no mechanisms
     match (or option expansions force failure), what happens depends on
     whether the host matches ‘hosts_require_auth’ or ‘hosts_try_auth’.
     In the first case, a temporary error is generated, and delivery is
     deferred.  The error can be detected in the retry rules, and
     thereby turned into a permanent error if you wish.  In the second
     case, Exim tries to deliver the message unauthenticated.

   Note that the hostlist test for whether to do authentication can be
confused if name-IP lookups change between the time the peer is decided
upon and the time that the transport runs.  For example, with a
manualroute router given a host name, and with DNS "round-robin" used by
that name: if the local resolver cache times out between the router and
the transport running, the transport may get an IP for the name for its
authentication check which does not match the connection peer IP. No
authentication will then be done, despite the names being identical.

   For such cases use a separate transport which always authenticates.

   When Exim has authenticated itself to a remote server, it adds the
AUTH parameter to the MAIL commands it sends, if it has an authenticated
sender for the message.  If the message came from a remote host, the
authenticated sender is the one that was receiving on an incoming MAIL
command, provided that the incoming connection was authenticated and the
‘server_mail_auth’ condition allowed the authenticated sender to be
retained.  If a local process calls Exim to send a message, the sender
address that is built from the login name and ‘qualify_domain’ is
treated as authenticated.  However, if the ‘authenticated_sender’ option
is set on the ‘smtp’ transport, it overrides the authenticated sender
that was received with the message.


File: spec.info,  Node: The plaintext authenticator,  Next: The cram_md5 authenticator,  Prev: SMTP authentication,  Up: Top

34 The plaintext authenticator
******************************

The ‘plaintext’ authenticator can be configured to support the PLAIN and
LOGIN authentication mechanisms, both of which transfer authentication
data as plain (unencrypted) text (though base64 encoded).  The use of
plain text is a security risk; you are strongly advised to insist on the
use of SMTP encryption (see chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections
using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.) if you use the PLAIN or
LOGIN mechanisms.  If you do use unencrypted plain text, you should not
use the same passwords for SMTP connections as you do for login
accounts.

* Menu:

* Avoiding cleartext use::
* Plaintext server options::
* Using plaintext in a server::
* Using plaintext in a client::


File: spec.info,  Node: Avoiding cleartext use,  Next: Plaintext server options,  Up: The plaintext authenticator

34.1 Avoiding cleartext use
===========================

The following generic option settings will disable ‘plaintext’
authenticators when TLS is not being used:

       server_advertise_condition = ${if def:tls_in_cipher }
       client_condition =           ${if def:tls_out_cipher}

   *Note*: a plaintext SMTP AUTH done inside TLS is not vulnerable to
casual snooping, but is still vulnerable to a Man In The Middle attack
unless certificates (including their names) have been properly verified.


File: spec.info,  Node: Plaintext server options,  Next: Using plaintext in a server,  Prev: Avoiding cleartext use,  Up: The plaintext authenticator

34.2 Plaintext server options
=============================

When configured as a server, ‘plaintext’ uses the following options:

‘server_condition’     Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _authenticators_  _string_*__       _unset_

   This is actually a global authentication option, but it must be set
in order to configure the ‘plaintext’ driver as a server.  Its use is
described below.

‘server_prompts’       Use:              Type: _string     Default:
                       _plaintext_       list_*__          _unset_

   The contents of this option, after expansion, must be a
colon-separated list of prompt strings.  If expansion fails, a temporary
authentication rejection is given.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using plaintext in a server,  Next: Using plaintext in a client,  Prev: Plaintext server options,  Up: The plaintext authenticator

34.3 Using plaintext in a server
================================

When running as a server, ‘plaintext’ performs the authentication test
by expanding a string.  The data sent by the client with the AUTH
command, or in response to subsequent prompts, is base64 encoded, and so
may contain any byte values when decoded.  If any data is supplied with
the command, it is treated as a list of strings, separated by NULs
(binary zeros), the first three of which are placed in the expansion
variables ‘$auth1’, ‘$auth2’, and ‘$auth3’ (neither LOGIN nor PLAIN uses
more than three strings).

   For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the values are also
placed in the expansion variables ‘$1’, ‘$2’, and ‘$3’.  However, the
use of these variables for this purpose is now deprecated, as it can
lead to confusion in string expansions that also use them for other
things.

   If there are more strings in ‘server_prompts’ than the number of
strings supplied with the AUTH command, the remaining prompts are used
to obtain more data.  Each response from the client may be a list of
NUL-separated strings.

   Once a sufficient number of data strings have been received,
‘server_condition’ is expanded.  If the expansion is forced to fail,
authentication fails.  Any other expansion failure causes a temporary
error code to be returned.  If the result of a successful expansion is
an empty string, "0", "no", or "false", authentication fails.  If the
result of the expansion is "1", "yes", or "true", authentication
succeeds and the generic ‘server_set_id’ option is expanded and saved in
‘$authenticated_id’.  For any other result, a temporary error code is
returned, with the expanded string as the error text.

   *Warning*: If you use a lookup in the expansion to find the user's
password, be sure to make the authentication fail if the user is
unknown.  There are good and bad examples at the end of the next
section.

* Menu:

* The PLAIN authentication mechanism::
* The LOGIN authentication mechanism::
* Support for different kinds of authentication::


File: spec.info,  Node: The PLAIN authentication mechanism,  Next: The LOGIN authentication mechanism,  Up: Using plaintext in a server

34.3.1 The PLAIN authentication mechanism
-----------------------------------------

The PLAIN authentication mechanism (*RFC 2595
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2595#section-6)*) specifies
that three strings be sent as one item of data (that is, one combined
string containing two NUL separators).  The data is sent either as part
of the AUTH command, or subsequently in response to an empty prompt from
the server.

   The second and third strings are a user name and a corresponding
password.  Using a single fixed user name and password as an example,
this could be configured as follows:

     fixed_plain:
       driver = plaintext
       public_name = PLAIN
       server_prompts = :
       server_condition = \
         ${if and {{eq{$auth2}{username}}{eq{$auth3}{mysecret}}}}
       server_set_id = $auth2

   Note that the default result strings from ‘if’ ("true" or an empty
string) are exactly what we want here, so they need not be specified.
Obviously, if the password contains expansion-significant characters
such as dollar, backslash, or closing brace, they have to be escaped.

   The ‘server_prompts’ setting specifies a single, empty prompt (empty
items at the end of a string list are ignored).  If all the data comes
as part of the AUTH command, as is commonly the case, the prompt is not
used.  This authenticator is advertised in the response to EHLO as

     250-AUTH PLAIN

   and a client host can authenticate itself by sending the command

     AUTH PLAIN AHVzZXJuYW1lAG15c2VjcmV0

   As this contains three strings (more than the number of prompts), no
further data is required from the client.  Alternatively, the client may
just send

     AUTH PLAIN

   to initiate authentication, in which case the server replies with an
empty prompt.  The client must respond with the combined data string.

   The data string is base64 encoded, as required by the RFC. This
example, when decoded, is <_NUL_>‘username’<_NUL_>‘mysecret’, where
<_NUL_> represents a zero byte.  This is split up into three strings,
the first of which is empty.  The ‘server_condition’ option in the
authenticator checks that the second two are ‘username’ and ‘mysecret’
respectively.

   Having just one fixed user name and password, as in this example, is
not very realistic, though for a small organization with only a handful
of authenticating clients it could make sense.

   A more sophisticated instance of this authenticator could use the
user name in ‘$auth2’ to look up a password in a file or database, and
maybe do an encrypted comparison (see ‘crypteq’ in chapter *note String
expansions::).  Here is a example of this approach, where the passwords
are looked up in a DBM file.  *Warning*: This is an incorrect example:

     server_condition = \
       ${if eq{$auth3}{${lookup{$auth2}dbm{/etc/authpwd}}}}

   The expansion uses the user name (‘$auth2’) as the key to look up a
password, which it then compares to the supplied password (‘$auth3’).
Why is this example incorrect?  It works fine for existing users, but
consider what happens if a non-existent user name is given.  The lookup
fails, but as no success/failure strings are given for the lookup, it
yields an empty string.  Thus, to defeat the authentication, all a
client has to do is to supply a non-existent user name and an empty
password.  The correct way of writing this test is:

     server_condition = ${lookup{$auth2}dbm{/etc/authpwd}\
       {${if eq{$value}{$auth3}}} {false}}

   In this case, if the lookup succeeds, the result is checked; if the
lookup fails, "false" is returned and authentication fails.  If
‘crypteq’ is being used instead of ‘eq’, the first example is in fact
safe, because ‘crypteq’ always fails if its second argument is empty.
However, the second way of writing the test makes the logic clearer.


File: spec.info,  Node: The LOGIN authentication mechanism,  Next: Support for different kinds of authentication,  Prev: The PLAIN authentication mechanism,  Up: Using plaintext in a server

34.3.2 The LOGIN authentication mechanism
-----------------------------------------

The LOGIN authentication mechanism is not documented in any RFC, but is
in use in a number of programs.  No data is sent with the AUTH command.
Instead, a user name and password are supplied separately, in response
to prompts.  *Note*: The extra roundtrips make this mechanism less
efficient than PLAIN. The plaintext authenticator can be configured to
support this as in this example:

     fixed_login:
       driver = plaintext
       public_name = LOGIN
       server_prompts = User Name : Password
       server_condition = \
         ${if and {{eq{$auth1}{username}}{eq{$auth2}{mysecret}}}}
       server_set_id = $auth1

   Because of the way plaintext operates, this authenticator accepts
data supplied with the AUTH command (in contravention of the
specification of LOGIN), but if the client does not supply it (as is the
case for LOGIN clients), the prompt strings are used to obtain two data
items.

   Some clients are very particular about the precise text of the
prompts.  For example, Outlook Express is reported to recognize only
"Username:" and "Password:".  Here is an example of a LOGIN
authenticator that uses those strings.  It uses the ‘ldapauth’ expansion
condition to check the user name and password by binding to an LDAP
server:

     login:
       driver = plaintext
       public_name = LOGIN
       server_prompts = Username:: : Password::
       server_condition = ${if and{{ \
         !eq{}{$auth1} }{ \
         ldapauth{\
           user="uid=${quote_ldap_dn:$auth1},ou=people,o=example.org" \
           pass=${quote:$auth2} \
           ldap://ldap.example.org/} }} }
       server_set_id = uid=$auth1,ou=people,o=example.org

   We have to check that the username is not empty before using it,
because LDAP does not permit empty DN components.  We must also use the
‘quote_ldap_dn’ operator to correctly quote the DN for authentication.
However, the basic ‘quote’ operator, rather than any of the LDAP quoting
operators, is the correct one to use for the password, because quoting
is needed only to make the password conform to the Exim syntax.  At the
LDAP level, the password is an uninterpreted string.


File: spec.info,  Node: Support for different kinds of authentication,  Prev: The LOGIN authentication mechanism,  Up: Using plaintext in a server

34.3.3 Support for different kinds of authentication
----------------------------------------------------

A number of string expansion features are provided for the purpose of
interfacing to different ways of user authentication.

   These include checking traditionally encrypted passwords from
‘/etc/passwd’ (or equivalent), PAM, Radius, ‘ldapauth’, and _saslauthd_.

   For details see section *note Expansion conditions::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using plaintext in a client,  Prev: Using plaintext in a server,  Up: The plaintext authenticator

34.4 Using plaintext in a client
================================

The ‘plaintext’ authenticator has two client options:

‘client_ignore_invalid_base64’Use:       Type: _boolean_   Default:
                       _plaintext_                         _false_

   If the client receives a server prompt that is not a valid base64
string, authentication is abandoned by default.  However, if this option
is set true, the error in the challenge is ignored and the client sends
the response as usual.

‘client_send’          Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _plaintext_       _string_*__       _unset_

   The string is a colon-separated list of authentication data strings.
Each string is independently expanded before being sent to the server.
The first string is sent with the AUTH command; any more strings are
sent in response to prompts from the server.  Before each string is
expanded, the value of the most recent prompt is placed in the next
‘$auth’<_n_> variable, starting with ‘$auth1’ for the first prompt.  Up
to three prompts are stored in this way.  Thus, the prompt that is
received in response to sending the first string (with the AUTH command)
can be used in the expansion of the second string, and so on.  If an
invalid base64 string is received when ‘client_ignore_invalid_base64’ is
set, an empty string is put in the ‘$auth’<_n_> variable.

   *Note*: You cannot use expansion to create multiple strings, because
splitting takes priority and happens first.

   Because the PLAIN authentication mechanism requires NUL (binary zero)
bytes in the data, further processing is applied to each string before
it is sent.  If there are any single circumflex characters in the
string, they are converted to NULs.  Should an actual circumflex be
required as data, it must be doubled in the string.

   This is an example of a client configuration that implements the
PLAIN authentication mechanism with a fixed user name and password:

     fixed_plain:
       driver = plaintext
       public_name = PLAIN
       client_send = ^username^mysecret

   The lack of colons means that the entire text is sent with the AUTH
command, with the circumflex characters converted to NULs.  Note that
due to the ambiguity of parsing three consectutive circumflex characters
there is no way to provide a password having a leading circumflex.

   A similar example that uses the LOGIN mechanism is:

     fixed_login:
       driver = plaintext
       public_name = LOGIN
       client_send = : username : mysecret

   The initial colon means that the first string is empty, so no data is
sent with the AUTH command itself.  The remaining strings are sent in
response to prompts.


File: spec.info,  Node: The cram_md5 authenticator,  Next: The cyrus_sasl authenticator,  Prev: The plaintext authenticator,  Up: Top

35 The cram_md5 authenticator
*****************************

The CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism is described in *RFC 2195
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2195)*.  The server sends a
challenge string to the client, and the response consists of a user name
and the CRAM-MD5 digest of the challenge string combined with a secret
string (password) which is known to both server and client.  Thus, the
secret is not sent over the network as plain text, which makes this
authenticator more secure than ‘plaintext’.  However, the downside is
that the secret has to be available in plain text at either end.

* Menu:

* Using cram_md5 as a server::
* Using cram_md5 as a client::


File: spec.info,  Node: Using cram_md5 as a server,  Next: Using cram_md5 as a client,  Up: The cram_md5 authenticator

35.1 Using cram_md5 as a server
===============================

This authenticator has one server option, which must be set to configure
the authenticator as a server:

‘server_secret’        Use: _cram_md5_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   When the server receives the client's response, the user name is
placed in the expansion variable ‘$auth1’, and ‘server_secret’ is
expanded to obtain the password for that user.  The server then computes
the CRAM-MD5 digest that the client should have sent, and checks that it
received the correct string.  If the expansion of ‘server_secret’ is
forced to fail, authentication fails.  If the expansion fails for some
other reason, a temporary error code is returned to the client.

   For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the user name is
also placed in ‘$1’.  However, the use of this variables for this
purpose is now deprecated, as it can lead to confusion in string
expansions that also use numeric variables for other things.

   For example, the following authenticator checks that the user name
given by the client is "ph10", and if so, uses "secret" as the password.
For any other user name, authentication fails.

     fixed_cram:
       driver = cram_md5
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       server_secret = ${if eq{$auth1}{ph10}{secret}fail}
       server_set_id = $auth1

   If authentication succeeds, the setting of ‘server_set_id’ preserves
the user name in ‘$authenticated_id’.  A more typical configuration
might look up the secret string in a file, using the user name as the
key.  For example:

     lookup_cram:
       driver = cram_md5
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       server_secret = ${lookup{$auth1}lsearch{/etc/authpwd}\
                       {$value}fail}
       server_set_id = $auth1

   Note that this expansion explicitly forces failure if the lookup
fails because ‘$auth1’ contains an unknown user name.

   As another example, if you wish to re-use a Cyrus SASL sasldb2 file
without using the relevant libraries, you need to know the realm to
specify in the lookup and then ask for the "userPassword" attribute for
that user in that realm, with:

     cyrusless_crammd5:
       driver = cram_md5
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       server_secret = ${lookup{$auth1:mail.example.org:userPassword}\
                       dbmjz{/etc/sasldb2}{$value}fail}
       server_set_id = $auth1


File: spec.info,  Node: Using cram_md5 as a client,  Prev: Using cram_md5 as a server,  Up: The cram_md5 authenticator

35.2 Using cram_md5 as a client
===============================

When used as a client, the ‘cram_md5’ authenticator has two options:

‘client_name’          Use: _cram_md5_   Type:             Default: _the
                                         _string_*__       primary host
                                                           name_

   This string is expanded, and the result used as the user name data
when computing the response to the server's challenge.

‘client_secret’        Use: _cram_md5_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option must be set for the authenticator to work as a client.
Its value is expanded and the result used as the secret string when
computing the response.

   Different user names and secrets can be used for different servers by
referring to ‘$host’ or ‘$host_address’ in the options.  Forced failure
of either expansion string is treated as an indication that this
authenticator is not prepared to handle this case.  Exim moves on to the
next configured client authenticator.  Any other expansion failure
causes Exim to give up trying to send the message to the current server.

   A simple example configuration of a ‘cram_md5’ authenticator, using
fixed strings, is:

     fixed_cram:
       driver = cram_md5
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       client_name = ph10
       client_secret = secret


File: spec.info,  Node: The cyrus_sasl authenticator,  Next: The dovecot authenticator,  Prev: The cram_md5 authenticator,  Up: Top

36 The cyrus_sasl authenticator
*******************************

The code for this authenticator was provided by Matthew Byng-Maddick
while at A L Digital Ltd.

   The ‘cyrus_sasl’ authenticator provides server support for the Cyrus
SASL library implementation of the *RFC 2222
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2222)* ("Simple Authentication
and Security Layer").  This library supports a number of authentication
mechanisms, including PLAIN and LOGIN, but also several others that Exim
does not support directly.  In particular, there is support for Kerberos
authentication.

   The ‘cyrus_sasl’ authenticator provides a gatewaying mechanism
directly to the Cyrus interface, so if your Cyrus library can do, for
example, CRAM-MD5, then so can the ‘cyrus_sasl’ authenticator.  By
default it uses the public name of the driver to determine which
mechanism to support.

   Where access to some kind of secret file is required, for example, in
GSSAPI or CRAM-MD5, it is worth noting that the authenticator runs as
the Exim user, and that the Cyrus SASL library has no way of escalating
privileges by default.  You may also find you need to set environment
variables, depending on the driver you are using.

   The application name provided by Exim is "exim", so various SASL
options may be set in ‘exim.conf’ in your SASL directory.  If you are
using GSSAPI for Kerberos, note that because of limitations in the
GSSAPI interface, changing the server keytab might need to be
communicated down to the Kerberos layer independently.  The mechanism
for doing so is dependent upon the Kerberos implementation.

   For example, for older releases of Heimdal, the environment variable
KRB5_KTNAME may be set to point to an alternative keytab file.  Exim
will pass this variable through from its own inherited environment when
started as root or the Exim user.  The keytab file needs to be readable
by the Exim user.  With newer releases of Heimdal, a setuid Exim may
cause Heimdal to discard the environment variable.  In practice, for
those releases, the Cyrus authenticator is not a suitable interface for
GSSAPI (Kerberos) support.  Instead, consider the ‘heimdal_gssapi’
authenticator, described in chapter *note The heimdal_gssapi
authenticator::

* Menu:

* Using cyrus_sasl as a server::


File: spec.info,  Node: Using cyrus_sasl as a server,  Up: The cyrus_sasl authenticator

36.1 Using cyrus_sasl as a server
=================================

The ‘cyrus_sasl’ authenticator has four private options.  It puts the
username (on a successful authentication) into ‘$auth1’.  For
compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the username is also
placed in ‘$1’.  However, the use of this variable for this purpose is
now deprecated, as it can lead to confusion in string expansions that
also use numeric variables for other things.

‘server_hostname’      Use:              Type:             Default: _see
                       _cyrus_sasl_      _string_*__       below_

   This option selects the hostname that is used when communicating with
the library.  The default value is ‘$primary_hostname’.  It is up to the
underlying SASL plug-in what it does with this data.

‘server_mech’          Use:              Type: _string_    Default: _see
                       _cyrus_sasl_                        below_

   This option selects the authentication mechanism this driver should
use.  The default is the value of the generic ‘public_name’ option.
This option allows you to use a different underlying mechanism from the
advertised name.  For example:

     sasl:
       driver = cyrus_sasl
       public_name = X-ANYTHING
       server_mech = CRAM-MD5
       server_set_id = $auth1

‘server_realm’         Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _cyrus_sasl_      _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the SASL realm that the server claims to be in.

‘server_service’       Use:              Type: _string_    Default:
                       _cyrus_sasl_                        _‘smtp’_

   This is the SASL service that the server claims to implement.

   For straightforward cases, you do not need to set any of the
authenticator's private options.  All you need to do is to specify an
appropriate mechanism as the public name.  Thus, if you have a SASL
library that supports CRAM-MD5 and PLAIN, you could have two
authenticators as follows:

     sasl_cram_md5:
       driver = cyrus_sasl
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       server_set_id = $auth1

     sasl_plain:
       driver = cyrus_sasl
       public_name = PLAIN
       server_set_id = $auth2

   Cyrus SASL does implement the LOGIN authentication method, even
though it is not a standard method.  It is disabled by default in the
source distribution, but it is present in many binary distributions.


File: spec.info,  Node: The dovecot authenticator,  Next: The gsasl authenticator,  Prev: The cyrus_sasl authenticator,  Up: Top

37 The dovecot authenticator
****************************

This authenticator is an interface to the authentication facility of the
Dovecot 2 POP/IMAP server, which can support a number of authentication
methods.  Note that Dovecot must be configured to use auth-client not
auth-userdb.  If you are using Dovecot to authenticate POP/IMAP clients,
it might be helpful to use the same mechanisms for SMTP authentication.
This is a server authenticator only.  There is only one non-generic
option:

‘server_socket’        Use: _dovecot_    Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _unset_

   This option must specify the UNIX socket that is the interface to
Dovecot authentication.  The ‘public_name’ option must specify an
authentication mechanism that Dovecot is configured to support.  You can
have several authenticators for different mechanisms.  For example:

     dovecot_plain:
       driver = dovecot
       public_name = PLAIN
       server_advertise_condition = ${if def:tls_in_cipher}
       server_socket = /var/run/dovecot/auth-client
       server_set_id = $auth1

     dovecot_ntlm:
       driver = dovecot
       public_name = NTLM
       server_socket = /var/run/dovecot/auth-client
       server_set_id = $auth1

   *Note*: plaintext authentication methods such as PLAIN and LOGIN
should not be advertised on cleartext SMTP connections.  See the
discussion in section *note Avoiding cleartext use::.

   If the SMTP connection is encrypted, or if ‘$sender_host_address’ is
equal to ‘$received_ip_address’ (that is, the connection is local), the
"secured" option is passed in the Dovecot authentication command.  If,
for a TLS connection, a client certificate has been verified, the
"valid-client-cert" option is passed.  When authentication succeeds, the
identity of the user who authenticated is placed in ‘$auth1’.

   The Dovecot configuration to match the above will look something
like:

     conf.d/10-master.conf :-

     service auth {
     ...
     #SASL
       unix_listener auth-client {
         mode = 0660
         user = mail
       }
     ...
     }

     conf.d/10-auth.conf :-

     auth_mechanisms = plain login ntlm


File: spec.info,  Node: The gsasl authenticator,  Next: The heimdal_gssapi authenticator,  Prev: The dovecot authenticator,  Up: Top

38 The gsasl authenticator
**************************

The ‘gsasl’ authenticator provides integration for the GNU SASL library
and the mechanisms it provides.  This is new as of the 4.80 release and
there are a few areas where the library does not let Exim smoothly scale
to handle future authentication mechanisms, so no guarantee can be made
that any particular new authentication mechanism will be supported
without code changes in Exim.

   The library is expected to add support in an upcoming realease for
the SCRAM-SHA-256 method.  The macro _HAVE_AUTH_GSASL_SCRAM_SHA_256 will
be defined when this happens.

   To see the list of mechanisms supported by the library run Exim with
"auth" debug enabled and look for a line containing "GNU SASL supports".
Note however that some may not have been tested from Exim.

‘client_authz’         Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option can be used to supply an _authorization id_ which is
different to the _authentication_id_ provided by ‘client_username’
option.  If unset or (after expansion) empty it is not used, which is
the common case.

‘client_channelbinding’Use: _gsasl_      Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   See ‘server_channelbinding’ below.

‘client_password’      Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is exapanded before use, and should result in the
password to be used, in clear.

‘client_username’      Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is exapanded before use, and should result in the account
name to be used.

‘client_spassword’     Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is only supported for library versions 1.9.1 and greater.
The macro _HAVE_AUTH_GSASL_SCRAM_S_KEY will be defined when this is so.

   If a SCRAM mechanism is being used and this option is set and
correctly sized it is used in preference to ‘client_password’.  The
value after expansion should be a 40 (for SHA-1) or 64 (for SHA-256)
character string with the PBKDF2-prepared password, hex-encoded.

   Note that this value will depend on the salt and iteration-count
supplied by the server.  The option is expanded before use.  During the
expansion ‘$auth1’ is set with the client username, ‘$auth2’ with the
iteration count, and ‘$auth3’ with the salt.

   The intent of this option is to support clients that can cache thes
salted password to save on recalculation costs.  The cache lookup should
return an unusable value (eg.  an empty string) if the salt or iteration
count has changed

   If the authentication succeeds then the above variables are set, plus
the calculated salted password value value in ‘$auth4’, during the
expansion of the ‘client_set_id’ option.  A side-effect of this
expansion can be used to prime the cache.

‘server_channelbinding’Use: _gsasl_      Type: _boolean_   Default:
                                                           _false_

   Some authentication mechanisms are able to use external context at
both ends of the session to bind the authentication to that context, and
fail the authentication process if that context differs.  Specifically,
some TLS ciphersuites can provide identifying information about the
cryptographic context.

   This should have meant that certificate identity and verification
becomes a non-issue, as a man-in-the-middle attack will cause the
correct client and server to see different identifiers and
authentication will fail.

   This is only usable by mechanisms which support "channel binding"; at
time of writing, that's the SCRAM family.  When using this feature the
"-PLUS" variants of the method names need to be used.

   This defaults off to ensure smooth upgrade across Exim releases, in
case this option causes some clients to start failing.  Some future
release of Exim might have switched the default to be true.

   This option was deprecated in previous releases due to doubts over
the "Triple Handshake" vulnerability.  Exim takes suitable precausions
(requiring Extended Master Secret if TLS Session Resumption was used)
for safety.

‘server_hostname’      Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   This option selects the hostname that is used when communicating with
the library.  The default value is ‘$primary_hostname’.  Some mechanisms
will use this data.

‘server_mech’          Use: _gsasl_      Type: _string_    Default: _see
                                                           below_

   This option selects the authentication mechanism this driver should
use.  It applies to both server and client modes.  The default is the
value of the generic ‘public_name’ option.  This option allows you to
use a different underlying mechanism from the advertised name.  For
example:

     sasl:
       driver = gsasl
       public_name = X-ANYTHING
       server_mech = CRAM-MD5
       server_set_id = $auth1

‘server_password’      Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   Various mechanisms need access to the cleartext password on the
server, so that proof-of-possession can be demonstrated on the wire,
without sending the password itself.

   The data available for lookup varies per mechanism.  In all cases,
‘$auth1’ is set to the _authentication id_.  The ‘$auth2’ variable will
always be the _authorization id_ (_authz_) if available, else the empty
string.  The ‘$auth3’ variable will always be the _realm_ if available,
else the empty string.

   A forced failure will cause authentication to defer.

   If using this option, it may make sense to set the ‘server_condition’
option to be simply "true".

‘server_realm’         Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This specifies the SASL realm that the server claims to be in.  Some
mechanisms will use this data.

‘server_scram_iter’    Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default: _4096_
                                         _string_*__

   This option provides data for the SCRAM family of mechanisms.  The
‘$auth1’, ‘$auth2’ and ‘$auth3’ variables are available when this option
is expanded.

   The result of expansion should be a decimal number, and represents
both a lower-bound on the security, and a compute cost factor imposed on
the client (if it does not cache results, or the server changes either
the iteration count or the salt).  A minimum value of 4096 is required
by the standards for all current SCRAM mechanism variants.

‘server_scram_salt’    Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option provides data for the SCRAM family of mechanisms.  The
‘$auth1’, ‘$auth2’ and ‘$auth3’ variables are available when this option
is expanded.  The value should be a base64-encoded string, of random
data typically 4-to-16 bytes long.  If unset or empty after expansion
the library will provides a value for the protocol conversation.

‘server_key’           Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

‘server_skey’          Use: _gsasl_      Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   These options can be used for the SCRAM family of mechanisms to
provide stored information related to a password, the storage of which
is preferable to plaintext.

   ‘server_key’ is the value defined in the SCRAM standards as
ServerKey; ‘server_skey’ is StoredKey.

   They are only available for version 1.9.0 (or later) of the gsasl
library.  When this is so, the macros
_OPT_AUTHENTICATOR_GSASL_SERVER_KEY and _HAVE_AUTH_GSASL_SCRAM_S_KEY
will be defined.

   The ‘$authN’ variables are available when these options are expanded.

   If set, the results of expansion should for each should be a 28 (for
SHA-1) or 44 (for SHA-256) character string of base64-coded data, and
will be used in preference to the ‘server_password’ option.  If unset or
not of the right length, ‘server_password’ will be used.

   The libgsasl library release includes a utility _gsasl_ which can be
used to generate these values.

‘server_service’       Use: _gsasl_      Type: _string_    Default:
                                                           _‘smtp’_

   This is the SASL service that the server claims to implement.  Some
mechanisms will use this data.

* Menu:

* gsasl auth variables::


File: spec.info,  Node: gsasl auth variables,  Up: The gsasl authenticator

38.1 gsasl auth variables
=========================

These may be set when evaluating specific options, as detailed above.
They will also be set when evaluating ‘server_condition’.

   Unless otherwise stated below, the ‘gsasl’ integration will use the
following meanings for these variables:

   • ‘$auth1’: the _authentication id_

   • ‘$auth2’: the _authorization id_

   • ‘$auth3’: the _realm_

   On a per-mechanism basis:

   • EXTERNAL: only ‘$auth1’ is set, to the possibly empty
     _authorization id_; the ‘server_condition’ option must be present.

   • ANONYMOUS: only ‘$auth1’ is set, to the possibly empty _anonymous
     token_; the ‘server_condition’ option must be present.

   • GSSAPI: ‘$auth1’ will be set to the _GSSAPI Display Name_; ‘$auth2’
     will be set to the _authorization id_, the ‘server_condition’
     option must be present.

   An _anonymous token_ is something passed along as an unauthenticated
identifier; this is analogous to FTP anonymous authentication passing an
email address, or software-identifier@, as the "password".

   An example showing the password having the realm specified in the
callback and demonstrating a Cyrus SASL to GSASL migration approach is:

     gsasl_cyrusless_crammd5:
       driver = gsasl
       public_name = CRAM-MD5
       server_realm = imap.example.org
       server_password = ${lookup{$auth1:$auth3:userPassword}\
                         dbmjz{/etc/sasldb2}{$value}fail}
       server_set_id = ${quote:$auth1}
       server_condition = yes


File: spec.info,  Node: The heimdal_gssapi authenticator,  Next: The spa authenticator,  Prev: The gsasl authenticator,  Up: Top

39 The heimdal_gssapi authenticator
***********************************

The ‘heimdal_gssapi’ authenticator provides server integration for the
Heimdal GSSAPI/Kerberos library, permitting Exim to set a keytab
pathname reliably.

‘server_hostname’      Use:              Type:             Default: _see
                       _heimdal_gssapi_  _string_*__       below_

   This option selects the hostname that is used, with ‘server_service’,
for constructing the GSS server name, as a _GSS_C_NT_HOSTBASED_SERVICE_
identifier.  The default value is ‘$primary_hostname’.

‘server_keytab’        Use:              Type:             Default:
                       _heimdal_gssapi_  _string_*__       _unset_

   If set, then Heimdal will not use the system default keytab
(typically ‘/etc/krb5.keytab’) but instead the pathname given in this
option.  The value should be a pathname, with no "file:" prefix.

‘server_service’       Use:              Type:             Default: _smtp_
                       _heimdal_gssapi_  _string_*__

   This option specifies the service identifier used, in conjunction
with ‘server_hostname’, for building the identifier for finding
credentials from the keytab.

* Menu:

* heimdal_gssapi auth variables::


File: spec.info,  Node: heimdal_gssapi auth variables,  Up: The heimdal_gssapi authenticator

39.1 heimdal_gssapi auth variables
==================================

Beware that these variables will typically include a realm, thus will
appear to be roughly like an email address already.  The _authzid_ in
‘$auth2’ is not verified, so a malicious client can set it to anything.

   The ‘$auth1’ field should be safely trustable as a value from the Key
Distribution Center.  Note that these are not quite email addresses.
Each identifier is for a role, and so the left-hand-side may include a
role suffix.  For instance, "joe/admin@EXAMPLE.ORG".

   • ‘$auth1’: the _authentication id_, set to the GSS Display Name.

   • ‘$auth2’: the _authorization id_, sent within SASL encapsulation
     after authentication.  If that was empty, this will also be set to
     the GSS Display Name.


File: spec.info,  Node: The spa authenticator,  Next: The external authenticator,  Prev: The heimdal_gssapi authenticator,  Up: Top

40 The spa authenticator
************************

The ‘spa’ authenticator provides client support for Microsoft's _Secure
Password Authentication_ mechanism, which is also sometimes known as
NTLM (NT LanMan).  The code for client side of this authenticator was
contributed by Marc Prud'hommeaux, and much of it is taken from the
*Samba project (https://www.samba.org/)*.  The code for the server side
was subsequently contributed by Tom Kistner.  The mechanism works as
follows:

   • After the AUTH command has been accepted, the client sends an SPA
     authentication request based on the user name and optional domain.

   • The server sends back a challenge.

   • The client builds a challenge response which makes use of the
     user's password and sends it to the server, which then accepts or
     rejects it.

   Encryption is used to protect the password in transit.

* Menu:

* Using spa as a server::
* Using spa as a client::


File: spec.info,  Node: Using spa as a server,  Next: Using spa as a client,  Up: The spa authenticator

40.1 Using spa as a server
==========================

The ‘spa’ authenticator has just one server option:

‘server_password’      Use: _spa_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is expanded, and the result must be the cleartext
password for the authenticating user, whose name is at this point in
‘$auth1’.  For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the user
name is also placed in ‘$1’.  However, the use of this variable for this
purpose is now deprecated, as it can lead to confusion in string
expansions that also use numeric variables for other things.  For
example:

     spa:
       driver = spa
       public_name = NTLM
       server_password = \
         ${lookup{$auth1}lsearch{/etc/exim/spa_clearpass}{$value}fail}

   If the expansion is forced to fail, authentication fails.  Any other
expansion failure causes a temporary error code to be returned.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using spa as a client,  Prev: Using spa as a server,  Up: The spa authenticator

40.2 Using spa as a client
==========================

The ‘spa’ authenticator has the following client options:

‘client_domain’        Use: _spa_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies an optional domain for the authentication.

‘client_password’      Use: _spa_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies the user's password, and must be set.

‘client_username’      Use: _spa_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option specifies the user name, and must be set.  Here is an
example of a configuration of this authenticator for use with the mail
servers at _msn.com_:

     msn:
       driver = spa
       public_name = MSN
       client_username = msn/msn_username
       client_password = msn_plaintext_password
       client_domain = DOMAIN_OR_UNSET


File: spec.info,  Node: The external authenticator,  Next: The tls authenticator,  Prev: The spa authenticator,  Up: Top

41 The external authenticator
*****************************

The ‘external’ authenticator provides support for authentication based
on non-SMTP information.  The specification is in *RFC 4422
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4422#appendix-A)*.  It is only
a transport and negotiation mechanism; the process of authentication is
entirely controlled by the server configuration.

   The client presents an identity in-clear.  It is probably wise for a
server to only advertise, and for clients to only attempt, this
authentication method on a secure (eg.  under TLS) connection.

   One possible use, compatible with the *K-9 Mail Android client
(https://k9mail.github.io/)* is for using X509 client certificates.

   It thus overlaps in function with the TLS authenticator (see *note
The tls authenticator::) but is a full SMTP SASL authenticator rather
than being implicit for TLS-connection carried client certificates only.

   The examples and discussion in this chapter assume that
client-certificate authentication is being done.

   The client must present a certificate, for which it must have been
requested via the ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ main
options (see *note Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted
SMTP connections.).  For authentication to be effective the certificate
should be verifiable against a trust-anchor certificate known to the
server.

* Menu:

* External options::
* Using external in a server::
* Using external in a client::


File: spec.info,  Node: External options,  Next: Using external in a server,  Up: The external authenticator

41.1 External options
=====================

The ‘external’ authenticator has two server options:

‘server_param2’        Use: _external_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

‘server_param3’        Use: _external_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   These options are expanded before the ‘server_condition’ option and
the result are placed in ‘$auth2’ and ‘$auth3’ resectively.  If the
expansion is forced to fail, authentication fails.  Any other expansion
failure causes a temporary error code to be returned.

   They can be used to clarify the coding of a complex
‘server_condition’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using external in a server,  Next: Using external in a client,  Prev: External options,  Up: The external authenticator

41.2 Using external in a server
===============================

When running as a server, ‘external’ performs the authentication test by
expanding a string.  The data sent by the client with the AUTH command,
or in response to subsequent prompts, is base64 encoded, and so may
contain any byte values when decoded.  The decoded value is treated as
an identity for authentication and placed in the expansion variable
‘$auth1’.

   For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, the value is also
placed in the expansion variable ‘$1’.  However, the use of this
variable for this purpose is now deprecated, as it can lead to confusion
in string expansions that also use them for other things.

   Once an identity has been received, ‘server_condition’ is expanded.
If the expansion is forced to fail, authentication fails.  Any other
expansion failure causes a temporary error code to be returned.  If the
result of a successful expansion is an empty string, "0", "no", or
"false", authentication fails.  If the result of the expansion is "1",
"yes", or "true", authentication succeeds and the generic
‘server_set_id’ option is expanded and saved in ‘$authenticated_id’.
For any other result, a temporary error code is returned, with the
expanded string as the error text.

   Example:

     ext_ccert_san_mail:
       driver =            external
       public_name =       EXTERNAL

       server_advertise_condition = $tls_in_certificate_verified
       server_param2 =     ${certextract {subj_altname,mail,>:} \
                                         {$tls_in_peercert}}
       server_condition =  ${if forany {$auth2} \
                                 {eq {$item}{$auth1}}}
       server_set_id =     $auth1

   This accepts a client certificate that is verifiable against any of
your configured trust-anchors (which usually means the full set of
public CAs) and which has a mail-SAN matching the claimed identity sent
by the client.

   *Note*: up to TLS1.2, the client cert is on the wire in-clear,
including the SAN. The account name is therefore guessable by an
opponent.  TLS 1.3 protects both server and client certificates, and is
not vulnerable in this way.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using external in a client,  Prev: Using external in a server,  Up: The external authenticator

41.3 Using external in a client
===============================

The ‘external’ authenticator has one client option:

‘client_send’          Use: _external_   Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is expanded and sent with the AUTH command as the
identity being asserted.

   Example:

     ext_ccert:
       driver =      external
       public_name = EXTERNAL

       client_condition = ${if !eq{$tls_out_cipher}{}}
       client_send = myaccount@smarthost.example.net


File: spec.info,  Node: The tls authenticator,  Next: Encrypted SMTP connections,  Prev: The external authenticator,  Up: Top

42 The tls authenticator
************************

The ‘tls’ authenticator provides server support for authentication based
on client certificates.

   It is not an SMTP authentication mechanism and is not advertised by
the server as part of the SMTP EHLO response.  It is an Exim
authenticator in the sense that it affects the protocol element of the
log line, can be tested for by the ‘authenticated’ ACL condition, and
can set the ‘$authenticated_id’ variable.

   The client must present a verifiable certificate, for which it must
have been requested via the ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’
main options (see *note Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL:
Encrypted SMTP connections.).

   If an authenticator of this type is configured it is run immediately
after a TLS connection being negotiated (due to either STARTTLS or
TLS-on-connect) and can authenticate the connection.  If it does, SMTP
authentication is not subsequently offered.

   A maximum of one authenticator of this type may be present.

   The ‘tls’ authenticator has three server options:

‘server_param1’        Use: _tls_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option is expanded after the TLS negotiation and the result is
placed in ‘$auth1’.  If the expansion is forced to fail, authentication
fails.  Any other expansion failure causes a temporary error code to be
returned.

‘server_param2’        Use: _tls_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

‘server_param3’        Use: _tls_        Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   As above, for ‘$auth2’ and ‘$auth3’.

   ‘server_param1’ may also be spelled ‘server_param’.

   Example:

     tls:
       driver = tls
       server_param1 =     ${certextract {subj_altname,mail,>:} \
                                         {$tls_in_peercert}}
       server_condition =  ${if and { {eq{$tls_in_certificate_verified}{1}} \
                                      {forany {$auth1} \
                                 {!= {0} \
                                     {${lookup ldap{ldap:///\
                              mailname=${quote_ldap_dn:${lc:$item}},\
                              ou=users,LDAP_DC?mailid} {$value}{0} \
                            }    }  } }}}
       server_set_id =     ${if = {1}{${listcount:$auth1}} {$auth1}{}}

   This accepts a client certificate that is verifiable against any of
your configured trust-anchors (which usually means the full set of
public CAs) and which has a SAN with a good account name.

   Note that, up to TLS1.2, the client cert is on the wire in-clear,
including the SAN, The account name is therefore guessable by an
opponent.  TLS 1.3 protects both server and client certificates, and is
not vulnerable in this way.  Likewise, a traditional plaintext SMTP AUTH
done inside TLS is not.

   Note that because authentication is traditionally an SMTP operation,
the ‘authenticated’ ACL condition cannot be used in a connect- or
helo-ACL.


File: spec.info,  Node: Encrypted SMTP connections,  Next: Access control lists,  Prev: The tls authenticator,  Up: Top

43 Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL
*******************************************

Support for TLS (Transport Layer Security), formerly known as SSL
(Secure Sockets Layer), is implemented by making use of the OpenSSL
library or the GnuTLS library (Exim requires GnuTLS release 1.0 or
later).  There is no cryptographic code in the Exim distribution itself
for implementing TLS. In order to use this feature you must install
OpenSSL or GnuTLS, and then build a version of Exim that includes TLS
support (see section *note Including TLS/SSL encryption support::).  You
also need to understand the basic concepts of encryption at a managerial
level, and in particular, the way that public keys, private keys, and
certificates are used.

   *RFC 3207 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3207)* defines
how SMTP connections can make use of encryption.  Once a connection is
established, the client issues a STARTTLS command.  If the server
accepts this, the client and the server negotiate an encryption
mechanism.  If the negotiation succeeds, the data that subsequently
passes between them is encrypted.

   Exim's ACLs can detect whether the current SMTP session is encrypted
or not, and if so, what cipher suite is in use, whether the client
supplied a certificate, and whether or not that certificate was
verified.  This makes it possible for an Exim server to deny or accept
certain commands based on the encryption state.

   *Warning*: Certain types of firewall and certain anti-virus products
can disrupt TLS connections.  You need to turn off SMTP scanning for
these products in order to get TLS to work.

* Menu:

* Support for the "submissions" (aka "ssmtp" and "smtps") protocol: Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
* OpenSSL vs GnuTLS::
* GnuTLS parameter computation::
* Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL::
* Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS::
* Configuring an Exim server to use TLS::
* Configuring an Exim client to use TLS::
* Use of TLS Server Name Indication::
* Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection::
* Certificates and all that::
* TLS Resumption::
* DANE::


File: spec.info,  Node: Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol,  Next: OpenSSL vs GnuTLS,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.1 Support for the "submissions" (aka "ssmtp" and "smtps") protocol
=====================================================================

The history of port numbers for TLS in SMTP is a little messy and has
been contentious.  As of *RFC 8314
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8314)*, the common practice of
using the historically allocated port 465 for "email submission but with
TLS immediately upon connect instead of using STARTTLS" is officially
blessed by the IETF, and recommended by them in preference to STARTTLS.

   The name originally assigned to the port was "ssmtp" or "smtps", but
as clarity emerged over the dual roles of SMTP, for MX delivery and
Email Submission, nomenclature has shifted.  The modern name is now
"submissions".

   This approach was, for a while, officially abandoned when encrypted
SMTP was standardized, but many clients kept using it, even as the TCP
port number was reassigned for other use.  Thus you may encounter
guidance claiming that you shouldn't enable use of this port.  In
practice, a number of mail-clients have only ever supported submissions,
not submission with STARTTLS upgrade.  Ideally, offer both submission
(587) and submissions (465) service.

   Exim supports TLS-on-connect by means of the ‘tls_on_connect_ports’
global option.  Its value must be a list of port numbers; the most
common use is expected to be:

     tls_on_connect_ports = 465

   The port numbers specified by this option apply to all SMTP
connections, both via the daemon and via _inetd_.  You still need to
specify all the ports that the daemon uses (by setting
‘daemon_smtp_ports’ or ‘local_interfaces’ or the ‘-oX’ command line
option) because ‘tls_on_connect_ports’ does not add an extra port -
rather, it specifies different behaviour on a port that is defined
elsewhere.

   There is also a ‘-tls-on-connect’ command line option.  This
overrides ‘tls_on_connect_ports’; it forces the TLS-only behaviour for
all ports.


File: spec.info,  Node: OpenSSL vs GnuTLS,  Next: GnuTLS parameter computation,  Prev: Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.2 OpenSSL vs GnuTLS
======================

TLS is supported in Exim using either the OpenSSL or GnuTLS library.  To
build Exim to use OpenSSL you need to set

     USE_OPENSSL=yes

   in Local/Makefile.

   To build Exim to use GnuTLS, you need to set

     USE_GNUTLS=yes

   in Local/Makefile.

   You must also set TLS_LIBS and TLS_INCLUDE appropriately, so that the
include files and libraries for GnuTLS can be found.

   There are some differences in usage when using GnuTLS instead of
OpenSSL:

   • The ‘tls_verify_certificates’ option cannot be the path of a
     directory for GnuTLS versions before 3.3.6 (for later versions, or
     OpenSSL, it can be either).

   • The default value for ‘tls_dhparam’ differs for historical reasons.

   • Distinguished Name (DN) strings reported by the OpenSSL library use
     a slash for separating fields; GnuTLS uses commas, in accordance
     with *RFC 2253
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2253#section-2.1)*.  This
     affects the value of the ‘$tls_in_peerdn’ and ‘$tls_out_peerdn’
     variables.

   • OpenSSL identifies cipher suites using hyphens as separators, for
     example: DES-CBC3-SHA. GnuTLS historically used underscores, for
     example: RSA_ARCFOUR_SHA. What is more, OpenSSL complains if
     underscores are present in a cipher list.  To make life simpler,
     Exim changes underscores to hyphens for OpenSSL and passes the
     string unchanged to GnuTLS (expecting the library to handle its own
     older variants) when processing lists of cipher suites in the
     ‘tls_require_ciphers’ options (the global option and the ‘smtp’
     transport option).

   • The ‘tls_require_ciphers’ options operate differently, as described
     in the sections *note Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL:: and
     *note Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS::.

   • The ‘tls_dh_min_bits’ SMTP transport option is only honoured by
     GnuTLS. When using OpenSSL, this option is ignored.  (If an API is
     found to let OpenSSL be configured in this way, let the Exim
     Maintainers know and we'll likely use it).

   • With GnuTLS, if an explicit list is used for the ‘tls_privatekey’
     main option, it must be ordered to match the ‘tls_certificate’
     list.

   • Some other recently added features may only be available in one or
     the other.  This should be documented with the feature.  If the
     documentation does not explicitly state that the feature is
     infeasible in the other TLS implementation, then patches are
     welcome.

   • The output from "exim -bV" will show which (if any) support was
     included in the build.  Also, the macro "_HAVE_OPENSSL" or
     "_HAVE_GNUTLS" will be defined.


File: spec.info,  Node: GnuTLS parameter computation,  Next: Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL,  Prev: OpenSSL vs GnuTLS,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.3 GnuTLS parameter computation
=================================

This section only applies if ‘tls_dhparam’ is set to ‘historic’ or to an
explicit path; if the latter, then the text about generation still
applies, but not the chosen filename.  By default, as of Exim 4.80 a
hard-coded D-H prime is used.  See the documentation of ‘tls_dhparam’
for more information.

   GnuTLS uses D-H parameters that may take a substantial amount of time
to compute.  It is unreasonable to re-compute them for every TLS
session.  Therefore, Exim keeps this data in a file in its spool
directory, called ‘gnutls-params-NNNN’ for some value of NNNN,
corresponding to the number of bits requested.  The file is owned by the
Exim user and is readable only by its owner.  Every Exim process that
start up GnuTLS reads the D-H parameters from this file.  If the file
does not exist, the first Exim process that needs it computes the data
and writes it to a temporary file which is renamed once it is complete.
It does not matter if several Exim processes do this simultaneously
(apart from wasting a few resources).  Once a file is in place, new Exim
processes immediately start using it.

   For maximum security, the parameters that are stored in this file
should be recalculated periodically, the frequency depending on your
paranoia level.  If you are avoiding using the fixed D-H primes
published in RFCs, then you are concerned about some advanced attacks
and will wish to do this; if you do not regenerate then you might as
well stick to the standard primes.

   Arranging this is easy in principle; just delete the file when you
want new values to be computed.  However, there may be a problem.  The
calculation of new parameters needs random numbers, and these are
obtained from ‘/dev/random’.  If the system is not very active,
‘/dev/random’ may delay returning data until enough randomness (entropy)
is available.  This may cause Exim to hang for a substantial amount of
time, causing timeouts on incoming connections.

   The solution is to generate the parameters externally to Exim.  They
are stored in ‘gnutls-params-N’ in PEM format, which means that they can
be generated externally using the ‘certtool’ command that is part of
GnuTLS.

   To replace the parameters with new ones, instead of deleting the file
and letting Exim re-create it, you can generate new parameters using
‘certtool’ and, when this has been done, replace Exim's cache file by
renaming.  The relevant commands are something like this:

     # ls
     [ look for file; assume gnutls-params-2236 is the most recent ]
     # rm -f new-params
     # touch new-params
     # chown exim:exim new-params
     # chmod 0600 new-params
     # certtool --generate-dh-params --bits 2236 >>new-params
     # openssl dhparam -noout -text -in new-params | head
     [ check the first line, make sure it's not more than 2236;
       if it is, then go back to the start ("rm") and repeat
       until the size generated is at most the size requested ]
     # chmod 0400 new-params
     # mv new-params gnutls-params-2236

   If Exim never has to generate the parameters itself, the possibility
of stalling is removed.

   The filename changed in Exim 4.80, to gain the -bits suffix.  The
value which Exim will choose depends upon the version of GnuTLS in use.
For older GnuTLS, the value remains hard-coded in Exim as 1024.  As of
GnuTLS 2.12.x, there is a way for Exim to ask for the "normal" number of
bits for D-H public-key usage, and Exim does so.  This attempt to remove
Exim from TLS policy decisions failed, as GnuTLS 2.12 returns a value
higher than the current hard-coded limit of the NSS library.  Thus Exim
gains the ‘tls_dh_max_bits’ global option, which applies to all D-H
usage, client or server.  If the value returned by GnuTLS is greater
than ‘tls_dh_max_bits’ then the value will be clamped down to
‘tls_dh_max_bits’.  The default value has been set at the current NSS
limit, which is still much higher than Exim historically used.

   The filename and bits used will change as the GnuTLS maintainers
change the value for their parameter ‘GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_NORMAL’, as
clamped by ‘tls_dh_max_bits’.  At the time of writing (mid 2012), GnuTLS
2.12 recommends 2432 bits, while NSS is limited to 2236 bits.

   In fact, the requested value will be *lower* than ‘tls_dh_max_bits’,
to increase the chance of the generated prime actually being within
acceptable bounds, as GnuTLS has been observed to overshoot.  Note the
check step in the procedure above.  There is no sane procedure available
to Exim to double-check the size of the generated prime, so it might
still be too large.


File: spec.info,  Node: Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL,  Next: Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS,  Prev: GnuTLS parameter computation,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.4 Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL
==========================================

There is a function in the OpenSSL library that can be passed a list of
cipher suites before the cipher negotiation takes place.  This specifies
which ciphers are acceptable for TLS versions prior to 1.3.  The list is
colon separated and may contain names like DES-CBC3-SHA. Exim passes the
expanded value of ‘tls_require_ciphers’ directly to this function call.
Many systems will install the OpenSSL manual-pages, so you may have
_ciphers(1)_ available to you.  The following quotation from the OpenSSL
documentation specifies what forms of item are allowed in the cipher
string:

   • It can consist of a single cipher suite such as RC4-SHA.

   • It can represent a list of cipher suites containing a certain
     algorithm, or cipher suites of a certain type.  For example SHA1
     represents all ciphers suites using the digest algorithm SHA1 and
     SSLv3 represents all SSL v3 algorithms.

   • Lists of cipher suites can be combined in a single cipher string
     using the + character.  This is used as a logical and operation.
     For example SHA1+DES represents all cipher suites containing the
     SHA1 and the DES algorithms.

   Each cipher string can be optionally preceded by one of the
characters ‘!’, ‘-’ or ‘+’.

   • If ‘!’ is used, the ciphers are permanently deleted from the list.
     The ciphers deleted can never reappear in the list even if they are
     explicitly stated.

   • If ‘-’ is used, the ciphers are deleted from the list, but some or
     all of the ciphers can be added again by later options.

   • If ‘+’ is used, the ciphers are moved to the end of the list.  This
     option does not add any new ciphers; it just moves matching
     existing ones.

   If none of these characters is present, the string is interpreted as
a list of ciphers to be appended to the current preference list.  If the
list includes any ciphers already present they will be ignored: that is,
they will not be moved to the end of the list.

   The OpenSSL _ciphers(1)_ command may be used to test the results of a
given string:

     # note single-quotes to get ! past any shell history expansion
     $ openssl ciphers 'HIGH:!MD5:!SHA1'

   This example will let the library defaults be permitted on the MX
port, where there's probably no identity verification anyway, but ups
the ante on the submission ports where the administrator might have some
influence on the choice of clients used:

     # OpenSSL variant; see man ciphers(1)
     tls_require_ciphers = ${if =={$received_port}{25}\
                                {DEFAULT}\
                                {HIGH:!MD5:!SHA1}}

   This example will prefer ECDSA-authenticated ciphers over RSA ones:

     tls_require_ciphers = ECDSA:RSA:!COMPLEMENTOFDEFAULT

   For TLS version 1.3 the control available is less fine-grained and
Exim does not provide access to it at present.  The value of the
‘tls_require_ciphers’ option is ignored when TLS version 1.3 is
negotiated.

   As of writing the library default cipher suite list for TLSv1.3 is

     TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384:TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256:TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256


File: spec.info,  Node: Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS,  Next: Configuring an Exim server to use TLS,  Prev: Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.5 Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS
=============================================================

The GnuTLS library allows the caller to provide a "priority string",
documented as part of the ‘gnutls_priority_init’ function.  This is very
similar to the ciphersuite specification in OpenSSL.

   The ‘tls_require_ciphers’ option is treated as the GnuTLS priority
string and controls both protocols and ciphers.

   The ‘tls_require_ciphers’ option is available both as an global
option, controlling how Exim behaves as a server, and also as an option
of the ‘smtp’ transport, controlling how Exim behaves as a client.  In
both cases the value is string expanded.  The resulting string is not an
Exim list and the string is given to the GnuTLS library, so that Exim
does not need to be aware of future feature enhancements of GnuTLS.

   Documentation of the strings accepted may be found in the GnuTLS
manual, under "Priority strings".  This is online as
*https://www.gnutls.org/manual/html_node/Priority-Strings.html
(https://www.gnutls.org/manual/html_node/Priority-Strings.html)*, but
beware that this relates to GnuTLS 3, which may be newer than the
version installed on your system.  If you are using GnuTLS 3, then the
example code
*https://www.gnutls.org/manual/gnutls.html#Listing-the-ciphersuites-in-a-priority-string
(https://www.gnutls.org/manual/gnutls.html#Listing-the-ciphersuites-in-a-priority-string)*
on that site can be used to test a given string.

   For example:

     # Disable older versions of protocols
     tls_require_ciphers = NORMAL:%LATEST_RECORD_VERSION:-VERS-SSL3.0

   Prior to Exim 4.80, an older API of GnuTLS was used, and Exim
supported three additional options, "‘gnutls_require_kx’",
"‘gnutls_require_mac’" and "‘gnutls_require_protocols’".
‘tls_require_ciphers’ was an Exim list.

   This example will let the library defaults be permitted on the MX
port, where there's probably no identity verification anyway, and lowers
security further by increasing compatibility; but this ups the ante on
the submission ports where the administrator might have some influence
on the choice of clients used:

     # GnuTLS variant
     tls_require_ciphers = ${if =={$received_port}{25}\
                                {NORMAL:%COMPAT}\
                                {SECURE128}}


File: spec.info,  Node: Configuring an Exim server to use TLS,  Next: Configuring an Exim client to use TLS,  Prev: Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.6 Configuring an Exim server to use TLS
==========================================

When Exim has been built with TLS support, it advertises the
availability of the STARTTLS command to client hosts that match
‘tls_advertise_hosts’, but not to any others.  The default value of this
option is *, which means that STARTTLS is always advertised.  Set it to
blank to never advertise; this is reasonable for systems that want to
use TLS only as a client.

   If STARTTLS is to be used you need to set some other options in order
to make TLS available.

   If a client issues a STARTTLS command and there is some configuration
problem in the server, the command is rejected with a 454 error.  If the
client persists in trying to issue SMTP commands, all except QUIT are
rejected with the error

     554 Security failure

   If a STARTTLS command is issued within an existing TLS session, it is
rejected with a 554 error code.

   To enable TLS operations on a server, the ‘tls_advertise_hosts’
option must be set to match some hosts.  The default is * which matches
all hosts.

   If this is all you do, TLS encryption will be enabled but not
authentication - meaning that the peer has no assurance it is actually
you he is talking to.  You gain protection from a passive sniffer
listening on the wire but not from someone able to intercept the
communication.

   Further protection requires some further configuration at the server
end.

   To make TLS work you need to set, in the server,

     tls_certificate = /some/file/name
     tls_privatekey = /some/file/name

   These options are, in fact, expanded strings, so you can make them
depend on the identity of the client that is connected if you wish.  The
first file contains the server's X509 certificate, and the second
contains the private key that goes with it.  These files need to be PEM
format and readable by the Exim user, and must always be given as full
path names.  The key must not be password-protected.  They can be the
same file if both the certificate and the key are contained within it.
If ‘tls_privatekey’ is not set, or if its expansion is forced to fail or
results in an empty string, this is assumed to be the case.  The
certificate file may also contain intermediate certificates that need to
be sent to the client to enable it to authenticate the server's
certificate.

   For dual-stack (eg.  RSA and ECDSA) configurations, these options can
be colon-separated lists of file paths.  Ciphers using given
authentication algorithms require the presence of a suitable certificate
to supply the public-key.  The server selects among the certificates to
present to the client depending on the selected cipher, hence the
priority ordering for ciphers will affect which certificate is used.

   If you do not understand about certificates and keys, please try to
find a source of this background information, which is not
Exim-specific.  (There are a few comments below in section *note
Certificates and all that::.)

   *Note*: These options do not apply when Exim is operating as a client
- they apply only in the case of a server.  If you need to use a
certificate in an Exim client, you must set the options of the same
names in an ‘smtp’ transport.

   With just these options, an Exim server will be able to use TLS. It
does not require the client to have a certificate (but see below for how
to insist on this).  There is one other option that may be needed in
other situations.  If

     tls_dhparam = /some/file/name

   is set, the SSL library is initialized for the use of Diffie-Hellman
ciphers with the parameters contained in the file.  Set this to ‘none’
to disable use of DH entirely, by making no prime available:

     tls_dhparam = none

   This may also be set to a string identifying a standard prime to be
used for DH; if it is set to ‘default’ or, for OpenSSL, is unset, then
the prime used is ‘ike23’.  There are a few standard primes available,
see the documentation for ‘tls_dhparam’ for the complete list.

   See the command

     openssl dhparam

   for a way of generating file data.

   The strings supplied for these three options are expanded every time
a client host connects.  It is therefore possible to use different
certificates and keys for different hosts, if you so wish, by making use
of the client's IP address in ‘$sender_host_address’ to control the
expansion.  If a string expansion is forced to fail, Exim behaves as if
the option is not set.

   The variable ‘$tls_in_cipher’ is set to the cipher suite that was
negotiated for an incoming TLS connection.  It is included in the
_Received:_ header of an incoming message (by default - you can, of
course, change this), and it is also included in the log line that
records a message's arrival, keyed by "X=", unless the ‘tls_cipher’ log
selector is turned off.  The ‘encrypted’ condition can be used to test
for specific cipher suites in ACLs.

   Once TLS has been established, the ACLs that run for subsequent SMTP
commands can check the name of the cipher suite and vary their actions
accordingly.  The cipher suite names vary, depending on which TLS
library is being used.  For example, OpenSSL uses the name DES-CBC3-SHA
for the cipher suite which in other contexts is known as
TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA. Check the OpenSSL or GnuTLS documentation
for more details.

   For outgoing SMTP deliveries, ‘$tls_out_cipher’ is used and logged
(again depending on the ‘tls_cipher’ log selector).

* Menu:

* Requesting and verifying client certificates::
* Caching of static server configuration items::


File: spec.info,  Node: Requesting and verifying client certificates,  Next: Caching of static server configuration items,  Up: Configuring an Exim server to use TLS

43.6.1 Requesting and verifying client certificates
---------------------------------------------------

If you want an Exim server to request a certificate when negotiating a
TLS session with a client, you must set either ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or
‘tls_try_verify_hosts’.  You can, of course, set either of them to * to
apply to all TLS connections.  For any host that matches one of these
options, Exim requests a certificate as part of the setup of the TLS
session.  The contents of the certificate are verified by comparing it
with a list of expected trust-anchors or certificates.  These may be the
system default set (depending on library version), an explicit file or,
depending on library version, a directory, identified by
‘tls_verify_certificates’.

   A file can contain multiple certificates, concatenated end to end.
If a directory is used (OpenSSL only), each certificate must be in a
separate file, with a name (or a symbolic link) of the form <_hash_>.0,
where <_hash_> is a hash value constructed from the certificate.  You
can compute the relevant hash by running the command

     openssl x509 -hash -noout -in /cert/file

   where ‘/cert/file’ contains a single certificate.

   There is no checking of names of the client against the certificate
Subject Name or Subject Alternate Names.

   The difference between ‘tls_verify_hosts’ and ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’
is what happens if the client does not supply a certificate, or if the
certificate does not match any of the certificates in the collection
named by ‘tls_verify_certificates’.  If the client matches
‘tls_verify_hosts’, the attempt to set up a TLS session is aborted, and
the incoming connection is dropped.  If the client matches
‘tls_try_verify_hosts’, the (encrypted) SMTP session continues.  ACLs
that run for subsequent SMTP commands can detect the fact that no
certificate was verified, and vary their actions accordingly.  For
example, you can insist on a certificate before accepting a message for
relaying, but not when the message is destined for local delivery.

   When a client supplies a certificate (whether it verifies or not),
the value of the Distinguished Name of the certificate is made available
in the variable ‘$tls_in_peerdn’ during subsequent processing of the
message.

   Because it is often a long text string, it is not included in the log
line or _Received:_ header by default.  You can arrange for it to be
logged, keyed by "DN=", by setting the ‘tls_peerdn’ log selector, and
you can use ‘received_header_text’ to change the _Received:_ header.
When no certificate is supplied, ‘$tls_in_peerdn’ is empty.

   For the server to verify the client certificate, the server's TLS
library might require that the certificate includes a Client
Authentication extension.  It is up to the Certificate Authority that
constructs and signs the certificate whether that is included.  As of
2026, public CA's are apparently becoming less amenable to supporting
such a need.  Running a private CA is an alternative.


File: spec.info,  Node: Caching of static server configuration items,  Prev: Requesting and verifying client certificates,  Up: Configuring an Exim server to use TLS

43.6.2 Caching of static server configuration items
---------------------------------------------------

If any of the main configuration options ‘tls_certificate’,
‘tls_privatekey’, ‘tls_crl’ and ‘tls_ocsp_file’ have values with no
expandable elements, then the associated information is loaded at daemon
startup.  It is made available to child processes forked for handling
received SMTP connections.

   This caching is currently only supported under Linux and FreeBSD.

   If caching is not possible, for example if an item has to be
dependent on the peer host so contains a ‘$sender_host_name’ expansion,
the load of the associated information is done at the startup of the TLS
connection.

   The cache is invalidated and reloaded after any changes to the
directories containing files specified by these options.

   The information specified by the main option
‘tls_verify_certificates’ is similarly cached so long as it specifies
files explicitly or (under GnuTLS) is the string "system,cache".  The
latter case is not automatically invalidated; it is the operator's
responsibility to arrange for a daemon restart any time the system
certificate authority bundle is updated.  A HUP signal is sufficient for
this.  The value "system" results in no caching under GnuTLS.

   The macro _HAVE_TLS_CA_CACHE will be defined if the suffix for
"system" is acceptable in configurations for the Exim executable.

   Caching of the system Certificate Authorities bundle can save
significant time and processing on every TLS connection accepted by
Exim.


File: spec.info,  Node: Configuring an Exim client to use TLS,  Next: Use of TLS Server Name Indication,  Prev: Configuring an Exim server to use TLS,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.7 Configuring an Exim client to use TLS
==========================================

The ‘tls_cipher’ and ‘tls_peerdn’ log selectors apply to outgoing SMTP
deliveries as well as to incoming, the latter one causing logging of the
server certificate's DN. The remaining client configuration for TLS is
all within the ‘smtp’ transport.

   It is not necessary to set any options to have TLS work in the ‘smtp’
transport.  If Exim is built with TLS support, and TLS is advertised by
a server, the ‘smtp’ transport always tries to start a TLS session.
However, this can be prevented by setting ‘hosts_avoid_tls’ (an option
of the transport) to a list of server hosts for which TLS should not be
used.

   If you do not want Exim to attempt to send messages unencrypted when
an attempt to set up an encrypted connection fails in any way, you can
set ‘hosts_require_tls’ to a list of hosts for which encryption is
mandatory.  For those hosts, delivery is always deferred if an encrypted
connection cannot be set up.  If there are any other hosts for the
address, they are tried in the usual way.

   When the server host is not in ‘hosts_require_tls’, Exim may try to
deliver the message unencrypted.  It always does this if the response to
STARTTLS is a 5_xx_ code.  For a temporary error code, or for a failure
to negotiate a TLS session after a success response code, what happens
is controlled by the ‘tls_tempfail_tryclear’ option of the ‘smtp’
transport.  If it is false, delivery to this host is deferred, and other
hosts (if available) are tried.  If it is true, Exim attempts to deliver
unencrypted after a 4_xx_ response to STARTTLS, and if STARTTLS is
accepted, but the subsequent TLS negotiation fails, Exim closes the
current connection (because it is in an unknown state), opens a new one
to the same host, and then tries the delivery unencrypted.

   The ‘tls_certificate’ and ‘tls_privatekey’ options of the ‘smtp’
transport provide the client with a certificate, which is passed to the
server if it requests it.  This is an optional thing for TLS
connections, although either end may insist on it.  If the server is
Exim, it will request a certificate only if ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or
‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ matches the client.

   *Note*: Do not use a certificate which has the OCSP-must-staple
extension, for client use (they are usable for server use).  As the TLS
protocol has no means for the client to staple before TLS 1.3 it will
result in failed connections.

   If the ‘tls_verify_certificates’ option is set on the ‘smtp’
transport, it specifies a collection of expected server certificates.
These may be the system default set (depending on library version), a
file, or (depending on library version) a directory.  The client
verifies the server's certificate against this collection, taking into
account any revoked certificates that are in the list defined by
‘tls_crl’.  Failure to verify fails the TLS connection unless either of
the ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ options are set.

   The ‘tls_verify_hosts’ and ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’ options restrict
certificate verification to the listed servers.  Verification either
must or need not succeed respectively.

   The ‘tls_verify_cert_hostnames’ option lists hosts for which
additional name checks are made on the server certificate.  The match
against this list is, as per other Exim usage, the IP for the host.
That is most closely associated with the name on the DNS A (or AAAA)
record for the host.  However, the name that needs to be in the
certificate is the one at the head of any CNAME chain leading to the A
record.  The option defaults to always checking.

   The ‘smtp’ transport has two OCSP-related options:
‘hosts_require_ocsp’; a host-list for which a Certificate Status is
requested and required for the connection to proceed.  The default value
is empty.  ‘hosts_request_ocsp’; a host-list for which (additionally) a
Certificate Status is requested (but not necessarily verified).  The
default value is "*" meaning that requests are made unless configured
otherwise.

   The host(s) should also be in ‘hosts_require_tls’, and
‘tls_verify_certificates’ configured for the transport, for OCSP to be
relevant.

   If ‘tls_require_ciphers’ is set on the ‘smtp’ transport, it must
contain a list of permitted cipher suites.  If either of these checks
fails, delivery to the current host is abandoned, and the ‘smtp’
transport tries to deliver to alternative hosts, if any.

   *Note*: These options must be set in the ‘smtp’ transport for Exim to
use TLS when it is operating as a client.  Exim does not assume that a
server certificate (set by the global options of the same name) should
also be used when operating as a client.

   All the TLS options in the ‘smtp’ transport are expanded before use,
with ‘$host’ and ‘$host_address’ containing the name and address of the
server to which the client is connected.  Forced failure of an expansion
causes Exim to behave as if the relevant option were unset.

   Before an SMTP connection is established, the ‘$tls_out_bits’,
‘$tls_out_cipher’, ‘$tls_out_peerdn’ and ‘$tls_out_sni’ variables are
emptied.  (Until the first connection, they contain the values that were
set when the message was received.)  If STARTTLS is subsequently
successfully obeyed, these variables are set to the relevant values for
the outgoing connection.

* Menu:

* Caching of static client configuration items::


File: spec.info,  Node: Caching of static client configuration items,  Up: Configuring an Exim client to use TLS

43.7.1 Caching of static client configuration items
---------------------------------------------------

If any of the transport configuration options ‘tls_certificate’,
‘tls_privatekey’ and ‘tls_crl’ have values with no expandable elements,
then the associated information is loaded per smtp transport at daemon
startup, at the start of a queue run, or on a command-line specified
message delivery.  It is made available to child processes forked for
handling making SMTP connections.

   This caching is currently only supported under Linux.

   If caching is not possible, the load of the associated information is
done at the startup of the TLS connection.

   The cache is invalidated in the daemon and reloaded after any changes
to the directories containing files specified by these options.

   The information specified by the main option
‘tls_verify_certificates’ is similarly cached so long as it specifies
files explicitly or (under GnuTLS) is the string "system,cache".  The
latter case is not automatically invaludated; it is the operator's
responsibility to arrange for a daemon restart any time the system
certificate authority bundle is updated.  A HUP signal is sufficient for
this.  The value "system" results in no caching under GnuTLS.

   The macro _HAVE_TLS_CA_CACHE will be defined if the suffix for
"system" is acceptable in configurations for the Exim executable.

   Caching of the system Certificate Authorities bundle can save
significant time and processing on every TLS connection initiated by
Exim.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of TLS Server Name Indication,  Next: Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection,  Prev: Configuring an Exim client to use TLS,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.8 Use of TLS Server Name Indication
======================================

With TLS1.0 or above, there is an extension mechanism by which extra
information can be included at various points in the protocol.  One of
these extensions, documented in *RFC 6066
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6066#section-3)* (and before
that *RFC 4366 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4366)*) is
"Server Name Indication", commonly "SNI". This extension is sent by the
client in the initial handshake, so that the server can examine the
servername within and possibly choose to use different certificates and
keys (and more) for this session.

   This is analogous to HTTP's "Host:" header, and is the main mechanism
by which HTTPS-enabled web-sites can be virtual-hosted, many sites to
one IP address.

   With SMTP to MX, there are the same problems here as in choosing the
identity against which to validate a certificate: you can't rely on
insecure DNS to provide the identity which you then cryptographically
verify.  So this will be of limited use in that environment.

   With SMTP to Submission, there is a well-defined hostname which
clients are connecting to and can validate certificates against.  Thus
clients *can* choose to include this information in the TLS negotiation.
If this becomes wide-spread, then hosters can choose to present
different certificates to different clients.  Or even negotiate
different cipher suites.

   The ‘tls_sni’ option on an SMTP transport is an expanded string; the
result, if not empty, will be sent on a TLS session as part of the
handshake.  There's nothing more to it.  Choosing a sensible value not
derived insecurely is the only point of caution.  The ‘$tls_out_sni’
variable will be set to this string for the lifetime of the client
connection (including during authentication).

   If DANE validated the connection attempt then the value of the
‘tls_sni’ option is forced to the name of the destination host, after
any MX- or CNAME-following.

   Except during SMTP client sessions, if ‘$tls_in_sni’ is set then it
is a string received from a client.  It can be logged with the
‘log_selector’ item ‘+tls_sni’.

   If the string ‘tls_in_sni’ appears in the main section's
‘tls_certificate’ option (prior to expansion) then the following options
will be re-expanded during TLS session handshake, to permit alternative
values to be chosen:

   • ‘tls_certificate’

   • ‘tls_crl’

   • ‘tls_privatekey’

   • ‘tls_verify_certificates’

   • ‘tls_ocsp_file’

   Great care should be taken to deal with matters of case, various
injection attacks in the string (‘../’ or SQL), and ensuring that a
valid filename can always be referenced; it is important to remember
that ‘$tls_in_sni’ is arbitrary unverified data provided prior to
authentication.  Further, the initial certificate is loaded before SNI
has arrived, so an expansion for ‘tls_certificate’ must have a default
which is used when ‘$tls_in_sni’ is empty.

   The Exim developers are proceeding cautiously and so far no other TLS
options are re-expanded.

   When Exim is built against OpenSSL, OpenSSL must have been built with
support for TLS Extensions.  This holds true for OpenSSL 1.0.0+ and
0.9.8+ with enable-tlsext in EXTRACONFIGURE. If you invoke ‘openssl
s_client -h’ and see ‘-servername’ in the output, then OpenSSL has
support.

   When Exim is built against GnuTLS, SNI support is available as of
GnuTLS 0.5.10.  (Its presence predates the current API which Exim uses,
so if Exim built, then you have SNI support).

* Menu:

* ALPN::


File: spec.info,  Node: ALPN,  Up: Use of TLS Server Name Indication

43.8.1 ALPN
-----------

There is a TLS feature related to SNI called Application Layer Protocol
Name (ALPN). This is intended to declare, or select, what protocol layer
will be using a TLS connection.  The client for the connection proposes
a set of protocol names, and the server responds with a selected one.
It is not, as of 2021, commonly used for SMTP connections.  However, to
guard against misdirected or malicious use of web clients (which often
do use ALPN) against MTA ports, Exim by default check that there is no
incompatible ALPN specified by a client for a TLS connection.  If there
is, the connection is rejected.

   As a client Exim does not supply ALPN by default.  The behaviour of
both client and server can be configured using the options ‘tls_alpn’
and ‘hosts_require_alpn’.  There are no variables providing
observability.  Some feature-specific logging may appear on denied
connections, but this depends on the behaviour of the peer (not all
peers can send a feature-specific TLS Alert).

   This feature is available when Exim is built with OpenSSL 1.1.0 or
later or GnuTLS 3.2.0 or later; the macro _HAVE_TLS_ALPN will be defined
when this is so.


File: spec.info,  Node: Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection,  Next: Certificates and all that,  Prev: Use of TLS Server Name Indication,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.9 Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection
==============================================================

Exim sends multiple messages down the same TCP/IP connection by starting
up an entirely new delivery process for each message, passing the socket
from one process to the next.  This implementation does not fit well
with the use of TLS, because there is quite a lot of state information
associated with a TLS connection, not just a socket identification.
Passing all the state information to a new process is not feasible.
Consequently, for sending using TLS Exim starts an additional proxy
process for handling the encryption, piping the unencrypted data stream
from and to the delivery processes.

   An older mode of operation can be enabled on a per-host basis by the
‘hosts_noproxy_tls’ option on the ‘smtp’ transport.  If the host matches
this list the proxy process described above is not used; instead Exim
shuts down an existing TLS session being run by the delivery process
before passing the socket to a new process.  The new process may then
try to start a new TLS session, and if successful, may try to
re-authenticate if AUTH is in use, before sending the next message.

   The RFC is not clear as to whether or not an SMTP session continues
in clear after TLS has been shut down, or whether TLS may be restarted
again later, as just described.  However, if the server is Exim, this
shutdown and reinitialization works.  It is not known which (if any)
other servers operate successfully if the client closes a TLS session
and continues with unencrypted SMTP, but there are certainly some that
do not work.  For such servers, Exim should not pass the socket to
another process, because the failure of the subsequent attempt to use it
would cause Exim to record a temporary host error, and delay other
deliveries to that host.

   To test for this case, Exim sends an EHLO command to the server after
closing down the TLS session.  If this fails in any way, the connection
is closed instead of being passed to a new delivery process, but no
retry information is recorded.

   There is also a manual override; you can set ‘hosts_nopass_tls’ on
the ‘smtp’ transport to match those hosts for which Exim should not pass
connections to new processes if TLS has been used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Certificates and all that,  Next: TLS Resumption,  Prev: Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.10 Certificates and all that
===============================

In order to understand fully how TLS works, you need to know about
certificates, certificate signing, and certificate authorities.  This is
a large topic and an introductory guide is unsuitable for the Exim
reference manual, so instead we provide pointers to existing
documentation.

   The Apache web-server was for a long time the canonical guide, so
their documentation is a good place to start; their SSL module's
Introduction document is currently at

     https://httpd.apache.org/docs/current/ssl/ssl_intro.html

   and their FAQ is at

     https://httpd.apache.org/docs/current/ssl/ssl_faq.html

   Eric Rescorla's book, _SSL and TLS_, published by Addison-Wesley
(ISBN 0-201-61598-3) in 2001, contains both introductory and more
in-depth descriptions.  More recently Ivan Ristić's book _Bulletproof
SSL and TLS_, published by Feisty Duck (ISBN 978-1907117046) in 2013 is
good.  Ivan is the author of the popular TLS testing tools at
*https://www.ssllabs.com/ (https://www.ssllabs.com/)*.

* Menu:

* Certificate chains::
* Self-signed certificates::
* Revoked certificates::


File: spec.info,  Node: Certificate chains,  Next: Self-signed certificates,  Up: Certificates and all that

43.10.1 Certificate chains
--------------------------

A file named by ‘tls_certificate’ may contain more than one certificate.
This is useful in the case where the certificate that is being sent is
validated by an intermediate certificate which the other end does not
have.  Multiple certificates must be in the correct order in the file.
First the host's certificate itself, then the first intermediate
certificate to validate the issuer of the host certificate, then the
next intermediate certificate to validate the issuer of the first
intermediate certificate, and so on, until finally (optionally) the root
certificate.  The root certificate must already be trusted by the
recipient for validation to succeed, of course, but if it's not
preinstalled, sending the root certificate along with the rest makes it
available for the user to install if the receiving end is a client MUA
that can interact with a user.

   Note that certificates using MD5 are unlikely to work on today's
Internet; even if your libraries allow loading them for use in Exim when
acting as a server, increasingly clients will not accept such
certificates.  The error diagnostics in such a case can be frustratingly
vague.


File: spec.info,  Node: Self-signed certificates,  Next: Revoked certificates,  Prev: Certificate chains,  Up: Certificates and all that

43.10.2 Self-signed certificates
--------------------------------

You can create a self-signed certificate using the _req_ command
provided with OpenSSL, like this:

     openssl req -x509 -newkey rsa:1024 -keyout file1 -out file2 \
                 -days 9999 -nodes

   ‘file1’ and ‘file2’ can be the same file; the key and the certificate
are delimited and so can be identified independently.  The ‘-days’
option specifies a period for which the certificate is valid.  The
‘-nodes’ option is important: if you do not set it, the key is encrypted
with a passphrase that you are prompted for, and any use that is made of
the key causes more prompting for the passphrase.  This is not helpful
if you are going to use this certificate and key in an MTA, where
prompting is not possible.

   NB: we are now past the point where 9999 days takes us past the
32-bit Unix epoch.  If your system uses unsigned time_t (most do) and is
32-bit, then the above command might produce a date in the past.  Think
carefully about the lifetime of the systems you're deploying, and either
reduce the duration of the certificate or reconsider your platform
deployment.  (At time of writing, reducing the duration is the most
likely choice, but the inexorable progression of time takes us steadily
towards an era where this will not be a sensible resolution).

   A self-signed certificate made in this way is sufficient for testing,
and may be adequate for all your requirements if you are mainly
interested in encrypting transfers, and not in secure identification.

   However, many clients require that the certificate presented by the
server be a user (also called "leaf" or "site") certificate, and not a
self-signed certificate.  In this situation, the self-signed certificate
described above must be installed on the client host as a trusted root
_certification authority_ (CA), and the certificate used by Exim must be
a user certificate signed with that self-signed certificate.

   For information on creating self-signed CA certificates and using
them to sign user certificates, see the _General implementation
overview_ chapter of the Open-source PKI book, available online at
*https://sourceforge.net/projects/ospkibook/
(https://sourceforge.net/projects/ospkibook/)*.


File: spec.info,  Node: Revoked certificates,  Prev: Self-signed certificates,  Up: Certificates and all that

43.10.3 Revoked certificates
----------------------------

There are three ways for a certificate to be made unusable before its
expiry.

   • Certificate issuing authorities issue Certificate Revocation Lists
     (CRLs) when certificates are revoked.  If you have such a list, you
     can pass it to an Exim server using the global option called
     ‘tls_crl’ and to an Exim client using an identically named option
     for the ‘smtp’ transport.  In each case, the value of the option is
     expanded and must then be the name of a file that contains a CRL in
     PEM format.  The downside is that clients have to periodically
     re-download a potentially huge file from every certificate
     authority they know of.

   • The way with most moving parts at query time is Online Certificate
     Status Protocol (OCSP), where the client verifies the certificate
     against an OCSP server run by the CA. This lets the CA track all
     usage of the certs.  It requires running software with access to
     the private key of the CA, to sign the responses to the OCSP
     queries.  OCSP is based on HTTP and can be proxied accordingly.

     The only widespread OCSP server implementation (known to this
     writer) comes as part of OpenSSL and aborts on an invalid request,
     such as connecting to the port and then disconnecting.  This
     requires re-entering the passphrase each time some random client
     does this.

   • The third way is OCSP Stapling; in this, the server using a
     certificate issued by the CA periodically requests an OCSP proof of
     validity from the OCSP server, then serves it up inline as part of
     the TLS negotiation.  This approach adds no extra round trips, does
     not let the CA track users, scales well with number of certs issued
     by the CA and is resilient to temporary OCSP server failures, as
     long as the server starts retrying to fetch an OCSP proof some time
     before its current proof expires.  The downside is that it requires
     server support.

     Unless Exim is built with the support disabled, or with GnuTLS
     earlier than version 3.3.16 / 3.4.8 support for OCSP stapling is
     included.

     There is a global option called ‘tls_ocsp_file’.  The file
     specified therein is expected to be in DER format, and contain an
     OCSP proof.  Exim will serve it as part of the TLS handshake.  This
     option will be re-expanded for SNI, if the ‘tls_certificate’ option
     contains ‘tls_in_sni’, as per other TLS options.

     Exim does not at this time implement any support for fetching a new
     OCSP proof.  The burden is on the administrator to handle this,
     outside of Exim.  The file specified should be replaced atomically,
     so that the contents are always valid.  Exim will expand the
     ‘tls_ocsp_file’ option on each connection, so a new file will be
     handled transparently on the next connection.

     When built with OpenSSL Exim will check for a valid next update
     timestamp in the OCSP proof; if not present, or if the proof has
     expired, it will be ignored.

     For the client to be able to verify the stapled OCSP the server
     must also supply, in its stapled information, any intermediate
     certificates for the chain leading to the OCSP proof from the
     signer of the server certificate.  There may be zero or one such.
     These intermediate certificates should be added to the server OCSP
     stapling file named by ‘tls_ocsp_file’.

     Note that the proof only covers the terminal server certificate,
     not any of the chain from CA to it.

     There is no current way to staple a proof for a client certificate.

            A helper script "ocsp_fetch.pl" for fetching a proof from a CA
            OCSP server is supplied.  The server URL may be included in the
            server certificate, if the CA is helpful.

            One failure mode seen was the OCSP Signer cert expiring before the end
            of validity of the OCSP proof. The checking done by Exim/OpenSSL
            noted this as invalid overall, but the re-fetch script did not.


File: spec.info,  Node: TLS Resumption,  Next: DANE,  Prev: Certificates and all that,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.11 TLS Resumption
====================

TLS Session Resumption for TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 connections can be used
(defined in *RFC 5077 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc5077)*
for 1.2).  The support for this requires GnuTLS 3.6.3 or OpenSSL 1.1.1
(or later).

   Session resumption (this is the "stateless" variant) involves the
server sending a "session ticket" to the client on one connection, which
can be stored by the client and used for a later session.  The ticket
contains sufficient state for the server to reconstruct the TLS session,
avoiding some expensive crypto calculation and (on TLS1.2) one full
packet roundtrip time.

   • Operational cost/benefit:

     The extra data being transmitted costs a minor amount, and the
     client has extra costs in storing and retrieving the data.

     In the Exim/Gnutls implementation the extra cost on an initial
     connection which is TLS1.2 over a loopback path is about 6ms on
     2017-laptop class hardware.  The saved cost on a subsequent
     connection is about 4ms; three or more connections become a net
     win.  On longer network paths, two or more connections will have an
     average lower startup time thanks to the one saved packet
     roundtrip.  TLS1.3 will save the crypto cpu costs but not any
     packet roundtrips.

     Since a new hints DB is used on the TLS client, the hints DB
     maintenance should be updated to additionally handle "tls".

   • Security aspects:

     The session ticket is encrypted, but is obviously an additional
     security vulnarability surface.  An attacker able to decrypt it
     would have access all connections using the resumed session.  The
     session ticket encryption key is not committed to storage by the
     server and is rotated regularly (OpenSSL: 1hr, and one previous key
     is used for overlap; GnuTLS 6hr but does not specify any overlap).
     Tickets have limited lifetime (2hr, and new ones issued after 1hr
     under OpenSSL. GnuTLS 2hr, appears to not do overlap).

     There is a question-mark over the security of the Diffie-Helman
     parameters used for session negotiation.

   • Observability:

     The ‘log_selector’ "tls_resumption" appends an asterisk to the
     tls_cipher "X=" element.

     The variables ‘$tls_in_resumption’ and ‘$tls_out_resumption’ have
     bits 0-4 indicating respectively support built, client requested
     ticket, client offered session, server issued ticket, resume used.
     A suitable decode list is provided in the builtin macro
     _RESUME_DECODE for in ‘listextract’ expansions.

   • Control:

     The ‘tls_resumption_hosts’ main option specifies a hostlist for
     which exim, operating as a server, will offer resumption to
     clients.  Current best practice is to not offer the feature to MUA
     connection.  Commonly this can be done like this:

          tls_resumption_hosts = ${if inlist {$received_port}{587:465} {:}{*}}

     If the peer host matches the list after expansion then resumption
     is offered and/or accepted.

     The ‘tls_resumption_hosts’ smtp transport option performs the
     equivalent function for operation as a client.  If the peer host
     matches the list after expansion then resumption is attempted (if a
     stored session is available) or the information stored (if supplied
     by the peer).

   • Issues:

     In a resumed session:

        • The variables ‘$tls_{in,out}_cipher’ will have values
          different to the original (under GnuTLS).

        • The variables ‘$tls_{in,out}_ocsp’ will be "not requested" or
          "no response", and the ‘hosts_require_ocsp’ smtp trasnport
          option will fail.


File: spec.info,  Node: DANE,  Prev: TLS Resumption,  Up: Encrypted SMTP connections

43.12 DANE
==========

DNS-based Authentication of Named Entities, as applied to SMTP over TLS,
provides assurance to a client that it is actually talking to the server
it wants to rather than some attacker operating a Man In The Middle
(MITM) operation.  The latter can terminate the TLS connection you make,
and make another one to the server (so both you and the server still
think you have an encrypted connection) and, if one of the "well known"
set of Certificate Authorities has been suborned - something which *has*
been seen already (2014), a verifiable certificate (if you're using
normal root CAs, eg.  the Mozilla set, as your trust anchors).

   What DANE does is replace the CAs with the DNS as the trust anchor.
The assurance is limited to a) the possibility that the DNS has been
suborned, b) mistakes made by the admins of the target server.  The
attack surface presented by (a) is thought to be smaller than that of
the set of root CAs.

   It also allows the server to declare (implicitly) that connections to
it should use TLS. An MITM could simply fail to pass on a server's
STARTTLS.

   DANE scales better than having to maintain (and communicate via
side-channel) copies of server certificates for every possible target
server.  It also scales (slightly) better than having to maintain on an
SMTP client a copy of the standard CAs bundle.  It also means not having
to pay a CA for certificates.

   DANE requires a server operator to do three things:

  1. Run DNSSEC. This provides assurance to clients that DNS lookups
     they do for the server have not been tampered with.  The domain MX
     record applying to this server, its A record, its TLSA record and
     any associated CNAME records must all be covered by DNSSEC.

  2. Add TLSA DNS records.  These say what the server certificate for a
     TLS connection should be.

  3. Offer a server certificate, or certificate chain, in TLS
     connections which is anchored by one of the TLSA records.

   There are no changes to Exim specific to server-side operation of
DANE. Support for client-side operation of DANE can be included at
compile time by defining SUPPORT_DANE=yes in ‘Local/Makefile’.  If it
has been included, the macro "_HAVE_DANE" will be defined.

* Menu:

* DNS records::
* Interaction with OCSP::
* Client configuration::
* Observability::
* General::


File: spec.info,  Node: DNS records,  Next: Interaction with OCSP,  Up: DANE

43.12.1 DNS records
-------------------

A TLSA record consist of 4 fields, the "Certificate Usage", the
"Selector", the "Matching type", and the "Certificate Association Data".
For a detailed description of the TLSA record see *RFC 7671
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc7671#section-2)*

   The TLSA record for the server may have "Certificate Usage" (1st)
field of DANE-TA(2) or DANE-EE(3).  These are the "Trust Anchor" and
"End Entity" variants.  The latter specifies the End Entity directly,
i.e.  the certificate involved is that of the server (and if only
DANE-EE is used then it should be the sole one transmitted during the
TLS handshake); this is appropriate for a single system, using a
self-signed certificate.  DANE-TA usage is effectively declaring a
specific CA to be used; this might be a private CA or a public,
well-known one.  A private CA at simplest is just a self-signed
certificate (with certain attributes) which is used to sign server
certificates, but running one securely does require careful arrangement.
With DANE-TA, as implemented in Exim and commonly in other MTAs, the
server TLS handshake must transmit the entire certificate chain from CA
to server-certificate.  DANE-TA is commonly used for several services
and/or servers, each having a TLSA query-domain CNAME record, all of
which point to a single TLSA record.  DANE-TA and DANE-EE can both be
used together.

   Our recommendation is to use DANE with a certificate from a public
CA, because this enables a variety of strategies for remote clients to
verify your certificate.  You can then publish information both via DANE
and another technology, "MTA-STS", described below.

   When you use DANE-TA to publish trust anchor information, you ask
entities outside your administrative control to trust the Certificate
Authority for connections to you.  If using a private CA then you should
expect others to still apply the technical criteria they'd use for a
public CA to your certificates.  In particular, you should probably try
to follow current best practices for CA operation around hash algorithms
and key sizes.  Do not expect other organizations to lower their
security expectations just because a particular profile might be
reasonable for your own internal use.

   When this text was last updated, this in practice means to avoid use
of SHA-1 and MD5; if using RSA to use key sizes of at least 2048 bits
(and no larger than 4096, for interoperability); to use keyUsage fields
correctly; to use random serial numbers.  The list of requirements is
subject to change as best practices evolve.  If you're not already using
a private CA, or it doesn't meet these requirements, then we encourage
you to avoid all these issues and use a public CA such as *Let's Encrypt
(https://letsencrypt.org/)* instead.

   The TLSA record should have a "Selector" (2nd) field of SPKI(1) and a
"Matching Type" (3rd) field of SHA2-512(2).

   For the "Certificate Authority Data" (4th) field, commands like

       openssl x509 -pubkey -noout <certificate.pem \
       | openssl rsa -outform der -pubin 2>/dev/null \
       | openssl sha512 \
       | awk '{print $2}'

   are workable to create a hash of the certificate's public key.

   An example TLSA record for DANE-EE(3), SPKI(1), and SHA-512 (2) looks
like

       _25._tcp.mail.example.com. TLSA 3 1 2 8BA8A336E...

   At the time of writing, *https://www.huque.com/bin/gen_tlsa
(https://www.huque.com/bin/gen_tlsa)* is useful for quickly generating
TLSA records.

   For use with the DANE-TA model, server certificates must have a
correct name (SubjectName or SubjectAltName).

   The Certificate issued by the CA published in the DANE-TA model
should be issued using a strong hash algorithm.  Exim, and importantly
various other MTAs sending to you, will not re-enable hash algorithms
which have been disabled by default in TLS libraries.  This means no MD5
and no SHA-1.  SHA2-256 is the minimum for reliable interoperability
(and probably the maximum too, in 2018).


File: spec.info,  Node: Interaction with OCSP,  Next: Client configuration,  Prev: DNS records,  Up: DANE

43.12.2 Interaction with OCSP
-----------------------------

The use of OCSP-stapling should be considered, allowing for fast
revocation of certificates (which would otherwise be limited by the DNS
TTL on the TLSA records).  However, this is likely to only be usable
with DANE-TA. NOTE: the default of requesting OCSP for all hosts is
modified iff DANE is in use, to:

       hosts_request_ocsp = ${if or { {= {0}{$tls_out_tlsa_usage}} \
     				 {= {4}{$tls_out_tlsa_usage}} } \
                              {*}{}}

   The (new) variable ‘$tls_out_tlsa_usage’ is a bitfield with numbered
bits set for TLSA record usage codes.  The zero above means DANE was not
in use, the four means that only DANE-TA usage TLSA records were found.
If the definition of ‘hosts_request_ocsp’ includes the string
"tls_out_tlsa_usage", they are re-expanded in time to control the OCSP
request.

   This modification of hosts_request_ocsp is only done if it has the
default value of "*".  Admins who change it, and those who use
‘hosts_require_ocsp’, should consider the interaction with DANE in their
OCSP settings.


File: spec.info,  Node: Client configuration,  Next: Observability,  Prev: Interaction with OCSP,  Up: DANE

43.12.3 Client configuration
----------------------------

For client-side DANE there are three new smtp transport options,
‘hosts_try_dane’, ‘hosts_require_dane’ and ‘dane_require_tls_ciphers’.
The "require" variant will result in failure if the target host is not
DNSSEC-secured.  To get DNSSEC-secured hostname resolution, use the
‘dnssec_request_domains’ router or transport option.

   DANE will only be usable if the target host has DNSSEC-secured MX, A
and TLSA records.

   A TLSA lookup will be done if either of the above options match and
the host-lookup succeeded using DNSSEC. If a TLSA lookup is done and
succeeds, a DANE-verified TLS connection will be required for the host.
If it does not, the host will not be used; there is no fallback to
non-DANE or non-TLS.

   If DANE is requested and usable, then the TLS cipher list
configuration prefers to use the option ‘dane_require_tls_ciphers’ and
falls back to ‘tls_require_ciphers’ only if that is unset.  This lets
you configure "decent crypto" for DANE and "better than nothing crypto"
as the default.  Note though that while GnuTLS lets the string control
which versions of TLS/SSL will be negotiated, OpenSSL does not and
you're limited to ciphersuite constraints.

   If DANE is requested and useable (see above) the following transport
options are ignored:

       hosts_require_tls
       tls_verify_hosts
       tls_try_verify_hosts
       tls_verify_certificates
       tls_crl
       tls_verify_cert_hostnames
       tls_sni

   If DANE is not usable, whether requested or not, and CA-anchored
verification evaluation is wanted, the above variables should be set
appropriately.

   The router and transport option ‘dnssec_request_domains’ must not be
set to "never", and ‘dnssec_require_domains’ is ignored.


File: spec.info,  Node: Observability,  Next: General,  Prev: Client configuration,  Up: DANE

43.12.4 Observability
---------------------

If verification was successful using DANE then the "CV" item in the
delivery log line will show as "CV=dane".

   There is a new variable ‘$tls_out_dane’ which will have "yes" if
verification succeeded using DANE and "no" otherwise (only useful in
combination with events; see *note Events::), and a new variable
‘$tls_out_tlsa_usage’ (detailed above).

   An event (see *note Events::) of type "dane:fail" will be raised on
failures to achieve DANE-verified connection, if one was either
requested and offered, or required.  This is intended to support
TLS-reporting as defined in
*https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-uta-smtp-tlsrpt-17
(https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-uta-smtp-tlsrpt-17)*.  The
‘$event_data’ will be one of the Result Types defined in Section 4.3 of
that document.


File: spec.info,  Node: General,  Prev: Observability,  Up: DANE

43.12.5 General
---------------

Under GnuTLS, DANE is only supported from version 3.0.0 onwards.

   DANE is specified in *RFC 6698
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6698)*.  It decouples
certificate authority trust selection from a "race to the bottom" of
"you must trust everything for mail to get through".  It does retain the
need to trust the assurances provided by the DNSSEC tree.

   There is an alternative technology called MTA-STS (*RFC 8461
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8461)*), which instead
publishes MX trust anchor information on an HTTPS website.  The
discovery of the address for that website does not (per standard)
require DNSSEC, and could be regarded as being less secure than DANE as
a result.

   Exim has no support for MTA-STS as a client, but Exim mail server
operators can choose to publish information describing their TLS
configuration using MTA-STS to let those clients who do use that
protocol derive trust information.

   The MTA-STS design requires a certificate from a public Certificate
Authority which is recognized by clients sending to you.  That selection
of which CAs are trusted by others is outside your control.

   The most interoperable course of action is probably to use *Let's
Encrypt (https://letsencrypt.org/)*, with automated certificate renewal;
to publish the anchor information in DNSSEC-secured DNS via TLSA records
for DANE clients (such as Exim and Postfix) and to publish anchor
information for MTA-STS as well.  This is what is done for the
_exim.org_ domain itself (with caveats around occasionally broken
MTA-STS because of incompatible specification changes prior to reaching
RFC status).


File: spec.info,  Node: Access control lists,  Next: Content scanning at ACL time,  Prev: Encrypted SMTP connections,  Up: Top

44 Access control lists
***********************

Access Control Lists (ACLs) are defined in a separate section of the
runtime configuration file, headed by "begin acl".  Each ACL definition
starts with a name, terminated by a colon.  Here is a complete ACL
section that contains just one very small ACL:

     begin acl
     small_acl:
       accept   hosts = one.host.only

   You can have as many lists as you like in the ACL section, and the
order in which they appear does not matter.  The lists are
self-terminating.

   The majority of ACLs are used to control Exim's behaviour when it
receives certain SMTP commands.  This applies both to incoming TCP/IP
connections, and when a local process submits a message using SMTP by
specifying the ‘-bs’ option.  The most common use is for controlling
which recipients are accepted in incoming messages.  In addition, you
can define an ACL that is used to check local non-SMTP messages.  The
default configuration file contains an example of a realistic ACL for
checking RCPT commands.  This is discussed in chapter *note The default
configuration file::.

* Menu:

* Testing ACLs::
* Specifying when ACLs are used::
* Finding an ACL to use::
* ACL return codes::
* Unset ACL options::
* Data for message ACLs::
* Data for non-message ACLs::
* Format of an ACL::
* ACL verbs::
* ACL variables::
* Condition and modifier processing::
* ACL modifiers::
* Use of the control modifier::
* Summary of message fixup control::
* Adding header lines in ACLs::
* Removing header lines in ACLs::
* ACL conditions::
* Using DNS lists::
* Previously seen user and hosts::
* Rate limiting incoming messages::
* Address verification::
* Callout verification::
* Quota caching::
* Sender address verification reporting::
* Redirection while verifying::
* Client SMTP authorization (CSA): Client SMTP authorization [CSA].
* Bounce address tag validation::
* Using an ACL to control relaying::
* Checking a relay configuration::


File: spec.info,  Node: Testing ACLs,  Next: Specifying when ACLs are used,  Up: Access control lists

44.1 Testing ACLs
=================

The ‘-bh’ command line option provides a way of testing your ACL
configuration locally by running a fake SMTP session with which you
interact.


File: spec.info,  Node: Specifying when ACLs are used,  Next: Finding an ACL to use,  Prev: Testing ACLs,  Up: Access control lists

44.2 Specifying when ACLs are used
==================================

In order to cause an ACL to be used, you have to name it in one of the
relevant options in the main part of the configuration.  These options
are:

    ‘acl_not_smtp’                   ACL for non-SMTP messages
    ‘acl_not_smtp_mime’              ACL for non-SMTP MIME parts
    ‘acl_not_smtp_start’             ACL at start of non-SMTP message
    ‘acl_smtp_atrn’                  ACL for ATRN
    ‘acl_smtp_auth’                  ACL for AUTH
    ‘acl_smtp_connect’               ACL for start of SMTP connection
    ‘acl_smtp_data’                  ACL after DATA is complete
    ‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’             ACL for each recipient, after DATA
                                     is complete
    ‘acl_smtp_dkim’                  ACL for each DKIM signer
    ‘acl_smtp_etrn’                  ACL for ETRN
    ‘acl_smtp_expn’                  ACL for EXPN
    ‘acl_smtp_helo’                  ACL for HELO or EHLO
    ‘acl_smtp_mail’                  ACL for MAIL
    ‘acl_smtp_mailauth’              ACL for the AUTH parameter of MAIL
    ‘acl_smtp_mime’                  ACL for content-scanning MIME
                                     parts
    ‘acl_smtp_notquit’               ACL for non-QUIT terminations
    ‘acl_smtp_predata’               ACL at start of DATA command
    ‘acl_smtp_quit’                  ACL for QUIT
    ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’                  ACL for RCPT
    ‘acl_smtp_starttls’              ACL for STARTTLS
    ‘acl_smtp_vrfy’                  ACL for VRFY
    ‘acl_smtp_wellknown’             ACL for WELLKNOWN

   For example, if you set

     acl_smtp_rcpt = small_acl

   the little ACL defined above is used whenever Exim receives a RCPT
command in an SMTP dialogue.  The majority of policy tests on incoming
messages can be done when RCPT commands arrive.  A rejection of RCPT
should cause the sending MTA to give up on the recipient address
contained in the RCPT command, whereas rejection at other times may
cause the client MTA to keep on trying to deliver the message.  It is
therefore recommended that you do as much testing as possible at RCPT
time.

* Menu:

* The non-SMTP ACLs::
* The SMTP connect ACL::
* The EHLO/HELO ACL::
* The DATA ACLs::
* The SMTP DKIM ACL::
* The SMTP MIME ACL::
* The SMTP PRDR ACL::
* The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL::
* The QUIT ACL::
* The not-QUIT ACL::


File: spec.info,  Node: The non-SMTP ACLs,  Next: The SMTP connect ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.1 The non-SMTP ACLs
------------------------

The non-SMTP ACLs apply to all non-interactive incoming messages, that
is, they apply to batched SMTP as well as to non-SMTP messages.
(Batched SMTP is not really SMTP.) Many of the ACL conditions (for
example, host tests, and tests on the state of the SMTP connection such
as encryption and authentication) are not relevant and are forbidden in
these ACLs.  However, the sender and recipients are known, so the
‘senders’ and ‘sender_domains’ conditions and the ‘$sender_address’ and
‘$recipients’ variables can be used.  Variables such as
‘$authenticated_sender’ are also available.  You can specify added
header lines in any of these ACLs.

   The ‘acl_not_smtp_start’ ACL is run right at the start of receiving a
non-SMTP message, before any of the message has been read.  (This is the
analogue of the ‘acl_smtp_predata’ ACL for SMTP input.)  In the case of
batched SMTP input, it runs after the DATA command has been reached.
The result of this ACL is ignored; it cannot be used to reject a
message.  If you really need to, you could set a value in an ACL
variable here and reject based on that in the ‘acl_not_smtp’ ACL.
However, this ACL can be used to set controls, and in particular, it can
be used to set

     control = suppress_local_fixups

   This cannot be used in the other non-SMTP ACLs because by the time
they are run, it is too late.

   The ‘acl_not_smtp_mime’ ACL is available only when Exim is compiled
with the content-scanning extension.  For details, see chapter *note
Content scanning at ACL time::.

   The ‘acl_not_smtp’ ACL is run just before the ‘local_scan()’
function.  Any kind of rejection is treated as permanent, because there
is no way of sending a temporary error for these kinds of message.


File: spec.info,  Node: The SMTP connect ACL,  Next: The EHLO/HELO ACL,  Prev: The non-SMTP ACLs,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.2 The SMTP connect ACL
---------------------------

The ACL test specified by ‘acl_smtp_connect’ happens at the start of an
SMTP session, after the test specified by ‘host_reject_connection’
(which is now an anomaly).  If the connection is accepted by an ‘accept’
verb that has a ‘message’ modifier, the contents of the message override
the banner message that is otherwise specified by the ‘smtp_banner’
option.

   For tls-on-connect connections, the ACL is run before the TLS
connection is accepted; if the ACL does not accept then the TCP
connection is dropped without any TLS startup attempt and without any
SMTP response being transmitted.


File: spec.info,  Node: The EHLO/HELO ACL,  Next: The DATA ACLs,  Prev: The SMTP connect ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.3 The EHLO/HELO ACL
------------------------

The ACL test specified by ‘acl_smtp_helo’ happens when the client issues
an EHLO or HELO command, after the tests specified by
‘helo_accept_junk_hosts’, ‘helo_allow_chars’, ‘helo_verify_hosts’, and
‘helo_try_verify_hosts’.  Note that a client may issue more than one
EHLO or HELO command in an SMTP session, and indeed is required to issue
a new EHLO or HELO after successfully setting up encryption following a
STARTTLS command.

   Note also that a deny neither forces the client to go away nor means
that mail will be refused on the connection.  Consider checking for
‘$sender_helo_name’ being defined in a MAIL or RCPT ACL to do that.

   If the command is accepted by an ‘accept’ verb that has a ‘message’
modifier, the message may not contain more than one line (it will be
truncated at the first newline and a panic logged if it does).  Such a
message cannot affect the EHLO options that are listed on the second and
subsequent lines of an EHLO response.


File: spec.info,  Node: The DATA ACLs,  Next: The SMTP DKIM ACL,  Prev: The EHLO/HELO ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.4 The DATA ACLs
--------------------

Two ACLs are associated with the DATA command, because it is two-stage
command, with two responses being sent to the client.  When the DATA
command is received, the ACL defined by ‘acl_smtp_predata’ is obeyed.
This gives you control after all the RCPT commands, but before the
message itself is received.  It offers the opportunity to give a
negative response to the DATA command before the data is transmitted.
Header lines added by MAIL or RCPT ACLs are not visible at this time,
but any that are defined here are visible when the ‘acl_smtp_data’ ACL
is run.

   You cannot test the contents of the message, for example, to verify
addresses in the headers, at RCPT time or when the DATA command is
received.  Such tests have to appear in the ACL that is run after the
message itself has been received, before the final response to the DATA
command is sent.  This is the ACL specified by ‘acl_smtp_data’, which is
the second ACL that is associated with the DATA command.

   If CHUNKING was advertised and a BDAT command sequence is received,
the ‘acl_smtp_predata’ ACL is not run.  The ‘acl_smtp_data’ is run after
the last BDAT command and all of the data specified is received.

   For both of these ACLs, it is not possible to reject individual
recipients.  (but look into the PRDR extension, which supports doing
so).  An error response rejects the entire message.  Unfortunately, it
is known that some MTAs do not treat hard (5_xx_) responses to the DATA
command (either before or after the data) correctly - they keep the
message on their queues and try again later, but that is their problem,
though it does waste some of your resources.

   The ‘acl_smtp_data’ ACL is run after the ‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’, the
‘acl_smtp_dkim’ and the ‘acl_smtp_mime’ ACLs.


File: spec.info,  Node: The SMTP DKIM ACL,  Next: The SMTP MIME ACL,  Prev: The DATA ACLs,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.5 The SMTP DKIM ACL
------------------------

The ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ ACL is available only when Exim is compiled with
DKIM support enabled (which is the default).

   If, for a specific message, an ACL control *dkim_disable_verify* has
been set, this ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ ACL is not called.

   The ACL test specified by ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ happens after a message has
been received, and is executed for each DKIM signature found in a
message.  If not otherwise specified, the default action is to accept.

   This ACL is evaluated before ‘acl_smtp_mime’ and ‘acl_smtp_data’.

   For details on the operation of DKIM, see section *note DKIM
(DomainKeys Identified Mail): DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail].


File: spec.info,  Node: The SMTP MIME ACL,  Next: The SMTP PRDR ACL,  Prev: The SMTP DKIM ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.6 The SMTP MIME ACL
------------------------

The ‘acl_smtp_mime’ option is available only when Exim is compiled with
the content-scanning extension.  For details, see chapter *note Content
scanning at ACL time::.

   This ACL is evaluated after ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ but before
‘acl_smtp_data’.


File: spec.info,  Node: The SMTP PRDR ACL,  Next: The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL,  Prev: The SMTP MIME ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.7 The SMTP PRDR ACL
------------------------

The ‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’ ACL is available only when Exim is compiled
with PRDR support enabled (which is the default).  It becomes active
only when the PRDR feature is negotiated between client and server for a
message, and more than one recipient has been accepted.

   The ACL test specified by ‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’ happens after a
message has been received, and is executed once for each recipient of
the message with ‘$local_part’ and ‘$domain’ valid.  The test may
accept, defer or deny for individual recipients.  The ‘acl_smtp_data’
will still be called after this ACL and can reject the message overall,
even if this ACL has accepted it for some or all recipients.

   PRDR may be used to support per-user content filtering.  Without it
one must defer any recipient after the first that has a different
content-filter configuration.  With PRDR, the RCPT-time check for this
can be disabled when the variable ‘$prdr_requested’ is "yes".  Any
required difference in behaviour of the main DATA-time ACL should
however depend on the PRDR-time ACL having run, as Exim will avoid doing
so in some situations (e.g.  single-recipient mails).

   See also the ‘prdr_enable’ global option and the ‘hosts_try_prdr’
smtp transport option.

   This ACL is evaluated after ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ but before
‘acl_smtp_data’.  If the ACL is not defined, processing completes as if
the feature was not requested by the client.


File: spec.info,  Node: The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL,  Next: The QUIT ACL,  Prev: The SMTP PRDR ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.8 The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL
-----------------------------

The ‘acl_smtp_wellknown’ ACL is available only when Exim is compiled
with WELLKNOWN support enabled.

   The ACL determines the response to an SMTP WELLKNOWN command, using
the normal accept/defer/deny verbs for the response code, and a new
"control=wellknown" modifier.  This modifier takes a single option,
separated by a '/' character, which must be the name of a file
containing the response cleartext.  The modifier is expanded before use
in the usual way before it is used.  The configuration is responsible
for picking a suitable file to return and, most importantly, not
returning any unexpected file.  The argument for the SMTP verb will be
available in the ‘$smtp_command_argument’ variable and can be used for
building the file path.  If the file path given in the modifier is empty
or inacessible, the control will fail.

   For example:

      check_wellknown:
       accept control = wellknown/\
     		    ${lookup {${xtextd:$smtp_command_argument}} \
     			dsearch,key=path,filter=file,ret=full \
     			{$spooldir/wellknown.d}}

   File content will be encoded in "xtext" form, and line-wrapping for
line-length limitation will be done before transmission.  A response
summary line will be prepended, with the (pre-encoding) file size.

   The above example uses the expansion operator
${xtextd:<coded-string>} which is needed to decode the xtext-encoded key
from the SMTP verb.

   Under the util directory there is a "mailtest" utility which can be
used to test/retrieve WELLKNOWN items.  Syntax is

       mailtest -h host.example.com -w security.txt

   WELLKNOWN is a ESMTP extension providing access to extended
information about the server.  It is modelled on the webserver
facilities documented in *RFC 8615
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8615)* and can be used for a
security.txt file and could be used for ACME handshaking (*RFC 8555
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8555)*).

   Exim will advertise WELLKNOWN support in the EHLO response
(conditional on a new option ‘wellknown_advertise_hosts’) and service
WELLKNOWN smtp verbs having a single parameter giving a key for an item
of "site-wide metadata".  The verb and key are separated by whitespace,
and the key is xtext-encoded (per *RFC 3461
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3461#section-4)*).


File: spec.info,  Node: The QUIT ACL,  Next: The not-QUIT ACL,  Prev: The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.9 The QUIT ACL
-------------------

The ACL for the SMTP QUIT command is anomalous, in that the outcome of
the ACL does not affect the response code to QUIT, which is always 221.
Thus, the ACL does not in fact control any access.  For this reason, it
may only accept or warn as its final result.

   This ACL can be used for tasks such as custom logging at the end of
an SMTP session.  For example, you can use ACL variables in other ACLs
to count messages, recipients, etc., and log the totals at QUIT time
using one or more ‘logwrite’ modifiers on a ‘warn’ verb.

   *Warning*: Only the ‘$acl_c’_x_ variables can be used for this,
because the ‘$acl_m’_x_ variables are reset at the end of each incoming
message.

   You do not need to have a final ‘accept’, but if you do, you can use
a ‘message’ modifier to specify custom text that is sent as part of the
221 response to QUIT.

   This ACL is run only for a "normal" QUIT. For certain kinds of
disastrous failure (for example, failure to open a log file, or when
Exim is bombing out because it has detected an unrecoverable error), all
SMTP commands from the client are given temporary error responses until
QUIT is received or the connection is closed.  In these special cases,
the QUIT ACL does not run.


File: spec.info,  Node: The not-QUIT ACL,  Prev: The QUIT ACL,  Up: Specifying when ACLs are used

44.2.10 The not-QUIT ACL
------------------------

The not-QUIT ACL, specified by ‘acl_smtp_notquit’, is run in most cases
when an SMTP session ends without sending QUIT. However, when Exim
itself is in bad trouble, such as being unable to write to its log
files, this ACL is not run, because it might try to do things (such as
write to log files) that make the situation even worse.

   Like the QUIT ACL, this ACL is provided to make it possible to do
customized logging or to gather statistics, and its outcome is ignored.
The ‘delay’ modifier is forbidden in this ACL, and the only permitted
verbs are ‘accept’ and ‘warn’.

   When the not-QUIT ACL is running, the variable ‘$smtp_notquit_reason’
is set to a string that indicates the reason for the termination of the
SMTP connection.  The possible values are:

    ‘acl-drop’                       Another ACL issued a ‘drop’
                                     command
    ‘bad-commands’                   Too many unknown or non-mail
                                     commands
    ‘command-timeout’                Timeout while reading SMTP
                                     commands
    ‘connection-lost’                The SMTP connection has been lost
    ‘data-timeout’                   Timeout while reading message data
    ‘local-scan-error’               The ‘local_scan()’ function
                                     crashed
    ‘local-scan-timeout’             The ‘local_scan()’ function timed
                                     out
    ‘signal-exit’                    SIGTERM or SIGINT
    ‘synchronization-error’          SMTP synchronization error
    ‘tls-failed’                     TLS failed to start

   In most cases when an SMTP connection is closed without having
received QUIT, Exim sends an SMTP response message before actually
closing the connection.  With the exception of the ‘acl-drop’ case, the
default message can be overridden by the ‘message’ modifier in the
not-QUIT ACL. In the case of a ‘drop’ verb in another ACL, it is the
message from the other ACL that is used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Finding an ACL to use,  Next: ACL return codes,  Prev: Specifying when ACLs are used,  Up: Access control lists

44.3 Finding an ACL to use
==========================

The value of an ‘acl_smtp_’_xxx_ option is expanded before use, so you
can use different ACLs in different circumstances.  For example,

     acl_smtp_rcpt = ${if ={25}{$interface_port} \
                          {acl_check_rcpt} {acl_check_rcpt_submit} }

   In the default configuration file there are some example settings for
providing an *RFC 4409 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4409)*
message "submission" service on port 587 and an *RFC 8314
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8314)* "submissions" service
on port 465.  You can use a string expansion like this to choose an ACL
for MUAs on these ports which is more appropriate for this purpose than
the default ACL on port 25.

   The expanded string does not have to be the name of an ACL in the
configuration file; there are other possibilities.  Having expanded the
string, Exim searches for an ACL as follows:

   • If the string begins with a slash, Exim uses it as a filename, and
     reads its contents as an ACL. The lines are processed in the same
     way as lines in the Exim configuration file.  In particular,
     continuation lines are supported, blank lines are ignored, as are
     lines whose first non-whitespace character is "#".  If the file
     does not exist or cannot be read, an error occurs (typically
     causing a temporary failure of whatever caused the ACL to be run).
     For example:

          acl_smtp_data = /etc/acls/\
            ${lookup{$sender_host_address}lsearch\
            {/etc/acllist}{$value}{default}}

     This looks up an ACL file to use on the basis of the host's IP
     address, falling back to a default if the lookup fails.  If an ACL
     is successfully read from a file, it is retained in memory for the
     duration of the Exim process, so that it can be re-used without
     having to re-read the file.

   • If the string does not start with a slash, and does not contain any
     spaces, Exim searches the ACL section of the configuration for an
     ACL whose name matches the string.

   • If no named ACL is found, or if the string contains spaces, Exim
     parses the string as an inline ACL. This can save typing in cases
     where you just want to have something like

          acl_smtp_vrfy = accept

     in order to allow free use of the VRFY command.  Such a string may
     contain newlines; it is processed in the same way as an ACL that is
     read from a file.


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL return codes,  Next: Unset ACL options,  Prev: Finding an ACL to use,  Up: Access control lists

44.4 ACL return codes
=====================

Except for the QUIT ACL, which does not affect the SMTP return code (see
section *note The QUIT ACL:: above), the result of running an ACL is
either "accept" or "deny", or, if some test cannot be completed (for
example, if a database is down), "defer".  These results cause 2_xx_,
5_xx_, and 4_xx_ return codes, respectively, to be used in the SMTP
dialogue.  A fourth return, "error", occurs when there is an error such
as invalid syntax in the ACL. This also causes a 4_xx_ return code.

   For the non-SMTP ACL, "defer" and "error" are treated in the same way
as "deny", because there is no mechanism for passing temporary errors to
the submitters of non-SMTP messages.

   ACLs that are relevant to message reception may also return
"discard".  This has the effect of "accept", but causes either the
entire message or an individual recipient address to be discarded.  In
other words, it is a blackholing facility.  Use it with care.

   If the ACL for MAIL returns "discard", all recipients are discarded,
and no ACL is run for subsequent RCPT commands.  The effect of "discard"
in a RCPT ACL is to discard just the one recipient address.  If there
are no recipients left when the message's data is received, the DATA ACL
is not run.  A "discard" return from the DATA or the non-SMTP ACL
discards all the remaining recipients.  The "discard" return is not
permitted for the ‘acl_smtp_predata’ ACL.

   If the ACL for VRFY returns "accept", a recipient verify (without
callout) is done on the address and the result determines the SMTP
response.

   The ‘local_scan()’ function is always run, even if there are no
remaining recipients; it may create new recipients.


File: spec.info,  Node: Unset ACL options,  Next: Data for message ACLs,  Prev: ACL return codes,  Up: Access control lists

44.5 Unset ACL options
======================

The default actions when any of the ‘acl_’_xxx_ options are unset are
not all the same.  *Note*: These defaults apply only when the relevant
ACL is not defined at all.  For any defined ACL, the default action when
control reaches the end of the ACL statements is "deny".

   For ‘acl_smtp_quit’ and ‘acl_not_smtp_start’ there is no default
because these two are ACLs that are used only for their side effects.
They cannot be used to accept or reject anything.

   For ‘acl_not_smtp’, ‘acl_smtp_auth’, ‘acl_smtp_connect’,
‘acl_smtp_data’, ‘acl_smtp_helo’, ‘acl_smtp_mail’, ‘acl_smtp_mailauth’,
‘acl_smtp_mime’, ‘acl_smtp_predata’, and ‘acl_smtp_starttls’, the action
when the ACL is not defined is "accept".

   For the others (‘acl_smtp_atrn’, ‘acl_smtp_etrn’, ‘acl_smtp_expn’,
‘acl_smtp_rcpt’, ‘acl_smtp_vrfy’ and ‘acl_smtp_wellknown’), the action
when the ACL is not defined is "deny".  This means that ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’
must be defined in order to receive any messages over an SMTP
connection.  For an example, see the ACL in the default configuration
file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Data for message ACLs,  Next: Data for non-message ACLs,  Prev: Unset ACL options,  Up: Access control lists

44.6 Data for message ACLs
==========================

When a MAIL or RCPT ACL, or either of the DATA ACLs, is running, the
variables that contain information about the host and the message's
sender (for example, ‘$sender_host_address’ and ‘$sender_address’) are
set, and can be used in ACL statements.  In the case of RCPT (but not
MAIL or DATA), ‘$domain’ and ‘$local_part’ are set from the argument
address.  The entire SMTP command is available in ‘$smtp_command’.

   When an ACL for the AUTH parameter of MAIL is running, the variables
that contain information about the host are set, but ‘$sender_address’
is not yet set.  Section *note The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands::
contains a discussion of this parameter and how it is used.

   The ‘$message_size’ variable is set to the value of the SIZE
parameter on the MAIL command at MAIL, RCPT and pre-data time, or to -1
if that parameter is not given.  The value is updated to the true
message size by the time the final DATA ACL is run (after the message
data has been received).

   The ‘$rcpt_count’ variable increases by one for each RCPT command
received.  The ‘$recipients_count’ variable increases by one each time a
RCPT command is accepted, so while an ACL for RCPT is being processed,
it contains the number of previously accepted recipients.  At DATA time
(for both the DATA ACLs), ‘$rcpt_count’ contains the total number of
RCPT commands, and ‘$recipients_count’ contains the total number of
accepted recipients.


File: spec.info,  Node: Data for non-message ACLs,  Next: Format of an ACL,  Prev: Data for message ACLs,  Up: Access control lists

44.7 Data for non-message ACLs
==============================

When an ACL is being run for ATRN, AUTH, EHLO, ETRN, EXPN, HELO,
STARTTLS, or VRFY, the remainder of the SMTP command line is placed in
‘$smtp_command_argument’, and the entire SMTP command is available in
‘$smtp_command’.  These variables can be tested using a ‘condition’
condition.  For example, here is an ACL for use with AUTH, which insists
that either the session is encrypted, or the CRAM-MD5 authentication
method is used.  In other words, it does not permit authentication
methods that use cleartext passwords on unencrypted connections.

     acl_check_auth:
       accept encrypted = *
       accept condition = ${if eq{${uc:$smtp_command_argument}}\
                          {CRAM-MD5}}
       deny   message   = TLS encryption or CRAM-MD5 required

   (Another way of applying this restriction is to arrange for the
authenticators that use cleartext passwords not to be advertised when
the connection is not encrypted.  You can use the generic
‘server_advertise_condition’ authenticator option to do this.)


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of an ACL,  Next: ACL verbs,  Prev: Data for non-message ACLs,  Up: Access control lists

44.8 Format of an ACL
=====================

An individual ACL definition consists of a number of statements.  Each
statement starts with a verb, optionally followed by a number of
conditions and "modifiers".  Modifiers can change the way the verb
operates, define error and log messages, set variables, insert delays,
and vary the processing of accepted messages.

   If all the conditions are met, the verb is obeyed.  The same
condition may be used (with different arguments) more than once in the
same statement.  This provides a means of specifying an "and"
conjunction between conditions.  For example:

     deny  dnslists = list1.example
           dnslists = list2.example

   If there are no conditions, the verb is always obeyed.  Exim stops
evaluating the conditions and modifiers when it reaches a condition that
fails.  What happens then depends on the verb (and in one case, on a
special modifier).  Not all the conditions make sense at every testing
point.  For example, you cannot test a sender address in the ACL that is
run for a VRFY command.

   The definition of an ACL ends where another starts, or a different
configuration section starts.


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL verbs,  Next: ACL variables,  Prev: Format of an ACL,  Up: Access control lists

44.9 ACL verbs
==============

The ACL verbs are as follows:

   • ‘accept’: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns "accept".
     If any of the conditions are not met, what happens depends on
     whether ‘endpass’ appears among the conditions (for syntax see
     below).  If the failing condition is before ‘endpass’, control is
     passed to the next ACL statement; if it is after ‘endpass’, the ACL
     returns "deny".  Consider this statement, used to check a RCPT
     command:

          accept domains = +local_domains
                 endpass
                 verify = recipient

     If the recipient domain does not match the ‘domains’ condition,
     control passes to the next statement.  If it does match, the
     recipient is verified, and the command is accepted if verification
     succeeds.  However, if verification fails, the ACL yields "deny",
     because the failing condition is after ‘endpass’.

     The ‘endpass’ feature has turned out to be confusing to many
     people, so its use is not recommended nowadays.  It is always
     possible to rewrite an ACL so that ‘endpass’ is not needed, and it
     is no longer used in the default configuration.

     If a ‘message’ modifier appears on an ‘accept’ statement, its
     action depends on whether or not ‘endpass’ is present.  In the
     absence of ‘endpass’ (when an ‘accept’ verb either accepts or
     passes control to the next statement), ‘message’ can be used to
     vary the message that is sent when an SMTP command is accepted.
     For example, in a RCPT ACL you could have:

          accept  <some conditions>
                  message = OK, I will allow you through today

     You can specify an SMTP response code, optionally followed by an
     "extended response code" at the start of the message, but the first
     digit must be the same as would be sent by default, which is 2 for
     an ‘accept’ verb.

     If ‘endpass’ is present in an ‘accept’ statement, ‘message’
     specifies an error message that is used when access is denied.
     This behaviour is retained for backward compatibility, but current
     "best practice" is to avoid the use of ‘endpass’.

   • ‘defer’: If all the conditions are true, the ACL returns "defer"
     which, in an SMTP session, causes a 4_xx_ response to be given.
     For a non-SMTP ACL, ‘defer’ is the same as ‘deny’, because there is
     no way of sending a temporary error.  For a RCPT command, ‘defer’
     is much the same as using a ‘redirect’ router and ‘:defer:’ while
     verifying, but the ‘defer’ verb can be used in any ACL, and even
     for a recipient it might be a simpler approach.

   • ‘deny’: If all the conditions are met, the ACL returns "deny".  If
     any of the conditions are not met, control is passed to the next
     ACL statement.  For example,

          deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org

     rejects commands from hosts that are on a DNS black list.

   • ‘discard’: This verb behaves like ‘accept’, except that it returns
     "discard" from the ACL instead of "accept".  It is permitted only
     on ACLs that are concerned with receiving messages.  When all the
     conditions are true, the sending entity receives a "success"
     response.  However, ‘discard’ causes recipients to be discarded.
     If it is used in an ACL for RCPT, just the one recipient is
     discarded; if used for MAIL, DATA or in the non-SMTP ACL, all the
     message's recipients are discarded.  Recipients that are discarded
     before DATA do not appear in the log line when the
     ‘received_recipients’ log selector is set.

     If the ‘log_message’ modifier is set when ‘discard’ operates, its
     contents are added to the line that is automatically written to the
     log.  The ‘message’ modifier operates exactly as it does for
     ‘accept’.

   • ‘drop’: This verb behaves like ‘deny’, except that an SMTP
     connection is forcibly closed after the 5_xx_ error message has
     been sent.  For example:

          drop   condition = ${if > {$rcpt_count}{20}}
                 message   = I don't take more than 20 RCPTs

     There is no difference between ‘deny’ and ‘drop’ for the
     connect-time ACL. The connection is always dropped after sending a
     550 response.

   • ‘require’: If all the conditions are met, control is passed to the
     next ACL statement.  If any of the conditions are not met, the ACL
     returns "deny".  For example, when checking a RCPT command,

          require message = Sender did not verify
                  verify  = sender

     passes control to subsequent statements only if the message's
     sender can be verified.  Otherwise, it rejects the command.  Note
     the positioning of the ‘message’ modifier, before the ‘verify’
     condition.  The reason for this is discussed in section *note
     Condition and modifier processing::.

   • ‘warn’: If all the conditions are true, a line specified by the
     ‘log_message’ modifier is written to Exim's main log.  Control
     always passes to the next ACL statement.  If any condition is
     false, the log line is not written.  If an identical log line is
     requested several times in the same message, only one copy is
     actually written to the log.  If you want to force duplicates to be
     written, use the ‘logwrite’ modifier instead.

     If ‘log_message’ is not present, a ‘warn’ verb just checks its
     conditions and obeys any "immediate" modifiers (such as ‘control’,
     ‘set’, ‘logwrite’, ‘add_header’, and ‘remove_header’) that appear
     before the first failing condition.  There is more about adding
     header lines in section *note Adding header lines in ACLs::.

     If any condition on a ‘warn’ statement cannot be completed (that
     is, there is some sort of defer), the log line specified by
     ‘log_message’ is not written.  This does not include the case of a
     forced failure from a lookup, which is considered to be a
     successful completion.  After a defer, no further conditions or
     modifiers in the ‘warn’ statement are processed.  The incident is
     logged, and the ACL continues to be processed, from the next
     statement onwards.

     When one of the ‘warn’ conditions is an address verification that
     fails, the text of the verification failure message is in
     ‘$acl_verify_message’.  If you want this logged, you must set it up
     explicitly.  For example:

          warn   !verify = sender
                 log_message = sender verify failed: $acl_verify_message

   At the end of each ACL there is an implicit unconditional ‘deny’.

   As you can see from the examples above, the conditions and modifiers
are written one to a line, with the first one on the same line as the
verb, and subsequent ones on following lines.  If you have a very long
condition, you can continue it onto several physical lines by the usual
backslash continuation mechanism.  It is conventional to align the
conditions vertically.


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL variables,  Next: Condition and modifier processing,  Prev: ACL verbs,  Up: Access control lists

44.10 ACL variables
===================

There are some special variables that can be set during ACL processing.
They can be used to pass information between different ACLs, different
invocations of the same ACL in the same SMTP connection, and between
ACLs and the routers, transports, and filters that are used to deliver a
message.  The names of these variables must begin with ‘$acl_c’ or
‘$acl_m’, followed either by a digit or an underscore, but the remainder
of the name can be any sequence of alphanumeric characters and
underscores that you choose.  There is no limit on the number of ACL
variables.  The two sets act as follows:

   • The values of those variables whose names begin with ‘$acl_c’
     persist throughout an SMTP connection.  They are never reset.
     Thus, a value that is set while receiving one message is still
     available when receiving the next message on the same SMTP
     connection.

   • The values of those variables whose names begin with ‘$acl_m’
     persist only while a message is being received.  They are reset
     afterwards.  They are also reset by MAIL, RSET, EHLO, HELO, and
     after starting up a TLS session.

   When a message is accepted, the current values of all the ACL
variables are preserved with the message and are subsequently made
available at delivery time.  The ACL variables are set by a modifier
called ‘set’.  For example:

     accept hosts = whatever
            set acl_m4 = some value
     accept authenticated = *
            set acl_c_auth = yes

   *Note*: A leading dollar sign is not used when naming a variable that
is to be set.  If you want to set a variable without taking any action,
you can use a ‘warn’ verb without any other modifiers or conditions.

   What happens if a syntactically valid but undefined ACL variable is
referenced depends on the setting of the ‘strict_acl_vars’ option.  If
it is false (the default), an empty string is substituted; if it is
true, an error is generated.

   Versions of Exim before 4.64 have a limited set of numbered
variables, but their names are compatible, so there is no problem with
upgrading.


File: spec.info,  Node: Condition and modifier processing,  Next: ACL modifiers,  Prev: ACL variables,  Up: Access control lists

44.11 Condition and modifier processing
=======================================

An exclamation mark preceding a condition negates its result.  For
example:

     deny   domains = *.dom.example
           !verify  = recipient

   causes the ACL to return "deny" if the recipient domain ends in
_dom.example_ and the recipient address cannot be verified.  Sometimes
negation can be used on the right-hand side of a condition.  For
example, these two statements are equivalent:

     deny  hosts = !192.168.3.4
     deny !hosts =  192.168.3.4

   However, for many conditions (‘verify’ being a good example), only
left-hand side negation of the whole condition is possible.

   The arguments of conditions and modifiers are expanded.  A forced
failure of an expansion causes a condition to be ignored, that is, it
behaves as if the condition is true.  Consider these two statements:

     accept  senders = ${lookup{$host_name}lsearch\
                       {/some/file}{$value}fail}
     accept  senders = ${lookup{$host_name}lsearch\
                       {/some/file}{$value}{}}

   Each attempts to look up a list of acceptable senders.  If the lookup
succeeds, the returned list is searched, but if the lookup fails the
behaviour is different in the two cases.  The ‘fail’ in the first
statement causes the condition to be ignored, leaving no further
conditions.  The ‘accept’ verb therefore succeeds.  The second
statement, however, generates an empty list when the lookup fails.  No
sender can match an empty list, so the condition fails, and therefore
the ‘accept’ also fails.

   ACL modifiers appear mixed in with conditions in ACL statements.
Some of them specify actions that are taken as the conditions for a
statement are checked; others specify text for messages that are used
when access is denied or a warning is generated.  The ‘control’ modifier
affects the way an incoming message is handled.

   The positioning of the modifiers in an ACL statement is important,
because the processing of a verb ceases as soon as its outcome is known.
Only those modifiers that have already been encountered will take
effect.  For example, consider this use of the ‘message’ modifier:

     require message = Can't verify sender
             verify  = sender
             message = Can't verify recipient
             verify  = recipient
             message = This message cannot be used

   If sender verification fails, Exim knows that the result of the
statement is "deny", so it goes no further.  The first ‘message’
modifier has been seen, so its text is used as the error message.  If
sender verification succeeds, but recipient verification fails, the
second message is used.  If recipient verification succeeds, the third
message becomes "current", but is never used because there are no more
conditions to cause failure.

   For the ‘deny’ verb, on the other hand, it is always the last
‘message’ modifier that is used, because all the conditions must be true
for rejection to happen.  Specifying more than one ‘message’ modifier
does not make sense, and the message can even be specified after all the
conditions.  For example:

     deny   hosts = ...
           !senders = *@my.domain.example
            message = Invalid sender from client host

   The "deny" result does not happen until the end of the statement is
reached, by which time Exim has set up the message.


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL modifiers,  Next: Use of the control modifier,  Prev: Condition and modifier processing,  Up: Access control lists

44.12 ACL modifiers
===================

The ACL modifiers are as follows:

*add_header* = <_text_>
     This modifier specifies one or more header lines that are to be
     added to an incoming message, assuming, of course, that the message
     is ultimately accepted.  For details, see section *note Adding
     header lines in ACLs::.

*continue* = <_text_>
     This modifier does nothing of itself, and processing of the ACL
     always continues with the next condition or modifier.  The value of
     ‘continue’ is in the side effects of expanding its argument.
     Typically this could be used to update a database.  It is really
     just a syntactic tidiness, to avoid having to write rather ugly
     lines like this:

          condition = ${if eq{0}{<some expansion>}{true}{true}}

     Instead, all you need is

          continue = <some expansion>

*control* = <_text_>
     This modifier affects the subsequent processing of the SMTP
     connection or of an incoming message that is accepted.  The effect
     of the first type of control lasts for the duration of the
     connection, whereas the effect of the second type lasts only until
     the current message has been received.  The message-specific
     controls always apply to the whole message, not to individual
     recipients, even if the ‘control’ modifier appears in a RCPT ACL.

     As there are now quite a few controls that can be applied, they are
     described separately in section *note Use of the control
     modifier::.  The ‘control’ modifier can be used in several
     different ways.  For example:

        • It can be at the end of an ‘accept’ statement:

                   accept  ...some conditions
                           control = queue

          In this case, the control is applied when this statement
          yields "accept", in other words, when the conditions are all
          true.

        • It can be in the middle of an ‘accept’ statement:

                   accept  ...some conditions...
                           control = queue
                           ...some more conditions...

          If the first set of conditions are true, the control is
          applied, even if the statement does not accept because one of
          the second set of conditions is false.  In this case, some
          subsequent statement must yield "accept" for the control to be
          relevant.

        • It can be used with ‘warn’ to apply the control, leaving the
          decision about accepting or denying to a subsequent verb.  For
          example:

                   warn    ...some conditions...
                           control = freeze
                   accept  ...

          This example of ‘warn’ does not contain ‘message’,
          ‘log_message’, or ‘logwrite’, so it does not add anything to
          the message and does not write a log entry.

        • If you want to apply a control unconditionally, you can use it
          with a ‘require’ verb.  For example:

                   require  control = no_multiline_responses

*delay* = <_time_>
     This modifier may appear in any ACL except notquit.  It causes Exim
     to wait for the time interval before proceeding.  However, when
     testing Exim using the ‘-bh’ option, the delay is not actually
     imposed (an appropriate message is output instead).  The time is
     given in the usual Exim notation, and the delay happens as soon as
     the modifier is processed.  In an SMTP session, pending output is
     flushed before the delay is imposed.

     Like ‘control’, ‘delay’ can be used with ‘accept’ or ‘deny’, for
     example:

          deny    ...some conditions...
                  delay = 30s

     The delay happens if all the conditions are true, before the
     statement returns "deny".  Compare this with:

          deny    delay = 30s
                  ...some conditions...

     which waits for 30s before processing the conditions.  The ‘delay’
     modifier can also be used with ‘warn’ and together with ‘control’:

          warn    ...some conditions...
                  delay = 2m
                  control = freeze
          accept  ...

     If ‘delay’ is encountered when the SMTP PIPELINING extension is in
     use, responses to several commands are no longer buffered and sent
     in one packet (as they would normally be) because all output is
     flushed before imposing the delay.  This optimization is disabled
     so that a number of small delays do not appear to the client as one
     large aggregated delay that might provoke an unwanted timeout.  You
     can, however, disable output flushing for ‘delay’ by using a
     ‘control’ modifier to set ‘no_delay_flush’.

*endpass*
     This modifier, which has no argument, is recognized only in
     ‘accept’ and ‘discard’ statements.  It marks the boundary between
     the conditions whose failure causes control to pass to the next
     statement, and the conditions whose failure causes the ACL to
     return "deny".  This concept has proved to be confusing to some
     people, so the use of ‘endpass’ is no longer recommended as "best
     practice".  See the description of ‘accept’ above for more details.

*log_message* = <_text_>
     This modifier sets up a message that is used as part of the log
     message if the ACL denies access or a ‘warn’ statement's conditions
     are true.  For example:

          require log_message = wrong cipher suite $tls_in_cipher
                  encrypted   = DES-CBC3-SHA

     ‘log_message’ is also used when recipients are discarded by
     ‘discard’.  For example:

          discard <some conditions>
                  log_message = Discarded $local_part@$domain because...

     When access is denied, ‘log_message’ adds to any underlying error
     message that may exist because of a condition failure.  For
     example, while verifying a recipient address, a _:fail:_
     redirection might have already set up a message.

     The message may be defined before the conditions to which it
     applies, because the string expansion does not happen until Exim
     decides that access is to be denied.  This means that any variables
     that are set by the condition are available for inclusion in the
     message.  For example, the ‘$dnslist_’<_xxx_> variables are set
     after a DNS black list lookup succeeds.  If the expansion of
     ‘log_message’ fails, or if the result is an empty string, the
     modifier is ignored.

     If you want to use a ‘warn’ statement to log the result of an
     address verification, you can use ‘$acl_verify_message’ to include
     the verification error message.

     If ‘log_message’ is used with a ‘warn’ statement, "Warning:" is
     added to the start of the logged message.  If the same warning log
     message is requested more than once while receiving a single email
     message, only one copy is actually logged.  If you want to log
     multiple copies, use ‘logwrite’ instead of ‘log_message’.  In the
     absence of ‘log_message’ and ‘logwrite’, nothing is logged for a
     successful ‘warn’ statement.

     If ‘log_message’ is not present and there is no underlying error
     message (for example, from the failure of address verification),
     but ‘message’ is present, the ‘message’ text is used for logging
     rejections.  However, if any text for logging contains newlines,
     only the first line is logged.  In the absence of both
     ‘log_message’ and ‘message’, a default built-in message is used for
     logging rejections.

*log_reject_target* = <_log name list_>
     This modifier makes it possible to specify which logs are used for
     messages about ACL rejections.  Its argument is a colon-separated
     list of words that can be "main", "reject", or "panic".  The
     default is ‘main:reject’.  The list may be empty, in which case a
     rejection is not logged at all.  For example, this ACL fragment
     writes no logging information when access is denied:

          deny <some conditions>
               log_reject_target =

     This modifier can be used in SMTP and non-SMTP ACLs.  It applies to
     both permanent and temporary rejections.  Its effect lasts for the
     rest of the current ACL.

*logwrite* = <_text_>
     This modifier writes a message to a log file as soon as it is
     encountered when processing an ACL. (Compare ‘log_message’, which,
     except in the case of ‘warn’ and ‘discard’, is used only if the ACL
     statement denies access.)  The ‘logwrite’ modifier can be used to
     log special incidents in ACLs.  For example:

          accept <some special conditions>
                 control  = freeze
                 logwrite = froze message because ...

     By default, the message is written to the main log.  However, it
     may begin with a colon, followed by a comma-separated list of log
     names, and then another colon, to specify exactly which logs are to
     be written.  For example:

          logwrite = :main,reject: text for main and reject logs
          logwrite = :panic: text for panic log only

*message* = <_text_>
     This modifier sets up a text string that is expanded and used as a
     response message when an ACL statement terminates the ACL with an
     "accept", "deny", or "defer" response.  (In the case of the
     ‘accept’ and ‘discard’ verbs, there is some complication if
     ‘endpass’ is involved; see the description of ‘accept’ for
     details.)

     The expansion of the message happens at the time Exim decides that
     the ACL is to end, not at the time it processes ‘message’.  If the
     expansion fails, or generates an empty string, the modifier is
     ignored.  Here is an example where ‘message’ must be specified
     first, because the ACL ends with a rejection if the ‘hosts’
     condition fails:

          require  message = Host not recognized
                   hosts = 10.0.0.0/8

     (Once a condition has failed, no further conditions or modifiers
     are processed.)

     For ACLs that are triggered by SMTP commands, the message is
     returned as part of the SMTP response.  The use of ‘message’ with
     ‘accept’ (or ‘discard’) is meaningful only for SMTP, as no message
     is returned when a non-SMTP message is accepted.  In the case of
     the connect ACL, accepting with a message modifier overrides the
     value of ‘smtp_banner’.  For the EHLO/HELO ACL, a customized accept
     message may not contain more than one line (otherwise it will be
     truncated at the first newline and a panic logged), and it cannot
     affect the EHLO options.

     When SMTP is involved, the message may begin with an overriding
     response code, consisting of three digits optionally followed by an
     "extended response code" of the form _n.n.n_, each code being
     followed by a space.  For example:

          deny  message = 599 1.2.3 Host not welcome
                hosts = 192.168.34.0/24

     The first digit of a supplied response code must be the same as
     would be sent by default.  A panic occurs if it is not.  Exim uses
     a 550 code when it denies access, but for the predata ACL, note
     that the default success code is 354, not 2_xx_.

     Likewise, the first component of an "extended response code" must
     match the default.

     Notwithstanding the previous paragraph, for the QUIT ACL, unlike
     the others, the message modifier cannot override the 221 response
     code.

     The text in a ‘message’ modifier is literal; any quotes are taken
     as literals, but because the string is expanded, backslash escapes
     are processed anyway.  If the message contains newlines, this gives
     rise to a multi-line SMTP response.  A long message line will also
     be split into multi-line SMTP responses, on word boundaries if
     possible.

     While the text is being expanded, the ‘$acl_verify_message’
     variable contains any message previously set.  Afterwards,
     ‘$acl_verify_message’ is cleared.

     If ‘message’ is used on a statement that verifies an address, the
     message specified overrides any message that is generated by the
     verification process.  However, the original message is available
     in the variable ‘$acl_verify_message’, so you can incorporate it
     into your message if you wish.  In particular, if you want the text
     from ‘:fail:’ items in ‘redirect’ routers to be passed back as part
     of the SMTP response, you should either not use a ‘message’
     modifier, or make use of ‘$acl_verify_message’.

     For compatibility with previous releases of Exim, a ‘message’
     modifier that is used with a ‘warn’ verb behaves in a similar way
     to the ‘add_header’ modifier, but this usage is now deprecated.
     However, ‘message’ acts only when all the conditions are true,
     wherever it appears in an ACL command, whereas ‘add_header’ acts as
     soon as it is encountered.  If ‘message’ is used with ‘warn’ in an
     ACL that is not concerned with receiving a message, it has no
     effect.

*queue* = <_text_>
     This modifier specifies the use of a named queue for spool files
     for the message.  It can only be used before the message is
     received (i.e.  not in the DATA ACL). This could be used, for
     example, for known high-volume burst sources of traffic, or for
     quarantine of messages.  Separate queue-runner processes will be
     needed for named queues.  If the text after expansion is empty, the
     default queue is used.

*remove_header* = <_text_>
     This modifier specifies one or more header names in a
     colon-separated list that are to be removed from an incoming
     message, assuming, of course, that the message is ultimately
     accepted.  For details, see section *note Removing header lines in
     ACLs::.

*set* <_acl_name_> = <_value_>
     This modifier puts a value into one of the ACL variables (see
     section *note ACL variables::).

*udpsend* = <_parameters_>
     This modifier sends a UDP packet, for purposes such as statistics
     collection or behaviour monitoring.  The parameters are expanded,
     and the result of the expansion must be a colon-separated list
     consisting of a destination server, port number, and the packet
     contents.  The server can be specified as a host name or IPv4 or
     IPv6 address.  The separator can be changed with the usual angle
     bracket syntax.  For example, you might want to collect information
     on which hosts connect when:

          udpsend = <; 2001:dB8::dead:beef ; 1234 ;\
                       $tod_zulu $sender_host_address


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of the control modifier,  Next: Summary of message fixup control,  Prev: ACL modifiers,  Up: Access control lists

44.13 Use of the control modifier
=================================

The ‘control’ modifier supports the following settings:

*control = allow_auth_unadvertised*
     This modifier allows a client host to use the SMTP AUTH command
     even when it has not been advertised in response to EHLO.
     Furthermore, because there are apparently some really broken
     clients that do this, Exim will accept AUTH after HELO (rather than
     EHLO) when this control is set.  It should be used only if you
     really need it, and you should limit its use to those broken
     clients that do not work without it.  For example:

          warn hosts   = 192.168.34.25
               control = allow_auth_unadvertised

     Normally, when an Exim server receives an AUTH command, it checks
     the name of the authentication mechanism that is given in the
     command to ensure that it matches an advertised mechanism.  When
     this control is set, the check that a mechanism has been advertised
     is bypassed.  Any configured mechanism can be used by the client.
     This control is permitted only in the connection and HELO ACLs.

*control = caseful_local_part*
*control = caselower_local_part*
     These two controls are permitted only in the ACL specified by
     ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’ (that is, during RCPT processing).  By default, the
     contents of ‘$local_part’ are lower cased before ACL processing.
     If "caseful_local_part" is specified, any uppercase letters in the
     original local part are restored in ‘$local_part’ for the rest of
     the ACL, or until a control that sets "caselower_local_part" is
     encountered.

     These controls affect only the current recipient.  Moreover, they
     apply only to local part handling that takes place directly in the
     ACL (for example, as a key in lookups).  If a test to verify the
     recipient is obeyed, the case-related handling of the local part
     during the verification is controlled by the router configuration
     (see the ‘caseful_local_part’ generic router option).

     This facility could be used, for example, to add a spam score to
     local parts containing upper case letters.  For example, using
     ‘$acl_m4’ to accumulate the spam score:

          warn  control = caseful_local_part
                set acl_m4 = ${eval:\
                               $acl_m4 + \
                               ${if match{$local_part}{[A-Z]}{1}{0}}\
                              }
                control = caselower_local_part

     Notice that we put back the lower cased version afterwards,
     assuming that is what is wanted for subsequent tests.

*control = cutthrough_delivery/*<_options_>
     This control requests delivery be attempted while the item is being
     received.

     The control is usable in the RCPT ACL. If enabled for a message
     received via smtp and routed to an smtp transport, and only one
     transport, interface, destination host and port combination is used
     for all recipients of the message, then the delivery connection is
     made while the receiving connection is open and data is copied from
     one to the other.

     An attempt to set this control for any recipient but the first for
     a mail will be quietly ignored.  If a recipient-verify callout
     (with use_sender or use_tpt_sender) connection is subsequently
     requested in the same ACL it is held open and used for any
     subsequent recipients and the data, otherwise one is made after the
     initial RCPT ACL completes.

     Note that routers are used in verify mode, and cannot depend on
     content of received headers.  Note also that headers cannot be
     modified by any of the post-data ACLs (DATA, MIME and DKIM).
     Headers may be modified by routers (subject to the above) and
     transports.  The _Received-By:_ header is generated as soon as the
     body reception starts, rather than the traditional time after the
     full message is received; this will affect the timestamp.

     All the usual ACLs are called; if one results in the message being
     rejected, all effort spent in delivery (including the costs on the
     ultimate destination) will be wasted.  Note that in the case of
     data-time ACLs this includes the entire message body.

     Cutthrough delivery is not supported via transport-filters or when
     DKIM signing of outgoing messages is done, because it sends data to
     the ultimate destination before the entire message has been
     received from the source.  It is not supported for messages
     received with the SMTP PRDR or CHUNKING modes in use.

     Should the ultimate destination system positively accept or reject
     the mail, a corresponding indication is given to the source system
     and nothing is queued.  If the item is successfully delivered in
     cutthrough mode the delivery log lines are tagged with ">>" rather
     than "=>" and appear before the acceptance "<=" line.

     Delivery in this mode avoids the generation of a bounce mail to a
     (possibly faked) sender when the destination system is doing
     content-scan based rejection.

     Options for this control may be appended, separated by slash ("/")
     characters.  There are two possible options, both taking a value
     string prefixed by an equals ("=") character.

     The *defer* option controls the result of a temporary error of the
     cutthrough delivery.  The default value "spool" queues the message
     in the normal way for later processing.  A value of "pass" copies
     an SMTP defer response back to the initiator and does not queue the
     message.  Note that this is independent of any recipient verify
     conditions in the ACL.

     The *sender* option controls the envelope-from used for the
     outbound connection.  The default value of "orig" uses the address
     given for envelope-from in the inbound (originating) connection.  A
     value of "transport" permits the transport used for the outbound
     connection to modify the envelope-from, via its *return_path*
     option.  If the control is used on combination with a verify (as
     described above) then the envelope-from options must match for the
     same connection to be used.

*control = debug/*<_options_>
     This control turns on debug logging, almost as though Exim had been
     invoked with ‘-d’, with the output going to a new logfile in the
     usual logs directory, by default called _debuglog_.

     Logging set up by the control will be maintained across spool
     residency.

     Options are a slash-separated list.  If an option takes an
     argument, the option name and argument are separated by an equals
     character.  Several options are supported:

          tag=<suffix>         The filename can be adjusted with thise option.
          		     The argument, which may access any variables already defined,
                               is appended to the default name.

          opts=<debug options> The argument specififes what is to be logged,
                               using the same values as the -d command-line option.

          stop                 Logging started with this control may be
                               stopped by using this option.

          kill                 Logging started with this control may be
                               stopped by using this option.
                               Additionally the debug file will be removed,
                               providing one means for speculative debug tracing.

          pretrigger=<size>    This option specifies a memory buffuer to be used
                               for pre-trigger debug capture.
                               Debug lines are recorded in the buffer until
                               and if) a trigger occurs; at which time they are
                               dumped to the debug file.  Newer lines displace the
                               oldest if the buffer is full.  After a trigger,
                               immediate writes to file are done as normal.

          trigger=<reason>     This option selects cause for the pretrigger buffer
                               see above) to be copied to file.  A reason of now
                               take effect immediately; one of paniclog triggers
                               on a write to the panic log.

     Some examples (which depend on variables that don't exist in all
     contexts):

                control = debug
                control = debug/tag=.$sender_host_address
                control = debug/opts=+expand+acl
                control = debug/tag=.$message_exim_id/opts=+expand
                control = debug/kill
                control = debug/opts=+all/pretrigger=1024/trigger=paniclog
                control = debug/trigger=now

*control = dkim_disable_verify*
     This control turns off DKIM verification processing entirely.  For
     details on the operation and configuration of DKIM, see section
     *note DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail): DKIM [DomainKeys
     Identified Mail].

*control = dmarc_disable_verify*
*control = dmarc_enable_forensic*
     These controls affect DMARC processing.  For details on the
     operation and configuration of DMARC, see section *note DMARC::.

     The "disable" turns off DMARC verification processing entirely.

*control = dscp/*<_value_>

     If Exim is built with DSCP support,

     this control causes the DSCP value associated with the socket for
     the inbound connection to be adjusted to a given value, given as
     one of a number of fixed strings or to numeric value.  The
     ‘-bI:dscp’ option may be used to ask Exim which names it knows of.
     Common values include ‘throughput’, ‘mincost’, and on newer systems
     ‘ef’, ‘af41’, etc.  Numeric values may be in the range 0 to 0x3F.

     The outbound packets from Exim will be marked with this value in
     the header (for IPv4, the TOS field; for IPv6, the TCLASS field);
     there is no guarantee that these values will have any effect, not
     be stripped by networking equipment, or do much of anything without
     cooperation with your Network Engineer and those of all network
     operators between the source and destination.

*control = enforce_sync*
*control = no_enforce_sync*
     These controls make it possible to be selective about when SMTP
     synchronization is enforced.  The global option ‘smtp_enforce_sync’
     specifies the initial state of the switch (it is true by default).
     See the description of this option in chapter *note Main
     configuration:: for details of SMTP synchronization checking.

     The effect of these two controls lasts for the remainder of the
     SMTP connection.  They can appear in any ACL except the one for the
     non-SMTP messages.  The most straightforward place to put them is
     in the ACL defined by ‘acl_smtp_connect’, which is run at the start
     of an incoming SMTP connection, before the first synchronization
     check.  The expected use is to turn off the synchronization checks
     for badly-behaved hosts that you nevertheless need to work with.

*control = fakedefer/*<_message_>
     This control works in exactly the same way as ‘fakereject’
     (described below) except that it causes an SMTP 450 response after
     the message data instead of a 550 response.  You must take care
     when using ‘fakedefer’ because it causes the messages to be
     duplicated when the sender retries.  Therefore, you should not use
     ‘fakedefer’ if the message is to be delivered normally.

*control = fakereject/*<_message_>
     This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, and DATA ACLs,
     in other words, only when an SMTP message is being received.  If
     Exim accepts the message, instead the final 250 response, a 550
     rejection message is sent.  However, Exim proceeds to deliver the
     message as normal.  The control applies only to the current
     message, not to any subsequent ones that may be received in the
     same SMTP connection.

     The text for the 550 response is taken from the ‘control’ modifier.
     If no message is supplied, the following is used:

          550-Your message has been rejected but is being
          550-kept for evaluation.
          550-If it was a legitimate message, it may still be
          550 delivered to the target recipient(s).

     This facility should be used with extreme caution.

*control = freeze*
     This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and
     non-SMTP ACLs, in other words, only when a message is being
     received.  If the message is accepted, it is placed on Exim's queue
     and frozen.  The control applies only to the current message, not
     to any subsequent ones that may be received in the same SMTP
     connection.

     This modifier can optionally be followed by ‘/no_tell’.  If the
     global option ‘freeze_tell’ is set, it is ignored for the current
     message (that is, nobody is told about the freezing), provided all
     the *control=freeze* modifiers that are obeyed for the current
     message have the ‘/no_tell’ option.

*control = no_delay_flush*
     Exim normally flushes SMTP output before implementing a delay in an
     ACL, to avoid unexpected timeouts in clients when the SMTP
     PIPELINING extension is in use.  This control, as long as it is
     encountered before the ‘delay’ modifier, disables such output
     flushing.

*control = no_callout_flush*
     Exim normally flushes SMTP output before performing a callout in an
     ACL, to avoid unexpected timeouts in clients when the SMTP
     PIPELINING extension is in use.  This control, as long as it is
     encountered before the ‘verify’ condition that causes the callout,
     disables such output flushing.

*control = no_mbox_unspool*
     This control is available when Exim is compiled with the content
     scanning extension.  Content scanning may require a copy of the
     current message, or parts of it, to be written in "mbox format" to
     a spool file, for passing to a virus or spam scanner.  Normally,
     such copies are deleted when they are no longer needed.  If this
     control is set, the copies are not deleted.  The control applies
     only to the current message, not to any subsequent ones that may be
     received in the same SMTP connection.  It is provided for debugging
     purposes and is unlikely to be useful in production.

*control = no_multiline_responses*
     This control is permitted for any ACL except the one for non-SMTP
     messages.  It seems that there are broken clients in use that
     cannot handle multiline SMTP responses, despite the fact that *RFC
     821 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc821)* defined them
     over 40 years ago.

     If this control is set, multiline SMTP responses from ACL
     rejections are suppressed.  One way of doing this would have been
     to put out these responses as one long line.  However, *RFC 2821
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2821#section-4.5.3.1)*
     specifies a maximum of 512 bytes per response ("use multiline
     responses for more" it says - ha!), and some of the responses might
     get close to that.  So this facility, which is after all only a sop
     to broken clients, is implemented by doing two very easy things:

        • Extra information that is normally output as part of a
          rejection caused by sender verification failure is omitted.
          Only the final line (typically "sender verification failed")
          is sent.

        • If a ‘message’ modifier supplies a multiline response, only
          the first line is output.

     The setting of the switch can, of course, be made conditional on
     the calling host.  Its effect lasts until the end of the SMTP
     connection.

*control = no_pipelining*
     This control turns off the advertising of the PIPELINING extension
     to SMTP in the current session.  To be useful, it must be obeyed
     before Exim sends its response to an EHLO command.  Therefore, it
     should normally appear in an ACL controlled by ‘acl_smtp_connect’
     or ‘acl_smtp_helo’.  See also ‘pipelining_advertise_hosts’.

*control = queue/*<_options_>*
*control = queue_only*
     This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and
     non-SMTP ACLs, in other words, only when a message is being
     received.  If the message is accepted, it is placed on Exim's queue
     and left there for delivery by a subsequent queue runner.  If used
     with no options set, no immediate delivery process is started.  In
     other words, it has the effect as the ‘queue_only’ global option or
     _-odq_ command-line option.

     If the _first_pass_route_ option is given then the behaviour is
     like the command-line _-oqds_ option; a delivery process is started
     which stops short of making any SMTP delivery.  The benefit is that
     the hints database will be updated for the message being waiting
     for a specific host, and a later queue run will be able to send all
     such messages on a single connection.

     The control only applies to the current message, not to any
     subsequent ones that may be received in the same SMTP connection.

*control = submission/*<_options_>
     This control is permitted only for the MAIL, RCPT, and start of
     data ACLs (the latter is the one defined by ‘acl_smtp_predata’).
     Setting it tells Exim that the current message is a submission from
     a local MUA. In this case, Exim operates in "submission mode", and
     applies certain fixups to the message if necessary.  For example,
     it adds a _Date:_ header line if one is not present.  This control
     is not permitted in the ‘acl_smtp_data’ ACL, because that is too
     late (the message has already been created).

     Chapter *note Message processing:: describes the processing that
     Exim applies to messages.  Section *note Submission mode for
     non-local messages:: covers the processing that happens in
     submission mode; the available options for this control are
     described there.  The control applies only to the current message,
     not to any subsequent ones that may be received in the same SMTP
     connection.

*control = suppress_local_fixups*
     This control applies to locally submitted (non TCP/IP) messages,
     and is the complement of ‘control = submission’.  It disables the
     fixups that are normally applied to locally-submitted messages.
     Specifically:

        • Any _Sender:_ header line is left alone (in this respect, it
          is a dynamic version of ‘local_sender_retain’).

        • No _Message-ID:_, _From:_, or _Date:_ header lines are added.

        • There is no check that _From:_ corresponds to the actual
          sender.

     This control may be useful when a remotely-originated message is
     accepted, passed to some scanning program, and then re-submitted
     for delivery.  It can be used only in the ‘acl_smtp_mail’,
     ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’, ‘acl_smtp_predata’, and ‘acl_not_smtp_start’ ACLs,
     because it has to be set before the message's data is read.

     *Note:* This control applies only to the current message, not to
     any others that are being submitted at the same time using ‘-bs’ or
     ‘-bS’.

*control = utf8_downconvert*
     This control enables conversion of UTF-8 in message envelope
     addresses to a-label form.  For details see section *note MTA
     operations::.

*control = wellknown*
     This control sets up a response data file for a WELLKNOWN SMTP
     command.  It may only be used in an ACL servicing that command.
     For details see section *note The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Summary of message fixup control,  Next: Adding header lines in ACLs,  Prev: Use of the control modifier,  Up: Access control lists

44.14 Summary of message fixup control
======================================

All four possibilities for message fixups can be specified:

   • Locally submitted, fixups applied: the default.

   • Locally submitted, no fixups applied: use ‘control =
     suppress_local_fixups’.

   • Remotely submitted, no fixups applied: the default.

   • Remotely submitted, fixups applied: use ‘control = submission’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Adding header lines in ACLs,  Next: Removing header lines in ACLs,  Prev: Summary of message fixup control,  Up: Access control lists

44.15 Adding header lines in ACLs
=================================

The ‘add_header’ modifier can be used to add one or more extra header
lines to an incoming message, as in this example:

     warn dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
                     dialup.mail-abuse.org
          add_header = X-blacklisted-at: $dnslist_domain

   The ‘add_header’ modifier is permitted in the MAIL, RCPT, PREDATA,
DATA, MIME, DKIM, and non-SMTP ACLs (in other words, those that are
concerned with receiving a message).  The message must ultimately be
accepted for ‘add_header’ to have any significant effect.  You can use
‘add_header’ with any ACL verb, including ‘deny’ (though this is
potentially useful only in a RCPT ACL).

   Headers will not be added to the message if the modifier is used in
DATA, MIME or DKIM ACLs for a message delivered by cutthrough routing.

   Leading and trailing newlines are removed from the data for the
‘add_header’ modifier; if it then contains one or more newlines that are
not followed by a space or a tab, it is assumed to contain multiple
header lines.  Each one is checked for valid syntax; ‘X-ACL-Warn:’ is
added to the front of any line that is not a valid header line.

   Added header lines are accumulated during the MAIL, RCPT, and predata
ACLs.  They are added to the message before processing the DATA and MIME
ACLs.  However, if an identical header line is requested more than once,
only one copy is actually added to the message.  Further header lines
may be accumulated during the DATA and MIME ACLs, after which they are
added to the message, again with duplicates suppressed.  Thus, it is
possible to add two identical header lines to an SMTP message, but only
if one is added before DATA and one after.  In the case of non-SMTP
messages, new headers are accumulated during the non-SMTP ACLs, and are
added to the message after all the ACLs have run.  If a message is
rejected after DATA or by the non-SMTP ACL, all added header lines are
included in the entry that is written to the reject log.

   Header lines are not visible in string expansions of message headers
until they are added to the message.  It follows that header lines
defined in the MAIL, RCPT, and predata ACLs are not visible until the
DATA ACL and MIME ACLs are run.  Similarly, header lines that are added
by the DATA or MIME ACLs are not visible in those ACLs.  Because of this
restriction, you cannot use header lines as a way of passing data
between (for example) the MAIL and RCPT ACLs.  If you want to do this,
you can use ACL variables, as described in section *note ACL
variables::.

   The list of headers yet to be added is given by the ‘$headers_added’
variable.

   The ‘add_header’ modifier acts immediately as it is encountered
during the processing of an ACL. Notice the difference between these two
cases:

     accept add_header = ADDED: some text
            <some condition>

     accept <some condition>
            add_header = ADDED: some text

   In the first case, the header line is always added, whether or not
the condition is true.  In the second case, the header line is added
only if the condition is true.  Multiple occurrences of ‘add_header’ may
occur in the same ACL statement.  All those that are encountered before
a condition fails are honoured.

   For compatibility with previous versions of Exim, a ‘message’
modifier for a ‘warn’ verb acts in the same way as ‘add_header’, except
that it takes effect only if all the conditions are true, even if it
appears before some of them.  Furthermore, only the last occurrence of
‘message’ is honoured.  This usage of ‘message’ is now deprecated.  If
both ‘add_header’ and ‘message’ are present on a ‘warn’ verb, both are
processed according to their specifications.

   By default, new header lines are added to a message at the end of the
existing header lines.  However, you can specify that any particular
header line should be added right at the start (before all the
_Received:_ lines), immediately after the first block of _Received:_
lines, or immediately before any line that is not a _Received:_ or
_Resent-something:_ header.

   This is done by specifying ":at_start:", ":after_received:", or
":at_start_rfc:" (or, for completeness, ":at_end:") before the text of
the header line, respectively.  (Header text cannot start with a colon,
as there has to be a header name first.)  For example:

     warn add_header = \
            :after_received:X-My-Header: something or other...

   If more than one header line is supplied in a single ‘add_header’
modifier, each one is treated independently and can therefore be placed
differently.  If you add more than one line at the start, or after the
Received: block, they end up in reverse order.

   *Warning*: This facility currently applies only to header lines that
are added in an ACL. It does NOT work for header lines that are added in
a system filter or in a router or transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: Removing header lines in ACLs,  Next: ACL conditions,  Prev: Adding header lines in ACLs,  Up: Access control lists

44.16 Removing header lines in ACLs
===================================

The ‘remove_header’ modifier can be used to remove one or more header
lines from an incoming message, as in this example:

     warn   message        = Remove internal headers
            remove_header  = x-route-mail1 : x-route-mail2

   The ‘remove_header’ modifier is permitted in the MAIL, RCPT, PREDATA,
DATA, MIME, DKIM, and non-SMTP ACLs (in other words, those that are
concerned with receiving a message).  The message must ultimately be
accepted for ‘remove_header’ to have any significant effect.  You can
use ‘remove_header’ with any ACL verb, including ‘deny’, though this is
really not useful for any verb that doesn't result in a delivered
message.

   Headers will not be removed from the message if the modifier is used
in DATA, MIME or DKIM ACLs for a message delivered by cutthrough
routing.

   More than one header can be removed at the same time by using a colon
separated list of header specifiers.  If a specifier does not start with
a circumflex (^) then it is treated as a header name.  The header name
matching is case insensitive.  If it does, then it is treated as a
(front-anchored) regular expression applied to the whole header.

   *Note*: The colon terminating a header name will need to be doubled
if used in an RE, and there can legitimately be whitepace before it.

   Example:

     remove_header = \N^(?i)Authentication-Results\s*::\s*example.org;\N

   List expansion is not performed, so you cannot use hostlists to
create a list of headers, however both connection and message variable
expansion are performed (‘$acl_c_*’ and ‘$acl_m_*’), illustrated in this
example:

     warn   hosts           = +internal_hosts
            set acl_c_ihdrs = x-route-mail1 : x-route-mail2
     warn   message         = Remove internal headers
            remove_header   = $acl_c_ihdrs

   Header specifiers for removal are accumulated during the MAIL, RCPT,
and predata ACLs.  Matching header lines are removed from the message
before processing the DATA and MIME ACLs.  If multiple header lines
match, all are removed.  There is no harm in attempting to remove the
same header twice nor in removing a non-existent header.  Further header
specifiers for removal may be accumulated during the DATA and MIME ACLs,
after which matching headers are removed if present.  In the case of
non-SMTP messages, remove specifiers are accumulated during the non-SMTP
ACLs, and are acted on after all the ACLs have run.  If a message is
rejected after DATA or by the non-SMTP ACL, there really is no effect
because there is no logging of what headers would have been removed.

   Header lines are not visible in string expansions until the DATA
phase when it is received.  Any header lines removed in the MAIL, RCPT,
and predata ACLs are not visible in the DATA ACL and MIME ACLs.
Similarly, header lines that are removed by the DATA or MIME ACLs are
still visible in those ACLs.  Because of this restriction, you cannot
use header lines as a way of controlling data passed between (for
example) the MAIL and RCPT ACLs.  If you want to do this, you should
instead use ACL variables, as described in section *note ACL
variables::.

   The ‘remove_header’ modifier acts immediately as it is encountered
during the processing of an ACL. Notice the difference between these two
cases:

     accept remove_header = X-Internal
            <some condition>

     accept <some condition>
            remove_header = X-Internal

   In the first case, the header line is always removed, whether or not
the condition is true.  In the second case, the header line is removed
only if the condition is true.  Multiple occurrences of ‘remove_header’
may occur in the same ACL statement.  All those that are encountered
before a condition fails are honoured.

   *Warning*: This facility currently applies only to header lines that
are present during ACL processing.  It does NOT remove header lines that
are added in a system filter or in a router or transport.


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL conditions,  Next: Using DNS lists,  Prev: Removing header lines in ACLs,  Up: Access control lists

44.17 ACL conditions
====================

Some of the conditions listed in this section are available only when
Exim is compiled with the content-scanning extension.  They are included
here briefly for completeness.  More detailed descriptions can be found
in the discussion on content scanning in chapter *note Content scanning
at ACL time::.

   Not all conditions are relevant in all circumstances.  For example,
testing senders and recipients does not make sense in an ACL that is
being run as the result of the arrival of an ETRN command, and checks on
message headers can be done only in the ACLs specified by
‘acl_smtp_data’ and ‘acl_not_smtp’.  You can use the same condition
(with different parameters) more than once in the same ACL statement.
This provides a way of specifying an "and" conjunction.  The conditions
are as follows:

*acl = *<_name of acl or ACL string or file name _>
     The possible values of the argument are the same as for the
     ‘acl_smtp_’_xxx_ options.  The named or inline ACL is run.  If it
     returns "accept" the condition is true; if it returns "deny" the
     condition is false.  If it returns "defer", the current ACL returns
     "defer" unless the condition is on a ‘warn’ verb.  In that case, a
     "defer" return makes the condition false.  This means that further
     processing of the ‘warn’ verb ceases, but processing of the ACL
     continues.

     If the argument is a named ACL, up to nine space-separated optional
     values can be appended; they appear within the called ACL in
     $acl_arg1 to $acl_arg9, and $acl_narg is set to the count of
     values.  Previous values of these variables are restored after the
     call returns.  The name and values are expanded separately.  Note
     that spaces in complex expansions which are used as arguments will
     act as argument separators.

     If the nested ‘acl’ returns "drop" and the outer condition denies
     access, the connection is dropped.  If it returns "discard", the
     verb must be ‘accept’ or ‘discard’, and the action is taken
     immediately - no further conditions are tested.

     ACLs may be nested up to 20 deep; the limit exists purely to catch
     runaway loops.  This condition allows you to use different ACLs in
     different circumstances.  For example, different ACLs can be used
     to handle RCPT commands for different local users or different
     local domains.

*atrn_domains = *<_domain list_>
     This condition is only usable in the ATRN ACL. It returns true if
     there are any messages queued for any of the domains given in the
     list.  The list supplied must not be tainted and should contain
     only domains relevant for the authenticated user (to avoid leaking
     information about other users).

*authenticated = *<_string list_>
     If the SMTP connection is not authenticated, the condition is
     false.  Otherwise, the name of the authenticator is tested against
     the list.  To test for authentication by any authenticator, you can
     set

          authenticated = *

*condition = *<_string_>
     This feature allows you to make up custom conditions.  If the
     result of expanding the string is an empty string, the number zero,
     or one of the strings "no" or "false", the condition is false.  If
     the result is any non-zero number, or one of the strings "yes" or
     "true", the condition is true.  For any other value, some error is
     assumed to have occurred, and the ACL returns "defer".  However, if
     the expansion is forced to fail, the condition is ignored.  The
     effect is to treat it as true, whether it is positive or negative.

*decode = *<_location_>
     This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension, and it is allowed only in the ACL
     defined by ‘acl_smtp_mime’.  It causes the current MIME part to be
     decoded into a file.  If all goes well, the condition is true.  It
     is false only if there are problems such as a syntax error or a
     memory shortage.  For more details, see chapter *note Content
     scanning at ACL time::.

*dnslists = *<_list of domain names and other data_>
     This condition checks for entries in DNS black lists.  These are
     also known as "RBL lists", after the original Realtime Blackhole
     List, but note that the use of the lists at _mail-abuse.org_ now
     carries a charge.  There are too many different variants of this
     condition to describe briefly here.  See sections *note Using DNS
     lists::-*note DNS lists and IPv6:: for details.

*domains = *<_domain list_>
     This condition is relevant only in a RCPT ACL. It checks that the
     domain of the recipient address is in the domain list.  If
     percent-hack processing is enabled, it is done before this test is
     done.  If the check succeeds with a lookup, the result of the
     lookup is placed in ‘$domain_data’ until the next ‘domains’ test.

     *Note carefully* (because many people seem to fall foul of this):
     you cannot use ‘domains’ in a DATA ACL.

*encrypted = *<_string list_>
     If the SMTP connection is not encrypted, the condition is false.
     Otherwise, the name of the cipher suite in use is tested against
     the list.  To test for encryption without testing for any specific
     cipher suite(s), set

          encrypted = *

*hosts = *<_host list_>
     This condition tests that the calling host matches the host list.
     If you have name lookups or wildcarded host names and IP addresses
     in the same host list, you should normally put the IP addresses
     first.  For example, you could have:

          accept hosts = 10.9.8.7 : dbm;/etc/friendly/hosts

     The lookup in this example uses the host name for its key.  This is
     implied by the lookup type "dbm".  (For a host address lookup you
     would use "net-dbm" and it wouldn't matter which way round you had
     these two items.)

     The reason for the problem with host names lies in the
     left-to-right way that Exim processes lists.  It can test IP
     addresses without doing any DNS lookups, but when it reaches an
     item that requires a host name, it fails if it cannot find a host
     name to compare with the pattern.  If the above list is given in
     the opposite order, the ‘accept’ statement fails for a host whose
     name cannot be found, even if its IP address is 10.9.8.7.

     If you really do want to do the name check first, and still
     recognize the IP address even if the name lookup fails, you can
     rewrite the ACL like this:

          accept hosts = dbm;/etc/friendly/hosts
          accept hosts = 10.9.8.7

     The default action on failing to find the host name is to assume
     that the host is not in the list, so the first ‘accept’ statement
     fails.  The second statement can then check the IP address.

     If a ‘hosts’ condition is satisfied by means of a lookup, the
     result of the lookup is made available in the ‘$host_data’
     variable.  This allows you, for example, to set up a statement like
     this:

          deny  hosts = net-lsearch;/some/file
                message = $host_data

     which gives a custom error message for each denied host.

*local_parts = *<_local part list_>
     This condition is relevant only in a RCPT ACL. It checks that the
     local part of the recipient address is in the list.  If
     percent-hack processing is enabled, it is done before this test.
     If the check succeeds with a lookup, the result of the lookup is
     placed in ‘$local_part_data’, which remains set until the next
     ‘local_parts’ test.

*malware = *<_option_>
     This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension and only after a DATA command.  It
     causes the incoming message to be scanned for viruses.  For
     details, see chapter *note Content scanning at ACL time::.

*mime_regex = *<_list of regular expressions_>
     This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension, and it is allowed only in the ACL
     defined by ‘acl_smtp_mime’.  It causes the current MIME part to be
     scanned for a match with any of the regular expressions.  For
     details, see chapter *note Content scanning at ACL time::.

*ratelimit = *<_parameters_>
     This condition can be used to limit the rate at which a user or
     host submits messages.  Details are given in section *note Rate
     limiting incoming messages::.

*recipients = *<_address list_>
     This condition is relevant only in a RCPT ACL. It checks the entire
     recipient address against a list of recipients.

*regex = *<_list of regular expressions_>
     This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension, and is available only in the DATA,
     MIME, and non-SMTP ACLs.  It causes the incoming message to be
     scanned for a match with any of the regular expressions.  For
     details, see chapter *note Content scanning at ACL time::.

*seen = *<_parameters_>
     This condition can be used to test if a situation has been
     previously met, for example for greylisting.  Details are given in
     section *note Previously seen user and hosts::.

*sender_domains = *<_domain list_>
     This condition tests the domain of the sender of the message
     against the given domain list.  *Note*: The domain of the sender
     address is in ‘$sender_address_domain’.  It is _not_ put in
     ‘$domain’ during the testing of this condition.  This is an
     exception to the general rule for testing domain lists.  It is done
     this way so that, if this condition is used in an ACL for a RCPT
     command, the recipient's domain (which is in ‘$domain’) can be used
     to influence the sender checking.

     *Warning*: It is a bad idea to use this condition on its own as a
     control on relaying, because sender addresses are easily, and
     commonly, forged.

*senders = *<_address list_>
     This condition tests the sender of the message against the given
     list.  To test for a bounce message, which has an empty sender, set

          senders = :

     *Warning*: It is a bad idea to use this condition on its own as a
     control on relaying, because sender addresses are easily, and
     commonly, forged.

*spam = *<_username_>
     This condition is available only when Exim is compiled with the
     content-scanning extension.  It causes the incoming message to be
     scanned by SpamAssassin.  For details, see chapter *note Content
     scanning at ACL time::.

*verify = certificate*
     This condition is true in an SMTP session if the session is
     encrypted, and a certificate was received from the client, and the
     certificate was verified.  The server requests a certificate only
     if the client matches ‘tls_verify_hosts’ or ‘tls_try_verify_hosts’
     (see chapter *note Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL:
     Encrypted SMTP connections.).

*verify = csa*
     This condition checks whether the sending host (the client) is
     authorized to send email.  Details of how this works are given in
     section *note Client SMTP authorization (CSA): Client SMTP
     authorization [CSA].

*verify = header_names_ascii*
     This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a
     message has been received.  This usually means an ACL specified by
     ‘acl_smtp_data’ or ‘acl_not_smtp’.  It checks all header names (not
     the content) to make sure there are no non-ASCII characters, also
     excluding control characters.  The allowable characters are decimal
     ASCII values 33 through 126.

     Exim itself will handle headers with non-ASCII characters, but it
     can cause problems for downstream applications, so this option will
     allow their detection and rejection in the DATA ACL's.

*verify = header_sender/*<_options_>
     This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a
     message has been received, that is, in an ACL specified by
     ‘acl_smtp_data’ or ‘acl_not_smtp’.  It checks that there is a
     verifiable address in at least one of the _Sender:_, _Reply-To:_,
     or _From:_ header lines.  Such an address is loosely thought of as
     a "sender" address (hence the name of the test).  However, an
     address that appears in one of these headers need not be an address
     that accepts bounce messages; only sender addresses in envelopes
     are required to accept bounces.  Therefore, if you use the callout
     option on this check, you might want to arrange for a non-empty
     address in the MAIL command.

     Details of address verification and the options are given later,
     starting at section *note Address verification:: (callouts are
     described in section *note Callout verification::).  You can
     combine this condition with the ‘senders’ condition to restrict it
     to bounce messages only:

          deny    senders = :
                 !verify  = header_sender
                  message = A valid sender header is required for bounces

*verify = header_syntax*
     This condition is relevant only in an ACL that is run after a
     message has been received, that is, in an ACL specified by
     ‘acl_smtp_data’ or ‘acl_not_smtp’.  It checks the syntax of all
     header lines that can contain lists of addresses (_Sender:_,
     _From:_, _Reply-To:_, _To:_, _Cc:_, and _Bcc:_), returning true if
     there are no problems.  Unqualified addresses (local parts without
     domains) are permitted only in locally generated messages and from
     hosts that match ‘sender_unqualified_hosts’ or
     ‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’, as appropriate.

     Note that this condition is a syntax check only.  However, a common
     spamming ploy used to be to send syntactically invalid headers such
     as

          To: @

     and this condition can be used to reject such messages, though they
     are not as common as they used to be.

*verify = helo*
     This condition is true if a HELO or EHLO command has been received
     from the client host, and its contents have been verified.  If
     there has been no previous attempt to verify the HELO/EHLO
     contents, it is carried out when this condition is encountered.
     See the description of the ‘helo_verify_hosts’ and
     ‘helo_try_verify_hosts’ options for details of how to request
     verification independently of this condition, and for detail of the
     verification.

     For SMTP input that does not come over TCP/IP (the ‘-bs’ command
     line option), this condition is always true.

*verify = not_blind/*<_options_>
     This condition checks that there are no blind (bcc) recipients in
     the message.  Every envelope recipient must appear either in a
     _To:_ header line or in a _Cc:_ header line for this condition to
     be true.  Local parts are checked case-sensitively; domains are
     checked case-insensitively.  If _Resent-To:_ or _Resent-Cc:_ header
     lines exist, they are also checked.  This condition can be used
     only in a DATA or non-SMTP ACL.

     There is one possible option, ‘case_insensitive’.  If this is
     present then local parts are checked case-insensitively.

     There are, of course, many legitimate messages that make use of
     blind (bcc) recipients.  This check should not be used on its own
     for blocking messages.

*verify = recipient/*<_options_>
     This condition is relevant only after a RCPT command.  It verifies
     the current recipient.  Details of address verification are given
     later, starting at section *note Address verification::.  After a
     recipient has been verified, the value of ‘$address_data’ is the
     last value that was set while routing the address.  This applies
     even if the verification fails.  When an address that is being
     verified is redirected to a single address, verification continues
     with the new address, and in that case, the subsequent value of
     ‘$address_data’ is the value for the child address.

*verify = reverse_host_lookup/*<_options_>
     This condition ensures that a verified host name has been looked up
     from the IP address of the client host.  (This may have happened
     already if the host name was needed for checking a host list, or if
     the host matched ‘host_lookup’.)  Verification ensures that the
     host name obtained from a reverse DNS lookup, or one of its
     aliases, does, when it is itself looked up in the DNS, yield the
     original IP address.

     There is one possible option, ‘defer_ok’.  If this is present and a
     DNS operation returns a temporary error, the verify condition
     succeeds.

     If this condition is used for a locally generated message (that is,
     when there is no client host involved), it always succeeds.

*verify = sender/*<_options_>
     This condition is relevant only after a MAIL or RCPT command, or
     after a message has been received (the ‘acl_smtp_data’ or
     ‘acl_not_smtp’ ACLs).  If the message's sender is empty (that is,
     this is a bounce message), the condition is true.  Otherwise, the
     sender address is verified.

     If there is data in the ‘$address_data’ variable at the end of
     routing, its value is placed in ‘$sender_address_data’ at the end
     of verification.  This value can be used in subsequent conditions
     and modifiers in the same ACL statement.  It does not persist after
     the end of the current statement.  If you want to preserve the
     value for longer, you can save it in an ACL variable.

     Details of verification are given later, starting at section *note
     Address verification::.  Exim caches the result of sender
     verification, to avoid doing it more than once per message.

*verify = sender=*<_address_>*/*<_options_>
     This is a variation of the previous option, in which a modified
     address is verified as a sender.

     Note that '/' is legal in local-parts; if the address may have such
     (eg.  is generated from the received message) they must be
     protected from the options parsing by doubling:

          verify = sender=${listquote{/}{${address:$h_sender:}}}


File: spec.info,  Node: Using DNS lists,  Next: Previously seen user and hosts,  Prev: ACL conditions,  Up: Access control lists

44.18 Using DNS lists
=====================

In its simplest form, the ‘dnslists’ condition tests whether the calling
host is on at least one of a number of DNS lists by looking up the
inverted IP address in one or more DNS domains.  (Note that DNS list
domains are not mail domains, so the ‘+’ syntax for named lists doesn't
work - it is used for special options instead.)  For example, if the
calling host's IP address is 192.168.62.43, and the ACL statement is

     deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org : \
                     dialups.mail-abuse.org

   the following records are looked up:

     43.62.168.192.blackholes.mail-abuse.org
     43.62.168.192.dialups.mail-abuse.org

   As soon as Exim finds an existing DNS record, processing of the list
stops.  Thus, multiple entries on the list provide an "or" conjunction.
If you want to test that a host is on more than one list (an "and"
conjunction), you can use two separate conditions:

     deny dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
          dnslists = dialups.mail-abuse.org

   If a DNS lookup times out or otherwise fails to give a decisive
answer, Exim behaves as if the host does not match the list item, that
is, as if the DNS record does not exist.  If there are further items in
the DNS list, they are processed.

   This is usually the required action when ‘dnslists’ is used with
‘deny’ (which is the most common usage), because it prevents a DNS
failure from blocking mail.  However, you can change this behaviour by
putting one of the following special items in the list:

    +include_unknownbehave as if the item is on the list
    +exclude_unknownbehave as if the item is not on the list (default)
    +defer_unknown give a temporary error

   Each of these applies to any subsequent items on the list.  For
example:

     deny dnslists = +defer_unknown : foo.bar.example

   Testing the list of domains stops as soon as a match is found.  If
you want to warn for one list and block for another, you can use two
different statements:

     deny  dnslists = blackholes.mail-abuse.org
     warn  dnslists = dialups.mail-abuse.org
           message  = X-Warn: sending host is on dialups list

   DNS list lookups are cached by Exim for the duration of the SMTP
session (but limited by the DNS return TTL value), so a lookup based on
the IP address is done at most once for any incoming connection
(assuming long-enough TTL). Exim does not share information between
multiple incoming connections (but your local name server cache should
be active).

   There are a number of DNS lists to choose from, some commercial, some
free, or free for small deployments.  Wikipedia
(*https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Domain_Name_System_blocklist
(https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Domain_Name_System_blocklist)*) gives a
conceptual overview and might provide inspiration for locating them.

* Menu:

* Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup::
* DNS lists keyed on domain names::
* Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list::
* Data returned by DNS lists::
* Variables set from DNS lists::
* Additional matching conditions for DNS lists::
* Negated DNS matching conditions::
* Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list::
* Detailed information from merged DNS lists::
* DNS lists and IPv6::


File: spec.info,  Node: Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup,  Next: DNS lists keyed on domain names,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.1 Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup
-------------------------------------------------------

By default, the IP address that is used in a DNS list lookup is the IP
address of the calling host.  However, you can specify another IP
address by listing it after the domain name, introduced by a slash.  For
example:

     deny dnslists = black.list.tld/192.168.1.2

   This feature is not very helpful with explicit IP addresses; it is
intended for use with IP addresses that are looked up, for example, the
IP addresses of the MX hosts or nameservers of an email sender address.
For an example, see section *note Multiple explicit keys for a DNS
list:: below.


File: spec.info,  Node: DNS lists keyed on domain names,  Next: Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list,  Prev: Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.2 DNS lists keyed on domain names
---------------------------------------

There are some lists that are keyed on domain names rather than inverted
IP addresses (see, e.g., the _domain based zones_ link at
*http://www.rfc-ignorant.org/ (http://www.rfc-ignorant.org/)*).  No
reversing of components is used with these lists.  You can change the
name that is looked up in a DNS list by listing it after the domain
name, introduced by a slash.  For example,

     deny  dnslists = dsn.rfc-ignorant.org/$sender_address_domain
           message  = Sender's domain is listed at $dnslist_domain

   This particular example is useful only in ACLs that are obeyed after
the RCPT or DATA commands, when a sender address is available.  If (for
example) the message's sender is _user@tld.example_ the name that is
looked up by this example is

     tld.example.dsn.rfc-ignorant.org

   A single ‘dnslists’ condition can contain entries for both names and
IP addresses.  For example:

     deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
                     dsn.rfc-ignorant.org/$sender_address_domain

   The first item checks the sending host's IP address; the second
checks a domain name.  The whole condition is true if either of the DNS
lookups succeeds.


File: spec.info,  Node: Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list,  Next: Data returned by DNS lists,  Prev: DNS lists keyed on domain names,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.3 Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list
---------------------------------------------

The syntax described above for looking up explicitly-defined values
(either names or IP addresses) in a DNS blacklist is a simplification.
After the domain name for the DNS list, what follows the slash can in
fact be a list of items.  As with all lists in Exim, the default
separator is a colon.  However, because this is a sublist within the
list of DNS blacklist domains, it is necessary either to double the
separators like this:

     dnslists = black.list.tld/name.1::name.2

   or to change the separator character, like this:

     dnslists = black.list.tld/<;name.1;name.2

   If an item in the list is an IP address, it is inverted before the
DNS blacklist domain is appended.  If it is not an IP address, no
inversion occurs.  Consider this condition:

     dnslists = black.list.tld/<;192.168.1.2;a.domain

   The DNS lookups that occur are:

     2.1.168.192.black.list.tld
     a.domain.black.list.tld

   Once a DNS record has been found (that matches a specific IP return
address, if specified - see section *note Additional matching conditions
for DNS lists::), no further lookups are done.  If there is a temporary
DNS error, the rest of the sublist of domains or IP addresses is tried.
A temporary error for the whole dnslists item occurs only if no other
DNS lookup in this sublist succeeds.  In other words, a successful
lookup for any of the items in the sublist overrides a temporary error
for a previous item.

   The ability to supply a list of items after the slash is in some
sense just a syntactic convenience.  These two examples have the same
effect:

     dnslists = black.list.tld/a.domain : black.list.tld/b.domain
     dnslists = black.list.tld/a.domain::b.domain

   However, when the data for the list is obtained from a lookup, the
second form is usually much more convenient.  Consider this example:

     deny dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org/<|${lookup dnsdb {>|a=<|\
                                        ${lookup dnsdb {>|mxh=\
                                        $sender_address_domain} }} }
          message  = The mail servers for the domain \
                     $sender_address_domain \
                     are listed at $dnslist_domain ($dnslist_value); \
                     see $dnslist_text.

   Note the use of ‘>|’ in the dnsdb lookup to specify the separator for
multiple DNS records.  The inner dnsdb lookup produces a list of MX
hosts and the outer dnsdb lookup finds the IP addresses for these hosts.
The result of expanding the condition might be something like this:

     dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org/<|192.168.2.3|192.168.5.6|...

   Thus, this example checks whether or not the IP addresses of the
sender domain's mail servers are on the Spamhaus black list.

   The key that was used for a successful DNS list lookup is put into
the variable ‘$dnslist_matched’ (see section *note Variables set from
DNS lists::).


File: spec.info,  Node: Data returned by DNS lists,  Next: Variables set from DNS lists,  Prev: Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.4 Data returned by DNS lists
----------------------------------

DNS lists are constructed using address records in the DNS. The original
RBL just used the address 127.0.0.1 on the right hand side of each
record, but the RBL+ list and some other lists use a number of values
with different meanings.  The values used on the RBL+ list are:

    127.1.0.1  RBL
    127.1.0.2  DUL
    127.1.0.3  DUL and RBL
    127.1.0.4  RSS
    127.1.0.5  RSS and RBL
    127.1.0.6  RSS and DUL
    127.1.0.7  RSS and DUL and RBL

   Section *note Additional matching conditions for DNS lists:: below
describes how you can distinguish between different values.  Some DNS
lists may return more than one address record; see section *note
Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list:: for details of how they
are checked.

   Values returned by a properly running DBSBL should be in the
127.0.0.0/8 range.  If a DNSBL operator loses control of the domain,
lookups on it may start returning other addresses.  Because of this,
Exim now ignores returned values outside the 127/8 region.


File: spec.info,  Node: Variables set from DNS lists,  Next: Additional matching conditions for DNS lists,  Prev: Data returned by DNS lists,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.5 Variables set from DNS lists
------------------------------------

When an entry is found in a DNS list, the variable ‘$dnslist_domain’
contains the name of the overall domain that matched (for example,
‘spamhaus.example’), ‘$dnslist_matched’ contains the key within that
domain (for example, ‘192.168.5.3’), and ‘$dnslist_value’ contains the
data from the DNS record.  When the key is an IP address, it is not
reversed in ‘$dnslist_matched’ (though it is, of course, in the actual
lookup).  In simple cases, for example:

     deny dnslists = spamhaus.example

   the key is also available in another variable (in this case,
‘$sender_host_address’).  In more complicated cases, however, this is
not true.  For example, using a data lookup (as described in section
*note Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list::) might generate a dnslists
lookup like this:

     deny dnslists = spamhaus.example/<|192.168.1.2|192.168.6.7|...

   If this condition succeeds, the value in ‘$dnslist_matched’ might be
‘192.168.6.7’ (for example).

   If more than one address record is returned by the DNS lookup, all
the IP addresses are included in ‘$dnslist_value’, separated by commas
and spaces.  The variable ‘$dnslist_text’ contains the contents of any
associated TXT record.  For lists such as RBL+ the TXT record for a
merged entry is often not very meaningful.  See section *note Detailed
information from merged DNS lists:: for a way of obtaining more
information.

   You can use the DNS list variables in ‘message’ or ‘log_message’
modifiers - even if these appear before the condition in the ACL, they
are not expanded until after it has failed.  For example:

     deny    hosts = !+local_networks
             message = $sender_host_address is listed \
                       at $dnslist_domain
             dnslists = rbl-plus.mail-abuse.example


File: spec.info,  Node: Additional matching conditions for DNS lists,  Next: Negated DNS matching conditions,  Prev: Variables set from DNS lists,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.6 Additional matching conditions for DNS lists
----------------------------------------------------

You can add an equals sign and an IP address after a ‘dnslists’ domain
name in order to restrict its action to DNS records with a matching
right hand side.  For example,

     deny dnslists = rblplus.mail-abuse.org=127.0.0.2

   rejects only those hosts that yield 127.0.0.2.  Without this
additional data, any address record is considered to be a match.  For
the moment, we assume that the DNS lookup returns just one record.
Section *note Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list:: describes
how multiple records are handled.

   More than one IP address may be given for checking, using a comma as
a separator.  These are alternatives - if any one of them matches, the
‘dnslists’ condition is true.  For example:

     deny  dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3

   If you want to specify a constraining address list and also specify
names or IP addresses to be looked up, the constraining address list
must be specified first.  For example:

     deny dnslists = dsn.rfc-ignorant.org\
                     =127.0.0.2/$sender_address_domain

   If the character ‘&’ is used instead of ‘=’, the comparison for each
listed IP address is done by a bitwise "and" instead of by an equality
test.  In other words, the listed addresses are used as bit masks.  The
comparison is true if all the bits in the mask are present in the
address that is being tested.  For example:

     dnslists = a.b.c&0.0.0.3

   matches if the address is _x.x.x._3, _x.x.x._7, _x.x.x._11, etc.  If
you want to test whether one bit or another bit is present (as opposed
to both being present), you must use multiple values.  For example:

     dnslists = a.b.c&0.0.0.1,0.0.0.2

   matches if the final component of the address is an odd number or two
times an odd number.


File: spec.info,  Node: Negated DNS matching conditions,  Next: Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list,  Prev: Additional matching conditions for DNS lists,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.7 Negated DNS matching conditions
---------------------------------------

You can supply a negative list of IP addresses as part of a ‘dnslists’
condition.  Whereas

     deny  dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3

   means "deny if the host is in the black list at the domain _a.b.c_
and the IP address yielded by the list is either 127.0.0.2 or
127.0.0.3",

     deny  dnslists = a.b.c!=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3

   means "deny if the host is in the black list at the domain _a.b.c_
and the IP address yielded by the list is not 127.0.0.2 and not
127.0.0.3".  In other words, the result of the test is inverted if an
exclamation mark appears before the ‘=’ (or the ‘&’) sign.

   *Note*: This kind of negation is not the same as negation in a
domain, host, or address list (which is why the syntax is different).

   If you are using just one list, the negation syntax does not gain you
much.  The previous example is precisely equivalent to

     deny  dnslists = a.b.c
          !dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.2,127.0.0.3

   However, if you are using multiple lists, the negation syntax is
clearer.  Consider this example:

     deny  dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
                      list.dsbl.org : \
                      dnsbl.njabl.org!=127.0.0.3 : \
                      relays.ordb.org

   Using only positive lists, this would have to be:

     deny  dnslists = sbl.spamhaus.org : \
                      list.dsbl.org
     deny  dnslists = dnsbl.njabl.org
          !dnslists = dnsbl.njabl.org=127.0.0.3
     deny  dnslists = relays.ordb.org

   which is less clear, and harder to maintain.

   Negation can also be used with a bitwise-and restriction.  The
dnslists condition with only be trus if a result is returned by the
lookup which, anded with the restriction, is all zeroes.  For example:

     deny dnslists = zen.spamhaus.org!&0.255.255.0


File: spec.info,  Node: Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list,  Next: Detailed information from merged DNS lists,  Prev: Negated DNS matching conditions,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.8 Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list
-----------------------------------------------------

A DNS lookup for a ‘dnslists’ condition may return more than one DNS
record, thereby providing more than one IP address.  When an item in a
‘dnslists’ list is followed by ‘=’ or ‘&’ and a list of IP addresses, in
order to restrict the match to specific results from the DNS lookup,
there are two ways in which the checking can be handled.  For example,
consider the condition:

     dnslists = a.b.c=127.0.0.1

   What happens if the DNS lookup for the incoming IP address yields
both 127.0.0.1 and 127.0.0.2 by means of two separate DNS records?  Is
the condition true because at least one given value was found, or is it
false because at least one of the found values was not listed?  And how
does this affect negated conditions?  Both possibilities are provided
for with the help of additional separators ‘==’ and ‘=&’.

   • If ‘=’ or ‘&’ is used, the condition is true if any one of the
     looked up IP addresses matches one of the listed addresses.  For
     the example above, the condition is true because 127.0.0.1 matches.

   • If ‘==’ or ‘=&’ is used, the condition is true only if every one of
     the looked up IP addresses matches one of the listed addresses.  If
     the condition is changed to:

          dnslists = a.b.c==127.0.0.1

     and the DNS lookup yields both 127.0.0.1 and 127.0.0.2, the
     condition is false because 127.0.0.2 is not listed.  You would need
     to have:

          dnslists = a.b.c==127.0.0.1,127.0.0.2

     for the condition to be true.

   When ‘!’ is used to negate IP address matching, it inverts the
result, giving the precise opposite of the behaviour above.  Thus:

   • If ‘!=’ or ‘!&’ is used, the condition is true if none of the
     looked up IP addresses matches one of the listed addresses.
     Consider:

          dnslists = a.b.c!&0.0.0.1

     If the DNS lookup yields both 127.0.0.1 and 127.0.0.2, the
     condition is false because 127.0.0.1 matches.

   • If ‘!==’ or ‘!=&’ is used, the condition is true if there is at
     least one looked up IP address that does not match.  Consider:

          dnslists = a.b.c!=&0.0.0.1

     If the DNS lookup yields both 127.0.0.1 and 127.0.0.2, the
     condition is true, because 127.0.0.2 does not match.  You would
     need to have:

          dnslists = a.b.c!=&0.0.0.1,0.0.0.2

     for the condition to be false.

   When the DNS lookup yields only a single IP address, there is no
difference between ‘=’ and ‘==’ and between ‘&’ and ‘=&’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Detailed information from merged DNS lists,  Next: DNS lists and IPv6,  Prev: Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.9 Detailed information from merged DNS lists
--------------------------------------------------

When the facility for restricting the matching IP values in a DNS list
is used, the text from the TXT record that is set in ‘$dnslist_text’ may
not reflect the true reason for rejection.  This happens when lists are
merged and the IP address in the A record is used to distinguish them;
unfortunately there is only one TXT record.  One way round this is not
to use merged lists, but that can be inefficient because it requires
multiple DNS lookups where one would do in the vast majority of cases
when the host of interest is not on any of the lists.

   A less inefficient way of solving this problem is available.  If two
domain names, comma-separated, are given, the second is used first to do
an initial check, making use of any IP value restrictions that are set.
If there is a match, the first domain is used, without any IP value
restrictions, to get the TXT record.  As a byproduct of this, there is
also a check that the IP being tested is indeed on the first list.  The
first domain is the one that is put in ‘$dnslist_domain’.  For example:

     deny   dnslists = \
              sbl.spamhaus.org,sbl-xbl.spamhaus.org=127.0.0.2 : \
              dul.dnsbl.sorbs.net,dnsbl.sorbs.net=127.0.0.10
            message  = \
              rejected because $sender_host_address is blacklisted \
              at $dnslist_domain\n$dnslist_text

   For the first blacklist item, this starts by doing a lookup in
_sbl-xbl.spamhaus.org_ and testing for a 127.0.0.2 return.  If there is
a match, it then looks in _sbl.spamhaus.org_, without checking the
return value, and as long as something is found, it looks for the
corresponding TXT record.  If there is no match in
_sbl-xbl.spamhaus.org_, nothing more is done.  The second blacklist item
is processed similarly.

   If you are interested in more than one merged list, the same list
must be given several times, but because the results of the DNS lookups
are cached, the DNS calls themselves are not repeated.  For example:

     deny dnslists = \
              http.dnsbl.sorbs.net,dnsbl.sorbs.net=127.0.0.2 : \
              socks.dnsbl.sorbs.net,dnsbl.sorbs.net=127.0.0.3 : \
              misc.dnsbl.sorbs.net,dnsbl.sorbs.net=127.0.0.4 : \
              dul.dnsbl.sorbs.net,dnsbl.sorbs.net=127.0.0.10

   In this case there is one lookup in _dnsbl.sorbs.net_, and if none of
the IP values matches (or if no record is found), this is the only
lookup that is done.  Only if there is a match is one of the more
specific lists consulted.


File: spec.info,  Node: DNS lists and IPv6,  Prev: Detailed information from merged DNS lists,  Up: Using DNS lists

44.18.10 DNS lists and IPv6
---------------------------

If Exim is asked to do a dnslist lookup for an IPv6 address, it inverts
it nibble by nibble.  For example, if the calling host's IP address is
3ffe:ffff:836f:0a00:000a:0800:200a:c031, Exim might look up

     1.3.0.c.a.0.0.2.0.0.8.0.a.0.0.0.0.0.a.0.f.6.3.8.
       f.f.f.f.e.f.f.3.blackholes.mail-abuse.org

   (split over two lines here to fit on the page).  Unfortunately, some
of the DNS lists contain wildcard records, intended for IPv4, that
interact badly with IPv6.  For example, the DNS entry

     *.3.some.list.example.    A    127.0.0.1

   is probably intended to put the entire 3.0.0.0/8 IPv4 network on the
list.  Unfortunately, it also matches the entire 3::/4 IPv6 network.

   You can exclude IPv6 addresses from DNS lookups by making use of a
suitable ‘condition’ condition, as in this example:

     deny   condition = ${if isip4{$sender_host_address}}
            dnslists  = some.list.example

   If an explicit key is being used for a DNS lookup and it may be an
IPv6 address you should specify alternate list separators for both the
outer (DNS list name) list and inner (lookup keys) list:

            dnslists = <; dnsbl.example.com/<|$acl_m_addrslist


File: spec.info,  Node: Previously seen user and hosts,  Next: Rate limiting incoming messages,  Prev: Using DNS lists,  Up: Access control lists

44.19 Previously seen user and hosts
====================================

The ‘seen’ ACL condition can be used to test whether a situation has
been previously met.  It uses a hints database to record a timestamp
against a key.  The syntax of the condition is:

     seen = <optional flag><time interval> / <options>

   For example,

     defer	seen = -5m / key=${sender_host_address}_$local_part@$domain

   in a RCPT ACL will implement simple greylisting.

   The parameters for the condition are a possible minus sign, then an
interval, then, slash-separated, a list of options.  The interval is
taken as an offset before the current time, and used for the test.  If
the interval is preceded by a minus sign then the condition returns
whether a record is found which is before the test time.  Otherwise, the
condition returns whether one is found which is since the test time.

   Options are read in order with later ones overriding earlier ones.

   The default key is ‘$sender_host_address’.  An explicit key can be
set using a ‘key=value’ option.

   If a ‘readonly’ option is given then no record create or update is
done.  If a ‘write’ option is given then a record create or update is
always done.  An update is done if the test is for "since".  If none of
those hold and there was no existing record, a record is created.

   Creates and updates are marked with the current time.

   Finally, a "before" test which succeeds, and for which the record is
old enough, will be refreshed with a timestamp of the test time.  This
can prevent tidying of the database from removing the entry.  The
interval for this is, by default, 10 days.  An explicit interval can be
set using a ‘refresh=value’ option.

   Note that "seen" should be added to the list of hints databases for
maintenance if this ACL condition is used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rate limiting incoming messages,  Next: Address verification,  Prev: Previously seen user and hosts,  Up: Access control lists

44.20 Rate limiting incoming messages
=====================================

The ‘ratelimit’ ACL condition can be used to measure and control the
rate at which clients can send email.  This is more powerful than the
‘smtp_ratelimit_*’ options, because those options control the rate of
commands in a single SMTP session only, whereas the ‘ratelimit’
condition works across all connections (concurrent and sequential) from
the same client host.  The syntax of the ‘ratelimit’ condition is:

     ratelimit = <m> / <p> / <options> / <key>

   If the average client sending rate is less than _m_ messages per time
period _p_ then the condition is false; otherwise it is true.

   As a side-effect, the ‘ratelimit’ condition sets the expansion
variable ‘$sender_rate’ to the client's computed rate,
‘$sender_rate_limit’ to the configured value of _m_, and
‘$sender_rate_period’ to the configured value of _p_.

   The parameter _p_ is the smoothing time constant, in the form of an
Exim time interval, for example, ‘8h’ for eight hours.  A larger time
constant means that it takes Exim longer to forget a client's past
behaviour.  The parameter _m_ is the maximum number of messages that a
client is permitted to send in each time interval.  It also specifies
the number of messages permitted in a fast burst.  By increasing both
_m_ and _p_ but keeping _m/p_ constant, you can allow a client to send
more messages in a burst without changing its long-term sending rate
limit.  Conversely, if _m_ and _p_ are both small, messages must be sent
at an even rate.

   There is a script in ‘util/ratelimit.pl’ which extracts sending rates
from log files, to assist with choosing appropriate settings for _m_ and
_p_ when deploying the ‘ratelimit’ ACL condition.  The script prints
usage instructions when it is run with no arguments.

   The key is used to look up the data for calculating the client's
average sending rate.  This data is stored in Exim's spool directory,
alongside the retry and other hints databases.  The default key is
‘$sender_host_address’, which means Exim computes the sending rate of
each client host IP address.  By changing the key you can change how
Exim identifies clients for the purpose of ratelimiting.  For example,
to limit the sending rate of each authenticated user, independent of the
computer they are sending from, set the key to ‘$authenticated_id’.  You
must ensure that the lookup key is meaningful; for example,
‘$authenticated_id’ is only meaningful if the client has authenticated
(which you can check with the ‘authenticated’ ACL condition).

   The lookup key does not have to identify clients: If you want to
limit the rate at which a recipient receives messages, you can use the
key ‘$local_part@$domain’ with the ‘per_rcpt’ option (see below) in a
RCPT ACL.

   Each ‘ratelimit’ condition can have up to four options.  A ‘per_*’
option specifies what Exim measures the rate of, for example, messages
or recipients or bytes.  You can adjust the measurement using the
‘unique=’ and/or ‘count=’ options.  You can also control when Exim
updates the recorded rate using a ‘strict’, ‘leaky’, or ‘readonly’
option.  The options are separated by a slash, like the other
parameters.  They may appear in any order.

   Internally, Exim appends the smoothing constant _p_ onto the lookup
key with any options that alter the meaning of the stored data.  The
limit _m_ is not stored, so you can alter the configured maximum rate
and Exim will still remember clients' past behaviour.  If you change the
‘per_*’ mode or add or remove the ‘unique=’ option, the lookup key
changes so Exim will forget past behaviour.  The lookup key is not
affected by changes to the update mode and the ‘count=’ option.

* Menu:

* Ratelimit options for what is being measured::
* Ratelimit update modes::
* Ratelimit options for handling fast clients::
* Limiting the rate of different events::
* Using rate limiting::


File: spec.info,  Node: Ratelimit options for what is being measured,  Next: Ratelimit update modes,  Up: Rate limiting incoming messages

44.20.1 Ratelimit options for what is being measured
----------------------------------------------------

per_conn
     This option limits the client's connection rate.  It is not
     normally used in the ‘acl_not_smtp’, ‘acl_not_smtp_mime’, or
     ‘acl_not_smtp_start’ ACLs.

per_mail
     This option limits the client's rate of sending messages.  This is
     the default if none of the ‘per_*’ options is specified.  It can be
     used in ‘acl_smtp_mail’, ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’, ‘acl_smtp_predata’,
     ‘acl_smtp_mime’, ‘acl_smtp_data’, or ‘acl_not_smtp’.

per_byte
     This option limits the sender's email bandwidth.  It can be used in
     the same ACLs as the ‘per_mail’ option, though it is best to use
     this option in the ‘acl_smtp_mime’, ‘acl_smtp_data’ or
     ‘acl_not_smtp’ ACLs; if it is used in an earlier ACL, Exim relies
     on the SIZE parameter given by the client in its MAIL command,
     which may be inaccurate or completely missing.  You can follow the
     limit _m_ in the configuration with K, M, or G to specify limits in
     kilobytes, megabytes, or gigabytes, respectively.

per_rcpt
     This option causes Exim to limit the rate at which recipients are
     accepted.  It can be used in the ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’,
     ‘acl_smtp_predata’, ‘acl_smtp_mime’, or ‘acl_smtp_data’ ACLs.  In
     ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’ the rate is updated one recipient at a time; in the
     other ACLs the rate is updated with the total (accepted) recipient
     count in one go.  Note that in either case the rate limiting engine
     will see a message with many recipients as a large high-speed
     burst.

per_addr
     This option is like the ‘per_rcpt’ option, except it counts the
     number of different recipients that the client has sent messages to
     in the last time period.  That is, if the client repeatedly sends
     messages to the same recipient, its measured rate is not increased.
     This option can only be used in ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’.

per_cmd
     This option causes Exim to recompute the rate every time the
     condition is processed.  This can be used to limit the rate of any
     SMTP command.  If it is used in multiple ACLs it can limit the
     aggregate rate of multiple different commands.

count
     This option can be used to alter how much Exim adds to the client's
     measured rate.  A value is required, after an equals sign.  For
     example, the ‘per_byte’ option is equivalent to
     ‘per_mail/count=$message_size’.  If there is no ‘count=’ option,
     Exim increases the measured rate by one (except for the ‘per_rcpt’
     option in ACLs other than ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’).  The count does not
     have to be an integer.

unique
     This option is described in section *note Limiting the rate of
     different events:: below.


File: spec.info,  Node: Ratelimit update modes,  Next: Ratelimit options for handling fast clients,  Prev: Ratelimit options for what is being measured,  Up: Rate limiting incoming messages

44.20.2 Ratelimit update modes
------------------------------

You can specify one of three options with the ‘ratelimit’ condition to
control when its database is updated.  This section describes the
‘readonly’ mode, and the next section describes the ‘strict’ and ‘leaky’
modes.

   If the ‘ratelimit’ condition is used in ‘readonly’ mode, Exim looks
up a previously-computed rate to check against the limit.

   For example, you can test the client's sending rate and deny it
access (when it is too fast) in the connect ACL. If the client passes
this check then it can go on to send a message, in which case its
recorded rate will be updated in the MAIL ACL. Subsequent connections
from the same client will check this new rate.

     acl_check_connect:
      deny ratelimit = 100 / 5m / readonly
           log_message = RATE CHECK: $sender_rate/$sender_rate_period \
                       (max $sender_rate_limit)
     # ...
     acl_check_mail:
      warn ratelimit = 100 / 5m / strict
           log_message = RATE UPDATE: $sender_rate/$sender_rate_period \
                       (max $sender_rate_limit)

   If Exim encounters multiple ‘ratelimit’ conditions with the same key
when processing a message then it may increase the client's measured
rate more than it should.  For example, this will happen if you check
the ‘per_rcpt’ option in both ‘acl_smtp_rcpt’ and ‘acl_smtp_data’.
However it's OK to check the same ‘ratelimit’ condition multiple times
in the same ACL. You can avoid any multiple update problems by using the
‘readonly’ option on later ratelimit checks.

   The ‘per_*’ options described above do not make sense in some ACLs.
If you use a ‘per_*’ option in an ACL where it is not normally permitted
then the update mode defaults to ‘readonly’ and you cannot specify the
‘strict’ or ‘leaky’ modes.  In other ACLs the default update mode is
‘leaky’ (see the next section) so you must specify the ‘readonly’ option
explicitly.


File: spec.info,  Node: Ratelimit options for handling fast clients,  Next: Limiting the rate of different events,  Prev: Ratelimit update modes,  Up: Rate limiting incoming messages

44.20.3 Ratelimit options for handling fast clients
---------------------------------------------------

If a client's average rate is greater than the maximum, the rate
limiting engine can react in two possible ways, depending on the
presence of the ‘strict’ or ‘leaky’ update modes.  This is independent
of the other counter-measures (such as rejecting the message) that may
be specified by the rest of the ACL.

   The ‘leaky’ (default) option means that the client's recorded rate is
not updated if it is above the limit.  The effect of this is that Exim
measures the client's average rate of successfully sent email, up to the
given limit.  This is appropriate if the countermeasure when the
condition is true consists of refusing the message, and is generally the
better choice if you have clients that retry automatically.  If the
action when true is anything more complex then this option is likely not
what is wanted.

   The ‘strict’ option means that the client's recorded rate is always
updated.  The effect of this is that Exim measures the client's average
rate of attempts to send email, which can be much higher than the
maximum it is actually allowed.  If the client is over the limit it may
be subjected to counter-measures by the ACL. It must slow down and allow
sufficient time to pass that its computed rate falls below the maximum
before it can send email again.  The time (the number of smoothing
periods) it must wait and not attempt to send mail can be calculated
with this formula:

             ln(peakrate/maxrate)


File: spec.info,  Node: Limiting the rate of different events,  Next: Using rate limiting,  Prev: Ratelimit options for handling fast clients,  Up: Rate limiting incoming messages

44.20.4 Limiting the rate of different events
---------------------------------------------

The ‘ratelimit’ ‘unique=’ option controls a mechanism for counting the
rate of different events.  For example, the ‘per_addr’ option uses this
mechanism to count the number of different recipients that the client
has sent messages to in the last time period; it is equivalent to
‘per_rcpt/unique=$local_part@$domain’.  You could use this feature to
measure the rate that a client uses different sender addresses with the
options ‘per_mail/unique=$sender_address’.

   For each ‘ratelimit’ key Exim stores the set of ‘unique=’ values that
it has seen for that key.  The whole set is thrown away when it is older
than the rate smoothing period _p_, so each different event is counted
at most once per period.  In the ‘leaky’ update mode, an event that
causes the client to go over the limit is not added to the set, in the
same way that the client's recorded rate is not updated in the same
situation.

   When you combine the ‘unique=’ and ‘readonly’ options, the specific
‘unique=’ value is ignored, and Exim just retrieves the client's stored
rate.

   The ‘unique=’ mechanism needs more space in the ratelimit database
than the other ‘ratelimit’ options in order to store the event set.  The
number of unique values is potentially as large as the rate limit, so
the extra space required increases with larger limits.

   The uniqueification is not perfect: there is a small probability that
Exim will think a new event has happened before.  If the sender's rate
is less than the limit, Exim should be more than 99.9% correct.  However
in ‘strict’ mode the measured rate can go above the limit, in which case
Exim may under-count events by a significant margin.  Fortunately, if
the rate is high enough (2.7 times the limit) that the false positive
rate goes above 9%, then Exim will throw away the over-full event set
before the measured rate falls below the limit.  Therefore the only harm
should be that exceptionally high sending rates are logged incorrectly;
any countermeasures you configure will be as effective as intended.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using rate limiting,  Prev: Limiting the rate of different events,  Up: Rate limiting incoming messages

44.20.5 Using rate limiting
---------------------------

Exim's other ACL facilities are used to define what counter-measures are
taken when the rate limit is exceeded.  This might be anything from
logging a warning (for example, while measuring existing sending rates
in order to define policy), through time delays to slow down fast
senders, up to rejecting the message.  For example:

     # Log all senders' rates
     warn ratelimit = 0 / 1h / strict
          log_message = Sender rate $sender_rate / $sender_rate_period

     # Slow down fast senders; note the need to truncate $sender_rate
     # at the decimal point.
     warn ratelimit = 100 / 1h / per_rcpt / strict
          delay     = ${eval: ${sg{$sender_rate}{[.].*}{}} - \
                        $sender_rate_limit }s

     # Keep authenticated users under control
     deny authenticated = *
          ratelimit = 100 / 1d / strict / $authenticated_id

     # System-wide rate limit
     defer ratelimit = 10 / 1s / $primary_hostname
           message = Sorry, too busy. Try again later.

     # Restrict incoming rate from each host, with a default
     # set using a macro and special cases looked up in a table.
     defer ratelimit = ${lookup {$sender_host_address} \
                        cdb {DB/ratelimits.cdb} \
                        {$value} {RATELIMIT} }
           message = Sender rate exceeds $sender_rate_limit \
                    messages per $sender_rate_period

   *Warning*: If you have a busy server with a lot of ‘ratelimit’ tests,
especially with the ‘per_rcpt’ option, you may suffer from a performance
bottleneck caused by locking on the ratelimit hints database.  Apart
from making your ACLs less complicated, you can reduce the problem by
using a RAM disk for Exim's hints directory (usually
‘/var/spool/exim/db/’).  However this means that Exim will lose its
hints data after a reboot (including retry hints, the callout cache, and
ratelimit data).


File: spec.info,  Node: Address verification,  Next: Callout verification,  Prev: Rate limiting incoming messages,  Up: Access control lists

44.21 Address verification
==========================

Several of the ‘verify’ conditions described in section *note ACL
conditions:: cause addresses to be verified.  Section *note Sender
address verification reporting:: discusses the reporting of sender
verification failures.  The verification conditions can be followed by
options that modify the verification process.  The options are separated
from the keyword and from each other by slashes, and some of them
contain parameters.  For example:

     verify = sender/callout
     verify = recipient/defer_ok/callout=10s,defer_ok

   The first stage of address verification, which always happens, is to
run the address through the routers, in "verify mode".  Routers can
detect the difference between verification and routing for delivery, and
their actions can be varied by a number of generic options such as
‘verify’ and ‘verify_only’ (see chapter *note Generic options for
routers::).  If routing fails, verification fails.  The available
options are as follows:

   • If the ‘callout’ option is specified, successful routing to one or
     more remote hosts is followed by a "callout" to those hosts as an
     additional check.  Callouts and their sub-options are discussed in
     the next section.

   • If there is a defer error while doing verification routing, the ACL
     normally returns "defer".  However, if you include ‘defer_ok’ in
     the options, the condition is forced to be true instead.  Note that
     this is a main verification option as well as a suboption for
     callouts.

   • The ‘no_details’ option is covered in section *note Sender address
     verification reporting::, which discusses the reporting of sender
     address verification failures.

   • The ‘success_on_redirect’ option causes verification always to
     succeed immediately after a successful redirection.  By default, if
     a redirection generates just one address, that address is also
     verified.  See further discussion in section *note Redirection
     while verifying::.

   • If the ‘quota’ option is specified for recipient verify, successful
     routing to an appendfile transport is followed by a call into the
     transport to evaluate the quota status for the recipient.  No
     actual delivery is done, but verification will succeed if the quota
     is sufficient for the message (if the sender gave a message size)
     or not already exceeded (otherwise).

   After an address verification failure, ‘$acl_verify_message’ contains
the error message that is associated with the failure.  It can be
preserved by coding like this:

     warn  !verify = sender
            set acl_m0 = $acl_verify_message

   If you are writing your own custom rejection message or log message
when denying access, you can use this variable to include information
about the verification failure.  This variable is cleared at the end of
processing the ACL verb.

   In addition, ‘$sender_verify_failure’ or ‘$recipient_verify_failure’
(as appropriate) contains one of the following words:

   • ‘qualify’: The address was unqualified (no domain), and the message
     was neither local nor came from an exempted host.

   • ‘route’: Routing failed.

   • ‘mail’: Routing succeeded, and a callout was attempted; rejection
     occurred at or before the MAIL command (that is, on initial
     connection, HELO, or MAIL).

   • ‘recipient’: The RCPT command in a callout was rejected.

   • ‘postmaster’: The postmaster check in a callout was rejected.

   • ‘quota’: The quota check for a local recipient did non pass.

   The main use of these variables is expected to be to distinguish
between rejections of MAIL and rejections of RCPT in callouts.

   The above variables may also be set after a *successful* address
verification to:

   • ‘random’: A random local-part callout succeeded


File: spec.info,  Node: Callout verification,  Next: Quota caching,  Prev: Address verification,  Up: Access control lists

44.22 Callout verification
==========================

For non-local addresses, routing verifies the domain, but is unable to
do any checking of the local part.  There are situations where some
means of verifying the local part is desirable.  One way this can be
done is to make an SMTP _callback_ to a delivery host for the sender
address or a _callforward_ to a subsequent host for a recipient address,
to see if the host accepts the address.  We use the term _callout_ to
cover both cases.  Note that for a sender address, the callback is not
to the client host that is trying to deliver the message, but to one of
the hosts that accepts incoming mail for the sender's domain.

   Exim does not do callouts by default.  If you want them to happen,
you must request them by setting appropriate options on the ‘verify’
condition, as described below.  This facility should be used with care,
because it can add a lot of resource usage to the cost of verifying an
address.  However, Exim does cache the results of callouts, which helps
to reduce the cost.  Details of caching are in section *note Callout
caching::.

   Recipient callouts are usually used only between hosts that are
controlled by the same administration.  For example, a corporate gateway
host could use callouts to check for valid recipients on an internal
mailserver.  A successful callout does not guarantee that a real
delivery to the address would succeed; on the other hand, a failing
callout does guarantee that a delivery would fail.

   If the ‘callout’ option is present on a condition that verifies an
address, a second stage of verification occurs if the address is
successfully routed to one or more remote hosts.  The usual case is
routing by a ‘dnslookup’ or a ‘manualroute’ router, where the router
specifies the hosts.  However, if a router that does not set up hosts
routes to an ‘smtp’ transport with a ‘hosts’ setting, the transport's
hosts are used.  If an ‘smtp’ transport has ‘hosts_override’ set, its
hosts are always used, whether or not the router supplies a host list.
Callouts are only supported on ‘smtp’ transports.

   The port that is used is taken from the transport, if it is specified
and is a remote transport.  (For routers that do verification only, no
transport need be specified.)  Otherwise, the default SMTP port is used.
If a remote transport specifies an outgoing interface, this is used;
otherwise the interface is not specified.  Likewise, the text that is
used for the HELO command is taken from the transport's ‘helo_data’
option; if there is no transport, the value of ‘$smtp_active_hostname’
is used.

   For a sender callout check, Exim makes SMTP connections to the remote
hosts, to test whether a bounce message could be delivered to the sender
address.  The following SMTP commands are sent:

     HELO <local host name>
     MAIL FROM:<>
     RCPT TO:<the address to be tested>
     QUIT

   LHLO is used instead of HELO if the transport's ‘protocol’ option is
set to "lmtp".

   The callout may use EHLO, AUTH and/or STARTTLS given appropriate
option settings.

   A recipient callout check is similar.  By default, it also uses an
empty address for the sender.  This default is chosen because most hosts
do not make use of the sender address when verifying a recipient.  Using
the same address means that a single cache entry can be used for each
recipient.  Some sites, however, do make use of the sender address when
verifying.  These are catered for by the ‘use_sender’, ‘use_tptsender’
and ‘use_postmaster’ options, described in the next section.

   If the response to the RCPT command is a 2_xx_ code, the verification
succeeds.  If it is 5_xx_, the verification fails.  For any other
condition, Exim tries the next host, if any.  If there is a problem with
all the remote hosts, the ACL yields "defer", unless the ‘defer_ok’
parameter of the ‘callout’ option is given, in which case the condition
is forced to succeed.

   A callout may take a little time.  For this reason, Exim normally
flushes SMTP output before performing a callout in an ACL, to avoid
unexpected timeouts in clients when the SMTP PIPELINING extension is in
use.  The flushing can be disabled by using a ‘control’ modifier to set
‘no_callout_flush’.

   A recipient callout which gets a 2_xx_ code will assign untainted
values to the ‘$domain_data’ and ‘$local_part_data’ variables,
corresponding to the domain and local parts of the recipient address.

* Menu:

* Additional parameters for callouts::
* Callout caching::


File: spec.info,  Node: Additional parameters for callouts,  Next: Callout caching,  Up: Callout verification

44.22.1 Additional parameters for callouts
------------------------------------------

The ‘callout’ option can be followed by an equals sign and a number of
optional parameters, separated by commas.  For example:

     verify = recipient/callout=10s,defer_ok

   The old syntax, which had ‘callout_defer_ok’ and ‘check_postmaster’
as separate verify options, is retained for backwards compatibility, but
is now deprecated.  The additional parameters for ‘callout’ are as
follows:

<_a time interval_>
     This specifies the timeout that applies for the callout attempt to
     each host.  For example:

          verify = sender/callout=5s

     The default is 30 seconds.  The timeout is used for each response
     from the remote host.  It is also used for the initial connection,
     unless overridden by the ‘connect’ parameter.

*connect = *<_time interval_>
     This parameter makes it possible to set a different (usually
     smaller) timeout for making the SMTP connection.  For example:

          verify = sender/callout=5s,connect=1s

     If not specified, this timeout defaults to the general timeout
     value.

*defer_ok*
     When this parameter is present, failure to contact any host, or any
     other kind of temporary error, is treated as success by the ACL.
     However, the cache is not updated in this circumstance.

*fullpostmaster*
     This operates like the ‘postmaster’ option (see below), but if the
     check for _postmaster@domain_ fails, it tries just _postmaster_,
     without a domain, in accordance with the specification in *RFC 2821
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2821#section-4.5.1)*.
     The RFC states that the unqualified address _postmaster_ should be
     accepted.

*mailfrom = *<_email address_>
     When verifying addresses in header lines using the ‘header_sender’
     verification option, Exim behaves by default as if the addresses
     are envelope sender addresses from a message.  Callout verification
     therefore tests to see whether a bounce message could be delivered,
     by using an empty address in the MAIL command.  However, it is
     arguable that these addresses might never be used as envelope
     senders, and could therefore justifiably reject bounce messages
     (empty senders).  The ‘mailfrom’ callout parameter allows you to
     specify what address to use in the MAIL command.  For example:

          require  verify = header_sender/callout=mailfrom=abcd@x.y.z

     This parameter is available only for the ‘header_sender’
     verification option.

*maxwait = *<_time interval_>
     This parameter sets an overall timeout for performing a callout
     verification.  For example:

          verify = sender/callout=5s,maxwait=30s

     This timeout defaults to four times the callout timeout for
     individual SMTP commands.  The overall timeout applies when there
     is more than one host that can be tried.  The timeout is checked
     before trying the next host.  This prevents very long delays if
     there are a large number of hosts and all are timing out (for
     example, when network connections are timing out).

*no_cache*
     When this parameter is given, the callout cache is neither read nor
     updated.

*postmaster*
     When this parameter is set, a successful callout check is followed
     by a similar check for the local part _postmaster_ at the same
     domain.  If this address is rejected, the callout fails (but see
     ‘fullpostmaster’ above).  The result of the postmaster check is
     recorded in a cache record; if it is a failure, this is used to
     fail subsequent callouts for the domain without a connection being
     made, until the cache record expires.

*postmaster_mailfrom = *<_email address_>
     The postmaster check uses an empty sender in the MAIL command by
     default.  You can use this parameter to do a postmaster check using
     a different address.  For example:

          require  verify = sender/callout=postmaster_mailfrom=abc@x.y.z

     If both ‘postmaster’ and ‘postmaster_mailfrom’ are present, the
     rightmost one overrides.  The ‘postmaster’ parameter is equivalent
     to this example:

          require  verify = sender/callout=postmaster_mailfrom=

     *Warning*: The caching arrangements for postmaster checking do not
     take account of the sender address.  It is assumed that either the
     empty address or a fixed non-empty address will be used.  All that
     Exim remembers is that the postmaster check for the domain
     succeeded or failed.

*random*
     When this parameter is set, before doing the normal callout check,
     Exim does a check for a "random" local part at the same domain.
     The local part is not really random - it is defined by the
     expansion of the option ‘callout_random_local_part’, which defaults
     to

          $primary_hostname-$tod_epoch-testing

     The idea here is to try to determine whether the remote host
     accepts all local parts without checking.  If it does, there is no
     point in doing callouts for specific local parts.  If the "random"
     check succeeds, the result is saved in a cache record, and used to
     force the current and subsequent callout checks to succeed without
     a connection being made, until the cache record expires.

*use_postmaster*
     This parameter applies to recipient callouts only.  For example:

          deny  !verify = recipient/callout=use_postmaster

     It causes a non-empty postmaster address to be used in the MAIL
     command when performing the callout for the recipient, and also for
     a "random" check if that is configured.  The local part of the
     address is ‘postmaster’ and the domain is the contents of
     ‘$qualify_domain’.

*use_sender*
     This option applies to recipient callouts only.  For example:

          require  verify = recipient/callout=use_sender

     It causes the message's actual sender address to be used in the
     MAIL command when performing the callout, instead of an empty
     address.  There is no need to use this option unless you know that
     the called hosts make use of the sender when checking recipients.
     If used indiscriminately, it reduces the usefulness of callout
     caching.

*use_tptsender*
     This option is similar to *use_sender* above, but additionally
     permits the replacement of the sender address by the *return_path*
     option of the transport.

*hold*
     This option applies to recipient callouts only.  For example:

          require  verify = recipient/callout=use_sender,hold

     It causes the connection to be held open and used for any further
     recipients and for eventual delivery (should that be done quickly).
     Doing this saves on TCP and SMTP startup costs, and TLS costs also
     when that is used for the connections.  The advantage is only
     gained if there are no callout cache hits (which could be enforced
     by the no_cache option), if the use_sender option is used, if
     neither the random nor the use_postmaster option is used, and if no
     other callouts intervene.

   If you use any of the parameters that set a non-empty sender for the
MAIL command (‘mailfrom’, ‘postmaster_mailfrom’, ‘use_postmaster’, or
‘use_sender’), you should think about possible loops.  Recipient
checking is usually done between two hosts that are under the same
management, and the host that receives the callouts is not normally
configured to do callouts itself.  Therefore, it is normally safe to use
‘use_postmaster’ or ‘use_sender’ in these circumstances.

   However, if you use a non-empty sender address for a callout to an
arbitrary host, there is the likelihood that the remote host will itself
initiate a callout check back to your host.  As it is checking what
appears to be a message sender, it is likely to use an empty address in
MAIL, thus avoiding a callout loop.  However, to be on the safe side it
would be best to set up your own ACLs so that they do not do sender
verification checks when the recipient is the address you use for header
sender or postmaster callout checking.

   Another issue to think about when using non-empty senders for
callouts is caching.  When you set ‘mailfrom’ or ‘use_sender’, the cache
record is keyed by the sender/recipient combination; thus, for any given
recipient, many more actual callouts are performed than when an empty
sender or postmaster is used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Callout caching,  Prev: Additional parameters for callouts,  Up: Callout verification

44.22.2 Callout caching
-----------------------

Exim caches the results of callouts in order to reduce the amount of
resources used, unless you specify the ‘no_cache’ parameter with the
‘callout’ option.  A hints database called "callout" is used for the
cache.  Two different record types are used: one records the result of a
callout check for a specific address, and the other records information
that applies to the entire domain (for example, that it accepts the
local part _postmaster_).

   When an original callout fails, a detailed SMTP error message is
given about the failure.  However, for subsequent failures that use the
cache data, this message is not available.

   The expiry times for negative and positive address cache records are
independent, and can be set by the global options
‘callout_negative_expire’ (default 2h) and ‘callout_positive_expire’
(default 24h), respectively.

   If a host gives a negative response to an SMTP connection, or rejects
any commands up to and including

     MAIL FROM:<>

   (but not including the MAIL command with a non-empty address), any
callout attempt is bound to fail.  Exim remembers such failures in a
domain cache record, which it uses to fail callouts for the domain
without making new connections, until the domain record times out.
There are two separate expiry times for domain cache records:
‘callout_domain_negative_expire’ (default 3h) and
‘callout_domain_positive_expire’ (default 7d).

   Domain records expire when the negative expiry time is reached if
callouts cannot be made for the domain, or if the postmaster check
failed.  Otherwise, they expire when the positive expiry time is
reached.  This ensures that, for example, a host that stops accepting
"random" local parts will eventually be noticed.

   The callout caching mechanism is based on the domain of the address
that is being tested.  If the domain routes to several hosts, it is
assumed that their behaviour will be the same.


File: spec.info,  Node: Quota caching,  Next: Sender address verification reporting,  Prev: Callout verification,  Up: Access control lists

44.23 Quota caching
===================

Exim caches the results of quota verification in order to reduce the
amount of resources used.  The "callout" hints database is used.

   The default cache periods are five minutes for a positive (good)
result and one hour for a negative result.  To change the periods the
‘quota’ option can be followed by an equals sign and a number of
optional paramemters, separated by commas.  For example:

     verify = recipient/quota=cachepos=1h,cacheneg=1d

   Possible parameters are:

*cachepos = *<_time interval_>
     Set the lifetime for a positive cache entry.  A value of zero
     seconds is legitimate.

*cacheneg = *<_time interval_>
     As above, for a negative entry.

*no_cache*
     Set both positive and negative lifetimes to zero.


File: spec.info,  Node: Sender address verification reporting,  Next: Redirection while verifying,  Prev: Quota caching,  Up: Access control lists

44.24 Sender address verification reporting
===========================================

See section *note Address verification:: for a general discussion of
verification.  When sender verification fails in an ACL, the details of
the failure are given as additional output lines before the 550 response
to the relevant SMTP command (RCPT or DATA). For example, if sender
callout is in use, you might see:

     MAIL FROM:<xyz@abc.example>
     250 OK
     RCPT TO:<pqr@def.example>
     550-Verification failed for <xyz@abc.example>
     550-Called:   192.168.34.43
     550-Sent:     RCPT TO:<xyz@abc.example>
     550-Response: 550 Unknown local part xyz in <xyz@abc.example>
     550 Sender verification failed

   If more than one RCPT command fails in the same way, the details are
given only for the first of them.  However, some administrators do not
want to send out this much information.  You can suppress the details by
adding ‘/no_details’ to the ACL statement that requests sender
verification.  For example:

     verify = sender/no_details


File: spec.info,  Node: Redirection while verifying,  Next: Client SMTP authorization [CSA],  Prev: Sender address verification reporting,  Up: Access control lists

44.25 Redirection while verifying
=================================

A dilemma arises when a local address is redirected by aliasing or
forwarding during verification: should the generated addresses
themselves be verified, or should the successful expansion of the
original address be enough to verify it?  By default, Exim takes the
following pragmatic approach:

   • When an incoming address is redirected to just one child address,
     verification continues with the child address, and if that fails to
     verify, the original verification also fails.

   • When an incoming address is redirected to more than one child
     address, verification does not continue.  A success result is
     returned.

   This seems the most reasonable behaviour for the common use of
aliasing as a way of redirecting different local parts to the same
mailbox.  It means, for example, that a pair of alias entries of the
form

     A.Wol:   aw123
     aw123:   :fail: Gone away, no forwarding address

   work as expected, with both local parts causing verification failure.
When a redirection generates more than one address, the behaviour is
more like a mailing list, where the existence of the alias itself is
sufficient for verification to succeed.

   It is possible, however, to change the default behaviour so that all
successful redirections count as successful verifications, however many
new addresses are generated.  This is specified by the
‘success_on_redirect’ verification option.  For example:

     require verify = recipient/success_on_redirect/callout=10s

   In this example, verification succeeds if a router generates a new
address, and the callout does not occur, because no address was routed
to a remote host.

   When verification is being tested via the ‘-bv’ option, the treatment
of redirections is as just described, unless the ‘-v’ or any debugging
option is also specified.  In that case, full verification is done for
every generated address and a report is output for each of them.


File: spec.info,  Node: Client SMTP authorization [CSA],  Next: Bounce address tag validation,  Prev: Redirection while verifying,  Up: Access control lists

44.26 Client SMTP authorization (CSA)
=====================================

Client SMTP Authorization is a system that allows a site to advertise
which machines are and are not permitted to send email.  This is done by
placing special SRV records in the DNS; these are looked up using the
client's HELO domain.  At the time of writing, CSA is still an Internet
Draft.  Client SMTP Authorization checks in Exim are performed by the
ACL condition:

     verify = csa

   This fails if the client is not authorized.  If there is a DNS
problem, or if no valid CSA SRV record is found, or if the client is
authorized, the condition succeeds.  These three cases can be
distinguished using the expansion variable ‘$csa_status’, which can take
one of the values "fail", "defer", "unknown", or "ok".  The condition
does not itself defer because that would be likely to cause problems for
legitimate email.

   The error messages produced by the CSA code include slightly more
detail.  If ‘$csa_status’ is "defer", this may be because of problems
looking up the CSA SRV record, or problems looking up the CSA target
address record.  There are four reasons for ‘$csa_status’ being "fail":

   • The client's host name is explicitly not authorized.

   • The client's IP address does not match any of the CSA target IP
     addresses.

   • The client's host name is authorized but it has no valid target IP
     addresses (for example, the target's addresses are IPv6 and the
     client is using IPv4).

   • The client's host name has no CSA SRV record but a parent domain
     has asserted that all subdomains must be explicitly authorized.

   The ‘csa’ verification condition can take an argument which is the
domain to use for the DNS query.  The default is:

     verify = csa/$sender_helo_name

   This implementation includes an extension to CSA. If the query domain
is an address literal such as [192.0.2.95], or if it is a bare IP
address, Exim searches for CSA SRV records in the reverse DNS as if the
HELO domain was (for example) _95.2.0.192.in-addr.arpa_.  Therefore it
is meaningful to say:

     verify = csa/$sender_host_address

   In fact, this is the check that Exim performs if the client does not
say HELO. This extension can be turned off by setting the main
configuration option ‘dns_csa_use_reverse’ to be false.

   If a CSA SRV record is not found for the domain itself, a search is
performed through its parent domains for a record which might be making
assertions about subdomains.  The maximum depth of this search is
limited using the main configuration option ‘dns_csa_search_limit’,
which is 5 by default.  Exim does not look for CSA SRV records in a top
level domain, so the default settings handle HELO domains as long as
seven (_hostname.five.four.three.two.one.com_).  This encompasses the
vast majority of legitimate HELO domains.

   The _dnsdb_ lookup also has support for CSA. Although _dnsdb_ also
supports direct SRV lookups, this is not sufficient because of the extra
parent domain search behaviour of CSA, and (as with PTR lookups) _dnsdb_
also turns IP addresses into lookups in the reverse DNS space.  The
result of a successful lookup such as:

     ${lookup dnsdb {csa=$sender_helo_name}}

   has two space-separated fields: an authorization code and a target
host name.  The authorization code can be "Y" for yes, "N" for no, "X"
for explicit authorization required but absent, or "?"  for unknown.


File: spec.info,  Node: Bounce address tag validation,  Next: Using an ACL to control relaying,  Prev: Client SMTP authorization [CSA],  Up: Access control lists

44.27 Bounce address tag validation
===================================

Bounce address tag validation (BATV) is a scheme whereby the envelope
senders of outgoing messages have a cryptographic, timestamped "tag"
added to them.  Genuine incoming bounce messages should therefore always
be addressed to recipients that have a valid tag.  This scheme is a way
of detecting unwanted bounce messages caused by sender address forgeries
(often called "collateral spam"), because the recipients of such
messages do not include valid tags.

   There are two expansion items to help with the implementation of the
BATV "prvs" (private signature) scheme in an Exim configuration.  This
scheme signs the original envelope sender address by using a simple key
to add a hash of the address and some time-based randomizing
information.  The ‘prvs’ expansion item creates a signed address, and
the ‘prvscheck’ expansion item checks one.  The syntax of these
expansion items is described in section *note Expansion items::.  The
validity period on signed addresses is seven days.

   As an example, suppose the secret per-address keys are stored in an
MySQL database.  A query to look up the key for an address could be
defined as a macro like this:

     PRVSCHECK_SQL = ${lookup mysql{SELECT secret FROM batv_prvs \
                     WHERE sender='${quote_mysql:$prvscheck_address}'\
                     }{$value}}

   Suppose also that the senders who make use of BATV are defined by an
address list called ‘batv_senders’.  Then, in the ACL for RCPT commands,
you could use this:

     # Bounces: drop unsigned addresses for BATV senders
     deny senders = :
          recipients = +batv_senders
          message = This address does not send an unsigned reverse path

     # Bounces: In case of prvs-signed address, check signature.
     deny senders = :
          condition  = ${prvscheck {$local_part@$domain}\
                       {PRVSCHECK_SQL}{1}}
          !condition = $prvscheck_result
          message = Invalid reverse path signature.

   The first statement rejects recipients for bounce messages that are
addressed to plain BATV sender addresses, because it is known that BATV
senders do not send out messages with plain sender addresses.  The
second statement rejects recipients that are prvs-signed, but with
invalid signatures (either because the key is wrong, or the signature
has timed out).

   A non-prvs-signed address is not rejected by the second statement,
because the ‘prvscheck’ expansion yields an empty string if its first
argument is not a prvs-signed address, thus causing the ‘condition’
condition to be false.  If the first argument is a syntactically valid
prvs-signed address, the yield is the third string (in this case "1"),
whether or not the cryptographic and timeout checks succeed.  The
‘$prvscheck_result’ variable contains the result of the checks (empty
for failure, "1" for success).

   There is one more issue you must consider when implementing
prvs-signing: you have to ensure that the routers accept prvs-signed
addresses and deliver them correctly.  The easiest way to handle this is
to use a ‘redirect’ router to remove the signature with a configuration
along these lines:

     batv_redirect:
       driver = redirect
       data = ${prvscheck {$local_part@$domain}{PRVSCHECK_SQL}}

   This works because, if the third argument of ‘prvscheck’ is empty,
the result of the expansion of a prvs-signed address is the decoded
value of the original address.  This router should probably be the first
of your routers that handles local addresses.

   To create BATV-signed addresses in the first place, a transport of
this form can be used:

     external_smtp_batv:
       driver = smtp
       return_path = ${prvs {$return_path} \
                            {${lookup mysql{SELECT \
                            secret FROM batv_prvs WHERE \
                            sender='${quote_mysql:$sender_address}'} \
                            {$value}fail}}}

   If no key can be found for the existing return path, no signing takes
place.


File: spec.info,  Node: Using an ACL to control relaying,  Next: Checking a relay configuration,  Prev: Bounce address tag validation,  Up: Access control lists

44.28 Using an ACL to control relaying
======================================

An MTA is said to _relay_ a message if it receives it from some host and
delivers it directly to another host as a result of a remote address
contained within it.  Redirecting a local address via an alias or
forward file and then passing the message on to another host is not
relaying, but a redirection as a result of the "percent hack" is.

   Two kinds of relaying exist, which are termed "incoming" and
"outgoing".  A host which is acting as a gateway or an MX backup is
concerned with incoming relaying from arbitrary hosts to a specific set
of domains.  On the other hand, a host which is acting as a smart host
for a number of clients is concerned with outgoing relaying from those
clients to the Internet at large.  Often the same host is fulfilling
both functions, but in principle these two kinds of relaying are
entirely independent.  What is not wanted is the transmission of mail
from arbitrary remote hosts through your system to arbitrary domains.

   You can implement relay control by means of suitable statements in
the ACL that runs for each RCPT command.  For convenience, it is often
easiest to use Exim's named list facility to define the domains and
hosts involved.  For example, suppose you want to do the following:

   • Deliver a number of domains to mailboxes on the local host (or
     process them locally in some other way).  Let's say these are
     _my.dom1.example_ and _my.dom2.example_.

   • Relay mail for a number of other domains for which you are the
     secondary MX. These might be _friend1.example_ and
     _friend2.example_.

   • Relay mail from the hosts on your local LAN, to whatever domains
     are involved.  Suppose your LAN is 192.168.45.0/24.

   In the main part of the configuration, you put the following
definitions:

     domainlist local_domains    = my.dom1.example : my.dom2.example
     domainlist relay_to_domains = friend1.example : friend2.example
     hostlist   relay_from_hosts = 192.168.45.0/24

   Now you can use these definitions in the ACL that is run for every
RCPT command:

     acl_check_rcpt:
       accept domains = +local_domains : +relay_to_domains
       accept hosts   = +relay_from_hosts

   The first statement accepts any RCPT command that contains an address
in the local or relay domains.  For any other domain, control passes to
the second statement, which accepts the command only if it comes from
one of the relay hosts.  In practice, you will probably want to make
your ACL more sophisticated than this, for example, by including sender
and recipient verification.  The default configuration includes a more
comprehensive example, which is described in chapter *note The default
configuration file::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Checking a relay configuration,  Prev: Using an ACL to control relaying,  Up: Access control lists

44.29 Checking a relay configuration
====================================

You can check the relay characteristics of your configuration in the
same way that you can test any ACL behaviour for an incoming SMTP
connection, by using the ‘-bh’ option to run a fake SMTP session with
which you interact.


File: spec.info,  Node: Content scanning at ACL time,  Next: Local scan function,  Prev: Access control lists,  Up: Top

45 Content scanning at ACL time
*******************************

The extension of Exim to include content scanning at ACL time, formerly
known as "exiscan", was originally implemented as a patch by Tom
Kistner.  The code was integrated into the main source for Exim release
4.50, and Tom continues to maintain it.  Most of the wording of this
chapter is taken from Tom's specification.

   It is also possible to scan the content of messages at other times.
The ‘local_scan()’ function (see chapter *note Adding a local scan
function to Exim: Local scan function.) allows for content scanning
after all the ACLs have run.  A transport filter can be used to scan
messages at delivery time (see the ‘transport_filter’ option, described
in chapter *note Generic options for transports::).

   If you want to include the ACL-time content-scanning features when
you compile Exim, you need to arrange for WITH_CONTENT_SCAN to be
defined in your ‘Local/Makefile’.  When you do that, the Exim binary is
built with:

   • Two additional ACLs (‘acl_smtp_mime’ and ‘acl_not_smtp_mime’) that
     are run for all MIME parts for SMTP and non-SMTP messages,
     respectively.

   • Additional ACL conditions and modifiers: ‘decode’, ‘malware’,
     ‘mime_regex’, ‘regex’, and ‘spam’.  These can be used in the ACL
     that is run at the end of message reception (the ‘acl_smtp_data’
     ACL).

   • An additional control feature ("no_mbox_unspool") that saves
     spooled copies of messages, or parts of messages, for debugging
     purposes.

   • Additional expansion variables that are set in the new ACL and by
     the new conditions.

   • Two new main configuration options: ‘av_scanner’ and
     ‘spamd_address’.

   Content-scanning is continually evolving, and new features are still
being added.  While such features are still unstable and liable to
incompatible changes, they are made available in Exim by setting options
whose names begin EXPERIMENTAL_ in ‘Local/Makefile’.  Such features are
not documented in this manual.  You can find out about them by reading
the file called ‘doc/experimental.txt’.

   All the content-scanning facilities work on a MBOX copy of the
message that is temporarily created in a file called:

     <spool_directory>/scan/<message_id>/<message_id>.eml

   The ‘.eml’ extension is a friendly hint to virus scanners that they
can expect an MBOX-like structure inside that file.  The file is created
when the first content scanning facility is called.  Subsequent calls to
content scanning conditions open the same file again.  The directory is
recursively removed when the ‘acl_smtp_data’ ACL has finished running,
unless

     control = no_mbox_unspool

   has been encountered.  When the MIME ACL decodes files, they are put
into the same directory by default.

* Menu:

* Scanning for viruses::
* Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd::
* Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL::
* Scanning MIME parts::
* Scanning with regular expressions::


File: spec.info,  Node: Scanning for viruses,  Next: Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd,  Up: Content scanning at ACL time

45.1 Scanning for viruses
=========================

The ‘malware’ ACL condition lets you connect virus scanner software to
Exim.  It supports a "generic" interface to scanners called via the
shell, and specialized interfaces for "daemon" type virus scanners,
which are resident in memory and thus are much faster.

   Since message data needs to have arrived, the condition may be only
called in ACL defined by ‘acl_smtp_data’, ‘acl_smtp_data_prdr’,
‘acl_smtp_mime’ or ‘acl_smtp_dkim’

   A timeout of 2 minutes is applied to a scanner call (by default); if
it expires then a defer action is taken.

   You can set the ‘av_scanner’ option in the main part of the
configuration to specify which scanner to use, together with any
additional options that are needed.  The basic syntax is as follows:

     av_scanner = <scanner-type>:<option1>:<option2>:[...]

   If you do not set ‘av_scanner’, it defaults to

     av_scanner = sophie:/var/run/sophie

   If the value of ‘av_scanner’ starts with a dollar character, it is
expanded before use.  The usual list-parsing of the content (see *note
List construction::) applies.  The following scanner types are supported
in this release, though individual ones can be included or not at build
time:

‘avast’
     This is the scanner daemon of Avast.  It has been tested with Avast
     Core Security (currently at version 2.2.0).  You can get a trial
     version at *https://www.avast.com (https://www.avast.com)* or for
     Linux at *https://www.avast.com/linux-server-antivirus
     (https://www.avast.com/linux-server-antivirus)*.  This scanner type
     takes one option, which can be either a full path to a UNIX socket,
     or host and port specifiers separated by white space.  The host may
     be a name or an IP address; the port is either a single number or a
     pair of numbers with a dash between.  A list of options may follow.
     These options are interpreted on the Exim's side of the malware
     scanner, or are given on separate lines to the daemon as options
     before the main scan command.

     If ‘pass_unscanned’ is set, any files the Avast scanner can't scan
     (e.g.  decompression bombs, or invalid archives) are considered
     clean.  Use with care.

     For example:

          av_scanner = avast:/var/run/avast/scan.sock:FLAGS -fullfiles:SENSITIVITY -pup
          av_scanner = avast:/var/run/avast/scan.sock:pass_unscanned:FLAGS -fullfiles:SENSITIVITY -pup
          av_scanner = avast:192.168.2.22 5036

     If you omit the argument, the default path
     ‘/var/run/avast/scan.sock’ is used.  If you use a remote host, you
     need to make Exim's spool directory available to it, as the scanner
     is passed a file path, not file contents.  For information about
     available commands and their options you may use

          $ socat UNIX:/var/run/avast/scan.sock STDIO:
              FLAGS
              SENSITIVITY
              PACK

     If the scanner returns a temporary failure (e.g.  license issues,
     or permission problems), the message is deferred and a paniclog
     entry is written.  The usual ‘defer_ok’ option is available.

‘clamd’
     This daemon-type scanner is GPL and free.  You can get it at
     *https://www.clamav.net/ (https://www.clamav.net/)*.  Some older
     versions of clamd do not seem to unpack MIME containers, so it used
     to be recommended to unpack MIME attachments in the MIME ACL. This
     is no longer believed to be necessary.

     The options are a list of server specifiers, which may be a UNIX
     socket specification, a TCP socket specification, or a (global)
     option.

     A socket specification consists of a space-separated list.  For a
     Unix socket the first element is a full path for the socket, for a
     TCP socket the first element is the IP address and the second a
     port number, Any further elements are per-server (non-global)
     options.  These per-server options are supported:

          retry=<timespec>	Retry on connect fail

     The ‘retry’ option specifies a time after which a single retry for
     a failed connect is made.  The default is to not retry.

     If a Unix socket file is specified, only one server is supported.

     Examples:

          av_scanner = clamd:/opt/clamd/socket
          av_scanner = clamd:192.0.2.3 1234
          av_scanner = clamd:192.0.2.3 1234:local
          av_scanner = clamd:192.0.2.3 1234 retry=10s
          av_scanner = clamd:192.0.2.3 1234 : 192.0.2.4 1234

     If the value of av_scanner points to a UNIX socket file or contains
     the ‘local’ option, then the ClamAV interface will pass a filename
     containing the data to be scanned, which should normally result in
     less I/O happening and be more efficient.  Normally in the TCP
     case, the data is streamed to ClamAV as Exim does not assume that
     there is a common filesystem with the remote host.

     The final example shows that multiple TCP targets can be specified.
     Exim will randomly use one for each incoming email (i.e.  it load
     balances them).  Note that only TCP targets may be used if
     specifying a list of scanners; a UNIX socket cannot be mixed in
     with TCP targets.  If one of the servers becomes unavailable, Exim
     will try the remaining one(s) until it finds one that works.  When
     a clamd server becomes unreachable, Exim will log a message.  Exim
     does not keep track of scanner state between multiple messages, and
     the scanner selection is random, so the message will get logged in
     the mainlog for each email that the down scanner gets chosen first
     (message wrapped to be readable):

          2013-10-09 14:30:39 1VTumd-0000Y8-BQ malware acl condition:
             clamd: connection to localhost, port 3310 failed
             (Connection refused)

     If the option is unset, the default is ‘/tmp/clamd’.  Thanks to
     David Saez for contributing the code for this scanner.

‘cmdline’
     This is the keyword for the generic command line scanner interface.
     It can be used to attach virus scanners that are invoked from the
     shell.  This scanner type takes 3 mandatory options:

       1. The full path and name of the scanner binary, with all command
          line options, and a placeholder (‘%s’) for the directory to
          scan.

       2. A regular expression to match against the STDOUT and STDERR
          output of the virus scanner.  If the expression matches, a
          virus was found.  You must make absolutely sure that this
          expression matches on "virus found".  This is called the
          "trigger" expression.

       3. Another regular expression, containing exactly one pair of
          parentheses, to match the name of the virus found in the
          scanners output.  This is called the "name" expression.

     For example, Sophos Sweep reports a virus on a line like this:

          Virus 'W32/Magistr-B' found in file ./those.bat

     For the trigger expression, we can match the phrase "found in
     file".  For the name expression, we want to extract the
     W32/Magistr-B string, so we can match for the single quotes left
     and right of it.  Altogether, this makes the configuration setting:

          av_scanner = cmdline:\
                       /path/to/sweep -ss -all -rec -archive %s:\
                       found in file:'(.+)'

‘sock’
     This is a general-purpose way of talking to simple scanner daemons
     running on the local machine.  There are four options: an address
     (which may be an IP address and port, or the path of a Unix
     socket), a commandline to send (may include a single %s which will
     be replaced with the path to the mail file to be scanned), an RE to
     trigger on from the returned data, and an RE to extract
     malware_name from the returned data.  For example:

          av_scanner = sock:127.0.0.1 6001:%s:(SPAM|VIRUS):(.*)$

     Note that surrounding whitespace is stripped from each option,
     meaning there is no way to specify a trailing newline.  The socket
     specifier and both regular-expressions are required.  Default for
     the commandline is ‘%s\n’ (note this does have a trailing newline);
     specify an empty element to get this.

   When ‘av_scanner’ is correctly set, you can use the ‘malware’
condition in the DATA ACL. *Note*: You cannot use the ‘malware’
condition in the MIME ACL.

   The ‘av_scanner’ option is expanded each time ‘malware’ is called.
This makes it possible to use different scanners.  See further below for
an example.  The ‘malware’ condition caches its results, so when you use
it multiple times for the same message, the actual scanning process is
only carried out once.  However, using expandable items in ‘av_scanner’
disables this caching, in which case each use of the ‘malware’ condition
causes a new scan of the message.

   The ‘malware’ condition takes a right-hand argument that is expanded
before use and taken as a list, slash-separated by default.  The first
element can then be one of

   • "true", "*", or "1", in which case the message is scanned for
     viruses.  The condition succeeds if a virus was found, and fail
     otherwise.  This is the recommended usage.

   • "false" or "0" or an empty string, in which case no scanning is
     done and the condition fails immediately.

   • A regular expression, in which case the message is scanned for
     viruses.  The condition succeeds if a virus is found and its name
     matches the regular expression.  This allows you to take special
     actions on certain types of virus.  Note that "/" characters in the
     RE must be doubled due to the list-processing, unless the separator
     is changed (in the usual way *note Changing list separators::).

   You can append a ‘defer_ok’ element to the ‘malware’ argument list to
accept messages even if there is a problem with the virus scanner.
Otherwise, such a problem causes the ACL to defer.

   You can append a ‘tmo=<val>’ element to the ‘malware’ argument list
to specify a non-default timeout.  The default is two minutes.  For
example:

     malware = * / defer_ok / tmo=10s

   A timeout causes the ACL to defer.

   When a connection is made to the scanner the expansion variable
‘$callout_address’ is set to record the actual address used.

   When a virus is found, the condition sets up an expansion variable
called ‘$malware_name’ that contains the name of the virus.  You can use
it in a ‘message’ modifier that specifies the error returned to the
sender, and/or in logging data.

   Beware the interaction of Exim's ‘message_size_limit’ with any size
limits imposed by your anti-virus scanner.

   Here is a very simple scanning example:

     deny malware = *
          message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)

   The next example accepts messages when there is a problem with the
scanner:

     deny malware = */defer_ok
          message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)

   The next example shows how to use an ACL variable to scan with both
sophie and aveserver.  It assumes you have set:

     av_scanner = $acl_m0

   in the main Exim configuration.

     deny set acl_m0 = sophie
          malware = *
          message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)

     deny set acl_m0 = aveserver
          malware = *
          message = This message contains malware ($malware_name)


File: spec.info,  Node: Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd,  Next: Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL,  Prev: Scanning for viruses,  Up: Content scanning at ACL time

45.2 Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd
==========================================

The ‘spam’ ACL condition calls SpamAssassin's ‘spamd’ daemon to get a
spam score and a report for the message.  Support is also provided for
Rspamd.

   For more information about installation and configuration of
SpamAssassin or Rspamd refer to their respective websites at
*https://spamassassin.apache.org/ (https://spamassassin.apache.org/)*
and *https://www.rspamd.com/ (https://www.rspamd.com/)*

   SpamAssassin can be installed with CPAN by running:

     perl -MCPAN -e 'install Mail::SpamAssassin'

   SpamAssassin has its own set of configuration files.  Please review
its documentation to see how you can tweak it.  The default installation
should work nicely, however.

   By default, SpamAssassin listens on 127.0.0.1, TCP port 783 and if
you intend to use an instance running on the local host you do not need
to set ‘spamd_address’.  If you intend to use another host or port for
SpamAssassin, you must set the ‘spamd_address’ option in the global part
of the Exim configuration as follows (example):

     spamd_address = 192.168.99.45 783

   The SpamAssassin protocol relies on a TCP half-close from the client.
If your SpamAssassin client side is running a Linux system with an
iptables firewall, consider setting
‘net.netfilter.nf_conntrack_tcp_timeout_close_wait’ to at least the
timeout, Exim uses when waiting for a response from the SpamAssassin
server (currently defaulting to 120s).  With a lower value the Linux
connection tracking may consider your half-closed connection as dead too
soon.

   To use Rspamd (which by default listens on all local addresses on TCP
port 11333) you should add ‘variant=rspamd’ after the address/port pair,
for example:

     spamd_address = 127.0.0.1 11333 variant=rspamd

   As of version 2.60, ‘SpamAssassin’ also supports communication over
UNIX sockets.  If you want to us these, supply ‘spamd_address’ with an
absolute filename instead of an address/port pair:

     spamd_address = /var/run/spamd_socket

   You can have multiple ‘spamd’ servers to improve scalability.  These
can reside on other hardware reachable over the network.  To specify
multiple ‘spamd’ servers, put multiple address/port pairs in the
‘spamd_address’ option, separated with colons (the separator can be
changed in the usual way *note Changing list separators::):

     spamd_address = 192.168.2.10 783 : \
                     192.168.2.11 783 : \
                     192.168.2.12 783

   Up to 32 ‘spamd’ servers are supported.  When a server fails to
respond to the connection attempt, all other servers are tried until one
succeeds.  If no server responds, the ‘spam’ condition defers.

   Unix and TCP socket specifications may be mixed in any order.  Each
element of the list is a list itself, space-separated by default and
changeable in the usual way (*note Changing list separators::); take
care to not double the separator.

   For TCP socket specifications a host name or IP (v4 or v6, but
subject to list-separator quoting rules) address can be used, and the
port can be one or a dash-separated pair.  In the latter case, the range
is tried in strict order.

   Elements after the first for Unix sockets, or second for TCP socket,
are options.  The supported options are:

     pri=<priority>      Selection priority
     weight=<value>      Selection bias
     time=<start>-<end>  Use only between these times of day
     retry=<timespec>    Retry on connect fail
     tmo=<timespec>      Connection time limit
     variant=rspamd      Use Rspamd rather than SpamAssassin protocol

   The ‘pri’ option specifies a priority for the server within the list,
higher values being tried first.  The default priority is 1.

   The ‘weight’ option specifies a selection bias.  Within a priority
set servers are queried in a random fashion, weighted by this value.
The default value for selection bias is 1.

   Time specifications for the ‘time’ option are
<hour>.<minute>.<second> in the local time zone; each element being one
or more digits.  Either the seconds or both minutes and seconds, plus
the leading ‘.’ characters, may be omitted and will be taken as zero.

   Timeout specifications for the ‘retry’ and ‘tmo’ options are the
usual Exim time interval standard, e.g.  ‘20s’ or ‘1m’.

   The ‘tmo’ option specifies an overall timeout for communication.  The
default value is two minutes.

   The ‘retry’ option specifies a time after which a single retry for a
failed connect is made.  The default is to not retry.

   The ‘spamd_address’ variable is expanded before use if it starts with
a dollar sign.  In this case, the expansion may return a string that is
used as the list so that multiple spamd servers can be the result of an
expansion.

   When a connection is made to the server the expansion variable
‘$callout_address’ is set to record the actual address used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL,  Next: Scanning MIME parts,  Prev: Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd,  Up: Content scanning at ACL time

45.3 Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL
==========================================

Here is a simple example of the use of the ‘spam’ condition in a DATA
ACL:

     deny spam = joe
          message = This message was classified as SPAM

   The right-hand side of the ‘spam’ condition specifies a name.  This
is relevant if you have set up multiple SpamAssassin profiles.  If you
do not want to scan using a specific profile, but rather use the
SpamAssassin system-wide default profile, you can scan for an unknown
name, or simply use "nobody".  Rspamd does not use this setting.
However, you must put something on the right-hand side.

   The name allows you to use per-domain or per-user antispam profiles
in principle, but this is not straightforward in practice, because a
message may have multiple recipients, not necessarily all in the same
domain.  Because the ‘spam’ condition has to be called from a DATA-time
ACL in order to be able to read the contents of the message, the
variables ‘$local_part’ and ‘$domain’ are not set.  Careful enforcement
of single-recipient messages (e.g.  by responding with defer in the
recipient ACL for all recipients after the first), or the use of PRDR,
are needed to use this feature.

   The right-hand side of the ‘spam’ condition is expanded before being
used, so you can put lookups or conditions there.  When the right-hand
side evaluates to "0" or "false", no scanning is done and the condition
fails immediately.

   Scanning with SpamAssassin uses a lot of resources.  If you scan
every message, large ones may cause significant performance degradation.
As most spam messages are quite small, it is recommended that you do not
scan the big ones.  For example:

     deny condition = ${if < {$message_size}{10K}}
          spam = nobody
          message = This message was classified as SPAM

   The ‘spam’ condition returns true if the threshold specified in the
user's SpamAssassin profile has been matched or exceeded.  If you want
to use the ‘spam’ condition for its side effects (see the variables
below), you can make it always return "true" by appending ‘:true’ to the
username.

   When the ‘spam’ condition is run, it sets up a number of expansion
variables.  Except for ‘$spam_report’, these variables are saved with
the received message so are available for use at delivery time.

‘$spam_score’
     The spam score of the message, for example, "3.4" or "30.5".  This
     is useful for inclusion in log or reject messages.

‘$spam_score_int’
     The spam score of the message, multiplied by ten, as an integer
     value.  For example "34" or "305".  It may appear to disagree with
     ‘$spam_score’ because ‘$spam_score’ is rounded and
     ‘$spam_score_int’ is truncated.  The integer value is useful for
     numeric comparisons in conditions.

‘$spam_bar’
     A string consisting of a number of "+" or "-" characters,
     representing the integer part of the spam score value.  A spam
     score of 4.4 would have a ‘$spam_bar’ value of "++++".  This is
     useful for inclusion in warning headers, since MUAs can match on
     such strings.  The maximum length of the spam bar is 50 characters.

‘$spam_report’
     A multiline text table, containing the full SpamAssassin report for
     the message.  Useful for inclusion in headers or reject messages.
     This variable is only usable in a DATA-time ACL. Beware that
     SpamAssassin may return non-ASCII characters, especially when
     running in country-specific locales, which are not legal unencoded
     in headers.

‘$spam_action’
     For SpamAssassin either 'reject' or 'no action' depending on the
     spam score versus threshold.  For Rspamd, the recommended action.

   The ‘spam’ condition caches its results unless expansion in
spamd_address was used.  If you call it again with the same user name,
it does not scan again, but rather returns the same values as before.

   The ‘spam’ condition returns DEFER if there is any error while
running the message through SpamAssassin or if the expansion of
spamd_address failed.  If you want to treat DEFER as FAIL (to pass on to
the next ACL statement block), append ‘/defer_ok’ to the right-hand side
of the spam condition, like this:

     deny spam    = joe/defer_ok
          message = This message was classified as SPAM

   This causes messages to be accepted even if there is a problem with
‘spamd’.

   Here is a longer, commented example of the use of the ‘spam’
condition:

     # put headers in all messages (no matter if spam or not)
     warn  spam = nobody:true
           add_header = X-Spam-Score: $spam_score ($spam_bar)
           add_header = X-Spam-Report: $spam_report

     # add second subject line with *SPAM* marker when message
     # is over threshold
     warn  spam = nobody
           add_header = Subject: *SPAM* $h_Subject:

     # reject spam at high scores (> 12)
     deny  spam = nobody:true
           condition = ${if >{$spam_score_int}{120}{1}{0}}
           message = This message scored $spam_score spam points.


File: spec.info,  Node: Scanning MIME parts,  Next: Scanning with regular expressions,  Prev: Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL,  Up: Content scanning at ACL time

45.4 Scanning MIME parts
========================

The ‘acl_smtp_mime’ global option specifies an ACL that is called once
for each MIME part of an SMTP message, including multipart types, in the
sequence of their position in the message.  Similarly, the
‘acl_not_smtp_mime’ option specifies an ACL that is used for the MIME
parts of non-SMTP messages.  These options may both refer to the same
ACL if you want the same processing in both cases.

   These ACLs are called (possibly many times) just before the
‘acl_smtp_data’ ACL in the case of an SMTP message, or just before the
‘acl_not_smtp’ ACL in the case of a non-SMTP message.  However, a MIME
ACL is called only if the message contains a _Content-Type:_ header
line.  When a call to a MIME ACL does not yield "accept", ACL processing
is aborted and the appropriate result code is sent to the client.  In
the case of an SMTP message, the ‘acl_smtp_data’ ACL is not called when
this happens.

   You cannot use the ‘malware’ or ‘spam’ conditions in a MIME ACL;
these can only be used in the DATA or non-SMTP ACLs.  However, you can
use the ‘regex’ condition to match against the raw MIME part.  You can
also use the ‘mime_regex’ condition to match against the decoded MIME
part (see section *note Scanning with regular expressions::).

   At the start of a MIME ACL, a number of variables are set from the
header information for the relevant MIME part.  These are described
below.  The contents of the MIME part are not by default decoded into a
disk file except for MIME parts whose content-type is "message/rfc822".
If you want to decode a MIME part into a disk file, you can use the
‘decode’ condition.  The general syntax is:

     decode = [/<path>/]<filename>

   The right hand side is expanded before use.  After expansion, the
value can be:

  1. "0" or "false", in which case no decoding is done.

  2. The string "default".  In that case, the file is put in the
     temporary "default" directory
     <_spool_directory_>‘/scan/’<_message_id_>‘/’ with a sequential
     filename consisting of the message id and a sequence number.  The
     full path and name is available in ‘$mime_decoded_filename’ after
     decoding.

  3. A full path name starting with a slash.  If the full name is an
     existing directory, it is used as a replacement for the default
     directory.  The filename is then sequentially assigned.  If the
     path does not exist, it is used as the full path and filename.

  4. If the string does not start with a slash, it is used as the
     filename, and the default path is then used.

   The ‘decode’ condition normally succeeds.  It is only false for
syntax errors or unusual circumstances such as memory shortages.  The
variable ‘$mime_filename’ will have the suggested name for the file.
Note however that this might contain anything, and is very difficult to
safely use as all or even part of the filename.  If you place files
outside of the default path, they are not automatically unlinked.

   For RFC822 attachments (these are messages attached to messages, with
a content-type of "message/rfc822"), the ACL is called again in the same
manner as for the primary message, only that the ‘$mime_is_rfc822’
expansion variable is set (see below).  Attached messages are always
decoded to disk before being checked, and the files are unlinked once
the check is done.

   The MIME ACL supports the ‘regex’ and ‘mime_regex’ conditions.  These
can be used to match regular expressions against raw and decoded MIME
parts, respectively.  They are described in section *note Scanning with
regular expressions::.

   The following list describes all expansion variables that are
available in the MIME ACL:

‘$mime_anomaly_level’
‘$mime_anomaly_text’
     If there are problems decoding, these variables contain information
     on the detected issue.

‘$mime_boundary’
     If the current part is a multipart (see ‘$mime_is_multipart’
     below), it should have a boundary string, which is stored in this
     variable.  If the current part has no boundary parameter in the
     _Content-Type:_ header, this variable contains the empty string.

‘$mime_charset’
     This variable contains the character set identifier, if one was
     found in the _Content-Type:_ header.  Examples for charset
     identifiers are:

          us-ascii
          gb2312 (Chinese)
          iso-8859-1

     Please note that this value is not normalized, so you should do
     matches case-insensitively.

‘$mime_content_description’
     This variable contains the normalized content of the
     _Content-Description:_ header.  It can contain a human-readable
     description of the parts content.  Some implementations repeat the
     filename for attachments here, but they are usually only used for
     display purposes.

‘$mime_content_disposition’
     This variable contains the normalized content of the
     _Content-Disposition:_ header.  You can expect strings like
     "attachment" or "inline" here.

‘$mime_content_id’
     This variable contains the normalized content of the _Content-ID:_
     header.  This is a unique ID that can be used to reference a part
     from another part.

‘$mime_content_size’
     This variable is set only after the ‘decode’ modifier (see above)
     has been successfully run.  It contains the size of the decoded
     part in kilobytes.  The size is always rounded up to full
     kilobytes, so only a completely empty part has a
     ‘$mime_content_size’ of zero.

‘$mime_content_transfer_encoding’
     This variable contains the normalized content of the
     _Content-transfer-encoding:_ header.  This is a symbolic name for
     an encoding type.  Typical values are "base64" and
     "quoted-printable".

‘$mime_content_type’
     If the MIME part has a _Content-Type:_ header, this variable
     contains its value, lowercased, and without any options (like
     "name" or "charset").  Here are some examples of popular MIME
     types, as they may appear in this variable:

          text/plain
          text/html
          application/octet-stream
          image/jpeg
          audio/midi

     If the MIME part has no _Content-Type:_ header, this variable
     contains the empty string.

‘$mime_decoded_filename’
     This variable is set only after the ‘decode’ modifier (see above)
     has been successfully run.  It contains the full path and filename
     of the file containing the decoded data.

‘$mime_filename’
     This is perhaps the most important of the MIME variables.  It
     contains a proposed filename for an attachment, if one was found in
     either the _Content-Type:_ or _Content-Disposition:_ headers.  The
     filename will be *RFC 2047
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)* or *RFC 2231
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2231)* decoded, but no
     additional sanity checks are done.  If no filename was found, this
     variable contains the empty string.

‘$mime_is_coverletter’
     This variable attempts to differentiate the "cover letter" of an
     e-mail from attached data.  It can be used to clamp down on flashy
     or unnecessarily encoded content in the cover letter, while not
     restricting attachments at all.

     The variable contains 1 (true) for a MIME part believed to be part
     of the cover letter, and 0 (false) for an attachment.  At present,
     the algorithm is as follows:

       1. The outermost MIME part of a message is always a cover letter.

       2. If a multipart/alternative or multipart/related MIME part is a
          cover letter, so are all MIME subparts within that multipart.

       3. If any other multipart is a cover letter, the first subpart is
          a cover letter, and the rest are attachments.

       4. All parts contained within an attachment multipart are
          attachments.

     As an example, the following will ban "HTML mail" (including that
     sent with alternative plain text), while allowing HTML files to be
     attached.  HTML coverletter mail attached to non-HTML coverletter
     mail will also be allowed:

          deny !condition = $mime_is_rfc822
               condition = $mime_is_coverletter
               condition = ${if eq{$mime_content_type}{text/html}{1}{0}}
               message = HTML mail is not accepted here

‘$mime_is_multipart’
     This variable has the value 1 (true) when the current part has the
     main type "multipart", for example, "multipart/alternative" or
     "multipart/mixed".  Since multipart entities only serve as
     containers for other parts, you may not want to carry out specific
     actions on them.

‘$mime_is_rfc822’
     This variable has the value 1 (true) if the current part is not a
     part of the checked message itself, but part of an attached
     message.  Attached message decoding is fully recursive.

‘$mime_part_count’
     This variable is a counter that is raised for each processed MIME
     part.  It starts at zero for the very first part (which is usually
     a multipart).  The counter is per-message, so it is reset when
     processing RFC822 attachments (see ‘$mime_is_rfc822’).  The counter
     stays set after ‘acl_smtp_mime’ is complete, so you can use it in
     the DATA ACL to determine the number of MIME parts of a message.
     For non-MIME messages, this variable contains the value -1.


File: spec.info,  Node: Scanning with regular expressions,  Prev: Scanning MIME parts,  Up: Content scanning at ACL time

45.5 Scanning with regular expressions
======================================

You can specify your own custom regular expression matches on the full
body of the message, or on individual MIME parts.

   The ‘regex’ condition takes one or more regular expressions as
arguments and matches them against the full message (when called in the
DATA ACL) or a raw MIME part (when called in the MIME ACL). The ‘regex’
condition matches linewise, with a maximum line length of 32K
characters.  That means you cannot have multiline matches with the
‘regex’ condition.

   The ‘mime_regex’ condition can be called only in the MIME ACL. It
matches up to 32K of decoded content (the whole content at once, not
linewise).  If the part has not been decoded with the ‘decode’ modifier
earlier in the ACL, it is decoded automatically when ‘mime_regex’ is
executed (using default path and filename values).  If the decoded data
is larger than 32K, only the first 32K characters are checked.

   The regular expressions are passed as a colon-separated list.  To
include a literal colon, you must double it.  Since the whole right-hand
side string is expanded before being used, you must also escape dollar
signs and backslashes with more backslashes, or use the ‘\N’ facility to
disable expansion.  Here is a simple example that contains two regular
expressions:

     deny regex = [Mm]ortgage : URGENT BUSINESS PROPOSAL
          message = contains blacklisted regex ($regex_match_string)

   The conditions returns true if any one of the regular expressions
matches.  The ‘$regex_match_string’ expansion variable is then set up
and contains the matching regular expression.  The expansion variables
‘$regex1’ ‘$regex2’ etc are set to any substrings captured by the
regular expression.

   *Warning*: With large messages, these conditions can be fairly
CPU-intensive.


File: spec.info,  Node: Local scan function,  Next: System-wide message filtering,  Prev: Content scanning at ACL time,  Up: Top

46 Adding a local scan function to Exim
***************************************

In these days of email worms, viruses, and ever-increasing spam, some
sites want to apply a lot of checking to messages before accepting them.

   The content scanning extension (chapter *note Content scanning at ACL
time::) has facilities for passing messages to external virus and spam
scanning software.  You can also do a certain amount in Exim itself
through string expansions and the ‘condition’ condition in the ACL that
runs after the SMTP DATA command or the ACL for non-SMTP messages (see
chapter *note Access control lists::), but this has its limitations.

   To allow for further customization to a site's own requirements,
there is the possibility of linking Exim with a private message scanning
function, written in C. If you want to run code that is written in
something other than C, you can of course use a little C stub to call
it.

   The local scan function is run once for every incoming message, at
the point when Exim is just about to accept the message.  It can
therefore be used to control non-SMTP messages from local processes as
well as messages arriving via SMTP.

   Exim applies a timeout to calls of the local scan function, and there
is an option called ‘local_scan_timeout’ for setting it.  The default is
5 minutes.  Zero means "no timeout".  Exim also sets up signal handlers
for SIGSEGV, SIGILL, SIGFPE, and SIGBUS before calling the local scan
function, so that the most common types of crash are caught.  If the
timeout is exceeded or one of those signals is caught, the incoming
message is rejected with a temporary error if it is an SMTP message.
For a non-SMTP message, the message is dropped and Exim ends with a
non-zero code.  The incident is logged on the main and reject logs.

* Menu:

* Building Exim to use a local scan function::
* API for local_scan(): API for local_scan[].
* Configuration options for local_scan(): Configuration options for local_scan[].
* Available Exim variables::
* Structure of header lines::
* Structure of recipient items::
* Available Exim functions::
* More about Exim's memory handling::


File: spec.info,  Node: Building Exim to use a local scan function,  Next: API for local_scan[],  Up: Local scan function

46.1 Building Exim to use a local scan function
===============================================

To make use of the local scan function feature, you must tell Exim where
your function is before building Exim, by setting both HAVE_LOCAL_SCAN
and LOCAL_SCAN_SOURCE in your ‘Local/Makefile’.  A recommended place to
put it is in the ‘Local’ directory, so you might set

     HAVE_LOCAL_SCAN=yes
     LOCAL_SCAN_SOURCE=Local/local_scan.c

   for example.  The function must be called ‘local_scan()’; the source
file(s) for it should first #define LOCAL_SCAN and then #include
"local_scan.h".  It is called by Exim after it has received a message,
when the success return code is about to be sent.  This is after all the
ACLs have been run.  The return code from your function controls whether
the message is actually accepted or not.  There is a commented template
function (that just accepts the message) in the file _src/local_scan.c_.

   If you want to make use of Exim's runtime configuration file to set
options for your ‘local_scan()’ function, you must also set

     LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes

   in ‘Local/Makefile’ (see section *note Configuration options for
local_scan(): Configuration options for local_scan[]. below).


File: spec.info,  Node: API for local_scan[],  Next: Configuration options for local_scan[],  Prev: Building Exim to use a local scan function,  Up: Local scan function

46.2 API for local_scan()
=========================

You must include this line near the start of your code:

     #define LOCAL_SCAN
     #include "local_scan.h"

   This header file defines a number of variables and other values, and
the prototype for the function itself.  Exim is coded to use unsigned
char values almost exclusively, and one of the things this header
defines is a shorthand for ‘unsigned char’ called ‘uschar’.  It also
makes available the following macro definitions, to simplify casting
character strings and pointers to character strings:

     #define CS   (char *)
     #define CCS  (const char *)
     #define CSS  (char **)
     #define US   (unsigned char *)
     #define CUS  (const unsigned char *)
     #define USS  (unsigned char **)

   The function prototype for ‘local_scan()’ is:

     extern int local_scan(int fd, uschar **return_text);

   The arguments are as follows:

   • ‘fd’ is a file descriptor for the file that contains the body of
     the message (the -D file).  The file is open for reading and
     writing, but updating it is not recommended.  *Warning*: You must
     _not_ close this file descriptor.

     The descriptor is positioned at character 26 of the file, which is
     the first character of the body itself, because the first 26
     characters (19 characters before Exim 4.97) are the message id
     followed by ‘-D’ and a newline.  If you rewind the file, you should
     use the macro SPOOL_DATA_START_OFFSET to reset to the start of the
     data, just in case this changes in some future version.

   • ‘return_text’ is an address which you can use to return a pointer
     to a text string at the end of the function.  The value it points
     to on entry is NULL.

   The function must return an ‘int’ value which is one of the following
macros:

‘LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT’
     The message is accepted.  If you pass back a string of text, it is
     saved with the message, and made available in the variable
     ‘$local_scan_data’.  No newlines are permitted (if there are any,
     they are turned into spaces) and the maximum length of text is 1000
     characters.

‘LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT_FREEZE’
     This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT, except that the accepted message
     is queued without immediate delivery, and is frozen.

‘LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT_QUEUE’
     This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT, except that the accepted message
     is queued without immediate delivery.

‘LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT’
     The message is rejected; the returned text is used as an error
     message which is passed back to the sender and which is also
     logged.  Newlines are permitted - they cause a multiline response
     for SMTP rejections, but are converted to ‘\n’ in log lines.  If no
     message is given, "Administrative prohibition" is used.

‘LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT’
     The message is temporarily rejected; the returned text is used as
     an error message as for LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT. If no message is given,
     "Temporary local problem" is used.

‘LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT_NOLOGHDR’
     This behaves as LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT, except that the header of the
     rejected message is not written to the reject log.  It has the
     effect of unsetting the ‘rejected_header’ log selector for just
     this rejection.  If ‘rejected_header’ is already unset (see the
     discussion of the ‘log_selection’ option in section *note Reducing
     or increasing what is logged::), this code is the same as
     LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT.

‘LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT_NOLOGHDR’
     This code is a variation of LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT in the same way
     that LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT_NOLOGHDR is a variation of
     LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT.

   If the message is not being received by interactive SMTP, rejections
are reported by writing to ‘stderr’ or by sending an email, as
configured by the ‘-oe’ command line options.


File: spec.info,  Node: Configuration options for local_scan[],  Next: Available Exim variables,  Prev: API for local_scan[],  Up: Local scan function

46.3 Configuration options for local_scan()
===========================================

It is possible to have option settings in the main configuration file
that set values in static variables in the ‘local_scan()’ module.  If
you want to do this, you must have the line

     LOCAL_SCAN_HAS_OPTIONS=yes

   in your ‘Local/Makefile’ when you build Exim.  (This line is in
‘OS/Makefile-Default’, commented out).  Then, in the ‘local_scan()’
source file, you must define static variables to hold the option values,
and a table to define them.

   The table must be a vector called ‘local_scan_options’, of type
‘optionlist’.  Each entry is a triplet, consisting of a name, an option
type, and a pointer to the variable that holds the value.  The entries
must appear in alphabetical order.  Following ‘local_scan_options’ you
must also define a variable called ‘local_scan_options_count’ that
contains the number of entries in the table.  Here is a short example,
showing two kinds of option:

     static int my_integer_option = 42;
     static uschar *my_string_option = US"a default string";

     optionlist local_scan_options[] = {
       { "my_integer", opt_int,       &my_integer_option },
       { "my_string",  opt_stringptr, &my_string_option }
     };

     int local_scan_options_count =
       sizeof(local_scan_options)/sizeof(optionlist);

   The values of the variables can now be changed from Exim's runtime
configuration file by including a local scan section as in this example:

     begin local_scan
     my_integer = 99
     my_string = some string of text...

   The available types of option data are as follows:

*opt_bool*
     This specifies a boolean (true/false) option.  The address should
     point to a variable of type ‘BOOL’, which will be set to TRUE or
     FALSE, which are macros that are defined as "1" and "0",
     respectively.  If you want to detect whether such a variable has
     been set at all, you can initialize it to TRUE_UNSET. (BOOL
     variables are integers underneath, so can hold more than two
     values.)

*opt_fixed*
     This specifies a fixed point number, such as is used for load
     averages.  The address should point to a variable of type ‘int’.
     The value is stored multiplied by 1000, so, for example, 1.4142 is
     truncated and stored as 1414.

*opt_int*
     This specifies an integer; the address should point to a variable
     of type ‘int’.  The value may be specified in any of the integer
     formats accepted by Exim.

*opt_mkint*
     This is the same as ‘opt_int’, except that when such a value is
     output in a ‘-bP’ listing, if it is an exact number of kilobytes or
     megabytes, it is printed with the suffix K or M.

*opt_octint*
     This also specifies an integer, but the value is always interpreted
     as an octal integer, whether or not it starts with the digit zero,
     and it is always output in octal.

*opt_stringptr*
     This specifies a string value; the address must be a pointer to a
     variable that points to a string (for example, of type ‘uschar *’).

*opt_time*
     This specifies a time interval value.  The address must point to a
     variable of type ‘int’.  The value that is placed there is a number
     of seconds.

   If the ‘-bP’ command line option is followed by ‘local_scan’, Exim
prints out the values of all the ‘local_scan()’ options.


File: spec.info,  Node: Available Exim variables,  Next: Structure of header lines,  Prev: Configuration options for local_scan[],  Up: Local scan function

46.4 Available Exim variables
=============================

The header ‘local_scan.h’ gives you access to a number of C variables.
These are the only ones that are guaranteed to be maintained from
release to release.  Note, however, that you can obtain the value of any
Exim expansion variable, including ‘$recipients’, by calling
_expand_string()_.  The exported C variables are as follows:

*int body_linecount*
     This variable contains the number of lines in the message's body.
     It is not valid if the ‘spool_wireformat’ option is used.

*int body_zerocount*
     This variable contains the number of binary zero bytes in the
     message's body.  It is not valid if the ‘spool_wireformat’ option
     is used.

*uschar *expand_string_message*
     After a failing call to _expand_string()_ (returned value NULL),
     the variable ‘expand_string_message’ contains the error message,
     zero-terminated.

*header_line *header_list*
     A pointer to a chain of header lines.  The ‘header_line’ structure
     is discussed below.

*header_line *header_last*
     A pointer to the last of the header lines.

*const uschar *headers_charset*
     The value of the ‘headers_charset’ configuration option.

*BOOL host_checking*
     This variable is TRUE during a host checking session that is
     initiated by the ‘-bh’ command line option.

*uschar *interface_address*
     The IP address of the interface that received the message, as a
     string.  This is NULL for locally submitted messages.

*int interface_port*
     The port on which this message was received.  When testing with the
     ‘-bh’ command line option, the value of this variable is -1 unless
     a port has been specified via the ‘-oMi’ option.

*uschar *message_id*
     This variable contains Exim's message id for the incoming message
     (the value of ‘$message_exim_id’) as a zero-terminated string.

*uschar *received_protocol*
     The name of the protocol by which the message was received.

*int recipients_count*
     The number of accepted recipients.

*recipient_item *recipients_list*
     The list of accepted recipients, held in a vector of length
     ‘recipients_count’.  The ‘recipient_item’ structure is discussed
     below.  You can add additional recipients by calling
     _receive_add_recipient()_ (see below).  You can delete recipients
     by removing them from the vector and adjusting the value in
     ‘recipients_count’.  In particular, by setting ‘recipients_count’
     to zero you remove all recipients.  If you then return the value
     ‘LOCAL_SCAN_ACCEPT’, the message is accepted, but immediately
     blackholed.  To replace the recipients, you can set
     ‘recipients_count’ to zero and then call _receive_add_recipient()_
     as often as needed.

*uschar *sender_address*
     The envelope sender address.  For bounce messages this is the empty
     string.

*uschar *sender_host_address*
     The IP address of the sending host, as a string.  This is NULL for
     locally-submitted messages.

*uschar *sender_host_authenticated*
     The name of the authentication mechanism that was used, or NULL if
     the message was not received over an authenticated SMTP connection.

*uschar *sender_host_name*
     The name of the sending host, if known.

*int sender_host_port*
     The port on the sending host.

*BOOL smtp_input*
     This variable is TRUE for all SMTP input, including BSMTP.

*BOOL smtp_batched_input*
     This variable is TRUE for BSMTP input.

*int store_pool*
     The contents of this variable control which pool of memory is used
     for new requests.  See section *note More about Exim's memory
     handling:: for details.


File: spec.info,  Node: Structure of header lines,  Next: Structure of recipient items,  Prev: Available Exim variables,  Up: Local scan function

46.5 Structure of header lines
==============================

The ‘header_line’ structure contains the members listed below.  You can
add additional header lines by calling the _header_add()_ function (see
below).  You can cause header lines to be ignored (deleted) by setting
their type to *.

*struct header_line *next*
     A pointer to the next header line, or NULL for the last line.

*int type*
     A code identifying certain headers that Exim recognizes.  The codes
     are printing characters, and are documented in chapter *note Format
     of spool files:: of this manual.  Notice in particular that any
     header line whose type is * is not transmitted with the message.
     This flagging is used for header lines that have been rewritten, or
     are to be removed (for example, _Envelope-sender:_ header lines.)
     Effectively, * means "deleted".

*int slen*
     The number of characters in the header line, including the
     terminating and any internal newlines.

*uschar *text*
     A pointer to the text of the header.  It always ends with a
     newline, followed by a zero byte.  Internal newlines are preserved.


File: spec.info,  Node: Structure of recipient items,  Next: Available Exim functions,  Prev: Structure of header lines,  Up: Local scan function

46.6 Structure of recipient items
=================================

The ‘recipient_item’ structure contains these members:

*uschar *address*
     This is a pointer to the recipient address as it was received.

*int pno*
     This is used in later Exim processing when top level addresses are
     created by the ‘one_time’ option.  It is not relevant at the time
     ‘local_scan()’ is run and must always contain -1 at this stage.

*uschar *errors_to*
     If this value is not NULL, bounce messages caused by failing to
     deliver to the recipient are sent to the address it contains.  In
     other words, it overrides the envelope sender for this one
     recipient.  (Compare the ‘errors_to’ generic router option.)  If a
     ‘local_scan()’ function sets an ‘errors_to’ field to an unqualified
     address, Exim qualifies it using the domain from
     ‘qualify_recipient’.  When ‘local_scan()’ is called, the
     ‘errors_to’ field is NULL for all recipients.


File: spec.info,  Node: Available Exim functions,  Next: More about Exim's memory handling,  Prev: Structure of recipient items,  Up: Local scan function

46.7 Available Exim functions
=============================

The header ‘local_scan.h’ gives you access to a number of Exim
functions.  These are the only ones that are guaranteed to be maintained
from release to release:

*pid_t child_open(uschar **argv, uschar **envp, int newumask, int *infdptr, int *outfdptr,   BOOL make_leader)*
     This function creates a child process that runs the command
     specified by ‘argv’.  The environment for the process is specified
     by ‘envp’, which can be NULL if no environment variables are to be
     passed.  A new umask is supplied for the process in ‘newumask’.

     Pipes to the standard input and output of the new process are set
     up and returned to the caller via the ‘infdptr’ and ‘outfdptr’
     arguments.  The standard error is cloned to the standard output.
     If there are any file descriptors "in the way" in the new process,
     they are closed.  If the final argument is TRUE, the new process is
     made into a process group leader.

     The function returns the pid of the new process, or -1 if things go
     wrong.

*int child_close(pid_t pid, int timeout)*
     This function waits for a child process to terminate, or for a
     timeout (in seconds) to expire.  A timeout value of zero means wait
     as long as it takes.  The return value is as follows:

        • >= 0

          The process terminated by a normal exit and the value is the
          process ending status.

        • < 0 and > -256

          The process was terminated by a signal and the value is the
          negation of the signal number.

        • -256

          The process timed out.

        • -257

          The was some other error in wait(); ‘errno’ is still set.

*pid_t child_open_exim(int *fd)*
     This function provide you with a means of submitting a new message
     to Exim.  (Of course, you can also call ‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’
     yourself if you want, but this packages it all up for you.)  The
     function creates a pipe, forks a subprocess that is running

          exim -t -oem -oi -f <>

     and returns to you (via the ‘int *’ argument) a file descriptor for
     the pipe that is connected to the standard input.  The yield of the
     function is the PID of the subprocess.  You can then write a
     message to the file descriptor, with recipients in _To:_, _Cc:_,
     and/or _Bcc:_ header lines.

     When you have finished, call _child_close()_ to wait for the
     process to finish and to collect its ending status.  A timeout
     value of zero is usually fine in this circumstance.  Unless you
     have made a mistake with the recipient addresses, you should get a
     return code of zero.

*pid_t child_open_exim2(int *fd, uschar *sender, uschar *sender_authentication)*
     This function is a more sophisticated version of _child_open()_.
     The command that it runs is:

          exim -t -oem -oi -f sender -oMas sender_authentication

     The third argument may be NULL, in which case the ‘-oMas’ option is
     omitted.

*void debug_enable_channel(const uschar *)*
     This function turns on debug output from a given debug channel,
     given by name.  Two channels are available: "v" and "local_scan".

        • The "v" channel is enabled when ‘-v’ was present on the
          command line.  This is a testing option that is not privileged
          - any caller may set it.  All the other channels can be
          enabled only by admin users.

        • The "local_scan" channel is provided for use by
          ‘local_scan()’; it is set by the ‘+local_scan’ debug selector.
          It is not included in the default set of debugging bits.

*void debug_printf(char *, ...)*
     This is Exim's debugging function, with arguments as for
     _printf()_.  The output is written to the standard error stream.
     If no debugging is selected, calls to _debug_printf()_ have no
     effect.  Normally, you should make calls

     conditional on the ‘local_scan’ debug selector by coding like this:

          if (is_debug(US"local_scan"))
            debug_printf("xxx", ...);

*uschar *expand_string(uschar *string)*
     This is an interface to Exim's string expansion code.  The return
     value is the expanded string, or NULL if there was an expansion
     failure.  The C variable ‘expand_string_message’ contains an error
     message after an expansion failure.  If expansion does not change
     the string, the return value is the pointer to the input string.
     Otherwise, the return value points to a new block of memory that
     was obtained by a call to _store_get()_.  See section *note More
     about Exim's memory handling:: below for a discussion of memory
     handling.

*void header_add(int type, char *format, ...)*
     This function allows you to an add additional header line at the
     end of the existing ones.  The first argument is the type, and
     should normally be a space character.  The second argument is a
     format string and any number of substitution arguments as for
     ‘sprintf()’.  You may include internal newlines if you want, and
     you must ensure that the string ends with a newline.

*void header_add_at_position(BOOL after, uschar *name, BOOL topnot, int type, char *format,   ...)*
     This function adds a new header line at a specified point in the
     header chain.  The header itself is specified as for
     _header_add()_.

     If ‘name’ is NULL, the new header is added at the end of the chain
     if ‘after’ is true, or at the start if ‘after’ is false.  If ‘name’
     is not NULL, the header lines are searched for the first
     non-deleted header that matches the name.  If one is found, the new
     header is added before it if ‘after’ is false.  If ‘after’ is true,
     the new header is added after the found header and any adjacent
     subsequent ones with the same name (even if marked "deleted").  If
     no matching non-deleted header is found, the ‘topnot’ option
     controls where the header is added.  If it is true, addition is at
     the top; otherwise at the bottom.  Thus, to add a header after all
     the _Received:_ headers, or at the top if there are no _Received:_
     headers, you could use

          header_add_at_position(TRUE, US"Received", TRUE,
            ' ', "X-xxx: ...");

     Normally, there is always at least one non-deleted _Received:_
     header, but there may not be if ‘received_header_text’ expands to
     an empty string.

*void header_remove(int occurrence, uschar *name)*
     This function removes header lines.  If ‘occurrence’ is zero or
     negative, all occurrences of the header are removed.  If occurrence
     is greater than zero, that particular instance of the header is
     removed.  If no header(s) can be found that match the
     specification, the function does nothing.

*BOOL header_testname(header_line *hdr, uschar *name, int length, BOOL notdel)*
     This function tests whether the given header has the given name.
     It is not just a string comparison, because white space is
     permitted between the name and the colon.  If the ‘notdel’ argument
     is true, a false return is forced for all "deleted" headers;
     otherwise they are not treated specially.  For example:

          if (header_testname(h, US"X-Spam", 6, TRUE)) ...

*uschar *lss_b64encode(uschar *cleartext, int length)*
     This function base64-encodes a string, which is passed by address
     and length.  The text may contain bytes of any value, including
     zero.  The result is passed back in dynamic memory that is obtained
     by calling _store_get()_.  It is zero-terminated.

*BOOL is_debug(uschar *channel)*
     This function tests whether a given debug channel is enabled, by
     name.

*int lss_b64decode(uschar *codetext, uschar **cleartext)*
     This function decodes a base64-encoded string.  Its arguments are a
     zero-terminated base64-encoded string and the address of a variable
     that is set to point to the result, which is in dynamic memory.
     The length of the decoded string is the yield of the function.  If
     the input is invalid base64 data, the yield is -1.  A zero byte is
     added to the end of the output string to make it easy to interpret
     as a C string (assuming it contains no zeros of its own).  The
     added zero byte is not included in the returned count.

*int lss_match_domain(uschar *domain, uschar *list)*
     This function checks for a match in a domain list.  Domains are
     always matched caselessly.  The return value is one of the
     following:

         ‘OK’    match succeeded
         ‘FAIL’  match failed
         ‘DEFER’ match deferred

     DEFER is usually caused by some kind of lookup defer, such as the
     inability to contact a database.

*int lss_match_local_part(uschar *localpart, uschar *list, BOOL caseless)*
     This function checks for a match in a local part list.  The third
     argument controls case-sensitivity.  The return values are as for
     _lss_match_domain()_.

*int lss_match_address(uschar *address, uschar *list, BOOL caseless)*
     This function checks for a match in an address list.  The third
     argument controls the case-sensitivity of the local part match.
     The domain is always matched caselessly.  The return values are as
     for _lss_match_domain()_.

*int lss_match_host(uschar *host_name, uschar *host_address, uschar *list)*
     This function checks for a match in a host list.  The most common
     usage is expected to be

          lss_match_host(sender_host_name, sender_host_address, ...)

     An empty address field matches an empty item in the host list.  If
     the host name is NULL, the name corresponding to
     ‘$sender_host_address’ is automatically looked up if a host name is
     required to match an item in the list.  The return values are as
     for _lss_match_domain()_, but in addition, _lss_match_host()_
     returns ERROR in the case when it had to look up a host name, but
     the lookup failed.

*void log_write(unsigned int selector, int which, char *format, ...)*
     This function writes to Exim's log files.  The first argument
     should be zero (it is concerned with ‘log_selector’).  The second
     argument can be ‘LOG_MAIN’ or ‘LOG_REJECT’ or ‘LOG_PANIC’ or the
     inclusive "or" of any combination of them.  It specifies to which
     log or logs the message is written.  The remaining arguments are a
     format and relevant insertion arguments.  The string should not
     contain any newlines, not even at the end.

*void receive_add_recipient(uschar *address, int pno)*
     This function adds an additional recipient to the message.  The
     first argument is the recipient address.  If it is unqualified (has
     no domain), it is qualified with the ‘qualify_recipient’ domain.
     The second argument must always be -1.

     This function does not allow you to specify a private ‘errors_to’
     address (as described with the structure of ‘recipient_item’
     above), because it pre-dates the addition of that field to the
     structure.  However, it is easy to add such a value afterwards.
     For example:

           receive_add_recipient(US"monitor@mydom.example", -1);
           recipients_list[recipients_count-1].errors_to =
             US"postmaster@mydom.example";

*BOOL receive_remove_recipient(uschar *recipient)*
     This is a convenience function to remove a named recipient from the
     list of recipients.  It returns true if a recipient was removed,
     and false if no matching recipient could be found.  The argument
     must be a complete email address.

*uschar rfc2047_decode(uschar *string, BOOL lencheck, uschar *target, int zeroval, int *lenptr,   uschar **error)*
     This function decodes strings that are encoded according to *RFC
     2047 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)*.  Typically
     these are the contents of header lines.  First, each "encoded word"
     is decoded from the Q or B encoding into a byte-string.  Then, if
     provided with the name of a charset encoding, and if the ‘iconv()’
     function is available, an attempt is made to translate the result
     to the named character set.  If this fails, the binary string is
     returned with an error message.

     The first argument is the string to be decoded.  If ‘lencheck’ is
     TRUE, the maximum MIME word length is enforced.  The third argument
     is the target encoding, or NULL if no translation is wanted.

     If a binary zero is encountered in the decoded string, it is
     replaced by the contents of the ‘zeroval’ argument.  For use with
     Exim headers, the value must not be 0 because header lines are
     handled as zero-terminated strings.

     The function returns the result of processing the string,
     zero-terminated; if ‘lenptr’ is not NULL, the length of the result
     is set in the variable to which it points.  When ‘zeroval’ is 0,
     ‘lenptr’ should not be NULL.

     If an error is encountered, the function returns NULL and uses the
     ‘error’ argument to return an error message.  The variable pointed
     to by ‘error’ is set to NULL if there is no error; it may be set
     non-NULL even when the function returns a non-NULL value if
     decoding was successful, but there was a problem with translation.

*int smtp_fflush(BOOL)*
     This function is used in conjunction with _smtp_printf()_, as
     described below.

*void smtp_printf(char *,BOOL, ...)*
     The arguments of this function are almost like ‘printf()’; it
     writes to the SMTP output stream.  You should use this function
     only when there is an SMTP output stream, that is, when the
     incoming message is being received via interactive SMTP. This is
     the case when ‘smtp_input’ is TRUE and ‘smtp_batched_input’ is
     FALSE. If you want to test for an incoming message from another
     host (as opposed to a local process that used the ‘-bs’ command
     line option), you can test the value of ‘sender_host_address’,
     which is non-NULL when a remote host is involved.

     If an SMTP TLS connection is established, _smtp_printf()_ uses the
     TLS output function, so it can be used for all forms of SMTP
     connection.

     The second argument is used to request that the data be buffered
     (when TRUE) or flushed (along with any previously buffered, when
     FALSE). This is advisory only, but likely to save on system-calls
     and packets sent when a sequence of calls to the function are made.

     The argument was added in Exim version 4.90 - changing the API/ABI.
     Nobody noticed until 4.93 was imminent, at which point the ABI
     version number was incremented.

     Strings that are written by _smtp_printf()_ from within
     ‘local_scan()’ must start with an appropriate response code: 550 if
     you are going to return LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT, 451 if you are going to
     return LOCAL_SCAN_TEMPREJECT, and 250 otherwise.  Because you are
     writing the initial lines of a multi-line response, the code must
     be followed by a hyphen to indicate that the line is not the final
     response line.  You must also ensure that the lines you write
     terminate with CRLF. For example:

          smtp_printf("550-this is some extra info\r\n");
          return LOCAL_SCAN_REJECT;

     Note that you can also create multi-line responses by including
     newlines in the data returned via the ‘return_text’ argument.  The
     added value of using _smtp_printf()_ is that, for instance, you
     could introduce delays between multiple output lines.

     The _smtp_printf()_ function does not return any error indication,
     because it does not guarantee a flush of pending output, and
     therefore does not test the state of the stream.  (In the main code
     of Exim, flushing and error detection is done when Exim is ready
     for the next SMTP input command.)  If you want to flush the output
     and check for an error (for example, the dropping of a TCP/IP
     connection), you can call _smtp_fflush()_, which has one argument
     saying whether to also uncork the socket layer (it is always safe
     to do so).  It flushes the output stream, and returns a non-zero
     value if there is an error.

*void *store_get(int,BOOL)*
     This function accesses Exim's internal store (memory) manager.  It
     gets a new chunk of memory whose size is given by the first
     argument.  The second argument should be given as TRUE if the
     memory will be used for data possibly coming from an attacker (eg.
     the message content), FALSE if it is locally-sourced.  Exim bombs
     out if it ever runs out of memory.  See the next section for a
     discussion of memory handling.

*void *store_get_perm(int,BOOL)*
     This function is like _store_get()_, but it always gets memory from
     the permanent pool.  See the next section for a discussion of
     memory handling.

*uschar *string_copy(uschar *string)*
     See below.

*uschar *string_copyn(uschar *string, int length)*
     See below.

*uschar *string_sprintf(char *format, ...)*
     These three functions create strings using Exim's dynamic memory
     facilities.  The first makes a copy of an entire string.  The
     second copies up to a maximum number of characters, indicated by
     the second argument.  The third uses a format and insertion
     arguments to create a new string.  In each case, the result is a
     pointer to a new string in the current memory pool.  See the next
     section for more discussion.


File: spec.info,  Node: More about Exim's memory handling,  Prev: Available Exim functions,  Up: Local scan function

46.8 More about Exim's memory handling
======================================

No function is provided for freeing memory, because that is never
needed.  The dynamic memory that Exim uses when receiving a message is
automatically recycled if another message is received by the same
process (this applies only to incoming SMTP connections - other input
methods can supply only one message at a time).  After receiving the
last message, a reception process terminates.

   Because it is recycled, the normal dynamic memory cannot be used for
holding data that must be preserved over a number of incoming messages
on the same SMTP connection.  However, Exim in fact uses two pools of
dynamic memory; the second one is not recycled, and can be used for this
purpose.

   If you want to allocate memory that remains available for subsequent
messages in the same SMTP connection, you should set

     store_pool = POOL_PERM

   before calling the function that does the allocation.  There is no
need to restore the value if you do not need to; however, if you do want
to revert to the normal pool, you can either restore the previous value
of ‘store_pool’ or set it explicitly to POOL_MAIN.

   The pool setting applies to all functions that get dynamic memory,
including _expand_string()_, _store_get()_, and the _string_xxx()_
functions.  There is also a convenience function called
_store_get_perm()_ that gets a block of memory from the permanent pool
while preserving the value of ‘store_pool’.


File: spec.info,  Node: System-wide message filtering,  Next: Message processing,  Prev: Local scan function,  Up: Top

47 System-wide message filtering
********************************

The previous chapters (on ACLs and the local scan function) describe
checks that can be applied to messages before they are accepted by a
host.  There is also a mechanism for checking messages once they have
been received, but before they are delivered.  This is called the
_system filter_.

   The system filter operates in a similar manner to users' filter
files, but it is run just once per message (however many recipients the
message has).  It should not normally be used as a substitute for
routing, because ‘deliver’ commands in a system router provide new
envelope recipient addresses.  The system filter must be an Exim filter.
It cannot be a Sieve filter.

   The system filter is run at the start of a delivery attempt, before
any routing is done.  If a message fails to be completely delivered at
the first attempt, the system filter is run again at the start of every
retry.  If you want your filter to do something only once per message,
you can make use of the ‘first_delivery’ condition in an ‘if’ command in
the filter to prevent it happening on retries.

   *Warning*: Because the system filter runs just once, variables that
are specific to individual recipient addresses, such as ‘$local_part’
and ‘$domain’, are not set, and the "personal" condition is not
meaningful.  If you want to run a centrally-specified filter for each
recipient address independently, you can do so by setting up a suitable
‘redirect’ router, as described in section *note Per-address filtering::
below.

* Menu:

* Specifying a system filter::
* Testing a system filter::
* Contents of a system filter::
* Additional variable for system filters::
* Defer, freeze, and fail commands for system filters: Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
* Adding and removing headers in a system filter::
* Setting an errors address in a system filter::
* Per-address filtering::


File: spec.info,  Node: Specifying a system filter,  Next: Testing a system filter,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.1 Specifying a system filter
===============================

The name of the file that contains the system filter must be specified
by setting ‘system_filter’.  If you want the filter to run under a uid
and gid other than root, you must also set ‘system_filter_user’ and
‘system_filter_group’ as appropriate.  For example:

     system_filter = /etc/mail/exim.filter
     system_filter_user = exim

   If a system filter generates any deliveries directly to files or
pipes (via the ‘save’ or ‘pipe’ commands), transports to handle these
deliveries must be specified by setting ‘system_filter_file_transport’
and ‘system_filter_pipe_transport’, respectively.  Similarly,
‘system_filter_reply_transport’ must be set to handle any messages
generated by the ‘reply’ command.


File: spec.info,  Node: Testing a system filter,  Next: Contents of a system filter,  Prev: Specifying a system filter,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.2 Testing a system filter
============================

You can run simple tests of a system filter in the same way as for a
user filter, but you should use ‘-bF’ rather than ‘-bf’, so that
features that are permitted only in system filters are recognized.

   If you want to test the combined effect of a system filter and a user
filter, you can use both ‘-bF’ and ‘-bf’ on the same command line.


File: spec.info,  Node: Contents of a system filter,  Next: Additional variable for system filters,  Prev: Testing a system filter,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.3 Contents of a system filter
================================

The language used to specify system filters is the same as for users'
filter files.  It is described in the separate end-user document _Exim's
interface to mail filtering_.  However, there are some additional
features that are available only in system filters; these are described
in subsequent sections.  If they are encountered in a user's filter file
or when testing with ‘-bf’, they cause errors.

   There are two special conditions which, though available in users'
filter files, are designed for use in system filters.  The condition
‘first_delivery’ is true only for the first attempt at delivering a
message, and ‘manually_thawed’ is true only if the message has been
frozen, and subsequently thawed by an admin user.  An explicit forced
delivery counts as a manual thaw, but thawing as a result of the
‘auto_thaw’ setting does not.

   *Warning*: If a system filter uses the ‘first_delivery’ condition to
specify an "unseen" (non-significant) delivery, and that delivery does
not succeed, it will not be tried again.  If you want Exim to retry an
unseen delivery until it succeeds, you should arrange to set it up every
time the filter runs.

   When a system filter finishes running, the values of the variables
‘$n0’ - ‘$n9’ are copied into ‘$sn0’ - ‘$sn9’ and are thereby made
available to users' filter files.  Thus a system filter can, for
example, set up "scores" to which users' filter files can refer.


File: spec.info,  Node: Additional variable for system filters,  Next: Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters,  Prev: Contents of a system filter,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.4 Additional variable for system filters
===========================================

The expansion variable ‘$recipients’, containing a list of all the
recipients of the message (separated by commas and white space), is
available in system filters.  It is not available in users' filters for
privacy reasons.


File: spec.info,  Node: Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters,  Next: Adding and removing headers in a system filter,  Prev: Additional variable for system filters,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.5 Defer, freeze, and fail commands for system filters
========================================================

There are three extra commands (‘defer’, ‘freeze’ and ‘fail’) which are
always available in system filters, but are not normally enabled in
users' filters.  (See the ‘allow_defer’, ‘allow_freeze’ and ‘allow_fail’
options for the ‘redirect’ router.)  These commands can optionally be
followed by the word ‘text’ and a string containing an error message,
for example:

     fail text "this message looks like spam to me"

   The keyword ‘text’ is optional if the next character is a double
quote.

   The ‘defer’ command defers delivery of the original recipients of the
message.  The ‘fail’ command causes all the original recipients to be
failed, and a bounce message to be created.  The ‘freeze’ command
suspends all delivery attempts for the original recipients.  In all
cases, any new deliveries that are specified by the filter are attempted
as normal after the filter has run.

   The ‘freeze’ command is ignored if the message has been manually
unfrozen and not manually frozen since.  This means that automatic
freezing by a system filter can be used as a way of checking out
suspicious messages.  If a message is found to be all right, manually
unfreezing it allows it to be delivered.

   The text given with a fail command is used as part of the bounce
message as well as being written to the log.  If the message is quite
long, this can fill up a lot of log space when such failures are common.
To reduce the size of the log message, Exim interprets the text in a
special way if it starts with the two characters ‘<<’ and contains ‘>>’
later.  The text between these two strings is written to the log, and
the rest of the text is used in the bounce message.  For example:

     fail "<<filter test 1>>Your message is rejected \
          because it contains attachments that we are \
          not prepared to receive."

   Take great care with the ‘fail’ command when basing the decision to
fail on the contents of the message, because the bounce message will of
course include the contents of the original message and will therefore
trigger the ‘fail’ command again (causing a mail loop) unless steps are
taken to prevent this.  Testing the ‘error_message’ condition is one way
to prevent this.  You could use, for example

     if $message_body contains "this is spam" and not error_message
     then fail text "spam is not wanted here" endif

   though of course that might let through unwanted bounce messages.
The alternative is clever checking of the body and/or headers to detect
bounces generated by the filter.

   The interpretation of a system filter file ceases after a ‘defer’,
‘freeze’, or ‘fail’ command is obeyed.  However, any deliveries that
were set up earlier in the filter file are honoured, so you can use a
sequence such as

     mail ...
     freeze

   to send a specified message when the system filter is freezing (or
deferring or failing) a message.  The normal deliveries for the message
do not, of course, take place.


File: spec.info,  Node: Adding and removing headers in a system filter,  Next: Setting an errors address in a system filter,  Prev: Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.6 Adding and removing headers in a system filter
===================================================

Two filter commands that are available only in system filters are:

     headers add <string>
     headers remove <string>

   The argument for the ‘headers add’ is a string that is expanded and
then added to the end of the message's headers.  It is the
responsibility of the filter maintainer to make sure it conforms to *RFC
2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* syntax.  Leading
white space is ignored, and if the string is otherwise empty, or if the
expansion is forced to fail, the command has no effect.

   You can use "\n" within the string, followed by white space, to
specify continued header lines.  More than one header may be added in
one command by including "\n" within the string without any following
white space.  For example:

     headers add "X-header-1: ....\n  \
                  continuation of X-header-1 ...\n\
                  X-header-2: ...."

   Note that the header line continuation white space after the first
newline must be placed before the backslash that continues the input
string, because white space after input continuations is ignored.

   The argument for ‘headers remove’ is a colon-separated list of header
names.  This command applies only to those headers that are stored with
the message; those that are added at delivery time (such as
_Envelope-To:_ and _Return-Path:_) cannot be removed by this means.  If
there is more than one header with the same name, they are all removed.

   The ‘headers’ command in a system filter makes an immediate change to
the set of header lines that was received with the message (with
possible additions from ACL processing).  Subsequent commands in the
system filter operate on the modified set, which also forms the basis
for subsequent message delivery.  Unless further modified during routing
or transporting, this set of headers is used for all recipients of the
message.

   During routing and transporting, the variables that refer to the
contents of header lines refer only to those lines that are in this set.
Thus, header lines that are added by a system filter are visible to
users' filter files and to all routers and transports.  This contrasts
with the manipulation of header lines by routers and transports, which
is not immediate, but which instead is saved up until the message is
actually being written (see section *note Adding and removing header
lines in routers and transports::).

   If the message is not delivered at the first attempt, header lines
that were added by the system filter are stored with the message, and so
are still present at the next delivery attempt.  Header lines that were
removed are still present, but marked "deleted" so that they are not
transported with the message.  For this reason, it is usual to make the
‘headers’ command conditional on ‘first_delivery’ so that the set of
header lines is not modified more than once.

   Because header modification in a system filter acts immediately, you
have to use an indirect approach if you want to modify the contents of a
header line.  For example:

     headers add "Old-Subject: $h_subject:"
     headers remove "Subject"
     headers add "Subject: new subject (was: $h_old-subject:)"
     headers remove "Old-Subject"


File: spec.info,  Node: Setting an errors address in a system filter,  Next: Per-address filtering,  Prev: Adding and removing headers in a system filter,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.7 Setting an errors address in a system filter
=================================================

In a system filter, if a ‘deliver’ command is followed by

     errors_to <some address>

   in order to change the envelope sender (and hence the error
reporting) for that delivery, any address may be specified.  (In a user
filter, only the current user's address can be set.)  For example, if
some mail is being monitored, you might use

     unseen deliver monitor@spying.example errors_to root@local.example

   to take a copy which would not be sent back to the normal error
reporting address if its delivery failed.


File: spec.info,  Node: Per-address filtering,  Prev: Setting an errors address in a system filter,  Up: System-wide message filtering

47.8 Per-address filtering
==========================

In contrast to the system filter, which is run just once per message for
each delivery attempt, it is also possible to set up a system-wide
filtering operation that runs once for each recipient address.  In this
case, variables such as ‘$local_part_data’ and ‘$domain_data’ can be
used, and indeed, the choice of filter file could be made dependent on
them.  This is an example of a router which implements such a filter:

     central_filter:
       check_local_user
       driver = redirect
       domains = +local_domains
       file = /central/filters/$local_part_data
       no_verify
       allow_filter
       allow_freeze

   The filter is run in a separate process under its own uid.
Therefore, either ‘check_local_user’ must be set (as above), in which
case the filter is run as the local user, or the ‘user’ option must be
used to specify which user to use.  If both are set, ‘user’ overrides.

   Care should be taken to ensure that none of the commands in the
filter file specify a significant delivery if the message is to go on to
be delivered to its intended recipient.  The router will not then claim
to have dealt with the address, so it will be passed on to subsequent
routers to be delivered in the normal way.


File: spec.info,  Node: Message processing,  Next: SMTP processing,  Prev: System-wide message filtering,  Up: Top

48 Message processing
*********************

Exim performs various transformations on the sender and recipient
addresses of all messages that it handles, and also on the messages'
header lines.  Some of these are optional and configurable, while others
always take place.  All of this processing, except rewriting as a result
of routing, and the addition or removal of header lines while
delivering, happens when a message is received, before it is placed on
Exim's queue.

   Some of the automatic processing takes place by default only for
"locally-originated" messages.  This adjective is used to describe
messages that are not received over TCP/IP, but instead are passed to an
Exim process on its standard input.  This includes the interactive
"local SMTP" case that is set up by the ‘-bs’ command line option.

   *Note*: Messages received over TCP/IP on the loopback interface
(127.0.0.1 or ::1) are not considered to be locally-originated.  Exim
does not treat the loopback interface specially in any way.

   If you want the loopback interface to be treated specially, you must
ensure that there are appropriate entries in your ACLs.

* Menu:

* Submission mode for non-local messages::
* Line endings::
* Unqualified addresses::
* The UUCP From line::
* Header lines::
* Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports::
* Constructed addresses::
* Case of local parts::
* Dots in local parts::
* Rewriting addresses::


File: spec.info,  Node: Submission mode for non-local messages,  Next: Line endings,  Up: Message processing

48.1 Submission mode for non-local messages
===========================================

Processing that happens automatically for locally-originated messages
(unless ‘suppress_local_fixups’ is set) can also be requested for
messages that are received over TCP/IP. The term "submission mode" is
used to describe this state.  Submission mode is set by the modifier

     control = submission

   in a MAIL, RCPT, or pre-data ACL for an incoming message (see
sections *note ACL modifiers:: and *note Use of the control modifier::).
This makes Exim treat the message as a local submission, and is normally
used when the source of the message is known to be an MUA running on a
client host (as opposed to an MTA). For example, to set submission mode
for messages originating on the IPv4 loopback interface, you could
include the following in the MAIL ACL:

     warn  hosts = 127.0.0.1
           control = submission

   There are some options that can be used when setting submission mode.
A slash is used to separate options.  For example:

     control = submission/sender_retain

   Specifying ‘sender_retain’ has the effect of setting
‘local_sender_retain’ true and ‘local_from_check’ false for the current
incoming message.  The first of these allows an existing _Sender:_
header in the message to remain, and the second suppresses the check to
ensure that _From:_ matches the authenticated sender.  With this
setting, Exim still fixes up messages by adding _Date:_ and
_Message-ID:_ header lines if they are missing, but makes no attempt to
check sender authenticity in header lines.

   When ‘sender_retain’ is not set, a submission mode setting may
specify a domain to be used when generating a _From:_ or _Sender:_
header line.  For example:

     control = submission/domain=some.domain

   The domain may be empty.  How this value is used is described in
sections *note From:: From;. and *note Sender:: Sender;.  There is also
a ‘name’ option that allows you to specify the user's full name for
inclusion in a created _Sender:_ or _From:_ header line.  For example:

     accept authenticated = *
            control = submission/domain=wonderland.example/\
                                 name=${lookup {$authenticated_id} \
                                        lsearch {/etc/exim/namelist}}

   Because the name may contain any characters, including slashes, the
‘name’ option must be given last.  The remainder of the string is used
as the name.  For the example above, if ‘/etc/exim/namelist’ contains:

     bigegg:  Humpty Dumpty

   then when the sender has authenticated as _bigegg_, the generated
_Sender:_ line would be:

     Sender: Humpty Dumpty <bigegg@wonderland.example>

   By default, submission mode forces the return path to the same
address as is used to create the _Sender:_ header.  However, if
‘sender_retain’ is specified, the return path is also left unchanged.

   *Note*: The changes caused by submission mode take effect after the
predata ACL. This means that any sender checks performed before the
fix-ups use the untrusted sender address specified by the user, not the
trusted sender address specified by submission mode.  Although this
might be slightly unexpected, it does mean that you can configure ACL
checks to spot that a user is trying to spoof another's address.


File: spec.info,  Node: Line endings,  Next: Unqualified addresses,  Prev: Submission mode for non-local messages,  Up: Message processing

48.2 Line endings
=================

*RFC 2821 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2821)* specifies
that CRLF (two characters: carriage-return, followed by linefeed) is the
line ending for messages transmitted over the Internet using SMTP over
TCP/IP. However, within individual operating systems, different
conventions are used.  For example, Unix-like systems use just LF, but
others use CRLF or just CR.

   Exim was designed for Unix-like systems, and internally, it stores
messages using the system's convention of a single LF as a line
terminator.  When receiving a message, all line endings are translated
to this standard format.  Originally, it was thought that programs that
passed messages directly to an MTA within an operating system would use
that system's convention.  Experience has shown that this is not the
case; for example, there are Unix applications that use CRLF in this
circumstance.  For this reason, and for compatibility with other MTAs,
the way Exim handles line endings for all messages is now as follows:

   • CR is treated as a line ending; if it is immediately followed by
     LF, the LF is ignored.

   • The sequence "CR, dot, CR" does not terminate an incoming SMTP
     message, nor a local message in the state where a line containing
     only a dot is a terminator.

   • If a bare CR is encountered within a header line, an extra space is
     added after the line terminator so as not to end the header line.
     The reasoning behind this is that bare CRs in header lines are most
     likely either to be mistakes, or people trying to play silly games.

   • If the first header line received in a message ends with CRLF, a
     subsequent bare LF in a header line is treated in the same way as a
     bare CR in a header line and a bare LF in a body line is replaced
     with a space.

   • If the first header line received in a message does not end with
     CRLF, a subsequent LF not preceded by CR is treated as a line
     ending.


File: spec.info,  Node: Unqualified addresses,  Next: The UUCP From line,  Prev: Line endings,  Up: Message processing

48.3 Unqualified addresses
==========================

By default, Exim expects every envelope address it receives from an
external host to be fully qualified.  Unqualified addresses cause
negative responses to SMTP commands.  However, because SMTP is used as a
means of transporting messages from MUAs running on personal
workstations, there is sometimes a requirement to accept unqualified
addresses from specific hosts or IP networks.

   Exim has two options that separately control which hosts may send
unqualified sender or recipient addresses in SMTP commands, namely
‘sender_unqualified_hosts’ and ‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’.  In both
cases, if an unqualified address is accepted, it is qualified by adding
the value of ‘qualify_domain’ or ‘qualify_recipient’, as appropriate.

   Unqualified addresses in header lines are automatically qualified for
messages that are locally originated, unless the ‘-bnq’ option is given
on the command line.  For messages received over SMTP, unqualified
addresses in header lines are qualified only if unqualified addresses
are permitted in SMTP commands.  In other words, such qualification is
also controlled by ‘sender_unqualified_hosts’ and
‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’,


File: spec.info,  Node: The UUCP From line,  Next: Header lines,  Prev: Unqualified addresses,  Up: Message processing

48.4 The UUCP From line
=======================

Messages that have come from UUCP (and some other applications) often
begin with a line containing the envelope sender and a timestamp,
following the word "From".  Examples of two common formats are:

     From a.oakley@berlin.mus Fri Jan  5 12:35 GMT 1996
     From f.butler@berlin.mus Fri, 7 Jan 97 14:00:00 GMT

   This line precedes the *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.5)* header
lines.  For compatibility with Sendmail, Exim recognizes such lines at
the start of messages that are submitted to it via the command line
(that is, on the standard input).  It does not recognize such lines in
incoming SMTP messages, unless the sending host matches
‘ignore_fromline_hosts’ or the ‘-bs’ option was used for a local message
and ‘ignore_fromline_local’ is set.  The recognition is controlled by a
regular expression that is defined by the ‘uucp_from_pattern’ option,
whose default value matches the two common cases shown above and puts
the address that follows "From" into ‘$1’.

   When the caller of Exim for a non-SMTP message that contains a "From"
line is a trusted user, the message's sender address is constructed by
expanding the contents of ‘uucp_sender_address’, whose default value is
"$1".  This is then parsed as an *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* address.  If there is
no domain, the local part is qualified with ‘qualify_domain’ unless it
is the empty string.  However, if the command line ‘-f’ option is used,
it overrides the "From" line.

   If the caller of Exim is not trusted, the "From" line is recognized,
but the sender address is not changed.  This is also the case for
incoming SMTP messages that are permitted to contain "From" lines.

   Only one "From" line is recognized.  If there is more than one, the
second is treated as a data line that starts the body of the message, as
it is not valid as a header line.  This also happens if a "From" line is
present in an incoming SMTP message from a source that is not permitted
to send them.


File: spec.info,  Node: Header lines,  Next: Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports,  Prev: The UUCP From line,  Up: Message processing

48.5 Header lines
=================

* Menu:

* Resent- header lines::
* Auto-Submitted;::
* Bcc;::
* Date;::
* Delivery-date;::
* Envelope-to;::
* From;::
* Message-ID;::
* Received;::
* References;::
* Return-path;::
* Sender;::


File: spec.info,  Node: Resent- header lines,  Next: Auto-Submitted;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.1 Resent- header lines
---------------------------

*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.6.6)*
makes provision for sets of header lines starting with the string
‘Resent-’ to be added to a message when it is resent by the original
recipient to somebody else.  These headers are _Resent-Date:_,
_Resent-From:_, _Resent-Sender:_, _Resent-To:_, _Resent-Cc:_,
_Resent-Bcc:_ and _Resent-Message-ID:_.  The RFC says:

     _Resent fields are strictly informational.  They MUST NOT be used
     in the normal processing of replies or other such automatic actions
     on messages._

   This leaves things a bit vague as far as other processing actions
such as address rewriting are concerned.  Exim treats ‘Resent-’ header
lines as follows:

   • A _Resent-From:_ line that just contains the login id of the
     submitting user is automatically rewritten in the same way as
     _From:_ (see below).

   • If there's a rewriting rule for a particular header line, it is
     also applied to ‘Resent-’ header lines of the same type.  For
     example, a rule that rewrites _From:_ also rewrites _Resent-From:_.

   • For local messages, if _Sender:_ is removed on input,
     _Resent-Sender:_ is also removed.

   • For a locally-submitted message, if there are any ‘Resent-’ header
     lines but no _Resent-Date:_, _Resent-From:_, or
     _Resent-Message-Id:_, they are added as necessary.  It is the
     contents of _Resent-Message-Id:_ (rather than _Message-Id:_) which
     are included in log lines in this case.

   • The logic for adding _Sender:_ is duplicated for _Resent-Sender:_
     when any ‘Resent-’ header lines are present.


File: spec.info,  Node: Auto-Submitted;,  Next: Bcc;,  Prev: Resent- header lines,  Up: Header lines

48.5.2 Auto-Submitted:
----------------------

Whenever Exim generates an autoreply, a bounce, or a delay warning
message, it includes the header line:

     Auto-Submitted: auto-replied


File: spec.info,  Node: Bcc;,  Next: Date;,  Prev: Auto-Submitted;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.3 Bcc:
-----------

If Exim is called with the ‘-t’ option, to take recipient addresses from
a message's header, it removes any _Bcc:_ header line that may exist
(after extracting its addresses).  If ‘-t’ is not present on the command
line, any existing _Bcc:_ is not removed.


File: spec.info,  Node: Date;,  Next: Delivery-date;,  Prev: Bcc;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.4 Date:
------------

If a locally-generated or submission-mode message has no _Date:_ header
line, Exim adds one, using the current date and time, unless the
‘suppress_local_fixups’ control has been specified.


File: spec.info,  Node: Delivery-date;,  Next: Envelope-to;,  Prev: Date;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.5 Delivery-date:
---------------------

_Delivery-date:_ header lines are not part of the standard *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.5)* header set.
Exim can be configured to add them to the final delivery of messages.
(See the generic ‘delivery_date_add’ transport option.)  They should not
be present in messages in transit.  If the ‘delivery_date_remove’
configuration option is set (the default), Exim removes _Delivery-date:_
header lines from incoming messages.


File: spec.info,  Node: Envelope-to;,  Next: From;,  Prev: Delivery-date;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.6 Envelope-to:
-------------------

_Envelope-to:_ header lines are not part of the standard *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.5)* header set.
Exim can be configured to add them to the final delivery of messages.
(See the generic ‘envelope_to_add’ transport option.)  They should not
be present in messages in transit.  If the ‘envelope_to_remove’
configuration option is set (the default), Exim removes _Envelope-to:_
header lines from incoming messages.


File: spec.info,  Node: From;,  Next: Message-ID;,  Prev: Envelope-to;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.7 From:
------------

If a submission-mode message does not contain a _From:_ header line,
Exim adds one if either of the following conditions is true:

   • The envelope sender address is not empty (that is, this is not a
     bounce message).  The added header line copies the envelope sender
     address.

   • The SMTP session is authenticated and ‘$authenticated_id’ is not
     empty.

       1. If no domain is specified by the submission control, the local
          part is ‘$authenticated_id’ and the domain is
          ‘$qualify_domain’.

       2. If a non-empty domain is specified by the submission control,
          the local part is ‘$authenticated_id’, and the domain is the
          specified domain.

       3. If an empty domain is specified by the submission control,
          ‘$authenticated_id’ is assumed to be the complete address.

   A non-empty envelope sender takes precedence.

   If a locally-generated incoming message does not contain a _From:_
header line, and the ‘suppress_local_fixups’ control is not set, Exim
adds one containing the sender's address.  The calling user's login name
and full name are used to construct the address, as described in section
*note Constructed addresses::.  They are obtained from the password data
by calling ‘getpwuid()’ (but see the ‘unknown_login’ configuration
option).  The address is qualified with ‘qualify_domain’.

   For compatibility with Sendmail, if an incoming, non-SMTP message has
a _From:_ header line containing just the unqualified login name of the
calling user, this is replaced by an address containing the user's login
name and full name as described in section *note Constructed
addresses::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Message-ID;,  Next: Received;,  Prev: From;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.8 Message-ID:
------------------

If a locally-generated or submission-mode incoming message does not
contain a _Message-ID:_ or _Resent-Message-ID:_ header line, and the
‘suppress_local_fixups’ control is not set, Exim adds a suitable header
line to the message.  If there are any _Resent-:_ headers in the
message, it creates _Resent-Message-ID:_.  The id is constructed from
Exim's internal message id, preceded by the letter E to ensure it starts
with a letter, and followed by @ and the primary host name.  Additional
information can be included in this header line by setting the
‘message_id_header_text’ and/or ‘message_id_header_domain’ options.


File: spec.info,  Node: Received;,  Next: References;,  Prev: Message-ID;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.9 Received:
----------------

A _Received:_ header line is added at the start of every message.  The
contents are defined by the ‘received_header_text’ configuration option,
and Exim automatically adds a semicolon and a timestamp to the
configured string.

   The _Received:_ header is generated as soon as the message's header
lines have been received.  At this stage, the timestamp in the
_Received:_ header line is the time that the message started to be
received.  This is the value that is seen by the DATA ACL and by the
‘local_scan()’ function.

   Once a message is accepted, the timestamp in the _Received:_ header
line is changed to the time of acceptance, which is (apart from a small
delay while the -H spool file is written) the earliest time at which
delivery could start.


File: spec.info,  Node: References;,  Next: Return-path;,  Prev: Received;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.10 References:
-------------------

Messages created by the ‘autoreply’ transport include a _References:_
header line.  This is constructed according to the rules that are
described in *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822#section-3.64)* (which
states that replies should contain such a header line), and *RFC 3834
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3834#section-3.1.6)* (which
states that automatic responses are not different in this respect).
However, because some mail processing software does not cope well with
very long header lines, no more than 12 message IDs are copied from the
_References:_ header line in the incoming message.  If there are more
than 12, the first one and then the final 11 are copied, before adding
the message ID of the incoming message.


File: spec.info,  Node: Return-path;,  Next: Sender;,  Prev: References;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.11 Return-path:
--------------------

_Return-path:_ header lines are defined as something an MTA may insert
when it does the final delivery of messages.  (See the generic
‘return_path_add’ transport option.)  Therefore, they should not be
present in messages in transit.  If the ‘return_path_remove’
configuration option is set (the default), Exim removes _Return-path:_
header lines from incoming messages.


File: spec.info,  Node: Sender;,  Prev: Return-path;,  Up: Header lines

48.5.12 Sender:
---------------

For a locally-originated message from an untrusted user, Exim may remove
an existing _Sender:_ header line, and it may add a new one.  You can
modify these actions by setting the ‘local_sender_retain’ option true,
the ‘local_from_check’ option false, or by using the
‘suppress_local_fixups’ control setting.

   When a local message is received from an untrusted user and
‘local_from_check’ is true (the default), and the
‘suppress_local_fixups’ control has not been set, a check is made to see
if the address given in the _From:_ header line is the correct (local)
sender of the message.  The address that is expected has the login name
as the local part and the value of ‘qualify_domain’ as the domain.
Prefixes and suffixes for the local part can be permitted by setting
‘local_from_prefix’ and ‘local_from_suffix’ appropriately.  If _From:_
does not contain the correct sender, a _Sender:_ line is added to the
message.

   If you set ‘local_from_check’ false, this checking does not occur.
However, the removal of an existing _Sender:_ line still happens, unless
you also set ‘local_sender_retain’ to be true.  It is not possible to
set both of these options true at the same time.

   By default, no processing of _Sender:_ header lines is done for
messages received over TCP/IP or for messages submitted by trusted
users.  However, when a message is received over TCP/IP in submission
mode, and ‘sender_retain’ is not specified on the submission control,
the following processing takes place:

   First, any existing _Sender:_ lines are removed.  Then, if the SMTP
session is authenticated, and ‘$authenticated_id’ is not empty, a sender
address is created as follows:

   • If no domain is specified by the submission control, the local part
     is ‘$authenticated_id’ and the domain is ‘$qualify_domain’.

   • If a non-empty domain is specified by the submission control, the
     local part is ‘$authenticated_id’, and the domain is the specified
     domain.

   • If an empty domain is specified by the submission control,
     ‘$authenticated_id’ is assumed to be the complete address.

   This address is compared with the address in the _From:_ header line.
If they are different, a _Sender:_ header line containing the created
address is added.  Prefixes and suffixes for the local part in _From:_
can be permitted by setting ‘local_from_prefix’ and ‘local_from_suffix’
appropriately.

   *Note*: Whenever a _Sender:_ header line is created, the return path
for the message (the envelope sender address) is changed to be the same
address, except in the case of submission mode when ‘sender_retain’ is
specified.


File: spec.info,  Node: Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports,  Next: Constructed addresses,  Prev: Header lines,  Up: Message processing

48.6 Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports
===============================================================

When a message is delivered, the addition and removal of header lines
can be specified in a system filter, or on any of the routers and
transports that process the message.  Section *note Adding and removing
headers in a system filter:: contains details about modifying headers in
a system filter.  Header lines can also be added in an ACL as a message
is received (see section *note Adding header lines in ACLs::).

   In contrast to what happens in a system filter, header modifications
that are specified on routers and transports apply only to the
particular recipient addresses that are being processed by those routers
and transports.  These changes do not actually take place until a copy
of the message is being transported.  Therefore, they do not affect the
basic set of header lines, and they do not affect the values of the
variables that refer to header lines.

   *Note*: In particular, this means that any expansions in the
configuration of the transport cannot refer to the modified header
lines, because such expansions all occur before the message is actually
transported.

   For both routers and transports, the argument of a ‘headers_add’
option must be in the form of one or more *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* header lines, separated
by newlines (coded as "\n").  For example:

     headers_add = X-added-header: added by $primary_hostname\n\
                   X-added-second: another added header line

   Exim does not check the syntax of these added header lines.

   Multiple ‘headers_add’ options for a single router or transport can
be specified; the values will append to a single list of header lines.
Each header-line is separately expanded.

   The argument of a ‘headers_remove’ option must consist of a
colon-separated list of header names.  This is confusing, because header
names themselves are often terminated by colons.  In this case, the
colons are the list separators, not part of the names.  For example:

     headers_remove = return-receipt-to:acknowledge-to

   Multiple ‘headers_remove’ options for a single router or transport
can be specified; the arguments will append to a single header-names
list.  Each item is separately expanded.  Note that colons in complex
expansions which are used to form all or part of a ‘headers_remove’ list
will act as list separators.

   When ‘headers_add’ or ‘headers_remove’ is specified on a router,
items are expanded at routing time, and then associated with all
addresses that are accepted by that router, and also with any new
addresses that it generates.  If an address passes through several
routers as a result of aliasing or forwarding, the changes are
cumulative.

   However, this does not apply to multiple routers that result from the
use of the ‘unseen’ option.  Any header modifications that were
specified by the "unseen" router or its predecessors apply only to the
"unseen" delivery.

   Addresses that end up with different ‘headers_add’ or
‘headers_remove’ settings cannot be delivered together in a batch, so a
transport is always dealing with a set of addresses that have the same
header-processing requirements.

   The transport starts by writing the original set of header lines that
arrived with the message, possibly modified by the system filter.  As it
writes out these lines, it consults the list of header names that were
attached to the recipient address(es) by ‘headers_remove’ options in
routers, and it also consults the transport's own ‘headers_remove’
option.  Header lines whose names are on either of these lists are not
written out.  If there are multiple instances of any listed header, they
are all skipped.

   After the remaining original header lines have been written, new
header lines that were specified by routers' ‘headers_add’ options are
written, in the order in which they were attached to the address.  These
are followed by any header lines specified by the transport's
‘headers_add’ option.

   This way of handling header line modifications in routers and
transports has the following consequences:

   • The original set of header lines, possibly modified by the system
     filter, remains "visible", in the sense that the ‘$header_’_xxx_
     variables refer to it, at all times.

   • Header lines that are added by a router's ‘headers_add’ option are
     not accessible by means of the ‘$header_’_xxx_ expansion syntax in
     subsequent routers or the transport.

   • Conversely, header lines that are specified for removal by
     ‘headers_remove’ in a router remain visible to subsequent routers
     and the transport.

   • Headers added to an address by ‘headers_add’ in a router cannot be
     removed by a later router or by a transport.

   • An added header can refer to the contents of an original header
     that is to be removed, even it has the same name as the added
     header.  For example:

          headers_remove = subject
          headers_add = Subject: new subject (was: $h_subject:)

   *Warning*: The ‘headers_add’ and ‘headers_remove’ options cannot be
used for a ‘redirect’ router that has the ‘one_time’ option set.


File: spec.info,  Node: Constructed addresses,  Next: Case of local parts,  Prev: Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports,  Up: Message processing

48.7 Constructed addresses
==========================

When Exim constructs a sender address for a locally-generated message,
it uses the form

     <user name>  <login@qualify_domain>

   For example:

     Zaphod Beeblebrox <zaphod@end.univ.example>

   The user name is obtained from the ‘-F’ command line option if set,
or otherwise by looking up the calling user by ‘getpwuid()’ and
extracting the "gecos" field from the password entry.  If the "gecos"
field contains an ampersand character, this is replaced by the login
name with the first letter upper cased, as is conventional in a number
of operating systems.  See the ‘gecos_name’ option for a way to tailor
the handling of the "gecos" field.  The ‘unknown_username’ option can be
used to specify user names in cases when there is no password file
entry.

   In all cases, the user name is made to conform to *RFC 2822
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* by quoting all or parts
of it if necessary.  In addition, if it contains any non-printing
characters, it is encoded as described in *RFC 2047
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2047)*, which defines a way of
including non-ASCII characters in header lines.  The value of the
‘headers_charset’ option specifies the name of the encoding that is used
(the characters are assumed to be in this encoding).  The setting of
‘print_topbitchars’ controls whether characters with the top bit set
(that is, with codes greater than 127) count as printing characters or
not.


File: spec.info,  Node: Case of local parts,  Next: Dots in local parts,  Prev: Constructed addresses,  Up: Message processing

48.8 Case of local parts
========================

*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* states that
the case of letters in the local parts of addresses cannot be assumed to
be non-significant.  Exim preserves the case of local parts of
addresses, but by default it uses a lower-cased form when it is routing,
because on most Unix systems, usernames are in lower case and
case-insensitive routing is required.  However, any particular router
can be made to use the original case for local parts by setting the
‘caseful_local_part’ generic router option.

   If you must have mixed-case user names on your system, the best way
to proceed, assuming you want case-independent handling of incoming
email, is to set up your first router to convert incoming local parts in
your domains to the correct case by means of a file lookup.  For
example:

     correct_case:
       driver = redirect
       domains = +local_domains
       data = ${lookup{$local_part}cdb\
                   {/etc/usercased.cdb}{$value}fail}\
                   @$domain

   For this router, the local part is forced to lower case by the
default action (‘caseful_local_part’ is not set).  The lower-cased local
part is used to look up a new local part in the correct case.  If you
then set ‘caseful_local_part’ on any subsequent routers which process
your domains, they will operate on local parts with the correct case in
a case-sensitive manner.


File: spec.info,  Node: Dots in local parts,  Next: Rewriting addresses,  Prev: Case of local parts,  Up: Message processing

48.9 Dots in local parts
========================

*RFC 2822 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2822)* forbids empty
components in local parts.  That is, an unquoted local part may not
begin or end with a dot, nor have two consecutive dots in the middle.
However, it seems that many MTAs do not enforce this, so Exim permits
empty components for compatibility.


File: spec.info,  Node: Rewriting addresses,  Prev: Dots in local parts,  Up: Message processing

48.10 Rewriting addresses
=========================

Rewriting of sender and recipient addresses, and addresses in headers,
can happen automatically, or as the result of configuration options, as
described in chapter *note Address rewriting::.  The headers that may be
affected by this are _Bcc:_, _Cc:_, _From:_, _Reply-To:_, _Sender:_, and
_To:_.

   Automatic rewriting includes qualification, as mentioned above.  The
other case in which it can happen is when an incomplete non-local domain
is given.  The routing process may cause this to be expanded into the
full domain name.  For example, a header such as

     To: hare@teaparty

   might get rewritten as

     To: hare@teaparty.wonderland.fict.example

   Rewriting as a result of routing is the one kind of message
processing that does not happen at input time, as it cannot be done
until the address has been routed.

   Strictly, one should not do _any_ deliveries of a message until all
its addresses have been routed, in case any of the headers get changed
as a result of routing.  However, doing this in practice would hold up
many deliveries for unreasonable amounts of time, just because one
address could not immediately be routed.  Exim therefore does not delay
other deliveries when routing of one or more addresses is deferred.


File: spec.info,  Node: SMTP processing,  Next: Customizing messages,  Prev: Message processing,  Up: Top

49 SMTP processing
******************

Exim supports a number of different ways of using the SMTP protocol, and
its LMTP variant, which is an interactive protocol for transferring
messages into a closed mail store application.  This chapter contains
details of how SMTP is processed.  For incoming mail, the following are
available:

   • SMTP over TCP/IP (Exim daemon or _inetd_);

   • SMTP over the standard input and output (the ‘-bs’ option);

   • Batched SMTP on the standard input (the ‘-bS’ option).

   For mail delivery, the following are available:

   • SMTP over TCP/IP (the ‘smtp’ transport);

   • LMTP over TCP/IP (the ‘smtp’ transport with the ‘protocol’ option
     set to "lmtp");

   • LMTP over a pipe to a process running in the local host (the ‘lmtp’
     transport);

   • Batched SMTP to a file or pipe (the ‘appendfile’ and ‘pipe’
     transports with the ‘use_bsmtp’ option set).

   _Batched SMTP_ is the name for a process in which batches of messages
are stored in or read from files (or pipes), in a format in which SMTP
commands are used to contain the envelope information.

* Menu:

* Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP::
* Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP::
* Incoming local SMTP::
* Batched SMTP::


File: spec.info,  Node: Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP,  Next: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP,  Up: SMTP processing

49.1 Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP
=======================================

Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP is implemented by the ‘smtp’
transport.  The ‘protocol’ option selects which protocol is to be used,
but the actual processing is the same in both cases.

   If, in response to its EHLO command, Exim is told that the SIZE
extension is supported, it adds SIZE=<_n_> to each subsequent MAIL
command.  The value of <_n_> is the message size plus the value of the
‘size_addition’ option (default 1024) to allow for additions to the
message such as per-transport header lines, or changes made in a
transport filter.  If ‘size_addition’ is set negative, the use of SIZE
is suppressed.

   If the remote server advertises support for PIPELINING, Exim uses the
pipelining extension to SMTP (*RFC 2197
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2197)*) to reduce the number
of TCP/IP packets required for the transaction.

   If the remote server advertises support for the STARTTLS command, and
Exim was built to support TLS encryption, it tries to start a TLS
session unless the server matches ‘hosts_avoid_tls’.  See chapter *note
Encrypted SMTP connections using TLS/SSL: Encrypted SMTP connections.
for more details.  Either a match in that or ‘hosts_verify_avoid_tls’
apply when the transport is called for verification.

   If the remote server advertises support for the AUTH command, Exim
scans the authenticators configuration for any suitable client settings,
as described in chapter *note SMTP authentication::.

   Responses from the remote host are supposed to be terminated by CR
followed by LF. However, there are known to be hosts that do not send CR
characters, so in order to be able to interwork with such hosts, Exim
treats LF on its own as a line terminator.

   If a message contains a number of different addresses, all those with
the same characteristics (for example, the same envelope sender) that
resolve to the same set of hosts, in the same order, are sent in a
single SMTP transaction, even if they are for different domains, unless
there are more than the setting of the ‘max_rcpt’s option in the ‘smtp’
transport allows, in which case they are split into groups containing no
more than ‘max_rcpt’s addresses each.  If ‘remote_max_parallel’ is
greater than one, such groups may be sent in parallel sessions.  The
order of hosts with identical MX values is not significant when checking
whether addresses can be batched in this way.

   When the ‘smtp’ transport suffers a temporary failure that is not
message-related, Exim updates its transport-specific database, which
contains records indexed by host name that remember which messages are
waiting for each particular host.  It also updates the retry database
with new retry times.

   Exim's retry hints are based on host name plus IP address, so if one
address of a multi-homed host is broken, it will soon be skipped most of
the time.  See the next section for more detail about error handling.

   When a message is successfully delivered over a TCP/IP SMTP
connection, Exim looks in the hints database for the transport to see if
there are any queued messages waiting for the host to which it is
connected.  If it finds one, it arranges to attempt that message on the
same connection.

   The ‘connection_max_messages’ option of the ‘smtp’ transport can be
used to limit the number of messages sent down a single TCP/IP
connection.

   The second and subsequent messages delivered down an existing
connection are identified in the main log by the addition of an asterisk
after the closing square bracket of the IP address.

* Menu:

* Errors in outgoing SMTP::


File: spec.info,  Node: Errors in outgoing SMTP,  Up: Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP

49.1.1 Errors in outgoing SMTP
------------------------------

Three different kinds of error are recognized for outgoing SMTP: host
errors, message errors, and recipient errors.

*Host errors*
     A host error is not associated with a particular message or with a
     particular recipient of a message.  The host errors are:

        • Connection refused or timed out,

        • Any error response code on connection,

        • Any error response code to EHLO or HELO,

        • Loss of connection at any time, except after ".",

        • I/O errors at any time,

        • Timeouts during the session, other than in response to MAIL,
          RCPT or the "."  at the end of the data.

     For a host error, a permanent error response on connection, or in
     response to EHLO, causes all addresses routed to the host to be
     failed.  Any other host error causes all addresses to be deferred,
     and retry data to be created for the host.  It is not tried again,
     for any message, until its retry time arrives.  If the current set
     of addresses are not all delivered in this run (to some alternative
     host), the message is added to the list of those waiting for this
     host, so if it is still undelivered when a subsequent successful
     delivery is made to the host, it will be sent down the same SMTP
     connection.

*Message errors*
     A message error is associated with a particular message when sent
     to a particular host, but not with a particular recipient of the
     message.  The message errors are:

        • Any error response code to MAIL, DATA, or the "."  that
          terminates the data,

        • Timeout after MAIL,

        • Timeout or loss of connection after the "."  that terminates
          the data.  A timeout after the DATA command itself is treated
          as a host error, as is loss of connection at any other time.

     For a message error, a permanent error response (5_xx_) causes all
     addresses to be failed, and a delivery error report to be returned
     to the sender.  A temporary error response (4_xx_), or one of the
     timeouts, causes all addresses to be deferred.  Retry data is not
     created for the host, but instead, a retry record for the
     combination of host plus message id is created.  The message is not
     added to the list of those waiting for this host.  This ensures
     that the failing message will not be sent to this host again until
     the retry time arrives.  However, other messages that are routed to
     the host are not affected, so if it is some property of the message
     that is causing the error, it will not stop the delivery of other
     mail.

     If the remote host specified support for the SIZE parameter in its
     response to EHLO, Exim adds SIZE=_nnn_ to the MAIL command, so an
     over-large message will cause a message error because the error
     arrives as a response to MAIL.

*Recipient errors*
     A recipient error is associated with a particular recipient of a
     message.  The recipient errors are:

        • Any error response to RCPT,

        • Timeout after RCPT.

     For a recipient error, a permanent error response (5_xx_) causes
     the recipient address to be failed, and a bounce message to be
     returned to the sender.  A temporary error response (4_xx_) or a
     timeout causes the failing address to be deferred, and routing
     retry data to be created for it.  This is used to delay processing
     of the address in subsequent queue runs, until its routing retry
     time arrives.  This applies to all messages, but because it
     operates only in queue runs, one attempt will be made to deliver a
     new message to the failing address before the delay starts to
     operate.  This ensures that, if the failure is really related to
     the message rather than the recipient ("message too big for this
     recipient" is a possible example), other messages have a chance of
     getting delivered.  If a delivery to the address does succeed, the
     retry information gets cleared, so all stuck messages get tried
     again, and the retry clock is reset.

     The message is not added to the list of those waiting for this
     host.  Use of the host for other messages is unaffected, and except
     in the case of a timeout, other recipients are processed
     independently, and may be successfully delivered in the current
     SMTP session.  After a timeout it is of course impossible to
     proceed with the session, so all addresses get deferred.  However,
     those other than the one that failed do not suffer any subsequent
     retry delays.  Therefore, if one recipient is causing trouble, the
     others have a chance of getting through when a subsequent delivery
     attempt occurs before the failing recipient's retry time.

   In all cases, if there are other hosts (or IP addresses) available
for the current set of addresses (for example, from multiple MX
records), they are tried in this run for any undelivered addresses,
subject of course to their own retry data.  In other words, recipient
error retry data does not take effect until the next delivery attempt.

   Some hosts have been observed to give temporary error responses to
every MAIL command at certain times ("insufficient space" has been
seen).  It would be nice if such circumstances could be recognized, and
defer data for the host itself created, but this is not possible within
the current Exim design.  What actually happens is that retry data for
every (host, message) combination is created.

   The reason that timeouts after MAIL and RCPT are treated specially is
that these can sometimes arise as a result of the remote host's
verification procedures.  Exim makes this assumption, and treats them as
if a temporary error response had been received.  A timeout after "."
is treated specially because it is known that some broken
implementations fail to recognize the end of the message if the last
character of the last line is a binary zero.  Thus, it is helpful to
treat this case as a message error.

   Timeouts at other times are treated as host errors, assuming a
problem with the host, or the connection to it.  If a timeout after
MAIL, RCPT, or "."  is really a connection problem, the assumption is
that at the next try the timeout is likely to occur at some other point
in the dialogue, causing it then to be treated as a host error.

   There is experimental evidence that some MTAs drop the connection
after the terminating "."  if they do not like the contents of the
message for some reason, in contravention of the RFC, which indicates
that a 5_xx_ response should be given.  That is why Exim treats this
case as a message rather than a host error, in order not to delay other
messages to the same host.


File: spec.info,  Node: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP,  Next: Incoming local SMTP,  Prev: Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP,  Up: SMTP processing

49.2 Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP
=======================================

Incoming SMTP messages can be accepted in one of two ways: by running a
listening daemon, or by using _inetd_.  In the latter case, the entry in
‘/etc/inetd.conf’ should be like this:

     smtp stream tcp nowait exim /opt/exim/bin/exim in.exim -bs

   Exim distinguishes between this case and the case of a locally
running user agent using the ‘-bs’ option by checking whether or not the
standard input is a socket.  When it is, either the port must be
privileged (less than 1024), or the caller must be root or the Exim
user.  If any other user passes a socket with an unprivileged port
number, Exim prints a message on the standard error stream and exits
with an error code.

   By default, Exim does not make a log entry when a remote host
connects or disconnects (either via the daemon or _inetd_), unless the
disconnection is unexpected.  It can be made to write such log entries
by setting the ‘smtp_connection’ log selector.

   Commands from the remote host are supposed to be terminated by CR
followed by LF. However, there are known to be hosts that do not send CR
characters.  In order to be able to interwork with such hosts, Exim
treats LF on its own as a line terminator.  Furthermore, because common
code is used for receiving messages from all sources, a CR on its own is
also interpreted as a line terminator.  However, the sequence "CR, dot,
CR" does not terminate incoming SMTP data.

   One area that sometimes gives rise to problems concerns the EHLO or
HELO commands.  Some clients send syntactically invalid versions of
these commands, which Exim rejects by default.  (This is nothing to do
with verifying the data that is sent, so ‘helo_verify_hosts’ is not
relevant.)  You can tell Exim not to apply a syntax check by setting
‘helo_accept_junk_hosts’ to match the broken hosts that send invalid
commands.

   The amount of disk space available is checked whenever SIZE is
received on a MAIL command, independently of whether
‘message_size_limit’ or ‘check_spool_space’ is configured, unless
‘smtp_check_spool_space’ is set false.  A temporary error is given if
there is not enough space.  If ‘check_spool_space’ is set, the check is
for that amount of space plus the value given with SIZE, that is, it
checks that the addition of the incoming message will not reduce the
space below the threshold.

   When a message is successfully received, Exim includes the local
message id in its response to the final "."  that terminates the data.
If the remote host logs this text it can help with tracing what has
happened to a message.

   The Exim daemon can limit the number of simultaneous incoming
connections it is prepared to handle (see the ‘smtp_accept_max’ option).
It can also limit the number of simultaneous incoming connections from a
single remote host (see the ‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’ option).
Additional connection attempts are rejected using the SMTP temporary
error code 421.

   The Exim daemon does not rely on the SIGCHLD signal to detect when a
subprocess has finished, as this can get lost at busy times.  Instead,
it looks for completed subprocesses every time it wakes up.  Provided
there are other things happening (new incoming calls, starts of queue
runs), completed processes will be noticed and tidied away.  On very
quiet systems you may sometimes see a "defunct" Exim process hanging
about.  This is not a problem; it will be noticed when the daemon next
wakes up.

   When running as a daemon, Exim can reserve some SMTP slots for
specific hosts, and can also be set up to reject SMTP calls from
non-reserved hosts at times of high system load - for details see the
‘smtp_accept_reserve’, ‘smtp_load_reserve’, and ‘smtp_reserve_hosts’
options.  The load check applies in both the daemon and _inetd_ cases.

   Exim normally starts a delivery process for each message received,
though this can be varied by means of the ‘-odq’ command line option and
the ‘queue_only’, ‘queue_only_file’, and ‘queue_only_load’ options.  The
number of simultaneously running delivery processes started in this way
from SMTP input can be limited by the ‘smtp_accept_queue’ and
‘smtp_accept_queue_per_connection’ options.  When either limit is
reached, subsequently received messages are just put on the input queue
without starting a delivery process.

   The controls that involve counts of incoming SMTP calls
(‘smtp_accept_max’, ‘smtp_accept_queue’, ‘smtp_accept_reserve’) are not
available when Exim is started up from the _inetd_ daemon, because in
that case each connection is handled by an entirely independent Exim
process.  Control by load average is, however, available with _inetd_.

   Exim can be configured to verify addresses in incoming SMTP commands
as they are received.  See chapter *note Access control lists:: for
details.  It can also be configured to rewrite addresses at this time -
before any syntax checking is done.  See section *note The SMTP-time
rewriting flag::.

   Exim can also be configured to limit the rate at which a client host
submits MAIL and RCPT commands in a single SMTP session.  See the
‘smtp_ratelimit_hosts’ option.

* Menu:

* Unrecognized SMTP commands::
* Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands::
* Use of non-mail SMTP commands::
* The VRFY and EXPN commands::
* The ETRN command::
* The ATRN command, and ODMR: The ATRN command; and ODMR.
* ODMR provider connection::
* ODMR customer connection::


File: spec.info,  Node: Unrecognized SMTP commands,  Next: Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.1 Unrecognized SMTP commands
---------------------------------

If Exim receives more than ‘smtp_max_unknown_commands’ unrecognized SMTP
commands during a single SMTP connection, it drops the connection after
sending the error response to the last command.  The default value for
‘smtp_max_unknown_commands’ is 3.  This is a defence against some kinds
of abuse that subvert web servers into making connections to SMTP ports;
in these circumstances, a number of non-SMTP lines are sent first.


File: spec.info,  Node: Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands,  Next: Use of non-mail SMTP commands,  Prev: Unrecognized SMTP commands,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.2 Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands
--------------------------------------------------

A syntax error is detected if an SMTP command is recognized, but there
is something syntactically wrong with its data, for example, a malformed
email address in a RCPT command.  Protocol errors include invalid
command sequencing such as RCPT before MAIL. If Exim receives more than
‘smtp_max_synprot_errors’ such commands during a single SMTP connection,
it drops the connection after sending the error response to the last
command.  The default value for ‘smtp_max_synprot_errors’ is 3.  This is
a defence against broken clients that loop sending bad commands (yes, it
has been seen).


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of non-mail SMTP commands,  Next: The VRFY and EXPN commands,  Prev: Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.3 Use of non-mail SMTP commands
------------------------------------

The "non-mail" SMTP commands are those other than MAIL, RCPT, and DATA.
Exim counts such commands, and drops the connection if there are too
many of them in a single SMTP session.  This action catches some
denial-of-service attempts and things like repeated failing AUTHs, or a
mad client looping sending EHLO. The global option
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’ defines what "too many" means.  Its default
value is 10.

   When a new message is expected, one occurrence of RSET is not
counted.  This allows a client to send one RSET between messages (this
is not necessary, but some clients do it).  Exim also allows one
uncounted occurrence of HELO or EHLO, and one occurrence of STARTTLS
between messages.  After starting up a TLS session, another EHLO is
expected, and so it too is not counted.

   The first occurrence of AUTH in a connection, or immediately
following STARTTLS is also not counted.  Otherwise, all commands other
than MAIL, RCPT, DATA, and QUIT are counted.

   You can control which hosts are subject to the limit set by
‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’ by setting ‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail_hosts’.
The default value is ‘*’, which makes the limit apply to all hosts.
This option means that you can exclude any specific badly-behaved hosts
that you have to live with.


File: spec.info,  Node: The VRFY and EXPN commands,  Next: The ETRN command,  Prev: Use of non-mail SMTP commands,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.4 The VRFY and EXPN commands
---------------------------------

When Exim receives a VRFY or EXPN command on a TCP/IP connection, it
runs the ACL specified by ‘acl_smtp_vrfy’ or ‘acl_smtp_expn’ (as
appropriate) in order to decide whether the command should be accepted
or not.

   When no ACL is defined for VRFY, or if it rejects without setting an
explicit response code, the command is accepted (with a 252 SMTP
response code) in order to support awkward clients that do a VRFY before
every RCPT. When VRFY is accepted, it runs exactly the same code as when
Exim is called with the ‘-bv’ option, and returns 250/451/550 SMTP
response codes.

   If no ACL for EXPN is defined, the command is rejected.  When EXPN is
accepted, a single-level expansion of the address is done.  EXPN is
treated as an "address test" (similar to the ‘-bt’ option) rather than a
verification (the ‘-bv’ option).  If an unqualified local part is given
as the argument to EXPN, it is qualified with ‘qualify_domain’.
Rejections of VRFY and EXPN commands are logged on the main and reject
logs, and VRFY verification failures are logged in the main log for
consistency with RCPT failures.


File: spec.info,  Node: The ETRN command,  Next: The ATRN command; and ODMR,  Prev: The VRFY and EXPN commands,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.5 The ETRN command
-----------------------

Most modern installations never need to use this.  It is used for
managing messages queued for an intermittently-connecting destination
(eg.  one using a dialup connection).

   The command is only available if permitted by an ACL specfied by the
main-section ‘acl_smtp_etrn’ option.

   *RFC 1985 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1985)* describes
an ESMTP command called ETRN that is designed to overcome the security
problems of the TURN command (which has fallen into disuse).  When Exim
receives an ETRN command on a TCP/IP connection, it runs the ACL
specified by ‘acl_smtp_etrn’ in order to decide whether the command
should be accepted or not.  If no ACL is defined, the command is
rejected.

   The ETRN command is concerned with "releasing" messages that are
awaiting delivery to certain hosts.  As Exim does not organize its
message queue by host, the only form of ETRN that is supported by
default is the one where the text starts with the "#" prefix, in which
case the remainder of the text is specific to the SMTP server.  A valid
ETRN command causes a run of Exim with the ‘-R’ option to happen, with
the remainder of the ETRN text as its argument.  For example,

     ETRN #brigadoon

   runs the command

     exim -R brigadoon

   which causes a delivery attempt on all messages with undelivered
addresses containing the text "brigadoon".  When ‘smtp_etrn_serialize’
is set (the default), Exim prevents the simultaneous execution of more
than one queue run for the same argument string as a result of an ETRN
command.  This stops a misbehaving client from starting more than one
queue runner at once.

   Exim implements the serialization by means of a hints database in
which a record is written whenever a process is started by ETRN, and
deleted when the process completes.  However, Exim does not keep the
SMTP session waiting for the ETRN process to complete.  Once ETRN is
accepted, the client is sent a "success" return code.  Obviously there
is scope for hints records to get left lying around if there is a system
or program crash.  To guard against this, Exim ignores any records that
are more than six hours old.

   For more control over what ETRN does, the ‘smtp_etrn_command’ option
can used.  This specifies a command that is run whenever ETRN is
received, whatever the form of its argument.  For example:

     smtp_etrn_command = /etc/etrn_command $domain \
                         $sender_host_address

   The string is split up into arguments which are independently
expanded.  The expansion variable ‘$domain’ is set to the argument of
the ETRN command, and no syntax checking is done on the contents of this
argument.  Exim does not wait for the command to complete, so its status
code is not checked.  Exim runs under its own uid and gid when receiving
incoming SMTP, so it is not possible for it to change them before
running the command.


File: spec.info,  Node: The ATRN command; and ODMR,  Next: ODMR provider connection,  Prev: The ETRN command,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.6 The ATRN command, and ODMR
---------------------------------

A second method for handling On-Demand Message Reception (ODMR) for
intermittently-connecting destinations is specified by *RFC 2645
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2645)*.

   This describes an ESMTP command called ATRN which requests a swap in
server/client roles of the communicating SMTP endpoints, and delivery of
queued messages.  Note that this supports customers having IP addresses
that change frequently.

   Exim supports both the "provider" and "customer" sides of ODMR, to
use the terms of that specification.


File: spec.info,  Node: ODMR provider connection,  Next: ODMR customer connection,  Prev: The ATRN command; and ODMR,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.7 ODMR provider connection
-------------------------------

In the "provider" use case Exim is initially an SMTP server, then
transferring to an SMTP client role if an ATRN command is accepted.

   The command is only available if permitted by an ACL specfied by the
main-section ‘acl_smtp_atrn’ option.  Per the standard, this should only
be for a specific provider port number (386, named "odmr"); Exim should
be configured to listen on that port (in addition to other duties) via
‘daemon_smtp_ports’ or equivalent commandline options, and restrict the
advertising of the facility to the port:

     acl_smtp_atrn = ${if = {$received_port}{386} {check_atrn}{}}

   A recieved ATRN command will be rejected unless authentication has
previously been done on the connection.

   Any arguments supplied with an ATRN command are (per standard) a
comma-separated list of requested domains, and will be available in the
‘$smtp_command_argument’ variable.

   The ACL configured may return "deny" for any policy reaons (for
example, the authenticated user is not permitted the facility).
Otherwise it should use the ACL "atrn_domains" condition, which returns
true if there are queued messages for any of the given list of domains.
If that condition fails the ACL should return "defer" with a "453 You
have no mail" response; else it should return "accept".

   For example (with default domain handling, and one possible de-taint
method) :

     check_atrn:
       warn  set acl_m0 = clientdom.net
       deny  condition = ${if def:smtp_command_argument}
             set acl_m0 = ${map \
               {<, $smtp_command_argument} \
               {${if inlist{$item}{clientdom.net:cl2dom.net} {$value}}} \
               }
             condition = ${if !def:acl_m0}
       defer !atrn_domains = <, $acl_m0
             message = 453 You have no mail
       accept

   Acceptance by the ACL will result in a queue-run for messages having
addresses with the given domains.  A suitable router and transport must
be configured for the deliveries.

   To access a named queue the ACL should use a "queue =" modifier
before the "atrn_domains" condition.  If the ACL does not accept, re-set
the queue to an empty value so as to not disrupt any later SMTP
operations on the connection.

   Use of the "atrn_domains" condition additionally sets up the
‘$atrn_host’ variable, which can be used by a manualroute router.  Being
otherwise empty, this router will decline in other situations so can be
safely placed in a general router chain.

   For example:

     begin routers
     to_odmr_customer:
       driver =      manualroute
       route_data =  <;$atrn_host
       transport =   call_customer

     begin transports
     call_customer:
       driver =      smtp

   Although not discssed in the specification document, Exim supports
use of ATRN within a STARTTLS- or TLS-on-connect- encrypted connection
(which is wise if a plaintext authentication mechanism is used).  In
such cases the TLS connection will remain open across the role-swap, and
be used for the sending of queued messages.

   Note that the RFC requires that the CRAM-MD5 authentication method be
supported.  Exim does not enforce this, but leaves it up to the
configuration; see chapter *note The cram_md5 authenticator::.


File: spec.info,  Node: ODMR customer connection,  Prev: ODMR provider connection,  Up: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP

49.2.8 ODMR customer connection
-------------------------------

Exim supports the "customer" side of ODMR, with a command-line option
"-atrn" that requests a connection to a given host, issuance of an ATRN
command then operation in SMTP server mode.  The option must be followed
by two arguments.

   The first is the name or IP of the provider to be contacted.

   The second, which may be empty, should be a comma-separated list of
domains for which mail is to be requested.  Interpretation of the list
is up to the provider; an empty list is expected to result in some
default being returned.

   The provider host is placed in ‘$domain’ for routing; router and
transport must be configured suitably to make the connection.  For
example:

     begin routers
     to_odmr_provider:
       driver =	manualroute
       condition =	${if eq {$atrn_mode}{C}}
       route_data =	<;$domain
       transport =	call_provider

     begin transports
     call_provider:
       driver =              smtp
       port =                odmr
       hosts_try_auth =	*
       command_timeout =     10m

   Note that the specification requires a long timeout for the ATRN
command, to allow for scanning of queued messages.

   Configuration should also include client-side authentication and
processing for receiving messages.


File: spec.info,  Node: Incoming local SMTP,  Next: Batched SMTP,  Prev: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP,  Up: SMTP processing

49.3 Incoming local SMTP
========================

Some user agents use SMTP to pass messages to their local MTA using the
standard input and output, as opposed to passing the envelope on the
command line and writing the message to the standard input.  This is
supported by the ‘-bs’ option.  This form of SMTP is handled in the same
way as incoming messages over TCP/IP (including the use of ACLs), except
that the envelope sender given in a MAIL command is ignored unless the
caller is trusted.  In an ACL you can detect this form of SMTP input by
testing for an empty host identification.  It is common to have this as
the first line in the ACL that runs for RCPT commands:

     accept hosts = :

   This accepts SMTP messages from local processes without doing any
other tests.


File: spec.info,  Node: Batched SMTP,  Prev: Incoming local SMTP,  Up: SMTP processing

49.4 Batched SMTP
=================

* Menu:

* Outgoing batched SMTP::
* Incoming batched SMTP::


File: spec.info,  Node: Outgoing batched SMTP,  Next: Incoming batched SMTP,  Up: Batched SMTP

49.4.1 Outgoing batched SMTP
----------------------------

Both the ‘appendfile’ and ‘pipe’ transports can be used for handling
batched SMTP. Each has an option called ‘use_bsmtp’ which causes
messages to be output in BSMTP format.  No SMTP responses are possible
for this form of delivery.  All it is doing is using SMTP commands as a
way of transmitting the envelope along with the message.

   The message is written to the file or pipe preceded by the SMTP
commands MAIL and RCPT, and followed by a line containing a single dot.
Lines in the message that start with a dot have an extra dot added.  The
SMTP command HELO is not normally used.  If it is required, the
‘message_prefix’ option can be used to specify it.

   Because ‘appendfile’ and ‘pipe’ are both local transports, they
accept only one recipient address at a time by default.  However, you
can arrange for them to handle several addresses at once by setting the
‘batch_max’ option.  When this is done for BSMTP, messages may contain
multiple RCPT commands.  See chapter *note Address batching in local
transports: Address batching. for more details.

   When one or more addresses are routed to a BSMTP transport by a
router that sets up a host list, the name of the first host on the list
is available to the transport in the variable ‘$host’.  Here is an
example of such a transport and router:

     begin routers
     route_append:
       driver = manualroute
       transport = smtp_appendfile
       route_list = domain.example  batch.host.example

     begin transports
     smtp_appendfile:
       driver = appendfile
       directory = /var/bsmtp/$host
       batch_max = 1000
       use_bsmtp
       user = exim

   This causes messages addressed to _domain.example_ to be written in
BSMTP format to ‘/var/bsmtp/batch.host.example’, with only a single copy
of each message (unless there are more than 1000 recipients).


File: spec.info,  Node: Incoming batched SMTP,  Prev: Outgoing batched SMTP,  Up: Batched SMTP

49.4.2 Incoming batched SMTP
----------------------------

The ‘-bS’ command line option causes Exim to accept one or more messages
by reading SMTP on the standard input, but to generate no responses.  If
the caller is trusted, the senders in the MAIL commands are believed;
otherwise the sender is always the caller of Exim.  Unqualified senders
and receivers are not rejected (there seems little point) but instead
just get qualified.  HELO and EHLO act as RSET; VRFY, EXPN, ETRN and
HELP, act as NOOP; QUIT quits.

   Minimal policy checking is done for BSMTP input.  Only the non-SMTP
ACL is run in the same way as for non-SMTP local input.

   If an error is detected while reading a message, including a missing
"."  at the end, Exim gives up immediately.  It writes details of the
error to the standard output in a stylized way that the calling program
should be able to make some use of automatically, for example:

     554 Unexpected end of file
     Transaction started in line 10
     Error detected in line 14

   It writes a more verbose version, for human consumption, to the
standard error file, for example:

     An error was detected while processing a file of BSMTP input.
     The error message was:

     501 '>' missing at end of address

     The SMTP transaction started in line 10.
     The error was detected in line 12.
     The SMTP command at fault was:

     rcpt to:<malformed@in.com.plete

     1 previous message was successfully processed.
     The rest of the batch was abandoned.

   The return code from Exim is zero only if there were no errors.  It
is 1 if some messages were accepted before an error was detected, and 2
if no messages were accepted.


File: spec.info,  Node: Customizing messages,  Next: Some common configuration settings,  Prev: SMTP processing,  Up: Top

50 Customizing bounce and warning messages
******************************************

When a message fails to be delivered, or remains in the queue for more
than a configured amount of time, Exim sends a message to the original
sender, or to an alternative configured address.  The text of these
messages is built into the code of Exim, but it is possible to change
it, either by adding a single string, or by replacing each of the
paragraphs by text supplied in a file.

   The _From:_ and _To:_ header lines are automatically generated; you
can cause a _Reply-To:_ line to be added by setting the
‘errors_reply_to’ option.  Exim also adds the line

     Auto-Submitted: auto-generated

   to all warning and bounce messages,

* Menu:

* Customizing bounce messages::
* Customizing warning messages::


File: spec.info,  Node: Customizing bounce messages,  Next: Customizing warning messages,  Up: Customizing messages

50.1 Customizing bounce messages
================================

If ‘bounce_message_text’ is set, its contents are included in the
default message immediately after "This message was created
automatically by mail delivery software."  The string is not expanded.
It is not used if ‘bounce_message_file’ is set.

   When ‘bounce_message_file’ is set, it must point to a template file
for constructing error messages.  The file consists of a series of text
items, separated by lines consisting of exactly four asterisks.  If the
file cannot be opened, default text is used and a message is written to
the main and panic logs.  If any text item in the file is empty, default
text is used for that item.

   Each item of text that is read from the file is expanded, and there
are two expansion variables which can be of use here:
‘$bounce_recipient’ is set to the recipient of an error message while it
is being created, and ‘$bounce_return_size_limit’ contains the value of
the ‘return_size_limit’ option, rounded to a whole number.

   The items must appear in the file in the following order:

   • The first item is included in the headers, and should include at
     least a _Subject:_ header.  Exim does not check the syntax of these
     headers.

   • The second item forms the start of the error message.  After it,
     Exim lists the failing addresses with their error messages.

   • The third item is used to introduce any text from pipe transports
     that is to be returned to the sender.  It is omitted if there is no
     such text.

   • The fourth, fifth and sixth items will be ignored and may be empty.
     The fields exist for back-compatibility

   The default state (‘bounce_message_file’ unset) is equivalent to the
following file, in which the sixth item is empty.  The _Subject:_ and
some other lines have been split in order to fit them on the page:

     Subject: Mail delivery failed
       ${if eq{$sender_address}{$bounce_recipient}
       {: returning message to sender}}
     ****
     This message was created automatically by mail delivery software.

     A message ${if eq{$sender_address}{$bounce_recipient}
       {that you sent }{sent by

     <$sender_address>

     }}could not be delivered to all of its recipients.
     This is a permanent error. The following address(es) failed:
     ****
     The following text was generated during the delivery attempt(s):
     ****
     ------ This is a copy of the message, including all the headers.
       ------
     ****
     ------ The body of the message is $message_size characters long;
       only the first
     ------ $bounce_return_size_limit or so are included here.
     ****


File: spec.info,  Node: Customizing warning messages,  Prev: Customizing bounce messages,  Up: Customizing messages

50.2 Customizing warning messages
=================================

The option ‘warn_message_file’ can be pointed at a template file for use
when warnings about message delays are created.  In this case there are
only three text sections:

   • The first item is included in the headers, and should include at
     least a _Subject:_ header.  Exim does not check the syntax of these
     headers.

   • The second item forms the start of the warning message.  After it,
     Exim lists the delayed addresses.

   • The third item then ends the message.

   The default state is equivalent to the following file, except that
some lines have been split here, in order to fit them on the page:

     Subject: Warning: message $message_exim_id delayed
       $warn_message_delay
     ****
     This message was created automatically by mail delivery software.

     A message ${if eq{$sender_address}{$warn_message_recipients}
     {that you sent }{sent by

     <$sender_address>

     }}has not been delivered to all of its recipients after
     more than $warn_message_delay in the queue on $primary_hostname.

     The message identifier is:     $message_exim_id
     The subject of the message is: $h_subject
     The date of the message is:    $h_date

     The following address(es) have not yet been delivered:
     ****
     No action is required on your part. Delivery attempts will
     continue for some time, and this warning may be repeated at
     intervals if the message remains undelivered. Eventually the
     mail delivery software will give up, and when that happens,
     the message will be returned to you.

   However, in the default state the subject and date lines are omitted
if no appropriate headers exist.  During the expansion of this file,
‘$warn_message_delay’ is set to the delay time in one of the forms
"<_n_> minutes" or "<_n_> hours", and ‘$warn_message_recipients’
contains a list of recipients for the warning message.  There may be
more than one if there are multiple addresses with different ‘errors_to’
settings on the routers that handled them.


File: spec.info,  Node: Some common configuration settings,  Next: Exim as a non-queueing client,  Prev: Customizing messages,  Up: Top

51 Some common configuration settings
*************************************

This chapter discusses some configuration settings that seem to be
fairly common.  More examples and discussion can be found in the Exim
book.

* Menu:

* Sending mail to a smart host::
* Using Exim to handle mailing lists::
* Syntax errors in mailing lists::
* Re-expansion of mailing lists::
* Closed mailing lists::
* Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP): Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].
* Virtual domains::
* Multiple user mailboxes::
* Simplified vacation processing::
* Taking copies of mail::
* Intermittently connected hosts::
* Exim on the upstream server host::
* Exim on the intermittently connected client host::


File: spec.info,  Node: Sending mail to a smart host,  Next: Using Exim to handle mailing lists,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.1 Sending mail to a smart host
=================================

If you want to send all mail for non-local domains to a "smart host",
you should replace the default ‘dnslookup’ router with a router which
does the routing explicitly:

     send_to_smart_host:
       driver = manualroute
       route_list = !+local_domains smart.host.name
       transport = remote_smtp

   You can use the smart host's IP address instead of the name if you
wish.  If you are using Exim only to submit messages to a smart host,
and not for receiving incoming messages, you can arrange for it to do
the submission synchronously by setting the ‘mua_wrapper’ option (see
chapter *note Using Exim as a non-queueing client: Exim as a
non-queueing client.).


File: spec.info,  Node: Using Exim to handle mailing lists,  Next: Syntax errors in mailing lists,  Prev: Sending mail to a smart host,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.2 Using Exim to handle mailing lists
=======================================

Exim can be used to run simple mailing lists, but for large and/or
complicated requirements, the use of additional specialized mailing list
software such as Majordomo or Mailman is recommended.

   The ‘redirect’ router can be used to handle mailing lists where each
list is maintained in a separate file, which can therefore be managed by
an independent manager.  The ‘domains’ router option can be used to run
these lists in a separate domain from normal mail.  For example:

     lists:
       driver = redirect
       domains = lists.example
       file = ${lookup {$local_part} dsearch,ret=full {/usr/lists}}
       forbid_pipe
       forbid_file
       errors_to = ${quote_local_part:$local_part-request}@lists.example
       no_more

   This router is skipped for domains other than _lists.example_.  For
addresses in that domain, it looks for a file that matches the local
part.  If there is no such file, the router declines, but because
‘no_more’ is set, no subsequent routers are tried, and so the whole
delivery fails.

   The ‘forbid_pipe’ and ‘forbid_file’ options prevent a local part from
being expanded into a filename or a pipe delivery, which is usually
inappropriate in a mailing list.

   The ‘errors_to’ option specifies that any delivery errors caused by
addresses taken from a mailing list are to be sent to the given address
rather than the original sender of the message.  However, before acting
on this, Exim verifies the error address, and ignores it if verification
fails.

   For example, using the configuration above, mail sent to
_dicts@lists.example_ is passed on to those addresses contained in
‘/usr/lists/dicts’, with error reports directed to
_dicts-request@lists.example_, provided that this address can be
verified.  There could be a file called ‘/usr/lists/dicts-request’
containing the address(es) of this particular list's manager(s), but
other approaches, such as setting up an earlier router (possibly using
the ‘local_part_prefix’ or ‘local_part_suffix’ options) to handle
addresses of the form ‘owner-’_xxx_ or ‘xxx-’_request_, are also
possible.


File: spec.info,  Node: Syntax errors in mailing lists,  Next: Re-expansion of mailing lists,  Prev: Using Exim to handle mailing lists,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.3 Syntax errors in mailing lists
===================================

If an entry in redirection data contains a syntax error, Exim normally
defers delivery of the original address.  That means that a syntax error
in a mailing list holds up all deliveries to the list.  This may not be
appropriate when a list is being maintained automatically from data
supplied by users, and the addresses are not rigorously checked.

   If the ‘skip_syntax_errors’ option is set, the ‘redirect’ router just
skips entries that fail to parse, noting the incident in the log.  If in
addition ‘syntax_errors_to’ is set to a verifiable address, a message is
sent to it whenever a broken address is skipped.  It is usually
appropriate to set ‘syntax_errors_to’ to the same address as
‘errors_to’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Re-expansion of mailing lists,  Next: Closed mailing lists,  Prev: Syntax errors in mailing lists,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.4 Re-expansion of mailing lists
==================================

Exim remembers every individual address to which a message has been
delivered, in order to avoid duplication, but it normally stores only
the original recipient addresses with a message.  If all the deliveries
to a mailing list cannot be done at the first attempt, the mailing list
is re-expanded when the delivery is next tried.  This means that
alterations to the list are taken into account at each delivery attempt,
so addresses that have been added to the list since the message arrived
will therefore receive a copy of the message, even though it pre-dates
their subscription.

   If this behaviour is felt to be undesirable, the ‘one_time’ option
can be set on the ‘redirect’ router.  If this is done, any addresses
generated by the router that fail to deliver at the first attempt are
added to the message as "top level" addresses, and the parent address
that generated them is marked "delivered".  Thus, expansion of the
mailing list does not happen again at the subsequent delivery attempts.
The disadvantage of this is that if any of the failing addresses are
incorrect, correcting them in the file has no effect on pre-existing
messages.

   The original top-level address is remembered with each of the
generated addresses, and is output in any log messages.  However, any
intermediate parent addresses are not recorded.  This makes a difference
to the log only if the ‘all_parents’ selector is set, but for mailing
lists there is normally only one level of expansion anyway.


File: spec.info,  Node: Closed mailing lists,  Next: Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP],  Prev: Re-expansion of mailing lists,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.5 Closed mailing lists
=========================

The examples so far have assumed open mailing lists, to which anybody
may send mail.  It is also possible to set up closed lists, where mail
is accepted from specified senders only.  This is done by making use of
the generic ‘senders’ option to restrict the router that handles the
list.

   The following example uses the same file as a list of recipients and
as a list of permitted senders.  It requires three routers:

     lists_request:
       driver = redirect
       domains = lists.example
       local_part_suffix = -request
       local_parts = ${lookup {$local_part} dsearch,filter=file {/usr/lists}}
       file = /usr/lists/${local_part_data}-request
       no_more

     lists_post:
       driver = redirect
       domains = lists.example
       local_parts = ${lookup {$local_part} dsearch,filter=file,ret=full {/usr/lists}}
       senders = ${if exists {$local_part_data} {lsearch;$local_part_data}{*}}
       file = ${lookup {$local_part} dsearch,ret=full {/usr/lists}}
       forbid_pipe
       forbid_file
       errors_to = ${quote_local_part:$local_part-request}@lists.example
       no_more

     lists_closed:
       driver = redirect
       domains = lists.example
       allow_fail
       data = :fail: $local_part@lists.example is a closed mailing list

   All three routers have the same ‘domains’ setting, so for any other
domains, they are all skipped.  The first router runs only if the local
part ends in ‘-request’.  It handles messages to the list manager(s) by
means of an open mailing list.

   The second router runs only if the ‘senders’ precondition is
satisfied.  It checks for the existence of a list that corresponds to
the local part, and then checks that the sender is on the list by means
of a linear search.  It is necessary to check for the existence of the
file before trying to search it, because otherwise Exim thinks there is
a configuration error.  If the file does not exist, the expansion of
‘senders’ is *, which matches all senders.  This means that the router
runs, but because there is no list, declines, and ‘no_more’ ensures that
no further routers are run.  The address fails with an "unrouteable
address" error.

   The third router runs only if the second router is skipped, which
happens when a mailing list exists, but the sender is not on it.  This
router forcibly fails the address, giving a suitable error message.


File: spec.info,  Node: Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP],  Next: Virtual domains,  Prev: Closed mailing lists,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.6 Variable Envelope Return Paths (VERP)
==========================================

Variable Envelope Return Paths - see *https://cr.yp.to/proto/verp.txt
(https://cr.yp.to/proto/verp.txt)* - are a way of helping mailing list
administrators discover which subscription address is the cause of a
particular delivery failure.  The idea is to encode the original
recipient address in the outgoing envelope sender address, so that if
the message is forwarded by another host and then subsequently bounces,
the original recipient can be extracted from the recipient address of
the bounce.

   Envelope sender addresses can be modified by Exim using two different
facilities: the ‘errors_to’ option on a router (as shown in previous
mailing list examples), or the ‘return_path’ option on a transport.  The
second of these is effective only if the message is successfully
delivered to another host; it is not used for errors detected on the
local host (see the description of ‘return_path’ in chapter *note
Generic options for transports::).  Here is an example of the use of
‘return_path’ to implement VERP on an ‘smtp’ transport:

     verp_smtp:
       driver = smtp
       max_rcpt = 1
       return_path = \
         ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}\
           {${quote_local_part:$1-request+$local_part=$domain}@your.dom.example}fail}

   This has the effect of rewriting the return path (envelope sender) on
outgoing SMTP messages, if the local part of the original return path
ends in "-request", and the domain is _your.dom.example_.  The rewriting
inserts the local part and domain of the recipient into the return path.
Suppose, for example, that a message whose return path has been set to
_somelist-request@your.dom.example_ is sent to
_subscriber@other.dom.example_.  In the transport, the return path is
rewritten as

     somelist-request+subscriber=other.dom.example@your.dom.example

   For this to work, you must tell Exim to send multiple copies of
messages that have more than one recipient, so that each copy has just
one recipient.  This is achieved by setting ‘max_rcpt’ to 1.  Without
this, a single copy of a message might be sent to several different
recipients in the same domain, in which case ‘$local_part’ is not
available in the transport, because it is not unique.

   Unless your host is doing nothing but mailing list deliveries, you
should probably use a separate transport for the VERP deliveries, so as
not to use extra resources in making one-per-recipient copies for other
deliveries.  This can easily be done by expanding the ‘transport’ option
in the router:

     dnslookup:
       driver = dnslookup
       domains = ! +local_domains
       transport = \
         ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}\
           {verp_smtp}{remote_smtp}}
       no_more

   If you want to change the return path using ‘errors_to’ in a router
instead of using ‘return_path’ in the transport, you need to set
‘errors_to’ on all routers that handle mailing list addresses.  This
will ensure that all delivery errors, including those detected on the
local host, are sent to the VERP address.

   On a host that does no local deliveries and has no manual routing,
only the ‘dnslookup’ router needs to be changed.  A special transport is
not needed for SMTP deliveries.  Every mailing list recipient has its
own return path value, and so Exim must hand them to the transport one
at a time.  Here is an example of a ‘dnslookup’ router that implements
VERP:

     verp_dnslookup:
       driver = dnslookup
       domains = ! +local_domains
       transport = remote_smtp
       errors_to = \
         ${if match {$return_path}{^(.+?)-request@your.dom.example\$}}
          {${quote_local_part:$1-request+$local_part=$domain}@your.dom.example}fail}
       no_more

   Before you start sending out messages with VERPed return paths, you
must also configure Exim to accept the bounce messages that come back to
those paths.  Typically this is done by setting a ‘local_part_suffix’
option for a router, and using this to route the messages to wherever
you want to handle them.

   The overhead incurred in using VERP depends very much on the size of
the message, the number of recipient addresses that resolve to the same
remote host, and the speed of the connection over which the message is
being sent.  If a lot of addresses resolve to the same host and the
connection is slow, sending a separate copy of the message for each
address may take substantially longer than sending a single copy with
many recipients (for which VERP cannot be used).


File: spec.info,  Node: Virtual domains,  Next: Multiple user mailboxes,  Prev: Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP],  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.7 Virtual domains
====================

The phrase _virtual domain_ is unfortunately used with two rather
different meanings:

   • A domain for which there are no real mailboxes; all valid local
     parts are aliases for other email addresses.  Common examples are
     organizational top-level domains and "vanity" domains.

   • One of a number of independent domains that are all handled by the
     same host, with mailboxes on that host, but where the mailbox
     owners do not necessarily have login accounts on that host.

   The first usage is probably more common, and does seem more "virtual"
than the second.  This kind of domain can be handled in Exim with a
straightforward aliasing router.  One approach is to create a separate
alias file for each virtual domain.  Exim can test for the existence of
the alias file to determine whether the domain exists.  The ‘dsearch’
lookup type is useful here, leading to a router of this form:

     virtual:
       driver = redirect
       domains = dsearch;/etc/mail/virtual
       data = ${lookup{$local_part}lsearch{/etc/mail/virtual/$domain_data}}
       no_more

   The ‘domains’ option specifies that the router is to be skipped,
unless there is a file in the ‘/etc/mail/virtual’ directory whose name
is the same as the domain that is being processed.  The ‘dsearch’ lookup
used results in an untainted version of ‘$domain’ being placed into the
‘$domain_data’ variable.

   When the router runs, it looks up the local part in the file to find
a new address (or list of addresses).  The ‘no_more’ setting ensures
that if the lookup fails (leading to ‘data’ being an empty string), Exim
gives up on the address without trying any subsequent routers.

   This one router can handle all the virtual domains because the alias
filenames follow a fixed pattern.  Permissions can be arranged so that
appropriate people can edit the different alias files.  A successful
aliasing operation results in a new envelope recipient address, which is
then routed from scratch.

   The other kind of "virtual" domain can also be handled in a
straightforward way.  One approach is to create a file for each domain
containing a list of valid local parts, and use it in a router like
this:

     my_domains:
       driver = accept
       domains = dsearch;/etc/mail/domains
       local_parts = lsearch;/etc/mail/domains/$domain
       transport = my_mailboxes

   The address is accepted if there is a file for the domain, and the
local part can be found in the file.  The ‘domains’ option is used to
check for the file's existence because ‘domains’ is tested before the
‘local_parts’ option (see section *note Router preconditions::).  You
cannot use ‘require_files’, because that option is tested after
‘local_parts’.  The transport is as follows:

     my_mailboxes:
       driver = appendfile
       file = /var/mail/$domain_data/$local_part_data
       user = mail

   This uses a directory of mailboxes for each domain.  The ‘user’
setting is required, to specify which uid is to be used for writing to
the mailboxes.

   The configuration shown here is just one example of how you might
support this requirement.  There are many other ways this kind of
configuration can be set up, for example, by using a database instead of
separate files to hold all the information about the domains.


File: spec.info,  Node: Multiple user mailboxes,  Next: Simplified vacation processing,  Prev: Virtual domains,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.8 Multiple user mailboxes
============================

Heavy email users often want to operate with multiple mailboxes, into
which incoming mail is automatically sorted.  A popular way of handling
this is to allow users to use multiple sender addresses, so that replies
can easily be identified.  Users are permitted to add prefixes or
suffixes to their local parts for this purpose.  The wildcard facility
of the generic router options ‘local_part_prefix’ and
‘local_part_suffix’ can be used for this.  For example, consider this
router:

     userforward:
       driver = redirect
       check_local_user
       file = $home/.forward
       local_part_suffix = -*
       local_part_suffix_optional
       allow_filter

   It runs a user's ‘.forward’ file for all local parts of the form
_username-*_.  Within the filter file the user can distinguish different
cases by testing the variable ‘$local_part_suffix’.  For example:

     if $local_part_suffix contains -special then
     save /home/$local_part_data/Mail/special
     endif

   If the filter file does not exist, or does not deal with such
addresses, they fall through to subsequent routers, and, assuming no
subsequent use of the ‘local_part_suffix’ option is made, they
presumably fail.  Thus, users have control over which suffixes are
valid.

   Alternatively, a suffix can be used to trigger the use of a different
‘.forward’ file - which is the way a similar facility is implemented in
another MTA:

     userforward:
       driver = redirect
       check_local_user
       local_part_suffix = -*
       local_part_suffix_optional
       file = ${lookup {.forward$local_part_suffix} dsearch,ret=full {$home} {$value}fail}
       allow_filter

   If there is no suffix, ‘.forward’ is used; if the suffix is
_-special_, for example, ‘.forward-special’ is used.  Once again, if the
appropriate file does not exist, or does not deal with the address, it
is passed on to subsequent routers, which could, if required, look for
an unqualified ‘.forward’ file to use as a default.


File: spec.info,  Node: Simplified vacation processing,  Next: Taking copies of mail,  Prev: Multiple user mailboxes,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.9 Simplified vacation processing
===================================

The traditional way of running the _vacation_ program is for a user to
set up a pipe command in a ‘.forward’ file (see section *note Special
items in redirection lists:: for syntax details).  This is prone to
error by inexperienced users.  There are two features of Exim that can
be used to make this process simpler for users:

   • A local part prefix such as "vacation-" can be specified on a
     router which can cause the message to be delivered directly to the
     _vacation_ program, or alternatively can use Exim's ‘autoreply’
     transport.  The contents of a user's ‘.forward’ file are then much
     simpler.  For example:

          spqr, vacation-spqr

   • The ‘require_files’ generic router option can be used to trigger a
     vacation delivery by checking for the existence of a certain file
     in the user's home directory.  The ‘unseen’ generic option should
     also be used, to ensure that the original delivery also proceeds.
     In this case, all the user has to do is to create a file called,
     say, ‘.vacation’, containing a vacation message.

   Another advantage of both these methods is that they both work even
when the use of arbitrary pipes by users is locked out.


File: spec.info,  Node: Taking copies of mail,  Next: Intermittently connected hosts,  Prev: Simplified vacation processing,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.10 Taking copies of mail
===========================

Some installations have policies that require archive copies of all
messages to be made.  A single copy of each message can easily be taken
by an appropriate command in a system filter, which could, for example,
use a different file for each day's messages.

   There is also a shadow transport mechanism that can be used to take
copies of messages that are successfully delivered by local transports,
one copy per delivery.  This could be used, _inter alia_, to implement
automatic notification of delivery by sites that insist on doing such
things.


File: spec.info,  Node: Intermittently connected hosts,  Next: Exim on the upstream server host,  Prev: Taking copies of mail,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.11 Intermittently connected hosts
====================================

It has become quite common (because it is cheaper) for hosts to connect
to the Internet periodically rather than remain connected all the time.
The normal arrangement is that mail for such hosts accumulates on a
system that is permanently connected.

   Exim was designed for use on permanently connected hosts, and so it
is not particularly well-suited to use in an intermittently connected
environment.  Nevertheless there are some features that can be used.


File: spec.info,  Node: Exim on the upstream server host,  Next: Exim on the intermittently connected client host,  Prev: Intermittently connected hosts,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.12 Exim on the upstream server host
======================================

It is tempting to arrange for incoming mail for the intermittently
connected host to remain in Exim's queue until the client connects.
However, this approach does not scale very well.  Two different kinds of
waiting message are being mixed up in the same queue - those that cannot
be delivered because of some temporary problem, and those that are
waiting for their destination host to connect.  This makes it hard to
manage the queue, as well as wasting resources, because each queue
runner scans the entire queue.

   A better approach is to separate off those messages that are waiting
for an intermittently connected host.  This can be done by delivering
these messages into local files in batch SMTP, "mailstore", or other
envelope-preserving format, from where they are transmitted by other
software when their destination connects.  This makes it easy to collect
all the mail for one host in a single directory, and to apply local
timeout rules on a per-message basis if required.

   On a very small scale, leaving the mail on Exim's queue can be made
to work.  If you are doing this, you should configure Exim with a long
retry period for the intermittent host.  For example:

     cheshire.wonderland.fict.example    *   F,5d,24h

   This stops a lot of failed delivery attempts from occurring, but Exim
remembers which messages it has queued up for that host.  Once the
intermittent host comes online, forcing delivery of one message (either
by using the ‘-M’ or ‘-R’ options, or by using the ETRN SMTP command
(see section *note The ETRN command::) causes all the queued up messages
to be delivered, often down a single SMTP connection.  While the host
remains connected, any new messages get delivered immediately.

   If the connecting hosts do not have fixed IP addresses, that is, if a
host is issued with a different IP address each time it connects, Exim's
retry mechanisms on the holding host get confused, because the IP
address is normally used as part of the key string for holding retry
information.  This can be avoided by unsetting
‘retry_include_ip_address’ on the ‘smtp’ transport.  Since this has
disadvantages for permanently connected hosts, it is best to arrange a
separate transport for the intermittently connected ones.


File: spec.info,  Node: Exim on the intermittently connected client host,  Prev: Exim on the upstream server host,  Up: Some common configuration settings

51.13 Exim on the intermittently connected client host
======================================================

The value of ‘smtp_accept_queue_per_connection’ should probably be
increased, or even set to zero (that is, disabled) on the intermittently
connected host, so that all incoming messages down a single connection
get delivered immediately.

   Mail waiting to be sent from an intermittently connected host will
probably not have been routed, because without a connection DNS lookups
are not possible.  This means that if a normal queue run is done at
connection time, each message is likely to be sent in a separate SMTP
session.  This can be avoided by starting the queue run with a command
line option beginning with ‘-qq’ instead of ‘-q’.  In this case, the
queue is scanned twice.  In the first pass, routing is done but no
deliveries take place.  The second pass is a normal queue run; since all
the messages have been previously routed, those destined for the same
host are likely to get sent as multiple deliveries in a single SMTP
connection.


File: spec.info,  Node: Exim as a non-queueing client,  Next: Log files,  Prev: Some common configuration settings,  Up: Top

52 Using Exim as a non-queueing client
**************************************

On a personal computer, it is a common requirement for all email to be
sent to a "smart host".  There are plenty of MUAs that can be configured
to operate that way, for all the popular operating systems.  However,
there are some MUAs for Unix-like systems that cannot be so configured:
they submit messages using the command line interface of
‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’.  Furthermore, utility programs such as _cron_
submit messages this way.

   If the personal computer runs continuously, there is no problem,
because it can run a conventional MTA that handles delivery to the smart
host, and deal with any delays via its queueing mechanism.  However, if
the computer does not run continuously or runs different operating
systems at different times, queueing email is not desirable.

   There is therefore a requirement for something that can provide the
‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’ interface but deliver messages to a smart host
without any queueing or retrying facilities.  Furthermore, the delivery
to the smart host should be synchronous, so that if it fails, the
sending MUA is immediately informed.  In other words, we want something
that extends an MUA that submits to a local MTA via the command line so
that it behaves like one that submits to a remote smart host using
TCP/SMTP.

   There are a number of applications (for example, there is one called
_ssmtp_) that do this job.  However, people have found them to be
lacking in various ways.  For instance, you might want to allow aliasing
and forwarding to be done before sending a message to the smart host.

   Exim already had the necessary infrastructure for doing this job.
Just a few tweaks were needed to make it behave as required, though it
is somewhat of an overkill to use a fully-featured MTA for this purpose.

   There is a Boolean global option called ‘mua_wrapper’, defaulting
false.  Setting ‘mua_wrapper’ true causes Exim to run in a special mode
where it assumes that it is being used to "wrap" a command-line MUA in
the manner just described.  As well as setting ‘mua_wrapper’, you also
need to provide a compatible router and transport configuration.
Typically there will be just one router and one transport, sending
everything to a smart host.

   When run in MUA wrapping mode, the behaviour of Exim changes in the
following ways:

   • A daemon cannot be run, nor will Exim accept incoming messages from
     _inetd_.  In other words, the only way to submit messages is via
     the command line.

   • Each message is synchronously delivered as soon as it is received
     (‘-odi’ is assumed).  All queueing options (‘queue_only’,
     ‘queue_smtp_domains’, ‘control’ in an ACL, etc.)  are quietly
     ignored.  The Exim reception process does not finish until the
     delivery attempt is complete.  If the delivery is successful, a
     zero return code is given.

   • Address redirection is permitted, but the final routing for all
     addresses must be to the same remote transport, and to the same
     list of hosts.  Furthermore, the return address (envelope sender)
     must be the same for all recipients, as must any added or deleted
     header lines.  In other words, it must be possible to deliver the
     message in a single SMTP transaction, however many recipients there
     are.

   • If these conditions are not met, or if routing any address results
     in a failure or defer status, or if Exim is unable to deliver all
     the recipients successfully to one of the smart hosts, delivery of
     the entire message fails.

   • Because no queueing is allowed, all failures are treated as
     permanent; there is no distinction between 4_xx_ and 5_xx_ SMTP
     response codes from the smart host.  Furthermore, because only a
     single yes/no response can be given to the caller, it is not
     possible to deliver to some recipients and not others.  If there is
     an error (temporary or permanent) for any recipient, all are
     failed.

   • If more than one smart host is listed, Exim will try another host
     after a connection failure or a timeout, in the normal way.
     However, if this kind of failure happens for all the hosts, the
     delivery fails.

   • When delivery fails, an error message is written to the standard
     error stream (as well as to Exim's log), and Exim exits to the
     caller with a return code value 1.  The message is expunged from
     Exim's spool files.  No bounce messages are ever generated.

   • No retry data is maintained, and any retry rules are ignored.

   • A number of Exim options are overridden: ‘deliver_drop_privilege’
     is forced true, ‘max_rcpt’ in the ‘smtp’ transport is forced to
     "unlimited", ‘remote_max_parallel’ is forced to one, and fallback
     hosts are ignored.

   The overall effect is that Exim makes a single synchronous attempt to
deliver the message, failing if there is any kind of problem.  Because
no local deliveries are done and no daemon can be run, Exim does not
need root privilege.  It should be possible to run it setuid to _exim_
instead of setuid to _root_.  See section *note Running Exim without
privilege:: for a general discussion about the advantages and
disadvantages of running without root privilege.


File: spec.info,  Node: Log files,  Next: Exim utilities,  Prev: Exim as a non-queueing client,  Up: Top

53 Log files
************

Exim writes three different logs, referred to as the main log, the
reject log, and the panic log:

   • The main log records the arrival of each message and each delivery
     in a single line in each case.  The format is as compact as
     possible, in an attempt to keep down the size of log files.
     Two-character flag sequences make it easy to pick out these lines.
     A number of other events are recorded in the main log.  Some of
     them are optional, in which case the ‘log_selector’ option controls
     whether they are included or not.  A Perl script called
     _eximstats_, which does simple analysis of main log files, is
     provided in the Exim distribution (see section *note Mail
     statistics (eximstats): Mail statistics [eximstats].).

   • The reject log records information from messages that are rejected
     as a result of a configuration option (that is, for policy
     reasons).  The first line of each rejection is a copy of the line
     that is also written to the main log.  Then, if the message's
     header has been read at the time the log is written, its contents
     are written to this log.  Only the original header lines are
     available; header lines added by ACLs are not logged.  You can use
     the reject log to check that your policy controls are working
     correctly; on a busy host this may be easier than scanning the main
     log for rejection messages.  You can suppress the writing of the
     reject log by setting ‘write_rejectlog’ false.

   • When certain serious errors occur, Exim writes entries to its panic
     log.  If the error is sufficiently disastrous, Exim bombs out
     afterwards.  Panic log entries are usually written to the main log
     as well, but can get lost amid the mass of other entries.  The
     panic log should be empty under normal circumstances.  It is
     therefore a good idea to check it (or to have a _cron_ script check
     it) regularly, in order to become aware of any problems.  When Exim
     cannot open its panic log, it tries as a last resort to write to
     the system log (syslog).  This is opened with LOG_PID+LOG_CONS and
     the facility code of LOG_MAIL. The message itself is written at
     priority LOG_CRIT.

   Every log line starts with a timestamp, in the format shown in the
following example.  Note that many of the examples shown in this chapter
are line-wrapped.  In the log file, this would be all on one line:

     2001-09-16 16:09:47 SMTP connection from [127.0.0.1] closed
       by QUIT

   By default, the timestamps are in the local timezone.  There are two
ways of changing this:

   • You can set the ‘timezone’ option to a different time zone; in
     particular, if you set

          timezone = UTC

     the timestamps will be in UTC (aka GMT).

   • If you set ‘log_timezone’ true, the time zone is added to the
     timestamp, for example:

          2003-04-25 11:17:07 +0100 Start queue run: pid=12762

   Exim does not include its process id in log lines by default, but you
can request that it does so by specifying the ‘pid’ log selector (see
section *note Reducing or increasing what is logged::).  When this is
set, the process id is output, in square brackets, immediately after the
time and date.

* Menu:

* Where the logs are written::
* Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled"::
* Datestamped log files::
* Logging to syslog::
* Log line flags::
* Logging message reception::
* Logging deliveries::
* Discarded deliveries::
* Deferred deliveries::
* Delivery failures::
* Fake deliveries::
* Completion::
* Summary of Fields in Log Lines::
* Other log entries::
* Reducing or increasing what is logged::
* Message log::


File: spec.info,  Node: Where the logs are written,  Next: Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled",  Up: Log files

53.1 Where the logs are written
===============================

The logs may be written to local files, or to syslog, or both.  However,
it should be noted that many syslog implementations use UDP as a
transport, and are therefore unreliable in the sense that messages are
not guaranteed to arrive at the loghost, nor is the ordering of messages
necessarily maintained.  It has also been reported that on large log
files (tens of megabytes) you may need to tweak syslog to prevent it
syncing the file with each write - on Linux this has been seen to make
syslog take 90% plus of CPU time.

   The destination for Exim's logs is configured by setting
LOG_FILE_PATH in ‘Local/Makefile’ or by setting ‘log_file_path’ in the
runtime configuration.  This latter string is expanded, so it can
contain, for example, references to the host name:

     log_file_path = /var/log/$primary_hostname/exim_%slog

   It is generally advisable, however, to set the string in
‘Local/Makefile’ rather than at runtime, because then the setting is
available right from the start of Exim's execution.  Otherwise, if
there's something it wants to log before it has read the configuration
file (for example, an error in the configuration file) it will not use
the path you want, and may not be able to log at all.

   The value of LOG_FILE_PATH or ‘log_file_path’ is a colon-separated
list, currently limited to at most two items.  This is one option where
the facility for changing a list separator may not be used.  The list
must always be colon-separated.  If an item in the list is "syslog" then
syslog is used; otherwise the item must either be an absolute path,
containing ‘%s’ at the point where "main", "reject", or "panic" is to be
inserted, or be empty, implying the use of a default path.

   When Exim encounters an empty item in the list, it searches the list
defined by LOG_FILE_PATH, and uses the first item it finds that is
neither empty nor "syslog".  This means that an empty item in
‘log_file_path’ can be used to mean "use the path specified at build
time".  If no such item exists, log files are written in the ‘log’
subdirectory of the spool directory.  This is equivalent to the
configuration file setting:

     log_file_path = $spool_directory/log/%slog

   If you do not specify anything at build time or runtime, or if you
unset the option at runtime (i.e.  ‘log_file_path = ’), that is where
the logs are written.

   A log file path may also contain ‘%D’ or ‘%M’ if datestamped log
filenames are in use - see section *note Datestamped log files:: below.

   Here are some examples of possible Makefile settings:

     LOG_FILE_PATH=syslog                     syslog only
     LOG_FILE_PATH=:syslog                    syslog and default path
     LOG_FILE_PATH=syslog : /usr/log/exim_%s  syslog and specified path
     LOG_FILE_PATH=/usr/log/exim_%s           specified path only

   If there are more than two paths in the list, the first is used and a
panic error is logged.


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled",  Next: Datestamped log files,  Prev: Where the logs are written,  Up: Log files

53.2 Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled"
==========================================================

Some operating systems provide centralized and standardized methods for
cycling log files.  For those that do not, a utility script called
_exicyclog_ is provided (see section *note Cycling log files
(exicyclog): Cycling log files [exicyclog].).  This renames and
compresses the main and reject logs each time it is called.  The maximum
number of old logs to keep can be set.  It is suggested this script is
run as a daily _cron_ job.

   An Exim delivery process opens the main log when it first needs to
write to it, and it keeps the file open in case subsequent entries are
required - for example, if a number of different deliveries are being
done for the same message.  However, remote SMTP deliveries can take a
long time, and this means that the file may be kept open long after it
is renamed if _exicyclog_ or something similar is being used to rename
log files on a regular basis.  To ensure that a switch of log files is
noticed as soon as possible, Exim calls ‘stat()’ on the main log's name
before reusing an open file, and if the file does not exist, or its
inode has changed, the old file is closed and Exim tries to open the
main log from scratch.  Thus, an old log file may remain open for quite
some time, but no Exim processes should write to it once it has been
renamed.


File: spec.info,  Node: Datestamped log files,  Next: Logging to syslog,  Prev: Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled",  Up: Log files

53.3 Datestamped log files
==========================

Instead of cycling the main and reject log files by renaming them
periodically, some sites like to use files whose names contain a
datestamp, for example, ‘mainlog-20031225’.  The datestamp is in the
form ‘yyyymmdd’ or ‘yyyymm’.  Exim has support for this way of working.
It is enabled by setting the ‘log_file_path’ option to a path that
includes ‘%D’ or ‘%M’ at the point where the datestamp is required.  For
example:

     log_file_path = /var/spool/exim/log/%slog-%D
     log_file_path = /var/log/exim-%s-%D.log
     log_file_path = /var/spool/exim/log/%D-%slog
     log_file_path = /var/log/exim/%s.%M

   As before, ‘%s’ is replaced by "main" or "reject"; the following are
examples of names generated by the above examples:

     /var/spool/exim/log/mainlog-20021225
     /var/log/exim-reject-20021225.log
     /var/spool/exim/log/20021225-mainlog
     /var/log/exim/main.200212

   When this form of log file is specified, Exim automatically switches
to new files at midnight.  It does not make any attempt to compress old
logs; you will need to write your own script if you require this.  You
should not run _exicyclog_ with this form of logging.

   The location of the panic log is also determined by ‘log_file_path’,
but it is not datestamped, because rotation of the panic log does not
make sense.  When generating the name of the panic log, ‘%D’ or ‘%M’ are
removed from the string.  In addition, if it immediately follows a
slash, a following non-alphanumeric character is removed; otherwise a
preceding non-alphanumeric character is removed.  Thus, the four
examples above would give these panic log names:

     /var/spool/exim/log/paniclog
     /var/log/exim-panic.log
     /var/spool/exim/log/paniclog
     /var/log/exim/panic


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging to syslog,  Next: Log line flags,  Prev: Datestamped log files,  Up: Log files

53.4 Logging to syslog
======================

The use of syslog does not change what Exim logs or the format of its
messages, except in one respect.  If ‘syslog_timestamp’ is set false,
the timestamps on Exim's log lines are omitted when these lines are sent
to syslog.  Apart from that, the same strings are written to syslog as
to log files.  The syslog "facility" is set to LOG_MAIL, and the program
name to "exim" by default, but you can change these by setting the
‘syslog_facility’ and ‘syslog_processname’ options, respectively.  If
Exim was compiled with SYSLOG_LOG_PID set in ‘Local/Makefile’ (this is
the default in ‘src/EDITME’), then, on systems that permit it (all
except ULTRIX), the LOG_PID flag is set so that the ‘syslog()’ call adds
the pid as well as the time and host name to each line.  The three log
streams are mapped onto syslog priorities as follows:

   • _mainlog_ is mapped to LOG_INFO

   • _rejectlog_ is mapped to LOG_NOTICE

   • _paniclog_ is mapped to LOG_ALERT

   Many log lines are written to both _mainlog_ and _rejectlog_, and
some are written to both _mainlog_ and _paniclog_, so there will be
duplicates if these are routed by syslog to the same place.  You can
suppress this duplication by setting ‘syslog_duplication’ false.

   Exim's log lines can sometimes be very long, and some of its
_rejectlog_ entries contain multiple lines when headers are included.
To cope with both these cases, entries written to syslog are split into
separate ‘syslog()’ calls at each internal newline, and also after a
maximum of 870 data characters.  (This allows for a total syslog line
length of 1024, when additions such as timestamps are added.)  If you
are running a syslog replacement that can handle lines longer than the
1024 characters allowed by *RFC 3164
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc3164)*, you should set

     SYSLOG_LONG_LINES=yes

   in ‘Local/Makefile’ before building Exim.  That stops Exim from
splitting long lines, but it still splits at internal newlines in
_reject_ log entries.

   To make it easy to re-assemble split lines later, each component of a
split entry starts with a string of the form [<_n_>/<_m_>] or
[<_n_>\<_m_>] where <_n_> is the component number and <_m_> is the total
number of components in the entry.  The / delimiter is used when the
line was split because it was too long; if it was split because of an
internal newline, the \ delimiter is used.  For example, supposing the
length limit to be 50 instead of 870, the following would be the result
of a typical rejection message to _mainlog_ (LOG_INFO), each line in
addition being preceded by the time, host name, and pid as added by
syslog:

     [1/5] 2002-09-16 16:09:43 16RdAL-0006pc-00 rejected from
     [2/5]  [127.0.0.1] (ph10): syntax error in 'From' header
     [3/5]  when scanning for sender: missing or malformed lo
     [4/5] cal part in "<>" (envelope sender is <ph10@cam.exa
     [5/5] mple>)

   The same error might cause the following lines to be written to
"rejectlog" (LOG_NOTICE):

     [1/18] 2002-09-16 16:09:43 16RdAL-0006pc-00 rejected fro
     [2/18] m [127.0.0.1] (ph10): syntax error in 'From' head
     [3/18] er when scanning for sender: missing or malformed
     [4/18]  local part in "<>" (envelope sender is <ph10@cam
     [5\18] .example>)
     [6\18] Recipients: ph10@some.domain.cam.example
     [7\18] P Received: from [127.0.0.1] (ident=ph10)
     [8\18]        by xxxxx.cam.example with smtp (Exim 4.00)
     [9\18]        id 16RdAL-0006pc-00
     [10/18]        for ph10@cam.example; Mon, 16 Sep 2002 16:
     [11\18] 09:43 +0100
     [12\18] F From: <>
     [13\18]   Subject: this is a test header
     [18\18]   X-something: this is another header
     [15/18] I Message-Id: <E16RdAL-0006pc-00@xxxxx.cam.examp
     [16\18] le>
     [17\18] B Bcc:
     [18/18]   Date: Mon, 16 Sep 2002 16:09:43 +0100

   Log lines that are neither too long nor contain newlines are written
to syslog without modification.

   If only syslog is being used, the Exim monitor is unable to provide a
log tail display, unless syslog is routing _mainlog_ to a file on the
local host and the environment variable EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH is set to
tell the monitor where it is.


File: spec.info,  Node: Log line flags,  Next: Logging message reception,  Prev: Logging to syslog,  Up: Log files

53.5 Log line flags
===================

One line is written to the main log for each message received, and for
each successful, unsuccessful, and delayed delivery.  These lines can
readily be picked out by the distinctive two-character flags that
immediately follow the timestamp.  The flags are:

    ‘<=’message arrival
    ‘(=’message fakereject
    ‘=>’normal message delivery
    ‘->’additional address in same delivery
    ‘>>’cutthrough message delivery
    ‘*>’delivery suppressed by ‘-N’
    ‘**’delivery failed; address bounced
    ‘==’delivery deferred; temporary problem


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging message reception,  Next: Logging deliveries,  Prev: Log line flags,  Up: Log files

53.6 Logging message reception
==============================

The format of the single-line entry in the main log that is written for
every message received is shown in the basic example below, which is
split over several lines in order to fit it on the page:

     2002-10-31 08:57:53 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 <= kryten@dwarf.fict.example
       H=mailer.fict.example [192.168.123.123] U=exim
       P=smtp S=5678 id=<incoming message id>

   The address immediately following "<=" is the envelope sender
address.  A bounce message is shown with the sender address "<>", and if
it is locally generated, this is followed by an item of the form

     R=<message id>

   which is a reference to the message that caused the bounce to be
sent.

   For messages from other hosts, the H and U fields identify the remote
host and record the RFC 1413 identity of the user that sent the message,
if one was received.  The number given in square brackets is the IP
address of the sending host.  If there is a single, unparenthesized host
name in the H field, as above, it has been verified to correspond to the
IP address (see the ‘host_lookup’ option).  If the name is in
parentheses, it was the name quoted by the remote host in the SMTP HELO
or EHLO command, and has not been verified.  If verification yields a
different name to that given for HELO or EHLO, the verified name appears
first, followed by the HELO or EHLO name in parentheses.

   Misconfigured hosts (and mail forgers) sometimes put an IP address,
with or without brackets, in the HELO or EHLO command, leading to
entries in the log containing text like these examples:

     H=(10.21.32.43) [192.168.8.34]
     H=([10.21.32.43]) [192.168.8.34]

   This can be confusing.  Only the final address in square brackets can
be relied on.

   For locally generated messages (that is, messages not received over
TCP/IP), the H field is omitted, and the U field contains the login name
of the caller of Exim.

   For all messages, the P field specifies the protocol used to receive
the message.  This is the value that is stored in ‘$received_protocol’.
In the case of incoming SMTP messages, the value indicates whether or
not any SMTP extensions (ESMTP), encryption, or authentication were
used.  If the SMTP session was encrypted, there is an additional X field
that records the cipher suite that was used.

   The protocol is set to "esmtpsa" or "esmtpa" for messages received
from hosts that have authenticated themselves using the SMTP AUTH
command.  The first value is used when the SMTP connection was encrypted
("secure").  In this case there is an additional item A= followed by the
name of the authenticator that was used.  If an authenticated
identification was set up by the authenticator's ‘server_set_id’ option,
this is logged too, separated by a colon from the authenticator name.

   The id field records the existing message id, if present.  The size
of the received message is given by the S field.  When the message is
delivered, headers may be removed or added, so that the size of
delivered copies of the message may not correspond with this value (and
indeed may be different to each other).

   The ‘log_selector’ option can be used to request the logging of
additional data when a message is received.  See section *note Reducing
or increasing what is logged:: below.


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging deliveries,  Next: Discarded deliveries,  Prev: Logging message reception,  Up: Log files

53.7 Logging deliveries
=======================

The format of the single-line entry in the main log that is written for
every delivery is shown in one of the examples below, for local and
remote deliveries, respectively.  Each example has been split into
multiple lines in order to fit it on the page:

     2002-10-31 08:59:13 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 => marv
       <marv@hitch.fict.example> R=localuser T=local_delivery
     2002-10-31 09:00:10 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 =>
       monk@holistic.fict.example R=dnslookup T=remote_smtp
       H=holistic.fict.example [192.168.234.234]

   For ordinary local deliveries, the original address is given in angle
brackets after the final delivery address, which might be a pipe or a
file.  If intermediate address(es) exist between the original and the
final address, the last of these is given in parentheses after the final
address.  The R and T fields record the router and transport that were
used to process the address.

   If SMTP AUTH was used for the delivery there is an additional item A=
followed by the name of the authenticator that was used.  If an
authenticated identification was set up by the authenticator's
‘client_set_id’ option, this is logged too, as a second colon-separated
list item.  Optionally (see the ‘smtp_mailauth’ ‘log_selector’) there
may be a third list item.

   If a shadow transport was run after a successful local delivery, the
log line for the successful delivery has an item added on the end, of
the form

     ST=<shadow transport name>

   If the shadow transport did not succeed, the error message is put in
parentheses afterwards.

   When more than one address is included in a single delivery (for
example, two SMTP RCPT commands in one transaction) the second and
subsequent addresses are flagged with ‘->’ instead of ‘=>’.  When two or
more messages are delivered down a single SMTP connection, an asterisk
follows the remote IP address (and port if enabled) in the log lines for
the second and subsequent messages.  When two or more messages are
delivered down a single TLS connection, the DNS and some TLS-related
information logged for the first message delivered will not be present
in the log lines for the second and subsequent messages.  TLS cipher
information is still available.

   When delivery is done in cutthrough mode it is flagged with ‘>>’ and
the log line precedes the reception line, since cutthrough waits for a
possible rejection from the destination in case it can reject the
sourced item.

   The generation of a reply message by a filter file gets logged as a
"delivery" to the addressee, preceded by ">".

   The ‘log_selector’ option can be used to request the logging of
additional data when a message is delivered.  See section *note Reducing
or increasing what is logged:: below.


File: spec.info,  Node: Discarded deliveries,  Next: Deferred deliveries,  Prev: Logging deliveries,  Up: Log files

53.8 Discarded deliveries
=========================

When a message is discarded as a result of the command "seen finish"
being obeyed in a filter file which generates no deliveries, a log entry
of the form

     2002-12-10 00:50:49 16auJc-0001UB-00 => discarded
       <low.club@bridge.example> R=userforward

   is written, to record why no deliveries are logged.  When a message
is discarded because it is aliased to ":blackhole:" the log line is like
this:

     1999-03-02 09:44:33 10HmaX-0005vi-00 => :blackhole:
       <hole@nowhere.example> R=blackhole_router


File: spec.info,  Node: Deferred deliveries,  Next: Delivery failures,  Prev: Discarded deliveries,  Up: Log files

53.9 Deferred deliveries
========================

When a delivery is deferred, a line of the following form is logged:

     2002-12-19 16:20:23 16aiQz-0002Q5-00 == marvin@endrest.example
       R=dnslookup T=smtp defer : Connection refused

   In the case of remote deliveries, the error is the one that was given
for the last IP address that was tried.  Details of individual SMTP
failures are also written to the log, so the above line would be
preceded by something like

     2002-12-19 16:20:23 16aiQz-0002Q5-00 Failed to connect to
       mail1.endrest.example [192.168.239.239]: Connection refused

   When a deferred address is skipped because its retry time has not
been reached, a message is written to the log, but this can be
suppressed by setting an appropriate value in ‘log_selector’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Delivery failures,  Next: Fake deliveries,  Prev: Deferred deliveries,  Up: Log files

53.10 Delivery failures
=======================

If a delivery fails because an address cannot be routed, a line of the
following form is logged:

     1995-12-19 16:20:23 0tRiQz-0002Q5-00 ** jim@trek99.example
       <jim@trek99.example>: unknown mail domain

   If a delivery fails at transport time, the router and transport are
shown, and the response from the remote host is included, as in this
example:

     2002-07-11 07:14:17 17SXDU-000189-00 ** ace400@pb.example
       R=dnslookup T=remote_smtp: SMTP error from remote mailer
       after pipelined RCPT TO:<ace400@pb.example>: host
       pbmail3.py.example [192.168.63.111]: 553 5.3.0
       <ace400@pb.example>...Addressee unknown

   The word "pipelined" indicates that the SMTP PIPELINING extension was
being used.  See ‘hosts_avoid_esmtp’ in the ‘smtp’ transport for a way
of disabling PIPELINING. The log lines for all forms of delivery failure
are flagged with ‘**’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Fake deliveries,  Next: Completion,  Prev: Delivery failures,  Up: Log files

53.11 Fake deliveries
=====================

If a delivery does not actually take place because the ‘-N’ option has
been used to suppress it, a normal delivery line is written to the log,
except that "=>" is replaced by "*>".


File: spec.info,  Node: Completion,  Next: Summary of Fields in Log Lines,  Prev: Fake deliveries,  Up: Log files

53.12 Completion
================

A line of the form

     2002-10-31 09:00:11 16ZCW1-0005MB-00 Completed

   is written to the main log when a message is about to be removed from
the spool at the end of its processing.


File: spec.info,  Node: Summary of Fields in Log Lines,  Next: Other log entries,  Prev: Completion,  Up: Log files

53.13 Summary of Fields in Log Lines
====================================

A summary of the field identifiers that are used in log lines is shown
in the following table:

     A           authenticator name (and optional id and sender)
     C           SMTP confirmation on delivery
     Ci          connection identifier
                 command list for "no mail in SMTP session"
     CV          certificate verification status
     D           duration of "no mail in SMTP session"
     DKIM        domain verified in incoming message
     DN          distinguished name from peer certificate
     DS          DNSSEC secured lookups
     DSN         DSN extension information
     DT          on =>, == and ** lines: time taken for, or to attempt, a delivery
     F           sender address (on delivery lines)
     H           host name and IP address
     I           local interface used
     id          message id (from header) for incoming message
     K           CHUNKING extension used
     L           on <= and => lines: PIPELINING extension used
     M8S         8BITMIME status for incoming message
     P           on <= lines: protocol used
                 on => and ** lines: return path
     PRDR        PRDR extension used
     PRX         on <= and => lines: proxy address
     PS          on => and ** lines: protocol sequence
     Q           alternate queue name
     QT          on => lines: time spent on queue so far
                 on "Completed" lines: time spent on queue
     R           on <= lines: reference for local bounce
                 on =>  >> ** and == lines: router name
     RT          on <= lines: time taken for reception
     S           size of message in bytes
     SNI         server name indication from TLS client hello
     ST          shadow transport name
     T           on <= lines: message subject (topic)
     TFO         connection took advantage of TCP Fast Open
                 on => ** and == lines: transport name
     U           local user or RFC 1413 identity
     X           TLS cipher suite


File: spec.info,  Node: Other log entries,  Next: Reducing or increasing what is logged,  Prev: Summary of Fields in Log Lines,  Up: Log files

53.14 Other log entries
=======================

Various other types of log entry are written from time to time.  Most
should be self-explanatory.  Among the more common are:

   • _retry time not reached_  An address previously suffered a
     temporary error during routing or local delivery, and the time to
     retry has not yet arrived.  This message is not written to an
     individual message log file unless it happens during the first
     delivery attempt.

   • _retry time not reached for any host_  An address previously
     suffered temporary errors during remote delivery, and the retry
     time has not yet arrived for any of the hosts to which it is
     routed.

   • _spool file locked_  An attempt to deliver a message cannot proceed
     because some other Exim process is already working on the message.
     This can be quite common if queue running processes are started at
     frequent intervals.  The _exiwhat_ utility script can be used to
     find out what Exim processes are doing.

   • _error ignored_  There are several circumstances that give rise to
     this message:

       1. Exim failed to deliver a bounce message whose age was greater
          than ‘ignore_bounce_errors_after’.  The bounce was discarded.

       2. A filter file set up a delivery using the "noerror" option,
          and the delivery failed.  The delivery was discarded.

       3. A delivery set up by a router configured with

                   errors_to = <>

          failed.  The delivery was discarded.

   • _DKIM: d=_  Verbose results of a DKIM verification attempt, if
     enabled for logging and the message has a DKIM signature header.


File: spec.info,  Node: Reducing or increasing what is logged,  Next: Message log,  Prev: Other log entries,  Up: Log files

53.15 Reducing or increasing what is logged
===========================================

By setting the ‘log_selector’ global option, you can disable some of
Exim's default logging to the main log, or you can request additional
logging.  The value of ‘log_selector’ is made up of names preceded by
plus or minus characters.  For example:

     log_selector = +arguments -retry_defer

   The list of optional log items is in the following table, with the
default selection marked by asterisks:

    ‘8bitmime’                                    received 8BITMIME
                                                  status
    ‘acl_warn_skipped’   *                        skipped ‘warn’
                                                  statement in ACL
    ‘address_rewrite’                             address rewriting
    ‘all_parents’                                 all parents in =>
                                                  lines
    ‘arguments’                                   command line arguments
    ‘connection_id’                               connection identifier
    ‘connection_reject’  *                        connection rejections
    ‘delay_delivery’     *                        immediate delivery
                                                  delayed
    ‘deliver_time’                                time taken to attempt
                                                  delivery
    ‘delivery_size’                               add ‘S=’_nnn_ to =>
                                                  lines
    ‘dkim’               *                        DKIM verified domain
                                                  on <= lines
    ‘dkim_verbose’                                separate full DKIM
                                                  verification result
                                                  line, per signature;
                                                  DKIM signing
    ‘dmarc’                                       DMARC accept marker on
                                                  accept/reject lines
    ‘dmarc_verbose’                               DMARC status on
                                                  accept/reject lines
    ‘dnslist_defer’      *                        defers of DNS list
                                                  (aka RBL) lookups
    ‘dnssec’                                      DNSSEC secured lookups
    ‘dsn’                                         DSN extension use
    ‘etrn’               *                        ETRN commands
    ‘host_lookup_failed’ *                        as it says
    ‘ident_timeout’                               timeout for ident
                                                  connection
    ‘incoming_interface’                          local interface & port
                                                  on <= and => lines
    ‘incoming_port’                               remote port on <=
                                                  lines
    ‘lost_incoming_connection’*                   as it says (includes
                                                  timeouts)
    ‘millisec’                                    millisecond timestamps
                                                  and RT,QT,DT,D times
    ‘msg_id’             *                        on <= lines,
                                                  Message-ID: header
                                                  value
    ‘msg_id_created’                              on <= lines,
                                                  Message-ID: header
                                                  value when one had to
                                                  be added
    ‘outgoing_interface’                          local interface on =>
                                                  lines
    ‘outgoing_port’                               add remote port to =>
                                                  lines
    ‘protocol_detail’                             detail on protocol use
    ‘queue_run’          *                        start and end queue
                                                  runs
    ‘queue_time’                                  time on queue for one
                                                  recipient
    ‘queue_time_exclusive’                        exclude recieve time
                                                  from QT times
    ‘queue_time_overall’                          time on queue for
                                                  whole message
    ‘pid’                                         Exim process id
    ‘pipelining’                                  PIPELINING use, on <=
                                                  and => lines
    ‘proxy’                                       proxy address on <=
                                                  and => lines
    ‘receive_time’                                time taken to receive
                                                  message
    ‘received_recipients’                         recipients on <= lines
    ‘received_sender’                             sender on <= lines
    ‘rejected_header’    *                        header contents on
                                                  reject log
    ‘retry_defer’        *                        "retry time not
                                                  reached"
    ‘return_path_on_delivery’                     put return path on =>
                                                  and ** lines
    ‘sender_on_delivery’                          add sender to => lines
    ‘sender_verify_fail’ *                        sender verification
                                                  failures
    ‘size_reject’        *                        rejection because too
                                                  big
    ‘skip_delivery’      *                        delivery skipped in a
                                                  queue run
    ‘smtp_confirmation’  *                        SMTP confirmation on
                                                  => lines
    ‘smtp_connection’                             incoming SMTP
                                                  connections
    ‘smtp_incomplete_transaction’                 incomplete SMTP
                                                  transactions
    ‘smtp_mailauth’                               AUTH argument to MAIL
                                                  commands
    ‘smtp_no_mail’                                session with no MAIL
                                                  commands
    ‘smtp_protocol_error’                         SMTP protocol errors
    ‘smtp_syntax_error’                           SMTP syntax errors
    ‘spf’                                         SPF pass marker on
                                                  accept/reject lines
    ‘spf_verbose’                                 SPF status on
                                                  accept/reject lines
    ‘subject’                                     contents of _Subject:_
                                                  on <= lines
    ‘tls_certificate_verified’*                   certificate
                                                  verification status
    ‘tls_cipher’         *                        TLS cipher suite on <=
                                                  and => lines
    ‘tls_on_connect’                              alternate set of
                                                  protocol labels
    ‘tls_peerdn’                                  TLS peer DN on <= and
                                                  => lines
    ‘tls_resumption’                              append * to cipher
                                                  field
    ‘tls_sni’                                     TLS SNI on <= lines
    ‘unknown_in_list’                             lookup failed in list
                                                  match
    ‘all’                                         *all of the above*

   See also the ‘slow_lookup_log’ main configuration option, section
*note Logging::

   More details on each of these items follows:

   • ‘8bitmime’: This causes Exim to log any 8BITMIME status of received
     messages, which may help in tracking down interoperability issues
     with ancient MTAs that are not 8bit clean.  This is added to the
     "<=" line, tagged with ‘M8S=’ and a value of ‘0’, ‘7’ or ‘8’,
     corresponding to "not given", ‘7BIT’ and ‘8BITMIME’ respectively.

   • ‘acl_warn_skipped’: When an ACL ‘warn’ statement is skipped because
     one of its conditions cannot be evaluated, a log line to this
     effect is written if this log selector is set.

   • ‘address_rewrite’: This applies both to global rewrites and
     per-transport rewrites, but not to rewrites in filters run as an
     unprivileged user (because such users cannot access the log).

   • ‘all_parents’: Normally only the original and final addresses are
     logged on delivery lines; with this selector, intermediate parents
     are given in parentheses between them.

   • ‘arguments’: This causes Exim to write the arguments with which it
     was called to the main log, preceded by the current working
     directory.  This is a debugging feature, added to make it easier to
     find out how certain MUAs call ‘/usr/sbin/sendmail’.  The logging
     does not happen if Exim has given up root privilege because it was
     called with the ‘-C’ or ‘-D’ options.  Arguments that are empty or
     that contain white space are quoted.  Non-printing characters are
     shown as escape sequences.  This facility cannot log unrecognized
     arguments, because the arguments are checked before the
     configuration file is read.  The only way to log such cases is to
     interpose a script such as ‘util/logargs.sh’ between the caller and
     Exim.

   • ‘connection_id’: An identifier for the accepted connection is added
     to connection start and end lines and to message accept lines.  The
     identifier is tagged by Ci=.  The value is PID-based, so will reset
     on reboot and will wrap.

   • ‘connection_reject’: A log entry is written whenever an incoming
     SMTP connection is rejected, for whatever reason.

   • ‘delay_delivery’: A log entry is written whenever a delivery
     process is not started for an incoming message because the load is
     too high or too many messages were received on one connection.
     Logging does not occur if no delivery process is started because
     ‘queue_only’ is set or ‘-odq’ was used.

   • ‘deliver_time’: For each delivery, the amount of real time it has
     taken to perform the actual delivery is logged as DT=<_time_>, for
     example, ‘DT=1s’.  If millisecond logging is enabled, short times
     will be shown with greater precision, eg.  ‘DT=0.304s’.

   • ‘delivery_size’: For each delivery, the size of message delivered
     is added to the "=>" line, tagged with S=.

   • ‘dkim’: For message acceptance log lines, when a DKIM signature in
     the header verifies successfully a tag of DKIM is added, with one
     of the verified domains.

     ‘dkim_verbose’: A log entry is written for each attempted DKIM
     verification.  Also, on message delivery lines signing information
     (domain and selector) is added, tagged with DKIM=.

   • ‘dmarc’: A ‘DMARC’ item is added to the message accept or reject
     line if DMARC verification was done and resulted in a accept
     status.

     ‘dmarc_verbose’: A ‘DMARC=’ item is added to the message accept or
     reject line if DMARC verification was done, with the result status.

   • ‘dnslist_defer’: A log entry is written if an attempt to look up a
     host in a DNS black list suffers a temporary error.

   • ‘dnssec’: For message acceptance and (attempted) delivery log
     lines, when dns lookups gave secure results a tag of DS is added.
     For acceptance this covers the reverse and forward lookups for host
     name verification.  It does not cover helo-name verification.  For
     delivery this covers the SRV, MX, A and/or AAAA lookups.

   • ‘dsn’: When a DSN extension was used for a message, an item with a
     tag of DSN is added to accept, reject and delivery log lines.  For
     accept and reject the values indicate the MAIL and RCPT extensions
     used.  For a recipient reject, the RCPT exensions for that recipent
     are indicated; otherwise the aggregate of RCPT extensions received
     for the message is given.  For a delivery (success or failure), the
     DSN status for the delivery connection is indicated.

   • ‘etrn’: Every valid ETRN command that is received is logged, before
     the ACL is run to determine whether or not it is actually accepted.
     An invalid ETRN command, or one received within a message
     transaction is not logged by this selector (see ‘smtp_syntax_error’
     and ‘smtp_protocol_error’).

   • ‘host_lookup_failed’: When a lookup of a host's IP addresses fails
     to find any addresses, or when a lookup of an IP address fails to
     find a host name, a log line is written.  This logging does not
     apply to direct DNS lookups when routing email addresses, but it
     does apply to "byname" lookups.

   • ‘ident_timeout’: A log line is written whenever an attempt to
     connect to a client's ident port times out.

   • ‘incoming_interface’: The interface on which a message was received
     is added to the "<=" line as an IP address in square brackets,
     tagged by I= and followed by a colon and the port number.  The
     local interface and port are also added to other SMTP log lines,
     for example, "SMTP connection from", to rejection lines, and
     (despite the name) to outgoing "=>", "->", "==" and "**" lines.
     The latter can be disabled by turning off the ‘outgoing_interface’
     option.

   • ‘proxy’: The internal (closest to the system running Exim) IP
     address of the proxy, tagged by PRX=, on the "<=" line for a
     message accepted on a proxied connection or the "=>" line for a
     message delivered on a proxied connection.  See *note Inbound
     proxies:: for more information.

   • ‘incoming_port’: The remote port number from which a message was
     received is added to log entries and _Received:_ header lines,
     following the IP address in square brackets, and separated from it
     by a colon.  This is implemented by changing the value that is put
     in the ‘$sender_fullhost’ and ‘$sender_rcvhost’ variables.
     Recording the remote port number has become more important with the
     widening use of NAT (see *RFC 2505
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2505#section-3.4)*).

   • ‘lost_incoming_connection’: A log line is written when an incoming
     SMTP connection is unexpectedly dropped.

   • ‘millisec’: Timestamps have a period and three decimal places of
     finer granularity appended to the seconds value.

   • ‘msg_id’: The value of the Message-ID: header.

   • ‘msg_id_created’: The value of the Message-ID: header, when one had
     to be created.  This will be either because the message is a
     bounce, or was submitted locally (submission mode) without one.
     The field identifier will have an asterix appended: "id*=".

   • ‘outgoing_interface’: If ‘incoming_interface’ is turned on, then
     the interface on which a message was sent is added to delivery
     lines as an I= tag followed by IP address in square brackets.  You
     can disable this by turning off the ‘outgoing_interface’ option.

   • ‘outgoing_port’: The remote port number is added to delivery log
     lines (those containing => tags) following the IP address.  The
     local port is also added if ‘incoming_interface’ and
     ‘outgoing_interface’ are both enabled.  This option is not included
     in the default setting, because for most ordinary configurations,
     the remote port number is always 25 (the SMTP port), and the local
     port is a random ephemeral port.  In both cases, if the ‘log_ports’
     option is defined then that list controls what port numbers are (or
     are not) added

   • ‘pid’: The current process id is added to every log line, in square
     brackets, immediately after the time and date.

   • ‘pipelining’: A field is added to delivery and accept log lines
     when the ESMTP PIPELINING extension was used.  The field is a
     single "L".

     On accept lines, where PIPELINING was offered but not used by the
     client, the field has a minus appended.

     If Exim is built without the DISABLE_PIPE_CONNECT build option
     accept "L" fields have a period appended if the feature was offered
     but not used, or an asterisk appended if used.  Delivery "L" fields
     have an asterisk appended if used.

   • ‘protocol_detail’: Additional details on protocol use are logged.

        • Under OpenSSL in server mode, log an extra line when a TCP RST
          is received directly after a QUIT.

          Outlook is consistently doing this as of writing; not waiting
          for the SMTP response to its QUIT, not properly closing the
          TLS session and not properly closing the TCP connection.

        • In a delivery ("=>") log line for a remote transport add an
          element showing the sequence of protocol actions used during
          SMTP session startup.  The element is tagged "PS=" and
          contains a left-to-right set of letters for the time-order of
          actions.  These letters may be used:

          s                                    TLS startup, either tls-on-connect
                                               or STARTTLS
          e                                    EHLO
          h                                    HELO
          l                                    LHLO
          a                                    Authentication

   • ‘queue_run’: The start and end of every queue run are logged.

   • ‘queue_time’: The amount of time the message has been in the queue
     on the local host is logged as QT=<_time_> on delivery (‘=>’)
     lines, for example, ‘QT=3m45s’.  If millisecond logging is enabled,
     short times will be shown with greater precision, eg.  ‘QT=1.578s’.

   • ‘queue_time_overall’: The amount of time the message has been in
     the queue on the local host is logged as QT=<_time_> on "Completed"
     lines, for example, ‘QT=3m45s’.

   • ‘receive_time’: For each message, the amount of real time it has
     taken to perform the reception is logged as RT=<_time_>, for
     example, ‘RT=1s’.  If millisecond logging is enabled, short times
     will be shown with greater precision, eg.  ‘RT=0.204s’.

   • ‘received_recipients’: The recipients of a message are listed in
     the main log as soon as the message is received.  The list appears
     at the end of the log line that is written when a message is
     received, preceded by the word "for".  The addresses are listed
     after they have been qualified, but before any rewriting has taken
     place.  Recipients that were discarded by an ACL for MAIL or RCPT
     do not appear in the list.

   • ‘received_sender’: The unrewritten original sender of a message is
     added to the end of the log line that records the message's
     arrival, after the word "from" (before the recipients if
     ‘received_recipients’ is also set).

   • ‘rejected_header’: If a message's header has been received at the
     time a rejection is written to the reject log, the complete header
     is added to the log.  Header logging can be turned off individually
     for messages that are rejected by the ‘local_scan()’ function (see
     section *note API for local_scan(): API for local_scan[].).

   • ‘retry_defer’: A log line is written if a delivery is deferred
     because a retry time has not yet been reached.  However, this
     "retry time not reached" message is always omitted from individual
     message logs after the first delivery attempt.

   • ‘return_path_on_delivery’: The return path that is being
     transmitted with the message is included in delivery and bounce
     lines, using the tag P=.  This is omitted if no delivery actually
     happens, for example, if routing fails, or if delivery is to
     ‘/dev/null’ or to ‘:blackhole:’.

   • ‘sender_on_delivery’: The message's sender address is added to
     every delivery and bounce line, tagged by F= (for "from").  This is
     the original sender that was received with the message; it is not
     necessarily the same as the outgoing return path.

   • ‘sender_verify_fail’: If this selector is unset, the separate log
     line that gives details of a sender verification failure is not
     written.  Log lines for the rejection of SMTP commands contain just
     "sender verify failed", so some detail is lost.

   • ‘size_reject’: A log line is written whenever a message is rejected
     because it is too big.

   • ‘skip_delivery’: A log line is written whenever a message is
     skipped during a queue run because it another process is already
     delivering it or because it is frozen.  The message that is written
     is either "spool file is locked" or "message is frozen".

   • ‘smtp_confirmation’: The response to the final "."  in the SMTP or
     LMTP dialogue for outgoing messages is added to delivery log lines
     in the form ‘C=’<_text_>.  A number of MTAs (including Exim) return
     an identifying string in this response.

   • ‘smtp_connection’: A log line is written whenever an incoming SMTP
     connection is established or closed, unless the connection is from
     a host that matches ‘hosts_connection_nolog’.  (In contrast,
     ‘lost_incoming_connection’ applies only when the closure is
     unexpected.)  This applies to connections from local processes that
     use ‘-bs’ as well as to TCP/IP connections.  If a connection is
     dropped in the middle of a message, a log line is always written,
     whether or not this selector is set, but otherwise nothing is
     written at the start and end of connections unless this selector is
     enabled.

     For TCP/IP connections to an Exim daemon, the current number of
     connections is included in the log message for each new connection,
     but note that the count is reset if the daemon is restarted.  Also,
     because connections are closed (and the closure is logged) in
     subprocesses, the count may not include connections that have been
     closed but whose termination the daemon has not yet noticed.  Thus,
     while it is possible to match up the opening and closing of
     connections in the log, the value of the logged counts may not be
     entirely accurate.

   • ‘smtp_incomplete_transaction’: When a mail transaction is aborted
     by RSET, QUIT, loss of connection, or otherwise, the incident is
     logged, and the message sender plus any accepted recipients are
     included in the log line.  This can provide evidence of dictionary
     attacks.

   • ‘smtp_no_mail’: A line is written to the main log whenever an
     accepted SMTP connection terminates without having issued a MAIL
     command.  This includes both the case when the connection is
     dropped, and the case when QUIT is used.  It does not include cases
     where the connection is rejected right at the start (by an ACL, or
     because there are too many connections, or whatever).  These cases
     already have their own log lines.

     The log line that is written contains the identity of the client in
     the usual way, followed by D= and a time, which records the
     duration of the connection.  If the connection was authenticated,
     this fact is logged exactly as it is for an incoming message, with
     an A= item.  If the connection was encrypted, CV=, DN=, and X=
     items may appear as they do for an incoming message, controlled by
     the same logging options.

     Finally, if any SMTP commands were issued during the connection, a
     C= item is added to the line, listing the commands that were used.
     For example,

          C=EHLO,QUIT

     shows that the client issued QUIT straight after EHLO. If there
     were fewer than 20 commands, they are all listed.  If there were
     more than 20 commands, the last 20 are listed, preceded by "...".
     However, with the default setting of 10 for
     ‘smtp_accept_max_nonmail’, the connection will in any case have
     been aborted before 20 non-mail commands are processed.

   • ‘smtp_mailauth’: A third subfield with the authenticated sender,
     colon-separated, is appended to the A= item for a message arrival
     or delivery log line, if an AUTH argument to the SMTP MAIL command
     (see *note The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands::) was accepted or
     used.

   • ‘smtp_protocol_error’: A log line is written for every SMTP
     protocol error encountered.  Exim does not have perfect detection
     of all protocol errors because of transmission delays and the use
     of pipelining.  If PIPELINING has been advertised to a client, an
     Exim server assumes that the client will use it, and therefore it
     does not count "expected" errors (for example, RCPT received after
     rejecting MAIL) as protocol errors.

   • ‘smtp_syntax_error’: A log line is written for every SMTP syntax
     error encountered.  An unrecognized command is treated as a syntax
     error.  For an external connection, the host identity is given; for
     an internal connection using ‘-bs’ the sender identification
     (normally the calling user) is given.

   • ‘spf’: An ‘SPF’ item is added to the message accept or reject line
     if SPF verification was done and resulted in a pass status.

     ‘spf_verbose’: An ‘SPF=’ item is added to the message accept or
     reject line if SPF verification was done, with the result status.

   • ‘subject’: The subject of the message is added to the arrival log
     line, preceded by "T=" (T for "topic", since S is already used for
     "size").  Any MIME "words" in the subject are decoded.  The
     ‘print_topbitchars’ option specifies whether characters with values
     greater than 127 should be logged unchanged, or whether they should
     be rendered as escape sequences.

   • ‘tls_certificate_verified’: An extra item is added to <= and => log
     lines when TLS is in use and the peer presented a certificate
     (servers must, but clients need not).  The item is ‘CV=yes’ if the
     peer's certificate was verified using a CA trust anchor, ‘CV=dane’
     if using a DNS trust anchor, and ‘CV=no’ if verification failed.

   • ‘tls_cipher’: When a message is sent or received over an encrypted
     connection, the cipher suite used is added to the log line,
     preceded by X=.

   • ‘tls_peerdn’: When a message is sent or received over an encrypted
     connection, and a certificate is supplied by the remote host, the
     peer DN is added to the log line, preceded by DN=.

   • ‘tls_on_connect’: When a message is received over an encrypted
     connection started at connect time rather than by STARTTLS, use one
     of an alternate set of protocol names for both the "P=" log element
     and the ‘$received_protocol’ variable.  For details see the entry
     for that variable.

   • ‘tls_resumption’: When a message is sent or received over an
     encrypted connection and the TLS session resumed one used on a
     previous TCP connection, an asterisk is appended to the X= cipher
     field in the log line.

   • ‘tls_sni’: When a message is received over an encrypted connection,
     and the remote host provided the Server Name Indication extension,
     the SNI is added to the log line, preceded by SNI=.

   • ‘unknown_in_list’: This setting causes a log entry to be written
     when the result of a list match is failure because a DNS lookup
     failed, or because a bad IP address was in the list.


File: spec.info,  Node: Message log,  Prev: Reducing or increasing what is logged,  Up: Log files

53.16 Message log
=================

In addition to the general log files, Exim writes a log file for each
message that it handles.  The names of these per-message logs are the
message ids, and they are kept in the ‘msglog’ sub-directory of the
spool directory.  Each message log contains copies of the log lines that
apply to the message.  This makes it easier to inspect the status of an
individual message without having to search the main log.  A message log
is deleted when processing of the message is complete, unless
‘preserve_message_logs’ is set, but this should be used only with great
care because they can fill up your disk very quickly.

   On a heavily loaded system, it may be desirable to disable the use of
per-message logs, in order to reduce disk I/O. This can be done by
setting the ‘message_logs’ option false.


File: spec.info,  Node: Exim utilities,  Next: The Exim monitor,  Prev: Log files,  Up: Top

54 Exim utilities
*****************

A number of utility scripts and programs are supplied with Exim and are
described in this chapter.  There is also the Exim Monitor, which is
covered in the next chapter.  The utilities described here are:

    *note Finding out what Exim processes are doing (exiwhat): Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat]._exiwhat_list what Exim processes are doing
    *note Selective queue listing (exiqgrep): Selective queue listing [exiqgrep]._exiqgrep_grep the queue
    *note Summarizing the queue (exiqsumm): Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm]._exiqsumm_summarize the queue
    *note Extracting specific information from the log (exigrep): Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep]._exigrep_search the main log
    *note Selecting messages by various criteria (exipick): Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick]._exipick_select messages on various criteria
    *note Cycling log files (exicyclog): Cycling log files [exicyclog]._exicyclog_cycle (rotate) log files
    *note Mail statistics (eximstats): Mail statistics [eximstats]._eximstats_extract statistics from the log
    *note Checking access policy (exim_checkaccess): Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess]._exim_checkaccess_check address acceptance from given IP
    *note Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild): Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild]._exim_dbmbuild_build a DBM file
    *note Finding individual retry times (exinext): Finding individual retry times [exinext]._exinext_extract retry information
    *note exim_dumpdb::_exim_dumpdb_dump a hints database
    *note exim_tidydb::_exim_tidydb_clean up a hints database
    *note exim_fixdb::_exim_fixdb_patch a hints database
    *note Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock): Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock]._exim_lock_lock a mailbox file
    *note Message Ids for humans (exim_msgdate): Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate]._exim_msgdate_Message Ids for humans (exim_msgdate)

   Another utility that might be of use to sites with many MTAs is Tom
Kistner's _exilog_.  It provides log visualizations across multiple Exim
servers.  See *https://duncanthrax.net/exilog/
(https://duncanthrax.net/exilog/)* for details.

* Menu:

* Finding out what Exim processes are doing (exiwhat): Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat].
* Selective queue listing (exiqgrep): Selective queue listing [exiqgrep].
* Summarizing the queue (exiqsumm): Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm].
* Extracting specific information from the log (exigrep): Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep].
* Selecting messages by various criteria (exipick): Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick].
* Cycling log files (exicyclog): Cycling log files [exicyclog].
* Mail statistics (eximstats): Mail statistics [eximstats].
* Checking access policy (exim_checkaccess): Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess].
* Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild): Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
* Finding individual retry times (exinext): Finding individual retry times [exinext].
* Hints database maintenance::
* Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock): Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock].
* Message Ids for humans (exim_msgdate): Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate].


File: spec.info,  Node: Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat],  Next: Selective queue listing [exiqgrep],  Up: Exim utilities

54.1 Finding out what Exim processes are doing (exiwhat)
========================================================

On operating systems that can restart a system call after receiving a
signal (most modern OS), an Exim process responds to the SIGUSR1 signal
by writing a line describing what it is doing to the file
‘exim-process.info’ in the Exim spool directory.  The _exiwhat_ script
sends the signal to all Exim processes it can find, having first emptied
the file.  It then waits for one second to allow the Exim processes to
react before displaying the results.  In order to run _exiwhat_
successfully you have to have sufficient privilege to send the signal to
the Exim processes, so it is normally run as root.

   *Warning*: This is not an efficient process.  It is intended for
occasional use by system administrators.  It is not sensible, for
example, to set up a script that sends SIGUSR1 signals to Exim processes
at short intervals.

   Unfortunately, the _ps_ command that _exiwhat_ uses to find Exim
processes varies in different operating systems.  Not only are different
options used, but the format of the output is different.  For this
reason, there are some system configuration options that configure
exactly how _exiwhat_ works.  If it doesn't seem to be working for you,
check the following compile-time options:

    ‘EXIWHAT_PS_CMD’   the command for running _ps_
    ‘EXIWHAT_PS_ARG’   the argument for _ps_
    ‘EXIWHAT_EGREP_ARG’the argument for _egrep_ to select from _ps_
                       output
    ‘EXIWHAT_KILL_ARG’ the argument for the _kill_ command

   An example of typical output from _exiwhat_ is

     164 daemon: -q1h, listening on port 25
     10483 running queue: waiting for 0tAycK-0002ij-00 (10492)
     10492 delivering 0tAycK-0002ij-00 to mail.ref.example
       [10.19.42.42] (editor@ref.example)
     10592 handling incoming call from [192.168.243.242]
     10628 accepting a local non-SMTP message

   The first number in the output line is the process number.  The third
line has been split here, in order to fit it on the page.


File: spec.info,  Node: Selective queue listing [exiqgrep],  Next: Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm],  Prev: Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat],  Up: Exim utilities

54.2 Selective queue listing (exiqgrep)
=======================================

This utility is a Perl script contributed by Matt Hubbard.  It runs

     exim -bpu

   or (in case *-a* switch is specified)

     exim -bp

   to obtain a queue listing, and then greps the output to select
messages that match given criteria.  The following selection options are
available:

*-f* <_regex_>
     Match the sender address using a case-insensitive search.  The
     field that is tested is enclosed in angle brackets, so you can test
     for bounce messages with

          exiqgrep -f '^<>$'

*-r* <_regex_>
     Match a recipient address using a case-insensitive search.  The
     field that is tested is not enclosed in angle brackets.

*-s* <_regex_>
     Match against the size field.

*-y* <_seconds_>
     Match messages that are younger than the given time.

*-o* <_seconds_>
     Match messages that are older than the given time.

*-z*
     Match only frozen messages.

*-x*
     Match only non-frozen messages.

*-G* <_queuename_>
     Match only messages in the given queue.  Without this, the default
     queue is searched.

   The following options control the format of the output:

*-c*
     Display only the count of matching messages.

*-l*
     Long format - display the full message information as output by
     Exim.  This is the default.

*-i*
     Display message ids only.

*-b*
     Brief format - one line per message.

*-R*
     Display messages in reverse order.

*-a*
     Include delivered recipients in queue listing.

   The following options give alternates for configuration:

*-C* <_config file_>
     is used to specify an alternate ‘exim.conf’ which might contain
     alternate exim configuration the queue management might be using.

*-E* <_path_>
     can be used to specify a path for the exim binary, overriding the
     built-in one.

   There is one more option, ‘-h’, which outputs a list of options.  At
least one selection option, or either the *-c* or *-h* option, must be
given.


File: spec.info,  Node: Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm],  Next: Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep],  Prev: Selective queue listing [exiqgrep],  Up: Exim utilities

54.3 Summarizing the queue (exiqsumm)
=====================================

The _exiqsumm_ utility is a Perl script which reads the output of ‘exim
-bp’ and produces a summary of the messages in the queue.  Thus, you use
it by running a command such as

     exim -bp | exiqsumm

   The output consists of one line for each domain that has messages
waiting for it, as in the following example:

     3   2322   74m   66m  msn.com.example

   Each line lists the number of pending deliveries for a domain, their
total volume, and the length of time that the oldest and the newest
messages have been waiting.  Note that the number of pending deliveries
is greater than the number of messages when messages have more than one
recipient.

   A summary line is output at the end.  By default the output is sorted
on the domain name, but _exiqsumm_ has the options ‘-a’ and ‘-c’, which
cause the output to be sorted by oldest message and by count of
messages, respectively.  There are also three options that split the
messages for each domain into two or more subcounts: ‘-b’ separates
bounce messages, ‘-f’ separates frozen messages, and ‘-s’ separates
messages according to their sender.

   The output of _exim -bp_ contains the original addresses in the
message, so this also applies to the output from _exiqsumm_.  No domains
from addresses generated by aliasing or forwarding are included (unless
the ‘one_time’ option of the ‘redirect’ router has been used to convert
them into "top level" addresses).


File: spec.info,  Node: Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep],  Next: Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick],  Prev: Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm],  Up: Exim utilities

54.4 Extracting specific information from the log (exigrep)
===========================================================

The _exigrep_ utility is a Perl script that searches one or more main
log files for entries that match a given pattern.  When it finds a
match, it extracts all the log entries for the relevant message, not
just those that match the pattern.  Thus, _exigrep_ can extract complete
log entries for a given message, or all mail for a given user, or for a
given host, for example.  The input files can be in Exim log format or
syslog format.  If a matching log line is not associated with a specific
message, it is included in _exigrep_'s output without any additional
lines.  The usage is:

     exigrep [-t<n>] [-I] [-l] [-M] [-v] <pattern> [<log file>] ...

   If no log filenames are given on the command line, the standard input
is read.

   The ‘-t’ argument specifies a number of seconds.  It adds an
additional condition for message selection.  Messages that are complete
are shown only if they spent more than <_n_> seconds in the queue.

   By default, _exigrep_ does case-insensitive matching.  The ‘-I’
option makes it case-sensitive.  This may give a performance improvement
when searching large log files.  Without ‘-I’, the Perl pattern matches
use Perl's ‘/i’ option; with ‘-I’ they do not.  In both cases it is
possible to change the case sensitivity within the pattern by using
‘(?i)’ or ‘(?-i)’.

   The ‘-l’ option means "literal", that is, treat all characters in the
pattern as standing for themselves.  Otherwise the pattern must be a
Perl regular expression.

   The ‘-v’ option inverts the matching condition.  That is, a line is
selected if it does _not_ match the pattern.

   The ‘-M’ options means "related messages".  _exigrep_ will show
messages that are generated as a result/response to a message that
_exigrep_ matched normally.

   Example of ‘-M’: user_a sends a message to user_b, which generates a
bounce back to user_b.  If _exigrep_ is used to search for "user_a",
only the first message will be displayed.  But if _exigrep_ is used to
search for "user_b", the first and the second (bounce) message will be
displayed.  Using ‘-M’ with _exigrep_ when searching for "user_a" will
show both messages since the bounce is "related" to or a "result" of the
first message that was found by the search term.

   If the location of a _zcat_ command is known from the definition of
ZCAT_COMMAND in ‘Local/Makefile’, _exigrep_ automatically passes any
file whose name ends in COMPRESS_SUFFIX through _zcat_ as it searches
it.  If the ZCAT_COMMAND is not executable, _exigrep_ tries to use
autodetection of some well known compression extensions.


File: spec.info,  Node: Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick],  Next: Cycling log files [exicyclog],  Prev: Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep],  Up: Exim utilities

54.5 Selecting messages by various criteria (exipick)
=====================================================

John Jetmore's _exipick_ utility is included in the Exim distribution.
It lists messages from the queue according to a variety of criteria.
For details of _exipick_'s facilities, run _exipick_ with the ‘--help’
option.


File: spec.info,  Node: Cycling log files [exicyclog],  Next: Mail statistics [eximstats],  Prev: Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick],  Up: Exim utilities

54.6 Cycling log files (exicyclog)
==================================

The _exicyclog_ script can be used to cycle (rotate) _mainlog_ and
_rejectlog_ files.  This is not necessary if only syslog is being used,
or if you are using log files with datestamps in their names (see
section *note Datestamped log files::).  Some operating systems have
their own standard mechanisms for log cycling, and these can be used
instead of _exicyclog_ if preferred.  There are two command line options
for _exicyclog_:

   • ‘-k’ <_count_> specifies the number of log files to keep,
     overriding the default that is set when Exim is built.  The default
     default is 10.

   • ‘-l’ <_path_> specifies the log file path, in the same format as
     Exim's ‘log_file_path’ option (for example, ‘/var/log/exim_%slog’),
     again overriding the script's default, which is to find the setting
     from Exim's configuration.

   Each time _exicyclog_ is run the filenames get "shuffled down" by
one.  If the main log filename is ‘mainlog’ (the default) then when
_exicyclog_ is run ‘mainlog’ becomes ‘mainlog.01’, the previous
‘mainlog.01’ becomes ‘mainlog.02’ and so on, up to the limit that is set
in the script or by the ‘-k’ option.  Log files whose numbers exceed the
limit are discarded.  Reject logs are handled similarly.

   If the limit is greater than 99, the script uses 3-digit numbers such
as ‘mainlog.001’, ‘mainlog.002’, etc.  If you change from a number less
than 99 to one that is greater, or _vice versa_, you will have to fix
the names of any existing log files.

   If no ‘mainlog’ file exists, the script does nothing.  Files that
"drop off" the end are deleted.  All files with numbers greater than 01
are compressed, using a compression command which is configured by the
COMPRESS_COMMAND setting in ‘Local/Makefile’.  It is usual to run
_exicyclog_ daily from a root ‘crontab’ entry of the form

     1 0 * * * su exim -c /usr/exim/bin/exicyclog

   assuming you have used the name "exim" for the Exim user.  You can
run _exicyclog_ as root if you wish, but there is no need.


File: spec.info,  Node: Mail statistics [eximstats],  Next: Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess],  Prev: Cycling log files [exicyclog],  Up: Exim utilities

54.7 Mail statistics (eximstats)
================================

A Perl script called _eximstats_ is provided for extracting statistical
information from log files.  The output is either plain text, or HTML.

   The _eximstats_ script has been hacked about quite a bit over time.
The latest version is the result of some extensive revision by Steve
Campbell.  A lot of information is given by default, but there are
options for suppressing various parts of it.  Following any options, the
arguments to the script are a list of files, which should be main log
files.  For example:

     eximstats -nr /var/spool/exim/log/mainlog.01

   By default, _eximstats_ extracts information about the number and
volume of messages received from or delivered to various hosts.  The
information is sorted both by message count and by volume, and the top
fifty hosts in each category are listed on the standard output.  Similar
information, based on email addresses or domains instead of hosts can be
requested by means of various options.  For messages delivered and
received locally, similar statistics are also produced per user.

   The output also includes total counts and statistics about delivery
errors, and histograms showing the number of messages received and
deliveries made in each hour of the day.  A delivery with more than one
address in its envelope (for example, an SMTP transaction with more than
one RCPT command) is counted as a single delivery by _eximstats_.

   Though normally more deliveries than receipts are reported (as
messages may have multiple recipients), it is possible for _eximstats_
to report more messages received than delivered, even though the queue
is empty at the start and end of the period in question.  If an incoming
message contains no valid recipients, no deliveries are recorded for it.
A bounce message is handled as an entirely separate message.

   _eximstats_ always outputs a grand total summary giving the volume
and number of messages received and deliveries made, and the number of
hosts involved in each case.  It also outputs the number of messages
that were delayed (that is, not completely delivered at the first
attempt), and the number that had at least one address that failed.

   The remainder of the output is in sections that can be independently
disabled or modified by various options.  It consists of a summary of
deliveries by transport, histograms of messages received and delivered
per time interval (default per hour), information about the time
messages spent in the queue, a list of relayed messages, lists of the
top fifty sending hosts, local senders, destination hosts, and
destination local users by count and by volume, and a list of delivery
errors that occurred.

   The relay information lists messages that were actually relayed, that
is, they came from a remote host and were directly delivered to some
other remote host, without being processed (for example, for aliasing or
forwarding) locally.

   There are quite a few options for _eximstats_ to control exactly what
it outputs.  These are documented in the Perl script itself, and can be
extracted by running the command ‘perldoc’ on the script.  For example:

     perldoc /usr/exim/bin/eximstats


File: spec.info,  Node: Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess],  Next: Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild],  Prev: Mail statistics [eximstats],  Up: Exim utilities

54.8 Checking access policy (exim_checkaccess)
==============================================

The ‘-bh’ command line argument allows you to run a fake SMTP session
with debugging output, in order to check what Exim is doing when it is
applying policy controls to incoming SMTP mail.  However, not everybody
is sufficiently familiar with the SMTP protocol to be able to make full
use of ‘-bh’, and sometimes you just want to answer the question "Does
this address have access?"  without bothering with any further details.

   The _exim_checkaccess_ utility is a "packaged" version of ‘-bh’.  It
takes two arguments, an IP address and an email address:

     exim_checkaccess 10.9.8.7 A.User@a.domain.example

   The utility runs a call to Exim with the ‘-bh’ option, to test
whether the given email address would be accepted in a RCPT command in a
TCP/IP connection from the host with the given IP address.  The output
of the utility is either the word "accepted", or the SMTP error
response, for example:

     Rejected:
     550 Relay not permitted

   When running this test, the utility uses ‘<>’ as the envelope sender
address for the MAIL command, but you can change this by providing
additional options.  These are passed directly to the Exim command.  For
example, to specify that the test is to be run with the sender address
_himself@there.example_ you can use:

     exim_checkaccess 10.9.8.7 A.User@a.domain.example \
                      -f himself@there.example

   Note that these additional Exim command line items must be given
after the two mandatory arguments.

   Because the ‘exim_checkaccess’ uses ‘-bh’, it does not perform
callouts while running its checks.  You can run checks that include
callouts by using ‘-bhc’, but this is not yet available in a "packaged"
form.


File: spec.info,  Node: Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild],  Next: Finding individual retry times [exinext],  Prev: Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess],  Up: Exim utilities

54.9 Making DBM files (exim_dbmbuild)
=====================================

The _exim_dbmbuild_ program reads an input file containing keys and data
in the format used by the ‘lsearch’ lookup (see section *note Single-key
lookup types::).  It writes a DBM file using the lower-cased alias names
as keys and the remainder of the information as data.  The lower-casing
can be prevented by calling the program with the ‘-nolc’ option.

   A terminating zero is included as part of the key string.  This is
expected by the ‘dbm’ lookup type.  However, if the option ‘-nozero’ is
given, _exim_dbmbuild_ creates files without terminating zeroes in
either the key strings or the data strings.  The ‘dbmnz’ lookup type can
be used with such files.

   The program requires two arguments: the name of the input file (which
can be a single hyphen to indicate the standard input), and the name of
the output file.  It creates the output under a temporary name, and then
renames it if all went well.

   If the native DB interface is in use (USE_DB is set in a compile-time
configuration file - this is common in free versions of Unix) the two
filenames must be different, because in this mode the Berkeley DB
functions create a single output file using exactly the name given.  For
example,

     exim_dbmbuild /etc/aliases /etc/aliases.db

   reads the system alias file and creates a DBM version of it in
‘/etc/aliases.db’.

   In systems that use the _ndbm_ routines (mostly proprietary versions
of Unix), two files are used, with the suffixes ‘.dir’ and ‘.pag’.  In
this environment, the suffixes are added to the second argument of
_exim_dbmbuild_, so it can be the same as the first.  This is also the
case when the Berkeley functions are used in compatibility mode (though
this is not recommended), because in that case it adds a ‘.db’ suffix to
the filename.

   If a duplicate key is encountered, the program outputs a warning, and
when it finishes, its return code is 1 rather than zero, unless the
‘-noduperr’ option is used.  By default, only the first of a set of
duplicates is used - this makes it compatible with ‘lsearch’ lookups.
There is an option ‘-lastdup’ which causes it to use the data for the
last duplicate instead.  There is also an option ‘-nowarn’, which stops
it listing duplicate keys to ‘stderr’.  For other errors, where it
doesn't actually make a new file, the return code is 2.


File: spec.info,  Node: Finding individual retry times [exinext],  Next: Hints database maintenance,  Prev: Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild],  Up: Exim utilities

54.10 Finding individual retry times (exinext)
==============================================

A utility called _exinext_ (mostly a Perl script) provides the ability
to fish specific information out of the retry database.  Given a mail
domain (or a complete address), it looks up the hosts for that domain,
and outputs any retry information for the hosts or for the domain.  At
present, the retry information is obtained by running _exim_dumpdb_ (see
below) and post-processing the output.  For example:

     $ exinext piglet@milne.fict.example
     kanga.milne.example:192.168.8.1 error 146: Connection refused
       first failed: 21-Feb-1996 14:57:34
       last tried:   21-Feb-1996 14:57:34
       next try at:  21-Feb-1996 15:02:34
     roo.milne.example:192.168.8.3 error 146: Connection refused
       first failed: 20-Jan-1996 13:12:08
       last tried:   21-Feb-1996 11:42:03
       next try at:  21-Feb-1996 19:42:03
       past final cutoff time

   You can also give _exinext_ a local part, without a domain, and it
will give any retry information for that local part in your default
domain.  A message id can be used to obtain retry information pertaining
to a specific message.  This exists only when an attempt to deliver a
message to a remote host suffers a message-specific error (see section
*note Errors in outgoing SMTP::).  _exinext_ is not particularly
efficient, but then it is not expected to be run very often.

   The _exinext_ utility calls Exim to find out information such as the
location of the spool directory.  The utility has ‘-C’ and ‘-D’ options,
which are passed on to the _exim_ commands.  The first specifies an
alternate Exim configuration file, and the second sets macros for use
within the configuration file.  These features are mainly to help in
testing, but might also be useful in environments where more than one
configuration file is in use.


File: spec.info,  Node: Hints database maintenance,  Next: Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock],  Prev: Finding individual retry times [exinext],  Up: Exim utilities

54.11 Hints database maintenance
================================

Three utility programs are provided for maintaining the DBM files that
Exim uses to contain its delivery hint information.  Each program
requires two arguments.  The first specifies the name of Exim's spool
directory, and the second is the name of the database it is to operate
on.  These are as follows:

   • _retry_: the database of retry information

   • _wait-_<_transport name_>: databases of information about messages
     waiting for remote hosts

   • _callout_: the callout cache

   • _ratelimit_: the data for implementing the ratelimit ACL condition

   • _tls_: TLS session resumption data

   • _misc_: other hints data

   The _misc_ database is used for

   • Serializing delivery to a specific host (when ‘serialize_hosts’ is
     set in an ‘smtp’ transport)

   • Limiting the concurrency of specific transports (when
     ‘max_parallel’ is set in a transport)

   • Recording EHLO-time facilities advertised by hosts

   • Serializing ETRN runs (when ‘smtp_etrn_serialize’ is set)

* Menu:

* exim_dumpdb::
* exim_tidydb::
* exim_fixdb::


File: spec.info,  Node: exim_dumpdb,  Next: exim_tidydb,  Up: Hints database maintenance

54.11.1 exim_dumpdb
-------------------

The entire contents of a database are written to the standard output by
the _exim_dumpdb_ program, taking as arguments the spool and database
names.  An option _-z_ may be given to request times in UTC; otherwise
times are in the local timezone.  An option _-k_ may be given to dump
only the record keys.  For example, to dump the retry database:

     exim_dumpdb /var/spool/exim retry

   For the retry database two lines of output are produced for each
entry:

     T:mail.ref.example:192.168.242.242 146 77 Connection refused
     31-Oct-1995 12:00:12 02-Nov-1995 12:21:39 02-Nov-1995 20:21:39 *

   The first item on the first line is the key of the record.  It starts
with one of the letters R, or T, depending on whether it refers to a
routing or transport retry.  For a local delivery, the next part is the
local address; for a remote delivery it is the name of the remote host,
followed by its failing IP address (unless ‘retry_include_ip_address’ is
set false on the ‘smtp’ transport).  If the remote port is not the
standard one (port 25), it is added to the IP address.  Then there
follows an error code, an additional error code, and a textual
description of the error.

   The three times on the second line are the time of first failure, the
time of the last delivery attempt, and the computed time for the next
attempt.  The line ends with an asterisk if the cutoff time for the last
retry rule has been exceeded.

   Each output line from _exim_dumpdb_ for the _wait-xxx_ databases
consists of a host name followed by a list of ids for messages that are
or were waiting to be delivered to that host.  If there are a very large
number for any one host, continuation records, with a sequence number
added to the host name, may be seen.  The data in these records is often
out of date, because a message may be routed to several alternative
hosts, and Exim makes no effort to keep cross-references.

   For non-hints DBM databases (as created by the _exim_dbmbuild_
utility) a _-L_ option signals that only a single argument follows,
giving the file path:

     exim_dumpdb -L my_dbm_file

   One line of output is given for each entry, with the key and the
value.


File: spec.info,  Node: exim_tidydb,  Next: exim_fixdb,  Prev: exim_dumpdb,  Up: Hints database maintenance

54.11.2 exim_tidydb
-------------------

The _exim_tidydb_ utility program is used to tidy up the contents of a
hints database.  If run with no options, it removes all records that are
more than 30 days old.  The age is calculated from the date and time
that the record was last updated.  Note that, in the case of the retry
database, it is _not_ the time since the first delivery failure.
Information about a host that has been down for more than 30 days will
remain in the database, provided that the record is updated sufficiently
often.

   The cutoff date can be altered by means of the ‘-t’ option, which
must be followed by a time.  For example, to remove all records older
than a week from the retry database:

     exim_tidydb -t 7d /var/spool/exim retry

   Both the _wait-xxx_ and _retry_ databases contain items that involve
message ids.  In the former these appear as data in records keyed by
host - they were messages that were waiting for that host - and in the
latter they are the keys for retry information for messages that have
suffered certain types of error.  When _exim_tidydb_ is run, a check is
made to ensure that message ids in database records are those of
messages that are still on the queue.  Message ids for messages that no
longer exist are removed from _wait-xxx_ records, and if this leaves any
records empty, they are deleted.  For the _retry_ database, records
whose keys are non-existent message ids are removed.  The _exim_tidydb_
utility outputs comments on the standard output whenever it removes
information from the database.

   Certain records are automatically removed by Exim when they are no
longer needed, but others are not.  For example, if all the MX hosts for
a domain are down, a retry record is created for each one.  If the
primary MX host comes back first, its record is removed when Exim
successfully delivers to it, but the records for the others remain
because Exim has not tried to use those hosts.

   It is important, therefore, to run _exim_tidydb_ periodically on all
the hints databases.  You should do this at a quiet time of day, because
it requires a database to be locked (and therefore inaccessible to Exim)
while it does its work.  Removing records from a DBM file does not
normally make the file smaller, but all the common DBM libraries are
able to re-use the space that is released.  After an initial phase of
increasing in size, the databases normally reach a point at which they
no longer get any bigger, as long as they are regularly tidied.

   *Warning*: If you never run _exim_tidydb_, the space used by the
hints databases is likely to keep on increasing.


File: spec.info,  Node: exim_fixdb,  Prev: exim_tidydb,  Up: Hints database maintenance

54.11.3 exim_fixdb
------------------

The _exim_fixdb_ program is a utility for interactively modifying
databases.  Its main use is for testing Exim, but it might also be
occasionally useful for getting round problems in a live system.  Its
interface is somewhat crude.  On entry, it prompts for input with a
right angle-bracket.  A key of a database record can then be entered,
and the data for that record is displayed.

   If "d" is typed at the next prompt, the entire record is deleted.
For all except the _retry_, _callout_, and _ratelimit_ databases, that
is the only operation that can be carried out.  For the modifiable ones,
each field is output preceded by a number, and data for individual
fields can be changed by typing the field number followed by new data,
for example:

     > 4 951102:1000

   resets the time of the next delivery attempt.  Time values are given
as a sequence of digit pairs for year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Colons can be used as optional separators.

   Both displayed and input times are in the local timezone by default.
If an option _-z_ is used on the command line, displayed times are in
UTC.

   For non-hints DBM databases (as created by the _exim_dbmbuild_
utility) a _-L_ option signals that only a single argument follows,
giving the file path:

     exim_fixdb -L my_dbm_file

   Records have no timestamp, and only have field number zero.


File: spec.info,  Node: Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock],  Next: Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate],  Prev: Hints database maintenance,  Up: Exim utilities

54.12 Mailbox maintenance (exim_lock)
=====================================

The _exim_lock_ utility locks a mailbox file using the same algorithm as
Exim.  For a discussion of locking issues, see section *note Operational
details for appending::.  _Exim_lock_ can be used to prevent any
modification of a mailbox by Exim or a user agent while investigating a
problem.  The utility requires the name of the file as its first
argument.  If the locking is successful, the second argument is run as a
command (using C's ‘system()’ function); if there is no second argument,
the value of the SHELL environment variable is used; if this is unset or
empty, ‘/bin/sh’ is run.  When the command finishes, the mailbox is
unlocked and the utility ends.  The following options are available:

‘-fcntl’
     Use ‘fcntl()’ locking on the open mailbox.

‘-flock’
     Use ‘flock()’ locking on the open mailbox, provided the operating
     system supports it.

‘-interval’
     This must be followed by a number, which is a number of seconds; it
     sets the interval to sleep between retries (default 3).

‘-lockfile’
     Create a lock file before opening the mailbox.

‘-mbx’
     Lock the mailbox using MBX rules.

‘-q’
     Suppress verification output.

‘-retries’
     This must be followed by a number; it sets the number of times to
     try to get the lock (default 10).

‘-restore_time’
     This option causes ‘exim_lock’ to restore the modified and read
     times to the locked file before exiting.  This allows you to access
     a locked mailbox (for example, to take a backup copy) without
     disturbing the times that the user subsequently sees.

‘-timeout’
     This must be followed by a number, which is a number of seconds; it
     sets a timeout to be used with a blocking ‘fcntl()’ lock.  If it is
     not set (the default), a non-blocking call is used.

‘-v’
     Generate verbose output.

   If none of ‘-fcntl’, ‘-flock’, ‘-lockfile’ or ‘-mbx’ are given, the
default is to create a lock file and also to use ‘fcntl()’ locking on
the mailbox, which is the same as Exim's default.  The use of ‘-flock’
or ‘-fcntl’ requires that the file be writeable; the use of ‘-lockfile’
requires that the directory containing the file be writeable.  Locking
by lock file does not last forever; Exim assumes that a lock file is
expired if it is more than 30 minutes old.

   The ‘-mbx’ option can be used with either or both of ‘-fcntl’ or
‘-flock’.  It assumes ‘-fcntl’ by default.  MBX locking causes a shared
lock to be taken out on the open mailbox, and an exclusive lock on the
file ‘/tmp/.n.m’ where _n_ and _m_ are the device number and inode
number of the mailbox file.  When the locking is released, if an
exclusive lock can be obtained for the mailbox, the file in ‘/tmp’ is
deleted.

   The default output contains verification of the locking that takes
place.  The ‘-v’ option causes some additional information to be given.
The ‘-q’ option suppresses all output except error messages.

   A command such as

     exim_lock /var/spool/mail/spqr

   runs an interactive shell while the file is locked, whereas

     exim_lock -q /var/spool/mail/spqr <<End
     <some commands>
     End

   runs a specific non-interactive sequence of commands while the file
is locked, suppressing all verification output.  A single command can be
run by a command such as

     exim_lock -q /var/spool/mail/spqr \
       "cp /var/spool/mail/spqr /some/where"

   Note that if a command is supplied, it must be entirely contained
within the second argument - hence the quotes.


File: spec.info,  Node: Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate],  Prev: Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock],  Up: Exim utilities

54.13 Message Ids for humans (exim_msgdate)
===========================================

The _exim_msgdate_ utility is written by Andrew Aitchison and included
in the Exim distribution.  This Perl script converts an Exim Mesage ID
back into a human readable form.  For details of _exim_msgdate_'s
options, run _exim_msgdate_ with the ‘--help’ option.

   Section *note Message identification:: (Message identification)
describes Exim Mesage IDs.


File: spec.info,  Node: The Exim monitor,  Next: Security considerations,  Prev: Exim utilities,  Up: Top

55 The Exim monitor
*******************

The Exim monitor is an application which displays in an X window
information about the state of Exim's queue and what Exim is doing.  An
admin user can perform certain operations on messages from this GUI
interface; however all such facilities are also available from the
command line, and indeed, the monitor itself makes use of the command
line to perform any actions requested.

* Menu:

* Running the monitor::
* The stripcharts::
* Main action buttons::
* The log display::
* The queue display::
* The queue menu::


File: spec.info,  Node: Running the monitor,  Next: The stripcharts,  Up: The Exim monitor

55.1 Running the monitor
========================

The monitor is started by running the script called _eximon_.  This is a
shell script that sets up a number of environment variables, and then
runs the binary called ‘eximon.bin’.  The default appearance of the
monitor window can be changed by editing the ‘Local/eximon.conf’ file
created by editing ‘exim_monitor/EDITME’.  Comments in that file
describe what the various parameters are for.

   The parameters that get built into the _eximon_ script can be
overridden for a particular invocation by setting up environment
variables of the same names, preceded by ‘EXIMON_’.  For example, a
shell command such as

     EXIMON_LOG_DEPTH=400 eximon

   (in a Bourne-compatible shell) runs _eximon_ with an overriding
setting of the LOG_DEPTH parameter.  If EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH is set in
the environment, it overrides the Exim log file configuration.  This
makes it possible to have _eximon_ tailing log data that is written to
syslog, provided that MAIL.INFO syslog messages are routed to a file on
the local host.

   X resources can be used to change the appearance of the window in the
normal way.  For example, a resource setting of the form

     Eximon*background: gray94

   changes the colour of the background to light grey rather than white.
The stripcharts are drawn with both the data lines and the reference
lines in black.  This means that the reference lines are not visible
when on top of the data.  However, their colour can be changed by
setting a resource called "highlight" (an odd name, but that's what the
Athena stripchart widget uses).  For example, if your X server is
running Unix, you could set up lighter reference lines in the
stripcharts by obeying

     xrdb -merge <<End
     Eximon*highlight: gray
     End

   In order to see the contents of messages in the queue, and to operate
on them, _eximon_ must either be run as root or by an admin user.

   The command-line parameters of _eximon_ are passed to ‘eximon.bin’
and may contain X11 resource parameters interpreted by the X11 library.
In addition, if the first parameter starts with the string "gdb" then it
is removed and the binary is invoked under gdb (the parameter is used as
the gdb command-name, so versioned variants of gdb can be invoked).

   The monitor's window is divided into three parts.  The first contains
one or more stripcharts and two action buttons, the second contains a
"tail" of the main log file, and the third is a display of the queue of
messages awaiting delivery, with two more action buttons.  The following
sections describe these different parts of the display.


File: spec.info,  Node: The stripcharts,  Next: Main action buttons,  Prev: Running the monitor,  Up: The Exim monitor

55.2 The stripcharts
====================

The first stripchart is always a count of messages in the queue.  Its
name can be configured by setting QUEUE_STRIPCHART_NAME in the
‘Local/eximon.conf’ file.  The remaining stripcharts are defined in the
configuration script by regular expression matches on log file entries,
making it possible to display, for example, counts of messages delivered
to certain hosts or using certain transports.  The supplied defaults
display counts of received and delivered messages, and of local and SMTP
deliveries.  The default period between stripchart updates is one
minute; this can be adjusted by a parameter in the ‘Local/eximon.conf’
file.

   The stripchart displays rescale themselves automatically as the value
they are displaying changes.  There are always 10 horizontal lines in
each chart; the title string indicates the value of each division when
it is greater than one.  For example, "x2" means that each division
represents a value of 2.

   It is also possible to have a stripchart which shows the percentage
fullness of a particular disk partition, which is useful when local
deliveries are confined to a single partition.

   This relies on the availability of the ‘statvfs()’ function or
equivalent in the operating system.  Most, but not all versions of Unix
that support Exim have this.  For this particular stripchart, the top of
the chart always represents 100%, and the scale is given as "x10%".
This chart is configured by setting SIZE_STRIPCHART and (optionally)
SIZE_STRIPCHART_NAME in the ‘Local/eximon.conf’ file.


File: spec.info,  Node: Main action buttons,  Next: The log display,  Prev: The stripcharts,  Up: The Exim monitor

55.3 Main action buttons
========================

Below the stripcharts there is an action button for quitting the
monitor.  Next to this is another button marked "Size".  They are placed
here so that shrinking the window to its default minimum size leaves
just the queue count stripchart and these two buttons visible.  Pressing
the "Size" button causes the window to expand to its maximum size,
unless it is already at the maximum, in which case it is reduced to its
minimum.

   When expanding to the maximum, if the window cannot be fully seen
where it currently is, it is moved back to where it was the last time it
was at full size.  When it is expanding from its minimum size, the old
position is remembered, and next time it is reduced to the minimum it is
moved back there.

   The idea is that you can keep a reduced window just showing one or
two stripcharts at a convenient place on your screen, easily expand it
to show the full window when required, and just as easily put it back to
what it was.  The idea is copied from what the _twm_ window manager does
for its _f.fullzoom_ action.  The minimum size of the window can be
changed by setting the MIN_HEIGHT and MIN_WIDTH values in
‘Local/eximon.conf’.

   Normally, the monitor starts up with the window at its full size, but
it can be built so that it starts up with the window at its smallest
size, by setting START_SMALL=yes in ‘Local/eximon.conf’.


File: spec.info,  Node: The log display,  Next: The queue display,  Prev: Main action buttons,  Up: The Exim monitor

55.4 The log display
====================

The second section of the window is an area in which a display of the
tail of the main log is maintained.  To save space on the screen, the
timestamp on each log line is shortened by removing the date and, if
‘log_timezone’ is set, the timezone.  The log tail is not available when
the only destination for logging data is syslog, unless the syslog lines
are routed to a local file whose name is passed to _eximon_ via the
EXIMON_LOG_FILE_PATH environment variable.

   The log sub-window has a scroll bar at its lefthand side which can be
used to move back to look at earlier text, and the up and down arrow
keys also have a scrolling effect.  The amount of log that is kept
depends on the setting of LOG_BUFFER in ‘Local/eximon.conf’, which
specifies the amount of memory to use.  When this is full, the earlier
50% of data is discarded - this is much more efficient than throwing it
away line by line.  The sub-window also has a horizontal scroll bar for
accessing the ends of long log lines.  This is the only means of
horizontal scrolling; the right and left arrow keys are not available.
Text can be cut from this part of the window using the mouse in the
normal way.  The size of this subwindow is controlled by parameters in
the configuration file ‘Local/eximon.conf’.

   Searches of the text in the log window can be carried out by means of
the ^R and ^S keystrokes, which default to a reverse and a forward
search, respectively.  The search covers only the text that is displayed
in the window.  It cannot go further back up the log.

   The point from which the search starts is indicated by a caret
marker.  This is normally at the end of the text in the window, but can
be positioned explicitly by pointing and clicking with the left mouse
button, and is moved automatically by a successful search.  If new text
arrives in the window when it is scrolled back, the caret remains where
it is, but if the window is not scrolled back, the caret is moved to the
end of the new text.

   Pressing ^R or ^S pops up a window into which the search text can be
typed.  There are buttons for selecting forward or reverse searching,
for carrying out the search, and for cancelling.  If the "Search" button
is pressed, the search happens and the window remains so that further
searches can be done.  If the "Return" key is pressed, a single search
is done and the window is closed.  If ^C is typed the search is
cancelled.

   The searching facility is implemented using the facilities of the
Athena text widget.  By default this pops up a window containing both
"search" and "replace" options.  In order to suppress the unwanted
"replace" portion for eximon, a modified version of the ‘TextPop’ widget
is distributed with Exim.  However, the linkers in BSDI and HP-UX seem
unable to handle an externally provided version of ‘TextPop’ when the
remaining parts of the text widget come from the standard libraries.
The compile-time option EXIMON_TEXTPOP can be unset to cut out the
modified ‘TextPop’, making it possible to build Eximon on these systems,
at the expense of having unwanted items in the search popup window.


File: spec.info,  Node: The queue display,  Next: The queue menu,  Prev: The log display,  Up: The Exim monitor

55.5 The queue display
======================

The bottom section of the monitor window contains a list of all messages
that are in the queue, which includes those currently being received or
delivered, as well as those awaiting delivery.  The size of this
subwindow is controlled by parameters in the configuration file
‘Local/eximon.conf’, and the frequency at which it is updated is
controlled by another parameter in the same file - the default is 5
minutes, since queue scans can be quite expensive.  However, there is an
"Update" action button just above the display which can be used to force
an update of the queue display at any time.

   When a host is down for some time, a lot of pending mail can build up
for it, and this can make it hard to deal with other messages in the
queue.  To help with this situation there is a button next to "Update"
called "Hide".  If pressed, a dialogue box called "Hide addresses ending
with" is put up.  If you type anything in here and press "Return", the
text is added to a chain of such texts, and if every undelivered address
in a message matches at least one of the texts, the message is not
displayed.

   If there is an address that does not match any of the texts, all the
addresses are displayed as normal.  The matching happens on the ends of
addresses so, for example, _cam.ac.uk_ specifies all addresses in
Cambridge, while _xxx@foo.com.example_ specifies just one specific
address.  When any hiding has been set up, a button called "Unhide" is
displayed.  If pressed, it cancels all hiding.  Also, to ensure that
hidden messages do not get forgotten, a hide request is automatically
cancelled after one hour.

   While the dialogue box is displayed, you can't press any buttons or
do anything else to the monitor window.  For this reason, if you want to
cut text from the queue display to use in the dialogue box, you have to
do the cutting before pressing the "Hide" button.

   The queue display contains, for each unhidden queued message, the
length of time it has been in the queue, the size of the message, the
message id, the message sender, and the first undelivered recipient, all
on one line.  If it is a bounce message, the sender is shown as "<>".
If there is more than one recipient to which the message has not yet
been delivered, subsequent ones are listed on additional lines, up to a
maximum configured number, following which an ellipsis is displayed.
Recipients that have already received the message are not shown.

   If a message is frozen, an asterisk is displayed at the left-hand
side.

   The queue display has a vertical scroll bar, and can also be scrolled
by means of the arrow keys.  Text can be cut from it using the mouse in
the normal way.  The text searching facilities, as described above for
the log window, are also available, but the caret is always moved to the
end of the text when the queue display is updated.


File: spec.info,  Node: The queue menu,  Prev: The queue display,  Up: The Exim monitor

55.6 The queue menu
===================

If the ‘shift’ key is held down and the left button is clicked when the
mouse pointer is over the text for any message, an action menu pops up,
and the first line of the queue display for the message is highlighted.
This does not affect any selected text.

   If you want to use some other event for popping up the menu, you can
set the MENU_EVENT parameter in ‘Local/eximon.conf’ to change the
default, or set EXIMON_MENU_EVENT in the environment before starting the
monitor.  The value set in this parameter is a standard X event
description.  For example, to run eximon using ‘ctrl’ rather than
‘shift’ you could use

     EXIMON_MENU_EVENT='Ctrl<Btn1Down>' eximon

   The title of the menu is the message id, and it contains entries
which act as follows:

   • _message log_: The contents of the message log for the message are
     displayed in a new text window.

   • _headers_: Information from the spool file that contains the
     envelope information and headers is displayed in a new text window.
     See chapter *note Format of spool files:: for a description of the
     format of spool files.

   • _body_: The contents of the spool file containing the body of the
     message are displayed in a new text window.  There is a default
     limit of 20,000 bytes to the amount of data displayed.  This can be
     changed by setting the BODY_MAX option at compile time, or the
     EXIMON_BODY_MAX option at runtime.

   • _deliver message_: A call to Exim is made using the ‘-M’ option to
     request delivery of the message.  This causes an automatic thaw if
     the message is frozen.  The ‘-v’ option is also set, and the output
     from Exim is displayed in a new text window.  The delivery is run
     in a separate process, to avoid holding up the monitor while the
     delivery proceeds.

   • _freeze message_: A call to Exim is made using the ‘-Mf’ option to
     request that the message be frozen.

   • _thaw message_: A call to Exim is made using the ‘-Mt’ option to
     request that the message be thawed.

   • _give up on msg_: A call to Exim is made using the ‘-Mg’ option to
     request that Exim gives up trying to deliver the message.  A bounce
     message is generated for any remaining undelivered addresses.

   • _remove message_: A call to Exim is made using the ‘-Mrm’ option to
     request that the message be deleted from the system without
     generating a bounce message.

   • _add recipient_: A dialog box is displayed into which a recipient
     address can be typed.  If the address is not qualified and the
     QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter is set in ‘Local/eximon.conf’, the address
     is qualified with that domain.  Otherwise it must be entered as a
     fully qualified address.  Pressing RETURN causes a call to Exim to
     be made using the ‘-Mar’ option to request that an additional
     recipient be added to the message, unless the entry box is empty,
     in which case no action is taken.

   • _mark delivered_: A dialog box is displayed into which a recipient
     address can be typed.  If the address is not qualified and the
     QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter is set in ‘Local/eximon.conf’, the address
     is qualified with that domain.  Otherwise it must be entered as a
     fully qualified address.  Pressing RETURN causes a call to Exim to
     be made using the ‘-Mmd’ option to mark the given recipient address
     as already delivered, unless the entry box is empty, in which case
     no action is taken.

   • _mark all delivered_: A call to Exim is made using the ‘-Mmad’
     option to mark all recipient addresses as already delivered.

   • _edit sender_: A dialog box is displayed initialized with the
     current sender's address.  Pressing RETURN causes a call to Exim to
     be made using the ‘-Mes’ option to replace the sender address,
     unless the entry box is empty, in which case no action is taken.
     If you want to set an empty sender (as in bounce messages), you
     must specify it as "<>".  Otherwise, if the address is not
     qualified and the QUALIFY_DOMAIN parameter is set in
     ‘Local/eximon.conf’, the address is qualified with that domain.

   When a delivery is forced, a window showing the ‘-v’ output is
displayed.  In other cases when a call to Exim is made, if there is any
output from Exim (in particular, if the command fails) a window
containing the command and the output is displayed.  Otherwise, the
results of the action are normally apparent from the log and queue
displays.  However, if you set ACTION_OUTPUT=yes in ‘Local/eximon.conf’,
a window showing the Exim command is always opened, even if no output is
generated.

   The queue display is automatically updated for actions such as
freezing and thawing, unless ACTION_QUEUE_UPDATE=no has been set in
‘Local/eximon.conf’.  In this case the "Update" button has to be used to
force an update of the display after one of these actions.

   In any text window that is displayed as result of a menu action, the
normal cut-and-paste facility is available, and searching can be carried
out using ^R and ^S, as described above for the log tail window.


File: spec.info,  Node: Security considerations,  Next: Format of spool files,  Prev: The Exim monitor,  Up: Top

56 Security considerations
**************************

This chapter discusses a number of issues concerned with security, some
of which are also covered in other parts of this manual.

   For reasons that this author does not understand, some people have
promoted Exim as a "particularly secure" mailer.  Perhaps it is because
of the existence of this chapter in the documentation.  However, the
intent of the chapter is simply to describe the way Exim works in
relation to certain security concerns, not to make any specific claims
about the effectiveness of its security as compared with other MTAs.

   What follows is a description of the way Exim is supposed to be.
Best efforts have been made to try to ensure that the code agrees with
the theory, but an absence of bugs can never be guaranteed.  Any that
are reported will get fixed as soon as possible.

* Menu:

* Building a more "hardened" Exim::
* Root privilege::
* Running Exim without privilege::
* Delivering to local files::
* Running local commands::
* Trust in configuration data::
* IPv4 source routing::
* The VRFY, EXPN, and ETRN commands in SMTP: The VRFY; EXPN; and ETRN commands in SMTP.
* Privileged users::
* Spool files::
* Use of argv[0]::
* Use of %f formatting::
* Embedded Exim path::
* Dynamic module directory::
* Use of sprintf(): Use of sprintf[].
* Use of debug_printf() and log_write(): Use of debug_printf[] and log_write[].
* Use of strcat() and strcpy(): Use of strcat[] and strcpy[].


File: spec.info,  Node: Building a more "hardened" Exim,  Next: Root privilege,  Up: Security considerations

56.1 Building a more "hardened" Exim
====================================

There are a number of build-time options that can be set in
‘Local/Makefile’ to create Exim binaries that are "harder" to attack, in
particular by a rogue Exim administrator who does not have the root
password, or by someone who has penetrated the Exim (but not the root)
account.  These options are as follows:

   • ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX can be set to a string that is required to match
     the start of any filenames used with the ‘-C’ option.  When it is
     set, these filenames are also not allowed to contain the sequence
     "/../".  (However, if the value of the ‘-C’ option is identical to
     the value of CONFIGURE_FILE in ‘Local/Makefile’, Exim ignores ‘-C’
     and proceeds as usual.)  There is no default setting for
     ‘ALT_CONFIG_PREFIX’.

     If the permitted configuration files are confined to a directory to
     which only root has access, this guards against someone who has
     broken into the Exim account from running a privileged Exim with an
     arbitrary configuration file, and using it to break into other
     accounts.

   • If a non-trusted configuration file (i.e.  not the default
     configuration file or one which is trusted by virtue of being
     listed in the TRUSTED_CONFIG_LIST file) is specified with ‘-C’, or
     if macros are given with ‘-D’ (but see the next item), then root
     privilege is retained only if the caller of Exim is root.  This
     locks out the possibility of testing a configuration using ‘-C’
     right through message reception and delivery, even if the caller is
     root.  The reception works, but by that time, Exim is running as
     the Exim user, so when it re-execs to regain privilege for the
     delivery, the use of ‘-C’ causes privilege to be lost.  However,
     root can test reception and delivery using two separate commands.

   • The WHITELIST_D_MACROS build option declares some macros to be safe
     to override with ‘-D’ if the real uid is one of root, the Exim
     run-time user or the CONFIGURE_OWNER, if defined.  The potential
     impact of this option is limited by requiring the run-time value
     supplied to ‘-D’ to match a regex that errs on the restrictive
     side.  Requiring build-time selection of safe macros is onerous but
     this option is intended solely as a transition mechanism to permit
     previously-working configurations to continue to work after release
     4.73.

   • If DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined, the use of the ‘-D’ command line
     option is disabled.

   • FIXED_NEVER_USERS can be set to a colon-separated list of users
     that are never to be used for any deliveries.  This is like the
     ‘never_users’ runtime option, but it cannot be overridden; the
     runtime option adds additional users to the list.  The default
     setting is "root"; this prevents a non-root user who is permitted
     to modify the runtime file from using Exim as a way to get root.


File: spec.info,  Node: Root privilege,  Next: Running Exim without privilege,  Prev: Building a more "hardened" Exim,  Up: Security considerations

56.2 Root privilege
===================

The Exim binary is normally setuid to root, which means that it gains
root privilege (runs as root) when it starts execution.  In some special
cases (for example, when the daemon is not in use and there are no local
deliveries), it may be possible to run Exim setuid to some user other
than root.  This is discussed in the next section.  However, in most
installations, root privilege is required for two things:

   • To set up a socket connected to the standard SMTP port (25) when
     initialising the listening daemon.  If Exim is run from _inetd_,
     this privileged action is not required.

   • To be able to change uid and gid in order to read users' ‘.forward’
     files and perform local deliveries as the receiving user or as
     specified in the configuration.

   It is not necessary to be root to do any of the other things Exim
does, such as receiving messages and delivering them externally over
SMTP, and it is obviously more secure if Exim does not run as root
except when necessary.  For this reason, a user and group for Exim to
use must be defined in ‘Local/Makefile’.  These are known as "the Exim
user" and "the Exim group".  Their values can be changed by the runtime
configuration, though this is not recommended.  Often a user called
_exim_ is used, but some sites use _mail_ or another user name
altogether.

   Exim uses ‘setuid()’ whenever it gives up root privilege.  This is a
permanent abdication; the process cannot regain root afterwards.  Prior
to release 4.00, ‘seteuid()’ was used in some circumstances, but this is
no longer the case.

   After a new Exim process has interpreted its command line options, it
changes uid and gid in the following cases:

   • If the ‘-C’ option is used to specify an alternate configuration
     file, or if the ‘-D’ option is used to define macro values for the
     configuration, and the calling process is not running as root, the
     uid and gid are changed to those of the calling process.  However,
     if DISABLE_D_OPTION is defined in ‘Local/Makefile’, the ‘-D’ option
     may not be used at all.  If WHITELIST_D_MACROS is defined in
     ‘Local/Makefile’, then some macro values can be supplied if the
     calling process is running as root, the Exim run-time user or
     CONFIGURE_OWNER, if defined.

   • If the expansion test option (‘-be’) or one of the filter testing
     options (‘-bf’ or ‘-bF’) are used, the uid and gid are changed to
     those of the calling process.

   • If the process is not a daemon process or a queue runner process or
     a delivery process or a process for testing address routing
     (started with ‘-bt’), the uid and gid are changed to the Exim user
     and group.  This means that Exim always runs under its own uid and
     gid when receiving messages.  This also applies when testing
     address verification (the ‘-bv’ option) and testing incoming
     message policy controls (the ‘-bh’ option).

   • For a daemon, queue runner, delivery, or address testing process,
     the uid remains as root at this stage, but the gid is changed to
     the Exim group.

   The processes that initially retain root privilege behave as follows:

   • A daemon process changes the gid to the Exim group and the uid to
     the Exim user after setting up one or more listening sockets.  The
     ‘initgroups()’ function is called, so that if the Exim user is in
     any additional groups, they will be used during message reception.

   • A queue runner process retains root privilege throughout its
     execution.  Its job is to fork a controlled sequence of delivery
     processes.

   • A delivery process retains root privilege throughout most of its
     execution., including while the recipient addresses in a message
     are being routed.

        • However, if a user's filter file has to be processed, this is
          done in a subprocess that runs under the individual user's uid
          and gid.  A system filter is run as root unless
          ‘system_filter_user’ is set.

     Any actual deliveries (that is, the transports themselves) are run
     in subprocesses which always change to a non-root uid and gid.

        • For local deliveries this is typically the uid and gid of the
          owner of the mailbox.

        • For remote deliveries, the Exim uid and gid are used.

     Once all the delivery subprocesses have been run, a delivery
     process changes to the Exim uid and gid while doing post-delivery
     tidying up such as updating the retry database and generating
     bounce and warning messages.

   • A process that is testing addresses (the ‘-bt’ option) runs as root
     so that the routing is done in the same environment as a message
     delivery.


File: spec.info,  Node: Running Exim without privilege,  Next: Delivering to local files,  Prev: Root privilege,  Up: Security considerations

56.3 Running Exim without privilege
===================================

Some installations like to run Exim in an unprivileged state for more of
its operation, for added security.  Support for this mode of operation
is provided by the global option ‘deliver_drop_privilege’.  When this is
set, the uid and gid are changed to the Exim user and group at the start
of a delivery process (and also queue runner and address testing
processes).  This means that address routing is no longer run as root,
and the deliveries themselves cannot change to any other uid.

   Leaving the binary setuid to root, but setting
‘deliver_drop_privilege’ means that the daemon can still be started in
the usual way, and it can respond correctly to SIGHUP because the
re-invocation regains root privilege.

   An alternative approach is to make Exim setuid to the Exim user and
also setgid to the Exim group.  If you do this, the daemon must be
started from a root process.  (Calling Exim from a root process makes it
behave in the way it does when it is setuid root.)  However, the daemon
cannot restart itself after a SIGHUP signal because it cannot regain
privilege.

   It is still useful to set ‘deliver_drop_privilege’ in this case,
because it stops Exim from trying to re-invoke itself to do a delivery
after a message has been received.  Such a re-invocation is a waste of
resources because it has no effect.

   If restarting the daemon is not an issue (for example, if
‘mua_wrapper’ is set, or _inetd_ is being used instead of a daemon),
having the binary setuid to the Exim user seems a clean approach, but
there is one complication:

   In this style of operation, Exim is running with the real uid and gid
set to those of the calling process, and the effective uid/gid set to
Exim's values.  Ideally, any association with the calling process'
uid/gid should be dropped, that is, the real uid/gid should be reset to
the effective values so as to discard any privileges that the caller may
have.  While some operating systems have a function that permits this
action for a non-root effective uid, quite a number of them do not.
Because of this lack of standardization, Exim does not address this
problem at this time.

   For this reason, the recommended approach for "mostly unprivileged"
running is to keep the Exim binary setuid to root, and to set
‘deliver_drop_privilege’.  This also has the advantage of allowing a
daemon to be used in the most straightforward way.

   If you configure Exim not to run delivery processes as root, there
are a number of restrictions on what you can do:

   • You can deliver only as the Exim user/group.  You should explicitly
     use the ‘user’ and ‘group’ options to override routers or local
     transports that normally deliver as the recipient.  This makes sure
     that configurations that work in this mode function the same way in
     normal mode.  Any implicit or explicit specification of another
     user causes an error.

   • Use of ‘.forward’ files is severely restricted, such that it is
     usually not worthwhile to include them in the configuration.

   • Users who wish to use ‘.forward’ would have to make their home
     directory and the file itself accessible to the Exim user.  Pipe
     and append-to-file entries, and their equivalents in Exim filters,
     cannot be used.  While they could be enabled in the Exim user's
     name, that would be insecure and not very useful.

   • Unless the local user mailboxes are all owned by the Exim user
     (possible in some POP3 or IMAP-only environments):

       1. They must be owned by the Exim group and be writeable by that
          group.  This implies you must set ‘mode’ in the appendfile
          configuration, as well as the mode of the mailbox files
          themselves.

       2. You must set ‘no_check_owner’, since most or all of the files
          will not be owned by the Exim user.

       3. You must set ‘file_must_exist’, because Exim cannot set the
          owner correctly on a newly created mailbox when unprivileged.
          This also implies that new mailboxes need to be created
          manually.

   These restrictions severely restrict what can be done in local
deliveries.  However, there are no restrictions on remote deliveries.
If you are running a gateway host that does no local deliveries, setting
‘deliver_drop_privilege’ gives more security at essentially no cost.

   If you are using the ‘mua_wrapper’ facility (see chapter *note Using
Exim as a non-queueing client: Exim as a non-queueing client.),
‘deliver_drop_privilege’ is forced to be true.


File: spec.info,  Node: Delivering to local files,  Next: Running local commands,  Prev: Running Exim without privilege,  Up: Security considerations

56.4 Delivering to local files
==============================

Full details of the checks applied by ‘appendfile’ before it writes to a
file are given in chapter *note The appendfile transport::.


File: spec.info,  Node: Running local commands,  Next: Trust in configuration data,  Prev: Delivering to local files,  Up: Security considerations

56.5 Running local commands
===========================

There are a number of ways in which an administrator can configure Exim
to run commands based upon received, untrustworthy, data.  Further, in
some configurations a user who can control a ‘.forward’ file can also
arrange to run commands.  Configuration to check includes, but is not
limited to:

   • Use of ‘use_shell’ in the pipe transport: various forms of shell
     command injection may be possible with this option present.  It is
     dangerous and should be used only with considerable caution.
     Consider constraints which whitelist allowed characters in a
     variable which is to be used in a pipe transport that has
     ‘use_shell’ enabled.

   • A number of options such as ‘forbid_filter_run’,
     ‘forbid_filter_perl’, ‘forbid_filter_dlfunc’ and so forth which
     restrict facilities available to ‘.forward’ files in a redirect
     router.  If Exim is running on a central mail hub to which ordinary
     users do not have shell access, but home directories are NFS
     mounted (for instance) then administrators should review the list
     of these forbid options available, and should bear in mind that the
     options that may need forbidding can change as new features are
     added between releases.

   • The ‘${run...}’ expansion item does not use a shell by default, but
     administrators can configure use of ‘/bin/sh’ as part of the
     command.  Such invocations should be viewed with prejudicial
     suspicion.

   • Administrators who use embedded Perl are advised to explore how
     Perl's taint checking might apply to their usage.

   • Use of ‘${expand...}’ is somewhat analogous to shell's eval builtin
     and administrators are well advised to view its use with suspicion,
     in case (for instance) it allows a local-part to contain embedded
     Exim directives.

   • Use of ‘${match_local_part...}’ and friends becomes more dangerous
     if Exim was built with EXPAND_LISTMATCH_RHS defined: the second
     string in each can reference arbitrary lists and files, rather than
     just being a list of opaque strings.  The EXPAND_LISTMATCH_RHS
     option was added and set false by default because of real-world
     security vulnerabilities caused by its use with untrustworthy data
     injected in, for SQL injection attacks.  Consider the use of the
     ‘inlisti’ expansion condition instead.


File: spec.info,  Node: Trust in configuration data,  Next: IPv4 source routing,  Prev: Running local commands,  Up: Security considerations

56.6 Trust in configuration data
================================

If configuration data for Exim can come from untrustworthy sources,
there are some issues to be aware of:

   • Use of ‘${expand...}’ may provide a path for shell injection
     attacks.

   • Letting untrusted data provide a regular expression is unwise.

   • Using ‘${match...}’ to apply a fixed regular expression against
     untrusted data may result in pathological behaviour within PCRE2.
     Be aware of what "backtracking" means and consider options for
     being more strict with a regular expression.  Avenues to explore
     include limiting what can match (avoiding ‘.’ when ‘[a-z0-9]’ or
     other character class will do), use of atomic grouping and
     possessive quantifiers or just not using regular expressions
     against untrusted data.

   • It can be important to correctly use ‘${quote:...}’,
     ‘${quote_local_part:...}’ and ‘${quote_’<_lookup-type_>‘:...}’
     expansion items to ensure that data is correctly constructed.

   • Some lookups might return multiple results, even though normal
     usage is only expected to yield one result.


File: spec.info,  Node: IPv4 source routing,  Next: The VRFY; EXPN; and ETRN commands in SMTP,  Prev: Trust in configuration data,  Up: Security considerations

56.7 IPv4 source routing
========================

Many operating systems suppress IP source-routed packets in the kernel,
but some cannot be made to do this, so Exim does its own check.  It logs
incoming IPv4 source-routed TCP calls, and then drops them.  Things are
all different in IPv6.  No special checking is currently done.


File: spec.info,  Node: The VRFY; EXPN; and ETRN commands in SMTP,  Next: Privileged users,  Prev: IPv4 source routing,  Up: Security considerations

56.8 The VRFY, EXPN, and ETRN commands in SMTP
==============================================

Support for these SMTP commands is disabled by default.  If required,
they can be enabled by defining suitable ACLs.


File: spec.info,  Node: Privileged users,  Next: Spool files,  Prev: The VRFY; EXPN; and ETRN commands in SMTP,  Up: Security considerations

56.9 Privileged users
=====================

Exim recognizes two sets of users with special privileges.  Trusted
users are able to submit new messages to Exim locally, but supply their
own sender addresses and information about a sending host.  For other
users submitting local messages, Exim sets up the sender address from
the uid, and doesn't permit a remote host to be specified.

   However, an untrusted user is permitted to use the ‘-f’ command line
option in the special form ‘-f <>’ to indicate that a delivery failure
for the message should not cause an error report.  This affects the
message's envelope, but it does not affect the _Sender:_ header.
Untrusted users may also be permitted to use specific forms of address
with the ‘-f’ option by setting the ‘untrusted_set_sender’ option.

   Trusted users are used to run processes that receive mail messages
from some other mail domain and pass them on to Exim for delivery either
locally, or over the Internet.  Exim trusts a caller that is running as
root, as the Exim user, as any user listed in the ‘trusted_users’
configuration option, or under any group listed in the ‘trusted_groups’
option.

   Admin users are permitted to do things to the messages on Exim's
queue.  They can freeze or thaw messages, cause them to be returned to
their senders, remove them entirely, or modify them in various ways.  In
addition, admin users can run the Exim monitor and see all the
information it is capable of providing, which includes the contents of
files on the spool.

   By default, the use of the ‘-M’ and ‘-q’ options to cause Exim to
attempt delivery of messages on its queue is restricted to admin users.
This restriction can be relaxed by setting the ‘no_prod_requires_admin’
option.  Similarly, the use of ‘-bp’ (and its variants) to list the
contents of the queue is also restricted to admin users.  This
restriction can be relaxed by setting ‘no_queue_list_requires_admin’.

   Exim recognizes an admin user if the calling process is running as
root or as the Exim user or if any of the groups associated with the
calling process is the Exim group.  It is not necessary actually to be
running under the Exim group.  However, if admin users who are not root
or the Exim user are to access the contents of files on the spool via
the Exim monitor (which runs unprivileged), Exim must be built to allow
group read access to its spool files.

   By default, regular users are trusted to perform basic testing and
introspection commands, as themselves.  This setting can be tightened by
setting the ‘commandline_checks_require_admin’ option.  This affects
most of the checking options, such as ‘-be’ and anything else ‘-b*’.


File: spec.info,  Node: Spool files,  Next: Use of argv[0],  Prev: Privileged users,  Up: Security considerations

56.10 Spool files
=================

Exim's spool directory and everything it contains is owned by the Exim
user and set to the Exim group.  The mode for spool files is defined in
the ‘Local/Makefile’ configuration file, and defaults to 0640.  This
means that any user who is a member of the Exim group can access these
files.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of argv[0],  Next: Use of %f formatting,  Prev: Spool files,  Up: Security considerations

56.11 Use of argv[0]
====================

Exim examines the last component of ‘argv[0]’, and if it matches one of
a set of specific strings, Exim assumes certain options.  For example,
calling Exim with the last component of ‘argv[0]’ set to "rsmtp" is
exactly equivalent to calling it with the option ‘-bS’.  There are no
security implications in this.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of %f formatting,  Next: Embedded Exim path,  Prev: Use of argv[0],  Up: Security considerations

56.12 Use of %f formatting
==========================

The only use made of "%f" by Exim is in formatting load average values.
These are actually stored in integer variables as 1000 times the load
average.  Consequently, their range is limited and so therefore is the
length of the converted output.


File: spec.info,  Node: Embedded Exim path,  Next: Dynamic module directory,  Prev: Use of %f formatting,  Up: Security considerations

56.13 Embedded Exim path
========================

Exim uses its own path name, which is embedded in the code, only when it
needs to re-exec in order to regain root privilege.  Therefore, it is
not root when it does so.  If some bug allowed the path to get
overwritten, it would lead to an arbitrary program's being run as exim,
not as root.


File: spec.info,  Node: Dynamic module directory,  Next: Use of sprintf[],  Prev: Embedded Exim path,  Up: Security considerations

56.14 Dynamic module directory
==============================

Any dynamically loadable modules must be installed into the directory
defined in ‘LOOKUP_MODULE_DIR’ in ‘Local/Makefile’ for Exim to permit
loading it.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of sprintf[],  Next: Use of debug_printf[] and log_write[],  Prev: Dynamic module directory,  Up: Security considerations

56.15 Use of sprintf()
======================

A large number of occurrences of "sprintf" in the code are actually
calls to _string_sprintf()_, a function that returns the result in
malloc'd store.  The intermediate formatting is done into a large fixed
buffer by a function that runs through the format string itself, and
checks the length of each conversion before performing it, thus
preventing buffer overruns.

   The remaining uses of ‘sprintf()’ happen in controlled circumstances
where the output buffer is known to be sufficiently long to contain the
converted string.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of debug_printf[] and log_write[],  Next: Use of strcat[] and strcpy[],  Prev: Use of sprintf[],  Up: Security considerations

56.16 Use of debug_printf() and log_write()
===========================================

Arbitrary strings are passed to both these functions, but they do their
formatting by calling the function _string_vformat()_, which runs
through the format string itself, and checks the length of each
conversion.


File: spec.info,  Node: Use of strcat[] and strcpy[],  Prev: Use of debug_printf[] and log_write[],  Up: Security considerations

56.17 Use of strcat() and strcpy()
==================================

These are used only in cases where the output buffer is known to be
large enough to hold the result.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of spool files,  Next: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support,  Prev: Security considerations,  Up: Top

57 Format of spool files
************************

A message on Exim's queue consists of two files, whose names are the
message id followed by -D and -H, respectively.  The data portion of the
message is kept in the -D file on its own.  The message's envelope,
status, and headers are all kept in the -H file, whose format is
described in this chapter.  Each of these two files contains the final
component of its own name as its first line.  This is insurance against
disk crashes where the directory is lost but the files themselves are
recoverable.

   The file formats may be changed, or new formats added, at any
release.  Spool files are not intended as an interface to other programs
and should not be used as such.

   Some people are tempted into editing -D files in order to modify
messages.  You need to be extremely careful if you do this; it is not
recommended and you are on your own if you do it.  Here are some of the
pitfalls:

   • You must ensure that Exim does not try to deliver the message while
     you are fiddling with it.  The safest way is to take out a write
     lock on the -D file, which is what Exim itself does, using
     ‘fcntl()’.  If you update the file in place, the lock will be
     retained.  If you write a new file and rename it, the lock will be
     lost at the instant of rename.

   • If you change the number of lines in the file, the value of
     ‘$body_linecount’, which is stored in the -H file, will be
     incorrect and can cause incomplete transmission of messages or
     undeliverable messages.

   • If the message is in MIME format, you must take care not to break
     it.

   • If the message is cryptographically signed, any change will
     invalidate the signature.

   All in all, modifying -D files is fraught with danger.

   Files whose names end with -J may also be seen in the ‘input’
directory (or its subdirectories when ‘split_spool_directory’ is set).
These are journal files, used to record addresses to which the message
has been delivered during the course of a delivery attempt.  If there
are still undelivered recipients at the end, the -H file is updated, and
the -J file is deleted.  If, however, there is some kind of crash (for
example, a power outage) before this happens, the -J file remains in
existence.  When Exim next processes the message, it notices the -J file
and uses it to update the -H file before starting the next delivery
attempt.

   Files whose names end with -K or .eml may also be seen in the spool.
These are temporaries used for DKIM or malware processing, when that is
used.  They should be tidied up by normal operations; any old ones are
probably relics of crashes and can be removed.

* Menu:

* Format of the -H file::
* Format of the -D file::


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of the -H file,  Next: Format of the -D file,  Up: Format of spool files

57.1 Format of the -H file
==========================

The second line of the -H file contains the login name for the uid of
the process that called Exim to read the message, followed by the
numerical uid and gid.  For a locally generated message, this is
normally the user who sent the message.  For a message received over
TCP/IP via the daemon, it is normally the Exim user.

   The third line of the file contains the address of the message's
sender as transmitted in the envelope, contained in angle brackets.  The
sender address is empty for bounce messages.  For incoming SMTP mail,
the sender address is given in the MAIL command.  For locally generated
mail, the sender address is created by Exim from the login name of the
current user and the configured ‘qualify_domain’.  However, this can be
overridden by the ‘-f’ option or a leading "From " line if the caller is
trusted, or if the supplied address is "<>" or an address that matches
‘untrusted_set_senders’.

   The fourth line contains two numbers.  The first is the time that the
message was received, in the conventional Unix form - the number of
seconds since the start of the epoch.  The second number is a count of
the number of messages warning of delayed delivery that have been sent
to the sender.

   There follow a number of lines starting with a hyphen.  These contain
variables, can appear in any order, and are omitted when not relevant.

   If there is a second hyphen after the first, the corresponding data
is tainted.  If there is a value in parentheses, the data is quoted for
a lookup.

   The following word specifies a variable, and the remainder of the
item depends on the variable.

‘-acl’ <_number_> <_length_>
     This item is obsolete, and is not generated from Exim release 4.61
     onwards; ‘-aclc’ and ‘-aclm’ are used instead.  However, ‘-acl’ is
     still recognized, to provide backward compatibility.  In the old
     format, a line of this form is present for every ACL variable that
     is not empty.  The number identifies the variable; the ‘acl_c’*x*
     variables are numbered 0-9 and the ‘acl_m’*x* variables are
     numbered 10-19.  The length is the length of the data string for
     the variable.  The string itself starts at the beginning of the
     next line, and is followed by a newline character.  It may contain
     internal newlines.

‘-aclc’ <_rest-of-name_> <_length_>
     A line of this form is present for every ACL connection variable
     that is defined.  Note that there is a space between ‘-aclc’ and
     the rest of the name.  The length is the length of the data string
     for the variable.  The string itself starts at the beginning of the
     next line, and is followed by a newline character.  It may contain
     internal newlines.

‘-aclm’ <_rest-of-name_> <_length_>
     A line of this form is present for every ACL message variable that
     is defined.  Note that there is a space between ‘-aclm’ and the
     rest of the name.  The length is the length of the data string for
     the variable.  The string itself starts at the beginning of the
     next line, and is followed by a newline character.  It may contain
     internal newlines.

‘-active_hostname’ <_hostname_>
     This is present if, when the message was received over SMTP, the
     value of ‘$smtp_active_hostname’ was different to the value of
     ‘$primary_hostname’.

‘-allow_unqualified_recipient’
     This is present if unqualified recipient addresses are permitted in
     header lines (to stop such addresses from being qualified if
     rewriting occurs at transport time).  Local messages that were
     input using ‘-bnq’ and remote messages from hosts that match
     ‘recipient_unqualified_hosts’ set this flag.

‘-allow_unqualified_sender’
     This is present if unqualified sender addresses are permitted in
     header lines (to stop such addresses from being qualified if
     rewriting occurs at transport time).  Local messages that were
     input using ‘-bnq’ and remote messages from hosts that match
     ‘sender_unqualified_hosts’ set this flag.

‘-auth_id’ <_text_>
     The id information for a message received on an authenticated SMTP
     connection - the value of the ‘$authenticated_id’ variable.

‘-auth_sender’ <_address_>
     The address of an authenticated sender - the value of the
     ‘$authenticated_sender’ variable.

‘-body_linecount’ <_number_>
     This records the number of lines in the body of the message, and is
     present unless ‘-spool_file_wireformat’ is.

‘-body_zerocount’ <_number_>
     This records the number of binary zero bytes in the body of the
     message, and is present if the number is greater than zero.

‘-deliver_firsttime’
     This is written when a new message is first added to the spool.
     When the spool file is updated after a deferral, it is omitted.

‘-frozen’ <_time_>
     The message is frozen, and the freezing happened at <_time_>.

‘-helo_name’ <_text_>
     This records the host name as specified by a remote host in a HELO
     or EHLO command.

‘-host_address’ <_address_>.<_port_>
     This records the IP address of the host from which the message was
     received and the remote port number that was used.  It is omitted
     for locally generated messages.

‘-host_auth’ <_text_>
     If the message was received on an authenticated SMTP connection,
     this records the name of the authenticator - the value of the
     ‘$sender_host_authenticated’ variable.

‘-host_lookup_failed’
     This is present if an attempt to look up the sending host's name
     from its IP address failed.  It corresponds to the
     ‘$host_lookup_failed’ variable.

‘-host_name’ <_text_>
     This records the name of the remote host from which the message was
     received, if the host name was looked up from the IP address when
     the message was being received.  It is not present if no reverse
     lookup was done.

‘-ident’ <_text_>
     For locally submitted messages, this records the login of the
     originating user, unless it was a trusted user and the ‘-oMt’
     option was used to specify an ident value.  For messages received
     over TCP/IP, this records the ident string supplied by the remote
     host, if any.

‘-interface_address’ <_address_>.<_port_>
     This records the IP address of the local interface and the port
     number through which a message was received from a remote host.  It
     is omitted for locally generated messages.

‘-local’
     The message is from a local sender.

‘-localerror’
     The message is a locally-generated bounce message.

‘-local_scan’ <_string_>
     This records the data string that was returned by the
     ‘local_scan()’ function when the message was received - the value
     of the ‘$local_scan_data’ variable.  It is omitted if no data was
     returned.

‘-manual_thaw’
     The message was frozen but has been thawed manually, that is, by an
     explicit Exim command rather than via the auto-thaw process.

‘-N’
     A testing delivery process was started using the ‘-N’ option to
     suppress any actual deliveries, but delivery was deferred.  At any
     further delivery attempts, ‘-N’ is assumed.

‘-received_protocol’
     This records the value of the ‘$received_protocol’ variable, which
     contains the name of the protocol by which the message was
     received.

‘-sender_set_untrusted’
     The envelope sender of this message was set by an untrusted local
     caller (used to ensure that the caller is displayed in queue
     listings).

‘-spam_score_int’ <_number_>
     If a message was scanned by SpamAssassin, this is present.  It
     records the value of ‘$spam_score_int’.

‘-spool_file_wireformat’
     The -D file for this message is in wire-format (for ESMTP CHUNKING)
     rather than Unix-format.  The line-ending is CRLF rather than
     newline.  There is still, however, no leading-dot-stuffing.

‘-tls_certificate_verified’
     A TLS certificate was received from the client that sent this
     message, and the certificate was verified by the server.

‘-tls_cipher’ <_cipher name_>
     When the message was received over an encrypted connection, this
     records the name of the cipher suite that was used.

‘-tls_peerdn’ <_peer DN_>
     When the message was received over an encrypted connection, and a
     certificate was received from the client, this records the
     Distinguished Name from that certificate.

   Following the options there is a list of those addresses to which the
message is not to be delivered.  This set of addresses is initialized
from the command line when the ‘-t’ option is used and
‘extract_addresses_remove_arguments’ is set; otherwise it starts out
empty.  Whenever a successful delivery is made, the address is added to
this set.  The addresses are kept internally as a balanced binary tree,
and it is a representation of that tree which is written to the spool
file.  If an address is expanded via an alias or forward file, the
original address is added to the tree when deliveries to all its child
addresses are complete.

   If the tree is empty, there is a single line in the spool file
containing just the text "XX". Otherwise, each line consists of two
letters, which are either Y or N, followed by an address.  The address
is the value for the node of the tree, and the letters indicate whether
the node has a left branch and/or a right branch attached to it,
respectively.  If branches exist, they immediately follow.  Here is an
example of a three-node tree:

     YY darcy@austen.fict.example
     NN alice@wonderland.fict.example
     NN editor@thesaurus.ref.example

   After the non-recipients tree, there is a list of the message's
recipients.  This is a simple list, preceded by a count.  It includes
all the original recipients of the message, including those to whom the
message has already been delivered.  In the simplest case, the list
contains one address per line.  For example:

     4
     editor@thesaurus.ref.example
     darcy@austen.fict.example
     rdo@foundation
     alice@wonderland.fict.example

   However, when a child address has been added to the top-level
addresses as a result of the use of the ‘one_time’ option on a
‘redirect’ router, each line is of the following form:

     <top-level address> <errors_to address> <length>,<parent number>#<flag bits>

   The 01 flag bit indicates the presence of the three other fields that
follow the top-level address.  Other bits may be used in future to
support additional fields.  The <_parent number_> is the offset in the
recipients list of the original parent of the "one time" address.  The
first two fields are the envelope sender that is associated with this
address and its length.  If the length is zero, there is no special
envelope sender (there are then two space characters in the line).  A
non-empty field can arise from a ‘redirect’ router that has an
‘errors_to’ setting.

   A blank line separates the envelope and status information from the
headers which follow.  A header may occupy several lines of the file,
and to save effort when reading it in, each header is preceded by a
number and an identifying character.  The number is the number of
characters in the header, including any embedded newlines and the
terminating newline.  The character is one of the following:

<_blank_>                            header in which Exim has no
                                     special interest
‘B’                                  _Bcc:_ header
‘C’                                  _Cc:_ header
‘F’                                  _From:_ header
‘I’                                  _Message-id:_ header
‘P’                                  _Received:_ header - P for
                                     "postmark"
‘R’                                  _Reply-To:_ header
‘S’                                  _Sender:_ header
‘T’                                  _To:_ header
‘*’                                  replaced or deleted header

   Deleted or replaced (rewritten) headers remain in the spool file for
debugging purposes.  They are not transmitted when the message is
delivered.  Here is a typical set of headers:

     111P Received: by hobbit.fict.example with local (Exim 4.00)
     id 14y9EI-00026G-00; Fri, 11 May 2001 10:28:59 +0100
     049  Message-Id: <E14y9EI-00026G-00@hobbit.fict.example>
     038* X-rewrote-sender: bb@hobbit.fict.example
     042* From: Bilbo Baggins <bb@hobbit.fict.example>
     049F From: Bilbo Baggins <B.Baggins@hobbit.fict.example>
     099* To: alice@wonderland.fict.example, rdo@foundation,
     darcy@austen.fict.example, editor@thesaurus.ref.example
     104T To: alice@wonderland.fict.example, rdo@foundation.example,
     darcy@austen.fict.example, editor@thesaurus.ref.example
     038  Date: Fri, 11 May 2001 10:28:59 +0100

   The asterisked headers indicate that the envelope sender, _From:_
header, and _To:_ header have been rewritten, the last one because
routing expanded the unqualified domain _foundation_.


File: spec.info,  Node: Format of the -D file,  Prev: Format of the -H file,  Up: Format of spool files

57.2 Format of the -D file
==========================

The data file is traditionally in Unix-standard format: lines are ended
with an ASCII newline character.  However, when the ‘spool_wireformat’
main option is used some -D files can have an alternate format.  This is
flagged by a ‘-spool_file_wireformat’ line in the corresponding -H file.
The -D file lines (not including the first name-component line) are
suitable for direct copying to the wire when transmitting using the
ESMTP CHUNKING option, meaning lower processing overhead.  Lines are
terminated with an ASCII CRLF pair.  There is no dot-stuffing (and no
dot-termination).


File: spec.info,  Node: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support,  Next: Proxy support,  Prev: Format of spool files,  Up: Top

58 DKIM, SPF, SRS and DMARC
***************************

* Menu:

* DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail): DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail].
* SPF (Sender Policy Framework): SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
* DMARC::


File: spec.info,  Node: DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail],  Next: SPF [Sender Policy Framework],  Up: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support

58.1 DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail)
======================================

DKIM is a mechanism by which messages sent by some entity can be
provably linked to a domain which that entity controls.  It permits
reputation to be tracked on a per-domain basis, rather than merely upon
source IP address.  DKIM is documented in *RFC 6376
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6376)*.

   As DKIM relies on the message being unchanged in transit, messages
handled by a mailing-list (which traditionally adds to the message) will
not match any original DKIM signature.

   DKIM support is compiled into Exim by default if TLS support is
present.  It can be disabled by setting DISABLE_DKIM=yes in
‘Local/Makefile’.

   Exim's DKIM implementation allows for

  1. Signing outgoing messages: This function is implemented in the SMTP
     transport.  It can co-exist with all other Exim features (including
     transport filters) except cutthrough delivery.  However, signing
     options may not depend on headers modified by routers, the
     transport or a transport filter.

  2. Verifying signatures in incoming messages: This is implemented by
     an additional ACL (acl_smtp_dkim), which can be called several
     times per message, with different signature contexts.

   In typical Exim style, the verification implementation does not
include any default "policy".  Instead it enables you to build your own
policy using Exim's standard controls.

   Please note that verification of DKIM signatures in incoming mail is
turned on by default for logging (in the <= line) purposes.

   Additional log detail can be enabled using the ‘dkim_verbose’
log_selector.  When set, for each signature in incoming email, exim will
log a line displaying the most important signature details, and the
signature status.  Here is an example (with line-breaks added for
clarity):

     2009-09-09 10:22:28 1MlIRf-0003LU-U3 DKIM:
         d=facebookmail.com s=q1-2009b
         c=relaxed/relaxed a=rsa-sha1
         i=@facebookmail.com t=1252484542 [verification succeeded]

   You might want to turn off DKIM verification processing entirely for
internal or relay mail sources.  To do that, set the
‘dkim_disable_verify’ ACL control modifier.  This should typically be
done in the RCPT ACL, at points where you accept mail from relay sources
(internal hosts or authenticated senders).

* Menu:

* Signing outgoing messages::
* Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail::


File: spec.info,  Node: Signing outgoing messages,  Next: Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail,  Up: DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail]

58.1.1 Signing outgoing messages
--------------------------------

For signing to be usable you must have published a DKIM record in DNS.
Note that *RFC 8301 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)*
(which does not cover EC keys) says:

     rsa-sha1 MUST NOT be used for signing or verifying.

     Signers MUST use RSA keys of at least 1024 bits for all keys.
     Signers SHOULD use RSA keys of at least 2048 bits.

   Note also that the key content (the 'p=' field) in the DNS record is
different between RSA and EC keys; for the former it is the base64 of
the ASN.1 for the RSA public key (equivalent to the private-key .pem
with the header/trailer stripped) but for EC keys it is the base64 of
the pure key; no ASN.1 wrapping.

   Signing is enabled by setting private options on the SMTP transport.
These options take (expandable) strings as arguments.

‘dkim_domain’          Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   The domain(s) you want to sign with.  After expansion, this can be a
list.  Each element in turn, lowercased, is put into the ‘$dkim_domain’
expansion variable while expanding the remaining signing options.  If it
is empty after expansion, DKIM signing is not done, and no error will
result even if ‘dkim_strict’ is set.

‘dkim_selector’        Use: _smtp_       Type: _string     Default:
                                         list_*__          _unset_

   This sets the key selector string.  After expansion, which can use
‘$dkim_domain’, this can be a list.  Each element in turn is put in the
expansion variable ‘$dkim_selector’ which may be used in the
‘dkim_private_key’ option along with ‘$dkim_domain’.  If the option is
empty after expansion, DKIM signing is not done for this domain, and no
error will result even if ‘dkim_strict’ is set.

   To do, for example, dual-signing with RSA and EC keys this could be
be used:

     dkim_selector = ec_sel : rsa_sel
     dkim_private_key = KEYS_DIR/$dkim_selector

‘dkim_private_key’     Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This sets the private key to use.  You can use the ‘$dkim_domain’ and
‘$dkim_selector’ expansion variables to determine the private key to
use.  The result can either

   • be a valid RSA private key in ASCII armor (.pem file), including
     line breaks

   • with GnuTLS 3.6.0 or OpenSSL 1.1.1 or later, be a valid Ed25519
     private key (same format as above)

   • start with a slash, in which case it is treated as a file that
     contains the private key

   • be "0", "false" or the empty string, in which case the message will
     not be signed.  This case will not result in an error, even if
     ‘dkim_strict’ is set.

   To generate keys under OpenSSL:

     openssl genrsa -out dkim_rsa.private 2048
     openssl rsa -in dkim_rsa.private -out /dev/stdout -pubout -outform PEM

   The result file from the first command should be retained,
permissions set so that Exim can read it, and this option set to use it.
Take the base-64 lines from the output of the second command,
concatenated, for the DNS TXT record.  See *RFC 6376
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6376#section-3.6)* for the
record specification.

   Under GnuTLS:

     certtool --generate-privkey --rsa --bits=2048 --password='' -8 --outfile=dkim_rsa.private
     certtool --load-privkey=dkim_rsa.private --pubkey-info

   Note that *RFC 8301 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)*
says:

     Signers MUST use RSA keys of at least 1024 bits for all keys.
     Signers SHOULD use RSA keys of at least 2048 bits.

   EC keys for DKIM are defined by *RFC 8463
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8463)*.  They are considerably
smaller than RSA keys for equivalent protection.  As they are a recent
development, users should consider dual-signing (by setting a list of
selectors, and an expansion for this option) for some transition period.
The "_CRYPTO_SIGN_ED25519" macro will be defined if support is present
for EC keys.

   OpenSSL 1.1.1 and GnuTLS 3.6.0 can create Ed25519 private keys:

     openssl genpkey -algorithm ed25519 -out dkim_ed25519.private
     certtool --generate-privkey --key-type=ed25519 --outfile=dkim_ed25519.private

   To produce the required public key value for a DNS record:

     openssl pkey -outform DER -pubout -in dkim_ed25519.private | tail -c +13 | base64
     certtool --load-privkey=dkim_ed25519.private --pubkey-info --outder | tail -c +13 | base64

   Exim also supports an alternate format of Ed25519 keys in DNS which
was a candidate during development of the standard, but not adopted.  A
future release will probably drop that support.

‘dkim_hash’            Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _sha256_

   Can be set to any one of the supported hash methods, which are:

   • ‘sha1’ - should not be used, is old and insecure

   • ‘sha256’ - the default

   • ‘sha512’ - possibly more secure but less well supported

   Note that *RFC 8301 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)*
says:

     rsa-sha1 MUST NOT be used for signing or verifying.

‘dkim_identity’        Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   If set after expansion, the value is used to set an "i=" tag in the
signing header.  The DKIM standards restrict the permissible syntax of
this optional tag to a mail address, with possibly-empty local part, an
@, and a domain identical to or subdomain of the "d=" tag value.  Note
that Exim does not check the value.

‘dkim_canon’           Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option sets the canonicalization method used when signing a
message.  The DKIM RFC currently supports two methods: "simple" and
"relaxed".  The option defaults to "relaxed" when unset.  Note: the
current implementation only supports signing with the same
canonicalization method for both headers and body.

‘dkim_strict’          Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _string_*__       _unset_

   This option defines how Exim behaves when signing a message that
should be signed fails for some reason.  When the expansion evaluates to
either "1" or "true", Exim will defer.  Otherwise Exim will send the
message unsigned.  You can use the ‘$dkim_domain’ and ‘$dkim_selector’
expansion variables here.

‘dkim_sign_headers’    Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default: _see
                                         _string_*__       below_

   If set, this option must expand to a colon-separated list of header
names.  Headers with these names, or the absence of such a header, will
be included in the message signature.  When unspecified, the header
names listed in *RFC 4871
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc4871#section-5.5)* will be
used, whether or not each header is present in the message.  The default
list is available for the expansion in the macro "_DKIM_SIGN_HEADERS"
and an oversigning variant is in "_DKIM_OVERSIGN_HEADERS".

   If a name is repeated, multiple headers by that name (or the absence
thereof) will be signed.  The textually later headers in the headers
part of the message are signed first, if there are multiples.

   A name can be prefixed with either an "=" or a "+" character.  If an
"=" prefix is used, all headers that are present with this name will be
signed.  If a "+" prefix if used, all headers that are present with this
name will be signed, and one signature added for a missing header with
the name will be appended.

‘dkim_timestamps’      Use: _smtp_       Type:             Default:
                                         _integer_*__      _unset_

   This option controls the inclusion of timestamp information in the
signature.  If not set, no such information will be included.
Otherwise, must be an unsigned number giving an offset in seconds from
the current time for the expiry tag (e.g.  1209600 for two weeks); both
creation (t=) and expiry (x=) tags will be included unless the offset is
0 (no expiry).

   *RFC 6376
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6376#section-3.5)* lists these
tags as RECOMMENDED.


File: spec.info,  Node: Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail,  Prev: Signing outgoing messages,  Up: DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail]

58.1.2 Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail
-------------------------------------------------

Verification of DKIM signatures in SMTP incoming email is done for all
messages for which an ACL control ‘dkim_disable_verify’ has not been
set.

   Individual classes of DKIM signature algorithm can be ignored by
changing the main options ‘dkim_verify_hashes’ or
‘dkim_verify_keytypes’.  The ‘dkim_verify_minimal’ option can be set to
cease verification processing for a message once the first passing
signature is found.

   Performing verification sets up information used by the ‘authresults’
expansion item.

   For most purposes the default option settings suffice and the
remainder of this section can be ignored.

   The results of verification are made available to the ‘acl_smtp_dkim’
ACL, which (for complex needs) can examine and modify them.  A missing
ACL definition defaults to accept.  By default, the ACL is called once
for each syntactically(!)  correct signature in the incoming message.
If any ACL call does not accept, the message is not accepted.  If a
cutthrough delivery was in progress for the message, that is summarily
dropped (having wasted the transmission effort).

   To evaluate the verification result in the ACL a large number of
expansion variables containing the signature status and its details are
set up during the runtime of the ACL.

   Calling the ACL only for existing signatures is not sufficient to
build more advanced policies.  For that reason, the main option
‘dkim_verify_signers’, and an expansion variable ‘$dkim_signers’ exist.

   The main option ‘dkim_verify_signers’ can be set to a colon-separated
list of DKIM domains or identities for which the ACL ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ is
called.  It is expanded when the message has been received.  At this
point, the expansion variable ‘$dkim_signers’ already contains a
colon-separated list of signer domains and identities for the message.
When ‘dkim_verify_signers’ is not specified in the main configuration,
it defaults as:

     dkim_verify_signers = $dkim_signers

   This leads to the default behaviour of calling ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ for
each DKIM signature in the message.  Current DKIM verifiers may want to
explicitly call the ACL for known domains or identities.  This would be
achieved as follows:

     dkim_verify_signers = paypal.com:ebay.com:$dkim_signers

   This would result in ‘acl_smtp_dkim’ always being called for
"paypal.com" and "ebay.com", plus all domains and identities that have
signatures in the message.  You can also be more creative in
constructing your policy.  For example:

     dkim_verify_signers = $sender_address_domain:$dkim_signers

   If a domain or identity is listed several times in the (expanded)
value of ‘dkim_verify_signers’, the ACL is only called once for that
domain or identity.

   Note that if the option is set using untrustworthy data (such as the
From: header) care should be taken to force lowercase for domains and
for the domain part if identities.  The default setting can be regarded
as trustworthy in this respect.

   If multiple signatures match a domain (or identity), the ACL is
called once for each matching signature.

   Inside the DKIM ACL, the following expansion variables are available
(from most to least important):

‘$dkim_cur_signer’
     The signer that is being evaluated in this ACL run.  This can be a
     domain or an identity.  This is one of the list items from the
     expanded main option ‘dkim_verify_signers’ (see above).

‘$dkim_verify_status’
     So long as a DKIM ACL is defined (it need do no more than accept,
     which is the default), after all the DKIM ACL runs have completed,
     the value becomes a colon-separated list of the values after each
     run.  The value is maintained for the MIME, PRDR and DATA ACLs.

     Within the DKIM ACL, a string describing the general status of the
     signature.  One of

        • ‘none’: There is no signature in the message for the current
          domain or identity (as reflected by ‘$dkim_cur_signer’).

        • ‘invalid’: The signature could not be verified due to a
          processing error.  More detail is available in
          ‘$dkim_verify_reason’.

        • ‘fail’: Verification of the signature failed.  More detail is
          available in ‘$dkim_verify_reason’.

        • ‘pass’: The signature passed verification.  It is valid.

     This variable can be overwritten using an ACL 'set' modifier.  This
     might, for instance, be done to enforce a policy restriction on
     hash-method or key-size:

            warn condition       = ${if eq {$dkim_verify_status}{pass}}
                 condition       = ${if eq {${length_3:$dkim_algo}}{rsa}}
                 condition       = ${if or {{eq {$dkim_algo}{rsa-sha1}} \
                                            {< {$dkim_key_length}{1024}}}}
                 logwrite        = NOTE: forcing DKIM verify fail (was pass)
                 set dkim_verify_status = fail
                 set dkim_verify_reason = hash too weak or key too short

‘$dkim_verify_reason’
     A string giving a little bit more detail when ‘$dkim_verify_status’
     is either "fail" or "invalid".  One of

        • ‘pubkey_unavailable’ (when ‘$dkim_verify_status’="invalid"):
          The public key for the domain could not be retrieved.  This
          may be a temporary problem.

        • ‘pubkey_syntax’ (when ‘$dkim_verify_status’="invalid"): The
          public key record for the domain is syntactically invalid.

        • ‘bodyhash_mismatch’ (when ‘$dkim_verify_status’="fail"): The
          calculated body hash does not match the one specified in the
          signature header.  This means that the message body was
          modified in transit.

        • ‘signature_incorrect’ (when ‘$dkim_verify_status’="fail"): The
          signature could not be verified.  This may mean that headers
          were modified, re-written or otherwise changed in a way which
          is incompatible with DKIM verification.  It may of course also
          mean that the signature is forged.

     This variable can be overwritten, with any value, using an ACL
     'set' modifier.

‘$dkim_domain’
     The signing domain.  IMPORTANT: This variable is only populated if
     there is an actual signature in the message for the current domain
     or identity (as reflected by ‘$dkim_cur_signer’).

‘$dkim_identity’
     The signing identity, if present.  IMPORTANT: This variable is only
     populated if there is an actual signature in the message for the
     current domain or identity (as reflected by ‘$dkim_cur_signer’).

‘$dkim_selector’
     The key record selector string.

‘$dkim_algo’
     The algorithm used.  One of 'rsa-sha1' or 'rsa-sha256'.  If running
     under GnuTLS 3.6.0 or OpenSSL 1.1.1 or later, may also be
     'ed25519-sha256'.  The "_CRYPTO_SIGN_ED25519" macro will be defined
     if support is present for EC keys.

     Note that *RFC 8301
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)* says:

          rsa-sha1 MUST NOT be used for signing or verifying.

          DKIM signatures identified as having been signed with historic
          algorithms (currently, rsa-sha1) have permanently failed evaluation

     To enforce this you must either have a DKIM ACL which checks this
     variable and overwrites the ‘$dkim_verify_status’ variable as
     discussed above, or have set the main option ‘dkim_verify_hashes’
     to exclude processing of such signatures.

‘$dkim_canon_body’
     The body canonicalization method.  One of 'relaxed' or 'simple'.

‘$dkim_canon_headers’
     The header canonicalization method.  One of 'relaxed' or 'simple'.

‘$dkim_copiedheaders’
     A transcript of headers and their values which are included in the
     signature (copied from the 'z=' tag of the signature).  Note that
     *RFC 6376 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc6376)* requires
     that verification fail if the From: header is not included in the
     signature.  Exim does not enforce this; sites wishing strict
     enforcement should code the check explicitly.

‘$dkim_bodylength’
     The number of signed body bytes.  If zero ("0"), the body is
     unsigned.  If no limit was set by the signer, "9999999999999" is
     returned.  This makes sure that this variable always expands to an
     integer value.  *Note:* The presence of the signature tag
     specifying a signing body length is one possible route to spoofing
     of valid DKIM signatures.  A paranoid implementation might wish to
     regard signature where this variable shows less than the "no limit"
     return as being invalid.

‘$dkim_created’
     UNIX timestamp reflecting the date and time when the signature was
     created.  When this was not specified by the signer, "0" is
     returned.

‘$dkim_expires’
     UNIX timestamp reflecting the date and time when the signer wants
     the signature to be treated as "expired".  When this was not
     specified by the signer, "9999999999999" is returned.  This makes
     it possible to do useful integer size comparisons against this
     value.  Note that Exim does not check this value.

‘$dkim_headernames’
     A colon-separated list of names of headers included in the
     signature.

‘$dkim_key_testing’
     "1" if the key record has the "testing" flag set, "0" if not.

‘$dkim_key_nosubdomains’
     "1" if the key record forbids subdomaining, "0" otherwise.

‘$dkim_key_srvtype’
     Service type (tag s=) from the key record.  Defaults to "*" if not
     specified in the key record.

‘$dkim_key_granularity’
     Key granularity (tag g=) from the key record.  Defaults to "*" if
     not specified in the key record.

‘$dkim_key_notes’
     Notes from the key record (tag n=).

‘$dkim_key_length’
     Number of bits in the key.  Valid only once the key is loaded,
     which is at the time the header signature is verified, which is
     after the body hash is.

     Note that *RFC 8301
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc8301)* says:

          Verifiers MUST NOT consider signatures using RSA keys of
          less than 1024 bits as valid signatures.

     This is enforced by the default setting for the
     ‘dkim_verify_min_keysizes’ option.

   In addition, two ACL conditions are provided:

‘dkim_signers’
     ACL condition that checks a colon-separated list of domains or
     identities for a match against the domain or identity that the ACL
     is currently verifying (reflected by ‘$dkim_cur_signer’).  This
     condition is only usable in a DKIM ACL. This is typically used to
     restrict an ACL verb to a group of domains or identities.  For
     example:

          # Warn when Mail purportedly from GMail has no gmail signature
          warn sender_domains = gmail.com
               dkim_signers = gmail.com
               dkim_status = none
               log_message = GMail sender without gmail.com DKIM signature

     Note that the above does not check for a total lack of DKIM
     signing; for that check for empty ‘$h_DKIM-Signature:’ in the data
     ACL.

‘dkim_status’
     ACL condition that checks a colon-separated list of possible DKIM
     verification results against the actual result of verification,
     given by ‘$dkim_verify_status’ if that is non-empty or "none" if
     empty.  This condition may be used in DKIM, MIME, PRDR and DATA
     ACLs.

     A basic verification might be:

          deny !dkim_status = pass:none:invalid

     A more complex use could be to restrict an ACL verb to a list of
     verification outcomes, for example:

          deny sender_domains = paypal.com:paypal.de
               dkim_signers = paypal.com:paypal.de
               dkim_status = none:invalid:fail
               message = Mail from Paypal with invalid/missing signature

     The possible status keywords are: 'none','invalid','fail' and
     'pass'.  Please see the documentation of the ‘$dkim_verify_status’
     expansion variable above for more information of what they mean.

     The condition is true if the status (or any of the list of status
     values) is any one of the supplied list.


File: spec.info,  Node: SPF [Sender Policy Framework],  Next: DMARC,  Prev: DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail],  Up: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support

58.2 SPF (Sender Policy Framework)
==================================

SPF is a mechanism whereby a domain may assert which IP addresses may
transmit messages with its domain in the envelope from, documented by
*RFC 7208 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc7208)*.  For more
information on SPF see *http://www.open-spf.org
(http://www.open-spf.org)*, a static copy of the *http://openspf.org
(http://openspf.org)*.

   Messages sent by a system not authorised will fail checking of such
assertions.  This includes retransmissions done by traditional
forwarders.

   SPF verification support is built into Exim if SUPPORT_SPF=yes is set
in ‘Local/Makefile’.  The support uses the ‘libspf2’ library
*https://www.libspf2.org/ (https://www.libspf2.org/)*.  The support can
be built as a dynamic-load module if desired; see the comments in that
Makefile.

   There is no Exim involvement in the transmission of messages;
publishing certain DNS records is all that is required.

   For verification, an ACL condition and an expansion lookup are
provided.  Performing verification sets up information used by the
‘authresults’ expansion item.

   The ACL condition "spf" can be used at or after the MAIL ACL. It
takes as an argument a list of strings giving the outcome of the SPF
check, and will succeed for any matching outcome.  Valid strings are:

‘pass’
     The SPF check passed, the sending host is positively verified by
     SPF.

‘fail’
     The SPF check failed, the sending host is NOT allowed to send mail
     for the domain in the envelope-from address.

‘softfail’
     The SPF check failed, but the queried domain can't absolutely
     confirm that this is a forgery.

‘none’
     The queried domain does not publish SPF records.

‘neutral’
     The SPF check returned a "neutral" state.  This means the queried
     domain has published a SPF record, but wants to allow outside
     servers to send mail under its domain as well.  This should be
     treated like "none".

‘permerror’
     This indicates a syntax error in the SPF record of the queried
     domain.  You may deny messages when this occurs.

‘temperror’
     This indicates a temporary error during all processing, including
     Exim's SPF processing.  You may defer messages when this occurs.

‘invalid’
     There was an error during processing of the SPF lookup

   You can prefix each string with an exclamation mark to invert its
meaning, for example "!fail" will match all results but "fail".

   An asterisk ("*") will match any outcome.

   The string list is evaluated left-to-right, in a short-circuit
fashion.

   Example:

     deny spf = fail
          message = $sender_host_address is not allowed to send mail from \
                    ${if def:sender_address_domain \
                         {$sender_address_domain}{$sender_helo_name}}.  \
                    Please see http://www.open-spf.org/Why;\
                    identity=${if def:sender_address_domain \
                                  {$sender_address}{$sender_helo_name}};\
                    ip=$sender_host_address

   Note: The above mentioned URL may not be as helpful as expected.  You
are encouraged to replace the link with a link to a site with more
explanations.

   When the spf condition has run, it sets up several expansion
variables:

‘$spf_header_comment’
     This contains a human-readable string describing the outcome of the
     SPF check.  You can add it to a custom header or use it for logging
     purposes.

‘$spf_received’
     This contains a complete Received-SPF: header (name and content)
     that can be added to the message.  Please note that according to
     the SPF draft, this header must be added at the top of the header
     list, i.e.  with

          add_header = :at_start:$spf_received

     See section *note Adding header lines in ACLs:: for further
     details.

     Note: in case of "Best-guess" (see below), the convention is to put
     this string in a header called X-SPF-Guess: instead.

‘$spf_result’
     This contains the outcome of the SPF check in string form,
     currently one of pass, fail, softfail, none, neutral, permerror,
     temperror, or "(invalid)".

‘$spf_result_guessed’
     This boolean is true only if a best-guess operation was used and
     required in order to obtain a result.

‘$spf_smtp_comment’
     This contains a string that can be used in a SMTP response to the
     calling party.  Useful for "fail".  The string is generated by the
     SPF library from the template configured in the main config option
     ‘spf_smtp_comment_template’.

   In addition to SPF, you can also perform checks for so-called
"Best-guess".  Strictly speaking, "Best-guess" is not standard SPF, but
it is supported by the same framework that enables SPF capability.
Refer to *http://www.open-spf.org/FAQ/Best_guess_record
(http://www.open-spf.org/FAQ/Best_guess_record)* for a description of
what it means.

   To access this feature, simply use the spf_guess condition in place
of the spf one.  For example:

     deny spf_guess = fail
          message = $sender_host_address doesn't look trustworthy to me

   In case you decide to reject messages based on this check, you should
note that although it uses the same framework, "Best-guess" is not SPF,
and therefore you should not mention SPF at all in your reject message.

   When the spf_guess condition has run, it sets up the same expansion
variables as when spf condition is run, described above.

   Additionally, since Best-guess is not standardized, you may redefine
what "Best-guess" means to you by redefining the main configuration
‘spf_guess’ option.  For example, the following:

     spf_guess = v=spf1 a/16 mx/16 ptr ?all

   would relax host matching rules to a broader network range.

   A lookup expansion is also available.  It takes an email address as
the key and an IP address (v4 or v6) as the database:

       ${lookup {username@domain} spf {ip.ip.ip.ip}}

   The lookup will return the same result strings as can appear in
‘$spf_result’ (pass,fail,softfail,neutral,none,err_perm,err_temp).

* Menu:

* SRS (Sender Rewriting Scheme): SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].


File: spec.info,  Node: SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme],  Up: SPF [Sender Policy Framework]

58.2.1 SRS (Sender Rewriting Scheme)
------------------------------------

SRS can be used to modify sender addresses when forwarding so that SPF
verification does not object to them.  It can also be used to identify a
received bounce message as likely (or not) having been trigged by a
message from the local system, and for identifying dead addresses in
mailing lists.  It is one implementation of a VERP (Variable Envelope
Return Path) method.

   SRS operates by encoding the original envelope sender in a new sender
local part and using a domain run by the forwarding site as the new
domain for the sender.  Any DSN message should be returned to this new
sender at the forwarding site, which can extract the original sender
from the coded local part and forward the DSN to the originator.

   This is a way of avoiding the breakage that SPF does to forwarding.
The constructed local-part will be longer than the original, leading to
possible problems with very long addresses.  The changing of the sender
address also hinders the tracing of mail problems.

   Exim can be built to include native SRS support.  To do this
SUPPORT_SRS=yes must be defined in ‘Local/Makefile’.  If this has been
done, the macros _HAVE_SRS and _HAVE_NATIVE_SRS will be defined.  The
support is limited to SRS0-encoding; SRS1 is not supported.

   To encode an address use this expansion item:

*${srs_encode {*<_secret_>*}{*<_return path_>*}{*<_original domain_>*}}*
     The first argument should be a secret known and used by all systems
     handling the recipient domain for the original message.  There is
     no need to periodically change this key; a timestamp is also
     encoded.  The second argument should be given as the envelope
     sender address before this encoding operation.  If this value is
     empty the the expansion result will be empty.  The third argument
     should be the recipient domain of the message when it arrived at
     this system.  All arguments are expanded before use.

     The result of the expansion is the replacement envelope-from
     (return path) to be used.

   To decode an address use this expansion condition:

*inbound_srs {*<_local part_>*}{*<_secret_>*}*
     The first argument should be the recipient local part as it was
     received.  The second argument is the site secret.  Both arguments
     are expanded before use.

     If the messages is not for an SRS-encoded recipient the condition
     will return false.  If it is, the condition will return true and
     the variable ‘$srs_recipient’ will be set to the decoded (original)
     value.

     If the second argument is empty then the condition returns true if
     the first argument is in valid SRS formet, else false.  The
     variable ‘$srs_recipient’ is not set for this case.

   Example usage:

       #macro
       SRS_SECRET = <pick something unique for your site for this. Use on all MXs.>

       #routers

       outbound:
         driver =    dnslookup
         # if outbound, and forwarding has been done, use an alternate transport
         domains =   ! +my_domains
         transport = ${if eq {$local_part@$domain} \
                             {$original_local_part@$original_domain} \
                          {remote_smtp} {remote_forwarded_smtp}}

       inbound_srs:
         driver =    redirect
         senders =   :
         domains =   +my_domains
         # detect inbound bounces which are SRS'd, and decode them
         condition = ${if inbound_srs {$local_part} {SRS_SECRET}}
         data =      $srs_recipient

       inbound_srs_failure:
         driver =    redirect
         senders =   :
         domains =   +my_domains
         # detect inbound bounces which look SRS'd but are invalid
         condition = ${if inbound_srs {$local_part} {}}
         allow_fail
         data =      :fail: Invalid SRS recipient address

       #... further routers here get inbound_srs-redirected recipients
       # and any that were not SRS'd


       # transport; should look like the non-forward outbound
       # one, plus the max_rcpt and return_path options
       remote_forwarded_smtp:
         driver =              smtp
         # single-recipient so that $original_domain is valid
         max_rcpt =            1
         # modify the envelope from, for mails that we forward
         return_path =         ${srs_encode {SRS_SECRET} {$return_path} {$original_domain}}


File: spec.info,  Node: DMARC,  Prev: SPF [Sender Policy Framework],  Up: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support

58.3 DMARC
==========

DMARC combines feedback from SPF, DKIM, and header From: in order to
attempt to provide better indicators of the authenticity of an email.
This document does not explain the fundamentals; you should read and
understand how it works by visiting the *DMARC website
(http://www.dmarc.org/)*.

   If Exim is built with DMARC support, the libopendmarc library is
used.

   For building Exim yourself, obtain the library from *sourceforge
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/opendmarc/)* to obtain a copy, or find
it in your favorite package repository.  You will need to attend to the
local/Makefile feature SUPPORT_DMARC and the associated LDFLAGS
addition.  This description assumes that headers will be in
/usr/local/include, and that the libraries are in /usr/local/lib.

* Menu:

* Configuration::
* Controls::
* ACL::
* Logging: Logging <1>.
* Example::


File: spec.info,  Node: Configuration,  Next: Controls,  Up: DMARC

58.3.1 Configuration
--------------------

There are three main-configuration options:

   The ‘dmarc_tld_file’ option defines the location of a text file of
valid top level domains the opendmarc library uses during domain
parsing.  Maintained by Mozilla, the most current version can be
downloaded from a link at
*https://publicsuffix.org/list/public_suffix_list.dat
(https://publicsuffix.org/list/public_suffix_list.dat)*.  See also the
util/renew-opendmarc-tlds.sh script.  The default for the option is
unset.  It is expanded before use.  If not set (or empty after
expansion), DMARC processing is disabled.

   The ‘dmarc_history_file’ option defines the location of a file to log
results of dmarc verification on inbound emails.  The contents are
importable by the opendmarc tools which will manage the data, send out
DMARC reports, and expire the data.  Make sure the directory of this
file is writable by the user exim runs as.  The default for the option
is unset.  It is expanded before use.  If not set (or empty after
expansion), no history is written.

   The ‘dmarc_forensic_sender’ option defines an alternate email address
to use when sending a forensic report detailing alignment failures if a
sender domain's dmarc record specifies it and you have configured Exim
to send them.  If set, this is expanded and used for the From: header
line; the address is extracted from it and used for the envelope from.
If not set (the default), the From: header is expanded from the dsn_from
option, and <> is used for the envelope from.


File: spec.info,  Node: Controls,  Next: ACL,  Prev: Configuration,  Up: DMARC

58.3.2 Controls
---------------

It makes sense to only verify DMARC status of messages coming from
remote, untrusted sources.  You can use standard conditions such as
hosts, senders, authenticated, etc, to decide that DMARC verification
should *not* be performed for them and disable DMARC with an ACL control
modifier:

       control = dmarc_disable_verify

   A DMARC record can also specify a "forensic address", which gives
exim an email address to submit reports about failed alignment.  Exim
does not do this by default because in certain conditions it results in
unintended information leakage (what lists a user might be subscribed
to, etc).  You must configure exim to submit forensic reports to the
owner of the domain.  If the DMARC record contains a forensic address
and you specify the control statement below, then exim will send these
forensic emails.  It is also advised that you configure a
‘dmarc_forensic_sender’ because the default sender address construction
might be inadequate.

       control = dmarc_enable_forensic

   (AGAIN: You can choose not to send these forensic reports by simply
not putting the dmarc_enable_forensic control line at any point in your
exim config.  If you don't tell exim to send them, it will not send
them.)

   There are no options to either control.  Both must appear before the
DATA acl.


File: spec.info,  Node: ACL,  Next: Logging <1>,  Prev: Controls,  Up: DMARC

58.3.3 ACL
----------

DMARC checks can be run on incoming SMTP messages by using the
"dmarc_status" ACL condition in the DATA ACL. You are required to call
the "spf" condition first in the ACLs, then the "dmarc_status"
condition.  Putting this condition in the ACLs is required in order for
a DMARC check to actually occur.

   The "dmarc_status" condition takes a list of strings on its
right-hand side.  These strings describe recommended action based on the
DMARC check.  To understand what the policy recommendations mean, refer
to the DMARC website above.  Valid strings are:

    _accept_   The DMARC check passed and the library recommends
               accepting the email
    _reject_   The DMARC check failed and the library recommends
               rejecting the email
    _quarantine_The DMARC check failed and the library recommends
               keeping it for further inspection
    _none_     The DMARC check passed and the library recommends no
               specific action, neutral
    _norecord_ No policy section in the DMARC record for this
               RFC5322.From field
    _nofrom_   Unable to determine the domain of the sender
    _temperror_Library error or dns error
    _off_      The DMARC check was disabled for this email

   You can prefix each string with an exclamation mark to invert its
meaning, for example "!accept" will match all results but "accept".  The
string list is evaluated left-to-right in a short-circuit fashion.  When
a string matches the outcome of the DMARC check, the condition succeeds.
If none of the listed strings matches the outcome of the DMARC check,
the condition fails.

   Of course, you can also use any other lookup method that Exim
supports, including LDAP, Postgres, MySQL, etc, as long as the result is
a list of colon-separated strings.

   Performing the check sets up information used by the ‘authresults’
expansion item

   and several expansion variables.  You should not use these variables
before a check has been run.

   The following expansion variables are available:

‘$dmarc_status’
     A one word status indicating what the DMARC library thinks of the
     email.  It is a combination of the results of DMARC record lookup
     and the SPF/DKIM/DMARC processing results (if a DMARC record was
     found).  The actual policy declared in the DMARC record is in a
     separate expansion variable.

‘$dmarc_status_text’
     Slightly longer, human readable status.

‘$dmarc_used_domain’
     The domain which DMARC used to look up the DMARC policy record.

‘$dmarc_domain_policy’
     The policy declared in the DMARC record.  Valid values are "none",
     "reject" and "quarantine".  It is blank when there is any error,
     including no DMARC record.

‘$dmarc_alignment_spf’
     The result of the SPF alignment portion of the test status; "yes"
     or "no".

‘$dmarc_alignment_dkim’
     The result of the DKIM alignment portion of the test status; "yes"
     or "no".


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging <1>,  Next: Example,  Prev: ACL,  Up: DMARC

58.3.4 Logging
--------------

By default, Exim's DMARC configuration is intended to be non-intrusive
and conservative.  To facilitate this, Exim will not create any type of
logging files without explicit configuration by you, the admin.  Nor
will Exim send out any emails/reports about DMARC issues without
explicit configuration by you, the admin (other than typical bounce
messages that may come about due to ACL processing or failure delivery
issues).

   In order to log statistics suitable to be imported by the opendmarc
tools, you need to:

   • Configure the global option ‘dmarc_history_file’

   • Configure cron jobs to call the appropriate opendmarc history
     import scripts and truncating the dmarc_history_file

   In order to send forensic reports, you need to:

   • Configure the global option ‘dmarc_forensic_sender’

   • Configure, somewhere before the DATA ACL, the control option to
     enable sending DMARC forensic reports


File: spec.info,  Node: Example,  Prev: Logging <1>,  Up: DMARC

58.3.5 Example
--------------

Example usage:

     (RCPT ACL)
       warn    domains        = +local_domains
               hosts          = +local_hosts
               control        = dmarc_disable_verify

       warn    !domains       = +screwed_up_dmarc_records
               control        = dmarc_enable_forensic

       warn    condition      = (lookup if destined to mailing list)
               set acl_m_mailing_list = 1

     (DATA ACL)
       warn    dmarc_status   = accept : none : off
               !authenticated = *
               log_message    = DMARC DEBUG: $dmarc_status $dmarc_used_domain

       warn    dmarc_status   = !accept
               !authenticated = *
               log_message    = DMARC DEBUG: '$dmarc_status' for $dmarc_used_domain

       warn    dmarc_status   = quarantine
               !authenticated = *
               set acl_m_quarantine = 1
               # Do something in a transport with this flag variable

       deny    condition      = ${if eq{$dmarc_domain_policy}{reject}}
               condition      = ${if eq{$acl_m_mailing_list}{1}}
               message        = Messages from $dmarc_used_domain break mailing lists

       deny    dmarc_status   = reject
               !authenticated = *
               message        = Message from $dmarc_used_domain failed sender's DMARC policy, REJECT

       warn    add_header     = :at_start:${authresults {$primary_hostname}}


File: spec.info,  Node: Proxy support,  Next: Internationalisation",  Prev: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support,  Up: Top

59 Proxies
**********

A proxy is an intermediate system through which communication is passed.
Proxies may provide a security, availability or load-distribution
function.

* Menu:

* Inbound proxies::
* Outbound proxies::
* Logging: Logging <2>.


File: spec.info,  Node: Inbound proxies,  Next: Outbound proxies,  Up: Proxy support

59.1 Inbound proxies
====================

Exim has support for receiving inbound SMTP connections via a proxy that
uses "Proxy Protocol" to speak to it.  To include this support, include
"SUPPORT_PROXY=yes" in Local/Makefile.

   It was built on the HAProxy specification, found at
*https://www.haproxy.org/download/1.8/doc/proxy-protocol.txt
(https://www.haproxy.org/download/1.8/doc/proxy-protocol.txt)*.

   The purpose of this facility is so that an application load balancer,
such as HAProxy, can sit in front of several Exim servers to distribute
load.  Exim uses the local protocol communication with the proxy to
obtain the remote SMTP system IP address and port information.  There is
no logging if a host passes or fails Proxy Protocol negotiation, but it
can easily be determined and recorded in an ACL (example is below).

   Use of a proxy is enabled by setting the ‘hosts_proxy’ main
configuration option to a hostlist; connections from these hosts will
use Proxy Protocol.  Exim supports both version 1 and version 2 of the
Proxy Protocol and automatically determines which version is in use.

   The Proxy Protocol header is the first data received on a TCP
connection and is inserted before any TLS-on-connect handshake from the
client; Exim negotiates TLS between Exim-as-server and the remote
client, not between Exim and the proxy server.  The Proxy Protocol
header must be received within ‘proxy_protocol_timeout’, which defaults
to 3s.

   The following expansion variables are usable ("internal" and
"external" here refer to the interfaces of the proxy):

    $proxy_external_addressIP of host being proxied or IP of remote
                       interface of proxy
    $proxy_external_portPort of host being proxied or Port on remote
                       interface of proxy
    $proxy_local_addressIP of proxy server inbound or IP of local
                       interface of proxy
    $proxy_local_port  Port of proxy server inbound or Port on local
                       interface of proxy
    $proxy_session     boolean: SMTP connection via proxy

   If ‘$proxy_session’ is set but ‘$proxy_external_address’ is empty
there was a protocol error.  The variables ‘$sender_host_address’ and
‘$sender_host_port’ will have values for the actual client system, not
the proxy.

   Since the real connections are all coming from the proxy, and the per
host connection tracking is done before Proxy Protocol is evaluated,
‘smtp_accept_max_per_host’ must be set high enough to handle all of the
parallel volume you expect per inbound proxy.  With the option set so
high, you lose the ability to protect your server from many connections
from one IP. In order to prevent your server from overload, you need to
add a per connection ratelimit to your connect ACL. A possible solution
is:

       # Set max number of connections per host
       LIMIT   = 5
       # Or do some kind of IP lookup in a flat file or database
       # LIMIT = ${lookup{$sender_host_address}iplsearch{/etc/exim/proxy_limits}}

       defer   ratelimit      = LIMIT / 5s / per_conn / strict
               message        = Too many connections from this IP right now


File: spec.info,  Node: Outbound proxies,  Next: Logging <2>,  Prev: Inbound proxies,  Up: Proxy support

59.2 Outbound proxies
=====================

Exim has support for sending outbound SMTP via a proxy using a protocol
called SOCKS5 (defined by *RFC 1928
(https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1928)*).  The support can be
optionally included by defining SUPPORT_SOCKS=yes in Local/Makefile.

   Use of a proxy is enabled by setting the ‘socks_proxy’ option on an
smtp transport.  If unset (or empty after expansion) then proxying is
not done.  Otherwise, expansion should result in a list (colon-separated
by default) of proxy specifiers.  Each proxy specifier is a list
(space-separated by default) where the initial element is an IP address
and any subsequent elements are options.

   Each option is a string of form <name>=<value>.  The list of options
is in the following table:

    _auth_authentication method
    _name_authentication username
    _pass_authentication password
    _port_tcp port
    _tmo_connection timeout
    _pri_priority
    _weight_selection bias

   More details on each of these options follows:

   • ‘auth’: Either "none" (default) or "name".  Using "name" selects
     username/password authentication per *RFC 1929
     (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc1929)* for access to the
     proxy.  Default is "none".

   • ‘name’: sets the username for the "name" authentication method.
     Default is empty.

   • ‘pass’: sets the password for the "name" authentication method.
     Default is empty.

   • ‘port’: the TCP port number to use for the connection to the proxy.
     Default is 1080.

   • ‘tmo’: sets a connection timeout in seconds for this proxy.
     Default is 5.

   • ‘pri’: specifies a priority for the proxy within the list, higher
     values being tried first.  The default priority is 1.

   • ‘weight’: specifies a selection bias.  Within a priority set
     servers are queried in a random fashion, weighted by this value.
     The default value for selection bias is 1.

   Proxies from the list are tried according to their priority and
weight settings until one responds.  The timeout for the overall
connection applies to the set of proxied attempts.


File: spec.info,  Node: Logging <2>,  Prev: Outbound proxies,  Up: Proxy support

59.3 Logging
============

To log the (local) IP of a proxy in the incoming or delivery logline,
add "+proxy" to the ‘log_selector’ option.  This will add a component
tagged with "PRX=" to the line.


File: spec.info,  Node: Internationalisation",  Next: Events,  Prev: Proxy support,  Up: Top

60 Internationalisation
***********************

Exim has support for Internationalised mail names.  To include this it
must be built with SUPPORT_I18N and the libidn library.  Standards
supported are RFCs *2060 (https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2060.html)*,
*5890 (https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc5890.html)*, *6530
(https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc6530.html)* and *6533
(https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc6533.html)*.

   If Exim is built with SUPPORT_I18N_2008 (in addition to SUPPORT_I18N,
not instead of it) then IDNA2008 is supported; this adds an extra
library requirement, upon libidn2.

* Menu:

* MTA operations::
* MDA operations::


File: spec.info,  Node: MTA operations,  Next: MDA operations,  Up: Internationalisation"

60.1 MTA operations
===================

The main configuration option ‘smtputf8_advertise_hosts’ specifies a
host list.  If this matches the sending host and accept_8bitmime is true
(the default) then the ESMTP option SMTPUTF8 will be advertised.

   If the sender specifies the SMTPUTF8 option on a MAIL command
international handling for the message is enabled and the expansion
variable ‘$message_smtputf8’ will have value TRUE.

   The option ‘allow_utf8_domains’ is set to true for this message.  All
DNS lookups are converted to a-label form whatever the setting of
‘allow_utf8_domains’ when Exim is built with SUPPORT_I18N.

   Both localparts and domain are maintained as the original UTF-8 form
internally; any comparison or regular-expression use will require
appropriate care.  Filenames created, eg.  by the appendfile transport,
will have UTF-8 names.

   HELO names sent by the smtp transport will have any UTF-8 components
expanded to a-label form, and any certificate name checks will be done
using the a-label form of the name.

   Log lines and Received-by: header lines will acquire a "utf8" prefix
on the protocol element, eg.  utf8esmtp.

   The following expansion operators can be used:

     ${utf8_domain_to_alabel:str}
     ${utf8_domain_from_alabel:str}
     ${utf8_localpart_to_alabel:str}
     ${utf8_localpart_from_alabel:str}

   The RCPT ACL may use the following modifier:

     control = utf8_downconvert
     control = utf8_downconvert/<value>

   This sets a flag requiring that envelope addresses are converted to
a-label form before smtp delivery.  This is usually for use in a Message
Submission Agent context, but could be used for any message.

   If a value is appended it may be:

    ‘1’mandatory downconversion
    ‘0’no downconversion
    ‘-1’if SMTPUTF8 not supported by destination host

   If no value is given, 1 is used.

   If mua_wrapper is set, the utf8_downconvert control is initially set
to -1.

   The smtp transport has an option ‘utf8_downconvert’.  If set it must
expand to one of the three values described above, or an empty string.
If non-empty it overrides value previously set (due to mua_wrapper or by
an ACL control).

   There is no explicit support for VRFY and EXPN. Configurations
supporting these should inspect ‘$smtp_command_argument’ for an SMTPUTF8
argument.

   There is no support for LMTP on Unix sockets.  Using the "lmtp"
protocol option on an smtp transport, for LMTP over TCP, should work as
expected.

   There is no support for DSN unitext handling, and no provision for
converting logging from or to UTF-8.


File: spec.info,  Node: MDA operations,  Prev: MTA operations,  Up: Internationalisation"

60.2 MDA operations
===================

To aid in constructing names suitable for IMAP folders the following
expansion operator can be used:

     ${imapfolder {<string>} {<sep>} {<specials>}}

   The string is converted from the charset specified by the "headers
charset" command (in a filter file) or ‘headers_charset’ main
configuration option (otherwise), to the modified UTF-7 encoding
specified by *RFC 2060 (https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2060)*,
with the following exception: All occurrences of <sep> (which has to be
a single character) are replaced with periods ("."), and all periods and
slashes that are not <sep> and are not in the <specials> string are
BASE64 encoded.

   The third argument can be omitted, defaulting to an empty string.
The second argument can be omitted, defaulting to "/".

   This is the encoding used by Courier for Maildir names on disk, and
followed by many other IMAP servers.

   Examples:

     ${imapfolder {Foo/Bar}}        yields Foo.Bar
     ${imapfolder {Foo/Bar}{.}{/}}  yields Foo&AC8-Bar
     ${imapfolder {Räksmörgås}}     yields R&AOQ-ksm&APY-rg&AOU-s

   Note that the source charset setting is vital, and also that
characters must be representable in UTF-16.


File: spec.info,  Node: Events,  Next: Adding drivers or lookups,  Prev: Internationalisation",  Up: Top

61 Events
*********

The events mechanism in Exim can be used to intercept processing at a
number of points.  It was originally invented to give a way to do
customised logging actions (for example, to a database) but can also be
used to modify some processing actions.

   Most installations will never need to use Events.  The support can be
left out of a build by defining DISABLE_EVENT=yes in ‘Local/Makefile’.

   There are two major classes of events: main and transport.  The main
configuration option ‘event_action’ controls reception events; a
transport option ‘event_action’ controls delivery events.

   Both options are a string which is expanded when the event fires.  An
example might look like:

     event_action = ${if eq {msg:delivery}{$event_name} \
     {${lookup pgsql {SELECT * FROM record_Delivery( \
         '${quote_pgsql:$sender_address_domain}',\
         '${quote_pgsql:${lc:$sender_address_local_part}}', \
         '${quote_pgsql:$domain}', \
         '${quote_pgsql:${lc:$local_part}}', \
         '${quote_pgsql:$host_address}', \
         '${quote_pgsql:${lc:$host}}', \
         '${quote_pgsql:$message_exim_id}')}} \
     } {}}

   Events have names which correspond to the point in process at which
they fire.  The name is placed in the variable ‘$event_name’ and the
event action expansion must check this, as it will be called for every
possible event type.

   The current list of events is:

auth:fail          after   both        per driver per authentication
                                       attempt
dane:fail          after   transport   per connection
dns:fail           after   both        per lookup
msg:complete       after   main        per message
msg:defer          after   transport   per message per delivery try
msg:delivery       after   transport   per recipient
msg:fail:delivery  after   transport   per recipient
msg:fail:internal  after   main        per recipient
msg:host:defer     after   transport   per host per delivery try; host
                                       errors
msg:rcpt:host:deferafter   transport   per recipient per host
msg:rcpt:defer     after   transport   per recipient
proc:deliver       before  main        per string of deliveries
tcp:connect        before  transport   per connection
tcp:close          after   transport   per connection
tls:cert           before  both        per certificate in verification
                                       chain
tls:fail:connect   after   main        per connection
smtp:connect       after   transport   per connection
smtp:ehlo          after   transport   per connection
smtp:fail:protocol after   main        per connection
smtp:fail:syntax   after   main        per connection

   New event types may be added in future.

   The event name is a colon-separated list, defining the type of event
in a tree of possibilities.  It may be used as a list or just matched on
as a whole.  There will be no spaces in the name.

   The second column in the table above describes whether the event
fires before or after the action is associates with.  Those which fire
before can be used to affect that action (more on this below).

   The third column in the table above says what section of the
configuration should define the event action.

   An additional variable, ‘$event_data’, is filled with information
varying with the event type:

auth:fail      smtp response
dane:fail      failure reason
dns:fail       failure reason, key and lookup-type
msg:defer      error string
msg:delivery   smtp confirmation message
msg:fail:internalfailure reason
msg:fail:deliverysmtp error message
msg:host:defer error string
msg:rcpt:host:defererror string
msg:rcpt:defer error string
proc:deliver   initial message id
tls:cert       verification chain depth
tls:fail:connecterror string
smtp:connect   smtp banner
smtp:ehlo      smtp ehlo response
smtp:fail:protocolerror string
smtp:fail:syntaxerror string

   The :defer events populate one extra variable: ‘$event_defer_errno’.

   For complex operations an ACL expansion can be used in
‘event_action’, however due to the multiple contexts that Exim operates
in during the course of its processing:

   • variables set in transport events will not be visible outside that
     transport call

   • acl_m variables in a server context are lost on a new connection,
     and after smtp helo/ehlo/mail/starttls/rset commands

   Using an ACL expansion with the logwrite modifier can be a useful way
of writing to the main log.

   The expansion of the event_action option should normally return an
empty string.  Should it return anything else the following will be
forced:

auth:fail      log information to write
tcp:connect    do not connect
tls:cert       refuse verification
smtp:connect   close connection

   All other message types ignore the result string, and no other use is
made of it.

   For a tcp:connect event, if the connection is being made to a proxy
then the ‘$host_address’ and ‘$host_port’ variables will be that of the
proxy and not the target system.

   For tls:cert events, if GnuTLS is in use this will trigger only per
chain element received on the connection.  For OpenSSL it will trigger
for every chain element including those loaded locally.

   For dns:fail events from dnsdb lookups, a "defer_never" option does
not affect the reporting of DNS_AGAIN.

   For proc:deliver events, will not be called for subsequent message
delivery attempts resulting from retry database linkage.  However, will
be called for both phases of a 2-phase queue run.


File: spec.info,  Node: Adding drivers or lookups,  Next: Concept Index,  Prev: Events,  Up: Top

62 Adding new drivers or lookup types
*************************************

The following actions have to be taken in order to add a new router,
transport, authenticator, or lookup type to Exim:

  1. Choose a name for the driver or lookup type that does not conflict
     with any existing name; I will use "newdriver" in what follows.

  2. Add to ‘src/EDITME’ the line:

          <type>_NEWDRIVER=yes

     where <_type_> is ROUTER, TRANSPORT, AUTH, or LOOKUP. If the code
     is not to be included in the binary by default, comment this line
     out.  You should also add any relevant comments about the driver or
     lookup type.

  3. Add to ‘src/config.h.defaults’ the line:

          #define <type>_NEWDRIVER

  4. Edit ‘src/drtables.c’, adding conditional code to pull in the
     private header and create a table entry as is done for all the
     other drivers and lookup types.

  5. Edit ‘scripts/lookups-Makefile’ if this is a new lookup; there is a
     for-loop near the bottom, ranging the ‘name_mod’ variable over a
     list of all lookups.  Add your ‘NEWDRIVER’ to that list.  As long
     as the dynamic module would be named ‘newdriver.so’, you can use
     the simple form that most lookups have.

  6. Edit ‘Makefile’ in the appropriate sub-directory (‘src/routers’,
     ‘src/transports’, ‘src/auths’, or ‘src/lookups’); add a line for
     the new driver or lookup type and add it to the definition of OBJ.

  7. Edit ‘OS/Makefile-Base’ adding a ‘.o’ file for the
     predefined-macros, to the definition of OBJ_MACRO. Add a set of
     line to do the compile also.

  8. Create ‘newdriver.h’ and ‘newdriver.c’ in the appropriate
     sub-directory of ‘src’.

  9. Edit ‘scripts/MakeLinks’ and add commands to link the ‘.h’ and ‘.c’
     files as for other drivers and lookups.

   Then all you need to do is write the code!  A good way to start is to
make a proforma by copying an existing module of the same type, globally
changing all occurrences of the name, and cutting out most of the code.
Note that any options you create must be listed in alphabetical order,
because the tables are searched using a binary chop procedure.

   There is a ‘README’ file in each of the sub-directories of ‘src’
describing the interface that is expected.


File: spec.info,  Node: Concept Index,  Prev: Adding drivers or lookups,  Up: Top

[index]
* Menu:

* "and" expansion condition:             Combining expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   25)
* "From" line:                           Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   19)
* "From" line <1>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line  186)
* "From" line <2>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line  336)
* "From" line <3>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line 1016)
* "From" line <4>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1417)
* "From" line <5>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3797)
* "From" line <6>:                       Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line   57)
* "From" line <7>:                       Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  443)
* "From" line <8>:                       Operational details for delivery to a new file.
                                                             (line    6)
* "From" line <9>:                       Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  169)
* "From" line <10>:                      The UUCP From line. (line    6)
* "gecos" field, parsing:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1107)
* "message is frozen":                   Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  388)
* "or" expansion condition:              Combining expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   14)
* "percent hack":                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2031)
* "percent hack" <1>:                    Using an ACL to control relaying.
                                                             (line   10)
* "spool file is locked":                Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  388)
* "sticky" bit:                          Testing.            (line   56)
* "sticky" bit <1>:                      Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  190)
* *@ with single-key lookup:             Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line   19)
* *@ with single-key lookup <1>:         Address lists.      (line   87)
* +caseful:                              Case of letters in address lists.
                                                             (line   24)
* +caseful <1>:                          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  469)
* +defer_unknown:                        Using DNS lists.    (line   43)
* +exclude_unknown:                      Using DNS lists.    (line   43)
* +ignore_defer:                         Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information.
                                                             (line    6)
* +ignore_unknown:                       Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found.
                                                             (line   17)
* +include_defer:                        Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information.
                                                             (line    6)
* +include_unknown:                      Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found.
                                                             (line   17)
* +include_unknown <1>:                  Using DNS lists.    (line   43)
* .ifdef:                                Conditional skips in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* .include in configuration file:        File inclusions in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* .include_if_exists in configuration file: File inclusions in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* .so building:                          Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* /dev/null:                             Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   64)
* /etc/aliases:                          Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line   26)
* /etc/mail/mailer.conf:                 Replacing another MTA with Exim.
                                                             (line   17)
* /etc/passwd:                           passwd.             (line    6)
* /etc/passwd <1>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1078)
* /etc/passwd <2>:                       Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  132)
* /etc/userdbshadow.dat:                 dbmnz.              (line    6)
* 4_xx_ responses:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  956)
* 4_xx_ responses <1>:                   Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   10)
* 4_xx_ responses <2>:                   Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  963)
* 4_xx_ responses <3>:                   Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors.
                                                             (line   22)
* 8-bit characters:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line   40)
* 8-bit characters <1>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   11)
* 8-bit characters <2>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2161)
* 8BITMIME:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   11)
* 8BITMIME <1>:                          Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  138)
* @ in a domain list:                    Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line   34)
* @ in a domain list <1>:                Domain lists.       (line    9)
* @ in a host list:                      Host list patterns that match by IP address.
                                                             (line   32)
* @@ with single-key lookup:             Address lists.      (line  124)
* @mx_any:                               Domain lists.       (line   29)
* @mx_primary:                           Domain lists.       (line   29)
* @mx_secondary:                         Domain lists.       (line   29)
* @[] in a domain list:                  Domain lists.       (line   17)
* @[] in a host list:                    Host list patterns that match by IP address.
                                                             (line   45)
* A+:                                    Pseudo dnsdb record types.
                                                             (line   51)
* abandoning mail:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line 1250)
* abandoning mail <1>:                   Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   89)
* accept ACL verb:                       ACL verbs.          (line    8)
* accept router:                         The accept router.  (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs):           Policy control.     (line   13)
* access control lists (ACLs) <1>:       ACL configuration.  (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <2>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   31)
* access control lists (ACLs) <3>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   45)
* access control lists (ACLs) <4>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   61)
* access control lists (ACLs) <5>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   69)
* access control lists (ACLs) <6>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   83)
* access control lists (ACLs) <7>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   83)
* access control lists (ACLs) <8>:       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3163)
* access control lists (ACLs) <9>:       When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <10>:      Access control lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <11>:      Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <12>:      Finding an ACL to use.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <13>:      ACL return codes.   (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <14>:      Unset ACL options.  (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <15>:      Data for message ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <16>:      Data for non-message ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <17>:      Format of an ACL.   (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <18>:      Format of an ACL.   (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <19>:      ACL variables.      (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <20>:      Condition and modifier processing.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <21>:      Condition and modifier processing.
                                                             (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <22>:      ACL modifiers.      (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <23>:      Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line   29)
* access control lists (ACLs) <24>:      Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line   59)
* access control lists (ACLs) <25>:      Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  126)
* access control lists (ACLs) <26>:      Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  190)
* access control lists (ACLs) <27>:      ACL conditions.     (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <28>:      ACL conditions.     (line   22)
* access control lists (ACLs) <29>:      ACL conditions.     (line   22)
* access control lists (ACLs) <30>:      ACL conditions.     (line   22)
* access control lists (ACLs) <31>:      ACL conditions.     (line   58)
* access control lists (ACLs) <32>:      ACL conditions.     (line   66)
* access control lists (ACLs) <33>:      ACL conditions.     (line   66)
* access control lists (ACLs) <34>:      ACL conditions.     (line   85)
* access control lists (ACLs) <35>:      ACL conditions.     (line   93)
* access control lists (ACLs) <36>:      ACL conditions.     (line  103)
* access control lists (ACLs) <37>:      ACL conditions.     (line  111)
* access control lists (ACLs) <38>:      ACL conditions.     (line  153)
* access control lists (ACLs) <39>:      ACL conditions.     (line  161)
* access control lists (ACLs) <40>:      ACL conditions.     (line  161)
* access control lists (ACLs) <41>:      ACL conditions.     (line  167)
* access control lists (ACLs) <42>:      ACL conditions.     (line  179)
* access control lists (ACLs) <43>:      ACL conditions.     (line  183)
* access control lists (ACLs) <44>:      ACL conditions.     (line  195)
* access control lists (ACLs) <45>:      ACL conditions.     (line  209)
* access control lists (ACLs) <46>:      ACL conditions.     (line  219)
* access control lists (ACLs) <47>:      ACL conditions.     (line  225)
* access control lists (ACLs) <48>:      ACL conditions.     (line  225)
* access control lists (ACLs) <49>:      ACL conditions.     (line  239)
* access control lists (ACLs) <50>:      ACL conditions.     (line  251)
* access control lists (ACLs) <51>:      ACL conditions.     (line  274)
* access control lists (ACLs) <52>:      ACL conditions.     (line  294)
* access control lists (ACLs) <53>:      ACL conditions.     (line  323)
* access control lists (ACLs) <54>:      ACL conditions.     (line  334)
* access control lists (ACLs) <55>:      ACL conditions.     (line  350)
* access control lists (ACLs) <56>:      Using DNS lists.    (line    6)
* access control lists (ACLs) <57>:      Using an ACL to control relaying.
                                                             (line    6)
* acl:                                   Expansion items.    (line   42)
* acl <1>:                               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   41)
* ACL:                                   SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line   30)
* ACL <1>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line  126)
* acl ACL condition:                     ACL conditions.     (line   22)
* adding drivers:                        Adding drivers or lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* additional groups:                     Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  543)
* additional groups <1>:                 Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  187)
* address:                               Introduction.       (line    6)
* address <1>:                           Limitations.        (line   15)
* address <2>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  628)
* address <3>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  687)
* address <4>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  984)
* address <5>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2031)
* address <6>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2200)
* address <7>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  368)
* address <8>:                           Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  144)
* address <9>:                           Private options for manualroute.
                                                             (line   93)
* address <10>:                          Unqualified addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* address <11>:                          Constructed addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* address duplicate, discarding:         Duplicate addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* address duplicate, discarding <1>:     Duplicate addresses <1>.
                                                             (line    6)
* address expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   12)
* address list:                          Address lists.      (line    6)
* address list <1>:                      Address lists.      (line    6)
* address list <2>:                      Address lists.      (line   39)
* address list <3>:                      Address lists.      (line   57)
* address list <4>:                      Address lists.      (line   71)
* address list <5>:                      Address lists.      (line  124)
* address list <6>:                      Address lists.      (line  124)
* address list <7>:                      Case of letters in address lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* address list <8>:                      Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  455)
* address list <9>:                      Rewriting patterns. (line    6)
* address qualification, suppressing:    Command line options.
                                                             (line  378)
* address redirection:                   The redirect router.
                                                             (line    6)
* address redirection <1>:               Forward files and address verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* address redirection <2>:               Items in a non-filter redirection list.
                                                             (line    6)
* address redirection <3>:               Redirecting to a local mailbox.
                                                             (line    6)
* address redirection <4>:               Redirecting to a local mailbox.
                                                             (line   15)
* address redirection <5>:               Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line    9)
* address redirection <6>:               Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   43)
* address redirection <7>:               Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   69)
* address redirection <8>:               Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   89)
* address redirection <9>:               Repeated redirection expansion.
                                                             (line    6)
* address redirection <10>:              Errors in redirection lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* address redirection <11>:              Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  334)
* address redirection <12>:              Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  412)
* address redirection <13>:              Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  440)
* address redirection <14>:              Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* address redirection <15>:              Redirection while verifying.
                                                             (line    6)
* addresses expansion item:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   21)
* add_header ACL modifier:               Adding header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* admin user:                            Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   38)
* admin user <1>:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  198)
* admin user <2>:                        Running the monitor.
                                                             (line   45)
* admin user <3>:                        Privileged users.   (line    6)
* affix:                                 Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   11)
* affix <1>:                             Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   57)
* affix <2>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  206)
* affix <3>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  211)
* affix <4>:                             Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  601)
* affix <5>:                             Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  554)
* alias file:                            Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   28)
* alias file <1>:                        Command line options.
                                                             (line  271)
* alias file <2>:                        Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line   19)
* alias file <3>:                        The redirect router.
                                                             (line    6)
* alias file <4>:                        Redirecting to a local mailbox.
                                                             (line   22)
* alias file <5>:                        Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  156)
* alias file <6>:                        Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  334)
* alias file <7>:                        Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  373)
* alias file <8>:                        Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* alias for host:                        Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line   39)
* ALPN:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1350)
* ALPN <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3360)
* ALPN <2>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  547)
* ALPN <3>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  858)
* ALPN <4>:                              ALPN.               (line    6)
* alternate configuration file:          Command line options.
                                                             (line  761)
* angle brackets, excess:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3171)
* appendfile:                            The file and directory options.
                                                             (line   38)
* appendfile transport:                  The appendfile transport.
                                                             (line    6)
* appending to a file:                   Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line    6)
* asterisk:                              Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* asterisk <1>:                          Domain lists.       (line   81)
* asterisk <2>:                          Domain lists.       (line  146)
* asterisk <3>:                          Special host list patterns.
                                                             (line   11)
* asterisk <4>:                          Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line   43)
* asterisk <5>:                          Address lists.      (line  132)
* asterisk <6>:                          Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   70)
* asterisk <7>:                          Logging deliveries. (line   40)
* Athena:                                Incorporated code.  (line   93)
* ATRN:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   52)
* ATRN <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   52)
* ATRN <2>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* ATRN <3>:                              ACL conditions.     (line   51)
* ATRN <4>:                              The ATRN command; and ODMR.
                                                             (line    6)
* AUTH:                                  Configuration file format.
                                                             (line   16)
* AUTH <1>:                              Authenticators configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* AUTH <2>:                              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  324)
* AUTH <3>:                              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  496)
* AUTH <4>:                              Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  164)
* AUTH <5>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   61)
* AUTH <6>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  127)
* AUTH <7>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  268)
* AUTH <8>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  286)
* AUTH <9>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  413)
* AUTH <10>:                             SMTP authentication.
                                                             (line   19)
* AUTH <11>:                             The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* AUTH <12>:                             Testing server authentication.
                                                             (line    6)
* AUTH <13>:                             Authentication by an Exim client.
                                                             (line   59)
* AUTH <14>:                             Using plaintext in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* AUTH <15>:                             The LOGIN authentication mechanism.
                                                             (line   32)
* AUTH <16>:                             Using external in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* AUTH <17>:                             Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* AUTH <18>:                             Logging message reception.
                                                             (line   48)
* authenticated ACL condition:           ACL conditions.     (line   58)
* authentication:                        Command line options.
                                                             (line 1498)
* authentication <1>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1506)
* authentication <2>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1514)
* authentication <3>:                    Expansion items.    (line   56)
* authentication <4>:                    Expansion items.    (line   56)
* authentication <5>:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  136)
* authentication <6>:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  151)
* authentication <7>:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  164)
* authentication <8>:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  180)
* authentication <9>:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  483)
* authentication <10>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  268)
* authentication <11>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  413)
* authentication <12>:                   Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  525)
* authentication <13>:                   Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  582)
* authentication <14>:                   SMTP authentication.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <15>:                   SMTP authentication.
                                                             (line  107)
* authentication <16>:                   Generic options for authenticators.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <17>:                   The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <18>:                   Authentication on an Exim server.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <19>:                   Authentication on an Exim server.
                                                             (line   70)
* authentication <20>:                   Authentication on an Exim server.
                                                             (line   73)
* authentication <21>:                   Testing server authentication.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <22>:                   Authentication by an Exim client.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <23>:                   Authentication by an Exim client.
                                                             (line   30)
* authentication <24>:                   The PLAIN authentication mechanism.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <25>:                   The LOGIN authentication mechanism.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <26>:                   The cram_md5 authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <27>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <28>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <29>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <30>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <31>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <32>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <33>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <34>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <35>:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <36>:                   gsasl auth variables.
                                                             (line   20)
* authentication <37>:                   gsasl auth variables.
                                                             (line   23)
* authentication <38>:                   gsasl auth variables.
                                                             (line   26)
* authentication <39>:                   The heimdal_gssapi authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <40>:                   The heimdal_gssapi authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <41>:                   The spa authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <42>:                   The spa authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <43>:                   The external authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <44>:                   The external authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <45>:                   The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <46>:                   The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authentication <47>:                   ACL conditions.     (line   58)
* authentication <48>:                   Logging message reception.
                                                             (line   48)
* authentication <49>:                   Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail.
                                                             (line   16)
* authentication <50>:                   SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line   27)
* authentication <51>:                   Outbound proxies.   (line   31)
* _Authentication-Results:_ header line: Expansion items.    (line   56)
* authenticator modules:                 Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators:                        The plaintext authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <1>:                    The cram_md5 authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <2>:                    The cyrus_sasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <3>:                    The dovecot authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <4>:                    The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <5>:                    The heimdal_gssapi authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <6>:                    The spa authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <7>:                    The external authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* authenticators <8>:                    The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* autoreply transport:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3280)
* autoreply transport <1>:               The autoreply transport.
                                                             (line    6)
* background delivery:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1361)
* backlog of connections:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2799)
* backslash in alias file:               Redirecting to a local mailbox.
                                                             (line   22)
* bang paths:                            Limitations.        (line    6)
* bang paths <1>:                        Rewriting examples. (line   41)
* banner:                                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3526)
* banner for SMTP:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2774)
* base32 expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   75)
* base32d expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   80)
* base36:                                Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* base62:                                Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* base62 <1>:                            Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  142)
* base62 expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   84)
* base62d expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   93)
* base64 decoding:                       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  105)
* base64 encoding:                       Expansion items.    (line  369)
* base64 encoding <1>:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   99)
* base64 encoding <2>:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  245)
* base64 encoding <3>:                   Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  106)
* base64 encoding <4>:                   Testing server authentication.
                                                             (line    6)
* base64 encoding <5>:                   Using plaintext in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* base64 encoding <6>:                   Using external in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* base64 encoding <7>:                   Available Exim functions.
                                                             (line  163)
* base64 expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   99)
* base64d expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  105)
* batched local delivery:                Address batching.   (line   14)
* batched SMTP input:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line  568)
* batched SMTP input <1>:                Incoming batched SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* batched SMTP output:                   Outgoing batched SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* batched SMTP output example:           Manualroute examples.
                                                             (line   83)
* BATV, verifying:                       Bounce address tag validation.
                                                             (line    6)
* bcc recipients, verifying none:        ACL conditions.     (line  307)
* _Bcc:_ header line:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* _Bcc:_ header line <1>:                Bcc;.               (line    6)
* BDAT:                                  Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  592)
* BDAT <1>:                              The DATA ACLs.      (line   23)
* Berkeley DB library:                   DBM libraries.      (line   44)
* Berkeley DB library <1>:               dbm.                (line   19)
* binary zero:                           cdb.                (line    6)
* binary zero <1>:                       dbm.                (line    6)
* binary zero <2>:                       dbmnz.              (line    6)
* binary zero <3>:                       nis.                (line    6)
* binary zero <4>:                       Expansion items.    (line  373)
* binary zero <5>:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  203)
* binary zero <6>:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  687)
* binary zero <7>:                       Testing server authentication.
                                                             (line   14)
* binary zero <8>:                       Using plaintext in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* binary zero <9>:                       The PLAIN authentication mechanism.
                                                             (line    6)
* binary zero <10>:                      Available Exim functions.
                                                             (line  264)
* binary zero <11>:                      Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
                                                             (line    6)
* bind IP address:                       Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  642)
* BIN_DIRECTORY:                         Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line    6)
* black hole:                            Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   89)
* black list (DNS):                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  298)
* black list (DNS) <1>:                  ACL conditions.     (line   85)
* black list (DNS) <2>:                  Using DNS lists.    (line    6)
* black list (DNS) <3>:                  Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  206)
* body of message:                       Terminology.        (line    6)
* body of message <1>:                   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  198)
* body of message <2>:                   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  203)
* body of message <3>:                   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  687)
* body of message <4>:                   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  703)
* body of message <5>:                   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  708)
* body of message <6>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1747)
* body of message <7>:                   Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   15)
* books about Exim:                      Exim documentation. (line   21)
* bool expansion condition:              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   54)
* boolean configuration values:          Boolean options.    (line    6)
* bool_lax expansion condition:          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   69)
* Bounce Address Tag Validation:         Introduction.       (line    6)
* bounce message:                        Terminology.        (line   10)
* bounce message <1>:                    Permanent delivery failure.
                                                             (line    6)
* bounce message <2>:                    Permanent delivery failure.
                                                             (line   21)
* bounce message <3>:                    Failures to deliver bounce messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* bounce message <4>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line  958)
* bounce message <5>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  346)
* bounce message <6>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  363)
* bounce message <7>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  370)
* bounce message <8>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  374)
* bounce message <9>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  396)
* bounce message <10>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  413)
* bounce message <11>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  945)
* bounce message <12>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  971)
* bounce message <13>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1390)
* bounce message <14>:                   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  288)
* bounce message <15>:                   Customizing bounce messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* bounce messages:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  909)
* bounce messages <1>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  922)
* bounce_message_file:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  349)
* broken alias or forward files:         Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* BSD, DBM library for:                  DBM libraries.      (line   12)
* bug reporting:                         FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line   18)
* bug reports:                           Bug reports.        (line    6)
* Bugzilla:                              FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line   18)
* build directory:                       The building process.
                                                             (line    6)
* build-time options, overriding:        Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line    6)
* building alias file:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line  271)
* building DBM files:                    Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
                                                             (line    6)
* building Exim:                         Building and installing Exim.
                                                             (line    6)
* building Exim <1>:                     Multiple machine architectures and operating systems.
                                                             (line    6)
* building Exim <2>:                     Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* building Exim <3>:                     Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   21)
* building Exim <4>:                     Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   21)
* building Exim <5>:                     Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   43)
* building Exim <6>:                     OS-specific header files.
                                                             (line    6)
* building Eximon:                       Overriding build-time options for the monitor.
                                                             (line    6)
* CA bundle:                             Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* CA bundle <1>:                         Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching:                               Lookup caching.     (line    6)
* caching <1>:                           Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line   44)
* caching <2>:                           Named list caching. (line    6)
* caching <3>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  428)
* caching <4>:                           Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <5>:                           Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <6>:                           Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <7>:                           Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <8>:                           Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <9>:                           Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <10>:                          Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <11>:                          Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <12>:                          Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <13>:                          Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <14>:                          Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* caching <15>:                          Using DNS lists.    (line   56)
* caching <16>:                          Callout caching.    (line    6)
* caching <17>:                          Quota caching.      (line    6)
* caching callout, suppressing:          Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   78)
* callout:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  428)
* callout <1>:                           Callout verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* callout <2>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line    6)
* callout <3>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   17)
* callout <4>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   27)
* callout <5>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   36)
* callout <6>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   41)
* callout <7>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   49)
* callout <8>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   65)
* callout <9>:                           Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   78)
* callout <10>:                          Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line   82)
* callout <11>:                          Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line  110)
* callout <12>:                          Additional parameters for callouts.
                                                             (line  126)
* callout <13>:                          Callout caching.    (line    6)
* carriage return:                       Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  670)
* carriage return <1>:                   Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  314)
* carriage return <2>:                   Line endings.       (line    6)
* carriage return <3>:                   Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   34)
* carriage return <4>:                   Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   25)
* case forcing in address lists:         Case of letters in address lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* case forcing in strings:               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  269)
* case forcing in strings <1>:           Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  548)
* case of local parts:                   Duplicate addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* case of local parts <1>:               Case of letters in address lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* case of local parts <2>:               Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  106)
* case of local parts <3>:               Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line   29)
* case of local parts <4>:               Case of local parts.
                                                             (line    6)
* case sensitivity:                      lsearch.            (line    6)
* case sensitivity <1>:                  [n]wildlsearch.     (line   13)
* _Cc:_ header line:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* cdb:                                   Incorporated code.  (line   17)
* cdb <1>:                               Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   79)
* cdb <2>:                               cdb.                (line    6)
* certextract:                           Expansion items.    (line   76)
* certificate:                           Expansion items.    (line   76)
* certificate <1>:                       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   99)
* certificate <2>:                       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  341)
* certificate <3>:                       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  462)
* certificate <4>:                       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  472)
* certificate <5>:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1535)
* certificate <6>:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1635)
* certificate <7>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1465)
* certificate <8>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1474)
* certificate <9>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1483)
* certificate <10>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1490)
* certificate <11>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3367)
* certificate <12>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3401)
* certificate <13>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3640)
* certificate <14>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3645)
* certificate <15>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3685)
* certificate <16>:                      Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  867)
* certificate <17>:                      Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  888)
* certificate <18>:                      Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  976)
* certificate <19>:                      Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  987)
* certificate <20>:                      Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  999)
* certificate <21>:                      Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line 1026)
* certificate <22>:                      Requesting and verifying client certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate <23>:                      Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate <24>:                      Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate <25>:                      Certificates and all that.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate <26>:                      Self-signed certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate <27>:                      Revoked certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate <28>:                      ACL conditions.     (line  225)
* certificate authorities:               Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* certificate authorities <1>:           Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* Certificate-based authentication:      The external authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* Certificate-based authentication <1>:  The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* change log:                            Exim documentation. (line   38)
* checking access:                       Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess].
                                                             (line    6)
* checking disk space:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  485)
* checking disk space <1>:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2790)
* CHUNKING:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  534)
* CHUNKING <1>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  592)
* CHUNKING <2>:                          The DATA ACLs.      (line   23)
* CIDR notation:                         Host list patterns that match by IP address.
                                                             (line   53)
* CIDR notation <1>:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  313)
* cipher:                                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3620)
* cipher <1>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  101)
* cipher <2>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  930)
* cipher <3>:                            Configuring an Exim server to use TLS.
                                                             (line  105)
* cipher <4>:                            Configuring an Exim client to use TLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* ciphers:                               Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* ciphers <1>:                           Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* class resources (BSD):                 Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  305)
* Client SMTP Authorization:             Introduction.       (line    6)
* client, non-queueing:                  Exim as a non-queueing client.
                                                             (line    6)
* command line:                          The Exim command line.
                                                             (line    6)
* command line <1>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1057)
* common option syntax:                  Common option syntax.
                                                             (line    6)
* compiler:                              Multiple machine architectures and operating systems.
                                                             (line   14)
* compiler <1>:                          Multiple machine architectures and operating systems.
                                                             (line   14)
* concurrent deliveries:                 Concurrent deliveries.
                                                             (line    6)
* condition ACL condition:               ACL conditions.     (line   66)
* configuration file:                    Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line  145)
* configuration file <1>:                Command line options.
                                                             (line  761)
* configuration file <2>:                The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <3>:                The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <4>:                The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line   24)
* configuration file <5>:                Using a different configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <6>:                Configuration file format.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <7>:                Configuration file format.
                                                             (line   50)
* configuration file <8>:                Configuration file format.
                                                             (line   50)
* configuration file <9>:                File inclusions in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <10>:               Macros in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <11>:               Conditional skips in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <12>:               Common option syntax.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <13>:               The default configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration file <14>:               Main configuration. (line    6)
* configuration file <15>:               Retry configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration for building Exim:       Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* configuration options:                 Command line options.
                                                             (line  400)
* configuration options <1>:             Command line options.
                                                             (line  407)
* configuration options <2>:             Common option syntax.
                                                             (line   14)
* CONFIGURE_FILE:                        Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line   18)
* CONFIGURE_FILE <1>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line  761)
* CONFIGURE_FILE <2>:                    The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* CONFIGURE_GROUP:                       The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line   24)
* CONFIGURE_OWNER:                       The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line   24)
* connection:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  250)
* connection <1>:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  169)
* connection <2>:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  174)
* connection backlog:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2765)
* connection backlog <1>:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2799)
* constructed address:                   Constructed addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* content scanning:                      Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line   31)
* content scanning <1>:                  Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  192)
* content scanning <2>:                  Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  386)
* content scanning <3>:                  Content scanning at ACL time.
                                                             (line    6)
* content scanning <4>:                  Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line    6)
* content scanning <5>:                  Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line    6)
* content scanning <6>:                  Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd.
                                                             (line    6)
* content scanning <7>:                  Scanning MIME parts.
                                                             (line    6)
* content scanning <8>:                  Scanning with regular expressions.
                                                             (line    6)
* continue ACL modifier:                 ACL modifiers.      (line   15)
* control ACL modifier:                  ACL modifiers.      (line   29)
* control ACL modifier <1>:              Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line    6)
* control of incoming mail:              Access control lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* copy of bounce message:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  945)
* copy of message (unseen option):       Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1090)
* correction of invalid utf-8 sequences in strings: Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  552)
* Courier:                               dbmnz.              (line    6)
* CR character:                          Introduction.       (line    6)
* CRAM-MD5 authentication mechanism:     The cram_md5 authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* cram_md5 authenticator:                The cram_md5 authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* creating directories:                  The appendfile transport.
                                                             (line    6)
* CRL:                                   Introduction.       (line    6)
* crl:                                   Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* crl <1>:                               Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* crypt():                               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  122)
* crypt16():                             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  128)
* crypteq expansion condition:           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   79)
* CSA:                                   Pseudo dnsdb record types.
                                                             (line   38)
* CSA <1>:                               Client SMTP authorization [CSA].
                                                             (line    6)
* CSA verification:                      ACL conditions.     (line  233)
* current directory for local transport: Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1039)
* current directory for local transport <1>: Current and home directories.
                                                             (line    6)
* customizing:                           Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   95)
* customizing <1>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  346)
* customizing <2>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1044)
* customizing <3>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2390)
* customizing <4>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2774)
* customizing <5>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3823)
* customizing <6>:                       Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line   81)
* customizing <7>:                       Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  106)
* customizing <8>:                       Address batching.   (line   47)
* customizing <9>:                       ACL conditions.     (line   66)
* customizing <10>:                      Local scan function.
                                                             (line    6)
* customizing <11>:                      Customizing bounce messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* customizing <12>:                      Customizing warning messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* cutthrough:                            Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line   59)
* cutthrough <1>:                        Logging deliveries. (line   51)
* cycling logs:                          Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled".
                                                             (line    6)
* cycling logs <1>:                      Cycling log files [exicyclog].
                                                             (line    6)
* Cygwin:                                Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* Cyrus:                                 Incorporated code.  (line   42)
* Cyrus <1>:                             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  575)
* Cyrus <2>:                             Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  169)
* Cyrus <3>:                             Using an external local delivery agent.
                                                             (line   50)
* Cyrus <4>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   32)
* Cyrus <5>:                             The cyrus_sasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* cyrus_sasl authenticator:              The cyrus_sasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* daemon:                                Command line options.
                                                             (line   44)
* daemon <1>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line   61)
* daemon <2>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* daemon <3>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* daemon <4>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  425)
* daemon <5>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  745)
* daemon <6>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1577)
* daemon <7>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1585)
* daemon <8>:                            Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* daemon <9>:                            Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* daemon <10>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2073)
* daemon <11>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3301)
* daemon <12>:                           Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* daemon <13>:                           Running Exim without privilege.
                                                             (line   14)
* daemon notifier socket:                Command line options.
                                                             (line 1617)
* daemon startup, retrying:              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  579)
* DANE:                                  Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  101)
* DANE <1>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  557)
* DANE <2>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  557)
* DANE <3>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  600)
* DANE <4>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  600)
* DANE <5>:                              DANE.               (line    6)
* DANE <6>:                              Observability.      (line   14)
* DANE <7>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  485)
* Darwin:                                Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* DATA:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   75)
* DATA <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   83)
* DATA <2>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* DATA <3>:                              The DATA ACLs.      (line    6)
* database:                              File and database lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* database <1>:                          lmdb.               (line    6)
* database <2>:                          ACL modifiers.      (line   15)
* Date::                                 Date;.              (line    6)
* DBM:                                   dbm.                (line    6)
* DBM <1>:                               Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
                                                             (line    6)
* DBM libraries:                         DBM libraries.      (line    6)
* DBM libraries <1>:                     DBM libraries.      (line   74)
* DBM libraries <2>:                     Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line  139)
* dbmjz lookup type:                     dbmjz.              (line    6)
* dbmnz lookup type:                     dbmnz.              (line    6)
* de-tainting:                           Introduction.       (line    6)
* de-tainting <1>:                       Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   47)
* de-tainting <2>:                       Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   47)
* de-tainting <3>:                       Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   59)
* de-tainting <4>:                       Examples of different lookup syntax.
                                                             (line   28)
* de-tainting <5>:                       Lookup types.       (line   14)
* de-tainting <6>:                       Domain lists.       (line  130)
* de-tainting <7>:                       Domain lists.       (line  168)
* de-tainting <8>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  288)
* de-tainting <9>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  477)
* de-tainting <10>:                      Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  137)
* de-tainting <11>:                      Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  118)
* de-tainting <12>:                      Callout verification.
                                                             (line   86)
* Debian:                                Exim documentation. (line   33)
* Debian <1>:                            Mailing lists.      (line   20)
* debugging:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  216)
* debugging <1>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line  845)
* debugging <2>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line  845)
* debugging <3>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line  927)
* debugging <4>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1301)
* debugging <5>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1301)
* debugging <6>:                         Calling Exim functions from Perl.
                                                             (line   22)
* debugging <7>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  549)
* debugging <8>:                         Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  126)
* decode ACL condition:                  ACL conditions.     (line   76)
* def expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  159)
* default:                               The default configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* default <1>:                           ACL configuration.  (line    6)
* default <2>:                           Router configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* default <3>:                           Transport configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* default <4>:                           Default retry rule. (line    6)
* default <5>:                           Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* defer ACL verb:                        ACL verbs.          (line   51)
* defer in system filter:                Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line    6)
* defer, fake:                           Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  224)
* deferred delivery, forcing:            Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  106)
* delay ACL modifier:                    ACL modifiers.      (line   81)
* delay warning, specifying:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  588)
* delayed delivery, logging:             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  177)
* delivery:                              Introduction.       (line    6)
* delivery <1>:                          Delivery in detail. (line    6)
* delivery <2>:                          Delivery in detail. (line   75)
* delivery <3>:                          Delivery in detail. (line   87)
* delivery <4>:                          Retry mechanism.    (line    6)
* delivery <5>:                          Temporary delivery failure.
                                                             (line    6)
* delivery <6>:                          Permanent delivery failure.
                                                             (line    6)
* delivery <7>:                          Testing.            (line   42)
* delivery <8>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1061)
* delivery <9>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1186)
* delivery <10>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1218)
* delivery <11>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1234)
* delivery <12>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1241)
* delivery <13>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1361)
* delivery <14>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1380)
* delivery <15>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1405)
* delivery <16>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1736)
* delivery <17>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1815)
* delivery <18>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1865)
* delivery <19>:                         Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  197)
* delivery <20>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  639)
* delivery <21>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1253)
* delivery <22>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2483)
* delivery <23>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2506)
* delivery <24>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2525)
* delivery <25>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  668)
* delivery <26>:                         Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   89)
* delivery <27>:                         Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   89)
* delivery <28>:                         Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  106)
* delivery <29>:                         Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  106)
* delivery <30>:                         Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  187)
* delivery <31>:                         Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  266)
* delivery <32>:                         Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  195)
* delivery <33>:                         Operational details for delivery to a new file.
                                                             (line    6)
* delivery <34>:                         Using an external local delivery agent.
                                                             (line    6)
* delivery <35>:                         Using an external local delivery agent.
                                                             (line    6)
* delivery <36>:                         Logging deliveries. (line   51)
* delivery <37>:                         Discarded deliveries.
                                                             (line    6)
* delivery <38>:                         Delivery failures.  (line    6)
* delivery <39>:                         Fake deliveries.    (line    6)
* delivery <40>:                         The queue menu.     (line   50)
* delivery failure, long-term:           Long-term failures. (line    6)
* Delivery Status Notification:          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1341)
* Delivery Status Notification <1>:      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  909)
* Delivery Status Notification <2>:      Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  311)
* Delivery Status Notification <3>:      The redirect router.
                                                             (line   33)
* _Delivery-date:_ header line:          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  655)
* _Delivery-date:_ header line <1>:      Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   54)
* _Delivery-date:_ header line <2>:      Delivery-date;.     (line    6)
* deny ACL verb:                         ACL verbs.          (line   59)
* design philosophy:                     Overall philosophy. (line    6)
* dialup:                                Introduction.       (line    6)
* directories, multiple:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3080)
* directory creation:                    The appendfile transport.
                                                             (line    6)
* directory creation <1>:                Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line   83)
* directory creation <2>:                Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   11)
* directory creation <3>:                Operational details for delivery to a new file.
                                                             (line   36)
* disable DKIM verify:                   Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  177)
* disable DMARC verify:                  Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  184)
* discard ACL verb:                      ACL verbs.          (line   67)
* discarded messages:                    Discarded deliveries.
                                                             (line    6)
* discarding bounce message:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1390)
* disk space, checking:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  485)
* disk space, checking <1>:              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2790)
* distribution:                          Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line    6)
* distribution <1>:                      Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line    6)
* distribution <2>:                      Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line   40)
* distribution <3>:                      Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line   40)
* DKIM:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   92)
* DKIM <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  692)
* DKIM <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  734)
* DKIM <3>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* DKIM <4>:                              Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  177)
* DKIM <5>:                              Other log entries.  (line   41)
* DKIM <6>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  191)
* DKIM <7>:                              DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail].
                                                             (line    6)
* DKIM <8>:                              Signing outgoing messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* DKIM <9>:                              Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail.
                                                             (line    6)
* DKIM <10>:                             Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail.
                                                             (line   10)
* dlfunc:                                Expansion items.    (line  134)
* dlfunc <1>:                            API for local_scan[].
                                                             (line    6)
* DMARC:                                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  746)
* DMARC <1>:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  184)
* DMARC <2>:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  184)
* DMARC <3>:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  184)
* DMARC <4>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  199)
* DMARC <5>:                             DMARC.              (line    6)
* DMARC <6>:                             Configuration.      (line    6)
* DMARC <7>:                             Configuration.      (line    6)
* DMARC <8>:                             Controls.           (line    6)
* DMARC <9>:                             ACL.                (line    6)
* DMARC <10>:                            ACL.                (line   51)
* DMARC <11>:                            Logging <1>.        (line    6)
* DMARC <12>:                            Example.            (line    6)
* DNS:                                   dnsdb.              (line    6)
* DNS <1>:                               More about dnsdb.   (line    6)
* DNS <2>:                               Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line   35)
* DNS <3>:                               Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line   44)
* DNS <4>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  651)
* DNS <5>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1227)
* DNS <6>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1258)
* DNS <7>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1357)
* DNS <8>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  752)
* DNS <9>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  776)
* DNS <10>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  810)
* DNS <11>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  821)
* DNS <12>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  821)
* DNS <13>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  841)
* DNS <14>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  841)
* DNS <15>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  856)
* DNS <16>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  856)
* DNS <17>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  870)
* DNS <18>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  870)
* DNS <19>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  892)
* DNS <20>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  894)
* DNS <21>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  894)
* DNS <22>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  894)
* DNS <23>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1226)
* DNS <24>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1236)
* dns:                                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2594)
* DNS <25>:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  265)
* DNS <26>:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  272)
* DNS <27>:                              Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   71)
* DNS <28>:                              Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   79)
* DNS <29>:                              Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  109)
* DNS <30>:                              Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  109)
* DNS <31>:                              Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  170)
* DNS <32>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  214)
* DNS <33>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  222)
* DNS <34>:                              Using DNS lists.    (line   56)
* DNS <35>:                              Format of the -H file.
                                                             (line  128)
* DNS list:                              ACL conditions.     (line   85)
* DNS list <1>:                          Using DNS lists.    (line    6)
* DNS list <2>:                          Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <3>:                          DNS lists keyed on domain names.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <4>:                          Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <5>:                          Data returned by DNS lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <6>:                          Variables set from DNS lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <7>:                          Additional matching conditions for DNS lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <8>:                          Detailed information from merged DNS lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNS list <9>:                          DNS lists and IPv6. (line    6)
* DNS list <10>:                         Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  206)
* DNS resolver, debugging output:        Command line options.
                                                             (line  911)
* dnsdb lookup:                          More about dnsdb.   (line    6)
* dnsdb modifiers:                       Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line    6)
* dnslists ACL condition:                ACL conditions.     (line   85)
* dnslookup router:                      The dnslookup router.
                                                             (line    6)
* dnslookup router <1>:                  Declining addresses by dnslookup.
                                                             (line    6)
* DNSSEC:                                Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line   26)
* DNSSEC <1>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  265)
* DNSSEC <2>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  272)
* DNSSEC <3>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  214)
* DNSSEC <4>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  222)
* dnssec:                                Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  209)
* doc/ChangeLog:                         Exim documentation. (line   38)
* doc/NewStuff:                          Exim documentation. (line   38)
* doc/spec.txt:                          Exim documentation. (line   52)
* documentation:                         Exim documentation. (line    6)
* documentation <1>:                     Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line   66)
* domain:                                Terminology.        (line   46)
* domain <1>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1815)
* domain <2>:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  109)
* domain <3>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  240)
* domain <4>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1253)
* domain <5>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2200)
* domain <6>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2226)
* domain <7>:                            Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  194)
* domain <8>:                            The manualroute router.
                                                             (line    6)
* domain <9>:                            Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  412)
* domain <10>:                           ACL conditions.     (line   93)
* domain <11>:                           Virtual domains.    (line    6)
* domain list:                           Domain lists.       (line    6)
* domain list <1>:                       Domain lists.       (line    9)
* domain list <2>:                       Domain lists.       (line   17)
* domain list <3>:                       Domain lists.       (line   29)
* domain list <4>:                       Domain lists.       (line   81)
* domain list <5>:                       Domain lists.       (line   81)
* domain list <6>:                       Domain lists.       (line   94)
* domain list <7>:                       Domain lists.       (line  115)
* domain list <8>:                       Domain lists.       (line  177)
* domain list <9>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  455)
* domain literal:                        Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  137)
* domain literal <1>:                    Router configuration.
                                                             (line   22)
* domain literal <2>:                    Domain lists.       (line   17)
* domain literal <3>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  210)
* domain literal <4>:                    The ipliteral router.
                                                             (line    6)
* domainless addresses:                  Limitations.        (line   15)
* domains ACL condition:                 ACL conditions.     (line   93)
* dot:                                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1041)
* dot <1>:                               Command line options.
                                                             (line 1464)
* dot <2>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3181)
* dot <3>:                               Dots in local parts.
                                                             (line    6)
* dovecot authenticator:                 The dovecot authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* drivers:                               Processing an address for delivery.
                                                             (line    6)
* drivers <1>:                           Processing an address for delivery.
                                                             (line   12)
* drivers <2>:                           Format of driver configurations.
                                                             (line    6)
* drivers <3>:                           Adding drivers or lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* drop ACL verb:                         ACL verbs.          (line   83)
* DSCP:                                  Command line options.
                                                             (line  295)
* DSCP <1>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  230)
* DSCP <2>:                              Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  190)
* dsearch lookup type:                   dsearch.            (line    6)
* DSN:                                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1341)
* DSN <1>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  909)
* DSN <2>:                               Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  311)
* DSN <3>:                               The redirect router.
                                                             (line   33)
* DSN <4>:                               Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  215)
* duplicate addresses:                   Duplicate addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* duplicate addresses <1>:               Command line options.
                                                             (line  654)
* duplicate addresses <2>:               Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  452)
* duplicate addresses <3>:               Duplicate addresses <1>.
                                                             (line    6)
* dynamic modules:                       Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* dynamic modules <1>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line  299)
* dynamic modules <2>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  556)
* dynamic modules <3>:                   SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line   19)
* EACCES:                                Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  297)
* EAI:                                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* EAI <1>:                               Internationalisation".
                                                             (line    6)
* EHLO:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  114)
* EHLO <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1176)
* EHLO <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1187)
* EHLO <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1200)
* EHLO <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1209)
* EHLO <5>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1242)
* EHLO <6>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  307)
* EHLO <7>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  403)
* EHLO <8>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* EHLO <9>:                              The EHLO/HELO ACL.  (line    6)
* EHLO <10>:                             ACL conditions.     (line  294)
* EHLO <11>:                             Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* EHLO <12>:                             Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   33)
* EHLO <13>:                             Logging message reception.
                                                             (line   23)
* empty item in hosts list:              Special host list patterns.
                                                             (line    6)
* encrypted ACL condition:               ACL conditions.     (line  103)
* encrypted strings, comparing:          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   79)
* encryption:                            Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line    6)
* encryption <1>:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3347)
* encryption <2>:                        Encrypted SMTP connections.
                                                             (line    6)
* encryption <3>:                        ACL conditions.     (line  103)
* endpass ACL modifier:                  ACL modifiers.      (line  119)
* ENOTDIR:                               Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  304)
* envelope from:                         Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   19)
* envelope from <1>:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line  186)
* envelope from <2>:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line  984)
* envelope from <3>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1579)
* envelope from <4>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3749)
* envelope from <5>:                     Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  320)
* envelope from <6>:                     Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  272)
* envelope from <7>:                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  661)
* envelope from <8>:                     When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line   39)
* envelope from <9>:                     Setting an errors address in a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* envelope from <10>:                    The UUCP From line. (line    6)
* envelope from <11>:                    Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].
                                                             (line    6)
* envelope sender:                       Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   19)
* envelope sender <1>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line  186)
* envelope sender <2>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line  984)
* envelope sender <3>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1579)
* envelope sender <4>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3749)
* envelope sender <5>:                   Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  320)
* envelope sender <6>:                   Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  272)
* envelope sender <7>:                   Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  661)
* envelope sender <8>:                   Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  296)
* envelope sender <9>:                   When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line   39)
* envelope sender <10>:                  Setting an errors address in a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* envelope sender <11>:                  The UUCP From line. (line    6)
* envelope sender <12>:                  Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].
                                                             (line    6)
* envelope, definition of:               Terminology.        (line   32)
* _Envelope-to:_ header line:            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  933)
* _Envelope-to:_ header line <1>:        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   71)
* _Envelope-to:_ header line <2>:        Address batching.   (line   75)
* _Envelope-to:_ header line <3>:        Envelope-to;.       (line    6)
* environment:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  451)
* environment <1>:                       Expansion items.    (line  175)
* environment <2>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  188)
* environment <3>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1429)
* environment <4>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3330)
* environment <5>:                       Environment for local transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* environment <6>:                       Environment variables.
                                                             (line    6)
* environment <7>:                       Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   65)
* eq expansion condition:                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  181)
* eqi expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  181)
* error:                                 Command line options.
                                                             (line 1434)
* error <1>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1445)
* error <2>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1451)
* error <3>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1456)
* error <4>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1460)
* error <5>:                             The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* error <6>:                             Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* error <7>:                             Errors in outgoing SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* error <8>:                             Other log entries.  (line   26)
* escape characters in quoted strings:   String values.      (line   21)
* escape expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  115)
* escape8bit expansion item:             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  122)
* ESMTP extensions:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   11)
* ESMTP extensions <1>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   52)
* ESMTP extensions <2>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  268)
* ESMTP extensions <3>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  534)
* ESMTP extensions <4>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  909)
* ESMTP extensions <5>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1542)
* ESMTP extensions <6>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1797)
* ESMTP extensions <7>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2088)
* ESMTP extensions <8>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2100)
* ESMTP extensions <9>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2119)
* ESMTP extensions <10>:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2833)
* ESMTP extensions <11>:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3011)
* ESMTP extensions <12>:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3347)
* ESMTP extensions <13>:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3834)
* ESMTP extensions <14>:                 Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   94)
* ESMTP extensions <15>:                 Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  413)
* ESMTP extensions <16>:                 Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  635)
* ESMTP extensions <17>:                 Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  698)
* ESMTP extensions <18>:                 Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  732)
* ESMTP extensions <19>:                 SMTP authentication.
                                                             (line   19)
* ESMTP extensions <20>:                 Configuring an Exim server to use TLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* ESMTP extensions <21>:                 Configuring an Exim client to use TLS.
                                                             (line   11)
* ESMTP extensions <22>:                 Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  318)
* ESMTP extensions <23>:                 Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   10)
* ESMTP extensions <24>:                 The ETRN command.   (line    6)
* ESMTP extensions <25>:                 The ATRN command; and ODMR.
                                                             (line    6)
* ESMTP extensions <26>:                 MTA operations.     (line    6)
* ESMTP, avoiding use of:                Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  403)
* ETRN:                                  Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  357)
* ETRN <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  100)
* ETRN <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  100)
* ETRN <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2833)
* ETRN <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2871)
* ETRN <5>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* ETRN <6>:                              The ETRN command.   (line    6)
* ETRN <7>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  223)
* eval expansion item:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  127)
* events:                                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  997)
* events <1>:                            Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   89)
* events <2>:                            Events.             (line    6)
* exec failure:                          Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   79)
* _exicyclog_:                           Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled".
                                                             (line    6)
* _exicyclog_ <1>:                       Cycling log files [exicyclog].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exigrep_:                             Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep].
                                                             (line    6)
* Exim arguments, logging:               Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  156)
* Exim binary, path name:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1014)
* Exim group:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1004)
* Exim monitor:                          Incorporated code.  (line   93)
* Exim monitor <1>:                      The Exim monitor.   (line    6)
* Exim monitor <2>:                      Main action buttons.
                                                             (line    6)
* Exim user:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1028)
* Exim version:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1044)
* _eximon_:                              The Exim monitor.   (line    6)
* _eximstats_:                           Mail statistics [eximstats].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exim_checkaccess_:                    Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exim_dbmbuild_:                       Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exim_dumpdb_:                         exim_dumpdb.        (line    6)
* _exim_fixdb_:                          exim_fixdb.         (line    6)
* EXIM_GROUP:                            The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line   24)
* _exim_lock_:                           Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock].
                                                             (line    6)
* exim_monitor/EDITME:                   Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line   40)
* exim_monitor/EDITME <1>:               The Exim monitor.   (line    6)
* exim_msgdate:                          Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* exim_msgdate <1>:                      Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exim_tidydb_:                         exim_tidydb.        (line    6)
* EXIM_USER:                             The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line   24)
* _exinext_:                             Finding individual retry times [exinext].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exipick_:                             Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exiqgrep_:                            Selective queue listing [exiqgrep].
                                                             (line    6)
* _exiqsumm_:                            Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm].
                                                             (line    6)
* exiscan:                               Introduction.       (line    6)
* exists, expansion condition:           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  187)
* _exiwhat_:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2179)
* _exiwhat_ <1>:                         Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat].
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line   92)
* expansion <1>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line  132)
* expansion <2>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1258)
* expansion <3>:                         Expanded strings.   (line    6)
* expansion <4>:                         Expansion of lists. (line    6)
* expansion <5>:                         String expansions.  (line    6)
* expansion <6>:                         String expansions.  (line   11)
* expansion <7>:                         String expansions.  (line   25)
* expansion <8>:                         Literal text in expanded strings.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <9>:                         Literal text in expanded strings.
                                                             (line   14)
* expansion <10>:                        Character escape sequences in expanded strings.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <11>:                        Testing string expansions.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <12>:                        Forced expansion failure.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <13>:                        Expansion items.    (line   12)
* expansion <14>:                        Expansion items.    (line   25)
* expansion <15>:                        Expansion items.    (line   42)
* expansion <16>:                        Expansion items.    (line   76)
* expansion <17>:                        Expansion items.    (line  175)
* expansion <18>:                        Expansion items.    (line  198)
* expansion <19>:                        Expansion items.    (line  236)
* expansion <20>:                        Expansion items.    (line  254)
* expansion <21>:                        Expansion items.    (line  283)
* expansion <22>:                        Expansion items.    (line  293)
* expansion <23>:                        Expansion items.    (line  313)
* expansion <24>:                        Expansion items.    (line  346)
* expansion <25>:                        Expansion items.    (line  448)
* expansion <26>:                        Expansion items.    (line  486)
* expansion <27>:                        Expansion items.    (line  512)
* expansion <28>:                        Expansion items.    (line  518)
* expansion <29>:                        Expansion items.    (line  532)
* expansion <30>:                        Expansion items.    (line  572)
* expansion <31>:                        Expansion items.    (line  631)
* expansion <32>:                        Expansion items.    (line  648)
* expansion <33>:                        Expansion items.    (line  667)
* expansion <34>:                        Expansion items.    (line  730)
* expansion <35>:                        Expansion items.    (line  743)
* expansion <36>:                        Expansion items.    (line  832)
* expansion <37>:                        Expansion items.    (line  863)
* expansion <38>:                        Expansion items.    (line  949)
* expansion <39>:                        Expansion items.    (line  976)
* expansion <40>:                        Expansion items.    (line 1006)
* expansion <41>:                        Expansion items.    (line 1064)
* expansion <42>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <43>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   12)
* expansion <44>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   21)
* expansion <45>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   75)
* expansion <46>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   80)
* expansion <47>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   84)
* expansion <48>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   93)
* expansion <49>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line   99)
* expansion <50>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  105)
* expansion <51>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  109)
* expansion <52>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  115)
* expansion <53>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  122)
* expansion <54>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  127)
* expansion <55>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  127)
* expansion <56>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  192)
* expansion <57>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  201)
* expansion <58>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  219)
* expansion <59>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  231)
* expansion <60>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  245)
* expansion <61>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  269)
* expansion <62>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  276)
* expansion <63>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  289)
* expansion <64>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  294)
* expansion <65>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  305)
* expansion <66>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  313)
* expansion <67>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  341)
* expansion <68>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  349)
* expansion <69>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  359)
* expansion <70>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  415)
* expansion <71>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  429)
* expansion <72>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  444)
* expansion <73>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  462)
* expansion <74>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  472)
* expansion <75>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  488)
* expansion <76>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  501)
* expansion <77>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  520)
* expansion <78>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  526)
* expansion <79>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  548)
* expansion <80>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  552)
* expansion <81>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* expansion <82>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <83>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   10)
* expansion <84>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   14)
* expansion <85>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   41)
* expansion <86>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   54)
* expansion <87>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   69)
* expansion <88>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   79)
* expansion <89>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  159)
* expansion <90>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  170)
* expansion <91>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  181)
* expansion <92>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  187)
* expansion <93>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  197)
* expansion <94>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  203)
* expansion <95>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  203)
* expansion <96>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  242)
* expansion <97>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  242)
* expansion <98>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  242)
* expansion <99>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  242)
* expansion <100>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  250)
* expansion <101>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  258)
* expansion <102>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  324)
* expansion <103>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  339)
* expansion <104>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  347)
* expansion <105>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  354)
* expansion <106>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  496)
* expansion <107>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  539)
* expansion <108>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  543)
* expansion <109>:                       Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  575)
* expansion <110>:                       Combining expansion conditions.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <111>:                       Combining expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   14)
* expansion <112>:                       Combining expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   25)
* expansion <113>:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line    6)
* expansion <114>:                       Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  203)
* expansion <115>:                       Variables set from DNS lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* EXPN:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  108)
* EXPN <1>:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  368)
* EXPN <2>:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1140)
* EXPN <3>:                              Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  122)
* EXPN <4>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* EXPN <5>:                              The VRFY and EXPN commands.
                                                             (line   18)
* external authenticator:                The external authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* external local delivery:               Using an external local delivery agent.
                                                             (line    6)
* external transports:                   Limitations.        (line   21)
* extract:                               Expansion items.    (line  198)
* extract <1>:                           Expansion items.    (line  254)
* EXTRALIBS:                             Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line  133)
* fail:                                  Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line    6)
* fail <1>:                              Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line   31)
* failing delivery:                      Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  106)
* failing delivery <1>:                  Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line   17)
* failure of exec:                       Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   79)
* fake defer:                            Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  224)
* fake rejection:                        Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  232)
* fakedefer:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  224)
* fakereject:                            Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  232)
* fallback:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  401)
* fallback <1>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   21)
* fallback <2>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  249)
* fallback <3>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  502)
* fallover:                              Introduction.       (line    6)
* FAQ:                                   FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line    9)
* fast open, TCP:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  610)
* fifo (named pipe):                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line    9)
* file:                                  Handling an incoming message.
                                                             (line    6)
* file <1>:                              Life of a message.  (line   34)
* file <2>:                              File and database lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* file <3>:                              Expansion items.    (line  572)
* file <4>:                              Expansion items.    (line  730)
* file <5>:                              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  501)
* file <6>:                              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  187)
* file <7>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* file <8>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3257)
* file <9>:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  745)
* file <10>:                             Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   43)
* file <11>:                             Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  200)
* file <12>:                             Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  409)
* file <13>:                             Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  409)
* file <14>:                             Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line    6)
* file <15>:                             Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   19)
* file <16>:                             Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line  100)
* filter:                                Introduction.       (line    6)
* filter <1>:                            User filters.       (line    6)
* filter <2>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  153)
* filter <3>:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  430)
* filter <4>:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  887)
* filter <5>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3235)
* filter <6>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1119)
* filter <7>:                            Interpreting redirection data.
                                                             (line    6)
* filter <8>:                            Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line   24)
* filter <9>:                            Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  175)
* filter <10>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  181)
* filter <11>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  187)
* filter <12>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  196)
* filter <13>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  203)
* filter <14>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  210)
* filter <15>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  218)
* filter <16>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  224)
* filter <17>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  231)
* filter <18>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  237)
* filter <19>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  243)
* filter <20>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  251)
* filter <21>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  257)
* filter <22>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  266)
* filter <23>:                           Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  274)
* filter <24>:                           Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  351)
* filter <25>:                           How the command is run.
                                                             (line   40)
* filter <26>:                           Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  838)
* filter <27>:                           System-wide message filtering.
                                                             (line    6)
* filter <28>:                           Adding and removing headers in a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* filter <29>:                           Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   14)
* filter modules:                        Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* filtering all mail:                    System-wide message filtering.
                                                             (line    6)
* final cutoff:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  175)
* final cutoff <1>:                      Long-term failures. (line   27)
* first delivery:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  197)
* first pass routing:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1416)
* first pass routing <1>:                Command line options.
                                                             (line 1701)
* first pass routing <2>:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2367)
* first pass routing <3>:                Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  326)
* first pass routing <4>:                Exim on the intermittently connected client host.
                                                             (line   11)
* first_delivery expansion condition:    Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  197)
* fixed point configuration values:      Fixed point numbers.
                                                             (line    6)
* force command:                         Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   95)
* forcing delivery:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1061)
* foreground delivery:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1380)
* format:                                Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* format <1>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  336)
* format <2>:                            Configuration file format.
                                                             (line    6)
* format <3>:                            Boolean options.    (line    6)
* format <4>:                            Integer values.     (line    6)
* format <5>:                            Octal integer values.
                                                             (line    6)
* format <6>:                            Fixed point numbers.
                                                             (line    6)
* format <7>:                            Time intervals.     (line    6)
* format <8>:                            String values.      (line    6)
* format <9>:                            User and group names.
                                                             (line    6)
* format <10>:                           User and group names.
                                                             (line    6)
* format <11>:                           List construction.  (line    6)
* format <12>:                           Format of spool files.
                                                             (line    6)
* forward file:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line  153)
* forward file <1>:                      Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  334)
* forward file <2>:                      Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  373)
* forward file <3>:                      Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* FreeBSD, MTA indirection:              Replacing another MTA with Exim.
                                                             (line   17)
* freeze in system filter:               Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line    6)
* freezing messages:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line 1210)
* freezing messages <1>:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1087)
* freezing messages <2>:                 Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line   46)
* freezing messages <3>:                 Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line    6)
* _From:_ header line:                   Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   25)
* _From:_ header line <1>:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  922)
* _From:_ header line <2>:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1552)
* _From:_ header line <3>:               From;.              (line    6)
* from_utf8 expansion item:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  201)
* frozen messages:                       Life of a message.  (line   14)
* frozen messages <1>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line  485)
* frozen messages <2>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1061)
* frozen messages <3>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1268)
* frozen messages <4>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1741)
* frozen messages <5>:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1849)
* frozen messages <6>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1087)
* frozen messages <7>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1830)
* frozen messages <8>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3313)
* frozen messages <9>:                   Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  251)
* frozen messages <10>:                  Contents of a system filter.
                                                             (line   13)
* frozen messages <11>:                  Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  386)
* frozen messages <12>:                  The queue display.  (line   48)
* frozen messages <13>:                  The queue menu.     (line   47)
* frozen messages <14>:                  Format of the -H file.
                                                             (line  106)
* fsync(), disabling:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  666)
* FTP site:                              FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line    6)
* FTP site <1>:                          Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line    6)
* _gdbm_ DBM library:                    DBM libraries.      (line   39)
* ge expansion condition:                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  250)
* gei expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  250)
* generic options:                       Format of driver configurations.
                                                             (line   43)
* generic options <1>:                   Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line    6)
* generic options <2>:                   Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* gid (group id):                        Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  220)
* gid (group id) <1>:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  858)
* gid (group id) <2>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1004)
* gid (group id) <3>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3265)
* gid (group id) <4>:                    Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  417)
* gid (group id) <5>:                    The queryprogram router.
                                                             (line   25)
* gid (group id) <6>:                    Specifying a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* gid (group id) <7>:                    Format of the -H file.
                                                             (line    6)
* giving up on messages:                 Command line options.
                                                             (line 1218)
* GnuTLS:                                Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line    6)
* GnuTLS <1>:                            Encrypted SMTP connections.
                                                             (line    6)
* GnuTLS <2>:                            Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* greylisting:                           Previously seen user and hosts.
                                                             (line    6)
* groups:                                User and group names.
                                                             (line    6)
* groups <1>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3715)
* groups <2>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  543)
* groups <3>:                            Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  187)
* gsasl authenticator:                   The gsasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* gt expansion condition:                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  258)
* gti expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  258)
* hash function:                         Expansion items.    (line  313)
* hash function <1>:                     Expansion items.    (line  648)
* hash function <2>:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  219)
* hash function <3>:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  349)
* header:                                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  231)
* header lines:                          Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   25)
* header lines <1>:                      Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   25)
* header lines <2>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1285)
* header lines <3>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* header lines <4>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* header lines <5>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* header lines <6>:                      Expansion items.    (line   56)
* header lines <7>:                      Expansion items.    (line  346)
* header lines <8>:                      Expansion items.    (line  346)
* header lines <9>:                      Expansion items.    (line  346)
* header lines <10>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1165)
* header lines <11>:                     Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  429)
* header lines <12>:                     Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  466)
* header lines <13>:                     Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  120)
* header lines <14>:                     Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  102)
* header lines <15>:                     Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  118)
* header lines <16>:                     Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  127)
* header lines <17>:                     Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  301)
* header lines <18>:                     When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line   39)
* header lines <19>:                     Adding header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <20>:                     Adding header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <21>:                     Adding header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line   42)
* header lines <22>:                     Removing header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <23>:                     Removing header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <24>:                     Removing header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line   59)
* header lines <25>:                     ACL conditions.     (line  239)
* header lines <26>:                     ACL conditions.     (line  251)
* header lines <27>:                     ACL conditions.     (line  274)
* header lines <28>:                     Adding and removing headers in a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <29>:                     Adding and removing headers in a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <30>:                     Resent- header lines.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <31>:                     Envelope-to;.       (line    6)
* header lines <32>:                     From;.              (line    6)
* header lines <33>:                     Message-ID;.        (line    6)
* header lines <34>:                     Received;.          (line    6)
* header lines <35>:                     References;.        (line    6)
* header lines <36>:                     Return-path;.       (line    6)
* header lines <37>:                     Sender;.            (line    6)
* header lines <38>:                     Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* header lines <39>:                     Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* header section:                        Terminology.        (line   40)
* header section <1>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1158)
* headers:                               Introduction.       (line    6)
* heimdal_gssapi authenticator:          The heimdal_gssapi authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* HELO:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  114)
* HELO <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1176)
* HELO <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1187)
* HELO <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1200)
* HELO <4>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  307)
* HELO <5>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  403)
* HELO <6>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* HELO <7>:                              The EHLO/HELO ACL.  (line    6)
* HELO <8>:                              ACL conditions.     (line  294)
* HELO <9>:                              Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* HELO <10>:                             Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   33)
* HELO <11>:                             Logging message reception.
                                                             (line   23)
* HELO verifying:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1209)
* HELO verifying <1>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1242)
* HELO/EHLO:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1360)
* hex2b64 expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  245)
* hexquote expansion item:               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  250)
* hiding configuration option values:    Command line options.
                                                             (line  407)
* hiding configuration option values <1>: Common option syntax.
                                                             (line   14)
* hiding named list values:              Named lists.        (line   67)
* hints database:                        Temporary delivery failure.
                                                             (line   18)
* hints database <1>:                    DBM libraries.      (line    6)
* hints database <2>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1067)
* hints database <3>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1186)
* hints database <4>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line 1713)
* hints database <5>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2535)
* hints database <6>:                    Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  832)
* hints database <7>:                    Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  199)
* hints database <8>:                    Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  250)
* hints database <9>:                    Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  501)
* hints database <10>:                   Multiple messages on a single connection.
                                                             (line   18)
* hints database <11>:                   Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  821)
* hints database <12>:                   Retry parameters.   (line   57)
* hints database <13>:                   Timeout of retry data.
                                                             (line    6)
* hints database <14>:                   TLS Resumption.     (line   32)
* hints database <15>:                   Callout caching.    (line    6)
* hints database <16>:                   Quota caching.      (line    6)
* hints database <17>:                   Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   56)
* hints database <18>:                   The ETRN command.   (line   42)
* hints database <19>:                   Hints database maintenance.
                                                             (line    6)
* hmac:                                  Expansion items.    (line  448)
* HOME:                                  Environment variables.
                                                             (line   45)
* home directory:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  859)
* home directory <1>:                    Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1053)
* home directory <2>:                    Current and home directories.
                                                             (line    6)
* host:                                  Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line    6)
* host <1>:                              Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line   39)
* host <2>:                              Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found.
                                                             (line    6)
* host <3>:                              Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information.
                                                             (line    6)
* host <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1315)
* host <5>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1333)
* host <6>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1372)
* host <7>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1647)
* host <8>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2138)
* host <9>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2442)
* host <10>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2569)
* host <11>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2583)
* host <12>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2670)
* host <13>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2718)
* host <14>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2737)
* host <15>:                             Private options for manualroute.
                                                             (line   46)
* HOST:                                  Environment variables.
                                                             (line   40)
* host <16>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  455)
* host <17>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  502)
* host <18>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  813)
* host <19>:                             How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used.
                                                             (line    6)
* host <20>:                             ACL conditions.     (line  111)
* host <21>:                             ACL conditions.     (line  334)
* host <22>:                             Errors in outgoing SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* host list:                             Host lists.         (line    6)
* host list <1>:                         Special host list patterns.
                                                             (line    6)
* host list <2>:                         Host list patterns that match by IP address.
                                                             (line    6)
* host list <3>:                         Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address.
                                                             (line    6)
* host list <4>:                         Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address.
                                                             (line   22)
* host list <5>:                         Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line    6)
* host list <6>:                         Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line   49)
* host list <7>:                         Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* host list <8>:                         Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name.
                                                             (line    6)
* host name:                             Domain lists.       (line    9)
* host name <1>:                         Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  456)
* host name <2>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1276)
* hosts ACL condition:                   ACL conditions.     (line  111)
* HP-UX:                                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1107)
* HTTPS download site:                   Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line    6)
* i18n:                                  Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line 1038)
* i18n <1>:                              Internationalisation".
                                                             (line    6)
* i18n <2>:                              MTA operations.     (line   27)
* i18n <3>:                              MTA operations.     (line   37)
* iconv() support:                       Support for iconv[].
                                                             (line    6)
* id of message:                         Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* ident:                                 Introduction.       (line    6)
* if, expansion item:                    Expansion items.    (line  486)
* ignoring faulty addresses:             Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* imapfolder expansion item:             Expansion items.    (line  512)
* included address list:                 Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   69)
* inclusions in configuration file:      File inclusions in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* incoming SMTP over TCP/IP:             Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* incorporated code:                     Incorporated code.  (line    6)
* incorrect utf-8:                       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  552)
* inetd:                                 Command line options.
                                                             (line  618)
* inetd <1>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  745)
* inetd <2>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  745)
* inetd <3>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2614)
* inetd <4>:                             Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* installing Exim:                       Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line    6)
* installing Exim <1>:                   Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line   58)
* installing Exim <2>:                   Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line   73)
* installing Exim <3>:                   Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line   87)
* installing Exim <4>:                   Installing info documentation.
                                                             (line    6)
* integer configuration values:          Integer values.     (line    6)
* integer format:                        Octal integer values.
                                                             (line    6)
* interface:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1524)
* interface <1>:                         Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* interface <2>:                         Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* interface <3>:                         Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  238)
* interface <4>:                         Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  275)
* intermittently connected hosts:        Intermittently connected hosts.
                                                             (line    6)
* internationalisation:                  Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* internationalisation <1>:              Internationalisation".
                                                             (line    6)
* IP address:                            Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address.
                                                             (line   22)
* IP address <1>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  256)
* IP address <2>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  262)
* IP address <3>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  262)
* IP address <4>:                        Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  313)
* IP address <5>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  299)
* IP address <6>:                        Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* IP address <7>:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  502)
* IP address <8>:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  990)
* IP address <9>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  642)
* IP source routing:                     IPv4 source routing.
                                                             (line    6)
* ipliteral router:                      The ipliteral router.
                                                             (line    6)
* iplookup router:                       The iplookup router.
                                                             (line    6)
* iplsearch lookup type:                 iplsearch.          (line    6)
* IPv4:                                  Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   79)
* IPv6:                                  Including support for IPv6.
                                                             (line    6)
* IPv6 <1>:                              Changing list separators.
                                                             (line    6)
* IPv6 <2>:                              IPv6 address scopes.
                                                             (line    6)
* IPv6 <3>:                              Disabling IPv6.     (line    6)
* IPv6 <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  682)
* IPv6 <5>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  841)
* IPv6 <6>:                              Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   71)
* IPv6 <7>:                              DNS lists and IPv6. (line    6)
* ipv6denorm expansion item:             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  256)
* ipv6norm expansion item:               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  262)
* IRIX, DBM library for:                 DBM libraries.      (line   12)
* isip expansion condition:              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  299)
* isip4 expansion condition:             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  299)
* isip6 expansion condition:             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  299)
* Issue:                                 FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line   18)
* Issue Reporting:                       Bug reports.        (line    6)
* journal file:                          Life of a message.  (line   34)
* json:                                  json.               (line    6)
* JSON:                                  json.               (line    6)
* JSON <1>:                              Expansion items.    (line  236)
* JSON <2>:                              Expansion items.    (line  283)
* JSON <3>:                              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  242)
* JSON <4>:                              Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  242)
* keepalive:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2601)
* keepalive <1>:                         Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  669)
* Kerberos:                              The cyrus_sasl authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* lc expansion item:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  269)
* LDAP:                                  Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   65)
* LDAP <1>:                              ldap.               (line    6)
* LDAP <2>:                              More about LDAP.    (line    6)
* LDAP <3>:                              Format of LDAP queries.
                                                             (line    6)
* LDAP <4>:                              Format of LDAP queries.
                                                             (line   14)
* LDAP <5>:                              LDAP quoting.       (line    6)
* LDAP <6>:                              LDAP connections.   (line    6)
* LDAP <7>:                              LDAP authentication and control information.
                                                             (line    6)
* LDAP <8>:                              LDAP authentication and control information.
                                                             (line   28)
* LDAP <9>:                              Format of data returned by LDAP.
                                                             (line    6)
* LDAP <10>:                             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  324)
* LDAP <11>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1465)
* LDAP <12>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1474)
* LDAP <13>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1483)
* LDAP <14>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1490)
* LDAP <15>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1498)
* LDAP <16>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1506)
* LDAP <17>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1514)
* LDAP <18>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1523)
* LDAP <19>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1533)
* ldapauth expansion condition:          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  324)
* le expansion condition:                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  339)
* lei expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  339)
* length expansion item:                 Expansion items.    (line  518)
* length expansion item <1>:             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  276)
* length of login name:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1732)
* LF character:                          Introduction.       (line    6)
* LHLO argument setting:                 Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  307)
* limit:                                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  374)
* limit <1>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  396)
* limit <2>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1158)
* limit <3>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1165)
* limit <4>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* limit <5>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1732)
* limit <6>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1791)
* limit <7>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2454)
* limit <8>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2542)
* limit <9>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2614)
* limit <10>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2630)
* limit <11>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2658)
* limit <12>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2670)
* limit <13>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2888)
* limit <14>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2909)
* limit <15>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2922)
* limit <16>:                            Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  195)
* limit <17>:                            Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  215)
* limit <18>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  455)
* limit <19>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  455)
* limit <20>:                            How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used.
                                                             (line    6)
* limit <21>:                            Retry parameters.   (line   45)
* limitations of Exim:                   Limitations.        (line    6)
* limiting client sending rates:         Rate limiting incoming messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* LIMITS:                                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1542)
* line endings:                          Line endings.       (line    6)
* line length:                           Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  673)
* line length <1>:                       Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  705)
* linear search:                         lsearch.            (line    6)
* linefeed:                              Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  670)
* linefeed <1>:                          Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  314)
* linefeed <2>:                          Line endings.       (line    6)
* linefeed <3>:                          Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   34)
* linefeed <4>:                          Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   25)
* Linux, DBM library for:                DBM libraries.      (line   12)
* list:                                  List construction.  (line    6)
* list <1>:                              Empty items in lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* list <2>:                              Negated items in lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* list <3>:                              File names in lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* list <4>:                              Named lists.        (line    6)
* list <5>:                              Named lists compared with macros.
                                                             (line    6)
* list <6>:                              Named list caching. (line    6)
* list <7>:                              Domain lists.       (line    6)
* list <8>:                              Host lists.         (line    6)
* list <9>:                              Address lists.      (line    6)
* list <10>:                             Local part lists.   (line    6)
* list <11>:                             Expansion items.    (line  293)
* list <12>:                             Expansion items.    (line  362)
* list <13>:                             Expansion items.    (line  532)
* list <14>:                             Expansion items.    (line  565)
* list <15>:                             Expansion items.    (line  832)
* list <16>:                             Expansion items.    (line  976)
* list <17>:                             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  289)
* list <18>:                             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  289)
* list <19>:                             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  203)
* list <20>:                             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  270)
* list separator:                        Changing list separators.
                                                             (line    6)
* list separator <1>:                    Changing list separators.
                                                             (line   19)
* listcount expansion item:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  289)
* listextract:                           Expansion items.    (line  532)
* listing:                               Command line options.
                                                             (line  463)
* listing <1>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1274)
* listing <2>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1279)
* listing <3>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1285)
* listing <4>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1290)
* listnamed expansion item:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  294)
* lists of domains; hosts; etc.:         Domain; host; and address lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* LMDB:                                  lmdb.               (line    6)
* LMTP:                                  The lmtp transport. (line    6)
* LMTP <1>:                              The lmtp transport. (line    6)
* LMTP <2>:                              The lmtp transport. (line   48)
* LMTP <3>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  682)
* LMTP <4>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  767)
* LMTP <5>:                              SMTP processing.    (line    6)
* LMTP <6>:                              Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* LMTP <7>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  391)
* lmtp transport:                        The lmtp transport. (line    6)
* load average:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  648)
* load average <1>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2279)
* load average <2>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2293)
* load average <3>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2878)
* load balancer:                         Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  333)
* local delivery:                        Terminology.        (line   51)
* local delivery <1>:                    Using an external local delivery agent.
                                                             (line    6)
* local host:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1372)
* local host <1>:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2138)
* local host <2>:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  892)
* local host <3>:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  942)
* local host <4>:                        The dnslookup router.
                                                             (line   29)
* local host <5>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   21)
* local message reception:               Command line options.
                                                             (line  314)
* local part:                            Terminology.        (line   46)
* local part <1>:                        Address lists.      (line   39)
* local part <2>:                        Address lists.      (line  147)
* local part <3>:                        Local part lists.   (line    6)
* local part <4>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  455)
* local part <5>:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  641)
* local part <6>:                        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  832)
* local part <7>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  229)
* local part <8>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  229)
* local part <9>:                        ACL conditions.     (line  153)
* local part <10>:                       Case of local parts.
                                                             (line    6)
* local part <11>:                       Dots in local parts.
                                                             (line    6)
* local part <12>:                       Multiple user mailboxes.
                                                             (line    6)
* local part <13>:                       Multiple user mailboxes.
                                                             (line    6)
* local SMTP input:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line  603)
* local transports:                      Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  417)
* local transports <1>:                  Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  543)
* local transports <2>:                  Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1119)
* local transports <3>:                  Environment for local transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* local transports <4>:                  Uids and gids.      (line    6)
* local user, checking in router:        Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  132)
* Local/eximon.conf:                     Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line   40)
* Local/eximon.conf <1>:                 Overriding build-time options for the monitor.
                                                             (line   16)
* Local/eximon.conf <2>:                 The Exim monitor.   (line    6)
* Local/Makefile:                        Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* Local/Makefile <1>:                    Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   21)
* local_part expansion item:             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  305)
* local_parts ACL condition:             ACL conditions.     (line  153)
* local_scan() function:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1626)
* local_scan() function <1>:             When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line   33)
* local_scan() function <2>:             ACL return codes.   (line   35)
* local_scan() function <3>:             Local scan function.
                                                             (line    6)
* local_scan() function <4>:             Building Exim to use a local scan function.
                                                             (line    6)
* local_scan() function <5>:             API for local_scan[].
                                                             (line    6)
* local_scan() function <6>:             Configuration options for local_scan[].
                                                             (line    6)
* local_scan() function <7>:             Available Exim variables.
                                                             (line    6)
* local_scan() function <8>:             Available Exim functions.
                                                             (line    6)
* local_scan() function <9>:             More about Exim's memory handling.
                                                             (line    6)
* lock files:                            Testing.            (line   56)
* lock files <1>:                        Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  177)
* locking files:                         Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  177)
* locking files <1>:                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  232)
* locking files <2>:                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  409)
* locking files <3>:                     Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   19)
* locking files <4>:                     Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line  100)
* locking mailboxes:                     Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock].
                                                             (line    6)
* log:                                   Life of a message.  (line   24)
* log <1>:                               Calling Exim functions from Perl.
                                                             (line   22)
* log <2>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   11)
* log <3>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   11)
* log <4>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1665)
* log <5>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1694)
* log <6>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1707)
* log <7>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1781)
* log <8>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2179)
* log <9>:                               Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  668)
* log <10>:                              Configuring an Exim server to use TLS.
                                                             (line  105)
* log <11>:                              Requesting and verifying client certificates.
                                                             (line   47)
* log <12>:                              Configuring an Exim client to use TLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <13>:                              Configuring an Exim client to use TLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <14>:                              Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line   31)
* log <15>:                              Log files.          (line    6)
* log <16>:                              Log files.          (line    6)
* log <17>:                              Log files.          (line   66)
* log <18>:                              Where the logs are written.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <19>:                              Where the logs are written.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <20>:                              Where the logs are written.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <21>:                              Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled".
                                                             (line    6)
* log <22>:                              Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled".
                                                             (line    6)
* log <23>:                              Datestamped log files.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <24>:                              Logging to syslog.  (line    6)
* log <25>:                              Logging message reception.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <26>:                              Logging message reception.
                                                             (line   55)
* log <27>:                              Logging deliveries. (line    6)
* log <28>:                              Summary of Fields in Log Lines.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <29>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line    6)
* log <30>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  138)
* log <31>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  148)
* log <32>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  152)
* log <33>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  156)
* log <34>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  169)
* log <35>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  174)
* log <36>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  177)
* log <37>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  183)
* log <38>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  188)
* log <39>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  191)
* log <40>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  199)
* log <41>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  206)
* log <42>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  209)
* log <43>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  215)
* log <44>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  223)
* log <45>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  229)
* log <46>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  235)
* log <47>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  238)
* log <48>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  238)
* log <49>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  238)
* log <50>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  238)
* log <51>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  247)
* log <52>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  253)
* log <53>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  262)
* log <54>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  265)
* log <55>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  268)
* log <56>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  275)
* log <57>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  275)
* log <58>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  275)
* log <59>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  280)
* log <60>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  290)
* log <61>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  293)
* log <62>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  305)
* log <63>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  327)
* log <64>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  329)
* log <65>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  338)
* log <66>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  343)
* log <67>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  351)
* log <68>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  356)
* log <69>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  362)
* log <70>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  367)
* log <71>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  373)
* log <72>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  378)
* log <73>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  383)
* log <74>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  386)
* log <75>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  391)
* log <76>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  396)
* log <77>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  417)
* log <78>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  423)
* log <79>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  458)
* log <80>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  466)
* log <81>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  466)
* log <82>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  472)
* log <83>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  478)
* log <84>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  485)
* log <85>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  485)
* log <86>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  491)
* log <87>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  495)
* log <88>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  505)
* log <89>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  510)
* log <90>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  514)
* log <91>:                              Message log.        (line    6)
* log <92>:                              Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep].
                                                             (line    6)
* log <93>:                              Cycling log files [exicyclog].
                                                             (line    6)
* log <94>:                              The log display.    (line    6)
* log <95>:                              MTA operations.     (line   27)
* logging:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2594)
* logging <1>:                           Events.             (line   19)
* logging in ACL:                        ACL modifiers.      (line  176)
* logging in ACL <1>:                    ACL modifiers.      (line  191)
* LOGIN authentication mechanism:        The LOGIN authentication mechanism.
                                                             (line    6)
* logwrite ACL modifier:                 ACL modifiers.      (line  191)
* log_message ACL modifier:              ACL modifiers.      (line  128)
* log_reject_target ACL modifier:        ACL modifiers.      (line  176)
* lookup:                                Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   65)
* lookup <1>:                            File and database lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <2>:                            Lookup types.       (line    6)
* lookup <3>:                            Single-key lookup types.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <4>:                            cdb.                (line    6)
* lookup <5>:                            dbm.                (line    6)
* lookup <6>:                            dbmjz.              (line    6)
* lookup <7>:                            dbmjz.              (line    6)
* lookup <8>:                            dbmnz.              (line    6)
* lookup <9>:                            dbmnz.              (line    6)
* lookup <10>:                           dsearch.            (line    6)
* lookup <11>:                           iplsearch.          (line    6)
* lookup <12>:                           json.               (line    6)
* lookup <13>:                           lmdb.               (line    6)
* lookup <14>:                           lsearch.            (line    6)
* lookup <15>:                           lsearch.            (line   26)
* lookup <16>:                           nis.                (line    6)
* lookup <17>:                           [n]wildlsearch.     (line    6)
* lookup <18>:                           [n]wildlsearch.     (line    6)
* lookup <19>:                           Public Suffix List. (line    6)
* lookup <20>:                           Public Suffix List. (line    6)
* lookup <21>:                           spf.                (line    6)
* lookup <22>:                           Query-style lookup types.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <23>:                           dnsdb.              (line    6)
* lookup <24>:                           ldap.               (line    6)
* lookup <25>:                           mysql.              (line    6)
* lookup <26>:                           nisplus.            (line    6)
* lookup <27>:                           oracle.             (line    6)
* lookup <28>:                           passwd.             (line    6)
* lookup <29>:                           pgsql.              (line    6)
* lookup <30>:                           redis.              (line    6)
* lookup <31>:                           sqlite.             (line    6)
* lookup <32>:                           whoson.             (line    6)
* lookup <33>:                           Temporary errors in lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <34>:                           Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <35>:                           Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <36>:                           Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <37>:                           Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line   19)
* lookup <38>:                           Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <39>:                           Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <40>:                           Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line   56)
* lookup <41>:                           Lookup caching.     (line    6)
* lookup <42>:                           Quoting lookup data.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <43>:                           More about dnsdb.   (line    6)
* lookup <44>:                           More about LDAP.    (line    6)
* lookup <45>:                           More about NIS+.    (line    6)
* lookup <46>:                           SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* lookup <47>:                           SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* lookup <48>:                           SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* lookup <49>:                           SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* lookup <50>:                           More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <51>:                           More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <52>:                           More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <53>:                           More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* lookup <54>:                           More about SQLite.  (line    6)
* lookup <55>:                           More about Redis.   (line    6)
* lookup <56>:                           Domain lists.       (line  115)
* lookup <57>:                           Expansion items.    (line  572)
* lookup <58>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* lookup <59>:                           SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line  154)
* lookup modules:                        Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* loop:                                  Delivery in detail. (line   33)
* loop <1>:                              Address lists.      (line  175)
* loop <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2434)
* loop <3>:                              Redirecting to a local mailbox.
                                                             (line    6)
* loop <4>:                              Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   92)
* loop <5>:                              Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line   43)
* lower casing:                          Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  269)
* lower casing <1>:                      Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
                                                             (line    6)
* lsearch lookup type:                   lsearch.            (line    6)
* lt expansion condition:                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  347)
* lti expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  347)
* macro:                                 Command line options.
                                                             (line  811)
* macro <1>:                             Macros in the configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* macro <2>:                             Named lists compared with macros.
                                                             (line    6)
* MAIL:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  121)
* MAIL <1>:                              The SMTP-time rewriting flag.
                                                             (line    6)
* MAIL <2>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* MAIL <3>:                              Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   41)
* MAIL <4>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  423)
* mail hub example:                      Manualroute examples.
                                                             (line   46)
* mail loop prevention:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2434)
* mailbox:                               Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  568)
* mailbox <1>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line   16)
* mailbox <2>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line   73)
* mailbox <3>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  232)
* mailbox <4>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  298)
* mailbox <5>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  306)
* mailbox <6>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  628)
* mailbox <7>:                           Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   52)
* mailbox <8>:                           Retry rules for specific errors.
                                                             (line   94)
* mailbox <9>:                           Multiple user mailboxes.
                                                             (line    6)
* mailbox <10>:                          Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock].
                                                             (line    6)
* maildir format:                        Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  316)
* maildir format <1>:                    Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  329)
* maildir format <2>:                    Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  363)
* maildir format <3>:                    Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  374)
* maildir format <4>:                    Operational details for delivery to a new file.
                                                             (line   30)
* maildir format <5>:                    Maildir delivery.   (line    6)
* maildir format <6>:                    Using a maildirsize file.
                                                             (line    6)
* maildir format <7>:                    Retry rules for specific errors.
                                                             (line  105)
* maildir++:                             Maildir delivery.   (line   59)
* maildirfolder, creating:               Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  374)
* mailing lists:                         Mailing lists.      (line    6)
* mailing lists <1>:                     Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  334)
* mailing lists <2>:                     Using Exim to handle mailing lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* mailing lists <3>:                     Syntax errors in mailing lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* mailing lists <4>:                     Re-expansion of mailing lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* mailing lists <5>:                     Closed mailing lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* _mailq_:                               Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line    6)
* mailstore format:                      Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  386)
* mailstore format <1>:                  Operational details for delivery to a new file.
                                                             (line   30)
* mailstore format <2>:                  Mailstore delivery. (line    6)
* main configuration:                    Main configuration. (line    6)
* main log:                              Log files.          (line    9)
* maintaining Exim's hints database:     Hints database maintenance.
                                                             (line    6)
* malware ACL condition:                 ACL conditions.     (line  161)
* malware scan test:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line  357)
* manualroute router:                    The manualroute router.
                                                             (line    6)
* mask expansion item:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  313)
* masked IP address:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  313)
* match expansion condition:             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  354)
* match_address expansion condition:     Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  388)
* match_domain expansion condition:      Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  391)
* match_ip expansion condition:          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  394)
* match_local_part expansion condition:  Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  455)
* maximum:                               Introduction.       (line    6)
* maximum <1>:                           Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  673)
* MBX format, specifying:                Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  409)
* md5 expansion item:                    Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  341)
* MD5 hash:                              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  341)
* MD5 hash <1>:                          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  106)
* memory:                                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  549)
* message:                               Terminology.        (line   40)
* message <1>:                           Receiving mail.     (line    6)
* message <2>:                           Life of a message.  (line    6)
* message <3>:                           Life of a message.  (line    6)
* message <4>:                           Life of a message.  (line   14)
* message <5>:                           Life of a message.  (line   24)
* message <6>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  336)
* message <7>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  476)
* message <8>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1081)
* message <9>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1201)
* message <10>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1210)
* message <11>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1218)
* message <12>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1250)
* message <13>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1268)
* message <14>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1274)
* message <15>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1279)
* message <16>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1285)
* message <17>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1290)
* message <18>:                          Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* message <19>:                          Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  679)
* message <20>:                          Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  776)
* message <21>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1791)
* message <22>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2226)
* message <23>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2249)
* message <24>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2263)
* message <25>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2279)
* message <26>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2367)
* message <27>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2690)
* message <28>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2705)
* message <29>:                          Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   15)
* message <30>:                          Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  118)
* message <31>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  838)
* message <32>:                          Access control lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* message <33>:                          Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  345)
* message <34>:                          Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line    6)
* message <35>:                          Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters.
                                                             (line    6)
* message <36>:                          Message processing. (line    6)
* message <37>:                          Submission mode for non-local messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* message <38>:                          From;.              (line    6)
* message <39>:                          Message-ID;.        (line    6)
* message <40>:                          Sender;.            (line    6)
* message <41>:                          Errors in outgoing SMTP.
                                                             (line   38)
* message <42>:                          Taking copies of mail.
                                                             (line    6)
* message <43>:                          Discarded deliveries.
                                                             (line    6)
* message <44>:                          Message log.        (line    6)
* message ACL modifier:                  ACL verbs.          (line   31)
* message ACL modifier <1>:              ACL modifiers.      (line  210)
* message body:                          Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  198)
* message body <1>:                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  203)
* message body <2>:                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  687)
* message body <3>:                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  703)
* message body <4>:                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  708)
* message body <5>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1741)
* message body <6>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1747)
* message ids:                           Message identification.
                                                             (line    6)
* message ids <1>:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1647)
* message logs:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1781)
* message logs <1>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2129)
* message reference:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line 1531)
* message sender, constructed by Exim:   Receiving mail.     (line   36)
* _Message-ID:_ header line:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1753)
* _Message-ID:_ header line <1>:         Message-ID;.        (line    6)
* Microsoft Secure Password Authentication: Incorporated code.
                                                             (line   37)
* Microsoft Secure Password Authentication <1>: The spa authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* millisecond:                           Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  265)
* MIME content scanning:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  135)
* MIME content scanning <1>:             Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* MIME content scanning <2>:             Scanning MIME parts.
                                                             (line    6)
* MIME content scanning <3>:             Scanning MIME parts.
                                                             (line   76)
* mime_regex ACL condition:              ACL conditions.     (line  167)
* mixed-case login names:                Case of local parts.
                                                             (line   15)
* MMDF format mailbox:                   Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line   73)
* modifiers:                             Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line    6)
* monitor:                               Introduction.       (line    6)
* msglog directory:                      Message log.        (line    6)
* multiline responses, suppressing:      Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  290)
* multiple:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1647)
* multiple hosts:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1647)
* multiple mailboxes:                    Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  568)
* multiple mailboxes <1>:                Multiple user mailboxes.
                                                             (line    6)
* multiple SMTP deliveries:              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1089)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <1>:          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1335)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <2>:          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1674)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <3>:          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <4>:          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   89)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <5>:          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  470)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <6>:          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  479)
* multiple SMTP deliveries <7>:          Exim on the intermittently connected client host.
                                                             (line   11)
* multiple SMTP deliveries with TLS:     Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection.
                                                             (line    6)
* multiple spool directories:            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3080)
* MX record:                             More about dnsdb.   (line   46)
* MX record <1>:                         Pseudo dnsdb record types.
                                                             (line    6)
* MX record <2>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  228)
* MX record <3>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  265)
* MX record <4>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  272)
* MX record <5>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  892)
* MX record <6>:                         The dnslookup router.
                                                             (line   29)
* MX record <7>:                         Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   11)
* MX record <8>:                         Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   62)
* MX record <9>:                         Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   87)
* MX record <10>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  214)
* MX record <11>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  222)
* MX record <12>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  455)
* MySQL:                                 mysql.              (line    6)
* MySQL <1>:                             SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* MySQL <2>:                             More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* MySQL <3>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1852)
* Nagle algorithm:                       Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3301)
* name:                                  Command line options.
                                                             (line  976)
* name <1>:                              Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1146)
* name <2>:                              Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1730)
* name <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2138)
* name server for enclosing domain:      Pseudo dnsdb record types.
                                                             (line   15)
* named lists:                           Named lists.        (line    6)
* named lists <1>:                       Named lists.        (line   67)
* named pipe (fifo):                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line    9)
* named queues:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1226)
* named queues <1>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1750)
* named queues <2>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1798)
* named queues <3>:                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  935)
* named queues <4>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2361)
* named queues <5>:                      ACL modifiers.      (line  290)
* _ndbm_ DBM library:                    DBM libraries.      (line   18)
* negation:                              Negated items in lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* negation <1>:                          Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   10)
* network interface:                     Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* new drivers, adding:                   Adding drivers or lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* _newaliases_:                          Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   28)
* newline:                               Changing list separators.
                                                             (line   19)
* newline <1>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1741)
* NFS:                                   Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  764)
* NFS <1>:                               Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  146)
* NFS <2>:                               Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  177)
* NFS <3>:                               Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  728)
* NFS <4>:                               Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   19)
* NIS lookup type:                       Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   65)
* NIS lookup type <1>:                   nis.                (line    6)
* NIS+ lookup type:                      Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   65)
* NIS+ lookup type <1>:                  nisplus.            (line    6)
* NIS+ lookup type <2>:                  More about NIS+.    (line    6)
* NIS, retrying user lookups:            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1070)
* non-immediate delivery:                Command line options.
                                                             (line 1405)
* non-SMTP messages:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   31)
* non-SMTP messages <1>:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   45)
* non-SMTP messages <2>:                 Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* non-SMTP messages <3>:                 The non-SMTP ACLs.  (line    6)
* not-QUIT, ACL for:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  142)
* no__xxx_:                              Introduction.       (line    6)
* NTLM authentication:                   The spa authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* NUL:                                   Introduction.       (line    6)
* number of deliveries:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2506)
* numeric comparison:                    Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line   14)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc):       Expansion items.    (line  613)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <1>:   Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  378)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <2>:   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line   16)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <3>:   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  966)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <4>:   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1121)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <5>:   Format of the list of hosts.
                                                             (line   18)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <6>:   Rewriting patterns. (line   19)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <7>:   Using plaintext in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <8>:   Using cram_md5 as a server.
                                                             (line   12)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <9>:   Using spa as a server.
                                                             (line   11)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <10>:  Using external in a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* numerical variables ($1 $2 etc) <11>:  The UUCP From line. (line   25)
* nwildlsearch lookup type:              [n]wildlsearch.     (line    6)
* ocsp:                                  Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* OCSP:                                  Revoked certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* ODMR:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   52)
* ODMR <1>:                              The ATRN command; and ODMR.
                                                             (line    6)
* ODMR <2>:                              ODMR customer connection.
                                                             (line    6)
* one-time aliasing/forwarding expansion: Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  334)
* open files, too many:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* OpenDMARC:                             Incorporated code.  (line    6)
* opendmarc:                             Incorporated code.  (line  123)
* OpenSSL:                               Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line    6)
* OpenSSL <1>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1908)
* OpenSSL <2>:                           Encrypted SMTP connections.
                                                             (line    6)
* options:                               The Exim command line.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <1>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line   16)
* options <2>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  400)
* options <3>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  407)
* options <4>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  422)
* options <5>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  438)
* options <6>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  438)
* options <7>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  438)
* options <8>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  455)
* options <9>:                           Common option syntax.
                                                             (line   14)
* options <10>:                          Format of driver configurations.
                                                             (line   43)
* options <11>:                          Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <12>:                          Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <13>:                          Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <14>:                          The iplookup router.
                                                             (line   23)
* options <15>:                          Private options for manualroute.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <16>:                          The queryprogram router.
                                                             (line   12)
* options <17>:                          Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <18>:                          Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <19>:                          Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <20>:                          Private options for autoreply.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <21>:                          The lmtp transport. (line   17)
* options <22>:                          Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <23>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <24>:                          Generic options for authenticators.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <25>:                          Plaintext server options.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <26>:                          Using plaintext in a client.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <27>:                          Using cram_md5 as a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <28>:                          Using cram_md5 as a client.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <29>:                          Using spa as a server.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <30>:                          Using spa as a client.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <31>:                          External options.   (line    6)
* options <32>:                          Using external in a client.
                                                             (line    6)
* options <33>:                          The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line   27)
* Oracle:                                oracle.             (line    6)
* Oracle <1>:                            SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* Oracle <2>:                            More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* Oracle <3>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2010)
* os.h:                                  OS-specific header files.
                                                             (line    6)
* outgoing LMTP over TCP/IP:             Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* outgoing SMTP over TCP/IP:             Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* ownership:                             The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line   24)
* ownership <1>:                         Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  373)
* ownership <2>:                         Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  373)
* packet radio:                          Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  990)
* PAM authentication:                    Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  496)
* pam expansion condition:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  496)
* panic log:                             Log files.          (line   32)
* partial matching:                      Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* passwd file:                           Introduction.       (line    6)
* passwd lookup type:                    passwd.             (line    6)
* pass_unscanned:                        Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line   48)
* PCRE2:                                 Incorporated code.  (line    6)
* PCRE2 <1>:                             Regular expressions.
                                                             (line    6)
* PCRE2 <2>:                             Trust in configuration data.
                                                             (line    6)
* PCRE2 library:                         PCRE2 library.      (line    6)
* periodic queue running:                Command line options.
                                                             (line 1785)
* Perl:                                  Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line  103)
* Perl <1>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1636)
* Perl <2>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1642)
* Perl <3>:                              Expansion items.    (line  667)
* Perl <4>:                              Embedded Perl.      (line    6)
* Perl <5>:                              Setting up so Perl can be used.
                                                             (line   39)
* Perl <6>:                              Use of standard output and error by Perl.
                                                             (line    6)
* Perl <7>:                              Use of standard output and error by Perl.
                                                             (line   15)
* Perl <8>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2056)
* pid (process id):                      Message identification.
                                                             (line   15)
* pid (process id) <1>:                  Command line options.
                                                             (line   61)
* pid (process id) <2>:                  Command line options.
                                                             (line  425)
* pid (process id) <3>:                  Command line options.
                                                             (line 1577)
* pid (process id) <4>:                  Command line options.
                                                             (line 1585)
* pid (process id) <5>:                  Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  884)
* pid (process id) <6>:                  Log files.          (line   66)
* pid (process id) <7>:                  Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  290)
* pid file, path for:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2073)
* pipe:                                  Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line    9)
* pipe <1>:                              Duplicate addresses <1>.
                                                             (line    6)
* pipe <2>:                              Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line    9)
* pipe <3>:                              The pipe transport. (line   50)
* pipe transport:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3273)
* pipe transport <1>:                    Uids and gids.      (line   42)
* pipe transport <2>:                    Address batching.   (line   82)
* pipe transport <3>:                    The pipe transport. (line    6)
* pipe transport <4>:                    Returned status and data.
                                                             (line    6)
* pipe transport <5>:                    How the command is run.
                                                             (line    6)
* pipe transport <6>:                    Environment variables.
                                                             (line    6)
* pipe transport <7>:                    Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line    9)
* pipe transport <8>:                    Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   65)
* pipe transport <9>:                    Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   79)
* pipe transport <10>:                   Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   88)
* pipe transport <11>:                   Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   95)
* pipe transport <12>:                   Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  124)
* pipe transport <13>:                   Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  258)
* PIPELINING:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2088)
* pipelining:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2100)
* pipelining <1>:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2100)
* PIPELINING <1>:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2901)
* PIPELINING <2>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  403)
* PIPELINING <3>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  413)
* pipelining <2>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  420)
* pipelining <3>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  420)
* PIPELINING <4>:                        Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  318)
* pipelining <4>:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  293)
* pipelining <5>:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  300)
* pkg-config:                            Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line   35)
* pkg-config <1>:                        Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line   52)
* pkg-config <2>:                        Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   86)
* pkg-config <3>:                        Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   86)
* PLAIN authentication mechanism:        The PLAIN authentication mechanism.
                                                             (line    6)
* plaintext authenticator:               The plaintext authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* policy control:                        Policy control.     (line    6)
* policy control <1>:                    Command line options.
                                                             (line  216)
* policy control <2>:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2996)
* policy control <3>:                    Access control lists.
                                                             (line    6)
* policy control <4>:                    Address verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* policy control <5>:                    Using an ACL to control relaying.
                                                             (line    6)
* policy control <6>:                    Local scan function.
                                                             (line    6)
* policy control <7>:                    Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess].
                                                             (line    6)
* port:                                  Command line options.
                                                             (line 1607)
* port <1>:                              Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* port <2>:                              Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* port <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  570)
* port <4>:                              The iplookup router.
                                                             (line   41)
* port <5>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  739)
* port <6>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  253)
* port <7>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  280)
* PostgreSQL lookup type:                pgsql.              (line    6)
* PostgreSQL lookup type <1>:            SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* PostgreSQL lookup type <2>:            More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* PostgreSQL lookup type <3>:            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2063)
* PRDR:                                  Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  916)
* PRDR <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line   83)
* PRDR <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2119)
* PRDR <3>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  635)
* PRDR <4>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* PRDR <5>:                              The SMTP PRDR ACL.  (line    6)
* PRDR <6>:                              The SMTP PRDR ACL.  (line   20)
* PRDR <7>:                              Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL.
                                                             (line   26)
* preconditions:                         Processing an address for delivery.
                                                             (line   36)
* preconditions <1>:                     Running an individual router.
                                                             (line    6)
* preconditions <2>:                     Router preconditions.
                                                             (line    6)
* prefix:                                Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line   56)
* prefix <1>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  554)
* prefix <2>:                            Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  229)
* preserving domain in redirection:      Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  412)
* primary host name:                     Domain lists.       (line    9)
* printing characters:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2161)
* private options:                       Format of driver configurations.
                                                             (line   47)
* privatekey:                            Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* privatekey <1>:                        Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* privilege, running without:            Running Exim without privilege.
                                                             (line    6)
* privileged user:                       Privileged users.   (line    6)
* process id:                            Introduction.       (line    6)
* process log path:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2179)
* process, querying:                     Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat].
                                                             (line    6)
* _procmail_:                            Using an external local delivery agent.
                                                             (line    6)
* protocol, specifying for local message: Command line options.
                                                             (line 1544)
* proxy:                                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1366)
* proxy <1>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2194)
* proxy <2>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  852)
* proxy <3>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  247)
* proxy <4>:                             Proxy support.      (line    6)
* proxy <5>:                             Inbound proxies.    (line    6)
* proxy <6>:                             Inbound proxies.    (line    6)
* proxy <7>:                             Inbound proxies.    (line    6)
* proxy <8>:                             Outbound proxies.   (line    6)
* proxy <9>:                             Outbound proxies.   (line    6)
* proxy <10>:                            Outbound proxies.   (line    6)
* proxy <11>:                            Outbound proxies.   (line   31)
* Proxy protocol:                        Inbound proxies.    (line    6)
* proxy support:                         Proxy support.      (line    6)
* prvs expansion item:                   Expansion items.    (line  692)
* prvscheck expansion item:              Expansion items.    (line  701)
* psl lookup type:                       Public Suffix List. (line    6)
* PTR record:                            More about dnsdb.   (line   37)
* public key for signed distribution:    Where to find the Exim distribution.
                                                             (line   40)
* query-style lookup:                    Lookup types.       (line   19)
* query-style lookup <1>:                Query-style lookup types.
                                                             (line    6)
* querying exim information:             Command line options.
                                                             (line  287)
* queryprogram router:                   The queryprogram router.
                                                             (line    6)
* queue:                                 Terminology.        (line   59)
* queue <1>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  463)
* queue <2>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  504)
* queue <3>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  509)
* queue <4>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1226)
* queue <5>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1226)
* queue <6>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1701)
* queue <7>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1701)
* queue <8>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1729)
* queue <9>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1736)
* queue <10>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1745)
* queue <11>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1750)
* queue <12>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1750)
* queue <13>:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  938)
* queue <14>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  588)
* queue <15>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2234)
* queue <16>:                            ODMR provider connection.
                                                             (line   51)
* queue <17>:                            Selective queue listing [exiqgrep].
                                                             (line    6)
* queue <18>:                            Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm].
                                                             (line    6)
* queue <19>:                            The queue display.  (line    6)
* queue <20>:                            The queue menu.     (line    6)
* queue ACL modifier:                    ACL modifiers.      (line  290)
* queue runner:                          Terminology.        (line   64)
* queue runner <1>:                      Delivery in detail. (line   63)
* queue runner <2>:                      Retry mechanism.    (line    6)
* queue runner <3>:                      Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   23)
* queue runner <4>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line   44)
* queue runner <5>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1661)
* queue runner <6>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1666)
* queue runner <7>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1701)
* queue runner <8>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1785)
* queue runner <9>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1815)
* queue runner <10>:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line 1865)
* queue runner <11>:                     Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  539)
* queue runner <12>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  648)
* queue runner <13>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2234)
* queue runner <14>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2318)
* queue runner <15>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2347)
* queue runner <16>:                     Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  327)
* queueing:                              Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  326)
* queueing incoming messages:            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1405)
* queueing incoming messages <1>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2226)
* queueing incoming messages <2>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2249)
* queueing incoming messages <3>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2263)
* queueing incoming messages <4>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2279)
* queueing incoming messages <5>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2307)
* queueing incoming messages <6>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2367)
* queueing incoming messages <7>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2690)
* queueing incoming messages <8>:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2705)
* queueing incoming messages <9>:        Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  326)
* queues:                                Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  935)
* queues <1>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2361)
* queue_running expansion condition:     Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  539)
* QUIT:                                  Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* QUIT, ACL for:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  156)
* QUIT, ACL for <1>:                     The QUIT ACL.       (line    6)
* quota:                                 The appendfile transport.
                                                             (line   23)
* quota <1>:                             Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  329)
* quota <2>:                             Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  495)
* quota <3>:                             Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  628)
* quota <4>:                             Maildir delivery.   (line   59)
* quota <5>:                             Using a maildirsize file.
                                                             (line    6)
* quota <6>:                             Retry rules for specific errors.
                                                             (line   89)
* quota <7>:                             Quota caching.      (line    6)
* quota cache:                           Quota caching.      (line   19)
* quota cache <1>:                       Quota caching.      (line   23)
* quote expansion item:                  Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  359)
* quote_local_part expansion item:       Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  376)
* quoting:                               Quoting lookup data.
                                                             (line    6)
* quoting <1>:                           Expansion items.    (line  565)
* quoting <2>:                           Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  250)
* quoting <3>:                           Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  359)
* quoting <4>:                           Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  389)
* quoting <5>:                           Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  456)
* quoting <6>:                           How the command is run.
                                                             (line   11)
* Radius:                                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  543)
* radius expansion condition:            Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  543)
* random number:                         Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  404)
* randomized host list:                  Private options for manualroute.
                                                             (line   46)
* randomized host list <1>:              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  502)
* rate limiting:                         ACL conditions.     (line  174)
* rate limiting <1>:                     Rate limiting incoming messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* rate limiting <2>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line    6)
* rate limiting <3>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line    7)
* rate limiting <4>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   12)
* rate limiting <5>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   18)
* rate limiting <6>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   28)
* rate limiting <7>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   38)
* rate limiting <8>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   45)
* rate limiting <9>:                     Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   51)
* rate limiting <10>:                    Ratelimit options for what is being measured.
                                                             (line   60)
* rate limiting <11>:                    Ratelimit update modes.
                                                             (line    6)
* rate limiting <12>:                    Ratelimit options for handling fast clients.
                                                             (line    6)
* rate limiting <13>:                    Limiting the rate of different events.
                                                             (line    6)
* RBL:                                   Introduction.       (line    6)
* RCPT:                                  ACL configuration.  (line   15)
* RCPT <1>:                              Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  786)
* RCPT <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  162)
* RCPT <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2468)
* RCPT <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2922)
* RCPT <5>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  690)
* RCPT <6>:                              The SMTP-time rewriting flag.
                                                             (line    6)
* RCPT <7>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* readfile expansion item:               Expansion items.    (line  730)
* readsocket expansion item:             Expansion items.    (line  743)
* _Received:_ header line:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2390)
* _Received:_ header line <1>:           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2434)
* _Received:_ header line <2>:           Received;.          (line    6)
* receiving mail:                        Receiving mail.     (line    6)
* recipient:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1081)
* recipient <1>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1241)
* recipient <2>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* recipient <3>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2454)
* recipient <4>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  179)
* recipient <5>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  323)
* recipient <6>:                         Available Exim variables.
                                                             (line   60)
* recipient <7>:                         Available Exim variables.
                                                             (line   60)
* recipient <8>:                         Errors in outgoing SMTP.
                                                             (line   70)
* recipients ACL condition:              ACL conditions.     (line  179)
* redirect:                              Redirection data.   (line   37)
* redirect <1>:                          Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   87)
* redirect router:                       The redirect router.
                                                             (line    6)
* redirection:                           Introduction.       (line    6)
* Redis lookup type:                     redis.              (line    6)
* Redis lookup type <1>:                 SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* Redis lookup type <2>:                 More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis.
                                                             (line    6)
* redis lookup type:                     More about Redis.   (line    6)
* _References:_ header line:             References;.        (line    6)
* regdom lookup type:                    Public Suffix List. (line    6)
* regex ACL condition:                   ACL conditions.     (line  183)
* regex submatch variables ($1regex $2regex etc): Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1112)
* regular expressions:                   Incorporated code.  (line    6)
* regular expressions <1>:               Regular expressions.
                                                             (line    6)
* regular expressions <2>:               Domain lists.       (line   94)
* regular expressions <3>:               Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line   49)
* regular expressions <4>:               Address lists.      (line   57)
* regular expressions <5>:               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  456)
* regular expressions <6>:               Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  354)
* regular expressions <7>:               Format of retry rules.
                                                             (line   34)
* regular expressions <8>:               Scanning with regular expressions.
                                                             (line    6)
* regular expressions <9>:               Trust in configuration data.
                                                             (line    6)
* reject log:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3839)
* reject log <1>:                        Log files.          (line   20)
* rejection, fake:                       Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  232)
* relaying:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line  216)
* relaying <1>:                          Using an ACL to control relaying.
                                                             (line    6)
* relaying <2>:                          Checking a relay configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* reload:                                Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* remote delivery, definition of:        Terminology.        (line   51)
* remove_header ACL modifier:            Removing header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line    6)
* removing messages:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line 1250)
* removing recipients:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1241)
* repeated redirection expansion:        Repeated redirection expansion.
                                                             (line    6)
* replacing another MTA:                 Replacing another MTA with Exim.
                                                             (line    6)
* reporting bugs:                        Bug reports.        (line    6)
* require ACL verb:                      ACL verbs.          (line   94)
* _Resent-_ header line:                 Resent- header lines.
                                                             (line    6)
* Resent- header lines:                  Command line options.
                                                             (line 1897)
* resolver, debugging output:            Command line options.
                                                             (line  911)
* restart:                               Upgrading Exim.     (line    9)
* restart <1>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* restricting access to features:        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  542)
* restricting access to features <1>:    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2188)
* restricting access to features <2>:    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2241)
* restricting access to features <3>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  175)
* restricting access to features <4>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  181)
* restricting access to features <5>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  187)
* restricting access to features <6>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  196)
* restricting access to features <7>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  203)
* restricting access to features <8>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  210)
* restricting access to features <9>:    Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  218)
* restricting access to features <10>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  224)
* restricting access to features <11>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  231)
* restricting access to features <12>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  237)
* restricting access to features <13>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  243)
* restricting access to features <14>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  251)
* restricting access to features <15>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  257)
* restricting access to features <16>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  266)
* restricting access to features <17>:   Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  274)
* retry:                                 Retry mechanism.    (line    6)
* retry <1>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line  536)
* retry <2>:                             Default retry rule. (line    6)
* retry <3>:                             Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  197)
* retry <4>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2542)
* retry <5>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  175)
* retry <6>:                             Retry configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* retry <7>:                             Retry configuration.
                                                             (line   23)
* retry <8>:                             Format of retry rules.
                                                             (line    6)
* retry <9>:                             Retry rules for specific errors.
                                                             (line    6)
* retry <10>:                            Retry rules for specific errors.
                                                             (line   89)
* retry <11>:                            Retry rules for specified senders.
                                                             (line    6)
* retry <12>:                            Retry parameters.   (line    6)
* retry <13>:                            Retry parameters.   (line   19)
* retry <14>:                            Retry parameters.   (line   19)
* retry <15>:                            Retry parameters.   (line   19)
* retry <16>:                            Retry parameters.   (line   19)
* retry <17>:                            Retry parameters.   (line   45)
* retry <18>:                            Timeout of retry data.
                                                             (line    6)
* retry <19>:                            Long-term failures. (line    6)
* retry <20>:                            Long-term failures. (line   27)
* retry <21>:                            Deliveries that work intermittently.
                                                             (line    6)
* retry <22>:                            System-wide message filtering.
                                                             (line   23)
* retry <23>:                            Other log entries.  (line    9)
* retry <24>:                            Finding individual retry times [exinext].
                                                             (line    6)
* return code:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  332)
* return code <1>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line  593)
* return code <2>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line  649)
* return code <3>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line  728)
* return code <4>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line 1438)
* return code <5>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line 1445)
* return code <6>:                       Command line options.
                                                             (line 1453)
* return code <7>:                       The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* return code <8>:                       Expansion items.    (line  898)
* return code <9>:                       Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1150)
* return path:                           Introduction.       (line    6)
* return path <1>:                       Terminology.        (line   56)
* return path <2>:                       Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  272)
* return path <3>:                       Submission mode for non-local messages.
                                                             (line   65)
* return path <4>:                       Sender;.            (line   54)
* _Return-path:_ header line:            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2550)
* _Return-path:_ header line <1>:        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  301)
* _Return-path:_ header line <2>:        Return-path;.       (line    6)
* reverse DNS lookup:                    Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1357)
* reverse DNS lookup <1>:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1226)
* reverse DNS lookup <2>:                Format of the -H file.
                                                             (line  128)
* revocation list:                       Revoked certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* rewriting:                             Handling an incoming message.
                                                             (line   31)
* rewriting <1>:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line  560)
* rewriting <2>:                         Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line  120)
* rewriting <3>:                         Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  151)
* rewriting <4>:                         Address rewriting.  (line    6)
* rewriting <5>:                         When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line    6)
* rewriting <6>:                         When does rewriting happen?.
                                                             (line   39)
* rewriting <7>:                         Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input.
                                                             (line    6)
* rewriting <8>:                         Rewriting rules.    (line    6)
* rewriting <9>:                         Rewriting patterns. (line    6)
* rewriting <10>:                        Rewriting replacements.
                                                             (line    6)
* rewriting <11>:                        Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite.
                                                             (line    6)
* rewriting <12>:                        Flags controlling the rewriting process.
                                                             (line   26)
* rewriting <13>:                        Rewriting examples. (line   41)
* rewriting <14>:                        Rewriting addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* rewriting <15>:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  148)
* RFC 1413:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line  235)
* RFC 1413 <1>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2569)
* RFC 1413 <2>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2576)
* RFC 1413 <3>:                          Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  235)
* RFC 2047:                              Support for iconv[].
                                                             (line    6)
* RFC 2047 <1>:                          Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  429)
* RFC 2047 <2>:                          Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  444)
* RFC 2047 <3>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  470)
* RFC 2047 <4>:                          Flags controlling the rewriting process.
                                                             (line   37)
* RFC 2047 <5>:                          Scanning MIME parts.
                                                             (line  152)
* RFC 2047 <6>:                          Available Exim functions.
                                                             (line  250)
* RFC 2047 <7>:                          Available Exim functions.
                                                             (line  264)
* RFC 2047 <8>:                          Constructed addresses.
                                                             (line   25)
* RFC 3030:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  534)
* RFC 3030 <1>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  592)
* RFC 3030 <2>:                          The DATA ACLs.      (line   23)
* RFC 7413:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  610)
* rfc2047 expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  429)
* rfc2047d expansion item:               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  444)
* _rmail_:                               Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   18)
* root privilege:                        Root privilege.     (line    6)
* root privilege <1>:                    Running Exim without privilege.
                                                             (line    6)
* router:                                Processing an address for delivery.
                                                             (line    6)
* router <1>:                            Processing an address for verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* router <2>:                            Processing an address for verification.
                                                             (line   12)
* router <3>:                            Running an individual router.
                                                             (line    6)
* router <4>:                            Running an individual router.
                                                             (line    6)
* router <5>:                            Router preconditions.
                                                             (line    6)
* router <6>:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  944)
* router <7>:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1146)
* router <8>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line   22)
* router <9>:                            Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line   72)
* router <10>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line   81)
* router <11>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  106)
* router <12>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  132)
* router <13>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  161)
* router <14>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  281)
* router <15>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  320)
* router <16>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  368)
* router <17>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  383)
* router <18>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  401)
* router <19>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  417)
* router <20>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  429)
* router <21>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  466)
* router <22>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  502)
* router <23>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  554)
* router <24>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  621)
* router <25>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  641)
* router <26>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  703)
* router <27>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  717)
* router <28>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  731)
* router <29>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  745)
* router <30>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  859)
* router <31>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  952)
* router <32>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  969)
* router <33>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  990)
* router <34>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1076)
* router <35>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1119)
* router <36>:                           Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1140)
* router modules:                        Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers:                               Router configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers <1>:                           The accept router.  (line    6)
* routers <2>:                           The dnslookup router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers <3>:                           The ipliteral router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers <4>:                           The iplookup router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers <5>:                           The manualroute router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers <6>:                           The queryprogram router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routers <7>:                           The redirect router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routing:                               Delivery in detail. (line   33)
* routing <1>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1701)
* routing <2>:                           The queryprogram router.
                                                             (line    6)
* routing <3>:                           Redirecting to a local mailbox.
                                                             (line    6)
* _rsmtp_:                               Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   13)
* Rspamd:                                Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd.
                                                             (line    6)
* run expansion item:                    Expansion items.    (line  863)
* _runq_:                                Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   23)
* runtime configuration:                 The runtime configuration file.
                                                             (line    6)
* rxquote expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  456)
* Samba project:                         Incorporated code.  (line   37)
* _saslauthd_ daemon:                    Incorporated code.  (line   42)
* _saslauthd_ daemon <1>:                Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  575)
* saslauthd expansion condition:         Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  575)
* sasldb2:                               dbmjz.              (line    6)
* scanning:                              Introduction.       (line    6)
* security:                              Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  265)
* security <1>:                          Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  272)
* security <2>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  214)
* security <3>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  222)
* security <4>:                          Security considerations.
                                                             (line    6)
* security <5>:                          Building a more "hardened" Exim.
                                                             (line    6)
* security <6>:                          Running local commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* security <7>:                          Running local commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* security <8>:                          Trust in configuration data.
                                                             (line    6)
* security <9>:                          Trust in configuration data.
                                                             (line    6)
* seen ACL condition:                    ACL conditions.     (line  190)
* seen ACL condition <1>:                Previously seen user and hosts.
                                                             (line    6)
* sender:                                Terminology.        (line   32)
* sender <1>:                            Receiving mail.     (line   36)
* sender <2>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  610)
* sender <3>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  976)
* sender <4>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line  984)
* sender <5>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1201)
* sender <6>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1475)
* sender <7>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1555)
* sender <8>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1561)
* sender <9>:                            Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  164)
* sender <10>:                           Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  858)
* sender <11>:                           Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  864)
* sender <12>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3749)
* sender <13>:                           ACL conditions.     (line  195)
* sender <14>:                           ACL conditions.     (line  209)
* sender <15>:                           ACL conditions.     (line  251)
* sender <16>:                           ACL conditions.     (line  350)
* sender <17>:                           The UUCP From line. (line    6)
* _Sender:_ header line:                 Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   25)
* _Sender:_ header line <1>:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1552)
* _Sender:_ header line <2>:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1636)
* _Sender:_ header line <3>:             Sender;.            (line    6)
* _Sender:_ header line <4>:             Sender;.            (line    6)
* senders ACL condition:                 ACL conditions.     (line  209)
* sender_domains ACL condition:          ACL conditions.     (line  195)
* sender_retain submission option:       Submission mode for non-local messages.
                                                             (line   24)
* Sendmail compatibility:                Calling interface.  (line    6)
* Sendmail compatibility <1>:            Setting options by program name.
                                                             (line   28)
* Sendmail compatibility <2>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line   40)
* Sendmail compatibility <3>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line  271)
* Sendmail compatibility <4>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line  336)
* Sendmail compatibility <5>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1036)
* Sendmail compatibility <6>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1330)
* Sendmail compatibility <7>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1567)
* Sendmail compatibility <8>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1573)
* Sendmail compatibility <9>:            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1885)
* Sendmail compatibility <10>:           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1931)
* Sendmail compatibility <11>:           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1057)
* Sendmail compatibility <12>:           The UUCP From line. (line    6)
* Sendmail compatibility <13>:           From;.              (line    6)
* serializing connections:               Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  813)
* set ACL modifier:                      ACL modifiers.      (line  306)
* setuid:                                Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line    9)
* setuid <1>:                            Root privilege.     (line    6)
* sg expansion item:                     Expansion items.    (line  949)
* SHA-1 hash:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  462)
* SHA-1 hash <1>:                        Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  114)
* SHA-2 hash:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  472)
* SHA-256 hash:                          Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  472)
* sha1 expansion item:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  462)
* sha2 expansion item:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  472)
* sha256 expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  472)
* sha3 expansion item:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  488)
* SHA3 hash:                             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  488)
* shadow transport:                      Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  323)
* shared spool directory:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1647)
* Sieve filter:                          User filters.       (line    6)
* Sieve filter <1>:                      Delivery in detail. (line   14)
* Sieve filter <2>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line  153)
* Sieve filter <3>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line  303)
* Sieve filter <4>:                      Router configuration.
                                                             (line  170)
* Sieve filter <5>:                      Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  112)
* Sieve filter <6>:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3235)
* Sieve filter <7>:                      Interpreting redirection data.
                                                             (line    6)
* Sieve filter <8>:                      Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line   24)
* Sieve filter <9>:                      Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  187)
* Sieve filter <10>:                     Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  187)
* Sieve filter <11>:                     Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  466)
* Sieve filter <12>:                     Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  494)
* Sieve filter <13>:                     The file and directory options.
                                                             (line   43)
* Sieve filter <14>:                     The file and directory options.
                                                             (line   43)
* SIGHUP:                                Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* SIGHUP <1>:                            Running Exim without privilege.
                                                             (line   14)
* signal:                                Upgrading Exim.     (line    9)
* signal <1>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* signal <2>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line   73)
* signal exit:                           Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   88)
* SIGUSR1:                               Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat].
                                                             (line    6)
* simultaneous deliveries:               Concurrent deliveries.
                                                             (line    6)
* single-key lookup:                     Lookup types.       (line    6)
* single-key lookup <1>:                 Single-key lookup types.
                                                             (line    6)
* size:                                  Command line options.
                                                             (line  476)
* size <1>:                              Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  776)
* size <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  374)
* size <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  396)
* size <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1791)
* SIZE:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1797)
* size <5>:                              Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  215)
* SIZE <1>:                              Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  393)
* size <6>:                              Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  298)
* size <7>:                              Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  306)
* size <8>:                              Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  628)
* SIZE <2>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  838)
* size <9>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  838)
* SIZE <3>:                              Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* size <10>:                             Logging message reception.
                                                             (line   63)
* size <11>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  188)
* size <12>:                             Main action buttons.
                                                             (line    6)
* SIZE option on MAIL command:           Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   41)
* skipping faulty addresses:             Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  475)
* smart host:                            Manualroute examples.
                                                             (line    9)
* smart host <1>:                        Sending mail to a smart host.
                                                             (line    6)
* smart host <2>:                        Exim as a non-queueing client.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP:                                  Command line options.
                                                             (line   44)
* SMTP <1>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line  216)
* SMTP <2>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line  568)
* SMTP <3>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line  603)
* SMTP <4>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1089)
* SMTP <5>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1089)
* SMTP <6>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1335)
* SMTP <7>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1335)
* SMTP <8>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1416)
* SMTP <9>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line 1597)
* SMTP <10>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1674)
* SMTP <11>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1674)
* SMTP <12>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* SMTP <13>:                             Command line options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* SMTP <14>:                             Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* SMTP <15>:                             Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* SMTP <16>:                             Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* SMTP <17>:                             Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1420)
* SMTP <18>:                             Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1427)
* SMTP <19>:                             Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <20>:                             Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <21>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2614)
* SMTP <22>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2630)
* SMTP <23>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2658)
* SMTP <24>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2690)
* SMTP <25>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2718)
* SMTP <26>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2737)
* SMTP <27>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2774)
* SMTP <28>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2799)
* SMTP <29>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2811)
* SMTP <30>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2888)
* SMTP <31>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2909)
* SMTP <32>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2922)
* SMTP <33>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2964)
* SMTP <34>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2996)
* SMTP <35>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3347)
* SMTP <36>:                             Manualroute examples.
                                                             (line   83)
* SMTP <37>:                             Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  126)
* SMTP <38>:                             Private options for the redirect router.
                                                             (line  277)
* SMTP <39>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   89)
* SMTP <40>:                             Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   89)
* SMTP <41>:                             The SMTP-time rewriting flag.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <42>:                             SMTP authentication.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <43>:                             Encrypted SMTP connections.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <44>:                             Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <45>:                             Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <46>:                             Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <47>:                             Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* SMTP <48>:                             The SMTP connect ACL.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <49>:                             ACL modifiers.      (line  230)
* SMTP <50>:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  209)
* SMTP <51>:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  265)
* SMTP <52>:                             Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  272)
* SMTP <53>:                             Callout verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <54>:                             Callout verification.
                                                             (line   80)
* SMTP <55>:                             SMTP processing.    (line    6)
* SMTP <56>:                             Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <57>:                             Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   60)
* SMTP <58>:                             Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   60)
* SMTP <59>:                             Errors in outgoing SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <60>:                             Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <61>:                             Unrecognized SMTP commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <62>:                             Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <63>:                             Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <64>:                             Use of non-mail SMTP commands.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <65>:                             Incoming local SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <66>:                             Outgoing batched SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <67>:                             Incoming batched SMTP.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTP <68>:                             Exim on the intermittently connected client host.
                                                             (line   11)
* SMTP <69>:                             Exim on the intermittently connected client host.
                                                             (line   11)
* SMTP <70>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  391)
* SMTP <71>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  396)
* SMTP <72>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  417)
* SMTP <73>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  458)
* SMTP <74>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  466)
* SMTP <75>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  466)
* SMTP <76>:                             Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  466)
* smtp transport:                        The smtp transport. (line    6)
* SMTPS:                                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3588)
* smtps protocol:                        Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* smtps protocol <1>:                    Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* smtps protocol <2>:                    Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* SMTPUTF8:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3011)
* SMTPUTF8 <1>:                          MTA operations.     (line    6)
* SMTPUTF8 <2>:                          MTA operations.     (line   27)
* SNI:                                   Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1663)
* SNI <1>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1677)
* SNI <2>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3388)
* SNI <3>:                               Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  950)
* SNI <4>:                               Use of TLS Server Name Indication.
                                                             (line    6)
* SNI <5>:                               Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  510)
* SOA record:                            More about dnsdb.   (line   64)
* socket, use of in expansion:           Expansion items.    (line  743)
* SOCKS:                                 Outbound proxies.   (line    6)
* Solaris:                               DBM libraries.      (line   12)
* Solaris <1>:                           Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris.
                                                             (line    6)
* Solaris <2>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1041)
* Solaris <3>:                           More about LDAP.    (line    6)
* Solaris <4>:                           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  496)
* Solaris <5>:                           Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  709)
* sorting:                               Expansion items.    (line  976)
* sorting remote deliveries:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2525)
* source routing:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2031)
* source routing <1>:                    IPv4 source routing.
                                                             (line    6)
* SPA authentication:                    Incorporated code.  (line   37)
* spa authenticator:                     The spa authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* spam ACL condition:                    ACL conditions.     (line  219)
* spam scanning:                         Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd.
                                                             (line    6)
* spam scanning <1>:                     Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL.
                                                             (line   49)
* SpamAssassin:                          Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd.
                                                             (line    6)
* SPF:                                   Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  472)
* SPF <1>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line    6)
* SPF <2>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line   30)
* SPF <3>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line   92)
* SPF <4>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line  126)
* SPF <5>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line  126)
* SPF <6>:                               SPF [Sender Policy Framework].
                                                             (line  154)
* spf lookup type:                       spf.                (line    6)
* SPF record:                            More about dnsdb.   (line   51)
* spool:                                 Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  938)
* spool directory:                       Terminology.        (line   70)
* spool directory <1>:                   Handling an incoming message.
                                                             (line    6)
* spool directory <2>:                   Handling an incoming message.
                                                             (line   13)
* spool directory <3>:                   Setting up the spool directory.
                                                             (line    6)
* spool directory <4>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  485)
* spool directory <5>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1647)
* spool directory <6>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2790)
* spool directory <7>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3080)
* spool directory <8>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3114)
* spool directory <9>:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3132)
* spool directory <10>:                  Other log entries.  (line   20)
* spool directory <11>:                  Spool files.        (line    6)
* spool directory <12>:                  Format of spool files.
                                                             (line    6)
* spool files:                           Format of spool files.
                                                             (line    6)
* spool files <1>:                       Format of spool files.
                                                             (line    6)
* sprintf():                             Use of sprintf[].   (line    6)
* SQL lookup types:                      SQL lookups.        (line    6)
* sqlite:                                More about SQLite.  (line   38)
* sqlite lookup type:                    sqlite.             (line    6)
* sqlite lookup type <1>:                More about SQLite.  (line    6)
* sqlite lookup type <2>:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3156)
* src/EDITME:                            Pre-building configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* SRS:                                   SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].
                                                             (line    6)
* SRS <1>:                               SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].
                                                             (line   29)
* SRS <2>:                               SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].
                                                             (line   32)
* SRS <3>:                               SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].
                                                             (line   44)
* srs_encode expansion item:             SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].
                                                             (line   32)
* SRV record:                            More about dnsdb.   (line   46)
* SRV record <1>:                        Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   21)
* SRV record <2>:                        Private options for dnslookup.
                                                             (line   87)
* SSL:                                   Introduction.       (line    6)
* SSMTP:                                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3588)
* ssmtp protocol:                        Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* ssmtp protocol <1>:                    Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* ssmtp protocol <2>:                    Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  767)
* ssmtp protocol <3>:                    Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* STARTTLS, ACL for:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  168)
* STARTTLS, ACL for <1>:                 Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* stat expansion item:                   Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  501)
* statistics:                            Mail statistics [eximstats].
                                                             (line    6)
* statvfs function:                      The stripcharts.    (line   27)
* str2b64 expansion item:                Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  517)
* string:                                Introduction.       (line    6)
* string <1>:                            String values.      (line    6)
* string <2>:                            String values.      (line   21)
* string <3>:                            List construction.  (line    6)
* string <4>:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  269)
* string <5>:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  520)
* string <6>:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  548)
* string <7>:                            Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  576)
* string <8>:                            Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  181)
* string <9>:                            Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  250)
* string <10>:                           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  258)
* string <11>:                           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  270)
* string <12>:                           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  299)
* string <13>:                           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  339)
* string <14>:                           Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  347)
* stripchart:                            The stripcharts.    (line    6)
* strlen expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  520)
* subject, logging:                      Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  478)
* submission fixups, suppressing:        Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  363)
* submission fixups, suppressing (command-line): Command line options.
                                                             (line 1024)
* submission mode:                       Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  345)
* submission mode <1>:                   Submission mode for non-local messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* submission mode <2>:                   From;.              (line    6)
* submission mode <3>:                   Sender;.            (line   28)
* submissions:                           Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  739)
* submissions protocol:                  Main configuration settings.
                                                             (line  107)
* submissions protocol <1>:              Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* submissions protocol <2>:              Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol.
                                                             (line    6)
* substr expansion item:                 Expansion items.    (line 1006)
* substr expansion item <1>:             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  526)
* substring extraction:                  Expansion items.    (line 1006)
* substring extraction <1>:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  526)
* suffix for local part:                 Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  621)
* suffix for local part <1>:             Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  229)
* symbolic link:                         Multiple machine architectures and operating systems.
                                                             (line   10)
* symbolic link <1>:                     The building process.
                                                             (line   10)
* symbolic link <2>:                     Replacing another MTA with Exim.
                                                             (line   12)
* symbolic link <3>:                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line   16)
* symbolic link <4>:                     Operational details for appending.
                                                             (line   52)
* synchronization checking in SMTP:      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2811)
* synchronization checking in SMTP <1>:  Use of the control modifier.
                                                             (line  209)
* syntax of common options:              Common option syntax.
                                                             (line    6)
* syslog:                                Command line options.
                                                             (line 1051)
* syslog <1>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3190)
* syslog <2>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3204)
* syslog <3>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3212)
* syslog <4>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3222)
* syslog <5>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3228)
* syslog <6>:                            Where the logs are written.
                                                             (line    6)
* system aliases file:                   Installing Exim binaries and scripts.
                                                             (line   26)
* system filter:                         Command line options.
                                                             (line  148)
* system filter <1>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3235)
* system filter <2>:                     System-wide message filtering.
                                                             (line    6)
* system log:                            Log files.          (line   32)
* tainted data:                          Router preconditions.
                                                             (line   47)
* tainted data <1>:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line  126)
* tainted data <2>:                      Examples of different lookup syntax.
                                                             (line   28)
* tainted data <3>:                      Lookup types.       (line   11)
* tainted data <4>:                      Lookup types.       (line   14)
* tainted data <5>:                      Lookup types.       (line   29)
* tainted data <6>:                      dsearch.            (line   10)
* tainted data <7>:                      Quoting lookup data.
                                                             (line   28)
* tainted data <8>:                      More about SQLite.  (line   18)
* tainted data <9>:                      Expansion of lists. (line    8)
* tainted data <10>:                     Domain lists.       (line  130)
* tainted data <11>:                     Domain lists.       (line  168)
* tainted data <12>:                     Domain lists.       (line  180)
* tainted data <13>:                     String expansions.  (line   17)
* tainted data <14>:                     String expansions.  (line   25)
* tainted data <15>:                     String expansions.  (line   25)
* tainted data <16>:                     String expansions.  (line   30)
* tainted data <17>:                     Expansion items.    (line  444)
* tainted data <18>:                     Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  288)
* tainted data <19>:                     Expansion conditions.
                                                             (line  477)
* tainted data <20>:                     Expansion variables.
                                                             (line    9)
* tainted data <21>:                     Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  361)
* tainted data <22>:                     Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  543)
* tainted data <23>:                     Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  604)
* tainted data <24>:                     Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  137)
* tainted data <25>:                     Redirection data.   (line   37)
* tainted data <26>:                     Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line   87)
* tainted data <27>:                     The file and directory options.
                                                             (line   38)
* tainted data <28>:                     Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  118)
* tainted data <29>:                     The pipe transport. (line   50)
* tainted data <30>:                     Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line   60)
* tainted data <31>:                     ACL conditions.     (line   53)
* tainted data <32>:                     Callout verification.
                                                             (line   86)
* TCP Fast Open:                         Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  610)
* TCP/IP:                                Command line options.
                                                             (line 1607)
* TCP/IP <1>:                            Command line options.
                                                             (line 1607)
* TCP/IP <2>:                            Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* TCP/IP <3>:                            Starting the daemon.
                                                             (line    6)
* TCP/IP <4>:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  570)
* TCP/IP <5>:                            Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  739)
* TCP/IP <6>:                            Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  238)
* TCP/IP <7>:                            Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  247)
* TCP/IP <8>:                            Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  253)
* TCP/IP <9>:                            Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  275)
* TCP/IP <10>:                           Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  280)
* TCP_NODELAY on listening sockets:      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3301)
* _tdb_ DBM library:                     DBM libraries.      (line   66)
* terminology definitions:               Terminology.        (line    6)
* testing:                               Testing.            (line    6)
* testing <1>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line   92)
* testing <2>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  132)
* testing <3>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  148)
* testing <4>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  153)
* testing <5>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  153)
* testing <6>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  216)
* testing <7>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  216)
* testing <8>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  357)
* testing <9>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line  536)
* testing <10>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line  560)
* testing <11>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line  628)
* testing <12>:                          Command line options.
                                                             (line 1258)
* testing <13>:                          Testing string expansions.
                                                             (line    6)
* testing <14>:                          Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  240)
* testing <15>:                          Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  368)
* testing <16>:                          Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   39)
* testing <17>:                          Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input.
                                                             (line    6)
* text forcing in strings:               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  576)
* thawing messages:                      Command line options.
                                                             (line 1268)
* thawing messages <1>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  298)
* thawing messages <2>:                  The queue menu.     (line   47)
* time interval:                         Time intervals.     (line    6)
* time interval <1>:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  538)
* time interval <2>:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  542)
* timeout:                               Command line options.
                                                             (line 1590)
* timeout <1>:                           Command line options.
                                                             (line 1597)
* timeout <2>:                           Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line   35)
* timeout <3>:                           LDAP authentication and control information.
                                                             (line   28)
* timeout <4>:                           More about SQLite.  (line   38)
* timeout <5>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  856)
* timeout <6>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1626)
* timeout <7>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2381)
* timeout <8>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2576)
* timeout <9>:                           Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2964)
* timeout <10>:                          Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3313)
* timeout <11>:                          Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  703)
* timeout <12>:                          Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  232)
* timeout <13>:                          Private options for appendfile.
                                                             (line  291)
* timeout <14>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   72)
* timeout <15>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line   78)
* timeout <16>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  114)
* timeout <17>:                          Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  284)
* timeout <18>:                          Timeout of retry data.
                                                             (line    6)
* timestamps:                            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3228)
* timestamps <1>:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  265)
* timezone, setting:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3330)
* time_eval expansion item:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  538)
* time_interval expansion item:          Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  542)
* TLS:                                   Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <1>:                               Command line options.
                                                             (line 1922)
* TLS <2>:                               Command line options.
                                                             (line 1922)
* TLS <3>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1656)
* TLS <4>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1663)
* TLS <5>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1663)
* TLS <6>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1677)
* TLS <7>:                               Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1677)
* TLS <8>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1350)
* TLS <9>:                               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1350)
* TLS <10>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3347)
* TLS <11>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3360)
* TLS <12>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3360)
* TLS <13>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3367)
* TLS <14>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3401)
* TLS <15>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3415)
* TLS <16>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3437)
* TLS <17>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3526)
* TLS <18>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3538)
* TLS <19>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3538)
* TLS <20>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3559)
* TLS <21>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3559)
* TLS <22>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3598)
* TLS <23>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3612)
* TLS <24>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3612)
* TLS <25>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3620)
* TLS <26>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3634)
* TLS <27>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3640)
* TLS <28>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3645)
* TLS <29>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3685)
* TLS <30>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  101)
* TLS <31>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  333)
* TLS <32>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  441)
* TLS <33>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  449)
* TLS <34>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  470)
* TLS <35>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  470)
* TLS <36>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  479)
* TLS <37>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  479)
* TLS <38>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  537)
* TLS <39>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  547)
* TLS <40>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  547)
* TLS <41>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  566)
* TLS <42>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  573)
* TLS <43>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  767)
* TLS <44>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  858)
* TLS <45>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  858)
* TLS <46>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  867)
* TLS <47>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  888)
* TLS <48>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  893)
* TLS <49>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  904)
* TLS <50>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  904)
* TLS <51>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  917)
* TLS <52>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  930)
* TLS <53>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  944)
* TLS <54>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  950)
* TLS <55>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  950)
* TLS <56>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  976)
* TLS <57>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  987)
* TLS <58>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  999)
* TLS <59>:                              Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line 1026)
* TLS <60>:                              Encrypted SMTP connections.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <61>:                              OpenSSL vs GnuTLS.  (line    6)
* TLS <62>:                              Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <63>:                              Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <64>:                              Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <65>:                              Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <66>:                              Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <67>:                              Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <68>:                              Configuring an Exim server to use TLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <69>:                              Requesting and verifying client certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <70>:                              Configuring an Exim client to use TLS.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <71>:                              Use of TLS Server Name Indication.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <72>:                              Use of TLS Server Name Indication.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <73>:                              ALPN.               (line    6)
* TLS <74>:                              ALPN.               (line    6)
* TLS <75>:                              Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <76>:                              Revoked certificates.
                                                             (line    6)
* TLS <77>:                              TLS Resumption.     (line    6)
* TLS <78>:                              ACL conditions.     (line  225)
* TLS <79>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  491)
* TLS <80>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  495)
* TLS <81>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  499)
* TLS <82>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  505)
* TLS <83>:                              Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  510)
* tls authenticator:                     The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls-on-connect:                        Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  499)
* tls_certificate:                       Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_certificate <1>:                   Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_crl:                               Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_crl <1>:                           Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_ocsp_file:                         Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_privatekey:                        Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_privatekey <1>:                    Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_require_ciphers:                   Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_require_ciphers <1>:               Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_verify_certificate:                Caching of static server configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tls_verify_certificate <1>:            Caching of static client configuration items.
                                                             (line    6)
* tmail:                                 Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  169)
* _To:_ header line:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line 1878)
* too many open files:                   Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1720)
* top bit:                               Introduction.       (line    6)
* tr expansion item:                     Expansion items.    (line 1064)
* trailing dot on domain:                Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3181)
* transport:                             Limitations.        (line   21)
* transport <1>:                         Processing an address for delivery.
                                                             (line    6)
* transport <2>:                         Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  430)
* transport <3>:                         Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  887)
* transport <4>:                         Expansion variables.
                                                             (line 1730)
* transport <5>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  417)
* transport <6>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line  543)
* transport <7>:                         Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1119)
* transport <8>:                         Environment for local transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* transport <9>:                         Uids and gids.      (line    6)
* transport <10>:                        Current and home directories.
                                                             (line    6)
* transport <11>:                        Current and home directories.
                                                             (line    6)
* transport <12>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line    6)
* transport <13>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   15)
* transport <14>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   24)
* transport <15>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line   95)
* transport <16>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  102)
* transport <17>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  118)
* transport <18>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  127)
* transport <19>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  151)
* transport <20>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  175)
* transport <21>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  187)
* transport <22>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  195)
* transport <23>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  195)
* transport <24>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  215)
* transport <25>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  272)
* transport <26>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  323)
* transport <27>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  351)
* transport <28>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  479)
* transport <29>:                        Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  491)
* transport <30>:                        Address batching.   (line    6)
* transport <31>:                        How the command is run.
                                                             (line   40)
* transport <32>:                        Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line  838)
* transport <33>:                        Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP.
                                                             (line   14)
* transport modules:                     Dynamically loaded module support.
                                                             (line    6)
* transports:                            Transport configuration.
                                                             (line    6)
* transports <1>:                        The appendfile transport.
                                                             (line    6)
* transports <2>:                        The autoreply transport.
                                                             (line    6)
* transports <3>:                        The lmtp transport. (line    6)
* transports <4>:                        The pipe transport. (line    6)
* transports <5>:                        The smtp transport. (line    6)
* Tru64-Unix build-time settings:        Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line   47)
* trusted groups:                        Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3715)
* trusted users:                         Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   13)
* trusted users <1>:                     Command line options.
                                                             (line  984)
* trusted users <2>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3726)
* trusted users <3>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3749)
* trusted users <4>:                     Privileged users.   (line    6)
* TTL:                                   Dnsdb lookup modifiers.
                                                             (line   44)
* TXT record:                            More about dnsdb.   (line   51)
* uc expansion item:                     Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  548)
* UDP communications:                    ACL modifiers.      (line  310)
* uid (user id):                         Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  226)
* uid (user id) <1>:                     Expansion variables.
                                                             (line  864)
* uid (user id) <2>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1028)
* uid (user id) <3>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3286)
* uid (user id) <4>:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3738)
* uid (user id) <5>:                     Generic options for routers.
                                                             (line 1119)
* uid (user id) <6>:                     The queryprogram router.
                                                             (line   34)
* uid (user id) <7>:                     Generic options for transports.
                                                             (line  491)
* uid (user id) <8>:                     Private options for pipe.
                                                             (line  216)
* uid (user id) <9>:                     Specifying a system filter.
                                                             (line    6)
* uid (user id) <10>:                    Format of the -H file.
                                                             (line    6)
* underscore in EHLO/HELO:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1187)
* unfreezing messages:                   Command line options.
                                                             (line 1268)
* unfreezing messages <1>:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  298)
* unfreezing messages <2>:               The queue menu.     (line   47)
* Unicode:                               Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  201)
* unknown host name:                     Host list patterns that match by host name.
                                                             (line    6)
* unknown host name <1>:                 Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name.
                                                             (line    6)
* unprivileged delivery:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  639)
* unprivileged running:                  Running Exim without privilege.
                                                             (line    6)
* unqualified addresses:                 Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2442)
* unqualified addresses <1>:             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2583)
* unqualified addresses <2>:             Unqualified addresses.
                                                             (line    6)
* untrusted user setting sender:         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3749)
* upgrading Exim:                        Upgrading Exim.     (line    6)
* upper casing:                          Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  548)
* user:                                  Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   13)
* user <1>:                              Trusted and admin users.
                                                             (line   38)
* user <2>:                              Command line options.
                                                             (line  984)
* user <3>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3726)
* user <4>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3749)
* user <5>:                              Privileged users.   (line    6)
* user <6>:                              Privileged users.   (line    6)
* user name:                             User and group names.
                                                             (line    6)
* user name <1>:                         Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1732)
* USE_DB:                                DBM libraries.      (line   74)
* USE_DB <1>:                            Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild].
                                                             (line   23)
* USE_GNUTLS:                            Including TLS/SSL encryption support.
                                                             (line   40)
* UTF-8:                                 Command line options.
                                                             (line  927)
* UTF-8 <1>:                             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  201)
* utf-8:                                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  552)
* UTF-8 <2>:                             Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* UTF-8 <3>:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  240)
* utf8:                                  Private options for smtp.
                                                             (line 1038)
* utf8 <1>:                              Internationalisation".
                                                             (line    6)
* utf8 <2>:                              MTA operations.     (line   37)
* utf8clean expansion item:              Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  552)
* utf8_domain_from_alabel expansion item: Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* utf8_domain_to_alabel expansion item:  Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* utf8_localpart_from_alabel expansion item: Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* utf8_localpart_to_alabel expansion item: Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  571)
* utilities:                             Exim utilities.     (line    6)
* UUCP:                                  Command line options.
                                                             (line  336)
* UUCP <1>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1417)
* UUCP <2>:                              Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3797)
* UUCP <3>:                              Manualroute examples.
                                                             (line  112)
* UUCP <4>:                              The UUCP From line. (line    6)
* vacation processing:                   Simplified vacation processing.
                                                             (line    6)
* Variable Envelope Return Paths:        Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].
                                                             (line    6)
* variables:                             Introduction.       (line    6)
* variables ($auth1 $auth2 etc):         External options.   (line   14)
* variables ($auth1 $auth2 etc) <1>:     The tls authenticator.
                                                             (line   32)
* verify ACL condition:                  ACL conditions.     (line  225)
* verify ACL condition <1>:              ACL conditions.     (line  239)
* verify ACL condition <2>:              ACL conditions.     (line  251)
* verify ACL condition <3>:              ACL conditions.     (line  274)
* verify ACL condition <4>:              ACL conditions.     (line  294)
* verify ACL condition <5>:              ACL conditions.     (line  323)
* verify ACL condition <6>:              ACL conditions.     (line  334)
* verify ACL condition <7>:              ACL conditions.     (line  350)
* verify ACL condition <8>:              ACL conditions.     (line  368)
* verify mode:                           Processing an address for verification.
                                                             (line   12)
* verifying:                             ACL conditions.     (line  239)
* verifying <1>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  251)
* verifying <2>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  274)
* verifying <3>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  294)
* verifying <4>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  294)
* verifying <5>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  307)
* verifying <6>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  323)
* verifying <7>:                         ACL conditions.     (line  350)
* verifying <8>:                         Sender address verification reporting.
                                                             (line    6)
* verifying <9>:                         Redirection while verifying.
                                                             (line    6)
* verifying address:                     Processing an address for verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* verifying address <1>:                 Command line options.
                                                             (line  687)
* verifying address <2>:                 Address verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* verifying address <3>:                 Address verification.
                                                             (line   53)
* verifying address <4>:                 Callout verification.
                                                             (line    6)
* VERP:                                  Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP].
                                                             (line    6)
* VERP <1>:                              SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme].
                                                             (line    6)
* version number of Exim:                Command line options.
                                                             (line  670)
* version number of Exim <1>:            Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 1044)
* virtual domains:                       Virtual domains.    (line    6)
* virus scanners:                        Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line   35)
* virus scanners <1>:                    Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line   74)
* virus scanners <2>:                    Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line  132)
* virus scanners <3>:                    Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line  164)
* virus scanning:                        Scanning for viruses.
                                                             (line    6)
* VRFY:                                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  175)
* VRFY <1>:                              Special items in redirection lists.
                                                             (line  121)
* VRFY <2>:                              Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* VRFY <3>:                              The VRFY and EXPN commands.
                                                             (line   11)
* warn ACL verb:                         ACL verbs.          (line  107)
* warn ACL verb <1>:                     Adding header lines in ACLs.
                                                             (line   71)
* warn ACL verb <2>:                     Reducing or increasing what is logged.
                                                             (line  144)
* warning of delay:                      Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  588)
* warning of delay <1>:                  Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3823)
* warning of delay <2>:                  Customizing warning messages.
                                                             (line    6)
* warn_message_file:                     Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3828)
* website:                               FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line    6)
* welcome banner for SMTP:               Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 2774)
* WELLKNOWN:                             Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line 3834)
* WELLKNOWN <1>:                         Specifying when ACLs are used.
                                                             (line    8)
* WELLKNOWN <2>:                         The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL.
                                                             (line    6)
* WELLKNOWN, ACL for:                    Alphabetical list of main options.
                                                             (line  181)
* white space:                           Configuration file format.
                                                             (line   50)
* white space <1>:                       lsearch.            (line   26)
* white space <2>:                       Expansion items.    (line  358)
* whoson lookup type:                    whoson.             (line    6)
* wiki:                                  FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line    9)
* wildcard lookups:                      Default values in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* wildcard lookups <1>:                  Partial matching in single-key lookups.
                                                             (line    6)
* wildlsearch lookup type:               [n]wildlsearch.     (line    6)
* window size:                           Main action buttons.
                                                             (line    6)
* wish list:                             FTP site and websites.
                                                             (line   18)
* _X-Failed-Recipients:_ header line:    Permanent delivery failure.
                                                             (line   17)
* X-windows:                             Incorporated code.  (line   93)
* X-windows <1>:                         The Exim monitor.   (line    6)
* X11 libraries, location of:            Overriding build-time options for Exim.
                                                             (line  112)
* xtext:                                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  576)
* xtextd expansion item:                 Expansion operators.
                                                             (line  576)
* zero, binary:                          Introduction.       (line    6)


Tag Table:
Node: Top243
Node: Introduction16368
Node: Exim documentation19069
Node: FTP site and websites23013
Node: Mailing lists24153
Node: Bug reports25357
Node: Where to find the Exim distribution25803
Node: Limitations29179
Node: Runtime configuration31328
Node: Calling interface31888
Node: Terminology33102
Node: Incorporated code36927
Node: Receiving and delivering mail43736
Node: Overall philosophy44320
Node: Policy control44925
Node: User filters47584
Node: Message identification48526
Node: Receiving mail51280
Node: Handling an incoming message54878
Node: Life of a message57328
Node: Processing an address for delivery59974
Node: Processing an address for verification64101
Node: Running an individual router65326
Node: Duplicate addresses68980
Node: Router preconditions69513
Node: Delivery in detail75572
Node: Retry mechanism80919
Node: Temporary delivery failure82220
Node: Permanent delivery failure83509
Node: Failures to deliver bounce messages85054
Node: Building and installing Exim85669
Node: Unpacking86578
Node: Multiple machine architectures and operating systems88387
Node: PCRE2 library89286
Node: DBM libraries90375
Node: Pre-building configuration96298
Node: Support for iconv[]99078
Node: Including TLS/SSL encryption support100340
Node: Including support for IPv6102409
Node: Dynamically loaded module support103434
Node: The building process105890
Node: Output from "make"107302
Node: Overriding build-time options for Exim108159
Node: OS-specific header files115255
Node: Overriding build-time options for the monitor115855
Node: Installing Exim binaries and scripts116846
Node: Installing info documentation122226
Node: Setting up the spool directory122674
Node: Testing123136
Node: Replacing another MTA with Exim126989
Node: Running the daemon129011
Node: Upgrading Exim129793
Node: Stopping the Exim daemon on Solaris130467
Node: The Exim command line131484
Node: Setting options by program name132210
Node: Trusted and admin users133872
Node: Command line options137218
Node: The runtime configuration file234266
Node: Using a different configuration file237505
Node: Configuration file format241258
Node: File inclusions in the configuration file244896
Node: Macros in the configuration file246413
Node: Macro substitution247508
Node: Redefining macros248677
Node: Overriding macro values249585
Node: Example of macro usage250127
Node: Builtin macros250968
Node: Conditional skips in the configuration file252460
Node: Common option syntax253994
Node: Boolean options255269
Node: Integer values256146
Node: Octal integer values257087
Node: Fixed point numbers257466
Node: Time intervals257809
Node: String values258608
Node: Expanded strings260746
Node: User and group names261500
Node: List construction261984
Node: Changing list separators263683
Node: Empty items in lists265638
Node: Format of driver configurations266631
Node: The default configuration file270353
Node: Macros271355
Node: Main configuration settings272187
Node: ACL configuration284952
Node: Router configuration295113
Node: Transport configuration304811
Node: Default retry rule310721
Node: Rewriting configuration311840
Node: Authenticators configuration312263
Node: Regular expressions314708
Node: File and database lookups317569
Node: Examples of different lookup syntax319900
Node: Lookup types322903
Node: Single-key lookup types324815
Node: cdb325240
Node: dbm326244
Node: dbmjz327398
Node: dbmnz327902
Node: dsearch328700
Node: iplsearch330530
Node: json332360
Node: lmdb333188
Node: lsearch333923
Node: nis335577
Node: [n]wildlsearch336043
Node: Public Suffix List339347
Node: spf340104
Node: Query-style lookup types340422
Node: dnsdb340882
Node: ldap341175
Node: mysql341649
Node: nisplus341892
Node: oracle342148
Node: passwd342388
Node: pgsql342887
Node: redis343125
Node: sqlite343368
Node: testdb343612
Node: whoson343842
Node: Temporary errors in lookups344855
Node: Default values in single-key lookups345609
Node: Partial matching in single-key lookups347417
Node: Lookup caching352575
Node: Quoting lookup data353854
Node: More about dnsdb355185
Node: Multiple dnsdb lookups358309
Node: Dnsdb lookup modifiers359416
Node: Pseudo dnsdb record types361711
Node: More about LDAP364268
Node: Format of LDAP queries366253
Node: LDAP quoting367738
Node: LDAP connections369782
Node: LDAP authentication and control information373473
Node: Format of data returned by LDAP378101
Node: More about NIS+381112
Node: SQL lookups382177
Node: More about MySQL; PostgreSQL; Oracle; and Redis383476
Node: Specifying the server in the query386438
Node: Special MySQL features388863
Node: Special PostgreSQL features390613
Node: More about SQLite391681
Node: More about Redis393642
Node: Domain; host; and address lists394521
Node: Results of list checking395709
Node: Expansion of lists396793
Node: Negated items in lists399078
Node: File names in lists400691
Node: An lsearch file is not an out-of-line list402369
Node: Named lists403433
Node: Named lists compared with macros407246
Node: Named list caching408091
Node: Domain lists409408
Node: Host lists419633
Node: Special host list patterns420786
Node: Host list patterns that match by IP address421353
Node: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host address426072
Node: Host list patterns that match by host name428862
Node: Behaviour when an IP address or name cannot be found432717
Node: Mixing wildcarded host names and addresses in host lists435171
Node: Temporary DNS errors when looking up host information436970
Node: Host list patterns for single-key lookups by host name437784
Node: Host list patterns for query-style lookups438856
Node: Address lists440467
Node: Case of letters in address lists448846
Node: Local part lists450814
Node: String expansions452301
Node: Literal text in expanded strings454174
Node: Character escape sequences in expanded strings455302
Node: Testing string expansions456200
Node: Forced expansion failure458124
Node: Expansion items459098
Node: Expansion operators510373
Node: Expansion conditions536625
Node: Combining expansion conditions565225
Node: Expansion variables566687
Node: Embedded Perl645017
Node: Setting up so Perl can be used645736
Node: Calling Perl subroutines648109
Node: Calling Exim functions from Perl649355
Node: Use of standard output and error by Perl650707
Node: Starting the daemon652208
Node: Starting a listening daemon654915
Node: Special IP listening addresses657173
Node: Overriding local_interfaces and daemon_smtp_ports657982
Node: Support for the submissions [aka SSMTP or SMTPS] protocol659533
Node: IPv6 address scopes661213
Node: Disabling IPv6662703
Node: Examples of starting a listening daemon663922
Node: Recognizing the local host665199
Node: Delivering to a remote host667443
Node: Main configuration668017
Node: Miscellaneous670006
Node: Exim parameters671221
Node: Privilege controls671788
Node: Logging672938
Node: Frozen messages674311
Node: Data lookups674782
Node: Message ids675991
Node: Embedded Perl Startup676265
Node: Daemon676640
Node: Resource control677507
Node: Policy controls679309
Node: Callout cache682846
Node: TLS683536
Node: Local user handling685302
Node: All incoming messages [SMTP and non-SMTP]685978
Node: Non-SMTP incoming messages686823
Node: Incoming SMTP messages687114
Node: SMTP extensions690320
Node: Processing messages691551
Node: System filter692684
Node: Routing and delivery693380
Node: Bounce and warning messages695561
Node: Alphabetical list of main options696945
Node: Generic options for routers886297
Node: The accept router944853
Node: The dnslookup router945890
Node: Problems with DNS lookups947601
Node: Declining addresses by dnslookup948784
Node: Private options for dnslookup950391
Node: Effect of qualify_single and search_parents960966
Node: The ipliteral router961863
Node: The iplookup router963356
Node: The manualroute router967602
Node: Private options for manualroute969921
Node: Routing rules in route_list975096
Node: Routing rules in route_data976937
Node: Format of the list of hosts978222
Node: Format of one host item979775
Node: How the list of hosts is used981076
Node: How the options are used984082
Node: Manualroute examples986844
Node: The queryprogram router992913
Node: The redirect router999030
Node: Redirection data1000848
Node: Forward files and address verification1002740
Node: Interpreting redirection data1003744
Node: Items in a non-filter redirection list1005059
Node: Redirecting to a local mailbox1006883
Node: Special items in redirection lists1009615
Node: Duplicate addresses <1>1017345
Node: Repeated redirection expansion1018339
Node: Errors in redirection lists1018982
Node: Private options for the redirect router1019572
Node: Environment for local transports1046604
Node: Concurrent deliveries1047925
Node: Uids and gids1048971
Node: Current and home directories1052224
Node: Expansion variables derived from the address1053539
Node: Generic options for transports1054300
Node: Address batching1080366
Node: The appendfile transport1084920
Node: The file and directory options1087393
Node: Private options for appendfile1091585
Node: Operational details for appending1128739
Node: Operational details for delivery to a new file1135591
Node: Maildir delivery1138106
Node: Using tags to record message sizes1142201
Node: Using a maildirsize file1143954
Node: Mailstore delivery1145421
Node: Non-special new file delivery1147286
Node: The autoreply transport1148022
Node: Private options for autoreply1152095
Node: The lmtp transport1159218
Node: The pipe transport1162605
Node: Concurrent delivery1165518
Node: Returned status and data1166082
Node: How the command is run1168060
Node: Environment variables1172371
Node: Private options for pipe1174926
Node: Using an external local delivery agent1192053
Node: The smtp transport1194625
Node: Multiple messages on a single connection1195394
Node: Use of the $host and $host_address variables1196928
Node: Use of $tls_cipher and $tls_peerdn1197757
Node: Private options for smtp1198741
Node: How the limits for the number of hosts to try are used1250277
Node: Address rewriting1254429
Node: Explicitly configured address rewriting1255868
Node: When does rewriting happen?1258475
Node: Testing the rewriting rules that apply on input1261233
Node: Rewriting rules1262743
Node: Rewriting patterns1264779
Node: Rewriting replacements1267635
Node: Rewriting flags1269056
Node: Flags specifying which headers and envelope addresses to rewrite1269672
Node: The SMTP-time rewriting flag1271097
Node: Flags controlling the rewriting process1272268
Node: Rewriting examples1274876
Node: Retry configuration1277599
Node: Changing retry rules1280600
Node: Format of retry rules1281466
Node: Choosing which retry rule to use for address errors1283324
Node: Choosing which retry rule to use for host and message errors1285269
Node: Retry rules for specific errors1287426
Node: Retry rules for specified senders1292408
Node: Retry parameters1293891
Node: Retry rule examples1297925
Node: Timeout of retry data1299999
Node: Long-term failures1301129
Node: Deliveries that work intermittently1304009
Node: SMTP authentication1305657
Node: Generic options for authenticators1313232
Node: The AUTH parameter on MAIL commands1318577
Node: Authentication on an Exim server1321043
Node: Testing server authentication1324932
Node: Authentication by an Exim client1326977
Node: The plaintext authenticator1330991
Node: Avoiding cleartext use1331887
Node: Plaintext server options1332510
Node: Using plaintext in a server1333409
Node: The PLAIN authentication mechanism1335672
Node: The LOGIN authentication mechanism1339687
Node: Support for different kinds of authentication1342121
Node: Using plaintext in a client1342708
Node: The cram_md5 authenticator1345569
Node: Using cram_md5 as a server1346396
Node: Using cram_md5 as a client1348992
Node: The cyrus_sasl authenticator1350553
Node: Using cyrus_sasl as a server1353002
Node: The dovecot authenticator1355556
Node: The gsasl authenticator1357907
Node: gsasl auth variables1367060
Node: The heimdal_gssapi authenticator1368722
Node: heimdal_gssapi auth variables1370127
Node: The spa authenticator1371034
Node: Using spa as a server1372122
Node: Using spa as a client1373199
Node: The external authenticator1374325
Node: External options1375958
Node: Using external in a server1376811
Node: Using external in a client1379159
Node: The tls authenticator1379833
Node: Encrypted SMTP connections1383145
Node: Support for the "submissions" [aka "ssmtp" and "smtps"] protocol1385435
Node: OpenSSL vs GnuTLS1387579
Node: GnuTLS parameter computation1390559
Node: Requiring specific ciphers in OpenSSL1395432
Node: Requiring specific ciphers or other parameters in GnuTLS1398869
Node: Configuring an Exim server to use TLS1401449
Node: Requesting and verifying client certificates1407289
Node: Caching of static server configuration items1410520
Node: Configuring an Exim client to use TLS1412264
Node: Caching of static client configuration items1418048
Node: Use of TLS Server Name Indication1419712
Node: ALPN1423566
Node: Multiple messages on the same encrypted TCP/IP connection1424821
Node: Certificates and all that1427337
Node: Certificate chains1428664
Node: Self-signed certificates1429981
Node: Revoked certificates1432403
Node: TLS Resumption1436672
Node: DANE1440524
Node: DNS records1442973
Node: Interaction with OCSP1447070
Node: Client configuration1448292
Node: Observability1450220
Node: General1451170
Node: Access control lists1452914
Node: Testing ACLs1455010
Node: Specifying when ACLs are used1455300
Node: The non-SMTP ACLs1458006
Node: The SMTP connect ACL1459942
Node: The EHLO/HELO ACL1460750
Node: The DATA ACLs1461928
Node: The SMTP DKIM ACL1463901
Node: The SMTP MIME ACL1464750
Node: The SMTP PRDR ACL1465191
Node: The SMTP WELLKNOWN ACL1466832
Node: The QUIT ACL1469347
Node: The not-QUIT ACL1470769
Node: Finding an ACL to use1473068
Node: ACL return codes1475698
Node: Unset ACL options1477548
Node: Data for message ACLs1478862
Node: Data for non-message ACLs1480527
Node: Format of an ACL1481764
Node: ACL verbs1483052
Node: ACL variables1490406
Node: Condition and modifier processing1492694
Node: ACL modifiers1496256
Node: Use of the control modifier1511390
Node: Summary of message fixup control1531514
Node: Adding header lines in ACLs1532099
Node: Removing header lines in ACLs1537275
Node: ACL conditions1541489
Node: Using DNS lists1560117
Node: Specifying the IP address for a DNS list lookup1563539
Node: DNS lists keyed on domain names1564354
Node: Multiple explicit keys for a DNS list1565786
Node: Data returned by DNS lists1568929
Node: Variables set from DNS lists1570189
Node: Additional matching conditions for DNS lists1572259
Node: Negated DNS matching conditions1574306
Node: Handling multiple DNS records from a DNS list1576372
Node: Detailed information from merged DNS lists1579219
Node: DNS lists and IPv61581996
Node: Previously seen user and hosts1583354
Node: Rate limiting incoming messages1585353
Node: Ratelimit options for what is being measured1589545
Node: Ratelimit update modes1592571
Node: Ratelimit options for handling fast clients1594792
Node: Limiting the rate of different events1596538
Node: Using rate limiting1598904
Node: Address verification1601000
Node: Callout verification1605090
Node: Additional parameters for callouts1609825
Node: Callout caching1618483
Node: Quota caching1620588
Node: Sender address verification reporting1621525
Node: Redirection while verifying1622735
Node: Client SMTP authorization [CSA]1624928
Node: Bounce address tag validation1628562
Node: Using an ACL to control relaying1632841
Node: Checking a relay configuration1635788
Node: Content scanning at ACL time1636219
Node: Scanning for viruses1639398
Node: Scanning with SpamAssassin and Rspamd1651096
Node: Calling SpamAssassin from an Exim ACL1656287
Node: Scanning MIME parts1661603
Node: Scanning with regular expressions1671293
Node: Local scan function1673309
Node: Building Exim to use a local scan function1675600
Node: API for local_scan[]1676976
Node: Configuration options for local_scan[]1681077
Node: Available Exim variables1684680
Node: Structure of header lines1688606
Node: Structure of recipient items1689907
Node: Available Exim functions1691067
Node: More about Exim's memory handling1709145
Node: System-wide message filtering1710768
Node: Specifying a system filter1712860
Node: Testing a system filter1713794
Node: Contents of a system filter1714370
Node: Additional variable for system filters1716064
Node: Defer; freeze; and fail commands for system filters1716580
Node: Adding and removing headers in a system filter1719957
Node: Setting an errors address in a system filter1723525
Node: Per-address filtering1724346
Node: Message processing1725791
Node: Submission mode for non-local messages1727354
Node: Line endings1730823
Node: Unqualified addresses1732966
Node: The UUCP From line1734340
Node: Header lines1736571
Node: Resent- header lines1736962
Node: Auto-Submitted;1738753
Node: Bcc;1739045
Node: Date;1739425
Node: Delivery-date;1739734
Node: Envelope-to;1740345
Node: From;1740944
Node: Message-ID;1742773
Node: Received;1743535
Node: References;1744432
Node: Return-path;1745335
Node: Sender;1745853
Node: Adding and removing header lines in routers and transports1748674
Node: Constructed addresses1754192
Node: Case of local parts1755885
Node: Dots in local parts1757466
Node: Rewriting addresses1757963
Node: SMTP processing1759365
Node: Outgoing SMTP and LMTP over TCP/IP1760762
Node: Errors in outgoing SMTP1764598
Node: Incoming SMTP messages over TCP/IP1771527
Node: Unrecognized SMTP commands1777250
Node: Syntax and protocol errors in SMTP commands1777903
Node: Use of non-mail SMTP commands1778786
Node: The VRFY and EXPN commands1780337
Node: The ETRN command1781691
Node: The ATRN command; and ODMR1784808
Node: ODMR provider connection1785564
Node: ODMR customer connection1789033
Node: Incoming local SMTP1790478
Node: Batched SMTP1791399
Node: Outgoing batched SMTP1791588
Node: Incoming batched SMTP1793621
Node: Customizing messages1795415
Node: Customizing bounce messages1796348
Node: Customizing warning messages1799177
Node: Some common configuration settings1801406
Node: Sending mail to a smart host1802256
Node: Using Exim to handle mailing lists1803145
Node: Syntax errors in mailing lists1805548
Node: Re-expansion of mailing lists1806529
Node: Closed mailing lists1808268
Node: Variable Envelope Return Paths [VERP]1810901
Node: Virtual domains1815729
Node: Multiple user mailboxes1819293
Node: Simplified vacation processing1821530
Node: Taking copies of mail1822999
Node: Intermittently connected hosts1823776
Node: Exim on the upstream server host1824483
Node: Exim on the intermittently connected client host1827030
Node: Exim as a non-queueing client1828261
Node: Log files1833758
Node: Where the logs are written1837625
Node: Logging to local files that are periodically "cycled"1840781
Node: Datestamped log files1842357
Node: Logging to syslog1844353
Node: Log line flags1848740
Node: Logging message reception1849511
Node: Logging deliveries1852985
Node: Discarded deliveries1855929
Node: Deferred deliveries1856617
Node: Delivery failures1857542
Node: Fake deliveries1858605
Node: Completion1858940
Node: Summary of Fields in Log Lines1859279
Node: Other log entries1861468
Node: Reducing or increasing what is logged1863307
Node: Message log1892631
Node: Exim utilities1893578
Node: Finding out what Exim processes are doing [exiwhat]1896946
Node: Selective queue listing [exiqgrep]1899212
Node: Summarizing the queue [exiqsumm]1901441
Node: Extracting specific information from the log [exigrep]1903166
Node: Selecting messages by various criteria [exipick]1906111
Node: Cycling log files [exicyclog]1906642
Node: Mail statistics [eximstats]1908964
Node: Checking access policy [exim_checkaccess]1912363
Node: Making DBM files [exim_dbmbuild]1914358
Node: Finding individual retry times [exinext]1916997
Node: Hints database maintenance1919063
Node: exim_dumpdb1920391
Node: exim_tidydb1922712
Node: exim_fixdb1925465
Node: Mailbox maintenance [exim_lock]1926953
Node: Message Ids for humans [exim_msgdate]1930814
Node: The Exim monitor1931391
Node: Running the monitor1932062
Node: The stripcharts1934809
Node: Main action buttons1936524
Node: The log display1938070
Node: The queue display1941380
Node: The queue menu1944409
Node: Security considerations1949779
Node: Building a more "hardened" Exim1951371
Node: Root privilege1954538
Node: Running Exim without privilege1959556
Node: Delivering to local files1964376
Node: Running local commands1964730
Node: Trust in configuration data1967356
Node: IPv4 source routing1968686
Node: The VRFY; EXPN; and ETRN commands in SMTP1969181
Node: Privileged users1969546
Node: Spool files1972435
Node: Use of argv[0]1972884
Node: Use of %f formatting1973373
Node: Embedded Exim path1973802
Node: Dynamic module directory1974283
Node: Use of sprintf[]1974641
Node: Use of debug_printf[] and log_write[]1975377
Node: Use of strcat[] and strcpy[]1975838
Node: Format of spool files1976143
Node: Format of the -H file1979057
Node: Format of the -D file1992513
Node: DKIM; SPF; SRS and DMARC Support1993266
Node: DKIM [DomainKeys Identified Mail]1993601
Node: Signing outgoing messages1996214
Node: Verifying DKIM signatures in incoming mail2004841
Node: SPF [Sender Policy Framework]2017404
Node: SRS [Sender Rewriting Scheme]2023812
Node: DMARC2028340
Node: Configuration2029326
Node: Controls2030951
Node: ACL2032383
Node: Logging <1>2035490
Node: Example2036538
Node: Proxy support2038041
Node: Inbound proxies2038411
Node: Outbound proxies2041708
Node: Logging <2>2044015
Node: Internationalisation"2044303
Node: MTA operations2045048
Node: MDA operations2047785
Node: Events2049110
Node: Adding drivers or lookups2054812
Node: Concept Index2057277

End Tag Table


Local Variables:
coding: utf-8
End:
